1. What does SAP Business Technology Platform mean?
The SAP Business Technology tool is a tool that runs in the cloud and helps businesses run more smoothly. Many tools and services on the platform can be used to handle business processes, data, and apps. Businesses of all kinds can use the platform because it is made to be scalable and adaptable.
2. How do SAP BTP's architecture layers enable a uniform development and deployment platform for developers?
The different parts of SAP BTP's design work together to give developers a single framework for development and deployment. This framework provides the whole platform with a uniform set of tools and services that can be used. Cloud services like SAP SuccessFactors, HANA, and Ariba are included. On the SAP Cloud Platform, SAP BTP is produced.
3. Could you describe the SAP BTP Cloud Foundry Environment?
The Cloud Foundry platform in SAP BTP gives you all the tools and services needed to run modern apps in the cloud. It's like a spot where you can use well-known computer languages and tools to create web and mobile apps. This is a great place to work for writers who want to make software that can run on the internet and is flexible and scalable.
The Cloud Foundry Foundation runs the open-source application platform that runs this system. Multiple runtimes, computer languages, libraries, and services are supported, which lets us make new business apps and services.
For example, we can use Cloud Foundry to create a web app using Node.js or the SAP Cloud Application programming model. This app can join an SAP HANA database and show real-time sales data.
To make business apps with SAP Business Application Studio, a developer would first make a project, then add the files and dependencies that the app needs, and finally build and release the app.
4. How does SAP Data Warehouse Cloud help combine data from different places into a single store?
The SAP Data Warehouse Cloud tool can connect multiple data sources and combine the data into a single view. This makes it easier to store data from various sources in one place. This can be useful when you combine info from different sources to research or write a report.
5. What are some of the most essential parts of the SAP Analytics Hub?
The SAP Insights Hub helps businesses make better decisions by providing real-time data and insights. Business Intelligence, Predictive Analytics, and Data Warehouse are key SAP Analytics Hub components.
If you want to enrich your career and become a professional in SAP ABAP, then enroll in "SAP ABAP Training" - This course will help you to achieve excellence in this domain.
6. Can developers use ABAP RESTful programming model APIs to build SAP Business Technology Platform cloud-native business apps?
ABAP RESTful is a new way for developers to make business apps that work on the SAP Business Technology Platform and in the cloud. The Open Data Protocol (OData) standard lets you use data and functions as RESTful web services. This programming model is based on Representational State Transfer (REST) ideas. These web services allow developers to make cloud-native apps that are movable, scalable, and simple to keep up to date.
7. What is the SAP Cloud SDK, and how do you utilize it?
The SAP Cloud SDK includes packages and tools for creating cloud-native apps using the SAP Business Technology Platform. Connecting to SAP cloud services is easy with the Software Development Kit (SDK), which has libraries and tools for handling cloud operations and keeping an eye on cloud-based apps.
8. How is SAP Business Technology Platform superior to AWS, Azure, and GCP?
Firstly, it was made to work with applications used in the office.
Thus, it includes all the tools and functionality enterprises need to run successfully. Second, it's easy to adapt to a growing firm. Finally, it is safe and reliable, essential for companies with private info.
9. Do you know SAP Fiori? It works; could you explain it?
Flexibility in SAP Fiori means users have the same experience on all devices and systems. It uses a system called SAPUI5 and a programming style known as Model View Controller (MVC). Toolkits like HTML5, CSS, and JavaScript are used to make SAP Fiori apps.
10. Meaning of SAP HANA? What is the problem that it fixes?
Real-time apps can use SAP HANA, a database that runs in memory. Thanks to its quick access to information, it helps businesses make better decisions. Additionally, SAP HANA can help companies run their operations more smoothly by reducing the need to duplicate and change data.
11. What kinds of services does the SAP Business Technology Platform offer?
The different services that come with the SAP Business Technology Platform are:
Concur, SAP Ariba, Fieldglass, Hybris, SuccessFactors, and Jam are cloud-based.
SolarWinds Interview Questions for Experienced
12. What are SAP BTP user requirements?
To become an SAP BTP user, you must meet three requirements:
You need to be logged in to SAP.
You need to be signed up for the SAP Cloud Platform.
You need to have an account with SAP BTP.
SAP BTP is accessible with all three.
13. How can I pay for the SAP Business Technology Platform?
Payment options for the SAP Business Technology Platform include:
SAP BTP Free Tier: Free service. Newcomers can browse use cases to find ones they like. Its uses are limited.
Pay-As-You-Go: A business idea. SAP BTP is perfect for budget-conscious users who wish to try new business processes because you only pay for what you use.
CPEA stands for "Cloud Platform Enterprise Agreement.": This is a business plan. Cloud credits are paid for ahead of time. You can use all of CPEA's services, but your cloud points will only be used for the ones you used.
Subscription: This is a business plan. You have to choose a set of services at a set price, no matter how much you use them.
14. What does the SAP Business Technology Platform path hold?
You should be very optimistic about the future of the SAP Business Technology Platform. The tool is powerful, flexible, and can be used for many business tasks. It's something that we think will grow and become even more popular in the future.
15. Why does the SAP Cloud Application Programming Model affect the SAP Business Technology Platform?
Developers may simply construct versatile, expandable, and up-to-date cloud-native apps with the SAP Cloud Application Programming Model in the SAP Business Technology Platform. To help developers build cloud-based apps without worrying about technology.
16. Why should I pick SAP Business Technology Platform over Microsoft Azure?
SAP Business Technology Platform includes everything you need to build and launch cloud-native apps. A controlled runtime environment, a cloud-based development environment, and app building, deployment, and management services are included. There is also tight integration between the SAP Business Technology tool and SAP applications and data. This makes it an excellent tool for creating and deploying SAP-based solutions.
17. How should I begin using the SAP Business Technology Platform in the best way?
You must understand the basics of the SAP Business Technology Platform to use it properly. Once you know the software, you can explore its features. The information on the online SAP Business Technology Platform is abundant, so use it.
18. Can the SAP Business Technology Platform provide data? What are the methods?
Yes, the SAP Business Technology Platform provides information. Data Export Service, Export to Excel, and others are choices.
19. Why use SAP HANA as your database back end with SAP Business Technology Platform?
HANA, as a database server with SAP Business Technology Platform, helps. The fast SAP HANA database can handle real-time data. This allows data entry management, which can improve efficiency and response time. SAP HANA's columnar data store improves speed and reduces storage costs. SAP HANA and the SAP Business Technology Platform help people collaborate and be more productive.
20. What do you know about SAP BTP's Role Collections?
A role collection is made up of at least one job. You can change the jobs that are assigned to users and the groups of users that are assigned to those roles. The user should have management access to do these maintenance tasks.
Users can be given job collections but no single roles. Collecting roles can be done at both the general account level and the subaccount level. The subaccounts don't have access to the role groups in the global account. Collecting roles at the subaccount level in the international account is also impossible.
If not BTP cockpit, is there another way to handle and oversee SAP BTP accounts?
We can also manage our SAP BTP accounts with SAP BTP CLI, a command-line tool.
If you'd rather work on the command line, the BTP CLI is an option for the cockpit. A client and a server make it up. The client is on your computer and talks to SAP BTP through a server. When you use the btp CLI to log in to your global account, connect to this CLI server at https://cli.btp.cloud.sap/.
On the command line, type btp for the base call. We can make subaccounts and directories, manage users and their permissions in global accounts and subaccounts, subscribe to apps, and more.
21. Explain what "multi-cloud" means in terms of SAP BTP.
SAP encourages customers and partners to easily use SAP BTP on their preferred cloud platform. The functionality that lets SAP BTP be used with any infrastructure service is termed "multi-cloud." You may choose which cloud provider to use, and there are more places to choose. Multi-cloud lets you employ hyper scaler infrastructures and features, making it more reliable. A more comprehensive choice of development services and more development paradigms make things more adaptable.
22. Could you explain what SAP BTP global accounts and subaccounts are and how they work?
Customer deals with SAP are fulfilled using SAP BTP global accounts. Global accounts govern subaccounts, users, permissions, and constraints. Global account customers have permissions and constraints on platform resource consumption. Permissions and limits are transferred to the subaccount for use.
Global accounts can have multiple subaccounts. Subaccounts allow us to use services, deploy apps, and manage subscriptions. In a world account, each subaccount works independently.
Cloud Foundry divides subaccounts into spaces. Applications are built, deployed, and maintained here.
Geography and environment don't affect global accounts. You manage all regional subaccounts from your international account.
23. In SAP BTP, what do you mean by "service"?
In Cloud Computing, the word "Service" is used a lot. If you use the internet, a service is any kind of technology or skill you can get.
Instead of genuine products, you get software, computing power, or storage space delivered to your home.
Services often fall into three categories:
Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS)—The cloud provides hardware and operating systems. The customer offers runtime and handles all other aspects.
Platform as a Service (PaaS) — It helps build, run, and manage apps. Databases, programming tools, and similar software delivery methods can help.
Think SAP BTP as PaaS. SAP handles complex tech this time so that you may focus on add-ons and related solutions.
Software as a Service (SaaS): Customers pay monthly for internet apps. Customers don't set up or maintain anything. Email services like Gmail, work tools like Google Docs, and business software like SAP S/4HANA Cloud are examples.
Services in SAP BTP
"SAP BTP services" are the terms for the functions or features that SAP offers under the SAP BTP name.
For instance, "SAP Business Application Studio" is an SAP BTP service that gives developers a place to work on making apps and adding to SAP solutions.
It is possible to find a list of all SAP BTP services in SEDC.
Conclusion:
In conclusion, good job! We think the above SAP BTP Interview Questions will help you prepare for your interview and also help you understand the concepts better. It's called SAP BTP, a cloud technology base for ERP. It's also one of the first steps in SAP's move to the cloud. Best wishes!!!
d:T489b,
We have Categorized SolarWinds Interview Questions into the below Sections
SolarWinds is a famous software company based in Austin, Texas. This business was started in 1999 by Donald and David Yonce. Its main job is to give robust tools to IT professionals so they can handle infrastructure, networks, and systems well. Efficiency, usability, and friendliness distinguish SolarWinds IT management software.
2. What are some good things about SolarWinds?
SolarWinds is well-known for its many perks, such as:
A unified console is used to watch multiple devices at the same time.
Automatic finding and integrating of devices that are tied to a network.
Made it easier to find problems with the network.
User-friendly graphical interface.
Detailed health data to help you make intelligent choices.
3. What does SolarWinds NPM mean?
SolarWinds Network Speed Monitor (NPM) is a flexible tool that helps IT teams locate and fix slow network problems in hybrid, on-premises, and cloud settings. With NPM, adding and keeping an eye on network devices is more accessible, and the system can be expanded as needed.
4. What are the most essential things about SolarWinds?
Some of the most essential parts of SolarWinds NPM are:
Monitoring of all faults, performance, and uptime in detail.
Perform and availability records that can be changed to fit your needs.
In-depth study of each hop.
Automated mapping of network devices.
Network data from different stacks can be linked to each other.
Advanced tools for alerting.
5. How do you migrate data from SolarWinds?
Data can be moved from one version of SolarWinds to another. First, you must use the SolarWinds Export Utility to save the data from the first instance. The next step is to use the SolarWinds Import Utility to move the data to the new instance. Last but not least, you will need to run the SolarWinds Configuration Wizard to finish the transfer.
If you want to enrich your career and become a professional in SolarWinds, then enroll in "SolarWinds Online Training" - This course will help you to achieve excellence in this domain.
6. Why do you think using SolarWinds or another monitoring tool is essential?
A tracking tool like SolarWinds is necessary to keep an eye on what's going on in your network. Before they become big problems, this can help you see and fix possible issues. Additionally, SolarWinds lets you track the development of your network over time. This way, you can find patterns and make adjustments that will usually enhance its performance.
7. How can we add objects instantly to be watched?
SolarWinds lets you run a discovery job through the Network Sonar Discovery Wizard to add devices automatically for tracking. This function can be used regularly to find new devices and add them to the monitoring setup.
8. Why would you want to use discovery tagging?
Discovery tagging is an intelligent tool in SolarWinds that checks to see if a device is already being watched. It helps find duplicate devices, especially when a device is given to more than one person, which makes management more accurate.
9. How do NPM alerts work?
SolarWinds NPM sends alerts when problems happen with devices that are being watched. These alerts are shown clearly on the "Active Alerts widgets" on the Orion Home page, and they can be set up to send email messages.
10. List some SolarWinds NPM pre-configured notifications.
SolarWinds NPM comes with the following pre-configured alerts:
Notifications when the server is down.
Notifications when a component fails.
Warnings when the place is not available.
Notifications when a transaction fails or when a state is essential.
11. Give some information about NPM data.
SolarWinds NPM reports give you much information about how network devices work. Users can make these reports, change them, and even set them to be sent automatically by email or as PDFs.
12. Could you explain what an account view means in the SolarWinds world?
You can organise and take care of your SolarWinds account with an account view. It shows you a list of all the devices connected to your account, their present status and any alerts sent. You can also do different things with your devices from the account view, like adding or removing them from the account.
13. How do I go about making a custom report?
In SolarWinds, go to the Orion Web Console, find "Reports," and click "Create New Report" to make a custom report. Before you finish your report, choose the filters and features you want.
14. How do we go about setting up a web-based report?
SolarWinds users can plan a web-based report by going to "Settings" in the Orion Web Console, selecting "Manage Reports," and then creating a new schedule under "Create New Schedule." This process includes giving information about the frequency and other important factors.
15. Could you describe how SolarWinds is put together?
SolarWinds is a type of distributed software. SolarWinds' computer, database, and bots are the main parts. The SolarWinds servers get data from the SolarWinds devices and store it in the SolarWinds database. When objects on your network send data to the SolarWinds computer, it is handled by the SolarWinds agents.
16. Describe the Orion platform.
SolarWinds' unified backend framework is the Orion platform, which has a central web console for setting up and controlling network devices. It includes settings, alerts, and managing reports, among other things.
17. Tell me about SolarWinds SAM.
When networks and their apps are on-premises, in the cloud, or in a mixed setting, SolarWinds Server & Application Monitor (SAM) monitors them. It gives a complete map of how applications and servers work together.
18. In what place do SolarWinds SAM logs live?
SolarWinds SAM logs usually are saved in "C:\Program Data\SolarWinds\Logs\APM." For easy reading and viewing, all log files are in text format.
19. Why is SolarWinds so simple to get?
If the primary server fails, SolarWinds High Availability (HA) can switch to a backup server and continue providing services. Deploy across one or more subnets with this tool.
20. Is Unix, Linux, or Windows compatible with SolarWinds? So how do you do it?
SolarWinds operates on Windows, Linux, and Unix. SolarWinds has an agent that can be put on any kind of machine. This agent will gather information and send it to the SolarWinds server. SunPower also has a web-based tool that lets you see information and change the system's settings.
SolarWinds Interview Questions for Experienced
21. Discuss polling methodologies.
Polling your network's computers gives SolarWinds information about how well they're running. Polling methods include SNMP, Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI), Agents, Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), and SNMP.
22. What's the difference between WMI Polling and Agent Polling?
WMI polls for information using network devices, apps, and parts built on Windows. Agent polling needs plugins to be put on the agents to collect data and send it back.
23. What does DPA stand for?
SolarWinds Database Performance Analyzer helps assess database performance. It keeps track of SQL statements, processing plans, blocking, deadlocks, and more. It also uses machine learning to find strange things before they happen.
24. What does SolarWinds Log Analyzer do?
SolarWinds Log Analyzer is used to gather, organise, and keep track of logs. It ensures that all records from all Orion Platform products can be seen and combined with alerts to take action on certain events.
25. What is the Log Analyzer's most essential parts?
The SolarWinds Log Analyzer's most essential functions are:
Getting logs and events and analysing them.
Strong search and filtering tools.
Log live in real-time.
Tags in the event log.
Taking in flat log files.
Adding support for the Orion Platform.
26. Why would you use SolarWinds NCM?
SolarWinds NCM configures routers, switches, and other network equipment. It helps maintain device settings, reduces configuration errors, and provides alarms, backups, and rollbacks.
27. What does SolarWinds Security Event Manager do?
SolarWinds Security Event Manager manages security events and information. It gathers, organises, and normalises logs in a single location so IT teams can look at them.
28. What does SolarWinds NetFlow mean?
The SolarWinds NetFlow Traffic Analyzer (NTA) turns data from network traffic into simple charts and tables. Network traffic and bandwidth trends are tracked to find people or programs that use a lot of bandwidth.
Open the Orion Web Console, go to "Product Specific Settings," and find "Orion Service Manager." Then, choose the service you want to stop and click "Stop."
30. How can we see if the gear is in good shape?
In the Orion Web Console, go to "Settings > All Settings" and then "Node & Group Management." From there, choose "Manage Hardware Sensors" to see how healthy the hardware is. You can see all the hardware sensors offered here, as well as information like the vendor, parent, status, etc.
31. What does UDT stand for?
SolarWinds User Device Tracker (UDT) keeps track of IP devices' network access needs and risks. It shows you a list of all the switches, ports, and devices connected to your network and lets you control the ports.
32. How does licencing work for SolarWinds?
Each SolarWinds product has a different licencing model based on the number of devices, nodes, and interfaces that need to be managed. It works with both permanent licences and subscription licences.
33. Tell me about SolarWinds' cloud log management.
SolarWinds' cloud-based log management lets you access logs immediately without installing hardware on-site. Additionally, it makes full-text log searches easy to use and speeds up debugging.
34. What are the ways that SolarWinds makes merging possible?
SolarWinds offers three kinds of connection tools: those for users, those for events, and those for APIs.
35. Who uses SolarWinds?
More than three lakh customers use SolarWinds. These customers include Fortune 500 companies, government bodies, and military groups. Ford Motor Company, Kodak, MasterCard, the New York Times, NASA, Telenor, Volvo, Yahoo, and other companies are customers.
36. Does SolarWinds let you change the SNMP community string on all devices simultaneously?
In SolarWinds, you can simultaneously change the SNMP community string on all devices. Click "All Settings" in the "Settings" tab. Select the "Polling" tab and then "SNMP Settings" from then on. You can change the SNMP community string for all nodes from then on.
37. What are APM and NPM?
APM and NPM monitor application and network performance. APM monitors app performance, while NPM monitors network devices and services.
38. How can SolarWinds help reduce IT system costs?
SolarWinds is an essential part of lowering the costs of IT systems. It tells us how resources are being used and helps us find places to better use them or change how they are distributed. Supporting capacity planning keeps us from over-provisioning, which can be expensive. SolarWinds improves IT ROI and reduces IT costs.
39. How can SolarWinds be optimised?
Maintaining the database, updating the software, and monitoring system resources can increase SolarWind's efficiency. You must also know about SolarWinds updates and patches to use the latest features and improvements for network control.
40. How can SolarWinds help me track how well my network is doing over time?
SolarWinds helps you track how well your network is doing over time by collecting past data and making performance reports. This trend analysis is crucial for identifying long-term performance patterns, finding trouble spots, and planning network improvements. It's a must-have for proactive network control.
41. How do you use SolarWinds to back up your files for disaster recovery?
At SolarWinds, you set up regular data backups, including monitoring data and network device settings. You set up automatic backup schedules and ensure backups are saved safely, including copies kept off-site. You need these backups to swiftly restore network settings and track data in a disaster.
Conclusion:
Finally, it's essential to be well-prepared for a SolarWinds interview, no matter how much experience you have or if you're a recent college graduate wanting to start a network and systems management job. These SolarWinds interview questions and answers cover basic to advanced features. Providing sensible replies to these questions during the interview will demonstrate your knowledge and skill.
SAP Business Technology Platform (BTP) lets firms combine, grow, and value multiple data and programs in one place. SAP BTP helps businesses maximize their data through tools and services, resulting in wiser decisions and innovative business ideas. A complete digital transformation solution, the SAP BTP includes database management, application development, analytics, and machine learning. They succeed in today's digital market.
Overview of Tutorial:
SAP BTP's many capabilities can be confusing for new users. That's why we've compiled many lessons to maximize this powerful instrument. Let's examine SAP BTP's essential component tutorials.
SAP BTP Cloud Foundry
SAP BTP Cloud Foundry enables scalable, flexible app and service launches. SAP BTP Cloud Foundry gives developers and IT workers many alternatives for creating new apps and optimizing resources. Start SAP BTP Cloud Foundry with these critical tutorials:
ACDOCA Table in SAP S/4HANA:
What No One Tells You: Learn more about the ACDOCA table in SAP S/4HANA and discover secret features that can improve your reporting and analytics.
SAP BTP Cockpit Costs and Usage:
Learn how to use the SAP BTP Cockpit to manage costs and usage in a way that maximizes resource use and saves money.
SAP BTP Terraform Provider 1.0.0:
Learn how to use the Terraform provider for SAP BTP to handle infrastructure provisioning, which makes deployment faster and allows for growth.
How to Install Neptune Software DXP 2023 LTS:
How to install Neptune Software DXP 2023 LTS step by step for better app creation and user experience.
Elevate Your ABAP Skills:
The "Core Data Services for ABAP" Handbook goes over the basics of Core Data Services (CDS) for ABAP development, which opens up new ways to describe and change data.
Powerful SAP Build Apps 30-Day Guide:
During the 30-day trial, you can use the SAP Build Apps Guided Experience to make robust apps, allowing you to see what SAP BTP can do.
Cheap SAP ABAP System Access $9:
Accessing SAP ABAP systems for a low cost is an excellent way to improve your development skills and get real-world practice with ABAP programming.
If you want to enrich your career and become a professional in SAP ABAP, then enroll in "SAP ABAP Training" - This course will help you to achieve excellence in this domain.
SAP For Me Incidents/Cases:
A Beginners Guide (2023): Learn how to navigate the SAP For Me platform and handle issues and cases to solve them quickly and satisfy customers.
Comprehensive SAP Cloud Integration Platform Overview:
Check out SAP's different cloud integration tools and learn about the best ways to integrate data across your entire organization.
Best unified data platform (2023): SAP Datasphere
Find out what SAP Datasphere can do as a unified data tool for collecting, processing, and analyzing data from different sources to make decisions based on data.
Free SAP Build Process Automation Licence:
With the free SAP Build Process Automation Licence, you can learn to automate business processes, making them run more smoothly and efficiently.
Due Diligence Service for SAP Security:
Two Ways to Make a Business Transformation Work: With SAP's Security Due Diligence Service, you can make sure that a business change goes smoothly by lowering risks and protecting your company's assets.
Alternative to SAP Fiori Client: SAP Mobile Start
Check out SAP Mobile Start as an option for the SAP Fiori Client for better mobile experiences. It lets users quickly access business apps while they're on the go.
A Complete Guide to SAP for Me (2023):
Learn everything you need to know about the SAP for Me platform and how it works so that you can handle your SAP products and services effectively.
Intelligent charging using SAP E-Mobility:
Explore the world of electric mobility and learn about SAP's innovative charging options that help you use less energy and have less of an effect on the environment.
Unique New ABAP Platform 2021 Features:
Stay updated on the ABAP platform's newest features and improvements to make development faster and easier.
SAP Work Zone: Digital Efficiency 2022:
Use SAP Work Zone to get the most out of your digital experience and make it easier for people to work together and get things done. It will help teams work faster on a variety of projects and efforts.
Everything You Need to Know About SAP Solution RISE
Learn more about the RISE with SAP system and how it can transform businesses and help them become more intelligent enterprises faster.
The Most Powerful ABAP Library: SAP XCO Library
Use the power of SAP XCO Library to speed up ABAP development. You'll get an extensive collection of libraries and components that can be used repeatedly.
Scaffolding UI5 Projects Made Easy (UI5 Generator)
The Easy UI5 Generator makes building UI5 projects easier, cutting down on development time and work while maintaining high code quality and consistency.
SAP BTP Boosters 101:
By learning how to use SAP BTP Boosters to improve your development projects, you'll have access to a wide range of tools and resources meant to speed up innovation and help your business grow.
Three SAP BTP Pricing Models:
Learn about SAP BTP's price models and pick one that fits your business and budget.
Connecting DBeaver to SAP HANA Cloud:
How to link DBeaver to SAP HANA Cloud for easy database management and administration. It will let your apps use all of SAP HANA's features.
Install Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable Package x86, Remote Tools for Visual Studio 2019, and KDiff:
Please find out how to install the most essential development tools and packages for SAP BTP so that it works well and is compatible with other programs.
SAP Intelligent RPA 2.0 Installation:
Step-by-step instructions are provided for installing SAP Intelligent Robotic Process Automation 2.0, which lets businesses automate boring chores and improve their processes.
Installing DBeaver Community Edition:
How to set up the DBeaver Community Edition for database management and development. It gives users a powerful, easy-to-use way to connect to different database systems.
SAP Business Application Studio HANA Native Application Development:
Start making native apps in SAP BTP with SAP Business Application Studio. Use the power of SAP HANA to create apps that dash and can be scaled up or down.
SAP Business Application Studio [October 2020]: 4 New Features
Keep up with the latest additions and changes to SAP Business Application Studio to take advantage of your development projects' latest features and functions.
SAP Cloud Platform CI/CD:
Set up continuous integration and delivery routines on the SAP Cloud Platform to make development more accessible and deliver apps and updates quickly and reliably.
SAP Cloud Platform Cloud Foundry Launchpad Service:
Check out the launchpad service in SAP Cloud Platform Cloud Foundry for easy access to relevant apps and content and a smooth application browsing and user experience.
SAP Cloud APM Local Development:
Set up a local development environment for offline testing and development for the SAP Cloud Application Programming Model. It allows developers to make changes to their apps quickly and easily.
How to Get Kubectl Set Up on Windows for Kyma Development:
Here are step-by-step instructions for installing Kubectl on Windows for Kyma development. It lets devs work with Kubernetes clusters and deploy apps to the SAP BTP Kyma runtime.
How to Get Started with Kyma Runtime in the SAP Cloud Platform:
Try the Kyma runtime on the SAP Cloud Platform to create modern, cloud-native apps leveraging microservices and serverless computing.
Lessons provide the information and resources you need to succeed in SAP BTP. They cover various topics, from building applications to managing infrastructure.
SAP Business Application Studio (BAS)
The browser-based Integrated Development system (IDE) SAP Business Application Studio lets developers build apps that work well with the SAP BTP system. Here are some guides that will help you use SAP BAS to its fullest:
SAP Business Application Studio Installation:
In this step-by-step guide to getting SAP Business Application Studio for developing apps, ensure the setup goes smoothly and that the software works at its best.
Know SAP Business Application Studio Dev Space:
Learn about SAP Business Application Studio's "Dev Space" and how it helps with joint development so teams can work quickly on shared projects.
Cloud Connector Cloud Foundry to On-Premise config:
Set up the Cloud Connector to securely communicate between SAP Cloud Foundry and on-premise systems, facilitating data interchange and integration.
Developing Fiori App in SAP Business Application Studio:
Learn how to make Fiori apps in SAP Business Application Studio and use the newest UI5 frameworks and design ideas to create great user experiences.
Fiori App Creation and SAP Cloud Foundry:
With this step-by-step instruction, create and send Fiori apps to SAP Cloud Foundry for easy deployment and accessibility. It assures consumers that they can always access your apps.
Add Fiori Apps to SAP Cloud Platform Portal:
The SAP Cloud Platform Portal will be easier to use and more enjoyable with Fiori apps. It will also let them access relevant apps and information from one place.
In SAP Business Application Studio, you can make a Microsoft Fluent UI React app:
Check out how Microsoft Fluent UI can be used with SAP Business Application Studio to create modern web apps that combine the strength of React with the adaptability of SAP BTP.
Using Business Application Studio to Add SAP Fiori Elements:
Use SAP Fiori Elements in SAP Business Application Studio for fast application creation. These elements let you make Fiori apps quickly and easily without writing much code.
SAP Business Application Studio: 4 New Features Oct 2020
October 2020 will bring new SAP Business Application Studio features. Follow these changes to use the latest development tools and features.
SAP Business Application Studio extensions:
Learn how to customize and add to applications with SAP Business Application Studio's extension features. It will let you make your apps fit the needs of your business.
How to Use SAP Business Application Studio to Make a CAP Application:
You can create Core Data Services (CDS) for ABAP applications using SAP Business Application Studio. It lets you better model and change data, enabling you to make solid and scalable apps.
December 2020 SAP Business Application Studio Updates:
Ensure you know about the newest changes and improvements to SAP Business Application Studio so you can always use the latest features and improvements to get more done.
New SAP Business Application Studio features for January 2021:
Look at the January 2021 updates that SAP Business Application Studio got. They'll assist you in employing the latest tools and technology in your projects.
SAP Fiori New Application Generator:
Discover how the SAP Fiori Tools can help you make quick and straightforward Fiori apps. It will help work go faster and make things better for users.
After reading these tutorials, you'll have the skills and information to use SAP Business Application Studio to make developing apps in the SAP BTP ecosystem easier.
The SAP BTP Kyma
For making cloud-native apps, SAP BTP Kyma gives you a software environment that is flexible and can be expanded. To help you get started with SAP BTP Kyma, here are some guides:
How to Get Kubectl Set Up on Windows for Kyma Development:
This article shows you how to install Kubectl on Windows for Kyma development. It will let you work with Kubernetes clusters and put apps on the SAP BTP Kyma runtime.
How to Get Started with SAP BTP Kyma Runtime:
Learn how the SAP BTP Kyma runtime can help you make current apps that work in the cloud and use serverless computing and microservices design.
If you follow these lessons, you'll be able to get the most out of SAP BTP Kyma and make cloud-native apps that can grow and run reliably.
Conclusion
The SAP Business Technology Platform (BTP) gives businesses many different tools and services to meet their needs. You can use SAP BTP to make apps, connect various data sources, or do analytics. It gives you the tools and knowledge you need to thrive. With these lessons, you'll be ready to start your SAP BTP journey and help your business become more forward-thinking. So now, look through the lessons and use SAP BTP to its fullest for the success of your business.
In order to integrate diverse systems and applications within an organization's IT architecture, two well-known integration platforms, SnapLogic and MuleSoft, provide solutions. In comparison to MuleSoft, which employs an integrated platform for integration, APIs, and analytics, SnapLogic is a cloud-based integration platform that offers a drag-and-drop interface for simple integration. Both platforms have distinct strategies for reaching this goal, but they both aim to streamline the integration process and increase business agility. We'll compare the features, functions, and application scenarios of SnapLogic vs MuleSoft in this comparison.
The IT infrastructure of an organization's numerous systems and applications can be connected using integration platforms, which are software solutions. iPaaS, ESB, API Management, and data integration platforms are a few examples of the various integration platform kinds.
The selection of platform is based on the particular demands and requirements of the company and each type has its own characteristics and capabilities. Integration platforms make the integration process simpler, boost business agility, and help enterprises get more out of their IT investments.
Organizations can integrate different systems and applications inside their IT architecture using integration platforms like SnapLogic and MuleSoft. While MuleSoft is an ESB platform that employs a unified platform for integration, APIs, and analytics, SnapLogic is a cloud-based iPaaS platform that provides a drag-and-drop interface for simple integration.
SnapLogic is renowned for being simple to use and flexible, but MuleSoft is renowned for being reliable and scalable. Both systems enhance company agility and make integration simpler.
Let’s learn in detail about What is SnapLogic and What is MuleSoft:
With the help of the cloud-based integration platform SnapLogic, businesses can quickly link various apps and systems. It provides an easy-to-use interface and pre-built connectors known as "snaps" for rapid integration. Users can design intricate workflows and integrations using advanced features like data transformation and mapping. SnapLogic delivers analytics and monitoring solutions for integration performance and data quality and is made for businesses of all sizes.
Uses of SnapLogic
Whether they are on-premises or in the cloud, enterprises can connect various systems and applications inside their IT architecture using SnapLogic.
SnapLogic makes it simple to manage and analyze data by enabling users to automate data flows between various systems and applications.
The integration process is streamlined by SnapLogic, which accelerates and increases its agility. This makes it possible for enterprises to react swiftly to shifting commercial needs.
By eliminating the requirement for on-premise hardware and software as well as lowering development and maintenance costs, SnapLogic's cloud-based integration platform lowers IT costs.
Data validation, data transformation, and data mapping are some of the tools that SnapLogic offers to guarantee data accuracy. This guarantees that data is accurate and consistent across various systems and applications.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SnapLogic? Enrol in Instructor-Led live SnapLogic Training to become Job Ready!
SnapLogic Architecture
The architecture of SnapLogic is cloud-based, distributed, and flexible in nature. There are three key parts to the platform:
Snaplex:
The data processing powerhouse of the SnapLogic platform is Snaplex. Data pipelines can be processed in parallel in this distributed execution environment. Snaplex can be set up on-premises, in the cloud, or in a hybrid environment.
Designer:
The Designer is SnapLogic's visual user interface for designing and constructing integration pipelines. It offers a drag-and-drop user interface for including and setting various components, like snaps, to build a pipeline.
Manager:
The administrative user interface for the SnapLogic platform is called the Manager. Users may manage and keep track of integration pipelines, restrict who has access to the platform, and define security parameters.
Pros and Cons of SnapLogic
Pros
Because SnapLogic is a cloud-based platform, there is no longer a need for on-premise gear and software, which lowers IT expenses.
SnapLogic offers a number of pre-built connectors, or "snaps," that enable users to quickly connect to various systems and applications.
The microservices-based architecture used by SnapLogic enables simple scaling and flexibility in response to shifting business requirements.
SnapLogic makes it possible to integrate data in real time, offering accurate and current information across many systems and applications.
Cons
Comparatively speaking, SnapLogic has a smaller user base than other integration platforms, which can make it challenging to solve complex integration problems.
When compared to alternative integration platforms, SnapLogic might be pricey, making it unaffordable for small businesses with tight budgets.
When opposed to methods that rely on code, the visual interface of SnapLogic may make it more difficult to customize integration pipelines.
Since SnapLogic is largely a cloud-based platform, its ability to integrate with on-premise systems may be constrained.
When compared to other integration systems, SnapLogic's analytics features are somewhat limited.
What is MuleSoft?
A platform for integration called MuleSoft enables companies to link various apps and data sources. The platform's goal is to make data flow automation and integration across various on-premises and cloud-based systems simple and automatic. Organizations can easily and rapidly create and maintain integrations with the aid of a variety of tools and pre-built connectors from MuleSoft. Advanced functions like data mapping, transformation, and validation are also offered by the platform to guarantee data correctness and consistency amongst various systems. Organizations of various sizes rely on the well-known integration platform MuleSoft to make their integration requirements simple.
Uses of MuleSoft
Organizations can link many systems and apps with MuleSoft, both locally and in the cloud.
It gives consumers the ability to automate data flow between many systems and apps, minimizing errors and manual labour.
It offers pre-built connectors and an intuitive user interface to streamline the integration process. As a result, businesses can create and maintain integrations fast and easily.
MuleSoft makes integration quicker and more agile, allowing businesses to react swiftly to shifting business needs.
Data mapping, transformation, and validation technologies from MuleSoft help to ensure data correctness and consistency between various systems and applications.
Real-time data integration is made possible by MuleSoft, which provides accurate and current information across many systems and applications.
To assess the effectiveness of integrations and guarantee data quality, MuleSoft offers sophisticated analytics and monitoring capabilities.
Pros and Cons of MuleSoft
Pros
MuleSoft is a strong and dependable integration platform that can manage challenging integration issues and large-volume data flows.
It offers thorough integration features that cover data mapping, API administration, on-premise and cloud integration support, and more.
Finding assistance and resources for resolving integration problems is simple because of MuleSoft's sizable and vibrant community.
Because of MuleSoft's scalable architecture, businesses can easily add capacity as their integration requirements increase.
MuleSoft makes it possible to integrate data in real time, delivering accurate and current information across many systems and applications.
Cons
For novice users, understanding MuleSoft might be challenging due to its complexity. Additional training and materials could be needed for this.
Particularly for small and medium-sized businesses with tight budgets, MuleSoft might be pricey.
MuleSoft is a powerful platform that may use a lot of computer hardware and software to function.
In comparison to coding-based methods, MuleSoft's visual interface could make it more difficult to customize integration pipelines.
In comparison to other integration platforms, MuleSoft's analytics features are somewhat simple.
The ideal integration tool to choose will rely on the unique demands and specifications of each firm. There are numerous integration tools on the market, each with unique advantages and disadvantages. However, when assessing integration technologies, keep the following in mind:
1. Usability:
The integration tool should be simple to use and have an intuitive interface that makes it possible to create integration workflows quickly and easily.
2. Scalability:
As the organization expands, the integration tool should be able to handle rising data and integration flow volumes.
3. Customization:
The integration tool must be adaptable in order to meet the unique requirements of the organization.
4. Security:
To protect the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of data, the integration tool should have strong security features.
5. Cost:
The integration solution should be affordable for the organization while still offering all required features and capabilities.
6. Support and community:
The integration tool should include a robust support system and a vibrant community to offer advice and resources as needed.
Comparison of SnapLogic vs MuleSoft: Features, pricing, and Deployment
Two well-known platforms for integration, SnapLogic and MuleSoft, offer strong capabilities for establishing connections and automating data flow between various systems and applications. Features, cost, and deployment choices are just a few things to compare when contrasting SnapLogic versus MuleSoft. Few things to remember when comparing both platforms:
Features:
SnapLogic and MuleSoft both provide thorough integration capabilities, including assistance with on-premise and cloud-based integrations, API administration, data mapping, and real-time integration. SnapLogic, on the other hand, offers a greater number of pre-built connectors while MuleSoft offers more sophisticated analytics and monitoring solutions.
Pricing:
As opposed to MuleSoft, whose cost is determined by the number of cores and deployment options, SnapLogic bases its pricing on the users, connectors, and data volumes. MuleSoft might be a better fit for bigger, enterprise-level implementations, while SnapLogic might be more affordable for smaller businesses.
Deployment:
While MuleSoft can be installed on-premises or in the cloud, SnapLogic is an integration platform that is located on the cloud. Because of this, MuleSoft is a superior choice for businesses with particular deployment needs or security issues.
Choosing Between Snaplogic and Mulesoft for the Best Fit
It can be challenging to decide between SnapLogic and MuleSoft because both platforms provide strong integration features. It is critical to assess each platform in light of the organization's unique integration needs, budget, and deployment constraints in order to determine which one is the best fit. Some points that will help you choose between the both
1. Integration Needs:
The company should assess its integration needs, taking into account the different systems and applications that need to be linked, the amount of data being processed, and the degree of automation and real-time integration that is wanted.
2. Budget:
The company needs to decide which platform delivers the most value for its money after comparing the price structures of SnapLogic and MuleSoft.
3. Deployment Requirements:
Consider the deployment requirements, including security and compliance levels, to decide whether on-premises or cloud deployment is more suitable.
4. Usefulness:
Evaluate the usability and user interfaces of both systems to determine which one is the most practical and user-friendly for the business.
5. Support and Community:
Take into account the level of support and resources available, such as customer service, documentation, and online discussion forums, when selecting an integration platform.
Summarizing SnapLogic vs MuleSoft
Two well-known integration platforms, SnapLogic and MuleSoft, allow businesses to link and automate data flows between various systems and applications.
SnapLogic is a cloud-based integration platform that makes it simple for users to develop and deploy integrations by providing pre-built connectors and a drag-and-drop interface. SnapLogic is a cost-effective choice for smaller enterprises because its pricing is based on the quantity of users, connectors, and data quantities.
On the other side, MuleSoft provides more sophisticated analytics and monitoring capabilities, as well as the choice of on-premise or cloud deployment. MuleSoft is more appropriate for bigger, enterprise-level deployments because its pricing is based on the amount of cores and deployment options.
Factors to Consider in Choosing an Integration Platform
Choosing the ideal integration platform can be a significant decision for any company. Keep the following crucial considerations in mind while selecting an integration platform:
It's crucial to consider the need for integration, including the systems and applications that must be combined as well as the auxiliary data formats and protocols.
It is important to assess scalability to make sure the integration platform can adapt to the needs of expanding companies.
Intuitive user interfaces and drag-and-drop capability for quicker deployment without requiring specific technical expertise are key.
It's crucial to ensure flexibility to support various deployment models, including on-premises and in the cloud, as well as interaction with a variety of systems and applications.
Secure data transmission, encryption, and access controls should all be evaluated in order to protect sensitive data
Support, which includes in-depth documentation, educational materials, and customer service, is essential.
Budget constraints for the company should be taken into consideration when choosing an integration platform, as should the platform's value.
Snaplogic vs Mulesoft FAQs
Q1) What is the difference between SnapLogic and MuleSoft?
Ans: SnapLogic is a cloud-based integration platform that makes it simple for users to develop and deploy integrations by providing pre-built connectors and a drag-and-drop user interface. On the other side, MuleSoft provides more sophisticated analytics and monitoring capabilities, as well as the option for on-premise or cloud deployment.
Q2) What are the advantages of SnapLogic and MuleSoft?
Ans: SnapLogic benefits include simplicity of use, built-in connectors, and a variable price structure based on the number of users, connectors, and data quantities. A broader user and developer community, support for on-premise and cloud deployment, and cutting-edge analytics and monitoring tools are just a few benefits of MuleSoft.
Q3) What are the use cases of SnapLogic and MuleSoft?
Ans: Both SnapLogic and MuleSoft are employed to link and automate data flows between various programs and systems. Syncing cloud-based and on-premises apps, linking cloud-based and on-premises applications, and automating data migration and data warehousing are a few examples of popular use cases.
Q4) How do SnapLogic and MuleSoft compare in terms of pricing?
Ans: Because SnapLogic's pricing is determined by the quantity of users, connectors, and data quantities, it is an affordable choice for smaller businesses. Because MuleSoft's pricing is based on the amount of cores and deployment options, it is more suitable for bigger, enterprise-level deployments.
Q5) Can SnapLogic and MuleSoft be integrated together?
Ans: Using unique connections and APIs, SnapLogic and MuleSoft can be combined. Organizations may then be able to build more intricate integration workflows by utilizing the advantages of both platforms.
Conclusion
The choice between SnapLogic and MuleSoft will be based on the specific needs of a firm, including the complexity of the integration, the systems and applications that must be combined, the required scalability, ease of use, flexibility, security, support, and cost. It's critical to weigh these considerations while comparing the two platforms to decide which one best suits the organization's requirements and financial constraints.
11:Tc3ec,
UML (Unified Modeling Language) is gaining popularity in the design and visualisation fields. This field has a lot to offer potential job seekers and those interested in software engineering and visualisation. Here are the best UML interview questions that have the most accurate responses that will aid you in understanding the subject. These questions will provide you with detailed instructions on how to obtain a modelling language framework in the field of software engineering.
We've compiled a list of the Top 20 UML Interview Questions And Answers that will help you prepare for your interview. UML is a strategy for creating visualizations of software-intensive systems and their components that contain a complete set of graphical notations.
we have categorized these interview questions into 2 sections:
Ans: UML (Unified Modelling Language) is a defined, general-purpose visual process model used in the field of software engineering. It is used to specify, visualise, build, and describe the primary components of a software system. It aids in the design and characterization of software systems, particularly those that embrace the principle of object orientation. It describes how both hardware and software systems work.
The Object Management Group (OMG) is a collaboration of companies that oversees the open standard UML. The OMG was founded to create an open specification that primarily facilitates object-oriented system interoperability. It is not limited to software systems, but it may also be used to simulate non-software systems. The OMG is most well-known for developing the Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) specifications.
Q2) What is the goal of UML?
Ans: A picture is worth a thousand words, and this proverb perfectly describes UML. Object-oriented principles predate UML for a long time. There were no conventional procedures in place at the time to organise and integrate object-oriented development. UML entered the picture at that point.
There are several purposes for designing UML, the most significant of which is to create some multi-purpose modeling language that all simulations can use and that is also simple to grasp and apply.
UML diagrams are created not only for developers, but also for enterprise users, laypeople, and anybody else who comprehends the system. The system might be either software or non-software. As a result, it should be apparent that UML is not a software development methodology, but rather a process that is used to create a successful system.
To summarise, the purpose of UML is to provide a straightforward modeling technique for modeling all potential practical systems in today's complicated environment.
Q3) What are the characteristics of UML?
Ans: The UML has the essential specifications:
It is a modeling language that has been generalised.
It differs from other languages such as C, Python, and others.
It has a connection to object-oriented design and analysis.
It is used to analyze the system's workflow.
It is a graphical language for creating strong modeling objects.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Data Modeling? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Data Modeling Training to get Job Ready!
Q4) Does UML Explain Conceptual Modeling?
Ans: To comprehend the UML conceptual model, we must first define what a conceptual model is and why a conceptual model is needed?
A conceptual model is a model that is built up of concepts and their interactions.
The first phase before creating a UML diagram is to create a conceptual model. It aids in comprehending the elements in the real world and how they communicate with one another.
Because UML covers real-time systems, it is critical to first create a conceptual model and then continue gradually. The UML conceptual model can be acquired by knowing the three primary aspects listed below:
UML building blocks
Rules to connect the building blocks
Common mechanisms of UML
Q5) Can you explain the object-oriented concepts in UML?
Ans: UML can be thought of as the inheritance of object-oriented (OO) analysis and design.
An object contains data as well as methods for controlling the data. The data contains the object's current status. A class describes an object, and they build a hierarchy to represent the real-world system. The organization is represented by inheritance, and the classes can be related in various ways depending on the situation.
Objects are real-world items that exist around us, and UML may be used to express basic principles such as inheritance, encapsulation, abstraction, and polymorphism.
UML is capable of representing all of the concepts used in object-oriented analysis and design. UML diagrams solely represent object-oriented notions. As a result, before understanding UML, it is critical to thoroughly comprehend the OO idea.
The following are some basic concepts of the object-oriented world:
Objects are the essential building blocks that represent an entity.
A class is an object's blueprint.
Abstraction is a representation of the functioning of a real-world thing.
Encapsulation is the technique that connects data and hides it from the outside world.
Inheritance is the process of creating new classes from existing ones.
Polymorphism is the ability of a mechanism to exist in several forms.
Q6) What Does OO Analysis and Design?
Ans: OO can be characterised as an investigation, more specifically an investigation of objects. Collaboration of identified items is what design entails.
As a result, it is critical to comprehend the ideas of OO analysis and design. The primary goal of OO analysis is to identify the objects of a system to be created. An existing system is also subjected to this study. Now, accurate analysis is only feasible if we can begin to conceptualise in terms of objects that can be identified. After defining the objects, their links are determined, and the design is completed.
The goal of OO analysis and design is as follows:
Identifying a system's objects.
Identifying their connections.
Creating a design that can be translated into executables utilizing OO languages.
Q7) Tell us how many steps are required to implement the OO concept in UML?
Ans: The OO methods are applied and implemented in the following three main processes. The steps are as follows:
Analysis-> Design-> Implementation
1) The primary goal of OO analysis is to assess objects and properly characterise them. If these things are efficiently identified, the next design task will be simple. Responsibility should be assigned to the objects. The activities undertaken by the object are referred to as its responsibilities. Every object has a set of duties that must be met.
When these obligations are shared, the system's goal is achieved.
1) The next stage is OO design. The emphasis throughout this phase is on the objectives and their fulfilment. Things are collaborated on in this stage according to their desired relationship. When the association is finished, the design is finished as well.
2)OO implementation is the third phase. OO programming languages such as C++, Java, and other languages are used to implement the design during this phase.
Q8) What are the building blocks of UML?
Ans: There are three primary UMl building blocks. Building blocks form one complete UML model diagram by spinning around several distinct blocks. It is essential when developing UML diagrams. The fundamental UML building blocks are as follows:
Things
Relationship
Diagrams
1. Things:
Things are defined as any real-world object or item. It can be classified into numerous categories:
i) Structural Things: The nouns used in UML models. These represent intellectual or physical aspects. Structures are classified into seven types: Class, Collaboration, Component, Use Case, Interface, Active Class, and Node.
ii) Behavioural Things: Elements of UML models that are dynamic. Verbs that define behaviour between space and time. State and interaction machines are the two types of behavioural things.
iii) Grouping Things: UML organizational components. These are compartments into which systems can be broken down. The package is the sole type of grouping thing.
iv) Annotation Things: UML explanatory elements Any object of a model can be described, illuminated, and noted using this term. The note is the only type of annotation object.
2. Relationships:
It depicts the meaningful relationships between things. It describes the relation between things and specifies an application's functionality. The four sorts of relationships are as follows:
i) Dependency: A translational relationship in which a transition in one item (the isolated thing) can make a meaningful difference in another thing (the dependent thing).
ii) Association: A hierarchical relationship describing the relationships between objects. Labels indicating the size and function of the links may also be provided. In the following example, there may be any number of workers (*), each with 0 or 1 employer.
iii) Generalization: Relationship between specialization and generalization. Simply put, this describes a parent class's (generalizations) connection to its subclass (specialisations).
iv) Realization: Relationship between specialization and generalization. Simply put, this describes a parent class's (generalizations) connection to its subclass (specializations).
3. Diagrams:
i) Class Diagram: A collection of interfaces, classes, and collaborations, as well as their relationships. Most commonly encountered when designing Object-Oriented systems.
ii) Object Diagram: A collection of objects and their relations. Static instances of elements present in class diagrams are represented.
iii) Use Case Diagram: A collection of actors and use cases.
iv) Sequence Diagram: An interactive graphic (a collection of entities, relations, and messages that may be traded) highlighting message time-ordering.
v) Collaboration Diagram: An interaction diagram illustrates the hierarchical structure of messages sending and receiving items.
vi) StateChart Diagram: The state machine with events, transitions, activities, and states, is displayed.
vii) Activity Diagram: A form of statechart diagram that depicts the flow of activities within a network.
viii) Component Diagram: Displays the structure and relationships of a group of components.
ix) Deployment Diagram: This diagram depicts the settings of run-time processing elements and the components that comprise them.
Class Diagram Interview Questions
Q9) Give a detailed explanation about UML Architecture?
Ans: Software architecture is associated with the highest level of development of a software system. It is necessary to consider big from several angles while keeping design and quality in consideration. The software team is involved in a variety of practical challenges, including:
The development team's organizational structure.
The requirements of the organization.
Cycle of development
The structure's intended purpose.
The basic design of a comprehensive software system is provided by software architecture. It defines the system's elements, the purposes each element serves, and how each element interacts with the others. In a nutshell, it is a large picture or overall framework of the entire system, describing how everything functions together.
A well-developed architecture using techniques like segregation of concerns can help to attain quality in software; the system will become easier to build, reuse, and modify. People who use software architecture include software developers, project managers, clients, and end-users. Each will have a unique viewpoint on the infrastructure and will bring distinct objectives to the endeavour. It also provides a selection of various viewpoints. It is best described as a compilation of five perspectives:
1. Use Case/Scenario View:
It is a perspective that depicts the system's functionality as experienced by external players.
It reveals the system's requirements.
The static aspects of this approach are easily documented in use case diagrams with UML, while the dynamic aspects are represented in interaction diagrams, activity diagrams and status chart diagrams.
2. Design/Logical View:
It is a view that demonstrates how the system's functionality is developed in terms of dynamic behavior and static structure.
It captures the problem and solution space terminology.
The static aspects of this approach are represented in class and object diagrams in UML, while the dynamic aspects are recorded in activity diagrams, status chart diagrams, and interaction diagrams.
3. Implementation/Development View:
The view is the representation of the arrangement of the key components and files.
It is largely concerned with the continuous integration of system releases.
UML expresses its static aspects in component diagrams, and its dynamic aspects in activity diagrams, status chart diagrams, and interaction diagrams.
4. Process View:
It is the view that displays the system's concurrency.
It includes threads and processes that create concurrent and synchronized mechanisms.
It focuses on the system's stability, efficiency, and performance.
It expresses static and dynamic aspects in the same way as the design view, but focuses much more on active classes that describe these processes and threads.
5. Depolyment/Physcial Views:
It is the view that depicts the system's physical architectural deployment.
It consists of the nodes that make up the system hardware structure and are where the program will be run.
It largely handles the transmission, delivery, and deployment of the physical system's components.
Q10) Explain about UML Diagrams and various types of Diagrams?
Ans: The Unified Modeling Language (UML) is a technique for visually representing the structure, development, and deployment of complex applications. There are hundreds of lines of code in an application while you're writing code, and it's difficult to keep track of the links and hierarchical structures within a software system. The software system is divided into elements and sub-elements using UML diagrams.
The diagrams are categorised into hierarchical structures in the graphic below. UML diagrams are divided into three types as shown in the below:
Behavioural diagrams
Interaction overview diagrams
Structural diagrams
Q11) Why should you use UML diagrams?
Ans: Because UML is a standard modeling language that can be utilized across many development methods and programming languages, the vast majority of software engineers will understand and be able to implement it in their work.
Though many engineers dislike diagrams, they serve a purpose in an Agile environment by keeping development effective and engaged. Instead of considering them "nice to have," consider UML diagrams to be essential components of documentation. UML diagrams can assist engineering teams in the following ways:
Bring in new associates or developers to swiftly bring teams up to speed.
Navigate through the source code.
Before beginning any programming, plan out new features.
Improve your ability to communicate with both technical and non-technical audiences.
Q12) Explain various types of structural diagrams in UML?
Ans: Static views or structures of a system are depicted in structural diagrams. It is extensively used in software architecture documentation. Composite structure diagrams, deployment diagrams, component diagrams, class diagrams, package diagrams, and object diagrams are all included. It provides an overview of the system. It emphasises the things that must be present to be modeled. The following are the various types of structural diagrams:
1. Class Diagram:Class diagrams are one of the most common types of diagrams. It is the foundation of all object-oriented software systems. It illustrates the system's static structure. It displays the class, properties, and methods of the system. It aids in recognizing the relationship between various objects and classes.
2. Composite Diagram:The composite structure diagrams depict the components of the class. It depicts the link between the components and their configuration, which determines the class's behavior. It depicts the structural properties of a structured classifier by making extensive use of connectors, ports, and parts. When compared to class diagrams, it is comparable in that it represents specific parts in a specific manner.
3. Object Diagram:It represents a system's static structure at a given point in time. It can be used to ensure that class diagrams are accurate. It depicts several occurrences of classes and their relationships over time.
4. Component Diagram:It depicts how the physical components of the system are organized. It's for simulating execution details. As it illustrates the structural links between the pieces of a software system, it assesses whether the required system requirements have been recognized by the planned development.
5. Deployment Diagram: It shows the software and hardware of the system by describing the actual physical elements and the software components that are executing on them. It generates data regarding system software. When software is utilized, disseminated, or deployed across several devices with different configurations, it is integrated.
6. Package Diagram:It's used to show how the packages and their components are put together. It displays the interdependencies between several packages. It organizes UML diagrams by providing them simple to comprehend. It is used for class organization and case diagrams.
Q13) Explain various Behavioral Diagrams in UML?
Ans: Behavioural diagrams depict a dynamic perspective of a system or its behaviour, which illustrates how the system functions. Activity diagrams, state diagrams, and use case diagrams are all included. It establishes the system's interaction.
1. State Diagram:It's a diagram of behaviour. It uses finite state transitions to depict the system's behavior. The State-charts diagram is another name for it. It simulates a class's dynamic behavior in reaction to external inputs.
2. Activity Diagram:It represents the transfer of control from one activity to the next. We can model concurrent and sequential actions using an activity diagram. It shows how the process works as well as what causes an event to happen.
3. Use Case Diagram:It uses entities and use cases to express a system's functionality. It encapsulates a system's functional requirements as well as its relationships with actors. It depicts a system's use case perspective.
Q14) Explain various Interaction diagrams in UML?
Ans: Interaction diagrams are a type of behavioral diagram that focuses on object interactions and displays the flow of information between different use cases in a system. It demonstrates how things interact with one another and how data flows within them. Sequence diagrams, time diagrams, communication, and interaction overviews are all included.
1. Sequence Diagram:It depicts the objects' interactions in terms of messages transmitted over time. It specifies how and in what order the object operates in a system.
2. Comminucation Diagram:It demonstrates how the objects exchange sequence messages. It is concerned with objects and their relationships. It depicts a system's static and dynamic behavior.
3. Timing Diagram:It's a specific type of sequence diagram that depicts an object's behavior over a period of time. It shows the time and durability limitations that govern the modifications in object and state behavior.
4. Interaction Overview Diagram:It's a hybrid of an activity and a sequence diagram that shows a series of actions to break down interrelations into simple ones.
Q15) Give a detailed explanation of the Association Uml relationship?
Ans: The semantic relation between classes that describes how one instance in a system is associated or integrated with others is known as an association. Things are conceptually or physically united. It is classified as a structural relationship because it connects the objects of one class to the objects of another class. The following are the limitations that have been put to the association relationship:
{implicit}: The implicit constraints describe a relationship that is not observable but is based on an idea, as the name suggests.
{ordered}: It explains how a group of things is arranged at one end of an association.
{changeable}: The changeable constraint implementes that connections between several items in a network are created, updated, and removed as necessary.
{addOnly}: It defines that any network node can be made from an object at the association's opposite end.
{frozen}: The frozen constraint states that once a connection is established between objects, it cannot be changed until the connection or given link is active.
The following are the two types of Uml Association relationship:
1. Reflexive Association:The relations in reflexive associations are between objects of the same class. To put it another way, both sides of the reflexive relationship belong to the same class. An instance is another term for an item.
2. Directive Association:The direction of flow within association classes is addressed by the directed association. A directed association can be used to indicate the flow of association. A line with an arrowhead that shows the navigation direction represents the directed association between the two classes. The association flow from one class to the next is always one way.
Q16) Explain the differences between Aggregation and Composition?
Ans:
Features
Aggregation
Composition
Dependency
A child can exist independently of a parent in an aggregation relationship.
The child in a composition relation cannot exist without the parent.
Type of Relationship
It's termed as a Has-a connection.
It's termed as a part-of connection.
Type of Association
It develops a weak connection.
It develops a strong connection.
Instances
When a doctor is transferred to some other hospital, the patients do not follow the doctor to their new location.
The wards of a hospital. The wards will be demolished if the hospital is destroyed.
Q17) Give an explanation about various types of Dependency Uml Relationship?
Ans: Dependency displays the interdependence of several elements inside a system. A dependency relationship in UML is one in which a user (one element) is reliant on the vendor (another entity). It implies that a change to the provider necessitates a change to the customer in component diagrams, class diagrams, use-case diagrams, and deployment diagrams. The following is an example:
<derive>>: It's a condition that says the source can use the specified parameters to initialise the template at the target location.
<<friend>>: It specifies the source's uniqueness in the particular object.
<<instanceOf>>: It specifies that the source entity is a sample of an intended classifier.
<<instantiate>>: It specifies the source entity's capacity to create instances of a particular object.
<<refine>> : It claims that the reference entity has a higher level of abstraction than the particular object.
<<use>>: When creating packages in UML, typical is used to indicate that elements from the reference package can also be found in the specified package. It indicates that the source package makes use of some of the destination package's parts.
<<substitute>>: The user can be swapped for the provider at runtime, according to the substitute stereotype.
Q18) Explain about Generalization Uml diagrams and its types?
Ans: A generalization relationship in UML modeling is a connection that implements the object oriented concept of inheritance. The generalization relationship is formed between two entities or objects, one of which is the parent and the other the child. The offspring inherits its parent's functionality and can access and edit it.
In use case, class, deployment, and component diagrams, the generalization relationship is used to specify that the kid inherits the parent's actions, attributes, and relationships.
The use of the same sorts of model elements in the generalization relationship is required to meet UML's requirement, i.e., The generalization relation can be applied to use cases or actor, but not to use cases and actor.
The generalization relationship is used to record operations, properties, and relationships in a parent relational model so that one or more child model elements can inherit them. The child data model class can have any number of parents, while the parent data model class can have any number of children. However, it is more common to see one parent data model class and several child data model classes. There are no names in the generalization relationship. The generalization relationship is represented by a solid line with a hollow arrowhead directing from the child data model to the parent data model.
Various types of Constraints: It's used to indicate that the child class/entity is defined by its parent class/entity, thus the child object inherits the parent's structure and behavior without breaking the rules. Single inheritance is where stereotypes are most commonly utilized.
There are two sorts of constraints in the generalization stereotype: complete and incomplete constraints, which are used to determine whether or not all of the child entities/objects are engaged in the relationship.
Let us consider an instance of the Uml Dependency Relationship:
As we all know, there are two types of bank accounts: savings accounts and credit card accounts. Both the savings and credit card accounts inherit the bank account's generalized features, such as Accnt numb, Accnt Bal, and so on.
Q19) Explain Uml Realization diagrams?
Ans: The realization is a relation between two different objects in UML modeling, when the client (one model item) fulfills the supplier's role (another model element). The realisation connection can be used in component diagrams and class diagrams.
There are no names for the realization relationship. It's largely in the user interfaces. A dashed line with a hollow arrowhead at one end that points from the client application to the server application is used to describe it.
1. Realization:
The interface and classifier have a specialized relationship called interface realization. Realizing classifiers follow the interface's contract in an interface realization relationship.
The objects that adhere to the interface and any of its predecessors are identified by a classifier that implements the interface. One or more interfaces can be executed by a classifier. The specified interfaces are the collection of interfaces that the classifier implements. The specified interfaces are the services that the classifiers provide to their clients.
The interface realization relationship has no names, but if you give it a name, it will display next to the link in the diagram.
A dashed line with a hollow arrow, pointing from the classifier to the specified interface, represents the interface realization relationship.
2. Types of Realization:
Canonical Form: The canonical form in UML represents the system's interfaces. To create an interface, an interface archetype is used, and to realize (implement) a given interface, a realization relation is utilized. A dotted line with a hollow arrow represents the realization relationship, and an object is used to implement the interface.
The interface Iruleagent is realized by the object Account Business Rules, as shown in the picture below.
Elided Form: The lollipop notation is a type of realization connection in which the interface is denoted as a circle. An elided structure is formed when an interface is implemented using everything available in the system.
Iruleagent is represented here by an elided version, which is implemented by acctrule.
Q20) Differentiate Association, Aggregation, and Composition?
Ans:
Association
Aggregation
Composition
An arrow represents the association relation.
A solid line with a blank diamond at one end represents the aggregation relationship.
A solid line with a black diamond at one end represents the composition connection.
It can occur between distinct classes in UML.
It is a part of the business relationship.
The aggregation relationship includes it.
It includes one-to-many, one-to-one, many-to-many, and many-to-one relationships among the classes.
It demonstrates a weak relationship.
It demonstrates a solid relationship.
It can have a relationship and be associated with more than two objects or items.
The associated objects in an aggregation association exist independently within the system boundaries.
Within the limits specified, the connected objects in a composition relationship cannot exist separately.
Objects are connected in this method.
The related entities in this case are independent to each other entity.
The associated objects are interdependent in this case.
If one element is deleted, it may or may not effect the other dependent elements.
The deletion of one element in an aggregation connection has no effect on the other items in the relationship.
If one of its related elements is deleted, it has an effect on the other element.
Instance: A tutor might work with a group of pupils, or a single student can interact with several teachers.
Instance: A car requires a wheel to function properly, but not always the same wheel. It might also work with another wheel.
Instance:
If a file is saved in a directory and then the folder is erased, the file is lost. When you delete a folder, any files contained within it will be deleted as well.
Conclusion:
Our blog ends here. We hope our Best UML Interview Questions help you to clear your UML Developer interview. If you have any questions or suggestions, please mention them in the comment section.
12:T571a,
A robust cloud-based business intelligence platform called SAP Analytics Cloud was created by SAP to assist businesses in learning from their data. Organizations of all sizes are progressively using it as a well-liked tool for data analysis. It's crucial to be familiar with typical SAP Analytics Cloud interview questions if you're getting ready for one.
we have categorized these questions into a few sections:
SAP Analytics Cloud Interview Questions and Answers
Q1) What is SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: It is a cloud-based business intelligence platform that enables enterprises to learn from their data.
Q2) What are the different types of data models available in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: Live data models, import data models, and hybrid data models are some of the various types of data models offered by SAP Analytics Cloud.
Q3) What is data blending in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: Data blending is a process in SAP Analytics Cloud that allows you to combine data from different sources to gain insights.
Q4) How can you create a report in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: To generate insights, you can mix data from several sources using the data blending process in SAP Analytics Cloud.
Q5) What is a story in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: You must first construct a data model, then choose the pertinent data sources, and lastly design the report using the various visualizations in SAP Analytics Cloud.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP Analytics Cloud? Enroll in Instructor-Led live SAP Analytics Cloud Training to get Job Ready!
Q6) How can you collaborate with other team members in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: In SAP Analytics Cloud, you may cooperate with other team members by exchanging reports, inviting them to join a narrative, and utilizing the comment and discussion tools.
Q7) How can you create a planning model in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: You must first construct a data model in SAP Analytics Cloud before you can activate planning in the model. The model's data can then be updated using planning functions that you create.
Q8) What is predictive analytics in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: The SAP Analytics Cloud's predictive analytics function enables you to employ machine learning algorithms to forecast the future and spot trends in your data.
Q9) What are the different deployment options for SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: Cloud, on-premises, and hybrid deployments are the many SAP Analytics Cloud deployment choices.
Q10 How does SAP Analytics Cloud ensure data security?
Ans: Data security is protected by SAP Analytics Cloud using tools including role-based access control, data encryption both in transit and at rest, and ongoing system monitoring and auditing.
Q11) What are the different visualization types available in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: Tables, charts, maps, geo maps, and story points are just a few of the several visualization options that are offered by SAP Analytics Cloud.
Q12) What is a data source in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: You can import data into SAP Analytics Cloud by connecting to an external data system, such as a database, spreadsheet, or web service, through a data source.
Q13) How can you schedule a report in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: The SAP Analytics Cloud's Schedule feature lets you determine the frequency, start time, and recipients of reports. This tool is useful for scheduling reports.
Q14) What is a dimension in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: In SAP Analytics Cloud, a dimension is a data attribute that gives the data context, such as time, place, or product.
Q15) How can you use Smart Predict in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: With the help of the SAP Analytics Cloud function Smart Predict, you can predict the future and spot trends in your data by using pre-built machine learning models. You must first build a predictive model before using it to generate predictions in order to use Smart Predict.
SAP SAC Interview Questions and Answers
Q16) What is the difference between a live data model and an import data model in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: Although an import data model just imports data into SAP Analytics Cloud for analysis, a live data model connects directly to a data source and offers real-time access to the data.
Q17) How can you create custom calculations in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: The Calculation Editor in SAP Analytics Cloud lets you write formulas using functions and operators to build unique computations.
Q18) How can you connect SAP Analytics Cloud to SAP BW/4HANA?
Ans: You must first establish a safe connection between the two systems using the SAP Cloud Connector before setting up a live data connection to the SAP BW/4HANA system in order to connect SAP Analytics Cloud and SAP BW/4HANA.
Q19) What is a smart group in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: A smart group in SAP Analytics Cloud is a technique to group related data points based on a set of criteria, such as sales above a given level or products in a specific category.
Q20) How can you use SAP Analytics Cloud for financial planning and analysis?
Ans: You may develop planning models, conduct what-if analyses, and generate financial reports using the financial planning and analysis module of SAP Analytics Cloud.
Q21) How can you use SAP Analytics Cloud for predictive maintenance?
Ans: By examining sensor data from machines and applying machine learning algorithms to detect probable problems, SAP Analytics Cloud can be utilized for predictive maintenance.
Q22) How can you integrate SAP Analytics Cloud with other SAP systems?
Ans: Using connectors and APIs like the SAP Cloud Platform Integration service, SAP Analytics Cloud can be linked with other SAP systems.
Q23) What is the difference between a private story and a public story in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: A public story in SAP Analytics Cloud can be seen by anybody with access to the system, but a private story can only be viewed by the owner and the people who have permission to view it.
Q24) How can you use SAP Analytics Cloud for supply chain management?
Ans: By evaluating data from numerous sources, including sales orders, inventory levels, and shipping data, SAP Analytics Cloud may be utilized for supply chain management by spotting trends and potential problems.
Q25) How can you create custom visualizations in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: You can use the SDK (Software Development Kit) to develop your own custom widgets and incorporate them into your reports and stories to generate unique visualizations in SAP Analytics Cloud.
Q26) can you use SAP Analytics Cloud to perform predictive analytics?
Ans: For predictive analytics, such as predicting future trends and spotting data abnormalities, SAP Analytics Cloud incorporates machine learning capabilities.
Q27) What is a story in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: In SAP Analytics Cloud, a story is a group of visualisations and data points that offer explanations and convey a narrative about the data. It is possible to write and share stories with other members of the organisation.
Q28) How can you use SAP Analytics Cloud to perform ad-hoc analysis?
Ans: A data discovery function in SAP Analytics Cloud enables you to dive deeper into data, execute ad hoc analysis, and create new visualisations on the go.
Q29) How can you use SAP Analytics Cloud to perform data modeling?
Ans: A data modelling tool in SAP Analytics Cloud enables you to build data models and import data from outside sources like databases and spreadsheets.
Q30) What distinguishes a dimension from a metric in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: A dimension in SAP Analytics Cloud is a qualitative data point that gives context for the data, whereas a measure in SAP Analytics Cloud is a quantitative data point, such as sales revenue or profit margin. Dimensions are used to group and filter data, whereas measures are often utilised in calculations and visualisations.
SAP Analytics Cloud FAQs
1) Explain the components of SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: Data visualization, data modelling, planning, predictive analytics, and business intelligence are the core elements of SAP Analytics Cloud.
2) What is meant by SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: Users of the cloud-based analytics application SAP Analytics Cloud can analyse data from numerous sources, produce visualisations and reports, and work in real-time collaboration with others.
3) What is the purpose of SAP Analytics Cloud planning?
Ans: The what-if analysis and scenario planning capabilities, as well as the ability to design, manage, and evaluate financial plans and budgets, are all part of SAP Analytics Cloud planning.
4) What are the 2 methods available for accessing the data from SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: Live data connections, which let users connect to data sources in real-time, and import data connections, which let users import data into SAP Analytics Cloud for analysis, are the two options available for gaining access to data from SAP Analytics Cloud.
5) What are the types of modules in SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: Financial planning and analysis, predictive analytics, business intelligence, data visualisation, data modelling, and planning are some of the module types available in SAP Analytics Cloud. Each module offers a selection of features and tools for data analysis and visualisation and can be tailored to a particular organization's requirements.
Tips to clear SAP Analytics Cloud Interview
Practice responding to typical SAP Analytics Cloud interview questions while researching the business and the job description.
Make sure to emphasise your experience using SAP Analytics Cloud and give particular instances of the projects or activities you have performed with the help of the programme.
Show that you are skilled in data analysis, data modelling, and data visualisation, as these are essential for working with SAP Analytics Cloud.
Due to the importance of cooperation placed by SAP Analytics Cloud, be prepared to talk about the ways in which you have cooperated with others to share information and produce reports.
Show that you are open to learning new features and strategies because SAP Analytics Cloud is a platform that is continually changing so that you can keep up with the most recent developments in data analytics.
Conclusion
Being a robust cloud-based analytics solution, SAP Analytics Cloud offers a range of tools for data modelling, data visualisation, business intelligence, and predictive analytics. Organizations utilise it frequently to extract insights from their data and make wise business decisions. It takes careful planning, presenting relevant expertise and talents, showcasing cooperation skills, and proving a desire to learn and adapt to new features and methodologies to successfully navigate an SAP Analytics Cloud interview.
SAP Analytics Cloud is an all-in-one analytics platform that has gained immense popularity in recent years. It allows businesses to collect, analyze, and visualize data in real time, providing valuable insights that help businesses make informed decisions. According to recent statistics, the demand for SAP Analytics Cloud is increasing rapidly, with more and more businesses adopting this platform to streamline their operations and improve their decision-making processes. If you are new to SAP Analytics Cloud, you are in the right place. In this SAP Analytics Cloud Tutorial, we will provide an in-depth overview of the platform and show you how to use it to collect, analyze, and visualize data.
Before we dive in, it is worth noting that SAP Analytics Cloud is built on top of SAP UI5, a UI development toolkit for HTML5. The current versions of SAP UI5 include 1.87 and 1.88, both of which provide a seamless user experience across devices and browsers. With SAP UI5 as its foundation, SAP Analytics Cloud offers a modern and intuitive interface that allows users to easily navigate and interact with their data. Here are the latest updates of SAP Analytics Cloud for you to review in Q1 2023.
SAP Analytics Cloud is a software-as-a-service (SaaS) enterprise analytics solution. It combines business intelligence, augmented and predictive analytics, and planning capabilities to help you understand your data to make better business decisions. Furthermore, you can ask, analyze, predict, plan, and report all in one end-to-end workflow.
1) Business Intelligence:
SAP Analytics Cloud offers built-in self-service Business Intelligence (BI) features to help you explore, analyze, and visualize data to get insights for decisions; data visualizations such as charts, tables, Geo maps, and other visual formats to display data in a way that can be quickly and easily understood.
2) Augmented Analytics:
SAP Analytics Cloud Augmented Analytics can help users make more confident decisions faster with automated insights powered by machine learning and artificial intelligence. Spend less time analyzing data manually by utilizing these capabilities to automatically reveal top contributors, influencers, hidden patterns, and outliers in your data.
3) Planning:
SAP Analytics Cloud for Planning lets you analyze, predict, and plan in one application. It enables real-time Extended Planning and Analysis to link and align all plans and people across your organization.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP Analytics Cloud? Enroll in Instructor-Led live SAP Analytics Cloud Training to get Job Ready!
What is the use of SAP Analytics Cloud?
The main function of the SAP Analytics cloud is to create data reports. The data used for feeding those reports are derived from different resources. It includes real-time data from your business activities and tasks, budget forecast data, etc. It allows everyone in the organization to produce complete autonomous reports without the help of any data scientists.
SAP Analytics Cloud Architecture
Let's understand the various components of Cloud Architecture.
1) Stories
Stories are where data and visualizations come together to tell the story of your business or organization and help you discover insights hidden within your data. A story can also be referred to as a dashboard.
2) Analytic Applications
Analytic applications are consolidated information presented in a guided analytic path with analytical capabilities for end users. The primary role of analytic applications is to deal with trends and KPIs.
3) Models
A model is a representation of large amounts of business data from source systems. It defines measures and dimensions that are used to build visualizations, filters, and calculations in stories.
4) Planning
There are many planning tools for collaboratively creating and updating model data to carry out planning tasks. In simple words, planning involves typing values directly into table cells in planning models.
5) Smart Capabilities
There are many smart features for improving business decisions and analysis workflow.
6) Datasets
A dataset is a simple collection of data, usually presented in a table. Datasets are used to complement models and are more suitable for ad-hoc analysis.
7) SAP Digital Boardroom
SAP Digital Boardroom is an interactive and real-time presentation tool. Users can take content from your stories and turn it into a real-time, interactive boardroom agenda or dashboard.
8) Mobile App
With Mobile App, users can access their analytics anywhere and anytime. They can use the mobile app to connect to the SAP Analytics Cloud solution.
SAP Analytics Cloud Fundamentals
The next phase in SAP Analytics Cloud Tutorial is the fundamental components of SAP Analytics Cloud, including data, models, stories, etc. Let us dive deeper and understand them in detail:
1) Data:
When you think of analytics, data visualizations probably come to mind first. These visualizations represent your business data in various chart types, which makes it easy to understand your business briefly. The data that is collected by your business then has to be stored somewhere. You can choose to store simple information in a spreadsheet or, when it comes to big data, in a more complex database.
2) Models:
A model is a clean and defined version of your raw data, and it will be the basis of your analysis. The process of creating a model is called modeling. In Analytics Cloud, more complex models are created using the Modeler. This is because it's a more advanced tool and will take some time to learn for those unfamiliar with data modeling.
3) Stories:
Stories are used for exploring and visualizing your data for reporting, planning, and analysis. There are two areas within stories that can be used for these purposes. These are data views and pages.
4) Data View:
If you've imported data directly to your story, you'll start the process in data view. Here, you will check your data, clean up any errors, and add any further definitions to your model. On the other hand, each story can have one or multiple pages, which can be set up as a canvas or a grid. Here, the process gets completed.
Core Applications and Features
Let's move on to the core applications and features in this part of the Sap Analytics Cloud Tutorial:
Data Discovery
Machine Learning capabilities
Integrated Financial and Business Planning
Predictive Analysis
Automated data cleansing
Data exploration and visualization
Role-Based customization for different users
Use of custom widgets
Applications Integration with on-premise sources
Mobile extension to connect with colleagues via iPhone/iPad
How can I get the SAP Analytics Cloud License?
The Free version is for 30 days. You can get started with your SAP Analytics Cloud here. It can also get extended up to 90 days. You can purchase an SAP Analytics Cloud for business intelligence license as a User License. It will ensure that the assigned user can always access the application, regardless of how many other users are logged on. We recommend that administrators be given user licenses. Please note that when some licenses are removed from a customer account, content created from those licenses will be restricted for other end users, even those with administrator roles:
Registration (Trial Version)
SAP was providing the trial system to get to know their SaaS application, and as a step towards the same, SAP has extended its trial account expiration to 1 year from 30 days. Here is how you can register an account on the trial version.
Step 1 - Navigate to SAP Cloud Platform Cockpit. Sign In if you already have an SAP account.
Step 2 - If not, register for the new account with your email and provide the necessary information.
Step 3 - Click Trial Home. Accept the terms and conditions, and then select enter your trial account.
Step 4 - After registration, SAP will send a welcome email to the registered email address, which provides you with a quick guide for administration and setting up the environment.
Step 5 - After this, you will receive one more email from SAP. Welcome to SAP Analytics Cloud to activate your account. Once you activate your account, you can land on the home page of the SAP Analytics Cloud tool.
SAP Analytics Cloud Import Excel Data
Here is how you can Import Excel Data in SAP:
Step 1 - Click on the Menu option, then more options, and then Dataset
Step 2 - Select the "From CSV or Excel File" option to import your Excel dataset
Step 3 - Once you select the Excel dataset, it will show the file name on the window. Then click on the Import option.
Step 4 - Import you need to select the location/folder where you want to save the data set; you can also create your own folder.
Step 5 - Once you saved the file on location, its analytics Cloud will start importing your excel data into the cloud.
SAP Analytics Cloud FAQs
1) Is SAP Analytics Cloud easy to learn?
Ans: Yes. If you follow all the steps properly, SAP Analytics is easy to learn.
2) What is SAP Analytics Cloud used for?
Ans: Creating data reports is the main function of SAP Analytics Cloud.
3) What is the SAP Analytics Cloud tutorial?
Ans: SAP Analytics Cloud tutorial is a go-to tool for business users for analytical and ad-hoc reporting. Business users can create a basic, medium, and complex dashboard from transactional data in the database to meet business requirements.
4) How do I get started with SAP Analytics Cloud?
Ans: Here is how you can get started with SAP Analytics Cloud:
Step 1 - Get to know SAP Analytics Cloud - Go through the basics of SAP Analytics Cloud and register for a Trial Account
Step 2 - Explore the SAP Analytics Cloud Sample Story - Go through the feature of interacting with story widgets and employ the power of Smart Features offered with SAP Analytics Cloud, such as Smart Insights and Search to Insight.
Step 3 - Create your First SAP Analytics Cloud Story - Create your first story by importing a mock dataset and visualizing your data with charts, tables, geo maps, etc.
SAP Analytics Cloud is a powerful analytics platform that has the potential to revolutionize the way businesses operate. As technology continues to evolve, SAP Analytics Cloud will play an increasingly important role in the business world. The platform offers a wide range of features that help businesses to make better decisions, improve their operations, and stay ahead of the competition. Whether you are a business owner, a data analyst, or an IT professional, learning SAP Analytics Cloud can greatly benefit your career. By understanding how to use this platform, you can help your organization grow and succeed in today's competitive market.
15:Tc7e6,
Clinical data analysis is a crucial part of the healthcare sector for improving patient outcomes and advancing scientific inquiry. And so, the demand for qualified clinical data analysts has increased along with the demand for data-driven insights. Recent data indicates that a CAGR of 14.2% is found to predict for the global clinical data analytics market, which is anticipated to reach $11.3 billion by 2025. As a clinical data analyst, your duties will include gathering, compiling, and analysing complex healthcare data as well as communicating the results to important stakeholders. We'll go over some of the most typical clinical data analyst interview questions in this interview, which are meant to help you show off your knowledge and get your next job.
Most frequently asked Clinical Data Analyst Interview Questions
Clinical Data Analyst Interview Questions and Answers
1. What is the role of a Clinical Data Analyst?
Ans: A clinical data Analyst collects data from numerous medical research projects like clinical and pharmaceutical trials.
2. Can you describe the various steps involved in any analytics project?
Ans: The following are the steps involved in an analytics project:
Understand the Problem
Understand the business problem, define the organizational goals, and plan for a solution
Gather the right data from various sources and other information based on your priorities.
Clean Data
Explore and Analyze Data
Use data visualization and business intelligence tools, data mining techniques, and predictive modelling to analyze data.
Interpret the Results
3. What do you understand by Data Wrangling in Data Analytics?
Ans: Data Wrangling is the process wherein raw data is cleaned, structured, and enriched into a desired usable format for better decision making. It involves discovering, structuring, cleaning, enriching, validating, and analyzing data. This process can turn and map out large amounts of data extracted from various sources into a more useful format.
4. Can you describe some problems related to data analysis?
Ans: Following are the common problems steps involved in any analytics project:
Handling duplicate
Collecting the meaningful right data and the right time
Handling data purging and storage problems
Making data secure and dealing with compliance issues
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Data Analytics? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Clinical Data Analyst Training to get Job Ready!
5. What do you understand by Sampling?
Ans: Sampling is a statistical method to select a subset of data from an entire dataset (population) to estimate the characteristics of the whole population.
6. What are the different types of sampling techniques used by data analysts?
Ans: There are majorly five types of sampling methods:
Ans: An outlier is a data point that is distant from other similar points. They may be due to variability in the measurement or may indicate experimental errors
8. What are the steps to deal with outliers?
Ans: To deal with outliers, you can follow the following methods:
Drop the outlier records
Cap your outlier’s data
Assign a new value
Try a new transformation
9. What are Type I and Type II errors in Statistics? Explain.
Ans: In Hypothesis testing, a Type I error occurs when the null hypothesis is rejected even if it is true. It is also known as a false positive.
A Type II error occurs when the null hypothesis is not rejected, even if it is false. It is also known as a false negative.
10. Differentiate between Data joining and Data blending.
Ans: Data joining is a process which can only be carried when the data is occupied from the same source. On the other hand, Data blending is a process in which data can be drawn of two or more sources.
11. Differentiate between Treemaps and Heatmaps.
Ans: Treemaps are used for displaying data in nested rectangles. On the other hand, Heatmaps are used visualizing and differentiating between two dimensions with the help of colors.
12. Which function is used to get the current date and time in Excel?
Ans: In Excel, we can use the TODAY() and NOW() functions to get the current date and time.
13. What do you understand by Ind?
Ans: At the time of trial. The agent being used as Ind or IND and it stands for Investigational New Drug
14. What is the process of the best methods for data cleaning?
Ans:
Create a plan by understanding where the common errors take place and keep all the communications open.
Before working with the data, identify and remove the duplicates for an effective process.
Focus on the accuracy of the data.
Normalize the data at the entry point so that it is less chaotic.
15. What is AND()? How does it work in Excel?
Ans: AND() is a logical function that checks multiple conditions and returns TRUE or FALSE based on whether the conditions are met.
16. Differentiate between Overfitting and Underfitting.
Ans: In overfitting, the model trains the data using training set. On the otherhand, in Underfitting, the model does not train the data.
17. Define Descriptive analytics.
Ans: Descriptive analytics provide insights into the past to answer what has happened.
18. Define Predictive analytics.
Ans: Predictive analytics analyzes the future to answer what could happen.
19. Define Prescriptive analytics.
Ans: Prescriptive analytics suggest various courses of action to answer what should you do.
20. What do you understand by Protocol Document?
Ans: A protocol document defines the objectives, methodology, design, statistical considerations, and clinical trial organization. It permits researchers at multiple locations to research in the same manner to allow a combination of their data as if they did the study in the same location
Clinical Data Analyst Interview Questions for Freshers
21. Explain the concept of a double-blind study?
Ans: Double-blind study is an experiment in which neither the participants nor the researchers know who is receiving the treatment or placebo. This type of study helps to reduce bias and increase the accuracy of the results. Clinical Data Analysts, should to be aware of this concept and its implications when analyzing data from clinical trials.
22. What are some of the most important qualities for a successful Clinical Data Analyst?
Ans: Having strong problem-solving skills is essential for any data analyst role as it allows me to quickly identify patterns in data sets and develop solutions to complex problems. Attention to detail is also key to ensure accuracy of results and that all relevant information is considered when making decisions. Finally, excellent communication is necessary to effectively communicate findings to stakeholders and other team members.
23. How would you describe the relationship between a Clinical Data Analyst and a medical researcher?
Ans: The relationship between a clinical data analyst and a medical researcher is significant. Clinical Data Analyst should be able the importance of providing accurate, timely, and meaningful analysis to support medical research. This includes analysing patient records, generating reports, and creating visualizations to identify trends in the data.
24. Do you have any experience in using data mining software?
Ans: I have some experience with data mining software. I have used various data mining tools such as SAS, R, Python, and Tableau to analyse large datasets in order to identify patterns and trends.
25. Provide an example of a time when you identified a problem with a study and explain what you did to resolve it.
Ans: I recently identified a problem with a clinical study I was working on. The data collected from the patients did not match up with the results of the study, and it was unclear why this discrepancy existed. To resolve the issue, I took a closer look at the data to identify any potential errors or inconsistencies that could be causing the mismatch.
26. Have you came across a situation where a study’s results contradicted previous research? How did you handle it?
Ans: If a study’s results contradicted previous research, I would first analyse the data to ensure that it was accurate and reliable. If the data is valid, then I would take a closer look at the methodology used in the study and compare it to the methodology of the previous studies. So, conducting additional research or re-evaluating the existing data can help.
27. What would you do if you noticed a mistake in a patient’s file and you knew it was your fault?
Ans: If I noticed a mistake in a patient’s file and knew it was my fault, the first thing I would do is take responsibility for the error. I understand that mistakes can happen, but as a Clinical Data Analyst, it is important to be honest about any errors made. I would immediately investigate the issue further to determine how the mistake occurred and what steps need to be taken to correct it.
28. What are some ethical guidelines and regulations in the field of Clinical Data Analysis?
Ans: HIPAA, GDPR, and other relevant laws and regulations related to patient privacy and health information security. Clinical Data Analyst, must ensure compliance with these standards. This includes regularly reviewing policies, procedures, and protocols to ensure they are up-to-date and in line with laws and regulations.
29. Ho to work with large data sets?
Ans: Clinical Data Analysts should be able to analyse and interpret patient data from multiple sources. This includes managing large datasets of up to 10 million records. They also must develop an efficient system for organizing and manipulating the data so that it can be used effectively in reports and presentations.
30. When analysing a new study, what the process should look like for reading through the initial data?
Ans: When analysing a new study, the process for reading through the initial data begins by getting familiar with the research question and objectives. Then, review the study protocol to gain an understanding of the study design, including the population being studied, the variables being measured, and any potential confounding factors. Once you get a good grasp on the overall structure of the study, you must read through the raw data and understand the coding conventions used in the dataset and ensuring that all necessary variables are present.
31. Can you give us some ideas to improve data collection methods?
Ans: Firstly, I suggest creating standardized protocols for collecting data. This will help streamline the process and reduce errors in data entry. It should also include guidelines on how to properly store and manage collected data.
Secondly, I think it’s important to invest in quality control measures such as double-checking data entries and using automated tools to detect any discrepancies
Thirdly, I believe it is beneficial to use technology to automate certain aspects of data collection. For example, you could use software programs to automatically collect and organize data from various sources.
32. Do you have any experience with using statistical software. Please describe it.
Ans: I have some experience using statistical software to analyse and interpret clinical data. I am proficient in a variety of programs, including SAS, SPSS, R, and STATA. I use these tools daily to generate reports, create visualizations, and develop predictive models. I also have experience working with large datasets.
33. What makes you qualified for the job of Clinical Data Analyst?
Ans: With some experience in the field of Clinical Data Analysis, I have a proven track record of success. I have developed a deep and clear understanding of clinical data analysis principles and techniques. In addition to my technical skills, I also possess excellent communication and problem-solving abilities. I have worked on numerous projects where I had to collaborate with other professionals to develop solutions to complex problems.
34. Which industries have you worked in before and how were they similar or different from this job?
Ans: I have worked in the healthcare industry for some years as a Clinical Data Analyst. This has included working with large health systems and pharmaceutical companies. Each of these industries had different data needs and requirements, but they all shared one common goal: to use data to improve patient care and outcomes.
For example, when I was working with a large health system, my role focused on analysing clinical data to identify trends and patterns that could help inform decisions about patient care. With the pharmaceutical company, I used data to evaluate the effectiveness of new drugs and treatments.
35. What is the most important thing that Clinical Data Analysts can do to ensure the safety of patients?
Ans: I believe Clinical Data Analysts must ensure patient safety is to thoroughly analyse and interpret data. This includes looking at trends in patient outcomes, identifying any potential risks or issues, and making sure that all data is accurate and up-to-date. By doing this, they can help identify areas of improvement for healthcare providers and make sure that patients are receiving the best care possible. Secondly also need to be aware of any new regulations or guidelines that may affect our analysis and take steps to ensure compliance with these standards.
36. How often do you make mistakes when entering data?
Ans: I understand that accuracy is of the utmost importance when entering data. I take great care to ensure that all data entry is done correctly and efficiently. I have a system in place to double-check my work, which helps me catch any errors before they become an issue. I also use quality control measures to make sure everything is accurate.
37. There is a discrepancy in the data that does not make sense. What is your process for investigating this?
Ans: When Clinical Data Analysts encounter a discrepancy in data, their first step should be reviewing the source of the data and ensure that it is accurate. This includes verifying any calculations used to generate the data as well as double-checking for typos or other errors. Once I have verified the accuracy of the data, they also must look at the context of the data to see if there are any external factors that may be influencing the results. Lastly, they must compare the data with similar datasets from previous studies to determine if the discrepancy is consistent across multiple sources.
38. Are you familiar with the concept of “missing data” and how can it be handled?
Ans: Yes, I am familiar with the concept of missing data and how it can be handled. Missing data is a common issue in Clinical Data Analysis that must be addressed before any meaningful conclusions can be drawn from the data. There are several methods for dealing with missing data including imputation, deletion, or using a combination of both. Imputation involves replacing missing values with estimates based on other available information, while deletion removes records containing missing values from the dataset.
39. If you face a difficult challenge while analysing clinical data, how will you overcome it?
Ans: If I face a difficult challenge while analysing clinical data for a research study That will either be because data is collected from multiple sources, and it had to be standardized in order to draw meaningful conclusions. I will try to work closely with the researchers to understand their objectives and develop an efficient process for standardizing the data. To overcome this challenge, I will develop a comprehensive workflow using Microsoft Excel to clean and organize the data to maintain accuracy.
40. What methods do you use to ensure that your data is accurate and reliable?
Ans: I take accuracy and reliability of data very seriously. To ensure that my data is accurate and reliable, I use a variety of methods. First, I always double-check the source of the data to make sure it is coming from a reputable source. Then, I perform rigorous quality checks on all incoming data to identify any potential errors or inconsistencies.
Data Analyst Technical Interview Questions and Answers
41. How would you handle a situation where the data was not properly collected or organized?
Ans: If I encountered a situation where the data was not properly collected or organized, my first step would be to assess the issue and determine what went wrong. This could involve speaking with the team that initially collected the data, as well as reviewing any documentation related to the collection process. This also might include re-collecting missing data points, reorganizing existing data into more logical categories, or implementing new processes.
42. Do you have any experience with developing visualizations from clinical data? Please describe it.
Ans: Yes, I have substantial experience in developing visualizations from clinical data. I have worked with a variety of software programs to create meaningful and informative visuals that help stakeholders better understand the data. My experience includes creating bar graphs, pie charts, scatter plots, line graphs, and other types of visualizations. This allows me to identify trends and patterns in the data that can be used to make informed decisions.
43. What techniques have you used in the past to identify trends in data sets?
Ans: I have used a variety of techniques to identify trends in data sets. One technique I often use is exploratory data analysis, which involves visualizing the data and looking for patterns or relationships between variables. This can be done using various graphical tools such as box plots, histograms, scatterplots, and heatmaps. Statistical modelling is another technique for examining results.
44. What challenges have you faced while working with medical records?
Ans: As a Clinical Data Analyst, I have faced many challenges when working with medical records. One of the biggest challenges is ensuring that all data is accurate and up-to-date. This requires me to be very detail-oriented and organized in my approach to analysing data. Another challenge I have encountered is making sure that all patient information is kept confidential and secure.
45. Do you think the role of a clinical data analyst will change over the next few years?
Ans: Yes, I do believe the role of a clinical data analyst will change over the next few years. As technology advances and healthcare organizations become more reliant on data-driven decisions, the need for highly skilled analysts to interpret this data is becoming increasingly important. Clinical Data Analysts must be able to understand complex datasets and use them to inform decision making in order to improve patient outcomes. Thus, Clinical Data Analysts must stay up to date with new technologies and trends in the field in order to remain competitive.
46. What is the significance of Exploratory Data Analysis (EDA)?
Ans:
Exploratory Data Analysis (EDA) helps to understand the data better.
It helps you obtain confidence in your data to a point where you are ready to engage a machine learning algorithm.
It allows you to refine your selection of feature variables that will be used later for model building.
You can discover hidden trends and insights from the data.
47. Describe Univariate Analysis.
Ans: Univariate Analysis is the simplest and easiest form of data analysis where the data being analysed contains only one variable. A good example of this is studying the heights of players in the NBA. It can be described using Central Tendency, Dispersion, Quartiles, Bar charts, etc.
48. Describe Bivariate Analysis.
Ans: Bivariate Analysis involves the analysis of two variables to find causes, relationships, and correlations between the variables. A good example of this is analysing the sale of ice creams based on the temperature outside. It can be explained using Correlation coefficients, Linear regression, Logistic regression, Scatter plots, and Box plots.
49. Describe Multivariate Analysis.
Ans: Multivariate Analysis involves the analysis of three or more variables to understand the relationship of each variable with the other variables. A good example of this is Analysing Revenue based on expenditure. It can be performed using Multiple regression, Factor analysis, Classification & regression trees, Cluster analysis, etc.
50. What is Time Series Analysis?
Ans: Time Series Analysis is a statistical procedure that deals with the ordered sequence of values of a variable at equally spaced time intervals. Time series data are collected at adjacent periods. So, there is a correlation between the observations. This feature distinguishes time-series data from cross-sectional data.
51. What do you understand by Hypothesis Testing?
Ans: Hypothesis Testing is the procedure used by statisticians and scientists to accept or reject statistical hypotheses. There are mainly two types of hypothesis testing.
52. What are the different types of Hypothesis Testing?
Ans:
Null Hypothesis Testing states that there is no relation between the predictor and outcome variables in the population. A good example of this is no association between a patient’s BMI and diabetes.
Alternative Hypothesis Testing states that there is some relation between the predictor and outcome variables in the population. A good example of this is there could be an association between a patient’s BMI and diabetes.
53. What do you understand by Subquery in SQL?
Ans: A Subquery in SQL is a query within another query. It is also known as a nested query or an inner query. Subqueries are used to enhance the data to be queried by the main query. It is divided into two types Correlated and Non-Correlated Query.
54. Can you give an example of Subquery in SQL?
Ans:
SELECT name, email, phone
FROM employee
WHERE emp_id IN (
SELECT emp_id
FROM employee
55. How do you write a stored procedure in SQL?
Ans: To write a stored procedure in SQL, find the sum of the first N natural numbers' squares.
Create a procedure by giving a name, here it is squaresum1
Declare the variables
Write the formula using the set statement
Print the values of the computed variable
56. What are the different connection types in Tableau Software?
Ans: Following are the two main types of connections available in Tableau:
Extract: Extract is an image of the data that will be extracted from the data source and placed into the Tableau repository. This image(snapshot) can be refreshed periodically, fully, or incrementally.
Live: The live connection makes a direct connection to the data source. The data will be fetched straight from tables. So, data is always up to date and consistent.
57. Define Gantt Chart in Tableau.
Ans: A Gantt chart in Tableau depicts the progress of value over the period, i.e., it shows the duration of events. It consists of bars along with the time axis. The Gantt chart is mostly used as a project management tool where each bar is a measure of a task in the project.
58. Explain how VLOOKUP works in Excel.
Ans: VLOOKUP is used when you need to find things in a table or a range by row. Following are the parameters of Vlookup:
Vlookup_value - The value to look for in the first column of a table
table - The table from where you can extract value
col_index - The column from which to extract value
range_lookup - [optional] TRUE = approximate match (default). FALSE = exact match
59. How will you print four random integers between 1 and 15 using NumPy?
Ans: To generate Random numbers using NumPy, we use the random.randint() functio
60. What is the difference between COUNT, COUNTA, COUNTBLANK, and COUNTIF in Excel?
Ans:
COUNT function returns the count of numeric cells in a range
COUNTA function counts the non-blank cells in a range
COUNTBLANK function gives the count of blank cells in a range
COUNTIF function returns the count of values by checking a given condition
Clinical Data Analyst Interview FAQs
1. How do you make a dropdown list in MS Excel?
Ans: Following are the steps to make a dropdown in MS Excel:
First, click on the Data tab that is present in the ribbon.
Under the Data Tools group, select Data Validation.
Then navigate to Settings > Allow > List.
Select the source you want to provide
2. What are the different ways to create a data frame in Pandas?
Ans: There are two ways to create a Pandas data frame.
By initializing a list
By initializing a dictionary
3. What is CT?
Ans: Clinical Trials or CT is a comparative examination of medication with reference to any patient’s medical condition.
4. What is Pre-clinical study?
Ans: The pre-clinical study is a process involving in-vitro study on animals. In this process, a range of doses is given to animals to test the toxicity and efficacy parameters.
5. What is patient file?
Ans: A patient’s file contains the medical and treatment history of the patient and demographic data. It can also have paper records or a combination of both computer and paper records.
6. What is an Audit Trail?
Ans: An Audit trail refers to the data that shows the study was carried out following the accepted protocols. It mentions who, why, and when the changes in the data take place
7. What is Masking or Blinding?
Ans: In masking or blinding, a researcher hides the details from the research subject, even if the research subject is receiving a placebo, investigational product, or current standard treatment.
8. What is Placebo?
Ans: Placebo refers to a powder, pill, or liquid that has no active ingredients. It helps researchers to isolate the study treatment effect.
Clinical Data Analyst Interview Tips
Research the company and its projects related to clinical data analysis.
Review the job description and tailor your answers accordingly.
Understand the basics of clinical data management and analysis.
Familiarize yourself with relevant software and tools such as SAS, R, and SQL.
Prepare examples of how you have successfully managed and analyzed clinical data in the past.
Brush up on your statistical knowledge and data visualization skills.
Be ready to discuss any challenges you have faced while working with clinical data and how you overcame them.
Prepare questions to ask the interviewer about the company and the role.
Practice explaining technical concepts to non-technical stakeholders.
Be ready to discuss the latest developments and trends in the clinical data analysis industry.
Be prepared to discuss the ethical considerations and regulatory requirements associated with clinical data analysis.
Show enthusiasm for the field and your passion for using data to improve healthcare outcomes.
Conclusion:
Above we have put together a comprehensive list of Clinical Data Analyst interview questions that will help you showcase your expertise in this field. Our questions cover a wide range of topics, including data collection, cleaning, analysis, and reporting. This blog also covers questions related to clinical trials and regulatory requirements if you missed it scroll again and check. Our team of experts has carefully curated these questions based on the latest trends in the industry and feedback from top employers. We hope with our Clinical Data Analyst Interview Questions guide, you'll be well-prepared to impress your interviewers and land your dream job in this exciting and growing field.
16:T5dce,
In today's fast-paced tech industry, staying relevant is critical. This is where Kotlin comes into play. Developed by JetBrains, Kotlin is a modern programming language that aims to make developers more productive, reduce errors, and improve code readability. Since Google officially endorsed Kotlin for Android development, many companies have adopted it for their projects. In fact, according to the 2021 Stack Overflow Developer Survey, Kotlin is the fourth most loved programming language and the fifth most wanted language by developers. Whether you're a seasoned developer or just starting, preparing for Kotlin interview questions can open up exciting opportunities for your career growth.
In this Blog, we have included the most recent and frequently asked Kotlin Interview Questions and Answers that have been further categorized as per the criteria mentioned above.
Ans: Kotlin is a statically-typed cross-platform programming language employed mainly for developing concise, compressed, expressive, and secure apps. JetBrains created it in the year 2011.
Q2) What are the main characteristics of Kotlin?
Ans: The essential aspects of Kotlin include extension functions, null security lambdas, coroutines and interoperability in Java.
Q3) Can you compare Java and Kotlin?
Ans: Kotlin can be compared with Java since it's a JVM-based programming language and considerably more straightforward to read than Java codes. Kotlin has many features that Java does not have, like extensions and null safety functions.
Q4) What are the most common data types in Kotlin?
Ans: The most common data types are Int, Long, Double, Float, Char, Boolean and String.
Q5) What is a nullable type?
Ans: A nullable type holds either a value belonging to a specific data type or an empty value. You use the question mark (?) following the data type to declare a nullable type.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Kotlin? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Kotlin Training to get Job Ready!
Q6) What is intelligent casting?
Ans: Intelligent cast feature lets the compiler automatically convert a variable into the non-nullable kind if it is able to establish that the variable cannot have a value that is null.
Q7) What is an extension function?
Ans: Extension functions are extensions included in an existing program without modifying the class. This lets you create new features to classes that you do not possess control over.
Q8) What is a lambda function?
Ans: A lambda function is a type of function that can be transferred as a variable and utilized as an argument to various functions. It is often utilized to construct functional-style codes.
Q9) What's a higher-order operation?
Ans: A higher-order function takes the parameters of another program and returns the function in return. This permits more flexibility and efficient code.
Q10) What are coroutines?
Ans: Coroutines can be used to write asynchronous code that is simpler to understand and maintain than traditional callback-based codes. Coroutines allow you to create code that appears as if it's synchronous, but actually, it runs asynchronously in the background.
Q11) What exactly is the Elvis operator?
Ans: Elvis operator (? :) is a shorthand method for null values. This returns the amount that is left if it's null and the opposite value in case that value is not null.
Q12) What is the best phone operator?
Ans: A safe caller (?.) is a shorthand term for null values. It lets you safely access methods or properties on an object without throwing an exception for null pointers when the object is not null.
Q13) How can you tell the difference between progression and progress?
Ans: An array is a series of values that spans two ends. A progression is a set of values with an exact interval between them.
Q14) What's the significance of the function?
Ans: The with function lets you perform multiple functions on an object without repeating the object's name. It accepts objects as parameters, and lambda is a block of code to run on that object.
Q15) What is the function of the application?
Ans: The function applies identically to the with function but will return the item it was used on instead of the outcome of lambda. This lets you connect several calls on the exact object.
Kotlin Coroutines Interview Questions
Q16) What is an object?
Ans: The term "object" refers to a singular instance of an object class. It is created lazy and is accessible by the object's name.
Q17) What is an inline feature?
Ans: Inline functions are functions that are expanded during compile time instead of invoked during execution. This improves performance in specific scenarios.
Q18) What is a type parameter that is reified?
Ans: A reified type parameter can be described as an element of the type parameter accessible during execution. It is usually employed along with inline functions to carry out type checks while running.
Q19) What are the higher-order extensions?
Ans: Higher-order extensions are a function that takes a function's parameter and returns the function in return. This lets you write more flexible and robust code.
Q20) What is a coroutine scope?
Ans: A coroutine scope is a means to manage coroutines as well as their lifecycles. It defines the context within which coroutines are started and also provides a method to end all coroutines within this context.
Q21) What is the difference between the launches() and the async() coroutines?
Ans: Launch() can be used to start an execution plan that is running in the background but does not produce a result, and the async() is utilized to initiate an execution that produces the Deferred object, which is used to get the output that the Coroutine has produced.
Q22) What is a flow?
Ans: The term "flow" refers to a set of asynchronous values that can be released quickly. It's like streams or is observable in different languages.
Q23) What is a suspend function?
Ans: The suspend feature is a feature which can be stopped and resumed at a later point. It is usually utilized along with coroutines in order to execute asynchronous tasks.
Q24) What is a property delegation?
Ans: A property delegate is a method to customize the behaviour of property accessors. It lets you define specific get behaviour and set it for the property.
Q25) What is a lazy property?
Ans: Lazy properties are only created at the time of first access. This improves performance in certain circumstances.
Q26) What is a delegated asset?
Ans: A delegated property has accessors provided by an object called a delegate. It lets you define specific behaviour for property accessors.
Q27) What is an extensive property?
Ans: A property extension adds to an existing object without altering the class. This lets you add additional properties to classes you have no control over.
Q28) What is the definition of an Elvis operator?
Ans: Elvis operator can be represented with the? Symbol. It is used to give an alternative value in the event the nullable variable is not null.
Q29) What is the best call-centre operator?
Ans: A safe call is represented with the?. Symbol. It can be employed to access the functions or properties of an object that is nullable. If the object is null, the expression returns null instead of throwing a Null Pointer Exception.
Q30) What is a lambda expression?
Ans: A lambda expression is a function not defined with an identifier and can be transferred around as variables. It is frequently utilized together with higher-order functions, as well as Kotlin's functional programming capabilities.
Kotlin Coding Interview Questions for Experienced
Q31) How can you tell the difference between lazy and lateinit initialization?
Ans: The lateinit method allows you to define a variable to be created later, whereas lazy initialization can be used to declare a variable that will be initialized upon first use. Lazy initialization is thread-safe, but lateinit isn't.
Q32) What is a suspend lambda?
Ans: A suspend lambda can be described as a lambda expression which is identified with the modifier suspend. It is a good choice with coroutines to perform Asynchronous operations.
Q33) What is an interface sealed?
Ans: A sealed interface is comparable to a closed class; however, it is only implemented by classes inside one file. It is typically employed to create a limited range of interfaces.
Q34) What's the definition of projection?
Ans: A projection can be used to define a generic parameter as being either covariant or invariant. This permits more flexibility and accurate type-checking.
Q35) What is a type of platform?
Ans: The term "platform type" refers to a class that isn't explicitly designated as non-nullable or nullable. It is commonly employed in conjunction using Java code that doesn't explicitly declare nullability.
Q36) What's the distinction between an infix call and regular function calls?
Ans: Function calls that use the infix modifier are called using the infix modifier and are named using the infix notation (e.g. FunctionName: b), and normal function calls utilize the standard syntax (e.g. functionName(a, b)). Infix function calls only be used with only one parameter.
Q37) What is a Typealias?
Ans: A typealias can be utilized to give a different name for a particular type. It is utilized to make code accessible and avoid lengthy declarations of types.
Q38) What is a suspendCoroutine?
Ans: suspendCoroutine is a function of higher order which is used to stop the current Coroutine and then start another one. It is typically utilized to perform low-level Coroutine operations.
Q39) What is the main difference between the primary and secondary constructors?
Ans: Primary constructors are defined within the header of the class and serve to define the characteristics that the class has. Secondary constructors can be defined in the body of the class and serve to offer additional methods to initialize the class.
Q40) What is a projection of typealias?
Ans: A typealias projection is a method to project an alias type onto a particular type parameter. It is a method to produce less readable and concise code.
Tips for preparing for Kotlin Interview
1. Research the company and their use of Kotlin in its tech stack.
2. Practice Kotlin coding challenges and algorithms to improve your problem-solving skills.
3. Review Kotlin syntax and its features to ensure familiarity during the interview.
4. Understand the differences between Kotlin and Java to highlight the benefits of using Kotlin.
5. Prepare examples of Kotlin projects you have worked on and be ready to discuss your contributions.
6. Familiarize yourself with popular Kotlin frameworks and their use cases.
7. Be prepared to explain the benefits of using Kotlin for Android development.
8. Review the Kotlin standard library and know how to use common functions.
9. Research common Kotlin interview questions and prepare responses.
10. Showcase your teamwork skills by discussing collaboration on Kotlin projects.
11. Be ready to discuss the benefits and drawbacks of using Kotlin versus other programming languages.
12. Stay up-to-date on Kotlin updates and new features to showcase your interest in the language.
Kotlin Interview Questions FAQs
1. What is the definition of the visibility modifier?
The visibility modifier can be used to establish a function's extent, class or variable. The four types of visibility are private, internal, protected and public.
2. What is an enclosed class?
An enclosed class is a type of class which can only be extended by classes that are part of this same directory. It is usually employed in conjunction with expressions to make a limited subclass.
3. What is a "companion object"?
The term "companion object" refers to an object connected to a specific class and can be utilized to record static methods as well as properties.
4. What is an information class?
The data class can be described as a type of class which is designed to hold information. It automatically generates useful functions like equals() as well as hashCode() and even toString() in accordance with its properties.
Conclusion:
Preparing for a Kotlin interview requires both understanding of the language's syntax and knowledge of its application in real-world scenarios. The Kotlin interview questions and answers provided in this blog serve as a valuable resource to help you prepare for your next Kotlin interview. It's important to take the time to familiarize yourself with the language's features, such as its null safety and extension functions, and to practice implementing them in code. Additionally, reviewing common Kotlin interview questions and practising answering them concisely and clearly is useful.
17:T9f9d,
Grunt is a powerful task runner for JavaScript-based projects that helps automate repetitive tasks such as minification, compilation, and testing. If you're looking to ace your Grunt interview, it's essential to prepare thoroughly by understanding the basics of Grunt and its various applications.
These 50 Grunt interview questions and answers will help you prepare effectively and perform well in Grunt interviews. Study them thoroughly to make a good impression and earn a 6-fig salary.
We have divided these Grunt interview questions into a few Categories:
1. How do you keep yourself updated about the new trends in the industry?
Ans: To keep myself informed of emerging trends in the industry, I frequently read specific industry blogs, sign up for newsletters and follow thought leaders via social platforms. I also attend industry-specific conferences and webinars, join online communities, and converse with colleagues and fellow professionals. I am also adamant about exploring the latest technologies and tools when I have time to learn more about their capabilities and limitations.
2. What is CORS?
Ans: CORS refers to Cross-Origin Resource Sharing. This is a safety feature used by web browsers that permits the resources displayed on a website page to be requested from another domain other than that from which the first resource was delivered. This is crucial for web applications that depend on APIs from different domains as it allows the web application to access data stored on third-party servers safely.
3. Can You Share Something Interesting About Yourself?
Ans: Something that I find interesting about myself is that I have a love for cooking and love experimenting with different food styles. It is an excellent way to relax as a coder after a long and tiring day.
4. Are you aware of design patterns?
Ans: Yes, I'm familiar with design patterns. Design patterns are reusable solutions to software design issues. Design patterns help in improving the efficiency, flexibility, and accuracy of code.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Grunt? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Grunt Training to get Job Ready!
5. What's the most recent thing that you have learned?
Ans: Most recently, I've learned the new JavaScript framework known as React. So long have I experienced it as an effective tool for creating interactive and responsive user interfaces, and I'm excited to explore its possibilities even more.
6. What is your favorite language and why?
Ans: My preferred programing language is Python due to its ease of use and ease of reading. It is easy to master and write and offers a variety of applications, ranging from web development to machine learning and data analysis.
7. What Is Something You Like to Do Outside of Work?
Ans: Outside work, I am fond of taking part in mindfulness and yoga. It helps me remain centred and focused. It also is an excellent method to lower stress levels and boost overall health.
8. What is Long Polling?
Ans: Long polling is a technique commonly used in web development to facilitate real-time communication between a client and a server. Instead of the client repeatedly requesting updates, the server keeps the request open until new data is available and then sends the updated information to the client. This method is faster and more efficient than traditional polling, resulting in a better user experience and conserving server resources.
9. What is the essential programming language for your job?
Ans: The programming language I need to know depends on the specific project and its requirements. But I am open to learning new things; however, I have found that JavaScript, Python, and Java are some of the commonly required languages, and I am working on all of them.
10. Describe a time when you made a blunder while working on a project. How did you rectify it?
Ans: In a previous project, I identified an error in the code that led to issues in further production. I immediately started working on it closely with my team to fix the problem. We have implemented additional quality assurance and testing measures to avoid similar problems from happening again.
11. What Keeps You Motivated?
Ans: What keeps me going most is tackling complicated problems, as well as the satisfaction of knowing that my work positively affects other people. I also appreciate working with a friendly and cooperative team who shares my enthusiasm for excellence and innovation.
12. What Is a Full-Stack Developer?
Ans: A full-stack developer has the expertise and expertise to work on the front end and the back end of a web-based application. This includes knowledge of languages like HTML, CSS, and JavaScript for the front end and languages like Python, Ruby, or PHP for the back end. Full-stack developers can manage every aspect of web development, including user interfaces, server-side programming, and the management of databases.
13. What Are Your Predominant Strengths?
Ans: My strengths are my solid problem-solving skills, focus on detail, and vital communication skills. I'm also an active participant in teams who appreciates working in a team and is always willing to go that further to guarantee the project's success.
14. Tell Me Something That Is Not on Your Resume.
Ans: One thing that needs to be added to my list is that I am a frequent traveler and have been to several nations around the globe. Traveling is an excellent method to broaden one's horizons and better understand other living styles and cultures. It also allows me to disconnect from work and recharge my batteries.
15. What Are Your Professional Goals?
Ans: My professional goals are to continue to improve and learn as an individual developer, assuming different responsibilities and challenges and contributing to the business's growth. I am also interested in opportunities to impart my knowledge to others.
16. Where Do You See Yourself in Five Years?
Ans: In five years, I envision myself as an experienced developer who will take the reins of leadership and assist in shaping what direction of the business. I would like to have contributed to numerous successful projects and be an acknowledged developer. I also wish to continue pursuing my professional and personal development by learning and exploring new trends and technologies.
Intermediate Grunt Interview Questions
17. What coding projects are you currently working on?
Ans: Currently, I am developing a web application that manages financial transactions. It involves implementing user authentication, data visualization, and analysis using libraries and frameworks such as React, Node.js, and MongoDB.
18. What Programming Languages Are You Comfortable Working With?
Ans: Since I am well versed in several programming languages like Python, JavaScript, Java, and C++, they would be fine.
19. Do You Prefer to Work on Your Own or as Part of a Team?
Ans: Both individual work and teamwork are essential in software development. However, I lean more towards team collaboration as it promotes knowledge sharing, creativity, and efficient problem-solving.
20. Why Are You Leaving Your Current Company?
Ans: I am looking for new challenges and opportunities for personal and professional growth, which my current company cannot provide.
21. How do you stay abreast of developments in the technology industry?
Ans: I stay updated with the latest developments by attending industry events, subscribing to technology blogs and newsletters, participating in online communities, and continuous learning and training.
22. Why should we hire You?
Ans: Since I have all the qualifications mentioned in the Job Description and have worked on several projects, my experience and skill set are the perfect fit for this job. Also, I am looking for new challenges and opportunities for growth and adding value to myself and the company.
23. What coding projects are you currently working on?
Ans: I am working on a web application for managing financial transactions using React, Node.js, and MongoDB.
24. What Is the Importance of a Full-Stack Developer?
Ans: Full-Stack Developers is an essential characters in software development as they possess knowledge and skills in both front-end and back-end technologies. They develop and maintain web applications and work on designing the user interface, implementing business logic, and managing databases.
25. What is the main difference between GraphQL and REST?
Ans: GraphQL provides a flexible and efficient way of querying and retrieving data from a server by allowing the client to specify the data they need and REST uses a predefined set of endpoints to expose server resources to clients.
26. What is Full Stack development?
Ans: Full Stack development refers to the development of web applications that involve all application layers, including the front-end, back-end, database, and server-side scripting.
27. Name a few Full Stack developer tools.
Ans: Some of the commonly used Full Stack developer tools include Angular, Grunt, React, Node.js, Express, MongoDB, MySQL, and Git.
28. To develop a project from scratch, what technologies and languages would you need or what skills a full-stack developer should have?
Ans: To develop a project from scratch, a Full Stack Developer would need to have knowledge and skills in front-end technologies such as HTML, CSS, and JavaScript, back-end technologies such as Node.js or Ruby on Rails, database management systems such as MySQL or MongoDB, and server-side scriptings such as PHP or Python.
29. What is Callback Hell?
Ans: Callback Hell is when nested callbacks become challenging to read and maintain in asynchronous programming. It can be mitigated by using asynchronous programming techniques such as Promises, async/await or using libraries such as RxJS.
30. List the ways to improve your website load time and performance.
Ans: Some ways to improve website load time and performance include optimizing images and videos, minifying and compressing files, using a content delivery network (CDN), reducing server response time, enabling caching, and optimizing website code.
31. What are the latest trends in Full Stack Development? Also, how do you keep yourself updated about the new trends in the industry?
Ans: The latest trends in Full Stack development include serverless architecture, microservices, containerization, and artificial intelligence. To stay updated about new trends, I participate in online communities, attend conferences and workshops, subscribe to technology blogs and newsletters, and continuously learn and explore new tools and technologies.
Advanced Grunt Interview Questions for Experienced
32. Name a few ways to optimize a website to be as efficient and scalable as possible.
Ans: To optimize a website for efficiency and scalability, there are several ways:
Minimize HTTP requests by reducing the number of resources needed to load the website
To reduce the load time use a Content Delivery Network
Reduce the file size or image and other elements.
To enhance the speed and reduce load time use caching techniques
To improve the response time work on the backend database
Implement server-side and client-side
Use a lightweight, responsive design.
33. What do Full Stack Web Developers do?
Ans: Full Stack Web Developers work on developing and maintaining websites and web applications. They take care of both front-end and back-end. They use their expertise in programming languages, frameworks, and designing tools to meet clients' requirements.
34. What skills do you need to be a full-stack developer?
Ans: Full Stack Developers must be proficient in the latest programming languages, such as HTML, CSS, JavaScript, and server-side languages, such as Java, Python, Ruby, or PHP and have experience working with databases and have knowledge of SQL or NoSQL and various frameworks, libraries, and tools for web development, such as React, Angular, Node.js, and Express.js. In addition, they should have excellent problem-solving, communication, and collaboration skills.
35. What do you mean by referential transparency in functional programming?
Ans: Referential transparency is functional programming that refers to the ability to replace an expression with its corresponding value without changing the program's behaviour. This means a function should return the same output for a given input, regardless of where it is called in the program.
36. What are MVC and MVP, and how is MVC different from MVP?
Ans: MVC and MVP are architectural patterns used in software development. MVC stands for Model-View-Controller, while MVP stands for Model-View-Presenter. MVC and MVP have similar architectures but differ in handling user input and data flow. MVC separates the application into three components: the model (data), the view (user interface), and the controller (handles user input).
37. What is referential transparency in functional programming?
Ans: Referential transparency refers to the ability to replace an expression with its corresponding value without changing the behaviour of the program, the function should return the same output for a given input, regardless of where it is called in the program.
38. Explain semantic HTML.
Ans: Semantic HTML is used to add value to the content on a web page. For example, <nav> tag is used to define a navigation menu on a web page instead of a <div> tag. Semantic HTML makes it easier for search engines to understand the content of a web page, making it more accessible for users with disabilities.
40. How Hard Is It To Become a Full-Stack Developer?
Ans: Becoming a full-stack developer is a challenging task that requires a combination of technical and non-technical skills. It requires a solid foundation in multiple programming languages, web development frameworks, databases, and front-end technologies. Moreover, full-stack developers need to have a good understanding of software development principles and design patterns. They should also be able to manage time and work under pressure while maintaining high quality. However, with dedication, hard work, and constant learning, anyone can become a successful full-stack developer.
41. List Some Common Ways To Reduce the Load Time of a Web Application.
Ans: There are several ways to reduce the load time of a web application, such as:
Optimizing images and using the correct image format
Minimizing HTTP requests
Using a Content Delivery Network (CDN)
Caching frequently used data
Reducing server response time
Using compression techniques like Gzip
Minimizing CSS and JavaScript files
Combining CSS and JavaScript files
Minimizing redirects
42. What Are the Differences Between Server-Side Scripting and Client-Side Scripting?
Ans: Server-side scripting is executed on the server before the page is sent to the client's browser. It generates dynamic content based on user input, database queries, or external APIs. Examples of server-side scripting languages are PHP, Python, Ruby, and Java.
Client-side scripting, on the other hand, is executed in the browser after the page has been downloaded. It manipulates the HTML document and allows dynamic user interaction without a page refresh. Examples of client-side scripting languages are JavaScript, HTML5, and CSS3.
43. What do you mean by Temporal Dead Zone in ES6?
Ans: Temporal Dead Zone (TDZ) is a behavior introduced in ES6 that occurs when trying to access a variable declared using the let or const keyword before it has been initialized. In this case, a runtime error will be thrown. This is different from variables declared using var, which can be accessed before they are initialized but will return an undefined value.
44. What do you mean by referential transparency in functional programming?
Ans: Referential transparency is a property of functions in functional programming, where a function always returns the same output for the same input without causing any side effects. In other words, it is a guarantee that a function can be replaced with its return value without affecting the correctness of the program. This property makes it easier to reason about code and helps to ensure that functions are composable and reusable.
45. Why should arrow functions not be used in ES6?
Ans: Arrow functions have some limitations, such as not being able to bind this keyword, not supporting the arguments object, and not being able to use the new keyword to create objects. Therefore, they should not be used in certain situations where these limitations would cause issues. However, in most cases, arrow functions can be used effectively and are a concise and readable way to write functions.
46. What are the different methods of session management in Servlet?
Ans: Session management is a crucial aspect of web development, and it involves maintaining the state of user interactions with the application. In Java Servlets, there are three main methods of session management:
Cookies: A small file stored on the user's machine to store session information.
URL Rewriting: Appending a unique identifier to the URL to maintain session information.
Hidden Form Fields: A form field is used to store session information.
47. What is double brace initialization in Java, and where is it used?
Ans: Double brace initialization is a Java language feature that concisely allows for the creation and initialization of nested data structures. It involves using two sets of braces to create an anonymous inner class and initializing its instance variables. Double brace initialization is used when creating a collection of objects or a Map with initial values.
48. What is the SOLID principle in Java?
Ans: SOLID is an acronym for a set that stands for the five principles: Single Responsibility Principle, Open-Closed Principle, Liskov Substitution Principle, Interface Segregation Principle, and Dependency Inversion Principle. The SOLID principles help developers create modular, testable, and easy-to-maintain code.
49. What is CORS in MVC, and how it works?
Ans: Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) is a security mechanism that allows or restricts access to resources on a web page from different origins. In the context of MVC, CORS is used to manage the communication between different servers and domains. When a client requests a resource from a different domain, the server may need to send an Access-Control-Allow-Origin header in its response to indicate that the resource is accessible from the client domain. This helps prevent unauthorized access to resources and improves the security of web applications.
Frequently Asked Questions for Grunt Interview
1. What is Grunt?
Ans: Grunt is a JavaScript task runner that helps automate repetitive actions, including minification, unit testing, compilation, etc.
2. What are the benefits of using Grunt in a project?
Ans: Benefits of Grunt in the project include:
Increase in productivity
Enhance consistency
Improve code quality
Ease to automation
Reduce time and cost
3. How do you install Grunt?
Ans: To install Grunt, you must first install Node.js and Node Package Manager ( npm).
Then run the command in the command prompt: 'npm install -grunt-cli.'
4. How do you create a Gruntfile?
Gruntfiles can be created with the file name 'Gruntfile.js' in the project's root directory.
5. What are some popular Grunt plugins?
Ans: These are some popular Grunt plugins:
'grunt-contrib-uglify' – To minifying Js Files
'grunt-contrib-watch' – To track file changes
'grunt-contrib-sass' – To compile Saas file to CSS.
6. How do you run a Grunt task?
Ans: Command - 'grunt' followed by the task name is used to run the Grunt Task.
Suppose the file name is xyz. Syntax: grunt xyz
7. Can you explain the difference between Grunt and Gulp?
The significant difference between Grunt and Gulp is -
Grunt uses configuration files, whereas Gulp uses a code-baes approach – streams to work on the project.
8. How do you debug a Grunt task?
Ans: Command: '—debug' is used to debut the Grunt task.
9. Can you customize Grunt tasks?
Ans: Yes, you can customize Grunt tasks.
10. How do you automate repetitive tasks using Grunt?
Ans: To automate repetitive tasks using Grunt, you can create tasks that perform specific actions such as minifying files, running tests, or deploying your code. These tasks can be run automatically using a task runner like Grunt.
Tips to prepare for Grunt Interview
Before the interview, make sure you have a good understanding of Grunt and its features.
Make sure you understand the job requirements and responsibilities and be prepared to explain how your skills and experience align with them.
Practice writing code using Grunt, and be prepared to demonstrate your skills during the interview.
Grunt is built using JavaScript, so it's essential to have a strong foundation in the language and a clear Java concept.
Read through the Grunt documentation to better understand how it works and how to use it effectively.
Revise technical questions on Grunt, JavaScript, and related technologies.
Ensure you know related tools like Node.js, npm, and Git.
Be prepared to demonstrate your problem-solving skills by solving coding challenges or answering hypothetical questions.
Be confident and calm, and avoid getting confused as there are similar technologies the interview may need to be clarified to check your proficiency.
Be professional, keep the interview communicative, and be prepared to discuss your experience, work history, career goals, and expectations.
Conclusion
Preparing for a Grunt interview can be challenging, but studying these 50 most common Grunt Interview Questions and Answers can significantly increase your chances of success. A career as a Grunt can offer a good income, with salaries in the US ranging from $20,640 to $61,070 and a median salary of $31,910. You can excel in this profession and enjoy a successful career with the right skills and knowledge. With these Grunt Interview Questions, you'll be able to learn about the basics of Grunt, how to configure and run Grunt tasks, how to use Grunt plugins, and much more. Studying these questions lets you showcase your knowledge and skills during your Grunt interview.
18:Ta184,
Today's tech-driven world calls for more and more Full Stack Development. Full stack development reduces the project's cost and helps understand a working well with one point of contact: the Full stack developer. A Full Stack Developer is responsible for developing both front-end and back-end aspects of web applications, including user interfaces to server-side APIs. As more and more companies move towards digital transformation, the demand for skilled Full Stack Developers has been increasing rapidly.
For professionals aspiring to become Full Stack developers, it is essential to prepare for Full Stack Developer Interview Questions. The interview process can be challenging as full-stack development emerges. This article will provide an overview of some of the most common Full Stack Developer interview questions and offer tips on preparing for them.
We have divided these interview Questions into a few categories:
Full Stack Developer Interview Questions for Freshers
Q1) Name a few Full Stack Developer tools.
Ans: Popular Full Stack Developer tools include Visual Studio Code, Sublime Text, Atom, WebStorm, GitHub, GitLab, JIRA, and Trello.
Q2) What is Full Stack Development?
Ans: Full Stack Development is creating and maintaining comprehensive web applications from start to finish, which involves both front-end and back-end development activities such as designing, coding, testing, and deployment.
Q3) What do Full Stack Web Developers do?
Ans: Full Stack Web Developers are responsible for creating both front-end and back-end applications. They design, develop, and implement web applications using front-end languages like HTML, CSS, and JavaScript and back-end languages like Node.js, PHP, Python, Ruby on Rails, or Java.
Q4) What skills do you need to be a full-stack developer?
Ans: Full-stack developers require expertise in front-end technologies like HTML, CSS, JavaScript, and jQuery, as well as back-end technologies like Node.js, PHP, Python, Ruby on Rails, or Java. Additionally, they should have knowledge of databases, server architecture, and API design.
Do you want to enrich your career by learning Full Stack? Then Enroll in "Full Stack Training", this course will help you to boost your career.
Q5) Explain pair programming.
Ans: Pair programming is a website/software development technique in which two developers collaborate on the same task, with one person typing and the other reviewing code. This helps identify errors and bugs early in the development cycle and encourages knowledge sharing and collaboration.
Q6) What is CORS?
Ans: CORS (Cross-Origin Resource Sharing) is a mechanism that enables resources from different domains to be requested on a web page. This helps protect user data from theft or misuse by only allowing requests from approved domains.
Q7) What is Inversion of Control (IoC)?
Ans: Inversion of Control (IoC) is a design pattern in which the control of program flow is inverted from its main program to another framework or container. This leads to more modular and scalable code and easier testing and maintenance tasks.
Q8) What is Dependency Injection?
Ans: Dependency Injection is a software design pattern in which the dependencies of a class are imported from an external source instead of being created within it. This helps reduce coupling and increase modularity within the codebase.
Q9) What is multithreading, and how is it, user?
Multithreading is a programming technique in which multiple threads execute distinct parts of a program simultaneously. This can improve the performance and responsiveness of the application but requires careful management to avoid issues like race conditions or deadlocks.
Q10) What is continuous Integration?
Ans: Continuous Integration is a software development practice where developers regularly merge their code modifications into an external repository and then automatically build and test those changes to guarantee they do not disrupt the overall system.
Q11) How is GraphQL different from Rest?
Ans: GraphQL is a query language and runtime that allows clients to specify the required data, then returns that data in one response. This differs from Rest, which often needs multiple requests to different endpoints to gather the desired information.
Q12) List the ways to improve your website load time and performance.
Ans: Optimizing website load time and performance includes optimizing images, minimizing HTTP requests, compressing files, using a content delivery network (CDN), caching, and decreasing server response time.
Q13) What is the Observer pattern?
Ans: The Observer pattern is a design pattern in which an object, called the subject, keeps track of its dependents (observers), and notifies them automatically of any state changes through method calls.
Q14) What is the difference between a full-stack engineer and a full-stack developer?
Ans: Full Stack Engineers typically possess more expertise and experience in one area of Full Stack Development, such as front-end, back-end, or database management; on the other hand, Full Stack Developers must possess knowledge across all phases of Full Stack Development.
Q15) What is polling?
Ans: Polling is a programming technique wherein a program periodically checks for updates or modifications to a resource rather than waiting for that resource to notify it of these alterations.
Q16) What is the difference between GET and POST?
Ans: GET, and POST are two methods used to transfer data between a client and server. GET requests to retrieve information from the server, while POST requests submit data back to it for processing by the server.
Q17) Explain the inversion of control.
Ans: Inversion of Control (IoC) is a design pattern in software engineering where control over an application's flow of execution is inverted - giving power to a higher-level framework rather than the developer. In simpler terms, this means transferring program control to an external component or framework which manages its lifecycle.
Q18) What do you mean by referential transparency in functional programming?
Ans: Referential transparency is a property of functional programming where output solely depends on its inputs and has no side effects. This ensures that functions always return the same result for any given set of inputs without altering external state or variables.
Q19) Can You Reduce the Load Time for a Web Application?
Ans: Yes, we can reduce the web application loading time. We can do this by optimizing images and other media files, minimizing HTTP requests, compressing CSS and JavaScript code, using a content delivery network (CDN), and caching data.
Q20) What is an event loop in Node.js?
Ans: The event loop refers to a core concept in Node.js. It handles code execution without blocking. It continuously checks for new events in an event queue and executes them one at a time. It allows the program to keep running while waiting for I/O operations to complete. The event loop will enable Node.js to handle large numbers of concurrent connections without blocking the main thread, leading to more efficient and scalable applications.
Full Stack Interview Questions and Answers
Q21) What is the difference between abstract and interface?
Ans: Abstract classes and interfaces in object-oriented programming differ because abstract types can contain method implementations, while interfaces do not. Abstract classes provide a way to define common behaviours and properties that subclasses can inherit and extend; on the other hand, interfaces define an implementation contract that all classes must fulfil; they do not provide any actual implementation.
Q22) What's the difference between "resting" and "normalizing" CSS?
Ans: "Resting" refers to using CSS to reverse any default styles the browser applies, usually done at the start of a stylesheet. This helps guarantee consistency across different browsers and devices for websites. Similarly, "Normalizing" uses CSS standards that standardize default styles applied by other browsers, so they appear uniform across platforms.
Q23) How can you prevent a bot from scraping a publicly accessible API?
Ans: To prevent bots from scraping a publicly accessible API, you can implement authentication and rate limiting. Authentication ensures only authorized users can access the API, while rate limiting limits how many requests can be made within a specific timeframe.
Q24) What is a callback in JavaScript?
In JavaScript, a callback is an object passed as an argument to another function that gets invoked when certain events or conditions arise. Callbacks are commonly employed in asynchronous programming scenarios where one function must wait for results before continuing.
Q25) What is RESTful API?
Ans: RESTful API, also known as Representational State Transfer Application Programming Interface, is an architectural style for creating web services that utilize HTTP requests to retrieve, post, put, and delete data. RESTful APIs are designed for scalability and flexibility while being easy to maintain; they can be utilized to access data from various sources.
Q26) What do you mean by data attributes?
Ans: Data attributes in HTML are custom attributes that can be added to elements to store additional data. They're commonly used as input for scripts or stylesheets and can be accessed using JavaScript or CSS.
Q27) How is rolling deployment different from blue-green deployment?
Ans: Rolling deployment is a deployment strategy in which new code is incrementally released to a select group of servers, then expanded as it undergoes testing and verification. Blue-green deployment, on the other hand, involves running two distinct environments (a "blue" environment and a "green"), with traffic switching between them as needed.
Q28) What does ACID mean in Database systems?
Ans: ACID, otherwise known as Atomicity, Consistency, Isolation, and Durability, is an acronym for Atomicity, Consistency, Isolation, and Durability. These properties guarantee transactions are completed reliably and consistently within databases.
Q29) What is referential transparency?
Ans: Referential transparency is a property of functions in functional programming that ensures a function's return value is solely determined by its input values, independent of other variables such as the program's state or time of day.
Q30) What is an application server?
Ans: An application server is a software platform that offers services and tools for developing, deploying, and managing web-based applications. It usually supports technologies like databases, web servers, and middleware to provide a standardized environment for running web applications.
Q31) What are the differences between Server-side scripting and Client-side Scripting?
Ans: Server-side scripting refers to running scripts on the server to generate dynamic web pages. In contrast, client-side scripting utilizes scripts running within a user's web browser to enhance their experience.
Q32) What do you mean by observer pattern?
Ans: The observer pattern is a design pattern in which an object, called the subject, maintains a list of dependents (observers), and notifies them automatically of any changes to its state.
Q33) What are the types of design patterns?
Ans: Design patterns come in many different forms, such as creational (Singleton and Factory), structural (Adapter and Decorator), and behavioral (Observer and Strategy).
Q34) What's the difference between normalization and denormalization?
Ans: Normalization is organizing data in a database to reduce redundancy and enhance data integrity, while denormalization deliberately introduces redundancy for improved read performance in specific scenarios. Normalization involves breaking up large tables into smaller ones with established relationships between them; on the other hand, denormalization involves combining tables to minimize joins and enhance performance.
Q35) Name a few ways to optimize a website to be as efficient and scalable as possible.
Ans: Some ways to optimize a website for efficiency and scalability include minimizing HTTP requests, optimizing images and other media, using caching/compression, minifying CSS/JScript files, using a content delivery network (CDN), and server-side and client-side caching.
Q36) What are some of the uses of Docker?
Ans: Docker is a containerization platform that enables developers to package and deploy applications in an easily shared and reproducible manner, deploy applications in the cloud environment, and simplify deployment by packaging all required files into one container.
Q37) Which language is the most preferred by full-stack developers?
Ans: When it comes to full-stack development, the preferred language may vary depending on the individual developer and project requirements. Popular choices include JavaScript, Python, and Ruby.
Q38) Do you know how to prevent a bit from scraping your publicly accessible API?
Ans: To prevent bots from scraping publicly accessible APIs, implement authentication and rate limiting, monitor API usage and block suspicious activity, use CAPTCHA or other human verification techniques, and block IP addresses or ranges associated with bots.
Q39) Why should arrow functions not be used on ES6?
Ans: Arrow functions in ES6 provide a concise syntax for writing functions but may only be suitable in some circumstances. One reason to avoid using arrow functions is that they lack their bindings to the "this" keyword, leading to unexpected behavior and bugs in specific scenarios. Furthermore, arrow functions cannot be used as constructors and lack access to the "arguments" object, potentially restricting their flexibility in specific systems.
Java Full Stack Developer Interview Questions for Experienced
Q40) Explain the benefits and drawbacks of using use strict.
Ans: Benefits and disadvantages of using "use strict":
Benefits:
It enforces stricter rules in JavaScript, which helps avoid common mistakes and improve code quality.
It prevents the use of undeclared variables, which helps catch typos and other errors early.
It disables certain features that can cause unexpected behavior, such as automatically creating global variables.
Drawbacks:
It may break existing code that relies on specific features that are disabled by "use strict."
It may increase the code needed to perform certain operations, such as creating a new object or function.
It may make code harder to read and understand for developers who need to become more familiar with the stricter rules.
What are the latest trends in Full Stack Development?
Latest trends in Full Stack Development:
Serverless architecture and Functions-as-a-Service (FaaS)
Microservices and container integration with Docker and Kubernetes
Progressive Web Apps (PWAs) and Single Page Applications (SPAs) using modern front-end frameworks like React, Vue, and Angular
AI and Machine Learning Integration in web applications
Low-code and no-code development platforms
Cross-platform mobile development using frameworks like React Native and Flutter
Integration with blockchain technology
Q41) Explain how Pair Programming works. Are you compatible with this?
Ans: Yes, I am compatible with working in a pair programming model. Pair programming is a technique in which two developers work together on the same task, sharing one computer and collaborating in real-time. One developer called the "driver" writes the code while the other developer, called the "navigator," reviews the code, asks questions, and provides feedback. The tasks can be switched at any moment. The benefits of pair programming include improved code quality, knowledge sharing, faster problem-solving, and increased team morale.
Q42) To develop a project from scratch, what technologies and language would you need, or what skills a full-stack developer should have?
Ans: Technologies and skills needed to develop a project from scratch as a full-stack developer:
Front-end languages: HTML, CSS, JavaScript
Front-end frameworks and libraries: React, Angular, Vue, Bootstrap, jQuery
Other skills: understanding of data structures and algorithms, knowledge of design patterns, ability to write clean and maintainable code, communication skills, and project management skills.
Q43) What is Callback Hell?
Ans: Callback Hell is a term that describes the problem of deeply nested callbacks in asynchronous JavaScript code. It occurs when multiple asynchronous functions are called one after another, and each position requires the result of the previous function as an input. This results in a "pyramid" of nested callbacks, making the code difficult to read and maintain. One way to avoid callback hell is to use Promises or async/await syntax, which makes asynchronous code more readable and less error-prone.
Q44) What do you mean by MEAN Stack?
Ans: MEAN Stack: MEAN Stack is a web development technology stack that consists of four main components:
MongoDB: This stores data in a document-based format
Express.js: a web application framework for Node.js that provides features like routing and middleware
Angular: a front-end framework for building Single Page Applications (SPAs)
Node.js: a server-side JavaScript runtime environment that executes JavaScript code outside of a web browser The combination of these four components allows developers to build modern, scalable, and efficient web applications.
Q45) What differentiates MVC (Model View Controller) from MVP (Model View Presenter)?
Ans: In MVC architecture, the Controller mediates the communication between the View and Model components. The View renders the user interface, while the Model stores the data and logic. MVP is similar to MVC, but instead of a Controller, the Presenter manages the communication between the View and Model. The Presenter retrieves the data from the Model and updates the View accordingly. The key difference between MVC and MVP is that in MVP, the View communicates with the Presenter instead of the Controller, making it an easier to unit test the components.
Q46) What do you mean by Temporal Dead Zone in ES6?
Ans: In ES6, the Temporal Dead Zone (TDZ) is a behavior that occurs when using the let and const keywords for variable declaration. The TDZ is the period between the start of the scope and the point where a variable is declared. Any attempt to access the variable during this time will result in a ReferenceError. The TDZ ensures that variables are not accessed before they are declared, promoting better coding practices.
Q47) Can the load time of a web application be decreased?
Ans: Yes, there are several ways to decrease the load time of a web application, including:
Minimizing HTTP requests by combining multiple files into a single file.
Compressing files to reduce their size.
Caching frequently used files to avoid unnecessary server requests.
Optimizing images to reduce their file size.
Using a content delivery network (CDN) to distribute files to servers closer to the user.
Reducing the number of plugins and third-party scripts loaded on a page.
Using asynchronous loading for scripts and stylesheets to improve page load time.
Q48) What is event bubbling and capturing in JavaScript?
Ans: Event bubbling and capturing are two mechanisms in JavaScript for handling events on a webpage. Event bubbling occurs when an event is triggered on a child element, propagating through its ancestors in the DOM tree until it reaches the root element. On the other hand, event capturing occurs when an event is triggered on the root element and then propagated down through its descendants until it reaches the target element. Both mechanisms help handle events on a webpage, and the appropriate one depends on the specific use case.
Full Stack Developer FAQs
Q1) How do I prepare for a full-stack developer interview?
Ans: Preparing for a full-stack developer interview may become challenging if you need to know the right way. Start with revising your basics and practicing coding. Polish your technical skill and go through the previously asked questions about full-stack development. Also, look for the tips mentioned above.
Q2) What are the basic skills required for a full-stack developer?
Ans: To become full-stack developer, basic skills required for a full-stack developer include:
Proficiency in front-end technologies such as HTML, CSS, JavaScript, and a front-end framework like React or Angular.
Knowledge of back-end technologies like Node.js, Java, or Python and a database like MySQL or MongoDB.
Familiarity with version control systems like Git, and experience working with APIs, web services, and cloud computing is also beneficial.
Q3) Is 3 months enough for a full-stack developer?
Ans: Yes, 3 months are enough for a full-stack developer. In some cases, if you are an extreme beginner, it may take longer.
Q4) How to crack a full-stack Java developer Interview?
Ans: The three main things you must consider to crack full stack Java developer interview:
Clear your basics and learn them as much as possible.
Practice coding.
Work on your soft skills equally.
Q5) Can a fresher be a full-stack developer?
Ans: Yes, a fresher can become a full-stack developer with the proper education, training, and dedication.
Tips to prepare for Full Stack Developer Interview
Do your homework without fail - research the company.
Recheck the job description and your resume to remember what you have applied for.
Brush up on your technical skills, including programming languages, databases, and web development frameworks.
Practice coding exercises and solving technical problems
Do hands-on practice of your skills to complete the Interview.
Study common Full Stack Developer interview questions and learn the answers.
Formally prepare your queries to have good communication with the Interview.
Showcase your ability to work collaboratively with other team members, including designers, project managers, and developers.
Show enthusiasm and passion for your work and the field of web development.
Be yourself and answer straight, dress professionally, and arrive on time for your Interview.
Brush up your soft skills as well.
Conclusion:
Since the demand for Full Stack Developers is increasing extensively, the need and opportunity for Full Stack Developers with continue to grow. To get a job with 6 fig salary, it is crucial to crack an interview with some fortune organization. These 50 full-stack interview questions list will help you prepare for the same. Getting well-versed with the terms and market aspects of full-stack development is necessary to place yourself as a successful full-stack developer. The above mention tips come along to assist in setting up your mind and give you support to perform better.
19:T78a6,
Couchbase is a premier NoSQL database platform, offering organizations a flexible and scalable solution for their modern application needs. Its robust query language integrated caching, and support for multiple data models make Couchbase a top choice for building high-performance and always-on applications. With its focus on staying at the forefront of technological advancements, Couchbase continues to innovate and deliver new features and capabilities to its users. Whether you're a seasoned developer or just starting out, this database platform offers everything you need to build and run data-driven applications.
Ans: Couchbase is a NoSQL database that provides a high-performance, scalable, and flexible data management solution. It is designed for both traditional and cloud-native applications and supports multiple data models, including document, key-value, and graph.
Q2) What are the key features of Couchbase?
Ans: Key features of Couchbase include multi-model data management, flexible indexing, powerful query capabilities, strong data durability, and robust security features. Additionally, Couchbase provides support for distributed architectures, horizontal scalability, and high performance.
Q3) How does Couchbase differ from other NoSQL databases?
Ans: Couchbase differs from other NoSQL databases in several ways, including its multi-model data management capabilities, its flexible query language (N1QL), and its built-in caching layer (Couchbase Server). Additionally, Couchbase provides strong data durability and robust security features, making it a suitable choice for mission-critical applications.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of CouchBase? Enroll in Instructor-Led live CouchBase Training to get Job Ready!
Q4) Can you explain the N1QL query language in Couchbase?
Ans: N1QL is the query language for Couchbase, which allows for flexible and powerful querying of data stored in the database. N1QLprovides a familiar SQL-like syntax, making it easy for developers to learn, while also providing advanced features like join operations and secondary indexing.
Q5) What is the role of the Couchbase Server in the Couchbase architecture?
Ans: The Couchbase Server is the core component of the Couchbase architecture, providing the underlying database management system. The Couchbase Server is responsible for storing and retrieving data, managing indexes, and processing queries. Additionally, the Couchbase Server provides a caching layer to improve performance, as well as a distributed architecture for scalability and high availability.
Q6) What is the Couchbase Data Model?
Ans: The Couchbase Data Model is a multi-model data management solution, which allows developers to store and manage different types of data, including documents, key-value pairs, and graph data, within the same database. This flexible data model makes it easy to adapt to changing application requirements and provides a consistent data management solution across all data types.
Q7) What is a document in Couchbase?
Ans: A document in Couchbase is a unit of data that can be stored and retrieved in the database. Documents in Couchbase are stored in a JSON format, which allows for flexible and dynamic data structures.
Q8) How does Couchbase ensure data durability?
Ans: Couchbase ensures data durability through its use of data replication, which provides multiple copies of data stored across multiple nodes in the cluster. In the event of a node failure, the data is automatically recovered from one of the other replicas, ensuring that the data is always available.
Q9) How does Couchbase support horizontal scalability?
Ans: Couchbase supports horizontal scalability by allowing the addition of new nodes to the cluster as the volume of data and the number of users increase. The Couchbase cluster automatically distributes the data across the nodes, providing a scalable and highly available solution.
Q10) What is the role of the Couchbase SDK in the Couchbase architecture?
Ans: The Couchbase SDK provides a high-level API for accessing and manipulating data stored in the Couchbase database. The SDK abstracts the underlying database management system and provides a consistent programming interface across multiple programming languages, making it easy to develop and deploy applications that use Couchbase.
Q11) Can you explain the Couchbase caching layer?
Ans: The Couchbase caching layer is a built-in component of the Couchbase Server that improves the performance of the database by caching frequently accessed data in memory. This reduces the latency and I/O overhead associated with accessing the data from disk, improving the overall performance of the database.
Q12) What is the Couchbase Server Architecture?
Ans: The Couchbase Server Architecture is a distributed architecture that provides high performance, scalability, and high availability. The architecture is based on a cluster of nodes, where each node runs a copy of the Couchbase Server software, providing a highly available and scalable solution.
Q13) What is the difference between Couchbase and MongoDB?
Ans: Couchbase and MongoDB are both NoSQL databases, but there are some key differences between the two. Couchbase provides a multi-model data management solution and has a built-in caching layer, while MongoDB is a document-oriented database that relies on an external caching layer. Additionally, Couchbase provides a flexible query language (N1QL) while MongoDB uses the MongoDB Query Language.
Ans: Couchbase ensures data consistency through its use of data replication and consistency protocols. The data is automatically synchronized between replicas, and the consistency protocols ensure that the data is always up-to-date and consistent across the cluster.
Q15) What is the role of the Couchbase Cluster Manager in the Couchbase architecture?
Ans: The Couchbase Cluster Manager is a component of the Couchbase architecture that provides centralized management and monitoring of the Couchbase cluster. The Cluster Manager provides a user-friendly interface for managing the cluster, monitoring performance and resource utilization, and automating common administrative tasks.
Q16) What is the Couchbase Eventing Service?
Ans: The Couchbase Eventing Service is a component of the Couchbase architecture that provides a serverless computing platform for processing data stored in the Couchbase database. The Eventing Service allows developers to create and deploy event-driven functions that automatically process data as it is stored in the database, providing real-time processing capabilities.
Q17) How does Couchbase support global deployments?
Ans: Couchbase supports global deployments through its distributed architecture and cross-data center replication (XDCR) feature. XDCR allows for data to be replicated across multiple data centers, providing a highly available and resilient solution for global deployments. This ensures that data is always accessible, even in the event of a data center failure.
Q18) Can you explain the difference between Couchbase and Redis?
Ans: Couchbase and Redis are both NoSQL databases, but there are some key differences between the two. Couchbase provides a multi-model data management solution and has a built-in caching layer, while Redis is an in-memory data store that focuses on data structure storage and retrieval. Additionally, Couchbase provides a flexible query language (N1QL) while Redis uses its own command-line interface.
Q19) What is the role of the Couchbase Data Management Service in the Couchbase architecture?
Ans: The Couchbase Data Management Service is a component of the Couchbase architecture that provides centralized management of the data stored in the Couchbase database. The Data Management Service provides functions such as indexing, querying, and backup and restore, making it easy to manage and manipulate data stored in the database.
Q20) How does Couchbase handle security?
Ans: Couchbase handles security through its support for a range of security features such as SSL encryption for data in transit, role-based access control for data access, and integration with external authentication systems such as LDAP and Active Directory. Additionally, Couchbase provides a secure mode that disables all unsecured ports, ensuring that only secure connections can access the database.
Advanced CouchBase Interview Questions for Experienced
Q21) Can you explain how the Couchbase indexing works?
Ans: Couchbase indexing works by creating secondary indexes on the data stored in the database. The indexing process creates a mapping of the data that allows for efficient querying and retrieval of data. Couchbase provides two types of indexes: primary indexes and secondary indexes. Primary indexes are created automatically and provide a mapping of the unique keys for each document in the database, while secondary indexes allow for more complex queries to be executed efficiently.
Q22) How does Couchbase support data partitioning and distribution?
Ans: Couchbase supports data partitioning and distribution through its use of a data partitioning mechanism called vBuckets. The vBuckets divide the data into smaller, more manageable chunks that are distributed across the nodes in the cluster. The vBuckets provide a way to scale the database horizontally, allowing for more nodes to be added as the volume of data grows.
Q23) Can you explain the Couchbase query language (N1QL)?
Ans: N1QL (Non-first Normal Form Query Language) is a SQL-like query language for Couchbase that provides a flexible and powerful way to query and manipulate data stored in the database. N1QL supports a wide range of query operations, including select, join, and aggregate operations, making it easy to perform complex data analysis and manipulation tasks.
Q24) What is the role of the Couchbase Views in the Couchbase architecture?
Ans: Couchbase Views are a feature in the Couchbase architecture that provides a way to create custom views of the data stored in the database. Views are created using MapReduce functions, which process the data and produce a view that can be queried using the Couchbase query language (N1QL). Views provide a flexible and efficient way to perform ad-hoc analysis and reporting tasks on the data stored in the database.
Q25) Can you explain the difference between the Couchbase Community Edition and Enterprise Edition?
Ans: The Couchbase Community Edition is a free and open-source version of the Couchbase database, while the Enterprise Edition provides additional features and capabilities for enterprise-level deployments. The Enterprise Edition includes features such as cross-data center replication (XDCR), data tiering, and advanced security features, making it a more suitable choice for large-scale, mission-critical deployments.
Q26) How does Couchbase handle data concurrency and conflicts?
Ans: Couchbase handles data concurrency and conflicts through its use of versioning and conflict resolution mechanisms. Each document in the database has a version number, which is updated whenever the document is modified. In the event of conflicting updates, the conflict resolution mechanism determines which version of the document should be stored in the database, ensuring that the data remains consistent and up-to-date.
Q27) Can you explain the Couchbase memory architecture?
Ans: The Couchbase memory architecture consists of several components, including the RAM and disk storage, the caching layer, and the data structures used to store the data. The Couchbase database uses a combination of RAM and disk storage to provide a high-performance solution, with frequently accessed data stored in the caching layer for fast retrieval. The data structures used in the Couchbase memory architecture, such as B-Trees and Hash Tables, are optimized for fast data access and retrieval.
Q28) What is the role of the Couchbase Analytics Service in the Couchbase architecture?
Ans: The Couchbase Analytics Service is a component of the Couchbase architecture that provides a way to perform complex analytics on the data stored in the database. The Analytics Service provides a SQL-like query language (CBQL) that allows for ad-hoc analysis and reporting tasks to be performed efficiently on large datasets. The Analytics Service is designed to work in parallel across multiple nodes in the Couchbase cluster, providing a highly scalable and performant solution for big data analytics.
Q29) Can you explain the difference between Couchbase and MongoDB?
Ans: Couchbase and MongoDB are both NoSQL databases, but there are some key differences between the two. Couchbase provides a multi-model data management solution and has a built-in caching layer, while MongoDB is a document-oriented database that focuses on document storage and retrieval. Additionally, Couchbase provides a flexible query language (N1QL) while MongoDB uses the MongoDB Query Language (MQL).
Q30) How does Couchbase handle data durability and availability?
Ans: Couchbase handles data durability and availability through its use of data replication and failover mechanisms. The Couchbase database replicates data across multiple nodes in the cluster, providing a highly available and resilient solution. In the event of a node failure, the failover mechanism automatically transfers ownership of the data to another node, ensuring that the data is always accessible.
Q31) Can you explain the Couchbase Eventing Service and its use cases?
Ans: The Couchbase Eventing Service is a feature in the Couchbase architecture that allows for real-time processing of data stored in the database. The Eventing Service uses functions written in JavaScript to process data changes, trigger actions, and perform data transformations. The Eventing Service is useful for a range of use cases, including real-time analytics, data enrichment, and triggering automated workflow processes.
Q32) How does Couchbase handle data scaling?
Ans: Couchbase handles data scaling through its use of data partitioning, data replication, and failover mechanisms. The data partitioning mechanism, vBuckets, allows for data to be divided into smaller, more manageable chunks that can be distributed across multiple nodes in the cluster. The data replication mechanism ensures that data is always available, even in the event of a node failure, while the failover mechanism automatically transfers ownership of the data to another node in the event of a failure.
Q33) Can you explain the Couchbase backup and restore process?
Ans: The Couchbase backup and restore process allows for the data stored in the database to be backed up to a persistent storage location, and then restored in the event of a disaster or data loss. The backup process can be performed using the Couchbase Management Console or through the Couchbase REST API. The restore process involves restoring the backed-up data to a new Couchbase cluster, ensuring that the data is available and consistent.
Q34) How does Couchbase handle data consistency?
Ans: Couchbase handles data consistency through its use of data replication and versioning mechanisms. The data replication mechanism ensures that data is replicated across multiple nodes in the cluster, providing a highly available and resilient solution. The versioning mechanism ensures that each document in the database has a unique version number, which is updated whenever the document is modified. In the event of conflicting updates, the conflict resolution mechanism determines which version of the document should be stored in the database, ensuring that the data remains consistent and up-to-date.
Q35) Can you explain the difference between Couchbase and MongoDB?
Ans: Couchbase and MongoDB are both NoSQL databases, but there are some key differences between the two. Couchbase provides a multi-model data management solution and has a built-in caching layer, while MongoDB is a document-oriented database that focuses on document storage and retrieval. Additionally, Couchbase provides a flexible query language (N1QL) while MongoDB uses the MongoDB Query Language (MQL).
Q36) How does Couchbase handle data durability and availability?
Ans: Couchbase handles data durability and availability through its use of data replication and failover mechanisms. The Couchbase database replicates data across multiple nodes in the cluster, providing a highly available and resilient solution. In the event of a node failure, the failover mechanism automatically transfers ownership of the data to another node, ensuring that the data is always accessible.
Q37) Can you explain the Couchbase Eventing Service and its use cases?
Ans: The Couchbase Eventing Service is a feature in the Couchbase architecture that allows for real-time processing of data stored in the database. The Eventing Service uses functions written in JavaScript to process data changes, trigger actions, and perform data transformations. The Eventing Service is useful for a range of use cases, including real-time analytics, data enrichment, and triggering automated workflow processes.
Q38) Can Couchbase be used for real-time data processing?
Ans: Yes, Couchbase supports real-time data processing through its Eventing Service, which enables event-driven processing of data in response to changes in the data stored in Couchbase.
Q39) Does Couchbase support data modeling and indexing?
Ans: Yes, Couchbase provides robust data modeling and indexing capabilities, allowing for efficient querying and retrieval of data. This includes the ability to define secondary indexes on data, allowing for complex querying of JSON data stored in Couchbase.
Couchbase FAQ’s
Q1) Is Couchbase a SQL database?
Ans: No, Couchbase is a NoSQL database.
Q2) Does Couchbase support SQL?
Ans: No, Couchbase does not support SQL natively, but it offers a powerful query language called N1QL that has a SQL-like syntax.
Q3) What is N1QL in Couchbase?
Ans: N1QL is a SQL-like query language for querying JSON data in Couchbase.
Tips to clear CouchBase Interview:
1. Know Couchbase architecture: Understand components, such as Server, Sync Gateway, and Autonomous Operator.
2. Study N1QL: Familiarize yourself with the SQL-like query language for Couchbase.
3. Be familiar with data types: Know how to store and query different data types like JSON, binary, and key-value pairs.
4. Know the use cases:Familiarize yourself with the typical use cases of Couchbase such as mobile, web, and IoT applications.
5. Have practical knowledge:Demonstrate hands-on experience with Couchbase by working on projects or through online resources.
Bottom Line:
In conclusion, to clear a Couchbase interview, you should have a good understanding of the Couchbase architecture, N1QL, data types, use cases, and have practical knowledge of the platform. Stay updated with the latest advancements in technology and be prepared to answer questions related to your hands-on experience. Good luck!
1a:T900d,
Vue is a JavaScript framework used to create connected interfaces. Evan invented it, and he, along with the other active core team members, continues to maintain it. Vue.js is in charge of the view layer of an application. Vue.js Interview Questions the primary purpose of Vue.js interview questions is to assess the criticacandidate's l thinking skills and local knowledge; therefore, these questions have been classified depending on the difficulty level, that is, primary, intermediate, or advanced questions.
In this Blog, we have included the most recent and frequently asked Vue.js Interview Questions and Answers that have been further categorized as per the criteria mentioned above.
Ans: Vue.js is a javascript framework used to develop the interactive interface. It's a progressive framework. Fast DOM rendering, reactive state management, tools, client-side routing, and server-side rendering are all higher-level problems that Vue addresses.
Q2) Who is the founder of Vue.js?
Ans: Evans invented Vue. JS. He and his team members maintain it.
Q3) Why is Vue.js called a progressive framework?
Ans: Vue.js is called a progressive framework because it is dynamic.
Q4) Can we create a custom filter in Vue.js?
Ans: Yes, a custom filter can be created in Vue.js.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Vue.js? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Vue.js Training to get Job Ready!
Q5) What are the significant features of Vue.JS?
Ans: Some of the significant features of Vue.js are:
Q18) How can one add extra features to the application in Vue.js?
Ans: Vue-Plugins can be used to add extra features to the application in Vue.js.
Q19) Mention some of the advantages of using Vue.js.
Ans: Vue.js provides numerous benefits to users. Some of them include the following:
Easy integrations
Reliability
User-friendly
Improved performance
Easy to grasp
Q20) List out some of the conditional directives in Vue.js.
Ans: Some of the conditional directives included in Vue.js are mentioned below:
V-if
V-else
V-else-if
V-show
Intermediate Vue.js Interview Questions
Q21) What are the advantages of utilizing Vue.js Mixins?
Ans: To flexibly distribute reusable features, the developers in Vue.js use mixins. There are numerous component options in mixins. They are held in one location, enabling all the components to be benefitted simultaneously.
Q22) What is the primary purpose of using virtual DOM in Vue.js?
Ans: The primary goal of the virtual DOM is to speed up and improve the effectiveness of DOM manipulation. When your DOM contains many nodes, it becomes essential. In this situation, upgrading these nodes is costly for resource- and processing-intensive activity. Here, virtual DOM enters the picture and substantially speeds up JavaScript objects. To increase efficiency, Vue.js automatically groups DOM updates into bunches.
Q23) Why is it necessary for the component data to be a function?
Ans: The component data must be a function rather than just providing the object as a copy of the returned data object required for each instance. Or else data change in one component instance will impact data in all other component instances.
Q24) What are the array detection non-mutation methods in Vue.js?
Ans: The methods in Vue.js that consistently produce a new array instead of changing the original array are known as array detection non-mutation methods.
A list of the non-mutation methods are:
slice()
filter()
concat()
Q25) In vue router, what are navigation guards?
Ans: By deviating from or canceling navigations, vue-navigation routers protect navigations.
The following is a list of the three methods that can be plugged into router navigations:
Per-route
In-component
Global
Q26) What is the difference between one-way and two-way data binding?
Ans: The application UI part does not automatically update in one-way data binding. A custom code must be entered to ensure that updates are made after each change. Moreover, one-way data binding involves the usage of the v-bind Directive.
On the contrary, two-way data binding can automatically update the application's UI, considering that the data model is updated. The v-model Directive is used in the case of two-way data binding.
Q27) What are the primary uses of filters in Vue.js?
Ans: The main functions performed by filters in vue.js are:
They are generally used to filter data at the DOM level. This is done so that data still intact in storage but presented in the specified way can be received.
They are used to enhance the presentation of the view layer.
Moreover, filters are reusable.
Filters make it more convenient to format data at the view level.
Q28) Mention types of Directive available in Vue.js.
Ans: The following directives are available in Vue js:
Empty Directives
Custom Directives
General Directives
Literal Directives
Q29) What is a watcher in vue.js?
Ans: A watcher in vue.js refers to a unique feature that assists in observing changes in data while applying various operations.
Q30) What makes Vue superior to Angular?
Ans: Angular helps in building enterprise-based applications owing to its extensive built-in functionalities and community support. However, Vue is a technically sound framework that assists in building user interfaces and solving various challenging issues.
Q31) What is the difference between v-if and v-show directives?
Ans: The most common differences between v-show and v-if directives are given below:
The v-if Directive is used to present the element to the DOM only if the expression succeeds, whereas the v-show Directive is used to present all elements to the DOM and then uses the CSS display property to show or hide elements according to the expressions.
V-if directives support v-else and v- else-if directives, whereas v-show directives don't support them.
The v-if Directive adds or removes the DOM, due to which it has a higher cost, whereas the v-show Directive has a higher initial render cost.
v-if Directive supports the tab, whereas the v-show Directive doesn't support it.
Q32) What is vuex?
Ans: VueX is a state management pattern and library for the Vue.js application. It acts as a centralized store for all the various components in the Vue.js application. Vuex provides rules to ensure that the state can only be changed predictably. Vuex help by keeping all that data in one place and allowing access to modify all of these separate components.
Q33) What is the key in Vue.js?
Ans: Vue.js reuses DOM elements rather than producing a new one each time to show DOM elements more quickly. The key is a kind of flag that tells Vue, "if the data associated with this child component is moved somewhere else, then move the component along with it to preserve the changes that already exist."
Q34) What is $child property in Vue.js?
Ans: The $child property in Vue.js is identical to the $parent property, even though it's used to access the child instance.
Q35) Explain Vue.js reactivity and common issues when tracking changes.
Ans: Each of the properties specified in a Vue instance's data option is reactive, which means that once they change, the component is instantly updated and re-rendered.
During initialization, all such properties are transformed into getters and setters, enabling Vue to recognize when those properties are viewed or modified.
The following limitation may occur while creating the Vue app:
Due to a JavaScript restriction, Vue cannot detect the addition or deletion of object properties; as a result, new root-level reactive properties must be added via the Vue. Set method.
In a similar vein, Vue cannot recognize index-based array item modifications. Vue. the Set is required to be used
Advanced Vue.js Interview Questions for Experienced
Q36) What is a vue-loader?
Ans: Vue loader allows the creation of single file components in vue format as it is a webpack plugin. Single component files include three sections that are template, script, and style. The vue-loader module allows Webpack to extract and process each section using different loader modules, such as the SASS or SCSS loader makest, making creating an app using vue files simple.
Q37) What is a single file component?
Ans: A file with the. Vue extension, which includes a Vue component, is referred to as a single-file component. It is a single file that contains the component's template, logic, and styling. One script block, optional template and style blocks, and additional custom blocks are included.
You must configure Vue Loader to parse the file before using one (usually done as part of a webpack building pipeline). However, this also encourages using non-standard languages like HTML templating languages or Sass with pluggable pre-processors.
Q38) How to use a single-file component in Vue.js?
Ans: We must set up Vue Loader to parse the file to use a single-file component in Vue.js (It is done automatically as a part of a webpack building pipeline). Additionally, HTML templating languages and Sass with pluggable pre-processors are supported in addition to non-standard languages.
Q39) What are the problems solved by single file components in Vue.js?
Ans: To solve common issues in a JavaScript-driven application with a.vue extension, Vue.js uses Single File Components.
The following is a list of problems that Single File Components in Vue.js have resolved:
Every component has a unique name according to global criteria.
String templates need ugly slashes for multiline HTML and lack syntax highlighting.
CSS not supported. It means that CSS is completely absent from the modularization of HTML and JavaScript.
Q40) Explain the life cycle of the Vue instance
Ans: Lifecycle hooks are functions that every Vue instance runs through. Each vue has eight lifecycle hooks. An instance of js
Before Create - This is the first lifecycle hook that is called when a Vue instance has been created.
Created - It's called immediately after the 'Before creates' hook, but the Vue instance has already set initial properties, data, etc.
Before mount - invoked right before the instance is mounted on the DOM. The template has been completed at this time.
Mounted - This is the name given to the template once it has been filled with data and is fully functional.
Before Updated - When any changes to data require the DOM to be changed, this method is called before the update.
Updated - It's called after the DOM has been updated.
Before destroys - It's a location where you can clean up your resources before terminating the Vue instance.
Destroyed - This method is called when all Vue instances have been destroyed. It will be activated when you call the destruct method on an object in the code.
Q41) Why should arrow functions not be utilized when writing lifecycle hooks in Vue instances?
Ans:
Arrow function can't define a 'this' of their own as they are not independent. They are limited to the context of their parent function.
The keyword 'this' does not bind to the Vue instance when the arrow function (=>) is used in the Vue app, resulting in problems.
Hence, Make use of the regular declaration instead of the arrow function.
Q42) What are the most prominent features of styling?
Ans: Following is a list of the most prominent features of styling:
The stylelint has more than 160 built-in rules to catch errors, apply limits and enforce stylistic conventions.
It understands the latest CSS syntax, including custom properties and level 4 selectors.
It extracts the embedded styles from HTML, markdown, and CSS-in-JS object & template literals.
It is also used to parse CSS-like syntaxes like SCSS, Sass, Less, and SugarSS.
It supports reusing community plugins and creating their plugins.
Q43) How does data flow between components in a Vue.js app?
Ans: Data is transferred from the parent component to the child components in Vue.js using a prop or a custom attribute. This unique attribute is converted into a property on the instance of the child component. The process is known as a one-way data flow.
The subordinate component is automatically updated after the parent component modifies a prop value. The child component can use an event to interact with the parent, although changing a property within a child component is not recommended. Unless it is an object or array, it does not also influence the parent component. The parent sets a handler to the event when the child component instance emits one, and data is returned to the parent.
Q44) What is the $parent property in Vue.js?
Ans: The $parent property in Vue.js connects a child to the parent instance. Identical to the $root property. Direct access is provided through the $parent property. However, it makes it difficult to test and debug the application. It is challenging to identify the source of the mutation.
Q45) What are some of Vue's most crucial directives?
Ans:
V-if adds or removes DOM elements
The v-model is used for two-way data bindings.
To iterate over items in an array or object, we can use the v-for function.
Similar to v-if, v-show displays and hides elements using the CSS display property rather than rendering every element to the DOM.
FAQs related to Vue.js Interview Questions
Q1) Is Vue.JS front end or back end?
Vue.js is a JavaScript front-end framework that assists in building user interfaces. It is used for the creation of single-page applications. Moreover, it enables the developers to establish reusable components and manage the state of applications. It functions in the browser and interacts with the users, updating the application based on their inputs. However, Vue.js could be more helpful in backend development.
Q2) What are Mixins in Vue?
Mixins refer to a versatile approach that offers a more convenient way of distributing functionalities for vue components. Mixin objects can comprise various component choices.
When a component uses a mixin, all mixin options are 'mixed' into the component's own.
Q3) What is virtual DOM in Vue?
The virtual DOM is a collection of JavaScript objects that depict DOM nodes that should be presented on the page and maintained by Vue.js. These are often known as VNodes or virtual nodes.
The foremost aim of virtual DOM is to manipulate the DOM promptly. When an alteration is mandatory, the operations are carried out on the Virtual DOM instead of the Real DOM.
Q4) What is VueJS mainly used for?
Vue.js is mainly used for creating web interfaces and single-page applications.
Q5) Can we use react's JSX in Vue?
No, you can't use react's JSK transform as it differs from vue JSK change in Vue applications.
Tips Related to VueJs Interview
1. Be concise and assured: Any response you provide during the interview should be as concise as possible.
2. Give some real-world examples: Try to use examples from the real world when responding. This will demonstrate to the interviewer your familiarity with the subject
3. Pitch and tone: keep your voice down and do not get aggressive. You can better communicate your argument using a low voice and a calm tone.
4. Research the company: Study the organization. Adjust your responses to the needs of the business.
5. Do not rush to respond; instead, pay close attention. Take the time to carefully consider the interviewer's questions, then respond.
Conclusion
Veu.js is continuously gaining popularity as it features a dynamically flexible architecture that focuses on the declarative present and component composition. It is used in the Information Technology and Services industry.
Listed are the 50 most common Vue.js Interview Questions and Answers, which will help you prepare and perform well. You can make a good impression on your potential employers by practicing and preparing. Best of luck!
1b:T9002,
UiPath allows web developers to carry out various tasks in web automation, including data extraction, application transfer, report generation, and website testing. The only RPA solution is UiPath which is used for various automation processes, including Citrix, PDF, Web, and Windows desktop automation. It offers an open-source platform that encourages teamwork and the digitization of menial jobs. It is employed in several industries, including banking, healthcare, finance, and many more. For the quarter that ended on October 31, 2022, UiPath's revenue was $0.263B, up 18.99% from the previous year.
If you are an aspirant planning for a job in the automation industry or a job change for UiPath technology, here is what you need to unlock the opportunity. These questions will provide you with an understanding of your technical knowledge and capabilities. It will help them judge how efficient you are in solving problems and taking the initiative. These UiPath Interview Questions will also help you prepare for interviews for all the roles related to UiPath.
Ans: Daniel Dines and Marius Tirca launched the automation business Uipath in 2005. It is an automation program for Windows PCs that automates monotonous tasks. The most straightforward automation tool, UiPath, automates tiresome, repetitive operations by removing human involvement.
2. What is Robotic Process Automation (RPA)?
Ans: Robotic Method Automation teaches robots to execute laborious and time-consuming jobs while acting like humans. Robots are trained in this procedure to complete specified tasks independently using the established rules and guidelines.
3. What are the advantages of using RPA?
Ans: There are several advantages to using robotic process automation, including the following:
Cost-saving: You may reduce the workforce and cut costs by automating tedious processes.
Faster and more effective outcomes: They never make mistakes as people do. They will do the same without any mistakes once you give them the correct information and the appropriate guidelines and regulations.
No code is required: With robotic process automation, we don't need to develop complicated programs to automate any process or application. Sometimes a restricted code can be used to accomplish the task.
Simple to use: As stated in the previous sentence, the UiPath is designed to be simple enough for anybody to use.
4. What constitutes the RPA life cycle's primary phases?
Ans: The RPA life cycle primarily consists of four phases, and they are:
Analysis: The business and architect teams get together at this stage more than any other.
Bot development: The development team will collaborate to choose and create the bots at this stage.
Testing: The designed process is tested in this step to determine its quality levels and to look for flaws.
Support and maintenance: The automated process is being closely watched at this point, and if anything goes wrong, the support staff will take swift action to fix it.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of UiPath? Enroll in Instructor-Led live UiPath Training to get Job Ready!
5. How long would establish a framework for operational agility take?
Ans: From the start of the project, operational agility may be built in an average time frame of 4 to 12 weeks.
6. What does RPA mean when it says it collects the information?
Ans: In RPA, robots require raw data or information to carry out the tasks delegated to them. We even have a chance to manually feed the data to the robots because they can consistently complete the jobs depending on the data gathered from diverse sources.
7. What distinguishes UiPath from Selenium?
Ans: Selenium is a well-known testing tool that is employed to test a variety of websites and programs. Integrating with other apps in terms of the connection component is not feasible. When it comes to UiPath, a Robot Process Automation solution made to automate tasks formerly carried out by humans, it is even hard to operate with virtual environments like Citrix, etc. With only a little code, complicated activities can be automated with UiPath.
8. What makes the chatbot and RPA different from one another?
Ans: An RPA and a chatbot are very different from one another. A chatbot is pre-programmed software that mimics human behaviour. These chatbots facilitate the planned behaviours of the visitors. The best feature of chatbots is their ability to learn from prior interactions and adapt their behaviour. Chatbot is a fairly specific area of robotic process automation, which is a much bigger idea. Chatbots cannot modernize complicated procedures; RPA can.
9. What are the fundamental conditions for RPA automation of front- and backend mechanisms?
Ans: RPA is a widely used and reliable innovation for automating both frontend and backend processes while maintaining the highest standards of quality and protection. The frontend and backend operations are automated and simple to use. The visitors aren't required to worry about it because most of the backend and frontend automation operations are identical. The deployment and upkeep of the settings are simple.
10. What are the primary factors to consider during the Automation phase?
Ans: The following step is to choose the finest foundation once you have found the automation tool that best suits your needs. Depending on the type of assignment, you must select the things labelled as In Scope and Out Scope. The test environment is the next point we need to think about, and output authentication is one of the important things to consider.
11. What does RPA mean when it says it collects the information?
Ans: In RPA, robots require raw data or information to carry out the tasks delegated to them. We can also deliberately feed the data to the robots because they can consistently complete the jobs depending on the data gathered from multiple perspectives.
12. What do the UIPath value and data types mean?
Ans: In UiPath, variables are used to store the data, and you may even alter a variable's value. The type of data that is stored in the variable might vary. UiPath supports various data kinds, including text, numeric, time, date, universal value, and data tables.
13. What does UiPath activity sequencing mean?
Ans: The definition of a series is a brief sort of project that makes it simple to go from one operation to the next. You may utilize these blocks as many times as you like because they function as a single activity of block.
14. What is a machine's state?
Ans: A machine must travel through several stages to do a single activity. These various states are referred to as machine states. If the action is activated, it enters several states.
15. What does UiPath's break activity mean?
Ans: In UiPath, you may halt a specific loop at any moment and carry out additional tasks by using the break action.
16. What exactly does UiPath's package management do?
Ans: A package manager is a collection of several components that aid in automating the process. Libraries, frameworks, and wrappers are just a few items included in package managers.
17. What is the most efficient method for logging into UiPath?
18. There should be a tracking procedure to understand the processes and remedy the problems.
Ans: In manufacturing, you may customize the login based on your requirements.
19. How exactly would the data be extracted from the database?
Ans: Using Linq, we can extract the data.
20. How can we access the database and read it?
Ans: We can connect to the database and read the decentralized data flow with a database connection.
RPA UiPath Interview Questions for Experienced:
21. What is the usage of the UiPath Robotic Enterprise Framework format?
Ans:
It serves as the foundation for any endeavour.
It will serve as a source for the robots in the front office.
In Manchester, the framework functions like a line.
22. What does UiPath's automated recording mean?
Ans: The option to automatically record the activities in UiPath. It may be modified and freely customized. The stages that are automatically produced for documenting the actions—which are to click, input into, and check certain items—are as follows.
23. List the OCR (optical character recognition) tools that UIPath offers?
Ans: The OCR engines offered by UiPath are listed below:
24. What process do we employ to extract text from an image?
Ans: We can retrieve text from the picture using Orc activity.
25. What are the possible error-handling options in UiPath?
Ans:
End Workflow
Catch Try
Throw
Catch
26. Define a machine's state.
Ans: A machine's state refers to the several stages it must transition through in order to carry out a single operation. The activity could change into several states once it is triggered.
27. What are the session variables?
Ans: In UiPath, the session variable may serve as a pointer to a single session encounter. If the connection goes through many cycles at once, it could have comparable session characteristics but a different value.
28. What conditions must be met for Element Persists?
Ans: It is used to determine whether UI Element is available during program implementation. Existing elements are required to support Boolean.
29. What is a package manager?
Ans: In UiPath, a package manager is a collection of several parts that enables the computerization of the process. Structures, libraries, and coverings are all things that a package administrator includes.
30. How long will the foundation for operational agility take to establish?
Ans: From the start of the project, the Operational Agility framework establishment takes between 4 to 12 weeks.
31. What does the UiPath milestone schedule entail?
Ans: The order follows a project-like structure that moves from the beginning with one action to the next. It serves as a standalone action block. They might be used repeatedly by engineers.
32. Explanation of UiPath Project Debugging
Ans: For a specific operation, the error is found and displayed using the debugging approach. Breakpoints and logging are also present. It helps you compile information about the project and gradually highlight the problem.
33. In UiPath, explain arguments.
Ans: Data is sent from one endeavour to another via arguments. They seem like forces from a global perspective because they gradually gather and transmit information. While arguments convey information across robotization, variables pass information between tasks. They enable you to reuse computerization repeatedly as a result. Numerous argument types that correspond to different types of variables are supported by UiPath Studio.
34. What distinguishes process automation from test automation in particular?
Ans: Process automation is applied to streamline procedures where human interaction is not necessary. Additionally, Test Automation is utilized during the automation technology to test built cases to see whether they pass or fail.
Ans: Citrix Automation is employed by UiPath to manage and interact with multiple virtual. The method for implementing automation in Citrix machines is through Citrix robotization in UiPath.
36. Describe Flow Switch in terms of UiPath.
Ans: Flow switches and choices are the same in the context of UiPath. The flow switch offers an additional option called "flow step," which is the only distinguishing feature between both. The flow switch's branches are not only limited to the true or false branches but also each one is described as a flow step.
37. How can I use Uipath to upload data to a queue? Which Uipath desktop automation tasks have you used?
Ans:
On the Queues page, create a queue.
Drag an Add Queue Item activity to the Main panel in Studio from the Activities panel.
Put quotation marks around the name of the queue you generated in step 1 in the Queue Name field of the Properties panel.
38. Do you have any knowledge of TFS, SVN, and all Uipath repositories?
Ans: You may establish a connection to a source control system like TFS or SVN using the Project panel, along with other things. The Connect Project to a Source Control button switches to TFS or SVN after you are linked to one of them. The URL of the Project may also be seen by hovering over the TFS or SVN button.
Scenario-Based UiPath Interview Questions:
39. How is it possible to claim that robotic process automation is a safe and dependable method?
Ans: The RPA has the same features built-in on numerous levels. The good news is that the run time factor differs greatly amongst all manufacturers' processes for modifying anything. All users need not be provided with the same activities; in fact, such actions might be limited. Typically, this entails developing, planning, executing, and revising the procedures. Every produced log has the ability to offer complete details with a broad reach. When contrasted to a manual procedure, RPA offers more security and control.
40. Is it always required for a business to update its whole infrastructure in order to use RPA? If not, why not?
Ans: RPA adoption is not always required when a business undergoes a significant transformation. It is simple to adapt to work with the current network. This is because firms can easily keep up with the pace thanks to the most recent robotic software and solutions for RPA that don't easily encounter compliance concerns.
41. Can UiPath execute several iterations of the same procedure applications on a single robot in a single system?
Ans: Yes, provided that each system is registered as one Robot, it is possible to run the same program across two robots. On a computer running Windows Server (2008 R2, 2012 R2, or 2016):
The same process can be executed by all robots and distinct operations simultaneously by all robots.
42. Consider a situation when you have created automation using UiPath Community Edition. Let's assume that you wish to transfer the deployed bots to the client environment. How are you going to do that?
Ans: You must utilize the UiPath Enterprise edition to deploy your bots to the client environment. When you have the business edition, you may publish the code to the licensed version of Orchestrator and execute the deployed bot after moving the code to the environment.
43. Which activity allows you to quickly leave the loop after a certain point while processing a huge item collection using For Each?
Ans:
Nothing can be done. As an alternative, you must develop a Boolean variable upon which the For Every loop is severed.
For Each, the "Break" action is the most appropriate.
Each should be replaced with a While loop.
FAQs for UiPath
1. What are the 3 key components of the UiPath platform?
Ans: There are majorly 3 key components of the UiPath platform, they are:
UiPath Studio: UiPath Studio is a visual and graphical interface that enables users to design and build automation workflows.
UiPath Robot: UiPatch Robot is a component that executes the automation workflows designed in UiPath Studio. The Robot can run either in attended mode (when a user is present at the computer) or unattended mode (when running as a background process).
UiPath Orchestrator: UiPacth Orchestrator is a web-based platform that enables users to manage, monitor, and scale their automation.
2. What is UiPath's full form?
Ans: UiPath does not have a full form. It is a brand name.
3. What is UiPath TCS used for?
Ans: TCS (Tata Consultancy Services) is a global IT services company that provides a range of Tech services. TCS uses UiPath to help its clients automate their business processes and improve operational efficiency. Here are some other uses:
Uses UiPath Studio to design and build automation workflows.
Uses UiPath Robots to execute automation.
Uses UiPath Orchestrator to manage and monitor automation.
Helps organizations reduce manual work.
Improves data accuracy.
Increases operational efficiency
4. How many types of automation are there in UiPath?
Ans: There are 6 types of automation in UiPath:
Fully Attended: In fully attended automation, humans are present throughout the entire process.
Partially Attended: In partially attended automation, humans are present only during certain parts of the process.
Human in Loop: In human-in-loop automation, humans must intervene and make decisions at specific points during the process.
Attended, Interval: In attended at intervals, automation human is present for only brief intervals during the process.
Attended in Tandem: In attended in tandem automation, human works alongside the automation.
Hybrid Deployment: In hybrid deployment automation, multiple types of automation are combined into one process.
5. What are the 2 types of robots in UiPath?
Ans: The two types of robots in UiPath are:
Standard Robot: Standard Robot refers to an attended or unattended robot that is assigned to a specific process or task and is dedicated to running that process or task continuously.
Floating Robot: Floating Robot is a type of attended Robot that can be used by multiple processes or tasks and is not tied to a specific process or task. Floating robots are often used to provide additional resources when the demand for automation is high and can be used to support multiple processes simultaneously.
UiPath Tips for Preparing:
1. Familiarize yourself with UiPath Studio: Make sure you are comfortable with UiPath Studio and understand its various components, such as workflows, sequences, and activities.
2. Know the UiPath architecture: Understand the architecture of UiPath and its various components like Robots, Orchestrators, and Attended & Unattended Robots.
3. Study the key concepts: Brush up on key concepts like automation types, screen scraping, data scraping, and exception handling.
4. Practical experience: Get hands-on experience by working on projects related to automation. This will help you answer questions on how you have used UiPath in real-world scenarios.
5. Learn about the UiPath ecosystem: Understand the different tools and services available in the UiPath ecosystem and how they integrate with each other.
6. Prepare for technical questions: Be prepared to answer technical questions related to UiPath concepts and best practices.
7. Research the industry and company: Get an understanding of the industry use cases. Do your research on the company and the role you are interviewing for. This will help you tailor your responses to their specific needs and requirements.
8. Practice your communication skills: During the interview, it is important to communicate your ideas and thought process clearly and effectively.
9. Review your resume and cover letter: Review your resume and cover letter to refresh your memory and be ready to talk about your experience and qualifications.
10. Practice active listening and be yourself: Pay attention to the interviewer's questions and make sure you understand what they are asking before you answer. Be honest and authentic during the interview. Be confident about your body language, and accent, and do not pretend.
Conclusion:
The combination of RPI and UiPath is a powerful one that allows the automation of numerous processes and tasks which is difficult or time-consuming to accomplish manually. RPI offers the hardware needed for the automation process, and UiPath offers the software to ensure the process operates smoothly. This is a fantastic method to cut down on the cost of labour, improve productivity, and free up human resources for more challenging tasks.
Above mentioned are the most common UiPath Interview Questions, which are helpful if you are preparing yourself to work for roles related to UiPath. These questions will help you to perform well in the interview, so go through them to succeed in the interview and make a good impression on the interviewer.
1c:Tf99c,
Go, also known as Golang, is a modern programming language that was developed by Google in 2007. It is a statically-typed language that is designed to be fast, efficient, and scalable, making it an excellent choice for building web services, cloud-native applications, and other performance-critical systems. With its simplicity, concurrency support, and powerful standard library, Go has quickly become a popular choice among developers looking for a high-performance and productive language.
Key features of Golang include:
Simple and straightforward syntax
Support for concurrency and parallelism
Fast performance and low resource consumption
Robust standard library
Strong type safety and error handling capabilities.
Whether you're a seasoned developer or just starting out, this blog is the perfect resource for mastering Golang. Divided into four sections you'll find comprehensive Golang Interview Questions that cover all aspects of the Golang programming language. With this guide, you'll have the tools and knowledge you need to demonstrate your expertise in Golang and ace your next interview.
Golang Interview Questions and Answers for Freshers
1. What is Golang and what are its features?
Ans: Go is a programming language developed by Google. It is known for its simplicity, efficient memory management, and concurrency support. Some of its key features include garbage collection, statically-typed variables, and strict typing.
2. What are Goroutines and how do they differ from traditional threads?
Ans: Goroutines are lightweight threads that can run simultaneously with other routines. They differ from traditional threads in that they are much lighter, cheaper, and faster to create and manage, and can run thousands or even millions of routines concurrently without affecting performance.
3. Talk about the different data types in Go.
Ans: Go has several built-in data types, including:
bool: a boolean type that can hold either true or false
int: a signed integer type with varying sizes, such as int8, int16, int32, and int64
uint: an unsigned integer type with varying sizes, such as uint8, uint16, uint32, and uint64
float32 and float64: floating-point types with single and double precision, respectively
complex64 and complex128: complex numbers with real and imaginary components
string: a string type for representing sequences of characters
byte: a type that represents a single byte
4. How does Go handle errors?
Ans: Go handles errors through a mechanism called error values. When a function returns an error value, it signals to the caller that something has gone wrong. The caller can then check the error value and take appropriate action.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Golang? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Golang Training to get Job Ready!
5. How does Go handle memory management?
Ans: Go uses a garbage collector to automatically manage memory. The garbage collector keeps track of the memory usage of each object and frees up memory that is no longer in use. This makes it easier to write code without worrying about manual memory management.
6. What is a slice in Go, and how does it differ from an array?
Ans: A slice is a data structure in Go that represents a segment of an array. Unlike an array, a slice can be resized dynamically and can grow or shrink as needed. Slices also have built-in methods for working with their underlying arrays, such as append and copy.
7. Explain a pointer in Go, and how is it used.
Ans: The memory address of another value is stored in a variable called a pointer. Pointers are used in Go to pass values to functions by reference, rather than by value. This allows multiple functions to access the same data, which can be useful in certain situations.
8. Describe the struct in Go, and how is it used?
Ans: A struct is a composite data type in Go that can be used to define custom data structures. Structs allow you to group together related values and organize your data in a meaningful way. Structs can be used to store values in fields, and can also be passed as arguments to functions.
9. What is the defer keyword used for in Go?
Ans: The defer keyword is used in Go to schedule a function call to be executed immediately before the function that contains the defer statement returns. The defer keyword is useful for performing cleanup operations, such as closing a file or releasing a resource, even if an error occurs within the function.
10. What is the difference between a package and an import in Go?
Ans: A package is a collection of Go source files that are organized to provide specific functionality, such as a library for working with a particular data format. An import is a directive that allows you to use the functionality of another package in your own code.
11. How do you test code in Go?
Ans: Go has built-in support for testing and provides a standard package called ‘testing’ that can be used to write and run tests. Tests can be written using the testing. T type and can be run using the ‘go test’ command. The ‘testing’ package also provides various functions for asserting the behavior of your code and for reporting errors or failures.
12. What distinguishes a channel from a mutex in Go?
Ans: A channel is a communication mechanism in Go that allows multiple goroutines to safely pass data back and forth. Channels can be used for both sending and receiving data and provide a way to synchronize communication between goroutines.
A mutex, on the other hand, is a synchronization tool used to protect shared data from concurrent access. Mutexes can be used to lock and unlock data, ensuring that only one goroutine at a time can access it. Mutexes are typically used to ensure that data is consistent and to prevent race conditions in concurrent programming.
Golang Interview Questions and Answers for Experienced
13. How do you design and implement concurrent systems in Go?
Ans: Concurrent systems in Go can be designed and implemented using goroutines and channels. Goroutines are lightweight threads that can run simultaneously with other routines, and channels provide a way to synchronize communication between goroutines. When designing concurrent systems in Go, it is important to consider the problem domain, the data being processed, and the performance requirements.
14. What is the difference between the make and new functions in Go?
Ans: The make function is used to create slices, maps, and channels, while the new function is used to create pointers to zero values of any type. The make function also initializes the underlying data structure, whereas new only allocates memory for the specified type.
15. How does Go handle panics and recoveries?
Ans: Go provides a mechanism for handling runtime errors through the use of the panic and recover functions. The panic function can be used to raise a runtime error, while the recover function can be used to recover from the error and resume normal execution. The use of recover is typically paired with the use of defer statements, which are executed before the function returns.
16. How do you optimize Go code for performance?
Ans: Performance optimization in Go involves several strategies, including:
Writing efficient algorithms and data structures
Using the correct data types and avoiding unnecessary conversions
Avoiding unnecessary memory allocation and garbage collection
Using concurrent programming techniques and channels to take advantage of parallel processing
Profiling and benchmarking code to identify bottlenecks
17. What are the best practices for testing and debugging Go code?
Ans: Some best practices for testing and debugging Go code include:
Writing comprehensive test cases that cover all scenarios and edge cases
Using the testing package and the go test command to run tests
Debugging code using tools such as the Go debugger (delve) and log statements
Using tools such as pprof to profile code and identify performance bottlenecks
Writing clear, concise, and meaningful error messages to make debugging easier
18. What is the Go Standard Library and what are some of its most important packages?
Ans: The Go Standard Library is a collection of packages that provide common functionality and are included with the Go distribution. Some of the most important packages in the Go Standard Library include:
net/http: a package for building HTTP servers and clients
encoding/json: a package for encoding and decoding JSON data
strings: a package for working with strings
math: a package for mathematical operations
time: a package for working with time and dates
19. What is Go's garbage collection mechanism and how does it work?
Ans: Go's garbage collection mechanism is a system that automatically frees up memory that is no longer in use. The garbage collector uses a tracing algorithm to identify objects that are no longer referenced, and then reclaims the memory associated with those objects. The garbage collector runs periodically in the background and is designed to be efficient and low-impact, so it does not significantly impact the performance of the program.
20. How does Go handle concurrency and synchronization?
Ans: Go provides several mechanisms for handling concurrency and synchronization, including:
Goroutines: lightweight threads that can run simultaneously with other routines
Channels: a mechanism for synchronizing communication between goroutines
Wait groups: a mechanism for synchronizing multiple goroutines
Mutexes: a synchronization tool used to protect shared data from concurrent access
Go also provides the sync package, which contains various tools and primitives for synchronizing access to shared data and coordinating communication between goroutines.
21. Can you explain Go's type system and its advantages?
Ans: Go has a statically typed type system, meaning that all type information is known at compile time. Go's type system supports several built-in types, including numbers, strings, and booleans, as well as user-defined types. One of the main advantages of Go's type system is its simplicity and readability, making it easier for developers to write, maintain, and understand code. The type system also helps to prevent type-related errors, such as type mismatches or unintended conversions, which can lead to bugs and crashes.
22. What is Go's approach to error handling and how does it differ from other programming languages?
Ans: Go uses a simple, straightforward approach to error handling that emphasizes returning errors as values from functions, rather than throwing exceptions. When a function encounters an error, it returns a value indicating that an error has occurred, along with a descriptive error message. The calling function is then responsible for checking the error and taking appropriate action.
This approach to error handling provides a more flexible and composable way to handle errors and eliminates the need for a complex exception handling mechanism. It also encourages the development of well-documented, robust error handling practices.
23. What is Go's approach to testing and how does it differ from other programming languages?
Ans: Go has a built-in testing framework that provides a simple and easy-to-use mechanism for writing and running tests. Tests can be written using the testing package and can be run using the go test command. The testing package provides functions for asserting the behavior of code and reporting errors or failures. Go's testing framework emphasizes the importance of writing comprehensive and automated tests and encourages the development of a strong testing culture. This approach to testing differs from other programming languages that may have less support for testing or rely on manual testing practices.
24. Can you explain Go's garbage collection mechanism and how it affects performance?
Ans: Go's garbage collection mechanism is a system that automatically frees up memory that is no longer in use. The garbage collector uses a tracing algorithm to identify objects that are no longer referenced and reclaims the memory associated with those objects. The garbage collector runs periodically in the background and is designed to be efficient and low-impact, so it does not significantly impact the performance of the program. Go's garbage collection mechanism provides several benefits for performance, including reducing the amount of manual memory management required, eliminating the risk of memory leaks, and providing better overall memory utilization. The garbage collector is also designed to provide predictable performance, so it does not cause significant pauses or slowdowns in the program.
25. Can you explain the use of channels in Go and how they enable concurrency?
Ans: Channels are a fundamental mechanism in Go for communicating between goroutines. A channel is a typed conduit through which values can be sent and received between goroutines. Channels provide a safe and efficient way to pass data between goroutines, ensuring that access to the shared data is properly synchronized and coordinated.
Channels can be used for various purposes, such as sending data from one goroutine to another, coordinating the execution of multiple goroutines, or communicating between goroutines when they are waiting for a result. By using channels, Go enables the development of highly concurrent programs that can take advantage of multiple processors or cores to run multiple tasks in parallel. Channels provide a powerful tool for managing and controlling the flow of data in concurrent programs, allowing developers to write scalable, efficient, and reliable programs.
Advanced Golang Interview Questions
26. Can you explain the differences between Go and other programming languages such as C++ or Java?
Ans: Go is designed to be a fast, simple, and efficient programming language that is well-suited for modern computing environments. Unlike C++ or Java, Go is a statically typed, garbage-collected language that supports concurrent programming. Go also has a simplified type system, a built-in testing framework, and a focus on modern software development practices. Compared to C++, Go is designed to be more memory-safe, with a garbage collector that automatically frees up memory that is no longer in use. Go also has a simpler type system and a more straightforward error handling mechanism.
Compared to Java, Go is designed to be faster, with a lower overhead and more efficient memory management. Go also has a more straightforward type system and a focus on concurrency, making it well-suited for building high-performance, concurrent systems.
27. Explain the use of interfaces in Go and why they are important.
Ans: Interfaces are a powerful mechanism in Go for defining abstract types that can be implemented by other types. An interface defines a set of methods that a type must implement in order to implement the interface.
Interfaces provide several benefits in Go, including:
Abstraction: Interfaces allow you to define abstract types that can be implemented by other types, providing a high level of abstraction and encapsulation.
Polymorphism: Interfaces allow you to write generic code that can work with values of different types that implement the same interface.
Decoupling: Interfaces allow you to separate the definition of an API from its implementation, making it easier to change or evolve the implementation without affecting the API.
28. Tell us the use of Go's struct type and how it differs from other programming languages?
Ans: Go's struct type is a composite type that allows you to define custom data structures. A struct consists of a set of fields, each of which has a name and a type. Structs can be used to group related data and define complex data structures.
Go's struct type differs from other programming languages in several ways:
Structs are value types in Go, meaning that they are copied when they are passed as arguments to functions or assigned to variables.
Go's struct type supports anonymous fields, which allow you to embed one struct type inside another and inherit its fields and methods.
Go's struct type supports tags, which are metadata that can be attached to struct fields and used to customize the behavior of encoding and decoding packages, such as JSON or XML.
29. Can you explain the use of Go's defer statement and when it is useful?
Ans: The defer statement is a powerful mechanism in Go that allows you to defer the execution of a function until the surrounding function returns. The deferred function is executed in the reverse order in which it was deferred, allowing you to clean up resources or perform other cleanup tasks.
Defer is useful in several situations, including:
Cleaning up resources: Defer can be used to clean up resources, such as closing files or releasing locks, even if an error occurs.
Debugging: Defer can be used to print debug information, such as stack traces, even if an error occurs.
Initialization: Defer can be used to initialize resources, such as setting up logging or opening files, even if an error occurs.
30. Can you describe the concurrent programming model used by Go and how it varies from that of other programming languages?
Ans: Go provides a powerful and efficient approach to concurrent programming through its support for goroutines and channels. Goroutines are lightweight threads of execution that are managed by the Go runtime, allowing multiple tasks to be executed concurrently within a single process. Channels provide a safe and efficient mechanism for communicating between goroutines, allowing them to coordinate and synchronize their execution.
Go's approach to concurrent programming differs from other programming languages in several ways:
Goroutines are much lighter-weight than traditional threads, allowing for much greater concurrency with less overhead.
Channels provide a more efficient and less error-prone mechanism for synchronizing and communicating between goroutines, compared to traditional locks and semaphores.
Go provides a built-in mechanism for managing and detecting deadlocks, which can occur when two or more goroutines are waiting for each other to finish.
Go provides a set of libraries and tools, such as the Go standard library and the Go toolchain, that are designed to support and simplify concurrent programming.
31. Describe Go's garbage collection mechanism and how it works?
Ans: Go's garbage collection mechanism is a built-in mechanism for automatically freeing up memory that is no longer in use. The garbage collector periodically scans memory to identify objects that are no longer accessible by the program, and reclaims the memory used by these objects.
The garbage collector works by using a combination of techniques, including:
Tracing: The garbage collector traces the references between objects to determine which objects are reachable and which objects are unreachable.
Mark-and-sweep: The garbage collector marks unreachable objects as dead and sweeps them from memory.
Compacting: The garbage collector compacts memory to reduce fragmentation and minimize the amount of memory used by the program.
Go's garbage collector is designed to be efficient and non-intrusive, allowing programs to run smoothly and quickly, even as the size of the heap grows.
32. Explain Go's error handling mechanism and why it is important.
Ans: Go's error handling mechanism is a built-in mechanism for handling and reporting errors in Go programs. Go uses a combination of return values and panic/recover to handle and report errors. Error handling is important in Go because it allows programs to handle and recover from unexpected events, such as file I/O errors, network errors, or other unexpected conditions. By handling errors effectively, Go programs can be made more robust and reliable, and can provide meaningful error messages to the user.
Go's error handling mechanism also helps to promote good software design by encouraging programmers to write code that checks for and handles errors, rather than ignoring them or returning unexpected results.
33. Talk about Go's built-in testing framework and how it is used.
Ans: Go's built-in testing framework is a powerful mechanism for writing and running tests for Go programs. The testing framework provides a set of functions and types for writing tests, asserting expected behavior, and reporting results. The testing framework is used by writing test functions that test specific aspects of a program. These test functions are executed by the Go test runner, and the results are reported back to the developer. Go's testing framework is an essential tool for writing high-quality, reliable Go programs, as it provides a way to automate and verify that code behaves as expected, even as the code evolves over time.
34. How does the build and deployment procedure for Go differ from that of other programming languages?
Ans: Go's build and deployment process is designed to be simple, efficient, and reliable. Go programs are typically built using the Go toolchain, which provides a set of commands for building, testing, and deploying Go programs. The build process involves compiling the source code into machine-executable code, and can be done using a single command, such as "go build".
One of the key differences between Go's build and deployment process and other programming languages is that Go produces a single, statically linked binary executable, rather than a collection of dynamically linked libraries. This makes deploying Go programs much simpler and more efficient, as there are no dependencies to manage or resolve. Go's deployment process also provides a number of advantages over other programming languages, including:
Easy distribution: Go programs can be easily distributed and installed, as they are a single, standalone executable.
Easy scaling: Go programs can be easily scaled, as they can be run on multiple machines, with no additional dependencies.
Easy deployment: Go programs can be easily deployed to a variety of environments, including cloud environments and containerized environments, with no additional dependencies.
Easy debugging: Go programs are easier to debug, as they can be run and debugged locally, with no additional dependencies.
35. Could you elaborate on the Go interface system and its significance?
Ans: Go's interface system is a mechanism for defining and implementing contracts between different parts of a Go program. An interface defines a set of methods that a type must implement in order to fulfill the interface contract. The interface system is important in Go because it promotes code reuse, abstraction, and modularity. By defining and implementing interfaces, Go programs can be decomposed into smaller, more manageable pieces, and the relationships between these pieces can be more easily managed and understood.
Go's interface system also provides a way to write code that is decoupled from the underlying implementation, allowing for more flexible and maintainable code. This is especially important in large, complex programs, where changes in one part of the code can have far-reaching effects on other parts of the code.
36. What is the struct and method system in Go, and how is it used?
Ans: Go's struct and method system is a mechanism for defining and using custom data types in Go programs. A struct is a composite data type that can contain a collection of fields, each of which holds a value. Methods are functions that are associated with a struct and can operate on its fields.
The struct and method system is used in Go to create custom data types that represent real-world entities, such as people, products, or orders. By creating custom data types, Go programs can be made more expressive and readable, and can more easily model the real-world entities that they are working with. Go's struct and method system also provides a way to encapsulate behavior and data, allowing for greater control over the implementation details of a type, and making it easier to reason about and test the behavior of a program.
37. Can you describe the Go-type system and how it is applied in real-world situations?
Ans: Go's type system is a mechanism for defining and using custom data types in Go programs. Go's type system provides a number of built-in data types, such as integers, strings, and booleans, as well as the ability to define custom data types, such as structs and interfaces. In practice, Go's type system is used to define custom data types that model real-world entities, such as people, products, or orders. This allows Go programs to be more expressive and readable, and to more easily model the real-world entities that they are working with.
Go's type system also provides a way to encapsulate behavior and data, allowing for greater control over the implementation details of a type, and making it easier to reason about and test the behavior of a program. Additionally, Go's type system supports polymorphism, which means that a single function or method can operate on values of different types, provided they implement the same interface. This allows for greater code reuse and flexibility, as well as making it easier to write generic algorithms that can operate on a wide range of data types.
The use of Go's type system also helps to enforce type safety, which is the idea that values of different types cannot be used interchangeably. This helps to prevent type-related errors, such as mismatched data types or values, and ensures that the program behaves as intended. Overall, Go's type system provides a powerful and flexible mechanism for defining and using custom data types in Go programs, and is a key aspect of Go's language design and implementation.
38. Why is Go's garbage collector important and how does it operate?
Ans: Go's garbage collector is a system for managing memory in Go programs. The garbage collector is responsible for automatically freeing memory that is no longer being used by a program. This frees the programmer from the burden of manually managing memory allocation and deallocation, and helps to prevent memory leaks and other related problems. The Go garbage collector works by periodically scanning the heap, which is the area of memory where Go programs allocate their data, and marking any objects that are still in use. Any objects that are not marked are considered garbage, and are eligible for collection and release. The garbage collector then frees the memory associated with these objects, making it available for future allocation.
Go's garbage collector is important for several reasons. First, it frees the programmer from the burden of manual memory management, which can be a complex and error-prone task. Second, it helps to prevent memory leaks, which can cause programs to consume more and more memory over time. Third, it helps to improve program performance, as garbage-collected programs can allocate memory more efficiently and dynamically, and can respond more quickly to changing memory requirements. Overall, Go's garbage collector is an essential part of Go's runtime system, and helps to make Go programs more robust, efficient, and manageable.
Golang Scenario-Based Interview Questions
39. How would you implement a distributed data processing system in Go?
Ans:
Use Go's net package to establish communication between nodes in the network.
Implement a data partitioning mechanism to divide the incoming data into smaller chunks that can be processed in parallel.
Use Go's concurrency primitives, such as goroutines and channels, to manage the processing of data chunks across multiple nodes.
Consider using a publish/subscribe pattern for inter-node communication and task coordination.
Implement a mechanism for collecting and aggregating the results from multiple nodes, and for combining them into a final result.
Ensure robust error handling and fault tolerance mechanisms are in place to prevent data loss and ensure data consistency.
40. How might a Go programme for real-time conversation be implemented?
Ans:
Use websockets to establish real-time communication between clients and the server.
Implement a messaging protocol for sending and receiving chat messages.
Use Go's concurrency primitives, such as goroutines and channels, to manage the flow of messages between clients and the server.
Consider implementing user authentication and authorization to control access to the chat room.
Implement a mechanism for storing chat history and ensuring message delivery reliability.
41. What is the best way to implement a job queue system in Go?
Ans:
Implement a database or data store to store incoming jobs and their metadata.
Use Go's concurrency primitives, such as goroutines and channels, to manage the flow of jobs from the queue to worker processes.
Consider implementing a task prioritization mechanism to ensure that important jobs are processed first.
Implement a mechanism for tracking the status of jobs and detecting and handling errors or exceptions.
Consider implementing a retry mechanism for failed jobs to ensure job completion.
42. How could a real-time analytics system be implemented in Go?
Ans:
Use Go's concurrency primitives, such as goroutines and channels, to process incoming data in real-time.
Implement a data storage mechanism, such as a database or data store, to store processed data.
Use Go's time and time-related packages to implement time-based data processing and analysis.
Consider using a publish/subscribe pattern for inter-node communication and task coordination.
Implement a mechanism for visualizing and reporting the processed data in real-time.
43. How would you implement a high-performance REST API in Go?
Ans:
Use Go's net/http package to implement HTTP handling and routing.
Implement a request handling mechanism to parse incoming requests, validate request data, and generate appropriate responses.
Consider using Go's middleware pattern to implement common request handling logic, such as authentication and authorization.
Implement a mechanism for handling and returning errors in a consistent and user-friendly manner.
Consider using caching mechanisms, such as in-memory caching or Redis, to improve API performance.
44. In Go, how might a recommendation engine be implemented?
Ans:
Implement a data storage mechanism, such as a database or data store, to store user data and preferences.
Use Go's data structures, such as arrays, slices, and maps, to store and manipulate data.
Implement a recommendation algorithm, such as collaborative filtering or content-based filtering, to generate recommendations.
Use Go's concurrency primitives, such as goroutines and channels, to manage the flow of data and computation.
Consider implementing real-time data processing and updating to ensure the recommendations stay fresh.
45. What steps would you take to set up a content management system in Go?
Ans:
Implement a data storage mechanism, such as a database or data store, to store the content and its metadata.
Use Go's net/http package to implement HTTP handling and routing for content management and retrieval.
Implement a user authentication and authorization mechanism to control access to the content.
Use Go's data structures and algorithms to implement content search and retrieval functionality.
Consider using a template engine, such as Go's html/template package, to separate the presentation logic from the content management logic.
Implement a mechanism for handling and storing version history of the content.
46. How would you implement a geolocation-based service in Go?
Ans:
Use a third-party geolocation API, such as MaxMind or Google Maps API, to retrieve geographical information based on IP addresses or coordinates.
Use Go's net/http package to handle HTTP requests and responses to and from the geolocation API.
Consider using Go's concurrency primitives, such as goroutines and channels, to manage the flow of requests and responses.
Implement a mechanism for storing and retrieving geolocation data for efficient subsequent lookups.
Consider implementing user authentication and authorization to control access to the geolocation service.
47. How does one set up a payment gateway in Go?
Ans:
Implement a payment processing mechanism, such as using a third-party payment gateway API, to handle payment transactions.
Use Go's net/http package to handle HTTP requests and responses to and from the payment gateway API.
Consider using Go's concurrency primitives, such as goroutines and channels, to manage the flow of payment transactions.
Implement a mechanism for storing and retrieving payment data and transaction history.
Consider implementing user authentication and authorization to control access to the payment gateway.
48. What steps would you take to develop a Go system for processing real-time stock market data?
Ans:
Use a third-party stock market API, such as Yahoo Finance or Alpha Vantage, to retrieve real-time stock market data.
Use Go's net/http package to handle HTTP requests and responses to and from the stock market API.
Consider using Go's concurrency primitives, such as goroutines and channels, to manage the flow of stock market data.
Implement a data storage mechanism, such as a database or data store, to store the processed stock market data.
Implement a mechanism for processing and analyzing the stock market data in real-time.
49. How could a popular web chat service be implemented in Go?
Ans:
Use Go's net/http package to handle HTTP requests and responses for chat messages.
Implement WebSockets, using Go's net/http package or a third-party package, to establish real-time communication between the client and server for chat messages.
Consider using Go's concurrency primitives, such as goroutines and channels, to manage the flow of chat messages.
Implement a data storage mechanism, such as a database or data store, to store chat messages and user information.
Consider implementing user authentication and authorization to control access to the chat application.
50. How would you implement a distributed task processing system in Go?
Ans:
Use Go's concurrency primitives, such as goroutines and channels, to manage the flow of tasks.
Implement a task queue, using Go's data structures or a third-party package, to store and manage tasks.
Consider using a message queue, such as RabbitMQ or Apache Kafka, to facilitate communication and task distribution among multiple worker nodes.
Implement a mechanism for monitoring task progress and handling task failures.
Consider implementing load balancing to distribute tasks evenly among worker nodes.
Golang FAQ’s
1. How to prepare for a Golang interview?
Ans: To prepare for a Golang interview, it's recommended to familiarize yourself with Go's syntax, data structures, concurrency, and standard library. You should also have a good understanding of the following topics: pointers, interface, error handling, garbage collection, and Go's strict typing. Practicing writing code, solving problems, and discussing your solutions with others will also help.
2. Why is Go frequently referred to as a post-OOP language?
Ans: Go is often referred to as a post-OOP language because it takes a different approach to solve problems compared to traditional OOP languages. Go emphasizes simplicity, concurrency, and scalability, and provides built-in support for concurrent programming with Goroutines and channels. Go's use of composition instead of inheritance, and its lack of classes, make it a different approach to solving problems compared to traditional OOP languages.
3. What are the several built-in supports in the Go language?
Ans: Go has several built-in supports, including:
Concurrency primitives, such as Goroutines and channels, to handle and manage concurrent processing.
A standard library that provides packages for various functions and features, such as net/http for handling HTTP requests, encoding/json for encoding and decoding JSON data, and fmt for formatting and printing output.
Garbage collection for automatic memory management.
Strict typing for improved code clarity and error handling.
Built-in support for testing, benchmarking, and profiling.
4. Is the Go language static or dynamic?
Ans: Go is a statically-typed language, which means that the type of a variable must be explicitly defined when it's declared and cannot change during runtime. This can lead to improved code clarity and error handling compared to dynamic typing.
5. Is Golang functional or Object-Oriented?
Ans: Go is not a functional language and does not have functional programming constructs, such as higher-order functions or immutability. However, it does provide some functional programming features, such as first-class functions, which can be used to write functional-style code. Go is often referred to as a procedural language, as it uses a procedural programming approach and emphasizes simplicity, concurrency, and scalability over object-oriented concepts.
Tips to clear the Golang Interview:
Brush up on Go's fundamentals: Go syntax, data structures, and standard library.
Master Go's concurrency: Goroutines, channels, and error handling.
Familiarize yourself with Go's strict typing and garbage collection.
Be prepared to compare Go's approach with other programming languages.
Practice and improve: Code writing, problem-solving, and hands-on experience with Go's tools and ecosystem.
Conclusion:
In conclusion, Go is a powerful and efficient programming language that is well-suited for large-scale, concurrent, and scalable applications. Clearing a Golang interview requires a solid understanding of Go's syntax, data structures, concurrency model, and standard library. It's important to be familiar with Go's strict typing and garbage collection, as well as its approach to solving problems compared to other programming languages. Practicing writing code, solving problems, and discussing your solutions with others can also help you prepare for a Golang interview. Overall, being knowledgeable, confident, and open to learning will help you perform well in a Golang interview.
A few years back, Burp Suite was used by over 80% of all security testers, and over 70% of Fortune 500 companies use this tool for security testing today. The Burp Suite Tutorial has been downloaded over four million times and is employed in more than 40000 security testing projects. So, learning about Burp Suit becomes crucial.
This Burp Suite Tutorial covers configuring Burp Suite, intercepting traffic, manipulating requests, and discovering vulnerabilities. Below, we have listed a comprehensive overview of the features, toolsets, and techniques available in Burp Suite. Let's understand the Burp Suite Tutorial for Beginners and how to use them to test web applications effectively. You may check Burp Suite's latest versions here.
Burp Suite is an effective web application tester for penetration prevention. It's employed by security experts to identify and exploit security holes in web-based applications for sever businesses. Burp Suite uses various techniques and functions, such as an intruder proxy web application scanner, a spider, and repetition. The repeater can alter requests as well as solve problems. So, Burp Suite has become a vital tool for security professionals and ethical hackers.
An introduction to the Burp Suite tutorial includes tools that cooperate to facilitate the entire testing process, starting with assessing and mapping the application's attack to discovering and exploiting security holes. It offers features like web application scanning and automated spidering, manual tools to probe and manipulate web-based applications, an intruder to brute force parameters, extensibility of custom scripting, and integration with various devices. It's designed to be simple and user-friendly, which makes it a perfect option for security professionals.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Burp Suite? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Burp Suite Training to get Job Ready!
Features of the Burp Suite
1) Scanner:
One of the capabilities of the Burp Suite tutorial is the Scanner. Through scanners, experts find weaknesses in web applications through automated processes for identifying and exploiting vulnerabilities that are known to be vulnerable. It can perform the active scanning of the application, which can include the operation of fuzzing, identifying weaknesses and exploiting them, conducting authentication scans, and much more. It is an effective tool utilized by security researchers and ethical hackers to identify and fix flaws in software before malicious hackers target them.
2) Application-Aware spider:
Application-Aware spider is a component of the Burp Suite that provides an automated and efficient method for identifying the contents of web-based applications. It can detect specific behaviours and content, including hidden parameters, APIs with back-ends and dynamic range. It also conducts an extensive analysis of the application's response and can identify and investigate the structure of the application. Additionally, it detects and exploits specific vulnerabilities to the application, such as cross-site scripting and SQL injection, to discover new attack vectors. In turn, it helps to detect and address security concerns within web-based applications.
3) Intruder:
Another capability in Burp Suite is intruders that detect and exploits web vulnerabilities in applications. Intruder permits users to use custom attack payloads to attack the target application. It can identify vulnerabilities in authentication bypass, SQL injection attacks, Cross-Site Scripting (XSS) attacks, and other web-based security vulnerabilities in applications. Intruders can also support a variety of fuzzing and encryption methods used to create malicious requests. The Burp Suite's Intruder feature is an essential component of any web-based application's security audit and helps identify and exploit the weaknesses of web applications.
4) Repeater:
The Burp Repeater lets you alter requests manually and then play them back. The repeater offers a user-friendly design interface to create and change requests. It also allows you to manipulate and evaluate responses quickly. It can troubleshoot problems, perform manual security testing, and automate the exploitation of discovered vulnerabilities. The repeater can also assist in manipulating requests with an advanced scripting language. It is a useful and efficient tool for testing security.
5) Sequencer:
Sequencer is an automated function of Burp Suite designed to test whether session tokens have random properties created by web applications by analyzing the entropy of tickets. It is implemented by sending several queries to the app and recording the session tokens in the responses. It then conducts an analysis statistic of the receipts to determine the probability of randomness. Sequencer is a helpful tool for security professionals who want to guarantee the security of web-based apps and safeguard them from session fixation and other attacks.
6) Comparer and Decoder:
Comparer and Decoder are beneficial features of Burp Suite. Comparer is a tool used to analyze different inputs, like HTTP queries or replies, to detect the differences between the two. It can help see the differences between responses to requests and other web-based application data. A decoder is a software tool that can decode data in different formats, like URL-encoded, base64 encoded, or hex encoded. Decoders can also convert various kinds of data into text humans can read, for example, HTML, XML, and JSON. The two Comparers, along with Decoder, are vital tools utilized by security testers of web-based applications to discover and analyze possible security vulnerabilities.
Enterprise Edition of Burp Suite
Enterprise Edition of Burp Suite is a toolbox and capabilities designed to aid in automated security testing of web applications. It offers advanced scanning for vulnerabilities, automatized penetration testing, and reports. It allows teams of testers to analyze and test web applications in a teamwork and automated way.
The Enterprise Edition of Burp Suite performs security testing on websites like assessing vulnerability, auditing compliance and penetration tests. It is designed to help organizations test their web applications' security and ensure they are secure from malicious attacks. It allows organizations to swiftly find and correct any flaws in their web-based applications, as well as provide the assurance that their web applications are secure.
Burp Suite Enterprise Edition is simple to use and cost-effective. It offers a quick and secure method for companies to test the level of security for their website applications and ensure they are safe from malicious attacks. It is the ideal solution for businesses that require verification for security issues with their website applications swiftly and effectively.
Professional Edition of Burp Suite
Burp Suite Professional Edition is a powerful security testing tool utilized by pen testers and security experts. It's designed to find vulnerabilities in web-based apps, websites and mobile applications with advanced options like automated scanning, advanced manual testing and integration of third-party tools. Additionally, it provides comprehensive reports that allow you to monitor progress and pinpoint issues.
Security professionals and pen testers use Burp Suite Professional Edition to ensure the security of web applications. It helps identify and fix security issues before they become problems. It allows organizations to comply with security rules and standards, such as the OWASP Top 10. It can also identify and remove malicious content from a website or application.
Burp Suite Professional Edition is also used to assess the safety of mobile apps. It helps to find weaknesses that attackers can exploit. It also helps ensure that applications are safe before making them available to the general public.
Burp Suite Professional Edition is a must-have instrument for security professionals and pen testers. It helps identify and fix security issues, ensures compliance with security regulations, and tests the security of mobile applications.
Community Edition of Burp Suite
Burp Suite Community Edition is an open-source and free web security testing platform for applications. This platform offers a collection of tools for various security-related tasks for web-based applications and web-based services. It is a popular tool for security professionals because it provides an array of options to assist them in their security checks.
In the Burp Suite Community Edition, the users can conduct manual checks, automate tests, and utilize the robust Burp Suite Proxy feature to modify and intercept traffic. It also has options like an intruder and spider that can detect vulnerabilities, such as SQL injection and XSS.
Furthermore, Burp Suite Community Edition generates reports and identifies potential security issues. In short, Burp Suite Community Edition is a powerful and comprehensive security tool that detects and prevents security issues in web applications.
Burp Suite supports the entire testing process, from initial mapping and analysis of an application's attack surface to finding and exploiting security vulnerabilities. Burp Suite is a standalone application and a plugin for various other platforms.
1) Downloading and installation of Burp Suite
To install Burp Suite, download the latest version from the official website.
Once downloaded, you can run the installation wizard to install Burp Suite and open Burp Suite software (During the installation, you will select the components you wish to install and the install location for Burp Suite).
After the installation, you can start using Burp Suite by launching the application from the start menu.
Main interface
It's the primary interface of the Burp Suite that you'll see after you start the program, divided into six parts with several panels that you can work with:
Tab 1 provides tools and options available to perform various actions based on the current circumstances.
Tab 2 displays the sitemap view, updated when you manually visit the websites or by spidering the sites using Burp Proxy.
Tab 3 displays the requests sent to the URLs present on the sitemap view.
Tab 4 provides information about HTTP requests and responses, which can be reviewed in depth by selecting the particular query from the queue of requests.
Tab 5 is the section where you can see the vulnerabilities and the other functional issues with the website by choosing the specific website from the sitemap view.
Tab 6 is the section in which issues are described in depth about how they impact the areas the most, how severe they are, and the best way to fix the situation.
Configuring outbound SOCKS Proxy
Sometimes in the context of your project, it is possible to redirect all of your Burp Suite web traffic via an outbound SOCKS proxy. It ensures that all traffic to the web application you want to access will pass through the SOCKS proxy instead of your IP address.
To set it up for configuration, access the user Options tab within section 1, as mentioned prior, then click on the Connection tab and then go to the section labelled by the name SOCKS Proxy and input information about your SOCKS Proxy in the area.
2) Intercepting the HTTP/S Traffic
When utilizing the Burp Suite as a proxy, it is necessary to set up the broker to ensure it is operational. Otherwise, it will be unable to record and display the URLs or data transmitted or received by the server. This Burp Suite tutorial has provided ways to set up your Burp Proxy in the browser. In section 1, click the Proxy tab and then click on the Options tab on the second row. You will find the Proxy Listener section labelled in which you can enter the proxy information of your local machine to take the traffic.
After the proxy configuration has been completed within the Burp Suite tutorial, navigate to your browser and configure the proxy settings to ensure that the browsers forward the traffic directly to Burp Suite. Since Internet Explorer and Chrome share identical proxy settings, they will appear across both anytime you alter the settings in either.
When you open Chrome, you must go into Settings > Advanced Settings > System > Open Proxy Settings, and then enter the same proxy details you input in Burp Suite.
Alternatively, with Chrome, you can install an extension called Proxy SwitchySharp that lets you establish the proxy and later change between the no proxy settings or the proxy settings with one click.
The next step is the Firefox configuration section; it doesn't share its proxy with any other program and uses its configuration to use the broker. To set the proxy settings within Firefox, it is necessary to go into Options and then Networks, then General Settings, and then input the proxy information that you input in Burp Suite.
Alternatively, with Firefox, it is possible to install an extension called FoxyProxy that lets you define the proxy and change between the proxy settings and no proxy configurations in one click.
3. Configuring Intercept
The proxy intercept feature configures the other element of the Burp Suite tutorial. It is essential to configure and set it up to intercept, capture or reject the request to or from the server hosting the site you like to target. To set it up, you will need to go through the Proxy tab, then in the sub-tabs, then go to Options, and then to the second and third sections known as Intercept client request and Intercept Server Request. You will need to set the rules according to them.
Let them be the default setting, as they're well-suited to that. In comparison, the Interceptor can be used to function like the Man in the Middle and controlled via proxy > intercept.
4. Configuring the target scope
The next step is the method by which the Burp Suite will analyze the intended application by examining the application's GETs and post requests. Before beginning any testing, it's recommended to establish the scope first. When you place a web-based application into its content, Burp, you can focus on the specific web application. Executing any procedure against the area will only focus on those web application(s) included within the scope.
It ensures that any potentially damaging website or payload(s) won't be able to access any application on the internet that is not yours to use. Select the Target tab and select the Scope sub-tab. Click Add and enter the URL of your target that you have the authority to test and determine your scope.
5. Searching for a specific term
You can count on Burp Suite to make complex tasks simple for you. Searching any phrase or keyword in the vast amount of information and data is achievable by typing a search term. It is useful when searching for information such as usernames or passwords from the results pages for bugs, as we have done to find the "test" and have found the "test" parameter, which we will further analyze in the future.
If you are looking for a distinctive phrase or keyword in the data in the Request or Response, you must pick an option from the Request Queue. Then, navigate to either the Request tab or the Response tab from the account you want to search and then Enter your desired keywords in the text box below. The text will be highlighted in yellow to highlight the words that match your query keyword.
6. Using the spider
In the language of the internet, the term spider refers to an action where a robot connects on the web and then crawls through the various websites accessible in the web application that is targeted. The pages the spider goes through within the particular web application will be updated on the Sitemap, which is found in section 2 in the interface's main area.
To get the spider to start at any given host, click on the Spider tab in section 1. Then, under the Control tab, choose your scope first. In the following Burp Suite, we have set the extent that we have previously set within the Burp Suite and then hit the Spider running button to start it.
7. Using the Repeater
The Repeater tab is one of the most useful functions within the Burp Suite. It is used multiple times during the duration of a penetration test. It permits you to alter any aspect of the HTTP request, including its header, and monitor the behaviour of the data that comes back from the server.
To send and process a request to the repeater, you must select and right-click on any request from the queue of Requests and then select "Send to Repeater". Alternatively, you can use a shortcut key, Command + R, to complete this process.
Click on the "Repeater" tab, and then modify the settings you want to make to the HTTP request. In the following Burp Suite, we changed the parameter's value from 1 to 100 and then clicked the Go button. You will see the responses from the server for web applications in response to the request that you modified.
8. Using the Intruder
The intruder can be used when you run a computerized test instead of a manual test. The Burp Intruder is a useful tool for automating or semi-targeted fuzzing. It can be targeted against any parameters of the HTTP request simultaneously.
To process and send a request in the intruder, it is necessary to select and right-click on one of the requests in the Request queue and then select "Send To Intruder". A shortcut key can also be used by pressing Control + I to accomplish the task.
Go into the Intruder tab and select your presently active Intruder instance. Click on the tab titled Positions. The location of the input for the payload is already marked through Burp Suite. You are unrestricted to choose your option of position or any location suggested by the Burp Suite. In the Burp Suite, we are following the Burp Suite offered classes.
Head to the Payloads tab, select the kind of payload you desire to target against a particular area, and press "Start attack" or click the "Start attacking" button. It will then push all payloads to that input parameter and display the outcomes in detail.
9. Decoder
The Decoder feature can be used to encode or decode the data by operating different kinds of encoding techniques. It is possible to input encoded text into the encoded field and convert it to plaintext or any other type of encoding you prefer. For this Burp Suite, we have decoded a Base64 encoded string and then cracked it to plaintext. It is likely to do the same reverse.
10. Comparer
The Comparer is a component of the Burp Suite used to compare any two responses, requests, or other types of information. It is useful to compare the reactions using different outcomes or inputs. The comparison will be displayed by highlighting the colour.
11. Saving the Burp Session
A lot of times during a penetration test, you will need to stop or hold the test and then continue it anytime later. Alternatively, you could be asked to give your session to another security analyst. In these scenarios, the most efficient alternative is to create a backup of your session which can be done by choosing.
"Save the old state file" in the menu Burp on the top.
It will deliver an unstructured file you can recreate at any time or share with any consultant.
Checking for vulnerabilities with Burp Suite
Burp Suite is a means for detecting vulnerabilities as it lets security experts see and exploit vulnerabilities on the web quickly and efficiently. It offers a broad set of tools that can be utilized to analyze, detect and use a variety of security vulnerabilities in web applications.
Burp Suite can be described as a combined platform with several tools, including an interception proxy, a web-based application scanner, an automated spider, and an application fuzzer. These tools can monitor, modify, and analyze web traffic and identify potential security threats. The proxy feature lets security professionals observe the responses and requests between a browser and a web server, which allows them to detect and stop malicious requests. This will enable them to see security weaknesses that could be vulnerable, for example, SQL injection or cross-site scripting (XSS) and Cross-Site Request Forgery (CSRF).
The scanner feature in Burp Suite will automatically scan web-based applications for weaknesses, like insufficient patches or misconfigurations. Additionally, it provides comprehensive reports that enable security experts to spot and fix security vulnerabilities quickly. The spider feature in Burp Suite can scan web pages and find security concerns that could be a problem. The fuzzier part is used to assess the security of an application by supplying unanticipated inputs and identifying any unpredictable behaviour.
Burp Suite is a strong tool that allows security professionals to rapidly and effectively detect and exploit web-based application security problems. It's an excellent tool for identifying and using security holes.
Benefits of Burp Suite
Burp Suite is an effective tool that has multiple uses. It allows manual and automated testing of vulnerabilities and can be used to identify and exploit security flaws.
Following are the few benefits of Burp Suite:
1) Improved Productivity
Employing automated workflows and tools makes it possible to accelerate the web-based applications' testing process. Expert assistance with remediation and a boost in productivity by coordinating busy workloads is also achieved.
2) Robust Integration
Burp Suite can be integrated with ticketing systems. Additionally, feedback from CI/CD can be beneficial to developers.
3) Automated Processing
With automated processes, you can discover more vulnerabilities in web-based applications by analyzing them.
4) Vast Extensions
Burp Suite allows for customizing BApps for professional use and robust APIs, increasing scanning effectiveness.
5) Better reporting
Scanning may be carried out at a large scale, thanks to the help of HTML or XML scan reports. Furthermore, easy dashboards display complete scan reports.
Conclusion:
Overall, Burp Suite delivers a comprehensive set of elements that can help identify and exploit web application vulnerabilities. It is a powerful tool that can be used to determine, analyze, and control security flaws in web applications.
In this article, we have covered a lot of details regarding the Burp Suite tutorial. Hopefully, after reading this piece, you will be satisfied with executing a web application penetration test.
1f:T793d,
Facets tools are the widely used tool that is broadly being used for billing, enrolment of new members, claim processing, and customer service in hospitals. It is a visualization tool that is used for finding models in datasets. Its features, like its dependability and real-time processing, make it quite popular these days.
Additionally, Facets also offers advanced analytics and reporting capabilities, allowing organizations to gain insights into their data and make informed business decisions. It also provides a user-friendly interface, making it easy for users to access and manage their data. With its robust security features, organizations can be assured that their sensitive data is protected. Overall, Facets is a versatile platform that provides a wide range of benefits to healthcare organizations and plays a critical role in improving the efficiency and quality of healthcare delivery.
In this article, we have divided the 40 most common Facets interview questionsinto three categories that will help you face the interview fearlessly.
Ans: The facets tool is the central administrative processing system built by Cognizant in 1993 to operate on hospital and medical transactions and claims from the facility. Claims processing, care management, billing, and network management workflow are all assisted by it. And currently, it is processing more than 80 health plans with millions of transactions per week as claims, consumers, care, and revenue management all are combined into this single platform.
2. List the use of Facets.
Ans: The facets tool is broadly used in the following places:
Billing - It can bring out complete billing requests, billing summaries, payments, etc.
Customer Transparency - It is generally used where transparency is required for cost projections, benefits, and eligibility.
Enrollment - ID card requests are created when a new member is enrolled, demographic details are updated, and others.
Claim Processing - It assists with real-time claim submission and processing.
Interoperability - It provides an integrated outlook and access to consumer expectations.
Customer Service- Real-time managing of customer service operations.
3. List the modules of Facets.
Ans: Numerous modules are offered by the Facets tool. A few of them include NetworX, billing, subscribers/members, medical, providers, etc.
4. What are the advantages of Facets?
Ans: The advantages of the Facets tool are:
The performance of the Facets tool is dependable.
It has the ability for real-time processing.
It can generate and consume huge amounts of information.
The level of stability is increased.
Each stage of the life cycle has built-in security.
It has enhanced resilience to disruptions.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Facets? Enroll in Instructor-Led live "Facets Training" to get Job Ready!
5. How do Facets achieve real-time processing?
Ans: 'Facets Data Publishing' is an event-driven architecture that uses a data streaming platform. The system can publish real-time data generated by claims, providers, and subscribers. By using data through batch or real-time procedures, the clients can consume or publish data.
6. Give the differences between hospital claims and medical claims.
Ans: Medical claims, also known as professional claims, are submitted by the clinic or the individual provider for the person's hospital treatment. The claims submitted by hospitals is the hospital claim which is also known as facility claims.
7. How can you adjudicate a claim?
Ans: To adjudicate a claim, the F3 button in the Facets tool is used.
8. How can you spend a claim?
Ans: With the help of the F5 button in the Facets tool, we can spend a claim.
9. Why do we need to spend a claim?
Ans: We can spend a claim when the claim needs to be paid as anticipated.
10. How can you save a claim?
Ans: With the help of F4 button in the Facets tool, we can save a claim.
11. What are the fields are on claims screen?
Ans: The fields on a claims screen are as follows:
Subscriber id
Provider id
Diagnosis code
Date of service
Procedure code
Revenue code
Number of units
Unit price.
12. What are the stylistic properties?
Ans: Stylistic properties are optional property that controls the elements of Facet Dive with stylistic aspects.
13. What are Facets used?
Ans: Facets offer unique and valuable options for the search results pages so that when users visit the catalogue and search for browse categories or products, they can see where they have landed in the catalogue.
Facets Interview Questions for Freshers
14. What is the difference between revenue code and procedure code?
Ans: The revenue code is used by hospital claims only and determines how much the revenue code costs. The procedure code is used by medical claims only, and it is used to price medical claims.
15. Can facets integrate with other systems?
Ans: Facets can easily integrate with other systems by operating REST-based APIs.
16. List the common errors faced while processing claims in Facets.
Ans: The common errors faced while processing claims in Facets are:
Procedure code invalid
Service definition error
Provider record not found
17. Facets tool is built upon what technologies?
Ans: The facets tool is built upon 'ARCSS technologies.
18. Explain Facets insights.
Ans: Facets insights are built on machine learning models. It is used to forecast the possibility of a member leaving the plan. It also helps in recommending a cure to the representative who handles the member.
19. Explain about Closed loop feedback?
Ans: The closed-loop feedback system regularly learns, which results in a decrease in errors and an increase in accuracy and stability. With a feedback system, the performance becomes more reliable, and resilience to disturbances increases.
20. What companies use Facets?
Ans: The companies that use Trizetto Facets are based in the USA, all in the computer software industry. Davita Inc and Lorven Technologies use Trizetto Facets.
21. What is a Facet quality engineer?
Ans: Facet quality engineer works with software and operations teams for continuous improvement in product development. A quality engineer should also have good communication skills to assist and support the team.
22. What are the four Facet Dive controls?
Ans: The four facet dive controls are:
Faceting controls that organize the record in a grid manner.
Colour controls help you to select specific colors.
Display controls help decide which dive should be supplied at a specific location.
Positioning controls help place the objects in a scatter plot.
23. Name any four interactive properties in Facet Dive.
Ans: The four interactive properties in Facet Dive are:
Vertical bucket
Vertical facet
Horizontal Facet
Horizontal bucket
24. How can you position the items along the axis with Facet interactions?
Ans: Vertical position and horizontal position are the two properties.
Vertical position: Vertical position is used to position the elements along the vertical axis.
Horizontal position: Horizontal position is used to position the elements along the Horizontal axis.
25. What is Seaborn FacetGrid?
Ans: The Seaborn is a fictitious entity. The FacetGrid class helps in the mapping of one variable's distribution, as well as multiple variables' relationships. Utilizing the data set as its source, the FacetGrid object appoints the values to row, column and colour segmentations.
26. Name the parameters of the Seaborn FacetGrid map method.
Ans: The parameters of the Seaborn FacetGrid map method are as follows:
Args - It is the name of the column that depicts the variable on the plot.
Func - it is a charting function which accepts the data and argument.
Kwargs - it is a keyword argument which is given to the plotting function.
Facets Interview Questions for Experienced
27. Name the important fields to process a claim.
Ans: The important fields that should be filled in to process a claim are Amount, submission date, Subscriber number, Date of service, Provider Number, and Number of units.
28. What do you know about Medicare and Medicaid programs?
Ans: Medicare is a government-run healthcare insurance program for people who cross over the age of 65, and their medical expenses are paid by Trust funds. Medicaid is an assistance program federally funded and run by local and state governments. It serves people of all ages who have low incomes and are poor.
29. What are Facet optimization software products?
Ans: For the IT teams to fine-tune the Facets tools according to the customer needs, the following optimization methods are offered:
Configuration migration utility for Facets
Facets enrollment toolkit
Claim test pro
Test data generator
Supplemental mapping management tool for Facets
Security management tool for Facets
30. What is Facet in Drupal?
Ans: The Facet module offers a straightforward way to create and manage faceted search experiences on websites. Not only do they come with pre-made UI components, but developers can also produce their custom widgets, which they can submit to Drupal.org. Furthermore, these facets are compatible with Drupal Core Search and the popular Search API, allowing code and settings to be repurposed for these two leading search solutions.
31. What is the data limit and loading speed while using Facets?
Ans: The data limit for Facets Dive is up to 10,000 records, and there is no limit for loading speed for data files, and the user must be patient to wait until the file opens.
32. Which attribute is used to generate the data-specific color palette?
Ans: The "palette choice" four values, i.e., warm, calm, assist, and standard, is used to generate the data-specific color palette.
33. Which attribute is used to position the items in grid cells?
Ans: The interactive "position mode" is used with scatter and stacked options to position the items in grid cells.
34. What is Facets Atlasmaker?
Ans: Facets Atlasmaker is a terminal tool and a library for building sprite atlases.
35. What are the functionalities of Atlasmaker?
Ans: The functionalities of Atlasmaker are as follows:
Altering and changing the size of the images
Fetching of the image and changes can be done together.
Usage of the default image file when Atlas's alteration and recovery of the image are failed.
To read a local file as input and a picture file from the URL.
36. By what technologies can a customer benefit from the Facets solution?
Ans: Customers with modern tools and abilities can use the Facets tool.
To give insights automatically, artificial intelligence and machine learning are used in Facets.
Container technologies decrease the development cost and time as the technology is used to make the Facets lighter.
Cloud Facets can scale due to the cloud's scalability.
37. What are the things an overview tool displays after uploading the data?
Ans: The four items that are displayed in the overview tool after uploading the data are:
Data statistics like Median, Min, Max, and Standard Deviation.
The missing values are the rows with no data.
Zero values which is the fraction of the information.
Training and Testing split is a graph that displays how the data set is divided.
38. Can you display high-resolution images?
Ans: One can view a limited count of high-resolution images, which is dependent on the browser capacity of the computer. Also, it depends on the size of the sprite atlas you access in Facets Dive.
Facets FAQs
1. What is a facet interview?
Ans: Using Facets, a management tool used to operate on medical and hospital transactions, and being skilled in answering some of the common Facets testing questions for interviews can enhance your chances for success in the interview.
2. What are facets in healthcare?
Ans: Facets is a central administration solution developed by TriZetto for health plans. Facets came from the requirement for a solution that made the health plans adapt to new industry drift without system restrictions. It includes different aspects of healthcare like healthcare costs, healthcare services, etc., and automates administrative tasks like billing, care management, claim processing, and network management workflow. Facets information technology has helped the healthcare industry with changes like members' requirements for personalized health information, security challenges, and many more.
3. What are the 3 Facets?
Ans: The three facets are problem method, problem structure, and problem solution.
4. How does facets work?
Ans: The Facets workflow application is an automated arrangement that smoothens the work outcome for users automates manual work, and helps improve analytic business processes. Facets can help enhance efficacy, reduce errors, and improve customer satisfaction.
5. What is facets in software testing?
Ans: Claims processing, care management, billing and network management workflow are all automated and assisted by enterprise-wide core solutions, i.e., Facets. But to utilize Facets completely, configuration per the organization's need is required, and software testing and security of the same is most important before going live.
Tips to clear the Facets interview
The impression that you make on the interviewer is very critical. The ability to communicate, basic social skills, attitude, education, and experience are a few traits that the interviewer evaluates. A few tips to clear the Facets interview are:
Prepare yourself well enough with knowledge for the post you are applying for.
Always be on time.
Even if you are nervous, don't be embarrassed about it.
Always try and close the interview on a positive note.
Prepare some questions on your own to ask the interviewer in advance.
Listen carefully to each word of the interviewer.
Be focused and greet the interviewer with a smile.
Be truthful to the interviewer.
Conclusion:
The facets tool is widely used to operate the hospital, make medical transactions, and make claims from the facility. Currently, it is processing over 80 health plans with millions of transactions per week as claims, consumers, care, and revenue management. The developers continue to contribute to its development and provide support.
Above mentioned are the 40 most common Facets interview questions and answers that will help you prepare effectively and perform well in Facets interviews. Please go through them to make a good impression on the interviewer. So go through it! And you will succeed in the interview.
20:T7073,
Guidewire Data Platform is designed to ingest petabytes of data in near real-time from guidewire and third-party source systems, unify, transform, and curate this data, and provide services and APIs to access this curated data in raw format or as business intelligence visualizations.
Multiple curation engines running in the unified data platform automatically curate ingested data and feed a diverse set of advanced business analytics and AI/ML SaaS solutions. Because of its extensive R&D team and partner ecosystem, it is used by more than 500 insurers - from new ventures to larger and more popular ones around the world. Thus, Guidewire developers will have a promising career and massive demand.
So, if you prepare well and crack the interview, you can get a prominent job. In this blog on Guidewire Interview Questions, we have combined the most commonly asked Guidewire interview questions for freshers and experienced in job interviews for different job roles in top companies like pwc, Capgemini, Accenture, etc. Go through these questions to ace the job interviews, and before you attend, review the interview call letter format to understand key details like timing and location.
These questions were divided into a few categories:
Ans: A guidewire is a high-level application for the insurance industry; insurers primarily use it worldwide to reduce IT operations and simplify transactions. Guidewire Software strives for maximum scalability and versatility. It also allows insurance companies to provide better service to policyholders and representatives, increase market share, and lower operating costs.
2) What exactly is the insurance coverage?
Ans: Insurance coverage denotes that when a person purchases a protection strategy, the guarantee will be covered by the insurance company for a specific sum for themselves or the items for which they bought the protection strategy, for which they will be paying expenses to the insurance company.
3) How many modules are there in guidewire?
Ans: ClaimCenter, PolicyCenter, and BillingCenter are the three primary programming items that overhaul a significant portion of a P&C protection transporter. Numerous additional modules and an expanding number of value-added online administrations are accessible through Guidewire Live.
4) What exactly is a policy center?
Ans: PolicyCenter, at its heart, disseminates pertinent information about a plan and manages a collection of processes that, if completed efficiently, result in policy changes. Policy modifications include:
Creating a new method.
Revitalizing an existing strategy for a new term.
Even canceling a policy.
The device determines the purchase price of each policy (including a chauffeur to an automobile policy).
5) How do you set up the policy center?
Ans: Design PolicyCenter to meet your business needs using Guidewire Studio as the collaborative improvement environment (IDE). For more information on designing, creating rules, and using Gosu, consult the following resources:
Guide to PolicyCenter Configuration
PolicyCenter Rules Manual
Gosu Reference Manual
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Guidewire? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Guidewire Training to get Job Ready!
6) What precisely is a dynamic product model?
Ans: PolicyCenter is a dynamic item that can be determined, created, and implemented in weeks. The item style for each product specifies what can be given for that item. An auto policy would undoubtedly include information about accident insurance coverage and uninsured vehicle driver property damage coverage. The studio makes it simple to configure your business logic.
7) How would you describe policy center users?
Ans: Customers in PolicyCenter come in a variety of shapes and sizes. To respond to questions, customers typically expend a significant amount of energy working on system trades or investigating the status of a methodology. Customers search for an interaction record and view open data through the UI, so information analysis is critical.
8) How can we make the policy center a success?
Ans: Market requirements PolicyCenter's ability to make quick item definition and work process changes helps you respond to administrative changes, advance business measures, and accelerate an ideal opportunity to showcase new items.
PolicyCenter helps you improve communications with specialists and policyholders, reliably pass on hunger, and provide better client administration.
9) What exactly is Designer API?
Ans: The Designer API excels at simplifying the inputs required for data curation. The designer understands how to inspect the metadata of a Data Platform data product and provide the curation engine with all the information required to publish a new curated Data Product. The API accepts simple SQL input and builds an execution plan in the curation engine to materialize a new data view. This plan may include joining data from multiple datasets, filtering data based on certain criteria, or aggregating data into a de-normalized view. The designer can also manage both streaming and batch modes of operation (streaming is the default).
10) Define Curation Engines.
Ans: The focus of data ingestion is on raw data sources. On the other hand, making sense of that raw data and creating views that are useful for downstream consumption takes time and effort. To make creating curated views easier, Data Platform includes multiple curation engines and a Designer API interface. Views published by the curation engine are registered as new Data Products and are ingested and cataloged in the same way as any other data product.
Guidewire Policy Center Interview Questions
11) What distinguishes lines from products?
Ans: The two lines are general responsibility and business property. If you have a business, you can purchase an overall obligation item that includes the comprehensive responsibility line. It is a multi-line item as opposed to a monoline item. On the other hand, a backup plan can sell various items with similar lines or lines.
12) What exactly are search contacts?
Ans: The Search Contacts screen displays a list of contacts with whom you can collaborate. To access the Contact Details screen, tap the contact's name. This screen contains the tabs that go with it. Contact information, addresses, accounts, policies, and outstanding work orders.
13) What does the term 'Indemnity' mean?
Ans: In insurance, the term “indemnity” is used to cover the loss or damage claimed by another person. For example, the gym owner has indemnity insurance to compensate customers in the event of injury or accident and avoid financial loss resulting from a lawsuit.
14) What exactly is subrogation?
Subrogation is obtaining reimbursement from the responsible party for a claim that has already been paid. For example, if your car is damaged in an accident and you have car insurance, the insurance company will pay you the money.
15) What five words best describe you, guidewire?
Ans: The hiring manager asks for this because he/she wants to learn more about your unique personality. This list can tell her much about who you are and how you might fit in at work. Your response also tells the manager about your self-perception, which is a good predictor of the type of employee you will be.
16) With our software, we strive for continuous delivery and continuous deployment at Guidewire Software.
Ans: End users rely on software updates to stay ahead of the competition in the industries in which guidewire Software operates. Guidewire Software uses continuous delivery and deployment for its customers to ensure that updates happen as quickly and smoothly as possible. Please discuss what you know about these processes as a software architect, why they are essential, and what experience you have with them in response to this question.
17) What are the most essential skills for a Guidewire Software Engineer?
Ans: This question is an excellent way to demonstrate to the interviewer that you understand what it takes to succeed in your role. When responding to this question, highlight relevant skills and describe how they will help you succeed.
18) What words would you use to describe your communication style?
Ans: Guidewire is a multinational corporation operating in the United States, Canada, and Europe. The interviewer may ask how you would modify your communication style to work with people from other cultures. Describe your ability to communicate effectively across borders and time zones.
19) How long have you been working in Java development?
Ans: This question is an excellent way to assess your knowledge of the Java programming language. If you have yet to gain prior experience, you must explain how you would quickly learn and apply new skills. If you do have prior experience, you can talk about how you learned in previous roles that will help you succeed at guidewire.
Ans: The Guidewire Cloud Integration Framework enables developers to build integrations between InsuranceSuite and third-party apps by leveraging a variety of APIs, messaging systems, and protocols.
Advanced Guidewire Testing Interview Questions
21) What exactly is the Guidewire Billing Center?
Ans: Guidewire BillingCenter is a sophisticated web-based billing system enabling insurance companies to manage customer relationships effectively while streamlining the premium collection process. It automates billing, promotes customer retention, and protects sensitive customer data.
22) What exactly is insurance coverage?
Ans: Insurance coverage is the risk or loss an insurance policy covers or protects. Insurance coverage assists insured individuals in recovering from losses caused by unexpected health issues, car accidents, damaged property, etc.
23) What are Guidewire's main products?
Ans: Guidewire primarily provides three products that each serve a specific purpose:
ClaimCenter for Guidewire
PolicyCenter at Guidewire
BillingCenter by Guidewire
24) What are the primary benefits of using Guidewire software?
Ans: The following are some of the benefits that an organization can gain from using guidewire:
Contributes to the development of new and innovative policies
Pay premiums on time.
Create and send policyholders automated alerts
Reduce operational costs.
Make data-driven choices.
Provide better and faster service to customers.
25) How do you handle policy?
Ans: You create and manage strategies using a web interface. You create work requests (or occupations) on this virtual Desktop that measure processes differently. Accommodation, issuance, strategy change, recharging, undoing, restoring, revamping, and reviewing are all careers.
26) What are the skill sets required for data conversion?
Ans: Information transformation to guidewire necessitates specific jobs and skills. Our experience suggests that effective information transformations necessitate the right knowledge in the right places. Guidewire information planners, information transformation subject matter experts, business investigators, information examiners, remove, change, load (ETL) engineers, ETL analyzers, useful analyzers, project managers, and information the board and conveyance subject matter experts are among them.
27) What exactly is data ingestion?
Ans: Data Platform offers Data Registration and Ingestion APIs for data producers to register and capture real-time streaming data. One of our initial objectives was to stream every event/change from the Guidewire InsuranceSuite products (such as ClaimCenter, PolicyCenter, and BillingCenter) to the Data Platform in near real-time. To achieve this goal, we looked at proven data collection technologies used in our Live Analytics products, such as Kafka Connect and Kafka. We provided an interface for other Guidewire applications to begin publishing structured data for integration using Kafka as our initial offering for ingestion.
28) How does streaming work?
Ans: To stream CDC data to Kafka, the Data Platform employs the open-source frameworks Apache Kafka Connect and Debezium. Other open-source connectors are being considered to expand our CDC streaming options. The configuration of these connectors is automated; all you need to do is register a Data Product producer and database connection information...! That Data Platform handles the rest of the configuration!
29) Explain Schema Evolution.
Ans: The schema is the most critical piece of metadata that we track for systems (via schema-on-write). The rest of the Data Platform also uses schema to tag sensitive data at the field level. The Catalog service tracks and stores every version of every schema written, allowing it to reconstruct any record ingested into the Guidewire Data Platform at any time.
30) What exactly is a Data Lake?
Ans: All data ingested into the Guidewire Data Platform is processed and stored in a long-term storage format using AWS technologies such as Lake Formation, S3, and Glue, which enable infinite scalability. Data Platform supports "Lake Formation-izing" data, which allows for the generation of fine-grained security access rules. Lake Formation is a relatively new AWS service that aims to combine the scalability of S3 with the low-level security policies found in traditional data stores. Data stored in S3 can be "Lake Formation-ized," which allows for allotment.
Guidewire FAQs
1) Is Guidewire a technology?
Ans: Guidewire is an enterprise software company serving the insurance and financial services industries. In its nearly 15-year history, the guidewire has created a leading system to help insurers (including Allstate Insurance Company, Nationwide Mutual Insurance Co., MetLife Auto & Home, and Erie Insurance) design, market, and administer their products.
2) Is Guidewire an ERP?
Ans: The guidewire is a CRM and ERP system.
3) What is Guidewire Claim Center?
Ans: Guidewire ClaimCenter is a claims management system that works with all types of insurance, including personal, commercial, and workers' compensation.
4) What language does guidewire use?
Ans: Guidewire uses a custom Java DSL called Guice. Guice is a language that allows software engineers to write object-oriented programs in a declarative style and easy-to-use syntax, which can shorten the development time and make it easy to test and maintain the code.
5) Is Guidewire an application?
Ans: The guidewire is more than a program for homeowners. The guidewire is a package of services, applications, and guides that aim to make the home insurance process easier, cheaper, and more convenient than it's ever been for people who use them.
Tips to clear the Guidewire Interview:
1) Communicate with the account team to ensure client satisfaction and awareness of client workflow.
2) Compiled reporting data and provided reports to leadership, including VP, Senior Director, Director, CMO, and CEO.
3) Background references were conducted, including interviews with former employers, supervisors, peers, and direct reports to confirm the information provided by the applicant.
4) Worked directly with management to devise and implement a full digital marketing campaign, including developing an annual social media strategy, launching a new company website and blog, and implementing a proprietary internal software solution for tracking all social media activity.
5) Spearheaded a new relationship with an existing client by communicating with her account team on critical deliverables and timelines.
Conclusion:
A guidewire is a software solution that various insurers are adopting. The casualty and property insurance sector are one of the most famous industries for guidewire implementations. As it supports the popular and most widely-used programming language “java,” almost all software professionals can work with Guidewire software. Thus, to make a career in Guidewire, you just require good knowledge of Guidewire software and proper interview preparation. We have designed these Guidewire interview questions for testers to improve your interview preparation and help you get the job. I hope these Guidewire interview questions are enough to prepare for Guidewire interviews.
21:T9c74,
WorkFusion is a leading provider of Intelligent Automation solutions for businesses worldwide. With a focus on AI and machine learning, WorkFusion delivers innovative software solutions designed to:
Improve operational efficiency
Reduce costs
Drive growth
Whether it's automating back-office processes or streamlining customer service, WorkFusion has a solution for every industry and every organization. The company's commitment to innovation and customer success makes it a trusted partner for organizations on their digital transformation journeys.
In this blog, you'll find a collection of WorkFusion interview questions and answers that cover a range of topics related to WorkFusion's Intelligent Automation solutions. This blog is organized into few sections and will help you demonstrate your expertise and prepare for your interview:
Ans: Robotic Process Automation (RPA) is a technology that allows software robots to automate mundane and repetitive processes. RPA can be utilised to enhance the effectiveness and precision of processes such as data input, document processing, and customer care.
Q2) How does WorkFusion differ from other RPA tools?
Ans: WorkFusion is a comprehensive RPA platform that includes advanced capabilities like machine learning, natural language processing, and computer vision, as well as a plethora of pre-built connectors for integrating with other systems and technologies. WorkFusion is thus better suited to automate complicated processes and decision-making, as well as unstructured data.
Q3) How do you approach automating a process using WorkFusion?
Ans: When automating a process using WorkFusion, I would first analyze the process to identify which tasks can be automated and determine the best approach for automation. I would then use WorkFusion's automation capabilities such as smart process automation, optical character recognition, and machine learning to automate the tasks. I would also test and monitor the automation to ensure it is working effectively and make any necessary adjustments.
Q4) How do you handle exceptions and errors during automation?
Ans: When handling exceptions and errors during automation, I would first identify the cause of the error. Depending on the type of error, I would either use WorkFusion's built-in error-handling capabilities or create custom error-handling rules to address the issue. I would also continuously monitor the automation to identify any potential errors and take necessary action to prevent them from happening in the future.
Do you want to enrich your career by learning WorkFusion? Then Enroll in "WorkFusion Training", this course will help you to boost your career.
Q5) Can you explain the difference between RPA and Intelligent Automation?
Ans: RPA is a technology that automates repetitive, rule-based tasks by mimicking human actions to interact with digital systems.
Intelligent Automation, on the other hand, combines RPA with other advanced technologies like machine learning and artificial intelligence to automate more complex tasks and make decisions. WorkFusion is an example of an intelligent automation platform.
Q6) Can you explain the benefits of using WorkFusion's Self-Learning Automation (SLA)?
Ans: WorkFusion's Self-Learning Automation (SLA) feature allows the software to learn and adapt to new data and situations on its own, reducing the need for human intervention. SLA uses machine learning algorithms to continuously analyze and improve automation, improving the efficiency and accuracy of self-learning Automation over time. Additionally, SLA allows for the automatic detection and handling of exceptions and errors.
Q7) How do you integrate WorkFusion with other systems and technologies?
Ans: APIs and connectors allow WorkFusion to be combined with other systems and technologies. I would first identify the systems and technologies that need to be merged, and then I would integrate them using WorkFusion's pre-built connectors or by developing new connectors. I would also ensure that data is correctly transmitted between systems and that the integration is safe.
Q8) Can you explain WorkFusion's machine-learning capabilities?
Ans: WorkFusion's machine-learning capabilities allow for the automation of more complex tasks and decision-making. It can be used to train models to perform tasks such as data extraction, image recognition, and natural language processing. I can use these models in automation to improve accuracy and efficiency. I can also use machine learning capabilities to continuously learn and adapt to new data, improving automation over time.
Q9) How do you handle changes in the process or system during automation?
Ans: Handling changes in the process or system during automation requires a flexible automation approach. I would use WorkFusion's ability to easily update and maintain automation, making it easy to incorporate changes. I would also set up monitoring and alerting to detect any changes in the process or system and take appropriate action to keep the automation running smoothly.
Q10) How do you measure the success of automation using WorkFusion?
Ans: To measure the success of automation using WorkFusion, I would track key performance indicators (KPIs) such as automation rate, accuracy, and processing time. I would also track the costs saved by automation and compare it to the costs of manual processing. Additionally, I would track customer satisfaction, and employee satisfaction to know how the automation is impacting them.
Q11) Can you describe a real-world scenario where you have used WorkFusion?
Ans: One real-world scenario where I have used WorkFusion is automating the process of data entry for a retail company. The process involved manually entering large amounts of data from paper-based forms into the company's system. Using WorkFusion, I was able to automate the data entry process by using optical character recognition (OCR) to extract data from the forms and populate the system automatically. This led to a significant reduction in processing time and improved data accuracy.
Q12) How do you ensure the security and compliance of automation using WorkFusion?
Ans: I would use industry-standard security standards such as encryption, access controls, and secure data transfer to ensure the security and compliance of automation utilising WorkFusion. In addition, I would perform regular security audits to discover and remediate any weaknesses. Furthermore, I would check that the automation complies with applicable legislation and compliance requirements, such as HIPAA and GDPR.
WorkFusion Interview Questions for Experienced:
Q13) Can you explain how WorkFusion's Smart Process Automation (SPA) works?
Ans: Smart Process Automation (SPA) is a feature of WorkFusion that automates repetitive, manual, and data-intensive tasks by combining RPA with other advanced technologies such as machine learning, optical character recognition, and natural language processing. It allows for the automation of more complex tasks and decision-making, such as data extraction and image recognition. SPA also continuously learns and adapts to new data, improving automation over time.
Q14) How do you use WorkFusion's machine-learning capabilities to improve data extraction?
Ans: Machine learning capabilities in WorkFusion can be utilised to train data extraction models. A variety of strategies, including supervised, unsupervised, and transfer can be used to train the models. These models can be used to extract information from a variety of sources, including papers, photos, and web pages. Machine learning models can increase data extraction accuracy and efficiency by continuously learning and adapting to new data.
Q15) How do you use WorkFusion's analytics and reporting capabilities to monitor automation performance?
Ans: WorkFusion's analytics and reporting tools enable real-time monitoring of automation performance. I'd use the automation data to track key performance indicators (KPIs) like automation rate, precision, and process time. I'd also keep track of the savings from automation and compare them against the costs of manual processing. Furthermore, I would monitor consumer and employee happiness to see how automation is affecting them.
Q16) Can you describe a real-world scenario where you have used WorkFusion's Intelligent Automation Cloud (IAC)?
Ans: I used WorkFusion's Intelligent Automation Cloud (IAC) to automate invoice processing for a finance organization in one real-world instance. The manual inspection and approval of invoices was time-consuming and error-prone. I was able to automate invoice processing utilizing IAC by extracting data from invoices using machine learning and then routing the invoices for approval using RPA. This resulted in significant time savings and increased accuracy.
Q17) How do you use WorkFusion's optical character recognition (OCR) capabilities to automate document processing?
Ans: WorkFusion's optical character recognition (OCR) capabilities can be used to automate document processing by extracting data from documents such as PDFs, images, and scanned documents.
I would use OCR to identify the text and structure of the document, and then use that data to automate tasks such as data entry and document routing. Additionally, I would use machine learning to improve the accuracy and efficiency of the OCR process over time.
Q18) Can you explain how WorkFusion's Natural Language Processing (NLP) capabilities work?
Ans: WorkFusion's Natural Language Processing (NLP) capabilities allow for the automation of tasks that involve understanding and processing human language.
NLP can be used to extract meaning and insights from unstructured text, such as emails and customer feedback. I would use NLP techniques such as sentiment analysis and entity recognition to understand the meaning of the text, and then use that information to automate tasks such as routing and tagging.
Q19) How do you use WorkFusion's task-mining capabilities to automate processes?
Ans: WorkFusion's task mining capabilities enable process automation by recognising and extracting jobs done by human workers. I'd utilise task mining to watch human workers complete tasks and identify the processes and activities they take. Then, utilising RPA and other modern technologies, I would leverage that information to construct automated procedures.
Q20) Can you explain how WorkFusion's cognitive capabilities work?
Ans: Advanced technologies such as machine learning, natural language processing, and computer vision are included in WorkFusion's cognitive capabilities, allowing the software to understand, reason, and learn like a human. Image identification, sentiment analysis, and language translation are all examples of jobs that can be automated using these capabilities. I would combine these capabilities with RPA to develop more advanced automation that can understand and respond to new data over time.
Q21) How do you use WorkFusion's process discovery capabilities to identify automation opportunities?
Ans: WorkFusion's process discovery capabilities allow for the identification of automation opportunities by analyzing the tasks and processes performed by human workers. I would use process discovery to observe human workers performing tasks and identify the steps and actions that are performed. Then, I would analyze the data to identify the tasks that are repetitive and time-consuming, which are the best candidates for automation.
Q22) How do you use WorkFusion's process intelligence capabilities to gain insights into automation performance?
Ans: The process intelligence features of WorkFusion enable the analysis and visualization of data from automation in order to acquire insights into performance. Process intelligence would be used to track key performance indicators (KPIs) such as automation rate, accuracy, and processing time and to identify opportunities for improvement. In addition, I would use process intelligence to analyze data from numerous automation in order to detect patterns and trends, as well as to make data-driven automation decisions.
Q23) What is the concept of Double Subscription in WorkFusion?
Ans: Double Subscription in WorkFusion refers to the ability of the software to run two instances of the same automation simultaneously. This can be useful in situations where there is a need to maintain continuity of service, such as during maintenance or updates. By running two instances of the same automation, one can be updated or maintained while the other continues to run and handle any incoming tasks. It also helps in testing and validating the new instance before switching over to it, ensuring a smooth transition and reducing the risk of downtime. Additionally, Double Subscription allows for testing new features or configurations in a separate instance before applying them to the main automation.
Q24) How do you troubleshoot and debug automation issues in WorkFusion?
Ans: When troubleshooting and debugging automation issues in WorkFusion, I would first check the logs and error messages to identify the root cause of the issue. I would then use WorkFusion's built-in debugging tools such as breakpoints, watches, and step-by-step execution to further investigate the issue. Additionally, I would use monitoring and alerting to detect any issues in real time and take appropriate action.
Q25) How do you manage and maintain automation workflows in WorkFusion?
Ans: To organize and manage automation processes in WorkFusion, I would leverage the platform's built-in workflow management tools. I'd also use version control to keep track of changes and roll them back if necessary. In addition, I would set up monitoring and alerting to notice any problems and take the necessary action to keep the automated functioning smoothly.
Q26) How do you scale automation using WorkFusion?
Ans: Scaling automation using WorkFusion can be achieved by using its built-in scalability features such as load balancing, and using cloud deployment options. I would also use WorkFusion's analytics and reporting capabilities to monitor automation performance and identify bottlenecks. Additionally, I would use machine learning capabilities to continuously learn and adapt to new data, improving the automation over time.
WorkFusion RPA Interview Questions:
Q27) How do you use WorkFusion's advanced analytics capabilities to improve automation?
The extensive analytics capabilities of WorkFusion enable the analysis and visualization of vast amounts of data in order to acquire insights about automation performance. I'd use these features to monitor key performance indicators (KPIs) including automation rate, accuracy, and processing time. I would also use analytics to find patterns and trends in data and to make data-driven automation decisions. I would also use analytics to discover areas for improvement and optimize automation performance.
Q28) How do you implement security and compliance in automation using WorkFusion?
Implementing security and compliance in automation using WorkFusion requires following industry-standard security practices such as encryption, access controls, and secure data transfer. I would also conduct regular security audits to identify and address any vulnerabilities. Additionally, I would ensure that the automation adheres to relevant regulations and compliance requirements, such as HIPAA and GDPR.
Q29) How do you use WorkFusion's cognitive capabilities to automate unstructured data?
WorkFusion's significant features include modern technologies like machine learning, natural language processing, and computer vision, which enables the software to comprehend, analyze, and learn like a human. These capabilities would be useful for automating tasks requiring unstructured data, such as picture identification, sentiment analysis, and language translation. Furthermore, I would employ cognitive talents for online analytical processing from unstructured data, such as text and photos, and then use that information to automate processes.
Q30) How do you use WorkFusion's API capabilities to integrate with other systems and technologies?
WorkFusion's API capabilities enable it to be integrated with other systems and technologies. I'd use APIs to build custom connections to connect WorkFusion to other systems like CRM, ERP, and databases. I would also ensure that data is correctly transmitted between systems and that the integration is safe. Furthermore, I would leverage WorkFusion's pre-built connectors to link to standard systems and technologies like Salesforce and Oracle without the need for bespoke development.
Q31) Can you explain how WorkFusion's Self-Learning Automation (SLA) works?
Self-Learning Automation (SLA) is a feature of WorkFusion that allows the software to learn and adapt to new data and situations on its own. SLA uses machine learning algorithms to continuously analyze and improve automation, reducing the need for human intervention. I would use SLA to improve the accuracy and efficiency of automation over time and to detect and handle exceptions and errors automatically.
Q32) How do you use WorkFusion's Decision Automation capabilities to automate complex tasks?
Decision Automation capabilities in WorkFusion enable the automation of complicated processes and decision-making by integrating RPA with advanced technologies like machine learning and artificial intelligence. Decision automation would be used to construct automation that can make judgments depending on the data they process, such as routing work to the proper department or authorizing bills. Furthermore, I would employ decision automation to enhance automation accuracy and efficiency over time.
Q33) How do you use WorkFusion's Predictive Automation capabilities to optimize automation performance?
WorkFusion's Predictive Automation capabilities allow for the use of machine learning to predict future events or outcomes and optimize automation performance. I would use predictive automation to identify patterns in data and make predictions about future automation performance. Additionally, I would use predictive automation to improve the accuracy and efficiency of automation over time and to detect and handle exceptions and errors automatically.
Q34) How do you use WorkFusion's Robotic Process Automation capabilities to automate repetitive tasks?
WorkFusion's Robotic Process Automation capabilities allow for the automation of repetitive tasks through the use of software robots. I would use RPA to automate tasks such as data entry, document processing, and customer service tasks. Additionally, I would use RPA to improve the accuracy and efficiency of automation over time and to detect and handle exceptions and errors automatically.
Q35) How do you use WorkFusion's Advanced Data Extraction capabilities to automate data-intensive tasks?
WorkFusion's Advanced Data Extraction capabilities enable the automation of data-intensive operations through the application of machine learning and optical character recognition (OCR). I would employ advanced data extraction to extract information from documents, photos, and web pages. Furthermore, I would employ advanced data extraction to increase the accuracy and efficiency of automation over time, as well as to automatically detect and handle exceptions and problems.
Q36) How do you use WorkFusion's Advanced Image Recognition capabilities to automate image-based tasks?
WorkFusion's Advanced Image Recognition capabilities allow for the automation of image-based tasks through the use of machine learning and computer vision.
I would use advanced image recognition to extract data from images, such as text and numbers, and to identify and classify images. Additionally, I would use advanced image recognition to improve the accuracy and efficiency of automation over time and to detect and handle exceptions and errors automatically.
Q37) How do you use WorkFusion's Advanced Natural Language Processing (NLP) capabilities to automate language-based tasks?
WorkFusion's Advanced Natural Language Processing (NLP) capabilities allow for the automation of language-based tasks through the use of advanced techniques such as sentiment analysis, entity recognition, and language translation. I would use advanced NLP to extract meaning and insights from unstructured text, such as emails and customer feedback. Additionally, I would use advanced NLP to improve the accuracy and efficiency of automation over time and to detect and handle exceptions and errors automatically.
Q38) How do you use WorkFusion's Advanced Computer Vision capabilities to automate visual-based tasks?
The Advanced Computer Vision features of WorkFusion enable the automation of visual-based tasks by utilizing advanced techniques such as object identification and image classification. I would employ advanced computer vision to extract data such as text and numbers from photographs and videos, as well as to recognize and classify images. Furthermore, I would employ advanced computer vision to increase the accuracy and efficiency of automation over time, as well as to quickly determine and handle exceptions and problems.
Q39) How do you use WorkFusion's Advanced Machine Learning capabilities to improve automation?
WorkFusion's Sophisticated Machine Learning capabilities enable the adoption of advanced approaches to boost automation, such as deep learning and neural networks. I would employ advanced machine learning to train models for tasks such as data extraction, picture recognition, and language processing. In addition, I would employ powerful machine learning to increase the precision and effectiveness of automation over time, as well as to automatically detect and handle exceptions and failures.
Q40) How do you use WorkFusion's Advanced Chatbot capabilities to automate customer service tasks?
WorkFusion's Advanced Chatbot capabilities allow for the automation of customer service tasks through the use of natural language processing and machine learning. I would use an advanced chatbot to understand customer queries, providing accurate and efficient responses in real time. Additionally, I would use an advanced chatbot to improve the accuracy and efficiency of automation over time and to detect and handle exceptions and errors automatically.
Most Common WorkFusion RPA FAQs:
1) What is RPA Testing?
Ans: RPA (Robotic Process Automation) testing is the process of ensuring that an RPA solution operates as intended and meets the criteria by testing its functionality and performance. RPA testing comprises functional testing, performance testing, and regression testing. This ensures the automation's stability, accuracy, and efficiency.
2) What is a Listener in WorkFusion?
Ans: In WorkFusion, a Listener is a component that enables the software robot to communicate with other systems and applications. The listener receives events or triggers from external systems and executes the associated automation flow based on the setup. This enables the automation of actions triggered by outside occurrences.
3) What are different RPA jobs?
Ans: Different RPA jobs include RPA Developer, RPA Business Analyst, RPA Project Manager, RPA Solution Architect, RPA Quality Assurance Analyst, RPA Infrastructure Engineer, RPA Operations Manager, RPA Consultant, and RPA Trainer.
4) Describe the two RPA Gateways
Ans: The two types of gateways that can be deployed in RPA are On-Premises Gateways and Cloud Gateways. On-Premises Gateway is installed and runs on a local network, while Cloud Gateway is deployed on a cloud platform.
5) How can we use Global Variable in WorkFusion?
Ans: Global Variables in WorkFusion can be used to store and access data that needs to be shared across multiple automation. These variables can be accessed and modified by any automation in the project. This allows for the easy sharing of data between automation and eliminates the need to hard-code data into each automation.
Tips to clear WorkFusion RPA Interview:
1) Understand the basics of RPA and WorkFusion:Before the interview, familiarize yourself with the basics of RPA and WorkFusion, including the features, capabilities, and use cases of the software.
2) Understand the role you are applying for: Understand the role you are applying for and the specific skills and experience required for the job. Tailor your answers to the specific requirements of the role.
3) Provide real-world examples: Provide real-world examples of how you have used WorkFusion in previous projects, highlighting your experience and skills with the software.
4) Be prepared to answer technical questions: Be prepared to answer technical questions about the software, including its capabilities, troubleshooting, and maintenance.
5) Practice with sample questions: Practice answering sample WorkFusion interview questions to familiarize yourself with the types of questions you may be asked.
6) Be confident and demonstrate your expertise: During the interview, present yourself as confident and knowledgeable about WorkFusion, and be ready to demonstrate your expertise with the software.
7) Show your willingness to learn: Show your willingness to learn new technologies and skills, as WorkFusion is a rapidly evolving technology and it's important to stay current.
Conclusion:
In conclusion, preparing for a WorkFusion interview requires a good understanding of the software and its capabilities, as well as knowledge of RPA in general. Be prepared to answer both WorkFusion technical and functional questions, and provide real-world examples of your experience with the software. Practice with sample questions and be confident in your abilities. It's also important to demonstrate a willingness to learn new technologies and skills as WorkFusion is a rapidly evolving technology.
Recently, there has been a rising demand for test automation frameworks due to the tremendous growth of web applications in the market. Cypress is a fast and reliable testing framework that many developers have come to rely on recently. Cypress is developed to answer all the issues faced by the team while automating an application. It is used by many organizations, such as Revoluta, Alibaba Travels, Bitpanda, etc., in their tech stacks as integration and unit tests can easily be written and debugged with Cypress End to End test.
This Cypress tutorial will guide you through all its features, pros, and cons, with a real understanding of its efficiency.
Cypress is an open-source JavaScript-based end-to-end testing framework for web applications. It is used on a large scale as a free test automation tool. Cypress is designed to write, set up, run, configure, execute, and debug tests easily for web applications. Cypress lets the developers test their web applications without additional configurations, as it runs directly in the browser and uses a built-in test runner.
Cypress is popular among developers as it is easy to use, has fast execution, and has a good developer experience. It has a unique feature that allows the developers to debug the test by rewinding and replaying any browser action. It also has an impressive API for interacting with web pages, making it easy for developers to test the behavior of a web application. Explore the full Cypress tutorial to know more.
Features of Cypress Testing
Cypress is an end-to-end testing framework with the following advantages.
The installation process of the Cypress framework is easy and simple.
Cypress does not require driver binaries, and the code executes natively in the browser.
The test code has access to the application's JS objects as both the test code and the application run in the same browser.
Cypress is remarkable as it allows code to be easily altered and executed instantly.
Cypress features a dashboard for comprehensive reporting.
Due to Cypress' built-in auto-wait features, tests are more reliable.
It provides a platform for the execution of coinciding tests.
Cypress documentation is extensive, and the user base of Cypress is active and vibrant.
The framework is equipped to handle both Behaviour-Driven Development (BDD) approaches and Test-Driven Development (TDD) procedures.
Screenshots of the examination procedure are taken throughout each stage. These can be very helpful in resolving any problems that arise with the test.
Cypress features an in-built request wait functionality, so additional waits are no longer needed to set up.
Do you want to enrich your career by learning Cypress Automation? Then Enroll in "Cypress Training", this course will help you to boost your career.
What makes Cypress so special?
1) Cypress Architecture
Cypress is built on a modern architecture that makes it easy to set up, write, run, and debug tests. Cypress is built on a Node.js server and uses the Mocha test framework to structure and organize tests. It also uses the Chai assertion library to verify test results. Cypress utilizes a custom command line interface (CLI) to interact with the tests. The architecture of Cypress is designed to provide a fast, secure, and reliable testing environment.
Cypress architecture is very performant and reliable when testing web applications Tests run faster and more reliably due to the architecture’s non-blocking I/O model, which allows for multiple tasks to be handled simultaneously. Tests also require less code and are easier to maintain due to Cypress’ simplified assertion library and test runner.
2) Cypress Test Runner
The Cypress Test runner is a unique interactive built-in test runner with the Cypress testing framework. The Cypress Test Runner is launched by running the Cypress command in the terminal. It provides a user interface for running tests, displaying the results of those tests, and debugging any issues that may arise.
While viewing the application under test allows you to see the commands as executed. Any changes made to the test code will automatically be reflected in the test runner without manually reloading the browser. It provides a 'time-travel' feature that allows developers to see the state of the browser at any point in time during the test, which helps in debugging the test.
3) Cypress Dashboard
The Cypress Dashboard is a cloud-based service that allows developers to record test runs, view screenshots and videos of test runs, and share test results with others, typically while running the Cypress tests. The Cypress Dashboard allows developers to view the results on a web-based dashboard and provides insight into what happened when the tests ran.
The Cypress Dashboard provides a feature called "parallelization," which allows running multiple tests simultaneously on different machines; this helps in reducing the time taken to run all the tests. It also provides methods to schedule tests to run automatically and provides a way to monitor the test execution remotely. It is a paid service.
How to use Cypress with continuous integration?
Cypress can be integrated with various continuous integration (CI) platforms. The process of integrating Cypress with a CI platform varies depending on the platform you are choosing. Here are the basic steps to integrate Cypress with a CI platform:
Step 1: Make sure Cypress is installed in your project by running the command.
npm install cypress --save-dev
Step 2: Run your Cypress tests; this typically involves creating a configuration file (e.g., .travis.yml, circle.yml) and specifying the commands that should run to execute your tests.
Step 3: Configure your CI platform to run the Cypress test command, which is:
cypress run
Step 4: To record the test results, Cypress provides a command that records the test result and stores it in the Cypress Dashboard for further analysis.
cypress run --record --key=abc123
Step 5: Schedule your test runs to run at specific intervals.
Step 6: Cypress Dashboard provides a way to monitor the test execution remotely and analyze the test results.
The integration process varies depending on the CI platform you are using and the specific requirements of your project. Refer to the documentation provided by the CI platform and Cypress for more information on integrating Cypress with your CI platform.
How to use Cypress in a continuous delivery workflow
Cypress can be used in a continuous delivery (CD) workflow to test web applications automatically. Here are the basic steps to use Cypress in a Continuous Delivery workflow:
Make sure Cypress is installed in your project by running the command in the same way as shared in the first step of integrating Cypress with a CI platform.
After successful installation, write automated tests using Cypress to test various web application functionalities.
Run Cypress tests as a part of the continuous integration (CI) process to ensure that changes made to the code do not break the existing functionality.
After running the Cypress test, record the test results in Cypress Dashboard for further analysis.
Monitor the test execution remotely and analyze the test results provided by the Cypress Dashboard.
Once the tests have been run and passed, the application can be deployed automatically using a CD tool (Jenkins, Travis, or CircleCI).
To run at specific intervals, schedule the test runs and deployment.
To ensure everything is working as expected, continuously monitor the application in production and run tests periodically.
For specific information on how to use Cypress in a CD workflow, it is important to refer to the document provided by the CD tool and Cypress, as the Continuous Delivery workflow varies depending on the project's specific requirements.
How to write end-to-end tests for native mobile applications using Cypress?
Cypress is a web-based end-to-end testing framework. Cypress is designed to test web applications that run in a browser. In the following example, all the functions come from Mocha other than the one that begins with cypress.
All the test files will begin with a “block” or describe () function. This function enables a way to make things easier to read and provides a way to organize the tests. As describe () can provide the condition for the tests written inside them, test files can have multiple describe ().
// app.spec.js
describe ("React TodoMVC", () =>{
it("adds a single todo", () =>{
су.visit( ("http://localhost:8888") // Arrange
су.get(".new-todo"). type ("Buy Milk{enter}") // Act
cy.get(".todo-list li"). should ("have. length", 1) // Assert
})
})
We have it blocked in end-to-end tests for native mobile applications. This is the actual test, where the test code goes as well. First, a test name, “adds a single todo," is provided and passed in a callback function. The three things that are required to write end-to-end tests for native mobile applications using React TodoMVC app are:
Arrange: Visit the URL http://localhost:8888
Act: Type in the string "Buy Milk," press the Enter key and get the element with the class of .new-todo.
Assert: Declaring that single todo is added to the application.
It's important to note that this approach requires a good knowledge of mobile testing; Cypress, a web-based testing framework, requires additional tools to test mobile apps.
Installation Process of Cypress for Automation
The installation process of Cypress depends on the development environment you are using. Here are the general steps to install Cypress in a local development environment:
Step 1: Cypress requires Node.js to be installed on your machine. You can download the latest version of Node.js from the official website and follow the installation instructions.
Step 2: Once the installation is done, create a new project directory and initialize it as a Node.js project by running the below-mentioned command in the terminal.
npm init
Step 3: install Cypress, run the below-mentioned command in the terminal. This command installs Cypress as a development dependency in your project.
npm install cypress --save-dev
Step 4: Once Cypress is installed, you can open the Cypress Test Runner by running the below-mentioned command in the terminal
npx cypress open
Step 5: As Cypress uses the Mocha test framework, you can create a test file in the integration folder inside the cypress folder.
yarn add cypress --dev
It is also possible to install Cypress via yarn, which is another package manager for javascript; the command is:
After Cypress is installed, you can start writing and running tests for your web application. Cypress provides many examples and documentation on how to use the framework, which you can refer to for more information.
It supports many languages like Python, Java, Php, etc.
Frameworks
It supports Mocha JS.
It supports multiple frameworks.
Setup
The setup is very easy. Additional downloads are not required.
As it requires Browser-specific driver installation and configuration of the test environment, it is a bit complicated.
Documentation
It has user-friendly documentation.
It has well-established documentation.
Browsers
Edge, Firefox(beta), Chrome, Electron.
Safari, Chrome, Firefox, Opera, Edge, IE.
Drawbacks of Cypress
Being a powerful and popular end-to-end testing Cypress framework has some drawbacks as well:
Cypress only supports the latest version of Chrome, Firefox, Edge, and Electron compared to Selenium which supports more browsers.
Cypress works only on JavaScript and can only use Node.js.
Cypress does not support older versions of Internet Explorer, which is a drawback for many organizations that use older browsers.
It does not provide built-in support for visual regression testing, which is used to detect visual changes in a web application.
Cypress is known to use more memory than other testing frameworks; this can be a problem running multiple tests or on a machine with limited memory.
Cypress Dashboard is a paid service, which could be a limitation for small projects or those with a tight budget.
Conclusion:
Cypress is a globally used automation testing framework. However, before deciding if Cypress is the right choice for your testing needs, it is important to consider the advantages and drawbacks. Before deciding, spend some time and automate a few test cases on a cloud-based platform that integrates with Selenium and Cypress. You will know which automation tool is best for your organization and team in the long run.
24:T5386,
PostgreSQL is a highly reliable and robots ORDBMS – Object Relational Database Management system known for its excellent performance. Most organizations have adopted it to manage their data recently. Several trials have emphasized the power of these compelling management features, and PostgreSQL has exhibited a proficient execution rate with zero crashes. Even at the highest database load, it has performed excellently, making it the best database management system for several organizations. Managing the database has helped businesses track their performances and profit to a remarkable extent.
Getting started with PostgreSQL can be challenging, so we have brought you a guide specially planned for beginners! The new object-relational database management system is worth exploring with its excellent logical and relation features, making it the most reliable, robust, and efficient system.
PostgreSQL is a powerful open-source ORDBMS (Object-Relational Database Management System). It was introduced in 1996 and has become one of the world's most popular open-source database management systems. PostgreSQL is known for its reliability and efficient performance. PostgreSQL is highly scalable and can be used in single-node and multi-node environments. It supports various data duplication options, including streaming, logical, and cascading duplication, which ensures its high availability and data longevity feature.
Features of PostgreSQL:
1) Object Relational Database:
PostgreSQL is an object-relational database that can store complex data structures in a relational database. It supports data types such as integers, floating point numbers, strings, date/time values, and other common data types and objects.
2) Stored Procedures & Triggers:
PostgreSQL allows users to write stored procedures and triggers in SQL and other procedural languages such as PL/pgSQL, PL/Tcl, and PL/Perl. These features enable developers to extend the database functionality and automate tasks.
3) Multi-Version Concurrency Control (MVCC):
PostgreSQL utilizes a Multi-Version Concurrency Control (MVCC) system, which allows multiple versions of the same data to existing in the database. This makes it easier to maintain data consistency and allows for better scalability and performance.
4) User-Defined Functions:
PostgreSQL supports user-defined functions (UDFs). UDFs allow users to write tasks to extend the database and enable complex data manipulation.
5) Database Replication:
PostgreSQL supports replication, which is the ability to replicate data from one database to another. This feature allows for better scalability, high availability, and improved data integrity.
6) Server-Side Programming:
PostgreSQL supports server-side programming, allowing developers to write custom logic and execute it on the server. This enables developers to build custom applications on top of the database.
7) Security:
PostgreSQL offers a wide range of security features, including authentication, access control, encryption, and auditing. These features can help protect a database from malicious attacks and unauthorized access.
Overall, PostgreSQL is a powerful and versatile database management system well-suited for many use cases and applications.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of PostgreSQL? Enroll in Instructor-Led live PostgreSQL Training to become Job Ready!
History of PostgreSQL:
#1980s
PostgreSQL often referred to as "Postgres," was created in 1986 by a computer science professor named Michael Stonebraker at the University of California, Berkeley. The original version of the software was called "Ingres" and was designed to be a more robust and capable alternative to existing relational databases at the time.
#1990s
In 1994, a team of graduate students and Stonebraker continued to improve and develop the software by adding new features and capabilities. The software was also renamed to "Postgres" to reflect its capabilities and new direction as an object-relational database management system.
The software released an open source under the name "PostgreSQL" to reflect its origins as a derivative of the Ingres project in 1996. The open-source release of PostgreSQL was a turning point for the project as it allowed a community of developers and users to contribute to the development of the software and provide support.
#2000s - Today
PostgreSQL continued to evolve and improve over the next decade with its new features in SQL, with improved performance and scalability added. In recent years, PostgreSQL has been widely considered one of the most potent and capable open-source databases, known for its reliability, robustness, and performance.
Installation Process of PostgreSQL:
Follow the steps to install PostgreSQL so that your experience a great database system:
Step 1: Download the software for your system. You can download the installer for your operating system from the official website. (https://www.postgresql.org/download/)
After downloading the installer, follow the below steps to complete the PostgreSQL installation:
Step 1. a: Click on the next button.
Step 1. b: Select the installation folder for PostgreSQL to be installed and then click Next.
Step 2: To install, choose the components according to your requirement and click the Next button.
Step 3: Choose the database directory and click Next to store the data.
Step 4: Set up the password for the database superuser (Postgres)
Step 5: Create the port for PostgreSQL. Do make sure that other applications do not use this port. If you need clarification, leave it to default and click Next.
Step 6: Select the default locale utilized by the database and click on the Next button.
Step 7: To start the installation, click the Next button.
Hold back, as it might take a few minutes for the installation to complete.
Step 8: Click on the Finish button to complete the PostgreSQL installation.
Note: To connect to the database, you will need to use a client tool such as pgAdmin or the command-line tool PSQL.
You will need the information:
Host: The IP address or hostname of the machine where the database is running
Port: The port number on which the database is listening (default is 5432)
Database: Connect to the name of the database.
User: The username you want to connect to.
Password: The password for the user.
Once installed, you need to start the PostgreSQL service to connect to the database.
Creating a new database is simple. Once connected, you can use the command in the command line of your choice (e.g., SQL Shell or PSQL) and type in 'CREATE DATABASE [DATABASE_NAME].' And voila, you've got yourself a new database. On Windows, you can use the Services app to start the service.
To create a table in the database, you can use the command "CREATE TABLE table_name (column_name data_type constraint, ....);."
To update data in a table, you can use the command "UPDATE table_name SET column1 = new_value WHERE condition;."
To retrieve data from a table, you can use the command "SELECT column1, column2, ... FROM table_name WHERE condition;."
To delete data from a table, use the "DELETE FROM table_name WHERE condition;"
To insert data into a table, you can use the command "INSERT INTO table_name (column1, column2, ...) VALUES (value1, value2, ...);"
To populate this new database, input data from other sources, such as spreadsheets or text files. There are multiple ways to do this, depending on your operating system. If you're using Windows, consider using "COPY" commands or BCP Utility Tool. Alternatively, if you prefer MacOS, look into PGAdmin's import option.
The next step is learning how to query within PostgreSQL—which is where most of your work of an introductory SELECT statement: "SELECT * FROM table_name;" This retrieves all columns and rows of data stored in the specified table_name. You can also refine your search by selecting specific columns instead of all of them.
While we're on the topic of querying, let's talk about transactions. A transaction ensures that any changes made during one operation remain permanent even if something goes wrong later. To start a transaction, use the "BEGIN;" command followed by your code. End your trade with either a COMMIT or ROLLBACK command.
Why is PostgreSQL best for you?
PostgreSQL is an incredible database system that provides powerful functionality for its users. It allows you to store, organize and retrieve data quickly and accurately. And since it's open-source, you won't have to worry about expensive licensing fees or complicated setup processes. You'll be able to focus on what matters most, i.e., creating outstanding results. Some of its valuable features include:
PostgreSQL is known for its ability to handle large-scale enterprise environments.
It can manage a large amount of data and supports advanced features such as geospatial data, JSON, and full-text search.
It supports a wide range of programming languages, making it the perfect choice for all developers.
It has built-in support for stored procedures, triggers, and resilience.
Its robust security features, including support for role-based access control, auditing, and encryption, give good privacy to your database.
It has a large and active community of developers and users who contribute to the development of the software and provide support.
With PostgreSQL, you can produce high-quality output with fewer other databases like Workday, Salesforce, SAP, etc. Above mentioned are just a few examples of the many features and functionalities that PostgreSQL can offer.
Facts about PostgreSQL:
With its extensive features and potentiality, PostgreSQL can be used for all sorts of projects, from small tasks to large-scale enterprise solutions. Many large organizations and companies use PostgreSQL. Examples of the many large organizations and companies that use PostgreSQL are Apple, Cisco, IMDb, NASA, Paypal, Uber, Spotify, and many more.
Different companies use PostgreSQL for other purposes.
Apple uses PostgreSQL for the Siri voice recognition system, and Instagram uses it to store and retrieve user data.
NASA uses it to store and retrieve data from satellite and weather monitoring systems.
Paypal uses PostgreSQL to store and retrieve financial data.
Uber uses it to store and retrieve data on drivers, riders, and trips.
Spotify uses PostgreSQL to store and retrieve data on songs, users, and playlists.
Is PostgreSQL suitable for beginners?
PostgreSQL is a powerful and flexible database management system, enabling users to write with human emotion while being logical. Its syntax is clear and concise, making it easy for beginners to understand the technical terms easily.
Furthermore, PostgreSQL allows you to tailor your queries and results to fit the specific needs of any age group or reading level. Its ability to limit words and phrases makes it ideal for communicating complex ideas to younger audiences. With its comprehensive range of features and capabilities, PostgreSQL can be used for all sorts of projects, from small tasks to large-scale enterprise solutions.
PostgreSQL is a good option for beginners who want to learn about relational databases and SQL. It is a powerful and feature-rich database management system used globally by almost all industries. It has an enormous community of developers and users who can help you learn from basic to advance effortlessly.
Another significant advantage of PostgreSQL is that it is open-source and free to use, modify, and distribute. It also makes it a cost-effective option for learning and experimenting with databases, as the cost is a significant concern for beginners. PostgreSQL also has a simple and intuitive SQL interface, which can make it easy to learn how to work with relational databases.
Conclusion:
PostgreSQL is widely considered one of the world's most influential and robust open-source databases. Its broad range of functionalities and features increase its usability in almost every industry. Since it has a large and active community of developers and users who continue to contribute to its development and provide support, it is rising extensively. Approx. 6099 companies across the world are using PostgreSQL as their database management system. The number might seem countable. However, it includes the world's top companies successfully earning millions. If you are planning to switch to PostgreSQL, you are correct.
25:T8015,
Saviynt is a leading provider of identity and access management solutions that help organizations secure and manage access to sensitive data and applications. Therefore, there is a massive need for people with a strong foundation in IAM software like Saviynt. According to studies, Saviynt holds a 2.74% market share for access-cloud-security-brokers, providing many prospects for reputable businesses and specialists in this field. Regardless of size, "security" or the organization's activities' location are most of them' top concerns. Organizations have made protecting data from growing security dangers a full responsibility.
In this Saviynt interview guide, we have compiled a list of frequently asked questions about Saviynt to help you prepare for your interview. These Saviynt Interview Questions cover a wide range of topics including Saviynt's product offerings, industry trends, and implementation best practices. Whether you are a seasoned professional or just starting out, this guide will provide you with the information you need to ace your Saviynt interview.
These are the three levels into which we've categorized the Saviynt Interview Questions:
Ans: Examine all the technologies included in your resume by carefully reading it. If you plan to attend a technical interview with Saviynt, thoroughly prepare at least two technologies or languages. Cloud Security, SQL, Java, Identity Management, and UNIX are the most typical subjects and abilities that Saviynt interviewers look for.
Q2) The Saviynt interview consists of how many rounds?
Ans: 3–4 rounds typically make up the Saviynt interview procedure. The Resume Shortlist, Technical, and One-on-One Rounds are the Saviynt interview process's most frequent stages.
Q3) How does Saviynt technology work?
Ans: Enterprises can protect apps, data, and infrastructure with Saviynt's unified platform for the cloud (Office 365, AWS, Salesforce, and Workday) (SAP, Oracle EBS). Saviynt is leading the development of IGA 2.0 by fusing sophisticated risk analytics and intelligence with fine-grained privilege control.
Q4) What were the most common inquiries during the Saviynt interview?
Ans: Top inquiries during the Saviynt interview included:
IAM principles, Roles, rights, obligations, and the many methods for importing user data.
How were you made aware of Saviynt?
How do you handle team disputes?
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Saviynt? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Saviynt Training to become Job Ready!
Q5) SailPoint or Saviynt—which is superior?
Ans: When compared, they each serve different purposes. SailPoint is the only option if you want a more extensive user base and sophisticated features. Additionally, you may choose Saviynt if you want superior features but only care a little about the community.
Q6) Saviynt is what sort of business?
Ans: Saviynt, Inc creates security software. The company provides administration, identity governance, and cloud security solutions. Enterprises can protect apps, data, and infrastructure on a single platform for cloud and enterprise thanks to Saviynt.
Q7) How many people work for Saviynt?
Ans: In all, Saviynt employed about 850 people worldwide.
Q8) Saviynt developer: what is it?
Ans: IAM solutions and systems installation, integration, configuration, and deployment are the duties of the Saviynt developers for this domain.
Q9) Saviynt, is it cloud-based?
Ans: Your digital transformation activities benefit from identity management's added security and operational effectiveness. Industry-leading cloud solutions from Saviynt precisely regulate each Identity.
Q10) What exactly is Saviynt's security manager?
Ans: A complete compliance-as-a-service platform from Saviynt includes features for Identity Governance and Management, Application Risk and Governance, Cloud Security, and Cloud PAM.
Saviynt Interview Questions for Freshers:
If you're new to this subject, beginners often ask this question. You'll feel more assured if you practice these questions in advance of the interview.
Q11) How can I define Saviynt?
Ans: The Saviynt, a platform for cloud-based authentication and authorization control, might aid contemporary businesses in realizing their cloud objectives. It offers the most cutting-edge method for dealing with compliance & security issues. Saviynt provides cloud security, seamless user experience, identity governance or IGA, and granular application access. It also defends whole business ecosystems.
Saviynt is trusted by the biggest businesses in the world to speed up digital transformation, enable remote workforces, and maintain compliance. Most businesses rely on Saviynt to uphold adherence requirements, accelerate digital transformation, and approve the crew.
Saviynt provides cloud, enterprise, and data security software on a single platform. Saviynt stands out from its competitors by reducing security threats, managing intelligence, and analyzing risk.
Q12) What exactly is IAM?
Ans: Users and devices can access applications of platforms and in the cloud only under the supervision of IAM (Identity and Access Management). Employees, stakeholders, clients, and others are referred as users, and devices that support IAM and also PCs, tablets, routers, cell phones, sensors, etc.
Each user is given a distinct digital identity & password via the IAM tool. Their identities must be protected in order to stop unauthorized access to organizational information.
Q13) What’s the danger of IAM?
Ans: The following IAM risks are faced by organizations using the revised architecture:
Operational Danger
Security Risk in Information
Risk of Compliance
Privacy Peril
Q14) In what contexts is Saviynt employed?
Ans: The departments listed below utilize Saviynt.
Medical Finance Services
Federal Government Higher Energy Education
Q15) What software programs can be integrated with Saviynt?
Ans: The software programs that can be integrated with Saviynt are:
Q16) What are the fundamental functions of Saviynt?
Ans: Saviynt's primary functions include:
Managing many clouds
Updating Old Machine Identities
Vendor/Third-Party Access
Internal Identities Constant Compliance Control
Q17) What products and operating systems do Saviynt support?
Ans: The products and operating systems that Saviynt support are:
Intelligence and Identity Governance
Access Governance for Applications and Infrastructure
Governance of Data Access
External Access Control
Q18) What’s the rationale behind Saviynt's division of labor?
Ans: The separation of roles is the central tenet of Saviynt because it makes it easier for many users to complete their activities by implementing a service technique to mitigate the risk of internal fraud.
Q19) What is an entitlement, and how are they used?
Ans: A device and application's entitlements describe its advantages across all platforms. Each profile in a database has an associated entitlement.
Q20) How does Saviynt define an authoritative source?
Ans: A safe application and the only source for data accuracy is called an Authoritative Source. This document is the primary source of data verification and storage and saving device for the customer's information.
Saviynt Interview Questions for Experienced:
If you’re an experienced candidate in this profession with two years or more, the interviewer may ask you some of these questions. Using these questions as a preparation tool can increase your knowledge & self-assurance.
Q21) What is the Connected Applications?
Ans: The correct answer is that connected applications—also known as linked apps—are programs connected to Saviynt by OOTB adapters and adhere to all connection requirements. These applications also provide ads that and Security System permits automatically.
Q22) How does Saviynt Identity Bot work?
Ans: The Identity Bot from Saviynt is automated to speed up application onboarding, cut costs, and improve productivity. It provides for the direct attachment of incompatible programs and enables them to automate consumer access without a combination technique. As soon as possible, iBOT added features to Saviynt's IGA system to provide efficient, multi-application data processing and improved access to the administration.
Q23) The security manager of Saviynt is what?
Ans: For Cloud (Office 365, AWS, Azure, Salesforce, Workday) and Enterprise applications, Saviynt enables businesses to secure operations, data, and resources in a single solution (SAP, Oracle EBS). Saviynt is a pioneer of IGA 2.0 by integrating cutting-edge hazard analytics, information, and powdery advantage monitoring.
Q24) What exactly is a reliable source?
Ans: The sole source of truth—precisely taken into account—is another name for an authoritative application. The standard application starts by looking at a particular document and is acceptable since it keeps the customers' data. The application's authoritative resource is where most customer issues are routinely handled.
Q25) What does Saviynt mean by segregation of duties?
Ans: Requiring different people to carry out diverse duties to complete a service method is crucial for addressing the risk of internal fraud and blunders.
Q26) Why is IAR used in Saviynt?
Ans: Saviynt's Intelligent Access Request offers cutting-edge capabilities to locate secure and practical access to help solve this issue. This aids users in comprehending unusual or dangerous access requests. By removing the need to wait for approvals, Saviynt's cutting-edge functionality aids in staff productivity.
Q27) Mention a few advantages of Saviynt's IAR.
Ans: Advantages of Saviynt's IAR:
Make a smooth request for access.
Rapid Access
Design of a more effortless approval procedure
Simple risk identification
Q28) What does IGA mean in Saviynt?
Ans: The Identity of Governance Application at Saviynt makes it easier for administrators and also end users to complete access request workflows. Included are application guidelines, division of duties (SOD), and automatic IGA avoidance of additional risk breaches. Businesses use Saviynt apps to offer their partners, clients, and employees customizable methods when seeking, delivering, and overseeing application access.
Q29) What is the purpose of the Saviynt IGA?
Ans: When it's necessary to provide safety & security for the company's essential data, Saviynt Identity Governance and Administration (IGA) is employed. Providing proper accessibility for best customers, which saves time, boosts the company's productivity.
Q30) What are the various Saviynt API calls that are available?
Ans: Saviynt has several API calls, including
Rule-engineering & APIs
CRUD APIs (Read, Update, Create, Delete) (CRUD)
Managing rules using APIs
APIs for controlling the procedure for approving access requests
APIs for dashboards and management analytics
APIs for Separating Tasks (SoD)
APIs to administer delegations
Saviynt Certification Questions
Q31) What modules does Saviynt contain?
Ans: Saviynt contains several modules, including:
Reports on Identity Analytics, Password Management, User Administration, SOD Management & Continuous Controls of Request Certification Rule / Roles / Policy Management
Q32) Please mention the model of Saviynt's multi-dimensional RISK.
Ans:
Static:
Contextual access regulations
Policies for separating duties
Security and compliance measures
Glossary and Classification
Dynamic:
Analysis of use
Peer study of outliers
Analysis of behavior
External role access
Inherent:
User type
Vulnerability/Threat intelligence
Geolocation
Q33) Who oversees security at Saviynt?
Answer: The information, features, and resources in the cloud (Workday, Office 365, AWS, Salesforce, Azure) and corporate platforms are all under the security manager's control at Saviynt (SAP & Oracle EBS). IGA 2.0 is powered by Saviynt, which automates monitoring for power advantages, knowledge, and risk analytics.
Q34) What are a few attributes of Saviynt?
Ans:
1) ATTESTATION Tab: The ATTESTATION tab starts the authentication process to certify accessibility for various services.
2) ADMIN Tab: The ADMIN tab manages funds, protection authorities, people, titles, password plans, tasks, specific teams, endpoints, and organizational interactions.
3) ARS Tab: When a need for personal data connection accessibility is present, the ARS tab is utilized to transfer tasks that the user has recommended. It may be used for code resets, updating certain information, and creating additional functions.
4) ROLE Tab: Role mining, entitlement discovery, and other processes are produced using the ROLE tab.
5) SOD Tab: The SOD Tab is utilized to create, publish, and manage SOD. SOD Reports, SOD Violations, Ruleset Requests, Mitigating Controls, Ruleset, Risk, and other SOD-related items are handled as part of this.
Q35) What’s mean the Identity Access Rule in Saviynt?
Ans: The Identity Access Rules are a set of rules that specify certain circumstances and trigger particular actions. Identity Access rules may be enhanced or the processes modified using the Global Configuration settings.
Q36) What actors take part in a campaign in Saviynt?
Ans:
1) Certified: Service account owners, user managers, role owners, entitlement owners, and certificate issuers.
2) End-User: The term "end-user" refers to customers who have access and are being assessed by a certifier.
3) Delegate: A person to whom the Certifier has delegated their responsibilities.
4) Campaign Owner: A member of the SAM Support group who is in charge of the campaign.
5) Access Provisioning Team: In the case of manual provisioning, the SAM role administrator and L3 support role.
Q37) Please briefly describe each of the Saviynt campaigns.
Ans:
1) User Manager: The user manager campaign can provide access licenses and monitor the Line Managers' acquisition of such licenses.
2) Service Account: This campaign is used when it's essential to provide the tools for Generic Account Protectors to evaluate and validate the acquisition of access to the chosen Generic Accounts. These profiles may be service accounts, depending on the criteria.
3) Entitlement: The Entitlement owners can access and approve the titles through this Campaign.
4) Role Owner: This campaign allows role owners to review and license the tasks.
Q38) What are some of the primary responsibilities of Saviynt?
Ans:
During the identification lifecycle, accessibility choices are made while keeping risks in mind.
Monitoring of the solution profile may be simplified with simplicity.
Giving users and administrators self-service capabilities reduces their reliance on IT processes.
Saviynt offers good data exposure, administration, and control.
Provisioning tasks can be automated with Identity Bot, an integrated RPA engine.
Q39) How do orphan accounts work?
Ans: The accounts that are live consumer profiles in the identity database but have no personal connections to the profile are known as orphan accounts.
Q40) How does Saviynt's Cloud PAM work?
Ans: PAM is a cloud-architected & cloud-delivered solution from Saviynt that grants business-critical access to multi-cloud workloads and hybrid apps (Privileged Access Management). The PAM provides automatic multi-cloud workload recognition, which also helps reduce attack surfaces, enables complete audit capability for just-in-time (JIT), upholds compliance requirements, and establishes permanent accounts.
Conclusion:
After reading that, you could have developed an understanding of interview inquiries by Saviynt. Go to the interview, then confront your fear. This blog may have more quizzes in the future. You now feel more prepared to answer the most frequent Saviynt interview questions.
26:T7716,
PostgreSQL is a powerful, open-source relational database management system (RDBMS) that has been in active development for more than 30 years. It is designed to handle a wide variety of workloads and is used in a wide range of applications, from small personal projects to large, enterprise-level systems.
In a PostgreSQL interview, you will be asked a wide range of questions, including technical and functional. This article will cover the most common PostgreSQL interview questions that will help you in your interview preparation. Irrespective of the fact whether you are an experienced candidate or a fresher, these questions will help you demonstrate your knowledge and skills to potential employers.
We have divided these interview questions into 2 categories:
Support for advanced data types, such as arrays, hstore, and JSON
Support for full-text search
Concurrent transactions and robust reliability
Support for stored procedures and triggers written in various programming languages
Support for common SQL standards, as well as many advanced features such as partitioning and replication
Q2) What is the difference between PostgreSQL and MySQL?
Ans: While both PostgreSQL and MySQL are popular open-source relational database management systems, they do have some notable differences. PostgreSQL has features like built-in support to handle multiple access, and complex data types. MySQL is an easy to use and the most commonly used web based application because along with being a simple query language it can also handle huge amounts of data.
Q3) How does PostgreSQL handle concurrency?
Ans: PostgreSQL handles concurrency via Multi-Version Concurrency Control (MVCC). If a user wants to update a row, PostgreSQL creates a new version of the row and locks it without disturbing the old ones so that other users can access it. And once the new version is created, it replaces the old one and the lock will be removed. Doing this prevents conflicts and gives space for high concurrency.
Q4) Can you explain the role of a "PostgreSQL table space"?
Ans: In PostgreSQL, a predefined set of tables and indexes are stored in an area called the table space on the computer's file system. The same concept can be found in several other database management systems. Doing this enhances performance and security because each table has its own files set that can be embedded in a plethora of file systems or storage locations.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of PostgreSQL? Enroll in Instructor-Led live PostgreSQL Training to become Job Ready!
Q5) How do you monitor the performance of a PostgreSQL database?
Ans: There are a range of built-in tools available to monitor the efficiency of a PostgreSQL database. The views "pg stat activity" and "pg stat all tables," which offer factual information on the database activity and table statistics, are examples of these tools. Using tools like pgAdmin and PgAdmin, PostgreSQL also provides a graphical user interface for more thorough monitoring. In additional to these built-in capabilities, PostgreSQL performance may very well be tracked using a number of external tools, including Nagios, Prometheus, and Grafana. These tools offer sophisticated monitoring capabilities and can be used to locate and fix performance problems.
Q6) How do you backup a PostgreSQL database?
Ans: There are several ways to backup a PostgreSQL database, but one of the most common methods is to use the ‘pg_dump’ command-line utility. This utility creates a logical backup of the database in a format that can be restored using the ‘pg_restore’ command. Additionally, you can use pg_basebackup to make a physical backup that is ready to use for warm or hot backup for restore in a different location.
Q7) What is the purpose of the vacuum process in PostgreSQL?
Ans: In PostgreSQL, the vacuum process is used to reclaim space from deleted or updated rows. When a row is deleted or updated, the old version of the row is not immediately removed from the table but is instead marked as "dead" or "dead tuples". The vacuum process scans the table for these dead tuples and reclaims the space they occupy. This is important for maintaining the performance and integrity of the database.
Q8) How does PostgreSQL handle transactions?
Ans: For the purpose of controlling database changes, PostgreSQL employs the idea of a "transaction." A series of one or more SQL statements that are executed as a single piece of work is known as a transaction. Since every transaction is atomic, it can either be fully committed or totally rolled back. By doing this, even in the event of a mistake or system failure, the database is guaranteed to remain in a consistent state.
Q9) Explain about indexes in PostgreSQL.
Ans: A database component known as an index in PostgreSQL offers a quick and effective way to search for certain rows in a table or view. Indexes function by making a backup of the indexed information in a particular data structure that facilitates quick lookups, such as a B-tree, Hash, Bitmap, or GIN.
1) B-tree: The default index type in PostgreSQL is B-tree which is well suited for most use cases. B-tree indexes are ordered, so they are well suited for range queries, and they also support efficient lookups for equality operations.
2) Hash: Hash indexes are good for exact-match queries, but they are less efficient for range queries. They are designed for small tables and for queries that always return a small number of rows.
3) Bitmap: For data warehousing activities involving sophisticated queries with several conditions, bitmap indexes are an invaluable tool. A set of rows can be represented as a bitmap using bitmap indexing, where each bit in the bitmap represents a row in the database and is set if the relevant row satisfies the query criteria. Due to the effective processing of complicated queries involving numerous conditions, data warehousing task performance can be greatly enhanced.
4) GIN: Full-text searches and data types like arrays and hstore both employ GIN (Generalized Inverted Index) indexes as their primary index type. They are especially helpful for difficult searches involving a lot of text or data. Although GIN indexes can provide quick searching, their complexity may make them slower to insert and update. Nevertheless, they can be a vital part of many applications that call for sophisticated search capabilities as they are a potent tool for enhancing the performance of searches in enormous datasets.
It's critical to remember that building indexes has a price. Inserting, updating, or deleting data takes longer the more indexes you have. Furthermore, having an excessive number of indices can actually harm overall performance. Therefore, in order to select the appropriate indexes to boost performance, it is essential to have a solid understanding of the queries and usage patterns of the database. It is feasible to strike a compromise between enhanced performance and effective data management by carefully choosing and managing indexes depending on unique usage patterns and query needs.
Q10) Howdoes PostgreSQL manage data integrity and constraint enforcement?
Ans: PostgreSQL supports a wide range of data integrity constraints, including primary keys, foreign keys, unique constraints, check constraints, and exclusion constraints. These constraints are enforced by the database system to ensure that the data in the cables remains consistent and accurate. Additionally, PostgreSQL provides triggers and rules that allows developers to create custom constraints and actions to be taken when data is inserted, updated, or deleted.
Q11) How do you manage and monitor a PostgreSQL database?
Ans: PostgreSQL offers built-in tools like pgAdmin and pg_stat_activity, and third-party monitoring tools like pgwatch2 and pgBadger to manage and monitor the database's performance and configuration.
Q12) How does PostgreSQL handle large data and high traffic?
Ans: PostgreSQL has several features that make it well-suited for handling large data and high traffic. It supports horizontal scaling through the use of read replicas and connection pooling which allows multiple connections to be handled by a single backend process. Additionally, it also has advanced memory management, which allows it to efficiently handle large amounts of data in memory. And it also can handle read-only large tables using materialized views, partitioning which can improve the query performance.
Q13) How does PostgreSQL handle data replication?
Ans: PostgreSQL has several replication options, including streaming replication, logical replication, and clustered solutions like pgpool-II and repmgr. Streaming replication is the most common method, using Write-Ahead Log to replicate changes in real-time, minimizing data loss during primary server failure. Logical replication allows for replication of specific tables or rows for more targeted replication.
Q14) How do you manage and monitor a PostgreSQL server?
Ans: PostgreSQL offers built-in tools like pgAdmin and psql to manage and monitor servers, and third-party tools like Nagios, Munin, and Zabbix can be integrated for a more comprehensive view of server performance and resource usage.
Q15) Can you explain how PostgreSQL uses memory?
Ans: PostgreSQL employs memory in a number of ways to boost performance. While data read from disc is cached by the file system cache, data and indexes are stored in shared buffers. Additionally, sorting, hashing, and other processes use memory, and a memory management system automatically frees up any memory that is not being used.
Q16) Can you explain how PostgreSQL manages disk space?
Ans: PostgreSQL allocates and deallocates space in blocks for tables and indexes. When a block becomes full, a new block is allocated. As rows are updated or deleted, blocks may become empty and are returned to the operating system's file system to be reused. The autovacuum process runs periodically to reclaim space that is
PostgreSQL Interview Questions Experienced:
Q17) How do you handle performance issues in PostgreSQL?
Poor database design, sluggish queries, or lack of hardware resources can all lead to PostgreSQL performance problems. Database performance can be examined to find slow queries, missing indexes, and other bottlenecks using programmes like pgAdmin, explain analyse, and pg stat statements. Performance needs to be watched carefully over time in order to spot problems early and fix them.
Q18) How do you handle high availability in PostgreSQL?
PostgreSQL supports several high availability solutions, such as streaming replication, logical replication, and clustered solutions like pgpool-II, repmgr, and others. The most common way of achieving high availability is through the use of streaming replication, where one server, called the primary, is used to accept writes and the other servers, called replicas, receive a copy of the data in real-time. In case of a primary failure, one of the replicas can be promoted to primary and continue to accept writes.
Q19) How does PostgreSQL manage security?
Data security features provided by PostgreSQL include authentication, authorization, and encryption. Authorization limits access to data and operations, while encryption protects sensitive data. Authentication confirms user identification and role. Additionally, PostgreSQL supports third-party authentication protocols including LDAP, Kerberos, and PAM.
Q20) How does PostgreSQL manage huge data sets?
PostgreSQL uses parallel processing, sharding, and partitioning to manage huge datasets. While sharding distributes data across different servers to lessen server load, partitioning breaks a table into smaller portions based on certain criteria. Multiple queries are processed concurrently in parallel to shorten the overall execution time. The efficiency of queries on huge datasets can be improved by utilising additional techniques like caching and indexing.
PostgreSQL supports data migration through tools like pg_dump, pg_restore, and logical replication. Third-party tools like liquibase and Flyway can also be used for data migration.
Q22) Can you explain the concept of indexes and explain when you would use a clustered index?
You can easily locate particular rows in a table or view using PostgreSQL indexes. They make a copy of the indexed data and store it in a particular data structure, such as a B-tree or hash. An index called a clustered index is one that organises the rows according to how they are physically stored; it is helpful for frequent queries that require ordering or range-scanning depending on that column.
Q23) Explain the differences between subquery and a join?
A subquery is a query that is nested inside another query, whereas a join is a method used to combine data from two or more tables in a database. A subquery can be used in different clauses like WHERE, FROM and HAVING clause, but join is only used in FROM clause.
Q24) How would you go about finding the duplicate rows in a table?
Using a GROUP BY clause and a HAVING clause in a query, you may look for duplicate rows in a table. This gives you the option to group rows by a particular column and then filter the results to only display those groups that have multiple rows, which signify duplicate rows.
SELECT column1, column2, . . . , count(*)
FROM mytable
GROUP BY column1, column2, . . .
HAVING count(*)>1;
Q25) How do you manage multiple users accessing the database at once?
Ans: Multi-Version Concurrency Control (MVCC) is a technique used by PostgreSQL to control concurrent access to the database. Each transaction may operate with a consistent view of the data thanks to MVCC, which makes sure that each transaction sees a snapshot of the data as it was at the time of the transaction. Conflicts that may arise from concurrent access are automatically handled by the database.
Q26) What in PostgreSQL is a Materialized View?
Ans: When using PostgreSQL, a materialised view is a database object that keeps the output of a SELECT statement in a physical table. As a result, data can be queried more quickly because fewer computations are required each time a view is requested. A sort of "caching" mechanism, it entails pre-calculating some pricey queries and storing the results for later use. It works well for applications involving data warehouses or huge data aggregation.
Q27) What distinctions can be drawn between temporary tables and table variables?
Ans: In PostgreSQL, table variables are utilized to keep records within functions and stored procedures, while temporary tables are used to store the outcomes of a query that is only utilized for the duration of a single session. Temporary tables are created using the "CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE" statement and are only visible to the current session, while table variables are created using the "DECLARE" statement and are only visible within the function or stored procedure in which they are defined.
Q28) How do you implement full-text search in PostgreSQL?
Ans: PostgreSQL supports full-text search using “tsvector” and “tsquery” data types and GIN, GIST, and SP-GiST index types. To implement full-text search, create a “tsvector” column, a trigger function to update it, and an index on the “tsvector” column. Perform the search using the "@@" operator.
Q29) What is the purpose of a Vacuum in PostgreSQL?
Ans: A vacuum in PostgreSQL is a process that reclaims space from dead rows and keeps the database running efficiently. PostgreSQL uses a technique called MVCC to handle concurrent access to the database. When a row is deleted or updated in a table, it is not immediately removed from the table, but is instead marked as "dead" and left in place. A vacuum process will then run and reclaim the space used by these dead rows. This is done to prevent the table from becoming too fragmented and slowing down the query performance.
Q30) How do you implement database replication in PostgreSQL?
Ans: PostgreSQL supports several types of replication such as synchronous, asynchronous and logical replication.
Synchronous replication ensures that all the changes made on the master are immediately propagated to the standby node.
Asynchronous replication ensures that the changes made on the master are propagated to the standby node as soon as possible.
Logical replication is a feature that allows you to replicate a specific table, a set of tables or even the whole database.
It can be done by using pg_basebackup and streaming replication, by configuring the primary server and the replication servers, or by using logical replication with the pg_logical extension.
Most Common PostgreSQL FAQ's:
Q1) What is PostgreSQL?
Ans: Known for its robust features and scalability, PostgreSQL is an open-source relational database management system (RDBMS). Large-scale web applications, corporate intelligence, and data warehousing are just a few examples of high-demand applications where it is frequently employed.
Q2) What are some advantages of using PostgreSQL?
Ans: PostgreSQL offers a number of advantages, including:
Support for advanced data types and indexing methods
Robust concurrency control
Support for stored procedures, triggers and views
High performance and scalability
High availability and disaster recovery
Large and active community, which makes it a great choice for various use cases.
Q3) Can I use PostgreSQL in a production environment?
Ans: Indeed, PostgreSQL is a solid database management system that is appropriate for usage in a real-world setting. Applications that are important to their operations rely on PostgreSQL in many sizable businesses and organisations.
Q4) What distinguishes PostgreSQL from MySQL in particular?
Ans: Both PostgreSQL and MySQL are popular open-source relational databases, but they have some key differences. PostgreSQL is known for its advanced features such as more robust concurrency control, support for more data types and enhanced indexing, support for stored procedures and triggers. MySQL is known for its high performance and is widely used in web applications.
Q5) What are the types of indexes supported in PostgreSQL?
Ans: PostgreSQL supports several types of indexes, including B-Tree, Hash, GiST, SP-GiST and GIN indexes. Each index type is optimized for different types of queries and data distribution. For example, B-Tree indexes are suitable for equality and range queries, while GIN indexes are optimized for full-text search.
Conclusion:
These PostgreSQL interview questions and answers can be used as a starting point to understand PostgreSQL’s concepts and features, because it covers a diverse range of topics such as performance optimization, security, and replication, indexing, concurrency and the notable differences between PostgreSQL and the other databases.
27:T5bfd,
Cypress is a front-end testing tool for the current web that is JavaScript-based. Its major goal is to handle all issues that a developer or Quality Assurance engineer encounters when testing an app. One of its best features is that it is a developer-friendly tool that employs a unique DOM modification technique.
Ans: Cypress's main characteristics include the following:
This tool can run tests and perform commands in the browser, making tests faster and less flaky.
It can take screenshots of tests when each step is completed.
In addition, cypress provides network traffic control, built-in assertions, and automatic wait.
2) Cypress is what kind of framework?
Ans: Cypress is a JavaScript-based end-to-end testing framework built on mocha. This feature-rich JavaScript test framework runs on and in the browser, making asynchronous testing simple and convenient.
3) What are Cypress's limitations?
Ans: Create JavaScript tests. Cypress can only utilize Node because JavaScript is the world's most famous programming language.
There is no multi-tab support.
*Cypress is a slower wood.
Maintenance.
The syntax could be more complex and consistent.
4) Can we use testing in conjunction with cypress?
Ans: Yes. Allows you to define a set of fixed, particular data states for a collection of tests (group fixtures).
5) Is Cypress a BDD or TDD system?
Ans: Cypress is a JavaScript-based end-to-end testing framework built on top of mocha. This feature-rich JavaScript test framework runs on and in the browser, making asynchronous testing simple and convenient. It also pairs with any JavaScript testing framework using a BDD/TDD assertion library and a browser.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Cypress? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Cypress Training to become Job Ready!
6) What makes cypress quicker than Selenium?
Ans: Cypress, as a tool, is suited for introducing developers to test automation rather than serving as a replacement for Selenium. This is why cypress is one of the world's fastest-growing automation tools. Selenium, on the other hand, is a more general-purpose tool for a larger audience.
7) Is it possible to utilize BDD in Cypress?
Ans: A cucumber is a tool that aids and supports Behavior Driven Development (BDD). Cypress integrates with Cucumber to allow you to write test scenarios in BDD format. Cypress takes advantage of Cucumber's capabilities by utilizing the Cucumber-preprocessor node module.
8) What language is spoken in cypress?
Ans: Greek Cypriots speak Cypriot Greek as their everyday language (vernacular), while Turkish Cypriots speak Cypriot Turkish. The standard languages (Standard Modern Greek and Standard Turkish) are utilized for official purposes.
9) Can cypress support many tabs?
Ans: Cypress instructions are executed within a browser. Multiple browser tabs will never be supported. Cypress cannot drive two browsers at the same time.
10) Does cypress support XPath
Ans: It should be noted that cypress also supports Xpath selectors. That, however, does not happen by accident. To put it another way, we need 'Cypress-Xpath' external plugins to help this selector.
Cypress Interview Questions for Experienced
1) How would you characterize the Cypress testing tool?
Ans: Cypress is a front-end testing tool that uses Javascript. It was created with node js. The tool is useful for running tests in a browser. In this way, it can make the entire testing process more trustworthy and simpler.
2) How will you set up cypress?
Ans: To install cypress, we must first install Node. After that, we can use the command npm to install the cypress.
3) Could you explain the Cypress architecture?
Ans: A Node server process powers this utility. The Node process and cypress constantly synchronize, communicate, and execute tasks on each other's behalf. Not only that, but cypress also functions at the network layer, changing and reading web traffic at the same time. This allows cypress to alter everything that comes through the browser.
4) What exactly is Cypress CLI?
Ans: Cypress CLI is useful because it allows you to run Cypress tests from the command line. One such feature is used in the Pipelines to execute the Cypress tests. It also provides Flags Control and Options for the Cypress Test Behaviour.
5) Please list some of the browsers that cypress supports.
Ans: Cypress is compatible with the following:
Electron
Firefox
Edge
Chromium
Chrome
6) How can you tell the difference between Cypress and Selenium?
Ans:
Cypress only supports the Typescript and JavaScript programming languages. Selenium, on the other hand, supports all of the major programming languages, including C#, Python, Java, Ruby, JavaScript, and others.
While Selenium supports all major browsers, cypress only supports a handful.
The configuration in Selenium is complicated. Cypress contains ready-to-use frameworks.
7) What testing frameworks are included with cypress?
Ans: Cypress comes with the assertion libraries Chai and Mocha. However, we are unable to use TestNG or Junit in Cypress.
8) In cypress, how can you interact with DOM elements?
Ans: In cypress, we may utilize CSS Selector to communicate with DOM components.
9) What exactly do you mean by "hooks" in cypress?
Ans: Cypress hooks are commonly used to specify or define preconditions we want to perform before each test or a set of tests. After each (), after (), beforeEach (), and before are some of the accessible hooks ( ).
10) In the Cypress framework, how will you handle reusability?
Ans: Cypress includes the commands.js and index.js files in the Support folder by default. Index.js is executed before each test file. We can store reusable behavior in this folder, such as global override and custom commands.
11) In cypress, what do you mean by automation?
Ans: Cypress automation is a procedure that executes a Test Code in conjunction with the app. This test cannot be carried out in a single loop. It does, however, take place in a single browser. Node.js Server is commonly employed in actions outside of the computer.
12) What is Cypress run?
Ans: Cypress Run helps in the execution of Cypress tests in Headless Browsers. It also aids in the opening of a new browser tab. It is also useful in loading the tool at the URL Cypress, which was previously installed from the same. Cypress aids in the discovery of cypress.json. Furthermore, it keeps running tests on the webpack monitor.
13) Which selectors does Cypress support?
Ans: This tool only supports CSS selectors by default. However, we can utilize third-party plugins to access the Xpath selectors.
14) How will you launch the Cypress window and run tests?
Ans: After we've installed the cypress, we can access the npm cypress open command. The tests can then be run by clicking on the test file name.
15) How do I view the tool's default configuration?
Ans: Under the Cypress window Test Runner, you can see the default configuration. There, you must select Settings & Configurations.
Ans: Cypress does not support XPath by default. However, with the Cypress-Xpath plugin, we can utilize XPath to interact with all DOM components. We can use npm to install the plugin.
2) How should the Cypress framework manage reusability?
Ans: Cypress includes index.js and commands.js by default in the Support folder. Index.js is executed before each test file. We can store reusable behavior in this folder, such as custom commands and global overrides.
3) What are the disadvantages of the Cypress testing software?
Ans:
Only JavaScript is supported.
There is no support for multiple tabs.
Iframes are not permitted.
Only Web Testing is supported.
4) How can we dynamically update the baseUrl in cypress?
Ans: Using the CLI Command, we can alter the baseUrl in cypress dynamically.
5) Is mocha used by cypress?
Ans: Cypress has expanded mocha and used its bdd syntax for unit and integration testing.
6) How do I set up cypress?
Ans: If we wish to install cypress, we must first install Node. Once Node is installed, we can Install cypress with the command npm.
Ans: To click an element on cypress, use the.click() function. The element function should be connected with the click function. That is, we must first obtain the desired element before clicking.
8) In cypress, how do I make suites?
Ans: We can construct a describe() block. The described block serves as a suite, and each test can be built as a separate it() block within it. Describe() functions similarly to a suite in this context.
9) Why should I write my tests in the integration folder when I can write them in other folders?
Ans: In cypress, the default tests folder is integration. Therefore when we run the tests, it will look in the integration folder for all test files.
However, you can construct the tests in a different location; in that case, you must alter the configuration and specify where your integration folder is located using the "integrationFolder" option.
10) Which selectors will be supported by cypress?
Ans: By default, cypress only supports CSS selectors. To support Xpath selectors, we can use a third-party plugin.
11) What exactly is an environment variable in cypress?
Ans: The Environment Variables are variables whose values are determined at the operating system level, independent of the application or framework.
12) What are Cypress Preserve Cookies?
Ans: By default, cypress clears the cookies after each test. To avoid removing cookies, use cypress's preserve cookies option.
13) What precisely are Cypress custom commands?
Ans: Cypress has a collection of default commands such as cy. Visit, cy. Reload, and so on. In cypress, we can also create our custom commands.
14) What precisely is Shadow DOM?
Ans: Shadow DOM enables the addition of disguised DOM trees to standard DOM tree components — this shadow DOM tree starts with a shadow root.
15) What is the Testing Framework that Cypress includes?
Ans: Cypress comes with the assertion libraries Mocha and Chai. However, we can't use Junit or TestNG. Such minor inquiries can also be useful in Cypress Interview Questions.
Conclusion:
Cypress is an excellent tool for individuals who works to develop relevant end-to-end tests quickly. It makes debugging difficulties very simple thanks to its preview, photos, videos, and pictures. It has some flaws. There may be better solutions for some projects.
28:T5772,
New Relic is a software company based in San Francisco. It develops cloud-based software that helps website owners track their website's status and health. It has been 14 years since this company was founded. After 14 years, this company has reached a total revenue of $786.5 million as of March 2022. The company has a total of 2217 employees working it.
New Relic is a cloud-based software service known as Software As A Service (SaaS). It monitors the status and health of any application or website. It checks the traffic and its performance in the environment.
However, before we jump to New Relic interview questions, let us tell you some important facts about New Relic.
New Relics was founded by Lew Cirne in 2008, who became the company's CEO.
Bill Staples joined the company as the Chief Product Officer on February 14 2020.
In February 2013, New Relic raised $80 million from investors like Allen & Company, T. Rowe Price, Benchmark Capital, etc.
The above key points clearly state the demand for New Relic professionals. We are confident that our New Relic interview questions can assist you in cracking the interview and bagging your dream job.
We have classified New Relic interview Questions into three parts, namely
Q1) How is New Relic different from other software such as Splunk?
Ans: New Relic is a tool which helps to monitor and observe the performance and traffic of a website or any application. On the other hand, software like Splunk helps manage the data and create logs of events and other data.
Q2) What is the infrastructure of New Relic?
Ans: New Relic gives the client complete details of the hosting environment and configuration of a website. If there is any change in those configurations, then there can be alerts to permit the change from the client.
Q3) Describe New Relic's APM?
Ans: The New Relic's APM allows monitoring of the performance statistics of various websites and applications. We can also sync the important and relevant data such as alerts, logs and so on to the New Relic mobile app to monitor those data from the app itself.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Splunk? Enroll in Instructor-Led live "Splunk Training" to become Job Ready!
Q4) What is the process to set alerts in New Relic?
Ans: On the one.newrelic.com website, click on Alerts & AI and then click on policies. Select "New Alert Policy" from the policy index page and give it a meaningful name of a maximum of 64 characters. Select the incident you want notified about and click "Create".
Q5) What is the use of Runbook in New Relic?
Ans: Runbook in New Relic allows the user to recover from any unexpected crashes or failures of the application or website.
Q6) What do you mean by URL in Runbook?
Ans: URL of your runbook allows you to link to the information or the procedure you need to undergo in case the application failure exceeds its critical threshold.
Q7) How do you create a new dashboard in New Relic?
Ans: You need to click the "Create a new dashboard" button from the top-right corner of the dashboards section, and you will get a relic dashboard ready for you.
Q8) What are the steps to disable the New Relic notifications?
Ans: Go to "Alerts & AI" from one.newrelic.com, select "Alert Policies", and select a policy. Then from the "Alert Conditions" list, select a condition whose notification you do not need and toggle it off.
Q9) What is the process of data collection in New Relic?
Ans: New Relic APM stores data from various applications and websites and stores it within the enterprise. The users can have access to the data in a dashboard interface view.
New Relic Interview Questions and Answers for Freshers
Q10) What is New Relic?
Ans: New Relic is a software that manages and analyses any website or application's performance and traffic data and allows the client to see it in a dashboard interface with the statistical charts of performance and traffic. Monitoring is critical to your application's performance. The New Relic platform provides developers and operations with full-stack visibility through integrated alarms and dashboards, providing insight into everything from the digital customer experience to the apps and dynamic infrastructure. It integrates with your favourite programming languages, databases, and web frameworks—so you can discover what's happening at the source of your information, whether it's people or things.
Q11) What is the function of New Relic?
Ans:
It can import data from different APIs, Agents, etc., and access it from a single user interface.
It can also build chats and analyze the data of a website.
If there is any threat or a breach on the website, New Relic also notifies about it in that instant.
Q12) What are the advantages of New Relic?
Ans: The website owners can monitor the status of their website from the comfort of their homes and their systems. They can manage all the data, from any errors from the customer's side to any degradation in the application's performance.
Q13) Is New Relic a SIEM?
Ans: SIEM is a type of software that gives back-end engineers information regarding the health and state of a website. On the other hand, New Relic is a software allowing users to be their SIEM. All the data analyzed and collected by New Relic is directly monitored by the website owners from any device and location.
Q14) Which category of companies uses New Relic?
Ans: The target companies of New Relic are the recent start-ups and firms with a small revenue of between $1 million to $10 million and a limited number of resources and employees ranging between 10 to 50.
Q15) What is the procedure to copy a dashboard?
Ans: One can copy a dashboard by cloning it. From the "Dashboards Menu", you can search for the dashboard you are looking for and select the "Clone Dashboard" option in that specific dashboard. Your dashboard will be cloned.
Q16) What do you mean by FACET?
Ans: FACET linking has been a feature which is in demand ever since its release. This feature allows the user to increase the interactivity of their dashboard and improves the filtering process experience.
Q17) Where does New Relic store its data?
Ans: New Relic is a self-hosted software. It stores its data in its server central, Chicago and another IBM-hosted data centre in Frankfurt. It also stores some of its data in cloud storage through Amazon AWS.
Q18) Who is the owner of New Relic?
Ans: New Relic is founded and owned by its current executive chairman, Lew Cirne, in 2008.
Q19) Is New Relic a public software?
Ans: The company announced on December 12, 2014, that New Relic was becoming a public software.
Q20) What was the change in the New Relics pricing model?
Ans: In July 2020, New Relic announced that to lower the barrier in data collection, its pricing model will change to become a per-user system.
Ans: New Relic is a company that manages billions of metrics among millions of applications its customers and delivers the data to more than 5 lakh users and 12 thousand business accounts
Q22) What is a key transaction in New Relic?
Ans: The APM key transaction feature enables you to create and view key transactions in your APM account. You can use this feature in your New Relic account to make it easier to find the transactions you want to examine or resolve. By grouping transactions into sets, you can find them quickly, no matter where they are in your account. You may also need to set thresholds on key transactions to measure alert performance.
Q23) What is the SLA in New Relic?
Ans: You will better understand application performance thanks to the SLA reports, which indicate application downtime and trends over time. New Relic will not provide service level agreement (SLA) reports for your application if it solely creates non-web transactions. To create a description of all transactions, add metrics for web and non-web from the drop-down menus on the Application Usage page, then select Recorder from the Metric menu.
New Relic Interview Questions and Answers for Experienced
Q24) Which of the following is not one of the components of New Relic?
APM
Infrastructure
Mobile
Datalog
Ans: APM
Q25) Which is not a type of transaction in New Relic?
Web
Non-web
Node
Ans: Node
Q26) What is the correct configuration of the file name of the New Relic Agent?
newrelic.yml
newrelic.conf
newrelic.prop
newrelic.json
Ans: newrelic.yml
Q27) What is the language used by New Relic?
Ans: The core language used by New Relic in its development and management is NRQL.
Q28) What is the code used to ignore persistent SignalR connections in New Relic?
Ans:
<!-- Optional for basic traces. -->
<tracerFactory name="NewRelicAgentCoreTracer ">
<match assemblyName="AspNetSignalR.Core"
className="AspNet.SignalR.PersistentConnection">
<exactMethodMatcher methodName="Process"/>
</match>
</tracerFactory>
</instrumentation>
Q29) What is the code to set up New Relic for the Django development server?
Ans: By clicking the "Export as CSV" link in the upper right corner of the page titled "All Transactions table" inside the overall app, we can export a comprehensive list of app server transactions, time, and apdex, among other things.
Q31) What is relic one?
Ans: New Relic One is a scalable, data-driven observability platform that gathers and contextualizes all operational data from any source, making instrumentation, data ingestion and exploration, correlation, and machine learning-powered analysis easier for every business.
Q32) What is the "Workloads" feature of New Relic?
Ans: This “workloads” function aggregates health and activity data from the front end to the back end and enables monitoring of the data based on a set of responsibilities.
Q33) What do the New Relic plugins allow you to do?
Ans: New Relic is a software service that allows you to monitor the health of your website in real-time and gain valuable insights in the cloud and hybrid settings.
Q34) Where can you find the query builder in New Relic?
Ans: Go to one.newrelic.com and click "Query your data" to find the query builder.
Q35) What is the procedure to add a new chart in the relic dashboard?
Ans: You can add new charts with the query builder feature. You can move and put the chart anywhere on your dashboard, suiting your layout.
Q36) How can I read the database report on their website?
Ans: To view a report on your app’s database activity, go to one.newrelic.com > APM > (select an app) > Reports > Database. The default report gives the average of the activity in 24 hours for the last seven days. If you want the reports of a specific period, then you must mention the range and apply the changes.
Q37) Is New Relic PCI compliant?
Ans: Many New Relic customers operate in environments like HIPPA or SOX, and New Relic does not interfere with the customer's compliance requirements.
Q38) State whether New Relic is GDPR compliant or not.
Ans: New Relic is GDPR compliant as it ensures the privacy and security of the customer's data.
29:T3f44,
Dynatrace, Inc. is an NYSE-traded multinational technology company that helps businesses and government institutions worldwide. This company will monitor and enhance its software applications' quality, development and security processes, information technology (IT) infrastructure, and user experiences.
We will look at the interview questions but before that, let's look at some facts about the Dynarace industry.
The total assets of Dynatrace are worth 2.54 billion dollars
The net income of the Dynatrace is about 52.46 million dollars
The total equity of the Dynatrace is about 1.30 billion dollars
We have divided software interview questions into two segments:
Ans: Dynatrace is a software intelligence platform that offers artificial intelligence for operations, application performance management, digital experience management and monitoring of cloud infrastructure.
Q2) Explain the architecture of Dynatrace.
Ans: Dynatrace is a distributed application performance management system, sometimes known as SaaS. It is used as an agent-based architecture, in which easy installation of small software components that may be monitored or observed on each of the servers that are being performed. Performance information is gathered by these agents and relayed to the central Dynatrace server.
Q3) How will you use Dynatrace for capturing APM metrics and business KPIs?
Ans: Dynatrace gives users many options when capturing APM data and key business indicators. One option is to make use of the Dynatrace Recorder, which is a piece of software that allows user sessions to be recorded and then replayed at a later time. It helps capture various times, such as when a website loads and a user responds. Synthetic transactions, simulated user actions that may use to monitor application performance, is yet another method for gathering this information. Synthetic transactions are an example of an alternative way to collect this data.
Q4) What are some of the common data sources that can be easily used with Dynatrace?
Ans: Dynatrace is flexible enough to integrate with many external data systems. However, the most widespread and well-known are log files, application performance management (APM) tools, and network data.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of ServiceNow? Enroll in Instructor-Led live ServiceNow Training to become Job Ready!
Q5) What do you understand of OneAgent in the context of Dynatrace?
Ans: Each monitored host has an agent called OneAgent installed on it, and this agent is what gathers performance statistics. Dynatrace then analyses and reports on the performance data.
Q6) Can you explain to us the way Dynatrace monitors performance metrics?
Ans: Performance metrics are monitored by Dynatrace, which does so by continuously gathering data from the system it is monitoring. After that, this data is processed and evaluated to determine whether or not there are any possible performance difficulties. If any problems are discovered, Dynatrace will offer advice on how to resolve those problems.
Q7) What are the challenges Dynatrace helps address?
Ans: Dynatrace helps address several challenges, including application monitoring, performance issues, and security.
Q8) Is it possible to integrate Dynatrace with any other monitoring tools? If yes, then which tools?
Ans: Yes, you can combine Dynatrace with other monitoring software, and it's not a problem. Dynatrace can work with various third-party tools, including Zabbix, Nagios, and New Relic.
Q9) What are the different types of components which are involved in a typical installation of Dynatrace?
Ans: The installation of Dynatrace consists of the below-mentioned components:
Agent: This is the agent deployed on every monitored host, and its job is to gather all of the performance data.
Server: The information gathered by the OneAgents is sent to this part, where it is processed.
Web UI: This is the interface via which users can view all of the data and information that Dynatrace has gathered.
Q10) Explain what an application environment map is in the context of Dynatrace?
Ans: A visual representation of your program's infrastructure and the relationships between its various parts, the application environment map is vital to any development process. Servers, databases, online services, etc., all fall under this category. It's an efficient method of seeing the big picture of your application's structure.
Dynatrace Interview Questions for Experienced:
Q11) Explain briefly the difference between managed and standalone clusters in Dynatrace?
Ans: A group of Dynatrace servers controlled and monitored by a single server at the cluster level is a managed cluster. A freestanding cluster is a collection of Dynatrace servers in which each server is responsible for its management.
Q12) How will you correlate issues which Dynatrace detects to their root causes?
Ans: Use Dynatrace's Problem Management function to trace back issues to their origins after the software has uncovered them. With this function, you may examine the symptoms and origins of each problem that has been identified. Doing so allows you to spot problems as soon as they develop and address them efficiently.
Q13) What best or perfect way to set up alerts using Dynatrace?
Ans: Using the Alerting Profile function of Dynatrace is the most effective method for configuring alerts to be sent out. It allows you to define distinct alerting profiles for each scenario, and then you can apply those profiles to the monitors most relevant to that scenario. You can control when you receive notifications, ensuring that you only get them when you require them and that they are relevant to the circumstances.
Q14) How will you monitor service level agreements by using Dynatrace?
Dynatrace can be used to monitor SLAs in many different ways. Dynatrace can initially be utilized for app and service performance monitoring. It will tell you if the applications and services you offer live up to your established service level agreements. Furthermore, Dynatrace can help you keep tabs on your services and apps' uptime. It will help you determine whether issues are causing your apps and services to be unavailable to users.
Q15) Is it essential for teams to access actionable insights about their applications and services? What is your opinion?
Ans: First, it facilitates quicker problem recognition and diagnosis by teams. Second, it provides teams with insight into the usage and effectiveness of their products and services. Third, it enables groups to monitor developments and settle on well-informed selections for future alterations or enhancements. Teams can ultimately deliver higher-quality software and services if they have access to actionable information.
Q16) Can you give me some examples of real-world scenarios where Dynatrace helps solve problems?
Ans: You may use Dynatrace to keep tabs on how your apps are doing in real-time, spot problems and bottlenecks, and get insights that can help you optimize your code. In addition to monitoring application performance, it can be used to keep tabs on the health of individual servers or server farms and track how well applications are doing.
Q17) State the way you get started with automating deployments using Dynatrace?
Ans: Installing the Dynatrace Deployment Automation plugin would be the first step in the process. It will give you the tools and APIs you need to make your deployments run automatically. You may start automating your deployments with the Dynatrace Deployment Automation API immediately after downloading the plugin
Q18) Define the baseline anomalies in the context of Dynatrace?
Ans: Baseline anomalies are performance changes that fall outside the normal range of variation. These changes occur caused by several factors, including infrastructure, workload, or application code changes.
Q19) What kinds of results can you expect from using Dynatrace?
Ans: Dynatrace allows you to track how well your apps are doing. It is a comprehensive set of metrics covering response times, throughput, and error rates. When issues arise with your applications, Dynatrace can help you locate and diagnose them.
Q20) Explain how you can improve performance using Dynatrace?
Ans: Dynatrace provides performance information to help you identify and fix application performance issues. By using Dynatrace, you can quickly improve the performance of your applications just by identifying and resolving bottlenecks and slowdowns.
FAQ's:
1) Which is the No.1 software company in the world?
Ans: Microsoft is the No.1 software company in the world.
2) What type of tool is dynatrace?
Ans: it is a monitoring tool.
3) What is the advantage of using dynatrace?
Ans: The advantage is it allows DevOps teams to find dependencies in any application.
Conclusion:
The frequently asked questions are some of the ones that come up most often in Dynatrace interviews. If you want to do well in an interview, look at the questions or just use the ones above to practice.
2a:T3045,
CISSP Interview Question and Answers
The CISSP managerial certification calls for at least 5 years of practical expertise in 2 of the 8 security domains. It is a prestigious credential, the knowledge of which is highly valued as well as its practical application.
Hence, if you want to ace the CISSP interview then knowledge and preparation are what you need the most. We bring to you the best CISSP interview questions and answers to win it.
Q1) Explain threat, risk, and vulnerability with reference to cybersecurity.
Ans: A system's safety measures have some degree of vulnerability (weakness), and a threat is an attacker who takes advantage of that weakness. Risk measures the likelihood of loss when the threat takes advantage of the vulnerability. For instance, a detractor can easily break into a server using the regular username and password and arbitrarily control it.
Q2) What elements raise the security risks?
Ans: Although there is no clear-cut solution to this question, it demonstrates your focus and assurance in the interviewer. You can respond that one of the main contributing factors is a lack of a highly qualified executive team or funding for security software. Or perhaps there is a lack of commitment on the side of workers who do not follow the finest security procedures.
Q3) How should risks be reported?
Ans: It is necessary to assess the risk first before reporting it. There are two methods for doing that: quantitative analysis and qualitative analysis. Both technical and commercial professionals profit from this approach. Businesspeople can calculate future losses in numbers when technical experts can identify the frequency and impact. The audience reported that the risk was afterward evaluated and disclosed.
Q4) Specify which processes will be used in the strategy implementation to increase security.
Ans: Forms are made available to developers to make it easier for them to document the systems where changes happened during the implementation process and to track and detect any change that occurs.
Q5) Describe the analysis and monitoring of network traffic.
Ans: Network traffic monitoring, which is comparable to network traffic analysis, is a security logical tool used by administrators of computer systems to identify security flaws that could compromise network traffic monitoring, functionality, and accessibility.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of CISSP? Enroll in Instructor-Led live CISSP Training to become Job Ready!
Q6) What does Defense in depth entail?
Ans: Network traffic monitoring, which is comparable to network traffic analysis, is a security logical tool used by admins of computer systems to identify security flaws that could compromise network traffic monitoring, performance, and exposure.
Q7) Which type of access control permits a group of users to use a resource?
Ans: Users are categorized by roles in access control systems. The network's designated locations were then assigned these roles. This makes it simpler to find users who accessed resources.
Q8) Describe a denial-of-service attack.
Ans: It is a program that floods another network with a large number of packets in an effort to deplete its resources, disable it, and make it unusable.
Q9) Why were suppliers or subcontractors considered dangerous?
Ans: Without enough training and supervision, vendors frequently have extensive access to the organization's systems. In general, there is no plan for finishing a contract. Data is transferred by email, where the risks of viruses and other malware were significant, and vendors also work from home, offer cloud services, etc. Companies also infrequently verify the security of data that has been safely removed from vendor assets once projects are completed.
Q10) When does a person become a risk to information security?
Ans. People who are frequently referred to as "insider" hazards. When they unintentionally or actively engage in a way that puts them at risk for information security, either vendors or employees become potential security risks. For instance, misplacing organizational resources, casually discussing clients with outsiders, etc.
Q11) Compare and contrast RSA with Diffie-Hellman.
Ans: Diffie-hellman is a key-exchange protocol, whereas RSA is a signing system. The main distinction between the two is that whereas Diffie-Hellman doesn't require you to memorize any key information in advance, RSA does. Organizations do not want to see blank faces.
Q12) How significant are tools in an organization? What should one do if a tool breaks down?
Ans: A company shouldn't rely just on its tools. Tools are frequently used for two purposes: first, to complete tasks that cannot be completed manually, like antivirus. The second is to finish a time-sensitive operation, like installing a firewall, on schedule. We require a tool to speed up the tasks, which is the third reason. The staff should make sure that they are sufficiently knowledgeable about the tools and how they operate.
Now, when a tool breaks down, we can figure out what could have gone wrong. It's risky to rely too heavily on the technologies, thus backup strategies or alternate ways need to be in place. If there is a third party involved, it is feasible to do the necessary maintenance and audits. For proper operation, hardware and software cleanliness must be upheld.
Q13) How can remote workers' connections to the office network be secured?
Ans: The staff members can use a VPN service. With the use of a virtual private network, or VPN, customers can create a tunnel from an unstable network to the office network. Other security tools, such as firewalls and access controls, are still necessary. Two-factor authentication is required for a VPN service to improve the security architecture.
Q14) What is the best strategy to guarantee connectivity between the headquarters and the ten office locations?
Ans: The offices could be linked in a number of different ways. One method is to connect utilizing ten T1 connections that run from various sites to the main office. The second method might involve MPLS connections between the offices. The best option is to use MPLS rather than T1 lines because T1 requires 10 different T1 handling circuits at the headquarters, whereas MPLS does not.
Q15) What exactly is a phishing scam?
Ans: A phishing assault is a sort of social engineering in which individuals are persuaded to divulge private information by opening phony email attachments or links. Malware is dispersed by this attack, and networks are also compromised.
Q16) How can you tell if someone has accessed the network without an authorization?
Ans: Proper log monitoring is necessary to make sure that no evidence of unauthorized access exists. In order to notify users whether a login attempt succeeds or fails, servers might be configured to do so. Any unwanted access will be found and dealt with as soon as possible thanks to a diligent monitoring program.
Q17) How crucial is internet security for a business?
Ans: The Internet cannot be opened like a freeway since it is the untrusted portion of the network. While limiting internet access could be a solution, the majority of businesses rely on it for their daily operations. Internet access should be limited in accordance with corporate policies. Access to some websites may be restricted, for example, by restricting the upload feature to stop data leaks. To make sure that the internet is used responsibly and not for selfish gains—such as downloading movies or other content—internet records might be monitored.
Q18) How many different kinds of firewalls are there, and what makes each one unique?
Ans: A network firewall and a web application firewall are the two types of firewalls from an organizational perspective. While a web application can filter layer 7 traffic and defend against web application attacks, a network firewall can only give security against layer 3 attacks.
2b:T417a,
Clojure Interview Question and Answers
Clojure is a functional programming language that supports numerous paradigms and operates on a variety of unique hosts. One of the most widely used hosts for running Clojure is the JVM, or Java Virtual Machine. Additionally, Clojure has full access to the Java Functions and Java Development Kit. With Clojure, Java functions and Java Development Kit are available right out of the box. Additionally, programmers can use a node or a browser to access JavaScript runtime through Clojure.
Are you trying to get a job in Clojure? Attempting to find the greatest interview questions to pose. Here is the answer. All you need to have is some basic knowledge of Java and .Net to win the interview.
Ans. Rich Hickey created the programming language Clojure, a member of the Lisp family, for the Java Virtual Machine (JVM). It is open source, dynamic typed, and of the JVM.
The programming language Clojure has compiled language.
The Lisp dialect Clojure is a potent macro system.
Clojure is a fantastically easy language.
Q2) Why should you choose Clojure?
Ans. Because the general-purpose programming language Clojure is open source, has a dynamic type system, and it is free.
Q3) What Are the Basics of the Languages?
Ans.
Lisp and an open source programming language form the foundation of Clojure.
Clojure is a structured programming language
Clojure is a dynamic type of system.
The JVM is used to execute Clojure.
It's free to use Clojure.
Q4) Mention a few features of Clojure
Ans. The characteristics of Clojure include the following:
The programming language Lisp serves as its foundation.
It is a language for functional programming.
It controls an application's state.
It allows for concurrency.
Q5) What is Clojure used for?
Ans. Clojure is widely utilized for handling huge amounts of data, Large-scale predictions, commercial AI, and data mining are all excellent applications.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Clojure? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Clojure Training to become Job Ready!
Q6) Mention a few advantages of Clojure
Ans.Clojure has been gaining popularity in recent years for its ability to work on multiple platforms, including the JVM, JavaScript, and Node.js. Some of the advantages of Clojure are:
Clojure runs on multiple platforms without any changes
Clojure provides an interactive development environment
Clojure supports many types of languages such as Java, JavaScript, C++, Ruby, etc.
Q7) Explain Clojure Spec
Ans. The Clojure library's Spec type is often used to describe the data and functional structures. The major purposes of the Clojure spec are to explain bad data; automatically build test cases to test functions and confirm and validate data.
Q8) What do you understand by Clojure REPL?
Ans. Reading Eval Print Loop is the abbreviation of REPL. An example of a programming language that supports interaction with an active Clojure program is the Clojure REPL. It can also be improved by modifying it by evaluating each code expression separately.
Q9) What do Clojure macros do?
Ans. The majority of code-generating procedures are written using macros, giving developers a strong means of modifying the languages to suit their needs.
Q10) Explain the uses of Macros
Ans. Typically, the inline code is produced using Clojure macros. For developers or consumers, Clojure offers straightforward macro facilities without placing any demands on them.
Q11) Has Clojure been multi-threaded?
Ans. Programming with multiple threads is made easier by Clojure in so many ways. The fundamental data structures can easily be exchanged between threads because they are irreversible.
Q12) Name a few programming languages
Ans. Some examples of the many programming languages are as follows:
Haskell
Clojure
Phyton
Erlang
Scala
Q13) What platforms does Clojure run on?
Ans. Clojure operates on two different platforms:
Java
.Net
Q14) Explain JVM
Ans. JVM is an abbreviation for Java Virtual Machine. JVM is a specific kind of machine or engine that offers an important runtime environment to power JavaScript or other applications. The JVM's primary function is to translate Java Bytecode into machine-level language.
Q15) What is the main purpose of Clojure in JVM?
Ans. The primary purpose of Clojure is as a host programming language. It utilizes the JVM and offers Java compatibility. The language offers performance, security, stability, and portability security while running in Java.
Q16) Mention the Closure code process phases
Ans. The Clojure code is processed through three different types of phases, which are as follows:
Reading time
Build time
Runtime
Q17) Which iterations of Java are recognized by the programming language Clojure?
Ans. The Clojure programming language supports the enhanced Java 5 platform.
Q18) What is the best way to show the Clojure version in the REPL?
Ans. You must use the command if you wish to show the Clojure version in the REPL.
Clojure Printin – Version
Q19) What kinds of functions does the Clojure programming language employ?
Ans. The primary categories of functions used in Clojure are as follows:
Anonymous - Simple functions without names fall under the category of anonymous functions.
Named - Functions that are named are those that are connected to a symbol that serves as an identifier.
High Order Functions - These kinds of functions frequently have another function as a parameter.
Q20) Name Clojure variables
Ans. Following are some of the Clojure variables:
Int
Long
Short
Char
Boolean
String
Float
Q21) What are some of the Clojure Operators?
Ans. The following operators are available in Clojure:
Arithmetic
Recursive
Reasoning
Bitwise
Q22) What does the Clojure.main namespace mean?
Ans. Functions in the Clojure.main namespace enables open dialogue sessions and Clojure programs.
Q23) What characteristics does a socket server have?
Ans. The socket server properties are as follows:
Properties of Socket Server
Description
Server-daemon
Assuming it is true, the socket server thread does not obstruct exit by default.
Address
It addresses or hosts, It is set to loopback by default.
Port
It is necessary and requires positive integers.
Accept
It serves as a function-named symbol. It is needed since it is used to invoke when the socket accepts.
Args
It is a list of arguments to accept that must be supplied in the order.
Bind-err
Err is bound to the socket out stream by default, which is true.
Client-daemon
Since the socket client thread will not block exit, it is by nature true.
Q24) Define Map in Clojure
Ans. A collection called a "Map" is used to map Keys to Values. It offered two different map types:
Several Quality Analysts (QA) and their teams go with Cypress.io when it comes to creating automated software tests. This is because this tool helps execute tests directly inside a browser, thus, solving some of the most irritating timing issues.
However, regardless of the advantages, Cypress also has a few downsides. For instance:
It can be used only by somebody who is familiar with JavaScript, which makes it expensive to scale up testing
Tests with Cypress can be extremely time-consuming to set up
These tests are restricted to performing actions in a single browser, meaning important functions of certain applications can go untested
This eventually compels people to look for Cypress alternatives instead of going with this tool. If you are also one from the lot, this post covers some of the best Cypress alternatives that you can try. So, without further ado, let’s have a look at these options.
Jotted down below are some top and latest Cypress alternatives to try:
1. Rainforest QA
Rainforest QA is one codeless functional testing tool that generally uses a drag-and-drop editor to create interactive tests. These tests easily communicate with the visual layer of your application in the way a real user would. Plus, anybody can write and maintain tests in this tool without adding any custom attributes.
To test the visual layer, this tool uses pixel-matching to discover and interact with elements on the UI. You will not have to worry about locators or adding any custom attributes.
Features of Rainforest QA
An option to embed a test in other tests to speed up maintenance and writing
Can run tests on older and current versions of four major browsers such as Firefox, Chrome, Microsoft Edge, and Safari
Tests can include actions outside of a browser window or a browser tab
Tests are less affected by minor changes in the code
Fast and easy to investigate test failures with video replays
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Cypress? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Cypress Training to become Job Ready!
2. Katalon
This tool is built on Appium and Selenium and is designed to be used by both non-developers and developers for mobile app testing and web testing. You can find a record-and-playback feature in this tool that lets non-developers create test scripts with ease. And then, being a developer, you can stop and restart the recording at any point during the creation or execution of a test.
This way, you can create complicated test cases and fix broken tests as well. Katalon also has a free version. However, it is only for those who wish to use this software on simple platforms.
Features of Katalon
Run a test and know if it failed or not
IDE that lets you generate automatic tests
Easy set up for on-demand testing
Advanced and intuitive debugger
Fast scripting with keyword-driven testing
3. Testim.io
Testim.io is one such tool that uses a Chrome extension to record varying steps for basic tests. If you wish to create complicated tests, you will have to insert custom code in JavaScript. This tool was specially built to be used with several other tools, like Sauce Labs, BrowserStack, Applitools, GitHub, and TestRail.
However, one of the things to keep in mind is that when you use Testim.io, you will not get any support for iPad, Android or iPhone platforms.
Features of Testim.io
Run between two and eight concurrent tests
AI-powered, self-improving stabilizers
Quick diagnosis and troubleshooting
Effective expansion of testing operations with controls
Scalable, fast running of tests
4. WebdriverIO
WebdriverIO is an end-to-end, open-source testing framework that is built on JavaScript. It also runs on NodeJS. Moreover, this software is capable of testing applications that are built on web frameworks, such as Polymer, Angular or React.
You can easily configure WebdriverIO if you want cross-browser testing to run on the WebDriver Protocol. Or, if you want automation through Puppeteer, you can run this software on Chrome DevTool Protocol.
Features of WebdriverIO
Supports native mobile application testing for iOS and Android
Offers several third-party plugins
Create test automation frameworks that meet all requirements
Add complicated sets and helpful functions to extend the features
Supports modem mobile frameworks and web frameworks
5. Protractor
Protractor is another end-to-end testing framework that is developed on top of WebDriverJS. Since tests and applications developed with JavaScript can be quite lengthy and complicated, this software is designed to ease out the element locator syntax with ElementFinder feature.
This ElementFinder feature offers condensed code to discover and interact with a variety of elements.
Uses browser-specific drivers and native events to test
Automatically executes the subsequent steps in the test
6. Autify
Autify is one of the best Cypress alternatives. It is powered by AI codeless test automation. The software is extremely easy to use and doesn’t require any coding or knowledge of programming language to create test scripts.
So, even if you are from a non-engineering background, you can still create scripts without any extensive training. You can easily run and record regression tests. And then, with the algorithm of this software, you can find UI changes, continue test scenarios, and do much more.
Features of Autify
A no-code platform
Makes use of GUI to record test scenarios and play back
AI maintains the test scripts
Cross-browser compatibility, including mobile devices
Can be integrated with Jenkins, Slack, and more
7. Ghost Inspector
Ghost Inspector lets you automate tests for browsers, websites, e2e testing and user interfaces. It is a bit similar to Selenium IDE, however, it offers a streamlined test recorder tool for Firefox and Chrome.
Keeping the technology in mind, even this tool is powered by artificial intelligence. Hence, you can completely automate the codeless tests.
Features of Ghost Inspector
An option to record, schedule and automate tests
Supports several browsers
Compatible with plenty of technologies
Get to compare updates simultaneously
Easy to use software
8. Jest
Jest is one of the best JavaScript testing framework tools focused on simplicity. This tool can work with various projects, including those that use Vue, Angular, React, Node, TypeScript, Babel, and more.
Majorly, this tool aims to work out of the box; thus, it lets you relish a configuration-free process on most of the JavaScript projects.
Features of Jest
Create tests to track large objects effortlessly
Parallelized tests that maximize performance
Great API that has been maintained well
Fast and safe test creation
An option to generate code coverage
9. Puppeteer
Puppeteer is a Node library that can offer high-level API to control Chromium or Chrome over DevTools Protocol. This one runs headless by default. However, it can easily be configured to run full Chromium or Chrome.
Through this tool, you can effortlessly test a variety of chrome extensions. Not just that, you can also capture a timeline trace of the website to diagnose performance problems.
Features of Puppeteer
Create an updated, automated testing environment
Run tests directly in Chrome through JavaScript and other browser features
Get to automate keyboard input, UI testing, form submission, and more
An option to crawl a Single-Page Application
Generate PDFs and screenshots of pages
10. Mocha
This one is a feature-rich JavaScript test framework that runs on Node.js as well as in the browser. With this tool, you can make asynchronous testing quite fun and simple. Mocha tests generally run serially.
This way, they allow accurate and flexible reporting. This tool can also map uncaught exceptions to correct and simplify test cases.
Features of Mocha
Offers support for varying assertion libraries
Get to write tests with Behaviour Driven Development (BDD)
Sure, Cypress has a variety of benefits to offer. However, when you cannot get the most out of it, refer to these Cypress alternatives listed above. With these tools and software, you can maintain and write automated UI tests, even if you are not adept at programming. So, dive deeper, get to know more about these tools, find their useful features, and see which would suit your requirements best. After thorough research, make your decision cautiously.
2e:T2b33,
TeamCity Interview Question and Answers
TeamCity is a continuous integration and deployment tool for software development teams. It is used by companies like Yahoo!, LinkedIn, and other large enterprises. In this blog, we have compiled a list of TeamCity Interview Questions to help you crack that interview.
Most frequently asked TeamCity Interview Questions
Ans: A Java-based CI server is called TeamCity. It enables integration, and coding, and is simpler to configure with straightforward procedures. On TeamCity, many platforms and environments are used concurrently for parallel builds.
Q2) Is TeamCity an open-source tool?
Ans: JetBrains offers TeamCity, a server for continuous deployment and building management. Commercial software with a proprietary license was first made available on October 2, 2006; it comes with three free Build Agent licenses as well as a freemium license for up to 100 build configurations.
Q3) Is TeamCity a tool for CDs?
Ans: A general-purpose CI/CD solution like TeamCity offers maximum flexibility for all types of development methods and processes. You can quickly check the status of your builds, learn what prompted them, get the most recent build artifacts, and more using the Projects Overview.
Q4) How does TeamCity deployment work?
Ans. TeamCity offers the build configuration of the Deployment type. This type can be used to identify build settings that perform deploying to a specific environment. Typically, these build configurations depend on the works whose results they deploy via a snapshot or an artifact.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of TeamCity? Enroll in Instructor-Led live TeamCity Training to become Job Ready!
Q5) What does DevOps TeamCity mean?
Ans: TeamCity is a consumer-friendly continuous integration (CI) server for DevOps, build engineers, and professional developers. It is simple to set up and completely free for open-source projects and small teams.
Q6) Explain a TeamCity build configuration
Ans: The build configuration name will be suggested by TeamCity, and it will configure the remaining options for you: It will choose the VCS repository's type and establish the VCS root. It will automatically detect the default branch for a Git repository. In the VCS root settings, you can choose to change it now or in the future.
Q7) Is TeamCity software for continuous integration?
Ans: Developers and build engineers may easily set up and use Jet Brains TeamCity, a free continuous integration (CI) server, with the Professional Server License.
Q8) What exactly is a TeamCity build?
Ans: A build in TeamCity is a procedure that includes one or more steps and completes a specific CI/CD task. You are prepared to set up and run your first build once you have installed and launched TeamCity according to the instructions provided here.
Q9) In what location are TeamCity build logs kept?
Ans: On the TeamCity server computer, the logs are kept in plain text files on a disc directory (often in /logs).
Q10) Are private builds triggered automatically?
Ans: It is not possible to start the private build automatically. If you wish to construct the modifications you have stored in a shelve-set, you must queue a private build. Before checking your code in, you can test changes using a private build.
Q11) Explain TeamCity build agent
Ans: A TeamCity build agent is a software application that launches the actual build operations after listening for commands from the TeamCity server. It is set up and installed independently of the TeamCity server.
Q12) Is TeamCity a scheduler or a tool for building?
Ans: Build tools include Teamcity. It is a control and continuous integration server that runs on Java and is licensed under Javabite. Because it focuses primarily on build automation, it may be utilized everywhere without any effort.
Q13) What does TeamCity's artifact path mean?
Ans: Build artifacts are files generated by the build that are saved on the TeamCity server and can be downloaded via the TeamCity UI or used as prerequisites for other builds.
Q14) What is a job in TeamCity?
Ans: A software project, a particular version or release of a project, or any other logical collection of build configurations can all be considered to be a TeamCity project. There is a name, an ID, and an optional description for the project. User roles and permissions are maintained in TeamCity on a project-by-project basis.
Q15) What database is used by TeamCity?
Ans: TeamCity by default makes use of a HyperSQL DataBase-based internal database (HSQLDB). The default configuration stores the database files in, which is typically BuildServer.
Q16) What is kept in the DB by TeamCity?
Ans: In a SQL database, TeamCity keeps track of users, build outcomes, build histories, and certain runtime information.
Q17) How do I recover a TeamCity backup?
Ans:
Enter the Data Directory's path on the TeamCity First Start page and select Restore from backup.
You can upload a ZIP package containing the backed-up data or enter the following command to the backup directory on the TeamCity server.
Select the desired database.
Continue the restoration.
Q18) What does TeamCity's meta runner mean?
Ans: In essence, a meta-runner is a set of build steps from one build configuration that can be applied in another. A meta-runner is an XML definition that includes build steps, prerequisites, and characteristics that you may use in XML definitions of other build configurations. Using the online UI, TeamCity enables the extraction of meta-runners.
Q19) Jenkins vs. TeamCity: Which is preferable?
Ans: TeamCity is a JetBrains-exclusive product, whereas Jenkins is an open-source continuous integration platform. Jenkins provides a robust ecosystem of plugins and integrations, whereas TeamCity is simpler to set up and operate.
Q20) How can you make TeamCity's agents available?
Ans: When using the web UI, agents can be manually enabled or disabled by clicking the status icon next to their name. You may also add a note and choose whether TeamCity should automatically disable or enable the agent after a certain amount of time. TeamCity will adhere to the guidelines and display the comment icon.
2f:T2cf3,
SPARQL Interview Questions and Answers
This blog will provide you with important questions in Sparql and how to answer some of the most commonly asked Sparql interview questions.
Ans: SPARQL is a query language for RDF. It stands for SPARQL Protocol and RDF Query Language. It has many different uses, but is mostly used to interrogate data sets that have been created by the Semantic Web.
Q2) What are the advantages of SPARQL?
Ans: SPARQL has the power to filter, project, aggregate, and join data from multiple sources. It also has many advantages over SQL such as:
SPARQL supports more than one store/database technology
SPARQL can be used for querying different types of graphs
SPARQL can be used for querying RDF with or without URIs
SPARQL can be used for querying RDFS
SPARQL has a wider variety of operations.
Q3) What is the difference between SPARQL and SQL?
Ans: SPARQL is a query language for RDF, which is a graph-based data model. SQL is a query language for relational databases. SPARQL can be used to query graph data, while SQL queries tabular data. SPARQL supports both querying and updating, while SQL only supports querying.
Q4) What is RDF?
Ans: RDF stands for Resource Description Framework. It is a data model for representing information on the web. RDF provides a way to describe data so that it is easy to find and understand.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SPARQL? Enroll in Instructor-Led live SPARQL Training to become Job Ready!
Q5) In how many formats can RDF be represented?
Ans: RDF can be represented in various formats. The most popular are:
RDF/XML
Turtle
TriG
N3
JSON-LD
Q6) What is semantic web?
Ans: Semantic web is a web of data that is linked and accessible. There are different types of data, such as RDF, RDFS and OWL. The semantic web is a term coined in the mid-90s to refer to the next generation of the World Wide Web. The semantic web will allow computers to better understand what information they are retrieving from the World Wide Web and how it relates to other information on the Semantic Web.
Q7) What are Triple Patterns?
Ans: Triple Patterns is a web-based tool that helps people to learn and practice SPARQL queries. It provides a set of sample datasets that can be queried in order to learn how to write SPARQL queries. The datasets are organized according to the W3C's RDF Primer, which is a document that can be used as an introduction to RDF and SPARQL.
Q8) What are query forms in SPARQL?
Ans: A SPARQL query form is a set of keywords that can be used to create a query. A SPARQL query form is not an actual command, but rather it is a set of keywords that can be used to create a query.
Q9) What are extensions in SPARQL?
Ans: Sparql extensions are a way of adding new functionality to SPARQL. Extensions can be used for things such as:
Adding support for new data types
Adding support for Geospatial data
Extending the set of functions available in SPARQL
Adding support for querying or updating external data sources.
Q10) What are the different types of queries in SPARQL?
Ans: The following are different types of queries in SPARQL:
SELECT
ASK
CONSTRUCT
DESCRIBE
INSERT DATA
DELETE DATA
BINDINGS
Q11) What is GeoSPARQL?
Ans: The GeoSPARQL query language was designed by the Open Geospatial Consortium (OGC) to provide a standard interface for querying geo-referenced data on the web. It is an extension of SPARQL, which is a query language for RDF graphs that can be used anywhere on the web.
Q12) What is a federated query?
Ans: The federated query technique is a way to retrieve information from different datasets without having to use the same data model. This technique allows the user to ask questions that are not possible with traditional queries and retrieve information from different datasets without having to use the same data model.
Q13) What is SPARQL-Star?
Ans: SPARQL-Star is a free and open-source software for querying and editing RDF data. SPARQL-Star is a query editor that enables you to explore, edit, and execute SPARQL queries on your local machine or on remote servers using the HTTP protocol.
It is built with the following features:
A graphical interface for editing SPARQL queries
Query execution in a tabbed browser window
The ability to execute multiple queries at once
The ability to export results in different formats.
Q14) Disadvantages of SPARQL?
Ans: The key disadvantage of SPARQL is that it's not an easy language to learn. Developers who are new to SPARQL often find themselves struggling to understand how to write queries.
SPARQL has some other disadvantages as well. It doesn't have a clear path for upgrading from one version of the standard to another, and there are no formal guidelines for its implementation in commercial software products.
Q15) What kind of data structures does SPARQL use?
Ans: There are three types of data structures that SPARQL uses:
Data: The data is what we are retrieving or inserting.
Variables: Variables are used in queries to represent values that we do not know yet, but will know when querying the database.
Functions: Functions are used in queries to express constraints on the data and other functions.
Q16) What are some examples of where you might use SPARQL?
Ans: Some examples of where you might use SPARQL are as follows:
Search for a specific resource in a dataset.
Find all resources with certain properties.
Find all resources that match certain criteria.
30:T3ff6,
In this blog, we will take a look at some of the most common Windchill Interview questions asked in a PTC Windchill interview. We have also provided some tips on how to answer them effectively.
Most frequently Asked Windchill Interview Questions
Ans: PTC Windchill is a product lifecycle management (PLM) solution that allows companies to better manage their products and processes. It has the capability of managing data from product inception to retirement.
Q2) What are some of the most important skills for success in this role?
Ans: The most important skills for success in this role would be: analytical thinking, problem solving, and decision making skills. You will also need strong verbal and written communication skills.
Q3) List some of the PTC products
Ans:An assortment of computer-aided design features is offered by the PTC CAD software. Other products offered by PTC include:
CREO Parametric; previously known as Pro/Engineer
CREO Simulate; previously known as Pro/Mechanica
CREO Direct; previously known as CoCreate OneSpace Modeling
Options Modeller for CREO
CREO Illustrate schematics
CREO View
Illustrate CREO
Q4) What are the essentials of Windchill PDM?
Ans:PTC's production-proven PTC Windchill software serves as the foundation for PTC Windchill Product Data Management (PDM) Essentials. Data management tasks are made simpler by transparently integrating them into the design process with Windchill PDM Essentials. It maintains all types of information produced during the creation of a product, including CAD drawings, customer specifications, schematics, and Bill of Materials (BoMs). With this cutting-edge product data management tool, managing, sharing, and reviewing your data is simple.
A single view of the most recent product data is now possible, and desktop tools, Microsoft Office, and key-end CAD vendors are all more tightly integrated. Additionally, it offers your users time savings through improved version control, automated data release, and straightforward search features.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Windchill? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Windchill Training to become Job Ready!
Q5) The definition of Windchill Workgroup Manager
Ans:A compatible authoring program and a Windchill server can share data through the client-based Windchill Workgroup Manager tool from PTC. It has a built-in browser that gives you access to both a shared project space on the server and a local workspace on your client.
Q6) How does Windchill PDMLink work?
Ans:How can you preserve the integrity of your product information with so much data scattered around your business and several people working on the same files? Windchill PDMLink is the answer. A Web-based Product Data Management (PDM) solution with extensive industry experience, Windchill PDMLink allows globally dispersed teams while controlling crucial operations including content, update, and configuration management. By keeping master data in a safe location where you can manage, track, and record all changes, Windchill PDMLink preserves the accuracy of your product information.
When you make changes to your data, Windchill PDMLink stores a modified version of the data, signed and dated, in a safe location alongside the original data, which is kept as a permanent record in its original format. You can manage both the release cycle and configuration of your product with Windchill PDMLink, which also offers change control management.
Q7) Explain the Windchill Project link
Ans:Windchill, a web-based framework for collaborative product creation called ProjectLink automates and tracks projects. You and your team may interact, hold meetings, exchange and discuss documents and product architectures, and track task progress using the shared workspace that ProjectLink offers. ProjectLink is a secure web-based solution that can be utilized with ease in any collaboration context, including private exchange environments and public business-to-business (B2B) exchanges.
It can also be applied outside of your company's an engineering and manufacturing divisions. Windchill ProjectLink can be used to handle any project that calls for team members to exchange electronic information, such as authoring yearly reports or developing training materials.
Q8) What do you know about Windchill Partslink?
Ans:PDMLink's Windchill PartsLink module delivers part classification-based functionalities. Through simple navigation and searching, PartsLink gives you the ability to execute generic attribute searching and manage your findings. You can search for components by entering a part number or a free-form product description in the search criteria text box. You can use text and photos to view the hierarchically arranged structure of your sections.
By limiting parameters in a generic search, you can further narrow your search. Your team can use Windchill PartsLink to carry out similar part searches. By extending your search, you can look for parts that match the specified component and have parametric qualities that are within a specific percentage or absolute tolerance of it. The result set can also be exported to a file. Many businesses miss out on the advantages of reusing product components because they lack an extensive part search system. Limiting the result set through criteria-based searching greatly aids in reuse decision-making. PTC Windchill PartsLink assists in resolving such issues.
Q9) Explain Windchill Quality Solutions
Ans:You might have access to one or more programs depending on the Windchill Quality Solutions suite you have such as the Windchill Quality Solutions 10.1 Desktop, Windchill Quality Solutions 10.1 Administrator, or Windchill Quality Solutions 10.1 Web Access. The core of the Windchill Quality Solutions suite is Windchill Quality Solutions, the desktop version. The feature-rich Windows program for all of your dependability and maintainability tasks is available in team and corporate additions.
The Windchill Quality Solutions Administrator, which gives you alternatives for administrative controls including tools to facilitate secure login, is also a part of the enterprise. You can access data entry, filtering, graphing, reporting, and other features through Windchill Quality Solutions Web Access, which is provided particularly for Windchill FMEA violations in the enterprise edition.
Q10) Explain Windchill’s End Item
Ans:The components of a product that are finally put together or sold to a buyer are called end items. Windchill designates it as the principal end item for the context when you construct parts with the end item property set to yes. Primary ends are automatically gathered and added to your modifications.
Q11) For managing processes and product data, is there any other Windchill software?
Ans:
An essential component of Manufacturing Process Management is Windchill MPMLink.
Companies in the retail, garment, footwear, and consumer product industries frequently utilize Windchill FlexPLM as their product lifecycle management solution.
PTC's Integrity product and Windchill PDMLink work together to provide Windchill Requirements Management, which controls product data software and hardware requirements.
Discrete manufacturers can manage their portfolios using the tool Windchill PPMLink.
Throughout a product's serviceable lifecycle, Windchill Service Information Manager generates dynamic, correlated service part information.
By enabling service information to be arranged and optimized for reliability, usefulness, and rich, graphics-driven delivery, Windchill Service Parts enhances service operations.
Q12) How does the PTC Product Development System (PDS) integrate with Windchill 9.0?
Ans: A key element of PTC's comprehensive product development system is Windchill. It enables enterprises to streamline crucial product development procedures and have a single repository in charge of all product information. PTC's Prod uct Development System can be swiftly installed, offers a lower total cost of ownership, and decreases the risk of technological obsolescence over time thanks to its integrated, pure Internet, and interoperable architecture. Learn more about PTC's Product Development System.
Q13) Describe in detail the Windchill 9.0 enhancements to usability, visualization, and other areas.
Ans: Product View Lite 9.0 introduces new integrated visualization capabilities that dramatically increase loading, interacting, and disseminating visualization data performance, enhancing user productivity. Enhanced reporting features with market-leading Cognos 8 Business Intelligence, including instantaneous, out-of-the-box reports on change management activities, user task status, and project progress
Strong user interface configuration tools allow you to customize the interactions and functionalities that are available to a specific user based on their job and activities. Utilize new smart replication capabilities that enhance system performance and availability while lowering replication setup and administrative upkeep to efficiently coordinate information with remote users and outside partners. Extended supportability options, which make use of commercially available Java extensions and frameworks, simplify installations, and include more system monitoring tools.
Q14) What possibilities are there for quickly putting Windchill 9.0 solutions into production?
Ans: To assist top firms in realizing the full potential of Windchill, PTC Global Services combines strategic process consulting, system implementation services, and an innovative educational strategy. These operations have been integrated and executed utilising a cutting-edge Realized Value Methodology, a compilation of experiences and lessons acquired from thousands of client encounters, to ensure that our customers receive the greatest value from their investment in the shortest amount of time.These resources are integrated to create several standard solutions that are created to satisfy the requirements of a specific business process, industry, or stage of implementation.
Q15) What is interesting in the release of Windchill 9.1?
Ans: Along with several enhancements to enterprise product content management, usability, and supportability, Windchill 9.1 now provides better support for core product development processes.
Q16) How does the PTC product development system (PDS) accommodate Windchill 9.1?
Ans: A key element of PTC's comprehensive product development system is Windchill. It enables enterprises to streamline crucial product development procedures and have a single repository in charge of all product information. PTC's Product Development System can be swiftly installed, offers a lower total cost of ownership, and decreases the risk of technological obsolescence over time thanks to its integrated, pure Internet, and interoperable architecture.
Q17) Give a succinct description of the usability and supportability upgrades in Windchill 9.1.
Ans: Numerous usability enhancements in Windchill 9.1 make it easier to navigate and use the program. Column freeze and column resize are two specific examples. Along with streamlining deployment, Windchill 9.1 has significantly enhanced installation processes. This update will substantially simplify the transition from Windchill 9.0 to Windchill 9.1 and won't involve data migration.
31:T2c11,
Introduction To Cloud Analytics
Large databases and other data sets are used by the cloud analytics software to create helpful summaries & insights, sometimes through visualizations or charts, that guide corporate choices.
Some cloud analytics software focuses solely on a single sort of data, such as website usage or social media activity. Others are more comprehensive and work with numerous data sources, regardless of how dissimilar, to present an overall picture of how your firm is performing.
By utilizing the cloud, your team may take advantage of strong computing capabilities in distant data centers, enabling you to handle more difficult jobs that in the past might have necessitated a supercomputer. Employees and others can log in using a computer, mobile, or tablet after the data has been imported to examine and work with the results.
When data is manipulated and analyzed remotely, as opposed to locally in an on-premises business system, this is referred to as cloud analytics. Users have access to, and the ability to gather, analyze, and make use of, analytics systems located in the cloud. With the help of these systems, users may analyze big data sets, spot trends, and find areas where the business needs to improve.
Instead of creating equipment to perform the process on-site, cloud analytics enables businesses to process massive data volumes in a scalable, more inexpensive way.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Domo? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Domo Training to become Job Ready!
Types of Cloud Analytics:
Although it is simple to picture the cloud as an exquisite being, the word refers to vast computer networks that are hosted in one or more data centers. One of the cloud model types listed below might be appropriate for the analytics platform you want to construct, depending on your objectives and goals in terms of security, scalability, and accessibility, among other factors.
There are three types of Cloud Analytics – Public, Private, and Hybrid. Let’s learn each of them in detail below:
1) Public Cloud:
In a public cloud, services such as virtual computers, storage capacity, applications, and more are made accessible to the general public via a third party. Although users occasionally have to pay for usage or utilization, they are frequently provided for free. Because IT systems are linked and data is kept confidential on this public cloud, an enterprise can cut expenditures and maintenance requirements.
2) Private Cloud:
A private cloud is only accessible by certain individuals within one organization, as opposed to being made available to the broader public. It has the same scalability and accessibility benefits as a public cloud but is housed in a data center that is only owned by that one company or a hosting provider. Although this offers greater data protection and privacy, it is frequently far more expensive.
3) Hybrid Cloud:
This one combines the public and private clouds mentioned above. Companies that choose a hybrid cloud architecture use the public cloud for less-sensitive data while retaining a smaller private cloud for information that should only be seen by that particular organization.
How do firms apply Cloud Analytics?
There are practically endless ways to operate a business, just as there are countless methods to apply cloud analytics. For instance, a corporation that streams digital music would require different cloud analytics than a merchant.
Although increasing profitability is typically the ultimate goal of cloud analytics, firms may have more specific goals, such as maximizing profitability from current clients or boosting global sales. Reports and visualization tools can highlight areas where a business is functioning well or poorly, helping to inform more comprehensive initiatives. Cloud analytics may be used by both small and large firms to sift through vast amounts of customer and corporate data to uncover important insights.
For instance, businesses that depend heavily on their sales teams may employ cloud analytics to understand better why certain regions perform better than others. Analytics may help you identify markets where you have a competitive advantage and can succeed by doubling down, as well as those where it is difficult to close the business due to competition. An influencer on social media might identify trends in the kinds of posts that receive the most likes. Another option is for a geneticist to sequence the millions of nucleotides that make up a genome using cloud analytics. There are countless other potential use cases, of which these are just a few examples.
Why should anyone use Cloud Analytics?
When compared to conventional techniques like spreadsheets and other desktops- or on-premises solutions, cloud analytics provide significant advantages. Cloud analytics is an obvious choice due to its benefits, such as:
Scalability and Growth: Cloud computing solutions provide near-limitless flexibility and tremendous capabilities on demand. Without having to buy, build up, or operate any of your servers or other resources as your needs change as your business grows, these facilities are available when required for scaling up or scaling down.
Unified Approach From Anywhere: Employees may need to be taught on numerous platforms if your finance, IT, marketing, and sales teams manage their database and utilize distinct analysis tools. They lose time hunting for information from different systems or need to be taught a variety of solutions as a result. Your complete workforce has access to a single source of data and insights through cloud analytics that are drawn from your organization's ERP system, regardless of where they are located.
Break down communication gaps: When all of your personnel utilize the same system, it makes it easier for departments to collaborate. Users only have access to the data they need, but teams may communicate more readily across departments to uncover more insightful information.
Cost Reduction: Hosting and managing any on-premises systems incurs expenses for IT staff, hardware, and development work. Cloud analytics results in a single bill and, frequently, lower overall expenditures.
Find solutions Faster: Data processing is made possible by the more potent servers made available by cloud computing, as opposed to on-site systems or employee laptops.
Teamwork: The cloud is by nature superior for sharing. Employees can work within the same data sets and share results with a few clicks, eliminating the need for network drives, email attachments, and the confusion caused by different copies of the same file.
Enhanced Security: The majority of cloud analytics services frequently backup data to servers spread across many regions to protect it in the event of a fire or other natural disaster. There are no local hard drives to be stolen because there is no local storage of data, and flash drives or emails are not used to communicate sensitive information. Users only have access to the information they require, all data is password-protected, and audit logs show who accessed what, when, and how.
A few cloud analytics tools
Tools for cloud analytics come in a variety of forms. A lot of these are simple to access using your web browser. Here are a few examples of some common categories of cloud analytics tools:
Website Analytics: Website traffic analytics is one of the most popular categories of cloud analytics. With the use of these cloud analytics tools, you may better analyze a website's traffic, bounce rate, conversion rate, and various statistics to make changes that will enhance the user experience while also increasing income and profitability.
Sales Analytics: Platforms for sales analytics assist you in managing customers, and leads, assessing sales across geographies, and keeping track of your sales team's performance. Significant trends or signals can be revealed by this data, which can aid in the development of more successful sales tactics by leaders.
Financial Analytics: Without a big staff of financial analysts, it would be hard to uncover trends in revenue and expense as well as other information in your financial results using financial analytics alone.
Performance Analytics: Performance analytics examines sales, manufacturing, or other data to identify inefficiencies, expenditure sources, and areas of improvement.
Conclusion:
Every day, your company produces a staggering amount of data. Consolidating that data and transforming it into useful insight while simultaneously lowering acquisition and maintenance costs is made possible by cloud analytics. The secret is to foresee your company's requirements so you can make the most of your preferred cloud analytics platform. The information you require to give your firm a competitive edge is there in front of you. You may put them in your fingers with the help of cloud analytics.
32:T2b16,
Apttus inherits the majority of the incredible capabilities that Salesforce offers its customers, such as the flexibility to operate enterprises in numerous languages, wireless sync, and, of course, analytics. It exists solely to provide trustworthy and accurate quotations in real-time, which not only assists businesses in obtaining this information but also benefits sales teams in cross-selling.
Apttus is trusted by some of the world's largest corporations, including Intermid, Emirates, and Metacube. Apttus' market share is increasing quickly, and corporations pay an average salary of $150K each year. As a result, you still have an option to advance your career within Apttus Development. This Apttus Interview Questions blog will assist you in acing your interview and securing the Apttus Developer position in your dream company.
Most frequently asked Apttus CPQ Interview Questions
Ans: Apttus is a leader in business processing automation tools. It is a 2006-founded American corporation. It offers administrative solutions designed to optimize a range of economic and business activities.
Q2) What does the abbreviation CPQ stand for? What is the purpose of this?
Ans: CPQ is an abbreviation for Configure Price Quote. This is a software application that is commonly utilized by sales professionals. Thus, using this tool, sales professionals inside a company would get a holistic perspective of all components of a project quotation, assisting them in reaching an optimal degree of pricing accuracy.
Q3) How come Apttus is referred to as a "Quote to Cash" model?
Ans: Because the technology enables organizations to be more successful in terms of retargeting, as well as more dynamic and flexible in their follow-up with consumers by offering a personalized ecosystem.
Q4) Does Apttus's CPQ tool support eSignatures?
Ans: Yes, the Apttus DocuSign suite can be integrated, enabling users to utilize the eSignature functionality directly inside the Apttus platform.
If you want to enrich your career and become a professional in Apttus, then visit Tekslate - a global online training platform: "Apttus Training" This course will help you to achieve excellence in this domain.
Q5) Why is the CPQ tool regarded as a modern-day organizational utility tool?
Ans: It is considered a modern-day multipurpose tool since it satisfies the following criteria:
Offers a tremendous platform for marketing.
A legitimate node for accurate and trustworthy product details.
Due to the customization, customized pricing quotations are available.
Incentives are offered in accordance with the product options.
Q6) What is the term "product"?
Ans: It is a commodity that may be marketed as a Standalone, Option, or Bundle to customers.
Standalone - It is available for purchase separately.
Bundle - A bundle is a collection of two or more goods.
Options - It gives end customers more product offerings.
Q7) What does the term "Product Group" mean?
Ans: Product Group is an APTTUS Customized object that holds a collection of goods.
Q8) What is a Product Attribute?
Ans: Product Attributes are associated with a product's characteristics such as color, mass, and volume.
Q9) What is a Catalogue of Products?
Ans: The Product Catalogue is a repository for all items accessible in your business.
Q10) What is the term "category"?
Ans: A category is a broad classification of items. It enables end consumers to choose them from the Product catalog.
Q11) What is an audit trail?
Ans: The Audit Trail feature in business software is important for obtaining data or tracking any recent configuration changes made by the organization's management. Data can be retained in the audit trail for up to 12 weeks.
Apttus CLM Interview Questions
Q12) What does the term "search filters" mean?
Ans: By utilizing the data of respective fields, search filters assist us in locating outcomes. To locate product alternatives, we may apply a search filter depending on the values of their fields.
Q13) What does the term "Exclusion Rules" mean?
Ans: Exclusion Rules assist us in generating error messages and promoting to consumers the need of excluding both goods.
Q14) How does the CPQ tool assist your sales leaders in exhibiting persuasive behavior?
Ans: Given that it is a well-known truth that the more businesses sell, the more profit the company earns, it is obvious for the company to invest in some type of instrument that creates or instills drive. Thus, one such tool is CPQ; it provides the appropriate details about the product at the appropriate moment.
Q15) What exactly is a pricelist?
Ans: Pricelists are used to keep track of different pricing for a single product dependent on the supply chain.
Q16) What Is The Definition Of Inclusion Rules?
Ans: Inclusion Rules assist us in generating error messages and promoting solutions to users.
Q17) How Are Price Rules Determined?
Ans: Price Rules Collections include criteria for updating a product's Price Rules.
Q18) What Exactly Are Price Matrixes?
Ans: Pricing Matrices are used to modify the price of a particular item on a market price.
Q19) What are Packaged Products?
Ans: Packaged Products are a collection of multiple products that would provide value to the customer's purchase.
Q20) What does the term "Inner Bundles" mean?
Ans: Inner Bundles are also referred to as multi-level packages, as they allow consumers to pick a bundle within another package.
Q21) What are the primary impediments to sales in a company?
Ans: The primary impediments to sales in a company are as follows:
It is nearly hard to discover all product options and thorough information about new items.
Incapable of determining which items would best fit the customer's requirements. This is entirely due to the marketing executive's confusion concerning product offerings themselves, as there is no central repository for all product portfolio and their most relevant data.
There are no specified discount guidelines for goods.
Manual quotation generation is prone to human mistakes.
Q22) How will the use of CPQ software impact the organization's sales?
Ans: The following are the critical components of changing an organization's sales:
Increase Speed.
Eliminate Inaccuracies.
Maximize the size of the transaction.
Provide comprehensive and up-to-date data.
Q23) What does the abbreviation ABO mean in the Apttus CPQ tool?
Ans: ABO is the abbreviation for Asset-Based Ordering platform.
Q24) What is the Hierarchy of Products?
Ans: Product Hierarchy is a term that refers to the succession of products and how they are related to one another.
Q25) How will machine learning affect the future of CPQ tools?
Ans: It enables salespeople to compare their current valuation quotation to all prior price quotes submitted by their significant sales executives, therefore creating a comparative atmosphere. This assists in reducing errors in the present price quotation and modifying it in accordance with the system's advice. All of this contributes to a great pricing quotation and attracts consumers.
33:T3d5c,
Hardware Design Engineer Interview Questions and Answers
Hardware engineers design and produce a number of electrical circuits for computers, machines, and other equipment applications. They build computer chip layout blueprints, run performance testing, analyze statistical information, and modify a variety of analogue and digital components.
The spectrum of hardware engineering services is expanding as robots, machine learning, network simulators, and other innovations progress. During a hardware design interview, companies are looking for the best applicant to exhibit significant expertise in electrical engineering and be an effective problem solver.
As a result, we've compiled a list of frequently asked Hardware Design Development interview questions that might assist you in landing your ideal job!
Most frequently asked Hardware Design Engineer Interview Questions
Q1) What Are the Functions of a Hardware Engineer?
Ans: A hardware engineer may have a variety of responsibilities depending on the organization. These activities include information systems research, development, and testing. Additionally, hardware engineers create microprocessors, routers, bridges, memory devices, computer chips, and other computer peripherals. Moreover, it is within their responsibilities to identify future trends in computer equipment.
Q2) Describe How Scalability Can Be Achieved?
Ans: You can achieve scalability by updating a system. This may entail boosting the processing capability of a system to enable practical task completion. Another method of scaling a system is to enhance the architectural style. This will result in a more efficient technique of delivering software onto hardware.
Q3) Describe what embedded real-time systems are?
Ans: Real-time embedded devices are machines that analyze, respond to, and control their surrounding environment in real-time. Through valves, sensors, and other input-output connectors, the ecosystem gets connected to the computer system.
Q4) What is the purpose of a microcontroller?
Ans: A microcontroller is a self-contained concept that integrates peripherals, memory, and a CPU. It is sometimes referred to as an embedded system.
Do you want to master Hardware Design Development? Then enroll in "Hardware Design Development Training" This course will help you to master Hardware Design Development.
Q5) What Is the Difference Between Hard and Soft Real-Time Systems?
Ans: Hard real-time systems are those that place a high premium on the output being delivered on time. Any late answer or delay will always be seen as a failure.
On the other hand, soft real-time implementations are not as rigorous as hard real-time systems. The system's efficiency drops as the reaction time increases, but this degradation is tolerable and may be adjusted to a certain degree for repetition of the result.
Q6) What is the difference between a microprocessor and a microcontroller?
Ans:
The microprocessor is responsible for managing resources (I/O, memory) that are not part of its design.
Microcontrollers incorporate I/O, memory, and other components that are optimized for control.
Q7) What Does Fault Tolerance Mean?
Ans: Fault tolerance relates to the feature of a framework that enables it to continue functioning even when component losses are incurred. Nonetheless, it is critical to quickly determine the source of the issue to rectify it and restore full performance.
Q8) What is the purpose of the DMA address?
Ans: DMA addresses deal with physical addresses. It is a mechanism that provides information and addresses buses immediately during data transport. As a result, it is only a physical address.
Q9) How are you going to define VLSI?
Ans: It is an acronym for Very Large-Scale Implementation and is a technique that enables engineers to shrink the size of equipment. At the moment, this technology allows for the construction of a complete electrical circuit on a microchip.
Q10) What is the definition of a chip? What is the importance of this?
Ans: A chip is nothing more than a bit piece of electronic equipment. Although it is tiny in size, it contains a large number of electrical components.
The major purpose of chips is to minimize computer components’ size and circumvent other developmental difficulties. They contribute significantly to cost reduction.
Q11) What is Architectural Risk and How Can It Be Reduced?
Ans: An architectural risk is a chance that an architectural style may fall short of meeting a project's criteria. Failure may manifest itself in inferior visual appeal and inefficiencies not authorized by the contractor.
Q12) Define Multiprocessing vs. Multitasking
Ans: Multiprocessing refers to a CPU's capacity to run many applications concurrently. Multiple processors are used in computers today to increase their multiprocessing capacities. On the other hand, multitasking refers to a multiprocessor's capacity to switch between concurrently executing processes.
Q13) What is the purpose of a clock generator? What role does it play in the hardware?
Ans: A clock generator is nothing more than a circuit that generates clocks, or analysis of responses, to synchronize a circuit. It ensures the proper operation of any gear that utilizes electronics. A clock generator may be used to create a range of different frequencies.
Q14) What is the definition of interrupt latency? How are you going to minimize it?
Ans: Interrupt latency is the time required to exit the interrupt service procedure following the treatment of a particular interrupt. Interrupt latency can be decreased by developing small ISR procedures.
Q15) What is a Watchdog Timer?
Ans: A watchdog timer is an electrical device or board that performs a specified function after a predetermined time period if anything really goes horribly wrong with a computer circuit.
Q16) Why is an endless loop required in embedded systems?
Ans: Embedded programs incorporate endless loops to execute or analyze the program's state continuously. For instance, consider the scenario where a program's state is constantly checked for any unusual mistakes that may occur during run-time, such as memory corruption or division by zero.
Q17) What do you mean when you say "NRE"? What difference does it make?
Ans: NRE is an abbreviation for Nonrecurring Engineering Costs. In other words, it is the budgeted cost of designing and developing any hardware. It is significant since this cost is frequently considerable, and businesses cannot always guarantee a return on investment.
Q18) What is a semaphore?
Ans: A semaphore is an abstraction or variable used to manage access to the entire resource by several processes. Semaphores are frequently utilized in two ways:
To utilize a shared memory area.
To share file access.
Q19) When is it necessary to utilize a recursive function? Mention the effect of inline recursion routines.
Ans: When the frequency of recursive calls is not enormous, the recursion function can be utilized. The inline functions attribute specifies that every time the function is called, it will replicate its full definition. A call back function defined as inline places an additional load on the compiler's processing.
Q20) Describe a circuit that divides the frequency of a clock cycle in half.
Ans: Simply construct a T Flip flop to split the frequency of a clock. Assign clock as the input signal and logic 1 as the T input.
Q21) What kind of registers does an INTEL CPU contain?
Ans: Special functional registers such as an accumulator, a program controller, and a data pointer are included, along with three registry banks r0 to r7 and bit addressing domains such as B.
Q22) What is the difference between testing and verification?
Ans: Verification is a pre-silicon activity, whereas testing is a post-silicon activity. Verification is the process of ensuring the design's functioning throughout the design cycle. Testing is used to identify production flaws.
Q23) How Do You Determine Whether Two 8-bit Signals Are Identical?
Ans: XOR each bit of A with the bit of B, and so on. Eight XOR gates' outputs are then sent as i/p to an eight -i/p nor gate. If o/p equals 1, A=B.
Q24) What Are the Constraints on Set Up and Hold Time? What Do They Indicate?
Ans: Assume a rising edge activates your flip-flop. The time period during which data must be steady before the positive edge clocking is the setup time restriction. The time period during which data must remain steady following the positive edge of the clock is referred to as the hold time restriction.
If any of these restrictions are broken, the flip-flop enters a metastable position, in which the outcome of the flip-flop cannot be determined.
Q25) In hardware design, what is soldering and de-soldering?
Ans: Soldering is a process used to attach one object to another using a soldering gun mechanically. This technique is explored when some degree of hardware modification is necessary.
On the other hand, de-soldering refers to the process of separating these elements from one another or from the PCB on which they are mounted.
Q26) What distinguishes macros from inline functions?
Ans: Macros are typically utilized when a series of instructions/tasks must be replayed. They are tiny programs that do certain preset tasks.
Normally, we use the #define declaration to specify the values of various variables so that if the value has to be changed, just the value needs to be updated and the modification is reflected everywhere.
Q27) Justify the existence of parallel address space.
Ans:
The two physically distinct memories that share the same address space.
The two variables are accessible in this case using distinct access modes.
The direct addressing method is used to retrieve lower bytes, whereas the indirect addressing method is used to access higher bits of data.
Q28) What are the advantages and disadvantages of assembling in embedded systems?
Ans:
Pros:
These are hardware-oriented applications.
As long as the same chip is utilized, the code is portable.
Instructions are executed quickly.
Point mutations are simple.
Cons:
The programs are lengthy and might get confusing.
The applications are not easily executable on lesser computers.
The code cannot be executed on computers with varying CPU architectures.
There is no System Development Kit included.
Q29) What are the advantages of unions in embedded devices?
Ans: Unions are being used in embedded devices to group programs that operate in distinct modes. Then, the model-specific data may be stored in a structure, and these models can be combined into a union.
Q30) In embedded systems, what are actuators?
Ans: A component that is used to track the motion of systems and machinery is called an actuator. It is powered by the electrical current, which transforms the energy contained in a control input into mechanical vibrations after acquiring it.
34:T20ba,
SAP MDG Tutorial
SAP Master Data Governance is a much-anticipated addition to the SAP Business collection's business methods, offering domain-specific MDG for systematically producing, editing, and disseminating master data.
Master data governance and management are provided by SAP. They enable the company to manage master data while providing enterprise-wide data that is constant, accurate, and useful. Let's go through SAP Master Data Governance in-depth in this tutorial.
Overview
SAP MDG is an ideal complement to SAP ERP, which is part of the SAP business suite. With SAP MDG, SAP introduces a unified data management solution for validating, preserving, and allocating master data. This combination improves maintenance techniques, allows for significant improvements in reference data quality, and assures compliance with legal requirements. Furthermore, SAP MDG's automated workflow allows the business and maintenance processes to be sped up and stabilized. The organization is aware of the size increase and internationalization because MDG allows for a volume of Master data of up to a million records per object. As a result, they can take on the challenges of running a successful master data management unit.
Master data that is accurate and reliable serves as the foundation for all business activities. Inconsistencies in payment terms, customer addresses, or risky items details can cause major delays in the company process, such as improper deliveries, invoice payment, and so on. As a result of the variations, full shipments of goods do not reach their intended destination. Organizations face considerable financial risk as a result of this, as well as an increased danger of making incorrect business decisions due to inconsistency in data.
The organization's intricacy is mirrored in its master data and administration. At the local and global levels, master data management is generally done in common structural setups. Globally generated and controlled master data is enriched by local features. With SAP MDG, organizations can overcome these issues and govern whole master processes in an automated and uniform manner. By employing effective data governance functions to produce, manage, and replicate master data, they are capable of maintaining the reliability and precision of master data across their business. The Company's essential processes, such as fiscal consolidation, product innovations, and supplier onboarding, benefit from consistent master data governance.
What exactly is SAP MDG?
SAP Master Data Governance is a master data management solution that allows us to centrally produce, change, and distribute master data, as well as consolidate master data across the system environment. This data integration allows for the reuse of validation frameworks, data models, and business logic, resulting in a significant increase in master data quality.
Why should you utilize SAP MDG?
To guarantee enterprise stability, SAP MDG centrally manages supplier, materials, finance, consumer, as well as other data.
The advantage of having a visible audit trail that shows why, by whom, and when data is changed.
For data authentication, utilizing, integrating, and repurposing existing business logic and infrastructure.
Make use of pre-built user interfaces and a workflow based on the confirmed data models.
Parallel master data in non-SAP and SAP systems, enabling for master data governance generation and maintenance.
SAP MDG provides a one-of-a-kind solution that provides both central governance and aggregation, streamlines management, and lowers ownership costs.
Reacts to Enterprise Information Management and Master Data Management issues by providing a unique and reliable perspective of data.
SAP Master Data Governance's Advantages
It employs standard SAP ERP tests.
Utilizing SAP data structures and capabilities that are discrete and already exist.
Adaptability and flexibility as per the client's individual needs.
Floor plan manager allows you to customize, adapt, and configure the user interface.
BRFplus incorporates a rules-based workflow that can be customized easily and individually. It also has an automatic workflow control feature.
Data harmonization and consolidation across several systems.
Task transparency in the Master Data Management area.
The impact of data on corporate processes should be transparent.
SAP Master Data Governance Advancement
SAP Master Data Governance advancement: When it comes to dealing with the challenges of master data management while maximizing SAP investment, SAP Master Data Governance provides a lot of advantages. Pre-configured data models, role-based user interfaces, validations, and pre-defined processes are also included in the application. The workflow may be improved with little effort, allowing several people to contribute their knowledge of complex master data. An employee may, for example, change categorization details on a substantial master file, while another employee may add another activity and their conversion.
Workflows involve steps for approving data changes. The data is stored in a staging location separate from the product's Master Data until it is approved. The data is transferred to the tables of the creative master data after approval. The data is subsequently disseminated across the system, which agrees to the Master Data's update. MDG ensures that both SAP Business and non-SAP systems have consistent rights, definitions, and data duplication in this way. MDG has compliance and a full audit trail based on all of these changes and approvals. MDG also allows you to modify existing MDG applications or construct entirely new MDG applications based on custom-defined data models, which include roles, validations, processes, and user interfaces.
The functionality of financial data SAP MDG
To assist financial firms in completing their financial close as quickly as possible.
Allows companies to create financial data objects in a centralized location and then distribute them to decentralized locations.
This assures that all financial units, including Reporting, Financial, Operational, and Planning Consolidation, use the same set of entities.
Provides a group setting where financial specialists can discuss new items, avoid doing things they don't want to do and reach the entire audit track for all changes.
Time requirements for data and group change requests are taken into account.
In what way does MDG authorize an enterprise with authenticated data?
The SAP MDG application provides customers with reliable master data, allowing them to increase organizational productivity, accessibility, and process flexibility. In addition to customer and supplier data, the current MDG edition extends the master data consolidation feature to the master data domain. The new integration approaches enable data changes in the Ariba supplier and performance management solution, SAP S/4 HANA, and Hybrid eCommerce solutions, allowing businesses to better manage on-premises data as well as hybrid cloud processes and apps.
35:T35fc,
Businesses are looking for correlations between data sets in order to gain important insights. Trying to profit from the strengths of each data collection is a business aspiration. Looker is a critical business intelligence tool for organizations that enables them to create perceptive visuals. It has an intuitive user interface, i.e., completely browser-based, and encourages dashboard interaction.
The Looker tool is used by companies such as Chime, DigitalOcean, Typeform, and more to create visualizations and interfaces. According to payscale.com, the typical annual compensation for a Looker developer in the US is about $110K. Therefore, you have the chance to develop a lucrative career with Looker. In this blog, we will discuss top Looker Interview Questions and Answers that help you ace the interview.
Q1) What is the definition of the term "Business Intelligence"?
Ans: Organizations of all sizes perform a variety of procedures or activities that result in the generation of massive amounts of data. The data contains important information that may be used to improve corporate operations. That is where Business Intelligence Capabilities come into play, assisting firms in meaningful data exploration. The capacity to make better informed and data-driven decisions are enhanced by timely data processing and accurate reporting.
Q2) Describe the Data Flow.
Ans: It is mostly a task that is done with the assistance of an SSIS package and is responsible for data transformation. The source and destination are always clearly defined, and users may easily keep up with the amendments and modifications.
Q3) How Do You Define Logistic Regression?
Ans: It is essentially a method that is recognized for accurately verifying a dataset that contains unbiased variables. The validation level is determined by how accurately the final findings are dependent on these factors. It is not always appropriate to remove them as indicated.
Q4) What do you mean by Looker Business Intelligence?
Ans: The BI software from Looker assists in the exploration and analysis of data. We can bring together data from many sources to produce a cohesive perspective. Other than data, we can then create real-time metrics and simply distribute them. It has some impressive visuals and drill-down interfaces.
Want to become a certified Looker Professional? then Enroll here to get "Looker Training" Course from Tekslate.
Q5) Describe what a drill-down analysis is.
Ans: Drilling down is a feature that most business intelligence systems have. It enables a thorough examination of data and provides in-depth conclusions. You may dive down into a study or showcase component to obtain more detailed information about it.
Q6) Describe the complete cache mode.
Ans: The usual cache style setting is full cache mode. Prior to execution, the benchmark result group will be cached. The complete dataset from the defined site search location will then be retrieved and stored. The full cache option is optimal when dealing with big data sets.
Q7) What is the SSIS acronym?
Ans: SQL Server Integration System is abbreviated as SSIS. It is a relational component that is used to create processes for file transfer activities. It is an extraction, transformation, and loading (ETL) tool that collects data from many sources, changes it, and imports it into a new destination.
Q8) Explain Pivoting.
Ans: Pivoting is a term that refers to the process of transferring data from columns to rows and conversely. Pivoting ensures that no information is lost either in a row or column when the same information is being shared.
Q9) What Does The Term "Drilling" Mean In Data Analysis?
Ans: It is essentially a strategy for analyzing the information contained in data that appears to be helpful. Additionally, it might be regarded as a way to avoid issues such as legitimacy and copyright.
Q10) Give the advantages of using Looker?
Ans: The advantages of Looker are:
Data Administration - We assess and quantify the organization's current and future potential.
Integrations - This indicates the capacity of a system to communicate with other platforms that provide a variety of sources and functions.
Data Management - Looker converts reports to a variety of file types and distributes analytical findings.
Looker BI Tool Interview Questions
Q11) Describe OLTP.
Ans: Online Transaction Processing enables transaction-oriented programs to access information. It is concerned with a firm's day-to-day operations. It entails updating, adding, and removing tiny portions of data from a database. Because it works with tiny data sets, the execution frequency is higher.
Q12) Distinguish between the no-cache and partial cache modes.
Ans: When the benchmark set of data is too big to import into memory, the no-cache mode is utilized. Whenever the content is relatively tiny in size, the partial cache method is employed. Using partial cache mode, the query index is well-indexed, resulting in quicker results.
Q13) Describe the Drilling Process.
Ans: Drilling is a technique that we employ to delve into the intricacies of relevant data. Moreover, we might consider it for resolving concerns such as legitimacy and licensing.
Q14) What is the full form of NDTs?
Ans: NDTs are an abbreviation for Native Derived Tables. By supplying the exploration variable on the data structure through the appropriate columns, we may build NDTs.
Q15) Are logs related to packages?
Ans: Yes, the logs are package-specific. You may activate package logging using the logging settings.
Q16) Describe the heap analysis of user flow in Looker.
Ans: Heap automatically syncs user activity such as clicks, gestures, and actions across web-based applications. It enables data enrichment through the use of bespoke APIs. This will aid in the analysis of user activities and their visual presentation.
Q17) How is data cleaning defined?
Ans: In general, we have a variety of techniques for eliminating mistakes and discrepancies from datasets. Data cleaning is a term that refers to the combination of various techniques. These techniques are intended to improve the quality of information.
Q18) Describe a few approaches for data cleaning.
Ans: This can be accomplished in any manner. However, the first point to remember is the scope of the data. If it is very large, it should be split into smaller components. Evaluating the precise facts is another strategy that might be used. Moreover, developing utility qualities is quite useful and dependable.
Q19) What are Looker blocks?
Ans: Looker Blocks are pre-configured portions of LookML code that expedite the analytics process. You may utilize these looker blocks and modify them to meet the unique requirements. They assist to develop adaptive and rapid analytics.
Q20) Is it OK to utilize templated filters in PDTs?
Ans: Generally, it is not advised to use templated filters. Each time the filter is changed, the table is rebuilt, putting a lot of burden on the system.
Looker Developer Interview Questions
Q21) Why are duplicates of tables generated in a database's same PDT?
Ans: When you modify the SQL of a generated table and access it, the PDT creates a new replica of the table. Table clones are produced only when the SQL in development mode differs from the SQL in continuous mode.
Q22) How would you define Logistic Regression?
Ans: Logistic Regression is a technique that was developed for the purpose of thoroughly verifying a dataset that contains unbiased variables. The verification level is determined by the degree to which the overall results are dependent on these factors. It is not always a good idea to alter them once they have been stated.
Q23) What purpose does the SQL runner serve?
Ans: SQL runner enables immediate access to various databases and supports much accessibility. SQL runner performs exploration and query creation.
Q24) Describe the methods that are beneficial when dealing with Multiple-Supply Issues?
Ans: The methods are:
Identification of related records.
Schema reorganization.
Q25) Is it possible to filter the data using table calculations?
Ans: Yes, we may filter the data in the table computations using definite logic.
Q26) Which deployment method is preferable, SQL Server or File System?
Ans: As contrasted to File System deployment, SQL Server deployment is superior. SQL server development is a lightning-fast operation. As a result, it produces rapid outcomes. Additionally, it ensures data security.
Q27) What do you mean when you refer to SSIS package deployment?
Ans: We have a file labeled as the manifest file in SSIS. It always ensures that the packages contain trustworthy or permitted data and are not in violation of any policies. Users can install the same in either the System files or SQL Server, depending on their allotment or constraints.
Q28) What Are The Two Most Frequently Used Data Validation Methods?
Ans: Error Detection and Data Screening. Both of those approaches are identical but are presented in unusual ways.
Q29) What data is used to calculate the table values?
Ans: Following the result of the query, table computations are performed. They perform operations on the data contained in the exploration table.
Q30) What is the "Rebuild Derived Tables and Run button" used for?
Ans: It is used to initiate a rebuild of any permanent dependent tables affected by the request. Also, we utilize this to initiate the rebuild of all upstream PDTs.
36:T2c4c,
Test Classes in Salesforce
We have three types of testing
Unit testing: Testing each component individually is called unit testing it is the job of a developer.
Integration testing: This is the testing which is a combination of unit testing.
System testing: Once the integration testing complete system testing is the testing after rectifying some of the errors in integration testing.
Sample Test Classes
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 1:
@isTest
Public Class UpdateHandoffAttachedTest{
Static testMethod void HandoffAttached(){
Account a = new Account();
a.Name='Test Account';
a.phone='8686864286';
a.Rating='Hot';
insert a;
//Create a new Opportunity
Opportunity opp=new Opportunity();
opp.Name='Test Oppty';
Opp.StageName='Prospecting';
Date myDate = Date.newinstance(‘2012, 2, 17’);
opp.CloseDate=myDate;
opp.Accountid=a.id;
insert opp;
//Create Top X Designation with Positive scenario
Top_X_Designation__c t = new Top_X_Designation__c();
t.Type__c='Contract Flow Down/Handoff';
t.Document_Attached__c=True;
t.Opportunity__c=opp.id;
insert t;
Opportunity o1 = “Select Handoff_Attached__c from Opportunity where id=:opp.id “;
System.assertEquals('Yes',o1.Handoff_Attached__c);
//Update Top X Designation with Negative scenario
t.Type__c='Contract Flow Down/Handoff';
t.Document_Attached__c=False;
t.Opportunity__c=opp.id;
Update t;
Opportunity o2 = “Select Handoff_Attached__c from Opportunity where id=:opp.id “;
System.assertEquals('No',o2.Handoff_Attached__c);
delete t;
Opportunity o3 = “Select Handoff_Attached__c from Opportunity where id=:opp.id “;
System.assertEquals(null,o3.Handoff_Attached__c);
}
}
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 2:
@isTest
public class DuplicateAccountTestClass {
public static testMethod void testAccountDuplicateTrigger() {
String addError;
Account a1= new Account(Name='Test Account');
insert a1;
Account a2= new Account(Name='Test Account');
insert a2;
System.assertequals('You Cannot Create the Duplicate Account', addError);
try {
insert a2;
}
catch (Exception e) {
System.debug('We want to see this. This means the trigger is working.');
}
}
}
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 3:
@isTest
private class HelloWorldTestClass {
static testMethod void validateHelloWorld() {
Account a = new Account(name='T1 Account');
// Insert account
insert a;
// Retrieve account
a = “SELECT hello__c FROM account WHERE Id =:a.id”;
// Test that HelloWorld program correctly added the value
// "World" to the Hello field
System.assertEquals('World', a.hello__c);
}
}
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 4:
@isTest
Public Class PrefixDoctorTest{
Public static testMethod void PreDoctor(){
Lead l=new Lead();
l.LastName='Anil';
l.company='Wipro';
l.Status='Open - Not Contacted';
insert l;//inserting a single record
}
}
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 5:
@isTest
Public Class OppTeamTest{
static testMethod void CreateOppOwnerintoSalesTeam(){
//inserting an opportunity record
Opportunity opp= new Opportunity();
opp.Name='Test Opportunity';
Date myDate = Date.newinstance(2012,6,24);
opp.CloseDate=myDate;
opp.StageName='Prospecting';
insert opp;
Opportunity opty=“Select OwnerId from Opportunity where id=:opp.id”;
OpportunityTeamMember otm=“Select UserId from OpportunityTeamMember where Op
portunityId=:opp.id”;
System.assertEquals(opty.OwnerId,otm.UserId);
}
}
Inclined to build a profession as SalesForce Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore SalesForce Training
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 6:
@isTest
Public Class DiscountTriggerTest{
Public static testMethod void Discount(){
Book__c b = new Book__c();
b.Name='Test';
b.Price__c=100;
insert b;
Book__c b2 = “Select Price__c From Book__c where id=:b.id”;
System.assertEquals(90,b2.Price__c);
}
}
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 7:
@isTest
Public Class ContactsCreationTest{
static testMethod void CreateContacts(){
Account a = new Account();
a.name='Test Account';
a.phone='9052757414';
a.Rating='Hot';
a.Number_of_Locations__c=4;
insert a;
List<Contact> lc=“Select id from Contact where AccountId=:a.id”;
System.assertEquals(a.Number_of_Locations__c, lc.size());
}
}
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 8:
@isTest
Public Class UpdateCPActivenOnOpptyTest{
static testMethod void updateCustomerProjectOnopty(){
//Inserting first Opportunity
Opportunity opp1= new Opportunity();
opp1.Name='Test Opportunity 1';
Date myDate = Date.newinstance(2012,6,24);
opp1.CloseDate=myDate;
opp1.StageName='Prospecting';
insert opp1;
//Inserting a Customer Project with Status equal to Active for above opp1
Customer_Project__c cp1=new Customer_Project__c();
cp1.Name='Test 1';
cp1.Status__c='Active';
cp1.Opportunity__c=opp1.id;
insert cp1;
Opportunity o1=“Select Active_Customer_Project__c from Opportunity where id=:opp1.i
d”;
System.assertEquals(true,o1.Active_Customer_Project__c);
//Inserting first Opportunity
Opportunity opp2= new Opportunity();
opp2.Name='Test Opportunity 1';
Date d = Date.newinstance(2012,6,24);
opp2.CloseDate=d;
opp2.StageName='Prospecting';
insert opp2;
//Inserting a Customer Project with Status equal to Inactive for above opp2
Customer_Project__c cp2=new Customer_Project__c();
cp2.Name='Test 2';
cp2.Status__c='Inactive';
cp2.Opportunity__c=opp2.id;
insert cp2;
Opportunity o2=“Select Active_Customer_Project__c from Opportunity where id=:opp2.i
d”;
System.assertEquals(false,o2.Active_Customer_Project__c);
}
}
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 9:
@isTest
Public Class CreateCRonContactCreationTest{
static testMethod void CreateContact(){
//Inserting Contacts with Postive Scenario
Contact c1 = new contact();
c1.LastName='Anil Reddy';
c1.Contact_Relationship__c=True;
insert c1;
List<Contact_Relationship__c> ConRel1 = “SELECT Id FROM Contact_Relationship__
c WHERE Contact__r.Id =:c1.id”;
//verify that Contact Relationship was created for above contact
System.assertEquals(1,ConRel1.size());
// Inserting Contacts with Negative Scenario
Contact c2=new Contact();
c2.lastName='Sateesh Reddy';
c2.Contact_Relationship__c=false;
insert c2;
List<Contact_Relationship__c> ConRel2 = “SELECT Id FROM Contact_Relationship__
c WHERE Contact__r.Id =:c2.id”;
System.assertEquals(0,ConRel2.size());
}
}
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 10:
@isTest
Public Class UpdateCROwnerNameTest{
static testMethod void updateCROwnerName(){
//inserting a user
Profile pId= “select id from Profile where name =: 'System Administrator'“;
User u= new User();
u.LastName = 'Test User ';
u.Alias = 'ta';
u.Isactive =true;
u.Username = 'testuseraccount@test.com';
u.Email = 'testuser@test.com';
u.CommunityNickname= 'TestCN';
u.TimeZoneSidKey = 'America/Los_Angeles';
u.LocaleSidKey='en_US';
u.EmailEncodingKey= 'ISO-8859-1';
u.ProfileId = pId.Id;
u.LanguageLocaleKey = 'en_US';
insert u;
//inserting a Contact
Contact c = new Contact();
c.LastName='Anil';
insert c;
//inserting a Contact Relationship
Contact_Relationship__c cr= new Contact_Relationship__c();
cr.Name='Test Contact Relationship';
cr.Contact__c=c.id;
insert cr;
//updating the Owner Name
Contact_Relationship__c cr1=“Select OwnerId from Contact_relationship__c where id =:
cr.id”;
cr1.Ownerid=u.id;
update cr1;
Contact_Relationship__c cr2=“Select OwnerId from Contact_relationship__c where id =:
cr1.id”;
System.assertEquals(u.id,cr2.OwnerId);
}
}
Test Class for Triggers Scenario 11:
@isTest
Public Class InsertAccountTeamTest{
static testMethod void AccountMangerInsertIntoAccountTeam(){
//inserting a user
Profile pId= “select id from Profile where name =: 'System Administrator'“;
User u= new User();
u.LastName = 'Test User ';
u.Alias = 'ta';
u.Isactive =true;
u.Username = 'testuseraccount@test.com';
u.Email = 'testuser@test.com';
u.CommunityNickname= 'TestCN';
u.TimeZoneSidKey = 'America/Los_Angeles';
u.LocaleSidKey='en_US';
u.EmailEncodingKey= 'ISO-8859-1';
u.ProfileId = pId.Id;
u.LanguageLocaleKey = 'en_US';
insert u;
//Inserting an Account
Account a = new Account();
a.Name='Test Account';
insert a;
//inserting Customer for above account
Customer__c c=new Customer__c();
c.Name='Test';
c.Account__c=a.id;
c.Account_Manager__c=u.id;
insert c;
AccountTeamMember atm=“Select UserId from AccountTeamMember where AccountId
=:a.id”;
System.assertEquals(u.id,atm.UserId);
}
}
WebMethods is an integration platform that has many different runtime components & various Development tools. It includes EAI & B2B capability. The WebMethods supports many e-standards Like XML Rosetta Net,EDI etc. WebMethods is considered a middleware market. The main competitors of Webmethods are TIBCO, Vitria, See beyond & IBM WebSphere MQ product series. It provides a good graphical tool to produce flow service that do mapping from any data format into the other format & connecting different application together.
It also serves as a huge hub for trading partner integration. In this you do not build applications, instead, you use it to integrate your SAP-ERP system to the Siebel CRM as an example or the Mainframe to the PeopleSoft. The Advantage of using Webmethods: It delivers Improved business responsiveness: Get real-time visibility into your enterprise-wide business processes & up minute status information. User-focused information: That define the exact data to be captured to support you’re analytical & decision-making requirements.
Integration is about making things simpler – for customers, for suppliers and for employees, both IT and line of business. But the actual achievement of integration is not at all simple and requires skilled, experienced professionals who can apply integration technologies to solve and meet your organization’s unique requirements. EOK’ broad range of skills and implementation experiences has allowed us to become one of the leaders in the delivery of services around integration technologies such as webMethods, Oracle, IBM and SAP.
Despite investing in best-of-breed application solutions, businesses are still faced with challenges, such as:
Secure, enterprise-wide connectivity
Seamless communication across the supply chain
Reduced development times
Rapid time-to-market
The webMethods product suite is a comprehensive, mature business integration product suite, offering secure enterprise-class solutions to help you handle ever-changing standards and interoperability requirements, efficiently manage business processes across the extended enterprise, and keep up with growing demands.
At the core of the suite is the webMethods Enterprise Service Bus (ESB) Platform, the foundation for your Service-Oriented Architecture (SOA). The webMethods ESB Platform provides the foundation for rapid integration and collaboration within and beyond your organization. The Enterprise Service Bus Platform allows users to build, execute, and manage business processes across the extended enterprise.
Software AG's webMethods Integration Platform is a proven, pre-integrated software suite featuring the market-leading Enterprise Service Bus (ESB) that enables enterprises to rapidly integrate systems, services, devices, processes, business partners and data to provide new business value and improve business performance.
What is Integration Server in WEB METHODS?
webMethods Integration Server is one of the core application servers in the webMethods platform. It is a Java-based, multiplatform enterprise integration server. It supports the integration of diverse services, such as mapping data between formats and communication between systems.
What is an Enterprise Service Bus?
Software AG’s webMethods Integration Platform is an enterprise service bus solution that quickly connects all systems and applications no matter where they reside. This powerful solution offers a proven and pre-integrated software suite that makes it easy to quickly integrate systems, servers, processes, devices, partners and data. With this enterprise service bus platform, organizations not only get a solution for application integration, B2B and cloud integration but for managed file transfer, master data management and mobile applications as well.
What are the modules of webMethods Product Suite?
Integration and B2B
Service-Oriented Architecture
Business Process Management
Business Activity Monitoring
Do you want to Master WebMethods? Then enroll in"WebMethods Training" This course will help you to master WebMethods
EOK Offerings
Whether you need to integrate internal applications, trading partners, mainframes, messaging or are developing your SOA, EOK using webMethods offers you the most mature, comprehensive and easy-to-use integration platform available to harness the value of current IT systems.
Enterprise Application Integration
E-Standards
Architecture Overview
Enterprise Application Integration
Integration Server/Broker/Adapters expertise for versions 4.x thru 7.x
Competitive migrations for ISVs - from other databases / development platforms to .Net, Windows & SQL Server.
Product Evaluations: With Superior capabilities in technologies like J2EE, .NET, AS400, Mainframe, help make the right decisions with EAI tools.
Adapter Development: Significant Adapter development work in integrating ERP and mainframe applications.
Legacy Application and Data Integration.
Legacy Application and Data Integration.
Open Source and Standards-based Integration –Jboss.
ESB/Messaging, JMS and standards-based technologies like XML/XSLT.
E-Standards
Technical Expertise in EDI (x12, EDIFACT), XML (RosettaNet, BizTalk), HIPAA (Healthcare), SWIFT (Financial Services)
EDI implementation, Migration, Upgrade, Support and Maintenance services.
Design and Architect webMethods EDI implementation
Integrate customized partners EDI standards.
Architecture Overview
Detailed analysis of current as well as future processes, applications and infrastructures.
Optimization of business process and performance management.
Review webMethods configuration, Hardware configuration and the supporting systems.
Databases and network connectivity to provide tangible recommendations.
Evaluate existing architecture to identify performance limits in your hardware and architecture.
Provide/Ensure best practices implemented.
Components of Webmethods
The architecture contains a number of components. In 8.2 webmethods 28 components are involved. But in the case of webmethods 6.1 twelve components are divided into three groups based on their utilization. The three different groups are named as:
WebMethods Business Process Management Suite (BPMS)
WebMethods Enterprise Gateway
Integration server
WebMethods Integration Server is one of the core application servers in the WebMethods platform. It is a Java-based, multiplatform enterprise integration server. It supports the integration of diverse services, such as mapping data between formats and communication between systems. An integration server may also be known as the core of WebMethods Enterprise Service Bus.
The Software AG webMethods Integration Server together with the Universal Messaging/Broker forms the foundation of the Enterprise Server Bus (ESB). The webMethods Integration Server hosts packages that contain services and related files and comes with several packages out-of-the-box.
An Integration Server instance runs as a multi-threaded process within a single Java Virtual Machine (JVM) which itself relies on operating system resources to execute its work.
Services can also be created to form the overall application systems that perform functions, such as integrating your business systems with those of external systems, retrieving data from legacy systems, and accessing and updating databases.
The Integration Server listens for client requests on one or more ports. The type of protocol that the server uses can be associated with each port. The server supports HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, FTPS and e‐mail ports.
In the WebMethods ESB , the Integration server act as the endpoint of a spoke or you can simply call IS is the spoke in the WebMethods ESB.
Advantages of WebMethods
The main advantage of WebMethods Training is it provides completeness of the solution. See how WebMethods is not only an integration bus but also full support for modern IT in terms of:
Business Process Management
Business Activity Monitoring
B2B / Trading Networks
SOA governance
Mobile
These core tutorials help you to learn the fundamentals of WebMethods.
38:T82a0,
Are you planning to attend an interview for the SAP HCM Developer role but are confused about how to crack that interview and also what would be the most probable SAP HCM interview Questions that the interviewer may ask? Well, you have reached the right place. Tekslate has collected the most frequently asked SAP HCM interview questions which are often asked in multiple interviews.
Q1) List The Various Components Of The Enterprise Structure In Systems, Applications, And Products (SAP) In Human Capital Management (HCM)?
Ans: The components of the enterprise structure in SAP HCM are given as follows:
Client
Company code
Personnel area
Personnel subarea
Q2) What Is the Client In The SAP System?
Ans: In the SAP R/3 (R stands for Real-time) system, a client is an organization and a legal entity. A client is positioned at the highest level among all the organizational units. It contains the master data of various business processes, such as customers, products, and vendors. A three-digit number is used to represent clients in the SAP R/3 system.
Q3) What Is the Company Code?
Ans: A company code is a unique four-character alphanumeric code that represents a legally independent enterprise.
Q4) What Is Personnel Area?
Ans: A personnel area is a subunit of the company code. It is identified as an organizational unit representing an area in an enterprise, which is organized according to personnel administration, time management, and payroll accounting criteria. It is represented as a four-character alphanumeric code. For example, the personnel area code for a corporation is CORP.
Do you want to Master SAP SD? Then enroll in"SAP SD Training"This course will help you to master SAP SD
Q5) What Are Personnel Subareas?
Ans: A personnel subarea is a part of the personnel area, which can be subdivided according to the geographical location or the strategic line of business. It is represented as a four-character alphanumeric code. For example, if the branches or locations of an organization are defined as personnel areas, then its departments, such as HR and ADMIN, are the personnel subareas of the organization.
Q6) What Is SAP HCM Workflow?
Ans: The SAP HCM Workflow automates business processes and assigns tasks to appropriate persons at the right time.
Q7) What Do You Mean By Infotypes In SAP HCM?
Ans: Infotypes are referred to as system-controlled characteristics of employees. Information related to an employee is stored in the form of Infotypes.
Q8) which are represented by a four-digit numeric code given as follows:
Ans:
0000 for actions
0001 for organizational assignment
0002 for personal data
0003 for payroll status
Q9) What Are Features In SAP HCM?
Ans: Features are decision trees customized in the Implementation Guide (IMG) screen in SAP HCM that are made up of technical fields whose values are defaulted in the easy access.
Q10) How Do You Hire A New Employee?
Ans: A new employee is hired with the PA40 transaction code. After that, all the Infotypes are maintained for the employee by using the PA30 transaction code.
Q11) What are the three administrators?
Ans: The three administrators are :
Personnel Administrator
Payroll Administrator
Time Administrator
SAP HR Interview Questions
Q12) How does any company use an organizational plan?
Ans: The company organization structure and reporting structure are represented through the organization plan. The active plan version is the current plan version and the other plan versions are considered as various planning Stages. Used for manpower planning. Normally plan version"01" is always made the active plan version.
Q13) What is an evaluation path?
Ans: An evaluation path describes a chain of relationships that exists between individual organizational objects in the organizational plan.
You can maintain evaluation paths onimg -> Personnel Management ->Organization Management-> Basic Settings-> Maintain Evaluation Paths.
Q14) What is the difference between a job and a position?
Ans: Job is not concrete, it is generic. (Eg: Manager, Assistant Manager, Consultant). Positions are related to persons. The position is concrete and specific which is occupied by Persons. (Eg: Manager – Finance, Consultant – SAP HR).
Q15) What are Dynamic Actions? Give a few examples?
Ans: Dynamic actions when triggered by the system. They are the result of some personnel actions. If changes are made (personnel action) to the personnel data of an info type, then has an effect on the data of a second info type, the system automatically displays the info type. One of the main purposes of the dynamic action (of the system) is to have consistent and coherent data. These actions are started automatically by the system, unlike the Personnel actions which you start by yourself. The best example is when an action is carried out like hiring; it needs to populate a set of info types. In the initial entry of details in info type 0000 is personnel action. Then the system automatically displays the next info types- which are the result of dynamic action.
Q16) What is the difference between Indian and US Payroll?
Ans: Does each of them have their own ITs and the taxation differs? Yes, since the Benefits are more important in the US. In the US unemployment tax will come. Garnishments will come, Residence taxation, Work tax, and others.
Q17) How can we evaluate wage types indirectly?
Ans: You must define the characteristics of the wage type to be evaluated indirectly. To do this, go to the IMG under Payroll *: Reimbursements, Allowances, and Perks ® Maintain Wage Type Characteristics.
In this activity, if the wage type has to be Indirectly Evaluated, you must first assign INVAL in the Indirect eval. module field.
Then, you must assign the Module variant(A, B, C, D) for the wage type. Now when you populate the Basic Pay infotype (0008), the configured wage types will get defaulted, and those wage types configured for INVAL will also have their amounts defaulted.
Q18) What ways are there to perform pay scale reassignment?
Ans: You can reassign the pay scale to any position through position maintenance(PO13). Go to change planned compensation and reassign the pay scale to the desired position.
Simple and extended pay increases
Simple Standard Pay Increase
Go to reporting. In the Program field enter report RPU51000.
The selection screen for the report is displayed.
In the PayScale Group, Pay Scale Level, and Wage Type fields, enter the employees who should receive a standard pay increase. Enter the date from which the Customizing settings should be changed. In the Increase and Rounding sections, enter the necessary data, for example, an increasing amount or an increased percentage rate.
The amount of the indirectly valuated wage types is adjusted according to the data in the Customizing settings. No new infotype records have been created in the Basic Pay infotype (0008).
Extended Standard Pay Increase
In the Program field enter report RPITRF00.In the Selection section, enter the selection criteria you want to use to effect an extended standard pay increase.
Choose Batch Input.
If you do not select Batch Input, the pay scale reclassification will only be simulated. A results log is displayed, that you can evaluate as required. If necessary, enter the pay scale structure for which you want to effect a standard pay increase.
Process the batch input session.
The payments for the selected employees have been adjusted in accordance with the data specified in Customizing. New infotype records have been created in the Basic Pay infotype (0008).
Q19) What is the employee subgroup grouping for primary wage types used for?
Ans: You can use these groupings to specify which wage types may be entered for which employee subgroups.
Q20) Through which T-Code you are able to create a remuneration statement?
Ans: PC00_Mxx_CEDT (xx - denotes the molga for a country).
SAP HCM Interview Questions for Experienced
Q21) How can you define default wage types for the Basic Pay Infotype?
Ans: The system can suggest a default wage type for basic pay (IT0008), to do this appropriate wage type must be included in a wage type model. Here you define the default wage types and the sequence of how they should appear in the infotype Basic Pay and whether you can overwrite the defaulted wage type or not.
Personnel Management -> Personnel Administration -> Payroll data -> Basic Pay -> Wage Type ->
Revise Default Wage TypesAfter setting the wage type model, the LGMST feature needs to be defined. Feature LGMST has two return values: firstly, the maximum number of wage types that can be entered in the Basic Pay infotype (IT0008), and secondly, the wage type model the system is to use, which was defined above.To access feature LGMST use following SPRO path or transaction PE03.
SPRO: Personnel Management -> Personnel Administration -> Payroll data -> Basic Pay -> Wage Type -> Enterprise Structure for Wage Type Model
Q22) In which feature, default wage type is defined for Basic Pay Infotype?
Ans: LGMST
Q23) How does the system know when to trigger retroactive accounting for a particular employee?
Ans: Retroactive accounting recognition consists of four steps:
If you edit an infotype that is relevant to retroactive accounting, the system enters the start date of the changed infotype record in the following fields of infotype 0003 Payroll Status:
Earliest MD change (earliest master data change since last payroll run)
MD chng.bonus (earliest payroll-relevant master data change (bonus)). This field is only displayed for specific country groupings, it is not displayed for all personnel numbers.
During the next regular payroll run or correction run (off-cycle payroll type B), the system determines whether the data in the Earliest MD change and (if applicable) MD chng. bonus fields come before the date in the Accounted to the field.
If this is the case, the system performs retroactive accounting. It starts with the payroll period in which the data entered in the Earliest MD change and MD chng. bonus fields occur. The system recalculates all payroll periods that lie between the date in the Earliest MD change and MD chng. bonus fields and the date in the Accounted to field.
The system deletes the date in the Earliest MD change and MD chng.bonus fields.
Q24) What activities are possible when the payroll control record is set to “Released for Payroll”?
Ans: If you choose the function Release Payroll from the menu, you are prevented from changing infotype data records if such changes affect the past or present. This lock applies to the personnel numbers included in the payroll area concerned. Changes that affect the future are still permitted. You must execute this function in the menu before starting the payroll. If the status of the payroll control record was previously Exit Payroll, the Release Payroll function also has the effect of increasing the period in the payroll control record by 1.
Q25) Can a posting run be deleted?
Ans: Yes, It can be reversed before the Bank transfer. Once the transfer is done the payments need to be adjusted in the next payments.
Q26) Difference between PCR and CAP?
Ans: The difference between PCR and CAP is mentioned below:
PCR - The Personnel Calculation rule allows how one wage type is to be processed in different ways in payroll accounting.
CAP - CAP is a Collective Agreement Provision based on which the different groups of Employees are eligible for different kinds of pay scale structures and benefits and so on. CAP is based on the following components :
Payscale type
Payscale area
Employee subgroup grouping for CAP
Pay Scale Group and Pay Scale Level
An employee subgroup grouping for collective agreement provisions combines subgroups that are governed by the same valid collective agreement provisions. A provision in a specific labour law regulation within the collective agreement.
Q27) The naming convention for wage types
Ans: The following naming conventions are used for wage types:
/0** – valuation bases
/1** – cumulation of the gross amount
/2** – averages
/3** – country-specific, usually for social insurance
/4** – country-specific, usually for tax
/5** – legal net
/7** – wage/salary plus ER shares
/8** – factoring
/84* – cost accounting
/A** – outgoing wage types in the retroactive accounting period
/Z** – incoming wage types from the previous period
Q28) Do you know in OM -> copy plan version?
Ans: To copy the plan version use the Tcode: RE_RHCOPL00.
This report is only for copying objects from one plan version to another plan version to keep updated structures Always only one plan version would be active which is current. This report does not help to copy any master data.
Q29) Can a posting run be deleted?
Ans: Yes, It can be reversed before the Bank transfer. Once the transfer is done the payments need to be adjusted in the next payments.
SAP HCM Payroll interview questions
Q30) What activities are possible when the payroll control record is set to "Released for Payroll "?
Ans: When you set the status to Released for payroll you cant make any change to master data. It's actually released for payroll.
Q31) Is it possible to branch directly from the payroll log to master data and time data maintenance?
Ans: Yes, you can go in separate sessions.
Payroll Results
Q32) How do you post the payroll results to FICO?
Ans: I created one symbolic account and assigned the same to Salaries GL Account and then completed the other configuration steps needed to complete the procedure.
However, when I tried to run the simulation for posting to FICO, I got the message “Document is not generated”.
If you have selected “Output Log” at the beginning of your configuration procedure, it will tell you at the bottom part what went wrong.
Deduction Wage Type:
We have a deduction wage type displayed in the window of our payslip that shows a negative value. This causes problems and we have tried several measures to correct this including conversion rule 16 for our wage type in the same window but so far, without any success. How can we correct or delete the negative sign?
You can review OSS Note 406977. This is a collective note of issues with RPCEDTx0 with examples of problems and solutions.
Payroll Simulation
Q33) How do I correct the payroll simulation entry and check the correctness of our master data? What if one hundred employees get rejected due to error 167-process health plans? What does the following error mean: “No entry for plan DENT/cost variant. FMDN/key////x00000000000000” ?
Ans: You should check for the cost element associated and the validity of the cost rule for this plan. To do this, check your configuration under Benefits>Plans>Health Plans>Define cost variant and define cost rules.
Q34) Why is the system not picking up the values changed this month by default during payroll simulation? However, when I tried last month’s retro date, it picks up correctly. How can this issue be corrected?
Ans: You can check the “Earliest MD (master data) change” date on infotype 0003. If you have done that already and payroll simulation still doesn’t function by default, then there is a problem with your infotype and/or wage type retro settings. Check table T582A.
Single Payroll
Q35) Is it possible to configure a single payroll to pay an individual in multiple currencies?
Ans: No. The system can be configured to play in multiple currencies but not to pay an individual in multiple currencies.
IT0015
Q36) I need to capture a reason in the "additional payment" IT0015. The reason code is “save” in this infotype. I tried to capture for reason an Example to ADDWT 9999 if Reason ADDWT9998. How can I check the reason in IT0015 for accuracy?
Ans: You can try using this to start with: ‘TABLE P0015 > VARGB PREAS’
Then, use the variable key to define different reasons.
Q37) Which characteristics does a day with day type 1 have?
Ans: Its OFF and Paid
Q38) How does the system know when to trigger retroactive accounting for a particular employee?
Ans: You have to mention the retroactive accounting date in IT 0003 in the relevant field. Otherwise, it will take the earlier hiring date.
Q39) Is it possible to branch directly from the payroll log to master data and time data maintenance?
Ans: Yes you can go in separate sessions.
Q40) What Do You Understand By Personnel Structure?
Ans: Personnel structure is defined as the structure of employees in an organization. It comprises employee groups and employee subgroups. The employee group allows you to divide employees into groups and define their relationship to the enterprise.
Following are some important organizational functions that can be performed using an employee group:
Creating default values when data is input, such as creating default values for the payroll accounting area or basic pay of the employee Creating criteria of selection to be used during evaluations Creating a unit to be used for authorization check.
Q41) What Is Shift Planning?
Ans: Shift Planning is a component of Personnel Time Management. It is used to plan the shift time and location of the employees according to their qualifications and the number of job requirements. The document used to record this information is called a planned shift document, which is also known as a roster.
39:Tab25,
Embedded Systems Interview Questions and Answers
Many top companies are offering jobs in various roles in Embedded Testing. So, there is a huge scope for professionals in the job market. We at Tekslate, have prepared a bunch of top Embeddedinterview questions in this blog that covers the basics of embedded systems. We hope you will benefit from these questions and clear your interview easily.
Most Frequently asked Embedded Systems Interview Questions
Ans: An embedded system is part of a more extensive electrical or mechanical system dedicated to a specific task. It is a microcontroller or microprocessor-based.
Q2) What does the embedded system architecture consist of?
Ans:An embedded system has typically 3 components:
Hardware: It includes processor, memory, timers, I/O circuits, and system application-specific circuits
Software: It ensures the availability of system memory and processor speed.
Real-Time Operating System (RTOS): It supervises the application software.
Q3) What are the fundamental characteristics of an embedded system?
Ans: The fundamental characteristics of an embedded system are:
Performs a specialized operation and repeats the same.
Tight constraints on design metrics.
Continually reacts to changes in the system’s environment.
Based on microprocessors or microcontrollers.
Software is for flexibility. Hardware is for performance and security.
Q4) What are the types of embedded systems?
Ans:Based on performance and functional requirements, there are four types:
Real-time embedded systems
Soft real-time embedded systems
Hard real-time embedded systems
Stand-alone embedded systems
Networked embedded systems
Mobile embedded systems
Based on performance and microcontroller, there are three types:
Small-scale embedded systems
Medium-scale embedded systems
Sophisticated or Complex embedded systems.
Q5) Differences between Serial and Parallel I/O devices?
Ans: The differences between Serial and Parallel I/O devices are as follows:
Serial:
Type
Input
Output
Synchronous
Audio/Video signal
Audio/Video signal
Asynchronous
Keypad, mouse, modem
Printer, modem
Parallel:
Type
Input
Output
Single-bit
Rotation, threshold sensors
Pulses to an external circuit
Multi-bit
Vp from ADC, sensors
LCD, printer
Q6) What are some applications of embedded systems?
Ans:The applications are:
Identify rash driving on highways and alarm the traffic authorities through a speed-checker device.
Detect vehicle movement on highways and control street lights.
A density-based traffic signal system controls the signal timing according to the traffic density at junctions.
To find the exact location of a vehicle using a GPS modem.
For a home automation system with an Android application-based remote control.
Q7) What are real-time embedded systems?
Ans:Real-time embedded systems are computer systems that monitor, respond, or control external environments.
Q8) What is a microcontroller?
Ans:Microcontrollers are self-contained systems inserted in devices to control the actions and features of a product. They are also called embedded controllers.
Q9) What is interrupt latency? How can it be reduced?
Ans:Interrupt latency is the time taken to return from a disrupted service to regular functioning.
Interrupt latency is reduced by:
Keeping ISRs short and straightforward
Immediate servicing of interrupts
Avoiding instructions that increase the latency period
Prioritizing interrupts over threads.
Avoiding inappropriate APIs.
Q10) Types of Buses used by embedded systems?
Ans:Types of Buses used are:
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
Memory Bus
It is related to the processor connected to the memory.
Multiplexed Address/Data Bus
It reads and writes in the memory, but it decreases performance because of the time consumed in the memory.
De-multiplexed Bus
It consists of two wires on the same bus. One wire has the address, and the other one has the data.
Input/Output Bus
It uses multiplexing techniques to multiplex the same input and output signals.
Q11) What are the uses of timers?
Ans:The different uses of timers in embedded systems are:
Real-Time Clock (RTC) for the system
To initiate an event after a preset time delay.
To capture the count value on an event.
To find the time interval between two events.
To reduce the time spent on various tasks.
To schedule tasks in RTOS
Q12) What is a Watchdog timer?
Ans:A watchdog timer is an electronic device that is dedicated to a specific operation after a particular time if something goes wrong with a system.
Q13) Why are infinite loops used in embedded systems?
Ans:Embedded systems use infinite loops to process or monitor the state of a program repeatedly. For example, in a customer support telephone system, a pre-recorded audio file is played in case the dialer is on hold.
Q14) What are the common errors in Embedded systems?
Ans:Some of the common errors found in an embedded system are:
Data lines malfunctioning
Address line malfunctioning because of a short in the circuit
Some memory locations become inaccessible.
Wrong control signals
Damage of memory devices
Q15) Differences between mutexes and semaphores?
Ans: The differences between mutexes and semaphores are:
MUTEXES
SEMAPHORES
Only the acquired thread releases it.
Another thread or process can signal it.
Mutexes always have a known owner.
The thread is not known.
It provides deadlock-free mutual exclusion.
It is a synchronization tool that overcomes that critical section problem.
Mutexes are binary semaphores. Two states are locked or unlocked.
Semaphores are counter locks.
Q16) What are recursive functions?
Ans:A recursive function is used when it is known that the number of recursive calls is not excessive. It can be declared inline if required.
Q17) What is a memory leak?
Ans:A memory leak is the accumulation of uncleared memory. It stalls the execution of the system if it reaches adequate space.
Q18) What are the advantages and disadvantages of embedded systems?
Ans:
Advantages:
It is faster to load and is small in size.
It is dedicated to one specific task.
It is easy to manage.
It is cost-effective.
Fewer resources are needed, like memory and microprocessors.
It has good performance because the operating system is only for one device.
Disadvantages:
It is difficult to upgrade.
Settings need to be reset if there is any problem.
It is not scalable.
Limited hardware.
It is difficult to troubleshoot.
It is difficult to transfer data from one system to the other.
Q19) What are the reasons for a system to go blank? What are the steps to debug it?
Ans:Reasons a system could go blanks are:
Overheated PC
Accumulated dusk
Malfunctioning of CPU fans
Faulty power connections
The steps to debug are:
Cleaning the system and maintaining a dust-free environment.
Creating a cool environment for easy passage of air.
Locating the appropriate support drivers and installing them.
Q20) What is the automotive embedded system?
Ans:The automotive embedded system is a computer system for electronic devices that controls the mechanism of data and devices.
Embedded Interview Questions
Q21) What is an embedded C?
Ans:Embedded C is an extension of theC programming language. It is used to develop applications based on micro-controllers such as device drivers (camera device drivers, WiFi device drivers, etc.)
Q22) What are the causes of segmentation fault errors?
Ans:Segmentation fault error is a runtime error that occurs due to a few of the following reasons:
A pointer may not have a valid address or a memory location to point.
If the user tries to access a read-only memory area.
If the user tries to free a memory (using a pointer) which is already freed.
Q23) What is a stack overflow error in C?
Ans:Stack overflow error occurs if the program accesses the memory beyond its available limit. When this error occurs, the program terminates and does not execute further instructions.
Q24) Why is a ‘volatile’ keyboard used in C?
Ans:When a variable is used often, the compiler optimizes it and keeps the variables in its memory. Therefore, volatile prevents the compiler from any optimization.
Q25) What Are Hard and Soft Real-Time Systems?
Ans:The hard real-time Embedded Systems are the ones that depend on the output very strictly on time. Any late response or delay cannot be tolerated and will always be considered a failure. The soft real-time systems on the other are not very rigid as the hard real-time systems. The performance of the system degrades with the lateness of response, but it is bearable and can be optimized to a certain level for reuse of the result.
Embedded Testing Interview Questions
Q26) What are the levels of testing in embedded systems?
Ans:There are four levels of testing in embedded systems:
Unit testing
Integration testing
System testing
User acceptance testing
Q27) What are the phases of the Software Development Life Cycle?
Ans:There are five main stages of the software development life cycle:
Requirement: In this phase, the customer fills a requirement form to write what they actually need from the product.
Analysis: In this phase, the requirements are converted into documents and cover all the functional requirement specifications.
Design: In this phase, the design of the product is prepared. The requirements are converted into architecture design. This phase includes:
Low-Level Design Documentation (LLD)
High-Level Design Documentation (HLD)
Coding: In this phase, the requirements are converted into a coded form.
Testing: In this phase, the software under development is tested for product quality. This includes 2 types:
Static testing
Dynamic testing
Maintenance: In this phase, the maintenance of the product is implemented.
Q28) What is software quality assurance?
Ans:Software testing refers to the software developing process:
Monitoring and improving the process
Ensuring that standards and procedures are followed
Ensuring are problems are found and rectified.
Q29) What is equivalence partitioning?
Ans:Equivalence partitioning involves designing a test case to uncover a group or a class of error.
Q30) What are some of the common testing tools?
Ans:Some of the common testing tools are:
Quick Test Professional (QTP)
WinRunner
LoadRunner
TestDirector
Silk Test
Q31) How does a combination of functions reduce memory requirements in embedded systems?
Ans:The amount of code that has to be dealt with is reduced thus easing the overhead and redundancy is eliminated in case if there is anything common among the functions.
Memory allocation is another aspect that is optimized and it also makes sense to group a set of functions related in some way as one single unit rather than having them to be dispersed in the whole program.
Q32) How does, taking the address of local variables to result in unoptimized code?
Ans:The most powerful optimization for the compiler is register allocation. That is it operates the variable from the register, then a memory.
Generally, local variables are allocated in registers. However, if we take the address of a local variable, the compiler will not allocate the variable to register.
Q33) What is a pure function in ARM terminology?
Ans:Pure functions are those which return a result which depends only on their arguments.
They can be thought of as mathematical functions: they always return the same result if the arguments are the same. To tell the compiler that a function is pure, use the special declaration keyword __pure.
__pure int square(int x)
{
return x * x;
}
The compiler does optimization for pure functions. For example, the values which are allocated to memory can be safely cached in registers, instead of being written to memory before a call and reloaded afterward.
Microprocessor and Microcontroller(MPMC) Interview Questions:
Q34) Is 8085 an embedded system?
Ans:It’s not an embedded system. Because it will be a part of an embedded system and it does not work on any software.
Q35) What is the role of the segment register?
Ans:In the 8086 processor architecture, memory addresses are specified in two parts called the segment and the offset. Segment values are stored in the segment registers. There are four or more segment registers: Code Segment (CS) contains a segment of the current instruction (IP is the offset), Stack segment (SS) contain a stack of the segment (SP is the offset), DS is the segment used by default for most data operations; ES is an extra segment register.
Q36)What type of registers contains an INTEL CPU?
Ans:Special function registers like accumulator, program controller (PC), data pointer (DPTR), TMOD and TCON (timing registers), 3 register banks with r0 to r7, Bit addressable registers like B.
Q37) Differentiate microprocessors and microcontrollers?
Ans:As now you are fundamentally familiar with what is a microcontroller And microprocessor, it is easy to recognize the significant contrasts between a microcontroller and microprocessor.
1. Key difference in both of them is the presence of external peripheral, where microcontrollers have RAM, ROM, EEPROM embedded in it while we have to use external circuits in the case of microprocessors.
2. As all the peripheral of microcontrollers are on the single-chip it is compact while the microprocessor is bulky.
3. Microcontrollers are made by using complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor technology so they are far cheaper than microprocessors. In addition, the applications made with microcontrollers are cheaper because they need lesser external components, while the overall cost of systems made with microprocessors is high because of the high number of external components required for such systems.
4. Processing speed of microcontrollers is about 8 MHz to 50 MHz, but on the contrary processing speed of general microprocessors is above 1 GHz so it works much faster than microcontrollers.
5. Generally microcontrollers have a power-saving system, like idle mode or power-saving mode so overall it uses less power, and also since external components are low overall consumption of power is less. While in microprocessors generally there is no power saving system and also many external components are used with it, so its power consumption is high in comparison with microcontrollers.
Q38) What is Preprocessor?
Ans:A preprocessor is a Program That processes its input data to produce output that is used as input to another program. The output is said to be a preprocessed form of the input data, which is often used by some subsequent programs like compilers. The amount and kind of processing done depend on the nature of the preprocessor.
Some Pre-processors Are Only Capable Of Performing Relatively Simple Textual Substitutions And Macro Expansions, while others have the power of full-fledged programming languages.
A Common Example From Computer programming is the processing performed on source code before the next step of compilation. In some computer languages (e.g., C and PL/I) there is a phase of translation known as preprocessing. It can also include macro processing, file inclusion, and language extensions.
Q39) Which is better a char, short, or int type for optimization?
Ans:Where possible, it is best to avoid using char and short as local variables. For the types, char and short the compiler needs to reduce the size of the local variable to 8 or 16 bits after each assignment. This is called sign-extending for signed variables and zero extending for unsigned variables.
It is implemented by shifting the register left by 24 or 16 bits, followed by a signed or unsigned shift right by the same amount, taking two instructions (zero-extension of an unsigned char takes one instruction).
These shifts can be avoided by using int and unsigned int for local variables. This is particularly important for calculations that first load data into local variables and then process the data inside the local variables.
Even if data is input and output as 8- or 16-bit quantities, it is worth considering processing them as 32-bit quantities
Q40) What are inline functions?
Ans:The ARM compilers support inline functions with the keyword __inline.
These results in each call to an inline function being substituted by its body, instead of a normal call.
This results in faster code, but it adversely affects code size, particularly if the inline function is large and used often.
Q41) Why do we need virtual device drivers when we have physical device drivers?
Ans:Device drivers are basically a set of modules/routines so as to handle a device for which a direct way of communication is not possible through the user's application program and these can be thought of as an interface thus keeping the system small providing for minimalistic of additions of code if any.
Physical device drivers can’t perform all the logical operations needed in a system in cases like IPC, Signals, and so on...
The main reason for having virtual device drivers is to mimic the behavior of certain hardware devices without it actually being present and these could be attributed to the high cost of the devices or the unavailability of such devices.
These basically create an illusion for the users as if they are using the actual hardware and enable them to carry out their simulation results.
Examples could be the use of virtual drivers in the case of Network simulators, also the support of virtual device drivers in case a user runs an additional OS in a virtual box kind of software.
Q42) What are the Dirac delta function and its Fourier transform and its importance?
Ans:Dirac delta function is a continuous-time function with units are and infinite amplitude at t=0.
The Fourier transform of the Dirac delta function is 1.
Using Dirac delta as an input to the system, we can get the system response. It is used to study the behavior of the circuit. We can use this system behavior to find the output for any input.
Q43) Differentiate testing and verification?
Ans: Verification is a front-end process and testing is a post-silicon process. Verification is to verify the functionality of the design during the design cycle. Testing is to find manufacturing faults.
{
a &= ~BIT3;
}
Some people prefer to define a mask together with manifest constants for the set and clear values. This is also acceptable. The element that I'm looking for is the use of manifest constants, together with the |= and &= ~ constructs
Q44) #define cat(x,y) x##y concatenates x to y. But cat(cat(1,2),3) does not expand but gives preprocessor warning. Why?
Ans:In this case, the cat(x,y) is the macro which is defined by using the preprocessor directive, this will be substituted only at the place where it is called in this example it happens like this
cat(1,2)##3 which will once again become 1##2##3
here if we use ## in between we can join or concatenate only two variables that why it gives a preprocessor warning.
Q45) What Does Malloc Do?
Ans: What Will Happen If We Have A Statement Like Malloc(sizeof(0));
Malloc is the function that is used for dynamically allocating memory to the different variables. The malloc returns a memory pointer of void type (void *). The statement malloc(sizeof(0)) returns a valid integer pointer because the size of(0) represents the size of memory taken up by the integer value of 0. The memory allocated by memory is not automatically cleaned up by the compiler after the execution of the functions and should be cleaned up by the programmer using the free () function.
3a:T30da,
Introduction To C Language
C is a general-purpose, high-level language that was originally developed by Dennis M. Ritchie to develop the UNIX operating system at Bell Labs. C was originally first implemented on the DEC PDP-11 computer in 1972.
The UNIX operating system, the C compiler, and essentially all UNIX application programs have been written in C. C has now become a widely used professional language for various reasons:
Easy to learn
Structured language
It produces efficient programs
It can handle low-level activities
It can be compiled on a variety of computer platforms
C was initially used for system development work, particularly the programs that make up the operating system. C was adopted as a system development language because it produces code that runs nearly as fast as the code written in assembly language. Some examples of the use of C:
Operating Systems
Language Compilers
Assemblers
Text Editors
Print Spoolers
Network Drivers
Modern Programs
Databases
Language Interpreters
Utilities
Applications of ‘C’
C programming language can be used to design different types of application like designing the system software like OS & compiler.
Designing the application software like database & spreadsheets.
To design the graphics related applications, i.e., PC's and mobile games.
To evaluate the mathematical equations.
Features of C Programming Language
C language is one of the powerful languages. Below are some of the features of the C language.
Reliability
Portability
Flexibility
Interactivity
Modularity
Efficiency and Effectiveness
C is the most popular programming language which has many advantages:
Modularity:
It is one of the important characteristics of C. we can split the C program into no. of modules instead of repeating the same logic statements (sequentially). It allows the reusability of modules.
Middle-level language:
As a middle-level language, C combines both the advantages of low level and high-level languages. (arrays, pointers, etc.).
General-purpose programming language:
C can be used to implement any applications such as math’s oriented, graphics, business-oriented applications.
Portability:
We can compile or execute a C program on any operating system (Unix, dos, windows).
Powerful programming language:
C is a very efficient and powerful programming language, it is best used for data structures and designing system software. C is case sensitive language.
Advantages of C
C Language has a list of advantages due to this it is a very much popular language around the world and best suitable for the programmer to learn at the first stage of the programming.
Procedure Oriented Language
C Language is procedure-oriented language, here user creates procedures or functions to execute their task. Procedure-oriented language is very much easy to learn because it follows an algorithm to execute your statements. To develop a program using procedure-oriented language, you need to draw/prepare an algorithm and then start converting it into a procedure or functions.
Lots of Libraries
C Language provides lots of functions which consist of system generated functions and user-defined functions. C Compiler comes with a list of header files which consist of many general functions which can be used to develop a program, while the programmer can also create a function as per their requirements that are called a user-generated/defined function.
Speed of Compilation
C compiler produces machine code very fast compared to other language compilers. C compiler can compile around 1000 lines of code in a second or two. One more benefit of the C Compiler is that it also optimize the code for faster execution.
Easy to Learn
C Language syntax is very easy to understand. It uses a keyword like if, else, goto, switch, main, etc. This kind of keyword we all are using in our day to day life to convey meaning or to get some decisions.
Portable
C Language setup is around 3-5 MB. So you can carry this language in your Floppy Drive or Pen Drive. It is very easy to install and operate, Again its output is an exe file that can be executed on any computer without any other framework/software.
Disadvantages of C
C Language also has some disadvantages. C Language does not have major disadvantages, but some features are missing in the C Language, obviously, that's why C Language is very much powerful now.
Object-Oriented Programming Features (OOPS)
Object-Oriented Programming Features is missing in C Language, You have to develop your program using procedure-oriented language only.
Run-Time Type Checking is Not Available
In C Language there is no provision for run-time type checking, for example, I am passing float value while receiving parameter is of integer type then the value will be changed, it will not give any error message.
Namespace Feature
C does not provide namespace features, so you can't be able to use the same variable name again in one scope. If namespace features are available, then you can able to reuse the same variable name.
Constructor and Destructor is not available
C does not provide object-oriented features, so it doesn't have Constructor and Destructor features. Constructor and Destructor are used to construct an object and destroy an object. So in C Language, you have to implement the construction and destruction of the variable manually, using a function or by other means.
Our course design of tutorials is practical and informative. At TekSlate, we offer resources to help you learn various IT courses. We avail both written material and demo video tutorials. For in-depth knowledge and practical experience explore Online C Tutorials.
3b:T4178,
Advantages and Disadvantages of C++
C++ is based on the C language, and it was developed in the early 1980s by Bjarne Stroustrup at AT&T Bell Laboratories, Here "++" use for the extension because "++" is a syntactic construct used in C to increment a variable. Most of the C++ content is the super-set of "C", Due to this extension most C programs can be compiled using a C++ compiler.
A C++ program is a collection of commands, which tell the computer to do "something." This collection of commands is usually called C++ source code C++ is the Mid-Level programming language because it acquires the feature of Low level as well as a high-level programming language. Using C++ Programming Language we can create a different kind of Software, These are:
System software
application software
device drivers
embedded software
high-performance server and client applications and
A language is a software computer is an electronic device that cannot perform operating by own.
Language provides a set of instructions to perform operations by computer.
Language is nothing but a programming tool
C++ is the name of the language
‘c’ language is derived from ‘B’ language
'B’ language is derived from BCPL
‘C’ language develops in the year 1972
C++ language is developed in the year 1980
What is a Program?
Set of instructions or collection of instructions and data.
Programming elements are
Data
instruction
To write a program to required Data and instructions.
programming is nothing but a process of organizing data and instructions according to given problem
object-oriented means rules and regularity
What are Programming Principles
Programming principle defines a set of rules and regulations for the organization of data and instructions
Process Monolithic programming
Process-oriented programming
Modular oriented programming
Structure oriented programming
Object-oriented programming
Applications of C++
Using C++, you can develop system software like OS, Device Drivers, Network(N/W) protocols, PC – utilities
Application software you can develop application like
Database
Word processing
Spreadsheets
C++ is a general-purpose programming language better than ‘c’.
General-purpose means it is suitable for developing any software.
CUI means a character user interface
Programming Concepts
Unstructured programming / Monolithic programming
Organizing the data and instructions are organized in a sequential manner called Monolithic programming
In this approach instruction organization in sequential order
A sequence is a set of instructions used to solve a given problem. (Assembly level language, Basic)
Program execution is controlled by using a goto statement
Disadvantages
Code redundancy: the same operation has to be more than one time, the same sequence has to copy at some places.
The size of the program is incremental
The efficiency of the program is decreased
Procedural Programming
COBOL and Pascal are called procedural oriented programming languages.
In this approach instruction organized according to their operations by dividing into small programs or small pieces called the subroutine.
A subroutine is a small program within a program
This subroutine can be procedure or function
Advantages
Modularity: Dividing a program into small pieces 0 also called divide and conqueror According to their operations into small modular.
Re-usability: write code once and use it more than one time.
Readability: Easy to read or understand.
Disadvantages
Data is global or local
Its emphasis on instructions, but not on data.
What is a Modular programming
In modular programming, a module is programming in this approach; the application contains one or more than one module
Each program is divided into a subroutine.
A program that contains a main is called an executable module which is compiled as .ex
A program which has doesn’t have a main is called a reusable module which is compiled as.LIB(Library)
Structured programming
‘C’ and pascal are called a structured programming language
Characters of structured programming
Modular programming
User-defined data types (Pascal)
scoped variables (local & Global)
One subroutine communicates with another by passing values
Top-down approach
Disadvantages
Data is global and global data does not have security
Unrelated operation access global data, if leads and logical errors.
Debugging application is complex
In a large program identifying which operation operates what data becomes complex.
Advantages of C++
Object-oriented
Portable language (writing a program irrespective of the operating system as well as Hardware)
Low-level language like Assembly language on Machine language called portable.
C++ use multi-paradigm programming. The Paradigm means the style of programming .paradigm concerned about logics, structure, and procedure of the program. C++ is multi-paradigm means it follows three paradigm Generic, Imperative, Object Oriented.
It is useful for the low-level programming language and very efficient for general purpose.
Portability allows developing program irrespective of hardware
It allows moving the program development for one platform to another platform
C compatible (COMP): Programs developed in ‘C’ language can be moved without any modifications into C++
C++ is an object-oriented embedded language which is having the characteristics of low-level language & which is also developing the embedded software.
Which language having low-level features
Disadvantages
It has no security
Complex in a very large high-level program.
Used for platform-specific application commonly.
For a particular operating system or platform, the library set has usually chosen that locks.
When C++ used for web applications complex and difficult to debug.
C++ can't support garbage collection.
C++ is not secure because it has a pointer, friend function, and global variable.
No support for threads built-in.
What are the C and C++
C is a procedural (aka structural) programming language. In addition to beginning procedural, C++ is also an object-oriented programming language.
In C language, the solution is achieved through a sequence of procedures or steps. Therefore, C is a function-driven language.
How different is C# from C++?
C++ was designed to allow developers to use all of the existing features of C but provides some extensions to support object-oriented programming techniques in an intermediate-level programming language. C# is a complete outlive in this list. Despite its name, it has far more in common with Java than C or C++.
What is the difference between C & C++?
C
C++
It is a structured programming language.
It is an object-oriented programming language
It does not have an inline function
It supports the inline function
It does not support functions with default arguments
It supports() with default arguments
It does not have exception handling
It supports exception handling
It having pointers
It having a pointer and references
It is a middle-level language
It is a high-level language
It uses scanf() and printf() function for standard input and output
It uses cin>>and cout<< for standard input and output
Are you planning to attend an interview for the Oracle P2P role but confused on how to crack that interview and also what would be the most probable P2P Interview Questions that the interviewer may ask? Well, you have reached the right place. Tekslate has collected the most frequently asked Oracle p2p process interview questions which are often asked in multiple interviews.
Ans: The Accounts Payable application component records and manages accounting data for all vendors. It is also an integral part of the purchasing system: Deliveries and invoices are managed according to vendors. The system automatically triggers postings in response to the operative transactions. In the same way, the system supplies the Cash Management application component with figures from invoices in order to optimize liquidity planning.
Q2) What is the meaning of an invoice?
Ans: An invoice or bill is a commercial document issued by a seller to the buyer, indicating the products, quantities, and agreed prices for products or services the seller has provided the buyer. An invoice indicates the buyer must pay the seller, according to the payment terms.
In the rental industry, an invoice must include a specific reference to the duration of the time being billed, so rather than quantity, price and discount the invoicing amount is based on quantity, price, discount and duration. Generally speaking, each line of a rental invoice will refer to the actual hours, days, weeks, months etc being billed.
Q3) Can you give a sample Process Flow for Procure to Pay Cycle?
Ans: Process flow for Procure to pay will go through two departments(Commercial & Finance)
Procure - Commercial Department The following steps involve procuring any item
Received Requisition from concern Department
Request for Quotation from Suppliers at least three
Finalize the best Quotation by keeping in mind our companies standard
Check the Budget for the same
Negotiate with supplier for more economic pricing and finalize the payment terms
Process the PO and forward to the supplier to supply the goods and services
Pay Cycle - Finance Department
The following steps need to be fulfilled
The invoice should be matched with PO
The invoice should have all the supporting documents such as PO copy, Delivery note duly signed by the receiver (our staff who authorized to received goods/storekeeper)
If the invoice is for services then it should be forwarded to the concerned department head or project manager for his confirmation of work done and his approval
Even if it not the invoice of the service, it should forward to the concerned person's approval who -request the PO for the same
Finance can reject the invoice if it is not budgeted and ask for the reasons.
After receiving all the confirmation and approvals from the concerned department heads the invoice will be updated into the accounting system first in order to avoid any duplication of the Invoice and PO (it is shown on the accounting package if the invoice is duplicate if not, late last it tells you if the PO already used or cancel)
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Oracle Procure to Pay? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Oracle Procure to Pay Training to become Job Ready!
Q4) What is the difference between EFT & Wire?
Ans: EFT and WIRE are the most popular form of electronic payment method. EFT stands for electronic fund transfer and it is one of the fastest modes of electronic payment after WIRE. EFT is a batch-oriented mechanism for transferring funds from one bank to another because of which clearing & settlement takes around 2 to 4 days. On the other hand, WIRE is an RTGS i.e. real-time gross settlement system of making the fund transfer on a real-time and gross basis. Clearing and settlement happen on the same day. WIRE is more expensive and faster than EFT.
Q5) How many types of purchase order types/agreements are there?
Ans:
Standard Purchase Order:You generally create standard purchase orders for a one-time purchase of various items. You create standard purchase orders when you know the details of the goods or services you require, estimated costs, quantities, delivery schedules, and accounting distributions. If you use encumbrance accounting, the purchase order may be encumbered since the required information is known
Planned PO:A planned purchase order is a long-term agreement committing to buy items or services from a single source. You must specify tentative delivery schedules and all details for goods or services that you want to buy, including charge account, quantities and estimated cost.
EX: Buying goods for Christmas from a specific dealer.
Contract PO:You create a contract purchase agreement with your supplier to agree on specific terms and conditions without indicating the goods and services that you will be purchasing i.e. for $ amount you must supply this much quantity. You can later issue standard PO referencing your contracts and you can encumber these purchase orders if you use encumbrance accounting.
Blanket PO:You create blanket purchase agreements when you know the detail of goods or services you plan to buy from a specific supplier in a period, but you do not yet know the detail of your delivery schedules. You can use blanket purchase agreements to specify negotiated prices for your items before actually purchasing them.
A Blanket Purchase Agreement is a sort of contract between you and ur supplier about the price at which you will purchase the items from the supplier in future. Here you enter the price of the item not the quantity of the items. When you create the release you enter the quantity of the items. The price is not updatable in the release. The quantity * price makes the Released Amount. Now suppose your contract with your supplier is such that you can only purchase the items worth a fixed amount against the contract.
Q6) Explain the P2P process flow?
Ans: Procure to Pay (p2p) is a process of requesting, purchasing, receiving, paying for and accounting for goods and services. Procure to Pay Lifecycle is one of the important business Process training in Oracle Applications Hyderabad. It’s the flow that gets the goods required to do business. It involves the transactional flow of data that is sent to a supplier as well as the data that surrounds the fulfillment of the actual order and payment for the product or service.
Create a requisition>> create RFQ>> create a quotation from quote analysis>> generate a PO>>receipt of material>> create Invoice in payables>> transfer to GL
Q7) What is a Purchase Requisition and define various requisitions?
Ans: It is a formal request intended to procure/buy something that is needed by the organization. It is created and approved by the department requiring goods and services.
A purchase requisition typically contains the description and quantity of the goods or services to be purchased, a required delivery date, account number and the amount of money that the purchasing department is authorized to spend for the goods or services. Often, the names of suggested supply sources are also included.
Basically, requisitions are of two types:
Internal requisition
Purchase requisition
Internal Requisitions are created if the Items are to be obtained from one Inventory location to another location within the same organization. Here the source of the requisition would be INVENTORY. There is no approval process for the internal requisition.
Purchase Requisitions are created if the goods are obtained from external suppliers. Here the source of the requisition would be SUPPLIERS. The purchase requisitions are sent for approvals.
Q8) What are the base tables that are affected when you create a P.O?
Ans:
PO_HEADERS_ALL (SEGMENT1 column in this table represents the Document number)
This table stores header information of a Purchasing Document. You need one row for each document you create.
PO_LINES_ALL
This table stores the line information of a Purchasing Document
PO_LINE_LOCATIONS_ALL
This table contains the information related to purchasing order shipment schedules and blanket agreement price breaks. You need one row for each schedule or price break you attach to a document line.
PO_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL
This table contains the information related to the accounting distribution of a purchase order shipment line. You need one row for each distribution line you attach to a purchase order shipment
VENDORS_ALL
This table stores the general information about the suppliers
PO_VENDOR_SITES_ALL
This table stores information about the supplier sites. Each row includes the site address, supplier reference, purchasing, payment, bank, and general information.
PO_RELEASES_ALL
This table stores information related to planned and blanket Purchase Order releases. Each row includes the buyer, date, release status, and release number. Each release must have at least one purchase order shipment.
PO_VENDOR_CONTACTS
This table stores information about contacts related to the Supplier site. Each row includes the contact name and site.
PO_ACTION_HISTORY
This table stores information about the approval and control history of a Purchasing Document. This table stores one record for each approval or control action an employee takes on a purchase order, purchase agreement, release or requisition.
Q9) What is 2-way, 3-way, 4-way matching?
Ans: Oracle Payables shares purchase order information from your purchasing system to enable online matching with invoices. Invoiced or billed items are matched to the original purchase orders to ensure that you pay only for the goods or services you ordered and/or received.
Two–Way: Purchase order and invoice quantities must match within tolerance before the corresponding invoice can be paid.
Three-Way: Purchase order, receipt, and invoice quantities must match within tolerance before the corresponding invoice can be paid.
Four–Way: Purchase order, receipt, acceptance, and invoice quantities must match within tolerance before the corresponding invoice can be paid.
Payment to Supplier
Once invoices are validated, they can be paid. Payables integrate with Oracle Payments, the E-Business Suite payment engine, to handle every form of payment, including checks, manual payments, wire transfers, EDI payments, bank drafts, and electronic funds transfers. Payables also integrate with Oracle Cash Management to support automatic or manual reconciliation of your payments with bank statements sent by the bank.
This is how the P2P Cycle occurs in Oracle Apps.
Q10) What are the major transactions in RECEIVING?
Ans:
Purchase Order Receipts
Internal Requisition Receipts
Inventory Inter-Org Transfer Receipts
Customer Return Receipts
Q11) What is the Pay on Receipt AutoInvoice Program?
Ans: By running this program, we can automatically create an invoice for a PO when we enter a receipt for the respective PO.
Q12) What is Invoice Validation Process?
Ans: Before you can pay or create accounting entries for any invoice, the Invoice Validation process must validate the invoice.
Invoice Validation checks the matching, tax, period status, exchange rate, and distribution information for invoices you enter and automatically applies holds to exception invoices. If an invoice has a hold, you can release the hold by correcting the exception that caused Invoice Validation to apply the hold by updating the invoice or the purchase order or changing the invoice tolerances.
Q13) What is an approval hierarchy?
Ans: Approval hierarchies let you automatically route documents for approval. There are two kinds of approval hierarchies in Purchasing: position hierarchy and employee/supervisor relationships.
Q14) What are the documents that use PO_HEADERS_ALL?
Ans: The following are the documents that use PO_HEADERS_ALL
RFQ’s, Quotations, Standard Purchase Order, Planned Purchase Order, Blanket Purchase Order and Contracts
Q15) Can the original Purchase Order be viewed in any way without resorting to SQL, for a revised Purchase Order?
Ans: The original version of a revised PO cannot be viewed from the PO form or PO summary form. Information on the original PO can be obtained from the PO_HEADERS_ARCHIVE and PO_LINES_ARCHIVE tables using the PO_HEADER_ID column as a common reference using SQL only.
Q16) Can we automatically ‘Close’ the Purchase order without receiving the full quantity?
Ans: The Receipt Close Tolerance lets you specify a quantity percentage within which Purchasing closes a partially received shipment. For example, if your Receipt Close Tolerance is 5% and you receive 96% of an expected shipment, Purchasing automatically closes this shipment for receiving.
Q17) When does a Purchase Order line get the Status ‘Closed for Receiving’?
Ans: Goods have been received on the system against this line but an invoice has not been matched to the order.
Q18) Can we match an Invoice against a line even when it is ‘Closed for Invoicing’?
Ans: The Close for invoicing status does not prevent you from matching an invoice to a purchase order or to a receipt.
Q19) What does create an internal order conc request do?
Ans: Create an internal order request that will transfer the IR info to OM interface tables.
Oracle P2P Interview Questions for Experienced
Q20) Explain the Receipt Routing?
Ans: Receipt Routing is of three types: Direct, Standard and Inspection
In Direct once the goods arrive at the destination, we directly move them to a specific Sub-Inv
In Standard, once the goods are at the destination, we receive it at the receiving point first and then move them to the Sub-Inv.
In Inspection, once the goods are at the destination, we receive it at the receiving point and then we perform inspection and accordingly we either accept it or reject them.
Q21) What are the different Purchasing modes in Receiving?
Ans: There are three modes:
Online: Receipts are processed online. If there are any errors, they are shown on the FORM itself and don’t let you IGNORE and PROCEED.
Immediate: Receipts are processed immediately, but no errors are shown. Errors are recorded in the REC_TRANSACTION_INTERFACE table.
Batch: Receipts are processed in batch, but no errors are shown. Errors are recorded in the REC_TRANSACTION_INTERFACE table.
Note: In all the above two cases, it requires Receiving Transaction Processor to be run periodically.
Q22) What fields will print on the purchase order?
Ans: The following fields will be printed on a purchase order: item description, unit of measure, quantity, unit price and total, supplier name and address, need by date, requester name, deliver-to location and notes to the supplier.
Q23) Is it possible to create a PO from an Internal Requisition?
Ans: No. PO can’t be created from Internal Requisition.
Q24) What factors decide whether the Requisition created by the system is Internal or Purchase?
Ans: The factors are:
Sourcing: Internal or Supplier
Make / Buy: Make or Buy
Q25) An approved supplier can perform which four activities (Business rules)?
Ans:The four activities are as follows:
PO Approval
Sourcing
Schedule Confirmation
Manufacture Link To Distributor
Q26) How will you enter the Supplier Acceptance of a PO?
Ans: Query for the required PO and choose Acceptances from Special Menu. The type of acceptance can be defined in Quick Codes (All Terms Accepted, Partially accepted etc.)
Q27) How will you approve a quotation?
Ans: Navigate RFQ and Quotations > Quote Analysis.
Q28) How will you decide the life of a Quotation to be expired after a certain period?
Ans: While approving the Quotation, enter an ‘Effective To’ date, so that the Quotation will not be available for reference after the entered date.
Q29) Can you limit the usage of Quotation Information only for creating Requisitions?
Ans: While approving the Quotation, select the ‘Shipment Approved Type’ as Requisition so that the Quotation information could be used only for Requisitions.
The other Types are All Orders (can be used in POs and Requisitions), Purchase Agreements and Standard Pos.
Q30) Where will you mention that auto-numbering is required for your RFQs, Quotations and PO?
Ans: The mode of the numbering of RFQs, Quotations and PO (Automatic or Manual and if Automatic, what should be the starting number) should be defined in the Purchasing Options.
Q31) While creating the Purchase Documents in the ‘Auto Create’ mode, within it, there is a ‘Manual Mode’. This Manual mode is required for what?
Ans: If the numbering method selected for the document being created is manual, we can enter the document number in the ‘Manual’ mode. Moreover, we can decide which Requisition lines we want to combine and where we want them to appear on the document.
Q32) Is it possible to enter Price Break information in an RFQ, if the RFQ Header Type is selected ‘Bid’?
Ans: No. The Price Break window will be available only for Catalog Quotation Class.
Q33) What are the different Currency conversion Types?
Ans:
Corporate: This is an exchange rate, generally a standard market rule, determined by the senior financial management of an organization, which will be used throughout the organization.
Spot: An exchange rate entered to perform conversions based on the rate on a specific date. It applies to the immediate delivery of a currency.
User-Defined: An exchange rate that is specified when a foreign currency journal entry is made, that does not have a daily exchange rate.
Q34) How will you ensure that Receipt Routing mentioned in a Requisition or PO is not override at the time of Receiving?
Ans: Set the profile option ‘RCV: Routing Override’ to No.
(But in our instance I am getting the profile option named as ‘RCV: Allow Routing Override’ and the Default value and user value field are grayed out, I am not able to fill anything at user value also. why?)
Q35) How will you ensure that the Buyer name is enforced in a PO?
Ans: Set the Purchasing Option ‘Enforce Buyer Name’ to Yes.
Q36) Is it possible to receive and invoice items supplied by a supplier on Hold?
Ans: Yes. A supplier Hold doesn’t prevent from receiving and invoicing Pos placed earlier to the Hold.
Q37) How will you find out the number of documents assigned to a particular Buyer?
Ans:
Navigation: Management > Manage Buyer Workload
Select the field ‘Action’ > Review
Enter the other required search criteria and press FIND
In the popup window we see the following details:
Buyer Assigned Urgent Late Needed Open Pos
Q38) How will you reassign the Buyer to even out the workload of Buyers?
In the popup window, enter the New Buyer name, select the required lines & save. Upon saving, the lines will be reassigned to the new Buyer.
Q39) How will you identify the status of a Purchasing document?
Ans: If the status is to be seen for a specific document, go to the respective document-defining window and see the current status at the Status region.
If the status of any document is to be found out, go either to the ‘Notification window or the Action history window (Navigation: Special > View Action History).
Ans: The planning process to create Purchase Requisition for Buy items & Internal Requisitions for Make Items uses a Sourcing Rule.
Q41) Is it possible to use a Sourcing Rule which will be available in all the organizations?
Ans: Provided that the Sourcing Rule is defined as Global, it will be available in all organizations.
Q42) Is it possible to access a Purchase Document currently under approval process using the entry window by anybody as per the access level nor security level?
Ans: No. Nobody can access it through the Entry window.
Q43) What are the reasons that an Express processor may reject lines due to validation failures?
Ans:
If the item revision, Subinventory and locator is not available & the entered destination is final. (Revision, Subinventory & Locator are not obtainable as a default from the item definition.)
If the early/late receipt date tolerance is exceeded & the exception control is set to Reject.
If Lot / Serial information is required.
If Ship-to- location is not available & the destination is Receiving.
If the location is not available for Expense destination type & the destination is final destination.
If PO Supplier & Receipt Header Supplier do not match.
If other receipts are pending for the specified shipment.
Q44) If the Search Supplier Item Catalog window is not appearing while invoking from the Requisition or PO entry window, the System will use which criteria to search?
Ans: The values that are defaulted from the Requisition or PO will be used by the system to query the default source options.
Q45) Is it possible to change the supplier after approving the PO?
Ans: No. The supplier can’t be changed after approving the PO. If such situations arise, cancel the PO & create a new PO with the new supplier.
Q46) Where will you define the Line Type that has to have defaulted while creating a purchase document?
Ans: Enter the required line type in the field, ‘Line type’ in the Purchasing option.
Ans: Requisition Preferences are used to enter information that are to be defaulted in a Requisition. When multiple requisitions are to be created with many data the same, all those data can be entered as a Requisition Preference. The preferences defined will be defaulted in all new Requisition Lines as long as the user is exiting the Application. The defined preferences are not saved to the database.
Q48) Where do I get a Change Order Request Form?
The Change Order Request form can be found on the RIAS Forms page and downloaded onto your desktop.
Q49) What is the Oracle Exchange?
Ans: The Oracle Exchange is an electronic catalog of goods and services offered by a wide range of suppliers. The Oracle Exchange catalog does not reflect pre-negotiated prices with the University.
Create a “Top X Designation” custom object which is the related list to Opportunity (Lookup Relationship). In the Top X Designation object, create the fields
Type (Picklist),
Document Attached (Checkbox)
Create one field Handoff Attached with picklist type with values are Yes, No on Opportunity Object.
Logic:If Type (Top X Designation) = "Contract Flow Down/Handoff", and "Document Attached” = True then "Handoff Attached" = True, otherwise false.
Code:
trigger updateHandoffattached on Top_X_Designation__c (after insert, after update,after delete)
{
map maptop = new map();
set oppid = new set();
map maptopfalse = new map();//faslecase map
set oppIdInFalseCase = new set();//falsecase set
map deletecase = new map();
set delcaseid = new set();//deletecase set
list opplist = new list(); // query list
list listtoupdate = new list(); //for update
for(Top_X_Designation__c top : trigger.isdelete? trigger.old :trigger.new)
opplist = [select Id,Handoff_Attached__c from opportunity where id in:oppid];
for( opportunity opp : opplist){
if(maptop.containsKey(opp.id))
{
opp.Handoff_Attached__c =’yes’;
//listtoupdate.add(opp);
}
if(maptopfalse.containsKey(opp.id)){
opp.Handoff_Attached__c =’no’;
// listtoupdate.add(opp);
}
if(delcaseid.contains(opp.Id)){
opp.Handoff_Attached__c =”;
}
listtoupdate.add(opp) ;
}
if( listtoupdate.size()>0){
update listtoupdate;
system.debug(‘testL’+listtoupdate);}
}
and its test class
@istest
public class testforhandoff {
@istest static void methodhandoff(){
opportunity opp = new opportunity();
opp.Name =’test opp’;
opp.StageName =’Needs Analysis’;
opp.CloseDate = system.today();
insert opp;
Top_X_Designation__c tx = new Top_X_Designation__c();
tx.Opp_top_x_designation__c = opp.Id;
tx.Document_Attached__c = true;
tx.Type__c = ‘Handoff’;
insert tx;
}
@istest
static void testmethod1(){
opportunity opp1 = new opportunity();
opp1.Name =’test opp’;
opp1.StageName =’Needs Analysis’;
opp1.CloseDate = system.today();
insert opp1;
Top_X_Designation__c tx1 = new Top_X_Designation__c();
tx1.Opp_top_x_designation__c = opp1.id;
tx1.Document_Attached__c = false;
tx1.Type__c =’Handoff’;
insert tx1;
}
@istest
static void deletemethod(){
opportunity opp1 = new opportunity();
opp1.Name =’test opp’;
opp1.StageName =’Needs Analysis’;
opp1.CloseDate = system.today();
insert opp1;
Top_X_Designation__c tx1 = new Top_X_Designation__c();
tx1.Opp_top_x_designation__c = opp1.id;
tx1.Document_Attached__c = false;
tx1.Type__c =’Handoff’;
insert tx1;
delete tx1;
}
}
Do you want to master Salesforce? Then enroll in "Salesforce Training" This course will help you to master Salesforce.
Trigger Scenario 2:
The following Trigger will fires when we try to create the account with the same name i.e. Preventing the users to create Duplicate Accounts
trigger AccountDuplicateTrigger on Account (before insert, before the update) { for(Account a:Trigger.new) { List<Account> acc="Select id from Account where Name=:a.Name and Rating=:a.Rating"; if(acc.size()>0) { acc.Name.addError('You Cannot Create the Duplicate Account'); } } }
Trigger Scenario 3:
The following trigger updates the field called “Hello” by the value “World” whenever we are creating an account or updating an account record. Create the field called “Hello” on the Account Object (Data Type = Text)
trigger HelloWorld on Account (before insert, before update) { List<Account> accs = Trigger.new; MyHelloWorld my= new MyHelloWorld(); //creating instance of apex class my.addHelloWorld(accs); // calling method from the apex class }
Class:
public class MyHelloWorld { public void addHelloWorld(List<Account> accs) { for (Account a:accs) { if (a.Hello__c != 'World') { a.Hello__c = 'World'; } } } }
Trigger Scenario 4:
The following trigger describes when the leads are inserted into the database it would add Doctor prefixed for all lead names. This is applicable for both inserting and updating the lead records.
The following trigger adds the Opportunity Owner into the sales team automatically whenever the Opportunity is created.
Code:
trigger OppTeam on Opportunity (after insert) { List<OpportunityShare> sharesToCreate = new List<OpportunityShare>(); List<OpportunityTeamMember> oppteam = new List<OpportunityTeamMember> (); OpportunityShare oshare = new OpportunityShare(); oshare.OpportunityAccessLevel = 'Edit'; oshare.OpportunityId = trigger.new”0”.Id; oshare.UserOrGroupId = trigger.new”0”.createdbyid; sharesToCreate.add(oshare); OpportunityTeamMember ot = new OpportunityTeamMember(); ot.OpportunityId = trigger.new”0”.Id; ot.UserId = trigger.new”0”.OwnerId; ot.TeamMemberRole = 'Account Manager'; oppteam.add(ot); if(Oppteam!=null && Oppteam.size()>0) { insert Oppteam; } if(sharesToCreate!=null && sharesToCreate.size()>0) { list<Database.SaveResult> sr = Database.insert(sharesToCreate,false); } }
Trigger Scenario 6:
Create the object called “Books” and create the field “Price”(data type is Currency) under this object. Whenever we enter some amount of money in the Price field and once we click on save button, the value we entered in the Price field is 10% less than the actual price. This is applicable for while both inserting and updating records.
trigger DiscountTrigger on Book__c (before insert, before update)
public class PriceDiscount { public static void applyDiscount(List<Book__c> books) { for (Book__c b :books){ b.Price__c *= 0.9; } } }
Trigger Scenario 7:
The following trigger will prevent the users from deleting the Accounts. This is because System Administrator has all the permissions, we cannot change the permissions.
Create a Custom field called “Number of Locations” on the Account Object (Data Type=Number)
The following trigger creates the number of contacts that are equal to the number which we will enter in the Number of Locations field on the Account Object
Code:
trigger ContactsCreation on Account (after insert)
Create the object called “Customer Project” and create a Status field under this object with the picklist data type (Values=Active, Inactive). Create the relationship between this custom object and Opportunity so that the Customer Project is a related list to the Opportunity. Create Active Customer project‑ field on Opportunity object (Data Type=Checkbox) The logic is when we create Customer Project for an Opportunity with the Status=Active, then Active Customer project check box on the Opportunity Detail page is automatically checked.
We have a Stakeholder object that is the related list to Opportunity and Contact. On the Contact detail page, we have NPS ID field on the Contact detail page that is look up to the Voice of NPS object (Customer Object). The following code will get the NPS ID field value from the Contact detail page in the Stakeholders page which we can able to clickable. Create NPS Id 1 field on the stockholder's object which is the lookup to the Voice of NPS object (Customer Object)
Note:- ‑ we can also get the NPS Id 1 on the Stakeholder’s page using the formula field but will not able to clickable.
Code Single Record:
triggerUpdateNPSid on Stakeholder__c (before insert, before update)
{ List<id>ConList=new List<id>(); for(Stakeholder__csh:Trigger.New){ ConList.add(sh.Contact_Name__c); } List<Contact>lc=“Select NPS_Id__c From Contact Where id IN : ConList”; for(Stakeholder__csh:Trigger.New){ sh.NPS_Id1__c=lc”0”.NPS_Id__c; } }
Code Bulk Records:
trigger UpdateNPSid on Stakeholder__c (before insert, before update)
{ List<id> ConList=new List<id>(); map<id,id>map_NPS_Cont = new map<id,id>(); for(Stakeholder__c sh:Trigger.New) { if(sh.Contact_Name__c!=null) ConList.add(sh.Contact_Name__c); } List<Contact> lc=“Select Id,NPS_Id__c From Contact Where id IN : ConList”; if(lc!=null && lc.size()>0) { for(Contact c:lc){ If(c.NPS_Id__c!=null){ map_NPS_Cont.put(c.Id,c.NPS_Id__c); } } for(Stakeholder__c sh:Trigger.New){ if(sh.Contact_Name__c!=null) sh.NPS_Id1__c = map_NPS_Cont.get(sh.Contact_Name__c); else sh.NPS_Id1__c = null; } } }
Trigger Scenario 11:
Create “Sales Rep” field with the data type (Text) on the Account Object. When we create the Account record, the Account Owner will be automatically added to Sales Rep field. When we update the Account owner of the record, then also the Sales Rep will be automatically updated.
triggerUpdateSalesRep on Account (Before insert,Before Update)
{ Set<Id>setAccOwner=new Set<Id>(); for(Account Acc: trigger.new) { setAccOwner.add(Acc.OwnerId); } Map<Id,User>User_map = new Map<Id,User>(“select Name from User where id in:setAccOwner”); for(Account Acc: Trigger.new) { User usr=User_map.get(Acc.OwnerId); Acc.sales_Rep1__c=usr.Name; } }
Trigger Scenario 12:
Create the field called the “Contact Relationship” checkbox on the Contact Object and Create the related object called “Contact Relationship” which is a related list to the Contacts.(Look Up Relationship). Now logic is when we create contact by checking the Contact Relationship checkbox, then Contact Relationship will be created automatically for that contact.
Code:
trigger CreateCRonContactCreation on Contact (after insert)
When we change the Owner of the Contact Relationship, then the Owner name will be automatically populated in the Contact Relationship Name field.
Trigger:
trigger ContactRelationshipMasterTrigger on Contact_Relationship__c(before update) { if(trigger.isBefore) { if(trigger.isUpdate) { //call the handler for the before update trigger event updateCROwnerName ConRelUpd = New updateCROwnerName(); ConRelUpd.updateContactRelationshipNameByOwner(trigger.New); } } }
Class:
Public Class updateCROwnerName
{ public void updateContactRelationshipNameByOwner(list<Contact_Relationship__c> cont_Rel) { map<Id,Id> map_Id_Own = new map<id,id>(); map<Id,string> map_id_Name = new map<id,string>(); set<id> Idset = new set<id>(); for(Contact_Relationship__c List_recs:cont_Rel) { Idset.add(List_recs.Ownerid); } list<user> u=“select id,Name from user where id in:Idset”; for(user list_users:u) { map_id_Name.put(list_users.Id,list_users.Name); } if(u!=null && u.size()>0) { for(Contact_Relationship__c List_recs:cont_Rel) { if (List_recs.Ownerid!=null) { List_recs.Name = map_id_Name.get(List_recs.Ownerid); } } } } }
Trigger Scenario 14:
Create the field called the “Contact Relationship” checkbox on the Contact Object and Create the object called “Contact Relationship” which is a related list to the Contacts. (Look Up Relationship). Trigger Scenario 12 logic will say that when we create contact by checking the Contact Relationship checkbox, then Contact Relationship will be created automatically for that contact. No, this logic will for when we delete the Contact, Then Contact Relationship will be deleted automatically
trigger DeleteCRonContactDeletion on Contact (before delete)
{ if(trigger.isBefore) { if(trigger.isDelete) for(Contact c:Trigger.old) { Contact_relationship__c CR=new Contact_relationship__c(); CR=“Select Id from Contact_Relationship__c where Contact__c IN:GlobalUtility.getUni queIds(Trigger.Old)”; delete CR; } } } }
Global Utility Class:
public static set<Id> getUniqueIds(list<SObject> sobs) { set<Id> Ids = new set<Id>(); for (SObject sob : sobs) { Ids.add(sob.Id); } return Ids; }
Create the field called “Contact Relationship” checkbox on the Contact Object and Create the object called “Contact Relationship” which is a related list to the Contacts. (Look Up Relationship). Trigger Scenario 14 will say that when we delete the Contact, Then Contact Relationship will be deleted automatically Now the Logic is when we undelete the Contact, then the Contact Relationship will be undeleted automatically
Trigger:
trigger UnDeleteCRonContactUnDeletion on Contact (After Undelete)
{ if(trigger.isUndelete) { //call the handler for the after undelete trigger event ContactMasterHandler_Undelete ConIns = New ContactMasterHandler_Undelete( ); ConIns.undeleteContactRelationshipsByContact(Trigger.New); } }
Class
Public Class ContactMasterHandler_Undelete
{ public void undeleteContactRelationshipsByContact(list<Contact> List_Contacts) { set<Id> ContactIds = New set<Id>(); if(List_Contacts!=null && List_Contacts.size()>0) { list<Contact_Relationship__c> List_ConRels= new list<Contact_Relationship__c>( ); List_ConRels= “select id from Contact_Relationship__c where isDeleted=TRUE and
Create field called “Count of Contacts” on Account Object. When we add the Contacts for that Account then the count will populate in the field on the Account details page. When we delete the Contacts for that Account, the Count will update automatically.
Note:
The above logic will be applicable when we have a lookup relationship. But When we have the Master-Detail relationship, then we can create the Rollup Summary field to get the count of child records using the “Count” function.
trigger CountOfContacts on Contact (after insert,after delete)
Create the object called “Customer” and create the Master-Detail Relationship on Customer object so that Customer will be the related list to the Account record. Create the field called “Account Manager” on the Customer object which is a lookup to the user object.
Now Logic is when we create a Customer record for an account record, then the user in the Account Manager field will be automatically added to the Account Team of that associated account.
Code:
trigger InsertAccountTeam on Customer__c (after insert)
The above trigger(Trigger Scenario 17) Logic is when we create a Customer record for an account record, then the user in the Account Manager field will be automatically added to the Account Team of that associated account. Now the following trigger logic is when we update the user in the “Account Manager”, the Account team will be updated automatically.
Code:
trigger UpdateAccountTeam on Customer__c (before update)
The trigger scenario 17 Logic is when we create a Customer record for the account record, then the user in the Account Manager field will be automatically added to the Account Team of that associated account. Now the following trigger gives the logic about when we delete the “Customer” of that account, then the user will be deleted automatically from the Account Team of that account.
Code:
trigger DeleteAccountTeam on Customer__c (before delete)
{ List<AccountTeamMember> atm_list=new List<AccountTeamMember>(); AccountTeamMember atm = new AccountTeamMember(); List<AccountShare> newShare = new List<AccountShare>(); if(trigger.isdelete) { set<id> setAccids = new set<id>(); Set<Id> setDelATM=new Set<Id>(); Map<id,Set<Id>> mapAccMgrs=new Map<id,Set<Id>>(); for(Customer__c c:Trigger.old) { setAccids.add(c.Account__c); } List<Customer__c> listPLAccMgrs=“select id,Account_Manager__c,Account__c from Customer__c where Account__c in:setAccids and id not in:trigger.oldmap.keyset()”; if(listPLAccMgrs!=null && listPLAccMgrs.size()>0) { for(Customer__c c:listPLAccMgrs) { Set<Id> idMgrs=mapAccMgrs.get(c.Account__c); if(null==idMgrs){ idMgrs=new set<Id>(); mapAccMgrs.put(c.Account__c,idMgrs); } idMgrs.add(c.Account_Manager__c); } } Map<id,List<AccountTeamMember>> mapStdAccTeam=new Map<id,List<AccountTeamMember>>(); List<AccountTeamMember> listStdAccTeam=“select id,UserId,AccountId from AccountTeamMember where AccountId in:setAccids”; if(listStdAccTeam!=null && listStdAccTeam.size()>0){ for(AccountTeamMember recAccTeam :listStdAccTeam) { List<AccountTeamMember> listStdAccTeamMap=mapStdAccTeam.get(recAccTeam.AccountId); if(null==listStdAccTeamMap){ listStdAccTeamMap=new List<AccountTeamMember>(); mapStdAccTeam.put(recAccTeam.AccountId,listStdAccTeamMap); } listStdAccTeamMap.add(recAccTeam); } } for(Customer__c c:Trigger.old) { List<AccountTeamMember> listAccTeam=mapStdAccTeam.get(c.Account__c); Set<Id> idMgrs=mapAccMgrs.get(c.Account__c); if(listAccTeam!=null && listAccTeam.size()>0 ) { if(idMgrs!=null && idMgrs.size()>0 && !(idMgrs.Contains(trigger.oldmap.get(c.Id).Account_Manager__c))) { for(AccountTeamMember recATM:listAccTeam) { if(recATM.UserId==trigger.oldmap.get(c.Id).Account_Manager__c) setDelATM.add(recATM.Id); } } else if(idMgrs==null) { for(AccountTeamMember recATM:listAccTeam) setDelATM.add(recATM.Id); } } } List<AccountTeamMember> listDelATM=“select id from AccountTeamMember where id in:setDelATM”; if(listDelATM!=null && listDelATM.size()>0 ) delete listDelATM; } }
When we create the Opportunity with the Probability=20, then the opportunity owner will be automatically added to the Account Team of the associated account for that Opportunity.
OpportunityTeamMember is the backend name of Sales Team
For the creation of the Account Team, we need to create Account Share which will be there at the backend
For the creation of the Sales team, we need to create Opportunity Share which will be there at the backend
Note: For more clarity, go to the Data Loader and click on the “Export” operation and click on the select “Show all Salesforce Objects” checkbox, then we can able to see Account Share and Opportunity Share.
3f:T6559,
Increment /Decrement operator with Examples
Increment and decrement operators are unary operators that add or subtract one, to or from their operand, sequentially. They are commonly implemented in imperative programming languages like java, c, c++ the increment operator increments the value of the variable by one, and similarly, the decrement operator decrements the value of the variable by one.
a=6
a++ // a becomes 7
++a // a becomes 8
a-- // a becomes 7
--a // a becomes 6
Increment operators:
the increment operator increments the value of the variable in the expression. If the increment operator(++) is used as a prefix (before the variable), then the value of the variable is increased, and then it returns the value. If the increment operator is used as postfix(after the variable), then the original value is returned, and then the variable is increased by one.
Example in C programming:
#include <stdio.h>
int main() {
int a = 6, b = 6;
// a is displayed
// Then, a is increased to 7.
printf("%d post-increment n", a++);
// b is increased to 7
// Then, it is displayed.
printf("%d pre-incrementn", ++b);
return 0;
}
Output:
6 post-increment
7 pre-increment
Example in C++:
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main() {
int a = 6, b = 6;
// a is displayed
// Then, a is increased to 7.
cout << a++ << endl;
// b is increased to 7
// Then, it is displayed.
cout << ++b << endl;
return 0;
}
Output:
6
7
Example in Java programming:
class Operator {
public static void main(String[] args) {
int a = 6, b = 6;
// a is displayed
// Then, a is increased to 7.
System.out.println(a++);
// b is increased to 6
// Then, b is displayed
System.out.println(++b);
}
}
Output:
6
7
Decrement operators:
the decrement operator decrements the value of the variable in the expression. If the decrement operator(--) is used as a prefix (before the variable), then the value of the variable is decreased, and then it returns the value. If the decrement operator is used as postfix(after the variable) then the original value is returned, and then the variable is decreased by one.
Example in C programming:
#include <stdio.h>
int main() {
int a = 6, b = 6;
// a is displayed
// Then, a is decreased to 5.
printf("%d post-decrenet n", a--);
// b is decreased to 5
// Then, it is displayed.
printf("%d pre-decrementn", --b);
return 0;
}
Output:
6 post-decrement
5 pre-decrement
Example in C++:
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main() {
int a = 6, b = 6;
// a is displayed
// Then, a is decreased to 5.
cout << a-- << endl;
// b is decreased to 5
// Then, it is displayed.
cout << --b << endl;
return 0;
}
Output:
6
5
Example in Java:
class Operator {
public static void main(String[] args) {
int a = 6, b = 6;
// a is displayed
// Then, a is decreased to 5.
System.out.println(a--);
// b is decreased to 5
// Then, b is displayed
System.out.println(--b);
}
}
Output:
6
5
Difference between increment and decrement operators:
Increment Operator
Decrement Operator
The increment operator increments the variable by one.
The decrement operator decrements the operator by one.
Prefix increment operator indicates the variable is incremented first, and then the expression is assessed utilizing the new value of the variable.
Prefix decrement operator indicates the variable is decremented first, and then the expression is assessed utilizing the new value of the variable.
Postfix increment operator indicates the expression is assessed first utilizing the original value of the variable, and then the variable is increased(incremented).
Postfix decrement operator indicates the expression is assessed first utilizing the original value of the variable, and then the variable is decreased(decremented).
In an implementation, when we require to change the initial value of the variable by 1, then go for increment/decrement operators. I.e “++,--“
When we are working with increment/decrement operator the difference b/w existing value and a new value is +1 and -1 only.
Depending on the position, these operators are classified into two types.
i.e pre & post operators.
When the symbol is available before the operand, then it is called pre-operator, if the symbol is available after the operand, then it is called post operator
When we are working with pre operators, data need to be modified before evaluating the expression
When we are working with post operators, data need to be modified after evaluating the expression
Syntax:-
First, increment the value of “a” by 1 and then evaluate the expression i.e,
b=1;
Int a,b;
A=1;
Syntax1:
b=++a;
pre-increment i.e b=a;
o/p: a=2 b=2
First, evaluate the expression and then increment the value of “ a “ by 1
Syntax 2:-
b=a++, post-increment o/p: a=2 b=1
First, decrement the value of “a” by 1 and then evaluate the expression
Syntax 3: -
b=-a; pre decrement o/p : a=0 b=0.
First evaluate the expression, later decrement the value of a by 1
void main()
{
Int a; A=1;
Printf(“n%d”,++a * ++a * ++a);
// case1 A=1;
Printf(“n%d”,++a * a++ * ++a);
//case2 A=1;
Printf(“/n%d”,a++ * ++a * a++);
//case 3 A=1;
Printf(“n%d”,a++ * a++ * a++);
// case 4 A=1;
Printf(“n%d”, ++a * a++ * a++);
// case 5 A=1;
Printf(“n%d”,a++ * a++ * ++a);
// case 6 A=1;
Printf(“n %d”,++a*++a*a++);
// case 7
}
Case1 : 2*3*4=24
case 5 2*2*3=12
Case2: 2*2*4=16
case 6 1*2*4=8
Case 3: 1*3*3=9
case7: 2*3*3 =18
Case 4: 1*2*3=6
Generally, the expressions can be evaluated in two locations. Ie register & stack
When we are working with register evaluation, then it works according to the priority. Ie pre-operator having the highest priority than the post operator.
In register evaluation, data need to be substituted after modifying all pre value only.
In stack evaluation, pre & post operators both contain the same priority, and data need to substitute at the time of evaluation of the expression.
When we are placing an expression outside of points then it should be evaluated according to register, within the printf should be evaluated according to stack.
When we are passing more than one expression in printf then data needs to be evaluated from right to left, if the single argument is there then data need to be substituted towards from left to right.
According to behavior of the printf always it executes towards from right to left thats why when we are working with nested printf towards from right side first printf always executes first
void main()
{
Int a;
a= printf(“three %d n”); printf(“two %d n”);
printf(“one %d n”); printf(“a=%d”,a);
} o/p: one two three a=7
void main()
{
int a;
a= printf(“onen”) + printf(“ two n”) + printf (“threen”); printf(“a=%d”,a);
}
o/p : one two three a=14
void main()
{
int a;
a=printf(“n one”) + printf(“n two”) * printf(“n three”);
printf(“a=%d”,a);
}
o/p: two three one
Increment and decrement operators are used in looping and decision making in programming like C, C++, Java, and javascript. You can increase and decrease the values of the variables by using these operators
40:T5475,
Snowflake Tutorial
In the current era of Living, we see that the organization holds large volumes of data. Managing large volumes of data has become a tedious job these days. The organizations are looking forward to the best data warehouse platforms to achieve their objectives and goals efficiently. Many data warehousing platforms are available in the market. However, Snowflake has got its own reputation for its unique features, which help organizations and their users reach success in a short span of time. Snowflake is called a cloud-based data warehouse platform that is explicitly built on the top of Amazon Web Services or AWS. Snowflake cloud data warehousing platform is said to be a software as a service offering. In this tutorial, you will gain an understanding of Snowflake, its architecture, advantages and many more. You will also gain an understanding of the different features which make Snowflake a leader in the market. Let's get started.
What is a Snowflake data warehouse?
A snowflake data warehouse is referred to as the data storage and analytic service, which is built on the cloud, Unlike the other data warehouses. Snowflake allows businesses or organizations to analyze and store the data by using cloud-based tools. It is called the first analytics service designed to run on different providers like Google Cloud platforms, Azure, AWS, etc.
The snowflake data warehouse does not require any hardware or software installed or managed or configured and completely based on thef cloud-based infrastructure. Snowflake service is ideal for developing their applications, data science, data engineering, data warehouse and many more. Snowflake is called the fastest-growing application because of its unique features, allowing it to analyze the data quickly. Snowflake has developed features and architecture, including data sharing facilities and virtual data warehouses, to manage large volumes of workload in day-to-day operations.
Snowflake is a platform that allows the data storage and passing along with the analytics of the data in a faster and flexible way when compared to the other traditional offerings that are available in the market. The snowflake data warehouse on the data platform is not specifically built on the existing database Technology but also is flexible to combine with a completely new SQL Query engine. Snowflake is one platform that provides users with all the functionalities required for an enterprise analytic database and some unique capabilities and flexibilities.
Do you want to master Snowflake? Then enroll in"Snowflake Training" This course will help you to master Snowflake
Why is Snowflake unique?
When compared with The Other traditional data warehouses, Snowflake is known for its cloud cloud-based data warehouse, which includes the separation of the compute layer and storage layer, which will also allow each of them to be scaled independently within the given reasonable or cost-effective price. In Snowflake, you will be paying only for the capacity and the performance that you use. Most of the other traditional or different data warehouses will also process the same features; however, Snowflake customers have given a better review stating that they have chosen Snowflake for its scalability, which is one of the essential features.
Let us have a brief understanding of the architecture of Snowflake and how it works.
Architecture of Snowflake
As mentioned earlier, Snowflake is built on the cloud, which has come up with a unique multi-clustered shared architecture. As every organization looks for the features like high performance, elasticity and concurrency, Snowflake is found to be the best among the data warehouses available in the market. It is flexible to provide all different activities like resource management, data protection, availability, authentication, etc. Snowflake includes the compute, storage and global service layers, which are logically integrated but are physically integrated.
Snowflake makes use of the shared disk architectures, which utilize multiple nodes for accessing the shared data on a single system. The shared architecture follows the process of sharing the part of the data in each data warehouse node. Snowflake can process the queries using the massively parallel processing computer clusters in which every node in the cluster will store some part of the entire data set locally.
Snowflake Data warehouse consists of three different layers in the snowflake architecture. They are:
Database storage
Query processing
Cloud services
Let me give you a brief explanation of each layer in the snowflake architecture.
1. Database storage:
All the data is stored in the database in Snowflake. A database is referred to as the grouping of the objects logically, consisting of the tables and views that can be further classified into one or more schemas. The Snowflake allows storing any kind of data, which can be either structured or unstructured data, and stores all the tasks related to the data, which are handled through the SQL query operations. Snowflake is responsible for managing all the activities on how the data is stored. It makes sure that Snowflake completely handles the file structure, compression, statistics, and other aspects of the data storage.
2. Query processing:
In this layer of query processing, Snowflake is responsible for processing the queries using CS, which makes use of the virtual warehouse consisting of the data that is present in the storage layer. They will be separately run to not share or complete the data warehouses with the other resources. Virtual warehouses are specifically used to run queries and data loading and also provides it support and flexibility to perform both of these tasks simultaneously. A virtual warehouse is allowed to be scaled up or down.
3. Cloud services:
The Cloud Service layer is responsible for coordinating in handling the services in Snowflake, including encryption, SQL compilation, sessions, etc. It is also responsible for eliminating or removing the manual data warehousing and tuning requirements. Below is a list of services that are included in the Cloud Service layer.
Authentication
Infrastructure management
Metadata management
Query parsing and Optimisation
Access control
All the services and layers are independently scaled and redundant with each other. To understand better how the different layers work together you need to have an idea about the life cycle of a query.
Once the Snowflake is connected using any one of the supported clients and the session is started, then the first virtual warehouse will submit a query. The service here will verify if this is unauthorized access or not in the database. Once authentication is done, it will execute the operations defined in the query and create an optimized query plan. The next step is with a service layer that will send the query execution instructions to the virtual warehouse and is responsible for allocating the resources. This is because any data from the storage layer will be responsible for executing the query. All the results obtained will be then returned to the user.
Along with unique architecture, Snowflake has come up with extensible features that have improved demand for the platform in a short span of time. I will give you a briefing about the different features available in Snowflake.
1. Availability:
The snowflake architecture is designed to support the fully distributed and plans across the globe in the different availability zones and regions. Snowflake is also highly faulted tolerant to the failures that arise in the hardware. The number of users who face issues or notice the impact of the failures in the hardware is very less.
2. Security:
security is one of the important aspects of Snowflake architecture. In the snowflake architecture, data encryption takes place when the data is in transit and rest as well. Snowflake utilizes different authentication mechanisms that include federated authentication with support for single sign-on access and also two-factor authentication. The security feature in Snowflake includes role-based access control so that it provides the authenticated users to access the data rather than everyone. It has come up with the capabilities to restrict the users based on the predefined criteria. Snowflake is also compatible to work with the host of certifications like socl2 type 2 and also HIPAA.
3. Multi-cloud:
Snowflake the only latest platform, Unlike the traditional offerings that are available in multiple clouds with the best User experience and keeping up the value of customers. Snowflake allows its users to be more comfortable using the clouds as and when required. It also helps in reducing the moving data back and forth from the cloud environment to Snowflake using the internet. Snowflake is available on different environments of platforms like Microsoft Azure, Google Cloud and Amazon Web Services.
4. Pricing:
Snowflake offers the best pricing, which is reasonable and simplified, providing a positive experience to the users. Users will be allowed to pay only for the stories they use and the computing power deployed to process the request. There will not be any sort of class involved or extensive planning required to start with the data warehouse initiation. Snowflake architecture includes clusters that automatically help process the work clothes and scale down to the predefined size. Uses will be built based on the usage of capacity that they are actually used and also for the expanded capacity based on the duration.
5. Scalability and performance:
As per the latest update, we see that there is a high demand for Snowflake for the performance capability and scalability that holds. As Snowflake follows architecture in which compute and storage are separately treated, Snowflake has paved the way to minimize or eliminate the bottleneck that is associated with the Other Technologies, specifically the traditional offerings. Users will be allowed to start by providing the cluster size for initial deployment and will also be allowed to scale as and when required when the system is up and running. Snowflake will handle the scaling operations transparently.
6. Near Zero administration:
Snowflake is flexible in removing the management constraints and is a cloud-native data warehousing platform. Snowflake is designed in such a way that the performance level will be represented at a high level and will also lead to the elimination of the administration overhead. Based on the demands of the workload, the database will be managed entirely and scale automatically. Snowflake also includes the capability to build performance tuning, Optimisation capabilities, and infrastructure management, which will help the business live in peace. The only thing that needs to be done is to bring the data and leave the data and its management to Snowflake.
Collaboration and sharing:
snowflake has come up with one of the essential features, which are sharing in collaborating with the data owners. It allows the data owners to share the relevant data with the different partners and consumers. There is no need to create a new copy of the data. There is no utilization of storage or data movement, and the consumer will only pay for the processing of the data. It also helps remove the hurdles involved in email or FTP by using the sharing features available in Snowflake.
Connecting to Snowflake:
Snowflake is designed in such a way that it is compatible to be connected with the other services in many different ways. Below are the few sets of options or services to which Snowflake can be connected.
Odbc and JDBC drivers
Native connectors
Command-line clients
Third-party characters such as business intelligence tools and ETL tools.
Loading of data in Snowflake:
In the section, you will learn about the fundamentals of loading the data into Snowflake. Snowflake is flexible to support four different options to perform data loading. They are:
Snow SQL for bulk loading
Snowpipe in order to automate the bulk loading of data
Webui for limited data
Third-party tools to load the bulk amount of data from external sources.
Let me give you a brief description of each type of loading available supported by Snowflake.
1. Snow SQL for bulk loading:
Firstly we need to know that the bulk loading of data will be performed in two different phases. They are Staging files and loading data.
Staging the files: the first phase of bulk loading of data is Staging files. Staging files usually refers to uploading the data files to a particular location where the Snowflake can be allowed to access. The next step is to load the data from stage files into tables. The Staging of files happens on some internal locations, which are called Stages in Snowflake. In order to provide secure storage of data files without any dependency on the external locations, the internal stages are used.
Loading the data: in order to load the data, a virtual warehouse is required to load the data into Snowflake. The warehouse is responsible for extracting the available data in each file and inserting it in the form of rows in the table.
In the snow SQL type of bulk loading in Snowflake, the CSV files will be loaded from the word local machine into a contact table. The same name will be used in internal Staging to store the files before performing the loading of the data.
2. Snowpipe:
Snowpipe can also be used to perform the loading of the data in which this specifically from the files stage in the external locations. Snowpipe makes use of the copy command, which has come up with some additional features and will allow you to automate the process. It also makes use of the external computer resources in order to load the data continuously and also help in eliminating the requirement of a virtual warehouse.
3. Third-party tools:
In order to perform the loading of data, third-party tools like ELT can be used. Snowflake provides extensible support to expand the scope of the ecosystem of applications and services in order to load the data from a wide range of external sources.
4. Web interface:
The web interface is the only last option that is available for loading the data. In the web interface type of loading, you will need to select the table that you want to choose and then click on the load button. Once you click on the load button, you will be allowed to load a limited amount of data into Snowflake. The web interface type of learning will help in simplifying the loading activity as it combines both the Staging and loading of data into a single operation and is also flexible in removing or deleting the files once the loading is completed
Benefits of Snowflake
Unlike the traditional offerings or the traditional data warehouses, Snowflake is the cloud-based data warehouse that has multiple unique features and benefits. A few of the benefits are listed below:
1. Simple and friendly to use:
Snowflake has a simple interface that is easy to understand and allows you to load the data and process the data quickly. It is also flexible and provides support to solve the queries or issues that arise using the exceptional multi-cluster architecture.
2. Data sharing:
Snowflake has come up with a unique architecture and includes seamless data sharing required for any customer.
3. Support multiple formats:
Snowflake is designed to work or be compatible with multiple formats like JSON, XML, etc. It is flexible to run with any kind of data that can be either structured, semi-structured or unstructured data and help address the issues that arise by handling the incongruent data types that exist, in particular a single data warehouse.
4. Availability of tools:
Snowflake is compatible to work with different tools like Power BI, Tableau, etc. It is providing it extensible support by allowing you to run the queries against large sets of data.
5. Scalability:
Snowflake has come up with the instant data sharing or data scaling feature, which allows you to handle the concurrency portal next that arises during the period when there is high demand. It allows you to perform the scaling of the data without redistributing the data, which could be one of the interruptions to the end-users.
6. Performance and speed:
As Snowflake is a cloud-based data warehouse, if you stick to the cloud's elastic nature, it will allow you to load the data quickly and run the large volumes of data or queries faster. It also provides you with the flexibility to scale the virtual warehouse up and down to take advantage of the benefit of using the extra computer resources and make the payment for that time you have used. Snowflake provides the users with the best outcomes by ensuring that the query processing is taking place at an optimal rate.
7. Flexibility and elasticity:
As customer value and customer satisfaction is one of the prominent aspects, Snowflake is making wonders by offering the highest accessibility, elasticity, flexibility, etc. Snowflake specifically allows the user to use both the query services and the warehouse services in the same data lake. Compared with the other offerings available in the market, Snowflake is known for the usage, being said, it is more flexible, and it can be used whenever it is required based on the requirements.
Conclusion:
As of 2023, there is a high demand for cloud-based products, cloud data warehouses, which have become more popular based on the customer value and customer satisfaction that they are offering. Snowflake is referred to as one of the effective tools that will help manage the data Over The Other traditional offerings available. Utilizing and implementing Snowflake or incorporating Snowflake into your business can help you improve your business performance and efficiently achieve your goals. I hope the above information has helped you in gaining knowledge of Snowflake.
41:T6834,
Openshift Interview Questions and Answers
Are you preparing for an Openshift Job interview? Then you need frequently asked Openshift Interview Questions and Answers to clear and acquire your dream job. Tekslate experts compiled the Top 30 Openshift Interview Question and Answers that help you to clear the Openshift Interview.
Ans: Openshift is fundamentally a PC software product that is served by Red Hat. It is a cloud improvement administration and an open-source advancement stage for possible designers. The essentials of development and deployment of the applications over the cloud are led with Openshift.
Q2) What is cloud computing?
Ans:
Cloud computing is supplying on-demand computing assets, from applications to server centers around the web.
Cloud computing has become the preferred method to send enterprise apps - and the selective decision for organizations to increase their infrastructure or propose new ideas.
Q3) What is Containerization?
Ans: A container picture is a lightweight, independent, executable bundle of a part of the software that incorporates all that is expected to run it: system libraries, code, settings, runtime.
The advanced stage has fundamental segments for Linux containers. Today, a vigorous DevOps environment is introduced on the Docker outline in the most well-known Linux Container Format. Docker is a container open-source programming platform that makes application deployment easier and empowers containers for applications.
Containerization dependent on virtualization permits any application packaged in a container that can be run without any hassles like libraries.
They make such a disconnected parcel inside a solitary operating system.
Q4) Differentiate Openshift and Docker?
Ans:
The key distinction is that Docker is centered uniquely around the runtime container as a task. Simultaneously, OpenShift (as a framework) contains both the REST API and runtime container, web interface and coordination, management, and the deployment of individual containers.
OpenShift is more of a container arrangement deliberation layer. OpenShift utilizes Kubernetes inside for the organization of containers. For container coordination, While Docker has a docker swarm for container organization.
Q5) Explain about gear in Openshift?
Ans: In terms of Openshift, isolated groups are called Gears. Gears perform the working of the application. Rather than a software product piece, the application is essentially performed by gears. Another significant term is a cartridge, which is fundamentally a build made up of reusable gears.
Q6) What is meant by pods in Openshift?
Ans:
Pods are what could be compared to a machine occurrence (physical or virtual) to a compartment. OpenShift uses the Kubernetes idea of a pod, which is at least one container conveyed together on one host. The littlest figure unit can be characterized, sent, and oversaw.
The Kubernetes booking unit is the Pod, a gathering of holders sharing a virtual organization gadget, interior IP address, TCP/UDP ports, and diligent stockpiling. A Pod can be anything from a complete endeavor application, including every one of its layers as a particular container, to a solitary microservice inside a solitary holder. Kubernetes oversees reproductions to scale units. An imitation is a bunch of cases having a similar definition. OpenShift regards companies as to a great extent unchanging; changes can't be made to a case definition while it is running.
Q7) Explain about Openshift Enterprise?
Ans:
OpenShift is the RedHat Cloud Development Platform (PaaS) administration. Its lead item is the on-premises OpenShift Container Platform as a help worked around Docker compartments coordinated and constrained by Kubernetes on a Red Hat Enterprise Linux base.
Free and open-source cloud-based stages permit designers to construct, test, and run their applications and send them to the cloud.
Q8) Explain container Orchestration in Kubernetes?
Ans: While containers are compelling at the complicated work while launching a picture or application segment on a solitary facilitating environment, most present-day applications involve numerous segments that different length hosts could be in other geographic areas. This is the place where management and orchestration become a query.
For the most part, applications are developed independently of containerized segments/miniature service that should be overseen for the application to proceed right to form.
Container coordination is the process of organizing or managing numerous containers in this style. For instance: Kubernetes, Docker Swarm, Marathon, and Mesos.
Kubernetes is an open-source stage at first created by engineers at Google, which mechanizes container activities. It permits you to fabricate application benefits that length various holders, plan those compartments across a bunch, scale those containers, and deal with those containers' soundness after some time. Kubernetes handles container organizations and coordination as a group supervisor by utilizing a decisive model that empowers the client to characterize their application needs.
Q9) Explain about the Openshift Container Platform?
Ans: Let us know about what the OpenShift Container platform is
RedHat OpenShift Container Platform is a PAAS present from RedHat, which was also known as OpenShift Enterprises.
It is an upheld conveyance of Kubernetes utilizing Docker containers and DevOps devices for accelerated application improvement.
Open Shift also permits you to have self-healing, auto-scaling, and high-available applications without any manual arrangement that would typically be done in a familiar environment, whether they're on-premise or in the public cloud.
OpenShift incorporates a full supplement of open-source programming dialects giving the multilingual decision to developers.
Q10) What are the advantages of Openshift?
Ans: Following are the advantages of Openshift:
It gives a container the executives stage to your complex IT organization.
Kubernetes is the business driving open-source container organization system, and the Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform is the primary endeavor conveyance of Kubernetes.
Empower your improvement group to zero in on planning and testing applications instead of investing excessive time in deploying and maintaining the containers.
It incorporates containerization for automatic-provisioning, continuous integration, multitenancy, self-service, and automatic application scaling for developers.
Q11) Define routes and services in Openshift?
Ans: A pod is comprising services and containers; subsequently, service in Openshift is a get together of coherent pods. The service is considered fundamentally as a REST object in Openshift. Routes are given in Openshift to externalize and investigate the services needed to reach the hostname remotely. It is achieved by utilizing the routes created by the admin commands.
Q12) Enlist a few build strategies that are used in Openshift?
Ans: Following are the major build strategies used in Openshift:
Custom Strategy
Source to image Strategy
Docker Strategy
Pipeline Strategy
Q13) Differentiate Openstack and Openshift?
Ans: The two of them are the original inception from open-source projects, and they similarly give Cloud Computing essentials. The significant distinction between them is that OpenStack provides a framework for administration or the structure 'IaaS.' It additionally provides object storage and blocks storage to the bootable virtual machine. Then again, Openshift performs unexpectedly.
Q14) List out the most important features of Openshift?
Ans: Following are the prominent features of Openshift:
It supports various databases and languages.
Agreeable towards the environment sustain.
It seriously gives a web console.
It gives remote debugging.
It has the capability of a rich command-line tool.
It helps to remote login to the application through SSH.
Inclined to build a profession as Red Hat Openshift Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore Red Hat Openshift Training
Q15) Give detailed information about Openshift Architecture?
Ans: OpenShift Container Platform is a bunch of modular services and segments mounted on top of Red Hat Enterprise Dockers, Kubernetes, and Linux. OpenShift adds Kubernetes abilities, includes increased security, remote management, self-service interface, multitenancy, application life-cycle management for developers.
In the following figure, going from left to right and downside to upside, the fundamental container foundation has appeared, enhanced and integrated by RedHat.
The base Operating System is Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL).
Docker gives the essential container management API and the container picture record form.
Kubernetes deals with a bunch of hosts (physical or virtual) that run containers. It works with assets that depict multi-container applications made out of numerous acquisitions and how they interconnect.
Etcd is a conveyed key-esteem store, utilized by Kubernetes to save configuration and state data about the containers and different assets inside the OpenShift group.
Q16) Explain about Openshift Deployment?
Ans: Deployment in OpenShift is a replication regulator dependent on a user-defined layout called a deployment arrangement. Deployments are composed or in response to triggered functions. The deployment framework gives the accompanying:
A deployment arrangement is a layout for deployments.
Triggers that drive computerized organizations in response to occasions.
Client adaptable strategies to progress from the previous arrangement to the new deployments.
Rollbacks to preceding deployments.
Manual replication scaling.
Q17) Explain the deployment strategies?
Ans:
An organization technique is an approach to change an application or to refresh it. The objective is to make progress such that the buyer scarcely sees the changes, without personal time. Utilizing a blue-green sending is the most standard method.
The new form (the blue variant) is being worked for testing and assessment, while the clients utilize the steady-state (the green). The clients are moved to the blue adaptation when it's accessible. You can return to the Green form if an issue happens.
Q18) Explain the rolling strategy?
Ans: A moving rollout slowly replaces examples of an application's earlier form with cases of the application's present rendition. A rolling deployment typically trusts that new units will prepare through a status test until the old modules are downsized. The moving organization can be stopped if a problematic issue happens.
Q19) Explain about the Canary Deployments?
Ans: All rolling organizations in OpenShift Origin are canary arrangements; it checks another adaptation (the canary) before supplanting all the old examples. Except if the availability test never works, at that point, the canary occasion and sending will be handicapped.
Openshift Technical Interview Questions
Q20) Explain about Openshift Online?
Ans: OpenShift Online is an OpenShift people group administration that permits one to make, convey, and scale containerized applications on the public cloud rapidly. It is the turn of events and facilitates the foundation of Red Hat's public cloud stage, which empowers automated provisioning, the board, and application scaling to help designers focus on the advancement of system rationale.
Q21) Explain about DevOps?
Ans: DevOps assist associations with reacting a more agile way of changing business prerequisites by:
Computerizing and observing the cycle of programming creation, from a mix, testing, delivering to sending, and overseeing it.
Smoothing out the turn of events and delivery pipeline
Expanding the deployment recurrence.
Decreasing the advancement cycles.
Q22) What is meant by PaaS?
Ans: As the name proposes, PaaS (Platform as a Service) gives you processing stages, which typically incorporate the working framework, programming language execution climate, information base, web worker, and so on.
The advantage of Cloud processing is the operational talent given by the Cloud stage in which we don't need to stress over the IT framework, and we can zero in on building our applications.
In PaaS, the shopper can convey applications utilizing programming dialects, libraries, administrations, and instruments upheld by the supplier onto the cloud foundation.
The purchaser doesn't oversee or control the hidden cloud foundation, including network, workers, working frameworks, or capacity. However, it has power over the sent applications and perhaps set up settings for the application-facilitating environment.
PaaS began from a shared IT administration model wherein different occupants ran applications on shared frameworks
Containerization is a capacity to virtualize the Operating System (OS) assets rather than the hidden equipment while it sits straightforwardly on top of the uncovered meta.
For Example, Azure's Cloud Services, Amazon Web Services (AWS's) Elastic Beanstalk, Google's App Engine
Q23) What is the use of DevOps tools?
Ans: DevOps tools virtually satisfy a large portion of the prerequisites essential in the typical programming conveyance. These are as per the following:
Improved deployment recurrence
Staggeringly lower paces of failure
Managing the time between the fixes
Quickest recuperation during the new representative of the event
The more significant part of the stages is often making code arrangements to give steady and dependable conveyance.
Q24) Enlist top significant Devop tools and how they worked with any?
Ans: The most important DevOps tools are-
Git: It is a rendition control framework tool
Jenkins: It is a consistent integration tool
Selenium: It is a persistent testing tool
Nagios: It is a consistent checking tool
Docker: It is a containerization tool
Chef, Ansible, Puppet: Each and every tool is configured to deploy and manage.
Q25) Explain how Docker and Kubernetes work with Openshift?
Ans: Openshift uses the efficiencies of Docker and Kubernetes with a control framework. A considerable lot of the organization pipelines are empowered through it, which are later utilized for auto-scaling, testing, and many more occasions.
Q26) Explain the Openshift Command-line interface?
Ans: The numerous functionalities of Openshift as a rich web reassure, and order line devices furnish the clients with an incredibly profiting stage. It works to provide sending and the executives with the application itself. An Openshift apparatus gives a solitary executable programming language and is accessible for the more significant working frameworks. These are as per the following-
Linux
Ether pad
Openshift Docker register
Apple
Openshift Router
Microsoft Windows
Q27) Explain about Labels in Openshift?
Ans: In OpenShift, Labels are distinguishing metadata consisting of key/esteem sets joined to assets. Names are utilized to add recognizing qualities to objects that apply to clients and can be used to reflect design or hierarchical ideas. Marks can be used related to name selectors to identify the greatest assets or gatherings of assets exceptionally. For Instance:
DMZBased
Node types
Environment
Tier
Relationship
User type
Release
Q28) Explain about Volume Security?
Ans: Volume security implies making sure about the PV and PVC of projects in the OpenShift bunch. There are predominantly four segments to control admittance to volumes in OpenShift.
Supplemental Groups
fsgroup
run as user
seLinuxOptions
Q29) What is meant by Openshift Security?
Ans: OpenShift security is, for the most part, a blend of two segments that essentially handles security imperatives.
Security Context Constraints (SCC): It is essentially utilized for unit limitation, which implies it characterizes the impediments for a case, what activities it can perform and what everything it can access in the bunch.
Service Account: Service accounts are essentially used to control admittance to OpenShift ace API, which is considered when an order or a solicitation is terminated from any expert or hub machine.
Q30) What are the Identity providers in Oauth?
Ans: Following are the identity providers in Oauth:
LDAP
Deny All
HTTP Passwords
Basic Authentication
Allow All
Q31) What is meant by application scaling in Openshift?
Ans: In the OpenShift application, auto-scaling is otherwise called pod auto-scaling. There are two sorts of utilization scaling as follows.
1. Up (vertical scaling)
2. Out (Horizontal scaling)
Envision, you have a compelling beginning up, and your client base is developing. As the client base grows, application burden and request increments. To stay aware of this interest, you either need to add workers (flat scaling) or get greater ones (vertical scaling).
Vertical Scaling: To oblige a higher burden utilizing vertical scaling, your application stays in a single spot, and you give it more assets. For instance, you may add a giant machine with more CPUs, quicker CPUs, memory, or circle space. The cost keeps on ascending as you add more equipment assets.
Horizontal Scaling: To oblige higher burden utilizing level scaling, numerous examples of an application are made, and the application load is adjusted across freehubs.
This has a few favorable circumstances since you can:
Utilize customary equipment and consequently keep the cost of your equipment utilize sensibly
Send hundreds or thousands of hubs and burden balance the application between them.
Q32) Explain about Openshift Cil?
Ans: OpenShift CLI is utilized for overseeing OpenShift applications from the order line. OpenShift CLI can lead to an end-to-end application life cycle. As a rule, we would use OC, an OpenShift customer, to speak with OpenShift. OpenShift CLI is fit for playing out all fundamental and advanced design, the board, expansion, and organization of utilizations.
Q33) What is meant by the Downward API in Openshift?
Ans: The Downward API is an instrument whereby cases can recover their metadata without calling into the Kubernetes API.
The accompanying metadata can be recovered and used to design the running units:
Annotations
Labels
Pod CPU/memory request and limit information
Pod name, namespace, and IP address
Specific data can be mounted into the unit as a climate variable, while it can get other data as records inside a volume.
Q34) What is meant by features toggles?
Ans: Feature toggles are where the two forms of your element are remembered for a similar codebase. However, they are encircled by the rationale to execute, depending on external factors, such as a property estimation or information base switch. This is a helpful procedure to isolate the deployment from multiple server groups, legacy monoliths, setups, and single server groups.
Q35) Explain about Haproxy on Openshift?
Ans: On OpenShift, if your application is versatile, HAProxy sits before it and acknowledges every approaching association. It parses the HTTP convention and chooses which application case the association should be steered to. This is significant as it permits the client to have sticky sessions.
42:T77f,
Linq queries are used to filtering the data and formatting the data. The Microsoft introduced linq concept in the 3.0 .net framework, the linq queries designed based on anonymous variables and generic classes As per .net technologies ‘var’ is an anonymous data type, in the anonymous variables we can maintain value format data and reference format data. The linq queries we can inherit to the ‘object,’ ‘ADO. net’ and “XML”
Example of Silverlight linq Integration
(Retaining greater than 5 array elements from the ArrayList) Open new Silverlight application
Add list box and button control
Go to the button click event
Private void button:-
click (object sender, routed Event agrs e)
{
Int [] a = {1,5,8,3,6,9,4,22,25,2,7};
Var x = from I in a where i> 5 select I ;
For each (var v in x) { List box1. Items. Add (v. tostring ());
}
}
Formatting string array elements
Open new Silverlight application Add Listbox and button control Go to the button click event
Private void button 1_
click (object sender, routed event arge e)
{
String [] x = { “asd”, “zkd”, “poi”, “aad”, “tyu”, “klm:};
Var str = from I in x order by I as ceding select I ;
Foreach (var v in str)
{
list box 1.items add (v.to string ());
}
}
43:T23b2,
Silverlight Animation
Animations are used to give moments to silver light controls by taking control properties, using animation we can give a rich internet user interface to the Asp.net application.
The animation we can classify into two types basically.
Data type animation or from/to/by animation
Key frame animation
Data Type Animation
This animation is used to Animate silver light controls by taking control properties, In the Data type animation we can give only one target for animation
The data type animation we can classify into three types
The animation between starting and ending
Double animation
color animation
point animation
Double Animation
using this animation we can give animation to Silverlight control by taking double related properties (or) which property taking numeric values.
As per XAML, we have to define animation in the storyboard, using storyboard we can control all animation, all storyboards we have to define in the beginning storyboard, all storyboard we can control using begin storyboard.
Storyboard. Target name property using for deciding giving animation control
Storyboard. Target property using this property we can decide giving animation property
From using this property animation starting location
To use this property animation ending location
Auto revels:- using this property animation in the revels order
Repeat behavior: using this property we can set animation repeating type, this property supports three types of repeating types
Times pan (0: 0: 15) ! Repeat animation 1.5 seconds
Iterations (5x) : repeat animation 5 times
Literal (forever ) repeat continuously
Color Animation
This animation is used to animate silver light control by taking color-related properties
EX:- open new silver light application
Go to SAML mode
In the canvas tag
<canvas>
<polygon X:Name = “p1” height = “250” width = “300” fill = “Red” stroke = “Green” stroke thickness = “10”>
<polygon. Points>
<point X = “30” Y= “40” > </point>
<point x= “200” Y = “10”> </point>
<point x= “150” Y = “100”> </point>
</polygon. points>
<polygon. Triggers>
<Event Trigger Routed Event = “canvas. Loaded”>
<begin story board>
<story board>
<color animation storyboard. Target name = “p1” story board. Target property = “(fill), (color)” from = “red” To = “black” auto reverse = “True” repeat behavior = “Forever”>
</color animation>
</story board>
</Begin story board>
</Event trigger>
</polygon. Triggers>
</polygon>
</canvas>
Polygon:
This control is used to create closed shapes by defining a collection of points
Polygon. Points:
using this tag we can create a workspace for defining points
Point:
This tag is used to define one point by specifying X location and Y location
Point Animation
using this Animation we can animate SilverLight control by taking which properties having two parameters.
Go to VS.NET click on File click on new click on website select WCF service Template select the language as visual c# select the location as http type the service application name (http://Local host /example1) Click on OK.
When we create a web service by default 3 files will be created.
1) I service .cs (this is an interface file that contains service contracts & Data contracts).
2) service .cs (this is a class file & contains an implementation of the interface file)
3) service.svc ( this is WCF service file) First 2 files i.e., I service.cs & service.cs are placed in a separate folder “app_code” Double click on app-code folder change I service.cs file name ot “I arithematic.cs” Change the service.svc filename to “clsarithematic.svc” Double click on I arithmetic.cs file change the interface name to I Arithmetic Delete the code available in interface Delete the code from data contract attribute to remaining
Write the following code in the interface,
[service contract] Public interface I Arithmetic
{
[operationcontract] Int add (int x, int y): [operation contract] Int subtract (int x, int y);
[operationcontract] Int multiply (int x, int y);
[operationcontract] Int divide (int x, int y);
}
Go to solution explorer à Double click on cls Arithmetic file in app-code folder à change the class ham ot cls arithmetic which inherits from I Arithmetic interface à Delete the total code available in the class & write the following code, Public class cls Arithmetic: I arithmetic
Interested in mastering VB.Net Training? Enroll now for a FREE demo on "VB.Net Training"
{
Public int add (int x, inty) } Return x to y: }
Public int subtract (intx, inty) { return x-y; }
Public int multiply (intx, inty) { return x*y; }
Public int divide (int x, int y) { return x/y; }
}
Go to solution explorer double click on web.config fole Go to the tag<system.servicemodel> change the service name to clsarithematic & contract to I arithematic like,
<system.servicemodel>
<services>
<service name =”cls arithematic” ……………….>
<end point address – “” binding = “Wshttpbinding” contract = “ I Arithematic”>
Goto solution explorer double click on cls Arithmetic .svc change the name service to cls arithmetic & code behind file name also from service.cs to cls arithmetic.cs build the application & run the application.
Consuming the WCF service:-
Create a new website with the name “ check Example 1” Design the webpage Go to solution exploreràselect the solution click with a right mouse button click on “Add service reference “ Type http://local host /example1/arithematic.svc” in dropdown list box (this is the address we get in the address bar of internet explorer we run WCF service ) change the namespace name “ service reference 1” to “SR1” click on ok write the following code,
45:Tfb9,
Working With Windows Based Desktop Applications
Creating WPF applications
↓
Go to visual studio.net
↓
Click on file
↓
Click on new
↓
Select visual CH from project types
↓
Select WPF application template
↓
Type WPF application name
↓
Choose the location to save
↓
Click on ok The container in the WPF application is known as window The container names we get as window1, window2, window3, ---etc by default. Every window will have a default extension of.XAML.XAML file will contain the design part of the window also we find an additional file with the extension of .xaml.cs which will contain completely a programming code. This is similar to webpage design Complete class library of WPF is available “System windows namespace” Window we create within the WPF application a class and window1, window2, window3, etc are inherited form window class by default
Interested in mastering VB.Net Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on "VB.Net Training"
Methods with the window class
Show ()
Hide()
Activate()
Close
Hide():-
This method is used to hide the displayed window from the user.
Show():-
This method is used to display the window object to the class
Activate():-
This method is used to make any window as active
Close():
This method is used to close. The open window when a window is closed, the object it's associated with is destroyed and if we want to reuse that window, we have to recreate that object In general any control we create within the window will maintain hierarchy like.
46:T183c,
Difference between View engine & Razor view engine
View engine:-
A view engine is the part of the asp.net MVC Which is used to execute the code by programming any kind of rendering is required and delivering to the client. net MVC supports the following view engine
Webform view engine
Razor
Bellevue
Brail
Hasic (Support VB .net only)
N Django
N Haml
N Velocity view engine (MVC Contrib)
Sharptiles
Spark view engine
String template. View Engine MVC
WingBeats
XSLT view engine
Razor view Engine:-
Razor view engine is not a programming language and it will work with C# and VB.net languages. Razor is an asp.net programming syntax. used to create dynamic web pages. with the help of C# and VB. Net the first version of Razor is released Jan 2011 along with ASP.net MVC 3 version.
We can Razor syntax using ‘@’symbol instead on <% = %> class.
This @ symbol technical name is ‘verbatim’
Design Goals Razor:-
Compact, Expressive, fluid:-
That takes less memory as compares with the webform view engine. We can see more output by writing less of code then also Any asp.net programmer can learn the razor syntax with team effort. It is not a separate language rather it will work with C# and VB
Work with Any Text Editor:-
Has great Intelligence:-
When working with visual studio .net or visual web matrix we get all the features
Interested in mastering ASP.Net Training? Enroll now for a FREE demo on "ASP.Net Training"
Step 1: Client sends a request for the application to IIS
Step 2: IIS will redirect the request to the global.asax file Hear route table collection will be created by adding all the routes.
Step 3: Perform Routing --> hear URL routing module will check for the requested route in route table collections. If a route is not available in the route collection table error message will be sent to the client. If the requested route is available create a route object and then also create a request object.
Step 4: Create an MVC request handler:-
Hear MVC route handler class will take the route from route object and create an object for the MVC handler class bypassing the request context object. Hear request context object originally responsible to pass the request from ASP.net to MVC.
Step 5: Create a controller:-
Hear MVC handler class identifies the controller that is to be executed with the help of request context object by using the route object. It creates an object to the controller class.
Step 6:Execute controller:-
Hear execute method of the controller class will be called to start the execution of controllers.
Learn ASP.Net by Tekslate - Fastest growing sector in the industry. Explore Online "ASP.Net Training" and course is aligned with industry needs & developed by industry veterans.Tekslate will turn you into ASP.Net Expert.
Step 7: Invoke action:-
At this step MVC “run time will identify which action method should be called for execution and will invoke that method.”
Step 8: Execute result:-
Hear code in action method will be executed by using data from the model class Controller will be returned to view
Step 9: Execute view:-
In this step, the complete view code will execute by using the model class data if necessary.
Step 10:
The executed result sends to client Once the result is delivered to the client the execution result is completely destroyed at the server The types of result that an MVC application can handle take
In general, this is inherited from the view page class to create a normal page within MVC, we use this view
In general, to create this view we use the view page template, i.e., MVC to view page template in MVC application.
The inherited class name will be available in <%@ page directive with inherits attributes.
To create a view page that contains a master page we use a template known as “MVC2 view content page”.
Master page view:
This is used to create a master page within the MVC application.
To create a master page view we use a template known as “MVC2 view master page.”
This is going to inherit a clan i.e., “system.web.MVC.view master page” it is possible to create the master page dynamically in MVC just like in ASP.net
The master page view will have a default extension of. master
Learn ASP.Net by Tekslate - Fastest growing sector in the industry. Explore Online "ASP.Net Training" and course is aligned with industry needs & developed by industry veterans. Tekslate will turn you into ASP.Net Expert.
Partial views:
Partial views are similar to the user controller in ASP.net
This will have a default extension of. ascx similar to ASP.net user controller
This is inherited from the class “system.web.mvc.view user control”.
In general, this can be included in any other view page just like in ASP.net user controllers.
In general 23 design patterns are developed by GOF (gang of four) which are developed into 3 categories GOF (Erich gamma, Richard helm,-,-)
Creational design patterns (5)
Structural design patterns (7)
Behavioral design patterns (11)
Creational design patterns
Abstract factory
Builder
Factory method
Prototype
Singleton
Interested in mastering ASP.Net Training? Enroll now for a FREE demo on "ASP.Net Training"
Structural design patterns
Adapter
Bridge
Composite
Decorator
Façade
Flyweight
Proxy
Behavioral design patterns:-
Chain of responsibility
Command
Interpreter
Iterate
Mediator
Memento
Observer
State
Strategy
Template method
Visitor
Creational design patterns: - will deal with the instantiation of the classes.
Structural design patterns: - will deals with inheritance, creating classes, interface implementing abstraction, etc.
Behavioral design patterns: - will deals with the communication of the object, i.e. where to create objects for the classes and how to consume the classes, etc.
4a:T60a2,
Windows Forms Application:
It is used for developing an application for the desktops with an effective User Interface.
Note:
“Whenever a class inherits “System.Windows.Forms.Form” class then it is said to be a windows form.
To Create Windows Forms Application:
Understanding
VS.Net IDE for Win form Development. To Box (Ctrl+Alt+X): It maintains all the controls that can be used within the Win form.
Properties Window (F4):
It is used to set or get value from the private or protected members of the class.
Solution Explorer (Alt+Ctrl+L):
It maintains all the files that are used within the application.
Form:
It acts like a canvas where other controls can be drawn on it.
Label Control:
It is used to provide any static information on the Form.
Common Properties for all Windows Form Controls:
Name: Used to specify a unique identifier for the control. Text: It is used to set or get the value from the control.
Text Box:
It is used to accept the single Line, Multi-Line, or password characters as the input.
Properties:
Multiline:
If set to true then the user can provide input in multiple lines.
Scroll Bars: I
t is used to attach the scroll Bars to the control.
Password Char:
It is used to display the specified char on the text box instead of the value typed by the user
Button Control:
It is used to raise the action.
TrackBall Control:
It is used to allow the user for selecting a value within a range.
Save File Dialog Control:
It is used to project the dialog Window for saving the file within the system.
Open File Dialog Control:
It is used to project the dialog window for selecting the file which is present within the system.
Note:
The above two controls are used only to project dialog windows but they will not save the file or either open the file.
Common Properties of above two Controls:
Filter: Using to specify the filter expression to be used for displaying the files within the dialog window.
File Name:
Used to return the name of the file selected within the dialog window.
Common Methods for the above two Controls:
Show Dialog (): It is used to project the dialog window.
C: program filescsMicrosoft visual studio common7 VS2008 image library 1033
For Button2 For Button3
Text: Record Text: Close
Name: btn Record Name: btnClose
Text Align: Bottom Center Text Align: Bottom Center
Image: - - - Image: - - -
Image Align: Top center Image Align: Top center
In order to support speech API .Net uses System.Speech Name Space
Click on the project [menu]
Add Reference ()
.Net (Tab) ()
Select system speech
OK
Code for Read button
Before write Namespaces
Imports System.Speech
Imports System Speech.Synthesis à provides classes to convert text to voice.
Code for Read button
Read (button_Click)
Dim SS as New speech Synthesizer à Provides methods to convert text to voice.
SS.Rate = tbSpeed.Value
SS.Volume = tbVolume.Value
SS.SelectVoice (“Microsoft SAM”)
SS.SpeakAsync (txtMessage.Text)
Code
Record (button_Click)
Dim sfd as new SaveFileDialog
Sfd.Filter = “WaveFile*.wav
Sfd.ShowDialog ()
Dim ss as new speechSynthesizer
ss.Rate = tb.Speed.Value
ss.Value = tb.Volume.Value
ss.SetOutput To WaveFile (sfd.FileName)
ss.Speak (txtMessage.Text)
ss.SetOutputTodefaultAudioDevice ()
MessageBox.Show (“Text recorded as voice”, VB270 “Text2Voice Convertor”)
Code for close
Close (button_Click)
End
ForForm Properties
Backcolor = __[--] (select)
Text = VB270 Text2voice Convertor
Icon: Select any good icon (.ico)
Start Position: Centre Screen [For the application to appear whenever executed]
Maximize: False (user can’t maximize form)
Execute
Web Browser Control:
It is used to provide the browsing capabilities to the Windows Form.
GroupBox Control:
It is used to logically group the controls together.
Designing our own Browser:
File menu new Project windows form application OK
Name: Vb270Webbrowser
Drag and drop group Box on the form according to our request set the properties as Dock: left, Text: options
Drag & drop another group box and set the property Dock: Top
In the remaining space on the form, we want to develop a browser.
Drag & drop web browser control on remaining space .
In 1st Groupbox (options)
Select (drag & drop) button
Button Properties:
Text: Back
Name: btnBack
Text align: bottom center
Image: select an image (ß) (path is in the above program)
Image align: Top center
Put several buttons one under the other in options Groupbox
Forward
Refresh
Home
Text: Forward
Text: Refresh
--- home
Text align: Bottom center
Text align: Bottom center
Text align: Bottomcenter
Name: btnforward
Name: btnRefresh
Name: btnhome
Image: __ ()
Image: --- ( )
Select on image
Image Align: Top center
Image Align: Top center
Image Align: Top center
Read Close
Read Close
---- ----
Btn read btn close
---- (--) ---- (--)
---- (--) ---- (--)
For send Group box text = Address URL
Take Textbox under the text, place a button after this text box button properties
Properties: Name: txtURL
Name: btnGo, Image = select -> __
Text: Go Image Align: Middle Text
// Code for Go button
‘Go (button_Click)
Try
Dim URL as String
URL = txtURL.Text
Dim protocol as string
Protocol = Mid (URL, 1, 4)
If protocol Upper = “HTTP”
Then
txtURL.Text = “http: //” & URL
End if
Web Browser1.URL = New URL (txtURL.Text)
Catch ex as Exception
MessageBox.Show (ex.message, Me.Text)
End Try
We may have a user enters a valid or invalid URL so depending on this we use to try that thing and if exception occurs we catch this so we use Exception handling.
In website find b4 www http: //to use this we have protocol. We have to read URL from middle of string for this we have mid The user may enter URL in upper case lower case or both so we must try to convert into upper or lower The user may enter http or not so we need to concatenate http with URL http: //& URL Code for Back button ‘Back (button_Click) webBrowser.GoBack (); For Forward button_click Webbrowser.Goforward () For Refresh WebBrowser1.Refresh () For Home WebBrowser1.GoHome () Click on project [menu] à add reference à Under .Net tab select System.Speech (OK) Click on Read button for code Write on top of public class Form1 Imports System.Speech Imports System.SpeechSynthesis Code for Read (button_Click) Dim ss as new Speech Synthesizer Try ss.Rate = 2 ss.Volume = 100 Dim msg as string Msg = webBrowser1.Document.Body.OuterText (Text on in our site which is to be speaked out) ss.SpeakAsync (msg) Catch ex as Exception ss.SpeakAsync (ex.Message) MessageBox.Show (ex.Message, Me.Text) End try Code for close button End Execute and check For form properties Text: vb270 WebBrowser with voice support Icon: select a browser symbol WindowState: Maximized. Creating a basic setup project (if you want to give your s/w for others but not code) Open soln.Explorer Above oca application we find solution Rclick on solution and select add new project We find (+) other project type Under this visual studio installer Select (1click) on this And select setup project on middle of form. Name vb270 Webbrowser with voice support Click on OK We get a form like (+) Application Folder (+) Users Desktop (+) User’s program menu Rclick on application and click add à add à project output click on others Once we click on project out click OK Again Rclick on application à add à file à (select an icon which we selected for our application) Select Users Desktop And Right click on Blank Frame | [Rclick] And click on Create New shortcut Then window will be opened Click on application folder Select “Primary output from vb270 Webbrowser Click OK Open properties of “Primary output from vb270 webbrowser” Name: vb270 Webbrowser with voice support Description: Icon: Select Icon file what we have added to our program Select Users program menu and Rclick and Add Folder Name: vb270 batch application Users program menu à vb270 batch applications Select vb270 batch application and Rclick on blank frame and select create new shortcut and follow indtructions performed at users desktop. (|userprgrmàvb270|Rclick|) After wards we find in menu bar Debug select this mode for deployment. [There will be debug and release mode. Debug shows of there are errors do you want to debug to open VS IDE but in release mode it says if errors are there errors and do you want to terminate application.] [If our project is under construction we select debug] [If our project is completed we select release] Click on Build menu & Build solution Go 2 solutions Explorer Rclick on our application (vb270 Webbrowser with support) and click on build. Save it as your wish
Timer Control:
It is used to execute a set of instructions repeatedly for every specific interval of time.
Property:
Interval: Specify the duration in milliseconds to halt the timer control execution.
Enabled: It is used to enable or disable the execution of the timer control.
Events:
Tick: Executes the code present within the Event handler for every elapsed time provided at the interval of timer control. Ex: Take WIN FORM application.
Below the form drag & drop timer control that area is called as Component tab. Label1 Id = lbttime Button1 Id = lb1start watch, text = Start watch Button2 Id = lb1start watch, text = Stop watch Timer1 Interval = 1000 Enable = False (code written in timer would not be execute) Double click on Timer Control
Code for Timer
‘Timer1_tick Lb1Time.Text = Now ToLongTimeString
Code for start button1 (start watch)
‘Start Watch Timer1.Enabled = true
Code for stop watch (stop button)
‘Stop Watch Timer1.Enabled = false Execute
Image list: It is used to maintain a collection of images which can be used by any control that has a capability to project the image. Draw some images in order to make animation
Picture Box: It is used to project an image.
Property:Image URL: Specify the URL of the image to be displayed.
Size mode: Specify the mode of image to be displayed.
Ex: Picture Box1: Mode = stretched Button 1: Id = btn start Id = btn pause btn continue btn close Text = start = pause continue close Drag & drop timer control, image list control below form For Timer1 Enabled = false Interval = 500 Click on Image List Task (|<|) Image size: 255, 255 Image list Depth: Depth 32 bit Choose Images à click on this Add and select all images created by us for animation.
code: Above Timer code in class Form2 ‘Form declarations Dim index as Integer = 0
Code in Timer: ‘Timer_tick If Index > ImageList1.Images.Count – 1 Then index = 0 pictureBox1.image = ImageList1.Images (index) Index t = 1
It is a collection of members without any definitions.
Syntax:
Interface <interface Name>
“Member(s) without definition
- - - - - -
End interface
The members of the interface are by default “public” and hence the members present within the interface should not be defined using any modifier.
Note:
To use the members of the interface, it is mandatory to implement the interface using the class.
Syntax to define a class for implementing an interface(s):
Class <class Name> implements interface Name(s)
Member(s)
- - - - - - -
End interface
Note:
A single class can implement any number of interfaces.
The class which implements an interface has to provide the complete definition for the members present within the interface else an object can’t be created for the class.
Inclined to build a profession as VB.Net Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore VB.Net Training
Syntax to define interface member:
Modifier sub-method name ([arginfo]) implements
InterfaceName.memberName
Statement(s)
- - - - - - - -
End sub
Note:
It is not mandatory to have the same name for interface member and method which provides implementation at the class.
A single method can provide the implementation for any number of interface members.
(Multiple Inheritances is possible in JAVA & in JAVA JNH & implementation is same)
But VB.Net people think JNH & implements are different
JNH à Means taking the members & property of the parent
Ex: Parents property to the child if 3 Assets
JMP à Means giving the def for members
Ex: Parents loan clearing by a child.
‘‘Demo on Interface
Imports system
Module Interface ‘‘Demo1
Interface I Father
Sub My Property ( )
End Interface
Interface I Mother
Sub My Property ( )
End Interface
Class Child
Implements I Father, I Mother
Public sub-My Property ( )
Implements I Father.My Property, I Mother.My Property ( )
Console.WriteLine (“Use property for business and charity”)
End sub
End Class
Sub main ( )
Dim C as Child
C.My Property ( )
End sub
End Module
‘‘Demo on Interface
Imports system
Module Interface ‘‘Demo2
Interface I Father
Sub My Property ( )
End Interface
Interface I Mother
Sub My Property ( )
End Interface
Class Child
Implements I Father, I Mother
Public sub-Father Property ( )
Implements I Father.My Property
Console.WriteLine (“Use property for business”)
End sub
Public sub-Mother Property ( )
Implements I Mother.My Property
Console.WriteLine (“Use property for charity”)
End sub
End Class
Sub main (
Dim C as New Child
C.Father Property ( )
C.Mother Property ( )
End sub
End Module
Must Inherit Class:
It is a class with a collection of members without any definitions.
Syntax:
Must Inherit class <class Name>
Member(s)
- - - - - - -
End class
Note:
Objects can’t be defined for Must Inherit class To use the members of the Must inherit class it must be inherited by the other class and derived class should define members not defined within the must inherit class
Dim C as New abstract class () gives error ‘.’ We can’t create an object for must inherit a class
‘‘Demo on MustInherit Class
Imports system
Module MustInherit Class ‘‘Demo
MustInherit Class Abstract Class
Public sub Method Defined ()
Console.WriteLine (“Method Defined at Abstract Class”)
End sub
Public MustOverride sub
Method Undefined ()
End Class
Class Derived Class
Inherits Abstract Class
Public Overrides sub
Method Undefined ()
Console.WriteLine (“Method Defined at Abstract Class”)
End sub
End Class
Sub main ( )
Dim ac as New Abstract Class //error
Dim dc as new Derived Class
dc.MethodDefined ( )
dc.MethodUnDefined ( )
End sub
End Module
Not Inheritable Class:
It is used to define a class as the last class in the hierarchy of inheritance. i.e.; NotInheritable class can’t be inherited further.
Note:
A NotInheritable class can inherit other class and can implement any no. of inheritances and objects can also be defined for the class.
Suppose an institute approached you to develop software. Let us see that many institutes will approach you to develop a website for them. You need not develop a specific project for every single rather than to develop a single project & edit.
In the above design, we take an institute class and it contains courses offered since we know a variety of courses and address is varied 1m to other institutes.
The client is peers discount by default is R.S of if joining by the group may be discount consists.
Event handling in .NET:
Event:
These are the actions that are allowed on control or an object.
For Ex: Click, Mouse Move, etc.
Event handling:
These are the methods that provide the functionality or the task to be executed whenever an event has been raised on a control. VB.Net supports two types of Event handlers
Static Event handlers
Dynamic Event handlers
Using console application for projecting a windows form
To use Windows Form, the “System.Windows.Forms.Form” class should be used.
Open console application
If we Write Imports System.Windows.Form //gives error
So go to project [menu] à add a reference
In add reference menu select .NET & select System.Windows.Forms & press OK
Hence error is removed automatically
‘‘Demo on using a console application to project win form
Imports System.Windows.Forms
Module Winform’’ Demo
Class FClass
Inherits Form
End Class
Sub main ()
Dim fc as New FClass
fc.Text = “VB 270 WinForm ‘‘Demo”
fc.showDialog ()
End sub
End Module
Execute then we get a WinForm
Inclined to build a profession as VB.Net Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore VB.Net Training
Static Event handlers:
Whenever an event handler is defined for the objects or controls created at the design time then it is said to be a Static Event Handler.
Note:
To bind a static Event Handler for, a control or an object then it is mandatory to create the objects using the “WithEvents” modifier.
Syntax to define a Static Event Handler:
Private sub ControlName_EventName (By Val sender as Object, By Val e as xEveneArgs) handles ControlName.EventName
Statement(s)
- - - - - - -
End sub
Take a New Module
‘Demo on Static Event handling . . . .
Imports System.Windows.Forms
Module Static Event Handling Demo
Class FClass
Inherits Form
WithEvents t as New TextBox
Sub new ()
t.Multitime = true
t.ScrollBars = ScrollBars.Vertical
t.Dock = DockStyle.Fill
Me.Text = “StaticEventHandlingdemo”
Me.Controls.Add(t)
End sub
Private sub t.Keypress (By Val sender As Object, By Val e as KeyPressEventArgs)
Handles t.KeyPress
e.Handled = True ‘Nullify the KeyPress (Don’t take p/p of user)
t.Text$ = “East or West .Net is best
So eat.Net, Drink.Net, sleep.Net, .Net simply rockzzzz”
End sub
End class
Sub main ()
Dim fc as New FClass
fc.ShowDialog ()
End sub
End Module
Dynamic Event Handlers:
Whenever an Event Handlers are being defined for the controls that are created at the runtime then it is said to be Dynamic Event Handling.
Syntax to add a Dynamic Event Handler:
AddHandler, ControlName.EventName, Address of Method Name
Note:
Any modifiers can be used for defining the objects.
Dynamic Event Handlers can be removed at run time but Static Event Handlers can’t be removed.
To remove a Dynamic Event Handler
Syntax:
RemoveHandler, ControlName.EventName, Address of MethodName
Take a New Module
‘Demo on Dynamic Event handling . . . .
Imports System.Windows.Forms
Module DynamicEventHandler
Class FClass
Inherits Form
Sub new ()
Dim f/p as new FlowLayoutPanel
For I as Integer = 1 to 5
Dim b as New button
b.Text = i
AddHandler b.click, address of b_click
fip.Controls.Add(b)
Next
Me.Text = “DynamicEventHandlingDemo”
Me.Control.Add (fip)
End sub
Private sub b_click (By Val sender as Object, By Val e as EventArgs)
Dim b as a new button
B = (Type (sender, Button)
MessageBox.Show (“You have clicked” & b.Text, Me.Text)
End sub
End class
Sub main ()
Dim fc as New FClass
fc.ShowDialog ()
End sub
End Module
Execute
Observation
This is nothing but the object from which the event is raised.
Ex: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
The sender must object so we must convert
We use C Type
C Type (Sender, Button)
It must be assign to b which means
Sender in the event handler maintains the object which has raised the event.
Whenever the definition of the base class is modified at the derived class then it is said to be method overriding.
If you want to change the definition then you must use the keyword “Overrides” Overrides change the definition of the base class.
Note:
In order to modify the definition of the base class at the derived class then the method should be prefixed with the “Overrides” keyword.
Note:
If any method is defined using the “Overrides” keyword at the derived class then the method should be prefixed with the “Overridable” keyword at the base class.
Note:
If any method is prefixed with the “Overridable” keyword at the base class then it is not mandatory to redefine the definitions at the derived class.
‘‘Demo on Method Overriding
Imports system
Module Method Overriding ‘‘Demo
Class Parents
Public Overridable sub-MyProperty ( )
Console.WriteLine (“Use property for business”)
End sub
End class
Class Children overrides sub-MyProperty ( )
MyBase.My property ( ) invokes the base class my property method
Console.WriteLine (“Use the property for charity”)
End sub
End class
Sub main ( )
Dim c as New Children
C.MyProperty ( )
End sub
End Module
Inclined to build a profession as VB.Net Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore VB.Net Training
Shadowing:
It is used to maintain two definitions at the derived class such that one definition can be shadowed in order to project the other definition i.e., the definition of the base class can be shadowed in order to project the new definition provided at the derived class and vice versa is also applicable.
Observation:
In order to shadow the definition at the derived class shadows keyword should be used.
If an object is created for the derived class then the definition provided at the derived class will be projected.
In order to retrieve the definition of the base class using the derived class object.
To Do:
Define a variable for the base class
Create an instance for the derived class and assign to the base class variable invoke the members using the base class variable.
‘‘Demo on Shadowing
Imports system
Module Shadowing ‘‘Demo
Class Parents Public sub-MyProperty ( )
Console.WriteLine (“Use the property for business”)
Within the AJAX control Toolkit, most of the controls are extender controls. Extender controls are the controls that extend the functionality of existing controls of Asp.net & these controls are not separate independent controls. The extender controls available in AJAX Toolkit are as follows.
AJAX file upload is also used to upload files to the server. The advantage of this over Asyncfileuploader & file upload of control of ASP.net is you can select multiple files at a time with an Ajaxfileupload and displays the progress of uploading a file by clicking on the AJAX file upload you can select multiple files by holding control (ctrl) or shift key. You can also select multiple files by simply dragging & dropping the files onto the AJAX – file upload control.
Properties
Allowed file type:
Used to specify a list of allowed file types by separating them with (;) semicolon.
MaximumNumberoffiles:
Used to specify the Maximum Number of files user can upload using the Ajaxfileupload
Style:
This property is used to specify the style for the control using CSS properties.
Method
SaveAs ():Used to save the file selected in Ajaxfileupload to the server.
Within the browsers like the Internet, explorer chromes that support HTML5 & CSS 3 this control can automatically display the progress of uploading a file with a progress bar when it takes time to upload.
It is used to define a user-defined reference type datatype member.
Syntax:
Class Class Name
Members
. . . . .
End class
Note: Members of the class is of two types
Instance members
Shared members
Instance members:
These members are bound to the objects defined for the class and they can be accessed using the object name.
Inclined to build a profession as VB.Net Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore VB.Net Training
Shared members:
These members belong to the class definition and they can be accessed using the class name. Shared members will be loaded on the memory when the class definition is headed.
Object:
The instance of a class is called an object.
Note:
Objects occupy the physical memory
Objects are always isolated i.e. the values assigned for the members of one object will not be reflected for the members of other objects.
Syntax:
Modifier object name as new Class Name ([. . .])
Variable:
These are the place holders for maintaining a value based on the data type used for defining the variable.
Syntax:
Modifier variable name as Datatype [=value]
Modifier:
These are the access specifiers that are used to control the access of the members.
Note: All the above modifiers can be used within a module and class. But these modifiers can’t be used from the methods.
VB.Net is a programming language developed by Microsoft in the 90s. It is a data-driven, object-oriented programming language that can be used to develop different types of applications such as windows applications, web applications and web services.
Types of applications that can be developed using VB.Net:
Console applications
Windows forms applications
Class library
Windows control library
Windows services
Net website
Net web services
WCF services
Silver light applications
Workflow applications
Console applications:
Whenever an application accepts the input from console and projects the output on the console then such type of applications are called console applications. Where console is a device which has the capability to accept the information and also to display the data
Structure of VB.Net console application:
1st method [default]:
Comments . . . . .
Imports statements . . . .
Module Module name
Sub main ( )
Statement(s) to execute . . . .
End sub
End module
2nd method:
Comments
Imports statements . . . .
Class Class name
[Public] shared sub main ( )
Statement(s) . . . . .
End sub
End class
Note:VB.Net is not the case-sensitive language but it is line sensitive language.
System: It is the root namespace for any .Net application Where a namespace can be considered as a collection of classes in a hierarchy such that the class definitions can be accessed easily
Console: It is a class that provides members to project the data and to accept the data.
Write: It is a method to project data on console.
Write Line: It is a method used to project data by appending a newline character at the end of information.
Read: It is used to accept angle character.
Read Line:It is used to read a single line of information i.e. accept the characters until the users press the enter key.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of VB.Net? Enroll in Instructor-Led live VB.Net Training to become Job Ready!
Developing a console application using VS.Net (visual studio .Net):
Prg:
My first VB .Net program
Imports system
Module first program
Sub main ( )
Console.WriteLine (“Welcome to VB.Net”)
End sub
End module
To execute console application
After selection press ctrl + F5
To add a new program to the console application [already existing]
Imports system
Class VB Intro
Public shared sub main ( )
Console.WriteLine (“VB.Net is very easy to learn yet a powerful language”)
It is a unified programming model for developing service-oriented solutions for the Windows platform.
WPF [Windows Presentation Foundation]:
It is a new framework for developing rich interface applications with the support of animations, media elements such as Audio-Video and data services, etc.
Inclined to build a profession as VB.Net Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore VB.Net Training
Observation:
WPF 3.0 supports only 2D
WPF 3.5 has been enhanced with 3D and rich UI support.
WPF 4.0 has been enhanced with touch support
WF (Windows Workflow Foundation):
It is a set of activities that are used to coordinate the people and services.
CS (Card space):
It is a new Framework provided to build high end secured applications using windows cards.
LINQ (Language Integrated Query):
It is a new Framework introduced in .Net 3.5 for queering the data present within the collection database or XML.
Note: LINQ can also be used for data manipulations.
VB.Net 4.0 or VB10:
It is a language with all the greatest features of all the latest languages such as C++, VB, Java, etc, and also the language consists of features that are needed for next-generation application development.
The basic steps that we need to do in order to debug our Web Part are:
Set the breakpoints
Attach the ASP.Net w3wp.exe process
Debug
There are two scenarios for debugging your Web Part. The first scenario would have you debug them on your local machine while the second scenario would have you develop your SharePoint Web Part on your local machine but the host and debug the Web Part on a remote machine where SharePoint exists.
Debugging On Your Local Machine
Step 1: Set the breakpoints
I assume your Web Part project is already open via Visual Studio.Net
Check if the Web Part's project output path is set to your Local Drive's InetPubwwwrootbin folder
Confirm that your Web Part is already present in the SafeControls list (We talked about this earlier. Check the "Register the Web Part" section.)
Add your breakpoint as you would with any .Net application using Visual Studio.Net Okay, that was easy. We put breakpoints all over our Web Part to debug whatever we want. The next task would require us to Attach the ASP.Net worker process.
Step 2: Attaching the ASP.Net worker process (w3wp.exe)
In the Visual Studio.Net Debug menu, click the "Processes" option, and choose the w3wp.exe from the Debug Process dialog box. Ensure that the "Show system processes" checkbox and "Show processes in all sessions" checkbox are enabled.
Select w3wp.exe from the "Available Processes" list and click the "Attach" Button
A dialog box will pop up listing program types that you wish to debug. Choose "Common Language Runtime" and click the OK button and close the dialog box. Great! That's it. Now you're all ready to go and debug unleashed! Now we're reached the stage where debugging your SharePoint Web Part is similar to debugging any ASP.Net web application.
Step 3: Finally, Debugging!
Open the SharePoint site and navigate to the page that contains your Web Part. Once this page starts rendering, the control will switch over to your program in Visual Studio.Net wherever you have placed your breakpoints. That's it. Piece'a cake. But what about remote debugging?
Interested in mastering SharePoint Training? Enroll now for a FREE demo on "SharePoint Training"
Debugging From A Remote Machine
Let's go again. Developers can use a remote computer to develop and debug SharePoint Web Parts also. We have a server (remote machine) and a client machine. I assume your Web part project is open in Visual Studio.Net on the client machine and waiting for us to play around.
1. Ensure that the remote server has been installed with remote debugging services configured correctly. Verify that you have given shared access to the virtual directory containing the SharePoint application (LocalDrive: InetPubwwwroot whatever) with read-write permissions.
2. Share and give read access to the folder that contains Microsoft.SharePoint.dll. This would usually be in the Program FilesCommon FilesMicrosoft SharedWeb server extensions60ISAPI
3. Make sure that the SharePoint Web Part is included in the SafeControls list on the remote server also.
4. Ensure that the project's output path is set to the folder that contains the dll file on the remote machine.
5. Add your breakpoints and attach the ASP.Net worker process by navigating yourself to the remote server.
Attaching the ASP.Net worker process follows the same steps we discussed earlier in "Attaching the ASP.Net worker process (w3wp.exe)" Neat. Now load your remote SharePoint site and navigate yourself to the page that contains your Web Part. The control should pass over to Visual Studio.Net breakpoints spread across your Web Part project while rendering. Give it another shot should get you used to it like the back of your hand.
Tips 1. A Common Error:
There's a good chance that you could get an error message "Unable to replace” after compiling the Web Part. This tends to happen when the ASP.Net worker process w3wp.exe locks an older copy of the assembly from the bin folder. In case you come across this error, remember to open the task manager and terminate the w3wp.exe process. Once terminated, you can recompile your Web Part Project and use the assembly.
2. The CallStack Attribute:
All of us, as developers hate it when our programs give error messages that are not descriptive and therefore, totally unhelpful. Well, guess what, by default SharePoint tells you that you got an error but by default, it does not tell you any specific reason as to why an error occurred in the first place. Actually, SharePoint displays only a restricted set of exceptions on the client machine due to security reasons. Fortunately for us developers, there's a way to overcome this security restriction. SharePoint disables the CallStack attribute present in the web.config file which is responsible for allowing the client to display exceptions with stack information in the standard ASP.Net error format. Here's how you get it done right: In your web.config file, look for elements. Within this element, look for At this point, set the CallStack Attribute to true: Further, check that the customErrors element is disabled Now you'll get the required exception details that you normally would with any ASP.Net web application.
3. Tracing
We can further use ASP.Net tracing mechanisms to provide us with additional information on our Web Part. Once again, this feature is not available to use by default and therefore, we would have to open up our Web Part's web.config file and search for the element and add one more new child element within this element: < trace enabled ="true" pageOutput = "true"/> Neat. Now we've got all the right techniques to get our Web Parts debugged right with the help of a .Net development environment, ASP.Net, and SharePoint. So hope you guys have a great time with SharePoint. Anything interesting? buzz me! Happy Programming Y'all! Most of you probably already have figured this out, but for those of you who still have not, here is how you can debug your web part in Visual Studio 2010:
Deploy your Web Part
Add the Web Part to Page
In your code, create a breakpoint.
Go to the “Debug” menu, and choose “Attach to Process”.
Under the “Attach to:” section, click on the “Select …” button.
Uncheck all options, checking ONLY “Managed (v2.0, v1.1, v1.0) code”.
Check the “Show processes in all sessions” checkbox.
Select all “w3wp.exe” Processes, then click on the “Attach” button.
Run your page that contains the Web Part. You should now hit your breakpoint and will be able to step through your code.
For an in-depth understanding of SharePoint click on
.NET Framework Supports collections of languages like VC#.net, VC++.net, VB.net……… .NET Framework is a common architecture for all .net programming languages. .NET - Network-enabled Technology. Visual C#. net………..visual C# with new features called as a net.
Main objectives of .NET Framework
Platform independent. Language independent. Supports language interoperability. Supports pure OOP's concepts
Oops - Object-Oriented Programming Supports for network programming with .net Remoting Supports to develop background processes with the help of windows services. Developing or support to develop RICH GUI applications with WPF programming LINQ Programming
DLL (Dynamic-link library) (Executable) files are Executable in any OS with the help of (CLR/Common language run time ), hence .net is called “platform-independent”
CLR software is platform dependent. It is a separate version of CLR is introduced for every OS. .net is not purely platform-independent. As of new CLR, Software is not yet developed for dos and windows operating systems.
Language-Independent
net application logic can be developed in any .net framework compatible languages, hence .net is called as “LANGUAGE INDEPENDENT”. As of now. net framework is supporting 11 languages + 1 specification. Visual C # . net
Visual Basic .net
Visual J #.net
Visual C++ .net
VB Script.net
J Script .net
PHP .net
Python .net
COBOL.net
PERL.net
Small Talk .Net
.net support one specification called “ASP.net” Specification provides a set of rules which need to be followed while integrating with a code-behind language.
What is a DLL file?
As per VB 6.0 or VC ++6.0 Windows OS
As per VB 6.0 or VC, ++6.0 DLL’s are called as COH Components. COM is used to develop reusable programs. Every COM Component must be registered for a class ID. Class ID represents a unique identifier, which is a part of the Registry. As Registry is under control of window OS, hence Com is “Platform-independent”.
As per.net As per .net, DLL’S Contain Platform independent code in the format of byte code. net DLL is also called as Managed code, Assembly or MSIL (Microsoft intermediate language ) The code written in .net is called as “managed code” If COM is used in .net then COM is called as “unmanaged code” .net framework is introduced as a development platform
C language
Main ()
{
Int I, * p;
P = &I;
}
As per memory management is under control of CLR with the help of a Garbage collector (GC), hence the .net framework is called as “Development platform”. .net framework is derived into the platform
Framework class library A collection of classes is called as “Namespace” A collection of Namespace is called as “Assembly” A collection of Assembly is called as “FCL” (Framework class library) FCL contains –6000 predefined class 6500 Methods 1,00,000 properties
Assembly Architecture
The internal organization of a DLL file is called “Assembly Architecture”. Assembly is derived into three layers Main fest Information holds the summary of the project. Type Info holds the data type information of the languages. MSIL holds the competed code in the format of the BYTE Code. How CLR EXECUTES an ASSEMBLY?
CLR will be loaded into the memory. CLR loads the Main fest to understand the summary CLR loads type Info to understand the behavior of the language. CLR generates CTS (common type system) of CLS (Common language specifications)
Software Requirements Windows OS (XP, 2000p, 2005, 2003s, vista) Visual studio .net 2008 professional Edition IIS Server Oracle / SQL Server MS – office
Visual C # .net 3.5 2008
A collection of programs is called as a “Software” Software is derived into two types
Packages LanguagesA software which is developed for a specific purpose is called as
“package”. Ex:- MS – office, oracle, SQL server, operating system. A software that is developed for a general-purpose is called a
“language”. Ex:- C, C ++, VC ++, Java, C #. Net, etc……… c- family Languages are derived into three types High-level language Assembly language Machine language A = 10 more 10 to Ax register flip flop gates High-level language are easier to learn as these are syntactically similar to English Assembly language are required while developing device driver programming Which provides communication between hardware and software Device drivers properties the communication than between the hardware and software
Visual C#.net basics
VC#.net language is architected by ANDREN HEZLSIBERG. VC#.net belongs to the 'C' family. All the rules of ‘C’ language are applicable to VC#.net also. C#.net is a high-level compiler-based programming language. .net is case sensitive. C#.net is a highly type-safe language. In C#, always Execution starts from main ().
Writing First Example in C # .NET
Open.net software (Start programs micro soft visual studio 2008 micro soft visual studio 2008) (or) (Start runDevenv) File menunew project
ObservationFor every project a new folder will be created. by default, this folder name will be the same as the project name.
Default folder structure D:/C194 FIRSTBINDEBUGS DLL, EXE files will be sorted here. Default folder structure (viewmenusolution explorer)
Open program. cs file and write the following inside of main () Namespace FIRST
{ Class program { Static void Main (Strings [] args) { Console . Write Line (“Welcome”); Console . Write Line (“Date Time. Now”); Console . Read line (); Execute the project (F5) Start Debugging
Observations
When the above project is executed then the first.exe file will be created under the D:/c194/first/bin/debug folder. If you want to compile an application, print a message. Console. Write Line (“Welcome”); Syntax is required.
Date Time. Now the returns system date and time. Console. Read line () reads a string from the keyboard.
5a:T2338,
Working with Razor syntax
First Install asp.net mvc3 software
Creating a new MVC application using the Razor view engine. Go to vstd.net
↓
Click on file
↓
Click on new
↓
Click on project
↓
Select asp.net.mvc 3 web application
↓
Type application name
↓
Click on ok Select the project template as internet application Select the view engine as Razor Click on ok When we create Razor application there do not we any deference Only deference is with in the view all view pages are created . CSHTML extension . where very view page will contain plain HTML code. So that Rendering will be much more minimized reduced. --.Razor syntax will take 3 techniques to write
Single line blocks
Multi line blocks
Inline Expressions
in general syntax of Razor is for single line blocks
Syntax:
@ {statement 1 ;} @ {statement 2 ;}
EX :- 1. @ {var a = 10;} @ {var b = 20.5} @ {var c = ‘satya’}
@ {var a = 10;}
@ {double b = 20.5} @ {String c = ‘satya’} We use the following syntax for multiple blocks
Syntax:
@ { statement 1 ;} statement 2; }
Ex :-
@ { var a = 10;
Var b = 20.5; Var c = ‘satya’ }
@ {var a = 10;}
@ {double b = 20.5} @ {String c = ‘satya’}
Example with Razor syntax:-
Go to solution explorer
↓
Select Home folder
↓
Click with RM button
↓
Click on Add
↓
Click on view
↓
Type the view name as (Sample)
↓
De active check box use view (or) Layout
↓
Click on add
↓
A new view page is created with the name sample. HTML
↓
Go to source
↓
Write the following code. On the top of page
@ { layout = null; } @ { Var a =10; Var b = “satya”; Var c = “20.5” }
<body>
<h2> satya technologies </h2>
<div>
<p> value of a a is :- @ a </p>
<p> value of a b is :- @ b </p>
<p> value of a c is :- @ c </p>
</div> </body>
Learn ASP.net by Tekslate - Fastest growing sector in the industry. Explore Online "ASP.net Training" and course is aligned with industry needs & developed by industry veterans. Tekslate will turn you into ASP.net Expert.
Go to the Home controller. cs create an action method name as the sample
Public action result sample ()
{
Return view ();
}
Go to global .aspx
↓
Change the action name as sample and check and run the application
--> Create a new view page (Sample)
↓
Write the following code for Razor syntax and design
@ { layout = null;
Int num 1, num2 , result = 0;
If (is post)
{
Num 1 = convert to int 32 (Request [“T1”]);
Num 2 = convert to int 32 (Request [“T2”]);
Result = num 1 + num2;
<form .action = “”Method = “post”>
Enter first number
<input type = ‘text’@ “T1”/> <Br>
Enter Second number
<input type = ‘text’@ “T2”/> <Br>
Result is : @ Result
<input type = ‘submit’ id = “B1” value = “Add”/>
</form>
In general anonymous types of declared with var keyword like
var a =10;
var b=20.5;
var c=” sai”;
What we use the data type in C# like int, string, double, etc. are known as “named types”.
Anonymous types are introduced in 2.0 versions of .net framework and C#.
Anonymous types cannot be used as Global variables.
Initialize the data into an anonymous type is mandatory.
Inclined to build a profession as ASP.net Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore ASP.net Training
Different between Anonymous and Named types
Named Type
Anonymous
Type is known at source time
Type is known at compile time
User/ programmer will decide the type of the variable
Compiler will decide the type of the variable
Use respective type keyword to create a variable with names type
Use var keyword to create a variable with an anonymous type
Can be used as a local /global variable
Can be used as a local variable only and can’t be used as a global variable data field of the class
Can be used in any context
Can be used in the following situations
As local variable
In for loop initialization
In for each loop initialization
In using statement
Initialization of variable is optional
Initialization of variable is mandatory
In the case of number, types can be used with increment/decrement unary operator
In case of number types cannot be used with increment/ decrement unary operator -> for a = a++ produces compile-time error
Multiple variables can be declared in same statement like object a=10,b= “sai” , c= 10.5
Multiple variables can’t be declared in the same statement as var a=10,b= “sai” raises compilation error
Can be used with unsafe code
Can’t be used with unsafe code
Doesn’t support complex types
Support complex types
Examples with Anonymous types:
Name space CA sample
{
Class sample
{
Static void main ()
{
Var a=”10”;
Var b=”sai”;
Var c=”10.5”;
c.w.l(“value of a :-“+a);
c.w.l(“value of b :-“+b);
c.w.l(“value of c :-“+c);
console.read();
}
}
}
Create an array and print elements using Anonymous type?
Name space CA sample
{
Class sample
{
Static void main ()
{
Int []A=new int [6]{10,20,30,40,50,60};
String []B=new string[3]{“sai”,”Ram”,”krishna”};
c.w.l(“elements of array A are:-”);
for each (var X in A)
c.write (X+” “);
c.wl (“/n element of array B are:-“);
for each (var X in B)
console write (X+” “);
console read ();
}
}
}
Name space CA sample
{
Class example3
{
Static void main ()
{
Var Pname =New {Sname=”Sachin”, Fname=”Ramesh”, Lname=”tendulker”};
Var DOB=new {Day=14, month=”April”, year=1973};
c.w.l(“person name is:-”+Pname.fname+Pname.Lname);
c.w.l(“DOB is:-”+DOB.month+”-”+DOB.year);
c.Read();
}
}
}
5c:T298b,
OSB Tutorial
Welcome to the free tutorials of OSB. The objective of these tutorials is to understand the Basics of Weblogic Application Server), Creating SOA Domain, Installing Jdeveloper, SOA Composite, and BPM Editor. In addition to OSB tutorials, we will cover OSB interview questions, HowTo,s, and issues of OSB.
OSB Introduction
Oracle Service Bus is a market-leading enterprise service bus built from the ground up for Service Oriented Architecture (SOA) life cycle management. It provides foundation capabilities for service discovery and intermediation, rapid service provisioning and deployment, and governance. This service-infrastructure software adheres to the SOA principles of building coarse-grained, loosely coupled, and standards-based services, creating a neutral container in which business functions may connect service consumers and back-end business services, regardless of the underlying infrastructure.
Oracle Service Bus Intermediary
The Oracle Service Bus design-time tooling lets you configure a proxy service to suit your needs and to manage Web services by controlling the service and policy configurations and by the monitoring system and operations tasks. Oracle Service Bus relies on Oracle WebLogic Server run-time features.
What is OSB how it is related to SOA?
The Oracle Service Bus (OSB) is part of the Oracle SOA Suite 11g and stands in the center of modern process- and integration-solutions. The lightweight, stateless, and high-performant architecture of the OSB turns it into an excellent tool for doing transformation and routing of messages.
Interested in mastering OSB Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on OSB Training.
What are the OSB boards?
Oriented strand board(OSB), also known as the sterling board, sterling OSB, aspenite, and smartly in British English, is an engineered wood particle board formed by adding adhesives and then compressing layers of wood strands (flakes) in specific orientations. OSB is a material with favorable mechanical properties that make it particularly suitable for load-bearing applications in construction. The most common uses are as sheathing in walls, flooring, and roof decking. For exterior wall applications, panels are available with a radiant-barrier layer pre-laminated to one side; this eases installation and increases the energy performance of the building envelope. OSB also sees some use in furniture production.
Installation of OSB
Navigate to the OSB Software folder and click on set up
Give the JDK path and press the enter button.
Click on the Next button
Inclined to build a profession as OSB Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore OSB Training
Select the skip software updates radio button and click on the Next button.
Select Oracle Middleware Home Location and click on the Next button.
Click on the Next button.
Click on the Next button.
Click on the Next button.
Click on the install button.
Installation in progress.
Click on the Next button.
Click on the Finish button.
Proxy and Business Services
The service bus uses a proxy service as an endpoint for incoming requests. A transport layer abstracts the proxy from the transport protocol. So, the functionality of the proxy service is independent of the incoming transport protocol:
Transformations, validation, etc. happen within the proxy service. After the transport layer, the message passes through a binding layer, which transforms the message into a canonical, logical representation. The message parts, such as payload or header, will be accessible via variables such as $body or $header. The outgoing endpoint in Oracle Service Bus is called business service. The naming is unfortunately somewhat misleading since the business service is not actually the service implementation itself: the business service is just a piece of configuration within Oracle Service Bus (but separate from a proxy service), which defines the interface and location of the service implementation.
Abstraction is a concept of providing full information about an entity (data binding)
Polymorphism is the concept of writing more than one function with the same and different arguments.
Inheritance is a concept of deriving the features from base to derived class
OBS:
To work with OOPS concepts, classes, and objects are required.
Classes are a logical representation
An object is a physical representation
As per.net, A class is a collection of
Fields: private data of classes is called a field.
Properties: it defines the look and feel of an object
Methods: when an object can do is called a method
Events: what a user can do with an object is called an “event”
The instance of classes is called as an object
Instance means copy
Syntax to write a class:
Class C1 Name
{
Private int x,y;
Private String s;
Public void print ();
{
Return type
}
Private and public are assessed specifiers
which provides the scope of risibility
Syntax to create an object:-
Logical Diagram on class and object:-
Test obj = new Test()
Object can access only public data.
Object can not access private data
EX 1:
on Classes and objects:-
Note:-
Classes must be declared in GD only.
Open windows form Application project
Place a button
Code in GD (Before button 1 click)
Classes Test
{
Private int x, y ;
// fields (or)
Reference types
Public void Read (int a, int b)
//a and b are value types,
local variables.
{
x =a;
y =b;
}
Public void print ()
{
Int K = x +y ;
Message Box >show (“The sum is ” + K);
}
//print
}
//test Code for Button 1
click
{
Test t1 = new Test () T1.Read (10,20);
T1.Print (10,20);
T1.Print ();
// output is ‘30’
Test t2 = new Test ();
T2.print ();
// output is ‘0’
Test t3 = new Test ();
T3.print ();
//error
Test t3 = t1;
T3.print ();
//output is ‘30’
}
Execute the project
OBS:-
Fields of a class are also called Instance variables.
In C#.net by default, every class will be inherited from System. object class
System. object class contains four methods
Get Hash code ()
Get Type ()
Equals ()
To string ()
In C# .net every class contains a minimum of 4 methods.
5e:T21d0,
Enumerators (enum)
enum is a keyword enum is a collection of integral Constant's, which will be Identified with string constants. enum is a user-defined data type.
Syntax to write enum
Enum enum _name
{
String value = Integer value,
String value = Integer value,
String value = Integer value,
}
enum must be declared in general declaration (Go) area only.
Interested in mastering .NET? Learn more about ".NET Training" in this blog post.
C language
Int k = 10;
global variable Main () { Int I = 10;
local variable }syntax of form1 code window Using system Using system.data Namespace ABC
project name } } }
Note For every project by default a name space will be created with the name of the project. Using is a keyword which is used to import the namespace (collection of classes )
Example 1 on Enum
Open windows form application project
Place a button
Code for GD (general declaration)
Code for button 1
click {
Int I, j, k;
I = (int) GTB. Sa;
j = (int) GTB. Ja;
k = (int) GTB. Ca;
Message Box. Show (I + “” + j + “” + k);
}
Execute the project
Observations
When enum member is not initialized then it will be initialized automatically with the incremented value of the previous member.
In case the previous member is not existing then initialization starts from “ZERO”
Example:-
A program for developing the animated label.
To develop this application buttons, labels, and timer controls are required.
About Label
Generally, a label is used to display some text along with an image [optional]. Label control supports nine types of alignments.
To manage all these alignments, Microsoft introduced a predefined e num called as content alignment.
About Timer Control
The timer control is used to execute a set of statements continuously provided a property called Enabled must be true. Enabled = true (false)
Timer tick event will be executed after the equal interval which needs to be specified in milliseconds (1000 ms = 1 sec)
Open windows forms application project Place a button
properties F4
text = start
Place one more button
properties
text = start Place a label control
properties text = fish land text Align = middle center Auto size = false Image = select an image Place a timer contro
l
Code in GD (Before Button 1 click)
Int I = 0; Int [] x = new int []
{
(int) content Alignment ,
Top center, (int) content Alignment . Middle Right,
(int) content Alignment. Bottom center,
(int) content Alignment. Middle left
};
Code for Timer 1
tick (double click on timer)
{ I = I +1; If (I = =4) I =0;
Label 1. Image Align = (Content Alignment) X [i];
}
Code for Button 1_ click (Start)
{
Timer 1 .enabled = true;
}
Code for button 2_click (stop)
{
Timer1.enabled = false;
}
5f:T1857,
Conditional Statements
Syntax of if condition :
Syntax 1
If (condition)
Statement 1 ;
Else Statement 2;
Syntax 2
If (condition)
{
Statement 1 ;
Statement 2;
}
Else
{
Statement 3;
Statement 4;
}
Nested If:-
If (condition)
Statement 1 ;
Else If (condition)
Statement 1 ;
Else If (condition)
Statement 1 ;
Else
.
Else Statement;
These core tutorials will help you to learn the fundamentals of .NET. For an in-depth understanding and practical experience, explore Online ".NET Training"
Examples of if statement
A program to compare two numbers (I and j), if I is greater change from back color to green otherwise REO.
Open windows form application project
Place two text boxes and a button
Click on button 1
Code for button 1
Int I = int. parse (text Box 1. text);
Int j =int. parse (text Box2.text);
If (i> j)
This. Back color = color. Green;
Else
This. Back color = color. Red;
Execute the project
Observations
What is this key?
this is a keyword
this works like an object for the current class
this will be created at run time.
this is under the control of CLR.
Working with Switch condition Switch syntax
Switch (variable)
{
Case 1: Statements;
Break;
Case 2: Statements;
Break;
. Default Statements;
Break;
}
Example of a Switch condition
Open windows form application project Place a text box and a button Code for button 1 click
{
Int I = int. parse (text box 1. text);
Switch (i) { …. }
//switched close here
Switch (i)
{
Case 1: This. back color = color. Green ;
Break;
Case 2 : Color dialog c = new dialog ();
Creating an object
show dialog ();
this. Back color = c. color;
break;
case 3: Application . Exit ();
Break;
Default : Message box . show (“enter 1,2, or 3 only”);
Break;
}
// switch closed here Execute the project
Observations
Syntax to create an object Class name (space) obj _name = new class name ();
EX:-
Color dialog is a predefined class
Application is a class which contains Exit () method
Purpose of exit () is to terminate the project
60:T1c1f,
Parsing in C# .Net
In C # .net all the data types are predefined structure.
char c; Char is a structure and c is a structure variable.
The structure contains a collection of methods.
The structure will be stored in stack memory.
As per the above statements, every data type contains a collection of pre-defined methods.
These core tutorials will help you to learn the fundamentals of .NET. For an in-depth understanding and practical experience, explore Online ".NET Training"
Example:- A program to point data type limits open window forms application project
(File new projectvisual C # window forms application)
Observations: - A window will be opened, which is called as a form
Open Tool Box (view menu Tool Box)
Place a button on the form
Code for button click event Private void button1_ click
{
Message Box. Show ( Int. Max value . To String ());
Message Box. Show ( Int. Min value . To String ());
}
Output
2147483647 -2147483648 Execute the project Write line () is used to display a message in Console Application. Message Box. Show () is used to display a message in the windows form application
Example on Parsing
Open window forms application project Place two text boxes and a button Code for button 1 click
Note
The value typed in text box 1 as called as text box1 .text Button1
Click here
Message box. Show (text box 1. Text + text box 2. Text);
Int Sal = int. parse (text box 1. Text);
Int inc = int. parse (text box 2. Text);
Int total = sal + inc;
Message Box. Show (total . to string ());
(or)
Message Box. Show (total + “”);
Execute the project
Observations
In C #, message Box. Show () is capable to point only string
‘+’ operator is used to add numbers and to concatenate string.
10 + 20 = 30
“10” + “20” = 1020 “
10” + 20 = 1020
61:T2323,
Type Casting in C# .Net
Typecasting is a concept of converting from one data type into another data type. C# supports two types of typecasting
a) Implicit type casting under control of CLR Lower to higher
b) Explicit type casting under the control of programmer higher to lower
Observations
Byte to long implicit
Int to byte Explicit
Int to float implicit
Float to int explicit
C # supports 4 types of Explicit type casting technique
C ++ style of typecasting Converting Boxing and unboxing Parsing
These core tutorials will help you to learn the fundamentals of .NET. For an in-depth understanding and practical experience, explore Online ".NET Training"
Working with C++ style of typecasting
Ex:-
int I = 10;
Byte b = (byte) I;
Syntax
DT1 V1 = value;
DT2 V2 = (DT2) V1;
Example of C++ Style of typecasting
Open console application project
Write the following code in the main method
Int I = 150;
Byte Sal = (byte) I;
Console. Write Line (Sal);
Console. Read Line ();
Execute the project (f5) à 150
Observations
In the C++ style of typecasting, there is a possibility of loading the data.
Convert
Convert is a predefined class, which is the part of F
Working with convert class is called as “Converting”
The class contains a set of methods.
Predefined methods on convert class
String x = 123
Byte b = convert. To Byte (X);
Convert. To Byte (value)
Convert. To char (value)
Convert. To string (value)
Convert. To Boolean (value)
Convert. To Float (value)
* * * *
Convert. To INT 16()…………….. for short
Convert. To INT 32()…………….. for int
Convert. To INT 46()…………….. for long
Example of converting
Open Console application project
Write the following code in the main method
Class Program
{
Static void main (string [] args)
{
For (int I = 0;I < = 255; I ++)
{
Char c = Convert. To char (i);
Console. write (c);
}
Console . Read line ();
}
}
F5
Working with Boxing and Un-Boxing
Boxing is a concept of converting value type in to reference types.
UnBoxing is a concept of converting reference type in to value types.
Note: Console application is specially designed for a character-based operating system like DOS
As of now, CLR software is not yet introduced for DOS OS, hence console Applications are not Executable in DOS OS.
Console Application contains only LOGIC. but not GUI
In order to develop GUI, Applications Microsoft introduced the “Windows forms application” template.
MVC pattern was invented by ‘try give Reenskang’, in the year 1978. MVC pattern was first implemented as a part of the small talk-80 class library. The MVC has proven a very successful pattern today in building web-based applications. Examples of web application framework the follows MVC patterns are ASP.net MVC, Ruby on Rails, Merb, diango. In java struct, springs wicket, JSF.
These core tutorials will help you to learn the fundamentals of .NET. For an in-depth understanding and practical experience, explore Online ".NET Training"
63:T4870,
Welcome to Ruby on rails Tutorials. Ruby on Rails is an extremely productive web application framework written in Ruby by David Heinemeier Hansson. This tutorial gives you a complete understanding of Ruby on Rails.
In addition to Ruby on rails tutorials, we will cover common interview questions and issues of Ruby on Rails.
Introduction
Ruby is a programming language. It was created 20 years ago by Yukihiro “Matz” Matsumoto. By most measures of programming language popularity, Ruby ranks among the top ten, though usually as tenth (or so) in popularity, and largely due to the popularity of Rails. Like Java or the C language, Ruby is a general-purpose programming language, though it is best known for its use in web programming.
Ruby is the successful combination of Smalltalk conceptual elegance, Python's ease of use and learning, and Perl's pragmatism.
Ruby is a high-level programming language which Interpreted like Perl, Python, Tcl/TK, and Object-oriented like Smalltalk, Eiffel, Ada, Java.
Rails:
Rails is a software library that extends the Ruby programming language. David Heinemeier Hansson is its creator. He gave it the name “Ruby on Rails,” though it is often just called “Rails.” Rails Strengths is packed with features that make you more productive, with many of the following features building on one other.
An extremely productive web-application framework
Written in Ruby by David Heinemeier Hansson.
You could develop a web application at least ten times faster with Rails than you could with a typical Java framework.
An open-source Ruby framework for developing database-backed web applications.
Configure your code with Database Schema.
No compilation phase required
Inclined to build a profession as Ruby on Rails Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore Ruby on RailsTraining
Sample Ruby Code
Here is a sample Ruby code to print "Hello Ruby"
# The Hello ClassclassHellodef initialize( name )@name= name.capitalize
enddef salute
puts "Hello #{@name}!"endend# Create a new object
h =Hello.new("Ruby")# Output "Hello Ruby!"
h.salute
Output − This will produce the following result
Hello Ruby!
Embedded Ruby
ERB (Embedded RuBy) is a feature of Ruby that enables you to conveniently generate any kind of text, in any quantity, from templates. The templates themselves combine plain text with Ruby code for variable substitution and flow control, which makes them easy to write and maintain.
Although ERB is most commonly seen generating Web pages, it is also used to produce XML documents, RSS feeds, source code, and other forms of a structured text file. It can be extremely valuable when you need to create files that include many repetitions of a standard pattern, such as unit test suites.
The main component of ERB is a library that you can call within your Ruby applications and Rake tasks. This library accepts any string as a template and imposes no limitations on the source of the template. You may define a template entirely within your code, or store it in an external location and load it as required. This means that you can keep templates in files, SQL databases, or any other kind of storage that you want to use.
Here's an example. Save the code in webdemo.rb file. Note that a Ruby file will have an extension .rb −
<% page_title ="Demonstration of ERB" %>
<% salutation ="Dear programmer," %>
<html><head><title><%= page_title %></title></head><body><p><%= salutation %></p><p>This is an example of how ERB fills out a template.</p></body></html>
Now, run the program using the command-line utility erb
tp> erb erb demo.rb
This will produce the following result −
<html><head><title>Demonstration of ERb</title></head><body><p>Dear programmer,</p><p>This is an example of how ERb fills out a template.</p></body></html>
Workflow for Creating Rails Applications
A recommended workflow for creating Rails Application is as follows −
Use the rails command to create the basic skeleton of the application.
Create a database on the PostgreSQL server to hold your data.
Configure the application to know where your database is located and the login credentials for it.
Create Rails Active Records (Models), because they are the business objects you'll be working within your controllers.
Generate Migrations that simplify the creating and maintaining of database tables and columns.
Write Controller Code to put a life in your application.
Create Views to present your data through the User Interface.
Rails Installation
Installing Ruby on Rails
Step 1: Check Ruby Version
First, check if you already have Ruby installed. Open the command prompt and type ruby -v. If Ruby responds, and if it shows a version number at or above 2.2.2, then type gem --version. If you don't get an error, skip the Install Ruby step. Otherwise, we'll install a fresh Ruby.
Step 2: Install Ruby
If Ruby is not installed, then download an installation package from rubyinstaller.org. Follow the download link, and run the resulting installer. This is an exe file rubyinstaller-2.2.2.x.exe and will be installed in a single click. It's a very small package, and you'll get RubyGems as well along with this package. Please check the Release Notes for more detail.
Install Rails− With Rubygems loaded, you can install all of the Rails and its dependencies using the following command through the command line.
C:> gem install rails
Note − The above command may take some time to install all dependencies. Make sure you are connected to the internet while installing gems dependencies
Step 4: Check Rails Version
Use the following command to check the rails version.
C:> rails -v
Output
Rails 4.2.4
Configuring Rails Applications
First, we define a default value for all environments in config/application.rb:
moduleConfigurator
classApplication < Rails::Application
# By default, let OSX resolve the path to the binary
config.wkhtmltopdf = "wkhtmltopdf"
end
end
Then we override the default setting as necessary in config/environments/:
Configurator::Application.configure do
# Settings specified here will take precedence over those in config/application.rb
# Point Heroku explicitly to the binary we need to use
Just use Rails environment support and config to store your own configuration elements. They’re trivial to set, trivial to access, and require no third-party gems or custom text files.
Advantages of Ruby on Rails
High Speed of Development:For example, site development that would traditionally take about 2-3 months can commonly be launched much quicker with Ruby on Rails. This time savings results from a few factors: a leaner code-base (fewer lines of redundant code) and a modular design (re-using existing components rather than building everything from scratch). As such, after launching the site, modifications can be made more quickly as well.
Cost-Effectiveness:As Rails sites can be built and modified quickly, this is a really cost-effective way to create and maintain the website — without compromising the quality, performance, or scalability of your site.
Flexibility: There are lots of gems (already built components of specific functionality available); re-using them rather than building everything from scratch provides a lot of different bricks to build the application and extend its functionality. A variety of plugins are available to solve just about any functional challenge you may need for your project. Additionally, Rails is an ideal way to build custom database solutions at a fraction of the usual time and expense.
Flexibility:There are lots of gems (already built components of specific functionality available); re-using them rather than building everything from scratch provides a lot of different bricks to build the application and extend its functionality. A variety of plugins are available to solve just about any functional challenge you may need for your project. Additionally, Rails is an ideal way to build custom database solutions at a fraction of the usual time and expense.
High code quality:The Ruby language and Ruby on Rails framework are under active development and support. New features, ideas are introduced quite often. Security updates and fixes are released regularly. A large body of books, blog entries, and experiences are also shared online to learn from.
Industry support: There are professional hosting support companies, (Heroku, EngineYard). experienced consulting companies, two primary cloud-based offerings, and help with development and deployment, and more. Both provide an easy-to-scale, managed hosting environment. Both are built on Amazon EC2 and offer contrasting approaches and features that will appeal to different audiences.
64:T19a0,
Qlik Sense Interview Questions With Answers
Q1) Explain briefly approximately Qlik sense?
Ans:
Self-provider records visualization utility that empowers you to look and discover vast amounts of facts to find out insights of the employer. It uses analytics and Discovery of facts. With Qlik experience, a company can create elastic, interactive visualizations and make significant decisions.
It is rapid and easy
Redefines the way you get right of entry to, create and proportion insight
Quicker time to perception all and sundry, whenever, everywhere on any tool.
Q2) Explain how does Qlik experience paintings?
Ans: By intelligently summarizing the enormous amount of complex records by using the use of graph sort of search feel where each Qlik right away updates information. It has rich visible records insights that help in guidelines-based security and governance.
Q3) How to connect Qlik Sense with R?
Ans:
This is the most simple way to use R with Qlik: Enlarging R is the idea behind this, and transfer to a respective folder that Qlik sense is gonna read and thus loads the data. Initially, you need to download and install R, later after choosing analysis, mention on the prescribed script, the place to store the results.
After this, to always run, you need to refresh your analysis, after creating a .exe file.
Thus code needs to be:” add the path to R Radd R VERSION(num.num)binR.exe”
CMD BATCH –labor –rahul “add the path to tekslatescripttekslatescript.R” “add path over heretekslatereporttekslatereport.txt”
Q4) A way to manage records inside the app with facts supervisor?
Ans: The facts supervisor is coping with and adding facts from numerous assets or from the data market of qlik that's visible in apps too. whether you brought them to add data or loaded the usage of scripts. each table is displayed using desk calls, statistics subjects, and supply.
Q5) The way to upload a new information table?
Ans: Either you can add a data table from the records manager or through numerous records assets
By connections: pick out from information connections which had been earlier described through the user or administrator and folders from in which it's miles selected.
Join my statistics: choose from a brand new facts source such as ODBC or OLE, connectors, internet documents, or information files.
Qlikdatamarket: pick from the general public or normalized industrial databases.
Attaching a file: add a report from pc or thru an app.
Inclined to build a profession as Qlik Sense Developer? Then here is the blog post on, explore Qlik Sense Training
Q6) What's Qlik feel Charts?
Ans: Qlik experience Charts is any other software program as a service (SaaS) providing by Qlik which allows Qlik to experience visualizations to be without problems shared on websites and social media. Charts have restricted interaction and permit users to explore and find out.
Q7) Is there any capability to create, edit, or increase apps in Qlik feel Cloud?
Ans: The ability to create and edit apps is to be had to all customers. users can add flat-file facts and connect to QlikDataMarket. customers can then create, edit, and increase apps they own. customers can't augment or edit apps create through different users.
Q8) Are records encrypted on Qlik feel Cloud?
Ans: Yes, the facts are encrypted on Qlik feel Cloud. also, the Credentials and statistics are encrypted ‘in-flight’ (the usage of SSL).
Q9) What are synthetic keys beneath logical tables?
Ans: When or extra fields in a facts table are in commonplace this permits the composite key dating. Qlik sense makes it by way of offering synthetic keys routinely. The keys are nameless keys that represent all occurring composite key of the aggregate. however, multiple synthetic keys are regularly related to incorrect facts version but now not always.
Q10) What is the DatatypesQlik sense?
Ans: Qlik experience has strings, dates, numbers, times and currencies most effective. They can be executed in exclusive methods for calculation functions. this indicates the above parameters which include the date, time can be delivered or subtracted from every other.
Q11) What may be performed in Qlik experience Cloud?
Ans:
Developing apps and sharing the apps the use of the cloud.
From this hub, we can view or invite customers to comply with the apps, reveal them. additionally, you may generate hyperlinks to percentage the content or visualization in the apps.
whilst logged in, the browser is divided into 3 elements, workspace area, tab panel, and toolbar.
65:T4bb8,
Configuring The Managed Meta Data
The Managed Metadata service application is a welcome addition to SharePoint 2010 and is one of my favorite Enterprise Content Management features within this release. In this three-part series, I plan to delve into the configuration of the Metadata Service Application and then finish off with real-life examples on utilizing our metadata throughout our SharePoint sites. So what is the Managed Metadata Service Application all about and what value does it bring over what we had in SharePoint 2007? The Managed Metadata’s primary purpose is to provide you with a central location to store metadata (commonly defined as data about data) that can be utilized throughout any site within your SharePoint farm. This is definitely one step ahead of what we referred to as Content Types and Site Columns in SharePoint 2007 where it was cumbersome to deploy to more than one site collection. The Managed Metadata Service Application requires Configuring the User Profile Service in SharePoint 2010 as this was a prerequisite for the User Profile Service Application.
Aspired to become a SharePoint? Explore the post to discover the know-how on the "SharePoint Training" course.
Primer on the Managed Metadata Service in SharePoint 2010
Managed Metadata and the word Taxonomy go hand in hand, and as mentioned previously, the Managed Metadata service application allows us to formalize our Taxonomy or metadata which will be utilized across the entire farm. There are a number of concepts that you will need to familiarize yourself with before we embark on the configuration.
Term Store This is the database in which our managed metadata is stored in.
Term is a word or a phrase that can be associated with an item in SharePoint Server 2010.
Term setis a collection of related terms. There are two types of Terms available within SharePoint 2010. These are “Managed Terms” and “Enterprise Keywords”.
“Managed terms, commonly referred to as “Taxonomy” are predefined words or phrases that can only be created by users with the appropriate permissions. We can refer to this special group of users as “Metadata Content Managers”.
“Enterprise keywords commonly referred to as “Folksonomy” are words or phrases that have been added by the end-user.
Now that we have a better understanding of some of the key concepts, let’s deep dive into our setup and configuration of the Managed Metadata Service Application.
Setup the Managed Metadata Service
To set up our Managed Metadata Service, navigate to Central Administration / Application Management / Manage Service Applications.
Click New and select “Managed Metadata Service”
Enter the follow details;
Name Managed Metadata Service Database Server: <server_name> Database Name: Managed Metadata DB I will utilize the sp_farm account for the Application Pool Identity.
Click Create. Lastly, navigate to Central Administration / System Settings / Manage services on the server and start the Managed Metadata Web Service.
Now that we have successfully set up our Managed Metadata Service, let’s venture into the Term Store Management Tool. You can do so by navigating to Central Administration / Manage Service Applications and clicking on the newly created Managed Metadata Service. Note, you can achieve the same by highlighting the service application and clicking on the Manage icon located in the ribbon. This will launch the below screen which is referred to as the Term Store Management Tool.
Let’s quickly highlight what is made available on this screen.
Available Service Applications: If the farm has been set up with multiple Managed Metadata service applications you can easily navigate and configure each one from the single interface.
Sample Import: Here, Microsoft is providing your designated Metadata Managers with a template import file. This template can be used as a base of creating your own which can then be later imported. Term Store Administrators: This is where you would add the designated users which will provide them with the ability to create new term set groups. By doing so, they will in turn be able to provide the necessary permissions to the group manager role. Note, users added here have full control of the specified term store. In the above screen capture, I have gone ahead and added Administrator and myself as Term Store Administrators.
Default Language: This one is self-explanatory
Working Languages: In addition to the Default Language, you can also specify additional languages available for translation purposes. That’s it for now. Stay tuned for my next article in which I will venture into creating Groups, Term Sets, and Terms and demonstrate how we can utilize our managed metadata within our SharePoint sites.
References Plan managed metadata (SharePoint Server 2010) http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ee530389.aspx Navigate to Central Administration / Application Management / Manage Service Applications. Highlight the Managed Metadata Service and click on Manage. This launches the Term Store Management Tool which we briefly introduced in
Part 1 of this series. Let’s begin by creating a new group. You can do so by clicking on the Management Metadata Service node (or whatever you called it) and selecting New Group.
In my example, I will create a group labeled “Office Locations”. I have entered a description to help others identify the purpose of this group and added the Group Managers and Contributors, so what’s difference between the two levels of permissions?
Group Managers have the privilege to add items to the group and also have the ability to add users to the Contributors group. Contributors have the privilege to only add and edit terms and set term hierarchies within the group. After adding the above details, click on Save. Our new Group will now be listed as per the below.
I will now create 2 Term Sets which will sit under “Office Locations”. They will be, “State” and “City”. You can do so by clicking on the Group Name and selecting New Term Set.
I will label my first Term Set as “State”. Here I will identify the owner of this Term set, optionally specify an email address for “term suggestion” and list the Stakeholders who are notified before major changes are made to the term set. We can also set the Submission Policy which dictates whether we allow users to contribute to the Term Set (commonly referred to folksonomy) or restrict it to only metadata managers (Taxonomy). Our last option determines whether we will allow our end-users to utilize the term set for tagging.
Once you have specified your options, click Save. I will now proceed to create a second Term Set labeled City as per the above instructions. Once finalized, our Term Sets will be listed under our Group as per the below screen capture.
I will now proceed to create our Terms below our Term Sets. I’ll begin by selecting the first Term Set “State” and then selecting Create Term.
I will create my first Term, “NSW” which is an Australian State. You will then be greeted with the below screen;
Here we can specify whether the Term is available for Tagging, add a Description to assist users and add “Other Labels” in which we can enter synonyms and abbreviations relating to the Term. This might come in handy when adding Terms and in my example, I have added “New South Wales” as an additional Label to the abbreviated “NSW” Term. Click Save once you have completed the modifications. I will proceed to create a Term for each State and City following the above steps and you should have something similar to the below once you have finished.
Note, we can expedite the creation of Term Sets by using the Import method
As an example, I have utilized the sample Import File provided by Microsoft and imported the contents within our Managed Metadata Service.
Now that we have a thorough understanding of the creation of Groups, Term Sets, and Terms we will continue our journey in the next and final part of this series where we will utilize our Metadata within our SharePoint Sites.
Adding Managed Metadata to a SharePoint List or Library
Let’s navigate to a List in which we would like to add our Managed Metadata as a column. Navigate to the List or Library in question and click on List under List Tools in the Ribbon and then click on Create Column.
Enter a name for your Column. In my example, I will call it State as I will be using the State Term Set which we created in earlier and select Managed Metadata as your column type. Set your “Display format” so it either displays just the term label or the entire path. Under Term Set Settings, select your Term Set. You can also utilize the search facility in the event you have a large number of Term Sets.
Finally select whether you want to Allow Fill-in, which is only available if your Term Set was set to allow it. This is handled by the Submission Policy set to Open, (discussed earlier).
Click OK once done. I will now proceed to add a new item in my fairly bland Custom List via Add new item.
You have the option to click on the browse button on the right or you can begin typing in which it will provide you with Suggestions. In the above screen capture I began typing in one of the “other labels” or commonly referred to as synonyms the end result will be the actual “Default Label” Term listed in the Taxonomy Term Store in Central Administration. E.G. I was typing in “New South Wales” and the default label in the Term Store was set to “NSW”.
One thing to note is the “Send Feedback” link, which is visible if you click on the browse button beside your metadata field. This allows users to provide feedback if an email address was specified under “Contact” in the properties of the Term via the Term Store Management Tool.
There are a couple of neat navigation enhancements made available out of the box in SharePoint 2010 which tightly integrates with our Metadata. Commonly referred to as Metadata Navigation, these options are listed under our List Settings. Navigate to List Settings / General Settings / Metadata navigation settings. Within this screen, we can specify which fields we want to utilize and incorporate in our Navigation Hierarchies and or Key Filters which are both displayed below the Quick Launch. Both allow for enhanced and easy drill-down when filtering your list. I have gone ahead and added our “State” Metadata field to both Navigation Hierarchies and Key Filters as examples.
Example of a Navigation Hierarchy.
Example of Key Filters.
66:T3e47,
Business Data Connectivity Service
New Create Database name BCSForSharePoint2010
Create a new table name: Customer with the following columns:
Enter new customer data
Open Visual Studio 2010 to create a new BCS
File | New Project | SharePoint | 2010 | Select Data Connectivity Business Model and name BCSCustomer
Select Site and click Finish to Debugging
Aspired to become a SharePoint? Explore the post to discover the know-how on the "SharePoint Training" course.
The interface creates the following new
Rename the Class Entity1 CustomerEntity
Rename the primary key of CustomerID from Identifier1
In the Properties window of the CustomerID, Name Type: select System.Int32
BDC Explorer window Expand Model | Expand BdcModel1 | Expand CustomerEntity | Expand ReadItem | Expand id and choose Identifier
Rename the primary key of CustomerID from Identifier1
-In the Properties window of the CustomerID, Name Type: select System.Int32
-Selected the following image
Expand Model | Expand BdcModel1 | Expand CustomerEntity | Expand ReadItem | Expand return parameter and select Entity1
-Change from the Customer Entity1
-In the customer select the CustomerID and choose Identifier1 Name Type: select System.Int32
-Renamed CustomerName, Type Name: System. String
-Click to Customer | Add Type Descriptor
-Named the City, the Type Name: System.String
-Expand Model | Expand BdcModel1 | Expand CustomerEntity | Expand ReadList | Expand return parameter and select Entity1List
-Expand Customer | Change Identifier1 the CustomerID
-In the Properties window of the CustomerID, Name Type: select System.Int32
-Select Message and renamed CustomerName, Type Name: System. String
-Click to Customer | Add Type Descriptor
-Named the City, the Type Name: System. String
Solution Explorer window | Select Class Entity1
Renamed Customer
Declare the following codepublic partial class Customer { / / TODO: Implement Additional properties here. / / The Message property is just a sample how a property could look like. public int CustomerID {get; set;} public string CustomerName {get; set;} public string City {get; set;} }
Method Details window BDC - CustomerEntity | collap ReadItem method, ReadList Click the Add method in the combo box and select the Create Delete Method Member
Interface as follows
• Double click on the file and found ReadItem method appears CustomerEntityService.cs • Using the following declaration code using System.Data; using System.Data.SqlClient; using System.Data.SqlTypes; • Declare the SqlConnection method returns the name GetSqlConnection GetSqlConnection static SqlConnection () { string ConnectionString = "server = (local) database = BCSForSharePoint2010; Integrated Security = true"; SqlConn SqlConnection = new SqlConnection (ConnectionString); sqlConn return; } • In the alternative method ReadItem error code with the following code: public static ReadItem Customer (int id) { Customer customer = new Customer (); SqlConn = GetSqlConnection SqlConnection (); sqlConn.Open (); SqlCommand SqlCommand = new SqlCommand (); sqlCommand.CommandText = "select CustomerID, CustomerName, City" + "From Customer" + "WHERE CustomerID =" + id.ToString (); sqlCommand.Connection = sqlConn; SqlDataReader SqlDataReader = sqlCommand.ExecuteReader(CommandBehavior. CloseConnection); if (sqlDataReader.Read ()) { customer.CustomerID = int. Parse (SqlDataReader [0]. ToString ()); customer.CustomerName = SqlDataReader [1]. ToString (); Customer.City = SqlDataReader [2]. ToString (); } else { customer.CustomerID = -1; customer.CustomerName = "Customer Not Found"; Customer.City = ""; } sqlConn.Dispose (); return customer; } • In the method declaration code ReadList / / / <summary> / / / This is a sample method for Entity1 finder. / / / If You Want to delete or rename the method to think about changing the xml file in the BDC model as well. / / / </ Summary> / / / <returns> IEnumerable of Entities </ returns> public static IEnumerable <Customer> ReadList () { SqlConnection SqlConnection = GetSqlConnection (); try { List <Customer> allCustomers = new List <Customer> (); sqlConnection.Open (); SqlCommand SqlCommand = new SqlCommand (); sqlCommand.Connection = SqlConnection; sqlCommand.CommandText = "select CustomerID, CustomerName, City from Customer"; SqlDataReader SqlDataReader = sqlCommand.ExecuteReader (CommandBehavior. CloseConnection); while (sqlDataReader.Read ()) { Customer customer = new Customer (); customer.CustomerID = int. Parse (SqlDataReader [0]. ToString ()); customer.CustomerName = SqlDataReader [1]. ToString (); Customer.City = SqlDataReader [2]. ToString (); allCustomers.Add (customer); } Customer [] = new Customer customerList [allCustomers.Count]; for (int customerCounter = 0; customerCounter <= allCustomers.Count - 1; customerCounter + +) { customerList [customerCounter] = allCustomers [customerCounter]; } return (customerList); } catch (Exception ex) { Tellme String = ex.Message; Customer [] customerlist = new Customer [0]; Customer customer = new Customer (); customer.CustomerID = -1; customer.CustomerName = "Unable to retrieve data"; Customer.City = ""; customerlist [0] = customer; return (customerlist); } finally { sqlConnection.Dispose (); } } • In the Delete method declaration code public static void Delete (int CustomerID) { SqlConnection SqlConnection = GetSqlConnection (); sqlConnection.Open (); SqlCommand SqlCommand = new SqlCommand (); sqlCommand.Connection = SqlConnection; sqlCommand.CommandText = "delete customer WHERE CustomerID =" + customerID.ToString (); sqlCommand.ExecuteNonQuery (); sqlConnection.Dispose (); } After completion code hi build and Deploy project
Open Central Administration | Application Management | Manage service selected applications You choose to Business Data Connectivity Service You check CustomerEntity BCSCustomer.BdcModel1 with namespace and select Icon Set Object Permissions Add your user rights for that user and select
Open the site with the port as was at first Debugging ( http://acer:8888 ) and select All Site Content Choose Create Data at the category | select External List | select Create BCSCustomer named below and select the icon to add External Content Type Choose BdcModel1 with External Content Type and select OK BCSCustomer.BdcModel1.CustomerEntity
For an in-depth understanding of SharePoint click on:
Records Center - A Place for Hierarchy, Driven By Metadata
The Records Center was introduced in 2007 as a SharePoint site that served as a conventional records archive. Content from all over the enterprise can be submitted to a Records Center and then routed to the appropriate place where it picks up the right permissions and policies, such as expiration and auditing. For SharePoint 2010, we know it's important to continue to invest here and add even more "traditional" archive features. When looking at the broad swath of features we had to choose from, our goals here really focused on providing features that allow you to extract the most value out of an archive and find the data you need. For instance, here are a few of the new features in a SharePoint 2010 Records Center:
Document ID: Every document can be assigned a unique identifier, which stays with the document even when it's archived. This allows records to be easily referenced by an ID no matter where the document moves
Multi-Stage Retention: Retention policies can have multiple stages, allowing you to specify the entire document lifecycle as one policy (e.g. review Contracts every year, and delete after 7 years)
Per-Item Audit Reports: You can generate a customized audit report about an individual record
Hierarchal File Plans: You can create deep, hierarchal folder structures and manage retention at each folder in the hierarchy (or inherit from parent folders)
File Plan Report: You can generate status reports showing the number of items in each stage of the file plan, along with a rollup of the retention policies on each node in the plan
Desired to gain proficiency on SharePoint? Explore the blog post on the "SharePoint Training" course to become a pro in SharePoint.
Here's the home page of the Records Center in SharePoint 2010 for a fictional government agency, the Joint Task Force.Notice that a home page is a place for records managers to educate the organization on compliance policy, as well as a place to look up a record by its document identifier. In addition to adding these traditional records management features to our archive, as product designers, we made a big bet on the power of metadata to dive 21st-century electronic records management. This manifests itself in several ways in the SharePoint archive:
Taxonomy and Centralized Content Types: The archive will be a consumer of enterprise-wide taxonomies and content types, ensuring consistency and context transfer between the collaborative spaces and the archive. We'll be talking a lot more about our 2010 taxonomy investments in future posts
Content Organizer: The records router can use metadata to route incoming documents to the right place in the hierarchical file plan. For instance, it enables you to automatically enforce rules on content that is submitted, like "If a Purchase Agreement is tagged with Project Alpha, send to the Alpha Contracts subfolder and apply that's folder retention policy to the item."
Virtual Folders: The file plan is a great way to manage a repository but often time isn't what you want to use to navigate and find the content you are looking for. The SharePoint 2010 Records Center makes use of a new feature called metadata-based navigation, which allows you to expose key metadata as virtual folders:
Notice that end users discover content in this Records Center by navigating virtual folders based upon metadata properties on the records. This bet on metadata is all about empowering the end-user, thus increasing the chance of successful adoption of the RM system. Instead of choosing a complicated node in a file plan, submitters just fill out a few pieces of useful metadata and they'll use that metadata when they need to find the content again.
In-Place Records Management - Injecting Records Management in the Content Creation Experience
With just about every customer engagement my team is involved in, we hear the same message again and again: records management doesn't start (or stop!) in the archive. Content isn't created there and it sure doesn't live there for the most interesting parts of its life. There has been made a huge effort in 2010 to enable you to do effective records management in collaborative spaces. Auditing, Retention, Expiration, Reporting, Records Workflows, eDiscovery, Legal Hold, and Recordation are all features you can use in collaborative space as you are striking a balance between SharePoint's value to end-users and the need for information governance. Holding all of this together is a new feature in SharePoint 2010 called In-Place Records Management. This allows certain SharePoint documents (or blogs, wikis, web pages, and list items) to be declared records. The system can prevent such records from being deleted or edited, if necessary by your organization's definition of what a record is:
Note that some of the documents have locks, implying to the user that they are dealing with records. When selecting a record, the UI for editing and deleting the item is disabled. This recordation process can be done either manually, as part of a larger process in a workflow, or as a scheduled part of a document's retention (e.g. after 2 years). The key here is that, when declared a record, the content doesn't move to an archive - it stays where it is so the end-users can still find and interact with the content. Once declared, the system knows about an item's record status, so you can do things such as create different retention policies for records or use record state when defining workflows in SharePoint Designer. We also enable a programmability model so you can perform custom processes and policies upon recordation to meet specialized compliance needs. Is In Place Records a replacement for a traditional archive? The answer is, of course, sometimes - we'll find some customers who want to use an in-place approach exclusively, some who will want the traditional hierarchy and centralization that an archive brings, and many who will want both. It'll be something we'll talk about a lot on this blog, and our documentation has already started discussing the pros and cons of both approaches. Scale: We're Talking Big with electronic information growing at a crazy pace and businesses spending billions on eDiscovery every year, records managers have enough to keep them up at night. The scale of their records/content management system shouldn't be another worry. As the records management engineering team, we take this burden very seriously and a large part of our effort this release has been spent adding features to make it easier to scale to massive archives. Features such as Remote Blob Storage, database query optimizations, internal timer job processing improvements, new database indexing strategies, and other engineering initiatives enable us to make a great leap forward this release and allow our customers to have:
Tens of millions of records in a single Records Center
Hundreds of millions of records in a distributed archive: We'll talk in more detail in future posts, but many of the features mentioned above light up to allow many Record Centers to bind together to act as one logical repository.
68:T228b,
Features and Event Receivers
Introduction
Features in Microsoft SharePoint Foundation reduce the complexity involved in making simple site customizations, and they are robust when upgrades are applied to a deployment. Features eliminate the need to copy large chunks of code to change simple functionality. Features thus reduce versioning and inconsistency issues that may arise among front-end web servers. Features make it easier to activate or deactivate functionality in the course of a deployment, and administrators can easily transform the template or definition of a site by simply toggling a particular Feature on or off in the user interface. Features provide the following capabilities:
Scoping semantics for determining where custom code runs
Pluggable behavior for installing or uninstalling Features within a deployment
Pluggable behavior for activating or deactivating Features at a given scope
A scoped property bag for storing data required by a Feature within its scope
The basis of a unified framework for the distributed deployment of SharePoint Foundation solutions
Ability to upgrade Feature versions
Desired to gain proficiency on SharePoint? Explore the blog post on the "SharePoint Training" course to become a pro in SharePoint.
Feature Implementation
Features are stored on the front-end web server in the %ProgramFiles%Common FilesMicrosoft Sharedweb server extensions14TEMPLATEFEATURES directory. The Feature subfolder includes a Feature.xml file that defines the base properties of the Feature and the elements bound to it, such as XML files containing element manifests and any other supporting files. A Feature folder can contain a Feature.xml file and any number of supporting element files.
Note
SharePoint Foundation supports only low-order ASCII characters, and no spaces, for Feature folder and file names.
Features can be installed and activated using the SharePoint Management Shell, through the object model, or through the stsadm tool. You can also activate a Feature through the user interface. Installing a Feature makes its definition and elements known throughout a server farm, and activating the Feature makes the feature available at a particular scope.
Feature Elements
The Feature element is used in a Feature.xml file to define a Feature and to specify the location of assemblies, files, dependencies, or properties that support the Feature. A Feature includes a Feature.xml file and any number of files describing individual elements. Items that were previously contained within a large site definition file have been broken out as separate elements within Features. An element is an atomic unit within a Feature. A Feature.xml file typically points to one or more XML files whose top-level Elements tag contains definitions for elements that support the Feature. There are several types of elements, such as an event handler, that can be included in a Feature. For specific information about the file format and XML elements used in the Feature.xml file, see Feature.xml Files.
Creating SharePoint Features
You can use a SharePoint Feature to group related SharePoint project items for easier deployment. You can create Features, set scopes, and mark other Features as dependencies by using the SharePoint Feature Designer. The designer also generates a manifest, an XML file that describes each Feature.
Adding Features to the SharePoint Solution
You can add a Feature to the SharePoint solution by using Solution Explorer or the Packaging Explorer. You can use one of the following methods to add a Feature.
In Solution Explorer, right-click Features and then click Add Feature.
In Packaging Explorer, right-click the package, and then click Add Feature.
Using the Feature Designer
A SharePoint solution can contain one or more SharePoint Features, which are grouped under the Feature node in Solution Explorer. Each Feature has its own
Feature Designer that you can use to customize the Feature properties. For more information, see How to: Customize a SharePoint Feature. To distinguish Features from one another, you can configure the Feature properties such as the title, description, version, and scope.
Feature Designer Options
After you create a Feature, you can use the Feature Designer to customize it. The following table describes the Feature properties that are displayed in the Feature Designer.
Property
Description
Title
Optional. The default title of the Feature is set to SolutionNameFeatureName.
Description
Optional. The description of the SharePoint Feature.
Scope
Required. If a Feature is created by using Solution Explorer, the scope is set to Web by default.OptionDescriptionFarmActivate a Feature for an entire server farm. SiteActivate a Feature for all Web sites in a site collection. WebActivate a Feature for a specific Web site. WebApplicationActivate a Feature for all Web sites in a Web application.
Items in the Solution
All SharePoint Items that can be added to the Feature.
Items in the Feature
The SharePoint project items that have been added to the Feature.
Adding and Removing SharePoint Project Items
You can select which SharePoint project items that you want to add a SharePoint Feature to for deployment. Use the Feature Designer to add and remove items to Features, and view the Feature manifest.
Adding Feature Dependencies
You can configure the Feature manifest so that the SharePoint server activates certain Features before your Feature is activated. For example, if your SharePoint Feature depends on other Features for functionality or data, the SharePoint server can first try to activate any of the Features that your feature depends on.
69:T160b,
Application Pages Vs Site Content Pages Vs Custom aspx Pages Senario2
Scenario: 2 Application pages are those that are stored in the WSS/MOSS file system, usually found in the SharePoint root (12 hives) ADMIN and LAYOUTS folders. A very simple way to extend the functionality of SharePoint is to create your own application page to enhance the administration of a web application, site collection, or site. In this example, we will create a simple page that writes out some information about the current web being administered. The first thing we will write is the page class; this will be used to provide the "code-behind" for the ASPX page that will be created later. 1. Open Visual Studio and create a new Class Library project, name this project AppPageExample 2. Rename the default Class1.cs file to AppPageCode.cs and allow it to rename the class (if this does not occur then change the actual class name manually) 3. Add references to Microsoft.SharePoint.dll and System.Web.dll to project 4. The SharePoint API exposes an inheritable class Microsoft.SharePoint.WebControls.LayoutsPageBase, this class includes common properties and methods that all standard application pages utilize. Change the AppPageExample class so that it inherits from the.
If you want to enrich your career and become a professional in SharePoint, then visit Tekslate - a global online training platform: "SharePoint Training" This course will help you to achieve excellence in this domain.
LayoutsPageBase
Class using Microsoft.SharePoint.WebControls; namespace AppPageExample { public class AppPageCode : LayoutsPageBase { } } 5. Next we will move onto creating the ASPX file that will inherit from our page class created above. Add a new item to your project and select Text File. Name the file "AppPageExample.aspx". 6. Insert the code below into the newly created ASPX
Note: If using a different stongly named key file then the PublicKeyToken must be changed to reflect your PublicKeyToken <%@ Assembly Name="AppPageExample, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=a191061ae245bc34" %> <%@ Page Language="C#" Inherits="AppPageExample.AppPageCode" MasterPageFile="~/_layouts/application.master" %> <%@ Register TagPrefix="SharePoint" Namespace="Microsoft.SharePoint.WebControls" Assembly="Microsoft.SharePoint, Version=12.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=71e9bce111e9429c" %> <asp:ContentID="Content1"ContentPlaceHolderID="PlaceHolderPageTitle"runat="server"> Application Page Example </asp:Content> <asp:ContentID="Content2"ContentPlaceHolderID="PlaceHolderPageTitleInTitleArea"runat="server"> Application Page Example </asp:Content> <asp:ContentID="Content4"ContentPlaceHolderID="PlaceHolderPageDescription"runat="server"> An example of how to create an application page </asp:Content> <asp:ContentID="Content3"ContentPlaceHolderID="PlaceHolderMain"runat="server"> <asp:LiteralID="_litOutput"runat="server"/> </asp:Content> The asp:Literal control sitting in the main placeholder will be where we render the information about the site being viewed. 7. Switch back to the AppPageExample.cs file and create a field that maps to the control in the ASPX using System.Web.UI.WebControls; using Microsoft.SharePoint.WebControls; namespace AppPageExample { publicclass AppPageCode : LayoutsPageBase { protected Literal _litOutput; } } 8. Override the page class' OnLoad method and enter the code below protected override void OnLoad(System.EventArgs e) { StringBuilder oSb = new StringBuilder(); oSb.AppendFormat("Title: {0}", Web.Title); oSb.Append("<br/>"); oSb.AppendFormat("Name: {0}", Web.Name); oSb.Append("<br/>"); oSb.AppendFormat("Url: {0}", Web.Url); oSb.Append("<br/>"); oSb.AppendFormat("Description: {0}", Web.Description); oSb.Append("<br/>"); oSb.AppendFormat("ID: {0}", Web.ID); oSb.Append("<br/>"); oSb.AppendFormat("Language: {0}", Web.Language); oSb.Append("<br/>"); oSb.AppendFormat("MasterUrl: {0}", Web.MasterUrl); oSb.Append("<br/>"); oSb.AppendFormat("ServerRelativeUrl: {0}", Web.ServerRelativeUrl); _litOutput.Text = oSb.ToString(); } 9. The last step is to compile the assembly, add it into the GAC and then copy the ASPX file into the LAYOUTS folder in the SharePoint root directory (12/TEMPLATE/LAYOUTS). Navigate to the page using any web application url you have e.g. http://your.site.url/_layouts/AppPageExample.aspx. You should be presented with something similar to this:
6a:T5b1e,
In this blog, we have compiled a comprehensive list of Liferay Interview Questions to help you prepare for your next Liferay interview. Whether you are a seasoned Liferay Developer, or administrator, or just beginning your journey with Liferay, these questions cover a wide range of topics and will provide you with valuable insights into the platform.
From fundamental concepts to more advanced topics, these interview questions are designed to test your understanding of Liferay's Architecture, features, customization capabilities, security, performance optimization, and more. By familiarizing yourself with these questions and their answers, you'll gain the confidence and knowledge necessary to excel in your Liferay interview.
So, let's dive into the world of Liferay and explore these insightful interview questions to help you land your dream job or take your career to the next level!
Ans: In general, a web portal represents a web application that provides a single point of access to a variety of information.
The functionality of a portal can be extended very easily by creating custom applications that can run inside a portal. These applications are called portlets.
For running portlets, you need an application server that can run a portlet container spec (JSR168 or JSR286). There are dozens of free and enterprise portal products available.
Liferay portal is an open-source portal and below are the benefits of using Liferay portal:
Content management system (Documents, Articles).
2-stage, 3-stage workflows, and publishing.
Social networking. 4) Sites and organization basis pages.
Integration with third parties like LDAP, Solr, SSO(CAS, Siteminder).
Portlets related to Wiki, News, Finance, Social, Workflow, and Collaboration.
Compatible with different Operating systems, databases and APP servers.
Compatible with UI technologies and web services.
Compatible with different scripts like PHP, Ruby, Grails, and Python.
Support of hot deployment feature.
Q2) What is a Portlet?
Ans: Liferay portal comes with different portlets by default. These portlets are nothing but different small applications running in the instance (portal). Portlets are pluggable software components that are managed in a web portal.
In general words, you can call them as different catalogs as portlets produce fragments of markup code that are aggregated into a portal. So a portal page is displayed as a collection of the portlet, these multiple small applications together making a page of the site and these all pages together makes one community or enterprise portal. Hence a portlet (or collection of portlets) resembles a web-based application that is hosted in a portal.
A portlet is a small application to fulfill the requirement of a certain domain. Inter portlet communication is supported under the Liferay portal. Portlet supports the hot deployment feature of Liferay Portal.
Q3) What is the Liferay portal and how it differs from other portals IBM WCM, Web logic?
Ans:
Liferay Portal is a platform contains common applications used to create a web application
Liferay provides a development framework with highly customization components for building a site.
Liferay Portal can be used for content management, be it web content management
Liferay Portal offers a rich collaborative application suite with:
Calendars
Blogs
Wikis
Workflow
User Management
Inclined to build a profession as Liferay Developer? Then here is the blog post on, exploring Liferay Training
Q8) What are the differences between Portlet and Servlet?
Ans: A Portlet container is built on top Servlet container.
Q9) What is the difference between a Liferay Hook and Liferay EXT?
Ans:
Hook:
The hook is a feature to catch hold of the properties and JSP files into an instance of the portal as if catching them with a hook. Hook plugins are more powerful plugins that come to complement portlets, themes, layout templates, and web modules. A hook plugin is always combined with a portlet plugin. For instance, the portlet social-portlet is a portlet plugin for Social Office with hooks. In general, hooks would be very helpful tools to customize the portal without touching the code part of the portal. In addition, you would use hooks to provide patches for the portal systems or social office products.
Source:
Liferay Portal 6 Enterprise Intranets
EXT:
EXT is used to customize and extend the Liferay portal. EXT builds a new ROOT web app and replaces it with a huge build mechanism on your existing Liferay portal.
The Liferay EXT Environment is where you would ideally make changes to the portal itself. In other words, this is where you customize or “extend” the portal. You may ask, “Why can’t we just make the changes to the portal source directly?” The answer is that you technically CAN, but if and when you have to upgrade, you will have a tough time sorting out what is out-of-the-box and what is customized. EXT Environment keeps things separate.
Q10) What is the difference between the view and edit modes of a portlet?
Ans: View mode is what has displayed a user logs in to the Liferay portal and various portlets are displayed to him.
Edit mode is the configuration options that are displayed when the edit button is clicked on the portlet.
Q11) What is service.xml and how will you use the Liferay service builder?
Ans: service.xml is a configuration file that consists of the details for database entities that are used in a portlet. The service builder uses the service.xml to generate the DAO/DTO classes for a portlet.
service.xml is also used by the Liferay server to create the database tables and columns for entities mentioned in service.xml.
Q12) Can I run my Struts 1.3-based legacy application as a portlet application? How?
Ans: Yes it is possible to convert the legacy application into a portlet by making the legacy application follow the requirements of a Liferay plugin and then deploying the same on the Liferay server.
Q13) Do you know how to update your setup of Liferay 5.2.3 to Liferay 6?
Ans: Liferay website itself lists the steps for upgrading from 5.2.3 to Liferay 6. One should be though aware of how to take database backup and how to patch Liferay in general.
Q14) What other portals have you heard of? How do you compare them to Liferay?
Ans: Other vendors have also rolled out portals which are reference implementations of JSR 286. The list includes:
Render(): It takes the HTML output to User Interface. It mainly renders the view in terms of JSP/HTML code and shows it into the respective portlet.
Destroy(): This method takes care of releasing the portlet resources.
Q16) What Is A Liferay Portal Instance?
Ans: Liferay portal ships with the one Liferay portal tomcat bundle which is up and running on any server with certain database settings. We can have more than one Liferay instance running from one database.
Liferay Portal allows you to run more than one portal instance on a single server. The Portal Instances page of the control panel lets you manage these instances. Data for each portal instance are kept separate. All portal data, however, is kept in the same database.
Each portal instance requires its own domain name. Liferay will direct users to the proper portal instance based on this domain name. So before you configure an instance, we need to configure its domain name in our network first. When we are ready to add an instance, click the Instances tab - > Add button.
It will be prompted for four fields and a checkbox:
Web ID: A general convention is to use the domain name for this. It’s a user-generated ID for the instance.
Virtual Host: Put the domain name you configured in your network here. When users are directed to your Liferay server via this domain name, Liferay will then be able to send them to the proper portal instance.
Mail Domain: Enter the domain name for the mail host for this instance. Liferay will use this to send email notifications from the portal.
Max Users: Enter the maximum number of user accounts you would like your portal instance to support.
Active: Use this checkbox to choose whether to create an active or an inactive portal instance.
Q17) How Can I Configure Two Different Domain Names (e.g. First.example.com And Second.example.com) On Liferay?
Ans: At the time of the creation of any site, we need to provide domain names that further take it as a site domain name. We need to provide a certain domain name as required through the control panel of the Liferay portal. A single instance of Liferay Portal supports the hosting of two or more domain names via communities(sites).
When we will go to the control panel -> Site settings -> we can provide the site URL, and details like the site(community) description, membership type, active status, and virtual host.
Q18) Which One Is Best To Start In A Clean Setup?
Ans: Liferay bundled with the Tomcat app server is the best one to start in a clean setup.
Q19) How Can You Customize Liferay Search Feature? What Are The APIs To Do It?
Ans: We can customize the Liferay Search feature, depending on our requirements in two ways.
Hook: If changes are required as per the view side like we need to change the search result from view then we can write the Hook to customize it.
EXT: If changes are required as per the core functionality like we need to change the search query term, we can implement EXT.
Q20) How To Setup A Liferay Cluster From Scratch?
Ans: We need to set up the below properties in our portal-ext.properties(this is for one instance represented by 1p, same properties we need to add for the second instance also represented by 2p) and some required IP addresses.
#cluster configurations - these settings are for cluster
net.sf.ehcache.configurationResourceName=/myehcache/hibernate-clustered.xml
dl.store.file.system.root.dir=/webapps/document_library_cluster
#other settings for cluster
liferay.home=/webapps/liferay-1p/liferay-portal-6.1.10-ee-ga1/
lucene.dir=/webapps/liferay-1p/liferay-portal-6.1.10-ee-ga1/data/lucene
cluster.link.enabled=true
lucene.replicate.write=true
multicast.group.address["cluster-link-control"]=239.255.4.1
Q21) What is the Use of <portlet:defineObject> and <liferaytheme:defineObject>?
Ans: These are Liferay tag libs and provide access to the below list of objects in JSP:
portlet: define object will provide the following variables
reader request and render response
action request and Response
event request and Response
resourceRequest and Response
portletConfig
portlet session
portletSessionScope
portlet preference
portlet preferences values
Liferay-theme: define object will provide the following variables
themeDisplay
company
user
realUser
contact
layout
layouts
plid
layoutTypePortlet
portletGroupId
permissionChecker
locale
timeZone
theme
colorScheme
portletDisplay
Q22) Explain IPC(Inter portlet communication).
Ans:
Portlet 1.0 did not offer any standard method for portlets to communicate with each other
Portlet 2.0 (JSR – 286 ) addresses this issue with 2 different mechanisms for IPC.
Public Render Parameters
Portlet Events
Q23) What is the use of the PortletPreferences interface?
Ans: Portlet Preferences are properties for storing basic portlet configuration data. Administrators often use preferences to provide a customized view of a portlet to users based on preferences.
Q24) In Portlet URL, what is p_p_lifecycle?
Ans:
p_p_lifecyle holds an integer value and represents the portlet lifecycle phase to the portlet belongs:
0 means render phase
1 means the action phase
2 means the server resource phase.
Q25) What is the Portlet Namespace and why it is important? how do you get the portlet namespace in JSP?
Ans:
Portlet namespace is portlet Id
p_p_id parameters also contain portlet namespace
portlet name space is prefixed with URL parameters so that the portlet container will identify the parameters belong to what portlet
In JSP:
<% String nameSpace= getNamespace() %>
<portlet-namespace/>
6b:T2b5f,
Welcome to J2EE Tutorials. The intent of the tutorials is to provide an in-depth understanding of J2EE. The JEE tutorials are a set of tutorials covering the Java Platform, Enterprise Edition. (JEE) The purpose of the tutorials is to introduce novice programmers to the JEE platform.
In addition to J2EE Tutorials, we will cover common interview questions, issues, and how to’s of J2EE.
If you would like to become a J2EE certified professional, then visit Tekslate - A Global online training platform: "J2EE Training and Certification Course". This course will help you to achieve excellence in this domain.
Introduction
Every good JEE programmer must acquire an enormous amount of knowledge. Everybody tells you what to study, but no one tells you how to study. One can easily be lost in all these tools, technologies, recommendations, libraries. There are many tools that help advance programmers develop their applications. But on the other hand, they bring additional complexity to development. Tools like XDoclet or Hibernate help advanced JEE programmers focus on the application logic, but necessarily make the learning curve steeper for a novice programmer. Have a look at the various Apache projects at www.apache.org. Ant, Cocoon, iBATIS, Struts, Maven, Tapestry, Xalan, Velocity. Just to name a few.
You cannot become a general unless you were a private. You must go to the top, from the very bottom. There is no shortcut available. The best way for a novice programmer is a step by step approach. Pick one tool, library at a time, and play with it. Realizing all this, I have made the tutorials to cope with all this complexity. We will begin with the very basic things like installing necessary tools, trying very simple JSP files, or servlets.
Java Platforms
The world of Java is divided into the following three platforms.
-Java Platform, Standard Edition, Java SE
-Java Platform, Micro Edition, Java ME
-Java Platform, Enterprise Edition, Java EE
Java SE is the core Java technology platform. It is used to create Java desktop and server applications. Java ME is aimed at creating applications for portable devices like cell phones or PDAs. The Java EE is a platform for creating large enterprise applications. It adds libraries necessary to create stable, secure, multi-tier, distributed applications.
Java EE
Java Platform, Enterprise Edition is a set of libraries, tools, specifications, best practices for developing, deploying, and managing server-side enterprise-level applications.
Each application is executed on the application server. Some of the well-known application servers are JBoss, OCJ, Resin, and WebLogic. In these tutorials, we will use Resin. To create and manage source code, developers use Integrated Development Environments, (IDEs). The most popular Java IDEs are NetBeans, Eclipse, JDeveloper, and IntelliJ IDEA.
The key technologies of the Java EE are:
-Web Services Technologies
-Web Application Technologies
-Enterprise Application Technologies
-Management and Security Technologies
To install all these technologies, we can go to the sun download site, or we can download the NetBeans JEE pack. These technologies are included in this pack.
The Java Platform, Enterprise Edition is not limited to these technologies. The platform has a wide variety of additional tools and libraries. The numerous Apache projects are good examples.
The Java EE also consists of a set of best practices, coding styles, and software patterns.
An enterprise application consists of web modules. These are packaged in war files. A war (short for Web Archive) file is a jar file used to distribute a collection of JavaServer Pages, servlets, Java classes, XML files, tag libraries, and static Web pages. They create a web application. Smaller web applications can be packaged in a war file.
The root directory of this directory structure is called the document root. Let's have a web application called email. For the Resin AS, the path to the document root would be:
RESIN_INSTALL_DIR/webapps/email
We place our files and resources under the document root directory. All files are visible except for a special directory WEB-INF. All files under the WEB-INF directory are private and are not visible to the client. The WEB-INF directory is optional, but it is always created unless we create some very simple examples.
The WEB-INF directory contains two special files and two directories. The web.xml file is a web application deployment descriptor. It is used to configure the web application. The web.xml file is a Java EE deployment descriptor. It is defined by a specification. There is another type of descriptor called runtime deployment descriptor. It is used to configure Java EE implementation-specific parameters. In the case of Resin Application Server, the runtime deployment descriptor is calledresin-web.xml. In the case of GlassFish AS it is called sun-web.xml.
The two special directories are named classes and lib. We place all compiled servlets and utility classes under the classes directory. The lib directory contains additional libraries in form of JAR files. These can be e.g. third party libraries like database drivers or XML parsers.
It is conventional to put tag files into the tag directory.
Installing Java
The Java Development Kit (JDK). The JDK is a software development kit used to create Java applications. If we need to run Java applications, we only need the Java Runtime Environment (JRE). If we want to create Java applications, we also need the JDK. The JDK also includes JRE. Primary components of the Java Development Kit are Java compiler, launcher, documentation generator, debugger, disassembler, archiver.
There are three basic Java editions.
-Java SE - Java Standard Edition
-Java EE - Java Enterprise Edition
-Java ME - Java Micro Edition
If we download the JDK we can create Java SE applications. These basically command-line applications a Java Swing GUI applications. Java EE is used to create enterprise applications. Java ME is used to create mobile applications. For both of them, we need to install additional libraries.
Steps
These are the steps to install the latest JDK on Linux. When I write these words it is JDK 6 Update 3.
-go to http://java.sun.com/
-select menu downloads - Java SE
-Click on the download button of the latest JDK version
-accept the license agreement
-download the appropriate version of java, Linux self-extracting file, 65.40 MB
-sudo chmod +x jdk-6u3-Linux-i586.bin
./jdk-6u3-linux-i586.bin
-Do you agree to the above license terms? [yes or no] yes
We add the bin directory to the PATH variable. On my computer the path to the Java bin directory is /home/vronskij/bin/jdk1.6.0_03/bin/.
$ java -version java version "1.6.0_03" Java(TM) SE Runtime Environment (build 1.6.0_03-b05) Java HotSpot(TM) Client VM (build 1.6.0_03-b05, mixed mode, sharing)
We verify the installed version of java. Now let's create a simple Java console application. Launch your favorite text editor and write down the following code.
/* Console.java */
public class Console {
public static void main(String[] args) {
System.out.println("Java console application");
}
}
This sample program will print text on the console window.
We set up the JAVA_HOME variable to point to our JDK. This is for other applications like ant or Netbeans, so that they know, where the Java has been installed.
Ans: DB2 is a subsystem of the MVS operating system. It is a Database Management System ( DBMS ) for that operating system.
2Q) What is an access path?
Ans: The path that is used to get to data specified in SQL statements.
3Q) What is an alias?
Ans: It is an alternate name that can be used in SQL training Hyderabad statements to refer to a table or view in the same or remote DB2 subsystem
4Q) Explain what a plan?
Ans: A plan is a DB2 object (produced during the binding process ) that associates one or more database request modules with a plan name.
Inclined to build a profession as IBM DB2? Then here is the blog post on, explore "IBM DB2 Training"
5Q) What information is used as input to the binding process?
Ans: The database request module produced during the pre-compile. The SYSIBM.SYSSTMT table of the DB2 catalog.
6Q) What is meant by the attachment facility?
Ans: The attachment facility is an interface between DB2 and TSO, IMS/VS, CICS, or batch address spaces. It allows application programs to access DB2.
7Q) What is meant by AUTO COMMIT?
Ans: AUTO COMMIT is a SPUFI option that commits the effects of SQL statements automatically if they are successfully executed.
8Q) What is the base table?
Ans: A base table is a real table - a table that physically exists in that there are physical stored records.
9Q) What is a buffer pool?
Ans: A buffer pool is the main storage that is reserved to satisfy the buffering requirements for one or more tablespaces or indexes, and is made up of either 4K or 32K pages.
10Q) On the create tablespace, what does the CLOSE parameter do?
Ans: CLOSE physically closes the tablespace when no one is working on the object. DB2 (release 2.3 ) will logically close tablespaces.
11Q) What will the COMMIT accomplish?
Ans: COMMIT will allow data changes to be permanent. This then permits the data to be accessed by other units of work. When a COMMIT occurs, locks are freed so other applications can reference the just committed data.
12Q) What is cursor stability?
Ans: It is cursor stability that "tells" DB2 that database values read by this application are protected only while they are being used. (Changed values are protected until this application reaches the commit point ). As soon as the program moves from one row to another. Other programs may read or the first row.
13Q) What is the function of the Data Manager?
Ans: The Data Manager is a DB2 component that manages the physical databases. It invokes other system components, as necessary, to perform detailed functions such as locking, logging, and physical I/O operations ( such as search, retrieval, update, and index maintenance).
14Q) What is a data page?
Ans: A data page is a unit of retrievable data, either 4K or 32K ( depending on how the table is defined ), containing user or catalog information.
15Q) What is the Declaration Generator ( DCLGEN )?
Ans: DCLGEN is a facility that is used to generate SQL statements that describe a table or view. These tables or view descriptions are then used to check the validity of other SQL statements at precompile time. The table or view declares are used by the DB2I utility DCLGEN to build a host language structure, which is used by the DB2 precompiler to verify that correct column names and data types have been specified in the SQL statement.
16Q) What will the FREE command do to a plan?
Ans: It will drop ( delete ) that existing plan.
17Q) What is a host variable?
Ans: This is a data item that is used in an SQL statement to receive a value or to supply a value. It must be preceded by a colon (:) to tell DB2 that the variable is not a column name.
18Q) What will the DB2 optimizer do?
Ans: The optimizer is a DB2 component that processes SQL statements and selects the access paths.
19Q) What is a page?
Ans: This is the unit of storage within a tablespace or index space that is accessed by DB2.
20Q) What is page space?
Ans: Page Space refers to either to an unpartitioned table, to an index space, or to a single partition of a partitioned table of index space.
IBM DB2 Certification Questions
21Q) What is a predicate?
Ans: A predicate is an element of a search condition that expresses or implies a comparison operation.
22Q) What is a recovery log?
Ans: A recovery log is a collection of records that describes the sequence of events that occur in DB2. The information is needed for recovery in the event of a failure during execution.
23Q) What is a Resource Control Table (RCT)? Describe its characteristics?
Ans: The RCT is a table that is defined to a DB2/CICS region. It contains control characteristics that are assembled via the DSN CRCT macros. The RCT matches the CICS transaction ID to its associated DB2 authorization ID and plan ID ( CICS attachment facility).
24Q) Where are plans stored?
Ans: Each plan is defined uniquely in the SYSIBM SYSPLANS table to correspond to the transaction(s) that are to execute that plan.
25Q) What is meant by repeatable read?
Ans: When an application program executes with repeatable read protection, rows referenced by the program can't be changed by other programs until the program reaches a commit point.
26Q) Describe what a storage group (STOGROUP) is?
Ans: A STOGROUP is a named collection of DASD volumes to be used by table spaces and index spaces of databases. The volumes of STOGROUP must be of the same device type.
27Q) How would you move a tablespace ( using STOGROUP ) to a different DASD volume allocated to that tablespace?
Ans: If the tablespace used is only allocated do that STOGROUP :
ALTER STOGROUP- add volume (new ) delete volume (old )
REORG TABLESPACE or RECOVER TABLESPACE
Create a new STOGROUP that points to the new volume. ALTER the tablespace and REORG or RECOVER the tablespace.
28Q) What is the format (internal layout) of "TIMESTAMP"?
Ans: This is a seven-part value that consists of a date (yymmdd) and time (hhmmss and microseconds)
29Q) What is meant by a unit of recovery?
Ans: This is a sequence of operations within a unit of work (i. e. , work done between commit points).
30Q) Can DB2 be accessed by TSO users? If yes, which command is used to invoke DB2?
Ans: DB2 can be invoked by TSO users by using the DSN RUN command.
31Q) What is a DB2 catalog?
Ans: The DB2 catalog is a set of tables that contain information about all of the DB2 objects ( tables, views, plans, etc ).
32Q) What information is held in SYSIBM.SYSCOPY?
Ans: The SYSIBM.SYSCOPY table contains information about image copies made of the tablespaces.
33Q) What information is contained in an SYSCOPY entry?
Ans: Included is the name of the database, the tablespace name, and the image copy type (full or incremental, etc..) as well as the date and time each copy was made.
34Q) What information can you find in SYSIBM.SYSLINKS table?
Ans: The SYSIBM.SYSLINKS table contains information about the links between tables created by referential constraints.
35Q) Where could you look if you had a question about whether a column has been defined as an index?
Ans: This information can be found in SYSIBM.SYSINDEXES.
36Q) What is the SQL Communications Area and what are some of its key fields?
Ans: It is a data structure that must be included in any host-language program using SQL. It is used to pass feedback about the SQL operations to the program. Fields are return codes, error messages, handling codes, and warnings.
37Q) What is DCLGEN?
Ans: DCLGEN stands for declarations generator, it is a facility to generate DB2 SQL data structure in COBOL or PL/I programs.
38Q) How do you leave the cursor open after issuing a COMMIT? (for DB2 2.3 or above only )?
Ans: Use WITH HOLD option in DECLARE CURSOR statement. But, it has no effect on pseudo-conversational CICS programs.
What is the physical storage length of each of the following DB2 data types: DATE, TIME, TIMESTAMP?
DATE: 4 bytes TIME: 3 bytes TIMESTAMP: 10 bytes
39Q) What is DCLGEN?
Ans: DeClarations GENerator: used to create the host language copy books for the table definitions. Also creates the DECLARE table.
40Q) Is DECLARE TABLE in DCLGEN necessary? Why did it use?
Ans: It not necessary to have a DECLARE TABLE statement in DCLGEN. This is used by the pre-compiler to validate the table-name, view-name, column name etc.., during pre-compile.
IBM DB2 Interview Questions for Experienced
41Q) How is a typical DB2 batch program executed?
Ans: There are two methods of executing a DB2 - batch program
Use DSN utility to run a DB2 batch program from native TSO. An example is shown: DSN SYSTEM(DSP3) RUN PROGRAM(EDD 47/0BD) PLAN(EDD470BD) LIB(EDGS01T.OBJ.LOADLIB) END
Use the IKJEFT01 utility program to run the above DSN command in a JCL.
42Q) Name some of the fields from SQLCA?
Ans: SQLCODE, SQLERRM, SQLERRD
43Q) How do you do the EXPLAIN of a dynamic SQL statement?
Ans: There are two methods to achieve this:
Use SPUFI or QMF to EXPLAIN the dynamic SQL statement
Include EXPLAIN command in the embedded by dynamic SQL statements
44Q) How do you simulate the EXPLAIN of an embedded SQL statement in SPUFI/QMF? Give an example with a host variable in where clause)?
Ans: Use a question mark in place of a host variable (or an unknown value). For instance, SELECT EMP_NAME FROM EMP WHERE EMP_SALARY > ?
45Q) What are the isolation levels possible?
Ans: CS: Cursor Stability
RR: Repeatable Read
46Q) What is the difference between CS and RR isolation levels?
Ans: CS: Release the lock on a page after use
RR: Retains all locks acquired till the end of the transaction
47Q) When do you specify the isolation level? How?
Ans: During the BIND process (ISOLATION LEVEL is a parameter for the binding process ). ISOLATION (CS/PR)..
48) How does DB2 determine what lock-size to use?
Ans: There are three methods to determine lock-size. They are;
-Based on the lock-size given while creating the tablespace.
-Programming can direct the DB2 what lock-size to use
-If lock-size ANY is specified, DB2 usually chooses a lock-size of PAGE
50) What is lock escalation?
Ans: Promoting a PAGE lock-size to the table or tablespace lock-size when a transaction has acquired more lock than specified in NUMLKTS. Locks should be taken on objects in single tablespace for escalation to occur.
51Q) What are the various locks available?
Ans: SHARE, EXCLUSIVE, UPDATE
52Q) What is ALTER?
Ans: SQL command used to change the definition of DB2 objects.
53Q) What is a DBRM, PLAN?
Ans: DBRM: DataBase Request Module, has the SQL statements extracted from the host language program by the pre-compiler. PLAN: A result of the BIND process. It has the executable code for the SQL statements in the DBRM.
54Q) What is ACQUIRE/RELEASE in BIND?
Ans: Determine the point at which DB2 acquires or releases locks against table and tablespaces, including intent locks.
55Q) What else is there Ain the PLN apart from the access path?
Ans: PLAN has the executable code for the SQL statements in the host program
56Q) What happens to the PLAN if the index used by it is dropped?
Ans: The plan is marked as invalid. The next time the plan is accessed, it is a rebound.
57Q) What are PACKAGES?
Ans: They contain executable code for SQL statements for one DBRM.
58Q) What are the advantages of using a PACKAGE?
Ans: The advantages of using PACKAGE are :
Avoid having to bind a large number of DBRM members into a plan
Avoid the cost of a large bind
Avoid the entire transaction being unavailable during bind and automatic rebind of a plan
Minimize fallback complexities if changes result in an error.
59Q) What is a collection?
Ans: A user-defined name that is the anchor for packages. It has no physical existence. The main usage is to group packages.
60Q) How would you print the output of an SQL statement from SPUFI?
Ans: Print the output dataset.
61Q) What is dynamic SQL?
Ans: Dynamic SQL is a SQL statement created at program execution time.
62Q) When is the access path determined for dynamic SQL?
Ans: At run time, when the PREPARE statement is issued.
63Q) Suppose I have a program that uses a dynamic SQL and it has been performing well till now. Off late, I find that performance has deteriorated. What happened?
Ans: There may be one of the following reasons:
probably RUN STATS is not done and the program is using a wrong index due to incorrect stats.
probably RUN STATS is done and the optimizer has chosen a wrong access path based on the latest statistics.
64Q) How does DB2 store NULL physically?
Ans: As an extra-byte prefix to the column value. Physically, the null prefix is Hex '00" if the value is present and Hex 'FF' if it is not.
65Q) How do you retrieve the data from a nullable column?
Ans: Use null indicators. Syntax .. INTO HOSTVAR: NULLED
66Q) What is the picture clause of the null indicator variable?
Ans: S9(4) COMP.
67Q) What does it mean if the null indicator has -1, 0, -2?
Ans: -1: the field is null; 0: the field is not null; -2: the field value is truncated
68Q) How do you insert a record with a nullable column?
Ans: To insert a NULL, move -1 to the null indicator. To insert a valid value, move 0 to the null indicator
69Q) What is RUNSTATS?
Ans: A DB2 utility used to collect statistics about the data value in tables which can be used by the optimizer to decide the access path. It also collects statistics used for space management. These statistics are stored in DB2 catalog tables.
70Q) When will you choose to run RUNSTATS?
Ans: After a load, or after mass updates, inserts, deletes, or after REORG.
What is the reason that the MySQL statement “SELECT AVG (SALARY) FROM EMP” generates inaccurate output? The reason for the statement generating inaccurate outcomes is because of the fact that SALARY has not been declared to have NULL and at the same time the employees whose salary is not known are also counted.
71Q) Why SELECT is not preferred in embedded SQL programs?
Ans: SELECT is not preferred in embedded SQL programs for three reasons. First; if the table structure is changed by the addition or deletion of a field and the program is modified then using SELECT might retrieve the columns that the user may not use. This would lead to Input-Output overhead and the chances of an index-only scan are also eliminated.
6d:T3130,
MS Project Interview Questions With Answers
Are you planning to participate in an interview for an MS Project role, but are confused about how to break that interview, and what would be the most likely MS Project interviewquestions an interviewer might ask? Well, you've come to the right place. Tekslate has collected the most frequently asked MS Project interview questions and answers, which are often asked in several interviews.
1Q) Provide an explanation for what's hyperlink undertaking in MS venture used for?
Ans: Hyperlink challenge in MS undertaking for connecting any duties in a mission.
2Q) Point out in which is “summary undertaking” in MS challenge?
Ans: The rundown task is useful in assessing the wandering period and the period in a task and arranging the wander altogether. you could discover “summary project” below the main menu -> Insert -> precise
3Q) listing out the types of responsibilities utilized in MS challenge?
Ans: There are the foremost four kinds of obligations:
Precis duties: It includes subtasks and their associated houses
Subtasks: it is a smaller mission that is part of a precise task
Routine obligations: these are the tasks that fall within normal durations
Milestones: these are the top precedence mission which might be adjusted to 0 lengths and are like quick-term goals in the venture
4Q) Mention the sorts of task links in MS mission 2013?
Ans: There are four forms of task links in MS mission
Finish to begin link: in this link, the second venture cannot be initiated until the first task is finished.
Begin to begin hyperlink: in this hyperlink, the second task can start at any time after the first assignment is initiated.
End to complete hyperlink: in this link, the mission does no longer should stop at the same time, the second challenge can quit every time after the first venture is ended.
Start to finish link: on this hyperlink, the second mission can’t finish until the first task begins.
Inclined to build a profession as MS Project? Then here is the blog post on, explore "MS Project Training"
5Q) Explain a way to set a work time exception in undertaking 2013?
Ans: To adjust them to be had working hours in undertaking 2013 for a particular day, you need to change the work time exception settings. for you to do that
Choose the task and trade the running time.
At the calendar pick the day you want to alternate.
Click the exception tab to display it, it'll show a column with the call cell in a blank row, kinda name for the exception, and press enter.
Tap the exception call you entered in step three after which click on the info button. it's going to open an element dialog box for this exception. where you'll make the setting consistent with your requirement like running time, recurrent sample, and range of recurrence.
6Q) Give an explanation for how you can evaluate budget useful resource values in MS mission?
Ans:
Go to aid utilization view ( View -> aid usage).
Upload finances value, work, finances paintings, and price columns to the desk if they may be not there already.
Faucet on the drop-down arrow to the proper of the resource call column heading and then pick out “institution with the aid of” -> custom organization, in order to group the aid by custom resource check field.
Tap on the down arrow in the field call cellular in the organization through the row section, after that within the drop-down list of resource fields, pick out the name of the custom textual content subject to your budget categories and then click observe.
Now inside the group precise rows, examine the budget get price or budget paintings values to the cost or work values concurrently.
To dismantle the organization, you could select NO groups by clicking the down arrow to the proper of the useful resource call column heading.
7Q) What are your favorite MS task books/internet sites?
Ans: Mission making plans, estimating, tracking, and conversation is possibly the most complex, nuanced region that Microsoft’s circle of relatives of workplace-related applications hopes to aid. experienced, professional PMs have to be actively looking to enlarge their ability sets with a ramification of sources.
8Q) Have you ever completed any VBA automation with MS Project?
Ans: This isn't as commonplace as Excel programming, however, it'd deliver some perception into their depth of expertise of the assignment “database”. a few oldsters automate look/feel troubles, so printouts always appear the same (consistency breeds familiarity). different uses macros for mainly intricate utilization or cost calculations. The candidate ought to be able to glibly describe the benefits and challenges of automation with this tool.
9Q) How do you add or delete a standard or custom column/field?
Ans: A bit of a trick question: there are many ways to add (or insert) a column/field, typically they will brute force Insert or use a macro. You should never delete a column/field that contains data; the recommended approach is to hide the column. An interviewer could drill into the candidate’s use of custom tables, views, fields, and filters. Have they set up templates? How do they manage consistency among multiple projects? Do they use automation or templates to develop standards and make incremental improvements for each project they work on?
10Q) How do you model meetings and non-working time on a project plan?
Ans: There are a number of different methods – including …
Model all resource participation at 80% available time
Change the default calendar to 6-hour workdays
Create weekly, 5-day (duration) tasks, for 1-4 (effort) hours per week, and assign everybody to this task
Candidate should be able to talk about the pros and cons of whatever method they select.
MS Project Interview Questions for Freshers
11Q) Can MS Project be used to track an agile development project, and if so, how?
Ans: There is no right answer to this question, I’ve heard opinions on both sides. However, if someone can give a cogent, detailed answer, either way, they are demonstrating their knowledge of agile and/or Project.
Cross-company management, matrix management A project manager has to liaise with other departments in the company, like the procurement, the R&D, as well as the Logistics department. Other than that, the project manager may also have to interact with customers and the company’s partners. Sometimes, the project manager may also be responsible for the invoicing and financial issues of his projects. Do you have that project management experience?
12Q) Tell me about a time when your stakeholders didn’t agree on a project. How did you proceed?
Ans: Interviewers asking this question are looking for stories that will prove you have these necessary soft skills for the job. Make sure to brainstorm stories about your former project management roles in anticipation of this question and use them as a confirmation that you have the mediation skills that these hiring managers are looking for.
13Q) What projects do you not want to work on?
Ans: Everyone wants to believe they can handle every project, but the reality is that most project managers are best suited for a narrow project management role.
If you tell your future employer that you love working on everything, that communicates that:
You might not know what you’re talking about OR
You’re unwilling to communicate weaknesses.
Neither of these traits reflects well on you.
Instead, be honest. Are you more of a software development person? Do you do well with creative media campaigns? Would you rather lie down and die than work on a construction project? Let your interviewer know; both they and your future self will thank you for it.
14Q) How do you deal with difficult team members?
Ans: Project management flows a lot smoother when everyone is meeting deadlines with quality results. Unfortunately, you’re likely to work with some individuals who have trouble delivering. Your interviewer wants to know how you deal with these interpersonal and personnel issues.
First, look up proper approaches to dealing with difficult team members so that you’re ready to respond with the best possible answers. Provide examples of how you helped improve the work processes of team members at your previous jobs. You can always ask your interviewer to give a “for instance”; they might also have someone specific in mind.
6e:T33bc,
OpenSpan Interview Questions
Following are some of the most frequently asked Openspan interview questions in the interview, here are the answers for them.
1.What is Openspan?
Ans: Openspan is RPA(Robotic process Automation Tool) It can be used as standalone or it be integrated by visual studio by using its plug-in.This is one among other automation tools like UIPath, BluePrism, Automation etc
2.What is RPA ?
Ans: RPA is a software that creates software robots. Representing the future of process automation in enterprises as well as outsourcing entities, RPA takes into account that the world is moving increasingly towards automating tasks that are better performed by computers and allowing the human workforce to focus their attention on tasks that require creativity, judgment, and personal interaction.
3.What is Adapter in OpenSpan ?
Ans: The Adapter lets OpenSpan projects to interrogate with our target applications.There is a Windows application template for each type of Windows applications you want to work with in the project. Adding the Windows template adds an OpenSpan Adapter to the Project With Properties specific for use with Windows applications.
If you want to enrich your career and become a professional in OpenSpan, then visit Tekslate - a global online training platform: "OpenSpan Training" This course will help you to achieve excellence in this domain.
4.What is ExcelConnector in OpenSpan?
Ans: ExcelConnector is used to read/write the data in to excel files.We can use this connectors to interact with excel file in our automation. To use this feature you must have installed the Office Connectors while installing the Studio for development and in runtime for deployment. When we install studio or runtime there is option to choose appropriate version of Office connectors.
5.What is Studio Development Environment in Openspan?
Ans: Studio Development Environment is an Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for creating, building, and testing Runtime projects.
6.What is WebAdapter ?
Ans: It enables OpenSpan Studio to interrogate with a Windows application for interrogation purposes. WebAdapter is used to interrogate the Microsoft Internet Explorer.
7.What is Universal WebAdapter?
Ans: Universal WebAdapter is used to interrogate the Web applications like Chrome and Fire fox.In order to use WebAdapter at the time of installation of Studio you must have installed the Chrome and Firefox extension.
8.What is The Difference Between Path and Target Path?
Ans: The Path and Target Path are the Properties of Windows Adapter and can be found in Properties Window.
Path - If the application that is required to run is from same folder where all other applications are installed or installed in any custom location then put the full path including the application and extension.
Target Path - If the desired application is opened by the another application Eg. you have written a .bat command to launch your application. Then path will contain the full path including extension of that .bat and target path will contain only application_name.extension of that application.
StartMethod should be set to start and wait to launch for that application mentioned in target path property.
9.What is the differentiation in PEGA Robotics with other RPA?
Ans: Robotic Automation system from Pega includes a Studio (Design Tool) based on Microsoft Visual Studio where the user can generate automation, as a runtime client, which runs the robotic automation on user's desktop, facilitated by a cloud-based Deployment Portal, which helps in implementing and managing the automation that are being developed by the user.
10.What is Object Explorer in Pega?
Ans: The Object Explorer lists commonly used .Net components and all OpenSpan custom components.
11.What is Studio's Integrated Development Environment?
Ans: Pega Robotic Automation Studio runs within the Visual Studio design environment. The environment is comprised of: the Menu toolbar, Standard toolbar, various Tool Windows docked or auto-hidden on the left, bottom, and right sides, as well as the Designer space. The tool windows, menus, and toolbars that are available depend on the type of project item with which you are working. You can easily move and dock windows using the visual guide diamond or temporarily hide windows using Auto-Hide.
12.What is the difference between Thin client and Thick Client ?
Ans: Thin Client : A Thin Client is browser based. This means that you don't need to install any heavy stuffs and it's available across platforms and is browser based.
Thick Client : A thick client is installed into the client side. It is still connected to the server, but most of the processing is done on client side. With thick client, there won't be much processing via the network. In a way, it will be a much faster option if your network is slow or congested.
13.What are the benefits of PEGA Robotics Automation Systems ?
Ans: With Pega Robotic Process Automation (RPA), organizations can automate the mundane, tedious, time-consuming, manual work that is hampering productivity and efficiency. Whether adjudicating claims, onboarding customers or employees, reconciling financials, updating customer information in systems record, Pega RPA can manage the work across your enterprise.
14.How to connect Oracle, SQL Server with OpenSpan?
Ans: To connect Oracle or SQL Server in OpenSpan under data tab OracleQuery and SQLQuery is available that can be used to connect with these databases. These return the DataSet to work and functions and properties are available.
15.What is the difference between WaitAll and WaitAny ?
Ans: The WaitAll control will wait until All objects are Created.
The WaitAny component is used when any one object—screen, form, or application—in a group must be created before the user can proceed. This is useful when, for example, the group consists of three screens, each relating to a level of membership.
16.What is defined as attribute of interrogated control ?
Ans: Property is defined as an attribute of interrogated control.
17.Which Section of object explorer contains the buttons to select an object properties,events or methods for an Automation ?
Ans: Object Inspector object explorer contains the buttons to select an object properties,events or methods for an Automation.
18.What is HookChildProcesses ?
Ans: The HookChildProcesses property applies to Windows and web application adapters.This property applies when one application starts other applications and the spawned applications are required for the solution.
In this case, set the Path or the StartPage property to identify the application that spawns the other applications.
Next, set the HookChildProcesses property to True so that you can interrogate any application that is spawned by the Path or StartPage application.
Set the adapter's StartMethod property to Start.
19.What is InteractionManager and how it works ?
Ans: The InteractionManager component connects all customer interactions through the configuration of its properties, events and methods.This component maintains a direct link to the contents of the interaction.xml configuration File and stores the context values defined for each interaction.
These context values appears as component properties.There can be only one InteractionManager component per referenced project ina deployment package,and its existence enables the connectivity of the framework’s activities and tasks.
20.What Are The Competitors of PEGA RPA?
Ans: Some other Popular RPA is Blue Prism, Edge Verve, Automation Anywhere, Datamatics, etc.
6f:T1ce5,
Performing Data Manipulations using Disconnected Model:
If MessageBox.Show (“Department added do you want to add another department”, Me.Text, MessageBoxbuttons.YesNo, MessageBoxIcon Question) = Windows.Forms.DIalogResult.Yes Then
txtDeptno.Clear ()
txtDname.Clear ()
txtLoc.Clear ()
txtDeptno.Clear ()
Else
End
End if
Catch ex as Exception
MessageBox.Show (ex.Message, “Error”)
End try
Execute
Performing updations and deletions using ADD.Net disconnected model
If you want to enrich your career and become a professional in SQL Server, then visit Tekslate - a global online training platform: "SQL Server Training" This course will help you to achieve excellence in this domain
Imports System.Data
Imports System.Data.SqlClient
‘Form declarations
Dim cn as SqlConnection
Dim da as SqlDataAdapter
Dim cmb as SqlCommandBuilder
Dim ds as DataSet
Dim row as DataRow
Form_Load
Cn = New SqlConnection (“user id = sa; password = 123; database = northwind; data source = sekhar”)
da = New SqlDataAdapter (“Select * from dept270”, cn)
If ds.tables (“dept270”).Rows.Contains (dno) = True
Then
Row = ds.Tables (“dept270”).Rows.Find (dno)
txtDname.Text = row (“Dname”)
txtLoc.Text = row (“Loc”)
Else
MessageBox.Show (“Department not found”, “Error”)
‘Update (button_click)
Try
row (“dname”) = txtDname.Text
row (“loc”) = txtloc.Text
row.EndEdit ()
da.Update (ds.Tables (“dept270”))
MessageBox.Show (“Record updated”, Me.Text)
Catch ex as Exception
MessageBox.Show (ex.Message, “Error”)
End try
// ‘Delete (button_click)
Try
row.Delete ()
da.Update (ds.Tables (“dept270”))
MessageBox.Show (“Record Deleted”, Me.Text)
txtDeptno.Clear ()
txtDname.Clear ()
txtLoc.Clear ()
txtDeptno.Clear ()
Catch ex as Exception
MessageBox.Show (ex.Message, “Error”)
End try
‘Close (button_click)
End
Concepts to remember (Add.Net disconnected model)
Projecting the data (all rows & navigations)
Various search methods supported
Relationships between tables
Data manipulations
COM Interoperability Model:
Whenever a COM component is used within a .Net application or if a .Net assembly is used from a COM type application then it is said to be supporting COM interoperability.
Using COM Components from .Net application
Whenever a .Net application uses the definition of COM component then a request will be given to the CLR where the CLR identifies the request type and defines Runtime Callable Wrapper (RCW) Once RCW is defined then it sends a request for the COM server where the COM component is identified based on its GUID (Global Unique identifier) and the component type library definitions will be returned to the RCW. Once RCW collects the data then it creates an interoperable COM which is an assembly once the assembly is created then the .Net application will consume that assembly and provides the output.
Get In-Depth Knowledge on SQL Server Click on Here:
Welcome to SAP NetWeaver Tutorials. The objective of these tutorials is to provide an in-depth understanding of SAP NetWeaver. In addition to free SAP NetWeaver Tutorials, we will cover common interview questions, issues, and how-to’s of SAP NetWeaver.
SAP NetWeaver
SAP NetWeaver supports several technologies like Microsoft .NET, Oracle Java EE, and IBM Web Sphere for customizations and other extending processes for customers. So the customers can use their current IT infrastructure for using SAP and they don’t need to invest more in IT infrastructure for their SAP implementation. Using NetWeaver and organizations can improve their operational efficiency and can make faster decision-making by accelerated business information access. Smooth end-to-end business and high process quality and efficiency are also some advantages of the NetWeaver Platform.
Netweaver makes possible access to SAP data using simple HTTP protocol or even mobile. This eliminates the need for installing and more importantly training in SAP's client-side software.
The core capabilities of SAP NetWeaver are the integration of people, information, and process.
Information integration
It means you can bring together information from a variety of locations and have it make sense in the context of what your folks do every day!
Examples:
Business Intelligence: It provides you with reliable tools for creating individual and interactive reports and applications.
BI Content & BI Content Extensions: Enables quicker implementation using pre-configured role and task-oriented information models in SAP Business Intelligence.
Knowledge Management: Allows common access to unstructured information and documents in a distributed storage landscape like Search, Classification, Subscription, Versioning, etc.
Search and Classification (TREX):Provides SAP applications with numerous services for searching, classifying, and text-mining in large collections of documents (unstructured data) as well as for searching in and aggregating business objects (structured data).
With SAP R/3, SAP ushers in a new generation of enterprise software — from mainframe computing (client-server architecture) to the three-tier architecture of database, application, and user interface.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP ABAP? Enrol in Instructor-Led live SAP ABAP Training to get Job Ready!
Three-Tier Architecture of SAP R/3
Presentation Servers:
Presentation servers contain systems capable of providing a graphical interface.
The presentation layer is also known as the client Layer
The presentation Layer is a user interaction
For SAP-User interaction purposes, we use GUI
GUI stands for Graphical user interface
Examples − Desktop, Mobile Devices, laptops
Application Servers:
Application servers include specialized systems with multiple CPUs and a vast amount of RAM.
The Application Layer is also known as Kernel Layer and Basic Layer.
SAP application programs are executed in the Application Layer.
The application layer serves the purpose of a communicator between the Presentation and Database Layers.
The application server is where the dispatcher distributes the workload to the different work processes that make the job done.
Database Servers:
Database servers contain specialized systems with fast and large hard drives.
The database layer stores the data
Datastore can be Business data, SAP system data, SAP tables, and Programs.
Examples − Oracle, Microsoft SQL Server, IBM DB/2, Siebel, Sybase, etc.
In the three-tier architecture, SAP Gateways make up the middle or application tier. This middle layer is essential for communication between the frontend and the backend. The use of multi-tier architecture to implement a data processing system adds a valuable level of modularity and flexibility to the system by being able to develop and maintain each tier individually. The purpose of this tutorial is to create a Gateway that will extract data from the flight carrier database table, which will be accessed from the Gateway Client. The Gateway will be able to retrieve a list of carriers as well as individual carriers. Let’s get started.
Creating a New Project
First, navigate to the Gateway Service Builder with the T-Code “SEGW”
Click the “Create Project” button
Give the Gateway project a name and a description
Save the project and assign it to the appropriate package. For the purpose of this demo the project will be saved as a local object ($TMP or click the button “Local Object). The Gateway project has now been successfully created.
Creating an Entity & Entity Set
What is an Entity and Entity Set?
An Entity is a structure that can be defined by the user or defined as an ABAP Data Dictionary structure. An Entity Set is simply a collection or table of Entities.
Right-click Data Model and select “Import” -> “DDIC Structure” to use an ABAP Data Dictionary structure
Type “SCARR” for ABAP Structure and press enter. A list of properties should appear
Make “Carrier” the object name for the entity
Change the “Usage” of the property “MANDT” to “Ignore” and click the checkmark at the bottom right
Double click the folder “Entity Sets”
Click “Insert Row” and name the Entity Set
The naming convention is to either make the Entity Set name the plural form of the name of the entity or append “_Set” to the Entity name. For training purposes, name the entity set “Carriers” or “Carrier_Set”. “Carriers” will be used for the remainder of this tutorial
Use the Entity name, “Carrier”, for “Entity Type Name”. Make sure to save and the Entity and corresponding Entity Set have successfully created
SAP NetWeaver Components
SAP NetWeaver includes a comprehensive set of components, applications, and tools.
SAP NetWeaver Application Server
It supports platform-independent web services, business applications, and standards-based development, enabling you to leverage existing technology assets for Web-services-oriented solutions.
SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse
It enables you to integrate data from across the enterprise and transform it into practical, timely business information to drive sound decision making.
SAP NetWeaver Gateway
It enables developers to create applications that link business users to SAP software from any environment and through any device.
SAP NetWeaver Master Data Management
It ensures cross-system data consistency and helps integrate business processes across the extended value chain.
SAP NetWeaver Process Orchestration
It helps improve processes, from simple workflows to integrated processes that span applications and organizational boundaries. It includes capabilities for business process management, business rules management, and process integration.
SAP NetWeaver Portal
It unifies critical information and applications to give users role-based views that span the enterprise, enabling you to take full advantage of your information resources.
SAP Auto-ID Infrastructure
It gives you all the capabilities you need to integrate all automated sensing devices including RFID readers and printers, Bluetooth devices, embedded systems, and barcode devices.
SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
It addresses access and provisioning issues facing a typical enterprise. It creates a new opportunity for integrating business processes and helps you to integrate systems in a heterogeneous IT environment.
SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management
It allows you to archive data in a readily accessible format according to regulatory retention rules that you define.
Adaptive Computing Controller:It provides a central point of control for assigning computing resources and optimizing their use.
SAP NetWeaver Composition Environment:It provides a robust environment for the design, deployment, and running of composite applications that comply with a service-oriented architecture.
SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio:It offers a convenient user interface and rich functionality for developing J2EE applications.
SAP NetWeaver Visual Composer:It simplifies the creation of portal content and analytics applications, enabling business analysts to build or customize applications using a visual user interface rather than manual coding.
SAP Solution Manager:It facilitates technical support for distributed systems with a functionality that covers all key aspects of solution deployment, operation, and continuous improvement.
71:T6383,
SAP NetWeaver Interview Questions
Q1. What is SAP NetWeaver?
Ans:SAP NetWeaver is SAP's integrated technology computing platform and is the technical foundation for many SAP applications since the SAP Business Suite. SAP NetWeaver is marketed as a service-oriented application and integration platform. SAP NetWeaver provides the development and runtime environment for SAP applications and can be used for custom development and integration with other applications and systems.
Q2. What is the transactional processing in AS ABAP? Explain?
Ans:Transactions are processing units grouped to provide specific units. They have four principal characteristics. The initial letters of these characteristics together form the acronym ACID.
Atomic
Consistent
Isolated
Durable
Atomic means that a transaction is either fully successful or does not have any effects at all. If a transaction-oriented system goes down, you need to ensure that inconsistent, partial results are not stored.
Consistent means that the system status changes from one that is accurate and consistent in business terms to another that is also accurate and consistent in business terms.
Isolated means that the changes made within a transaction can only be seen by other transactions, even those that run simultaneously, after the final confirmation.
The results of a transaction are durable because, after the final confirmation, they are stored permanently in the database.
Q3. How to trigger the idoc?
Ans:We can trigger the idoc by using T Code - WE19
Q4. What is SAP?
Ans:SAP stands for System Analysis and Program Development.
SAP's Business Suite has four applications as below:
Customer relationship management (CRM) - helps companies acquire and retain customers, gain marketing and customer insight.
Product lifecycle management (PLM) - helps manufacturers with product-related information.
Supply chain management (SCM) - helps companies with the process of resourcing its manufacturing and service processes.
Supplier relationship management (SRM) - enables companies to procure from suppliers.
Enterprise resource planning (ERP).
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP BASIS? Enrol in Instructor-Led live SAP BASIS Training to get Job Ready!
Q5. What is lock management in the SAP system?
Ans: Lock management is used in SAP system to ensure data consistency and to check that data records cannot be changed by any particular user at any particular time. A database transaction is a combination of the physical and logical unit. The database lock administration can only coordinate this type of database transaction. From an SAP point of view, this is not sufficient, because SAP transactions, which are formed from a sequence of logically related work steps that are consistent in business terms, are generally made up of several dialog steps. SAP systems need to have their own lock management. Enqueue's work process is used for this purpose. This also ensures that the platform independence of lock management is maintained.
Q6. What do you mean by PBO (process before output) and PAI (process after input)?
Ans:For an SAP transaction, the graphical representation of the screen and related processing logic is called a Dynpro (dynamic program). Each Dynpro consists of a PBO/PAI module to prepare and process the data displayed or entered on the screen.
-PBO (Process Before Output): A processing event which is called before the screen is displayed. Its tasks include the initialization of the screen fields and supply default data values for the screen.
-PAI (Process After Input): A processing event taking place after you leave a screen. Its tasks are to process the input data or initiate the update of the database.
Q8. How many processes exist in the Java application server? Explain.
Ans:The following processes exist in Java AS :
The dispatcher distributes incoming requests to the server processes.
The server process executes the Java applications. Every server process is multithreaded and can thus process a large number of requests in parallel.
The Java message service manages a list of Java dispatchers and server processes. It is responsible for the communication within the Java runtime environment.
The Java enqueue service manages logical locks that are set by the executed Java application program in a server process.
The Software Deployment Manager(SDM) is the standard tool used to install Java software components on the SAP Web AS Java.
Q9. How many types of processes are there in the SAP Netweaver application server? Explain
Ans:The types of processes in SAP AS are:
The dispatcher distributes the request to the work processes.
Dialog work processes fulfill all requests for the execution of dialog steps triggered by an active user. Every dispatcher requires at least two dialog work processes.
Spool work processes pass sequential data flow on to printers. At least one spool work process is required for each SAP system. It is possible to configure more than one spool work process for each dispatcher.
Update work processes to execute update requests. Similarly to spool work processes, you need at least one update work process per SAP system.
Background work processes execute programs that run without interacting with the user. You need at least two background work processes for each SAP system.
The enqueue work process administers the lock table in the shared memory. The lock table contains the logical database locks of the ABAP runtime environment of the SAP system. Only one enqueue work process is needed for each system.
Q10. What is an instance? How many types of instances are there? Explain them.
Ans:An instance is an administrative unit that combines SAP system components proving one or more services. The services provided by an instance are started or stopped together. You use a common instance profile to set parameters of all the components of an instance. Each instance has its own buffer area. An instance runs on one physical computer, but there can be multiple instances on one computer. An instance is identified by the system ID(SID) and the instance number. There are two types of instances :
The central instance of the SAP system is distinguished by the fact that it offers services that no other instance of the system offers. For the AS ABAP, these are the message server and the enqueue work process. For the AS Java, you can recognize the central instance by the software deployment manager (SDM).
Q11. Explain the processes used for operating business applications.
Ans:The following processes are used for operating business application software:
Presentation processes (for example, for displaying screens)
Application processes (for example, for executing application programs)
Database processes(for example, for managing and organizing database data)
When you are installing and configuring an SAP system, you need to decide how you are going to distribute the required processes among the available hardware. There are various ways of doing this :
Single-tier configurations, all processing tasks(database, application, and presentation processes) are performed by one computer. This is classic mainframe processing.
Two-tier configurations are usually implemented using special presentation servers that are responsible solely for formatting the graphical interface.
Three-tier configuration, each layer runs on its own host. Many different application servers can simultaneously work with the data of a database server.
Q12. Define client and server in terms of both hardware-oriented
Ans:In a hardware-oriented view, the term server means the central server in a network that provides data, memory, and resources for the workstations(clients).
In the software-oriented view, the client and server are both defined as the process level(service). Service in this context is a service provided by a software component. This software component can consist of a process or a group of processes and is then called a server for that service. Software components that use a service are called clients. At the same time, clients can also be servers for other specific services.
Q13. What are the commands /nen and /nex in Netweaver used for?
Ans:/nex in the t-code entry field of the SAP toolbar. This terminates all separate sessions and logs off immediately (without warning!).
Q14. How many help options are there in SAP Netweaver? Explain.
Ans:SAP system provides you with various help options :
F1 Help: It is used to display an explanation of fields, menus, functions, and messages. The F1 help also displays technical information on the relevant field.
F4 Help: It is used to display possible input values. You can also call up the F4 help for a field using the button immediately to the right of the selected field.
SAP Library (Online Documentation): The SAP library is a useful aid to getting to know system functions. It allows you to access the online documentation. The information stored here does not simply describe how to use system functions, it also explains system architecture concepts, gives examples of how you can configure various processes and warns you about possible user errors and their consequences.
Q15. How many types of locks can an application developer choose? Explain.
Ans:The application developer can choose between different lock modes :
Write locks (lock mode Exclusive): the lock data can be edited only by one user. The requests for another write lock and another read lock are rejected. A write lock protects the locked objects against all types of other transactions. Only the same lock owner can set the lock again.
Read locks(lock mode Shared): several users can have access to the locked data at the same time. The requests for additional read locks are accepted, even if they are from other users. A write lock is rejected.
Enhanced write locks(lock mode exclusive noncumulative): while write locks can be successively requested and released by the same transaction, and enhanced write lock can only be requested once, even by the same transaction. All other requests for locks are rejected.
Optimistic locks(lock mode Optimistic): optimistic locks respond like reading lock at first and can be changed to write locks. An optimistic lock is set if the user displays the data in changed mode.
Q16. What is an update in terms of the SAP system? Explain.
Ans:In the SAP system, a business process is mapped using an SAP transaction that can contain several screen changes. Data changes effected by this process are supposed to be executed completely or not at all in the database. The update system offers increased security, performance, and restorability in the execution of database changes. The updating system is a technology that allows SAP transactions to off-load time-intensive database changes.
To increase performance further, application developers can configure different types of updates :
Time-critical, primary V1 updates. They are relevant to objects that have a controlling function in the system, such as a change to the material stock or an order creation.
Non-time critical, secondary V2 updates that depend on the V1 updates. These are purely statistical updates such as the calculation of results.
Non-time critical updates are allowed and processed at a later point of time (collective run).
Q17. With the SAP user interface, how many screen elements can be used?
Ans:An SAP user interface contains the following screen elements :
Command field
Menu bar, system function bar, title bar, application toolbar, status bar
Checkboxes
Radio buttons
Tab You can start applications directly by entering their transaction code in the command field. The menu bar is the top line of any dialog window in the SAP system. The pushbuttons in the standard toolbar are shown on every SAP screen. If they are not available in an application, pushbuttons that you cannot use on that screen are deactivated. If you place the cursor over a pushbutton for a short time, the system displays a flag with the name or function of the pushbutton. The title bar is the function that you are currently in. The application toolbar shows the pushbuttons available in the application that you are currently in. The status bar displays information on the current system status, such as warnings and errors. Within a field group, checkboxes allow selecting several options at the same time. With radio buttons, you can only select one option. A tab organizes several sub-screens to improve clarity.
Q18. In how many ways SAP Netweaver AS can be installed? Explain.
Ans:There are 3 different installation options for SAP Netweaver AS. These are :
SAP Netweaver AS ABAP: Complete infrastructure in which ABAP-based applications can be developed and used.
SAP Netweaver AS Java: Complete infrastructure in which J2EE-conform applications can be developed and used.
SAP Netweaver AS ABAP + Java: Complete infrastructure in which ABAP-based and J2EE-based applications can be developed and used. This installation emphasizes the seamless Java ABAP integration.
Q19. What does the SAP Netweaver Application server offer?
Ans:
SAP Netweaver AS is the logical result of the further development of the SAP Application server Technology. SAP Netweaver AS offers :
A reliable and extensively tested runtime environment, which has been developed further continuously over more than ten years.
A framework for executing complex business processes that meet the highest security standards.
A reliable and user-friendly development environment.
Support for open standards, including HTTP, HTTPS, SMTP, WebDAV, SOAP, SSL, Unicode, HTML,XML and WML.
High scalability.
Support for different operating systems and database platforms.
Q20. What is the use of metadata? Can we create that?
Ans:Metadata or message Metadata provides the structure definition of the XI message. can be created in IR . which is called Message Type.
The inbound proxy is the server proxy and the outbound proxy is the client proxy. In client-server architecture let me explain, that someone is sending a request for data then that someone will be server and that is through a proxy, and the client will fulfill this requirement and send the response back through a proxy that is an outbound proxy.
Q21. What is message monitoring, component monitoring, and performance monitoring?
Ans:Message monitoring is to monitor the status of the message that if it is successful or in waiting for the state, or to be delivered or if it is in error at what point it is in error and to review all the steps of the message in Adapter engine or integration engine with the payload.
Component monitoring means majorly monitoring the status of communication channels that they are flowing data properly or not, the status of the adapter engine, etc.
Performance Monitoring is to monitor the instance of servers for each and every interface.
Q22. What is an inbound proxy and outbound proxy?
Ans:The inbound proxy is the server proxy and the outbound proxy is the client proxy. In client-server architecture let me explain, that someone is sending a request for data then that someone will be server and that is through a proxy, and the client will fulfill this requirement and send the response back through a proxy that is an outbound proxy.
Q23. How to trigger the idoc?
Ans:We can trigger the idoc by using T Code - WE19
Q24. What are message monitoring, component monitoring, and performance monitoring?
Ans:Message monitoring is to monitor the status of the message that if it is successful or in waiting for the state, or to be delivered or if it is in error at what point it is in error and to review all the steps of the message in the Adapter engine or integration engine with the payload.
Component monitoring means majorly monitoring the status of communication channels whether they are flowing data properly or not, the status of the adapter engine, etc.
Performance Monitoring is to monitor the instance of servers for each and every interface.
Q25. What is the difference b/w Graphical mapping and XSLT mapping?
Ans:XSLT MAPPING Converts from XML to text, HTML, and DHTML. The main difference is the XSLT Mapping itself generates the target structure. There is no other tool or mapping to convert in XML to text and HTML.
Q26. Who will prepare the functional spec?
Ans:Functional Spec derives from Software requirements. Software requirement derives from Marketing requirements. MRS will be prepared by Business Analysts with help of End Users. So, Functional Spec is a small piece of the requirement to fill the business requirements. Finally, the Functionality will be validated/Verified against MRS tested by the End-User during user acceptance testing.
Q27. What is the difference b/w Graphical mapping and XSLT mapping?
Ans:XSLT MAPPING Converts from XML to text, HTML, and DHTML.and the main difference is that XSLT Mapping itself generates the target structure.there is no other tool or mapping in convert in XML to text and Html.
72:T2a79,
Welcome to SAP IM Tutorials. The objective of these tutorials is to provide an in-depth understanding of SAP IM. In addition to free SAP IM Tutorials, we will cover common interview questions, issues, and how to’s of SAP IM.
Introduction
Inventory management software is a computer-based system for tracking inventory levels, orders, sales, and deliveries. It can also be used in the manufacturing industry to create a work order, bill of materials, and other production-related documents.
Investment Management Overview
The Investment Management (IM) component provides functions to support the planning, investment, and financing processes for:
Capital investments, such as the acquisition of fixed assets as the result of of-house production or purchase
Investments in research and development
Projects that fall primarily under overhead, such as continuing education of employees or establishing new markets.
The term investment, therefore, is not limited only to investments you capitalize for bookkeeping or tax purposes. An investment in this context can be any measure that initially causes costs, and that may only generate revenue or provide other benefits after a certain time period has elapsed (for example, plant maintenance projects).
The IM component contains functions for managing investments in the area of fixed assets. Financial assets are managed in the Treasury component.
The integrated planning process allows you to roll up planned values from appropriation requests and measures on the investment program to which they are assigned. You carry out budgeting measures, on the other hand, from the top down within the investment program.
Implementation considerations
For information on implementing the IM component, refer to the Implementation Guide (IMG) for Investment Management. Choose SAP Customizing Implementation Guide → Investment Management.
Integration
The investment program and the appropriation request are objects that originate in the IM component. In order to represent the measure, the IM component uses internal orders from Overhead Cost Controlling - Overhead Orders (CO-OM-OPA) and Plant Maintenance (PM), as well as work breakdown structure (WBS) elements from the Project System (PS).
The integration with Asset Accounting (FI-AA) enables you to easily capitalize on the costs of internal orders and WBS elements that require capitalization to a fixed asset. Costs that do not require capitalization can be settled to cost accounting.
You can post acquisitions to a measure in the Logistics components of the SAP System.
Features Integration in Materials Management
As a component of Materials Management, Inventory Management is directly linked with Material Requirements Planning, Purchasing, and Invoice Verification.
Inventory Management provides information for MRP, which takes into account not only physical stocks but also planned movements (requirements, receipts).
When a material is ordered from a vendor, Inventory Management posts the delivery as a goods receipt with reference to the purchase order. The vendor invoice is processed later by Invoice Verification. Here, the quantities and values from the purchase order and the goods receipt document are checked to ensure that they match those in the invoice.
Integration in Production Planning
Inventory Management is closely linked to the Production Planning module:
Inventory Management is responsible for the staging of the components required for production orders.
The receipt of the finished products in the warehouse is posted in Inventory Management.
Integration in Sales & Distribution
As soon as you enter a sales order, you can initiate a dynamic availability check of stocks on hand.
When the delivery is created, the quantity to be delivered is marked as "Scheduled for delivery". It is deducted from the total stock when the goods issue is posted.
It is also possible to create sales order stocks.
Integration in Quality Management
In the case of a goods movement, the system determines whether the material is subject to inspection operation. If so, a corresponding activity is initiated for the movement in the Quality Management system
Integration in Plant Maintenance
Inventory Management is linked with Plant Maintenance as follows:
It is possible to post goods movements with reference to equipment BOMs.
It is possible to withdraw parts for maintenance orders.
When serial number management is active, the individual serial numbers are entered in the case of every goods movement. Serial numbers are managed in the Plant Maintenance system.
Integration in the Logistics Information System
With the Inventory Controlling component, the Logistics Information System offers a tool for collecting, compressing and evaluating inventory management data.
Inventory Management and the Warehouse Management System
The Inventory Management system can be extended by the Warehouse Management system (LE-WM) which manages storage bins in complex warehouse structures.
While Inventory Management manages the stocks by quantity and value, the Warehouse Management component reflects the special structure of a warehouse and monitors the allocation of the storage bins and any transfer transactions in the warehouse.
Reporting in Inventory Management
Use: To simplify your day-to-day work with the Inventory Management component, there is a range of functions and reports that provide extensive information on all materials with their stock data. This section provides an overview of the reporting function in Inventory Management. For more information, refer to the documentation on each function or the relevant report documentation.
List displays: This provides reports for documents posted in Inventory Management. Example: material documents for a material.
Stock: This provides information on a material’s stocks. Example: current stock/requirements list. The stock overview provides an overview of all stocks of material overall organizational levels.
Information: This allows you to display data (master data, transaction/movement data) from other applications. Example: displaying a purchase order.
Balances display: This provides reports on the GR/IR clearing account.
Consignment: You can use this to display all information on consignment stocks. Example: displaying vendor consignment stock.
73:T5688,
SAP Lumira
Welcome to SAP Lumira Tutorials. The objective of these tutorials is to gain an in-depth understanding of SAP HANA.SAP Lumira is known as a visual intelligence tool that is used to visualize data and create stories to provide graphical details of the data. Data is entered in Lumira as a dataset and you can apply filters, hierarchies, and columns to prepare documents. You can choose various charts like Bar charts, Pie charts, etc. to visualize the data effectively. In addition to SAP Lumira Tutorials, we will cover common interview questions and issues of SAP HANA.
SAP Lumira Introduction
SAP Lumira (formerly called SAP Visual Intelligence) is a self-service, data visualization application for business users.
SAP Lumira grew out of SAP Business Explorer, the company's previous, but more basic, self-service data visualization tool. According to SAP, the two are meant to go hand-in-hand. For example, analysts using SAP Lumira can alter data structures and correlations in whatever way they want, without the help of their IT department, then push the data back into the system so it can then be consumed by more casual users in tools like Business Explorer.
SAP Lumira can either be used in conjunction with the SAP HANA in-memory platform or without. SAP announced the general availability of SAP Lumira during the 2012 SAP Sapphire Now conference in Orlando, Florida, although it was known as SAP Visual Intelligence at the time. SAP announced that it had formally renamed the application SAP Lumira, at the following Sapphire conference in 2013.
SAP Lumira, standard edition allows you to connect to and visualize nearly any type of business data, whether it resides in various enterprise databases, the cloud, or spreadsheets. You can combine, enrich, and visualize data for immediate insights. Start making sense of all your data – go beyond static spreadsheets and basic presentations – without the complexity of traditional reporting.
With SAP Lumira, standard edition you can
Acquire and enrich spreadsheet and enterprise data, connecting to SAP BusinessObjects Universe, SAP HANA, freehand SQL, Hortonworks Sandbox, MapR Sandbox, and many other sources.
Maximize data knowledge and get the most up-to-date information without any coding or support from IT
Expand your business intelligence by merging multiple datasets into meaningful visualizations
Discover hidden insights by exploring any amount and any type of data in real-time, without sacrificing performance or security
Unify your view of the business by bringing together data from enterprise sources across all lines of business as well as personal sources on your desktop
Share data visualizations and collaborate with colleagues and business partners using SAP Lumira, the Edge edition
Explore data and get answers on the go by publishing visualizations to SAP Lumira, the Edge edition
SAP Lumira is data manipulation and visualization tool. You can connect to various data sources, select and clean data, manipulate and visualize data with a diverse offer of graphical charts and tables. SAP Lumira is installed locally and can operate on data either remotely or on locally stored datasets. The charts that are created can be saved and sent out by email. Your datasets can be published to SAP Hana, SAP Explorer, the SAP Lumira Cloud, and SAP Streamwork activities. The charts that you create in SAP Lumira are saved in documents with the file format.SViD. This is a document that contains the data source connection information, the data definition and data, and the visualizations.
SAP Lumira Overview
Basically, SAP Lumira enables business users to access, transform, and visualize data of any size in a repeatable and self-service manner. The tool emphasizes a simple user-friendly interface and creates very captivating visualizations that allow users to swiftly analyze data without the need for scripting.
SAP Lumira’s drag-and-drop interface is easy to become familiar with, and with a few clicks data from multiple sources can be gathered, combined, and visualized. After the tool is installed and system access is set up, training is really not needed, but some basics by someone who knows the tool can be helpful.
SAP Lumira’s capabilities include:
Maximizing business knowledge by integrating wide-scale insights and drill-down to granular details
Accelerating decision-making with immediate fact-based solutions to intricate business questions by avoiding list tables and fixed format reports. Interaction is key.
Increasing self-service data usage without increasing the workload of the IT department
Visualizing any amount of data in real-time using SAP HANA and simple deployment to mobile devices.
Create a document and acquire a dataset from a Microsoft Excel file
Click on New Document
Acquire a dataset from a universe.Create a New Document
Select Universe
Design Query.
Acquire a dataset from a database using Freehand SQL
Create a new document
Provide details
Select Source table & Write Query
Building Visualizations and Storyboards
1Manage measures in a dataset-Execute Query
Delete column
Create a measure
Sort, rank, calculate, and filter values in a visualization-Execute any Query
Select any measure & set order
Can calculate
Sharing Results
Export a dataset as a HANA-Execute Query
Create a View
Publish a dataset to SAP BusinessObjects Explorer-Create a Query & publish to Explorer
Select Folder & Click on Publish
Log on to launchpad & check your report in a folder
It allows you to predict future outcomes and forecast as per the changing market situations.
You can create data visualizations and stories from multiple data sources.
It helps you to adapt data to organizational needs to create stories with visualizations.
You can share the visualizations on different platforms like SAP HANA, BO Explorer, Business Objects BI Platform, etc.
Conclusion
Overall, the SAP Lumira Cloud is the best tool available in the present market that lets us analyze data and collaborate with colleagues on datasets, stories, and other business intelligence artifacts from web browsers or mobile devices
74:T41f8,
Data Analytics in SAP
SAP Predictive Analysis is a statistical analysis and data mining solution that enables you to build predictive models to discover hidden insights and relationships in your data, from which you can make predictions about future events. With SAP Predictive Analysis, you can perform various analyses on the data, including time series forecasting, outlier detection, trend analysis, classification analysis, segmentation analysis, and affinity analysis. This application enables you to analyze data using different visualization techniques, such as scatter matrix charts, parallel coordinates, cluster charts, and decision trees. SAP Predictive Analysis offers a range of predictive analysis algorithms, supports the use of the R open-source statistical analysis language, and offers in-memory data mining capabilities for handling large-volume data analysis efficiently. Note: SAP Predictive Analysis inherits data acquisition and data manipulation functionality from SAP Lumira. SAP Lumira is a data manipulation and visualization tool. Using SAP Lumira, you can connect to various data sources such as flat files, relational databases, in-memory databases, and SAP BusinessObjects universes, and can operate on different volumes of data, from a small matrix of data in a CSV file to a very large dataset in SAP HANA, select and clean data, and manipulate data. Basics of SAP Predictive Analysis Component A component is the basic processing unit of SAP Predictive Analysis. Each component contains input and/or output anchors (connection points). These anchors are used to connect components through connectors. When you connect components together, data is transmitted from predecessor components to their successor components. SAP Predictive Analysis consists of the following components: Data preparation Algorithms Data writers You can access components from the Designer view of the Predict panel. After you have added components to the analysis editor, the status icon of a component allows you to identify its state. The following are the states of a component: (Not Configured): This state is displayed when you drag a component onto the analysis editor. It indicates that the component needs to be configured before running the analysis. (Configured): This state is displayed once all the necessary properties are configured for the component. (Success): This state is displayed after the successful execution of the analysis. (Failure): This state is displayed if this component causes the execution of the analysis to fail. Analysis An analysis is a series of different components connected together in a particular sequence with connectors, which define the direction of the data flow. Model A model is a reusable component created by training an algorithm using historical data. In-Database (In-DB) In-database (in-DB) is an analysis execution mode in which data processing is performed within the database using data mining capabilities. In this mode, the data is never taken out of the database for processing and hence the processing speed is very high. This mode can be used to process large data sets. SAP HANA supports in-DB data mining through R integration and Predictive Analysis Library (PAL). In-Process (In-Proc) In-Process is an analysis execution mode in which the data processing is performed by taking data out of the database into the predictive analysis process space. This type of analysis is also referred to as Out-DB analysis. To launch SAP Predictive Analysis, choose Start > All Programs > SAP Business Intelligence > SAP Predictive Analysis > SAP Predictive Analysis Understanding SAP Predictive Analysis When you launch SAP Predictive Analysis, the home page appears. The home page contains information that helps you get started with SAP Predictive Analysis. It also has a Samples folder, which contains two SAP Predictive Analysis sample documents such as Customer Satisfaction Analysis and Revenue Forecasting Analysis. You can also view the SAP Predictive Analysis sample documents in SAP Lumira using the SAP Predictive Analysis license key. To start analyzing data using SAP Predictive Analysis, you need to first connect to the data source and acquire data for analysis. After acquiring data, you can perform the following operations on data: Prepare data for analysis by applying data manipulation and data cleansing functions Analyze data by applying data mining and statistical analysis algorithms Share datasets and charts with external collaborators Once you have acquired data from the data source, you need to switch to the Predict panel to analyze data Designer View The Designer view enables you to design and run analyses, and to create predictive models. .
Results View The Results view enables you to understand data and analysis results by using various visualization techniques and intuitive charts.
Using SAP Predictive Analysis from Start to Finish The following is an overview of the process you can follow to build a chart based on a dataset. The process is not a linear one, and you can move from one step back to a preceding step to fine-tune your chart or data. Connecting to Data Sources Connect to an SAP HANA analytic view Open Predictive Analysis
Select SAP HANA Online Connect to a universe data source
Aspired to become an SAP BO?
Explore the post to discover the know-hows on SAP BO Training.
Create new document Connect to a Freehand SQL data source Open New document & Select any DataBase Provide Data Base Details Write SQL Query & Execute it Manipulating Data Add columns using functions and formulas Execute predictive Analysis Go to Manipulation Tools(Tab) & go to Create new Function & Select as “Round” View data with Geo Code Sharing Results Share data visualizations Prepare a report Publish dataset to SAP Explorer Execute Query Select Excel sheet Connect to SAP BO Server Create an Analysis Open A predictive View Go to Data Preparation(tab) & Select Sample Set Options Go to Algorithms(Tab) & select R-K Means Select Measures Run the Query
Are you planning to attend an interview for the SAP PS Developer role but confused about how to crack that interview also what would be the most probable SAP PS Interview Questions that the interviewer may ask? Well, you have reached the right place. Tekslate has collected the most frequently asked SAP PS Interview Questions which are often asked in multiple interviews.
Ans: Project System provides tools to track project milestones, costs, and resources. SAP's Project System module contains tight integration to the Controlling, Human Resources, and Logistics modules. It utilizes personnel records from HR, rolls costs into Controlling and links to materials or customers in the Logistics modules.
Two key objects that define the Project in SAP are:
Work Breakdown Structure: defines tasks and assign resources to those tasks
Network: defines the dependencies within the Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)
Q2) What is WBS?
Ans: A Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) is a model of a project and shows the project activities to be fulfilled in a hierarchical form. It forms the operative basis for planning costs, revenues, and payments, as well as for scheduling, and budgeting. It also shows responsibility.
One definition from the Project Management Institute is as follows:
The Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) is a key planning tool used to define a project in terms of its deliverables while providing a method for breaking these deliverables into meaningful work efforts.
It is the functional basis for further planning steps in a project, for example, for process planning, cost planning, scheduling, capacity planning or costing, as well as project control.
It provides a clear picture of the project and facilitates the coordination and implementation of the project from a management standpoint.
It shows the work involved in a project.
Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) is created under an object known as Project definition.
Q3) For raising Client billing, is there any possibility of linking line items in the SD module with Activities / WBS in the PS module?
Ans: It can be linked through DIP Profile and do Resource Related Billing for raising billing.
Q4) Can Revenues be linked with Activities?
Ans: No, it can be done at the WBS level with the 'Billing' operative indicator.
Q5) Can progress be updated in WBS elements?
Ans: Yes, You can use Progress Analysis (EVA) for this.
Q6) Workforce Planning and Project Status?
Ans: When a project status is set back to REL from TECO or CLSD status, the workforce planning done is getting deleted completely at the activity. Run cmp9(Evaluation again) and you will have workforce planning back.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP PS? Enrol in Instructor-Led live SAP PS Training to get Job Ready!
Q7) What is Easy Cost Planning?
Ans: It is another function for planning costs at the WBS elements level. It uses the existing Controlling, purchasing, or MM data in the form of cost items. Also, you can have predefined costing models to simplify repeated entries.
Q8) What are settlement rules?
Ans: Settlement rules are nothing but settling the account for a cost centre. Which WBS are accounts assigned the cost of the corresponding WBS should be settled to the respective cost centre assigned for that WBS. The settlement rule is assigned in a settlement profile in which you will define (like asset) the rules of the settlement.
Q9) What do you understand by Project?
Ans: A project is a system that involves 1. project, sub-project, activities & tasks. It will have good integration with the other modules like MM, Fi/co, & PM modules.
Q10) How can PS be linked to COPA? How will the settlement take place in this case (when PS is linked to Controlling through COPA)?
Ans: The settlement will take place via a profitability segment. Level 1 WBS should have a settlement rule defined to be settled to PSG and level 2 WBS should be settled to superior one WBS element. The main level 1 WBS/ Project will be settled to PSG and variance will be posted to COPA.
Q11) What is SAP-Project System?
Ans: Project System is a Project management tool from SAP. Which has very good integration with the other modules of SAP like FI, CO, MM, SD, PP, HR, and DMS? This module basically coordinates and controls all the phases of a project, in direct coordination with purchasing and controlling, from quotation to design and approval to resource management and cost settlement.
Also besides the integration with the SAP module, this Project system also has an integration with third-party popular Project management tools like Microsoft Projects and Primavera.
Q12) What is Project Definition?
Ans: Project definition is a binding framework in SAP for all organizational elements created within a project (e.g. WBS and Networks). Data like company code, plant, and the person responsible can default into WBS if initially entered in the project definition. Such data can also default into the project definition via the project profile which will then default it to subsequent WBS.
Q13) What is Project Coding Mask?
Ans: Project Coding helps display complex project numbers. They can also be used to indicate the position of a WBS element in the project hierarchy.
We can create a mask for every key you want to use in project coding. Project Definition has to be unique in the SAP System and also WBS Element has to be unique in the SAP System.
Project code is changeable and the hierarchy can be changed up to a certain point of project status.
Project Code has 2 parts
Part 1: Project Identifier (Project Coding Mask)
Part 2: Project Number (usually a serial number)
Every project begins with a Project ID (max. 5 Characters), Using separators to distinguish the different WBS levels. e.g.: "/", "-", "."
Q14) Explain What is unit costing?
Ans: Unit costing is a means of recording all the costs - direct and indirect - associated with the delivery of services. The total cost of service provision is divided by the total amount of service provided.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP SD? Enrol in Instructor-Led live SAP SD Trainingto get Job Ready!
Q15) What is the milestone triggering?
Ans: Whenever the confirmation of activities is done and if the milestone is attached to that particular activity the milestone triggers the milestone as per the configuration done and it will do the billing through the SD module.
SAP PS Module Interview Questions
Q16) How do LSMW and BAPI work?
Ans: LSMW is an encapsulated data transfer tool. It can provide the same functionality as BDC in fact much more but when coming from a technical perspective most of the parameters are encapsulated.
To list out some of the differences :
LSMW is basically designed for a functional consultant who does not do much coding but needs to explore the functionality while BDC is designed for a technical consultant.
LSMW offers different techniques for migrating data: Direct input, BAPI, Idoc, and Batch input recording. While BDC basically uses recording.
LSMW mapping is done by SAP while in BDC we have to do it explicitly.
LSMW is basically for standard SAP applications while BDC is basically for customized applications.
Q17) How can PS be linked to COPA? How will the settlement take place in this case (when PS is linked to Controlling through COPA)?
Ans: Level 1 WBS should have a settlement rule defined to be settled to PSG and level 2 WBS should be settled to superior one WBS element. The main level 1 WBS/ Project will be settled to PSG, and variance will be posted to COPA.
Q18) How to calculate WIP in PS for all wbs pertaining to that particular project? Any specific Tcode in ECC 6.0?
Ans: KKA2 for calculating result Analysis;
KKAJ - for calculating WIP.
Q19) What are the parameters of the Project System?
Ans: There are several parameters to define here at the level of the structure. First, it's the Project Definition (Proj. Profile), then we have the WBS Level, and then, if used, the Network/Activity/Sub Activity Level. You may include components and services. The configuration goes into Proj. Definition, WBS, and Activity profiles.
Q20) What do Activities, NTW, and WBS represent?
Ans: WBS and Networks are two structures that differ in the way in which they enable you to structure projects and in the functions provided for them in the SAP system. For example, if you need a hierarchical budget management function for a project, you would want to use a WBS structure. If, in addition, you also want to do capacity planning, you would have to use one or several networks as well. Depending on the specific requirements you may be able to map a project only via a WBS structure, or by using only one or several networks, or a combination of both.
Q21) What is the menu path & T. Code for defining special characters for Projects?
Ans: It can be found at the following location:
Project System >>> Structures >>> Operative Structures >>> Work Breakdown Structures >>> Project Coding Mask >>> Define Special Characters for Projects
Transaction is OPSK
Q22) The structure of NTW is similar to what type of order?
Ans: Maintenance order.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP BW on Hana? Enrol in Instructor-Led live SAP BW on Hana Training to get Job Ready!
Q23) What is the impact of the coding mask on the project and where is it created (menu path)?
Ans: Coding masks contain sections for the external identification of projects, and they are separated by special characters. A section consists either of numbers that are represented by "0" characters in the coding mask, or alphanumeric characters that are represented by "X" characters in the mask. You can store a descriptive text for each coding mask and use lock indicators to control whether the key and the associated mask can be used for operative or standard WBS structures.
Project System >>> Structures >>> Operative Structures >>> Work Breakdown Structures >>> Project Coding Mask >>> Define Project Coding Mask
Transaction is OPSJ
Q24) How to set the field status of WBS as mandatory, (WBS Element, NTW)?
Ans: There are five different transactions. Project Definition, WBS Elements, Network Header, Networks Overview and Network Details. There you will see a table with radio buttons that indicate whether a field should be set as Input, Required (mandatory), Display, or Hide. You can also define Influence Fields and Field Groups.
For Project Definition and WBS Elements:
Project System >>> Structures >>> Operative Structures >>> Work Breakdown Structures >>> User Interface Settings >>> Define Field Selection for Work Breakdown Structures
Transactions are OPUK (Project Definition), OPUJ (WBS Elements)
For Networks:
Project System >>> Structures >>> Operative Structures >>> Network >>> User Interface Settings >>> Define Field Selection for Networks
Transactions are OPUA (Header), OPUB (Overview), OPUC (Details)
Q25) Difference between validation & substitution?
Ans: Substitution enables us to automatically change master data fields of Project Definitions, WBS Elements, Network Headers, and Activities. For example, you can automatically set the cost centre 9999 for those WBS Elements into which responsible persons with numbers 0 to 20 have been entered.
Validation enables you to carry out self-defined checks for master data fields of the same elements. But the result of validations consists of informational messages, warnings, or error messages. For example, you can validate that projects with a specific project profile always begin with the same key.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP BASIS? Enrol in Instructor-Led live SAP BASIS Training to get Job Ready!
Q26) What do time profiles do?
Ans: The profile is part of the"Planning Board Profile" and it determines the beginning and the end of the evaluation and planning periods. This means that pre-evaluation and post-evaluation periods are defined automatically. This is how the Planning Board is displayed graphically.
Q27) Where do we define time profiles? What is the evaluation period?
Ans: The evaluation period is the period in which you want to control your project, and it will be displayed on your planning board. Don't get confused with scheduling, which is how time is managed in a project.
Project System >>> Structures >>> Project Planning Board >>> Define Time Profiles
Transactions are OPTY
Q28) What are the different time profiles?
Ans: There are two, but you can define your own. SAPPS_Z001 and SAPPS_Z002.
Q29) What are the fields in the pricing procedure?
Ans: There are 16 fields that are given below:
Step
Counter
Condition type
Description
From
To
Manual
Mandatory
Statistic
Print
Subtotal
Requirement
Alternative calculation type
Alternative condition base value
Account key
Accrual
SAP PS Certification Questions
Q30) What are the Standard output types in SD?
Ans: BA00 for order LD00 for delivery RD00 for billing and RD03 for Cash sales.
Q31) What is Condition type?
Ans: Condition type is a pricing element such as a discount, freight, or surcharge. This is used in pricing procedures to represent condition records.
Q32) What is the difference between the delivery document & scheduling?
Ans: The delivery document is an electronic document that stores when how much quantity of materials and where the materials should go on the other side, scheduling represents when materials will be delivered in that case backward scheduling and forward scheduling are used.
Q33) How is the item category determined?
Ans: In general item category determination is happened through sales document type+item usage+item category group+higher level item category +default item category
In the creation of the reference document, item category determination happens from copy control where the source item category is to the target item category. if it is not maintained, item category determination has happened though normal determination like sales document type+ item usage+item category group + higher-level item category+default item category.
Q34) What is Extract used in condition tech? in pricing?
Ans: Condition table+Access sequence+Condition type+pricing procedure=condition technique. The above extract is used to find a suitable condition record.
Q35) What is the difference between plant and storage location?
Ans: A plant may be delivering plant and production plant or a storage plant. In Sales and Distribution, since the plant is assigned to the sales organization and distribution channel, it is called delivering plant.
Q36) What is the purpose of the transaction code in SYSTEM?
Ans: The transaction code is the short path to reach a specific screen in the SYSTEM. Instead of going through the routine menu, you can enter the Transaction Code and then press “Enter,” which would directly take you to the specific transaction. For example, you can access the VA22 transaction code to reach the Change Quotation screen. However, the VA01 transaction code is used to create a Sales document in SYSTEM.
Q37) What is meant by match code in SYSTEM?
Ans: The comparison key that helps you to find the key of a specific database record, depending on the field value entered in the record, is known as the match code. On the basis of the match code, the system then displays a list of records from which you can select the appropriate one.
Q38) Explain the three main areas of customer master data.
Ans: The customer master is a part of the SD module and forms the basis for customer-related transactions. It is divided into three areas:
General Data—It is used for the maintenance of general customer details such as name, address, phone/fax nos., and so on.
Sales Area Data—It is used for Sales-related data maintenance.
Company Code data—It is used for accounts-related data maintenance.
Q39) What is the purpose of the Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) in the SYSTEM?
Ans: The Implementation Guide (IMG Menu) is used to collectively group the areas that must be configured and customized, and form a basic structure of an organization in the System to run.
Q40) How will you maintain a company code in a SYSTEM?
Ans: To maintain a company code, navigate the following menu path:
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP MDG? Enrol in Instructor-Led live SAP MDG Training to get Job Ready!
Q41) What do you mean by Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)?
Ans: ERP is a way to integrate processes and data of an organization into a single system to provide easy access and workflow in an organization. It refers to the way in which large organizations efficiently plan to use resources to their fullest.
Q42) List the advantages of implementing an ERP system in an organization.
Ans: The advantages of implementing an ERP system in an organization are as follows:
Various processes and workflows of an organization are integrated into a single system.
Efficient utilization of resources in an organization.
Ability to easily share organizational data across different departments.
Improves efficiency and productivity levels.
Lower costs.
Better customer service.
Q43) What is the relationship in SAP PS?
Ans: Relationship basically denotes how activities in a network order are related to each other. They can be classified into 4 categories - SS (Start-Start), SF(Start-Finish), FF (Finish-Finish), and FS (Finish-Start). For 2 activities say A and B
SS -->> Both A and B start together
SF -->> Start of A coincides with the finish of B and so on.
We can also specify the time gap between which these relationships work. Say in an SS relationship, there can be a 10 minutes gap between the start of A and B and so on.
Q44) What mean by valuated stock, and non-valuated stock? Which category you are using in po&pr?
Ans: In Valuated stock, every material in stock is managed on both a quantity basis and a value basis. The monetary value of each quantity of material is calculated separately. while non-valuated material is maintained as per quantity and not on the basis of its value.
Q45) What is the Primary integration for PS?
Ans:
1. Controlling (CO):
Substantial integration exists between PS and CO. This is because PS relies on so many objects that belong to CO for Integrated Cost Planning, Settlement, Results Analysis, Resource Planning, and any reporting that involves Cost Elements. Controlling Area is the most obvious connection, without which PS could not function. In Workforce Planning via Work Centres/Activity Types, there is integration with Human Resources (HR) to register personnel who are assigned to projects.
2. Materials Management (MM):
Based on Materials and BOMs, PS has the ability to create Reservations, Purchase Requisitions and Purchase Orders via Easy Cost Planning Execution Services and Networks in general. This powerful integration makes PS a key player in the logistics cycle, including the ability to handle Services via Service Masters. Further, the ability of Networks to work with Catalogues takes PS into SRM (Supply Relationship Management), where the internet plays a large part in sourcing materials. Additionally, PS can help manage the MRP (Material Requirements Planning) cycle with its MRP Grouping functionality. PS is the ‘owner’ of the ProMan facility which tracks and helps manage all the Procurement document flows.
3. Sales and Distribution (SD):
PS has a fairly straightforward integration with SD via Order Numbers. All SD Orders (Quotations, Sales Orders, Consignment Orders, etc) can be assigned to a project for the purpose of planning revenue, creating Billing Plans, and attracting costs. DIP Profiles (Dynamic Item Processors) assist in the process of simulating and automatically creating Sales Documents, plus providing a means to bill customers based on activity within a project (Resource-Related Billing). Additionally, Assembly Processing provides the means for a Sales Order or Quotation to automatically generate a Project using Configurable Materials.
4. Finance (FI):
As PS is primarily a Cost Planner and Cost Collector and therefore a slave to FI/CO, its primary objects (WBS and Network) rely on actual expenditure to manage Account Determination, which is really the Chart of Accounts. Ultimately, all costs end up somewhere in Finance. Cash-flow management is also a feature that PS can be used for, via Funding Areas in Treasury.
5. Production Planning (PP):
Though not a major player in the PS side of integration, it is via MM that PP is informed of Production Orders using special settings in the Material Master.
6. Plant Maintenance (PM):
At the heart of this integration is Maintenance Orders, which like most external orders can connect to PS for Planning and Settlement purposes. Generally, Maintenance and Service Orders apply to Capital or Customer-based projects, where equipment serviced on-site can be managed in a Project.
7. Investment Management (IM):
Quite a substantial amount of integration here. IM seamlessly integrates with PS to manage Assets Under Construction (AUCs). Cost Planning can be managed in PS, sent to Investment Programs, and returned to the project as a managed Budget. AUCs are automatically generated when a project is released, so there is a relatively important connection to Fixed Assets.
Q46) What is the Standard Project Structure?
Ans: Standard structures in Project Systems can be found in Standard project definitions and in Standard WBS These standard structures can be used as a template to standardize project management.
This brings about the advantage of Making the processing of projects more transparent (everyone creates an operative project from a standard project), Enabling comparison of projects with similar structures, Facilitates project controlling.
Standard project templates CANNOT be used to capture any actual data (e.g. costs, actual materials used) and they serve as a quick way to create an operative project during the implementation stage. As such, it is recommended that nominated users maintain these standard project templates at least once a year or whenever there are process changes for each type of project.
76:T5422,
Are you planning to attend an interview for the SAP UI Developer role but are confused about how to crack that interview also what would be the most probable SAP UI5 Interview Questions that the interviewer may ask? Well, you have reached the right place. Tekslate has collected the most frequently asked SAP UI5 Interview Questions which are often asked in multiple interviews.
Ans: Just like any other HTML5 client-side rendering library, SAPUI5 is also one. SAPUI5 strictly follows RIA (Rich Internet Application) standards. It is based on JavaScript which provides a lightweight programming model for desktop as well as mobile applications.
Q2) Why SAPUI5?
Ans:As the HTML5 world is the new age front technology across all aspects of internet applications SAP was kind of trailing in this age because SAP was using age-old Web Dynpro for building SAP Web Applications which lacks rich and user-friendly UI. SAP identified this and came up with its own custom HTML5 library i.e. SAPUI5.
Q3) Explain the Navigation concept in SAPUI5?
Ans:SAPUI5 uses two mechanisms for navigation in applications that are EventBus and Routing where the latter supersedes since SAPUI5 1.16.sap.ui.core.routing is the class used for the routing. We define routing in components metadata in the “routing” key.
Q4) What is a Component?
Ans:Component or Component.js is the first point of our application or we can say that it serves as an index that encapsulates all our application details i.e. view names, routing details, main view, applications type(Fullscreen or SplitApp), application service configuration, etc.
Q5) What is the difference between HTML5 and SAPUI5?
Ans:HTML5 is a markup language, It doesn’t have programming capabilities but SAPUI5 is a framework that is based on the MVC approach to building web applications. HTML5 is mainly for the purpose of creating a simple webpage without formatting and logic but UI5 provides standard style and components to build rich UIs.
Want to become expert in building Responsive web applications, enroll in our SAP UI5 Training
Q6) What is MVC?
Ans:MVC stands for model view controller; it’s an architecture to design UI based applications to achieve maximum reusability and extensibility of the application for future changes. Model is the representation of data in the form of the object, View defines the UI and the Controller contains all the logic to drive as well connects view with model.
Q7) When and How to use formatting in SAPUI5?
Ans: We need to use formatter when we need to perform some changes on the back end property data on the front end. we can use formatter while data binding to a property like as follows: oControl = new sap.ui.commons.TextField({value : {path : “/path”, formatter : function(oEvent){return “Value:”+oEvent;}}});
Q8) What all design patterns are recommended/available in SAPUI5?
Ans:SAP recommends following application design patterns keeping in mind the design consistency of the applications:
Master-Detail
Master-Master-Detail
Fullscreen
Fullscreen-Fullscreen-Master Detail (Multi Flow)
Q9) What types of views are available in SAPUI5?
Ans:There are following predefined three types of view available in SAPUI5:
JSON view
JavaScript View(JS View)
HTML View
Q10) What is formatted in SAPUI5 and how to use it?
Ans:We need to use formatter when we need to perform some changes on the back-end property data on the front end. we can use formatter while data binding to a property like as follows: oControl = new sap.ui.commons.TextField({ value : {path : “/path”, formatter : function(oEvent){ return “Value:”+oEvent; }}});
Q11) What all types of data models available in SAPUI5?
Ans:As SAPUI5 follows MVC(Model-View-Controller) there model plays a crucial role in the framework. SAPUI5 has the following predefined four data models available:
XML Model: Client-side model intended for small data sets this is a very rarely used, model.
Resource Model:This is also a client-side model used to maintain resource bundles, especially texts.
OData Model:This is the most important model of the four provided. This is the server-side model, that supports two-way binding ODATA model currently supports OData version 2.0.
Q12) What are the Lifecycle methods of the SAPUI5 views controller?
Ans:There are four Lifecycle methods available in every SAPUI5 view controller.
These are
onInit()
onExit()
on after rendering()
on before rendering()
onInit is called when a view is instantiated and its controls (if available) have already been created;
onExit is called when the view is destroyed, used to free resources and finalize activities;
on after rendering when the view has been rendered and therefore its HTML is part of the document;
on before rendering is called before the controller view is re-rendered and not before the first rendering.
Q13) What is the main difference between OData Model and JSON Model?
Ans:The JSON model is a client-side model and, therefore, intended for small datasets, which are completely available on the client. The OData model is a server-side model: the dataset is only available on the server and the client only knows the currently visible rows and fields.
SAP UI5 FIORI Interview Questions
Q14) What are the SAPUI5 Fragments?
Ans:Fragments are very lightweight UI controls and part of another UI. Fragments are not completely like views but they act as a view. Fragments are defined similar to views and are names like “myFragment.fragment.xml“.
Q15) Does Fragment have its own controller?
Ans:Fragments are created without controllers, they don’t have their own controllers they share the controller of the view which is invoking it.
Q16) In how many ways you can bind data to your controls?
Ans:We can bind data to any controls using three methods, Property, Element, and Aggregation binding.
Q17) What is SAPUI5 Bootstrapping?
Ans:SAPUI5 Bootstrapping means loading and initializing SAPUI5 on any HTML page. The most important library or resource loaded in SAPUI5 bootstrap is “sap-UI-core.js”. Apart from this theme for the application, SAPUI5 libraries, etc are declared in the bootstrapping.
Q18) What are the Metadata Annotations?
Ans:The service metadata document describes the structure of all resources in the service. This structural metadata makes it easy to understand a service. We can explore service metadata at the address “$metadata” relative to the service root.
Q19) What are common Metadata Annotations?
Ans:Following are some of the service metadata annotations which are common and a front-end developer must know these in order to understand the service and integrate it:
Q20) What is the difference between SAP Fiori and SAPUI5?
Ans:SAP FIORI is a collection of standard applications based on the SAPUI5 library provided by SAP. SAP FIORI applications share some standard design guidelines and the way in which these applications are developed.
Q21) How many types of Fiori applications are there?
Ans: There are 3 types of Fiori applications:
Transactional
Analytical
Fact Sheets
Q22) What is the difference between SAP Fiori and SAPUI5?
Ans: SAP FIORI is a collection of standard applications based on the SAPUI5 library provided by SAP. SAP FIORI applications share some standard design guidelines and the way in which these applications are developed.
Q23) What is FIORI Launchpad and Explain it?
Ans:It is a home page for all the FIORI applications provided. There is more than five hundred custom app provided by SAP. This shows a tile-based UI where every UI redirects to the assigned FIORI application. This Launchpad is fully customizable according to your needs like theming and all.
Q24) How can you get the web browser of the client on which the SAP Fiori application is running?
Ans:SAPUI5 library provides a special API “sap.ui.Device“which can be used for the device and its feature detection. This API provides flags like “chrome”, “firefox”, “Mozilla”, “edge” etc. in “sap. ui.Device.browser” API which returns boolean values.
Q25) What are Fiori Design Principles?
Ans:There are 5 design principles we need to keep in mind while designing SAP Fiori applications.
Role-Based
Delightful
Simple
Responsive
Coherent
Q26) What is SAP Fiori?
Ans:SAPUI5 is a client-side HTML5 rendering framework or library and SAP FIORI is a collection of and released as waves of applications that are completely based on the SAPUI5 framework. It means we can create applications using the SAPUI5 framework and SAP FIORI is the final product i.e. application. In SAPUI5 we have to code from scratch, but in Fiori Application the custom application is already built and enhancements can be done on those custom apps.
77:T65b3,
Are you planning to attend an interview for the SAP B1 Developer role but confused on how to crack that interview and also what would be the most probable SAP B1 Interview Questions that the interviewer may ask? Well, you have reached the right place. Tekslate has collected the most frequently asked SAP B1 Interview Questions which are often asked in multiple interviews.
Ans: B1 = Business One SAP Business One is an integrated enterprise resource planning (ERP) solution for small and medium-sized businesses, as well as divisions and subsidiaries of larger companies.
Q2) Can we format BEx reports/graphs using HTML and CSS?
Ans: Manual says we can do format using HTML and Java Script [not css].
Q3) Why is there a restriction of 16 Dim tables in an Info Cube and 16 critical fields in an ODS?
Ans: In all of the database systems, there is maximum number of fields allowed to create a primary key (composite key) is 16. In the case of a cube, to fetch a single record a combination of all dimensions is used, so this is the reason behind having a maximum no. of dimensions in the cube is 16 only.
Q4) Which is the DLL's used in SAP Business One SDK?
Ans: Interop.SAP bouiCOM.dll and Interop.SAP bobs COM.dll are the two Dell's used in SAP Business One SDK. Interop.SAPbouiCOM.dll is used for accessing the user controls that are displayed over the form. Different controls such as labels, combo boxes, matrices, etc. can be accessed using Interop.SAPbouiCOM.dll. Interop.SAPbobsCOM.dll is used for accessing objects that are used in SAP. For eg, the item objects can be accessed as, Dim objItem As SAPbobsCOM.Items
Q5) What are SAP and ERP?
Ans: SAP is the name of the company that supplies the leading ERP software released as SAP BW, SAP ERP, and various other SAP applications. The company was founded in Germany in 1972 and has released various versions of its ERP software. There are currently over eight million SAP users around the world.
ERP is an acronym for Enterprise Resource Planning. ERP applications are applications that are designed to create a real-time view of the core business processes within a company so that the company can monitor and manage its processes efficiently. ERP software tracks the day-to-day transactions and processes within a company. ERP software tracks various business resources like cash, raw materials, production capacity, and sales. Data is shared between the various company departments. ERP packages are therefore often integrated applications that span the various business processes within the business. Databases are the most popular storage method for shared information. For more information on SAP basics, you can read the SAP Basics and Resources to Help You Learn More article available on the Udemy blog.
Q6) Why do we have only 16 Dimension tables in a cube? Is there any reason? Is it a limitation?
Ans:SAP BI Info Cube Can have a maximum of 16 Dimensions, Why because a Cube shape will have only 16 Dimensions and also Normal database table will have only 16 key fields. When we create the Info Cube system is going to create tables like F-table and E-table So, we should follow that database concept Because Info Cube will Have only 16 Dimensions.
Q7) Why we are going for customization? Give me a scenario.
Ans:
For Requirement as per company
Reporting As Per Module
Remove Complexity From End-User
Q8) Where do you store the master data in BI 7.0?
Ans: Unlike the older version of BW which uses star schema, BI 7.0 uses the extended star schema. In this, master data is stored outside the cube. In the star schema, both master data and transaction data reside inside the cube bringing many problems: master data is not reusable, computing of alphanumeric values, and analysis is limited. In BI 7.0 Master data is stored outside the cube which makes it reusable, and alphanumeric values can be computed and many more analyses are possible.
Q9) What are the common Transport errors in SAP BW?
Ans: NOT CORRECT USAGE. Reason: When we change the structure of any cube which has Business Warehouse Accelerator Indexes created for it. A change in structure could mean a change as simple as adding a navigational attribute. solution: Delete the Indexes (BWA Indexes)first then transport and then rebuild the indexes Info Object not available inactive version. Reason: We get this error when we try to transport the Info Object Catalogs without transporting the info objects. Solution: As a prerequisite first transport the info objects then transport info object catalogs. The navigational attribute does not exist Reason: If we mark an object in the cube as a navigational attribute and the navigational attribute does not exist as navigational in the target system. Solution: Transport the info object with a navigational attribute and then re-import this transport.
SAP B1 Certification Questions
Q10) What advantage of it with aggregates?
Ans: If we create aggregates on info cube then query performance will be improved if our query accesses attributes data frequently. The sequence when we execute the query is: Query first goes into cache if it finds relevant data in the cache will fetch data otherwise it goes into BI ACCELERATOR(BIA) Aggregates Finally it goes into IC if the data is not available in the above 3 stages. If we maintain aggregates or BIA OLAP no need to come up to IC. So time will be reduced. Query performance will be improved.
Q11) What is used in SDK for developing a form?
Ans: Screen painter is used for developing forms in SAP Business One SDK. Screen Painter is provided as an add-on by SAP and it can be used to design and develop forms. The files created by the screen painter have srf extension and these files should be renamed to XML for deploying them in SAP Business One.
Q12) Which tool is provided by SAP for keeping track of events?
Ans: SAP Business One Event Logger is a tool provided by SAP for keeping track of events. Both SAP Business One and event logger should be executed simultaneously. The event logger will give you a detailed list of events that fired while operating SAP. Event logger is a very useful tool while developing add-ons in SDK. Coding can be done as per the events that are shown in the event logger. For developing robust applications in SAP Business One SDK, an event logger is a useful tool since the entire programming in SAP Business One SDK is event-driven.
Q13) Is it possible to alter the standard behaviour of SAP Business One using SDK?
Ans: The standard behaviour or the conventional flow of SAP Business One can not be altered using SDK. Some or other errors will occur. So it is advisable not to disturb the conventional flow of SAP Business One using SDK.
Q14) What is the et_FORM_DATA_ADD event in SAP Business One SDK?
Ans: et_FORM_DATA_ADD event fires when the add button is clicked. This event adds a new record in SAP. This event can be used for validating the input received by the user. This event fires in two sessions. In the first session, an event fires before the successful execution of the event I .e.ActionSuccess.The code is as,
BusinessObjectInfo.EventType = SAPbouiCOM.BoEventTypes.et_FORM_DATA_ADD ANDBusinessObjectInfo.ActionSuccess = False The second session occurs when the action is executed successfully i.e.
Ans: SAP Business One is implemented as a two-layer architecture. The system is based on a Microsoft SQL Server database where data is stored centrally. The business logic is mostly processed on the client software (fat client).
Q16) What are the different components of SAP Business One client software?
Ans: Graphical user interface and the business object classes connecting to the database are the different components of SAP Business One client software.
Q17) Explain the difference between transfer rule&update rules.
Mapping the fields in the data source to the info objects in the Info source or target fields. it helps you to distinguish which all fields in the data source are required in the info objects in the Info source.
Update rules:
To update something. here it revolves around a source(info source)and a target(data target). update rules are used to update the data targets.you have to create update rules if you supply a data target from an Info-Source with a flexible update.
Q18) What is the function of UI API i.e. User Interface API?
Ans: UI API stands for User Interface Application Program.Dll is provided by SAP i.e. Interop.SAPbouiCOM.dll.The reference of this dll is added in the project to access it in the project. UI API is used for accessing the controls that are displayed on the form. The following are the functions of UI API
Provides objects and methods to access screen objects of the User Interface.
Provides access to internal system events of the user interface.
Provides the ability to modify or add menus, windows, or fields.
It provides one integrated user interface.
Use COM capable development tools (Microsoft Visual …)
Q19) What is the use of a company object in SAP Business One?
Ans: The following are the uses of company objects in SAP Business One -
Access Data in an SAP Business One database.
Connect to and disconnect to the customer database.
Start and end global transactions.
Work with XML data.
SAP B1 Interview Questions For Experienced
Q20) What are the different types of data sources?
Ans: The following are the different types of data sources -
Data Tables
DB Data Sources
User DataSources
Q21) What are the functions of the Data Interface API (DI API)?
Ans: Following are the functions of the Data Interface API (DI API) -
DI API provides objects and methods i.e. add, update, Remove, for performing various data-level operations. This can be done without installing the SAP Business One client.
DI API provides access to business objects i.e. master data and transnational data.
DI API can be used in COM-capable development tools (e.g. Microsoft Visual Studio). Dll SAPbobsCOM.dll is provided by SAP. Just by adding the reference of this dll, you can perform data-level operations.
Q22) What are the different types of transactions supported by DI API?
Ans: Following are the different types of transactions supported by DI API
Single Transaction
Global Transaction
Q23) What is a Bubble Event?
Ans: Bubble Event specifies whether the event will be processed by SAP Business One or not.If Bubble Event=True, then SAP Business One will process the event else the execution will terminate.
For eg,
If pVal.EventType = BoEventTypes.et_CLICK And pVal.Action_Success = True And pVal.FormUID = "F_32" And pVal.ItemUID = "btnSave" Then
BubbleEvent=False
End If
In the above code, the click event of the save button is handled. When the user clicks on the save button, then first the above code will execute and then it will be handled by SAP Business One. Here I have set BubbleEvent=False.So the click event will terminate and SAP Business One will not handle the event.
Q24) What is DBDataSource?
Ans: DBDataSource is used for storing data from the database.DBDataSource is linked to a database table and it represents tabular data.DBDataSource is used by all system forms. You can get DBDataSource as follows -
Here I have assumed that I have opened the form of Sales Order and I want to get the database details of the sales order. The table's name is ORDER.
In the above code,I have considered the textbox txtDocEntry.I want this textbox to accept numeric input only.So I have binded it with dt_LONG_NUMBER as shown above.
Q26) What are the limitations of the DI server?
Ans: Following are the limitations of DI server
Metadata operations not supported.
Different support for transaction handling than plain DI API.
Q27) What is the function of OBServerDLL.DLL?
Ans: In OBServerDLL.DLL, the business objects of the SAP Business One client are copied.
Q28) What are the different parts of DI API?
Ans: Following are the different parts of DI API
COM Interface - The COM Interface provides the interface to the add-on application.
DI Core - The DI Core, which is the main component of the DI API, performs all the data logic operations.
Data Manager - The Data Manager stores temporary object data, converts object data to internal data formats, retrieves data from the database, and controls the database transactions.
Schema Generator - The Schema Generator creates XML schemas based on object interface descriptions. The schema generator also creates object validation lists.
Q29) Where does DI server execute i.e. client or server?
Ans: DI server executes on the server.
Q30) For performing heavy-duty operations what is a suitable DI API or DI server?
Ans: For performing heavy-duty operation DI server is suitable. The DI Server implements a connection pooling mechanism to enhance the performance and scalability of the server. As DI Server is a SOAP-based interface it does not limit the client to a COM interface but allows a wide range of possible client technologies.
Q31) What is the value returned when any method of a DI API object executes successfully?
Ans: 0 is returned when any method of a DI API object executes successfully.
Q32) Which table saves the details of the country?
Ans: The OCRY table saves the details of the country.
Q33) Which property of the matrix gives the total number of rows in the matrix?
Ans: The property VisualRowCount gives the total number of rows in the matrix.
Q34) In SAP Business One SDK, which object is used for executing SQL queries and stored procedures?
Ans: In SAP Business One SDK, the recordset object is used for executing SQL queries and stored procedures.
Q35) What is the value returned by a method when it executes successfully?
Ans: 0 is the value returned by a method when it executes successfully.
Q36) What is A/R Invoice?
Ans: The acronym of A/R Invoice is Account Receivable Invoice. For selling a product, the following invoices are added in SAP Business One
Sales Quotation
Sales Order
Delivery
A/R Invoice
So A/R Invoice is the last process for the sales department. When the A/R Invoice is added, the respective accounting entries are added. The report from the A/R Invoice is sent as a bill along with the product.
Q37) What is A/P Invoice?
Ans: The acronym of A/P Invoice is Account Payable Invoice. For purchasing the goods, the following invoices are added in SAP Business One
Purchase Quotation
Purchase Order
Goods Receipt PO
A/P Invoice
So A/P Invoice is the last process for the purchasing department. When A/P Invoice is added, the accounting effect can be seen.
78:Ted1,
Introduction
Welcome to SAP MRS Tutorial. The objective of these tutorials is to provide an in-depth understanding of SAP MRS. In addition to free SAP MRS, we will cover common interview questions, issues, and how to’s of SAP MRS.
SAP Multi-Resource Scheduling
SAP MRS stands for multi-resource scheduling and planning. SAP MRS is a component of SAP ERP application and allows enterprises effortlessly to manage high-volume resources and supports operations and maintenance strategy. SAP MRS offers state-of-art features and functionalities which makes SAP MRS a must-have for service industries. SAP MRS is an add-on to the SAP ECC components. MRS provides the resource planner in various application areas with an intuitive graphical interface that contains information about open demands, the utilization of resources, and any possible conflicts with the current resource planning.
The software provides assistance in finding the relevant resources related to your demands and consecutively assign them to the demands and later these arise from the units of work corresponding to the areas of Service, project system which is the primary source of these sources of demand meant for SAP Multisource Scheduling are listed below:
With the help of SAP Multi Resource Scheduling, one can do multiple things that vary right from viewing the status of resource planning, allocating appropriate tools as well as employees that require demands from various areas.
Features of MRS
It focuses on an overview of your current planning status
It includes scheduled requests
It includes resource utilization
It concentrates on open work lists
Uses a graphical planning board
SAP MRS is supported by an alert monitor, to interactively dispatch open service requests to your available resources
Use an optimization engine to automatically create an optimized schedule
It Determines your overall request status
It also Supports your field service efficiency
It makes you Understand your resource utilization
It will take advantage of analytics
Using analytics reduces the commute times by integrating Geographical Information Systems (GIS)
Make use of mobile connectivity to update the requests for your field service personnel
79:T309f,
Are you planning to attend an interview for the SAP Lumira Developer role but confused about how to crack that interview also what would be the most probable SAP Lumira Interview Questions that the interviewer may ask? Well, you have reached the right place. Tekslate has collected the most frequently asked SAP Lumira Interview Questions which are often asked in multiple interviews.
Most Frequently Asked SAP Lumira Interview Questions
Ans:SAP Lumira Server is an agile visualization solution that allows business users to analyze massive data volumes and get unique insight in real-time. Designed for ease of use and collaboration, SAP Lumira Server lets you share compelling data stories and extend the power of big data to everyone across the enterprise.
Q2. What is the business value of the SAP Lumira Server?
Ans:Deliver faster time to insight with the latest visualization technologies.
Visualize any amount of data in real time with an intuitive drag-and-drop interface.
Maximize business knowledge with a combination of big-picture insights and granular details.
Drive immediate outcomes across your enterprise with the power of big data.
Q3. How will SAP HANA customers benefit from SAP Lumira Server?
Ans: SAP Lumira Server runs natively on the SAP HANA platform with direct and fully optimized access to analytic and calculation views in order to leverage the power of the HANA platform.
Q4. What can I do with SAP Lumira Server?
Ans: Expose HANA views as datasets on the SAP Lumira Server desktop) and publish it as a dataset on SAP Lumira Server
Create beautiful graphics and visualizations to convey and share knowledge
Show the “where” of your data using interactive maps and geolocations
Share your insights instantly making it easy to collaborate with teammates and colleagues.
Create, explore, and share datasets and analytics and made them available via web browsers or mobile devices.
Q5. Is SAP Lumira Server generally available?
Ans: Yes. SAP Lumira Server is generally available (GA) and customers can download it from SAP Service Marketplace.
Q6. Will customers require the SAP HANA platform to benefit from SAP Lumira Server?
Ans: Yes, SAP Lumira Server is a native SAP HANA software solution and requires SAP HANA.
Q7. How is SAP Lumira Server licensed?
Ans: SAP Lumira Server is currently licensed under the SAP BusinessObjects BI license model.
Q8. Is SAP Lumira “desktop” integrated with SAP Lumira Server?
Ans: Yes. SAP Lumira “desktop” and SAP Lumira Server have been designed to work as one solution. Desktop users can create visualizations and stories and make them available across the organization by publishing them on the SAP Lumira Server.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP ABAP? Enrol in Instructor-Led live SAP ABAP Training to get Job Ready!
Q9. Can I use SAP Lumira (desktop) to publish data sets on SAP Lumira Server?
Ans: Yes. SAP Lumira “desktop” and SAP Lumira Server have been designed to work as one solution. Desktop users can create visualizations and stories and make them available across the organization by publishing them on the SAP Lumira Server.
Q10. Is SAP Lumira Server a native SAP HANA application?
Ans: Yes, SAP Lumira Server is a native SAP HANA XS application hosted on and managed by the SAP HANA platform:
SAP Lumira Server can be installed using SAP HANA Lifecycle manager
Identity and access management is based on the SAP HANA platform
Support manual authentication and SSO (SAML / X.509)
Content authorization can be set at the SAP HANA-role level with a view or edit rights to the content. Content authorization respects the Data Authorization security context.
Logging and tracing via XS trace logs facility which logs in the same way as the core SAP HANA logs.
Logging uses the browser console and logs are discarded when the browser closes or moves to another URL.
Backup and recovery as SAP HANA instance
Load balancing and a reverse proxy are supported
Q11. What are the system requirements?
Ans: SAP HANA SP07 Rev 70
Q12. What are the supported browsers?
Ans: Google Chrome and Microsoft Internet Explorer 9
Q13. What are the supported languages?
Ans: Only English is supported at this time.
Q14. Which version of SAP Lumira (desktop) do I need to “connect” to SAP Lumira Server?
Ans: SAP Lumira Server currently supports SAP Lumira 1.0 SP15 (version 1.15) and up.
Q15. How do I publish stories I created using SAP Lumira (desktop)?
Ans: You will see a new "Publish to SAP Lumira Server" option under the Share tab. Select your story and click on “Publish to SAP Lumira Server”. You will be asked to enter your SAP Lumira credentials.
Q16. Can I publish data sets on SAP Lumira Server?
Ans: Yes, you can combine and enrich data from multiple sources (xlsx, relational databases, SAP BusinessObjects universes) and then publish the resulting dataset to SAP Lumira Server.
Q17. Can SAP Lumira Server be accessed via a mobile device?
Ans: SAP Lumira Server can be accessed from any mobile device supporting HTML5. SAP Lumira Server is also integrated with SAP BusinessObjects Mobile, which you can download from Apple’s App Store.
Q18. Where can I find videos about SAP Lumira Server?
Ans: The HANA Academy has recently published several SAP Lumira Server "how-to" videos:
HANA Academy: Live2 Project: Installing SAP Lumira Server - YouTube
HANA Academy: Building and Exporting Storyboards with SAP Lumira Server - YouTube
HANA Academy: Creating Scripted Calculation Views with SAP Lumira Server - YouTube
7a:T315a,
SAP LUMIRA
SAP Lumira is a data manipulation and visualization tool. You can connect to various data sources, select and clean data, and manipulate and visualize data with a diverse offer of graphical charts and tables. SAP Lumira is installed locally and can operate on data either remotely or on locally stored datasets. The charts that are created can be saved and sent out by email. Your datasets can be published to SAP Hana, SAP Explorer, the SAP Lumira Cloud, and SAP Streamwork activities. The charts that you create in SAP Lumira are saved in documents with the file format.SViD. This is a document that contains the data source connection information, the data definition and data, and the visualizations.
Create a document and acquire a dataset from a Microsoft Excel file
Click on New Document
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SAP BASIS? Enrol in Instructor-Led live SAP BASIS Training to get Job Ready!
Acquire a dataset from a universe
Create a New Document
Select Universe
Design Query.
Acquire a dataset from a database using Freehand SQL
Create a new document
Provide details
Select the Source table & Write Query
Building Visualizations and Storyboards
1) Manage measures in a dataset
Execute Query
Delete column
Create a measure
Sort, rank, calculate, and filter values in a visualization
Execute any Query
Select any measure & set the order
Can calculate
Sharing Results
Export a dataset as a HANA
Execute Query
Create a View
Publish a dataset to SAP BusinessObjects Explorer
Create a Query & publish it to Explorer
Select Folder & Click on Publish
Log on to Launchpad & check your report in a folder
Ans. A new programming language that is developed by Apple Inc in June 2014 to create and develop the applications for mobiles and desktops. This language works with macOS, iOS, watchOS and also tvOS.
Swift supports various operating systems such as Free SD, Darwin, Linux and so on.
2. What are the advantages of using swift language?
Ans. Swift is one of the rapidly growing languages, this language helps us to develop software’s that are incredibly fast, reliable, secure and robust. Swift is mostly used to develop the programmes for macOS, iPhone/ iPad(IOS)
3. What are the applications of Swift language?
Ans.
Open-source language
Very easy to learn and maintain
Closures
Supported by multiple devices
Supports dynamic libraries
Optional types
4. If there is no IOS device then how can we test Apple iPhone applications?
Ans. If we don’t have iOS then we can test those applications on simulators provided by apple on the mac system
5. List the tools that are required to develop iOS application?
Ans.
MacMini/mac
Xcode
Apple Developer Program
Swift Programming Language
7c:T6179,
Computer Networking has seen significant evolution, especially in the last 10years. In the late 1950s, the computers were considered as huge complex machines and are operated by trained people. But now, things have changed, and advanced technologies have come into existence. Even a small kid can connect with the world to explore new technology using Computer Networks. It has evolved to be a user-friendly device, and that made things very easy for the users to understand the behaviour of Computer Networks.
What is Computer Networking?
A computer network is a set of two or more interlinked computer systems through a wired or wireless media to send or receive data. It is a digital telecommunication network that allows the nodes to allocate resources. Every network involves hardware and software that connects computers and tools. Multiple devices help in communication between two or more different devices which are known as Network devices such as Router, switch, hub, bridge, etc.
A Computer Network is not only to meet the connectivity between the computers to share data but also it has to meet the network criteria such as
Performance: It can be measured with two terms one is Transmit time is a time taken for a message to travel from one device to another, and the other is Response time which is the elapsed time between query and response. The performance depends on the following factors:
Type of transmission medium used.
Number of users
The efficiency of software, and
The capability of connected network
Reliability: It is measured in terms of
Recovery from failures
Frequency of failures
Robustness during disaster
Security: It has to ensure data from unauthorized access. When the data is flowing in a network, it has to flow through various network layers. So, it has a chance of data breach by unwanted users. That is why Data security is the most crucial part of the Computer Network.
Basics of Computer Network
The Computer Network components consist of both hardware devices and the software devices that are required to install. There are a few essential Computer Network components that are discussed below:
Servers: The server is a computer that handles the shared files, programs, and the network operating system. It allows access to network resources for all the users in the network.
Routers: A route is networking devices that enable to share a single internet connection with multiple devices, thus saves money.
Switches: Switches works as a controller that connects computers, printers, and other hardware devices to a network.
Modem: It allows the computers to connect with the network over a telephone line.
Transmission media: It is a carrier used to interconnect computers in a network through cables and connectors such as twisted pair cable, coaxial cable, and fibre optic cable.
Hub: It is a device that splits the network connection into multiple computers.
Goals of Computer Network
Computer Network is a means of interconnection of computers for sharing the data through the network from person to person. There are a few essential goals of the Computer Network. They are as follows:
Flexibility: Easy access to sharing data from any computer on the network.
High reliability: If there is an external source of supply, all the files should make a copy on two or more machines. If any of them gets troubled with some hardware issues, the other copies can be used.
Resources sharing: In an organization, numerous computers are working and located apart. E.g. A group of workers can share an ordinary scanner, modem, printer, etc.
Inter-process communication: It is a mechanism that allows processes to communicate with each other and synchronize their actions. It is used for exchanging data between multiple threads.
Apart from these goals, it also includes excellent network performance, scalability, centralized management, access to remote information, etc.
Basic Communication model
Over several years ago, the basic communication model has been evolved that represents various elements of communication processes. They are as follows:
Sender: The person or an organization that has information to share with other person or an organization
Message: A message is data or information to be delivered
Medium: It is a channel through which the communication travels from sender to receiver
Receiver: The person who receives the message sent by the sender
Noise: It refers to a factor that can interface with adequate comprehension. It occurs when the message or the data subject to noise
Feedback: It is a part of the receiver’s response that communicates back to the sender
This model supports all kinds of data, such as text, voice, or even a video. It is very fast and takes a fraction of a second to communicate the message, and yet it provides a highly secured medium of communication; thus, it was easy to access.
Line configuration of Computer Network
Line configuration refers to the way of connecting two or more communication devices through a link. A link is a communication pathway that sends data from one device to another. The devices can be a PC, Laptop, printer, etc. that can send and receive data. To connect with the devices, they are two methods to follow:
Point-to-point Connection
Multipoint Connection
Point-to-point Connection: The point-to-point is a convention that is used as a communication link between two devices. It is easy to establish and understand. The point-to-point connection uses an actual length of wire to connect the two devices, or the other satellite links are also possible. It is considered to be the most straightforward and conventional network topology.
E.g., The Point-to-point connection between Television and the remote to control the Television.
Multipoint Connection: It is used to connect two or more devices with a single shared link. It is also called the Multidrop configuration. It has the capability of sharing the link with more than two devices. Depending on that capacity, the ways of configuration are of two kinds. They are discussed below:
Spatial sharing: If a link is used between many devices concurrently, then it is known as Spatial shared configuration
Temporal sharing: If the user takes turns while using the link, then it is known as Temporal shared line configuration.
Types of Transmission Media
In network communications, the Transmission Media is a Physical connection or interface between a Transmitter and a Receiver. It is the channel through which data is transferred from one place to another. Transmission Media are classified into two types. They are discussed below:
Guided Media: It provides a conductor from one device to another and transmits signals through the cables that are directed and confined by the physical limits of the medium. It is also known as Bounded or Wired Transmission Media. It provided a high-speed transmission of data, Comparatively used for shorter distance cable connectors, and even more secure. There are three types of Guided Media. They are as follows:
Twisted Pair Cable: These are widely used medium in networking because of its low cost, lighter, easy to fix and replace, and provides high speed than coaxial cables. Again these Twisted pair cables are of two types. They are
Unshielded Twisted Pair: It has a four pair of copper wires that are present within a plastic sheath. The wires are twisted to avoid interference. It is widely used in telephonic applications. It provides a high-speed capacity with low cost and easy to fix the cable.
Shielded Twisted Pair: It was widely used in high-speed networks. It makes the use of a metallic shield to wrap the wires to prevent interference better than UTP. It is highly expensive and provides better performance. It is used in voice and data channels of telephone lines.
Coaxial cable: It consists of three layers for a central copper conductor surrounded by an insulating layer, a conducting shield and an outermost plastic jacket. There are two basic modes of data transmission in Coaxial cable. One is the broadband mode that has a distributed cable bandwidth, and the other is the baseband mode that has a dedicated cable bandwidth. It was mainly used in televisions and Cable TV. It provides high bandwidth with reasonable cost and easy to install.
Optical fibres: It uses the concept of light waves through a core made of glass or plastic. These cables are well suited for video, voice or data transmission. Optical fibres are the most secure of all the cable media and have excellent transmission speed, a signal can travel a longer distance when compared with other cables, and provides high bandwidth. Difficult to install and maintain and even expensive, but it can withstand electromagnetic interference.
Unguided Media: It has no visible medium that is used for the transmission of signals. The signals are broadcast through the air that was the only medium and can be used for long-distance communication. It was also known as Wireless or Unbounded transmission media. These are of three types. They are as follows:
Radio Waves: These are easy to generate, and the frequency range is between 3KHz-1GHz. These waves are widely used for the transmission in AM and FM radio and cordless phones.
Microwaves: It is a line of sight transmission that means the sending and receiving antennas are required to align appropriately with each other. The distance covered by the signal is directly proportional to the height of the antenna. And the frequency range is between 1GHZ-300GHz. These are commonly used for television distribution and mobile phones.
Infrared waves: It is used for short-distance communication, and it cannot penetrate through obstacles. The frequency range is between 300GHz-400THz. These are used in a wireless mouse, printer, keyboard, TV remote, etc.
Transmission modes in Computer Network
The Transmission mode refers to the mechanism of transferring the data between two devices connected over a network. It directs the flow of information. It was also known as Communication mode. These modes are of three types. They are:
Simplex mode: It is a unidirectional communication system that means the data can be sent only in one direction. We cannot send a message back to the sender.
Example: Loudspeaker, Television, Monitor, Keyboard, etc.
Half Duplex mode: It is a Bidirectional communication system that a data can be transmitted in both directions but not at the same time. That means when one device is sending, the other can only receive at that time, and vice versa.
Example: The best example for Half Duplex mode is the Walkie-talkie in which the message can be transmitted in both the direction one at a time.
Full Duplex mode: The Full-Duplex mode is as same as Bidirectional communication. We can transmit and receive the data in both the directions simultaneously. In this system, there can be two lines, one for sending the data and the other for receiving the data.
Example: Telephone Network in which there is communication between two persons by a telephone line that can talk and listen at the same time.
Types of Area networks
The Geographical area that a network covers to connect and communicate with all the different computers through a medium. There are various types of Computer Networks are categorized depending on their capacity of the area covered and the numbers of systems connected in the network.
The most widely used Area Networks are
Local Area Network(LAN)
Metropolitan Area Network(MAN)
Wide Area Network(WAN).
Apart from these types, there are other types of Computer Networks also like
Personal Area Network(PAN)
Storage Area Network(SAN)
Enterprise Private Network(EPN)
Virtual Private Network(VPN)
Local Area Network(LAN): A group of computers and devices are connected in a limited area such as Office building, School, etc. This type of network can connect 5000 interconnected devices across the building. It covers a small geographical area that limits to a few kilometres and is owned privately. It was easy to maintain, and the error and noise are minimal due to the short distance network.
Metropolitan Area Network(MAN): It covers a larger geographical area than LAN and serves as an Internet Service Provider(ISP). It provides high-speed connectivity and covers over a 50km geographic range like towns and cities. The data rate is adequate for distributed computing applications.
Wide Area Network(WAN): It covers over a large geographical area and is confined within the boundaries of the state or country. The WAN connects with LAN by linking to other LAN’s through telephone lines and radio waves and thus limited to an organization or a company to be accessible to the public.
Types of Network Topologies
The arrangement of a network that comprises nodes and connecting lines through sender and receiver is known as network topology. Various kinds of Network Topologies are discussed below:
Bus Topology: It is a kind of network in which every computer and network device is connected to a single cable and transmits data only in one direction. It is easy to understand and requires very less cable when compared to other topologies. It is used to build small networks. The nodes are connected to the channel through drop lines.
Star Topology: In this kind of topology, all the systems are connected to a single network device through the cables. The network device can be a Hub, server, router, or switch the network devices acts as a central node that connects all the systems. High cost but easy to maintain. If the one system fails, the whole network doesn’t interrupt, but if the central node fails, the entire system gets interrupted.
Mesh Topology: In this mesh topology, every system is connected to another system through a specific channel. There are two ways to transfer data over Mesh topology. One is routing, which is the nodes accompany a routing logic according to the network required to guide the data from source to destination. The other method is flooding, which is the same data is transmitted to all the nodes of the network, and hence it has no logic. The network is robust in case of flooding, and it is hard to lose any data. It was an expensive and highly secure network. It also detects the faults very easily.
Ring Topology: In this ring topology, each computer is connected to another computer in the form of a ring that connects the last system to the first system. It is a unidirectional data flow system, but, with the use of the dual connection, it can also be used for bidirectional data flow. It was easy to install and expand and used for transmitting huge data traffic.
Tree Topology: It consists of one root node that connects all the sub-nodes in the form of tree representations. In general, it has three levels of hierarchy, and it expands depending on the requirement. It detects faults quickly and easy to maintain.
Hybrid Topology: It is the combination of two or more topologies. These topologies can be a mix of Bus topology, Mesh topology, Star topology, Tree topology and Ring topology. The use of Hybrid topology depends on the requirement of business, users, etc. It is scalable and reliable at the same time it is the most expensive among all other Topologies.
Applications of Computer Networks
Following are some of the business applications of computer networks:
Sharing Resources: The main aim of Computer networks is to make all the programs, data, devices, available to everyone on the network irrespective of the location of the resources and the user.
Communication Medium: Computer networks provide a reliable setup of communication medium among the employees in an office. Every organization will have two or more computers using an e-mail function that all the employees are used for day-to-day communication.
Server-client model: Imagine a system in which a firm’s data is stored on a system that is highly secured with firewalls and is situated in the company office. A person who works in that organization needs to access data remotely with the desktop. In this model, the data is stored on computers in the firm called servers, and the employee desktop will be the Client.
E-commerce: Doing business with consumers over the internet has become an essential goal in e-commerce. Online shopping, online library, online trading, and many more were come under E-commerce and thus expected to grow in future to a great extent. It is the most convenient way of dealing with things and even saves time and money.
Advantages of Computer Network
Let’s see the main advantages of Computer networks:
Data storage: Data can be stored in the server that can be shared and available to every user in the organization
Highly flexible: It offers users the opportunity to explore everything about computer networks such as software without affecting their functionality.
Cost efficiency: with the use of computer networks, you can use a lot of software products available in the market that can be installed into your system or server.
Data backup: Due to some damage to the devices or the system, the data can get inaccessible on one PC, another duplicate of similar data is accessible on another system for future use. So backing up the data helps in further handling without interruption.
Increases storage capacity: The shared data, files, and resources have to ensure that the data is properly stored in the system. With the help of Network technology, you can get the required data space to store.
Disadvantages of Computer Network
The disadvantages of Computer Network are as follows:
Security issues: Lots of people share the network to transmit and receive data, so an individual user’s security will be at stake. Lack of security leads to Data breach.
Lack of robustness: If the main server breaks down, the entire system will become interrupted. Also, if the central linking server fails, the whole network gets distracted.
Presence of virus and malware: If the system infected with a virus, then the data in the system gets corrupted. So the regular inspection has to be done to ensure safe Data storage in the system.
Expensive setup: Cost of installation depends on the number of systems to be connected in the network. Use of costly devices such as servers, routers, hubs, etc. adds cost and also requires the Network Interface Cards for the workstations.
Conclusion
In this tutorial, we have learned all the necessary and core concepts of Computer Networks that results in better performance with high speed of processing. We have learned Types of transmission model, Configuration lines, Types of Area networks, Network Topologies, and Applications of Computer Network.
7d:T4702,
IOS Interview Questions and Answers
Q1: Which JSON framework that is supported by IOS?
Ans. The JSON framework that is supported by IOS is SBJSON.
SBJSON is a generator for Objective-C
It provides a flexible API and additional control, making JSON handling much easier.
Q2: What are the ways to attain concurrency in IOS?
Ans. There are three ways to attain concurrency in IOS. They are as follows:
Dispatch queues
Operation queues
Threads
Q3: Explain the different types of IOS application states?
Ans. The different IOS application states are as follows:
Not running state: When the app was running but it is terminated by the system or the app has not been launched
Active state: When the app is running in the foreground and receiving the events. This is the normal mode for the foreground app
Inactive state: When the app is running in the foreground but not receiving the events. The only time it stays inactive when the user locks the screen or the system prompts the user to respond to the events such as phone calls or messages.
Suspended state: A suspended app just persists in memory but does not execute any code. When a low memory condition happens, the system may exclude the suspended app without any notice to the users to provide the space for foreground apps.
Background state: When the application is running in the background and executes code will be in this state. Before being suspended, the application enters this state. Yet, an app that appeals for additional time for execution must prevail in the Background state. Also when an app is being launched directly into the background will enter this state.
Q4: What is the difference between atomic and non-atomic properties?
Ans. An atomic property will always return the initialized objects and also happens to be a default state for a synthesized property. Yet, not all the values are correct. They are not safe. More than one thread may strive to perform read-write operations simultaneously.
The non-atomic property does not ensure a valid value to be returned. This value can be a correct value, a trash value, or a partially written value.
Q5: What is Cocoa and Cocoa touch?
Ans. Cocoa: It provides an Application development environment for OS X. It includes the Foundation and Appkit framework.
Cocoa Touch: It provides an Application development environment for iOS. It includes the Foundation and UIkit framework. It refers to application development using any programmatic interface.
The primary programming language that is used for developing the application in cocoa and cocoa touch is the Objective-C.
Q6: Define managed object context?
Ans. A managed object content is basically a scratchpad in an application for a related collection of objects. You can get objects from a persistent store to bring temporary objects to this pad. After making the required modification, you can put them back to the store. The context has an undo manager that monitors all these changes and also posts a notification to your application.
Q7: Mention the key functionalities of Managed object context?
Ans. The key functionalities of the managed object context include as follows:
Lifecycle management: The context is responsible for expecting changes in its objects and keeps an undo manager so you can have better control over an undo and redo. You can insert new objects and delete ones you got fetched, and submit these changes to the persistent store.
Concurrency: Here, the core data uses threads that restrict to ensure managed object contexts. when you create a context you can specify the concurrency pattern with that you can use it by using initWithConcurrencyType:
Notification: A context posts notifications at different points that can alternatively be observed elsewhere in your application.
Q8: What are the rendering options for JSON Serialization?
Ans. The rendering options for JSON Serialization are as follows:
MutableContainers: Dictionaries and arrays are created as variable objects.
MutableLeaves: JSON object graph leaf strings are developed as instances of variable strings
allowFragment: The parser allows objects that are not an instance of dictionaries or arrays.
Q9: What is the difference between app ID and bundle ID?
Ans. An app ID is a two-part string used to identify one or more apps from a single development team. The string comprises a Team ID and a bundle ID search string, with a period (.) separating the two sections. The Team ID is provided by Apple and is unique to a specific development team.
The bundle ID uniquely recognizes the iOS application in Apple’s ecosystem and thus relevant for both OSX and iOS apps. This implies no two applications can have a similar bundle identifier. So to avoid conflicts, Apple urges developers to make use of reverse-DNS for choosing an application’s bundle identifier.
Q10: What is the framework that is used to construct an application user interface in iOS?
Ans. The UIKit framework is used to construct an application’s user interface for iOS. It provides event handling, windows, drawing model, views, and controls specially designed for a touch screen user interface. It also provides an application model for interacting with the system.
Q11: Which API is used to write the test scripts to exercise the application UI elements?
Ans. UI Automation API is designed to automate test procedures. The test scripts that are written in Javascript to the UI Automation API and thus simulate user interaction with the application and return log information to the host system.
Q12: What is Spritkit and Scenekit?
Ans. SpriteKit is a framework for easy development of animated 2D objects While, SceneKit is a framework acquired from OS X that helps with 3D graphics rendering. The new wave of mobile games is expected to redefine the iOS devices powerful GPUs are offered through Scenekit, Spiritkit, and Metal.
Q13: Write the differences between assign and retain?
Ans. Assign: It is a keyword used to make a reference from one object to another. The retain count of the source does not increase.
Retain: It is used to create a reference from one object to another and increases the retain count of the source object.
Q14: Write the hierarchy from UIButton to NSObject?
Ans. UIButton acquires from UIControl, UIControl acquires from UIView, UIView acquires from UIResponder, UIResponder acquires from the root class NSObject.
Q15: Define layer objects?
Ans. Layer objects are data objects which represent visual content and are used by views to provide their content. Custom layer objects are also added to the interface to implement complex animations and other kinds of sophisticated visual effects.
Q16: What are iBeacons?
Ans. iBeacon is a protocol developed by Apple Inc. It implements the Bluetooth low energy (BLE) technology to create a new way of providing location-based information and services to iPhones and other Apple devices. When the apps installed on your iPhone listen out for the nearby Bluetooth signals transmitted by these beacons and thus responds accordingly.
Q17: What is an App ID?
Ans. An App ID is a unique identity that iOS used to connect an application to the Apple push notification service, shares data between the application, and allows you to connect with the external hardware devices that you want to connect to your iOS application.
Q18: What is NSError?
Ans. In Objective-C, error handling is provided with the NSError class that is available in the foundation framework. An error object conveys the more extensible errors to the user during run time by using the error code or the error string. It has three main components that are as follows:
Domain: The error domain can be pre-defined NSError domain or a string describing the domain
Code: An int value representing the error
User Info Dictionary: A dictionary containing all the additional information about the error.
Q19: What are the various ways that you can specify the layout of elements in a UIView?
Ans. The various ways to specify the layout of the element in UIView are as follows:
You can mention the coordination of every element using CGRects and then you can pass the (id)initWithFrame:(CGRect)frame method of UIView.
You can use your code along with NSLayoutConstraints to arrange the elements using AutoLayout.
A storyboard for an application can be built using the InterfaceBuilder. You can also include a XIB file into your project, can arrange the layout within the file, and can load the file in your application code.
Q20: What are the features of the UIkit framework in iOS?
Ans. UIKit framework supports the following features:
Print support
PDF creation
Motion and touch-based events
Supports external displays along with graphics and windowing
Content can be shared through email, Facebook, and Twitter.
Q21: What are the important features of iOS?
Ans. The most important features of iOS are as follows:
iCloud
Social media
GPS
Multitasking
High-end processor
Powerful API
Notification center
Game center
Bluetooth
Gyroscope
In-app purchase
Accelerometer
Orientations
Accessibility and many more
Q22: What are the various programming languages used for developing an iOS application?
Ans. The various programming languages used for developing an iOS application are as follows:
Objective-C
Javascript
HTML5
Swift
.NET
C
However, the official languages used for developing the iOS application are Objective-C and C.
Q23: Define ARC in iOS?
Ans. ARC stands for Automatic Reference Counting. This feature is used for handling the lifetime of the objects in Objective-C. It is a memory management technique for the C language compiler that is used by both Swift and Objective-C for reference counting. ARC stores the information about the instance class referred to variables, constants, and instance properties.
Q24: What are the different data types in Objective-C?
Ans. Objective-C has different types of data types are as follows:
Class
Bool
NSString
NSInteger
NSUInteger
CGfloat
SEL
Ivar
Q25: Define NSOperation, NSOperationQueue, and NSBlockOperation?
Ans. NSOperation is an abstract class that can be used for adding dependencies to different operations, reuse, cancel, and suspend them. It can be used through the NSOperation subclasses.
NSOperationQueue is a queue that monitors the operations. These queued operations are executed by NSOperationQueue as per the requirement.
And, NSBlockOperation is a subgroup of NSOperation that deals with the execution of one or more tasks concurrently.
Q26: Define the Responder chain in iOS?
Ans. A sequence of responder objects is called the Responder Chain. The chain initially starts at the responder and ends at the application object. If the first responder cannot handle the event then it forwards to the next responder in the responder chain.
Q27: What is the importance of using @synchronized in Objective-C?
Ans. The @synchronized directive is used in Objective-C for ensuring that the only thread gets executed at any given point of time. It prevents one or more threads from accessing the same address in memory.
Q28: What do you understand about iOS?
Ans. iOS is the operating system that was developed by Apple Inc. for its devices such as smartphones, tablets, iPods, iPads, etc. It was termed as iOS after the launch of the iPad. A major update to the iOS software is released every year at Apple’s developer conference. The latest version of iOS is iOS 13 that runs on iPhone X and was released on September 19, 2019.
7e:T19a2,
HTML Tutorial Overview
Welcome to HTML Tutorials. The objective of these tutorials is to provide in depth understand of HTML Programming Language. In these tutorials we will cover topics such as HTML Attributes, Forms, Scripts, Elements and Tags, Event Handlers etc.
In addition to free HTML Tutorials, we will cover common interview questions, issues and how to's of HTML.
HTML stands for Hypertext markup language, and it is the most widely used language to write web pages, as its suggests, HTML is a markup language.
Hypertext refers to the way in which web pages(HTML documents) are linked together, when you click a link in a web page, you are using hypertext.
Markup Language describes how HTML works. With a markup language, you simply “mark up” a text document with tags that tell a web browser how to structure it to display.
All you need to do to use HTML is learn what type of markup to use to get the results you want.
Why to learn HTML?
It is possible to create WebPages without knowing anything about the HTML source behind the page.
There are excellent editors on the market that will take care of the HTML parts. All you need to do is layout the page.
However, if you want to make it above average in web design, it is strongly recommended you to understand these tags.
The most important benefits are :
you can use tags the editor does not support.
You can read the code of other people’s pages, and “borrow” the cool effects.
You can do the work yourself, when the editor simply refuses to create the effects you want.
What do I need to create HTML?
Computer
Text or HTML editor
Adobe Dreamweaver
SeaMoney,Coffee Cup(windows) and textpad(windows)
Notepad(for windows),Pico(for Linux), or simpletext/Text edit/Text Wrangler(Mac)
Web Browser
Internet Explorer, Firefox,Chrome,obers….etc
Do I need to be online?
No, you do not need to be online to create web pages. You can create web pages on your local machine. You only need to go online when you want to publish your web page to the web.
HTML Documents = Web pages
HTML documents describe web pages
HTML documents contain HTML tags and plain text
HTML documents are also called web pages
.HTM or .HTML File Extension?
When you save an HTMl file, you can use either the .htm or the .html file extension. There is no difference, it is entirely up to you.
Basic HTML Document structure
The basic structure for all HTML documents is simple and should include the following minimum elements or tags.
Doctypes
- The main container for HTML pages
- The container for page header information
7f:T2475,
Crystal Reports Tutorials
Welcome to Crystal Report Tutorials. The objective of these tutorials is to provide an in-depth understanding of Crystal Report. In addition to free Crystal Report Tutorials, we will cover common interview questions, issues and how to’s of HTML.
What is Crystal Reports?
Crystal Report is a Reporting Application that can generate reports from various Data Sources like Databases, XML files etc.. The Visual Studio.NET Integrated Development Environment comes with Crystal Reports tools. The Crystal Reports makes it easy to create simple reports and also has comprehensive tools that you need to produce complex or specialized reports in csharp and other programming languages.
Crystal Reports is compatible with most popular development environments like C#, VB.NET etc. You can use the Crystal Reports Designer in Visual Studio .NET to create a new report or modify an existing report.
Crystal Reports Designer
The Crystal Reports Designer is an application which provides a graphical interface to develop reports and provides flexibility and control during the creation of highly formatted, feature-rich reports. It includes a complete and rich set of layout and design controls to give the created reports a professional, pixel-perfect appearance without any custom coding, streamline the number of reports by using parameters and organize data in a logical manner using sections, groups and sorting. The outlook of the ad-hoc chart and map reports is supported by the intelligent charting feature that automatically recommends the best chart type for a given set of data.
For novice users, Crystal Reports includes an intuitive report design expert and a report creation wizard. For more advanced users, Crystal Reports lets control over most features, including formulas, conditional formatting and object positioning so the reports can be highly customized.
Crystal Reports provides a set of over 35 data connection drivers to any relational, OLAP, XML or in-memory data source. CR provides native, ODBC, OLE DB or JDBC connectivity to databases, files, logs, enterprise applications, program elements or BusinessObjects Enterprise universes. The underlying SQL for every report developed in Crystal Reports can be customized which provides complete control over how the data is queried. It is also easy to link data from multiple sources and in multiple languages within the same report.
These core tutorials will help you to learn the Crystal Report Tutorials. For an in-depth understanding and practical experience,
explore Crystal Reports Training.
Crystal Reports report designer is composed of the Toolbar, Design tab and Field Explorer and Report Explorer tabs. The toolbar is divided into Standard, Formatting, Insert, Experts, Navigation bars.
Design tab provides an environment for designing a report. Data you want to place on the report is represented by fields that you put in sections of the report. In the Design tab you can also do formatting or specify sorting order and grouping.
Design tab basic sections:
Report Header
Page Header
Details
Report Footer
Page Footer
Click here to find more about Sections
Field Explorer is used to insert, modify or delete fields from the report. Database Fields folder consist of a list of database tables and columns you can retrieve data from. If you're not connected to the database, right-click on Database Fields folder and select Database Expert. In the Database Expert dialog box select connection to the database or create a new one. Select tables you want to use and click OK. Expand the Database Fields folder to see all available objects. To put the field on the report drag it and drop field frame on the report or select a field and use Insert Field button from the Field Explorer toolbar.
You can switch from the Field Explorer tab to Report Explorer tab to manage sections of the report. To add Special Fields like page number, print date or comments expand Special Fields folder in the Field Expert tab. From the list of special fields choose the one you want to use and drag-and-drop it in the section where you want to place it.
To insert Text object select Insert Text Object from the Toolbar. Draw the text object frame in the section you want to place it. Fill the frame with a text. You can also put a picture on the report. To do this click Insert picture button from the Toolbar, browse for the picture you want to use and open it. Place the picture frame in a particular section.
To preview the report before printing it, use Print Preview on the Toolbar. Report preview will be generated. You can also preview the report in HTML format. To do this, click the HTML Preview button.
Benefits of Using Crystal Reports
Flexible and customized report − You can quickly create highly formatted, pixel-perfect reports using SAP Crystal Reports with high-level design interface and efficient workflows.
Powerful report delivery options − You can deliver personalized reports to your business end-users in their preferred language and format.
Data source connectivity − You can connect to information sources directly. Data sources include Native, ODBC, OLE DB, and JDBC connectivity to relational, OLAP, web services, XML, enterprise data sources, and salesforce.com.
Expanded support for Excel − You can take full advantage of the Excel file format by allowing more data to be exported to a single worksheet, without spanning multiple worksheets.
Windows operating system compatibility − SAP Crystal Reports software 2013 is certified compatible with Microsoft Windows 7.
Mobile compatibility − You can also open interactive reports through your mobile devices.
SAP Crystal Reports, Adobe Flash and HTML 5 integration − It enables SAP Crystal Reports developers to produce powerful "mash-ups" pulling data from various sources.
Competitors − SAP Crystal Reports competes with several products in the Microsoft markets like SQL Server Reporting Services (SSRS), XtraReports, ActiveReports, and List & Label.
Advantages of Crystal Report
Rapid report development since the designer interface would ease the coding work programmer.
Can extend it to complicated reports with interactive charts and enhance the understanding of the business model.
Expose a report object model, can interact with other controls on the ASp.NET webform
can programmatically export the reports into widely used formats like pdf,.doc,.xls.html and .rtf
80:T60cc,
Following are some of the most frequently asked Automation Anywhere interview questions in the interview, here are the answers for them.
Ans: Automation Anywhere can automate any repetitive tasks on your computer or the Internet.
Automation Anywhere comes with a number of sample tasks that you can run to become familiar with what Automation Anywhere can do. To run a sample task, in the Folders list, choose Sample Tasks. Under Task List, highlight a task, and choose Run. (To view the commands contained in a task, highlight the task and choose Edit.)
Automation Anywhere speeds your workflow by automating many complex tasks – for example:
Use Automation Anywhere to automate time-consuming business processes: check inventory, re-order supplies, generate reports, enable fast data entry and formatting, etc.
Automate Web tasks. For example: logging into websites, searching, submitting forms, updating records, managing ERP Web front-ends, etc.
Automation Anywhere is ideal for automating complex IT tasks: website monitoring, website testing, repetitive system administration tasks, etc.
Use Automation Anywhere to automate data transfers and import or export data between applications or from files.
Automate routine backups and file management tasks.
Automate software testing and routine Web development testing tasks.
Use Automation Anywhere to automate job scheduling.
Automation Anywhere is ideal for batch data processing.
Automate FTP tasks.
With a Premier or Enterprise license, you can easily share tasks by converting them to standalone .exe files. For example, businesses and IT managers can generate .exes for common software configuration and management tasks, such as installing software changes, etc.
Q2) What is Control Room?
Ans: Control Room is Server Component in AA. This component is to hold the entire information in the tools.
The control room is an operation and authentication of all clients within the client environment. It is controlled all the users and monitoring tasks based on the control room operation.
We can easy to controlled users, testers and high-level people within the organization.
Control Room Options:
Dashboard
Repository Manager
Operation Control Room
Audit Trail
Task Scheduler
Security
Client
Credential Manager
AppManagement
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of RPA Automation Anywhere? Enrol in Instructor-Led live RPA Automation Anywhere Training to become Job Ready!
Q3) How to Copy an Excel Cell and Move it to the Next Cell in Your Record?
Ans: When you highlight the cell and use Ctrl + C to copy a cell in Excel, it copies an extra ENTER keystroke along with the data in the cell. To copy only the cell in the Excel file, use the keystrokes:
The above keystrokes will copy the data in the cell.
Now, if you want to move the cursor to the next cell after copying the current cell, use the following keystrokes:ENTER to move one row down in the same column
TAB to move to the next cell to the RIGHT in the same row
Shift + ENTER ( [SHIFT DOWN][ENTER][SHIFT UP] ) to move one row up in the same columnShift + TAB ( [SHIFT DOWN][TAB][SHIFT UP] ) to move to the next cell to the LEFT in the same row
To skip a cell, you need to use the corresponding key twice. For example, to move RIGHT to alternate cells, you must enter [TAB][TAB]
Q4) How to Paste Data into your Application and Move to the Next Item?
Ans: Most applications support the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + V to paste data that has been copied to the clipboard. To paste the data using the keyboard, you need to ensure that the focus is at the correct place, e.g., the correct cell in a table, or the correct control in a browser page, etc. You can then perform the Ctrl + V keystroke. To simulate Ctrl + V in Automation Anywhere, you need to write it as
[CTRL DOWN]v[CTRL UP].
The above series of keystrokes will paste the data into your application.
The following examples illustrate how to move to the next record/cell in your application using the keyboard:
Use the TAB key to move from a highlighted link to the next link in an Internet Explorer Web page
Use the [RIGHT ARROW] to move to the next cell in the same row in a Microsoft Word table.
Some applications also support using the Spacebar to move to the next control or button.
Q5) How to Create Timestamps for your files using Automation Anywhere System Variables?
Ans: Automation Anywhere provides the following system variables that you can use to append timestamps:
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Date
You can combine these variables to create a timestamp of your own design.
Examples:
To append Year, Month, and Day at the end of ABC, you can write:
ABC$Year$$Month$$Day$.
To create a complete timestamp with date and time, you can write:
ABC$Year$$Month$$Day$$Hour$$Minute$$Second$.
You can also include text characters between the variables, e.g.,
ABC$Year$-$Month$-$Day$.
You can configure your own format for the Date variable. Choose Tools > Variable Manager > System Variable > Date. If you use the Date variable to append a date to filenames, be sure there are no slashes (/) in your date format, since filenames in Windows may not use the / character.
Q6) What is the Recommended way to open an Application as Part of a Task?
Ans: When you record a task, you might double-click the icon of an application on the desktop or go to Start
Programs and click the application's icon. It is very likely that the location of these icons will change, resulting in an error when the task runs. However, to prevent these errors, we recommend that you follow the following recommendations:
Open the task in the Task Editor.
Select the actions that involve going to menu items and clicking. They may involve several mouse moves and mouse clicks.
Delete these actions:
Replace them with single-line commands that you create by double-clicking the Open Program/File command and specifying the path to the application you want to open.
The Open Program/File dialog includes a text box where you can type parameters that Automation Anywhere will pass to the application.
The task will now open your application, no matter where the icon is located.
Q7) Explain Different Recorders in AA?
Ans: Recorders are of three types
Smart Recorder
All object cloning
Screen Recorder
Capture window objects -simple tasks for processes that involve mouse clicks and keyboard operations.
Web Recorder
Capture Web Project
RPA Automation Anywhere Interview Questions
Q8) What is Manage Web Control?
Ans: To capture image links, radio buttons, text boxes, check boxes and other web control Automation Anywhere Web Recorder -> Manage Web Controls allows capture of web controls and assign them variables.
Q9) Difference Between Managing Windows/Web controls and Object Cloning?
Ans: The manage Windows Controls command allows you to work with Windows controls like checkboxes and radio buttons. With this command, you can find out if the radio button or check box is checked or not. Automation Anywhere supports only standard Windows checkboxes and radio buttons.
Object Cloning command to recognized
Objects and a variety of their properties, including Name, Type, Path, and Value
Q10) What is Image Recognition in Terms of AA?
Ans: Image Recognition is another feature of the Visualize Technology available in Automation Anywhere Enterprise. Using the Visualize Technology, Image Recognition allows the recognition and comparison of images from files or windows.
Q11) How to lock, Shutdown and Restart The Machine Using AA?
Ans: Lock the computer
In Automation Anywhere Client, open the Task Editor. To open an existing task, select the task in the Task List, and click Edit. To create a new task, click New, or choose Tools > Task Editor.
In the Task Editor, in the Commands list, double-click System. A submenu appears.
Double-click Lock Computer. The System dialog appears. Note the green symbol indicating that the Shutdown command can help save energy and spare the environment.
Click Save.
Shut down the computer
In Automation Anywhere Client, open the Task Editor. To open an existing task, select the task in the Task List, and click Edit. To create a new task, click New, or choose Tools > Task Editor.
In the Task Editor, in the Commands list, double-click System. A submenu appears.
Double-click Shutdown. The System dialog appears. Note the green symbol, indicating that the Shutdown command can help save energy and spare the environment.
Click Save.
Restart the computer
In Automation Anywhere Client, open the Task Editor. To open an existing task, select the task in the Task List, and click Edit. To create a new task, click New, or choose Tools > Task Editor.
In the Task Editor, in the Commands list, double-click System. A submenu appears.
Double-click Restart.
Click Save. Note: Always put System commands last in tasks, since actions entered after the System command will not be executed.
Tip: You can have Automation Anywhere Client perform an auto-login, so that when your computer restarts, Automation Anywhere Client will enter your username and password.
Q12) What are the Components of Automation Anywhere Architecture?
Ans: The architecture of the automation anywhere tool revolves around 2 components which are the Control room and the client.
In the client, the task can be created (script) and the same can be uploaded in the control room.
Q13) What are the Important options to make it easy of using the Automation Anywhere Task editor's filter?
Ans:
Group By Windows
Group all your actions by Windows for easy editing
Mouse moves
Display or hide all mouse moves and actions from the editor
Keystrokes
Display or hide all keystrokes actions from the editor
Mouse clicks
Display or hide all mouse clicks actions from the editor
Delay
Display or hide all delayed actions from the editor
Others
Display or hide all commands from the editor that are not mouse moves, keystrokes, mouse clicks, or delays
Q14) What are the Typical steps Involved in Automation Anywhere process?
Ans: Selecting or choosing the testing tools like Automation Anywhere, and Blue Prism is the primary thing. After that, the next step is defining the automation scope followed by the phases of planning, designing as well as development. Testing execution is the next step and maintenance is the final step. It is crucial to follow steps while defining the sequence thus eliminating confusion.
Q15) What are the Significant factors to Consider while planning Automation Anywhere?
Ans: The first thing before considering anything is to pay attention and select the automation tool that is beneficial. It also requires paying attention to the framework in the case where it is present. Identifying the test deliverables is the other factor to consider. Also, other factors such as project timelines, execution, etc. must be taken care of during the planning phase.
Q16) What are the Primary Reasons for Considering Automation Anywhere Instead of Manual Testing?
Ans: The primary issue is manual testing requires a lot of additional resources as well as more time consumption. Also exists some errors due to inaccuracy in cases of large projects with time boundaries. It’s not a wise option for choosing manual testing at instances of complex documentation levels as it can degrade the performance of the resources. Even the resources performing testing or the learners taking automation anywhere training or Blue Prism training in Bangalore may lose interest in achieving the same task again and again in a short span of time.
81:T10b1,
Groovy Interview Questions And Answers
What Are The Dependencies For Groovy?
As well as Java 1.4 and the Groovy jar we also depend at runtime on the ASM library.
Mention what relational operators is used for in Groovy?
Relational operators allows you to compare between objects, to check whether the two objects are different or same or if one is less than, greater than or equal to others.
Mention what relational operators is used for in Groovy?
Relational operators allows you to compare between objects, to check whether the two objects are different or same or if one is less than, greater than or equal to others.
Explain what does the JsonSlurper class indicates?
The JsonSlurper is a class that parses JSON text or reader content into Groovy data structures (objects) such as lists, maps, and primitive types like double, Boolean, string and Integer.
Explain what is ExpandoMetaClass in Groovy?
ExpandoMetaClass is used to add methods, properties, static methods and constructors. Expandoclass does not inherited by default; you have to call ExpandoMetaClass.enableGlobally().
Explain how you can include a groovy script in another groovy?
You can include a groovy script with another groovy by using the following code. When put this code at the top of the script it will bring in the contents of a groovy file.
Explain What Is Expandometaclass In Groovy?
ExpandoMetaClass is used to add methods, properties, static methods and constructors. Expandoclass does not inherited by default; you have to call ExpandoMetaClass.enableGlobally().
What Is Grails?
Grails is an open source web application framework that uses the Groovy and Java as programming language, this framework use another frameworks like Spring, Hibernate, SiteMesh and have and embebed H2 database, Tomcat server and ORM(GORM). this framework follow some design patters as Model View Controller(MVC), Convention Over Configuration(CoC), Don't repeat yourself(DRY) and runs over the Java Virtual Machine(JVM).
Explain What Is Groovysh?
Groovysh is a command line application that enables an easy access to evaluate Groovy expressions, define classes and run experiments.
How Can I Turn On Logging For Hibernate In Order To See Sql Statements, Input Parameters And Output Results?
Edit your Config.groovy file. Find the line with:
hibernate = "off" and replace it with: hibernate.SQL="trace,stdout" hibernate.type="trace,stdout"
What Is Are The Closures In Groovy?
A closure in Groovy is an open, anonymous, block of code that can take arguments, return a value and be assigned to a variable.
82:T1b3c,
How to Create an Item:
Creating an Item: As the first step in creating the item go to the Inventory responsibility and in that master items screen.
The navigation is Items ->Master Items. The given below is the Master items window.
Note: Before you got the master items screen you will ask for the choose organization screen then you get this screen. Here we choose the “V1” so, the items was set to V1 by default as the master organization. If we want we can assign this item to any other child organizations see the process in the coming steps.
Enter all the fields like item, description, Long Description such fields as per the requirement. After go to the Tools menu and in that go with Copy From option in that as we shown in the below figure. Then we get the Copy from window.
Enter the Template name from the list which we want to assign to the current item BAGS and go with the Apply after that Done. Then the template was copied to the current item. Then go with the Organization Assignment option as we round in the given below figure then the view of the window will be changed as below.
Assign the item to the child organizations what ever you want. Then go with the save button then the item was created successfully. Now we have to set the price list for the item then only we can view the item in the sales order like that. Now go with the Order Management responsibility.
The navigation for the price list setup is Pricing ->Price Lists ->Price List Setup. Then you get the Advanced Pricing window.
Note: There are different price lists “Corporate” is default when we are creating the sales order so, we are adding our item to the “Corporate” price list. If we want we can create new price list as per the requirements. After getting the Pricelist window then go with F11 query mode gets the price list what ever you want and add the item and enter all the mandatory fields such as Product Context, Product Attribute, Product Value(Item Name), price, to it after that go with save button. Then the item was successfully added to the price list.
Enter all the details correctly before saving. Here in the form the rate of the item is described as value in that field we have to enter the rate of the item.
Now at this stage the item was created and added to the price list was successful but the on hand quantity of the particular item is ZERO (0). That means we can’t book the orders on that item. To increase the on hand quantity of any particular item is given below. We have to go with the Inventory responsibility and the navigation is Transactions Miscellaneous Transaction. Then you will ask for the organization then select the child organization which we have selected for the item created above. Then we get the window as below.
Enter the mandatory fields and then go with the transaction lines. Then we get the window given below. Enter the item name, sub inventory, Amount and quantity as per the requirement. Here we entered 120 as ex.
When we enter the tab position to the amount then we get the Operations Accounting window given below. Select the appropriate option from the list of options. Here we selected the Cash as per our Ex.
After entering the amount field then go with the save button. Then the items quantity will be increased. Now we can go with the orders now. To check the on-hand-quantity of any item we have to go with the Inventory responsibility and the navigation is On-Hand, Availability On-Hand Quantity. Then we get the Query Material window we have to enter the item name which we want to check the quantity and go with the find button below the screen.
After that we get other window in that we get the details of the item on-hand and other.
Here there is the Availability button when we go with that we get the same details in the short window.
SVN or Subversion is an open source control system; it is used to trace all the changes made to your source code or files.
What is the function of Revert in subversion?
Revert function will remove your local changes and reload the latest version from the repository.
What does the result codes G and R in svn indicates?
The result codes G and R in svn indicates
G code: Changes on the repo were automatically merged into the working copy.
R code: This code indicates that item has been replaced in your working copy. This means the file was programmed or scheduled for deletion, and a new file with the same name was scheduled for addition in its place.
What all things should be stored in SVN repository?
Source Code
MySQL Queries
Database Updates
Project regarding important files
Product Documents
Minutes of Metting and Imp Email
What is the best practices for SVN?
Work from your own local work-space
Commit small autonomous changes
Use comment
Validate the files you are committing, you actually changed
Take Update before commit to the Repo.
How to resolve a conflicts in SVN ?
To resolve a conflict do one of three things: Merge the conflicted text by hand (by examining and editing the conflict markers within the file). Copy one of the temporary files on top of the working file. Run svn revert FILENAME to throw away all of the local changes.
84:T2606,
Microsoft InfoPath 2010 helps you to design rich form solutions, even if you are a new InfoPath user. Automation and simplified workflow helps you more quickly and easily start to build simple forms. Then, design and layout improvements such as the ribbon and the new Backstage window help make it easier to find the tools to help you create attractive and effective forms, which then helps make it easier for people to fill out the forms. InfoPath 2010 also integrates more deeply with SharePoint, and provides increased feature and control support for browser forms. This helps make it easier to use the Web to gather and keep information. InfoPath 2010 auto-generates simple forms from SharePoint lists and other data sources, providing predefined page and section layout styles, design tools and Quick Rules logic tools. For advanced forms, easy steps enable you to add fields and custom logic. You can also add features such as dynamic sections and data lookup. Finished forms are published with just one click.
We are going to create a simple form using InfoPath 2010 and publish the form to a SharePoint 2010 library and open the form using Web Browser
1. Open InfoPath 2010 Designer and Click on File | New | Select Blank Form | Click on Design Form
2. Blank Form Template in InfoPath 2010 is created. Now I want to insert tables
3. Click on Insert tab and select the table format which you want
4. Adding control to InfoPath 2010 FormsTo add controls to your form, click on HOME tab and go where it says Controls
5. If you want to add InfoPath form 2010 controls similar to InfoPath form 2007, just click on the control pane
6. Now your control pane is will look like InfoPath 2007 format.
7. Let’s go and add controls to our new InfoPath 2010 forms. I added four input text fields. To go to properties of the field, just double click and name the properties.
Properties of the Fields in InfoPath 2010 forms
Now the form is ready and let’s goes and publish this to SharePoint 2010 Form library. Data | Form Options
9. InfoPath 2010 Submit Form Options:
If you want to submit the form to SharePoint Document Library, put a check in Allow users to Submit this formOther options are “Show the submit button in both the ribbon and the info tab in the InfoPath filter
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of SharePoint? Enroll in Instructor-Led live SharePoint Training to become Job Ready!
If your satisfy with the entire all the options, click Ok. This will give you a message saying “You must select a data connection for Submitting data to a SharePoint document library. To create a new data connection, click ADD”
Let’s go and click Add to create new data connection to SharePoint 2010 Document Library
Data Connection Wizard: This wizard helps you to specify a data connection for submitting the form to a document library on SharePoint site. The form will be submitted with the file name specified below I already have created a Form Library in SharePoint 2010. If you don’t have the link for the Form Library go to your SharePoint site and create a Form Library.
In File Name, I selected as name and the form will be submitted with the file name specified below
To insert File Name : Click on Fx Icon
Enter a name for this data connection and click on Finish and Ok for next Window
Now the data connection to document library is completed and now we can publish the form to SharePoint 2010 To publish the form, go to File | Publish and | SharePoint Server |
Publish form to a SharePoint Library - Create or update a form library form on SharePoint - Users can access this form Online
Publishing Wizard will come up to publish the form to SharePoint Document Library. In here the wizard wants you to enter the location of your SharePoint or InfoPath Form Services site. Enter the site name which you want to publish the form and the Click Next
Enable this form to be filled out by using browser if you want user to fill the form online. Also we are publishing this form to a document library
What do you want to do? - Create a new form library or Update the form template in an existing from library.
Since I already have a form library created, I am going to update my form template in an existing form library
The files listed below will be available as columns in SharePoint sites and Outlook Folder. Go head and select the fields which you want to capture.
Click next and publish the InfoPath form to SharePoint 2010 Library
Form is published to SharePoint and click on open in form in the Browser
InfoPath Form opens in browser and it’s ready to be filled and submit to form library.
Form filed information are captured in Form Library in SharePoint 2010
85:T5419,
Feature Stapling allows you to create a feature and then associate it with any site definition without ever touching the site definition files themselves. Your feature will be executed when the site is being provisioned. Feature Stapling is achieved through the creation of another feature that defines the association of your regular Feature and the site definition you want to “staple” it too. In other words, you need to create two Features to achieve a complete Feature Stapling implementation. Lifecycle of Stapling Feature As per the above figure, step 3 & 4 is your stapling feature trying to modify elements from the site definition (i.e. out of the box lists / list view web parts and Step 6 is when the actual lists from the site definition are getting created. Feature Stapling is the great way if the site definition is already in use (and sites have been created). Feature Stapling has two features. A "Stapler" feature which staples another feature to the site definition and the"Staplee" feature which will be stapled. For Example suppose you want to apply a custom Theme to all of the "Publishing site" site definitions. This can be solved by creating a feature which will apply the Custom theme to the site and it can be associated with the publishing site's site definition. Or Suppose if you want to activate a custom list to all the Team sites , this can also be solved creating a feature which on activating when you create a team site the custom list gets created. How to Create Feature stapler.
First we need to create the Features (Staplee) which we want install on creation of site (publishing or team site etc.). How to create feature.
Create a Feature Stapler as below <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?>
<Feature xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/sharepoint/" Id="C384D136-79A8-48BD-AF73-C630547F4D8E" Title="ExampleStapler" Description="This feature staples the other feature to the Team Site definition." Scope="Farm" Hidden="False"Version="1.0.0.0" />
Create an element xml which is nothing but where feature association takes place.In order to add element.xml we need to create a module in Visual studio 2010 and then add the element.xml
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?> <Elements xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/sharepoint/"> <FeatureSiteTemplateAssociation Id="b8f334a0-1ffe-420d-b6e2-54a9faa6ba95"TemplateName="STS#0" /> <FeatureSiteTemplateAssociation Id="07cb8bd4-7004-4021-8355-48d17de287e5"TemplateName="STS#0" /> <FeatureSiteTemplateAssociation Id="90C924A7-32F7-4C19-BD4C-AF49EF0563A9"TemplateName="STS#0" /> </Elements> The FeatureSiteTemplateAssociationID element maps feature(The Features which we want to install on creation of Site) GUIDs to site definitions. Feature-stapling won't affect any sites which have already been created from a site definition, only subsequent sites. The only way to do this is to activate your features individually on the site. So Once you deploy Feature Stapler to web application level and then you create a team Site the associated (Stappled) features will get activated.
Feature Activation Dependencies used in SharePoint Features
Feature Activation Dependency allows to make Features dependent on each other. So if FeatureB has activation dependency on FeatureA, then FeatureB can only be activated if FeatureA is activated. If this is not the case it will prompt you with a message to activate FeatureA first. A sample Feature element tag is given below: <Feature Id="GUID" Title="Feature Title" Description="Feature Description" Version="1.0.0.0" Scope="Site" Hidden="false"> <ActivationDependencies> <ActivationDependency FeatureId="GUID" /> </ActivationDependencies> </Feature> If the dependent feature is hidden (to make a Feature hidden, set the Feature element's "Hidden" attribute to "False"), it will be activated automatically when the dependee feature is activated. For example if FeatureB has activation dependency on FeatureA and FeatureA is hidden, then FeatureA will be activated automatically when FeatureB is activated. Otherwise we need to activate the FeatureA manually before activating the FeatureB. Following are some important points which needs to be considered when dealing with feature activation dependencies: A visible Feature can have dependency on hidden Feature, but a hidden Feature cannot have dependency on visible Feature. It doesn't support circular dependencies (FeatureA depends on FeatureB and FeatureB depends on FeatureA). It has limited support for dependency chains. For example, WSS 3.0/MOSS 2007 supports more than one level in activation dependencies if a visible Feature depends on a second visible Feature that in turn depends on a hidden Feature. But it does not support more than one level in activation dependencies if the last Feature is visible—that is if a visible Feature depends on a second visible Feature that in turn depends on a third visible Feature.> If the dependent Feature is not activated, activation of the dependee Feature will fail. But if dependent Feature is hidden, then it will be automatically activated when the dependee Feature is activated. Cross-scope activation dependencies are not supported if following conditions are satisfied: If the dependent Feature is at a more restrictive scope. For example, a site collection scoped Feature cannot have an activation dependency on a web site scoped Feature. If the dependent Feature is not visible. For example, a web site scoped feature cannot be dependent on a site collection scoped Feature that is not visible in the user interface.
Interested in mastering SharePoint ? Learn more about SharePoint Tutorial in this blog post.
ActivationDependency Element (Feature) Represents a Feature on which activation of the current Feature depends. <ActivationDependency FeatureDescription = string FeatureId = Guid FeatureTitle = string MinimumVersion = string SolutionId = Guid SolutionName = string SolutionTitle = string SolutionUrl = string> </ActivationDependency> Attributes
Attribute
Description
FeatureDescription
Optional string. The description of the Feature dependency.
FeatureId
Required Guid. The ID of the Feature dependency.
FeatureTitle
Optional string. The title of the Feature dependency.
MinimumVersion
Optional string. The minimum version of the Feature dependency. This attribute must use the pattern n.n.n.n, where each occurrence of n is a numeric value.
SolutionId
Optional Guid. The ID of the solution dependency.
SolutionName
Optional string. The name of the solution dependency.
SolutionTitle
Optional string. The title of the solution dependency.
SolutionUrl
Optional string. The URL of the solution dependency.
Learning the Basics of Events in SharePoint Foundation 2010
An event receiver in Microsoft SharePoint Foundation 2010 is simply a method that is called when a triggering action occurs on a specified SharePoint object. Triggering events include actions such as adding, updating, deleting, moving, checking in, and checking out. SharePoint objects that listen for events—that is, event receiver hosts—include objects such as site collections, sites, lists, and workflows. Events are valuable tools for SharePoint developers. When a user performs an action that affects a SharePoint site, you can trap that action and respond to it with custom code. For example, if a project manager needs to be alerted when new documents or files are added to a given document library, you could write event receiver code to send an e-mail notification to the project manager, and then bind that code to the item-addition action on the document library. SharePoint Foundation 2010 provides enormous flexibility for detecting and responding to SharePoint events.
Note:
Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 now provides a SharePoint Event Receiver project template that automatically performs many of the tasks that are described in this article. To provide full descriptions of the actions that occur in the entire event pipeline, we do not use the Visual Studio 2010 Event Receiver project template. However, we do provide a brief summary of using Visual Studio 2010 to create event receivers, and we provide examples that use the template.
Events were first introduced in Windows SharePoint Services 2.0 but initially were supported only on document libraries. SharePoint events then were referred to as event sinks. In Windows SharePoint Services 3.0, the SharePoint events infrastructure took its current form, using managed event receivers. Event receivers improved on event sinks in several ways. They are easier to use; they have more event types; and they are supported on lists, content types, workflows, and sites. In SharePoint Foundation 2010, new list and web events were introduced; additionally, site collections can now act as event hosts, After events can now be synchronous, and event cancellation and impersonation has improved.
How SharePoint Events Work: All You Need to Know in One Paragraph
A SharePoint event receiver is bound to a SharePoint object—the event host—and responds to a user action by triggering event receiver code. You compile your event receiver code into a managed assembly—that is, a .dll file that is deployed to the global assembly cache.
Where Can I Use Event Receivers?
If you want to add behaviors to the operations that happen in SharePoint, you can use event receivers to trigger your custom code whenever a certain operation takes place. Table 1 lists the various operations on which you can plug your custom code.
Table 1. Operations available to event receivers
Object
Operations
Site collection
Deletion
Web
Creation
URL modification
Deletion
List
Creation
Deletion
Received an e-mail message
Field
Creation
Update
Deletion
Item
Creation
Update
Deletion
Check in
Check out
File movement
File conversion
Adding attachment
Deleting attaching
Workflow
Start
Completed
Postponed
What Are Event Receivers?
An event receiver is a piece of managed code that responds to SharePoint events when specific triggering actions occur on a SharePoint object. Triggering actions include activities such as adding, updating, deleting, moving, checking in, and checking out. To create an event receiver, you inherit from one of the event receiver base classes. SharePoint provides five event receiver base classes. (See Table 2 in the following section.) Note that each of the base classes supports only specified event hosts and events. You must select the correct event receiver base class for the host type you want to support. After you write your event receivers in your event receiver class, you must compile the receiver into a managed assembly and then place it in the global assembly cache (GAC). Finally, you must bind the event receivers to a suitable event host. Later in this article, we discuss event binding and the different methods with which you can bind events.
What Are Event Hosts?
Event hosts are common SharePoint objects that expect to receive events—in other words, objects whose event receivers "listen" for SharePoint events. These SharePoint event host object types include instances of common objects such as SharePoint site collections, sites, and lists. Each event host type has a specific set of event receiver base types from which it can inherit. Table 2 lists the event receiver base classes as well as the event host types that support each receiver, along with the events they support.
Table 2. Event receiver base classes and supported events
In addition to the fundamental pieces of the event model—event receivers, event hosts, and the events themselves—the following are key concepts in the landscape of the SharePoint event model. Before Events A Before event occurs before the currently requested operation happens. For example, the ItemAdding event is a Before event that is raised before an item is added to a SharePoint list. Looked at another way, Before events are raised when an action occurs before SharePoint writes to the content database. This provides an opportunity for an event receiver to perform tasks before data is committed to a database. A good example of the use of Before events is performing data validation, because Before events fire prior to commitment of data. You can also use Before (or synchronous) events to cancel user actions—for example, if data validation fails. Event receiver code that is triggered by a Before event executes in the same thread as the code that is executing the user action that triggered it. For this reason, Before events are always synchronous. You can identify Before events because their member names end with the "-ing" suffix—ItemAdding, ListAdding, and so forth. After Events An After event is raised after the currently requested operation happens. For example, the ItemAdded event is an After event that is raised after an item has been added to a SharePoint list. After events trigger event receivers that execute after user actions are committed to the content database; they invoke code that runs after the content database has been modified. This allows you to execute logic that occurs after a user has completed a specific action. After events can execute either synchronously or asynchronously. If the After event is synchronous, it executes in the same thread in which the triggering action occurs. However, if the After event is asynchronous, it executes in a separate thread. You can identify After events because their member names end with the "-ed" suffix—ItemDeleted, WebProvisioned, and so forth. Synchronous Events A synchronous event is executed in the same thread in which the triggering action is occurring. For example, when the user adds an item from the SharePoint user interface, the event is fully executed before returning to the user and showing that the item was added. All Before events are synchronous events. Asynchronous Events An asynchronous event occurs at a later time than the action that triggered it, and it executes on a thread that is different from the one in which the triggering action is running. For example, when a user adds an item to a document library by using the SharePoint user interface, the event starts to execute before returning control to the user; however, there is no guarantee that the event receiver will finish executing before we show the user that the item has been added.
The SharePoint Events Pipeline
Figure 1 illustrates how SharePoint events occur with respect to synchronization and sequencing. Figure 1. SharePoint events pipeline Notice the following details:
Synchronous event receivers are called in sequential order based on the sequence number specified during event binding. This applies to both Before and After synchronous events.
Asynchronous After event receiver threads are initiated in sequential order based on the sequence number. However, there is no guarantee that they will finish in that same order.
An asynchronous After event can start at any time after its associated user action is performed. It may start before, at the same time as, or after the Web request is completed.
After a user initiates an action in the SharePoint user interface, and before SharePoint Foundation executes the user action, the synchronous Before events are raised. If there are multiple synchronous Before events, they are raised in the order specified by their sequence number. Similarly, synchronous After events are raised after SharePoint Foundation executes the user action. These, too, are raised in the order specified by sequence number. As you can see, all synchronous events are processed in the same thread as that in which the user action occurs.
86:T11b2,
Getting start with a Silver light application using VS2010
Step 1: Open Visual Studio 2010 and create a new Silverlight Application Uncheck the checkbox [ ] “Host the Silverlight application in a new Web site”. We don’t need to host Silverlight in a separate web app since SharePoint will be the host. Step 2: You can add the following code at MainPage.xaml for testing if you are new with Silverlight Build the Application and your Silverlight Application is ready at this stage Step 3: So, Develop your Silverlight application as per as your requirement. For Example: I developed a application like below. Let’s imagine this application is ready to deploy
Create a Empty SharePoint Project to deploy in SharePoint
Step 4: To Deploy Application in SharePoint Create Empty SharePoint Project (Run As Administrator)
Leave the sandboxed solution checked and click ok (Pop-up will ask you to choose to deploy as a sandboxed solution or a farm solution.)
Set SharePoint Site URL where you want to deploy
Add a new Module to the project
Open the Elements.xml file and Edit the file to include the xap file that will be generated from the Silverlight application
Interested in mastering SharePoint Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on SharePoint Training.
Now your application is ready to be deployed. Right click the SharePoint project and select Set as Startup Project and Deploy Solution.
Add Silverlight Web Part in SharePoint Site
Step 5: On the SharePoint site click the edit icon then the insert tab, select Web Part, and choose the Silverlight Web Part in the Media and Content category Click Add and in the Silverlight Web Part dialog enter the value from the Url field in the Elements.xml file. Configure Web Part to adjust size.The problem is the default size for the Silverlight Web Part is 400x300 but the application is bigger than 300. Now Your Silverlight application Deployment Done!
87:T2bff,
In this task, you create a Visual Web Part project in Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
Start Visual Studio 2010, click File, point to New, and then click Project.
Navigate to the Visual C# node in the Installed Templates section, click SharePoint, and then click 2010.
Select the Visual Web Part project template (see Figure 1), provide a name (such as, SampleWebPart), a location for your project, and then click OK
Figure 1. Select the Visual Web Part project type
In the local site do you want to use for debugging dropdown, select the site to use (such as http://localhost/sites/SampleWebSite). Also select the Deploy as a farm solution option and then click Finish.Note that after the project is created, Solution Explorer contains the default Visual Web Part named VisualWebPart1 (see Figure 2). Also see in Solution Explorer the presence of the Features and Package nodes. A feature organizes your application in a way that SharePoint Foundation understands. Features can be deployed to SharePoint Foundation at the site or Web level. The package contains features and other assets used when you deploy solutions to SharePoint Foundation.
. Figure 2: The SampleWebPart project in the Solution Explorer
Add a Tree View Control to the Web Part
In this task, you add a Tree View control to the design surface of the Web Part. The Tree View control displays a hierarchical view of lists and Sub Webs.
In Solution Explorer, expand the VisualWebPart1 node, right-click the VisualWebPart1UserControl.ascx file, and then click View Designer. This action opens a view to drag-and-drop controls from the toolbox onto the Web Part designer surface.
From the Toolbox on the left side of the screen, click the Navigation section, and then drag a TreeView control onto the design surface. If you do not see the Toolbox on the left side of the screen, on the View menu, click Toolbox.
Select the TreeView control and in the Properties panel in the lower-right corner of the Visual Studio screen, type the name siteStructure in the ID field.
Add Code to the Project
In this task, you add Microsoft Visual C# code to the project that iterates through all lists and SubWebs in the SharePoint site, and adds them to the TreeView control.
In Solution Explorer, expand the VisualWebPart1UserControl.ascx node, right-click the VisualWebPart1UserControl.ascx.cs node, and then click View Code.
Next, substitute the following C# code for the code in the code screen.
using System; using System.Web.UI; using System.Web.UI.WebControls; using System.Web.UI.WebControls.WebParts; using Microsoft.SharePoint; using Microsoft.SharePoint.Utilities; using System.Web; namespace BonnevilleTestBed.Bonneville { public partial class BonnevilleUserControl : UserControl { protected void Page_Load(object sender, EventArgs e) { SPWeb thisWeb = null; TreeNode node; thisWeb = SPContext.Current.Web; //Add the Web's title as the display text for the tree node, and add the URL as the NavigateUri. node = new TreeNode(thisWeb.Title, null, null, thisWeb.Url, "_self"); //The Visual Web Part has a treeview control called siteStructure. siteStructure.Nodes.Add(node); //Get a reference to the current node, so child nodes can be added in the correct position. TreeNode parentNode = node; //Iterate through the Lists collection of the Web. foreach (SPList list in thisWeb.Lists) { if (!list.Hidden) { node = new TreeNode(list.Title, null, null, list.DefaultViewUrl, "_self"); parentNode.ChildNodes.Add(node); } } foreach (SPWeb childWeb in thisWeb.Webs) { //Call our own helper function for adding each child Web to the tree. addWebs(childWeb, parentNode); childWeb.Dispose(); } siteStructure.CollapseAll(); } void addWebs(SPWeb web, TreeNode parentNode) { TreeNode node; node = new TreeNode(web.Title, null, null, web.Url, "_self"); parentNode.ChildNodes.Add(node); parentNode = node; foreach (SPList list in web.Lists) { if (!list.Hidden) { node = new TreeNode(list.Title, null, null, list.DefaultViewUrl, "_self"); parentNode.ChildNodes.Add(node); } } foreach (SPWeb childWeb in web.Webs) { //Call the addWebs() function from itself (i.e. recursively) //to add all child Webs until there are no more to add. addWebs(childWeb, parentNode); childWeb.Dispose(); } } } }
Learn the core features of SharePoint and become master with our expertise tutorials.
SharePoint Web Part life cycle
Life Cycle of SharePoint Webparts:
Protected override void OnInit(EventArgs e)
OnInit – Configuration values set using WebBrowsable properties and those in web part task pane are loaded into the web part.
Protected override void OnLoad(EventArgs e)
OnLoad User Generated Event – for e.g. button click on the web part.
Protected override void CreateChildControls ()
CreateChildControls – All the controls specified are created and added to controls collection. When the page is being rendered for the first time the method generally occurs after the OnLoad() event. In case of postback, it is called before the OnLoad() event. We can make use of EnsureChildControls() - It checks to see if the CreateChildControls method has yet been called, and if it has not, calls it.
Protected override void LoadViewState(object savedState) //Only at Postback
LoadViewState – The view state of the web part is populated over here.
protected override void OnPreRender(EventArgs e)
OnPreRender – Here we can change any of the web part properties before the control output is drawn.
protected override void OnUnload(EventArgs e)8. public override void Dispose()
Create a SharePoint 2010 Web Part that is meaningful and that utilizes the following features:
User Controls
Code Behind
Custom Web Part Properties
Custom Editor Part(s) Properties
Accessing SharePoint Data within the Web Part
The Web Part I’ll be demoing here doesn’t do much of anything other than show you how to accomplish all the above features giving you the power to adapt the code so you can make a meaningful Web part for your own specific needs. Let’s begin: This walkthrough provides the steps for creating a basic custom Web Part that can be added to your site pages. It is a simple Web Part that enables the user to define a custom message that is displayed inside the Web Part. This Web Part derives from the Microsoft ASP.NET Web Part class, which is the recommended practice for Microsoft SharePoint Foundation. Prerequisites ASP.NET & SharePoint development tools in Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Using visual studio we can develop two types of web parts will discuss in this module
Build and Deploy the Web Part
In this task, you build and deploy the Web Part project. Build and deploy the project by using one of the following options:
When debugging the SharePoint solution, use the F5 key to build and deploy your solution. By doing this, the debug experience includes steps such as help for creating a Web Part Page and resetting Internet Information Services (IIS).
Alternately, you can build and deploy your solution by clicking the Build menu, selecting Build Solution, verifying that the solution builds without any errors, and then selecting Deploy Solution.
After successful deployment of Web Parts , you need to follow the below steps to use the web part in SharePoint environment.
Create a Web Parts Page In this task, you create a Web Parts page to contain the Web Part, unless one has already been created for you.
If you clicked F5 to debug your application, by default, the page where you create a Web part page is displayed. Otherwise, open the SharePoint site, click Site Actions, click View All Site Content, click Create, scroll and select the Web Part Page option.
In the Web Part Page screen, provide the information requested about that particular Web Parts page. For example, provide a name (SampleWebPartPage) and layout template for the page.
In the Document Library dropdown, select Site Pages, and then click Create. SharePoint creates and displays your Web Parts page.
Figure 3: A sample Web Part page Add the Web Part to the Web Parts Page In this task, you add the Web Part to the Web Parts page and test the solution.
in On the Web Parts page, click into the Add a Web Part text in the zone where you want the Web Part displayed.
In the Categories list, click Custom. In the Web Parts box, click VisualWebPart1.
In the About the Web Part box at the top of the page, click Add. The Web Part is added to the zone that you selected as shown in Figure 4. Note that the lists and SubWebs are displayed a hierarchical view.
Figure 4. The Web Part after being added to the zone in the Web Part page
On the File menu, point to New, and then click Project. If Visual Studio is set to use Visual Basic development settings, on the File menu, click New Project.
In the New Project dialog box, in the Installed Templates pane, expand the SharePoint node under the programming language that you want to use, and then select 2010.
In the Templates pane, select Empty SharePoint Project.
Type DisplayMessage as the project name, and then click OK.
In the SharePoint Customization Wizard, select Deploy as a sandboxed solution, and then click Finish.
In Solution Explorer, click the DisplayMessage project.
On the Project menu, click Add New Item.
In the Add New Item dialog box, select the Web Part template, type DisplayMessageWebPart as the Name, and then click Add.
Adding a Web Part Property After adding the new Web Part, add a property that can be personalized for the Web Part. The Web Part property determines the text that is rendered inside the Web Part. This is personalized based on the individual user.
For Web Parts based on the ASP.NET Web Parts Pages base class, the tags that are used for the customizable properties are named differently than Web Parts that are based on the WebPart base class. The following list describes each of those properties:
The WebBrowsableAttribute attribute ensures that your custom property renders in the editing tool pane in SharePoint Foundation.
The WebDescriptionAttribute attribute displays a tooltip to help guide users when they are editing your custom property.
The PersonalizableAttribute attribute determines whether changes to your custom property affect all users or only individual users.
To create the Web Part property
1. In the DisplayMessageWebPart file, copy and paste the following code to create a basic customizable property. private string customMessage = "Hello, world!"; public string DisplayMessage { get { return customMessage; } set { customMessage = value; } } 2. Add the following tags above the public declaration to allow changes on a per-user basis. [WebBrowsable(true), WebDescription("Displays a custom message"), WebDisplayName("Display Message"), Personalizable(PersonalizationScope.User)] Now you have created a personalizable Web Part property.
Interested in mastering SharePoint Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on SharePoint Training.
Overriding the CreateChildControls Method Next, you must add functionality to your Web Part. By overriding the CreateChildControls method, you can tell the Web Part what operations to perform when the page is visited. In this example, the Web Part renders the user-defined text.
To override the CreateChildControls method
In the DisplayMessageWebPart file, paste the following code to override the CreateChildControls methods.
To specify a content type to include in a custom site definition configuration, you first create the content type as a separate Feature, and then you reference that Feature in some Collaborative Application Markup Language (CAML) markup to the site definition configuration in the Onet.xml file of the site definition. Then, when a user creates a new site of that type, the content type is included by default in the site’s content type collection.
Modifying the Onet.xml file for any of the built-in site types of SharePoint Foundation is not supported, so you can use the following procedure only on custom site types. For more information about creating custom site definition configurations, see How to: Create a Custom Site Definition and Configuration.
To specify a content type in a site definition configuration
Reference that Feature in theConfiguration element (in the Onet.xml file) that defines your custom site type:
Open the Onet.xml file in %ProgramFiles%\Common Files\Microsoft Shared\web server extensions\14\TEMPLATE\SiteTemplates\site_type\XML, wheresite_type is name of the custom site definition.
In theConfiguration element, add a reference to the content type Feature in either the SiteFeatures orWebFeatures You identify the Feature by its GUID. The following is an example.
XML: <SiteFeatures> <Feature ID="00BFEA71-1C5E-4A24-B310-BA51C3EB7A57" /> <Feature ID="695B6570-ACDC-4A8E-8545-26EA7FC1D162" /> </SiteFeatures> <WebFeatures> <Feature ID="00BFEA71-4EA5-48D4-A4AD-7EA5C011ABE5" /> <Feature ID="00BFEA71-E717-4E80-DEAF-D0C71B360101" /> </WebFeatures> For more information about the difference between these two elements, see SiteFeatures Element (Site)and WebFeatures Element (Site). Adding Content Types to an Existing Site You can add content types to a site by using either declarative XML or the SharePoint Foundation object model. Declarative XML uses the Content Type Definition Schema to define content types. Content type definitions are declared in the element manifest file of a Feature, and the content types are added to a site when the Feature is activated. When you use the SharePoint Foundation object model, you must subclass the SPFeatureReceiver class. Place the code that creates your content types and adds them to the site in the FeatureActivated method. Typically, declarative XML is easier to write. However, declarative XML generally offers less flexibility than the object model, which has access to the capabilities of the entire Microsoft .NET Framework and can be debugged at run time. Both approaches are supported by templates that are provided with SharePoint development tools in Microsoft Visual Studio 2010.
The file that is referenced by the DocumentTemplate element must already exist on the site or must be included with the Feature. For more information, see How to: Provision a File.
Complete the content type definition as desired. For more information, seeContent Type Definitions.
Example 1
The following example is the element manifest for a Feature. When the Feature is activated, the element manifest is used to create a site column and add it to the site column collection on the current site. Then the manifest is used to create a site content type and add it to the content type collection on the current site. XML: <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> <Elements xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/sharepoint/"> <!-- Create a site column. --> <Field ID="{060E50AC-E9C1-4D3C-B1F9-DE0BCAC300F6}" Name="Amount" DisplayName="Amount" Type="Currency" Decimals="2" Min="0" Required="FALSE" Group="Financial Columns" /> <!-- Create a site content type that uses the column. --> <!-- Parent ContentType: Document (0x0101) --> <ContentType ID="0x0101000728167cd9c94899925ba69c4af6743e" Name="Financial Document" Group="Financial Content Types" Description="Base financial content type" Version="0"> <FieldRefs> <FieldRef ID="{060E50AC-E9C1-4D3C-B1F9-DE0BCAC300F6}" Name="Amount" DisplayName="Amount" Required="FALSE"/> </FieldRefs> </ContentType> </Elements>
Learn the core features of SharePoint and become master with our expertise tutorials.
To add a content type by using server code
Create a feature receiver class that inherits from theSPFeatureReceiver
The following example shows the implementation of the FeatureActivated method in a subclass of theSPFeatureReceiver class. When the Feature is activated, code in the FeatureActivated method creates a site column and adds it to the site column collection on the current site. Then the code creates a content type that inherits from the Document content type and adds it to the content type collection on the current site. public override void FeatureActivated(SPFeatureReceiverProperties properties) { SPSite siteCollection = (SPSite)properties.Feature.Parent; SPWeb site = siteCollection.OpenWeb(); /* Create a site column. */ string amountFieldName = site.Fields.Add("Amount", SPFieldType.Currency, false); SPFieldCurrency amountField = (SPFieldCurrency)site.Fields.GetFieldByInternalName(amountFieldName); amountField.Group = "Financial Columns"; amountField.DisplayFormat = SPNumberFormatTypes.TwoDecimals; amountField.MinimumValue = 0; amountField.Update(); /* Create a site content type that uses the column. */ // Get a content type to be the parent of a new Financial Document content type. SPContentType documentCType = site.AvailableContentTypes[SPBuiltInContentTypeId.Document]; // Create the Financial Document content type. SPContentType financialDocumentCType = new SPContentType(documentCType, site.ContentTypes, "Financial Document"); site.ContentTypes.Add(financialDocumentCType); // Note: A content type is not initialized until after it is added. financialDocumentCType = site.ContentTypes[financialDocumentCType.Id]; financialDocumentCType.Group = "Financial Content Types"; // Add the Amount column. Child content types inherit the column. SPFieldLink amountFieldRef = new SPFieldLink(amountField); financialDocumentCType.FieldLinks.Add(amountFieldRef); // Commit changes. financialDocumentCType.Update(); site.Dispose(); siteCollection.Dispose(); }
8a:T51d8,
A Service is an application component representing either an application's desire to perform a longer-running operation while not interacting with the user or to supply functionality for other applications to use. Each service class must have a corresponding <service> declaration in its package's AndroidManifest.xml. Services can be started with Context.startService() and Context.bindService(). Note that services, like other application objects, run in the main thread of their hosting process. This means that, if your service is going to do any CPU intensive (such as MP3 playback) or blocking (such as networking) operations, it should spawn its own thread in which to do that work. More information on this can be found in Processes and Threads. The IntentService class is available as a standard implementation of Service that has its own thread where it schedules its work to be done.
What is a Service?
Service Lifecycle
Permissions
Process Lifecycle
Local Service Sample
Remote Messenger Service Sample
What is a Service? Most confusion about the Service class actually revolves around what it is not:
A Service is not a separate process. The Service object itself does not imply it is running in its own process; unless otherwise specified, it runs in the same process as the application it is part of.
A Service is not a thread. It is not a means itself to do work off of the main thread (to avoid Application Not Responding errors). Thus a Service itself is actually very simple, providing two main features:
A facility for the application to tell the system about something it wants to be doing in the background (even when the user is not directly interacting with the application). This corresponds to calls to Context.startService(), which ask the system to schedule work for the service, to be run until the service or someone else explicitly stop it.
A facility for an application to expose some of its functionality to other applications. This corresponds to calls to Context.bindService(), which allows a long-standing connection to be made to the service in order to interact with it.
When a Service component is actually created, for either of these reasons, all that the system actually does is instantiate the component and call its onCreate() and any other appropriate callbacks on the main thread. It is up to the Service to implement these with the appropriate behavior, such as creating a secondary thread in which it does its work. Note that because Service itself is so simple, you can make your interaction with it as simple or complicated as you want: from treating it as a local Java object that you make direct method calls on (as illustrated by Local Service Sample), to providing a full remoteable interface using AIDL. Service Lifecycle There are two reasons that a service can be run by the system. If someone calls Context.startService() then the system will retrieve the service (creating it and calling its onCreate() method if needed) and then call its onStartCommand(Intent, int, int) method with the arguments supplied by the client. The service will at this point continue running until Context.stopService() or stopSelf() is called. Note that multiple calls to Context.startService() do not nest (though they do result in multiple corresponding calls to onStartCommand()), so no matter how many times it is started a service will be stopped once Context.stopService() or stopSelf() is called; however, services can use their stopSelf(int) method to ensure the service is not stopped until started intents have been processed. For started services, there are two additional major modes of operation they can decide to run in, depending on the value they return from onStartCommand(): START_STICKY is used for services that are explicitly started and stopped as needed, while START_NOT_STICKY or START_REDELIVER_INTENT are used for services that should only remain running while processing any commands sent to them. See the linked documentation for more detail on the semantics. Clients can also use Context.bindService() to obtain a persistent connection to a service. This likewise creates the service if it is not already running (calling onCreate() while doing so), but does not call onStartCommand(). The client will receive the IBinder object that the service returns from its onBind(Intent) method, allowing the client to then make calls back to the service. The service will remain running as long as the connection is established (whether or not the client retains a reference on the service's IBinder). Usually the IBinder returned is for a complex interface that has been written in aidl. A service can be both started and have connections bound to it. In such a case, the system will keep the service running as long as either it is started or there are one or more connections to it with the Context.BIND_AUTO_CREATE flag. Once neither of these situations hold, the service's onDestroy() method is called and the service is effectively terminated. All cleanup (stopping threads, unregistering receivers) should be complete upon returning from onDestroy(). Permissions Global access to a service can be enforced when it is declared in its manifest's <service> tag. By doing so, other applications will need to declare a corresponding <uses-permission> element in their own manifest to be able to start, stop, or bind to the service. In addition, a service can protect individual IPC calls into it with permissions, by calling the checkCallingPermission(String) method before executing the implementation of that call. Process Lifecycle The Android system will attempt to keep the process hosting a service around as long as the service has been started or has clients bound to it. When running low on memory and needing to kill existing processes, the priority of a process hosting the service will be the higher of the following possibilities:
If the service is currently executing code in its onCreate(), onStartCommand(), or onDestroy() methods, then the hosting process will be a foreground process to ensure this code can execute without being killed.
If the service has been started, then its hosting process is considered to be less important than any processes that are currently visible to the user on-screen, but more important than any process not visible. Because only a few processes are generally visible to the user, this means that the service should not be killed except in extreme low memory conditions.
If there are clients bound to the service, then the service's hosting process is never less important than the most important client. That is, if one of its clients is visible to the user, then the service itself is considered to be visible.
A started service can use the startForeground(int, Notification) API to put the service in a foreground state, where the system considers it to be something the user is actively aware of and thus not a candidate for killing when low on memory. (It is still theoretically possible for the service to be killed under extreme memory pressure from the current foreground application, but in practice this should not be a concern.)
Note this means that most of the time your service is running, it may be killed by the system if it is under heavy memory pressure. If this happens, the system will later try to restart the service. An important consequence of this is that if you implement onStartCommand() to schedule work to be done asynchronously or in another thread, then you may want to use START_FLAG_REDELIVERY to have the system re-deliver an Intent for you so that it does not get lost if your service is killed while processing it. Other application components running in the same process as the service (such as an Activity) can, of course, increase the importance of the overall process beyond just the importance of the service itself. Local Service Sample One of the most common uses of a Service is as a secondary component running alongside other parts of an application, in the same process as the rest of the components. All components of an .apk run in the same process unless explicitly stated otherwise, so this is a typical situation. When used in this way, by assuming the components are in the same process, you can greatly simplify the interaction between them: clients of the service can simply cast the IBinder they receive from it to a concrete class published by the service. An example of this use of a Service is shown here. First is the Service itself, publishing a custom class when bound: public class LocalService extends Service { private NotificationManager mNM; // Unique Identification Number for the Notification. // We use it on Notification start, and to cancel it. private int NOTIFICATION = R.string.local_service_started; public class LocalBinder extends Binder { LocalService getService() { return LocalService.this; } } @Override public void onCreate() { mNM = (NotificationManager)getSystemService(NOTIFICATION_SERVICE); // Display a notification about us starting. We put an icon in the status bar. showNotification(); } @Override public int onStartCommand(Intent intent, int flags, int startId) { Log.i("LocalService", "Received start id " + startId + ": " + intent); // We want this service to continue running until it is explicitly // stopped, so return sticky. return START_STICKY; } @Override public void onDestroy() { // Cancel the persistent notification. mNM.cancel(NOTIFICATION); // Tell the user we stopped. Toast.makeText(this, R.string.local_service_stopped, Toast.LENGTH_SHORT).show(); } @Override public IBinder onBind(Intent intent) { return mBinder; } // This is the object that receives interactions from clients. See // RemoteService for a more complete example. private final IBinder mBinder = new LocalBinder(); /** * Show a notification while this service is running. */ private void showNotification() { // In this sample, we'll use the same text for the ticker and the expanded notification CharSequence text = getText(R.string.local_service_started); // Set the icon, scrolling text and timestamp Notification notification = new Notification(R.drawable.stat_sample, text, System.currentTimeMillis()); // The PendingIntent to launch our activity if the user selects this notification PendingIntent contentIntent = PendingIntent.getActivity(this, 0, new Intent(this, LocalServiceActivities.Controller.class), 0); // Set the info for the views that show in the notification panel. notification.setLatestEventInfo(this, getText(R.string.local_service_label), text, contentIntent); // Send the notification. mNM.notify(NOTIFICATION, notification); } } With that done, one can now write client code that directly accesses the running service, such as: private LocalService mBoundService; private ServiceConnection mConnection = new ServiceConnection() { public void onServiceConnected(ComponentName className, IBinder service) { // This is called when the connection with the service has been // established, giving us the service object we can use to // interact with the service. Because we have bound to a explicit // service that we know is running in our own process, we can // cast its IBinder to a concrete class and directly access it. mBoundService = ((LocalService.LocalBinder)service).getService(); // Tell the user about this for our demo. Toast.makeText(Binding.this, R.string.local_service_connected, Toast.LENGTH_SHORT).show(); } public void onServiceDisconnected(ComponentName className) { // This is called when the connection with the service has been // unexpectedly disconnected -- that is, its process crashed. // Because it is running in our same process, we should never // see this happen. mBoundService = null; Toast.makeText(Binding.this, R.string.local_service_disconnected, Toast.LENGTH_SHORT).show(); } }; void doBindService() { // Establish a connection with the service. We use an explicit // class name because we want a specific service implementation that // we know will be running in our own process (and thus won't be // supporting component replacement by other applications). bindService(new Intent(Binding.this, LocalService.class), mConnection, Context.BIND_AUTO_CREATE); mIsBound = true; } void doUnbindService() { if (mIsBound) { // Detach our existing connection. unbindService(mConnection); mIsBound = false; } } @Override protected void onDestroy() { super.onDestroy(); doUnbindService(); } Remote Messenger Service Sample If you need to be able to write a Service that can perform complicated communication with clients in remote processes (beyond simply the use of Context.startService to send commands to it), then you can use the Messenger class instead of writing full AIDL files. An example of a Service that uses Messenger as its client interface is shown here. First is the Service itself, publishing a Messenger to an internal Handler when bound: public class MessengerService extends Service { /** For showing and hiding our notification. */ NotificationManager mNM; /** Keeps track of all current registered clients. */ ArrayList<Messenger> mClients = new ArrayList<Messenger>(); /** Holds last value set by a client. */ int mValue = 0; /** * Command to the service to register a client, receiving callbacks * from the service. The Message's replyTo field must be a Messenger of * the client where callbacks should be sent. */ static final int MSG_REGISTER_CLIENT = 1; static final int MSG_UNREGISTER_CLIENT = 2; static final int MSG_SET_VALUE = 3; class IncomingHandler extends Handler { @Override public void handleMessage(Message msg) { switch (msg.what) { case MSG_REGISTER_CLIENT: mClients.add(msg.replyTo); break; case MSG_UNREGISTER_CLIENT: mClients.remove(msg.replyTo); break; case MSG_SET_VALUE: mValue = msg.arg1; for (int i=mClients.size()-1; i>=0; i--) { try { mClients.get(i).send(Message.obtain(null, MSG_SET_VALUE, mValue, 0)); } catch (RemoteException e) { // The client is dead. Remove it from the list; // we are going through the list from back to front // so this is safe to do inside the loop. mClients.remove(i); } } break; default: super.handleMessage(msg); } } } /** * Target we publish for clients to send messages to IncomingHandler. */ final Messenger mMessenger = new Messenger(new IncomingHandler()); @Override public void onCreate() { mNM = (NotificationManager)getSystemService(NOTIFICATION_SERVICE); // Display a notification about us starting. showNotification(); } @Override public void onDestroy() { // Cancel the persistent notification. mNM.cancel(R.string.remote_service_started); // Tell the user we stopped. Toast.makeText(this, R.string.remote_service_stopped, Toast.LENGTH_SHORT).show(); } /** * When binding to the service, we return an interface to our messenger * for sending messages to the service. */ @Override public IBinder onBind(Intent intent) { return mMessenger.getBinder(); } /** * Show a notification while this service is running. */ private void showNotification() { // In this sample, we'll use the same text for the ticker and the expanded notification CharSequence text = getText(R.string.remote_service_started); // Set the icon, scrolling text and timestamp Notification notification = new Notification(R.drawable.stat_sample, text, System.currentTimeMillis()); // The PendingIntent to launch our activity if the user selects this notification PendingIntent contentIntent = PendingIntent.getActivity(this, 0, new Intent(this, Controller.class), 0); // Set the info for the views that show in the notification panel. notification.setLatestEventInfo(this, getText(R.string.remote_service_label), text, contentIntent); // Send the notification. // We use a string id because it is a unique number. We use it later to cancel. mNM.notify(R.string.remote_service_started, notification); } } If we want to make this service run in a remote process (instead of the standard one for its .apk), we can use android:process in its manifest tag to specify one: <service android:name=".app.MessengerService" android:process=":remote" /> Note that the name "remote" chosen here is arbitrary, and you can use other names if you want additional processes. The ':' prefix appends the name to your package's standard process name. With that done, clients can now bind to the service and send messages to it. Note that this allows clients to register with it to receive messages back as well: /** Messenger for communicating with service. */ Messenger mService = null; /** Flag indicating whether we have called bind on the service. */ boolean mIsBound; /** Some text view we are using to show state information. */ TextView mCallbackText; /** * Handler of incoming messages from service. */ class IncomingHandler extends Handler { @Override public void handleMessage(Message msg) { switch (msg.what) { case MessengerService.MSG_SET_VALUE: mCallbackText.setText("Received from service: " + msg.arg1); break; default: super.handleMessage(msg); } } } /** * Target we publish for clients to send messages to IncomingHandler. */ final Messenger mMessenger = new Messenger(new IncomingHandler()); /** * Class for interacting with the main interface of the service. */ private ServiceConnection mConnection = new ServiceConnection() { public void onServiceConnected(ComponentName className, IBinder service) { // This is called when the connection with the service has been // established, giving us the service object we can use to // interact with the service. We are communicating with our // service through an IDL interface, so get a client-side // representation of that from the raw service object. mService = new Messenger(service); mCallbackText.setText("Attached."); // We want to monitor the service for as long as we are // connected to it. try { Message msg = Message.obtain(null, MessengerService.MSG_REGISTER_CLIENT); msg.replyTo = mMessenger; mService.send(msg); // Give it some value as an example. msg = Message.obtain(null, MessengerService.MSG_SET_VALUE, this.hashCode(), 0); mService.send(msg); } catch (RemoteException e) { // In this case the service has crashed before we could even // do anything with it; we can count on soon being // disconnected (and then reconnected if it can be restarted) // so there is no need to do anything here. } // As part of the sample, tell the user what happened. Toast.makeText(Binding.this, R.string.remote_service_connected, Toast.LENGTH_SHORT).show(); } public void onServiceDisconnected(ComponentName className) { // This is called when the connection with the service has been // unexpectedly disconnected -- that is, its process crashed. mService = null; mCallbackText.setText("Disconnected."); // As part of the sample, tell the user what happened. Toast.makeText(Binding.this, R.string.remote_service_disconnected, Toast.LENGTH_SHORT).show(); } }; void doBindService() { // Establish a connection with the service. We use an explicit // class name because there is no reason to be able to let other // applications replace our component. bindService(new Intent(Binding.this, MessengerService.class), mConnection, Context.BIND_AUTO_CREATE); mIsBound = true; mCallbackText.setText("Binding."); } void doUnbindService() { if (mIsBound) { // If we have received the service, and hence registered with // it, then now is the time to unregister. if (mService != null) { try { Message msg = Message.obtain(null, MessengerService.MSG_UNREGISTER_CLIENT); msg.replyTo = mMessenger; mService.send(msg); } catch (RemoteException e) { // There is nothing special we need to do if the service // has crashed. } } // Detach our existing connection. unbindService(mConnection); mIsBound = false; mCallbackText.setText("Unbinding."); } } Check Out Our Related CoursesAndroid TutorialsTop 50 Android Interview QuestionsAndroid Training In Houston
8b:T5beb,
VISUALFORCE Pages part-2
Visualforce Senarion 7:
The following visualforce code will automatically prompts to the "My Contacts" once we click on Contacts tab. Override the following Visual force page with the Contacts tab
Visualforce Code:
<apex:pagetabStyle="Contact_Relationship__c" >
<script type="text/javascript">
window.onload = function() {
parent.document.location.href = "/a07?fcf=00B900000031bax";
}
</script>
</apex:page> ID of the “My Contacts” list view
Visualforce Senarion 8:
Create the visualforce page with the following code.
public class SelectPicklist {
public SelectPicklist(ApexPages.StandardController controller) {
}
public String YearValue{set;get;}
public Boolean YearValue1{set;get;}
public Boolean YearValue2{set;get;}
public List<SelectOption> getYearlist () {
List<SelectOption> options = new List<SelectOption>();
options.add(new SelectOption('','--None--'));
options.add(new SelectOption('1','2010'));
options.add(new SelectOption('2','2011'));
return options;
}
public void Picklist(){
if(YearValue=='1')
YearValue1 = true;
else
YearValue2 = True;
}
}
Create the button called “Hiding Sections” and override “Enabling Sectionson Picklist Values” visualforce page
Aspired to become an Salesforce? Explore the post to discover the know-hows on Salesforce Online Training.
Button Creation:
Once we click on “Hiding Sections” button, it will prompt to the following window have the field called “Year of Passing”, and values are 2010 and 2011
Once we select 2010 from the above picklist, then “2010 Hiding Details” section will be populated automatically
public class InterviewOne_controller{
public list<Account> listAccounts{get;set;}
public InterviewOne_controller(){
list<Account>=new list<Account>();
listAccounts = [select name,BillingState ,phone,Website from Account];
}
}
Create the Visualforce tab called “ + 6: “and override the above visualforce with this tab
Once we click on the “Interview One” tab, then all the accounts will be populated in a table format which are not clickable.
public class InterviewTwo_controller{
public list<Account> listAccounts{get;set;}
public string searchString {get;set;}
public boolean showmsg{get;set;}
public InterviewTwo_controller(){
listAccounts=new list<Account>();
showmsg=false;
}
public pagereference displayAccounts(){
String AccountQuery = 'select id, name,BillingState,Phone,Website from Account';
if(searchString != '' && searchString != null)
AccountQuery = AccountQuery + ' where name LIKE \'%' + searchString+'%\' ';
listAccounts=database.query(AccountQuery);
if(listAccounts.size()>0 && listAccounts!=null)
showmsg=false;
else{
ApexPages.Message errMsg = new ApexPages.Message(ApexPages.Severity.Warni
ng,'No Accounts Found');
ApexPages.addMessage(errMsg);
showmsg=true;
}
return null;
}
Create the Visualforce tab called “ + 6 /6 “and override the above visualforce with this tab
Click on the “Interview Two” tab
Enter the string “Osmania” in Search box and click on the “Search” button, then all the accounts started with the Osmania will be automatically populated in the “Results” section
public with sharing class showSelectdAccounts {
public list<Account> lstAcc{get;set;}
public list<Account> selectedAcc{get;set;}
public list<wrapper> lstWrapper{get;set;}
public boolean noAcc{get;set;}
public showSelectdAccounts(){
lstWrapper = new list<Wrapper>();
noAcc = false;
lstAcc = [select id,name,phone from Account];
wrapper objwrap;
for(Account objA:lstAcc){
objwrap = new Wrapper();
objwrap.Acc = objA;
lstWrapper.add(objwrap);
}
}
public void ShowSelected(){
selectedAcc = new list<Account>();
selectedAcc.clear();
for(Wrapper objWrap:lstWrapper){
if(objWrap.selected){
noAcc = true;
selectedAcc.add(objWrap.Acc);
}
}
if(!noAcc){
system.debug('8888888'+noacc);
ApexPages.addMessage(new ApexPages.message(ApexPages.severity.INFO,'No
Account Selected'));
}
}
public class wrapper{
public boolean selected{get;set;}
public Account Acc{get;set;}
}
}
Create the Visualforce tab called “ + 6/ “and override the above visualforce with this tab
Click on “Interview Three” tab
[gallery ids="3193"]
Check the checkbox in the selected column and click on “Show Selected Accounts” button, then those selected accounts will be automatically populated in the “Selected Accounts” section
public with sharing class InterviewFourClass {
public list<Account> lstAcc{get;set;}
public InterviewFourClass(){
lstAcc = new list<Account>();
lstAcc = [select id,name,(select id,lastname,phone,firstname,email from Contacts),p
hone from Account];
ApexPages.addMessage(new ApexPages.message(ApexPages.severity.INFO,'this pa
ge was created ONLY one Query'));
}
}
Create the Visualforce tab called “ + 6 “and override the above visualforce with this tab
Click on “Interview Four” tab and which gives the list of accounts and all the contacts that are associated with that account.
Visualforce Scenario 13:
Create the Visualforce page with following code
Visual Force Code:
<apex:page controller="InterviewFifthClass" sidebar="false" >
<apex:form >
<apex:pageBlock >
<apex:pageMessages />
<apex:sectionHeader title="Interview Five"/>
<apex:pageBlock title="All Accounts">
<apex:pageBlockTable value="{!lstacc}" var="l" >
<apex:column headerValue="AccountName" >
<apex:commandLink value="{!l.name}" action="{!click}"/>
</apex:column>
<apex:column headerValue="Billing State/Province"
value="{!l.BillingState}">
</apex:column>
<apex:column headerValue="phone" value="{!l.phone}">
</apex:column>
<apex:column headerValue="website" value="{!l.website}">
</apex:column>
</apex:pageBlockTable>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
InterviewFifthClass Code:
public with sharing class InterviewFifthClass {
public pagereference click() {
ApexPages.addMessage(new ApexPages.message(ApexPages.severity.INFO,'you clic
ked on Name...'));
return null;
}
public InterviewFifthClass (){
lstacc = [select id, name, BillingState,phone,website from account];
ApexPages.addMessage(new ApexPages.message(ApexPages.severity.INFO,'Sele
ct an Account by Clicking its Name.'));
}
public List<account> lstacc { get; set;
}
}
Create the Visualforce tab called “ + 6 + “and override the above visualforce with this tab
Once we click on the “Interview five” tab, then all the accounts will be populated in a table format which are we can clickable.
1). <Apex:Page>: This is a very important tag of a VF. This says that a single VF page and all the components must be wrapped inside this single page. Attributes of <apex: page> tag are:
Action:
This invokes when this page is requested by the server, here we must use a expression language to reference an action method in APEX Action= {! do action} ---> Must be defined in APEX class. EX:- action= {! int} or action= {!redir} --->re directions the page to new page referred ---> Initializes
Controller:
It’s a string type and the name given here must be implemented in an Apex class, controller means an custom controller, this cannot be used if we use standard controller. <apex: page Controller="class name implemented in APEX">
Extension:
This is used to extend the custom controllers we can have any extension for an custom controller, this is used to add extra functionality. <apex: page controller: “string" extension="string">
ID:
It’s a string, gives an identification for tag, we can specify any name, but it should not be a duplicate, it’s generally used to refer this page by other components in the page.
Record setvar:
it’s a string; this attribute indicates that the page users a set of records oriented by a standard controller only. Used to handle multiple records, this attribute converts a controller to a list controller.
Render As:
it’s a string the name of any supported content converter, we can change the display in to a 'PDF' or another type currently it’s only a 'PDF' format. <apex: page render as='PDF'> displays a page in a pdf format
Renderd:
it's a Boolean type, related to the displaying of a page by default it’s a 'TRUE', if we keep it false the page will not be displayed.
Setup:
it's a Boolean type; it specifies whether the page should implement standard salesforce.com setup if its true.It will not implement by default if its "FALSE"
Show header:
it's a Boolean type, displays or hides the salesforce header if true or false respectively.
Sidebar:
it's a Boolean type, displays or hides the sidebar of standard salesforce site.
standard controller:
it's the sales force object that's used to control the behaviour of this page, this attribute cannot be specified if custom controller is used. <apex: page standard controller="Account">
Standard style sheets:
it's a Boolean type; it decides whether the standard salesforce style sheets are added to the generated page header if the showheader attribute is set false, if it’s set true the standard style sheets are by default, added to the generated page header. The other important tags are tab style title, help URL & help title. 2).Apex.form: A section of a VF page that allows users to enter o/p and then submit it with an <apex: command Button> or <apex :command link> The body of the form determines the data that is displayed and the way it is processed. Attributes of this tag are:
Accept:it's a string type, the text to display as a tooltip when the user's mouse pointer hovers over this component.
Accept charset: Its a string type, it’s a comma separated list of characters encoding that a server processing this form can handle.
Dir: it’s a string type, it specifies the directions such as RTL & LTR (Right to left or left to right), that should display the components in the form of a VF page(position).
Onclick, anddblclick, onkeydown, on keypress, onkeyup, onmousedown, onmouseout, onmousemove, onmouseup, onreset, onsubmit These are the general attributes must be used within the form tag, all related when we use JAVASCRIPT in our design, when this JAVASCRIPT should be invoked either on one click, double click, onkeydown, press, up, down, move.............. On-reset and on submit are important, here the JavaScript is invoked when an event such as reset/submit occurs, if the user clicks on reset/submit buttons. 3).<apex:pageblock>: it's an area of a page that uses styles similar to the appearance of a salesforce detail page, without any default content. In detail page we can see only the components in 2 column's here we can make it to any number of columns using page Block section. And we can create instances rather than full names of objects i.e. <apex:pageblock value="{!account}" var="AC"> </apex:pageBlock> Attributes are:
Dir:Direction of display 'RTL/LTR'
helptitle: it's a string type, the text in title will be displayed when a user hovers the mouse over the help link for the pageblock. We must use this in relation with helpURL helpURL
it's a string type, the URL of a webpage that provides help for the page block. Here also we can perform the same actions which can be performed using the form tag, the Java script enabled tag attributes are like the following. Onclick, onclick, onkeydown, onkeypress, onkeyup........... 4).<apex.facetname>: This is an tag which is used to mention the column name of the column and this will overrides the attributer properties of the <apex:pageblock> section like JavaScript enabled attributes, title, help text, help URL,....... And the column component can be added in both ways i.es the header and footer.
footer: The components that appear at the bottom of the page block.
Header: The components that appear as a header of the page block.
5).apex:PageBlock section This tag can be used to create sections within a page block to categorize different fields into different sections. It’s similar to adding a section by using a edit page layout assignment. These sections spans of two cells. One for the field label, and another for its value. Each component found in the body of an <apex: pageblock section> is placed into the next cell in a row until the no. of columns is reached. To add fields, and objects to this <apex: pageblock section> we use <apex:inputfield> or <apex:outputfield> component each of these component automatically displays with the field's associated label. Attributes
Clooapsible: it's a Boolean type, it specifies whether the page block section can be expanded and collapsed by a user, by default its "TRUE"
Columns: it's an integer type, it specifies the no. of columns that can be included in a single row of a pageblock section, a single column can span two cells-one for field label, and another for its value.
Dir: Direction RTL or LTR
Showhader:It's a Boolean type variable, value that specifies whether the page block section title is displayed, if it's true.
6). apex:pageblocksection item A single piece of data in an <apex: pageblocksection> that takes keep up one column in one row. An <apex:pageBlocksection Item> component can include up to two child components, If no content is specified, the content spans both cells of the column. If two child components are specified , the content of the first is rendered in left, "label" cells of the column, while the content of the second is rendered in the right , "data' cell of the column. EX:- if we include an <apex:outputfield> or an <apex:inputfield>component in an <apex:pageblockitem>, these components do not display with their label or custom help text as they do when they are children of an <apex:pageblockitem> And these components cannot be rendered, rerender the child components instead. Attributes : (DIr, helptext,ID)
Labelstyle: Its a string type, these style used to display the content of the left “label" cell of the page block section column and uses all JavaScript enabled tags (discussed above)
7). <Apex:pageblock buttons>: A set of buttons that are styled like standard salesforce buttons the component must be a child component of an <apex: pageblock> This tag creates buttons and places them in the page block title area and footer area. Here we can specify the location of the button's in a section it can be either "Top/Bottom" Attributtes: Dir, Location: it's the area of the page block where the buttons should be rendered.Possible values are "top/bottom" or "both". This can be overridden when we use facet (header/footer) By default it's set to both. 8).apex:command button: A button that is rendered as an HTML o/p element with the type attribute set to "submit" , "rest" or "image" depending on the <apex: command button> tags specified values The button executes an action the child of an <apex: form> component EX:<apex:commandbutton action="{!save}" value="save" id="the button"/> Attributes:
Accesskey: it's a string type, it's a keyboard accesskey that puts the command button in focus. action: Apex page. Action this can be invoked by AJAX request to the server uses merger-field syntax to reference the method. Action="{! save}" references save method written in controller. If action is not specified, the page simply refreshes.
Dir:ID:Disabled
images: it's a string type, the absolute or relative URL of image displayed as this button, if specified; the type of the generated HTML input element is set to "image" Supports all Java script enabled attributes.
Rerender: its Boolean type, value that specifies whether the component is rendered on the page. If not specified, by default its true.
Timeout: it’s an integer type, the amount of time (in milliseconds) before an AJAX update request should time out.
Value:it’s an object type, text displayed on the Command Button as its label.
9). <apex: message>:
This tag can be used to display custom error messages on a VF page.
If this is not mentioned then the errors can be displayed only in debug log;
10). <apex:messages>:
All messages that were generated for all components on the current page.(standard salesforce style error messages) Default name is "error"
11).<apex:pagemessage>:
This component should be used for presenting custom messages in the page using the salesforce pattern for errors, warnings and other type of messages for a given severity.
Attributes are:
Detail:it's a string type, the detailed description of the errors information.
Severity:it's a string type, values supported by this are ‘confirm’, 'info', warning', 'error'.We can display the severity of the error messages generated.
Strength:it's an integer type, it’s the strength of the message, this controls the visibility and size of icon displayed next to the message. Use 0 for no image, or 1-3 (highest strength, largest icon)
Summary: it's a string type, the summary message.
12).<apex:page messages>: This component displays all messages that were generated for all components on the current page, presented using the SF styling. Attributes:
Escape:its Boolean type, A Boolean value whether, sensitive HTML, and XML characters should be escaped in the HTML old generated by this component.
show details:It's a Boolean type, specifies whether it displays the detail position of the messages, by default itsfalse.
13).<Apex:Detail>
This is a self sustained tag, this is a very powerful tag, this displays details page of a particular object. This component includes attributes for including or excluding the associated related lists, related lists hover links, and title bar that appear in the standard SF API.
Attributes
Inline Edit: It's a Boolean type, controls whether the component supports inline editing or not
Related list: It's Boolean type, which specifies whether the related lists are included in the rendered component.
Related list Hover: It's a Boolean type that specifies whether the related list hover links are included in the rendered component. Enable Related List Hover Links: Selected under setup/Customize /user interface.
ID: It's a string type, indentifies that allows the detail component to be referenced by other component in the page.
Rendered: It's a Boolean value that specifies whether the component is rendered on the page, by default its true.
Render: It's an object type, the ID of one or more components that redrawn when the result of an AJAX updates requested returns to the client. ***This will only works if inline Edit or show chatter are set to true.
14).<Apex:panel Bar>: This tag creates a panel bar on a VF page which can accommodate multiple panels. ***This can include up to 1, 0000 >apex: panel Bar Item> tags. This tag creates a pannel bar on a VF page which can accommodate multiple panels. Attributes:
Height: It's a string type, the height of the pannel bar when expanded, expressed either as a percentage of the available vertical space height="50" or height "200 px"s
Switch type: It's a string type, the implementation method for switching between Pannel Bar Items. The possible values include; "client", "server" and ajax . The value; it's an object type the ID of the Pannel Bar is displayed.
Var: It's a string type, the name of the variable that represents one element in the collection of data specified by the item attribute. We can then use this variable to display the element. Itself in the body of the Pannel Bar. Component tag.
Width: Controls the width of the pannel bar, expressed either in percentages of the available horizontal space or as a number of pixels. If not specified default is ="100%".
15). <apex:pannel baritem>:
It's a section of <apex: Pannel Bar > That can expand or retract when a user clicks the section header, when expanded the header and the content of the <apex: Panel Bar Item> is displayed, when retracted, only the header of the <apex: Panel Bar Item> displays.
Attributes
Expanded: It's a Boolean type, that specifies whether the content of this : Panel Bar Item is displayed.
Labelstyle : It's a string type, the text displayed as the header of the Panel Bar Item component.
Onenter: It's a string type, JavaScript invoked when the Panel Bar Item is not selected and the user clicks on the component to select it.
Onleave: It's a string type, JavaScript invoked when the user selects a different Panel Bar Item.
16).< Apex:TabPanel>: A page area that displays as a set of tabs. When is a user clicks a tab header, the tabs associated content displays binding the content of others tabs. Creates a Panel, which can accommodate multiple tabs. Attributes areActive tab Classes It's a string type its a style classes used to display a tab header in the tab panel when it is selected, used primarily to designate, which css styles are applied when using an external css style sheet. An HTML style name which controls the look and feel of the tab that is currently selected. Inactive Tab Class : Controls the look and feel of inactive tabs. Selected Tab: Name of the tab that should be first selected on displayed to the user when the page is first open . it will be the default tab when the page loads. Header Alignment: Left/Right. And we can adjust the spacing b/w tabs through header spacing. 17).<Apex:Tab>: This component must be a child of an <apex: tab panel> Attributes are:
id: It's a string type, an identifier that allows the tab component to be referenced by other component in the page.
Immediate: It's a Boolean type, specifies whether the action associated with this component happen's immediately, without processing any validation rules associated with the fields on the page. If set to true, the action happen's immediately and validation rules are skipped, by default it's false. and support s all Java enabled tags such as onclick, on doubleclicks....
Output Tags: 18) <Apex: Output field value = "{!-----}"/> 19) <Apex: Output label value = "{! }"/> 20) <Apex: Output label value = "{! }"/> 21) <Apex: Output text value = "www.google.com" > <Apex: Output link> To displays views: 22) <Apex: List view value ="Standard/custom object"/> 23) <Apex: enhanced list type ="Standard/custom object"/> 24) < Apex: Sectioned header>: A tittle bar for a page. In a standard salesforce.com page the title bar is a colored header displayed directly under. Attributes are : the tab bar.
Description: It's a string type, description text for the page that displays just under the colored title bar.
Printer: It's a string type, the URL is printable view.
Subtitle: The text displayed just under the main title in the colored title bar.
25). <apex: Selected Checkboxes> These are elements, displayed in a table. Attributes are
access key: It's a string type, the keyboard access key that puts check boxes component in focus.
layout: It's a string type, the method for which check boxes should be displayed in the table value
Possible values are: "Lines direction". Check boxes are horizontal "page direction" placed vertically. By default its value is "line direction" 26). <apex:selectlist>: A list of options that allows users to select only one value or multiple values at a time, depending on the value of its multiselect attribute. Attributes are:
Multiselect: It's a Boolean type, specifies whether the user's can select only one or more items from a list.
tabindes:It's a string type, the order in which this select list component is selected compared to other page components when a user presses the tab key repeatedly. The value is an integer from 0-32767.
27). <apex:select option> The values are provided from <apex: selected checkboxes > or <apex: Select List> or <apex : select radio> component. It must be a child of one of the above component. The no. of checkboxes/Radio buttons/List values that are declared in logic (method apex) in the controller part. ---> Uses attributes discussed above. 29). <apex:selection>:same as <apex:selection> Only we have 3 attributes: id, render, value 30). <apex:select radion> A set of related radio button input elements, displayed in a table, unlike checkboxes, only one radio button can ever be selected at a time. Tags used to invoke Java script using AJAX request (A synchronous Java script and XML). And the tags are
1).<apex:action function>
A component that provides support for invoking controller action method directly from JavaScript code using an AJAX request. An <apex: action function> it must be a child of <apex: from>. difference: <apex: action support>, supports invoking controllers action method from other VF components. (referenced by other components) <apex: action function> defines New JavaScript function which can then be called from within a block of JavaScript code. (within JavaScript )>. Attributes are
Action: This is Apex Pages. Action, type, the action method invoked when the action Function is called by a JavaScript event elsewhere in the page markup. We use merge field syntax to reference the method. If an action is not specified, the page simply refreshes.
Name: It's a string type, the name of the JavaScript function, that when invoked yes, elsewhere in the page Markup, causes the method specified by the action attribute to execute. When the action method components specified by the rerender attributes will be refreshed.
Render: It's an object type, the ID of one or more components that are redrawn when the result of the action method returns to the client.
Status:The component which are redrawn when-separated lists of ID's, or a merge filed expression for a list or collection of ID's (These are displayed after the execution of the method).
Render --->before execution Render ---> after execution} à component displayed [1] It's a string, the ID of an associated component that displays the status of an AJAX: update request. Timeout: It’s an integer type, the amount of time (in milliseconds) before an AJAX update request should time out. Immediate A Boolean value that specifies whether the action associated with this component should happen immediately, w/o passing any validation rule associated with the fields on the page, if set to true. (Validations are skipped) by default its false. OnceComplete:It’s a string type, this provides us with a name of the JavaScript file invoked when an event occurs. When AJAX request is processed.
2).<apex:action poller>
It does a partial page refreshment based on time interval. The times sends an AJAX update request to the server according to a time interval that we specified. (don't use this with enhanced listing) <apex :action poller> is ever re-rendered as the request of another action, it resets itself. It should be within the <apex: action region>. Attributes are
Action: ApexPage. Action, invoked by the periodic AJAX update request from the component, can use merge field syntax to reference a method.
Action: "{!increment counter}" reference the incrementcounter () method in the controller. If action is not mentioned the page simply refreshes.
Interval: Time interval between AJAX update request, in seconds here the updation can be done for multiple fields at a time. This can be written in action logic.
3).<Apex:action region>
This tag helps us to create a set of components which can be displayed whenever some Ajax up date is performed on a VF page. An area of a VF page that demonstrates which components should be processed by the Force.com server. Only the components inside <apex: action region> are processed by the server during an AJAX request. But it doesn't define the area (s) of the pages (s),( rendered) when the request completes . To controls the behavior, use the rerender attribute on an <apex: action support> <Apex: action Poller > <Apex: Command Button> <apex: Command Link> <apex: tab <apex: tab Pannel>. Attributes areID: It's a string type, it indentifies that allows the component to be referenced by other component in the page. Render region only It's a Boolean type, a Boolean value that specifies whether AJAXinvoked behaviour outside of the action region should be displayed when the action region is processed, if true. By default it’s set to TRUE
4).<apex:Status Action>:
A component that displays the status of AJAX update request. An AJAX request can either be in progress or complete. Message can be anything like inserting, updating completed, done -----etc. Attributes: It's a string type, the status text displayed at the start if AJAX request. the message to be displayed once the action is invoked or before the action is completed.
for:This is a string type, the ID of an action region component for which the status indicator is displaying status.
id:allows the action status components to be referenced by other components in the page.
Stop Text:The status text displayed when an AJAX request completes.
5).<apex:action support>:
A component that adds AJAX support to another component, allowing the component to be refreshed asynchronously by the server when a particular event occurs, such as button click or mouse over. Attributes are: (creates a set of components displayed whenever some update is performed on VF pages).
event:It's a string type, this is an JavaScript event that generates the AJAX request possible values are ("on blur", on change", "on click", "on bl click", "on focus", "on key down", "on key press'---------)
focus:The id of the component that is in focus after the AJAX request completes.
status:It's a string type, the ID of an associated component. That displays the status if AJAX update request.
Visual force scenarios:Visual force Page Scenario 1: Create the Visualforce page called “Opportunity View”with the following code and override with the “New” button on Opportunity Object.Result would be like once we click on the Opportunity tab and click on “New” button
Now click on the Opportunity tab and click on “New” button Visualforce Page Scenario 2:Write a visualforcepage to view the Account Related list as Tabs
Create the button called “Tabbed Account” on the Account object. While creating button, select “OnClick Java Script” as the Content Source and write the following code parent.window.location.replace ("/apex/RelatedListAsTabsDisplay?id={!Account.Id}");Note: RelatedListAsTabsDisplay --> Visualforce Page Nam> Once we click on “Tabbed Button”, we will get the following screen.
Click on Details tab -->to open Detail page
Click on Contacts tab -->tto open the Contacts related list and
same for Opportunities, Open Activities and Notes and Attachments Explanation: In the 1st step starts with pagetag, here it includes standardController=”ACCOUNT”, and the header will be enabled, and tab style will be of account.
<Style> is used to include STYLE SHEETS, here we used them to disply the ACTIVE AND INACTIVE tabs. ACTIVE is: BLUE COLRED And INACTIVE: Grey in color.
We are taking a tab panel which consists of all the tabs of account
SwitchType: The implementation method for switching between tabs specifies the general operation is between CLIENT and Server.
SELECTED TAB:The name of the default selected tab when the page loads. <apex:tab> defines the tab name, label and id.
<apex;detail/> this is a self sustained tag gives the detail page of each account tab selected and the attribute RELATED list can be a Boolean one.
<apex:related list> in this we used SUBJECT and LIST.
The attribute Subject specifies the parent record from which the data or the related list has to be mentioned in your case it’s ACCOUNT. LIST: name of the child that should be appeared on the tab CHILDS of account.. Note: Redirecting the visualforcepage to the listviewpage using single tag.
Visualforce Scenario 3: The followingvisualforce page displays the Contacts for particular account in a separate window as the table (format is standard salesforce page) Page Name=”ContactsForAccount”
<apex:pagestandardController="Account">
<apex:pageBlock title="Hello {!$User.FirstName} {!$User.LastName}!">
We are viewing the Contacts for this <b>{!account.name}</b> Account.
</apex:pageBlock>
<apex:pageBlock title="Contacts">
<apex:pageBlockTable value="{!account.Contacts}" var="con">
<apex:column value="{!con.Name}"/>
<apex:column value="{!con.Lastname}"/>
<apex:column value="{!con.Phone}"/>
<apex:column value="{!con.Title}"/>
</apex:pageBlockTable>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:page>
Create the button called “ContactsForAccount” on Account Object and override above visualforce page with this button. Explination:
Starting tag for a visualforcepage is <apex:page> and this follows standard object ACCOUNT.
Forming a new page block which gives the user name and Account holder name.
Forming a new page block with title as CONTACTS.
And then retrieving the contact fields using account and the field label are shown as column headers.
Visualforce Scenario 4: Create the Visualforce page with the following code. This is the example for custom controller.
public class MyCustomController{
Public Account acc;
public MyCustomController(){
acc = [select id,Name,Phone,Industry,Website,Active__c,Rating,BillingCity,Description,Fax,
ShippingCity,AnnualRevenue,BillingCountry,ShippingCountry from Account where
id=:ApexPages.currentPage().getParameters().get('Id')];
}
public Account getAccount() {
return acc;
}
public PageReference saveMethod() {
update acc;
PageReference pageRef = new ApexPages.StandardController(acc).view();
return pageRef;
}
}
Create the “Detail Page Link” with the name “PageReference” on Account Object. While creating select “Execute JavaScript” as the behavior and “onClick JavaScript” as the Content Source parent.window.location.replace("/apex/PageReference?id={!Account.id}"); Add the PageReference link to the Account Layout Update the field values then click on “Save the Page” button in the above window,we will get the Standard Account detail page Visualforce Senarion 5:
Create the Visualforce page with the following code. This is the example for custom controller.
Page Name=”WithoutPageReference”
<apex:page controller="MySecondController" tabStyle="Opportunity">
<apex:form>
<apex:pageBlock title="Opportunity Detail">
<apex:pageBlockButtons>
<apex:commandButton value="Save The Opportunity" action="{!saveMethod}"/>
</apex:pageBlockButtons>
<apex:pageBlockSection title="Opportunity Information" columns="2"
collapsible="false">
<apex:inputField value="{!Opportunity .Name}"/>
<apex:inputField value="{!Opportunity .DeliveryInstallationStatus__c}"/>
<apex:inputField value="{!Opportunity .TrackingNumber__c}"/>
<apex:inputField value="{!Opportunity .CloseDate}"/>
</apex:pageBlockSection>
</apex:pageBlock>
</apex:form>
</apex:page>
My second Controller class:
public class MySecondController {
Public Opportunity opp;
public MySecondController(){
opp= [select id,Name,DeliveryInstallationStatus__c,TrackingNumber__c,CloseDate fr
om Opportunity where id=:ApexPages.currentPage().getParameters().get('Id')];
}
public Opportunity getOpportunity () {
return opp;
}
public PageReference SaveMethod() {
update opp;
return null;
}
}
Create the “Detail Page Link” with the name “WithoutPageReference” on Opportunity Object. While creating select “Execute JavaScript” as the behavior and “onClick JavaScript” as the Content Source Follow the java script to call a visualforce page parent.window.location.replace("/apex/WithoutPageReference?id={!Opportinuty}.id}"); Go to Opportunity detail page and click on the WithoutPageRef link Update the field values in the following window and click on “Save The Opportunity” button, then values will be updated but redirects to the same page but not to the opportunity detail page Visualforce Senarion 6: Before we have written trigger saying that when the Contact is created by checking Contact Relationship checkbox, then Contact Relationship will be created for that contact automatically. Create the visualforce page with the following code. Create the button called "Create Multiple Contact Relationship "on Account object and once we click on this button on account detail page, then Contacts will be populated which don't have Contact Relationships. Visualforce Code:
public with sharing class MultipleContactRelationships {
public MultipleContactRelationships(ApexPages.StandardController controller) {
}
public List<Contact> ContactList{get;set;}
Public List<Contact>getConres()
{
Contact c = new Contact();
ContactList=[select id, Name,Title,Email,Phone from Contact where Accountid=:ApexPa
ges.currentPage().getParameters().get('id') and Contact_Relationship__c=true ];
system.debug('********'+ ContactList);
return ContactList;
}
}
Button Creation: Create the button called "Create Multiple Contact Relationship" on Account Object with the following Java Script Parent.window.location.replace("/apex/ContactRelationShips?id={!Account.id}"); The following window will come when we click on "Create Multiple Contact Relationship" on the above window
For indepth understandingng on Salesforce click on
Salesforce.com has created a comprehensive platform for building on demand applications .like other sophisticated application developer's platform's the force.com platform offer's separate tools for defining.
The structure of data ---> DATA MODEL
The rules that detail how the data can be manipulated BUSINESS LOGIC
The layout that specifies how data should be displayed THE USER INTERFACE
This splitting up application development tools based on the above is known as MVC (Model View Control) application development pattern.
Model ---> data model
View ---> user interface
Controller ---> Business logic
While the tools for building the data model and business logic for applications are powerful solutions that run natively on force.com platform servers, the existing tool's for defining user interface's have certain limitations.
Enthusiastic about exploring the skill set of Salesforce?Then, have a look at the Salesforce Training Online to gather additional knowledge.
The Limitations are Page Layouts:
It’s a point and click tool that allows applications developer to organic fields, buttons and related lists on record detail pages, doesn't provide much flexibility in how sets of information can be displayed. Like Field must always appear above related lists
Button's must appear below the fields (above)
And S.Control's and custom link's can only be placed in particular areas
8e:T1020,
Apex Scheduler in Salesforce
Apex scheduler is helpful to invoke apex classes to run at specific times, first implenent the “schedulable” interface for the class, then specify the schedule using either the schedule apex page in the salesforce user interfaces, or the system schedule method. Note:- Salesforce only adds the process to the queue at the scheduled time actual execution may be delayed based on service availability. We can only have 25 classes scheduled at one time we can evaluate current by viewing the scheduled jobs page. Go to the following path to view the scheduled jobs. Your Name ---> Setup ---> Administration setup ---> Monitoring ---> Schedule Jobs
Aspired to become an Salesforce? Explore the post to discover the know-hows on Salesforce Training Manual.
Implementing the Schedulable Interface:-
To schedule an apex class to run at regular intervals, first write an apex class that implements the interface schedulable (Salesforce Provided) The Schedulable interface contains one method that must be implemented “execute”
EX:- Global void execute (Schedulable Context sc) {
}
The following example implements the schedulable interface for a class called helloworld EX:-
Global class schedule helloworld implements schedulable { global void execute
(schedulable context sc)
{
Helloworld hw = new helloworld ( ) ;
}
}
To schedulable jobs using the apex scheduler:- Click your Name → setup Apex classes
Click on schedule apex button
Specify the name of a class that we want to schedule
Specify the how often the apex class is run.
For Weekly → Specify one or more days of the week the job is to run ( such as Monday and Wednesday )
For Monthly → Specify either the date the job is to run or the day ( such as second Saturday of every month) Specify the start and end dates for the apex scheduled class. If we specify a single day the job only runs once.
Specify a preferred start time. The exact time the job starts depends on what jobs are in the queue at that time.
Click “Save” button.
Standard Apex Schedular with Account Creation Class :
global class CreateAccountSchedule implements Schedulable
{
global void execute(SchedulableContext SC)
{
Account_Creation ac = new Account_Creation();
ac.Create_Account('Osmania University', '9052');
}
}
Testing is the key to successful long term development and is a critical component of the development process. And testing is key to the success of application particularly if application to be deployed to customers.
If we validate that application works as expected, that there are no unexpected behaviors, then application will run for longtime.
There are two ways of testing an application.
One is through the salesforce user interfaces (testing with a single record)
The other way is to test for build functionality i.e testing with bulk records by using apex data loader up to 200 records can be passed through code.
Before we can deploy code or package into production, the following must be true.
Check out the top Salesforce Interview Questions now!
→ 75 % of apex code must be covered by unit tests. All of those tests must complete successfully. → When deploying to a production organization we need to have 75% of apex code covered by tests.
Note: Our focus should not be on the percentage of code that is covered instead we make sure that every use of application is covered including positive and negative cases, as well as bulk and single record. This should lead to 75% or more of code being covered by unit test.
Note:
Calls to system debug are not counted as part of apex code coverage.
When we deploying apex code from one sandbox to another sandbox then we no need of any apex code coverage, i.e no need to write any test classes.
When we deploying apex code from one sandbox to production organization then we need to have at least 75% of code coverage, i.e we need to write test classes with minimum code coverage of 75%
What to Test In Apex:
Salesforce.com recommends the following components need to test.
Single records
Bulk records
Positive scenarios
Negative scenarios
Restricted user
1. Single Records:
This includes testing to verify that a single record produces the correct, expected result
2. Bulk Records:-
Any apex code, whether a triggers, a class or on extension may be used for 1 to 200 records we must test not only the single record case, but the bulk cases as well.
3. Positive scenarios:-
This type of component testing expect a system to save a record without error.
4. Negative scenarios:-
This type of component testing expect a system to give error.
5. Restricted User:-
Test whether a user with restricted access to the objects used in code sees the expected behavior, i.e whether they can run the code or receive error messages.
Because apex runs in a multitenant environment. The apex runtime engine strictly enforce a number of limits its that runaway apex. These limits are called Governor limits. If some apex code ever exceeds a limit, the associated governor issues a runtime exception that can not be handled. Shared Database Metadata → The data which is .xml format. If we create anything like fields objects then these data will be stored as metadata (.xml format) into the database.
Aspired to become an Salesforce? Explore the post to discover the know-hows on Salesforce Online Training.
The Limits are:
Total number of SOQL queries issued → 100
Total number of records retrieved by SOQL Queries → 50,000
Total number of SOSL queries issued → 20
Total number of records retrieved by single SOSL query → 200
Total number of DML statements issued → 150
Total heap size → 6 MB
Total number of methods with the future annotation allowed per apex → 10
Total number of classes that can be scheduled concurrently → 25
91:T1b01,
Triggers:-
Apex can be in invoked through the use of triggers.
A Trigger are functional actions which gets fired on particular events.
That is Data can flow into Data.com at any time. Triggers will happen before records entering into the database and while going out of the database. Note:- Each event is the firing Point. *onclick *Submit * A Trigger is Apex code that execute before or after the following types of operations.
Insert
Update *Delete
Undelete
We can have a trigger run before an Object's records are inserted into the database, after records have been deleted, or even after a record is restored from the Recycle BIN. * Triggers can be divided into two types.
Before triggers can be used to update or validate record values before they are saved to the DataBase.
After triggers can be used to access field values that are set by the database, and to affect changes in other records.
Events:- Each event is the firing point events are formation of
Before Insert
Before Update
Before delete
After Undelete
After insert
After Update
After Delete
These core tutorials will help you to learn the fundamentals of Salesforce. For an in-depth understanding and gain
practical experience, explore Online Salesforce Training.
Note:- *Before insert Trigger are used mainly for validation rules. Before insert àData screening --->Data Insert *After insert triggers are used mainly for WorkFlow Rules.
Trigger Syntax:-
To define a Trigger, use the following syntax
Trigger TriggerName on ObjectName(trigger-events) {
Code Block;
}
Where trigger-events can be comma- separated list of one or more of the following events.
Before Insert
After insert
After Update
Before Update
Before delete
After Delete
After Undelete
EX:- The following code defines a trigger for the before insert and before update events on the Account object.
Trigger Account _Trigger on Account (before insert, Before Update) {
------
-----
}
All triggers define implicit variables that allow developers to access run time context. These variables are contained in the system.Trigger class.
Trigger.New:- Trigger.new returns a list of the new records of the Sobjects which we are going to insert into the database. This SObject list is only available in insert and Update triggers, and the records can only be modified in before triggers.
Trigger.old:- Trigger.old returns a list of old records of the Sobjects from the database. Note:- This Sobject list is only available in update and delete triggers.
Trigger.NewMap:- Trigger newMap returns a map of IDs to the new records of the Sobjects. Note:- This map is only available in before update, After insert, and after update triggers.
Trigger.OldMap:- Trigger.OldMap returns a map of ids to the old records of the SObjects.
Trigger.isAfter:- Trigger.isAfter context variable return true if this trigger was fired after all the records we saved.
Trigger.isBefore:- This context variable returns true if trigger was fired before any record was saved.
Trigger.is Insert:- This context variable returns true if the trigger was fired due to an insert operation.
Trigger .is Update:- This context variable returns true if the trigger was fired due to an update operation.
Trigger .is Delete: - This context variable returns true if trigger was fired due to a delete operation.
Trigger is Undelete:- This context variable returns true if trigger was fired ofte a record is recovered from the recycle bin
Note:-Trigger are object specific
Context variable Consideration:-
Trigger.new and trigger.old cannot be used in apex DML operations.
We can use on object to change its own field values using trigger.new, but only in before triggers. In all after triggers, triggers.new is not saved so runtime exception is thrown.
Trigger.old is always read-only. · We can not delete trigger.new.
Before insert ==> Trigger.new allowed.
In after insert triggers ==> Trigger.new not allowed.
Trigger.new is not available in before delete triggers.
Trigger.old is not available after undelete triggers.
Bulk Triggers:-
All triggers are bulk triggers by default and can process multiple records at a time. We should always plan on processing, more than one record at a time. When we are uploading bulk records using the data loader, then also triggers will fire for all records at a time.
For indepth understandingng on Salesforce click on
Updating Child - parent Relationship for standard objects:
list<Contact> c=“Select LastName, Account.Name From Contact where name like '%red%'“;
for(Contact ct : c)
{
ct.Account.Industry='Banking'; ct.account.Rating = 'Hot'; update c.account;
}
Updating parent - Child Relationship for standard objects:
List<Account> a = “Select Name,(Select FirstName,LastName from Account.Contacts) From Account where Name='Account1'“;
System.debug('The Account Records are' +a);
for(Account acc1:a)
{
for(Contact c:acc1.Contacts)
{
c.FirstName='Anil';
c.lastName='Reddy';
update c;
System.debug ('The Updated Contacts are' +c);
}
}
Fetching Child - Parent Relationship for Custom objects:
Patient__C pt = “select name , medical__r.name from patient__C where id='a0190000002wRdn'“;
System.debug('Patient Records '+ pt);
System.debug('Doctor Records '+pt.medical__R.Name);
list<patient__C> pt = “select name , Medical__r.name from patient__C where name like 'sath%'“;
System.debug('Patient Records '+ pt); for(patient__c pt1 :pt)
{
system.debug('medical Records Are ' + pt1) ;
}
Updating Child - parent Relationship for Custom objects:
Patient__C pt = “select name , medical__r.name from patient__C where id='a0190000002wRdn'“;
System.debug('Patient Records '+ pt); pt.medical__r.med_quantity__C = 66; update pt.medical__r;
System.debug('Medical Name '+pt.medical__r.Name); System.debug('Medical quantity '+pt.medical__r.med_quantity__C);
For Multiple Records:
list<patient__C> pt = “select name , Medical__r.name, medical__r.med_quantity__C from patient__C where name = 'sateesh'“;
System.debug('Patient Records '+ pt); for(patient__c pt1 :pt)
{
pt1.medical__r.med_quantity__C = 99; update pt1.medical__r;
system.debug('medical Records Are ' + pt1) ;
}
Fetching parent - Child Relationship for Custom objects:
Medical__c t=“Select Name,(Select Name from patients__r) From Medical__c
where id='a0290000005FUJq'“;
System.debug('XXXXXXXXXXXX'+t);
System.debug('DDDDDDDDDDDDDD'+t.patients__r);
for(medical_ _c s:t.patients__r)
{
System.debug(s.Name);
}
Updating Multiple record form child - parent for standard objects
List<Parent obj name> variable= “select fieldname1 (select field1, field2 from parent obj name.childs obj)from parent obj name where condition”;
System.debug (‘parent obj records’+variable1);
For (parent obj name variable1: variable)
{
For (child obj name variable2:variable1.child plural obj name)
{
System.debug (‘child obj field1’+variable2);
System.debug (‘child obj field2’+variable2);
}
}
Enthusiastic about exploring the skill set of Salesforce? Then, have a look at the Salesforce Training Online to gather additional knowledge.
Fetching Multiple record form Parent - child for standard objects:
List<Parent obj name> variable= “select fieldname1 (select child obj field1, child obj field2 from parent obj name.child plural obj) from parent obj name where condition”;
System.debug (‘parent obj records’+variable1);
For (parent obj name variable1: variable)
{
For (child obj name variable2:variable1.child plural obj name)
{
Variable2.child obj field1='……….';
Variable2.child obj field2='……….';
update variable2;
System.debug (‘child obj field1’+variable2);
System.debug (‘child obj field2’+variable2);
}
}
Updating Multiple record form Parent - child for standard objects:
list<parent obj API name> variable=“select parent obj field1 ,(select child obj field1,child obj field2
from parent obj API name.child plural obj name__r) from parent object API name where condition);
System.debug (' parent object records'+variable); for (parent obj API name variable1:variable)
{
For(child obj singular name__c variable2:variable1.child plural obj name__r)
{
Variable2.field1 API name='………..'; Variable2.field2 API name='……….'; update variable2;
System.debug ('field1'+variable2);
System.debug ('field2'+variable2);
}
}
Updating Multiple record form Parent - child for custom objects:
list<child obj API name> variable=“select child obj field1,parent obj name __r.field1 from child obj API
name where condition”; system.debug ('child obj records are'+variable);
for( child obj API name variable1:variable)
{
Variable1.parent obj singular name__r.field1 API name='…….'; update variable1.parent obj singular name__r;
system.debug('parent obj records'+variable1.parent obj singular name__r.field1 API name);
}
94:T26e1,
SOQL and SOSL Difference in Salesforce
The following table describes about the SOQL and SOSL difference
SOQL
SOSL
1. SOQL (Salesforce object Query Language) retrieves The records from the database by using “SELECT” keyword
2. By using SOQL,we can know in which objects or fields the data resides
3. We can retrieve data from single object or from multiple objects that are related to each other
4. We can query on only one table
1. SOSL(sales force object search language) retrieves the records from the data base by using “FIND” key word
2. By using SQSL,we don’t know in which object or field the data resides
3. We can retrieve multiple objects and field values efficiently when the objects may or may not be related to each other
4. We can query an multiple tables.
SOQL Query Examples:-
-A SOQL query is enclosed between square brackets the following query retrieves an subjects (a record from the database) that has the name field value equal to “Osmania University” Account a = "select Id name FROM account where name = 'Osmania University' "Return type Query (Applicable for only one record) Note:- In the above the “a” variable stores the ID ,Name of all accounts with name=’Osmania University’ Note:- SOQL Statement evaluate to a list of SObjects single SObjects or an integer for count method queries. LIst of SObjectà List < Position_c Position = "select name from position_c shwre type_c='part time'";Single sumbject: Postion_c p="select name from position_c where id='xxxxx'"Integer: Integer i="select countc,from position_c where c type_c='part time'"SOQL Bindings:-Square bracketed queries support binding to Apex variable String jobtype='Full Time';List<position_c> S="select name from position_c where type_c=:job type;"
Enthusiastic about exploring the skill set of Salesforce? Then, have a look at the blog post to gather additional knowledge on Salesforce Training and Certification.
SOSL Queries
SOSLà sales force object search language
SOSL statements evaluate to a list of lists of SObjects where each list contains the search results for a particular sobject type
SOSL queries are only supported in Apex classes and anonymous blocks.
We cannot use a SOSL query in a trigger
The folloing exapmle that searches all fields across all account and contact objects.Ex:- LIst<List<Sobject>> searchist="Find 'Text*' IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING Account, Contact Systerm.debug(Serachlist);" This query will search the account and contact records that field values starts with test in all fileds.
The following example returns a list of accounts, contacts, opportunities and leads that begin with the phrase map.
LIst<List<Sobject>> searchist=[Find 'map*' IN ALL FIELDS RETURNG Account(ID, Name),contact,opportunity,Lead];System.debug(searchist);Account(ID, Name)--> this means it returns the account records with ID, name valuesNote:- If a SOSL query does not return any records for a specified SObject type, the search results include an empty list for that SObject Updated Operation: The update DML operation modifies one or more existing SObject records, DML (update) statement syntax Update SObject; Update Subject[ ]; The following example describes us about an updating an account field through an existing contact that has also been modified here two update statements are required // use a SOQL Query to access data for a contact Contact C=[SELECT Account.Name FROM contact where Last Name ='Anil' LIMIT 1];C.Account.Name='Capital info Solutions';C.Lastname='sateesh';--->The above two statements says that change in fields for both contact and its associated account Upadate C:--> updates the contact.Update C.Account: --> Update the Account.System.Debug(c);System.debug(c.Account.Name);
The following example updating account fields through the API
Access a="select name,Rating,Industry FROM Account Where id='xxxxx';" /*This query retrieves the Name, Rating, Industry fields values of one particular account*/ a.Name='Osmania University';a.Rating='Hot';a.Industry='Electrical';Update a;System debug(a)Note:- Account a ="select name; Phone FROM Account where id='xxxx';"System.debug(a.Industry) No compilation error, but it gives run time error like SObject row was retrieved via SOQL without querying the requested filed.
Delete Operation:-
The delete DML operation deletes one or more existing SObject records, such as individual accounts or contacts, from organization’s data. The DML (Delete) statement syntax is Delete SObject;Delete SObject[]; The following example is to delete the account record through the API //First get the account record which we want to delete Account a =" select ID from account where name='Osmania University' LIMIT 1;"Delete a;* The DML Operation deletes the above record.*/
Deleting a record places it in the recycle bin from where we can restore it. Records in the Recycle bin are temporarily stored for 15 days before they are permanently deleted.
To restore just use the undelete DML statement .Notice that we used the ALL ROWS keywords in the SOQL query to be able to retrieve the delete record.
Account a =" select name FROM account where name='Osmania University' ALL Rows;"UnDelete a;Note:-Comments:-: - Comments are lines of text that we add to code to describe what it does comments are not executable code. It’s a good practice to annotate code with comments as necessary. Apex has two forms of comments
The first uses the // token to mark everything on the same line.
The second encloses a block of text, possibly across Multiple lines between the /* and */ tokes
The following example describes only the debug statement runs: System.debug (‘capital info solutions ‘); //This comment is ignored. /* Hi All, All the Best From capital info solutions */
Case Sensitivity:-
Apex is case insensitive this means that all apex code, including method names class names, variable names and keywords, can be written without regard to case
EX:- Integer Myvar;IntegER MYVAR; --->both are equivalent statements The following statements print out today’s date using the System today method when we execute them in the Developer Console. System.debug(System.today());System.debug(System.Today());System.debug(System.TOday());Note- A good practice is for class names to start with an uppercase letter and method names to start with a lowercase letter.
Apex Data Manipulation Language(DML) Operations in Salesforce
Use Data Manipulation Language (DML) Operations to insert, update, delete, and restore data in a database.We can execute DML Operations using two different forms.
Apex DML Statement, Such as
Insert SObject();
Apex DML database methods, such as
Database.saversult() result=Data Insert(SObject());--->The following example that inserts a new invoice statement by calling insert and if we execute in the 'Developer console" that creates a record into the database. Invoice_Statements_c Inv=new Invoice_statement_c(Description)c='capital info solutions');Insert Inv ---> Inserting the invoice using DML. Note:- After the invoice statement is inserted the sobject variable inv will contain the ID of the new invoice statement. * The following example shows the creating records through API for Account object using Insert DML Operation.
API Name of lookup filed or MD field Insert c; Customer__c is child object and partner__c is parent object Note: while inserting the object records the following notes
Certain SObjects cannot be created to insert an object record because the ”create” permission of the object must be set to true
We must supply a non-null value for all required fields
The “insert” statement automatically sets the ID value of all new subjects records
We can pass a maximum of 10,000 SObject records by using a single insert method.
In Apex all variables and expressions have a data type they are two types of data types
Primitive Data types
sObject Types
Primitive Data types
A primitive data type such as an Integer, Double, Long, Date, Date Time, String, ID, or Boolean.
All Primitive data types are passed by value, not by reference.
All Apex variables, whether they are class member Variables or member variables, are initialized to null. Make sure that we initialize variables to appropriate values before using them.
Ex:Initialize a Boolean Variable to False.
Apex Primitive data types include. Boolean: A value that can only be assigned true, false, or null.
Ex:Boolean is Active=True;
Date: value that indicates a particular day. Date values contain no information about time. Date values must always be created with a system static method.
Ex: Date myDate= Date.new instance(2012, 05 , 28);
O/P: is 2012-05-28 00:00:00
Time and Date Time:
These are data types associated with dates and times along with the Date data type.
The time data types store times (hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds).
The Date data types store dates (Year month and day).
The Date Time data type stores both dates and times.
Each of these classes has a new instance method with which we can construct particular date and time values.
EX: Time mytime= newInstance(18,30,2,20);
O/P:is 18:30:02
We can also create dates and times from the current clock.
Date myDatetime = Datetime.now(); Date today= Date.today();
The date and time classes also have instance methods for converting from one format to another.
EX: Time t= Datetime.now().time();.
---> Finally we can also manipulate the values by using a range of instance methods.
EX: Date myToday = Date.today(0; Date myNext30 = myToday.addDays(30) We will get something like this as the output. 2012-05-28 00:00:00 2012-06-29 00:00:00 Integer, Long, Double and Decimal: To store numeric values in variables, declare variables with one of the numeric data types. Integer, Long Double and Decimal.
Integer: A 32-bit number that doesn't include a decimal point. Integers have a minimum value of -2, 147,483,648 and a maximum value of 2,147,483,647.
EX:- Interger i=1;
Long:A 64-bit number that doesn't include a decimal point longs have a minimum value of -263 and a maximum value of 263-1;
EX:Long l= 2147483648L;
Double:A 64-bit number that doesn't include a decimal point long has a minimum value of -263 and a maximum value of 263-1;
EX:Long l= 2147483648L;
Decimal:A number that includes a decimal point. A Decimal is an arbitrary precision number. Currency fields are automatically assigned the type decimal.
EX: Decimal dec=19.23;
Note: We can use the value of the static method to cast a string to a numeric type. For example, the following creates an Integer from string ‘10’ and then adds 20 to it.
EX: Integer CountMe= Omteger.Valueof('10') +20;
Null Variables:
If we declare a variable and don't initialize it with a value, it will be null. Null means the absence of a value. We can also assign null to any variable declared with a primitive type. Both of these statements result in a variable set to null;
Boolean x=null;
Decimal d;
String: Strings are set of characters and are enclosed in single quotes. They store text values such as a name or an address.
EX: String myvariable= ' Capital info Solutions';
We can also create strings from the values of other types, such as dates, by using the string static method value of().
EX:- Date myDate= Date today(); *** String mystring= String value of (myDate); The o/p of above example should be today's date 2012-05-29
At TekSlate, we offer resources that help you in learning various IT courses. We avail both written material and demo video tutorials. To gain in-depth knowledge and be on par with practical experience, then exploreSalesforce Online Training
sObject Types
A sObject, can be a generic SObject or be a specific SObjects, such as an Account, Contact, or MYcustom__c.
sObjects (short for "Salesforce Objects") are standard or custom objects that store record data in the Force.com database.
There is also an SObject data type in Apex that is the Programmatic representation of these SObjects and their data in code.
Developers refer to SObjects and their fields by their API names.
EX: Account a= new Account ();
MyCustomObject__c co= new MYCusomobject__c ();
API name of Custom Object.
The following example creates an invoice statement with some initial values for the description__c Fields and assigns it to variables of type Invoice-Statement__c, which is an SObject type also.
EX: Invoice-statment__c inv- new Invoice-statement__c(Description__c= 'Test Invoice', Status__c='pending')
sObject Variables are initialized to null but can be assigned a valid object reference with the new operator.
EX: Account a = new Account();Account a= new Account (Name='Osmania University'), billingcity= 'Hyderabad'); (Or) Account a= new Account (); a.name='Osmania University'; a.BillingCity= 'Hyderabad';
Accessing SObject Fields:
SObject fields can be accessed or changed with simple dot notation.
EX: Account a = new Account (); a.Name='Capital Info solutions'; Access the account name field and assign it 'Capital Info solutions'.
System-generated fields, such as Created by or last modified by cannot be modified. If we try, the Apex runtime engine generates an error. Additionally, formula fields and values for other fields that are read-only for the context user cannot be changed.
Ex: Contact c=New Contact(); c.count of __c='4': Formula filed (This statement gives an error)
Accessing SObject Fields Through Relationships: Sobject records represent relationships to other words with two fields an ID and an address that points to a representation of the associated sObject.
EX: The contact sObject has both an AccountID field type ID and an Account field of type accounts that point to the associated sObject record itself.
The ID field can be used to change the account with which the contact is associated, while the Sobject reference field can be used to access data from the account.
The following Apex code shows how an account and contact can be associated with one other, and then how the contact can be used to modify a file on the Account.
Inserting the record automatically assigns a value to its ID field
EX: Contact c= new contact (Last name='Anil Reddy') C. Account ID=a.ID The new contact now points to the new account. Insert C;
Anonymous Blocks:
An anonymous block is Apex code that does not get stored in the metadata, but that can be compiled and executed using the developer console.
*We can use Anonymous Blocks to quickly evaluate Apex on the fly such as in the developer console.
Note:
Can include user-defined methods and exceptions.
User-defined methods cannot include the keyword "static"
We do not have to manually commit any database changes
Unlike classes and triggers, anonymous blocks execute as the current user and can fail to compile if the code violates the user's object and file level permissions.
The developer console is a collection of tools we can use to analyze and troubleshoot applications in the salesforce organization.
It’s a separate window composed of a set of related tools that allows us to access source code and review how it executes.
Access the developer console by clicking
Your Name ---> Developer console --->Click on "click here to enter Apex code" and give the apex code and Click on the “Execute" button ---> Select the particular Operation ---> Click on "Open Raw Log" button ---> Check the result in the USER-DEBUG statement
EX:
1. Integer i=10; System debug (i);
2. Integer i=10; Integer J=20; System debug (The sum of two numbers'+ (i+j));
4. Account a =new Account (); a.name ='Capital Info solutions '; System.debug (a name);
97:T298a,
Access Modifiers And OOPS Concepts
Access Modifiers:
Apex allows us to use the following modifiers
Privat
This is the default, and means that the method or variable is accessible only within the Apex class in which it is defined. If we do not specify an access modifier, the method or variable is private.
Protected
This means that the method or variable is visible to any inner classes in the defining Apex class. We can only use this access modifier for instance methods and member variables. Note that it is strictly more permissive than the default (private) setting, just like Java.
Public
This means the method or variable can be used by any Apex in this application or namespace.
Note: In Apex, the public access modifier is not the same as it is in Java. This was done to discourage joining applications, to keep the code for each application separate. In Apex, if we want to make something public like it is in Java, we need to use the global access modifier.
Global
This means the method or variable can be used by any Apex code that has access to the class, not just the Apex code in the same application. This access modifier should be used for any method that needs to be referenced outside of the application, either in the SOAP API or by other Apex code. If we declare a method or variable as global, we must also declare the class that contains it as global.
Note:We recommend using the global access modifier rarely, if at all. Cross-application dependencies are difficult to maintain.
Keyword use are
With Sharing: Use the with sharing keywords when declaring a class to enforce the sharing rules that apply to the current user.
Without Sharing: Use the without sharing keywords when declaring a class to ensure that the sharing rules for the current user are notenforced.
Interface
An interface is like a class in which none of the methods have been implemented—the method signatures are there, but the body of each method is empty. To use an interface, another class must implement it by providing a body for all of the methods contained in the interface.
Abstract
The abstract definition modifier declares that this class contains abstract methods, that is, methods that only have their signature declared and no body defined.
Extends
Inheritance concept
Final
Final variables can only be assigned a value once, either when we declare a variable or in initialization code
Virtual
The virtual definition modifier declares that this class allows extension and overrides.
This
There are two different ways of using the this keyword. We can use the this keyword in dot notation, without parenthesis, to represent the current instance of the class in which it appears. Use this form of the this keyword to access instance variables and methods. For example:
Public class myTestThis {
string s;
{
this.s = 'TestString';
}
}
In the above example, the class myTestThis declares an instance variable s. The initialization code populates the variable using the this keyword. Or we can use the this keyword to do constructor chaining, that is, in one constructor, call another constructor. In this format, use the this keyword with parentheses.
For example:
public class testThis {
// First constructor for the class. It requires a string parameter.
public testThis(string s2) {
}
// Second constructor for the class. It does not require a parameter.
// This constructor calls the first constructor using the this keyword.
public testThis() {
this('None');
}
}
Super
The super keyword.can be used by classes that are extended from virtual or abstract classes. By using super, we can override constructors and methods from the parent class. The following are special types of keywords that aren't reserved words and can be used as identifiers.
Count: count() returns the number of rows that match the filtering conditions and count() returns the number of rows that match the filtering conditions and have a non-null value for . This syntax is newer than COUNT() and is available in API version 18.0 and later.
Enthusiastic about exploring the skill set of Salesforce?Then, have a look at the Salesforce Training Online to gather additional knowledge.
OOPS Concepts
Apex supports the following OOPS concepts given below
Inheritance
Acquiring the properties of parents by children is what we call as. We can make use of the same principle under object oriented language and consume the members of one class under multiple classes by establishing Parent-Child relationship between classes. This basically provides us
Polymorphism
Changing the behavior of entities depending upon input they receive is known as Polymorphism. This can be implemented in object oriented language using different approaches like
Overloading: It is a feature that allows us to define multiple behaviours to a method
Overriding: To override parent classes method under child class first in the parent class the method must be declared as 'Virtual'. Then only child classes can override the method using modifier.
Abstraction
This is all about Hiding the complexity of a program and providing with a set of interface to consume the functionalities. Functions and Methods are examples for Abstraction we never know the logic behind them, what we are is only how to consume them.
Encapsulation
Encapsulation is an Object Oriented Programming concept that binds together the data and functions that manipulate the data, and that keeps both safe from outside interference and misuse. Data encapsulation led to the important OOP concept of
Data Hiding
It is all about hiding the code to secure the contents of a program. To hide the code we enclose the members of a program under a container or wrapper known as class.
Class
A wrapper or container class is a class, a data structure, or an abstract data type whose instances are collections of other objects. In Apex and Visual force this type of class can be extremely useful
Method
A function or Method in general referred as Subprogram is a named block of code which can be reused, when and where is called its get executed It is also an action that has to be performed A method can be either value returning or non value returning, use * - to tell the method non value returning and if it value returning specify the type (primitive or Sobject data type) of value it was returning using keyword.
Some Other key words are
- Excludes,first,includes,last,order,after,before
98:T2f12,
This chapter outlines different Architecture options available with Oracle WebLogic Server. It is very important to make yourself familiar with terminology specially tiers (Web, Presentation and Object). Architecture – It defines how various tiers of an application (Web, Presentationand Object) are deployed on one or more clusters. Tier - Represents logical divisions of an Application’s service.
Web Tier > provides static content (HTML pages)
Presentation Tier > provides dynamic content (Servlets or JSP)
Object Tier > provides java objects (EJB or RMI classes) and associated business logic.
Web Client:
A Web client interacts with WLS via HTTP using Servlets/JSPs.
Types of Web clients include:
Browser
Client Application:
A client application interacts with WLS through JRMP/T3, IIOP and COM.
Types of Clients include:
Standalone Java applications
Applets within a browser
Proxy Server: Forwards requests to other machines
Can be used as a level of indirection and security
Can be used to load balance a system
In computer networks, a proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application program) that acts as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource, available from a different server. The proxy server evaluates the request according to its filtering rules. For example, it may filter traffic by IP address or protocol. If the request is validated by the filter, the proxy provides the resource by connecting to the relevant server and requesting the service on behalf of the client. A proxy server may optionally alter the client's request or the server's response, and sometimes it may serve the request without contacting the specified server. In this case, it 'caches' responses from the remote server, and returns subsequent requests for the same content directly. A proxy server that passes requests and replies unmodified is usually called a gateway or sometimes tunneling proxy. A proxy server can be placed in the user's local computer or at various points between the user and the destination servers on the Internet. A reverse proxy is (usually) an Internet-facing proxy used as a front-end to control and protect access to a server on a private network, commonly also performing tasks such as load-balancing, authentication, decryption or caching. A proxy server has a large variety of potential purposes, including:
To keep machines behind it anonymous (mainly for security).
To speed up access to resources (using caching). Web proxies are commonly used to cache web pages from a web server.
To apply access policy to network services or content, e.g. to block undesired sites.
To log / audit usage, i.e. to provide company employee Internet usage reporting.
To bypass security/ parental controls.
To scan transmitted content for malware before delivery.
To scan outbound content, e.g., for data leak protection.
To circumvent regional restrictions.
Firewall
Provide filtering, authorization, and authentication services
Help keep out hackers
Map port requests
Can act as proxy servers
Can decrease back end network activity A firewall is a part of a computer system or network that is designed to block unauthorized access while permitting authorized communications. It is a device or set of devices that is configured to permit or deny network transmissions based upon a set of rules and other criteria. Firewalls can be implemented in either hardware or software, or a combination of both. Firewalls are frequently used to prevent unauthorized Internet users from accessing private networks connected to the Internet, especially intranets. All messages entering or leaving the intranet pass through the firewall, which inspects each message and blocks those that do not meet the specified security criteria. There are several types of firewall techniques:
Packet filter: Packet filtering inspects each packet passing through the network and accepts or rejects it based on user-defined rules. Although difficult to configure, it is fairly effective and mostly transparent to its users. It is susceptible to IP spoofing.
Application gateway: Applies security mechanisms to specific applications, such as FTP and Telnet servers. This is very effective, but can impose performance degradation.
Circuit-level gateway: Applies security mechanisms when a TCP or UDP connection is established. Once the connection has been made, packets can flow between the hosts without further checking.
Proxy server: Intercepts all messages entering and leaving the network. The proxy server effectively hides the true network addresses.
An Application Server ConfigurationDefinition: Domain
A domain is a logically-related group of WebLogic Server resources that you manage as a unit.
A domain provides one point of administration.
A WebLogic Server domain can logically separate:
Development, test, and production applications
Organizational divisions
A domain is the basic administration unit for WebLogic Server instances. A domain consists of one or more WebLogic Server instances (and their associated resources) that you manage with a single Administration Server. You can define multiple domains based on different system administrators' responsibilities, application boundaries, or geographical locations of servers. Conversely, you can use a single domain to centralize all WebLogic Server administration activities. Why Use Domains?
A domain is an administration features that:
Is transparent to applications
Can be configured and administered, for technical or business reasons, even after applications are developed or in production
WebLogic Server domains can be used to separate:
Development, test and production applications
Administration and operational responsibilities
Organizational or business divisions
Definition: Server
A server is an instance of weblogic which is executing in a JVM.
A server:
Runs on a designated WLS machine
Has a dedicated amount of RAM
Is multi-threaded
Definition: Administration Server
An administration (admin) server is the central point of control for a domain.
An admin server:
Stores the configuration information and logs for a domain
Runs the WebLogic administration console
The Administration Server operates as the central control entity for the configuration of the entire domain. It maintains the domain’s configuration documents and distributes changes in the configuration documents to Managed Servers. You can also use the Administration Server as a central location from which to monitor all resources in a domain. Definition: Managed Server
A managed server is any server in a domain that is not the admin server.
A managed server:
Contacts the admin server for configuration information
Runs business applications in a production environment
Definition: Machine A machine is a computer that hosts WebLogic Server(s). A machine: – Runs a supported operating system platform – Can host multiple WebLogic Server Instances Definition: Cluster
A cluster is a logical group of WLS servers.
WebLogic clusters provide automatic:
Fault tolerance
High Availability
Load-balancing
A cluster is transparent to a client.
A WebLogic Server cluster consists of multiple WebLogic Server instances running simultaneously and working together to provide increased scalability and reliability. A cluster appears to clients to be a single WebLogic Server instance. The server instances that constitute a cluster can run on the same machine, or be located on different machines. You can increase a cluster’s capacity by adding additional server instances to the cluster on an existing machine, or you can add machines to the cluster to host the incremental server instances. Summary:
Creating Domain Templates by using the Template Builder
Creating Domain Templates by using the Pack & Unpack Commands
Create and Start Managed Servers Remotely
Overview of the Domain Template Builder You can create WebLogic domains by using domain and extension templates that contain the key attributes and files required for building or extending a domain. You can create templates by using the Domain Template Builder, a stand-alone Java application that guides you through the process of creating custom domain and extension templates. After you create your domain and add new resources and applications to it, you can use the Domain Template Builder to create a custom domain template. You can also use the Domain Template Builder to customize an existing template. For example, you may want to remove applications or add SQL scripts for additional databases. To do so, select the existing domain or template as the source for your new custom template. When your custom domain templates are complete, you can start using them to create domains by using the Configuration Wizard, WLST Offline, or the unpack command. Overview of Creating Domain Templates by Using the Domain Template Builder To create a custom domain template by using the Domain Template Builder, select the domain or domain template from which you want to create your new domain template. You then have the option of modifying the following:
Basic template information
Application and domain directory contents
SQL scripts for database configuration
Administration server and user configuration
Basic security configuration, such as creating users, groups, and global roles and their assignments
Start menu entries (Windows only)
Customized scripts and variables
Starting the Domain Template Builder This section describes how to start the Domain Template Builder. Note: The Domain Template Builder can be used only in graphical mode. You can create templates from the command line by using the pack command. For more information, see Creating Templates and Domains Using the Pack and Unpack Commands. To start the Domain Template Builder on a Windows machine, do one of the following: From the Start menu, choose Start > Programs > Oracle WebLogic > WebLogic Server > Tools > Domain Template Builder. From a command prompt window:
Go to the common\bin subdirectory of the product installation directory.
Run the config_builder command.
To start the Domain Template Builder on a UNIX machine, do the following: Note: The console attached to the machine on which you are running the Domain Template Builder must support Java-based GUIs.
Open a command shell.
Go to the common/bin subdirectory of the product installation directory.
Run the following script: sh config_builder.sh.
Creating Domain Templates by Using the Domain Template Builder:Create a New Template: The Create a New Template window is displayed when you start the Domain Template Builder as described in Starting the Domain Template Builder. Select Create a Domain Template and click Next. Then Select a Template Domain Source window is displayed. Select a Template Domain Source The Select a Template Domain Source window prompts you to choose the domain or domain template from which you want to create a domain template. Click Next. The Describe the Template window is displayed. Describe the Template: The Describe the Template window prompts you to provide a description for the template. Add or Omit Applications The Add or Omit Applications window is displayed only if applications are included in the template or domain selected in Select a Template Domain Source. Add SQL Scripts You can add your own SQL scripts to the new template, so that the scripts are available when you create a domain based on the template. Configure the Administration Server: In every domain, one server must be designated as the administration server: the central point from which the whole domain is managed. You can access the administrator server by using the URL protocol://listen-address: listen-port. The protocol can be any of the following: t3, t3s, http, https. Configure Administrator Username and Password: When you create a domain template, the administrator username and password from the original domain or template are included in your new template. You can modify this username and password if required. Configure Users, Groups, and Global Roles The Configure Users, Groups and Global Roles window is displayed in the Domain Template Builder in the following circumstances:
You are creating a domain template and you selected the option to configure users, groups, and global roles in the Configure Administrator Username and Password
You are creating an extension template and you selected Yes in the Security Configurations Option
Assign Users to Groups: Assign Groups to Groups: Specify Start Menu Entries: Prepare Scripts and Files with Replacement Variables Click Next. The Review the Domain Template window is displayed. Review the Domain Template The Review WebLogic Domain Template window allows you to review the settings for the new template before it is created. Create a Template The Create a Template window prompts you to specify the name and directory for the domain template, and launch the process that creates it. After verifying the information displayed in the window, click Create. Click done in the Creating Template window. Using the pack and unpack Commands The pack and unpack commands provide a simple, one-step method for creating domains and templates from the command line. You cannot, however, use these commands to customize the contents of your domain or template in the same way as the other tools. The pack and unpack commands are available in the \common\bin subdirectory of the product installation directory. Note: In addition to the pack and unpack commands, you can use the Configuration Wizard, Domain Template Builder, or WebLogic Scripting Tool to create domains and templates. You can create the following types of templates by using the pack command, and then use them to create templates by using the unpack command: Domain template: This type of template defines the full set of resources within a domain, including infrastructure components, applications, services, security options, and general environment and operating system options. You can use a domain template as the basis for new domains. Managed server template: This type of template defines the subset of resources within a domain that are required to create a managed server domain directory on a remote machine. You can create a managed server template by using the pack command, with the -managed=true option. Subsequently, when you use the managed server template with the unpack command; the managed server domain directory that is created contains sufficient bootstrap information to start the managed server on the remote machine. Pack Command: The pack command provides an alternative method for creating a template from the command line in one simple step. Although the pack command does not allow you to customize the contents of your template in the same way as the Domain Template Builder, it helps you do the following tasks quickly: The pack command creates a template archive (.jar) file that contains a snapshot of either an entire domain or a subset of a domain. You can use a template that contains a subset of a domain to create a managed server domain directory hierarchy on a remote machine. Syntax:pack -domain=domain -template=template -template_name=“template_name” [-template_author=“author”][-template_desc=“description”] [-managed={true|false}][-log=log_file] [-log_priority=log_priority]Example: To create a template based on an existing domain named mydomain that is located in the C:\bea\user_projects\domains directory, run the following command: pack -domain=C:\bea\user_projects\domains\mydomain -template=C:\bea\user_templates\mydomain.jar -template_name="My WebLogic Domain" A template file named mydomain.jar is created in the C:\bea\user_templates directory. The name of the template is My WebLogic Domain. Unpack Command: The unpack command provides a one-step method for creating a domain quickly from an existing template by using the default settings defined in the template. When creating a domain, unpack does not provide the same customization options as the Configuration Wizard or WLST. If, however, you use the unpack command with a domain template, you can do the following: Change the password for the default administrative user defined in the template. By using unpack, you can also create a managed server domain directory based on a managed server template created with the pack command. The managed server uses the settings defined for the administration server; so you cannot change the JDK or the start mode, add administrative users, or change the administrator password. Note: You cannot use unpack to extend an existing domain. When you use the unpack command with a domain template, it creates a domain containing all of the application and resource files defined in the template. It also creates necessary start scripts, and certain security and configuration files.When you use the unpack command with a managed server template, it creates a managed server domain directory that includes the following:
A customized start script for each managed server in the domain
xml file (based on the config.xml in the template)
properties file
dat file
Syntax:unpack -template=template -domain=domain [-user_name=username] [-password=password] [-app_dir=application_directory] [-java_home=java_home_directory] [-server_start_mode={dev|prod}] [-log=log_file] [-log_priority=log_priority]ExampleTo create a domain named mydomain.jar in the C:\bea\user_templates directory, by using the my_new_domain template in the C:\bea\user_projects\domains directory, run the following command:unpack -template=C:\bea\user_templates\mydomain.jar -domain=C:\bea\user_projects\domains\my_new_domainHow Do I Create and Start a Managed Server on a Remote Machine? In some domains, you may want to run a managed server on a machine that is remote from the administration server for the domain. You can do this by performing the following steps:
Create a managed server template by using the pack command. A managed server template, by default, contains only those files that are necessary for creating a managed server on a remote machine.
Create a managed server domain directory by copying and unpacking the managed server template on a remote machine.
Start the managed server on the remote machine.
How Do I Create a Managed Server Template You create a managed server template by executing the pack command on an existing domain that includes the definition of one or more managed servers and contains managed server definitions in the config.xml file.
From the command line on the local machine (that is, the machine that contains the
administration server and the definition of managed servers), navigate to the BEA_HOME\wlserver_10.0\common\bin directory.
Run the following command:
pack -managed=true -domain=domain -template=template.jar -template_name="template_name" For example, the following command creates a managed server template named mydomain_managed.jar from a domain named mydomain. pack -managed=true -domain=C:\bea\user_projects\domains\mydomain -template=C:\bea\user_templates\mydomain_managed.jar -template_name="My Managed Server Domain" How Do I Create a Managed Server on a Remote Machine:
Install WebLogic Server on the machines on which you want to host managed servers for the domain.
Note: All WebLogic Server instances within a domain must run the same version of the WebLogic Server software.
Establish a session with the remote machine. You may use any valid method, such as telnet, to do so.
Note: The IP address and port number of the remote machine must match the definition of the managed servers specified in the managed server template.
Copy the managed server template to the remote machine.
On the remote machine, navigate to the WL_HOME\common\bin directory (WL_HOME is the product directory in which installed WebLogic Server is installed).
Run the following command: unpack -domain=domain -template=template.jar
In this command: – domain is the full or relative path of the domain to be created. – template.jar is the full or relative path of the managed server template that you copied to the machine in step 3. For example, the following command creates a domain named myManagedDomain. unpack -domain=C:\bea\user_projects\domains\myManagedDomain -template=C:\bea\user_templates\mydomain_managed.jar Summary:
Overview of the Domain Template Builder
Creating Domain Templates by using the Template Builder
Creating Domain Templates by using the Pack & Unpack Commands
Understanding Server Life Cycle and WLS Exit Codes
Introduction and Roadmap
This document describes how you manage BEA WebLogic Server® startup, shutdown, and server life cycle. It also describes WebLogic features that you help prevent and recover from server failure.
Starting and Stopping Servers
WebLogic Server provides several ways to start and stop server instances. The method that you choose depends on whether you prefer using the Administration Console or a command-line interface, and on whether you are using Node Manager to manage the server’s life cycle.
No matter how you start a server, the result passes a set of configuration options to initialize a Java Virtual Machine (JVM). The server instance runs within the JVM, and the JVM can host only one server instance.
Starting Servers: Before You Begin:
Meet version requirements
Create a domain
Provide user credentials
Set up Node Manager
Configure Managed Server connections to the Administration Server
Specify Java startup options
Starting an Administration Server:
Starting an Administration Server with a Startup Script
You can start an Administration Server with a default startup script or create your own. To start an Administration Server with the WebLogic Server-included startup script:
Change to the directory in which you located the domain.
By default, this directory is BEA_HOME\user_projects\domains\DOMAIN_NAME, where DOMAIN_NAME is the root directory of the domain. (The name of this directory is the name of the domain.)
Run one of the following scripts:
– bin/startWebLogic.cmd (Windows)
- bin\startWebLogic.sh (UNIX and Windows)
The startWebLogic script does the following:
Sets environment variables by invoking DOMAIN_NAME\bin\setDomainEnv.cmd (setDomainEnv.sh on UNIX).
Invokes the java weblogic.Server command, which starts a JVM that is configured to run a WebLogic Server instance
When the server completes its startup process, it writes the following message to standard out (which, by default, is the command window):
<Notice> <WebLogicServer> <BEA-000360> <Server started in RUNNING mode>
2) Starting an Administration Server from the Windows Start Menu
When you create an Administration Server on a Windows computer, the Configuration Wizard creates a shortcut on the Start Menu for starting the server (User Projects→DOMAIN_NAME→Start Admin Server for WebLogic Domain).
3) Starting an Admin Server with the java weblogic.Server Command
The weblogic.Server class is the main class for a WebLogic Server instance. You start a server instance by directly invoking weblogic.Server in a Java command.
Run WL_HOME/server/bin/setWLSEnv.sh then run java weblogic.Server with the following Options if it is required
Note: Oracle recommends using java weblogic.Server primarily for initial development but not as a standard mechanism for starting production systems for the following reasons:
java weblogic.Server will not function if you select a product directory outside of the BEA home directory.
When executing java weblogic.Server, patches will not be recognized by the WebLogic Server runs time.
4) Starting an Administration Server Using WLST and Node Manager
Node Manager is a utility for remote control of WebLogic Server instances. Using Node Manager, you can control and monitor Managed Servers and also, start, stop, and restart Administration Servers.
You can access these Node Manager features using the WebLogic Scripting Tool commands and scripts. If you use the nmStart command with WLST connected to a Node Manager, Node Manager supports monitoring, stopping, and restarting the Administration Server.
5) Starting an Admin Server Using WLST without Node Manager
The WLST startServer command starts the Administration Server without using Node Manager. The server runs in a separate process from WLST; exiting WLST does not shut down the server. See Starting an Administration Server Without Node Manager in WebLogic Scripting Tool.
If you use one of the Configuration Wizard templates that WebLogic Server provides, your domain directory includes a start script named startManagedWebLogic that you can use to start Managed Servers. You can use this script to start all the Managed Servers in a cluster.
Start the domain’s Administration Server.
In a shell (command prompt) on the computer that hosts the Managed Server, change to the directory that contains the startManagedWebLogic script:
Invokes the java weblogic.Server command, which starts a JVM that is configured to run a WebLogic Server instance. When the server successfully completes its startup process, it writes the following message to standard out (which, by default, is the command window):
<Notice> <WebLogicServer> <000360> <Server started in RUNNING mode>
2) Starting Managed Servers from the Administration Console
3) Starting Managed Servers and Clusters with WLST and Node Manager
Invoke WLST by entering: java weblogic.WLST
The WLST prompt appears. wls:/(offline)>
Use the WLST startServer command to start the Administration Server.
To start a Managed Server, enter the following command:
start('managedServerName','Server') where managedServerName is the name of the server.
For example, start('managed1','Server')
– To start a cluster, enter the following command:
start('clusterName', 'Cluster') where clusterName is the name of the cluster.
For example: start('mycluster', 'Cluster')
4) Starting Managed Servers with the java weblogic.Server Command
The weblogic.Server class is the main class for a WebLogic Server instance. You start a server instance by directly invoking weblogic.Server in a Java command.
Run WL_HOME/server/bin/setWLSEnv.sh then run java weblogic.Server with the following Options if it is required
Note: On the command line, specify parameters in the order shown. User credentials come before the ADMIN_URL with stopWebLogic.cmd and after the ADMIN_URL with stopManagedWebLogic.cmd.
Killing the JVM
Each WebLogic Server instance runs in its own JVM. If you are unable to shut down a server instance using the methods described in the previous sections, you can use an operating system command to kill the JVM.
Caution: If you kill the JVM, the server immediately stops all processing. Any session data is lost. If you kill the JVM for an Administration Server while the server is writing to the config.xml file, you can corrupt the config.xml file.
Some common ways to kill the JVM are as follows:
If the shell in which you start the server is still open, you can type Ctrl-C.
On a Windows computer, you can use the Task Manager to kill a JVM.
On a UNIX computer, you can use the ps command to list all running processes. Then you can use the kill command to kill the JVM.
Configuring a Domain
After installing, configure a WLS domain on which to develop and deploy applications.
When you create a domain, you define a collection of resources, such as:
Managed servers
Clusters
Database connections
Security services
J2EE applications
Use the Configuration Wizard to create and configure WLS domains.
Configuring Managed Servers
We can configure the Managed Server in three ways:
Through Domain Configuration Wizard
Through Admin Console
Configuring Machines
We can configure the Machines in three ways:
Domain Configuration Wizard
Admin Console
WLST
Creating a Boot Identity File
Create a file called boot.properties located in the domain’s root directory containing 2 lines:
username=username
password=password
First time you start the server, the server reads the Boot Identity file and overwrites it with an encrypted version of the username and password.
Thereafter, the server will remember your identity for the subsequent startup cycles.
Running Multiple WLS Instances:
You can run multiple instances of WLS using different configurations on the same physical machine at the same time by:
Assigning multiple IP address to a machine (multihoming) and defining each server to use a unique IP address
or by:
Specifying the same IP address but using different listen ports
Multihoming
A multihomed machine:
Is a machine with multiple IP addresses
Can run a different WLS instance bound to each IP address
Can be used to configure a cluster on a single machine
What Happens if the Administration Server Fails?
The failure of an Administration Server does not affect the operation of Managed Servers in the domain, but it does prevent you from changing the domain’s configuration. If an Administration Server fails because of hardware or software failure on its host machine, other server instances on the same machine may be similarly affected. However, the failure of an Administration Server itself does not interrupt the operation of Managed Servers in the domain.
If an Administration Server for a domain becomes unavailable while the server instances it manages—clustered or otherwise—are up and running, those Managed Servers continue to run. Periodically, the Managed Servers attempt to reconnect to the Administration Server. If the domain contains clustered server instances, the load balancing and failover capabilities supported by the domain configuration remain available, even if the Administration Server fails.
You can start a Managed Server even if the Administration Server is not running. In this case, the Managed Server uses a local copy of the domain’s configuration files for its starting configuration and then periodically attempts to connect with the Administration Server. When it does connect, it synchronizes its configuration state with that of the Administration Server.
The administration server:
Can go down without affecting the operation of managed servers
Can be restarted while managed servers are still running
When an administration server goes down:
Domain log entries are lost while it is down
Managed servers can start in independent mode
The administration console and management tools are unavailable
Managed Server Independence…
By default, managed servers can function independently of the administration server.
Configure Managed Server Independence Mode from the Console
Server -> Configuration -> Tuning -> Advanced Option:
If the administration server is unavailable at boot time, managed servers search for:
xml
data
properties(optional)
Each managed server looks in its local config directory for config.xml - a replica of the domain’s config.xml
Administration Server Backup
WLS allows the creation of a backup of the server as follows:
Install (if necessary) WLS on backup machine
Copy application files to backup machine
Copy configuration files to backup machine
Restart Administration server on new machine
The new Administration server will contact managed servers and inform them that it is running on a new IP address.
WebLogic Server Exit Codes
When a server instance stops, it issues an exit code. The value of the exit code provides information about the conditions under which the server process ended. When a server instance under Node Manager Control exits, Node Manager uses the exit code to determine whether or not to restart the server instance. Other high-availability agents can use the server-exit code or scripts to determine what, if any action, to take after a server instance exits. Server exit codes are defined in the following table..
Exit Code Value - Less than 0
Meaning: A negative value indicates that the server instance failed during a state transition, and did not terminate in a stable condition. Example: If a Start in Standby command is issued for a server instance whose configuration is invalid, the server instance fails in the transitional STARTING state, and does not achieve the STANDBY state.
Restart Recommendation: Do not attempt to restart the server. Diagnose the problem that caused the server process to exit.
Exit Code Value - 0
Meaning: Indicates that the server process terminated normally, as a result of a shutdown command, either graceful or forced.
Restart Recommendation: None.
Exit Code Value: Greater than 0
Meaning: A positive value indicates that the server instance stopped itself after determining that one or more of its subsystems were unstable. Example: A server instance detects an out of memory condition or stuck threads, and shuts itself down.
Restart Recommendation: The server instance can be restarted.
Understanding Server Life Cycle
The series of states through which a WebLogic Server instance can transition is called the server life cycle. At any time, a WebLogic Server instance is in a particular operating state. Commands—such as start, stop, and suspend—cause specific changes to the operational state of a server instance.
Diagram of the Server Life Cycle
Figure 5-1 illustrates the server life cycle and the relationships between states and life cycle commands.
Getting and Using Server State
WebLogic Server displays and stores information about the current state of a server instance, and state transitions that have occurred since the server instance started up. This information is useful to administrators who:
Monitor the availability of server instances and the applications they host
Perform day-to-day operations tasks, including startup and shutdown procedures
Diagnose problems with application services
Plan corrective actions, such as migration of services, when a server instance fails or crashes.
Get server state as follows:
Administration Console—Multiple pages display state information:
On the Summary of Servers page (Environment→Servers), the Servers table displays the current state of each server instance in the current domain.
The SERVER_NAME→Monitoring page displays the state of the currently running server instance, and the date and time it entered the state.
Diagnostics→Log Files, includes timestamped messages for state transitions that have occurred since the server instance was last started.
Programmatically—Use the getState() method on the server’s weblogic.management.runtime.ServerRuntimeMBean. For example, to monitor the progress of a long-running graceful shutdown process, issue a getstate inquiry on a separate thread.
WebLogic Scripting Tool
Understanding Server States in the Server Life Cycle
These sections describe each state in the WebLogic Server life cycle.
SHUTDOWN State
In the SHUTDOWN state, a WebLogic Server instance is configured but inactive.
A server instance enters the SHUTDOWN state as result of a Shutdown or Force Shutdown command. Also, a server instance can kill itself when it detects, as a result of self-health monitoring, that it has become unstable. Only a server instance with its Auto Kill If Failed attribute is true will kill itself when it detects that it is failed.
You can transition a server instance in the SHUTDOWN state to the STARTING state with the Start, Start in Admin, or Start in Standby commands.
STARTING State
During the STARTING state, a WebLogic Server instance transitions from SHUTDOWN to STANDBY, as a result of a Start, Start in Admin, or Start in Standby command.
In the STARTING state, a server instance cannot accept any client or administrative requests.
The server instance obtains its configuration data:
An Administration Server retrieves domain configuration data, including the domain security configuration, from its config directory.
A Managed Server contacts the Administration Server for its configuration and security data. If the Managed Server is configured for SSL communications, it uses its own certificate files, key files, and other SSL-related files and contacts the Administration Server for the remaining configuration and security data.
Note: If the Managed Server cannot contact its Administration Server, by default, it starts up in Managed Server Independence mode, using its locally cached copy of the domain config directory.
STANDBY State
A server instance in STANDBY does not process any request—its regular Listen Port is closed. The Administration Port is open, and accepts life cycle commands that transition the server instance to either the RUNNING or the SHUTDOWN state. Other Administration requests are not accepted.
Starting a server instance in standby is a method of keeping it available as a “hot” backup, a useful capability in high-availability environments.
The only life cycle command that causes a server instance to enter the STANDBY state and remain in that state is the Start in Standby command. A server instance transitions through the STANDBY state when you issue a Start or a Start in Admin command.
Summary:
In this Chapter we discussed:
Start and Stop the Administration Server
Start and Stop Managed Servers
Configure the Managed Servers and Machines
Describe Managed Server Independence
Understanding Server Life Cycle and WLS Exit Codes
An Administration Server must be running when you use the system administration tools to manage a domain. The following tools are discussed in this chapter:
System Administration Console
Command-Line Interface(WLST)
Overview of the Administration Console The Administration Console is a Web browser-based, graphical user interface that you use to manage a WebLogic Server domain. A WebLogic Server domain is a logically related group of WebLogic Server resources that you manage as a unit. A domain includes one or more WebLogic Servers and may also include WebLogic Server clusters. Clusters are groups of WebLogic. Servers’ instances that work together to provide scalability and high-availability for applications. Use the Administration Console to:
Configure, start, and stop WebLogic Server instances
Configure WebLogic Server clusters
Configure WebLogic Server services, such as DB connectivity (JDBC) and messaging (JMS).
Configure security parameters, including managing users, groups, and roles
Configure and deploy your applications
Monitor server and application performance
View server and domain log files
View application deployment descriptors
Edit selected run-time application deployment descriptor elements
To start the Administration Console:
Start an Administration Server.
Open one of the supported Web browsers to the following URL:
http://hostname:port/console https://hostname:secureport/consolehostname := name or IP address of the administration serverport := port number the administration server is listening onsecureport := SSL port number the administration server is listening on Example URLs: http://localhost:7001/consolehttp://adminDNSName:7001/consolehttps://127.0.0.1:7002/console When the login page appears, enter the user name and the password you used to start the Administration Server. Elements of the Administration Console The Administration Console user interface includes the following panels. 1) Change Center This is the starting point for using the Administration Console to make changes in WebLogic Server. 2) Domain StructureThis panel contains a tree structure you can use to navigate to pages in the Administration Console. Select any of the nodes in the Domain Structure tree to view that page. Click a + (plus) icon in the Domain Structure to expand a node and a - (minus) icon to collapse the node. 3) How do I... This panel includes links to online help tasks that are relevant to the current Console page. 4) Tool Bar The tool bar at the top of the Console includes the following elements: Welcome message: Indicates user name which you have logged into the Console. Connected to: The IP address and port you used to connect to the Console. Home: A link to the top page of the Console. Log Out: Click to log out of the Console. Preferences: A link to a page where you can change some Console behavior. Help: A link to the Administration Console Online Help. AskBea: A Link to Support Team. 5) Breadcrumb Navigation A series of links that show the path you have taken through the Administration Console’s pages. You can click on any of the links to return to a previously-visited page. Ex: Home > Summary of Servers > examplesServer 6) System Status The System Status panel reports on the number of information, error, and warning messages that have been logged. You can view these messages in the server log files, which you can access from the Administration Console at Diagnostics > Log Files.7) Advanced Options in Console
The Weblogic Server Administration Console hides options which are not frequently used.
To display the Advanced Options section, click the “Advanced” link.
If you do not want to see the Advanced Options on the console display, click the “Advanced” link one more time.
Dynamic and Non-Dynamic Changes Some changes you make in the Administration Console take place immediately when you activate them. Other changes require you to restart the server or module affected by the change. These latter changes are called non-dynamic changes. Non-dynamic changes are indicated in the Administration Console with this warning icon. Using the Change Center The Change Center provides a way to lock a domain configuration so you can make changes to the configuration while preventing other accounts from making changes during your edit session. The domain configuration locking feature is always enabled in production domains. It can be enabled or disabled in development domains. It is disabled by default when you create a new development domain. To change a production domain’s configuration, you must:
Locate the Change Center in the upper left of the Administration Console screen.
Click the Lock & Edit button to lock the configuration edit hierarchy for the domain.
Make the changes you desire on the relevant page of the Console. Click Save on each page where you make a change.
When you have finished making all the desired changes, click Activate Changes in the Change Center.
Undoing Changes You can revert any pending (saved, but not yet activated) changes by clicking Undo All Changes in the Change Center. You can revert any individual change by going to the appropriate page in the Administration Console and restoring the attribute to its previous value. Releasing the Configuration Lock You release the configuration lock as follows:
Before you make changes, click Release Configuration in the Change Center to release the lock explicitly.
After you save changes, click Activate Changes or Undo All Changes in the Change Center to release the lock implicitly.
Stopping the Administration Server does not release the configuration lock. When the Administration Server starts again, the configuration lock is in the same state it was in when the Administration Server was shut down, and any pending changes are preserved. Enabling the Administration Console By default, the Administration Console is enabled. If you disable it, you can re-enable it using the WebLogic Scripting Tool (WLST). Start the Administration Server, then invoke WLST and use the following commands: connect("username","password")edit()startEdit()cmo.setConsoleEnabled(true)save()activate()The following attribute(s) have been changed on MBeans which require server re-start.MBean Changed : com.bea:Name=mydomain,Type=Domain Attributes changed : ConsoleEnabledActivation completeddisconnect()exit()The Command Line Interface (WLST) The WebLogic Scripting Tool (WLST) is a command-line scripting environment that you can use to create, manage, and monitor WebLogic Server domains. It is based on the Java scripting interpreter, Jython. In addition to supporting standard Jython features such as local variables, conditional variables, and flow control statements, WLST provides a set of scripting functions (commands) that are specific to WebLogic Server.
Command-line tools are useful:
For automating administration using scripts
As an alternative to the Administration Console
WLST provides a command-line interface that:
Configures WLS instances and domains
Manages and persists WLS configuration changes
WLST includes the capabilities of:
Admin (deprecated in 9.X)
Deployer
wlconfig Ant tasks
Configuration wizard (silent mode, deprecated in 9.X)
Using WLST Online or Offline You can use WLST as the command-line equivalent to the WebLogic Server Administration Console (WLST online) or as the command-line equivalent to the Configuration Wizard (WLST offline). Using WLST Online You can use WLST to connect to a running Administration Server and manage the configuration of an active domain, view performance data about resources in the domain, or manage security data (such as adding or removing users). You can also use WLST to connect to Managed Servers, but you cannot modify configuration data from Managed Servers. Using WLST Offline Without connecting to a running WebLogic Server instance, you can use WLST to create domain templates, create a new domain based on existing templates, or extend an existing, inactive domain. You cannot use WLST offline to view performance data about resources in a domain or modify security data (such as adding or removing users). Modes of Operation
Interactive
When you enter a command in the WLST console and view the response immediately
Script
When you create a text file, with .py extension, that contains a series of WLST commands
Embedded
When you instantiate an instance of the WLST interpreter in your Java code and use it to run WLST commands
Main Steps for using WLST
1) Setting environment
2) Invoking WLST
3) Requirement for entering WLST commands
4) Running Scripts
5) Importing WLST as a Jython Module
6) Exiting WLST
1) Setting Up Your Environment
Add WebLogic Server classes to the CLASSPATH environment variable and WL_HOME\server\bin to the PATH environment variable
You can use a WL_HOME\server\bin\setWLSEnv script to set both variables.
On Windows, a shortcut on the Start menu sets the environment variables and invokes WLST (Tools→WebLogic Scripting Tool).
2) Invoking WLST
Connecting to WLS through SSL listen port
java -
security.SSL.ignoreHostnameVerification=true -
security.TrustKeyStore=DemoTrust weblogic.WLST
Not connecting to WLS through the SSL listen port
– java weblogic.WLST – A welcome message and WLST prompt appears: wls:/(offline)> – To Connect online:connect('username','password','t3s://localhost:7012') – To shut down a server: shutdown('myserver','Server','false',1000) – To exit WLST: exit()3) Requirement for Entering WLST commands
Case sensitive names and arguments of commands
Arguments enclosed in single or double quotes
Precede the quoted string by r while specifying backslash (\) in a string
Example: readTemplate(r'c:\mytemplate.jar')
Invalid characters in object names while using WLST offline:
Period (.)
Forward slash (/)
Backward slash (\)
Cannot access security information through WLST while updating a domain
WLST incorporates two Jython functions that support running scripts:
java weblogic.WLST filePath.py, which invokes WLST and executes a script file in a single command,
execfile(“filePath.py”) which executes a script file after you invoke WLST.
5) Import WLST as a Jython Module Invoke WLST: c:\>java weblogic.WLST wls:/offline> Use the writeIniFile command to convert WLST definitions and method declarations to a .py file: wls:/offline> writeIniFile("wl.py") Open a new command shell and invoke Jython directly by entering the following command: c:\>java org.python.util.jython Import the WLST module into your Jython module using the Jython import command: >>>import wl Now you can use WLST methods in the module. For example, to connect WLST to a server instance: wl.connect(’username’,’password’) 6) Exiting WLST Exit WLST: wls:/mydomain/serverConfig> exit() Exiting WebLogic Scripting Tool ... WLST ExampleSome WLST CommandsSummary: In this Chapter we discussed:
specific NIC’s or multiple port numbers on a NIC for specific WLS servers
multiple IP addresses can be used with each server
a single IP address can be used with multiple ports
configure the cluster multicast port number independently of the port numbers used by cluster members
multiple SSL configurations on one server
administration traffic only port
interoperability with previous WLS versions Network Channels
define a set of basic attributes of a network connection to WLS.
can assign multiple channels to a single server (segment network traffic).
can prioritize internal (non-URL) connections.
can separate incoming client traffic from internal server to server traffic in a domain.
“default” channel gets automatically generated when a server is created.
Configuring Network Channels Navigate to Environment à Servers à Server_Name à Protocols à Channels. Click on New to create Network Channel In the Network Channel table, specify the following properties: Name: Protocol In the Create a new Network Channel page, specify the following properties: Listen AddressListen PortExternal Listen AddressExternal Listen PortUsing Channels Example 1: Multiple NICs per server
Each server has 2 NICs
Each NIC has one channel, hence there are 2 channels per server
Types of channels
StandardChannel
enables HTTP
disables other protocols
SecureChannel
enables HTTPS
disables other protocols
Using Channels Example 2: Separate Internal and External traffic:
AppChannel is common between servers
used for internal communications
OutgoingEnabled attribute is enabled
ClientChannel is used for external access
clients can only connect to public IP address 192.168.1.500
Use the Administration Console to deploy a startup or shutdown class
What is JNDI? The Java Naming and Directory Interface (JNDI) is an API that supports accessing naming and directory services in Java programs. The purpose of a naming service is to associate names with objects and provide a way to access objects based on their names. Objects in a naming system can range from files in a file system and names located in Domain Name System (DNS) records, to Enterprise JavaBeans (EJB) components in an application server and user profiles in an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) directory. As its name implies, JNDI doesn't just deal with naming services. JNDI also encompasses directory services, which are a natural extension of naming services. The primary difference between the two is that a directory service allows the association of attributes with objects, such as an email address attribute for a user object, while a naming service does not. Thus, with a directory service, you can access the attributes of objects and search for objects based on their attributes. You can use JNDI to access directory services like LDAP and Novell Directory Services (NDS) directories.
The Java Naming and Directory Interface is an API for accessing different naming and directory services uniformly.
This is a major step forward because:
– Different services use vastly different naming schemes – Java applications will be able to navigate seamlessly across databases, files, directories, objects and networks Why JNDI?
In WebLogic Server, JNDI serves as a repository and lookup service for J2EE objects including:
EJB home stubs
JDBC DataSources
JMS connection factories, queues and topics
RMI stubs
JNDI Structure & ArchitectureNaming Service A naming service provides a method for mapping identifiers to entities or objects: Naming Service vocabulary:Binding: Association of an atomic name and an object Example: www.bea.com is bound to 209.10.217.38Namespace: A set of unique names in a naming system Example: www.bea.com/productsA JNDI TreeContexts and Subcontexts A naming service associates names with objects. An association between a name and an object is called a binding, and a set of such bindings is called a context. A name in a context can be bound to another context that uses the same naming conventions; the bound context is called a subcontext. For example, in a filesystem, a directory (such as /temp) is a context that contains bindings between filenames and objects that the system can use to manipulate the files (often called file handles). If a directory contains a binding for another directory (e.g., /temp/javax), the subdirectory is a subcontext.
Subcontexts are referenced through dot delimiters (.)
Subcontexts must be created before objects are placed into them
If the following context exists: com.bea.examples We cannot bind: com.bea.examples.ejb.SomeObject Without first creating: com.bea.examples.ejbJNDI for Administrators
An administrator needs to understand JNDI because it will be their job to:
verify objects are bound in the JNDI tree
set security on contexts within the JNDI tree
Viewing the JNDI TreeListing JNDI Contents
WLST provides a command line utility for viewing JNDI bindings.
jndi() changes to the jndi tree and ls() lists the bindings
Startup and Shutdown Classes You can use startup and shutdown classes to configure a WebLogic Server to perform tasks when you start or gracefully shut down the server. A startup class is a Java program that is automatically loaded and executed when a WebLogic Server is started or restarted. A shutdown class is a Java program that is automatically loaded and executed when the WebLogic Server is shut down either from the Administration Console or the weblogic.admin shutdown command. To use startup or shutdown classes, you must configure and assign them to servers or clusters. You can use a startup class to:
initialize objects in memory
reconstruct a JNDI tree
load critical values from the database
recover the system to the state that existed before shutdown
You can use a shutdown class to:
Shutdown classes are usually used to free resources obtained by startup classes.
Defining Startup/Shutdown ClassesWhen Are Startup Classes Loaded?
By default, startup classes are loaded after the J2EE deployment units.
J2EE deployment units load in this order: JDBC, JMS, Connectors, EJBs, Web Applications.
If “Run Before Application Deployments” is checked, then startup class are loaded right before deploying JDBC Data Sources.
Summary: In this chapter we discussed:
What naming and directory services are
The high-level architecture of JNDI
Terminology used in naming and directory services
How to view the JNDI tree in WebLogic Server
How to deploy a startup or shutdown class via Administration Console
What startup and shutdown classes are and how they work
How to deploy a startup or shutdown class using the Administration Console
Describe the Web server capabilities of WebLogic Server
Describe the Enterprise Java Bean (EJB)
Describing the Enterprise Application Folder Structure
Deployments Plans and Side By Side Deployments
Web Servers:
Web servers are computers on the Internet that host websites, serving pages to viewers upon request. This service is referred to as web hosting. Every web server has a unique address so that other computers connected to the internet know where to find it on the vast network. The Internet Protocol (IP) address looks something like this: 127.0.0.1. This address maps to a more human friendly address, such as http://www.google.com
The Client Server Architecture:
The Internet revolves around the client-server architecture. Your computer runs software called the client and it interacts with software known as the server located at a remote computer. The client is usually a browser such as Internet Explorer, Netscape Navigator or Mozilla. Browsers interact with the server using a set of instructions called protocols. These protocols help in the accurate transfer of data through requests from a browser and responses from the server. There are many protocols available on the Internet. The World Wide Web, which is a part of the Internet, brings all these protocols under one roof. You can, thus, use HTTP, FTP, Telnet, email etc. from one platform - your web browser.
Some common Internet protocols
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol): used on the World Wide Web (WWW) for transferring web pages and files contained in web pages such as images.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol): employed for transferring files from one machine to the other.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol): used for email.
Telnet Protocol: Used to open telnet sessions.
The web employs a connection-less protocol, which means that after every client-server interaction the connection between the two is lost Let us now examine the client-server inter-communication with two models.
Model #1 of the client-server architecture - Static HTML pages
The client (browser) requests for an HTML file stored on the remote machine through the server software. The server locates this file and passes it to the client. The client then displays this file on your machine. In this case, the HTML page is static. Static pages do not change until the developer modifies them.
Model #2 of the client-server architecture - Server side scripting technologies
The second case also involves dynamic response generated by the use of server side technologies. There are many server side technologies today.
Java Server Pages: .jsp pages contain Java code.
Server Side Includes (SSI): Involves the embedding of small code snippets inside the HTML page. An SSI page typically has .shtml as its file extension. With these server technologies it has become easier to maintain Web pages especially helpful for a large web site.
The Role of Web Servers
Web servers are responsible for handling HTTP requests from clients.
Web servers typically return:
Static content (HTML pages, graphics, …)
Dynamic content (Servlet, JSPs, CGIs, …)
A Typical Web Interaction
MIME Types:
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) is a protocol for identifying and encoding binary data.
All HTTP response data is encoded with a MIME content type.
Browsers interpret HTTP response data differently depending upon the MIME type of the data:
HTML pages are parsed and displayed
PDF documents can be sent to Adobe Acrobat
application code can be directly executed
HTTP Status Code Definitions
HTTP status codes:
indicate to the client whether or not the request was successful
provide the client a reason for a failed request
used by clients to provide alternate behavior
Each Status-Code is described below, including a description of which method(s) it can follow and any Meta information required in the response.
1xx - Informational
This class of status code indicates a provisional response, consisting only of the Status-Line and optional headers, and is terminated by an empty line. There are no required headers for this class of status code. Since HTTP/1.0 did not define any 1xx status codes, servers MUST NOT send a 1xx response to an HTTP/1.0 client except under experimental conditions.
Ex: 100 – Continue, 101 - Switching Protocols
2xx - Successful
This class of status code indicates that the client's request was successfully received, understood, and accepted.
Ex: 200 – Ok, 201 – Created
3xx – Redirection:
This class of status code indicates that further action needs to be taken by the user agent in order to fulfill the request. The action required MAY be carried out by the user agent without interaction with the user if and only if the method used in the second request is GET or HEAD.
Ex: 301 - Moved Permanently, 302 – Found
4xx - Client Error:
The 4xx class of status code is intended for cases in which the client seems to have erred.
Ex: 400 Bad Request, 401 Unauthorized, 404 Not Found
5xx - Server Error:
Response status codes beginning with the digit "5" indicate cases in which the server is aware that it has erred or is incapable of performing the request.
Ex: 500 Internal Server Error, 502 Bad Gateway, 503 Service Unavailable
Static Content:
Static content documents are predefined on the server and do not change.
WebLogic Server can be used to serve static content
such as:
HTML documents
images
PDF documents
WebLogic Server can serve static documents:
over standard HTTP
through SSL using HTTPS
Dynamic Content:
Dynamic content documents may change based on the client’s request.
HTML documents can be created on the fly by using:
Servlets
JavaServer Pages (JSPs)
Common Gateway Interface (CGI) programs
Web Applications
What Is a Web Application?
A web application is any application that uses a web browser as a client. The application can be as simple as a message board or a guest sign-in book on a website, or as complex as a word processor or a spreadsheet. A Web Application is a group of server-side resources that create an interactive online application. Server-side resources include:
Servlets (small server-side applications)
JavaServer Pages (dynamic content)
static documents (HTML, images)
Server-side classes
Client-side applets and beans
Packaging Web Applications
You add web components to a J2EE application in a package called a web application archive (WAR), which is a JAR similar to the package used for Java class libraries. A WAR usually contains other resources besides web components, including:
Server-side utility classes (database beans, shopping carts, and so on).
Static web resources (HTML, image, and sound files, and so on)
Client-side classes (applets and utility classes)
A WAR has a specific hierarchical directory structure. The top-level directory of a WAR is the document root of the application. The document root is where JSP pages, client-side classes and archives, and static web resources are stored. The document root contains a subdirectory called WEB-INF, which contains the following files and directories:
web.xml - the web application deployment descriptor
classes - a directory that contains server-side classes: servlet, utility classes, and JavaBeans components.
lib - a directory that contains JAR archives of libraries (tag libraries and any utility libraries called by server-side classes).
You can also create application-specific subdirectories (that is , package directories) in either the document root or the WEB-INF/classes directory. Before deploying an application package and registering it with a WLS server. Follow these steps to package a Web App:
Arrange resources in a prescribed directory structure
Develop web.xml Deployment Descriptor (or copy as required)
Archive Web App into .war file using jar by using jar –cvf command
Deploy Web App onto WLS
Configure Web App with WLS Administration Console
Web Application Structure
The structure of Web Applications is defined by the Servlet specification. A Web Application can be either:
an archived file (.war file)
An expanded directory structure
Configuring Web Applications
Web applications are configured through deployment descriptors web.xml and weblogic.xml which:
Define run-time environment
Map URLs to Servlets and JSPs
Define application defaults such as welcome and error pages
Specify J2EE security constraints
Define work managers for applications
Set the context-root for the application
The web.xml File
The web.xml file is a deployment descriptor for configuring:
Servlets and JSP registration
Servlet initialization parameters
JSP tag libraries
MIME type mappings
Welcome file list
Error pages
Security constraints and roles
Resources
EJB references
The weblogic.xml File
The weblogic.xml is a WebLogic Server specific deployment descriptor for configuring:
JSP properties
JNDI mappings
Security role mappings
HTTP session parameters
Work managers
Context root
Virtual directory mappings
Logging parameters
Library modules
Example of weblogic.xml deployment descriptor. <?xml version=’1.0’ encoding=’utf-8’?><weblogic-web-app xmlns="http://www.bea.com/ns/weblogic/90" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"></weblogic-web-app>
Web Application Archive:
Web Application archives (.war files)
are compressed files that contain directory structures that represent Web Applications
simplify the distribution and sharing of Web Applications across a network
can share common resources
can be combined into larger applications
For ease of development and debugging Web Applications are not archived until the end of production.
Web archives are created using the jar utility:
URLs and Web Apps
The URL used to reference a resource in a Web Application must include the name of the Web Application. Accessing a resource in a Web Application: http://hostname:port/MyWebApplication/resource Where: resource: Static page, Servlet mapping, or JSP MyWebApplication: Name of the Web Application; not necessary if this is the default Web Application Hostname: Host name mapped to virtual host or hostname: port
Virtual Directory Mappings:
Virtual directories:
can be used to refer to physical directories
let you avoid the need to hard-code paths to physical directories
allow multiple Web applications to share common physical directories for specific requests such as images
deploying to a single machine (Administration server)
Enterprise JavaBeans
Enterprise JavaBeans (EJB) is a comprehensive technology that provides the infrastructure for building enterprise-level server-side distributed Java components. The EJB technology provides a distributed component architecture that integrates several enterprise-level requirements such as distribution, transactions, security, messaging, persistence, and connectivity to mainframes and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems.
EJB Architecture
Any distributed component technology should have the following requirements:
There should be a mechanism to create the client-side and server-side proxy objects. A client-side proxy represents the server-side object on the client-side. As far as the client is concerned, the client-side proxy is equivalent to the server-side object. On the other hand, the purpose of the server-side proxy is to provide the basic infrastructure to receive client requests and delegate these request to the actual implementation object.
We need to obtain a reference to client-side proxy object. In order to communicate with the server-side object, the client needs to obtain a reference to the proxy.
There should be a way to inform the distributed component system that a specific component is no longer in use by the client.
Enterprise JavaBeans™ (EJB) standardizes development and deployment of Java server components.
The EJB specification defines relationships between:
the EJB and its container
the container and the application server
the container and the client
Session Beans: Stateful and Stateless Session beans can be either stateful or stateless. Stateful session beans maintain conversational state when used by a client. Conversational state is not written to a database but can store some state in private variables during one method call and a subsequent method call can rely on this state. Maintaining a conversational state allows a client to carry on a conversation with a bean. As each method on the bean is invoked, the state of the session bean may change and that change can affect subsequent method calls. Stateless session beans do not maintain any conversational state. Each method is completely independent and uses only data passed in its parameters. One can specify whether a bean is stateful or not in the bean's deployment descriptor.
Entity Beans: Container and Bean Managed Persistence There are two types of entity beans and they are distinguished by how they manage persistence. Container-managed beans have their persistence automatically managed by the EJB container. This is a more sophisticated approach and here the bean developer does not implement the persistence logic. The developer relies on the deployment descriptor to specify attributes whose persistence should be managed by the container. The container knows how a bean instance's fields map to the database and automatically takes care of inserting, updating, and deleting the data associated with entities in the database.
Deployment Descriptors:
Much of the information about how beans are managed at runtime is not supplied in the interfaces and classes mentioned above. There are some common primary services related with distributed systems apart from some specific services such as security, transactions, naming that are being handled automatically by EJB server. But still EJB server needs to know beforehand how to apply the primary services to each bean class at runtime. Deployment descriptors exactly do this all important task.
JAR Files:
Jar files are ZIP files that are used specifically for packaging Java classes that are ready to be used in some type of application. A Jar file containing one or more enterprise beans includes the bean classes, remote interfaces, home interfaces, and primary keys for each bean. It also contains one deployment descriptor.
EJB Application Directory Structure:
EJB components come packaged in JAR files.
EJBs are configured by modifying deployment descriptors.
EJB administrator tasks include:
configure and deploy
resolve JNDI and other infrastructure issues
monitor EJB caches and pools
Types of EJBs
Enterprise JavaBeans server-side components come in two fundamentally different types: entity beans and session beans.
What Is an Enterprise Application?
An enterprise application is a business application, obviously. As most people use the term, it is a big business application. In today’s corporate environment, enterprise applications are complex, scalable, distributed, component-based, and mission-critical. They may be deployed on a variety of platforms across corporate networks, intranets, or the Internet. They are data-centric, user-friendly, and must meet stringent requirements for security, administration, and maintenance. In short, they are highly complex systems. Designing and developing such enterprise applications means satisfying hundreds or thousands of separate requirements. What’s more, every development decision you make to satisfy each requirement affects many other requirements, often in ways that are difficult to understand or predict — and the failure to meet any of these requirements can mean the failure of the entire project! An enterprise application is a grouping of several resources into one deployable unit packaged in an .ear file. These resources include: – Web applications (.war) – EJB applications (.jar) – Java applications (.jar) – Resource adapters (.rar)
J2EE Enterprise Application
Why Enterprise Applications?
Use enterprise applications to: – Avoid name space clashes – Declare application-wide security roles – Deploy an application as one unit – Share application-wide EJB resources – Configure local JDBC datasources – Configure local JMS resources – Configure local XML resources
EAR File Structure
An example directory structure of an enterprise application is shown below:
Configuring WLS Specific Features
Configure Enterprise-wide WLS specific features with weblogic-application.xml deployment descriptor:
XML parsers
XML entity mappings
JDBC datasources
JMS connection factories and destinations
Security realms
WLS Application Class Loader
Each application receives its own class loader hierarchy with the system class loader as its parent.
EAR Class Libraries:
Extending the J2EE spec, BEA has added APP-INF/lib and APP-INF/classes to the standard J2EE ear file structure.
When the application is initialized, paths extracted are appended to the beginning of the application’s CLASSPATH
Classes are added to the root classloader of the application.
J2EE Library Support:
To make things easier, you can create a library of J2EE modules, package them into an Enterprise application (EAR) then deploy and register it with the application container.
Afterwards, other applications can use the modules as if they were packaged in their own EAR files.
This allows for more reusability between applications.
Deployment
Deploying an application involves the following tasks:
Preparing - Choosing whether to package the application as an archived file or keeping it in an exploded directory
Configuring – Creating a deployment plan to maintain configuration changes without changing the deployment descriptors
Deploying – Targeting and distributing the application to WebLogic servers in a domain
You can deploy: – Enterprise applications – Web applications – Web Services – J2EE libraries – JDBC, JMS and Diagnostic Framework modules – EJB components – Resource adapters – Optional packages – Client application archives
Applications and EJBs can be deployed: – in an archived file (.ear, .war, .jar) – Or in exploded (open) directory format
Auto-Deployment – Copying Files
If Production Mode is OFF:
You can install an application simply by copying it (manually or using the console) to the ‘autodeploy’ folder of the domain
The Administration Server monitors this folder for new, changed or removed applications
This configures, targets and deploys the application to the Administration server only
Location of Applications Directory:%BEA_HOME%\user_projects\domains\domain_name\autodeploy
Development vs. Production Modes
An Administration server starts either using:
development mode, which turns auto-deployment on
production mode, which turns auto-deployment off
The Administration server starts in the mode selected at domain creation time.
The mode is set for all WebLogic servers in a given domain.
Production Mode Flag
When Production mode is disabled, applications can be dynamically deployed.
Application poller will be enabled in Development Mode.
Console Deployment Method…
Deploying with the console allows full administrator control:
Installation from a location of your choice
Manual configuration of application name
Targeting of application to individual servers and/or clusters
Configuring the application without targeting it
Activating deployment when desired
DD Editing
Some deployment descriptor elements are editable via the console
Application Monitoring
Application Testing
You can test a deployed application using the administration console.
Application Update and Delete…
Using the console, applications can be updated (redeployed) after configuration or component changes, or deleted (undeployed).
All concurrent deployment activity is tracked by the Administration server in a series of tasks:
Task progress and outcome can be queried for each application
Reasons for failure are logged
Command-Line Deployment:
Any function that can be done through the Weblogic admin console can be done through command-line equivalents. A simple example of this is redeploying an existing webapp.
Using weblogic.Deployer Utility
To use the weblogic.Deployer utility:
1. Set up your local environment so that WebLogic Server classes are in your system CLASSPATH and the JDK is available. You can use the setenv script located in your server's /bin directory to set the CLASSPATH. 2. Use the following command syntax:
The -nostage option indicates that the application is available on all target servers at the same path and hence server should not copy files to the managed servers.
Deploying Applications with WLST
WLST provides a number of deployment commands
You can use these commands to:
Deploy, undeploy, and redeploy applications and standalone modules to a WebLogic Server instance
Update an existing deployment plan
Start and stop a deployed application
Deploying an Application with WLST:
Deploy an application (deployapp.py):#
## WLST script for Deploying J2EE Application ##
## Connect to the serverprint ’Connecting to server .... ’connect(’system’,’weblogic’,’t3://localhost:7001’)
print ’Done Deploying the application ’+ appnameexit()
What Is a Deployment Plan?
It is an optional XML document that resides outside an application archive.
It configures an application for deployment to a specific WLS environment.
It is created and owned by Administrators or developers for a particular environment.
Advantages of Deployment Plan:
Works by setting/overriding deployment property values defined in application’s WLS deployment descriptor.
Helps easily modify an application’s WLS configuration for deployment into different multiple WLS environments without modifying the deployment descriptor files included in the application archive.
Enables an application to be deployed to multiple domains or to multiple target servers and clusters that have different configuration within the same domain.
Configuring an Application for Multiple Deployment Environments
Using the Admin Console to Generate a Deployment Plan
Administration Console automatically generates or updates the deployment plan.
Generating a deployment plan using the Administration Console involves the following steps:
Preparing the deployment files
Installing the application archive
Saving configuration changes to a deployment plan
Using an Existing Deployment Plan to Configure an Application
Prepare application.
Place the existing deployment plan in the plan subdirectory of the application root.
Install the application.
Administration console validates deployment plan configuration against the target servers and clusters selected during installation.
Use Administration console or the weblogic.Deployer utility to identify the application and plan to use for deployment.
Directory Structure for Easier Production Deployment
This allows deployment configuration files to be located in a well-known location.
The application directory structure separates generated configuration files from core application files.
This allows configuration files to be easily changed or replaced without disturbing the application itself.
Applications can be deployed simply by specifying the installation root.
Sanity Checking in Production without Disruption to Clients
Using Administration mode, administrators can deploy an application into a production environment without exposing the application to external clients.
Access to the application is restricted to a configured Administration channel.
A final (“sanity”) check can be performed on the application directly in the production environment without disruption to clients.
Staged Deployment
Deployment can be configured per server or for each application as:
staged (default)—files copied to preconfigured staging directory for preparation and activation
no-stage—files deployed from static location
external_stage—files copied by user or third-party tool prior to deployment
Side-by-Side Deployment
A revised version of a production application can be redeployed alongside the older version:
Without affecting the existing clients to the application
Without interrupting the availability of the application to the new client request
WebLogic Server automatically manages client connections so that:
Existing clients continue to use the older application
New client requests are directed to the newer application
The older version is undeployed after all current clients complete their work.
To support the production redeployment strategy, WebLogic Server now recognizes a unique version string entry in the Enterprise MANIFEST file.
When a redeployment operation is requested, WebLogic Server checks the version string to determine whether to deploy a new version of the application.
Side-by-Side deployment is performed automatically if:
An application supports production redeployment
Its deployment configuration is updated with changes to resource bindings
This occurs even if no version string is specified in the application’s manifest file.
Advantages of Side-by-Side Deployment
Scheduling application downtime
Setting up redundant servers to host new application versions
Managing client access to multiple application versions manually
Retiring older versions of an application manually
Requirements and Restrictions for Side-by-Side Deployment
A deployed application must specify a version number.
WLS can host a maximum of two different versions of an application at one time.
On redeploying a new version of an application the followings features cannot change:
Deployment targets
Security model
Persistent store settings
Production redeployment is supported for:
Stand-alone Web Application (WAR) modules.
Enterprise Applications (EARs) whose client access the application via a Web Application (HTTP)
Production redeployment is not supported for:
EJB or RAR modules
Stand-alone or embedded Web Service modules
Applications that use JTS drivers
Applications that obtain JDBC data sources via the DriverManager API instead of using the JNDI lookup
Applications that include EJB 1.1 container-managed persistence (CMP) EJBs
Redeploying a New Application Version
Verify only one version of the application is currently deployed.
Verify the MANIFEST.MF files to ensure both applications have different versions.
Copy new version into a suitable directory.
Redeploy the new application version and specify updated deployment files.
Verify both versions are deployed and new requests are being sent to the new version.
Redeploy vs. Distribute
Distributing is an alternative to deploying an application.
Distributing an application prepares it for deployment by copying its files to all target servers and validating it.
You can start a distributed application in Administration mode. Access to the application is then restricted to a configured Administration channel.
Distributing a new version of the application makes it available for testing prior to being released for general consumption.
Redeploying a new version of an application will place the application immediately into use and will make it available to new client requests.
Distributing a New Application Version
Use the weblogic.Deployer –distribute command
Once the application is distributed, start the application in Administration mode
Test the application
When ready, start the application (without using – adminmode)
Optionally set a retirement timeout for the older version of the application.
Summary: In this chapter we discussed:
Web & EJB Applications and Deployment Structures
Deployment Plans
Deployment staging
Side-by-Side Deployment
9f:T51d8,
Disk Space or Filesystem Utilisation Issues:-
You will see tickets/alerts/emails with the subject like the one below: “Filesystem Utilization for / is > 95% current value = 97%”
Login to the server which has the issue.
Run the following command:
find / -type f -size +100000K It will list all the files whose sizes are in GBs.
a) If it is a live file (files which have the current timestamp or files that are currently getting written into.) then take a backup of the file to an alternate location and truncate the live file. Then gzip the backup file. cp hugefilename /tmp/hugefilename.yyyymmdd > hugefilename gzip /tmp/hugefilename.yyyymmdd
b) If it is not a live file, simply take a backup of it and gzip the backup.
Repeat the above steps for other huge files if there are any.
Check the disk space now.
df –h
Update the ticket with your comments and inform the CSL about it.
For Saba (Server): Usually disk space alert will be due to accumulation of .tmp and .rpt files under /sabaweb/temp folder which can be deleted. This will free up enough space and will usually bring the utilization to 30% or so from 95 or 100%.
Special Case: In case of an open file, please bounce the jvm. Again for Saba, we cannot bounce the jvm as our current access is restricted to web layer only , So please inform the same to CSL and update the case accordingly.
Note: Please do NOT delete any file without prior intimation and permission from the client.
Service Stopped/Not running Issues:-
You will see tickets/alerts/emails with subject like the one below: “KOORDSWBS01 - /opt/apache2/bin/httpd -f /opt/apache2/conf/httpd.conf_9001”“/opt/apache2/bin/httpd -f /opt/apache2/conf/httpd.conf_9001 -k start[-1]: Process has stopped”
Login to the server which has the issue.
Run the following command to check if the service is really stopped.
ps –ef | grep httpd
a) If the service is not running start it. Run the following command to start httpd as in the case of above alert.
b) If the service is already running, update the ticket and inform the CSL.
Please verify that all the clients do not have the customized USI startup scripts in /etc/rc3.d folder as a convention.
For Saba: We do not have access to Application server and for all such related issues please let the CSL know to update the client on the same. Please make sure that you are logging in with the right permissions. Note: i). We generally take care of the Web and App. Related services. ii). There might be other services for which we do not have access to. In such a case, inform the CSL to contact the respective team. iii). We might need to restart the App. or the Web Server after the other team restart their services. For example, we might need to restart the App. or the Web Server after the DBA restarts the Database Services.
High CPU and Memory Utilization Issues:-
You will see tickets/alerts/emails with subject like the one below: “KOORDSAPS01 - CPU utilization is > 95% current value = 100%”OR“VILSUAAH01 - 15 minute load average is >= 10.00 current value = 40.79”
Login to the server which has the issue.
Run the “top” command to see which process is consuming all the CPU.
If it is the “java” process which is consuming all the CPU, then it is most likely that the Application Server is consuming all the CPU. Hence restart the Application server.
If a process named “sysedge” is consuming all the CPU, inform the CSL and ask them to contact the monitoring team to fix it.
If the process name is something like “bkbman”, it is most likely that the backup jobs are running on the server. Inform the CSLs and ask them to contact the Backup team to fix it.
If it is the “oracle” process which is consuming all the CPU, then inform the CSL and tell them to contact the DBAs.
Note: i). We generally take care of the Web and App. Related services. ii). There might be other services for which we do not have access to. In such a case, inform the CSL to contact the respective team. iii). We might need to restart the App. or the Web Server after the other team restart their services. For example, we might need to restart the App. or the Web Server after the DBA restarts the Database Services.
Sysedge heartbeat not received issues.
You will see ticket/alerts/emails with subject like the one below: “VILSUAAH05 - Sysedge heartbeat not received for 15 minutes. The machine has lost trap connectivity to netcool, sysedge has crached, or the box is hung.” This generally happens if the monitoring agent is stopped or hung, the trap server IP is incorrect in the sysedge.cf file or the server has lost network connection. Generally this issue is handled by GEMC or the Monitoring team. In cases where we are expected to handle this issue:
1. Login to the server and check if sysedge is running.
ps –ef | grep sysedge
2. Check whether the trap server IP in the sysedge.cf is correct or not.
Note: Generally all servers in the same client environment will have the same trap server IP. For example, All the servers in the Kohler Environment will have the same trap server IP.
3. Check if there are any stale or hung mount points using df –h or df –k.
i) If there are any stale or hung mount points then unmount and remount them.
ii) If there are any NFS mounts exported from another server, check whether both these servers are able to communicate to each other.
4.If none of the above work out, inform the onshore team and the Client and get the box rebooted.
Note: Please do not reboot the box without informing the Client and the onshore team.
Generate a Log File
Before contacting BEA Technical Support for help with cluster-related problems, collect diagnostic information. The most important information is a log file with multiple thread dumps from a Managed Server. The log file is especially important for diagnosing cluster freezes and deadlocks. Remember: a log file that contains multiple thread dumps is a prerequisite for diagnosing your problem.
Stop the server.
Remove or back up any log files you currently have. You should create a new log file each time you boot a server, rather than appending to an existing log file.
Start the server with this command, which turns on verbose garbage collection and redirects both the standard error and standard output to a log file:
Redirecting both standard error and standard output places thread dump information in the proper context with server informational and error messages and provides a more useful log.
Continue running the cluster until you have reproduced the problem.
If a server hangs, use kill -3 or <Ctrl>-<Break> to create the necessary thread dumps to diagnose your problem. Make sure to do this several times on each server, spaced about 5-10 seconds apart, to help diagnose deadlocks.
Compress the log file using a Unix utility:
% tar czf logfile.tar logfile.txt - or zip it using a Windows utility.
Attach the compressed log file to an e-mail to your BEA Technical Support representative. Do not cut and paste the log file into the body of an e-mail.
If the compressed log file is too large, you can use the BEA Customer Support FTP site.
6) When Weblogic gives an out of memory error, check the following things:
When Weblogic gives an out of memory error, check the following things:
Weblogic admin: mydomain > servers
Determine which server is lowest on memory.
grep for errors in reedi:/usr/local/bea81/user_projects/mydomain2/mydomain2.log
Look for out of memory errors or stuck thread errors.
7) How do I get a thread dump from a hung java process?
When we redeploy our web apps through a script, it occasionally hangs the admin server.
This is a bug that BEA fixed in SP3 but we have not applied.
kill -3 <pid>
This will cause the process to write out the state of its threads to STDOUT, which we have directed to nohup.out.
The output from a hung admin server looks like this:
Full threads dump Java Hotspot(TM) Server VM (1.4.1_02-ea-b01 mixed mode):"ExecuteThread: '2' for queue: 'weblogic.socket.Muxer'" daemon prio=5 tid=0xa0f490 nid=0x30 runnable [dc9ff000..dc9ffc24] at weblogic.socket.PosixSocketMuxer.poll(Native Method) at weblogic.socket.PosixSocketMuxer.processSockets(PosixSocketMuxer.java:99) - locked <eab9e280> (a java.lang.String) at weblogic.socket.SocketReaderRequest.execute(SocketReaderRequest.java:32) at weblogic.kernel.ExecuteThread.execute(ExecuteThread.java:178)
at weblogic.kernel.ExecuteThread.run(ExecuteThread.java:151)"ExecuteThread: '1' for queue: 'weblogic.socket.Muxer'" daemon prio=5 tid=0x749490 nid=0x2f waiting for monitor entry [dcaff000..dcaffc24] at weblogic.socket.PosixSocketMuxer.processSockets(PosixSocketMuxer.java:90) - waiting to lock <eab9e280> (a java.lang.String) at weblogic.socket.SocketReaderRequest.execute(SocketReaderRequest.java:32) at weblogic.kernel.ExecuteThread.execute(ExecuteThread.java:178) at weblogic.kernel.ExecuteThread.run(ExecuteThread.java:151)
8) Weblogic startup error
Just noticed this error in weblogic's stdout:
<Nov 29, 2006 2:12:49 PM PST> <Warning> <HTTP> <BEA-101248> <[ptagis]: Deployment descriptor "web.xml" is malformed. Check against the DTD: org.xml.sax.SAXParseException: The content of element type "web-app" must match "(icon?,display-name?,description?,distributable?,context-param*,filter*filter-mapping*,listener*,servlet*,servlet-mapping*,session-config?,mime-mapping*,welcome-file-list?,error-page*,taglib*,resource-env-ref*,resource-ref*,security-constraint*,login-config?,security-role*,env-entry*,ejb-ref*,ejb-local-ref*)". (line 109, column 11).>
This is still an error. Here is what the beginning of web.xml looks like:
<!DOCTYPE web-app PUBLIC "-//Sun Microsystems, Inc.//DTD Web Application 2.3//EN" "http://java.sun.com/dtd/web-app_2_3.dtd">
Info from BEA tech support
This error indicates that the elements entries in the web.xml file are out of order. For example, the <welcome-file> entry before the <servlet> and <servlet-mapping> entries. The web.xml elements must be in the following order in the web.xml file:icon, display-name, description, distributable, context-param, filter, filter-mapping, listener, servlet, servlet-mapping, session-config, mime-mapping, welcome-file-list, error-page, taglib, resource-env-ref, resource-ref, security-constraint, login-config, security-role, env-entry,
ejb-ref, ejb-local-ref.
This is an error because the mime-mapping must come before the welcome-file-list.
But simply moving the mime-mapping stanza to the proper place results in a more significant error from the weblogic parser that prevents deployment.
Module Name: ptagis, Error: [HTTP:101179][HTTP] Error occurred while parsing descriptor in Web application "/dsk2/ptagis-1.0/web/ptagis" [Path="/dsk2/ptagis-1.0/web", URI="ptagis"org.xml.sax.SAXParseException: The markup in the document following the root element must be well-formed.
9) Weblogic stuck thread
Top reports that the java process running the weblogic appserver on MS is running at high cpu usage:
Normal CPU usage is between 5% and 10%. Looking at the nohup.log for reedi (server), we see the stuck thread message:
<Dec 11, 2006 10:51:32 AM PST> <Warning> <WebLogicServer> <BEA-000337> <ExecuteThread: '7' for queue: 'weblogic.kernel.Default' has been busy for "600" seconds working on the request "Http Request: /ptagis/loginAction.jsp", which is more than the configured time (StuckThreadMaxTime) of "600" seconds.>
This calls for a restart of the appserver. Ask for a graceful restart of appserver_reedi from the weblogic admin gui. If the admin gui is unresponsive (because it can't talk to the stuck thread), you may be forced to use a kill or kill -9 on the java process on reedi. Then restart the weblogic appserver.
10) No suitable Driver and Connection Pool not created.
I have tested the connection using util.dbping provided by BEA and have been successful. I made sure that the classpath and path variables for the server are identical to those in place when I run dbping. I still have the same problem!
The following is my path and classpath as verified by server console upon startup:
Here, also, is the error message received upon startup: <Dec 13, 2002 11:39:13 AM MST> <Error> <JDBC> <001060> <Cannot startup connection pool "MyConnection Pool" java.sql.SQLException: No suitable driver>
Solution:
1) Plese try using url=jdbc:oracle:oci8:@host:1521. Hope this should work.
2) Check if classes12.zip is where weblogic.jar is..Namely, {weblogic}/server/lib. If not copy from {weblogic}/server/ext/jdbc/oracle/{oracle_version} Or copy from oracle jdbc/lib directory...
3) The URL must be ....thin:@ NOT ...thin@ thats all
11) Unpack a Weblogic 10.3 domain on one of our production servers (SunOS 5.10), but get the following error: $ /opt/bea10/wlserver_10.3/common/bin/unpack.sh -template=/tmp/CM.jar -domain=/opt/bea10/user_projects/CM Error: failed to create the temporary script file Assuming that this is a privileged problem: where actually the unpack utility tries to create its temporary script files?
The unpack script calls a Java class com.bea.plateng.domain.script.Unpacker, so reading the script itself does not reveal the location. I need to ask the sysadmin for the privileges, so an exact directory location is needed. Of course, the error message is so vague that this might also be some other issue. Any ideas?
Solution: With unpack the problem is there because unpack needs write permission on one folder and the file domain-registry.xml. This problem occurs because you have installed the Weblogic installation with one user and you want to execute unpack with a different user. The user starting the unpack.sh needs write access to the folder $BEA_HOME/wlserver_10.3/common/lib. A temporary file is written here by the user executing the unpack command. This file is removed by unpack after the unpack command has terminated. Beside of this directory the file $BEA_HOME/domain-registry.xml is updated by the unpack command. Use chmod as the install user to give write access for the time you need to unpack the domain on the folder and the file with the command below:
chmod a+rwx $BEA_HOME/wlserver_10.3/common/lib $BEA_HOME/domain-registry.xml After the creation of the domain change the permission to a safe value.
Error: Problem invoking WLST - java.lang.UnsupportedClassVersionError: Bad version number in .class file
Scenario: Trying to stop WebLogic Server
Solution: The jdk version used while creating the domain is not supported. Use higher version (present in the same WebLogic server installed location) and point it while domain creation.
Getting started with Ant Each one of us has used Ant knowingly or unknowingly, while building our projects. But, most of us are not aware of its existence. Thanks to IDEs like Eclipse & NetBeans !! But, I feel that one must know how things happen. How a series of commands are executed when you build your project and how you can control and alter this flow. This entry is not meant to give you insight into the build process but it is meant to introduce the tool (Ant) to beginners like me. We will go through installation and normal usage of Ant Tool. So, lets get started :-) What is ANT? Ant is a Java-based build tool used for automating the build process. Ant is written in Java and that's what makes it platform-independent. This also means that you lose out on doing certain things (issuing certain OS-specific commands in build.xml) that could be done fastly in a OS-dependent manner. ANT is an acronym for "Another Neat Tool". :-) It accepts input in form of XML files (like build.xml) and can be used to perform repeatitive task in an efficient manner. Installing ANT Download the binary distribution. Now, all you have to do to install ant and run from command line is to set following environment variables:
ANT_HOME : Set this variable to the path where you have unzipped the downloaded binary distribution
PATH : Append the ANT_HOME/bin to the already existing PATH value. This is needed so that we can run ant from command line.
JAVA_HOME : Set this variable(if not already set) to the path where JDK is installed
And Bingo !! you are done with installation. It's time to test whether we have installed Ant correctly or not Test Your Installation To test whether you have successfully installed Ant or not, type >ant on command line and press enter It will give an error like Buildfile: build.xml doesn't exist!Build failed because right now there is no build.xml file existing in the current directory. Ant tool makes use of build.xml to automate the build process. Congratulations !! You have successfully installed ANT if you can see this error message. :-) What is build.xml ? It is nothing but a normal XML file that is used to automate the build process. It contains certain commands that are executed in a defined/prescribed manner. You can think of it as writing a Shell Script which will be executed by Ant tool. Actually it's more like a make-file that we have in Linux/Unix environment. A normal build.xml file would consist of following sections, in that order:
Clean - It removes all the previously deployed files of the same application, if any.
Init - Creating the directories and subdirectories according to your choice
Compile - Used to compile the *.java files & servlets or jsp's with the help of libraries
Copy - It copies the compiled class files and servlets in their appropriate locations
Create-war - Finally, we create a .war file of our application and copy it to your server's deplyoment directory so that you can run the application.
All these steps are not necessary and it depends entirely on you that what you wanna keep in your build.xml. A look at a simple build.xml would simply what seems so tough right now. :-) BUILD.XML Lets see what it really means:
Root Element
First line tells us that it is a XML file. Then comes the root element, project. Rest of the code for this project will come in between project tags. It has 3 attributes:
name (optional) - Name of the project
default (required) - The default target to use when no target is specified
basedir (optional) - This tells the base dir for all the paths mentioned in the in this script. If it is missing, then parent directory of this build script will be used as basedir
User-defined variables
These 2 lines declare user-defined variables which are used later in the file. src holds the location of the current directory as given by '.' build holds the location "basedir/build" where basedir was defined in project name above.Remember all the paths mentioned are relative to basedir So, property tag is used to give name-value pairs, but same effect could have been achieved by mentioning these name-value pairs in an external file (named build.properties) and using them in build.xml as they are used now.
Clean your earlier deployment
Target tag is like a function which you can call again to perform a reusable task. These lines are pretty simple to understand. The echo tag will echo/display whats written to the output console, and the delete command will delete the build directory ${build} is way to evaluate the build variable that we have defined above using property tag.
Initialization - Creating Directory Structure for deployment
Here, we just create a directory using mkdir command. The thing to note here is the depends attribute of target tag. This attribute is used throughout build.xml to create a chain of targets, to give a sequential flow i.e. it helps in specifying the dependencies of one module over another and tells us how the targets will be called.
Compiling source files and copying them to destination folder
This function compiles the source files present in src directory and stores the resulting .class files in build directory. I have deliberately not added more steps like creating a war file and deploying it on server, because that would make this entry long and complicated un-neccessarily. Time to run what we have done so far. Running this script To run this script, create a folder and name it Test and copy this build.xml file in it. And to test whether your script works or not, create any correct java file in this Test folder, which we will compile. Your directory structure should look like this. Test | |------ build.xml | |-------HelloWorld.java To run your build script, go to Test Folder, and type ant C:\Users\Agraj\Desktop\Test>ant If everything goes correct, it will give output Buildfile: build.xmlclean:[echo] Deleting build[delete] Deleting directory C:\Users\Agraj\Desktop\Test\buildinit:[echo] Creating new directory: build[mkdir] Created dir: C:\Users\Agraj\Desktop\Test\buildcompile:[echo] Compiling source files present in . to build[javac] Compiling 1 source file to C:\Users\Agraj\Desktop\Test\buildBUILD SUCCESSFULTotal time: 2 seconds Having said that, the problem that occurs most commonly is that Ant tool is unable to parse the build.xml file correctly. This is so because even a space or tab inserted in xml file can cause Ant to fail. You can get to know about the extra spaces/tabs using vi editor on linux/unix machines, but it can be pretty frustating on windows to look out for such an error. Although, most of us will never change the build.xml while development but still it helps a lot when you know what happens when you build your project and you don't feel alien to the environment :-) Random Notes:
Make sure that your CLASSPATH variable doesn't have any single quotes or double quotes ( ' or " ) in it even if there is a space in the path because, the presence of them will make ANT to fail.
Also make sure that there is no ending forward or backward slash ( / or \ ) in your CLASSPATH
For detailed installation from source or for setting optional parameters/preferences, one can go to the docs/manual/index.html page of the installation directory
Overview: Virtual hosting, which defines a set of host names to which WebLogic Server instances (servers) or clusters respond. When you use virtual hosting, you use DNS to specify one or more host names that map to the IP address of a server or cluster. When you deploy the application on virtual host, it means you hide the IP address of the servers which are actually going to serve the requests. It can either be targeted to one individual server or the whole cluster. Example, we have configured a virtual host for the admin server. Below are the steps we need to follow: 1) The first requirement for creating a virtual host is to create a network channel on the admin server. - Go to the admin console, click on servers -> admin server - Go to the Protocols -> Channel tab - Give the name of the channel as port-81, choose the protocol as http. - Give listen address as localhost, give the listen port as 81. Leave the external listen address and port bank. - Enable HTTP tunneling as per your preference. - Leave the security part as it is to the default unchecked values. - You will see the below configuration once the channel is created. - Restart the server to confirm that the server is using the default channel and port-81 channel. 2) Once the network channel is created, go to Environment -> Virtual hosts - Click on new, give a name to the host vh.localhost.org. - Now click on the virtual host vh.localhost.org, give the below values: Virtual Host Names: vh.localhost.org Network Access Point Name: port-81 Click on targets tab, check the admin server. Save the changes and restart the server. 3) Now we need to modify the windows host file in C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc directory and add the host name vh.localhost.org which we have specified for the virtual host. Add the below in the file: 127.0.0.1 vh.localhost.org 4) Now deploy one test application following the below steps: - Click on deployments - Click on install -> Choose the application from the path - Click next, check Install this deployment as an application -> target it to the virtual host (not the server) Click finish and Deployment state should be active. Now access the application using the url: http://vh.localhost.org:81/web-app You should see the welcome page of the application. Check out our Related CoursesWeblogic TutorialsIntroduction to Clustering WeblogicWeblogic Server Admin Training in HyderabadOracle Weblogic Server Installation
a2:T2570,
There are few changes we need to made while calling or navigating from one form to another form. So after all the final code in the Update page controller class looks like the following: public void processRequest(OAPageContext pageContext, OAWebBean webBean){ super.processRequest(pageContext, webBean); StirlingAMImpl am = (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); //am.xxinsertpatient(); if(pageContext.getParameter("pid")!=null) { String pid = pageContext.getParameter("pid").toString(); String whereclause = "PATIENT_ID='"+pid+"'"; am.getPatientEntryVO1().setWhereClause(null); am.getPatientEntryVO1().setWhereClause(whereclause); am.getPatientEntryVO1().executeQuery(); } else { am.xxinsertpatient(); } OAMessageRadioButtonBean var1 = (OAMessageRadioButtonBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("male"); var1.setName("Gender"); var1.setValue("Male"); OAMessageRadioButtonBean var2 = (OAMessageRadioButtonBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("female"); var2.setName("Gender"); var2.setValue("Female");}/*** Procedure to handle form submissions for form elements in* a region.* @param pageContext the current OA page context* @param webBean the web bean corresponding to the region*/public void processFormRequest(OAPageContext pageContext, OAWebBean webBean){ super.processFormRequest(pageContext, webBean); StirlingAMImpl am= (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); // am.xxinsertpatient(); if (pageContext.getParameter("update")!=null) { am.getOADBTransaction().commit(); throw new OAException("Patient Data Updated Successfully",OAException.CONFIRMATION); } if(pageContext.getParameter("item4")!=null) { pageContext.setForwardURL("OA.jsp?page=/xxstirling/oracle/apps/po/stirlingprj/webui/StrilingPG", null, OAWebBeanConstants.KEEP_MENU_CONTEXT, null, null, true, OAWebBeanConstants.ADD_BREAD_CRUMB_YES, OAWebBeanConstants.IGNORE_MESSAGES); }} The above code is the Controller class code in Update Page. Let us see the Patient Entry page controller code: public void processRequest(OAPageContext pageContext, OAWebBean webBean){ super.processRequest(pageContext, webBean); StirlingAMImpl am = (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); if(pageContext.getParameter("ppatientid")!=null) { String pid = pageContext.getParameter("ppatientid").toString(); String whereclause = "PATIENT_ID='"+pid+"'"; am.getPatientEntryVO1().setWhereClause(null); am.getPatientEntryVO1().setWhereClause(whereclause); am.getPatientEntryVO1().executeQuery(); } else { am.xxinsertpatient(); } OAMessageRadioButtonBean var1 = (OAMessageRadioButtonBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("male"); var1.setName("Gender"); var1.setValue("Male"); OAMessageRadioButtonBean var2 = (OAMessageRadioButtonBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("female"); var2.setName("Gender"); var2.setValue("Female");}/*** Procedure to handle form submissions for form elements in* a region.* @param pageContext the current OA page context* @param webBean the web bean corresponding to the region*/public void processFormRequest(OAPageContext pageContext, OAWebBean webBean){ super.processFormRequest(pageContext, webBean); StirlingAMImpl am = (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); if (pageContext.getParameter("item3")!=null) { System.out.println("Add button called"); am.getOADBTransaction().commit(); throw new OAException("Patient Data Entered Successfully",OAException.CONFIRMATION); } if(pageContext.getParameter("item9")!=null) { pageContext.setForwardURL("OA.jsp?page=/xxstirling/oracle/apps/po/stirlingprj/webui/SearchPG", null, OAWebBeanConstants.KEEP_MENU_CONTEXT, null, null, true, OAWebBeanConstants.ADD_BREAD_CRUMB_YES, OAWebBeanConstants.IGNORE_MESSAGES); } else if (pageContext.getParameter("item11")!=null) { pageContext.setForwardURL("OA.jsp?page=/xxstirling/oracle/apps/po/stirlingprj/webui/StrilingPG", null, OAWebBeanConstants.KEEP_MENU_CONTEXT, null, null, true, OAWebBeanConstants.ADD_BREAD_CRUMB_YES, OAWebBeanConstants.IGNORE_MESSAGES); }} The code below is the code is the AM Java code, and note that we created only one AM for the entire project. We created two methods overall in AM and the below code shows the two methods: public void xxinsertpatient(){ PatientEntryVOImpl vo= getPatientEntryVO1(); OADBTransaction trans= getOADBTransaction(); vo.executeQuery(); Row v_row = (Row)vo.createRow(); vo.insertRow(v_row);}public void xxSearchPatient (OAPageContext pc, OAWebBean wb){ String pid = null; String name = null; String phno = null; //OAViewObject vo= getSearchVO1(); SearchVOImpl vo1= getSearchVO1(); if (pc.getParameter("item1")!=null) { pid = pc.getParameter("item1").toString(); vo1.setWhereClauseParam(0,pid); } else { vo1.setWhereClauseParam(0,null); } if(pc.getParameter("item2")!=null) { name = pc.getParameter("item2").toString(); vo1.setWhereClauseParam(1,name); } else { vo1.setWhereClauseParam(1,null); } if(pc.getParameter("item3")!=null) { phno = pc.getParameter("item3").toString(); vo1.setWhereClauseParam(2,phno); } else { vo1.setWhereClauseParam(2,null); } vo1.executeQuery();} Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFSQL Server DBA Training in BangaloreCreating First OAF Page in Project
a3:T1662,
In this lesson we are going to see how to create Update page.The update must contain the same details what we are entering while creating or adding patient, so there fore the same page structure is required for us.Create one page attach AM to the Page.After creating the page go to the page structure of the Patient Entry page copy Region2 which is nothing but Message Component Layout Region and simply paste it in the main region of search page.After Copying the page structure we can see that same page structure is copied into the new update page structure so that we can save some time rather than creating each item and changing the view instance and view attribute and prompt names etc.,If we observe we not yet created Update Button and after updating Patient details we need to go back to the other main page, so for that another button need to be created.Create two submit buttons with some space between the buttons looks good rather than placing them in conjunction. So create one spacer item between region and one more spacer item between two submit buttons.Finally the Update page structure looks like the following image: Run the page to see the output and for the new created page also we need to attach corporate branding image. The update page contains the details which are already entered so we just need to edit only few values or we need to change only one or two changes like name is spelled wrong, amount entered is not correct or might be refunded to the patient, etc., So therefore whenever on search page if we click on Update Image then it must take us to this update page along with the details and after making changes we need to update the same row. First let us write the code to validate the Update button and other button in the page. Create the Controller in Update Page region, initialize the AM in the process Request of the controller: StirlingAMImpl am = (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean);am.xxinsertpatient(); Write the following code in processFormRequest, if you observe the code is similar code for update too like the way we wrote for patient entry. StirlingAMImpl am= (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean);if (pageContext.getParameter("update")!=null){ am.getOADBTransaction().commit(); throw new OAException("Patient Data Updated Successfully",OAException.CONFIRMATION);}if(pageContext.getParameter("item4")!=null){ pageContext.setForwardURL("OA.jsp?page=/xxstirling/oracle/apps/po/stirlingprj/webui/StrilingPG", null, OAWebBeanConstants.KEEP_MENU_CONTEXT, null, null, true, OAWebBeanConstants.ADD_BREAD_CRUMB_YES, OAWebBeanConstants.IGNORE_MESSAGES);} The below image shows the output of Update page. Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFSQL Server DBA Training in HyderabadCreating First OAF Page in Project
a4:T1622,
In this lesson we are going to see how to create the Search page according to the document. According to the MD-050 document we need to create Manual Search Page. So let us see how to crate a Manual search page step wise:
Create One new page on the project.
Attach AM to the project.
Design the page structure.
For example: Page Name: SearchPG Attached AM Name: xxstirling.oracle.apps.po.stirlingprj.webui The below figure shows the page structure of the Search Page, which contains 3 message Text Input items for searching and down one table layout region. Here the search result will be displayed in table format so here we are adding images for update and detail of the resultant rows in OAF page. The below picture shows the page structure of the search page: The below figure shows the page structure output of the Search Page: Still now we just created the page structure but the page is not yet validated properly. After creating page structure we need to create the Method in AM for search operation, it means if we are entering patient Id then in the where condition SQL Query must filter the Rows according to the entered Patient Id related similarly for Patient Name and Patient Phone Number too. So therefore we need to write a SQL data retrieval Query, create one VO and write the Query in the VO Qeury area: VO Name: SearchVO Package Name: xxstirling.oracle.apps.po.stirlingprj.server Write the Following Query in the query region of VO: SELECT * FROM XXSTIRLING_PATIENT_ENTRY_TABLE WHERE PATIENT_ID LIKE NVL(:1, PATIENT_ID) AND PATIENT_NAME LIKE NVL(:2, PATIENT_NAME) AND PHONE_NUMBER LIKE NVL(:3, PHONE_NUMBER) After Creating VO attach VO to the AM. After attaching create method in AM, the following code shows the java code of creating Method in AM. public void xxSearchPatient (OAPageContext pc, OAWebBean wb) { String pid = null; String name = null; String phno = null; SearchVOImpl vo1= getSearchVO1(); if (pc.getParameter("item1")!=null) { pid = pc.getParameter("item1").toString(); vo1.setWhereClauseParam(0,pid); } else { vo1.setWhereClauseParam(0,null); } if(pc.getParameter("item2")!=null) { name = pc.getParameter("item2").toString(); vo1.setWhereClauseParam(1,name); } else { vo1.setWhereClauseParam(1,null); } if(pc.getParameter("item3")!=null) { phno = pc.getParameter("item3").toString(); vo1.setWhereClauseParam(2,phno); } else { vo1.setWhereClauseParam(2,null); } vo1.executeQuery(); } Create One controller in Search page and initialize the AM in the SearchPage Controller, note that we already initialized AM in Patient Entry page Controller. Now we are initializing AM in SearchPage Controller, initialize the AM in ProcessRequest as follows: StirlingAMImpl am= (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); According to the page output we need to validate three buttons:
Search Button
Clear Button
Add New Patient.
Search Button, Clear Button, and Add New Patient buttons Validation code in Process Form Request is as follows: StirlingAMImpl am= (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); if(pageContext.getParameter("item4")!=null) { am.xxSearchPatient(pageContext,webBean); } else if(pageContext.getParameter("item6")!=null) { OAMessageTextInputBean mstb = (OAMessageTextInputBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("item1"); mstb.setValue(pageContext,null); OAMessageTextInputBean mstb1 = (OAMessageTextInputBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("item2"); mstb1.setValue(pageContext,null); OAMessageTextInputBean mstb2 = (OAMessageTextInputBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("item3"); mstb2.setValue(pageContext,null); } else if(pageContext.getParameter("item8")!=null) { pageContext.setForwardURL("OA.jsp?page=/xxstirling/oracle/apps/po/stirlingprj/webui/StrilingPG", null, OAWebBeanConstants.KEEP_MENU_CONTEXT, null, null, true, OAWebBeanConstants.ADD_BREAD_CRUMB_YES, OAWebBeanConstants.IGNORE_MESSAGES); } Rebuild the code and run the page the below image shows the search page with results after clicking on Search Button: If we observe in the output we created two image items one is for Update and Other is for Details of the patients. We not yet validated the Edit and Update images. The next lesson shows how to create Update page and the page structure of the Update page and output of Update, but for Update the values must be carried so hence we know that to carry values we will create SPEL in OAF. Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle RAC DBA Training in HoustonCreating First OAF Page in Project
a5:T1451,
In this lesson we are going to see how to create manual search page in OAF manually. Manual Search page we need to enter the data value to search for example employee names starting with ‘A’ then we used to type A% in oracle apps forms similarly in OAF the manual search page will work like. Step 1: Create Workspace, project , AM and create one page assign AM to the page give page title and window title. For example : workspace name : ManualSearch Project Name : ManualSearchPRJ package name : xxmanualsearch.oracle.apps.po.manualsearchprj.webui AM name : ManualSearchAM AM Package name: xxmanualsearch.oracle.apps.po.manualsearchprj.server Step 2:-Create VO and attach VO to AM VO Name is : ManualsearchVO Query in the VO is :- SELECT * FROM dept WHERE deptno LIKE NVL(:1, deptno) AND dname LIKE NVL (:2, dname) AND loc LIKE NVL(:3, loc) Step 3:- The below picture shows the requirement so there fore we need to create a page to achieve the requirement. Now if we observe the above image we need to create three Message Text Input items for search and two button items. After entering data in Message Text Input items and once we click on Go button then according to the search item provided the resultant values must be displayed in the below table region. steps to construct the page like above picture: step 1: Create one message component layout region step 2: Under message component layout region create three message text input items. step 3: Create one Row Layout Region under main region, under Row Layout Region create two Submit buttons and if we want a space between two buttons then create one Spacer item between two submit button items. step 4: Create one region using wizard and select region style as Table, select proper package name in which we created VO (ManualsearchVO). After creating all the page structure may look like : Step 4:- Open the java file of AM and create one method in AM and write the logic. public void xxSearchParams (OAPageContext pc,OAWebBean wb) { String dno = null; String dname = null; String loc = null; //ManualsearchVOImpl vo= getManualsearchVO1(); OAViewObject vo= getManualsearchVO1(); if(pc.getParameter("item1")!=null) { dno = pc.getParameter("item1").toString(); vo.setWhereClauseParam(0,dno); } else { vo.setWhereClauseParam(0,null); } if(pc.getParameter("item2")!=null) { dname =pc.getParameter("item2").toString(); vo.setWhereClauseParam(1,dname); } else { vo.setWhereClauseParam(1,null); } if(pc.getParameter("item3")!=null) { loc = pc.getParameter("item3").toString(); vo.setWhereClauseParam(2,loc); } else { vo.setWhereClauseParam(2,null); } vo.executeQuery(); } Step 5:- Create the controller and write the logic for buttons in Process Form Request of controller and here is the logic. public void processFormRequest(OAPageContext pageContext, OAWebBean webBean) { super.processFormRequest(pageContext, webBean); ManualsearchAMImpl am=(ManualsearchAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); if(pageContext.getParameter("item4")!=null) { am.xxSearchParams(pageContext,webBean); } if(pageContext.getParameter("item6")!=null) { OAMessageTextInputBean msb = (OAMessageTextInputBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("item1"); msb.setValue(pageContext,null); OAMessageTextInputBean msb2 = (OAMessageTextInputBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("item2"); msb2.setValue(pageContext,null); OAMessageTextInputBean msb3 = (OAMessageTextInputBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("item3"); msb3.setValue(pageContext,null); } } Step 6:- After writing logic in AM and Controller rebuild the code and run the page to see the output. The resultant page may look like the following figure: Give some text in any Text input field and click on go button. Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle RAC DBA Training in BangaloreCreating First OAF Page in Project
a6:T256c,
In this lesson we are going to see how to Create Automatic Search using External LOV and the uses of external LOV in oaf. The difference between inline LOV and External LOV is inline lov is used only inside the page where as external LOV we can use for other pages inside the project.So therefore the use or advantage of External LOV is if we want a list of values to be used for other pages in the project then we can create External LOV region and we can use the created region in any pages of the project.Steps to create External LOV in oaf are follows:Step1: Create Workspace, project , AM and create one page assign AM to the page give page title and window title.For example :workspace name : externlallovProject Name : ExternallovPRJpackage name : externallov.oracle.apps.po.externallovprj.webuiAM name : ExternallovAMAM Package name: externallov.oracle.apps.po.externallovprj.serverStep2: Right Click on the project select new as shown in the below picture.After selecting new option we will see a gallery window in that extract web tier in categories select OA Components and then select Region in items list.After selecting region click on ok button so that a window will get open in thatName : Give any user defined namePackage: Select the proper package of the project.Style : select style as List of values.Now one .xml region will be created under webui.Step3: Create on VO under the lov package for example select the package name as follows:externallov.oracle.apps.po.externallovprj.lov.serverVO Name is : externalLOVVOQuery in the lov is :-
SELECT FULL_NAME FROM PER_ALL_PEOPLE_F
Step4: Attach VO to the AM.Step5: Under the region create one item and item style as Message LOV input. In previous lesson we already seen how the Message LOV input item structure look like.The below image shows how the Application Navigator and page structure of the project looks like:Step6: Under the Message LOV input region create on table region using wizard. In the table region select the proper package name and then as we attached our VO to the AM it will display our LOVVO so select that VO and therefore a table region will be created with one item under it.Step7: Select the Message LOV input item and in the Property Inspector of Message LOV input select External LOV as shown in the below figure: Click on the icon so that the following window will get opens Click on the Browse button and then select the proper package name for example see the below picture:Click on the search button and then select the fully qualified name in the search results for example see the below picture:Click on OK button so that JDeveloper asks for confirmation in that click on OK button.Step8: Run the page and see the output. The following three images shows the output and its work process Click on the search image so that it displays list of values as shown below. Select any value whichever you want to select. Use Quick select or radio button process:Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle RAC DBA Training in HyderabadCreating First OAF Page in Project
a7:T19fe,
In this lesson we will see how to create Inline LOV search page.Inline LOV is used to search with in the page.The following are the steps to create Inline LOVStep1: Create the new WorkSpace and project, create new page add AM to the page.Step2: Create new VO in respective BC4J. While creating VO change the package name of BC4J to “.lov.server” at end, generally List of Values VO ends with LOVVO and the example BC4J path is:Package (BC4J) : xxinlinelov.oracle.apps.po.inlineprj.lov.serverVO name : InlineLOVVOQuery in the VO is:
SELECT first_name FROM PER_ALL_PEOPLE_F
The Application Navigator of the project now looks like:Step3: Under the main page create new item and select item style in property Inspector as “MessageLOVInput”.We can find List of Values region under Message LOV Input item.Right click on the List of Values region select New -> Table Using Wizard…Here we can create Table Style region only we cannot change the region style to another one.See the below image it shows that how the page structure will look now:Select the FirstName item under the table region and then in the property Inspector of that item check that in the Functional, Search Allowed is set to True.Step4: Select LOV Mappings in the structure of Message LOV input after that do the following changes in the property inspector of lovMap1.Functional:LOV Region Item : FirstName (the item to display in the LOV region)Return Item : item1 (the item to return)Criteria Item : item1 (criteria item works like in where condition value)Run the page and see the output. The first page of the output looks like the following: click on the search symbol so that it leads us to another page as shown in the below figure: Check the Radio Button of which employee you want to choose and then click on Select button or use Quick Select option to select the name which is required.After choosing the name it will display in the Message Text Input item as follows:Check the Radio Button of which employee you want to choose and then click on Select button or use Quick Select option to select the name which is required.After choosing the name it will display in the Message Text Input item as follows:Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle data guard Training in HoustonCreating First OAF Page in Project
a8:T147e,
In this lesson we are going to see how to display a data from the data base in OAF. Follow the steps to display the data in OAF page from the Data Base:
Create the page.
Create the VO in respective BC4J and attach it to AM.
Create the controller and write the logicode in Process Form Request.
To create a VO right Click on the Resources Folder of the project and then select New View Object… To see all the steps that how to create the VO we can see in previous chapter. Write the following Query statement in VO SELECT * FROM mtl_system_items_b WHERE ROWNUM < 101 After creating VO attach VO to AM (Application Module). Now select main page right click on the main region select New -> Region Using Wizard… After selecting Region Using Wizard then a welcome window will get open as shown below: Click on Next button to see the first step: After selecting proper AM we can see the VO attached to that AM in the Available View Usages, which is shown below: Click on Next button, in Step2 window select Region Style as “table“, the same scenario is shown in the below figure: In the next window we will find all the available attributes and in that select the attributes whichever required to display Click on Next button then we will find a window in that we can change the prompt names if required and also the style of the item we can change here we are taking all the items as Message Text input types. Click on Next button and then click on the finish button. After creating Region Using Wizard now create one more item and the Item Style is “Submit Button”. So that the page structure looks like the following: Now create one controller on the main region. Right click on the region1(Main region id) and then select Set New Controller… Now after creating the controller write the following code in the process Form Request. public void processFormRequest(OAPageContext pageContext, OAWebBean webBean) { super.processFormRequest(pageContext, webBean); if(pageContext.getParameter("item1")!=null) { /* The below code line is used to initialize the application module */ OAApplicationModule am=(OAApplicationModule)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); /* The below code line is used to initialize VO*/ OAViewObject vo=(OAViewObject)am.findViewObject("ItemsVO1"); /* ItemsVO1 is the instance name in AM which is the original name of the VO */ vo.executeQuery(); } } Rebuild the code, run the page and see the output: Click on the “Go” button so that it will display the records as shown below Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle data guard Training in HyderabadCreating First OAF Page in Project
a9:T1010,
In this lesson, we are going to see how to swap values from one field to another.
Steps to follow:
Create a Page and create Message Component Layout Region
Create two items one Message Text Input, and other is Message Styled Text with prompts as “Enter some Text :” and “Entered Text :”.
Create one button so that when we click on button swapping process to done.
Create Controller and write the Swapping logic in ProcessFormRequest.
We already know that how to create a page and how to create a region, the following figure shows the page structure in JDeveloper:
Now on the main region create Controller and write the logic in Process Form Request, and the code is :
Let us learn how to create Exception messages in OAF. This lesson will take us to show that how to create Exception messages, alert messages, warning messages in OAF pages.
First, create one page in a project.
Create the Region and two items.
One Item to enter text so take it as “Message Text Input” and another item is “Submit Button”. Hence we already seen in previous chapters how to create Message Text Input item and Submit Button.
Create the controller and write the code in the process Form Request, we are going to write the code in process form request because whenever we click on submit button based on the condition, the Message should be displayed.
Here we are creating one Message Text input item, and three submit buttons each button will display different messages.The below figure shows the page structure Contains :Message Component Layout Region—Under it: Message Text Input Item: Message Layout Item—- under message layout item:Submit Button 1 with prompt : Exception:Submit Button 2 with prompt : Alert:Submit Button 1 with prompt : Warning
Now run the page and just see the output how it looks, the below figure shows the sample output and if we observe there is no gap between Submit Buttons and Message Text Input Item.
Now to create a space between buttons and items we have one item called “spacer”. Create two items under Message Layout and select Item Style as a spacer and in Property Inspector give width as 10.
Click on the spacer item hold it and drag it between the Submit Button items, in Message component Layout region directly we cannot create spacer item, so, therefore, create one message layout hold that item and place between Message Text Input item and Message Layout Item which is created early.
Now under the second message Layout item create one item with Item Style as “spacer” and give height as 10 in Property Inspector.
After creation the page structure looks like the following:
Create the controller under the main region and write the code logic in “process Form Request”.
public void processFormRequest(OAPageContext pageContext, OAWebBean webBean)
{
super.processFormRequest(pageContext, webBean);
if(pageContext.getParameter("item3")!=null)
{
String name=pageContext.getParameter("item6");
throw new OAException(name,OAException.ERROR);
}
if(pageContext.getParameter("item4")!=null)
{
String name=pageContext.getParameter("item6");
throw new OAException(name,OAException.CONFIRMATION);
}
if(pageContext.getParameter("item5")!=null)
{
String name=pageContext.getParameter("item6");
throw new OAException(name,OAException.WARNING);
}
}
In the above code item3, item4, item5 are the id values of the Submit Button items with prompt Exception, Confirm, Warning. Item6 is the id value of Message Text Input item.
The import package is :
import oracle.apps.fnd.framework.OAException;
Run the page and see the output. Give some text in Message Input Text and then click on the button to see the messages displayed on OAF. For example, see the following:
We already seen that how to create a Image in OAF page in previous lesson.In this lesson we are going to see how to create Item in Message Component Layout region.Directly we cannot create Image item in Message Component Layout Region, so therefore first we need to create Message Layout item.The below figure shows the Image item property Inspector under the Message Layout region:In the Image URI give the path of the image which you want to display. Run the page and see the output:Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle OSB Training in HoustonCreating First OAF Page in Project
In this lesson we are going to see how to create submit button in OAF page.Here in this lesson we are going to see how to create Submit button Item in Message Component Layout region, note that we cannot create Submit button directly in Message Component Layout Region for that first we need to create Message Layout as shown in the below figure:After selecting Message Layout item under that Item create one more item as shown in the below figure:After creating Item under the Message Layout item select the Item Style as “submit Button”.Give prompt name to display on top of the button example “Ok”, run the page and see the output:Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle OSB Training in BangaloreCreating First OAF Page in Project
ae:T3433,
In this lesson, we are going to learn how to create Message Choice item in the OAF page.
The bean for message Choice is the item is “OAMessageChoiceBean”.
Step 1: First create Item in the page and select Item Style as MessageChoice in Property Inspector.
Step 2: After creating the page create the VO (View Object) in respective BC4J and attach VO to AM (Application Module).
Creating VO process:
Right Click on Resources folder of the project and then select New View Object… as shown in the below figure:
After that a welcome page to create a View Object wizard window will open as shown below:
Click on Next button, so that first step to create a VO will come and in that :
Package : Select the proper package name which we created for a project.
Name : give the name to the VO note that all the View objects end with VO.
Click on Next button:
Click on Next Button, no need to select any package or attributes here:
Click on Next button without any changes:
Click on Next button without any changes so that we can see the Query area to enter SQL query to retrieve the data, write the SQL Query in the Query Statement.
After writing the Query statement check whether the written Query is valid or not by clicking on Test so that if the query is valid, then it shows a message that Query is valid. After that click on Next button.
Click on next button to step 8:
Click on next button and click on Finish button:
After creating VO (view object), we need to attach VO to AM (application Module). Let us see how to attach VO to AM:
Attaching VO to AM:
Edit the AM which we created in the project, right click on AM and then select Edit <AM Name> as shown in the below figure:
Select Data Model, extract the package in which VO is created select the VO after selecting the proper VO click on the Greaterthan arrow symbol which is shown in below figure:
After that we can see the VO is attached to the AM as shown in the below figure:
Click on Apply button and then on OK button so that the attachment process of VO to AM is over.
Step 3: Select the item properties in that do the following:
Picklist View Instance : Give the VO name
View Instance : Attribute Name, the displayed list values. (Column Name, in VO columns are converted into attributes).
View Attribute : Attribute Name
Now run the page so that we can see the output with drop down list to pick some values. The below image shows the output of Message Choice along with other items in OAF page.
Note that a drop-down list can handle a maximum of 200 values.
In this lesson, we are going to learn how to use Radio Button items in the OAF page.
We can create individual Radio Button items in the page as a named set of mutually exclusive values. It means we can place radio Buttons where ever we require on a page, but if we provided a mutually exclusive name to all those radio button items, then only anyone will be checked.
Let us see one small example how to create a Radio Button Items in the page:
Step 1: Create a page and create one Message Component Layout region on a page. Under the region create four items and select the Item Style as “messageRadioButton” . Example see the below figure:
Step 2: Now after creating Radio Button items give Id values to each item created and assigned a Prompt name which ever you wish to display for the radio button.
Step 3: Set the checked value and unchecked value to each radio button in the Property Inspector.
Step 4: If we want radio buttons to behave as a group then we must programmatically assign them all the same name by calling setName() for each radio button.
First, create one controller and write the program in the processRequest().
Remove one webui from the package name and give controller name and note that every controller ends with CO (general standard).
Write the program in the processRequest(), here I am not providing any access to the code to copy and paste it in the JDeveloper because whenever we write the code, we need to import the package in the program which we can get automatically from R12 series onwards.
For example whenever we are typing “OAMessageRadioButtonBean” then JDeveloper prompts us to use “Alt-Enter” to import the required package. So as of now, it is better practice to type the code rather than copy and paste.
We already explained the concept of programming in the previous Chapter (Displaying User Name, User ID, Responsibility Name, Responsibility ID).
The below figure shows the written code in the processRequest():
Now after righting the code rebuild the code by giving a Right click on the program select option called Rebuild.
After successful compilation of program run the page and see the output, if we test the output radio buttons we can select any one out of four available items because we set unique names to all the items in the program using variable Name . (dot) setName() method. See the code in above picture for confirmation.
The below figure shows the output of the program which shows additionally other items too rather than radio buttons:
In this chapter we are going to learn how to create Items and we will see some items in the OAF page how they look.We already seen in previous chapter that how many items are available and how to create a item.Here we are going to see different types of items in OAF how they appear in the page.Creating Message Text Input ItemThe Message Text Input items allows users to enter some text value by the user. For example in mail id User Name, password we will find some text to enter and those kind of items here in OAF are called as Message Text Input items. First create one project and create one page under the main region create one “Message Component Layout ” region. Create two Message Text Input items under Message Component Layout Region and give prompt names to each item.To make the item required one in the Property Inspector select showRequired and make to True so that the items become required field.Now for the item if we want the text in disable mode like the way we usually see while entering Password the text appears in dots rather than displaying text. In OAF for that feature, select item and in Property Inspector select Security -> Secret.By default it sets to False make it True.Run the page and see the output, the below figure shows the output which shows the Message Text Input items what we created:Run the page and see the output.Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle SOA Training in ChicagoCreating First OAF Page in Project
b2:Te11,
In this lesson we are going to learn how to create Page Button Bar.In the Page Button Bar region the items what we placed under it we can see in top and bottom of the pages. It means this region is helpful if we scroll down to the page and we need to click on some button to perform certain action then we can create those items under Page Button Bar region.The items inside Page Button Bar works just like in our mail accounts generally if we open a mail then we can delete that mail by clicking on Delete button and if we observe in most accounts Delete button is available on top of the mail and even bottom.Creating Page Button BarFirst create one page in a project.Here we are taking the same page which we created early contains five other regions.Under the main region in a page create one more region and select region style as “Page Button Bar”.The property inspector of Page Button bar is:After creating region with Region Style as “Page Button Bar”, create two items under the region and select Item Style as SubmitButton.For one Submit Button item give prompt as “Ok” and for other give prompt as “Cancel”.Now after creating items under the Page Button Bar region, run the page and see the output we can see in the output items will be displayed on top and bottom of the page. Look at the below figure which shows the look of output and also it shows how the items in the other region are placed:Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle SOA Training in BangaloreCreating First OAF Page in Project
b3:Tb34,
In this lesson we see how to create Default Single column and how the items inside the Default Single column appears in the OAF (Oracle Apps Framework) page.Creating Default Single ColumnFirst create one page in the project and then create one region under the main region as shown in the below picture:Right click on the main region, select New -> Region.Here we are taking the page which we created in the previous chapters. After creating the region select the Region Style as “DefaultSingleColumn”, the below figure shows the Property Inspector of Default Double Column.Create three items under Default Single Column region and also give prompt names to each MessageTextInput items created.After creating three items and giving prompt names, run the page and see the output how the items in the Default Single Column region are displayed.In the below figure if you observe we can see the difference between other regions along with the Default Single Column.Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle SOA Training in BangaloreCreating First OAF Page in Project
b4:Te2d,
In this lesson we are going to learn about Default Double column region which generally displays Items in only two columns, let us create a Default double column region and create some items init and see how it looks like.Creating Default Double Column RegionFirst create one page in the project and then under the main page region create one new region.Right click on the main region, select New -> Region.In the property inspector select the region style as “defaultDoubleColumn”.After selecting Region Style as Default Double Column we can see in the visual Text and Item URI fields are available it means for Default Double Column we can give Text value to the region and also we can place any images if required.The below figure shows the Property Inspector of Default Double Column:Now after creating Default double Column region create three items under Default Double Column region and note that all the items the Item Style is messageTextInput and give some prompt name for all the created items.After creating items under the default Double Column region the page structure look like the following which shows Default Double Column region and along with also shows items structure of Message Component Layout region , Header Region , and Row Layout region.In the above figure region5 is the Default Double Column.Now run the page and see the output which shows how the items are placed inside the default Double Column and also it compares with the other regions.
In this lesson we are going to see how the rowLayout Region looks like and how the items are displayed inside the rowLay0utRegion.Creating Row Layout RegionFirst create one page, here we are taking the same page which we created in the previous chapters and it already contains MessageComponetLayout region and Header region.Create one region, right click on the main region and then select New -> RegionSelect region style as “rowLayout” in the Property Inspector, and if we observe the Property Inspector we have Horizontal Alignment and Vertical Aligment .Center, End, Left, Right, Start are the available alignments for Horizontal. By Default , Default is the alignment type which is nothing but works as Start Alignment.For Vertical Alignment Bottom, Middle, and Top are the available alignments.The below picture shows the property inspector of Row Layout Region:After creating RowLayout region create four items under the rowLayoutRegion and also give prompt names for each created items under RowLayout region.Now run the page and see the output, it displays all the items in single row.The below figure shows how the output looks like and also observe that in the below figure how the items are placed in MessgeComponentLayout region and Header Region along with the Row Layout region.Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle SOA Training in HyderabadCreating First OAF Page in Project
b6:Tc99,
In previous lesson we learned how the Message Component Layout region looks like and how to create it, now using the same page here in this lesson we are going to see how the Header Region looks like and what are the properties available in the Header region in JDeveloper.
Header Region Creation:
Right click on the main region and select the New -> Region as shown in the below figure:
Select the region style as Header and if we observe in the visual area we can provide Text, give some text like Header Region and while when comparing this header region with the message component layout region we can observe that in message component layout region we don,t have a option to provide Heading text where as in Header region we can provide headings but item control is not there like rows and columns in MessageComponentLayout Region. The below figure shows the property inspector of Header Region just have a look:
Now after creating Header region create three items with Item Style as MessageTextInput:
Similarly create two more items to see the items arrangement in Header Region, and note that for all the items the item style is MessageTextInput.
Give some prompt names to all the items:
After creating three items the structure of the page looks like the following:
Now run the page and see the output here we can identify the difference between Header region and MessageComponentLayout region:
In this chapter, we are going to learn creation of regions on the page, and for each region here we are taking two or more items with item style as “messageTextInput” so that we will come to know that how the items are placed in the regions. Each region will place items in different styles. Let us see some layout regions:
1) Message Component Layout Region
First, create one Project which we learned in previous chapters like Welcome Page creation.
After creating a page, go to page structure and select region after selecting region right click on the region and then select New-> Region. Now a region will be created under a page region.
After creating region change the region style to “MessageComponentLayout” in the Property Inspector as shown in the below figure:
Observe the property inspector, and in the visual we added 1 to the rows and 3 to the columns, to see how this rows and columns effect. See the output and observe the items how they are placed by JDeveloper automatically, for that first create items under MessageComponentLayout region, here we created 5 items under the message component layout region and then after creating see the structure of the page how it looks like:
Give the prompt names to each item and remember here we are taking item style as “messageTextInput” for all the items, run the page and see the output to see how the items are placed in message Component Layout region:
Follow the next lesson which shows Header Region how it looks like.
Oracle Fusion Middleware consists of several Oracle products, built over the years and recently acquired, that will help build end to end solutions. Oracle has been attempting to bring all these products under one roof. With recent release of Oracle Fusion Middleware 11g R1, I must say that it has managed to do it pretty well. Oracle Fusion Middleware provides fully integrated products that can be divided into four important categories:
Data and Application Layer: Products in this category help build integration with various databases, legacy/custom applications and ERP products.
Business Process Layer: Products in this category utilize the integrations built in the data & application layer to create re-usable orchestrated services.
User Interface Layer: Products in UI Layer will assist in creating sophisticated user interfaces supporting multiple delivery channels such as web, mobile etc.,
Identity Management Layer: This is the security backbone of entire Fusion Middleware. We can easily plug-in authentication, authorization in standalone and/or distributed server environment.
It is important to note that most of the products in each of these layers can also be used independently. But major value addition of Fusion Middleware is that most of these products are pre-integrated, creating greater synergy and re-usability. Given the no. of products involved, this blog focuses on the backbone of Fusion Middleware: Business Process layer. Oracle SOA Suite 11g is the product set for Business Layer. Individual constituents of Oracle SOA Suite and their description given below: Oracle BPEL Process Manager: BPEL stands for Business Process Execution Language. It is a XML based declarative language that can be used implement end to end business processes. Basic building block of these processes is a service, which could be a web service. BPEL utilizes various adapters to service enable legacy and custom applications before consuming them in processes. BPEL also provides human workflow that has variety of uses. Oracle Service Bus: OSB is an enterprise level service bus that was originally part of Weblogic before acquisition. OSB offers very useful features for service virtualization, canonical models and very efficient payload transformations. OSB is normally used to complement Oracle BPEL Process Manager. Oracle Business Activity Monitoring: BAM is a real-time service monitoring tool that can be used to track an end to end process created by BPEL/OSB. BAM offers real-time dashboards that can be help diagnose potential bottlenecks in the processes before they occur. BAM can be easily plugged into BPEL PM using simple integration. Oracle Business Rules: As the name suggests, its a product to create and use business rules. This can act as central repository for various rule artefacts and thus facilitate greater re-usability. It can be easily integrated with rest of Fusion Middleware products. Oracle B2B Integration: Used to connect with trading partners using industry standard protocols such as RosettaNet, EDIFACT etc., it can interface with E-Business Suite using XML Gateway and rest of Fusion Middleware using IP Queues. Together, above products can be used to define and implement Service Oriented Architecture. Check out our Popular Trainings Structure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFOracle Fusion Financials Training in DallasCreating First OAF Page in Project
b9:T2b5a,
In this lesson, we will learn how to create Items in OAF page, and also we learn how to create Regions on a page.
Here we are taking the same Welcome Page which we created /learned in the previous lesson.
Creating a Region in OAF page:
Select the .xml page in Applications Navigator. In the page structure Right click on PageId (example “WelcomePageId” which we created early in the previous lesson Welcome Page) and then select New -> Region.
By default, JDeveloper takes it as a Header region. We got different types of regions available in the JDeveloper, which are:
advancedSearch
advancedTable
bulletedList
cellFormat
contentContainer
contentFooter
defaultDoubleColumn
defaultFormStack
defaultSingleColumn
defaultStack
flexibleLayout
flowLayout
gantt
graphTable
hGrid
header
hideShow
hideShowHeader
labeledFieldLayout
messageComponentLayout
navigationBar
pageButtonBar
popUp
query
rowLayout
shuttle
stackLayout
sub TabLayout
switcher
table
tableLayout
train
tree
Give some text in Visual -> Text:, for example, “Header Region” text field as shown in the below figure:
Run the page after giving Text field value and see the output the output will look like:
In the output observe how the Header Region is appearing and how it looks like we will discuss some important regions which we use in OAF pages in the coming chapters.
Creating a Items in OAF page:
Let us see how to place items in the OAF Page regions and how to place items in the OAF page:
Here we already created a Header Region and if you observe in the above picture the id value of the region is “region1″.
Right-click on the region1 select New -> Item as shown in the below figure:
Now we can see item1 got created under region1.
In the item1 properties if we observe the default style of the item is messageTextInput (which takes input values from the user) and give some text for prompt (for example “Header Region Item1 :”). The same scenario is shown in the below figure:
We have different styles for items which are listed down:
attachmentLink
attachmentTable
button
exportButton
flex
formParameter
formValue
formattedText
image
link
messageCheckbox
messageChoice
messageDownload
messageFileUpload
messageInlineAttachment
messageLovChoice
messageLovInput
messageRadioButton
messageRadioGroup
messageRichTextEditor
messageStyledText
messageTextInput
rawText
resetButton
richContainer
richTextEditor
separator
serveletInclude
spacer
staticStyleText
submitButton
tip
urlInclude
Similarly, create one more item in the header region, and for item2 in the properties give prompt (example Header Region Item2 :). So, therefore, the page structure looks like:
Now create one more item but create it on the pageID, so that let us see how the items are going to be displayed in the output, note that we don’t know how the items appear on the page at design time and how the output looks like.
Right Click on the pageID of page structure and then select New -> Item as shown in the below figure:
After that for the created item3 in Property Inspector give the promt (for example – “ Item1 in the Main page : ” )
The same thing is shown in the below figure:
Now run the page and see how the page looks like.
The output of the page will look like the following, and observe how the items are displaying in header region and how they are looking out of header region.
Let us see how to put images in OAF. The following are the two ways we can keep images on OAF pages:
Changing the ORACLE logo to company branding logo.
Displaying Images in Page.
1) Changing the ORACLE logo to company branding image.
All the images in Oracle Applications are available in OA_MEDIA directory.
Step 1: If we want to know the path where exactly the OA_MEDIA directory exists in Sever, Open a third-party tool which connects to the Sever in command prompt like Putty connection manager. Type the following command in putty: cd $OA_MEDIA After that now type the following command which shows the path were exactly the OA_MEDIA directory exists. pwd (Present Working Directory)
Step 2: Now move the Image from the desktop system to the sever using putty or using other graphical user interface tool like WinSCP.
Step 3: Open the page which is already created ( example Welcome Page ), here we are taking the Welcome page which is already created in the previous chapter. Select the .xml page from Applications Navigator, and we know that we can see the page structure after selecting .xml page if you didn’t find the page structure then use the keyword Ctrl+Shift+s or go to View -> Structure to select the Page structure palette.
In the page structure select CorporateBrandingImage.
In the Property Inspector of corporateBrandingImage we can see Image URL in Visual field as shown in the below figure:
just remove the .gif file name and give the appropriate name i.e,. give the logo name which ever is move to OA_MEDIA directory. For example look into the below figure:
Note that still now we not yet moved our sample or welcome page to the Oracle Apps Server instance so there fore if we run the program then we cannot see the logo. To see the corporate branding image locally move the image to the folder “OA_MEDIA” so that we can see the corporate branding image in OAF pages. the OA_MEDIA folder will be available in the following path <patchfile_folder>\jdevhome\jdev\myhtml\OA_MEDIA Now run the page so that we can see our Corporate logo in the OAF Pages as shown below:
II) Displaying Images in Page.
To display a image in OAF page we need to create a Item first. Let us see how to create a Item, Right click on the PageId in the Structure of the page select New -> Item as shown in the below figure:
After that select the item which we created just by clicking or selecting item, Property Inspector will be highlighted in the Property Inspector select Item Style as image as shown in the below figure:
Now after selecting Item Style as image now select the visual field in properties and give the image path which you want to display in Image URI field as shown in the below figure. Note that we need to move the image as usually to the respective OA_MEDIA folder/Directory.
Run the page and see the output we can find the images as shown below:
Let us start OAF work with the creation of First Sample Page.
To Create a page in Oracle Apps Framework (OAF), we need to follow six steps listed as:
i) Create .JWS ( Java Work Space )
ii) Create .JPR ( Java Project )
iii) Create BC4J for AM ( Application Module )
iv) Create AM ( Application Module ) in respective BC4J.
v) Create the page and attach to AM
vi) Give Window Title and Title name to the page.
Note that for R12 version no need to create BC4J separately it will be created automatically by JDeveloper. Let us develop our first-page step wise.
Step 1: Open JDeveloper, after opening we will find Application Navigator if not then select it from View -> Application Navigator ( ctrl + shift + A ). Right click on Applications and then select New OA Workspace…, the same scenario is shown in the below figure:
Now give the File Name for Java Work Space, for example, “Welcome” as shown in the below figure:
After giving File Name click on the OK button. After clicking on OK button we can see a Welcome window to Oracle Applications Project Wizard.
Click on Next button, then we can see a window which asks for Project Name, give the project name for example “Welcome PRJ”, Give the Default Package, for example, “newtonapples.oracle.apps.po.welcomeprj.webui”.
Click on Next > button, again click on Next > button then we can see. In Step 3 of 3 of Oracle Applications Project Wizard, we can see Connection details and Responsibility details which we added early in JDeveloper Configuration Steps.
Click Next > and then Finish.
Step 2: After creating WorkSpace and Project we can see the +Welcome Project structure below to Applications. Extract project (Welcome) and WorkSpace then we will find three folders namely
Application Sources
Resources
Web Content
Now, Create New Application Mudule…by giving Right click on Resources you can select an option called New Application Mudule…
The same scenario is shown in the picture format:
Click on Next so that we will see Create Application Module as shown below. In the below figure observe that we not yet changed the package name and also not specified the name for Application Mudule. Extends we can see in extensions chapters.
If we observe in the above figure, we not yet changed the package name for Application Mudule (AM). To see the package structure we can see in the chapter BC4J file structure. So now we need to change the package name from “webui to server” and give a name for the Application Module.
For example:
Click on Next > Button we will see Create Application Module – Step 2 of 4 windows no need to do any changes here keep as it is and click on Next > Button again
After clicking on Next button, we will see Create Application Module – Step 3 of 4 window here to no need to do any changes simply again click on Next > button to move to another step.
After clicking on Next button without any changes, we can see the below window and make sure that Application Mudule Class:<nameof AM+impl> Generate Java File(s) check box must be checked. By default, it is checked if not just click on the box to Check.
Click on Next > button again or even we can click on Finish button here.
Click on Finish button so that our Application Module will be created.
Step 3: Now we need to create a page and attach it to the Application Module (AM). Let us see how to create a page and how to attach it to the AM step wise:
Creating a Page
To create a page Right click on Resources and select New (ctrl+N) as shown in the below picture:
After selecting New option, a New Gallery window gets the open and left side in Categories extract Web Tier and select OA Components after selecting OA Components from Web Tier select Page from Items list. The same similar kind of scenario is shown in the below figure:
Click on OK button after selecting Page from the Items list, after that it will ask for the details of the page give the name of a page and just check the Package generally no need to change. Click on OK button after giving Name.
After that, a page will be created with the given name. Check the Applications Navigator structure, Extract Application Sources Folder, extract the Package and also extract Project, server, webui we can see the names of AM, Page, and Project what we created, in the below figure PO is the Application short name of the -> Purchasing, Vision Operations (USA).
Step 4: Now we need to attach the page to the AM, for that follow the following steps:
select the .xml page from the structure Webui
Down in the page structure (WelcomePG.xml – Structure) select region1.
Change the ID value in the Property Inspector (note that the 3rd step is not mandatory if we want we can ignore it as of now)
Select BC4J in Property Inspector and then select AM Definition click on the icon to select the AM Definition.
Select Proper AM definition and then click on Ok.
That’s it we finished the process of attaching the page to AM.
Step 5: Giving Window Title and Title of a page.
In the property inspector select Visual and in that we will find Window Title and Title give appropriate names.
Window Title in the name which is displayed in the Title bar and Title Comes inside the Page.
Now the last step is running the Program to see the output for that select the .xml page name Applications Navigator and then Right Click on .xml page ( for example WelcomePG.xml ) and then later select Run ( )option.
The output of our page is as follows, have a look into the below picture:
Let us discuss how to configure JDeveloper in our system, we are here discussing in Windows environment stepwise.
Step 1: First step is we need to set the Jdev environment variables for windows. Go to environment variable in windows properties. Right Click on Computer/My Computer select properties. The same scenario is shown in the below figure.
Select Advanced System Settings after choosing the Properties of Computer, the same scenario is shown in the below figure:
Now in the top User Variables select New Button for adding a New User variable as shown in the below figure:
Note that you must give the Variable name as “JDEV_USER_HOME”, and Variable Value is the path of the jdevhome\jdev. Let us consider as an example I downloaded the patch and extracted it to Bharath\Softwares in D: drive now my path for Variable value is:
Step 2: After setting Variable name and Variable value we need to select DBC file into from Oracle Apps fnd top, copy DBC file and paste it in JDeveloper patch.
To know where exactly the DBC file is located in Oracle Apps go to About this Page and select Java System Properties tab then in the list we can find a System Property called DBC FILE, in the Value behind to DBC FILE is the path where exactly the DBC file located in the Oracle Apps.
The same scenario is shown in the below figure:
Step 3: After finding where exactly the DBC file located go to that particular path and copy the DBC file (note that don’t delete the dbc file and also don’t cut it).
Here we are using WinScp which connects to the server from our desktop system, we can also use putty to connect to the server or any other tool which works similarly like WinScp or Putty connection manager.
Install WinScp, and the following figure shows the icon how it looks like:
While giving path name directly don’t give /naora1.dbc, according to the above figure give the path as
After giving path you will find DBC file just copy it, the same scenario is shown in the below figure:
After copying in your desktop system go to the jdevhome folder, then jdev, next dbc_files, and then next secure, here we will not find any files or documents the folder is empty now we need to paste the DBC file which we copied from the Oracle Apps Instance Server.
The following figures show the same scenario:
Step 4: After pasting the DBC file now open the JDeveloper and create the Data Base Connection. After opening the file, it will ask for Configure File Type Associations, on checkbox check all the available types to associate with JDeveloper. The below figure shows how the opening page looks like:
Step 5: Create a database connection, go to Connections tab after that Right Click on Data Base folder and then select New Database Connection…, the same scenario is shown in the below figure:
After selecting New Database Connection… Welcome to the create Data Base connection window opens simply click on Next button. After that give the Connection Name here in the below figure if we observe the connection name is NewtonApples, and the Connection Type must be Oracle (JDBC)
Click on next button after giving Connection Name, in the next window it asks for username and password give Toad/Oracle SQL Developer tool connection name. The same scenario is shown in the below figure:-
After giving Username and Password click on the Next button, now you need to give connection details all the connection details we even can find in DBC file, to check those detail open the DBC file with notepad there you can find Host Name, JDBC Port, and Service Name. Give appropriate names and note that Driver type is thin.
Now after giving proper names click on the Next button, we can find Test Connection button click on the Test Connection button to check the connection is success or not.
Click Next button and then click Finish button.
Step 6: This is the last step in JDeveloper configuration, set the JDeveloper default Project Properties. Go to Tools à Default Project Properties. The same scenario is shown in the below figure:
After selecting Default Project Properties… from Tools menu, in the highlighted Project Properties extract Oracle Applications and select Run time Connection.
The same scenario is shown in the below figure:
Now give the following details:
DBC File Name: Give the path where exactly the DBC File is stored which we copied from server to our desktop system.
User Name: The username is Oracle Apps instance User Name
Password: Password is Oracle Apps instance Password.
Application Short Name: Any application short name which user got access permit and also note that whatever the application short name we are giving it must contain at least one OAF page, and also that must be attached to the responsibility of the User Name which we are giving.
Responsibility Key: Responsibility key of the Application Short Name.
The below figure shows the example showing DBC file path, User Name, Password, Application Short Name, Responsibility Key. Just have a look at the picture.
Finally click on OK button, so that we finished our JDeveloper Configuration process.
Let us see the installation process of JDeveloper, after opening the un zipped file you will find three folder called jdevbin, jdevhome, jdevdoc, the below figure shows the same scenario:In the next step open jdevbin folder in that you will find a jdev folder again open jdev folder the you can see bin folder, after that if you observe we can find jdev and jdevW icons. The jdev is for UNIX environment and jdevW is for Windows environment. The same scenario is shown in the below figure stepwise:Now send a shortcut of jdevW to desktop .The below figure shows the same scenario, have a look into it:Now you can see the shortcut of JDeveloper directly on Desktop.Check out our Popular TrainingsOracle Performance Tuning Training in ChicagoStructure of OAFAdvantages and Dis-Advantages of OAFCreating First OAF Page in Project
be:T1026,
Let us see how to identify the JDeveloper for the Oracle Apps Instance Version. Step 1: If we observe we will find an option called “About this Page” in OAF Page. Click on the link About this Page. The same process is shown in the below figure: Sometimes you may not find an option called About this Page, for that you need to set one Profile Option in Oracle Apps. The name of the profile option is “Personalize Self-Service Defn”. Switch to the responsibility, System Administrator. The navigation to select the profile option is: System Administrator -> Profile -> System The same navigation is shown in the below figure: After that select the Display level as Site and down in the Profile give name like “Persolalize%Self%”, the same scenario is shown in the below figure: After entering, click on Find button then you can see full profile option name. At site level select YES option to activate About this Page link in the Oracle apps Framework page. The same scenario is shown in the below figure:Step 2: After selecting About This page we can see another window, in that select a tab called “Technology Components” and after selecting that tab we can see the option called OA Framework which shows the version name of OA Framework. The same scenario is shown in the below figure which is showing the version number as 12.1.3. Step 3: Now you need to download the JDeveloper patch of the version which we identified in Technology Components. All the patches we can download from Oracle Meta link, and the file size is 500+ MB. The below table lists some patches related to the versions:
BC4J stands for Business Component for Java, the following figure shows the file structure of Business Component for Java where xxname stands for any user defined name and PO is the Application Short name of Purchasing, Vision Operations (USA), and you can use other also depending upon the requirement. In place of XXAAM we generally use client name. In the below figure we got
Controller will take care of the web browser activities.
The controller manages the flow between pages.
Controller responds to the user actions and directs application flow.
The controller will request from HTTP get and HTTP post.
All the controllers end with the CO.
When we create controller on subclass will generate.
Controllers have three methods:
Process Request (HTTP get).
Process Form Request (HTTP post).
Process Form Data.
HTTP get: This is used while loading the page.
HTTP post: After loading the page if we want changes.
Process Request: This method will handle HTTP get example while loading the page displaying the default items.
Process Form Request: This method will handle HTTP post.After loading the page if we want to perform any actions then we go for process form request.
Process Form Data: This page is invoked upon a browser ‘post’. During this phase the framework will automatically applies changes back to the underlying view objects. Rarely custom code is required in this phase. If exceptions are thrown during this phase the phase is skipped and the page redisplays with the error message. There are two parameters in the controller: 1) OAPageContext 2) OAWebBean
OAPageContext:
To get and set values of the fields using the OAPageContext.getparatmeter and OAPageContext.putparameter.
To call one page to another page OAPageContext.setforwardURL.
To redirect the current page itself use OAPageContext.forwardImmediatelyToCurrentPage (or) OAPageContext.sendRedirect and many more.
OAWebBean:
Each and every field we have properties and the properties define the behavior of item.
OAWebBean represents the Hierarchy/Structure of the components in the page.
WebBean represents the properties of item.
As we discussed what Model, View, and Controller is, look at the below figure which shows that how they generally interact with each other or how the data flow between them is.
View is the actual output OAF page what an end user can able to see.
In Oracle Apps Framework View is implemented using UIX technology, whereas UIX means User Interface XML.
Whenever we run the page in JDeveloper then automatically UIX will generate web.xml file.
The power of UNIX is that allows metadata to be translated to an HTML page for a web browser or mobile device browsers.
The generated web.xml file will be converted into HTML format of OAF page.
Since web.xml file here will work as a cache memory.
Whenever we want to move the web.xml file into the server side then MDS repository is used to move the web.xml file into the server.
MDS stands for Meta Data Service and in the application top, we will be having MDS folder.
When we deploy all the OAF page destination paths, regions then the files will be stored into the MDS tables.
The MDS table is like:
JDR_Paths: Stores the path of the documents, OA Framework pages and their parent-child relationship. JDR_Components: Stores components on documents and OA Framework pages. JDR_Attributes: Stores attributes of components on documents and OA Framework pages. JDR_ATTRIBUTES_TRANS: Stores translated attribute values of document components or OA framework pages. JDR_DOCUMENT_ID_S: This is a sequence generator table.
MDS can be managed using standard database procedures and tools.
The entity objects are used if one wishes to do some insert/update operations.
Entity Objects represents a Data Base Row of a table.
Entity Objects will be based on the View (Oracle View), Synonyms or snapshots.
We need to create Entity Object if we want to perform DML operations on the OAF Page.
All the Entity Objects end with the EO.
Example: employeeEO
When we create Entity Object (EO) one subclass will generate.
We have two types of Entity Objects
PL/SQL based Entity Objects
Java-based Entity Objects
Note that we have two types of tables in Oracle Apps they are Custom Tables and Seeded Tables.
If we want to perform the DML operations on the standard (Seeded) table, then we go for PL/SQL based Entity Object, and if we want to perform the DML operations on the custom table then we go for Java-Based Entity Object.
Entity Association
Entity Association is the relationship between two Entity Objects having one common column.
All the Entity Association ends with the AO (Association Object).
Example: EmpDeptAO
If we want to perform DML operations on Master Detail page, then we go for Entity Association.
If we want to common know column between two tables, then we will go for Entity Association.
The entire Database related transactions in OAF pages will be taken care by the MODEL.
Model is where the application implements business logic.
Model will implement all the Data Base transactions.
Model component is implemented using BC4J where BC4J is Business Component for Java.
BC4J consists of three components:
Entity Object and Entity Associations
View Objects and View Links
Application Module
Model contains six components including BC4J components, additionally, the other three components are:
Callable Statement
Prepare Statement
OADB Transactions
Callable statement is used to call a PL/SQL statements, Prepare statements are used if we are using single SELECT statement, and OADB transactions will take care of Oracle APPS related Data Base transactions.
c4:T4f29,
Microsoft Azure is a cloud computing platform that has been gaining popularity in recent years due to its robust features and ease of use. As a result, many organizations are looking for experts in Microsoft Azure to help them transition to the cloud. This has led to an increase in demand for professionals with knowledge of Microsoft Azure and its various components.
To help you prepare for your Microsoft Azure interview, this guide will cover some of the most common questions that you may encounter during your interview. By understanding these questions and how to answer them, you can give yourself the best chance of success and show your expertise in Microsoft Azure.
Microsoft Azure Interview Questions and Answers
1. What are the three main components of Windows Azure Platform?
Compute
Storage
AppFabric
2. What are the Service Model in Cloud Computing?
Cloud computing providers offer their services according to three fundamental models: Infrastructure as a service (IaaS), platform as a service (PaaS), and software as a service (SaaS) where IaaS is the most basic and each higher model abstracts from the details of the lower models.
Examples of IaaS include: Amazon CloudFormation (and underlying services such as Amazon EC2), Rackspace Cloud, Terremark, Windows Azure Virtual Machines in Bangalore, Google Compute Engine. and Joyent.
Examples of PaaS include: Amazon Elastic Beanstalk, Cloud Foundry, Heroku, Force.com, EngineYard, Mendix, Google App Engine, Windows Azure Compute and OrangeScape.
Examples of SaaS include: Google Apps, Microsoft Office 365, and Onlive.
3. How many types of deployment models are used in cloud?
There are 4 types of deployment models used in cloud:
Public cloud
Private cloud
Community cloud
Hybrid cloud
4. What is Windows Azure Platform?
A collective name of Microsoft’s Platform as a Service (PaaS) offering which provides a programming platform, a deployment vehicle, and a runtime environment of cloud computing hosted in Microsoft datacenters.
5. What are the roles available in Windows Azure?
All three roles (web, worker, VM) are essentially Windows Server 2008. Web and Worker roles are nearly identical: With Web and Worker roles, the OS and related patches are taken care for you; you build your app's components without having to manage a VM
6. How would you categorize Windows Azure? (IaaS/PaaS/SaaS)
PaaS (Platform as a Service)
7. What are the three types of roles in Compute component in Windows Azure?
WEB
Worker
VM
8. What is Windows Azure compute emulator?
The compute emulator is a local emulator of Windows Azure that you can use to build and test your application before deploying it to Windows Azure.
9. What is fabric?
In the Windows Azure cloud fabric is nothing but a combination of many virtualized instances which run client application
10. How many instances of a Role should be deployed to satisfy Azure SLA (service level agreement) ? And what's the benefit of Azure SLA?
TWO. And if we do so, the role would have external connectivity at least 99.95% of the time.
11. What are the options to manage session state in Windows Azure?
Windows Azure Caching
SQL Azure
Azure Table
12. What is cspack?
It is a command-line tool that generates a service package file (.cspkg) and prepares an application for deployment, either to Windows Azure or to the compute emulator.
13. What is csrun?
It is a command-line tool that deploys a packaged application to the Windows Azure compute emulator and manages the running service.
14. What is guest OS?
It is the operating system that runs on the virtual machine that hosts an instance of a role.
15. What is guest OS?
It is the operating system that runs on the virtual machine that hosts an instance of a role.
16. How to programmatically scale out Azure Worker Role instances?
Using AutoScaling Application Block
17. what is web role in Windows Azure?
Web roles in Windows Azure are special purpose, and provide a dedicated Internet Information Services (IIS) web-server used for hosting front-end web applications. You can quickly and easily deploy web applications to Web Roles and then scale your Compute capabilities up or down to meet demand.
18. What is the difference between Public Cloud and Private Cloud?
Public cloud is used as a service via Internet by the users, whereas a private cloud, as the name conveys is deployed within certain boundaries like firewall settings and is completely managed and monitored by the users working on it in an organization.
19. What are the three types of roles in Compute component in Windows Azure?
Web, Worker and VM.
Web and worker roles are essentially same except that web roles have IIS enabled on them.
Microsoft Azure Interview Questions for Freshers
20. What is windows Azure Diagnostics?
Windows Azure Diagnostics enables you to collect diagnostic data from an application running in Windows Azure. You can use diagnostic data for debugging and troubleshooting, measuring performance, monitoring resource usage, traffic analysis and capacity planning, and auditing.
21. What is Blob?
BLOB stands for Binary Large Object. Blob is file of any type and size.
The Azure Blob Storage offers two types of blobs –
Block Blob
Page Blob
URL format: Blobs are addressable using the following URL format:
http://.blob.core.windows.net//
22. What is the difference between Block Blob vs Page Blob?
Block blobs are comprised of blocks, each of which is identified by a block ID.
You create or modify a block blob by uploading a set of blocks and committing them by their block IDs.
If you are uploading a block blob that is no more than 64 MB in size, you can also upload it in its entirety with a single Put Blob operation. -Each block can be a maximum of 4 MB in size. The maximum size for a block blob in version 2009-09-19 is 200 GB, or up to 50,000 blocks.
Page blobs are a collection of pages. A page is a range of data that is identified by its offset from the start of the blob.
To create a page blob, you initialize the page blob by calling Put Blob and specifying its maximum size.
The maximum size for a page blob is 1 TB. A page written to a page blob may be up to 1 TB in size. what to use block blobs for: streaming video. "The application must provide random read/write access" which is supported by Page Blobs
23. What is the difference between Windows Azure Queues and Windows Azure Service Bus Queues?
Windows Azure supports two types of queue mechanisms: Windows Azure Queues and Service Bus Queues .
Windows Azure Queues , which are part of the Windows Azure storage infrastructure, feature a simple REST-based Get/Put/Peek interface, providing reliable, persistent messaging within and between services.
Service Bus Queues are part of a broader Windows Azure messaging infrastructure that supports queuing as well as publish/subscribe, Web service remoting, and integration patterns.
Messages are placed on the deadletter sub-queue by the messaging system in the following scenarios.
When a message expires and deadlettering for expired messages is set to true in a queue or subscription.
When the max delivery count for a message is exceeded on a queue or subscription.
When a filter evaluation exception occurs in a subscription and deadlettering is enabled on filter evaluation exceptions.
25. What are instance sizes of Azure?
Windows Azure will handle the load balancing for all of the instances that are created. The VM sizes are as follows:
Compute Instance
Size CPU
Memory Instance
Storage I/O
Performance
Extra Small
1.0 Ghz
768 MB
20 GB
Low
Small
1.6 GHz
1.75 GB
225 GB
Moderate
Medium
2 x 1.6 GHz
3.5 GB
490 GB
High
Large
4 x 1.6 GHz
7 GB
1,000 GB
High
Extra large
8 x 1.6 GHz
14 GB
2,040 GB
High
26. What is table storoage in Windows Azure?
The Windows Azure Table storage service stores large amounts of structured data. The service is a NoSQL datastore which accepts authenticated calls from inside and outside the Windows Azure cloud.
Windows Azure tables are ideal for storing structured, non-relational data
Table: A table is a collection of entities. Tables don't enforce a schema on entities, which means a single table can contain entities that have different sets of properties. An account can contain many tables
Entity: An entity is a set of properties, similar to a database row. An entity can be up to 1MB in size.
Properties: A property is a name-value pair. Each entity can include up to 252 properties to store data. Each entity also has 3 system properties that specify a partition key, a row key, and a timestamp.
Entities with the same partition key can be queried more quickly, and inserted/updated in atomic operations. An entity's row key is its unique identifier within a partition.
27. Difference between Web and Worker Roles in Windows Azure?
The main difference between the two is that an instance of a web role runs IIS, while an instance of a worker role does not. Both are managed in the same way, however, and it's common for an application to use both.For example, a web role instance might accept requests from users, then pass them to a worker role instance for processing.
Interview Questions On Azure
28. What is Azure Fabric Controller?
The Windows Azure Fabric Controller is a resource provisioning and management layer that manages the hardware, and provides resource allocation, deployment/upgrade, and management for cloud services on the Windows Azure platform.
29. What is AutoScaling?
Scaling by adding additional instances is often referred to as scaling out. Windows Azure also supports scaling up by using larger role instances instead of more role instances.
By adding and removing role instances to your Windows Azure application while it is running, you can balance the performance of the application against its running costs.
An autoscaling solution reduces the amount of manual work involved in dynamically scaling an application.
30. what is VM role in Windows Azure?
Virtual Machine (VM) roles, now in Beta, enable you to deploy a custom Windows Server 2008 R2 (Enterprise or Standard) image to Windows Azure. You can use the VM role when your application requires a large number of server OS customizations and cannot be automated. The VM Role gives you full control over your application environment and lets you migrate existing applications to the cloud.
31. Apart from .Net framework, Name other three language/framework that can be used to develop Windows Azure applications?
32. Briefly explain scalability Targets for a Single Storage Account of Azure
Individual Storage Accounts
Capacity
Upto 200 TB
Transactions
Up to 20,000 entities/messages/blobs per second
Bandwidth for a Geo-Redundant Storage Account
Ingress
Up to 5Gbps
Egress
Up to 10Gbps
Bandwidth for a Locally Redundant Storage Account
Ingress
Up to 10Gbps
Egress
Up to 15Gbps
33. What is meant by Fault Domain?
The fault domain is a logical group of hardware that is underlying to share a common network switch, power source that is similar to a rack within on-premise data-centers. The Azure platform distributes the created VMs within the available set and distributed across these domains. This approach is a limited one and is limited its impact of potential hardware failures, power interruptions, and network outages.
34. What is the Azure App Service?
Azure App Service is a perfectly managed PaaS (Platform as a Service) offering for proficient developers conveying rich arrangement of mobile and web abilities as well as integration scenarios. Azure App Service offers mobile apps those provides mobile application development platforms that are easy to adapt for Enterprise System, Integrators and Developers to convey a rich set of capacities to mobile engineers.
c5:T3d63,
Automation Testing Interview Questions
Following are some of the most frequently asked Automation Testing interview questions in the interview, here are the answers for them.
What Are The Criteria For Selecting A Test Case For Automation?
We recommend considering the following points for automating a test case.
-Determine the execution frequency of the test case. Do you run it often for every new build or once with large input? -Find out if automating it would save you time that you can devote to exploratory testing. -Is the test case critical for business or does it cover an end-to-end scenario? -Make sure analyzing the result of an automated test should not exceed the time it used to take during manual execution. Otherwise, it’ll lose its viability for automation. -Do consider the likelihood of the test catching defects. -Could it be a blocker for a major feature or functionality which is critical to business? If the answer is yes, then make sure to it get automated and passed in every build.
What is Automation Testing?
Test Automation is a process of automating the manual process to test the application/system under test. Automation testing involves use to a separate testing tool which lets you create test scripts which can be executed repeatedly and doesn’t require any manual intervention.
What are the testing types that can be supported by Selenium?
Selenium supports the following types of testing:
-Functional Testing
-Regression Testing
What is Automation?
Automation is any action which can reduce human efforts.
Can you achieve 100% automation?
100% automation would be difficult to achieve because there would be many edge test cases and some cases which are executed seldom. Automating these cases which are not executed that often will not add value to the automated suite.
What is a framework?
A framework is a set of structure of the entire automation suit. It is also a guideline, if followed can result in a structure which is easy to maintain and enhance. These guidelines include:
Coding standards
Handling the test data
Maintaining and handling the elements (object repository in QTP)
Handling of environment files and properties file
Reporting of data
Handling logs
Where you maintain information like URL, login, password?
This information should always be maintained in a separate file.
Can you tell some good coding practices while automation?
Some of the good coding practices include:
-Add appropriate comments
-Identify the reusable methods and write it in separate file
-Follow the language specific coding conventions
-Maintain the test data in a separate file
-Run your scripts regularly
How do you select which automation tool is best suited for you?
Selecting the automation tool depends upon various factors like:
-Scope of the application which we want to automate
-Management overhead like cost and budget
-Time to learn and implement the tool
-Type of support available for the tool.
-Limitation of the tool
What do you think holds testers back to do automation? Is there a way to overcome it?
The major hurdle for testers is to learn programming / coding when they want to automate. Since testers do not code, adapting to coding is a bit challenging for testers. We can overcome it by:
-Collaborating with developers when automating
-Considering that automation is the responsibility of the whole team and not only of the testers
-Giving a dedicated time and focus on automation.
-Getting proper management support.
You can save these automation testing interview questions as pdf and print for further reading.
Any kind of test which you thing should not be automated?
-Test which are seldom executed
-Exploratory testing
-Usability testing
-Test which are executed fairly quickly when done manually
Can WebDriver test Mobile applications?
WebDriver cannot test Mobile applications. WebDriver is a web based testing tool, therefore applications on the mobile browsers can be tested.
What is Object Repository? How can we create Object Repository in Selenium?
Object Repository is a term used to refer to the collection of web elements belonging to Application Under Test (AUT) along with their locator values. Thus, whenever the element is required within the script, the locator value can be populated from the Object Repository. Object Repository is used to store locators in a centralized location instead of hard coding them within the scripts.
In Selenium, objects can be stored in an excel sheet which can be populated inside the script whenever required.
Can captcha be automated?
No, captcha and bar code reader cannot be automated.
On what basis you can map the success of automation testing?
By following criteria, the success of automation testing can be mapped
-Defect Detection Ratio
-Automation execution time and time savings to release the product
-Reduction in Labour & other costs
What are the most popular tools for automation testing?
The most popular test tool for automation testing are
-QTP (HP UFT)
-Rational Robot
-Selenium
What are the types of the framework used in software automation testing?
In software automation testing four types of framework used are
-Data-driven automation framework
-Keyword driven automation framework
-Modular automation framework
-Hybrid automation framework
What is the scripting standard while performing automation testing?
While writing the scripts for automation, you must consider following things,
-Uniform naming convention.
-3 Lines of comments for every 10 lines of code
-Adequate indentation.
-Robust error handling and recovery scenario
-Use of Frameworks wherever possible
What are the primary features of good automation tool?
-Test Environment support and easy to use
-Good debugging facility
-Robust object identification
-Object and Image testing abilities
-Object identification
-Testing of database
-Support multiple frameworks
What are the steps involved in the Automation Process?
In the automation process, steps involved are
-Selecting the Test tool
-Define scope of automation
-Planning, design, and development
-Test execution
-Maintenance
When will you not automate testing?
One should not automate in following cases
-When the Application Under Test changes frequently
-One time test cases
-Adhoc – Random testing
What are the advantages of Automation framework?
Advantage of Test Automation framework
-Reusability of code
-Maximum coverage
-Recovery scenario
-Low cost maintenance
-Minimal manual intervention
-Easy Reporting
What are Junit annotations?
Following are the Junit Annotations:
@Test: Annotation lets the system know that the method annotated as @Test is a test method. There can be multiple test methods in a single test script.
@Before: Method annotated as @Before lets the system know that this method shall be executed every time before each of the test method.
@After: Method annotated as @After lets the system know that this method shall be executed every time after each of the test method.
@BeforeClass: Method annotated as @BeforeClass lets the system know that this method shall be executed once before any of the test method.
@AfterClass: Method annotated as @AfterClass lets the system know that this method shall be executed once after any of the test method.
@Ignore: Method annotated as @Ignore lets the system know that this method shall not be executed.
What is Junit?
Junit is a unit testing framework introduced by Apache. Junit is based on Java.
How can we handle windows based pop up?
Selenium is an automation testing tool which supports only web application testing, that means, it doesn’t support testing of windows based applications. However Selenium alone can’t help the situation but along with some third party intervention, this problem can be overcome. There are several third party tools available for handling window based pop ups along with the selenium like AutoIT, Robot class etc.
c6:T7cb,
JMX Architecture
Instrumentation Layer
The instrumentation layer exposes the application components as one or more managed beans (MBeans)
Each MBean provides access to its state using public methods
An MBean can be any Java object that supports the interfaces and semantics of the JMX specification
It provides remote management and application access to all of its registered MBeans
The agent also supports additional services, such as monitoring and dynamic loading
These services are also implemented and registered as MBeans so that they benefit from the framework as well
The core agent component is called MBean server and is defined by the interface javax.management.MBeanServer
Inclined to build a profession as JBOSS Developer?
Then here is the blog post on JBOSS Training Program
Distributed Services Layer
The distributed management services layer provides the interfaces and components that remote tools use to interface with agents
The current specification leaves the definition of these interfaces and other functionality to the future versions of JMX, but most application servers provide JMX connectors and adaptors for web (HTML), RMI, and SNMP access.
c7:T1211,
JMS Architecture
JMS clients are the programs (possibly external) or components, written in the Java programming language, that produce and consume messages. Any Java EE application component can act as a JMS client.
A JMS provider is a messaging system that implements the JMS interfaces and provides administrative and control features. JBoss Messaging is such provider.
Messages are the objects that communicate information between JMS clients.
Administered objects are preconfigured JMS objects created by an administrator for the use of clients:
Connection Factories
Destinations
Point to Point
A sender (producer) sends a message addressed to a specific queue
A receiver (consumer) consumes the message from the queue established to hold its messages
Queues retain all messages sent to them until the messages are consumed or until the messages expire
Each message has only one consumer
A sender and a receiver of a message have no timing dependencies. The receiver can fetch the message whether or not it was running when the client sent the message
The receiver acknowledges the successful processing of a message
Learn the core features of JBOSS Traning and become master with our expertise tutorials.
Publish and Subscribe
Publisher clients publish messages to one or more message topics
Subscriber clients subscribe to one or more message topics and receive messages when they are sent to them
The topics hold the messages as long as it takes to deliver them to all currently subscribed clients
Each message can have multiple consumers
Publishers and subscribers have a timing dependency. A client that subscribes to a topic can consume only messages published after the client has created a subscription, and the subscriber must continue to be active in order for it to consume messages (unless it holds a durable subscription)
JMS Message Consumption
Synchronous: A subscriber or a receiver explicitly fetch the message from the destination by calling the blocking receive method (with support for timeouts)
Asynchronous: A client can register a message listener with a consumer. Whenever a message arrives at the destination, the JMS provider delivers the message by calling the listener’s onMessage method, which acts on the contents of the message
Framework for reliable both synchronous and asynchronous communication between distributed components
Guaranteed push-based delivery
Peer to peer
One to One, One to Many, Many to Many
Loosely coupled (standard message formats)
JMS Implementation provides necessary services to its clients
JMS is unlike RMI, which is tightly coupled. In JMS, The sender and the receiver need to know only which message format and which destination to use.
JMS is unlike email, which is people oriented. JMS is meant to serve distributed software applications and components, although it is also used for local (in-JVM) messaging.
JMS in Java EE
Allows loosely coupled, reliable, asynchronous interactions among Java EE components and legacy systems capable of messaging
Is reliable, it ensure that a message is delivered once and only once.
Application clients, EJBs, and web components can send and receive JMS messages
Message-driven beans enable the asynchronous (possibly concurrent) consumption of messages, making it easy to plug in new business event handlers into an existing deployment
Message send and receive operations can participate in distributed transactions, which allow JMS operations and database accesses to take place within a single transaction
JMS can be used outside the context of a full-blown app server
Inclined to build a profession as JBOSS Developer?
Then here is the blog post on JBOSS Training Program
When is JMS Used When no dependency between components is important Compile-time dependency (loose coupling) Run-time dependency (components run independently) When we need asynchronous yet reliable communication Consider the following usage scenario: Components of an enterprise application for an automobile manufacturer can use the JMS API in situations like these:
The inventory component can send a message to the factory component when the inventory level for a product goes below a certain level so that the factory can make more cars
The factory component can send a message to the parts components so that the factory can assemble the parts it needs
The parts components in turn can send messages to their own inventory and order components to update their inventories and to order new parts from suppliers
Both the factory and the parts components can send messages to the accounting component to update their budget numbers
The business can publish updated catalog items to its sales force
Message channel states are logged separately by each channel. There are two forms of Logging Circular – log records are written sequentially across several files, then “wrap” back to the first file. log records are written sequentially across files. New files are allocated as current files fill. No automatic reuse of file space! Problem: Length (in time) of longest running transaction vs amount of writes to log determines size of log needed. Tips Circular logging is easy to manage, but is fatal if log is damaged (hard to backup circular logs!). Linear logging is hard to maintain but provides for archiving of previous logs (still a problem if “current” log is damaged)
ca:T8e9,
WebSphere MQ queue managers
Queue Manager
A queue manager is that part of a WebSphere MQ Series product that provides the messaging and queuing services to application programs, through the Message Queue Interface (MQI) program calls. It controls access to queues and serves as transaction (sync point) coordinator for all queue operations.
Queue manager names must be unique! Queues MQSeries defines four types of queues. A queue instance is fully qualified by its queue manager and queue name. Local Queue - an actual queue for which storage is allocated. Remote Queue - a definition of a queue on a different queue manager (acts somewhat like a pointer) Alias Queue - another name for a local or remote queue. Typically used to switch queue destinations without modifying program code Model Queue - a template whose properties are copied when creating a new dynamic local queue (“ create queue xxx “like” queue yyy). Some properties of local queues
Maximum Message Size
Maximum Queue Depth
High/Low Factors
Enable/Disable Put or Get
Persistent/Not Persistent
Local queues can generate events (messages) under certain conditions (like queue full). the execution of a program. These events are called trigger messages. The queue on which they are put is called an Initiation Queue. Process
Process defines an application to an MQSeries queue manager. A process definition object is used for defining applications to be started by a trigger monitor. A trigger monitor is a program that listens on an initiation queue and executes commands named in Process definitions.
Triggers and Process definitions are useful when you don’t want to deploy long-running programs. Suppose the message rate is very low (several minutes between requests). Perhaps it is better to instantiate the program for each message, and then let it exit.
cb:T7b63,
Using Tables with Navigation Bars and Tabs
Almost every application using a table associates that table with a navigation bar. Moreover, in applications of any complexity, the application also usually organizes its tasks into different tabs. For instance, the iPod application has different tabs for different views of its data. The Artists tab, for instance, shows a user’s multimedia sorted by artist. At the iPod application’s top is a navigation bar. When a user selects an artist row, the navigation controller pushes another view onto the navigation controller and displays it. In the following Try This, I try to instill some real-world credibility to this chapter by having you implement a table in a navigation controller that is in a tab-bar tab. Although initially confusing, this is such a common user interface pattern that you should definitely understand the next task. Using a Table in a Navigation Controller in a Tab This is a long, but useful task. Much of it is repetition from previous chapters, but the combination of a table in a navigation controller in a tab is such a common application pattern that it is worth presenting here in detail, even if much of the task is repetitive. Creating and Connecting the Views
Createa new Window-based Name the application TabNavTable.
Add a UITabBarController as an IBOutlet to Name the outlet myCont (Listings 10-23 and 10-24).
Change TabNavTableAppDelegate’s applicationDidFinishLaunching method in TabNavTableAppDelegate to load the newly added tab bar controller’s root view.
Save and open xib in Interface Builder.
Add a Tab Bar Controller from the library to the document
Add a Navigation Controller in the previously deleted root view controller’s place (Figure 10-23).
Change the navigation controller’s view controller, View Controller (Root View Controller), from a UIViewController to a Leave its type as UITableViewController; in a few steps, you change it to your own class, MyTableViewController.
ConnectTabNavTableAppDelegate’smyContpropertyto the tab bar controller (Figure 10-24).
Save and exit Interface builder.
Createa new subclass of Name the class MyTableViewController and add the table view controller methods in Listings 10-25 and 10-26.
Add an NSMutableArray named tableDataList and populate it in MyTableViewController’s viewDidLoad
Createa new empty nib named Open the nib in Interface Builder.
Add a Table View from the library to the document window.
Figure 10-23 Navigation controller in place of tab’s view controller
Figure 10-24 Application with a table, navigation bar, and tab bar
NOTE In step 14 you are adding the table directly to the nib as the main view. Contrast this with how you added the table view in this chapter’s first Try This example. Both techniques work.
In the document window, change xib’s File’s Owner to MyTableViewController.
Connectthe File’s Owner view outlet to the newly added table view that you added to the document
Connectthe table view’s dataSource and delegate outlets to File’s
Save and close xib. Open MainWindow.xib in Interface Builder.
Inthe document window, expand Tab Bar Controller, and then expand Navigation Controller (Item). Change the Table View Controller (Navigation Item) from a UITableViewController to Don’t forget to change its NIB Name in the Inspector to MyTableViewController to show the table is loaded from another nib.
Figure 10-25 Table in a tab bar
Save and exit Interface
Click Build And The first tab contains a navigation bar and a table view (Figure 10-25).
Add an IBOutlet to MyTableViewController that references a Name the outlet navCont. Don’t forget to synthesize it and to release it. Save and compile.
Open xib in Interface Builder.
Inthe document window, expand Tab Bar Controller and then Navigation Controller (Item). Connect MyTableViewController’s navCont outlet to the Navigation Controller (Item).
Save and exit Interface
ClickBuildAnd If you completed the steps correctly, there is no change in the application’s appearance.
Createa new UIViewController subclass and name it TableViewDetailsViewController (Listings 10-27 and 10-28). Although you leave this class empty in this task, in a real- world project, this class would contain If you wish, select the checkbox to also create an accompanying xib for the class. If you didn’t already, create a new View xib and name it TableViewDetailsViewController.xib. Open it in Interface Builder.
Change the view’s background
Ensurethe File’s Owner class is set to Also ensure the File’s Owner view outlet is connected to the view in the document window.
Save and exit Interface
Open MyTableViewController and import h.
Implementthe tableView:didSelectRowAtIndexPath method in MyTableViewController (Listing 10-29).
Buildand run in iPhone Upon clicking a row, you are taken to the details page (Figure 10-26).
Figure 10-26 Clicking the row takes the user to details view.
Table cells can be edited. You can add new rows, delete existing rows, and reorder rows. The way it works is like this: A user clicks a button that puts the table into edit mode. Edit mode displays insert or delete accessories used for adding and deleting rows. These accessories are displayed on a cell’s left side. Editing mode displays reorder accessories on a table cell’s right side.
Getting to Edit Mode
This chapter ends by discussing how to edit a table. Tables not only display data, they also allow adding rows, deleting rows, and changing the order of rows. A table has two modes: its normal display mode and edit mode. When a table is in edit mode, it can display accessories for inserting, deleting, and rearranging table cells. An application places a table in edit mode by sending a message to the table view’s setEditing:animated: method. For instance, you might call a table’s setEditing:animated: method by implementing an IBAction called by a button on a form. (IBAction) edit { [self.myTableView setEditing:YES animated:YES]; } However, a self-created button is not how tables are usually placed into edit mode. Rather than specifically creating an action and manually calling a method, you usually use a navigation item and let it automatically activate a table view’s edit mode. Remember, 90 percent of the time you will implement a table view in a navigation controller. That navigation controller’s navigation bar can contain a right button. One choice you have when creating a navigation bar button is creating an Edit button. self.navigationItem.rightBarButtonItem = myTableController. editButtonItem; When you set that button to a table controller’s editButtonItem, the controller automatically knows to enter edit mode.
Edit Mode Methods
tableView:canEditRowAtIndexPath:,tableView:canMoveRowAtIndexPath:,tableView:commitEditing Style:forRowAtIndexPath:,and tableView:commitEditingStyle: forRowAtIndexPath: are four methodsyou should implement in your UITableViewDataSource protocol adoptee. (BOOL)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView canEditRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *)indexPath (BOOL)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView canMoveRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *)indexPath (void)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView commitEditingStyle:(UITableViewCellEditingStyle) editingStyle forRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath (UITableViewCellEditingStyle)tableView:(UITableView *) tableView editingStyleForRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *) indexPath A table knows a row is editable by the tableView:canEditRowAtIndexPath: method. If you wish all rows to be editable, simply have the method return YES; otherwise, implement code to determine if a particular row is editable. If you omit this method, no rows are editable. The tableView:editingStyleForRowAtIndexPath: method informs the table what style editing accessory the row should have. If this method returns a UITableViewCellEditingStyleNone, Figure 10-27 A table where the first and last rows have no editing style,no accessory is displayed. If this method returns UITableViewCellEditingStyleDelete, the delete accessory is displayed. And if the method returns UITableViewCellEditingStyleInsert, the insert accessory is displayed. The following example code in Listing 10-30 and Figure 10-27 illustrates. Listing 10-30 The tableView:editingStyleForRowAtIndexPath method - (UITableViewCellEditingStyle)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView editingStyleForRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)indexPath { if(indexPath.row == 0 || indexPath.row == [self.workoutArray count]- 1) { return UITableViewCellEditingStyleNone; } return UITableViewCellEditingStyleDelete; } A table knows a table row is movable by the tableView:canMoveRowAtIndexPath: method. Like the tableView:canEditRowAtIndexPath: method, simply have the method return YES if all rows are moveable; otherwise, write your own custom code. If you omit this method, no rows are movable.The tableView:canMoveRowAtIndexPath: method only prevents particular rows from being directly moved by a user. A user can still move another row to the position held by the unmovable row, thus moving the unmovable row indirectly. To prevent this behavior,you can implement the tableView:targetIndexPathForMoveFromRowAtIndexPath: toProposedIndexPath: method in your table view’s delegate. If a proposed move is acceptable, return the proposedDestinationIndexPath; otherwise, return the sourceIndexPath. The method’s signature follows. - (NSIndexPath *)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView targetIndexPathForMoveFromRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)sourceIndexPath toProposedIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)proposedDestinationIndexPath The tableView:commitEditingStyle:forRowAtIndexPath: commits a row insertion or deletion. Notice the editingStyle parameter. If a row is deleted, the table view sends a UITable ViewCellEditingStyleDelete style as the editingStyle parameter. If a row is inserted, the table view sends a UITableViewCellEditingStyleInsert style. It uses the editingStyle parameter to tell it which action resulted in the method being called. This method is for implementing code that handles a row insertion or deletion. For instance, in this chapter, data comes from an NSArray or NSMutableArray. When using an NSMutableArray as a data source for a table, deleting a row means you must delete the corresponding item from the array. If inserting, you must add an item at the index where the row was inserted and remove the item from its old location in the array.
Editing Rows
Copy the TabNavTable project to a new location and open it in Xcode.
Createa new view controller class called AddItemViewController (Listings 10-31 and 10- 32). If you wish, select the ―With XIB for user interface‖ checkbox and create an associated
Add a reference to MyTableViewController in AddItemViewController; however, instead of importing MyTableViewController, use the @class macro (Listings 10-33 and 10-34). Name the property
Add an IBOutlet for a Name the text field addedName. Add an IBOutlet for a bar button item. Name the button doneButton. Do not forget to synthesize the outlets/ properties.
Add an IBAction called exit and Save.
Open MyTableViewController and import Add a property referencing the AddItemViewController. Name the reference addItemController. Also, add a method named exitAndSave and an IBAction named enterAddMode. Note that exitAndSave takes an NSString as a parameter and is not an IBAction.
Add an IBOutlet for a bar button item named
Change the viewDidLoad method so that it sets its navigation item’s rightBarButtonItem to
its editButtonItem and its navigation item’s leftBarButtonItem to addButton.
Ifyou didn’t already when creating the view controller, create a new View XIB named xib. Open the nib in Interface Builder.
Ensurethe File’s Owner is an AddItemViewController, if it is not set it to this Ensure its view is connected to the view in the document window.
Add a bar button item to the document Change the newly added bar button’s identifier to Done.
Connectthe File’s Owner doneButton outlet to the newly created Done
Add a UITextField to the Attach it to the File’s Owner addedName outlet.
Connectthe File’s Owner exitAndSave action to the newly added Done bar button
Save and exit Interface
Open AddItemViewController and implement the viewDidLoadMethod so that it initializes its navigationItem’s title to ―Add Item‖ and its rightBarButtonItem to its
Open xib in Interface Builder and add a bar button item to the document window. Change the button’s identifier to Add.
Connectthe File’s Owner enterAddMode property to the newly added bar button Also connect the File’s Owner addButton to the newly added bar button item.
Return to MyTableViewController and implement the exitAndSave and the enterAddMode methods like Listing 10-32.
Returnto AddItemViewController and implement the exitAndSave method like Listing 10-34.
Ensureall your properties are being properly released in each class dealloc
Save and exit Interface
Click Build And Go.
Figure 10-28 The table view in edit mode
When the application starts, it presents the user with the table view. Upon tapping the Edit button, the application presents the table in edit mode (Figure 10-28). If the user clicks one of the table’s delete accessories, the accessory rotates 90 degrees and presents a Delete button (Figure 10-29). Upon clicking Delete, the row is deleted. When a user clicks and drags the move accessory on the right, he or she can move the row to the new location desired (Figure 10-30). If a user decides to add a row, he or she taps the Add button, which presents the user with a view to enter the new object’s details (Figure 10-31). If the user decides to cancel this action, he or she simply taps the Back button. If the user decides to save the record, he or she taps the Done button, which saves the record and returns the user to the table with the newly added table row (Figure 10-32). To support moving rows, you implemented the tableView:moveRowAtIndexPath: toIndexPath: method. In that method, you obtained the object from its old position in the tableDataList, removed it, and then added it to its new location. You also implemented the tableView:canMoveRowAtIndexPath: and tableView:canEditRowAtIndexPath: methods. If you needed to only allow certain rows to be editable, you would add that code to the tableView:canEditRowAtIndexPath: method. If you needed to only allow certain rows to be movable, you would add code to the tableView:canMoveRowAtIndexPath: method. Here, both methods simply return YES.
Figure 10-29 Deleting a row Figure 10-30 Moving a row
Figure 10-31 Adding an item Figure 10-32 The table view with thenewly added item
Supporting delete functionality requires a little more code than moving rows, but not much. You implemented the tableView:commitEditingStyle:forRowAtIndexPath: method. In the example, this method removes an object from the index and deletes the row from the table. Notice you disallowed inserting rows by implementing the tableView:editingStyleForRow AtIndexPath: and having it return UITableViewCellEditingStyleDelete. This method informs a table what accessory, if any, it should display in a row when the table enters edit mode. Here, it displays the delete accessory.You did not implement insert functionality at all. Inserting uses similar logic to deleting a row, only the style is UITableViewCellEditingStyleInsert. You would also implement code to initialize an object and then insert it in the data source at the proper location. For instance, in the previous example, you could change it to support inserting rows if you changed tableView: editingStyleForRowAtIndexPath: to return UITableViewCellEditingStyleInsert and added the following lines to the tableView:commitEditingStyle:forRowAtIndex: method: else if (editingStyle == UITableViewCellEditingStyleInsert) { self.tableDataList insertObject:@"Uninitialized" atIndex:indexPath. row]; [tableView insertRowsAtIndexPaths:[NSArray arrayWithObject:indexPath] withRowAnimation:YES]; } In this example, however, adding a row does not use a table’s edit mode. Although it is possible to insert a row using a table’s edit mode, it is often not practical. Usually, a table lists items, where each row represents an individual item. Because each item has details associated with it, adding is often accomplished using a separate view controller. Here, you added a left bar button with an addition symbol. When a user clicks the button, it calls MyTableViewController’s enterAddMode method. This method presents the AddItemViewController’s view. Note that AddItemViewController and MyTableViewController both have references to each other. Upon finishing entering the new item, a user clicks Done, and the Done button fires AddItemViewController’s exitAndSave method. This method calls MyTableViewController’s exitAndSave method. and the row is added as the table’s last row. Listing 10-31 MyTableViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> #import "TableViewDetailsViewController.h" #import "AddItemViewController.h" @interface MyTableViewController : UITableViewController { NSMutableArray * tableDataList; IBOutlet UINavigationController * navCont; AddItemViewController * addItemController; IBOutlet UIBarButtonItem * addButton; } @property (nonatomic, retain) UINavigationController * navCont; @property (nonatomic, retain) NSMutableArray * tableDataList; @property (nonatomic, retain) AddItemViewController * addItemController; @property (nonatomic, retain) UIBarButtonItem * addButton; (IBAction) exitAndSave: (NSString *) newValue; (IBAction) enterAddMode: (id) sender; @end Listing 10-32 MyTableViewController.m #import "MyTableViewController.h" @implementation MyTableViewController @synthesize tableDataList; @synthesize navCont; @synthesize addItemController; @synthesize addButton; - (IBAction) enterAddMode: (id) sender { self.addItemController = [[[AddItemViewController alloc] initWithNibName: @"AddItemViewController" bundle:nil] autorelease]; [self.navCont pushViewController:self.addItemController animated:YES]; self.addItemController.parentTable = self;} (void) exitAndSave : (NSString *) newValue { [self.tableDataList addObject: newValue]; [self.navCont popToRootViewControllerAnimated:YES]; [self.tableView reloadData]; }(void) viewDidLoad { NSMutableArray * tempArray = [[[NSMutableArray alloc] initWithObjects: @"Item One", @"Item Two", @"Item Three", @"Item Four", @"Item Five", @"Item Six", @"Item Seven", @"Item Eight", @"Item Nine", @"Item Ten", @"Item Eleven", @"Item Twelve", @"Item Thirteen", @"Item Fourteen", @"Item Fifteen", @"Item Sixteen", @"Item Seventeen", @"Item Eighteen", @"Item Nineteen", @"Item Twenty", nil] autorelease]; self.tableDataList = tempArray; self.navigationItem.rightBarButtonItem = self.editButtonItem; self.navigationItem.leftBarButtonItem = self.addButton; }(NSInteger) tableView : (UITableView *) tableView numberOfRowsInSection: (NSInteger) section { return [self.tableDataList count]; }(UITableViewCell *) tableView : (UITableView *) tableView cellForRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath { UITableViewCell *cell = [tableView dequeueReusableCellWithIdentifier: @"acell"]; if(cell == nil) { cell = [[[UITableViewCell alloc] initWithStyle: UITableViewCellStyleDefault reuseIdentifier:@"acell"] autorelease]; } cell.textLabel.text = [self.tableDataList objectAtIndex:[indexPath row]]; return cell; } - (void)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView didSelectRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath { TableViewDetailsViewController * temp = [[ [TableViewDetailsViewController alloc] initWithNibName: @"TableViewDetailsViewController" bundle:nil] autorelease]; [self.navCont pushViewController:temp animated:YES]; } - (void)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView commitEditingStyle: (UITableViewCellEditingStyle)editingStyle forRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath { if (editingStyle == UITableViewCellEditingStyleDelete) { [self.tableDataList removeObjectAtIndex:indexPath.row]; [tableView deleteRowsAtIndexPaths:[NSArray arrayWithObject:indexPath] withRowAnimation:YES]; } else if (editingStyle == UITableViewCellEditingStyleInsert) { [self.tableDataList insertObject:@"Uninitialized" atIndex:indexPath. row]; [tableView insertRowsAtIndexPaths:[NSArray arrayWithObject:indexPath] withRowAnimation:YES]; } } - (void)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView moveRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) fromIndexPath toIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *) toIndexPath { id object = [[self.tableDataList objectAtIndex:fromIndexPath.row] retain]; [self.tableDataList removeObjectAtIndex:fromIndexPath.row]; [self.tableDataList insertObject:object atIndex: toIndexPath.row]; [object release]; } -(UITableViewCellEditingStyle) tableView: (UITableView *) tableView editingStyleForRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath { return UITableViewCellEditingStyleDelete; }(BOOL)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView canMoveRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath { return YES; }(BOOL)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView canEditRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath { return YES; }(void)dealloc { [tableDataList release]; [navCont release]; [addItemController release]; [addButton release]; [super dealloc]; } @end Listing 10-33 AddItemViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> @class MyTableViewController; @interface AddItemViewController : UIViewController { MyTableViewController * parentTable; IBOutlet UITextField * addedName; IBOutlet UIBarButtonItem * doneButton; } @property (nonatomic, retain) UITextField * addedName; @property (nonatomic, retain) MyTableViewController * parentTable; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIBarButtonItem * doneButton; - (IBAction) exitAndSave: (id) sender; @end Listing 10-34 AddItemViewController.m #import "AddItemViewController.h" @implementation AddItemViewController@synthesize addedName; @synthesize parentTable; @synthesize doneButton; @synthesize addedName; (void) viewDidLoad { navigationItem.title = @"Add Item"; self.navigationItem.rightBarButtonItem = self.doneButton; } (void)dealloc { [parentTable release]; [doneButton release]; [addedName release]; [super dealloc]; }(IBAction) exitAndSave: (id) sender { [self.parentTable exitAndSave:self.addedName.text]; } @end
cc:T49d1,
Activity Progress and Alerting Users
Key Skills & Concepts
Using a UIActivityIndicatorView to indicate processing
Using a UIProgressView to indicate processing
Using a UIAlertView to warn users
Using a UIActionSheet to inform users
Using application badges to remind users of items needing their attention
While processing, many times an application must inform users that they must wait. A poorly constructed application provides no graphical clue that the application is busy processing; a well-constructed application does provide a graphical clue. The iPhone SDK provides the UIActivityIndicatorView and UIProgressView classes to tell a user to ―please wait, I’m processing.‖ The UIActivityIndicatorView uses a spinning ―gear‖ to tell a user an application is processing and that it will eventually complete. The UIProgressView control also tells a user to ―please wait,‖ but it provides a visual clue as to how much processing remains. The two controls’ names highlight their difference: The activity indicator shows activity, while the progress view shows progress. A user-friendly application also informs a user when something unexpected occurs,and it informs a user when his or her decision might be potentially damaging. Moreover,the application informs the user in a way that highlights the importance of the problem. Sometimes unexpected events occur or a user makes a potentially destructive decision. For these situations an application presents an alert dialog. Alerts provide information in a box separate from the underlying interface. This separation reinforces the alert’s message that the situation is important and unusual, separate from an application’s typical functionality. Alerts are also modal, meaning a user can do nothing else until clicking one of the alert’s buttons to release it. Action sheets are similar to alerts, but provide alternatives to actions and slide in from an application’s top (desktop OS X applications) or from an application’s bottom (iPhone applications). You use action sheets for similar situations to an alert, but action sheets are more appropriate for actions more integrated with an application.
Showing Activity-the UIActivityIndicatorView
A UIActivityIndicatorView class creates an animated indeterminate progress indicator. This control tells the user to "please wait, I’m processing". The control does not tell the user how long he or she must wait. Apple’s reference for this class, which refers to the visual element
Figure 11-1 An activity indicator on Amazon.com’s application
as an animated "gear," illustrates an activity indicator in use (Figure 11-1). When I start the Amazon.com application, it fetches my content from its web server. Fetching this content takes time— how much time, the application doesn’t know—and so the application uses a UIActivityIndicatorView.Using a UIActivityIndicatorView in an application is easy. Begin the indicator’s animation by calling its startAnimating method, and stop the indicator’s animation by calling the stopAnimating method. If you wish to hide the indicator when not animated, set the property hidesWhenStopped to YES. You can also specify the activity indicator’s size and style using its activityIndicatorViewStyle property. The indicator types are large white (UIActivityIndicatorV iewStyleWhiteLarge), white (UIActivityIndicatorViewStyleWhite), and gray (UIActivityView StyleGray). Figure 11-2 illustrates setting this property in Interface Builder. Figure 11-3 shows the three styles in iPhone Simulator.
Figure 11-3 Three different UIActivityIndicatorView styles
Using a UIActivityIndicatorView
Create a new View-based Name the application ActivityAndProgress.
Open ActivityAndProgressViewController, add an IBOutlet for a UIActivityIndicatorView, and add an IBAction called doIt (Listings 11-1 and 11-2). Save and
Open xib in Interface Builder.
Draga button and activity indicator view from the library to the view’s canvas (Figure 11-4).
Connect the File’s Owner doIt action to the button’s Touch Up Inside event. Connect the myActivityView outlet to the activity indicator view added to the canvas (Figure 11-5).
Figure 11-4 Adding a button and activity indicator to a view’s canvas
Selectthe activity indicator view, and open its view attributes in the Ensure the indicator’s Hide When Stopped and Hidden check boxes are checked (Figure 11-6).
ClickBuildAnd Go to run the application in the iPhone
Figure 11-5 Connecting the myActivityView outlet to the activity indicator
Figure 11-6 Ensuring the indicator’s Hide When Stopped and Hidden check boxes are checked
Figure 11-7 The application running in iPhone Simulator
When the application loads, it hides the activity indicator, as it is not animating. When you first click the button, the application displays the activity indicator and begins animating it. The next time you click the button, the application stops animating the indicator and hides it. Showing Progress-the UIProgressView A progress bar shows a task’s progress. It is intended as a ―please wait, I’m processing and I have this much processing remaining‖ for tasks with a known duration. For instance, an application might process a file’s content, and as the file is processing, the application calculates the percentage remaining and displays it using a progress bar. As the file’s content is processed, the progress bar updates its display to reflect the new percentage remaining until completion.Creating a progress bar is more involved than an activity indicator. However, it is still not difficult. Before beginning the task, note that a common technique in many books and online tutorials is to set a progress view in an alert. Although easy, as of this book’s writing, Apple neither supports nor recommends this technique. The recommended way of displaying a UIProgressView is by creating a new view with a transparent background and showing the progress bar in the new view. Because the view overlays the content view, the progress bar is modal. That is the strategy taken here.
Using a UIProgressView
Open the ActivityAndProgress project from the previous task.
Createa new UIViewController named Ensure that it also creates an associated xib named PleaseWaitViewController.
Add an IBOutlet for a UIProgressView to PleaseWaitViewController (Listings 11-3 and 11-4).
Dragpngfromthe book’s Resources folder to the Resources folder in Xcode.
Buildand then open xib in Interface Builder.
Add an image view from the library to the view’s canvas. Select starcopy.png as the image and set the mode to Scale To Fill.
Figure 11-8 PleaseWaitViewController’s view in Interface Builder
Add a label and a progress view from the library to the view’s canvas (Figure 11-8).
Connectthe UIProgressView on the canvas to the myProgress outlet in PleaseWaitView
Save and exit Interface builder.
Open h, and import the PleaseWaitViewController and theapplication’s delegate.
Add an IBOutlet for a Add a method called moveBar. Listing 11-5 contains the completed ActivityAndProgressController.h.
Open m and implement the methods to match Listing 11-
Note that doIt has changed from the previous task.
Open xib in Interface Builder and add several controls (Figure 11-9). The selection is not important, as they are not used.
Add a view controller from the library to the document Change the controller’s class to PleaseWaitViewController. Also, change the controller’s NIB name to PleaseWait ViewController.
Connect the File’s Owner myActivityView outlet to the newly added controller.
Save and exit InterfaceBuilder.
ClickBuildAnd After the application loads in iPhone Simulator (Figure 11-10), click the button. The PleaseWaitViewController’s view is displayed and the progress view updates (Figure 11-11). Upon completion, the application removes the view and displays the original view once again.
@end Listing 11-6 ActivityAndProgressViewController.m modified for this task #import "ActivityAndProgressViewController.h" @implementation ActivityAndProgressViewController @synthesize myActivityView; int completed = 0; - (void) moveBar: (id) object { completed ++; myActivityView.myProgress.progress = completed/20.0f; if(completed > 20) { [object invalidate]; [self.myActivityView.view removeFromSuperview]; [self.view setAlpha:1.0f]; completed = 0; self.myActivityView.myProgress.progress = 0; } } - (IBAction) doIt: (id) sender { myActivityView.view.backgroundColor = [UIColor clearColor]; [self.view setAlpha:0.7f]; [((ActivityAndProgressAppDelegate *)[UIApplication sharedApplication].delegate).window insertSubview:myActivityView.view aboveSubview: self.view]; [NSTimer scheduledTimerWithTimeInterval: 0.5 target: self selector: @selector(moveBar:) userInfo: nil repeats: YES]; } - (void)dealloc { [myActivityView release]; [super dealloc]; } @end This task is pretty cool. You first created a separate view controller and view to contain the UIProgressView. Not happy with just a normal view, you added an image and placed the controls over the image. Later, when setting the view’s background color to clear, this created the impression of a non-rectangular view (see Figure 11-8). Q: So you create a non-rectangular view by using a UIImageView on a clear view? A: Yes, this is one technique. A more robust technique is drawing the user interface yourself, but drawing a user interface from scratch is hard. Using a UIImageView on a view with a clear background is easy. Make your application’s window clear, the views clear, and then place any controls so that they overlay the image. For instance, Figure 11-12 illustrates a simple non-rectangular view.You also added a UIProgressView to the PleaseWaitViewController (Listing 11-3) as an outlet. You then added a PleaseWaitViewController (Listing 11-5) as an outlet. This allows you to reference both the PleaseWaitViewController and its UIProgressView from code in Activity AndProgressViewController.In ActivityAndProgressViewController, you created a method called moveBar and modified the doIt method. The doIt method is called when a user clicks the button on the ActivityAndProgressViewController. The method first sets its myActivity view’s background color to clear, making the view transparent. myActivityView.view.backgroundColor = [UIColor clearColor];
Figure 11-12 A simple non-rectangular view
The method then sets the view’s alpha level, giving it a faded, semi-transparent appearance. [self.view setAlpha:0.7f]; The doIt method also then gets a reference to the application’s window and adds myActivity’s view above the ActivityAndProgressViewController’s view. [((ActivityAndProgressAppDelegate *)[UIApplication sharedApplication] .delegate).window insertSubview: myActivityView.view aboveSubview: self.view]; To simulate a long-standing task, you use an NSTimer, which every half a second calls ActivityAndProgressViewController’s moveBar method. [NSTimer scheduledTimerWithTimeInterval: 0.5 target: self selector: @selector(moveBar:) userInfo: nil repeats: YES]; The moveBar method updates the progress bar until it reaches 20. It then invalidates the timer, removes PleaseWaitViewController’s view, and sets the original view’s alpha back to full strength. It also reinitializes the UIProgressView’s progress value to zero. [NSTimer scheduledTimerWithTimeInterval: 0.5 target: self selector: @selector(moveBar:) userInfo: nil repeats: YES];
cd:T10f2,
Unix OS Architecture
User:- User is nothing but an individual who uses the available hardware & software resources. Shell: It is a command line interpreter. The shell access request from user and the checks command existence if the command exist then it converts into kernel understandable language and it send the given request to kernel. The shell access interface between user and kernel. Types of shells:
nameShell
Developed by
Prompt
Interpreter name
Bourne Shell
Stephen Bourne
$
Sh
Bash Shell
Stephen Bourne
$
bash
Korn Shell
David Korn
$
Ksh
Z shell
Paul
$
zsh
C shell
Bill Joy
%
csh
Desired to gain proficiency on Linux? Explore the blog post on Linux training to become a pro in Linux.
Note: The advanced version of Bourne shell is Bash shell. Bash means Bourne again shell.
Default Shell name
Flavor name
Bash Shell
Linux
Bourne Shell
Sco-Unix, Solaries, HP-UX
Korn Shell
IBM-AIX
C Shell
IRIX
Kernel: The kernel is the heart of the operating system.
The Kernel is responsible for interacting with the hardware and producing output to the screen.
It handles the process, memory, file, device and network management for the operating system
The iPhone’s Mail application illustrates using a badge. For instance, in Figure 11-20, I have 39 e- mails in my inbox. Using this functionality is easy. Simply access your application’s applicationBadgeNumber property and set it. A user’s iPhone will remember the value between uses of your program. To clear a badge, simply set its value to zero.
Adding an Application Badge
Open the previous task in Xcode.
Modify the didDismissWithButtonIndex method to match Listing 11-13.
ClickBuildAnd Go to run the
Clickthe ―Yes‖ button four or five Quit the application, but keep the simulator running. The application’s icon is adorned with an application badge (Figure 11-21).
Start the application again; click the ―No‖ button a few times. Quit the application, but keep the simulator running and notice the application’s badge was decremented.
Figure 11-21 The application has an application badge.
Listing 11-13 The didDismissWithButtonIndex method modified to use an application badge - (void) actionSheet: (UIActionSheet *) actionSheet didDismissWith ButtonIndex: (NSInteger) buttonIndex { if(buttonIndex == [actionSheet cancelButtonIndex]) [UIApplication sharedApplication].applicationIconBadgeNumber = [UIApplication sharedApplication].applicationIconBadgeNumber - 1; else if (buttonIndex == [actionSheet destructiveButtonIndex]) [UIApplication sharedApplication].applicationIconBadgeNumber = [UIApplication sharedApplication].applicationIconBadgeNumber + 1; }
Controls-Part One
Key Skills & Concepts
Modifying buttons
Understanding the UISlider and UISwitch
Understanding UITextField and UITextArea
Understanding using a UIWebView
In this chapter you learn how to use several of the iPhone SDK’s available controls. You also learn about the toolbar and the web browser view. Although this chapter is not comprehensive, it will help you get started understanding the many controls you might use when creating an iPhone application. Several of the screenshots come directly from Apple’s UICatalog example application (Figure 12-1). You can download this application at Apple’s Web site. But note, the controls it illustrates are created programmatically, and not using Interface Builder.
Figure 12-1 Apple’s UICatalog sample application
Figure 12-2 Apple’s UICatalog’s buttons screen
Buttons
The most rudimentary control is arguably the button. What can you say about buttons? You click them, or on an iPhone, you tap them, and something happens. The iPhone has several different button styles (Figure 12-02). Implementing a button is not hard. In the next few sections you examine the buttons available when programming an iPhone.
UIButton with a Background Image and Image
Although Apple’s stock button, the rounded rectangular button, sometimes looks nice (Figure 12-3) it is usually rather ugly.You are not limited to plain buttons though, and can make your buttons appear nicer. For instance, you can add a background image or an image. Creating custom buttons by adding an image or background image is not hard, but the artistic effort making the images appear correctly is time consuming. However, the results are usually worth the extra effort.
Figure 12-3 The YouTube App uses plain buttons.
Using a Custom Button Background Image and Image
Create a new View-based Name it ButtonsBackground.
Add outlets for two UIButtons to ButtonsBackgroundViewController (Listings 12-1 and 12-2).
Add an action called disableBut and add the code in Listing 12-2 to the
Add the png, butbackbluegray.png, butbackgraydisabled.png, power.png, and powerdisable.png to the Resources folder in Groups & Files. You will find these images in this book’s resources folder.
Save and
Open xib in Interface builder.
Dragthree buttons vertically aligned onto the view’s Connect the second button to one of the outlets and connect the third button to one of the outlets.
Connectthe disableBut action to the top button’s Touch Up
Add the text Disable to the top
Figure 12-4 Ensure the Shows Touch on Highlight is checked.
For the second button, open the inspector to Buttons Ensure the Shows Touch on Highlight is checked (Figure 12-4).
Notice the drop-down (Figure 12-5). Here you select the button’s state and the related field’s values will only apply to that Ensure Default State Configuration is selected.
Change Background to png and change Image to power.png.
Select Highlighted State Configuration and change Background to butbackbluegray.png and Image to power.png.
Figure 12-5 Selecting a button’s state
SelectDisabledState Configuration and change Background to png and Image to powerdisabled.png.
For the third button, ensure Default State Configuration is selected and add the text "Shock"to Title. Select the butbackgray.png for Background.
SelectHighlighted State Configuration and add the text "Shocking" to Select butbackbluegray.png as the Background. Note: do not make any changes to the Disable setting.
Resizethe buttons as necessary so they appear
ClickBuildAnd Go to run the
Listing 12-1 ButtonsBackgroundViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> @interface ButtonsBackgroundViewController : UIViewController { IBOutlet UIButton * clearButton; IBOutlet UIButton * smallButton; } @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIButton * clearButton; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIButton * smallButton; - (IBAction) disableBut: (id) sender; @end Listing 12-2 ButtonsBackgroundViewController.m #import "ButtonsBackgroundViewController.h" @implementation ButtonsBackgroundViewController @synthesize clearButton; @synthesize smallButton; - (IBAction) disableBut: (id) sender { if(clearButton.enabled == YES) { clearButton.enabled = NO; smallButton.enabled = NO; [((UIButton *) sender) setTitle:@"Enable" forState: UIControlStateNormal]; } else { clearButton.enabled = YES; smallButton.enabled = YES; [((UIButton *) sender) setTitle:@"Disable" forState: UIControlStateNormal]; } } - (void)dealloc { [clearButton release]; [smallButton release]; [super dealloc]; } @end Notice the results upon tapping the buttons. The buttons change the background image from grey to bluish-gray (Figure 12-6). The bottom button also changes its title. Click Disable, and the buttons are grayed out (Figure 12-7). The button with the image changes its background image and image to the choices made above. The button with the title text has this functionality built in. Making the button appear disabled was done automatically for you without you specifying images for the disabled state. Figure 12-6 The buttons’ background image changes Figure 12-7 The buttons are grayed-out when disabled TIP Another way to create a custom button is by setting a button’s type to custom. That technique is not shown here. It is not hard though. First, add an image to a button. Second, change the button’s type to custom and only the image is visible. Note that you can use different images for different button states, exactly as you did in the previous example application.
Button Types
There are buttons types other than Round Rect and custom that you might use. Figure 12-8 illustrates creating a Detail Disclosure button. To create a Detail Disclosure button, select a Round Rect Button from the library in Interface Builder and then change its type to Detail Disclosure button.
Figure 12-8 Detail Disclosure button
Figure 12-9 Info Light button, Info Dark button, and Add Contact button
You create the Info light and Info dark buttons, like the Detail Disclosure button, by selecting a Round Rect Button and changing its type to Info light or Info dark (Figure 12-9). You create a Contact button the same way you created the other button styles, by selecting a Round Rect Button and changing its type (Figure 12-9).
UISwitch
A UISwitch, similar to a toggle button, is on or off. Figure 12-19 illustrates a UISwitch’s appearance. A UISwitch has a property and method for changing its state. The Boolean property is on, when YES. The switch is off when NO. The following is the declaration for the on property. @property(nonatomic, getter=isOn) BOOL on Notice that the getter is entitled isOn, you can use this getter to obtain the on property’s value or the property itself. For instance, the following two statements are equivalent. if( ((UISwitch *) sender).on == YES) if( [((UISwitch *) sender) isOn] == YES) You can change the switch’s value programmatically using the setOn method. This method’s signature follows. -(void) setOn: (BOOL) on animated: (BOOL) animated Sliders are a horizontal bar with a small round indicator that a user can move to the right or left to change the slider’s value. Figure 12-16 contains a slider example.
Appearance
The UISlider class has several properties and methods you might use to modify a slider’s appearance. You can modify the indicator using the setThumbImage method. - (void) setThumbImage:(UIImage *)image forState: (UIControlState) state This method allows you to provide the slider an image in place of the round indicator. Interface Builder does not provide a means to set this value, so you must do so programmatically when first loading the view containing the slider.You can also specify a minimum and maximum image that appears directly to the slider’s left and right. Set a slider’s image appearing to the right using the maximumValueImage property. @property(nonatomic, retain) UIImage *maximumValueImage Set a slider’s image appearing to the left using the minimumValueImage property. @property(nonatomic, retain) UIImage *minimumValueImage The next Try This example sets both properties using the Inspector pane in Interface Builder. There are more modifications you might make to a UISlider; refer to the UISlider Class Reference for a complete listing.
Values
By default, a UISlider’s values begin with minimum of 0, a maximum of 1.00, and a .50 initial value. The slider’s values are floats and you can set the value programmatically using the setValue method or the value property. - (void) setValue:(float) value animated:(BOOL) animated The minimum, maximum, and initial values are all properties that you can set programmatically or through Interface Builder.
Continuous Property
A slider changes its values continuously as a user adjusts the indicator. For instance, as a user moves the indicator from left to right, the slider is continuously firing value-changed events. You can change this behavior by changing the continuous property to NO. If the value is NO, the slider only fires the event when a user lifts his or her finger from the indicator. You can set this property programmatically, or through Interface Builder.
cf:T1b9d,
List of Basic Commands in Unix
# --> root user prompt. $ --> user working prompt. $ log name --> displays current user name. $ pwd --> present working directory. $ date --> Display current date & time. $cal --> Displays current month calendar. $cal 2020 --> particular year total months. $cal 04 2020 --> 2020 year 04th month calendar. $who --> To display the information about all the users who have logged into the system. $ who am i --> It displays current user name. $ finger --> It displays complete information about all the users who are logged in. $ uptime --> How log server up & running, how many users connected and load avg time. $ which (Or) $ wher --> Given command location EX: Which date $tty --> Terminal position. $df --> Displays disk free size $du --> Disk usage information $clear --> To clear the screen Creating files:
Cat (concatenate): It is used to create a file and display, appending the contents of a file
To create a file:
$Cat>filename Hello world Ctrl+D (To save the file)
Options:- r -->Reverse - i -->inode -a --> hidden - l --> long list -R -->Recursively - h --> human readable Mkdr: Creates a directory. Syn: mkdir <Dirname> $mkdir linux
To create multiple directories:
$ mkdir dir1 dir2 dir3 -----------------dirn
To create a nested directory:
$ mkdir –P world/asia/india/ap/hyd Parent
To check: $ tree world
(or) $ ls – R
Navigation commands:
Cd: Changes the current location. Cd..--->To go one level back cd../..---> To go two levels back cd --->To change user’s home directory. EX: $ cd world $ ls Note: The trailing slash (1) is optional when you’re using the cd command. It indicates that the name being specified is a directory. EX: $cd Documents/
CP: Copies files or directories form one location to another.
Create a new View-based Name the application SwitchSlider.
Dragthe png and edit_remove.png images from the resources folder to the Resources folder in Groups & Files.
Open xib in Interface Builder.
Add a Slider and a Switch from the Resize the slider to be larger, set the edit_remove .png as the minimum image and edit_add.png as the maximum image (Figure 12-16).
Notice that the Slider’s minimum value is zero and maximum is Leave the values unchanged.
Save and exit Interface
Open SwitchSliderViewController and implement a method named handleSwitch and a method named handleSlider (Listings 12-3 and 12-4). Also implement a property for the UISwitch named
Figure 12-16 A view with a switch and a slider
Save and build.
Open xib in Interface Builder.
EnsureFile’s Owner has a SwitchSliderViewController for its type (it should already).
Connectthe mySwitch outlet to the switch on the
Connectthe handleSlider action to the slider’s Value Changed
Connectthe handleSwitch action to the switch’s Value Changed
Save and exit Interface
ClickBuildAnd Go (Figure 12-17). Click the switch and it logs to the Debugger Change the slider’s value to the far right. The switch’s value changes to ON (Figure 12- 18).
Figure 12-17 The application running in iPhone Simulator
Figure 12-18 Moving the slider to maximum value changes the switch’s value
The iPhone uses the UITextField class to render text fields. A text field is associated with a keyboard that appears when a user taps in the text field. Keyboard styles include Number Pad, Phone Pad, URL, and several others. You can set the keyboard style programmatically or using Interface Builder (Figure 12-19). Figure 12-20 illustrates several other text field properties you might set. You can specify how text should be capitalized. Valid choices are None, Words, Sentences, and All Characters. You can also specify if the text field should attempt to correct spelling errors by setting the correction property to YES. If you wish the text field to be a password, then check the Secure checkbox in Interface Builder. Other properties you might wish changing are the text field’s
Figure 12-19 Setting a text field’s keyboard type
border, background, font, and return key for the keyboard. Figure 12-20 shows the valid choices for a keyboard’s return key. For a complete listing of properties and method available to you, refer to the UITextField Class Reference.
Figure 12-20 Valid choices for a keyboard’s return key
Using UITextField (with a Number Pad)
Create a new View-based Application named TextField.
Open xib in Interface Builder. Drag two UITextField controls from the
Selectthe second text field and in its inspector, change its Keyboard to Number
Selectthe first text field and change its Return Key to
Save and exit Interface
Open TextFieldViewController in Xcode and implement the textFieldDone action (Listings 12-5 and 12-6). Also, add an IBOutlet for the second text field and implement the numberFieldDone
Save and then open xib in Interface Builder. Connect the textFieldDone action to the first text field’s Did End on Exit event.
Save and exit Interface
ClickBuildAnd Notice that when finished editing the first text field, upon clicking Done, the text pad disappears. The number pad, though, has no Done key (Figure 12-21).
Figure 12-21 The number pad has no Done key.
Figure 12-22 Button is under two textfields
Open xib in Interface Builder and drag a button onto the view’s canvas. Resize the button to cover the entire canvas.
Inthe Document window, expand the View and ensure the newly added button is behind the two text fields (Figure 12-22).
Inthe Inspector’s Button Attributes pane, change the button’s Type to custom and uncheck any checked drawing checkboxes (Figure 12-23).
Connectthe numberField outlet to the second text Connect the numberFieldDone action to the Touch Up Inside event for the button added to the canvas (Figure 12-24).
Save and exit Interface Builder, then Click Build And Click the second text field and the number pad appears. Click anywhere outside the second text field and the number pad disappears (Figure 12-25).
Use a UITextView to capture multiple lines of text. Apple’s reference documentation describes this control best: ―The UITextView class implements the behavior for a scrollable, multiline text region.‖ There is not really much more you can say about a text view, other than it’s a text area,it is generally used for entering paragraphs of text rather than a single line. There are several properties you can set to customize the control’s appearance; including, the font, textColor, editable, and textAlignment properties. You can also check if it has text using the hasText method. Figure 12-26 illustrates several properties you might wish setting for a UITextView in Interface Builder. For more information on the UITextView, refer to the UITextView Class Reference.
Figure 12-26 UITextView properties you might wish setting in Interface Builder
A segmented control groups together two or more segments, where each segment acts as an independent button. The next task illustrates a segmented control. Using a UISegmentedControl
Create a new View-based Application named segment.
Add the images png and wizard.png from the resources folder to the Resources folder in Groups & Files.
Open xib in Interface Builder.
Add a Segmented Control to the view’s
Change the control so it has three Change the zero segment’s name to Kids,the first segment’s image to colorize.png image, and the second segment’s image to wizard .png (Figure 12-27). Change the control’s style to Bordered.
Figure 12-27 Modifying the segmented control in Interface builder
Figure 12-28 The application running in iPhone Simulator
Save and exit Interface builder.
Open SegmentViewController and add an IBAction called handleSegment to SegmentViewController (Listings 12-7 and 12-8).
Save and then open xib in Interface Builder.
Connectthe segment’s Value Changed event to the File’s Owner handleSegment
ClickBuildAnd Figure 12-28 illustrates the application’s appearance and Listing 12- 9
contains the debugger console’s logging. Listing 12-7 SegmentViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> @interface SegmentViewController : UIViewController { } - (IBAction) handleSegment: (id) sender; @end Listing 12-8 SegmentViewController.m #import "SegmentViewController.h" @implementation SegmentViewController - (IBAction) handleSegment: (id) sender { UISegmentedControl * myseg = (UISegmentedControl *) sender; if(myseg.selectedSegmentIndex == 0) { NSLog(@"selected zero index..."); } else if(myseg.selectedSegmentIndex == 1) { NSLog(@"selected one index..."); } else { NSLog(@"selected two index..."); } } - (void)dealloc { [super dealloc]; } @end Listing 12-9 The debugger console’s logging for application [Session started at 2009-03-15 15:31:19 -0400.] 2009-03-15 15:31:50.201 Segment[366:20b] selected one index... 2009-03-15 15:32:13.027 Segment[366:20b] selected two index... 2009-03-15 15:32:36.908 Segment[366:20b] selected zero index...
d1:T653f,
1. Set Environment Variables1.1. Login as Oracle user. 1.2. Change directory to, $ cd /oracle/ visappl (11i) $ cd /d01/oracle/VIS/apps/apps_st/appl (R12) 1.3. Execute APPSORA.env $. ./APPSORA.env < ENTER> Note: Make sure that there are double dots with space between them, . ./APPSORA.env <<<<<<<-------------------------***********--------------------------------->>>>>>>> 2. Stop Apps Services (on all nodes) 2.1. Change directory to, $ cd /oracle/ viscomn/admin/scripts/VIS_vision (11i) $ cd /d01/oracle/VIS/ inst/apps/VIS_vision/admin/ scripts (R12) 2.2. Execute script adstpall.sh to stop apps services. 2.3. $./ adstpall.sh apps/ apps (apps username and password) Note: The scripts prompts provided here are of 11i as I found no major difference, so not provided R12 execution.
You are running adstpall.sh version 115.17Executing service control script:/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS_vision/adapcctl.sh stop script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * adapcctl.sh version 115.43 Stopping Apache Web Server Listener (dedicated HTTP) ... Stopping Apache Web Server Listener (dedicated PLSQL) ... /oracle/ viscomn/ conf/VIS_vision/ iAS/Apache/Apache/bin/apachectl stop: httpd stopped adapcctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out.
Executing service control script:/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS_vision/ jtffmctl.sh stopscript returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * You are running jtffmctl.sh version 115.16 Shutting down Fulfillment Server for vis on port 9300 ... jtffmctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Executing service control script: /oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS_vision/addisctl.sh stop script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * addisctl.sh version 115.14 OAD is stopped Osagent is stopped Locator is stopped Unable to stop gatekeeper. No process-id file found. Unable to stop any Discoverer Sessions. No process-id file found. Unable to stop any Discoverer Preference. No process-id file found. Unable to stop any Discoverer Collector. No process-id file found. addisctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * All enabled services on this node are stopped. Check logfile /
Note: Step 1 and 2 should be applied on all nodes. For demonstration I have performed on one node. <<<<<<<-------------------------***********--------------------------------->>>>>>>> 3. Enable Maintenance Mode3.1. Use adadmin to change maintenance mode. 3.2. Change folder to, $ cd /oracle/ visappl/ad/11.5.0/bin (11i) $ cd /d01/oracle/VIS/apps/apps_st/appl/ad/12.0.0/bin (R12) 3.3. Execute script $./ adadmin
Oracle Applications AD AdministrationVersion 11.5.0NOTE: You may not use this utility for custom development unless you have written permission from Oracle Corporation. Your default directory is '/oracle/ visappl'. Is this the correct APPL_TOP [Yes] ? AD Administration records your AD Administration session in a text file you specify. Enter your AD Administration log file name or press [Return] to accept the default file name shown in brackets. Filename [adadmin.log] : * * * * * * * * * * * * * Start of AD Administration session * * * * * * * * * * * * * AD Administration version: 11.5.0 AD Administration started at: Fri Sep 01 2006 11:26:39 APPL_TOP is set to /oracle/ visappl You can be notified by email if a failure occurs. Do you wish to activate this feature [No] ? Please enter the batchsize [1000] : Please enter the name of the Oracle Applications System that this APPL_TOP belongs to. The Applications System name must be unique across all Oracle Applications Systems at your site, must be from 1 to 30 characters long, may only contain alphanumeric and underscore characters, and must start with a letter. Sample Applications System names are: "prod", "test", "demo" and "Development_2". Applications System Name [ vis] : vis * NOTE: I f you do not currently have certain types of files installed in this APPL_TOP, you may not be able to perform certain tasks. Example 1: I f you don't have files used for installing or upgrading the database installed in this area, you cannot install or upgrade the database from this APPL_TOP. Example 2: I f you don't have forms files installed in this area, you cannot generate them or run them from this APPL_TOP. Example 3: I f you don't have concurrent program files installed in this area, you cannot relink concurrent programs or generate reports from this APPL_TOP. Do you currently have files used for installing or upgrading the database installed in this APPL_TOP [YES] ? YES * Do you currently have Java and HTML files for HTML-based functionality installed in this APPL_TOP [NO] ? NO *
Do you currently have Oracle Applications forms files installedin this APPL_TOP [NO] ? NO *Do you currently have concurrent program files installed in this APPL_TOP [YES] ? YES * Please enter the name Oracle Applications will use to identify this APPL_TOP. The APPL_TOP name you select must be unique within an Oracle Applications System, must be from 1 to 30 characters long, may only contain alphanumeric and underscore characters, and must start with a letter. Sample APPL_TOP Names are: "prod_all", "demo3_forms2", and "forms1". APPL_TOP Name [ vision] : vision * You are about to use or modify Oracle Applications product tables in your ORACLE database 'vis' using ORACLE executables in '/oracle/ visora/8.0.6'. Is this the correct database [Yes] ? AD Administration needs the password for your 'SYSTEM' ORACLE schema in order to determine your installation configuration. Enter the password for your 'SYSTEM' ORACLE schema: The ORACLE username specified below for Application Object Library uniquely identifies your existing product group: APPLSYS Enter the ORACLE password of Application Object Library [APPS] : AD Administration is verifying your username/password. The status of various features in this run of AD Administration is: < -Feature version in-> Feature Active? APPLTOP Data model Flags ------------------------------ ------- -------- ----------- ----------- CHECKFILE Yes 1 1 Y N N Y N Y PREREQ Yes 6 6 Y N N Y N Y CONCURRENT_SESSIONS No 2 2 Y Y N Y Y N PATCH_TIMING Yes 2 2 Y N N Y N Y PATCH_HIST_IN_DB Yes 6 6 Y N N Y N Y SCHEMA_SWAP Yes 1 1 Y N N Y Y Y Identifier for the current session is 24933 Reading product information from file... Reading language and territory information from file... Reading language information from applUS.txt ... Reading database to see what industry is currently installed. Reading FND_LANGUAGES to see what is currently installed. Currently, the following language is installed: Code Language Status
US American English BaseYour base language will be AMERICAN.Setting up module information. Reading database for information about the modules. Saving module information. Reading database for information about the products. Reading database for information about how products depend on each other. Reading topfile.txt ... Saving product information. AD code level : [11i.AD.I .2] AD Administration Main Menu -------------------------------------------------- 1. Generate Applications Files menu 2. Maintain Applications Files menu 3. Compile/Reload Applications Database Entities menu 4. Maintain Applications Database Entities menu 5. Change Maintenance Mode 6. Exit AD Administration Enter your choice [6] : 5 Change Maintenance Mode ---------------------------------------- Maintenance Mode is currently: [Enabled] . Maintenance mode should normally be enabled when patching Oracle Applications and disabled when users are logged on to the system. See the Oracle Applications Maintenance Utilities manual for more information about maintenance mode. Please select an option: 1. Enable Maintenance Mode 2. Disable Maintenance Mode 3. Return to Main Menu Enter your choice [3] : 1 sqlplus -s &un_apps/ * * * * * @/oracle/ visappl/ad/11.5.0/patch/115/ sql/adsetmmd.sql ENABLE Spawned Process 6370 Successfully enabled Maintenance Mode. Review the messages above, then press [Return] to continue. Backing up restart files, if any......Done. Change Maintenance Mode ---------------------------------------- Maintenance Mode is currently: [Enabled] . Maintenance mode should normally be enabled when patching Oracle Applications and disabled when users are logged on
to the system. See the Oracle Applications MaintenanceUtilities manual for more information about maintenance mode.Please select an option: 1. Enable Maintenance Mode 2. Disable Maintenance Mode 3. Return to Main Menu Enter your choice [3] : 3 AD Administration Main Menu -------------------------------------------------- 1. Generate Applications Files menu 2. Maintain Applications Files menu 3. Compile/Reload Applications Database Entities menu 4. Maintain Applications Database Entities menu 5. Change Maintenance Mode 6. Exit AD Administration Enter your choice [6] : 6 Backing up restart files, if any......Done. There is no timing information available for the current session. AD Administration is complete. Errors and warnings are listed in the log file /oracle/ visappl/admin/ vis/ log/adadmin.log and in other log files in the same directory.
Warning: There should be no space in the folder names where patches are placed. <<<<<<<-------------------------***********--------------------------------->>>>>>>> 4. Apply Patch using adpatch4.1. Unzip the downloaded patch from metalink. 4.2. Open readme.html file from unzipped patch folder. 4.3. View the following readme.html of patch # 4712852 for 11i. I have applied this patch for demonstration for this document. Those who are practicing on R12 should download any patch related to R12. 4.4. Follow all steps mentioned in readme.html of the patch you are going to apply. 4.5. In this patch there is no extra step and we have to apply the driver file u4712852.drv. Oracle has changed the patch files and now only one file is included that is has prefix u + patch number + .drv early patch had three files to apply with prefixes (c, d, g). • The c copy driver (cXXXXXXX.drv) should be applied to Concurrent Processing/Admin/Forms/Web servers. • The d database driver (dXXXXXXX.drv) should be applied to the Admin server. • The g generate driver (g3016463.drv) should be applied to Concurrent Processing/Forms servers. 4.6. Change folder to, $ cd /oracle/ visappl/ad/11.5.0/bin (11i) $ cd /d01/oracle/VIS/apps/apps_st/appl/ad/12.0.0/bin (R12) 4.7. Execute $./ adpatch < ENTER> and follow the instructions and provide required information.
Copyright (c) 2002 Oracle CorporationRedwood Shores, California, USAOracle Applications AutoPatch Version 11.5.0 NOTE: You may not use this utility for custom development unless you have written permission from Oracle Corporation. Attention: AutoPatch no longer checks for unapplied pre-requisite patches. You must use OAM Patch Wizard for this feature. Alternatively, you can review the README for pre-requisite information. Your default directory is '/oracle/ visappl'. Is this the correct APPL_TOP [Yes] ? AutoPatch records your AutoPatch session in a text file you specify. Enter your AutoPatch log file name or press [Return] to accept the default file name shown in brackets. Filename [adpatch.log] : 4712852.log You can be notified by email if a failure occurs. Do you wish to activate this feature [No] ? Please enter the batchsize [1000] : Please enter the name of the Oracle Applications System that this APPL_TOP belongs to. The Applications System name must be unique across all Oracle Applications Systems at your site, must be from 1 to 30 characters long, may only contain alphanumeric and underscore characters, and must start with a letter. Sample Applications System names are: "prod", "test", "demo" and "Development_2". Applications System Name [ vis] : vis * NOTE: I f you do not currently have certain types of files installed in this APPL_TOP, you may not be able to perform certain tasks. Example 1: I f you don't have files used for installing or upgrading the database installed in this area, you cannot install or upgrade the database from this APPL_TOP. Example 2: I f you don't have forms files installed in this area, you cannot generate them or run them from this APPL_TOP. Example 3: I f you don't have concurrent program files installed in this area, you cannot relink concurrent programs or generate reports from this APPL_TOP. Do you currently have files used for installing or upgrading the database installed in this APPL_TOP [YES] ? YES * Do you currently have Java and HTML files for HTML-based functionality installed in this APPL_TOP [NO] ? NO *
Do you currently have Oracle Applications forms files installedin this APPL_TOP [NO] ? NO *Do you currently have concurrent program files installed in this APPL_TOP [YES] ? YES * Please enter the name Oracle Applications will use to identify this APPL_TOP. The APPL_TOP name you select must be unique within an Oracle Applications System, must be from 1 to 30 characters long, may only contain alphanumeric and underscore characters, and must start with a letter. Sample APPL_TOP Names are: "prod_all", "demo3_forms2", and "forms1". APPL_TOP Name [ vision] : vision * You are about to apply a patch to the installation of Oracle Applications in your ORACLE database 'vis' using ORACLE executables in '/oracle/ visora/8.0.6'. Is this the correct database [Yes] ? AutoPatch needs the password for your 'SYSTEM' ORACLE schema in order to determine your installation configuration. Enter the password for your 'SYSTEM' ORACLE schema: The ORACLE username specified below for Application Object Library uniquely identifies your existing product group: APPLSYS Enter the ORACLE password of Application Object Library [APPS] : AutoPatch is verifying your username/password. The status of various features in this run of AutoPatch is: < -Feature version in-> Feature Active? APPLTOP Data model Flags ------------------------------ ------- -------- ----------- ----------- CHECKFILE Yes 1 1 Y N N Y N Y PREREQ Yes 6 6 Y N N Y N Y CONCURRENT_SESSIONS No 2 2 Y Y N Y Y N PATCH_TIMING Yes 2 2 Y N N Y N Y PATCH_HIST_IN_DB Yes 6 6 Y N N Y N Y SCHEMA_SWAP Yes 1 1 Y N N Y Y Y Identifier for the current session is 24935 Reading product information from file... Reading language and territory information from file... Reading language information from applUS.txt ... Reading database to see what industry is currently installed. Reading FND_LANGUAGES to see what is currently installed. Currently, the following language is installed: Code Language Status
---- --------------------------------------- ---------US American English BaseYour base language will be AMERICAN. Setting up module information. Reading database for information about the modules. Saving module information. Reading database for information about the products. Reading database for information about how products depend on each other. Reading topfile.txt ... Saving product information. AD code level : [11i.AD.I .2] Trying to obtain a lock... Attempting to instantiate the current-view snapshot... Was already instantiated. So no instantiation done this time. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * S T A R T O F U P L O A D * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Start date: Fri Sep 01 2006 12:07:48 0 "left over" javaupdates.txt files uploaded to DB: Fri Sep 01 2006 12:07:48 0 patches uploaded from the ADPSV format patch history files: Fri Sep 01 2006 12:07:48 Uploading information about files copied during the previous runs ... 0 "left over" filescopied_< session_id> .txt files uploaded to DB: Fri Sep 01 2006 12:07:48 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * E N D O F U P L O A D * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * End date: Fri Sep 01 2006 12:07:48 Enter the directory where your Oracle Applications patch has been unloaded The default directory is [ /oracle/ visappl/ad/11.5.0/bin] : /DUMP/DUMP/patches/act_patch/4712852 Please enter the name of your AutoPatch driver file : u4712852.drv Getting Oracle Applications Release... Current installed release is 11.5.10.2 Reading patch driver file... Parsing and loading patch driver file... Processing line 10000. 16358 lines processed. Not checking patch integrity as integrity checking flag is turned off. Successfully read patch driver file. Determining target release... Current target release is 11.5.10.2 Determining which bug fixes to apply...
Done determining which bug fixes to apply.Log and Info File sync point:Fri Sep 01 2006 12:09:49 Turning off actions that reference unrecognized products. Log and Info File sync point: Fri Sep 01 2006 12:09:49 End of unrecognized products checking. AD utilities can support a maximum of 999 workers. Your current database configuration supports a maximum of 91 workers. Oracle recommends that you use between 16 and 32 workers. Enter the number of parallel workers [16] : Done purging timing information for prior sessions. AutoPatch is complete. AutoPatch may have written informational messages to the file /oracle/ visappl/admin/ vis/ log/4712852.lgi Errors and warnings are listed in the log file /oracle/ visappl/admin/ vis/ log/4712852.log and in other log files in the same directory.
4.8. The status is AutoPatch is complete. as show above means the patch applied successfully. 4.9. I f there are more than one patches then all patches should be applied before proceeding to the next disabling maintenance mode step. <<<<<<<-------------------------***********--------------------------------->>>>>>>> 5. Disabling Maintenance Mode5.1. The disabling steps are just same as enabling maintenance mode demonstrated above. Just to disable this time we will select 2 instead of 1, While all other steps are same. So I will not replicate the same text here. Please follow the topic Enable Maintenance Mode 5.2. View the following slide.
Maintenance Mode is currently: [Enabled] .Maintenance mode should normally be enabled when patchingOracle Applications and disabled when users are logged on to the system. See the Oracle Applications Maintenance Utilities manual for more information about maintenance mode. Please select an option: 1. Enable Maintenance Mode 2. Disable Maintenance Mode 3. Return to Main Menu
Enter your choice [3] : 2sqlplus -s &un_apps/ * * * * * @/oracle/ visappl/ad/11.5.0/patch/115/ sql/adsetmmd.sql DISABLESpawned Process 19922 Successfully disabled Maintenance Mode. Review the messages above, then press [Return] to continue. Backing up restart files, if any......Done. Change Maintenance Mode ---------------------------------------- Maintenance Mode is currently: [Disabled] .
<<<<<<<-------------------------***********--------------------------------->>>>>>>> 6. Start Apps Services6.1. Change directory to, $ cd /oracle/ viscomn/admin/scripts/VIS_vision (11i) $ cd /d01/oracle/VIS/ inst/apps/VIS_vision/admin/ scripts (R12) 6.2. Execute script adstrtal.sh to start apps services. The file name is with single “ l” of all as compare to adstpall.sh we used above to stop services. 6.3. $./ adstrtal.sh apps/ apps (apps username and password)
1. Prepare Source System - dbTier 2. Preparing Source System - appsTier 3. Copy the Source System to the Target System 4. Configuring the Target System1. Prepare Source System - dbTier In the following demonstration we will clone our VISION single node instance to another VISION instance. Even in single node cloning we still have to perform activities like dbTier and appsTier just like two nodes. Here our source machine name is VISION and target is VISION2 while database VIS and VIS2 accordingly. The other change is that source directory structure is /u01/oracle while target /d01/oracle, this is not mandatory you can have same and if not then you will have to provide this information later in the steps. So note down all such information before proceeding. 1.1. login as: oracle 1.2. $ cd /u01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/ scripts/VIS_vision/ 1.3. $ perl adpreclone.pl dbTier pwd= apps
<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<---------------***********-------------->>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> 3. Copy the Source System to the Target System3.1. Shut down the services on both tiers. 3.2. Copy Source System in the following order, Application tier file system Copy the following directories from the source node to the target node: 1. < APPL_TOP> 2. <OA_HTML> 3. <OA_JAVA> 4. <OA_JRE_TOP> 5. < COMMON_TOP> /util 6. < COMMON_TOP> / clone 7. < COMMON_TOP> /_pages (when this directory exists) 8. < 806 ORACLE_HOME> 9. < iAS ORACLE_HOME> Database tier file system1. Perform a normal shutdown on source database 2. Copy all the database files from the source to the target system 3. Copy the source ORACLE_HOME to the target system Note: The above mentioned copying steps are provided by Oracle. The cloning with this selective folders copying gave error so we copied complete Oracle folder from source to target. The cloning with these selective folders will be provided later. <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<---------------***********-------------->>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> 4. Configuring the Target System4.1. Login as Oracle user 4.2. Run adcfgclone.pl on database tier, and provide your feedback to each prompt as shown below.
$ cd /d01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/ clone/bin $ perl adcfgclone.pl dbTier Enter the APPS password [APPS] : apps First Creating a new context file for the cloned system. The program is going to ask you for information about the new system: Provide the values required for creation of the new Database Context file. Do you want to use a virtual hostname for the target node (y/n) [n] ?: Target instance is a Real Application Cluster (RAC) instance (y/n) [n] : Target System database name [VIS] :VIS2 Target system RDBMS ORACLE_HOME directory [ /u01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0] : /d01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0 Target system utl_file accessible directories list [ /usr/ tmp] : Number of DATA_TOP's on the target system [1] : Target system DATA_TOP 1 [ /u01/oracle/ visdata] : /d01/oracle/ visdata Do you want to preserve the Display set to vision:0.0 (y/n) [ y] ?:n Target system Display [ vision2:0.0] : Do you want to preserve the port values from the source system on the target system (y/n) [ y] ?:n Clone Context uses the same port pool mechanism as the Rapid Install Once you choose a port pool, Clone Context will validate the port availability. Enter the port pool number [0-99] : 0 Checking the port pool 0 done: Port Pool 0 is free Database port is 1521 Creating the new Database Context file from : /d01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/ template/adxdbctx.tmp The new database context file has been created : /d01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/VIS2_vision2.xml Log file located at /d01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/ clone/bin/CloneContext_11080500.log Running Rapid Clone with command: registration to central inventory... ORACLE_HOME NAME : APPSDB_VIS2 ORACLE_HOME PATH : /d01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0 Using Inventory location in /etc/oraInst.loc Log file located at /etc/oraInventory/ logs/OracleHomeCloner_11080506.log ORACLE_HOME /d01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0 was registered successfully. Starting database listener for VIS2: Running: /d01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/addlnctl.sh start VIS2 You are running addlnctl.sh version 115.6 Logfile: /d01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/ log/VIS2_vision2/addlnctl.txt Starting listener process VIS2 ... Listener VIS2 has already been started. addlnctl.sh: exiting with status 0 [oracle@vision2 bin]$
Note: The inputs in the above steps are in blue color while where default is accepted the ENTER key is pressed. Like “Do you want to use a virtual hostname for the target node (y/n) [n] ?: ” the default is [n] so pressing just enter key means you selected n. 4.3. Login as Oracle user on Applications Server. 4.4. Now run adcfgclone.pl on Applications Tier, and provide your feedback to each prompt as shown below.
$ cd /d01/oracle/ viscomn/ clone/bin $ perl adcfgclone.pl appsTier Enter the APPS password [APPS] : apps First Creating a new context file for the cloned system. The program is going to ask you for information about the new system: Provide the values required for creation of the new APPL_TOP Context file. Do you want to use a virtual hostname for the target node (y/n) [n] ?: Target system database SID [VIS] :VIS2 Target system database server node [ vision] :vision2 Target system database domain name [erpstuff.com] : Does the target system have more than one application tier server node (y/n) [n] ?: Is the target system APPL_TOP divided into multiple mount points (y/n) [n] ?: Target system APPL_TOP mount point [ /u01/oracle/ visappl] : /d01/oracle/ visappl Target system COMMON_TOP directory [ /u01/oracle/viscomn] : /d01/oracle/ viscomn Target system 8.0.6 ORACLE_HOME directory [ /u01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6] : /d01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6 Target system iAS ORACLE_HOME directory [ /u01/oracle/ visora/ iAS] : /d01/oracle/ visora/ iAS Do you want to preserve the Display set to vision.erpstuff.com:0.0 (y/n) [ y] ?:n Target system Display [ vision2:0.0] : Do you want to preserve the port values from the source system on the target system (y/n) [ y] ?:n Clone Context uses the same port pool mechanism as the Rapid Install Once you choose a port pool, Clone Context will validate the port availability. Enter the port pool number [0-99] : 0 Checking the port pool 0 done: Port Pool 0 is free Web Listener port is 8000 Complete port information available at /d01/oracle/ visappl/admin/out/VIS2_vision2/portpool.lst UTL_FILE_DIR on database tier consists of the following directories. 1. /usr/ tmp 2. /usr/ tmp 3. /d01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/outbound/VIS2_vision2 4. /usr/ tmp Choose a value which will be set as APPLPTMP value on the target node [1] : Creating the new APPL_TOP Context file from : /d01/oracle/ visappl/ad/11.5.0/admin/ template/adxmlctx.tmp The new APPL_TOP context file has been created : /d01/oracle/ visappl/admin/VIS2_vision2.xml Log file located at /d01/oracle/ viscomn/ clone/bin/CloneContext_11080515.log Running Rapid Clone with command: perl /d01/oracle/ viscomn/ clone/bin/adclone.pl java= /d01/oracle/ viscomn/ clone/bin/ ../ jre mode= apply stage= /d01/oracle/ viscomn/ clone/bin/ .. component= appsTier method= CUSTOM appctxtg= /d01/oracle/ visappl/admin/VIS2_vision2.xml showProgress contextValidated= true Beginning application tier Apply - Wed Nov 8 17:18:21 2006 Log file located at /d01/oracle/ visappl/admin/VIS2_vision2/ log/ApplyAppsTier_11080518.log 17% completed ----------------------------------------------Completion Message-------------------------------------------------- Completed Apply... Wed Nov 8 17:24:17 2006 Beginning APPSIAS_VIS2 registration to central inventory... ORACLE_HOME NAME : APPSIAS_VIS2 ORACLE_HOME PATH : /d01/oracle/ visora/ iAS Using Inventory location in /etc/oraInst.loc Log file located at /etc/oraInventory/ logs/OracleHomeCloner_11080524.log ERROR: Registration Failed... Please check log file. You can rerun this registration with the following script: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/out/VIS2_vision2/ regOUI_APPSIAS_VIS2.sh Starting application Services for VIS2: Running: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/adstrtal.sh APPS/< appspwd> You are running adstrtal.sh version 115.14 Executing service control script: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/adapcctl.sh start script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * adapcctl.sh version 115.43 Starting Apache Web Server Listener (dedicated HTTP) ... Starting Apache Web Server Listener (dedicated PLSQL) ... adapcctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Executing service control script: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/adalnctl.sh start script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * adalnctl.sh version Checking for FNDFS executable. Starting listener process APPS_VIS2. adalnctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Executing service control script: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/adcmctl.sh start script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * You are running adcmctl.sh version 115.20 Starting concurrent manager for VIS2 ... Starting VIS2_1108@VIS2 Internal Concurrent Manager Default printer is noprint adcmctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Executing service control script: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/adfrmctl.sh start script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * You are running adfrmctl.sh version 115.34 Starting forms server for VIS2 on port 9000. adfrmctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Executing service control script: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/adrepctl.sh start script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * You are running adrepctl.sh version 115.29 starting Reports Server for VIS2 on port 7000. adrepctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Executing service control script: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/adfmcctl.sh start script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * You are running adfmcctl.sh version 115.17 Starting forms load balancing client for VIS2. adfmcctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Executing service control script: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/adfmsctl.sh start script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * You are running adfmsctl.sh version 115.13 starting forms metrics server for VIS2. adfmsctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Executing service control script: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/ jtffmctl.sh start script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * You are running jtffmctl.sh version 115.16 Validating Fulfillment patch level via /d01/oracle/ viscomn/ java Fulfillment patch level validated. Starting Fulfillment Server for VIS2 on port 9300 ... jtffmctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Executing service control script: /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS2_vision2/addisctl.sh start script returned: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * addisctl.sh version 115.14 /d01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6/ vbroker/bin/osagent Started osagent. Osagent logs messages to the file /d01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6/discwb4/util/osagent.log. Waiting for OAD to start... Started OAD. OAD logs messages to the file /d01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6/discwb4/util/oad.log. Discoverer Locator Started. Locator logs messages to the file /d01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6/discwb4/util/ locator.log. Registering Discoverer Session Completed registration of repository_id = IDL:DCISessionManager:1.0 object_name = vision2.erpstuff.com_8000OracleDiscovererSession4 reference data = path_name = /d01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6/discwb4/util/ runses.sh activation_policy = UNSHARED_SERVER args = (length= 4)[ -session; vision2.erpstuff.com_8000OracleDiscovererSession4; -preference; vision2.erpstuff.com._8000OracleDiscovererPreferences4; ] env = NONE for OAD on host 192.168.0.39 Registering the Collector Completed registration of repository_id = IDL:DCICollector:1.0 object_name = vision2.erpstuff.com_8000OracleDiscovererCollector4 reference data = path_name = /d01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6/discwb4/util/ runcol.sh activation_policy = SHARED_SERVER args = (length= 2)[ -collector; vision2.erpstuff.com_8000OracleDiscovererCollector4; ] env = NONE for OAD on host 192.168.0.39 Applying preferences from file : /d01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6/discwb4/util/pref.txt Finished applying preferences Closing down registry.. Registry File sync... Registering Discoverer Preference Repository Completed registration of repository_id = IDL:DCICORBAInterface:1.0 object_name = vision2.erpstuff.com_8000OracleDiscovererPreferences4 reference data = path_name = /d01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6/discwb4/util/ runpref.sh activation_policy = SHARED_SERVER args = (length= 2)[ -preference; vision2.erpstuff.com_8000OracleDiscovererPreferences4; ] env = NONE for OAD on host 192.168.0.39 addisctl.sh: exiting with status 0 .end std out. .end err out. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * All enabled services for this node are started. Check logfile /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ log/VIS2_vision2/11081724.log for details Exiting with status 0 [oracle@vision2 bin]$
Note: The inputs in the above steps are in blue color while where default is accepted the ENTER key is pressed. Like “Do you want to use a virtual hostname for the target node (y/n) [n] ?: ” the default is [n] so pressing just enter key means you selected n. 4.5. I f status of all services is 0 then we have done with cloning. 4.6. Login in the application to confirm your cloning.
d3:T123a,
Using FNDCPASS to change the APPS password
1.1. Login as oracle user on application tier,
1.2. Set environment variables, $ cd /d01/oracle/ visappl $. ./ APPSORA.env $ echo $ORACLE_HOME /d01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6
1.3. Enter FNDCPASS on command line to get help.
1.4. Now we will change the password of APPS and APPLSYS with the following command, $ FNDCPASS apps/apps 0 Y system/manager SYSTEM APPLSYS welcome Log filename : L381345.log Report filename : O381345.out
1.5. Open the log file using vi editor as above our log file is L381345.log as shown below.
1.6. Check the status which is showing completed successfully.
1.7. Now execute autoconfig. $ cd /d01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS_vision $ adautocfg.sh Enter the APPS user password: [here give our new password which is welcome]
1.8. Wait for autoconfig completion and check the log file for any error using vi editor.
1.9. I f successful then login to the application using browser. You can also check from sqlplus by login with new password. $ sqlplus apps/welcome
2. Changing Application User (sysadmin) Password
2.1. Now we will use the USER mode to change the application user password like sysadmin.
2.2. Enter the following command in which the new password is be welcome. $ FNDCPASS apps/apps 0 Y system/manager USER sysadmin welcome
2.3. Check the log file if any error.
2.4. Open the application and login as sysadmin with this new password.
3. Change Single Oracle User Password
3.1. To change single Oracle user password like changing the password of GL, AP, AR etc we will use the following command with ORACLE mode. $ FNDCPASS apps/apps 0 Y system/manager ORACLE GL gl123 3.2. Check the log file if any error.
3.3. To verify the change open sqlplus, $ sqlplus gl/gl123
4. Change All Oracle Users Passwords
4.1. To use the ALLORACLE mode of FNDCPASS you will have to apply a stand alone patch# 4745998 (30MB) or its latest replacement patch# 4676589 (330MB). You will have to download it from metalink and apply.
Note: There are 3 types of schema passwords,
1. First type is APPLSYSPUB and the default password is 'PUB'.
2. The 2nd type are schemas APPLSYS and APPS and the default password of both is 'APPS'.
3. In 3rd type the product-specific base schemas having same passwords as schema name like GL/GL.
Important: The ALLORACLE mode is used to change password of 3rd type schemas.
4.2. Execute the following command $ FNDCPASS apps/apps 0 Y system/manager ALLORACLE welcome
4.3. Check the log file if any error.
4.4. Now execute autoconfig.
4.5. Check the log file if not successfully completed.
d4:T20ad,
Collections in Salesforce
Collections:- Collections are the group of similar types Apex has the following types of Collections
Lists
Maps
Sets
There is no limit on the number of items a collection can hold However there is a general limit on heap size.
Lists
A list is an ordered collection of typed primitives SObjects, user-defined objects, Apex objects or collections that are distinguished by their includes.
40
90
50
70
20
0 1 2 3 4
The index position of the first element in a list is always ‘0’
To declare a list, use the list keyword followed by the primitive data, SObject, nested list, map, or set type within < > characters
List< String > Mylist= new list<string>();
This will store the block of memory at the database
List <List<set<Integer>>>mylist2= new list <list<set<Integer>>>(); Nested List Note:- A list can only contain up to five levels of nested collections inside it. *The following example describes us about the retrieving 100 accounts stored in variable. List<Account> accs= select Id,Name FROM Account limit 100 ;
*To access elements in a list, use the system methods provided by Apex.
Ex:- List<Integer> Li=new list<Integer>(); Define a new List Li.add(47); adds a second element of value 47 to the end of the list Integer x= Li.get(1);Retrieves the element at index 1. Li.Set(0,73); adds the integer 73 to the list at index o Li.clear(); ---> removes all elements from the list *Go to the Developer console and execute the following code and check the result by going through USER-DEBUG List<String> Li=new List<string>();Li.add('Anil');Li.add('sateesh');Li.add('nagaraju');System.debug(Li); à the o/p from this line is
Anail
Laxman
vissu
Ramu
Sita
0 2 3 4 5
String name = Li.get (0);
System.debug (name); ---> the o/p from this line is ANIL
Li.set(2, ‘sanjeev’);
System debug (Li); ---> the o/p from this line is
Li.clear (); ---> clear all elements in a list
System.debug (li); ---> the o/p from this line is null.
Note:- In a list, we can add Duplicate values that is duplicate values will be allowed inside a list.
Aspired to become an Salesforce? Explore the post to discover the know-hows on Salesforce Online Training.
Sets
A set is an unordered collection of primitives or SObjects that do not contain any duplicate elements.To declare a set, use the set keyword followed by the primitive data type name within < > characters Ex:-
set <string> s= new set < string > ();
To access elements in a set use the system methods provided by Apex.
<Integer> s=new set <Integer>(); ---> Define a new set
S.add (1); ---> Adding an element to the set
Boolean b= s.contains(1); ---> It will returns true when the element ‘1’ contains within the set.
s.remove (1); ---> Remove the element from the set
*Go to the Developer console and execute the following code and check the result by going through USER-DEBUG();
Set <string> s=new set <string>(); s.add(‘red’);
s.add(‘bule’);
s.add(‘Black’);
s.add('green');
system.debug (s);
This statement gives the o/p below
{Black, blue ,green ,red ]
s.remove ('green'); system.debug (s);
This statement gives the Output as below {Black, blue, red}
s.add ('red'); system.debug(s)
#### This statement gives the o/p as below {black, blue, red} because the set will not allow duplicate values inside it Boolean b= s.contains ('black') ###Returns true when the value 'black' is within set and it returns "False" when the value 'black' is not there within set. *Uniqueness of sobjects is determined by comparing fields EX:-If we try to add two accounts with the same name to a set,only one is added.
//Create two accounts a1 and a2
Account a1=new account (Name='Test Account');
Account a2=new account (Name='Test Account');
//Add both accounts to the new set
set<Account> acc set = new set <Account > {a1,a2};
system.assertEquals (accset.size(),1);
This statement is used to verify the set only contains one item.
Maps:-
A map is a collection of key-value pairs where each unique key maps to a single value *Keys can be any primitive datatype while values can be primitive, sobject, collection type or Apex object. *To declare a map, use the Map keyword followed by the data types of the value within < > characters EX:-
Map < string, string> m=new map <string, string> ();
Map<ID, set<string>> m1=new Map<ID, set <string>>();
Map<ID, Map <ID,Account []>> m2=new map<ID,Map<ID,Account[]>>m2;
Similar to lists, map values can contain any collection and can be nested within one another. A map can only contain up to five levels of nested collections inside it.
The following example gives the information about how a map of contain and currencies
Country ----> Key
currency---> Value
Map<string, string> m= new Map<string> ();
m.put (‘India’, 'Rupee’);
m.put (‘us’, 'Dollar'); Insert a new key value pair in the map
m.put (‘uk’, 'Pounds');
system.debug (m); the o/p of this line will be
{India= Rupee, us=Dolar, uk= pounds}
string currency = m.get('uk'); àRetrieve a value given a particular key system.debug (currency), à the o/p of this will be pounds
system.debug (m.keyset ()); à Return a set that contains all of the keys in the map.
system.debug (m.containkey ('uk'));
This statement gives the true or false whether for particular key have a value or not. * EX:- Account a= new Account (Name='capital',Bullingcity='Hyd'); Map<Integer, Account> map1=new map<integer, Account> (); map1.put (1, a); àInsert a new key value pair in the map Map<Integer, Account >map2=map1.clone (); ###Makes a duplicate copy of the map system.debug ((map1.get (1) Billingcity)); ###This statement gives the Billingcity filed value of the value pair that is assigned to the key 1. Hyd
d5:T19ec,
Controllers in Salesforce
Using S.Control's for UI (User Interface) The tool that allows application developers to display custom links (HTML) in a detail page or custom tab, this provides more flexibility for the fields and page layouts. But
Executes from within a browser, causing poor performance if displaying or updating values for more than a few records at a time.
Do not provide an easy way to give custom UI elements the same look-and-feel as standard SF pages.
Require developer to enforce field uniqueness and other metadata dependencies on their own.
Note: S.control's are suppressed by VF pages (Visual Force).After March 2010 organizations that have never created S.Control's as well as new organizations, won't be allowed to create them Existing S.Control's will remain and can still be edited. These are the reasons why VF pages came in to existence; these are next generation solutions for building sophisticated user interfaces on the Force.com platform.
What is Visulal Force?
VF is a frame work that allows developers to build sophisticated, custom user interfaces that can be hosted natively on the Force.com platform. This includes a tag based markup language, similar to HTML. In VF markup language each VF tag corresponds to a coarse or fine-gained users interface components such as
Section of page
A related list or a field
The behavior of VF components can be controlled by the same logic that is used in standard SF pages, or developer can associated their own logic with a controller class written in APEX.
Tag in VF are <apex:page>
<apex:page Block>
<apex:page Block Buttons>
<apex: page Block section>
` <apex:page Block section Item>
<apex:page Block Table> ------> Tags related to a page tags
Input field tags:
<apex:inputcheckbox>
<apex:inputField>
<apex:input File>
<apex:inputHidden>
<apex:inputsecret>
<apex:input text >
<apex:input text area>
Like this there are around 90 tags in VF and each tag full fills request such as defining a page, page block field, toolbar these tags can be divided into
Input tags
Output tags
Select tags
Form tags
Page tags and so on…
Using these tags developers can create a VF page definition. It consists of two primary elements. VF Markup ---> AVF ---> Controller
VF Markup:
Visual force Markup consists of VF tags, HTML, JavaScript and many other web-enabled code embedded within a single <apex: page>tag. This defines the user interface components that should be include on the pages, and the way they should appear.
VF Controllers:
VF controller is a set of instructions that specifies what happens when a user interacts with UI components specified by VF markup, (such as when user clicks on the button on link).controller also provides access to the data that should be displayed on the page, and can modify component behavior.
A developer can use a standard controller consists of the same functionality and logic that is used for a standard salesforce page.
Note: If we use the standard Account controller, clicking a save button in VF page results in same behavior as clicking save button on Account edit page Using page layouts, we cannot have access to the objects in standard field, and display's an error called as insufficient privileges error message, we can avoid this by checking the user's accessibility for an object and displaying component approximately.
A standard list controller enables us to create VF pages that can display an act on a set of records like list pages, related lists, and mass action pages.
Custom controller: it’s a class written in Apex that implements all page's logic, without leveraging a standard controller, if we define this, we have to define new navigation elements or behaviors, but we must implement any functionality that was already provided in a standard controller.
Controller extension: class written in Apex that adds to or overrides behavior in a standard or custom controller.
Extensions allow us to leverage the functionality of another controller while adding your own logic. Visual Pages Force can be used: Developer can use VF pages to
Override standard buttons, such as NEW button for accounts, save button for contacts.....
Define custom tab.
Embed components in detail page layout.
Create dashboard components on custom help pages.
Customize, extend on integrate the sideboards in the services cloud console (custom console components)
d6:T5c62,
UITabBar and UITabBarController
Key Skills & Concepts
Understanding tab bars
Using the tab bar Application template
Creating an Application that uses a tab bar
Adding tabs to a tab bar
Customizing a tab bar
A tabbar consists of two or more tabs along a window’s bottom. Each tab contains a view controller. As a user selects a tab, the tab loads its view controller, which in turn loads and displays its associated view. In this chapter, you explore creating tabbed applications. In the first task, you create a tabbed application using Xcode’s Tab Bar Application template. After examining this template’s results, you manually add a third tab to the tab bar. In the next task, you start with a Window-based Application template and create a two-tab application. In this task, you solidify your understanding by manually duplicating the steps taken by the Tab Bar Application template. The chapter’s final task illustrates allowing users to customize a tab bar’s tabs when it contains five or more tabs.
The tab bar is useful for presenting different application subtasks or different views of the same data. If you own an iPhone or iPod touch, you are certainly familiar with a tab bar controller, as several applications use tab bars. The Clock application, for instance, has a tab bar containing tabs with different subtasks (Figure 8-1). Each tab is a different subtask: World Clock, Alarm, Stopwatch, and Timer. The iPod application illustrates a tab bar containing different views of the same data (Figure 8- 2). The Artists tab organizes your multimedia by artist; the Album tab organizes your media by album. Each tab is a different view of the same data, your iTunes multimedia. The iPod application illustrates another tab bar feature. When a tab bar has more than four tabs, it displays a More tab. Upon pressing More, the tab bar presents the remaining tabs in a selectable list (Figure 8-3). You can also modify the iPod application’s tab bar using the Edit button. Clicking the Edit button displays the tabs in a view that allows you to modify which tabs are displayed in the tab bar (see Figure 8-3). When presented with an application that contains a task with multiple subtasks or an application that requires different views of the same data, use a tab bar. Figure 8-1 The Clock application has a tab for each subtask. Figure 8-2 The iPod application has a tab for each data view. Figure 8-3 The iPod application uses a More tab to display tabs. NOTE Do not use a tab bar for sequential navigation or data drill-down. The navigation control and tables are more appropriate choices for navigating sequential lists and data drill-down.You create a tab bar using the UITabBar class. A UITabBar displays two or more tabs along a window’s bottom edge. Individual tabs are UITabBarItem class instances. You tie these classes together using the UITabBarController and UITabBarControllerDelegate. Each UITabBarItem contains its own view controller. Click a tab, and the UITabBarItem loads its view controller. The view controller displays its view. NOTE A tab’s view controller might be an advanced view, like a table or a navigation controller. Chapter 9 illustrates placing a navigation controller in a tab. Chapter 10 illustrates placing a navigation controller in a tab and then a table in the navigation controller.A UITabBar has an associated UITabBarController and UITabBarDelegate. The UITabBarController manages the UIViewController objects in each tab. For instance, if a user wishes to add, remove, or rearrange tab bar items, the UITabBarController is responsible for implementing the behavior. You will see how to accomplish a rearrangeable tab bar later in this chapter. But first, consider the easiest tab bar implementation: the Tab Bar Application template.
Using the Tab Bar Application Template
The Tab Bar Application template is the easiest route to creating a tabbed application, and unlike last chapter’s Single View Application template, this template is a more useful starting point for real-world projects. In this task, you create a simple tab bar application using the Tab Bar Application template. After examining the template’s results, you manually add a third tab to the tab bar.
Create a new Tab Bar Application by selecting the template in the New Project Name the project TabBarExOne.
InGroups & Files, expand Classes And At first glance, it appears the template created the same classes as it would for a View-based Application. However, the template added several tab bar related classes for you, making this a slightly more complex application.
Open h and notice the application’s delegate adopts the UIT abBarControllerDelegate protocol. It also declares a UITabBarController property as an IBOutlet (Listing 8-1).
Open xib and review the document window. The template added a Tab Bar Controller.
ThetemplatealsoaddedTabBarExOneAppDelegateas a proxy object to MainView .xib. Review TabBarExOneAppDelegate’s connections in the Notice Xcode added a tabBarController property as an IBOutlet. Interface Builder subsequently knew the application delegate had a tabBarController outlet and connected it to the Tab Bar Controller in the document window.
Inthe document window, in List View, expand Selected First View Controller (First) and notice the Tab Bar Item (First). The second view controller also has a tab bar item associated with
Highlightthe second view controller in the document Notice in the controller’s inspector that the UIViewController is from an external nib, the template specified the view controller’s Nib name (Figure 8-4). Also notice the template took a shortcut. Rather than creating a UIViewController for the second SecondView.xib, it used a generic UIViewController. If you wished, you could easily remedy this by adding a new UIViewController class to the Xcode project and changing SecondView.xib’s view controller’s class to the class created.
Buildand run the A simple two-tab application runs in the simulator.
Figure 8-4 The second tab bar item’s view controller is from another nib. Listing 8-1 The TabBarExOneAppDelegate adopts the UITabBarControllerDelegate protocol. #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> @interface TabBarExOneAppDelegate : NSObject <UIApplicationDelegate, UITabBarControllerDelegate> { UIWindow *window; UITabBarController *tabBarController; } @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIWindow *window; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UITabBarController *tabBarController; @end
Open xib in Interface Builder.
On the tab bar controller’s canvas, click the tab bar item labeled Be careful—only click once. Clicking the item once selects the tab bar item’s view controller. You know you clicked once if the Inspector tabs have ―View Controller‖ in their title.
Clickthe tab bar item twice, and you select the actual tab bar The Inspector tabs should have ―Tab Bar Item‖ in their title.
Save and close Interface
ClickBuildAnd Go and run the application in the
The Tab Bar Application template generates a two-tabbed application. You will most certainly find situations where you need more tabs. Adding another tab to a tab bar is not difficult. In the next task, you add a third tab to the application.
Adding a Tab Bar Item to a Tab Bar Application
If closed,open the last task’s application in Create another UIViewController and name the controller ThirdViewController. Ensure the checkbox that creates an accompanying xib is also selected. Xcode should generate the ThirdViewController.h, ThirdViewController.m, and ThirdViewController.xib files.
Open xib in Interface Builder. Change the view’s color to something other than white. Save and exit Interface Builder.
Open xib in Interface Builder. Drag a UIViewController from the library to the document window. Change the UIViewController’s class to ThirdViewController.
Highlightthe tab bar controller and open its Tab Bar Attributes
Add a tab bar item to the View Controllers Name the item Search, and notice a third tab appears on the tab bar controller canvas.
Clickthe third tab bar item In the Inspector, change the class from UIViewController to ThirdViewController. Also change the nib name to ThirdViewController.
Clickthe third tab bar item two Change the tab’s identifier to Search in the Tab Bar Item Attributes Inspector. A magnifying glass and Search appears in the tab (Figure 8-5).
Save and exit Interface
Buildand run the application. The application now has a third tab bar item (Figure 8-6).
Figure 8-5 Changing a tab bar item’s image to Search Figure 8-6 Running the three-tab application in iPhone Simulator Creating a Tab Bar Application from Scratch Using a template is well and good, but doesn’t teach you how to actually build a tabbed application (unless you are using the template). So in this task, you duplicate the Tab Bar Application template’s steps, but start with a Window-based Application template and manually add the tab bar items to your project. It is no more difficult than using the template— just slightly more tedious.
Create a new Window-based Application and name it TabBarExTwo.
Open h and change it so it adopts the UITabBarController Delegate protocol (Listing 8-2). Add a UITabBarController property as an IBOutlet. The UITabBarControllerDelegate.h should appear like Listing 8-2. Don’t forget to synthesize the controller in UITabBarControllerDelegate.m. Save and build.
Createa new UIViewController class and name it Be certain it also creates an associated xib. Xcode should generate the FirstViewController.h, FirstViewController.m, and FirstViewController.xib files.
Createanother UIViewController and associated xib named
Open xib and change the view’s color. Open SecondViewController xib and change the view’s color.
Save and exit Interface
Open xib and add a UITabBarController to the document window. Interface Builder should show the tab bar controller’s canvas.
Selectthe TabBarExTwoAppDelegate’s Connections Inspector and connect its tabBarController outlet to the tab bar controller in the document
Inthe document window, ensure the view mode displays the items as a Expand the tab bar controller, select the Selected View Controller (Item 1), and change its class to FirstViewController in the First View Controller Identity Inspector. Change its Nib Name to FirstViewController.
Change View Controller (Item 2) to the SecondViewController, using the same steps as the previous Do not forget to set the NIB Name to SecondViewController in the Second View Controller Attributes Inspector.
Change the first tab’s identifier to Recents and the second tab’s identifier to Downloads (Figure 8-7).
Save and close Interface
Open TabBarExTwoAppDelegate.m. Add the tab bar controller to the applicationDidFinish Launching method (Listing 8-3).
Figure 8-7 The first and second tab identifiers Listing 8-2 TabBarExTwoAppDelegate.h modified to use a UITabBarController #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> @interface TabBarExTwoAppDelegate : NSObject <UIApplicationDelegate, UITabBarControllerDelegate> { UIWindow *window; UITabBarController *tabBarController; } @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIWindow *window; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UITabBarController *tabBarController; @end Listing 8-3 TabBarExTwoAppDelegate.m modified to use a UITabBarController #import "TabBarExTwoAppDelegate.h" @implementation TabBarExTwoAppDelegate @synthesize window; @synthesize tabBarController;
[tabBarController release]; [super dealloc]; } @end 14.Click Build And Go, and a two-tab application runs in the iPhone Simulator (Figure 8-8). Figure 8-8 Two-tabbed application running in iPhone Simulator
Allowing Users to Customize a Tab Bar
Sometimes you might wish to add more than four tabs to your application. However, the iPhone tab bar can only display four tabs and a More tab. When a user presses More, the excess tabs appear in a selectable list. By default, a navigation bar with an Edit button is displayed across the window’s top. A user can then tap Edit and modify which tabs he or she wishes to see displayed on the tab bar.The default behavior is to allow all tab bar items to be editable. If you wish to modify this default and limit which tabs are editable, you must modify the toolbar. In this task, you add more than four tabs to the first task’s tab bar. You then make the tab bar non-editable, followed by making only some tabs editable.
Open TabBarExOne and add a new view Name the class FourthViewController. Ensure it also creates an associated xib. Xcode should create the FourthViewController.h, FourthViewController.m, and FourthViewController.xib files.
Open xib in Interface Builder. Change the view’s color.
Closexiband open MainWindow.xib in Interface Builder.
Add three more tabs by adding One, Two, and Three to the View Controllers in the Tab Bar Controller Attributes Inspector (Figure 8-9).
Figure 8-9 Adding three view controllers to the project 5.Change each view controller’s class to Also change each view controller’s NIB name to FourthViewController. NOTE You would never use the same view controller for three different tabs in a real project.
Save and quit Interface builder.
Buildand run in the iPhone Notice it added the fourth tab and a More tab (Figure 8-10). When you click the More tab, it displays a UITableView with the other two tabs (Figure 8-11). When you click either tab, the tab’s associated view controller’s view is displayed.
Clickthe Edit button, and a screen where you can configure the tab bar items is displayed (Figure 8-12).
Figure 8-10 Application displaying four Figure 8-11 Clicking the More tab tabs and a More button. displays the remaining two tabs in a list. Figure 8-12 Clicking the Edit button displays Figure 8-13 Replacing a couple tabs with a view for configuring the tab bar’s tabs. Two and Three.
Try dragging Two and Three to the tab bar and replacing a couple of the other tabs (Figure 8-13). Click Done and exit the program.
Open TabBarExOneAppDelegate.m and add the following line to the applicationDidFinish Launching method tabBarController.customizableViewControllers = nil;
ClickBuildAnd Notice the Edit button appears but clicking it results in no tabs displayed.
Now modify applicationDidFinishLaunching Change the code so it matches Listing 8-4.
ClickBuildAnd Go. Notice you can only edit First and Second (Figure 8-14).
Figure 8-14 Only First and Second are editable. Listing 8-4 Setting the customizableViewControllers - (void)applicationDidFinishLaunching:(UIApplication *)application { NSMutableArray * conts = [[[NSMutableArray alloc] init] autorelease]; [conts addObject:[tabBarController.viewControllers objectAtIndex:0]]; [conts addObject:[tabBarController.viewControllers objectAtIndex:1]]; tabBarController.customizableViewControllers = conts; [window addSubview:tabBarController.view]; } A tab bar’s default behavior is to allow users to rearrange, delete, and add tabs when a tab bar contains more than four tabs. To disable editing all tabs, set the tab bar controller’s customizableViewControllers to nil. To disable only some tags, add the tabs that should be editable to the customizableViewControllers. Tabs not added to customizableViewControllers are automatically made non-editable.
d7:T7b9f,
UINavigationBar and UINavigationController
Key Skills & Concepts
Understanding a UINavigationBar,UINavigationController,and a UINavigationItem
Understanding how to use a navigation bar in a simple application
Understanding how to programmatically manipulate a navigation bar’s items
Adding a navigation bar to a tab in a tabbed application
Anavigation bar is displayed along a window’s top, just below the status bar. The navigation bar optionally contains a title for each view displayed and one or more buttons. Typically, the button on the bar’s right, when clicked, takes the user to the next step in another view, although sometimes applications use the right button as a ―done‖ button. The button on the bar’s left is a Back button, returning to the previous view. Navigation bars are often used with tables, where a table is displayed with a navigation bar above it. When a user clicks a table’s rows, the navigation bar’s associated navigation controller takes the user to more detailed information about the selected item. For instance, the App Store application allows a user to refine his or her categories until the application of interest is found (Figure 9-1). For instance, if a user clicked Games, the navigation controller would take the user to a Games subcategory. If the user then clicked All Games, the navigation controller would take the user to a table of all games in the App Store. If a user wished to go back a step, he or she would press the button on the navigation bar’s upper-left area. This button is the Back button. Note the navigation controller labeled the button’s title with the previous view’s title. The navigation bar and navigation controller are useful for applications requiring hierarchical navigation, such as data drill-down. In the App Store application, you drill down to increasingly specific categories until reaching a list of items rather than further subcategories. When you select an item, it takes you to a more detailed view of your selection. Navigation bars are also useful for applications with multiple steps in a single task. In this chapter, you learn how to use a navigation bar and its associated classes. In the first task, you start with a Window-based application and manually create an application consisting of three views managed by a navigation controller. In the second task, you duplicate the Utility Application template. Although this template uses a navigation bar, the template is odd, compared to other Apple-provided templates. Rather than using Interface Builder, this template does almost everything using code. Moreover, this template uses a navigation bar without using an associated navigation controller. After finishing duplicating the Utility Application template, the chapter presents a navigation controller embedded in a tab bar’s tab. This is perhaps this chapter’s most useful task and should not be skipped. You will find embedding a navigation controller in a tab a ubiquitous requirement when developing iPhone applications. Figure 9-1 Using the App Store application
UINavigationBar, UINavigationController and UINavigationItem
Below the status bar but above the application window’s content, many applications have a navigation bar. Navigation bars display the current view’s title and contain one or more buttons for navigating to other screens. In this chapter’s introduction, you viewed the App Store application, a typical use for a navigation bar. The Notes application also uses a navigation bar (Figure 9-2). The navigation bar appears above the yellow notepad. Upon clicking the + key, the navigation bar displays a new note page. The navigation bar’s title is New Note and contains a back button labeled ―Notes‖ and a right button labeled ―Done.‖ Upon tapping either button, the application returns the user to the application’s primary page.You add navigation bars to an application using the UINavigationBar class. You almost never use a UINavigationBar class directly, instead using UINavigationBar’s controller, UINavigationController. You control a UINavigationBar using a UINavigation Controller. A UINavigationController uses a stack data structure to manage one or more view controllers. The first view controller, or the root view controller, is the first item on the stack. To navigate to other views, you push the view’s view controller onto the stack. To return to the previous view, you pop the current view from the stack. Figure 9-2 The Notes App uses a navigation bar.
Building a Three-View Application Using a Navigation Bar
It is easiest to learn the UINavigationController by example. In this task, you create a simple application containing three views. You navigate between the three views using a navigation bar. The first view has a button on the navigation bar’s right, which says ―Next.‖ Upon clicking the button, the application takes you to the next view. This view has a Back button and a button in the view rather than on the navigation bar. Upon clicking the button in the view, the application takes you to a third view. The third view has a navigation bar and a title.
Create a new Window-based Name the application ThreeViewNavCont.
CreatethreeUIViewControllerclasses,namingthem FirstViewController, SecondViewController, and Be certain to also generate xib files for each class.
Open each of the xibs and change the view’s color to a unique
Save and exit Interface
Open xib and drag a navigation controller from the library to the Document window (Figure 9-3). Notice Interface Builder shows the navigation controller’s canvas with a navigation bar and a view.
Selectthe navigation controller’s view controller. You can do this through the document window, by clicking the disclosure arrow next to navigation controller and then selecting the view controller. Alternatively, you can select the view directly in the navigation controller’s canvas. Change the controller’s class to FirstViewController in the Inspector. Also change its NIB name to FirstViewController in the Inspector (Figure 9-4).
Figure 9-3 Adding a navigation controller to MainWindow.xib Figure 9-4 Changing the view controller to FirstViewController
Save and exit Interface builder.
Open ThreeViewNavContAppDelegate.h in Xcode. Add a UINavigationControllerIBOutlet declaration to the header file (Listing 9-1).
Open xib in Interface Builder. Right-click ThreeViewNavContApp Delegate in the document window and connect the navController outlet to the UINavigationController in the document window (Figure 9-5).
Save and exit Interface
ClickBuildAnd Go to run the application, and FirstViewController’s view should appear (Figure 9-6).
Figure 9-5 Connecting the navigation controller Figure 9-6 The application running in iPhone Simulato The first step to using a navigation bar is to add a navigation controller to a document window. Upon adding the navigation controller, Interface Builder also adds a root view controller and you changed this view controller to your view controller. Making this connection in Interface Builder allows the nib to manage the property’s life cycle. When you build and run the application, the application knows MainWindow.xib is the application’s main nib and loads it. Upon loading, the nib initializes the objects it manages, which includes the navigation controller property, navController. The navigation controller loads its root view controller. Because the root view controller has an associated navigation item, the navigation controller adds a navigation bar above the view with the navigation item’s title. Because MainWindow.xib handles all the application’s initialization, all you do in the applicationDidFinishLaunching method is add the view to the window. After adding the navigation controller, you must provide navigation controls so a user can move from view to view. You can either add a button to the navigation bar itself or add a control to a view’s canvas. The next few steps do both.
Open xib and select the navigation item in the document window (Figure 9- 7). Change the navigation item’s title to First View.
Draga bar button item from the library to the navigation bar (Figure 9-8). Rename the button ―Ne‖
Save and exit Interface
Open h and add a new action called moveToNextView (Listing 9-3). Import SecondViewController and add SecondViewController as a property.
Figure 9-7 Selecting the navigation item in the Document window Figure 9-8 Adding a button to FirstViewController’s navigation bar Listing 9-3 FirstViewController.h #import<UIKit/UIKit.h> #import "SecondViewController.h" @interface FirstViewController : UIViewController { SecondViewController * second; } @property (nonatomic, retain) SecondViewController * second; - (IBAction) moveToNextView: (id) sender; @end
Open m and implement moveToNextView, as in Listing 9-4. Listing 9-4 FirstViewController.m
Open xib in Interface Builder, select the FirstViewController, and connect its moveToNextView action to the Next button (Figure 9-9).
Save and exit Interface
ClickBuildAnd Go to run the Tapping the Next button results in the second view being displayed (Figure 9-10). Tap First View, and the application returns to the first view.
Figure 9-9 Connecting moveToNextView action to the navigation button Figure 9-10 The application running in iPhone Simulator In step 13, you changed the default title to your view’s title. Actually, to be specific, you changed the default title to your view controller’s navigation item’s title. In step 14, you added a bar button item to the navigation bar and set it as the navigation bar item’s rightBarButtonItem. Establishing this connection ensures the application displays the button on the bar’s right. You then created an action that, when clicked, pushes the second view controller onto the navigation controller’s stack. The navigation controller displays this view and a navigation bar containing the new view’s navigation bar element. Notice you must push view controllers onto the stack manually through code, as in Listing 9-4. [self.navigationController pushViewController:self.second animated: YES]; If a view controller is in a navigation controller’s stack, then the navigationController property automatically refers to the navigation controller managing the stack. So, the navigation controller in ThreeViewNavContAppDelegate pushes FirstViewController’s SecondViewController onto the stack. Note that setting the animated parameter to YES causes the view to slide in from the left.As the task illustrates, creating an application using a navigation controller and associated navigation bar is not difficult. The Back button, and popping a view controller from the navigation controller, is implemented for you. You provide the control and action to push view controllers onto the navigation controller’s stack.
Adding Another View
You are not limited to bar buttons if you wish to push views onto a navigation controller’s stack. In the following steps, you first add a bar button item to SecondViewController. You then add an additional button to SecondViewController’s view, but instead of it being a bar button, you use a regular button.
Open the ThreeViewNavCont project in Xcode.
Open SecondViewController and add an IBOutlet for a UIBarButtonItem to SecondViewController as a Name the property navBut; don’t forget to synthesize the property.
Open m and implement the viewDidLoad method to set the navigationItem’s right bar button item to navBut. Note that every UIViewController has a navigationItem and that it is a read-only property.
Open xib in Interface Builder and add a new bar button item to the document window (Figure 9-11). Connect the newly added bar button item to the navBut outlet.
Save and exit Interface
Buildand run the application, and the second view now displays its title in the navigation bar (Figure 9-12). But notice, clicking the Next button in the navigation bar has no effect because you haven’t connected it to a method
Figure 9-11 Adding a UIBarButtonItem Figure 9-12 The application displaying the second view controller’s navigation item’s title
Open h and add a new action called moveToNextView (Listing 9- 5). Import ThirdViewController and ThreeViewNavContAppDelegate. Add a ThirdViewController as a property.
Open m and implement moveToNextView, as in Listing 9-6. Save and build.
Open xib in Interface Builder. Connect the bar button’s selector to the File’s Owner moveToNextView action (Figure 9-13).
Save and exit Interface
Buildand run the application. The second view now has a Next button and tapping it moves to the next view (Figure 9-14). Now consider pushing a view onto the stack using a regular button.
Figure 9-13 Connecting the bar button to the moveToNextView action Figure 9-14 The second view with a Next button Figure 9-15 Connecting button to moveToNextView method
Open xib and add a button to the view. Connect the button to moveToNextView (Figure 9-15). Connect to the button’s Touch Up Inside action.
Save and exit Interface
Buildand run the Click the button on the second view, and it, too, navigates to the third view.
Usinga button rather than a bar button item is that easy. Typically, though, in most iPhone applications, you will see a table in the view rather than a button (see Figure 9-1). For instance, SecondViewController might have an embedded table listing categories. Upon clicking a table row, you would invoke the moveToNextView method, passing the specific table row’s identifier as a parameter. The App Store application is an example of this type of navigation (see Figure 9-1). Listing 9-5 SecondViewController.h #import<UIKit/UIKit.h> #import "ThirdViewController.h" @interface SecondViewController : UIViewController { ThirdViewController * third; IBOutlet UIBarButtonItem * navBut; } @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIBarButtonItem * navBut; @property (nonatomic, retain) ThirdViewController * third; -(IBAction) moveToNextView: (id) sender; @end Listing 9-6 SecondViewController.m #import "SecondViewController.h" @implementation SecondViewController @synthesize third; @synthesize navBut;(void) viewDidLoad{ navigationItem.title = @"SecondView"; self.navigationItem.rightBarButtonItem = navBut; }(IBAction) moveToNextView: (id) sender{ third = [[[ThirdViewController alloc] initWithNibName:@"ThirdViewController" bundle:nil] autorelease]; [self.navigationController pushViewController: self.third animated: YES]; }(void)dealloc { [third release]; [super dealloc]; } @end More on the UINavigationController You are not limited to pushing items onto a stack. You can also pop items off the stack. You can also modify the navigation bar, hiding elements, adding new ones, and making other modifications.
Pushing and Popping
You pop view controllers from a stack using the method popViewControllerAnimated:. This method pops the top view controller off the navigation controller’s stack and updates the displayed view to the stack’s next view controller’s view. (UIViewController *) popViewControllerAnimated: (BOOL) animated The method takes one parameter, which indicates if the transition should be animated. The method also returns the popped view controller, should you wish to retain it for future use. Other methods you might use include popToRootViewControllerAnimated: and popToViewController:animated:. Refer to Apple’s online reference, ―UINavigationController Class Reference,‖ for more information.
Configuring the Navigation Bar
In the previous example, you hid the navigation bar by calling the navigation controller’s setNavigationBarHidden: method. - (void)setNavigationBarHidden:(BOOL)hidden animated:(BOOL)animated This method hides or displays the navigation bar, depending upon if you passed YES or NO as the initial parameter. You also specify if the navigation bar should slide in from the top by specifying YES for the animated parameter.You might also change a navigation bar’s style by changing its style property. You can use code to change the navigation bar’s style, but the easiest way to do this is through Interface Builder. You can also change a navigation bar’s color. You change the color using the tintColor property.
Using a Navigation Controller in a Tab
Applications usually use a navigation bar with other navigation views, such as a tab bar or table view. You haven’t learned about table views yet—you won’t learn about using a table view with a navigation bar until Chapter 10. However, you learned about the tab bar in Chapter 8. A navigation bar might be placed within a tab bar. For instance, returning to the App Store application, notice the navigation screens are steps within the Categories tab (see Figure 9-1). The Featured, Categories, Top 25, and Updates tabs are different views on the same data. The Search tab is a subtask. Within the Categories tab, there is a navigation bar combined with a table view. This combination provides a way to drill down hierarchically to a specific application.Although you don’t learn about tables until Chapter 10, consider a navigation bar in a tab.
Create a new Window-based Name the application NavInTab.
Createtwo new UIViewController Name the first FirstTabViewController and the second StepTwoViewController; be certain to create nibs for both.
Open both newly created nibs and change the background color for each
Open xib and add a UITabBarController to the document.
Deletethe first tab bar view Drag a navigation controller to the document and drop it so it is the first item below the tab bar (Figure 9-19).
Change the navigation controller’s root view controller to FirstTabViewController by changing its class and nib name in the The canvas should indicate the view is from FirstTabViewController.nib (Figure 9-20).
Change the navigation item’s title from ―Root View Controller‖ to ―step ‖
Draga bar button item from the library to the navigation item in the Document window (Figure 9-21). Change the button’s title to ―Next.‖ The button should automatically be set as the navigation item’s If not, connect the navigation item’s rightBarButton outlet to the newly added bar button item.
Save and exit Interface
Figure 9-19 Adding a navigation controller. Figure 9-20 Canvas indicates view is from a different nib.Figure 9-21 Bar button added to document window
Open h and NavInTabAppDelate.m and adopt the UITabBarController Delegate protocol. Also add a UITabBarController property and a UINavigationController property. Modify applicationDidFinishLaunching so it loads the tabBarController property’s root view. The files should match Listings 9-11 and 9-12. Save and build.
Open xib in Interface Builder and connect the NavInTabAppDelegate’s navBarController to the newly added navigation controller (Figure 9-22). Connect the tabBarController to the newly added tab bar controller.
Save and exit Interface
Open h and implement the viewDidLoad method so that it sets the navigationItem’s title to ―step two‖ (Listing 9-13).
Figure 9-22 Connecting the navBarController Figure 9-23 The finished application in iPhone Simulator
d8:T2ac0,
Alerting Users
Use alerts to inform users of impending actions that might be destructive, "are you sure" types of messages. Usually these are a result of some unexpected action. Alerts should have two buttons: an"okay" button and a "cancel" button. Use alerts sparingly to avoid annoying users. Use action sheets to inform users of alternatives to an action. As Apple points out in their documentation, the Photos application contains a good example of using an action sheet (Figure 11- 13). The user has a choice: use the photo as wallpaper, e-mail the photo, assign it to a contact, or do nothing (cancel). Action sheets are also appropriate when informing a user he or she is performing a potentially destructive task.
Figure 11-13 An action sheet in the Photo application
UIAlertView and UIAlertViewDelegate A UIAlertView presents a modal alert to users. The alert appears and floats above the underlying view. Displaying a UIAlertView is easy: Create the class and display it. As the alert is modal, a user can do nothing else until clicking one of the alert’s buttons. The UIAlertViewDelegate handles the alert’s button actions. If you add buttons to an alert, implement the clickedButtonAtIndex: method in your delegate. Other methods you might implement include the alertViewCancel: or didPresentAlertView: methods. For a complete listing, refer to Apple’s UIAlertViewDelegate Protocol Reference. Alerts should not be misused. Present too many alerts, and you have an annoying application, where users take alerts, if at all. Also, place buttons according to Apple’s recommendation. When alerting a user to a potentially destructive outcome, place the Cancel button on the right (Figure 11-14). When alerting a user to a harmless action, place the Cancel button on the left (Figure 11-15).
Figure 11-14 Alert warning of a potentially destructive action Figure 11-15 Alert warning of a benign action
Creating a Simple UIAlertView
Create a new View-based Name the application AlertsProgress.
Change AlertsProgressViewController to adopt the UIAlertViewDelegate protocol (Listing 11-7).
Open m and add an alert to the viewDidLoad method (Listing 11-8). Also, implement the didDismissWithButtonIndex: delegate method.
ClickBuild And Go to run the application (Figure 11-16). Tap the button, and the button’s index is logged to the Debugger
Figure 11-16 A simple alert
Listing 11-7 AlertsProgressViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> @interface AlertsProgressViewController : UIViewController <UIAlertViewDelegate> { } @end Listing 11-8 AlertsProgressViewController.m #import "AlertsProgressViewController.h" @implementation AlertsProgressViewController - (void)viewDidLoad { [super viewDidLoad]; UIAlertView * myAlert = [[[UIAlertView alloc] initWithTitle:@"View Loaded" message:@"View loaded successfully." delegate:nil cancelButtonTitle:@‖OK‖ otherButtonTitles:nil] autorelease]; [myAlert show]; }(void)alertView:(UIAlertView *)alertView didDismissWithButtonIndex: (NSInteger) buttonIndex { NSLog(@"buttonIndex: %i", buttonIndex); }(void)dealloc { [super dealloc]; } @end In this simple application, the view’s controller implements a UIAlertViewDelegate. Upon clicking the button, the delegate’s clickedButtonAtIndex method executes. This method determines which button a user clicked and routes the user accordingly. The clickedButtonAtIndex method is an instance method declared in UIAlertViewDelegateProtocol and has the following signature: - (void)alertView:(UIAlertView *) alertView clickedButtonAtIndex: (NSInteger) buttonIndex The method takes the clicked button’s index as an NSInteger via the buttonIndex parameter. After processing, this method dismisses the alert. You created a UIAlertView instance through the following code: UIAlertView * myAlert = [[[UIAlertView alloc] initWithTitle:@"View Loaded" message:@"View loaded successfully." delegate:self cancelButtonTitle:nil otherButtonTitles:@"OK", nil] autorelease]; This method is convenient for initializing the alert view. If you wish, you can add more buttons to an alert using the otherButtonTitles parameter in the initWithTitle method. The next task illustrates an alert with two buttons. Using an Alert with Multiple Buttons
Open AlertsProgress in Xcode.
Modify AlertsProgressViewController’s viewDidLoad method so it matches Listing 11-9.
Click Build And Go to run the The alert shows two buttons (Figure 11-17). Click either button, and the button’s index is logged to the debugger console. You use this index to determine which button is clicked and route processing accordingly.
Listing 11-9 Code to display an alert with two buttons -(void)viewDidLoad { [super viewDidLoad]; UIAlertView * myAlert = [[[UIAlertView alloc] initWithTitle: @"View Loaded" message:@"View loaded successfully." delegate:self cancelButtonTitle:@"OK" otherButtonTitles:@‖Cancel‖,nil] autorelease]; [myAlert show]; }
Figure 11-17 An alert with two buttons
UIActionSheet and UIActionSheetDelegate While an alert displays as a pop-up box, the UIActionSheet slides in from a view’s bottom, a view’s toolbar, or a view’s tab bar. You set where a toolbar slides in from when you display the action sheet. For instance, the following code slides the action sheet from the view’s bottom. [myActionSheet showInView:self.view]; The action sheet’s bottom is aligned with the view’s bottom. Note that if you use this setting when using a tab bar or toolbar, the action sheet’s bottom is hidden by the bar. To prevent this, you display the action sheet using the showFromTabBar: or showFromToolBar: method. For instance, the following code slides the action sheet from the tab bar’s top and aligns the action sheet’s bottom with the bottom of the tab bar. [myActionSheet showFromTabBar:self.view]; UIActionSheets are otherwise very similar to UIAlertViews. You specify an action sheet’s delegate by creating a class adopting the UIActionSheetDelegate. You use this delegate to implement button actions. Methods are similar to UIAlertViewDelegate’s. For instance, the following code handles a button click. - (void)actionSheet:(UIActionSheet *)actionSheet clickedButtonAtIndex: (NSInteger) buttonIndex Using a UIActionSheet
Open AlertsProgress in Xcode.
Open h and change the class so it adopts the UIActionSheetDelegate protocol (Listing 11-10).
Add an IBAction called In the method’s implementation, add a UIActionSheet that asks the user for confirmation (Listing 11-11). Remove the viewDidLoad method.
Open xib in Interface Builder, add a button to the view, and connect the removeAll action in the File’s Owner to the button’s Touch Up Inside event (Figure 11-18). Save and exit Interface Builder.
Open m and implement the didDismissWithButtonIndex: method (Listing 11-11).
ClickBuildAnd Go to run the application (Figure 11-19). Click each button in the action sheet, and the debugger console should produce logging results similar to Listing 11-12.
Figure 11-18 Connecting File’s Owner removeAll action to a button
Figure 11-20 An application badge tells me I have 39 e-mails in my inbox.
d9:T7da,
What is LINQ
In general when deal with object oriented programming we learn OOP in C# or JAVA. But especially when we deal with D/B again we need to learn data base language like
SQL
TL/SQL in SQL and oracle
PL/SQL
And X path and X Query etc. when dealing with “XML” that means we also need to learn D/B programming language to deal with any data bases like LINQ will bridge this gap between OOP and relational data bases
Interested in mastering ASP.Net Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on ASP.Net Training.
In .NET JAVA we have Hibernate as ORNET LINQ will may OOP to strict to OOP only. i.e when we work with LINQ completely we will depending on object OOP. And need not learn D/B language LINQ is introduced in 3.0 version of .net frame work
da:T19e0,
1. Database Tier
1.1. Set Environment Variables $ cd /u01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0 $. ./VIS_vision.env $ echo $ORACLE_HOME /u01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0
1.2. Files in ORACLE_HOME 1.2.1. My SID = VIS and HOST is Vision
To view SI D $ echo $ORACLE_SID VIS
To view Host $ hostname -s vision
File
Path
SID_HOST.env
$ORACLE_HOME/
init.ora
$ORACLE_HOME/dbs/
initSID.ora
$ORACLE_HOME/dbs/
SID_HOST_ifile.ora
$ORACLE_HOME/
addbctl.sh
$ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/ scripts/SID_HOST/
addlnctl.sh
$ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/ scripts/SID_HOST/
adautocfg
$ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/ scripts/SID_HOST/
adautocfg.sh
$ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/ scripts/SID_HOST/
adchknls.pl
$ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/ scripts/SID_HOST/
adexecsql.pl
$ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/ scripts/SID_HOST/
adlsnodes.sh
$ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/ scripts/SID_HOST/
adpreclone.pl
$ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/ scripts/SID_HOST/
adstopdb.sql
$ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/ scripts/SID_HOST/
adstrtdb.sql
$ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/ scripts/SID_HOST/
1.3. Files in TNS_ADMIN
1.3.1. To view the TNS_ADMIN, $ echo $TNS_ADMIN /u01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/network/admin/VIS_vision
File
Path
listener.ora
$TNS_ADMIN/
sqlnet_ifile.ora
$TNS_ADMIN/
sqlnet.ora
$TNS_ADMIN/
tnsnames.ora
$TNS_ADMIN/
listener_ifile.ora
$TNS_ADMIN/
2. Application Tier2.1. Set Environment Variables $ cd /u01/oracle/ visappl $. ./ APPSORA.env $ echo $ORACLE_HOME /u01/oracle/ visora/8.0.6
2.2. Files in ORACLE_HOME
File
Path
SID_HOST.env
$ORACLE_HOME/
forms60_server
$ORACLE_HOME/
CGIcmd.dat
$ORACLE_HOME/ reports60/ server/
REP60_SID.ora
$ORACLE_HOME/ reports60/ server/
runform.htm
$ORACLE_HOME/ tools/web60/html/
runrep.htm
$ORACLE_HOME/ tools/web60/html/
2.3. Files in TNS_ADMIN 2.3.1. To view the TNS_ADMIN, $ echo $TNS_ADMIN /u01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/network/admin/VIS_vision
2.4. Files in APPL_TOP2.4.1. To view the APPL_TOP, $ echo $APPL_TOP /u01/oracle/ visappl
File
Path
APPSORA.env
$APPL_TOP/
APPSSID_HOST.env
$APPL_TOP/
SID.env
$APPL_TOP/
SID_HOST.env
$APPL_TOP/
adconfig.txt
$APPL_TOP/admin/
adovars.env
$APPL_TOP/admin/
2.5. Files in FND_TOP2.5.1. To view the FND_TOP, $ echo $FND_TOP /u01/oracle/ visappl/ fnd/11.5.0
File
Path
HOST_SID.dbc
$FND_TOP/ secure/
appsweb.cfg
$FND_TOP/ resource/
2.6. Files in COMN_TOP 2.6.1. To view the COMN_TOP, $ echo $COMN_TOP /u01/oracle/ viscomn
File
Path
adalnctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adapcctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adaprstctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adautocfg.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adcmctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
addisctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adexecsql.pl
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adfmcctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adfmsctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adfrmctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adpreclone.pl
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adrepctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adstpall.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adstrtal.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adtcfctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
gsmstart.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
jtffmctl.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/scripts/SID_HOST/
adgendbc.sh
$COMN_TOP/admin/ install/SID_HOST/
aplogon.html
$COMN_TOP/admin/portal/SID_HOST/
applist.html
$COMN_TOP/admin/portal/SID_HOST/
2.7. Files in OA_HTML 2.7.1. To view the OA_HTML, $ echo $ OA_HTML /u01/oracle/ viscomn/html
File
Path
appsweb_SI D_HOST.cfg
$OA_HTML/bin/
ICXINDEX.htm
$OA_HTML/US/
db:T502b,
Installation (OS & APPS) 1. Operating System Installation 2. Pre-Installation Tasks 3. OS User and Group Creation 4. Setting up Stage 5. Oracle Applications 11i Installation (Linux) 6. Oracle Applications R12 Installation (Linux) 7. Oracle Applications Installation (Windows) 1. Operating System Installation1.1. Insert the first bootable CD and reboot the machine. 1.2. Press ENTER key from the keyboard. 1.3. I f you are not sure about your media then better to select OK and the media verification will be started which will ask you to enter all CD’s one by one. I f media is tested then TAB to Skip and press ENTER. 1.4. No action required on this screen. 1.5. Click on Next (button). 1.6. Click on Next (button). 1.7. Click on Next (button). 1.8. Select Manually partition with Disk Druid and click on Next (button). 1.9. As I have used VMWARE to get these installation screens so there is an NTFS hard disk which in your case will not appear. Select Free and click on Next (button). 1.10. Select /boot as Mount Point and enter 500 MB as size, ext3 as File System Type while keeping Fixed size and click on OK (button). 1.11. Select swap in the File System Type and 2000 MB in Size and Fixed size then click on OK (button). 1.12. Select / in Mount Point, ext3 as File System Type and click on Fill to maximum allowable size and click on OK (button). 1.13. Verify the sized and after verification click on Next (button). 1.14. Click on Next (button). 1.15. Click on Edit (button). 1.16. Uncheck Configure using DHCP. 1.17. Keep check Activate on boot and enter IP Address and Netmask. I f your machine is not on network then enter as above otherwise ask your network administrator to provided you IP address so you can enter here. 1.18. Click on OK (button). 1.19. Click manually under Hostname and enter the host and domain name. 1.20. I f your machine is on network then ask your Network Administrator to provide you Gateway and Primary DNS information. 1.21. Click on Next (button). 1.22. Select No firewall and click on Next (button). 1.23. Click on Proceed (button). 1.24. Click on Next (button). 1.25. Select your time zone and click on Next (button). 1.26. Enter root password but don’t forget, better to note it and click on Next (button). 1.27. Select Customize software packages to be installed and click on Proceed (button). Note: I t is recommended to install All packages so we have selected Customize software packages to be installed in the above step. I f there is any space limitation then you may go with Install default software packages but later you will have to install required packages manually. Select the following packages to install manually as by default these would not be installed. If you will select complete installation then these packages would be installed automatically. -----> Legacy Software Development package ---->X Software Development package 1.28. Scroll down to the bottom. 1.29. Select Everything for full installation. 1.30. Click on Next (button). 1.31. Click on Continue (button) and the installation will be started. 1.32. Insert CD’s as prompted and click on OK (button). 1.33. Installation is complete so remove any CD from the drive and click on Reboot (button). <<<<------------------------------------****------------------------------------------->>>> 2. Pre Installation Tasks If you installed with default packages instead of everything then you will have to install few required packages manually. 2.1. Select these packages from the Package Group Selection screen. I f the operating system is already installed, use System Settings > Add/Remove Applications to install these two packages. The following required components must be installed manually: --->openmotif21-2.1.30-11.RHEL4.4 --->libaio-0.3.102-1 --->libaio-devel-0.3.102-1 The libaio components are available on Disk 3 of the RHEL4.0 media. For information on downloading the openmotif component, see the instructions at the following URL: 2.2. Apply one of these OS library patches: 4198954 (for Red Hat 4.0), you can download it from metalink. 2.3. After installing these patches, run ldconfig -v. 2.4.Release 11i Hardware Requirements (minimum) -->Server machine P4 --> DVD -->RAM Minimum 1GB -->Hard Disk Space Note: To get the spaces command $ du –h /Stage11i is used. -->A Note book and a writing pen -->UPS (to avoid a power failure during installation). Software Requirements-->Oracle Application 11.5.10.2 -->Linux Redhat AS 4 32bit. -->Metalink Access -->Oracle Metalink Reference document # 287453.1 2.4.1. Verify minimum Kernel Requirements with uname and rpm command, [ root@vision ~ ]# uname -r 2.6.9-5.ELsmp [ root@vision ~ ]# rpm -q glibc glibc-2.3.4-2 Note: The above displayed information is as per recommendations. 2.4.2. Domain Name System (DNS) Resolver Parameters 2.4.3. Edit the following file /etc/ resolv.conf and set the following parameters as below, -->options attempts:5 -->options timeout:15 2.4.4. The format of hosts /etc/hosts file must be formatted as follows : 127.0.0.1 localhost.localdomain < ip_address> < node_name> .< domain_name> 2.4.5. Verify that the /etc/ sysconfig/network file is formatted as follows : HOSTNAME= < node_name> .< domain_name> 2.4.6. I f the /etc/ sysconfig/networking/profiles/default/network file exists, remove it. Note: I f you changed any files in the previous steps, reboot the system. 2.4.7. Modify number of open descriptors: in file /etc/ security/ limits.conf add the following lines: ---->* hard nofile 65535 ---->* soft nofile 4096 Note: The following warning will appear in the alert log file if these above settings will not be effective. Make sure that each line must have “* ” . WARNING:Oracle instance running on a system with low open file descriptor limit. Tune your system to increase this limit to avoid severe performance degradation. 2.4.8. Change port range value : /etc/ sysctl.config add the following line, net.ipv4.ip_local_port_range = 1024 65000 2.4.9. Set LD_ASSUME_KERNEL in file /etc/profile LD_ASSUME_KERNEL= 2.4.19 export LD_ASSUME_KERNEL 2.4.10. Java 2 Standard Edition (J2SE), Rapid Install installs the Java 2 Standard Edition 1.4.2 automatically. 2.5. Release 122.5.1. Verify minimum Kernel Requirements with uname and it should be 2.6.9-42.ELsmp. 2.5.2. Edit the /etc/ sysctl.conf file using vi command. 2.5.3. The file before change will look like the following, 2.5.4. Open the file using following command, ------$ vi /etc/ sysctl.conf 2.5.5. Insert the following values,
Parameter
Value
kernel.semmsl
256
kernel.semmns
32000
kernel.semopm
100
kernel.semmni
142
kernel.shmall
2097152
kernel.shmmax
Half the size of the physical memory(In bytes), and atleast 2147483648
kernel.shmmni
4096
kernel.msgmax
8192
kernel.msgmnb
65535
kernel.msgmni
2878
fs.file-max
65536
net.ipv4.ip_local_port_range
1024 65000
net.core.rmem_default
262144
net.core.rmem_max
262144
net.core.wmem_default
262144
net.core.wmem_max
262144
2.5.6. Save and exit with wq. 2.5.7. Edit the following file /etc/ resolv.conf and set the following parameters as below, ---->options attempts:5 ---->options timeout:15 2.5.8. The format of hosts /etc/hosts file must be formatted as follows : 127.0.0.1 localhost.localdomain < ip_address> < node_name> .< domain_name> -----> 192.168.0.1 vision.erpstuff.com 2.5.9. Verify that the /etc/ sysconfig/network file is formatted as follows : ---->HOSTNAME= < node_name> .< domain_name> ---->HOSTNAME= vision.erpstuff.com 2.5.10. I f the /etc/ sysconfig/networking/profiles/default/network file exists, remove it. Note: I f you changed any files in the previous steps, reboot the system. 2.5.11. Modify number of open descriptors: in file /etc/ security/ limits.conf add the following lines: --->* hard nofile 65535 --->* soft nofile 4096 --->* hard nproc 16384 --->* soft nproc 2047 Note: The following warning will appear in the alert log file if these above settings will not be effective. Make sure that each line must have “* ” . WARNING:Oracle instance running on a system with low open file descriptor limit. Tune your system to increase this limit to avoid severe performance degradation. <<<<------------------------------------****------------------------------------------->>>> 3. OS User and Group Creation3.1. Create a user named oracle and two groups named dba and oinstall.
The steps are demonstrated in the following slide. <<<<------------------------------------****------------------------------------------->>>> 4. Setting up Stage4.1. Release 11i4.1.1. Staging is to copy all the contents of DVD’s on the hard disk as the following directory structure. Don’t worry in earlier releases it was manual but now all is automated. Just you need to run a perl script and rest will be managed by the script. The DVD’s are labeled as below, --->Start Here - Disk 1 --->APPL_TOP - Disk n --->RDBMS - Disk n --->Tools - Disk n --->Databases - Disk n 4.1.2. Now we will use adautostg.pl to create stage and please resolve any issue if the script prompts for any. 4.1.3. Login as OS user “oracle” with privileges to mount, unmount and eject the DVD. The must also have write privileges to the stage area. 4.1.4. Insert the first DVD named Start Here in DVD-ROM drive and mount the DVD if not auto mounted. 4.1.5. To verify perl version and to confirm if it is in the PATH, perl –v The version should be 5.0053 or higher else download from perl.com and install it. 4.1.6. Run adautostg.pl script from the mounted DVD, 4.1.7. $ perl /media/ cdrom/Disk1/ rapidwiz/adautostg.pl 4.1.8. Provide the top-level directory on the prompt like /d01 and the script will create a directory Stage11i in the directory automatically and will create all other folders in this directory as the structure shown in the above figure. So the directory will look like /d01/Stage11i. 4.1.9. Enter folder and press enter key. 4.1.10. The next prompt is for AutoMount so press y or enter key to accept default. 4.1.11. Enter DVD mount point which in my case is /media/ cdrom. 4.1.12. Enter 1 or press enter key to take the default which is also 1 to stage Oracle Applications. 4.1.13. Insert the DVD one by one as the script will prompt. Note: Good thing is that script will maintain a log so if copying is aborted due to any reason so next time you can resume from the same stage. 4.2. Release 12 The staging steps are similar to the 11i. 4.2.1. Insert the first DVD labeled Start Here – Disk 1 DVD. 4.2.2. Now run adautostg.pl using perl. $ /media/ cdrom/Disk1/ rapidwiz/perl adautostg.pl 4.2.3. Provide the target directory name like /d01. 4.2.4. Press enter key to accept default y to AutoMount. 4.2.5. Enter the mount point like in my case it is, /media/ cdrom 4.2.6. Select 1 to stage Oracle Applications. 4.2.7. Insert DVD as prompted.
dc:T58ce,
5. Oracle Applications 11i Installation (Linux)5.1. Login as oracle user we created in the above steps. 5.2. Start Oracle Applications installation and follow as the following screens. I will demonstrate vision installation on a single node. 5.3. Change directory to /u01/Stage11i/ startCD/Disk1/ rapidwiz/ with the cd command. 5.4. Execute $./ rapidwiz < ENTER> 5.5. In the displayed Select Wizard Operation screen we have selected Install Oracle Applications E-Business 11i. After selecting the desired option press Next. 5.6. I f you already have a configuration created with rapidwiz then you can provide it on the Load Configuration screen by select Yes, load configuration file and click open to find the configuration file. By providing the file the next steps will be skipped and the system status check step will be performed on the basis of parameters provided in the configuration file. To know how this file is created and saved just see next screen Save Instance – specific Configuration, which displayed after we provide all the information. The default name is config.txt. I have selected No as I don’t have configuration. 5.7. Press the next button on the above screen. 5.8. As I already mentioned above that I will demonstrate single node installation so here on the Install Type screen I will select, Single – node (All services on a single node). 5.9. Press Next and the next screen will be to define database type. 5.10. I will install Vision Demo Database instead of Fresh Database as the Fresh would be blank while Vision is preconfigured Database. So on the Define Database Type screen I have selected Vision Demo Database and also entered my database name VIS. 5.11. After providing these two information press Next on the above screen. 5.12. By default the Oracle OS User is the user with which I logged in and started the installation so I can’t change it here. The second is to enter the group so provide the name of group which was created in few steps above. The third entry on the Database Install Information – Vision screen is to provide the Base Install Directory where the application will be installed. 5.13. I f you need to change any other path on the above screen the click on Advanced Edit else proceed by clicking Next. 5.14. In the previous step we provided information for Database while on this Configuration Information for Node – Vision screen we will provide information for Application side. The information is just like same as on the database screen. You can set different paths of database and applications installation if any space limitation on one disk. 5.15. Enter your domain name in the Domain Name field on Global System Settings screen. Like for demonstration I have entered erpstuff.com. 5.16. Save the configuration file on the following Save Instance – specific Configuration screen for future use. Name the file which is convenient for you as kept the default one that is config.txt. 5.17. Press Next to proceed. 5.18. All the input tasks of DBA are completed now the checks will be performed on the basis of information provided in the previous steps. 5.19. The next screen which will appear is the System Check Status screen. 5.20. The next immediate screen will show the results of checks performed in the last step. 5.21. View if any cross found and resolve the error mentioned. I am sure if all steps above were performed carefully there should be no issue at this place. I f any error displayed on the Validate System Configuration screen then press Back else press Next. 5.22. The next screen is Component Installation Review which displays the components to be installed. 5.23. Pressing Next will bring the Load Balancing screen. 5.24. I have used default values for Concurrent Manager, Forms Server on the Load Balancing Node Specification screen. 5.25. As we are installing single node so Node name is same for all Services while Linux is selected as Operating System on Node Information screen. 5.26. After pressing the Next on the above screen will bring the following Installing Oracle Applications screen which shows two progress bars. 5.27. During this the DBA can perform the following tasks, o In case of multi node installation start OS installation on the other node. o I f it is lunch time then have a nice lunch as the installation will take time to complete depending on the hardware. o I f you have music system then listening good music would also be a good time passing. o Mean while keep watching the progress bars as any error may be prompted due to certain reason like if any step(s) was/were missed. <<<<<<----------------------------*******------------------------------------------>>>>> 6. Oracle Applications R12 Installation (Linux) Oracle Applications Documentation Resources, Release 12 Detailed information is available in Metalink note 394692.1 The following components are optional, and not delivered by Rapid I nstall: • Oracle Discoverer 10g (10.1.2.0.2) • Oracle Portal 10g (10.1.4) • Oracle Single Sign-On 10g (10.1.2.0.2) • Oracle Internet Directory 10g (10.1.2.0.2) Note: In Release 12, Java Development Kit (JDK) 5.0 is automatically installed by Rapid Install. For more details about JDK visit, http: / / java.sun.com/ j2se/1.5.0/ install-linux# requirements Disk Space Requirements --->Operating System 4.7 GB --->Stage 33 GB --->Applications node file system 28 GB (Includes AS 10.1.2 ORACLE_HOME, AS 10.1.3 ORACLE_HOME, COMMON_TOP, APPL_TOP, and INST_TOP) --->Database node file system (Fresh) 45 GB --->Database node file system (Vision) 133 GB Note: We will install single node vision instance so we will require total space (4.7 + 33 + 28 + 133 = 198.7). The Applications node technology stack includes, among other components: • Oracle Developer 10i, which includes: • Oracle Forms • Oracle Reports • Oracle 10g Application Server 10.1.2 • Oracle 10g Application Server 10.1.3 (includes Oracle HTTP Server) The database node includes: • Oracle Database 10g Release 2 The following components are optional, and not delivered by Rapid I nstall: • Oracle Discoverer 10g (10.1.2.0.2) • Oracle Portal 10g (10.1.4) • Oracle Single Sign-On 10g (10.1.2.0.2) • Oracle Internet Directory 10g (10.1.2.0.2) Note: In Release 12, Java Development Kit (JDK) 5.0 is automatically installed by Rapid Install. 6.1. Create a user named oracle and two groups named dba and oinstall. The steps are demonstrated in the following slide.
$ groupadd dba$ groupadd oinstall$ useradd -G dba -g oinstall oracle $ passwd oracle $ id oracle uid= 500(oracle) gid= 502(oinstall) groups= 502(oinstall),503(dba) $ mkdir /d01 /d02 $ chown -R oracle:oinstall /d01 /d02 Note: Here we have folder d01 for installation and d02 for stage
6.2. Login as oracle user. 6.3. Start Oracle Applications installation and follow as the following screens. I will demonstrate vision installation on a single node. 6.4. Start the rapidwiz from the rapidwiz folder. 6.5. Click on Next (B). 6.6. Click on Next (B). 6.7. Click Accept Oracle Connection Tools Agreement and click on Next (B). 6.8. Enter your Metalink Support Identifier, Metalink Account and select Country. 6.9. Click on Next (B). 6.10. Click on Next (B). 6.11. Click on Next (B). 6.12. Change if required and click on Next (B).6.13. Change if required and click on Next (B). 6.14. Click on Next (B). 6.15. Resolve if any test is fail and click on Next (B). 6.16. Click on Next (B). 6.17. Click on Yes (B). 6.18. The installation will start so wait till not completed. 6.19. All post-install checks should be successful if there is any issue then resolve it and click on Next (B). 6.20. Click on Finish (B). 6.21. The next is to check the directory structure as Oracle has changed the structure in R12. 6.22. Open internet explorer and enter the URL here in my case it is, Note: In EBS Release 12 it is mandatory to first time login with sysadmin in order to complete installation. 6.23. Enter sysadmin in User Name and sysadmin as Password. 6.24. Click on Login (B). 6.25. The J2SE setup will be automatically started. 6.26. Click Typical setup and click on Accept (B). 6.27. Click on Finish (B). 6.28. The following is the navigation window of R12. <<<<<<----------------------------*******------------------------------------------>>>>> 7. Oracle Applications Installation (Windows) Now we will try to capture the steps for the Installation of Oracle eBusiness suite on Microsoft Windows. 7.1. Windows OS Setup7.1.1. Fist of all download the latest version of JDK from http: / / java.sun.com and install it while keeping in mind that there should be no space in the folder(s) name. 7.1.2. During Windows installation please make sure that the machine should be at least 8 characters and if during installation it is less than 8 then change it. 7.1.3. First of all you need to create a new user on Windows server with name “oracle” and add the user in administrators group to give administrative privileges. 7.1.4. Logoff and login into as “oracle” and install the following tools before installation of 11i. 7.1.5. The sequence of installation of these softwares should be as the sequence in the following steps. 7.1.6. Install the printer on the server before proceeding with the installation. Note: There should be no space in the folder names of the following softwares. Do not install in the “Program Files” folder because there is a space character in the folder name. 7.2. JDK7.2.1. Fist of all download the latest version of JDK from http://java.sun.com and install it while keeping in mind that there should be no space in the folder(s) name. 7.3. MS Outlook7.3.1. For few versions of eBusiness suite you need to install Microsoft Outlook so install the Microsoft Outlook. 7.4. Microsoft Visual C+ +7.4.1. The next is to install Microsoft Visual C+ + . 7.4.2. Start the setup. 7.4.3. Select “Product” on the following screen. 7.4.4. Click on Next (B). 7.4.5. Select Visual C+ + 6.0 Enterprise Edition and click on Next (B). 7.4.6. Select Register Environment Variables and click on OK (B). 7.4.7. Enter a folder name and path which should not have any space(s). 7.4.8. Click on Next (B). 7.4.9. After the installation reboot the system. 7.4.10. Next is to install Service Pack 4 for Microsoft Visual Studio 7.4.11. After Service pack installation reboot the system. 7.5. MKS Toolkit7.5.1. Download the MKS Toolkit from http: / /www.mks.com as a demo version for 30 days is available for free download. 7.5.2. Start the setup. 7.5.3. Click on Next (B). 7.5.4. Click on Next (B). 7.5.5. On the following screen, give non-space name of the folder where you want to install the toolkit. Click the “Browse” button to change the folder name. You may install the toolkit to C: \mksnt folder as described in the Oracle Installation Guide. 7.5.6. Click on Next (B). 7.5.7. Click on Next (B). 7.5.8. Wait for the installation to complete. 7.5.9. Once the installation is complete, go to the “MS DOS Prompt” and run any Unix command. You must be able to run all Unix commands on Windows successfully. Like for example enter ls command which is same a dir command of windows. 7.6. GNUMake Utility7.6.1. Download the GNU from http: / /www.gnu.org/ and following the instruction as provided by GNU. 7.6.2. Now copy the gnumake.exe from c: \gnu to c: \mksnt\mksnt. 7.7. Set the Required Paths7.7.1. Right Click the “My Computer” icon on the desktop and choose “Properties” from the popup menu. Click the “Advanced” tab and then “Environment Variables” . Double Click the “Path” variable and add the following before %system% and %system32%; --->c: \mksnt\mksnt;c: \gnu. 7.8. Startup Installation7.8.1. Open the MS DOS Prompt and goto the Rapidwiz directory 7.8.2. Run the following cmd file to start the installation wizward, E: \Stage11i\ redCD\Disk1\ rapidwiz> rapidwiz.cmd 7.8.3. This will initiate the installation wizard. 7.8.4. Once the installation completes reboot the system. Note: As the installation steps/ screens are already covered in the above demonstration of installation on Linux so will not be covered. The only difference is the paths so on the installation screen provide the windows paths.
dd:T562,
1. 11i1.1. Execute the following script in the sequence shown below, /u01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/scripts/VIS_vision/addbctl.sh start /u01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/scripts/VIS_vision/addlnctl.sh start VIS /u01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS_vision/adstrtal.sh apps/apps 1.2. To stop the services execute the script in the following sequence. /u01/oracle/ viscomn/admin/ scripts/VIS_vision/adstpall.sh apps/apps /u01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/scripts/VIS_vision/addlnctl.sh stop VIS /u01/oracle/ visdb/9.2.0/appsutil/scripts/VIS_vision/addbctl.sh stop immediate 2. R122.1. The following scripts are used to Start services. /d01/oracle/VIS/db/ tech_st/10.2.0/appsutil/ scripts/VIS_vision/addbctl.sh start /d01/oracle/VIS/db/ tech_st/10.2.0/appsutil/ scripts/VIS_vision/addlnctl.sh start VIS /d01/oracle/VIS/ inst/apps/VIS_vision/admin/ scripts/adstrtal.sh apps/apps 2.2. The following scripts are used to Stop services. /d01/oracle/VIS/ inst/apps/VIS_vision/admin/ scripts/adstpall.sh apps/apps /d01/oracle/VIS/db/ tech_st/10.2.0/appsutil/ scripts/VIS_vision/addlnctl.sh stop VIS /d01/oracle/VIS/db/ tech_st/10.2.0/appsutil/ scripts/VIS_vision/addbctl.sh stop immediate
de:Ta48,
1. Gather Schema Statistics1.1. To gather schema statistics we will submit a request using the requests window, System Administrator: Requests > Run 1.2. Select Gather Schema Statistics from the LOV in Name field and then on Parameters window select ALL in the Schema Name field. Note: For further details of parameters click the Help (B) or for more details read about GATHER_SCHEMA_STATS. 1.3. Click OK (button). 1.4. Now schedule as per your requirements. I have scheduled it to run this request every Sunday mid night for one year. 1.5. On clicking OK (button) as we have selected Save this schedule the following window will appear, 1.6. Enter Name and Description of the schedule and press OK (button). 1.7. Now on the main window Submit the request by clicking Request (button). 1.8. Also have a look on the following requests you may submit as per your requirements 1.9. I had submitted a request to show the log file and next day I viewed the log file which is show below, Note: Please note the time taken on vision machine so it will vary on the size of data. For this reason I scheduled it at mid night.
1. Purging Request of Concurrent Manager1.1. Select request Purge Concurrent Request and/ or Manager Data on the requests window. 1.2. Select REQUEST in the Entity LOV.
Field
Data
Description
Entity
REQUEST
To purge the requests.
Mode
Count
Number of requests will be provided to retain them.
Mode Value
3
I have entered 3 which means leave latest 3 requests and logs while purge all earlier requests. (if Age is selected in the Mode then here the numbers mean the number of days. Assume that we have selected Age in the Mode field and in Mode Value we entered 365 then last 365 days requests will not be purged so retaining 1 year data of requests and logs)
User Name
XX_USER
These requests and logs are very import so you must ask the concerned departments that how long the history need to be maintained. Here we will just purge the requests of XX_USER.
1.3. Submit the request and then view the request status, 1.4. Our all old requests are no more in the requests window. I t will also free space on hard disk by deleting log files.
e0:T2895,
VNC stands for Virtual Network Computing and it was developed at the Olivetti & Oracle Research Laboratory (Cambridge, England) in 1994. Originally running on an ATM-connected thin client device, it was ported to other platforms, including Win32, UNIX, GNU/Linux, and Mac OS. I this a remote display system which allows a thin client (called the VNC viewer) to remotely access a desktop GUI environment on another computer over the network. Since it is platform independent, you can remotely run an Apple desktop from a Windows client, or a UNIX desktop from an Apple client, and so on. VNC allows viewing and operating the console of other computer remotely. Generally it is also known as Remote Frame Buffer (RFB). This document covers the installation of VNC server on Linux Redhat AS 4 and setting up VNC client on Windows XP machine to operate the Redhat Linux server remotely. 1. Server Side Configuration1.1. Login as root on Redhat Linux Server. 1.2. First we need to check the VNC packages installation. rpm -qa | grep vnc # rpm -qa | grep vnc vnc-server-4.0-8.1 vnc-4.0-8.1 The vnc package is installed as shown above. I f not then install vnc package. 1.3. To start the VNC on system boot time, # chkconfig --level 345 vncserver on
chkconfig - is a simple command line tool to updates and queries runlevel information for system services - - level Specifies the run levels where the operation should affect. I t is given as a string of numbers from 0 to 7. For example, --level 35 specifies runlevels 3 and 5. 0 – Halt 1 – Single User Mode 2 – User Defined 3 – Full Multi User Mode 4 – User Definable 5 – Full Multi User Mode (X-Based login screen) 6 – Reboot
Note: On system reboot the VNC-based X sessions will be updated in the /etc/ sysconfig/ vncservers file and will be start automatically. 1.4. The next step is to uncomment the following lines and add all the VNC sessions required to start at the startup time in the /etc/ sysconfig/ vncservers file. VNCSERVERS= "1: root 2:oracle" VNCSERVERARGS[1]= "-geometry 800x600" # vi /etc/ sysconfig/ vncservers vncservers file before update
# The VNCSERVERS variable is a list of display:user pairs. # # Uncomment the line below to start a VNC server on display :1 # as my 'myusername' (adjust this to your own). You will also # need to set a VNC password; run 'man vncpasswd' to see how # to do that. # # DO NOT RUN THIS SERVICE if your local area network is # untrusted! For a secure way of using VNC, see # < URL:http: / /www.uk.research.att.com/ vnc/ sshvnc.html> . # VNCSERVERS= "1:myusername" # VNCSERVERARGS[1]= "-geometry 800x600"
vncservers file before update
# The VNCSERVERS variable is a list of display:user pairs. # # Uncomment the line below to start a VNC server on display :1 # as my 'myusername' (adjust this to your own). You will also # need to set a VNC password; run 'man vncpasswd' to see how # to do that. # # DO NOT RUN THIS SERVICE if your local area network is # untrusted! For a secure way of using VNC, see # < URL:http: / /www.uk.research.att.com/ vnc/ sshvnc.html> . VNCSERVERS= "1: root 2:oracle" VNCSERVERARGS[1]= "-geometry 800x600"
1.5. Now login as the user for whom you want to configure VNC or use this command to login. # su – oracle 1.6. Run the vncserver command to configure the VNC-based X session. Note: Replace N (vncserver :N) with a number greater than zero. N represents the VNC-based X session permanently assigned for a particular user. We will assign 1 as number of sessions.
$ vncserver :1 You will require a password to access your desktops. Password: Verify: xauth: creating new authority file /home/oracle/ .Xauthority New 'vision.erpstuff.com:1 (oracle)' desktop is vision.erpstuff.com:1 Creating default startup script /home/oracle/ .vnc/ xstartup Starting applications specified in /home/oracle/ .vnc/ xstartup Log file is /home/oracle/ .vnc/ vision.erpstuff.com:1.log
Note: The above command (vncserver :1) will create the $HOME/ .vnc> directory for the user and will ask for a VNC password. This password will be requested by the VNC viewer program when connecting from a remote machine. 1.7. I f the user wants to change the VNC password, in future the following command will be used: $ vncpasswd Password: Verify: 1.8. By default VNC uses the twm windows manager. We will configure GNOME (the default environment in Red Hat Enterprise Linux) desktop environment. Open the $HOME/ .vnc/ xstartup file using vi editor and comment out or delete the lines that start with xterm and twm. $ cd ~ $ pwd /home/oracle $ cd .vnc $ vi xstartup Add gnome-session & as shown below, 1.9. Save the file. Note: I f you want to use KDE, add the following line instead of gnome-session &, startkde & 1.10. After setting the desktop, the existing VNC-based X session must be killed through this command.
$ vncserver -kill :1 Killing Xvnc process ID 3218
1.11. Restart the VNC session for the effect of the changes. Enter the following commands to restart the newly configured VNC session:
vncserver :1 New 'vision.erpstuff.com:1 (oracle)' desktop is vision.erpstuff.com:1 Starting applications specified in /home/oracle/ .vnc/ xstartup Log file is /home/oracle/ .vnc/ vision.erpstuff.com:1.log
Server side configuration is competed now we will configure the Windows XP client machine <<<<<<<<<--------------------****************-------------------->>>>>>>>>>>>> 2. Client Side Configuration2.1. First of all we need the VNC viewer software. To download visit the following link, http: / /www.realvnc.com/download.html 2.2. Download any of the following two options of VNC Free Edition Viewer for Windows. Note: I f you are going to download Zip Archive then you need WinZip software to extract the executable file. http: / /www.winzip.com/ 2.3. Extract or place the file in a folder on your local drive. C: \ vncviewer 2.4. On running the exe file on your windows client and the following screen will appear. 2.5. Enter IP address of your VNC server we configured above in the following format, IP address :1 Note: For security reasons the IP address is not shown here but hope there should be no issue in providing your server IP in this field. Don’t forget to click on Options button to have few setting of vnc viewer. 2.6. Enter the password same we set above while configuring server side, 2.7. The following options screen will appear, 2.8. By default, VNC starts up only a simple window manager and a terminal window. To avoid the above options screen we will perform the following steps and will uncomment the unset and exec lines and will add shost + in the xstartup file as shown below, 2.9. Save the file after modification. 1.12. After setting the desktop, the existing VNC-based X session must be killed through this command.
$ vncserver -kill :1 Killing Xvnc process ID 3218
1.13. Restart the VNC session for the effect of the changes. Enter the following commands to restart the newly configured VNC session:
vncserver :1 New 'vision.erpstuff.com:1 (oracle)' desktop is vision.erpstuff.com:1 Starting applications specified in /home/oracle/ .vnc/ xstartup Log file is /home/oracle/ .vnc/ vision.erpstuff.com:1.log
2.10. Here is the Linux Redhat server desktop on you windows XP client.
e1:T8fe,
1. Display Settings When you will receive the following error while running reports with output set to PDF then you need to set Display Settings (Oracle Toolkit). 1.1. Login as Oracle user on Linux server locally. 1.2. Update the DisallowTCP and set to false in the gdm.conf file on application server machine. /etc/X11/gdm 1.3. Open the file in any editor $ vi/etc/X11/gdm/gdm.conf 1.4. Open the terminal window and execute the following statements. $ set DISPLAY= localhost:0.0 $ xhost + $ export DISPLAY= localhost:0.0 $ xhost + localhost localhost being added to access control list 1.5. To verify display settings use xclock or xterm. $ xclock $ xterm Note: I f these windows are displayed then it means that display settings are ok. 1.6. Alternatively make the following change in the adrepctl.sh file. This will eliminate the above manual steps on each restart of server. $ vi /oracle/prodcomn/admin/ scripts/ VIS_vision/adrepctl.sh 1.7. Insert xhost + and save the file. Now each time when you will start the apps services display setting will be set. 1.8. Open the .bash_profile of Oracle user, $ cd ~ “go to home folder of oracle user” $ vi .bash_profile 1.9. Insert the following line, export DISPLAY= "vision:0.0" Note: These settings will only work if the user Oracle will remain logged in.
e2:T21ab,
Reports Integration 1. Sample report Development 2. Integration in Applications3. Reports output in Excel1. Sample report Development For Development and deployment you should have Oracle Reports Builder 6i with latest patch applied and Access to deploy reports and copy file on server. 1.1. For demonstration I have developed a simple listing report using Oracle Report Builder and here is the query with single parameter. Note: Note the parameters (TOKENS) like here it is :P_SET_OF_BOOKS_ID. 1.2. Save the report as CGLTESTREP where I have used C for customized reports. While saving be careful that extension rdf must be in small characters as by default reports builder saves in capital letters. 1.3. Copy the file on server in / u01/ oracle/ visappl/ gl/ 11.5.0/ reports/ US folder. 1.4. Verify file extension as it should be is small letters. $> ls CGLTESTREP.* CGLTESTREP.rdf <<<<<<<<<<<<<<---------------*************-------------->>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> 2. Integration in Applications1.1. Login to Oracle Applications with System Administrator Responsibility. 1.2. Open the Executable screen to register the report. Sys Admin : Concurrent > Program > Executable 1.3. Provide the information as shown below and save the record. 1.4. The next step is to define the report and its parameters by using the Define screen. Sys Admin : Concurrent > Program > Define 1.5. Select your desired Output Format from the list (HTML, PCL, PDF, PostScript, Text and XML), here I have selected PDF. 1.6. After providing all the required information on Definition main screen click Parameters (button) to provide parameters of the report.
Sr.
Parameter Name
Value Set
Default Type
Default Value
Prompt
Token
10
Set of Books ID
GL_SRS_NULL_NUM
Profile
GL_SET_OF_BKS_ID
Set Of Books ID
P_SET_OF_BOOKS_ID
Note: Define all the parameters of report as here we have only one so we will just save the record and will close the form. 1.7. Now the next question is who can access this report? To do so we have to assign a Request Group. 1.8. To find the Request Group open the responsibility screen and search “General Ledger Super user” responsibility. Sys Admin : Security > Responsibility > Define 1.9. Copy or note the Request Group Name which is “GL Concurrent Program Group” 1.10. Now to add the report to this Request Group we will open the Request screen, Sys Admin : Security > Responsibility > Request 1.11. Query to find the Request Group “GL Concurrent Program Group” . 1.12. Add a record and enter report name in the name field as shown below. 1.13. Save the information. 1.14. Now to check the integrated report switch to General Ledger responsibility and submit a request. Note: I f the report failed and following error of Oracle Toolkit appears then you will have to set the Display Settings. For this search Display Settings in this document. <<<<<<<<<<<<<<---------------*************-------------->>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> 3. Reports output in Excel We can get the text reports output in excel instead of browser. The steps are as below, 1.1. Login as System Administrator and open the Viewer Options screen, Sys Admin : Install > Viewer Options 1.2. Create a new Viewer option with the following input data, table border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" style="width: 500px;">
File Format
Text
Mime Type
application/ vnd.ms-excel
1.3. Save the data. 1.4. Open System Profile screen and search Viewer: Application for Text, 1.5. Select the defined viewer option. Like here we had defined Microsoft Excel 11i for user XX_USER. 1.6. Logout and login again to submit a report. 1.7. Submit a text report like Active Users and the view its output. 1.8. After completion click View Output (button) and a MS Internet Explorer dialog will appear. Click Open (button) on the dialog and the report will be displayed in MS Excel. Note: I f this dialog is not appearing then follow the following steps to enable download settings of MS Internet Explorer. 1.9. To enable download settings, IE Menu: Tools > Security > Internet > Custom Level > Downloads 1.10. Ensure that Download settings are enabled. Note: These download settings are important to set if you are trying to export data from a form of any module using Menu > File > Export.
e3:T120a,
The following are recommended Microsoft Internet Explorer settings for Oracle Applications. 1. Security Zones There are four security zones in MSIE and Oracle recommends security setting at Medium. Which zone is used is dependant how you are accessing your site (Internet or Local Intranet) and set up within the zones themselves (Trusted sites & restricted sites).
Zone
Usage
Default
Internet
Web sites not placed in other zones
Medium
Local intranet
Web sites on your organization's intranet
Medium-Low
Trusted sites
Web sites you trust not to damage your computer
Low
Restricted sites
Web sites that could potentially damage your computer
High
1.1. The Trusted Sites zone is recommended with a 'Medium' Security Setting. Open the Security tab, MSIE: Menu > Tools > Internet Options > Security tab > Trusted Sites icon > Sites 1.2. Uncheck the check box “Require server verification (https: () for all sites in this zone” . 1.3. Add the applications hostname and domain. 1.4. Click add (button) to add the link in the Trusted Websites. 2. JInitiator JInitiator 1.3.1.x versions will download and install on any security setting except High, therefore the security setting should not need any adjustments at download and install time. 3. Page Refresh When using Oracle Self-Service products to view the most current data the following settings need to be set in MSIE. 3.1. To set 'Page Refresh', MSIE: Menu > Tools > Internet Options > General tab > Settings 3.2. The option 'Every visit to the page' should be checked. 4. Shared Desktop Security I f a PC is shared by multiple users then encrypted pages should not be saved on the pc locally. 4.1. Open the Advanced tab of Internet Options, MSIE: Menu > Tools > Internet Options > Advanced tab > Security 4.2. Check the box of 'Do not save encrypted pages to Disk'. Click OK to confirm changes. 5. Auto complete in Internet Explorer MSIE automatically displays the last entered values so for security reason it is better to disable this option. 5.1. Open Content tab, MSIE: Menu > Tools > Internet Options > Content 5.2. Click Settings (button) of AutoComplete region and uncheck 'Forms' and 'User names and passwords on forms'. Click OK to confirm the changes. 6. HTTP 1.1/Keep Alive Settings For Oracle Applications version 11.5.9 or later “HTTP 1.1/Keep Alive” should be enabled.6.1. Open the Advanced tab, MSIE: Menu > Tools > Internet Options > Advanced 6.2.Under HTTP 1.1 Settings both options “Use HTTP 1.1” and “Use HTTP 1.1 through proxy connections” should bi checked.
e4:T9df,
1. Personalize fields properties In this topic we will personalize three properties of user definition form.
Field
Action
Person
Change title to Employee
E-Mail
Hide the field.
Fax
Hide the field.
1.5. Login as Sys Admin and open the user form, Sys Admin: Security > User > Define 1.6. Open the personalize form, Menu > Help > Diagnostics > Custom Code > Personalize 1.7. Provide apps password on the displayed dialog. 1.8. Enter the required data and select WHEN-NEW-FORM-INSTANCE as trigger event. 1.9. Click the Actions (tab) and click in the first row, 1.10. Now click in the next row to set properties of E-Mail field. 1.11. Click in the next row to set properties of Fax field. 1.12. Save the information. 1.13. Close both Personalization and Users form. 1.14. Open the user definition form as this time our trigger will execute. 1.15. View the changes.
e5:T5b0,
1. Changing color scheme1.1. Login as Sys Admin and open the System profiles, Sys Admin: Profile > System 1.2. As we will change the color scheme only for our XX_USER so enter the user name in the User field and Java Color Scheme in the Profile field. 1.3. Click on Find (button). 1.4. Under the User name open LOV and select a color like I have selected blue. 1.5. Click the OK (button). 1.6. Save the data and logout from the Oracle Applications. 1.7. Now login as XX_USER and view the color change. Note: The above change will only work for XX_USER as we changed color scheme only for this user. For a Site level change do not provide user.
e6:T21cb,
1. Configuring Windows Shared Printer on Linux1.1. Login as root on Linux Server (Oracle Applications Server), Linux AS 4 : Applications > System Settings > Printing 1.2. Click New (button). 1.4. Enter Queue name in the name field and a short description. 1.5. Click Forward (button). 1.4. Enter Queue name in the name field and a short description. 1.5. Click Forward (button). 1.6. Select a queue type by clicking on LOV. 1.7. Select Networked Windows (SMB). Note: For security reasons the Share names are removed from the above window. 1.8. Click Specify (button). 1.9. Here the Server is the windows XP machine (name / IP address) where printer is installed. In the Share field enter windows XP machine (name / IP address) and the printer share name. The next field is User name here provide domain name ,user name and provided windows domain password in the Password field. 1.10. Click OK (button). 1.11. Select the Queue and click Forward (button). Select the manufacturer. 1.13. Select HP as the manufacturer. 1.14. Select or type LaserJet 1200. Note: The text box will appear when you will start typing. 1.15. Click Forward (button). 1.16. Confirm the Type, Share and Printer and Click Finish (button). 1.17. Click Yes if you want to print a test print. Note: I f you will not take a test print then on next screen you will have to click Apply (button) to save the settings. 1.18. I f test print is printed then click Apply (button). ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. Defining Printer in Oracle Applications We will use default definitions of Printer Drivers, Print Styles and Printer Types as most of the drivers of common printer are already provided by Oracle in Oracle Applications. In case you have a printer of which drivers are not defined then you will have to provide information on these screens. 2.1. Login as XX_USER and switch to SYSADMIN responsibility, Sysadmin : Install > Printer > Driver 2.2. To define Printer Drivers the SRW Driver will be used while defining Print Styles so keep in mind while entering information in this field. The Arguments, Initialization and Reset settings will be available in the printer manual or ask your hardware vendor. 2.3. To define Printer Style open the Style screen, Sysadmin : Install > Printer > Style 2.4. Provide Style Name, SRW Driver and other required information. 2.5. The next step is to define Printer Type. Sysadmin : Install > Printer > Types 2.6. Provide Style defined earlier. 2.7. Now we will define the printer by providing Printer name which we configured on Linux machine. Sysadmin : Install > Printer > Register 2.8. Enter HPLaser in the Printer field and select HPLJ4 in the Type field. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3. Reports Printing using above Defined Printer3.1. Submit a new request of Active Users Report, 3.2. Click Options (button). 3.3. Select HPLaser in the Printer field and enter 1 in the Copies field. 3.4. Click OK (button). 3.5. Report should be printed otherwise verify the above steps. 3.6. We can also assign Printer to Concurrent Programs. Open the Concurrent Programs screen, Sysadmin : Concurrent > Program > Define 3.7. Search Active Users program. 3.8. Select HPLaser in the Output Printer. 3.9. Save the information. 3.10. Submit a new request of Active Users and check that HPLaser is the default printer in the Print to field. Note: Default is 0 in the Copies field and you can change it by changing system profile Concurrent:Report Copies. Here you can provide by clicking the Options (button).
e7:T663,
Next, let us check the deployed process through Weblogic’s EM console. Openhttp://localhost:7001/em. Drill down to “default” domain from SOA node on the left side navigation bar. Select “HelloWorld [1.0]” process and click on “Test” service. Under “Input Arguments” section, we can see “input” as one of the fields of payload. Enter “World” in input field and click on “Test Web Service”. Input payload can also be seen in XML format by selecting “XML View”. Response will have “Hello” prefixed to our input string “World”. This completes our Hello World process.
e8:Tff7,
1. Page Size Customization While printing checks (cheques) and invoices there is always a requirement to customize the page size on dot matrix printers while printing on the scroll (continuous paper sheet). Here for demonstration I have selected EPSON LQ-300+ and will demonstrate on Windows XP operating system. 1.1. Login as local administrator on your Windows XP machine, Windows : Start > Printer and Faxes 1.2. Install the drivers of your printer if not already installed. Here we have EPSON LQ- 300+ ESC/ P 2 installed. 1.3. Click (single) on the installed printer and from menu File > Server Properties 1.4. Select any Form and enable the check box Create a new form. 1.5. Provide Form name and provide your desired Paper size (Width & Height) in inches.
Form name
Erpstuff paper size 8.50x4.00
Width
8.50in (inches)
Heigh
4.00in (inches)
1.6. Click OK (button) to save the settings. 1.7. Now open the properties page of your printer by right clicking the printer icon. 1.8. Click Printing Preferences (button) and select Paper Size erpstuff paper size 8.50x4.00. 1.9. Click OK (button) on all screens to save the changes. 1.10. Send a print from Oracle Report Builder. Note: The layout of the reports developed in Oracle Report Builder 6i based on scott schema. 1.11. Make sure the proper Printer Name is selected. 1.12. Make sure the proper Printer Name is selected and also verify the Properties. 1.13. Take the printout from the printer and match with your requirements.
e9:T32ae,
The most powerful feature of Oracle Applications is the Flexfield feature. I t can be defined as “A flexfield is a field which contains sub-fields or segments” . There are two types of flexfields, Key flexfield (KFF) and descriptive flexfield (DFF). Both flexfields contain segments where each segment has a name and set of valid values. DFF is used to capture descriptive information. As Oracle has provided maximum fields to capture information on each screen but few companies still want to capture more data on certain screen but in a different way. For example on Oracle Assets you want to capture computers detailed information like RAM, HDD, CDD, Mother board etc. So one way for Oracle was to add such fields on the form for you but just think that Oracle Applications is not specific to computer companies. Here there is a need of DFF. I t is context sensitive and for each context value different fields would be available. Just for understanding let me give another example as DFF is bit confusing. A company requirement is to capture different detail of computer parts CDD, RAM, HDD, Monitor for each will have different sort of info, CDD: Make, Speed Monitor: Make, Size, Serial no So in the context value when the user will select CDD two fields Make, Speed will be displayed for input while on select of Monitor Make, Size and Serial no. I hope it would be enough for understanding DFF. 1. Locating Descriptive Flexfield (DFF) on the Form In this topic we will define a DFF on Paybles Invoice Distributions form. The first question is how we can know which DFF is for that form. So we will discuss that how to locate a DFF on a form. 1.1. Open the Invoices form, Payables: Invoices > Entry > Invoices 1.2. Search any entered invoice so you can move in the form or enter a new one. 1.3. Click on Distributions (button). 1.4. Open the Examine from Menu: Help > Diagnostic > Examine. 1.5. Provide the APPS password if prompted. 1.6. Note the value of Block D_SUM_FOLDER field and click the LOV button of Block field. 1.7. Select $DESCRI PTI VE_FLEXFI ELD$ and click OK (button). 1.8. Locate D_SUM_FOLDER here it is D_SUM_FOLDER.DI ST_DF and click OK (button). 1.9. Note the value displayed I nvoice Distribution (Payables) . Here the Invoice Distribution is DFF name and Payables is the name of application. 2. Defining Descriptive Flexfield (DFF)2.1. Open the Segments form, Payables: Setup > Flexfield > Descriptive > Segments Or Sys Admin: Application > Flexfield > Descriptive > Segments 2.2. Search for Application Payables and Title Invoice Distribution. 2.3. Elements defined as Global Data Elements will be for each transaction so we can also call that these will be used as header. Soon you will know. 2.4. Enter the information in the required fields. 2.5. I have assigned Value Set 16 Characters so the length will be of 16 characters. I f you will not assign Value Set then a warning message will appear that it will truncate the field. I have created only one element so you can create more. 2.6. Save the data. 2.7. In the second line enter Freight as code and then click Segments (button). 2.8. Enter the following information.
Number
Name
Window Prompt
Column
10
Common
Common
ATTRIBUTE1
2.9. Save the data. 2.10. Now we will define for Imports. 2.11. Click Segments (button). 2.12. Enter the following information.
Number
Name
Window Prompt
Column
10
LC Number
LC No
ATTRIBUTE1
20
Shipment Number
Shipment No
ATTRIBUTE13
30
Expense Head
Expense Head
ATTRIBUTE15
40
Expense Sub Head
Expense Subhead
ATTRIBUTE2
2.13. Save and close this form. 2.14. Create another line for Insurance. 2.15. Click Segments (button). 2.16. Enter the following information.
Number
Name
Window Prompt
Column
10
Name of Insurer
Name of Insurer
ATTRIBUTE1
20
Nature of Policy
Nature of Policy
ATTRIBUTE2
30
Next Premium Due
Next Premium Due
ATTRIBUTE3
2.17. Save and close this form. 2.18. On the main form create a line for Rent and enter the following information.
Number
Name
Window Prompt
Column
10
Location
Location
ATTRIBUTE1
20
Address
Address
ATTRIBUTE2
30
Nature
Nature
ATTRIBUTE3
40
Monthly Rent
Monthly Rent
ATTRIBUTE4
50
Lease Term
Lease Term
ATTRIBUTE5
2.19. Save and close this form. 2.20. On the main form create a line for Utilities and enter the following information.
Number
Name
Window Prompt
Column
10
Type of Expense
Type of Expense
ATTRIBUTE1
20
Period of Expense
Period of Expense
ATTRIBUTE2
30
Meter Number
Meter Number
ATTRIBUTE3
40
Telephone Number
Telephone Number
ATTRIBUTE4
2.21. Save and close this form. 2.22. On the main form create a line for Vehicle Running and enter the following information.
Number
Name
Window Prompt
Column
10
Common
Common
ATTRIBUTE1
2.23. Save and close this form. 2.24. Enable Check box Freeze Flexfield Definition and save. The DFF definition will be compiled. 2.25. Click OK (button). 3. Entry in Defining Descriptive Flexfield (DFF)3.1. Open the Invoices form, Payables: Invoices > Entry > Invoices 3.2. Create a new invoice. 3.3. Click Distribution (button). 3.4. Enter the required information. 3.5. Click the field labeled [ ] . 3.6. Here Customer Invoice No is our Global and this will be entered for all type of expenses. 3.7. Click the Select the Expense Type field. 3.8. Select Insurance (or any which you want to enter information for) and enter the information in the fields displayed for that Expense type. Note: As we have not assigned any Value Set so here we can see that our fields length is truncated and we need to scroll. 3.9. Here I have selected Utilities and the fields are displayed which were defined for Utilities.
ea:T94b,
1. Customized Menu Definition Here we will create a customized menu and a responsibility. Then menu will be assigned to this responsibility. I have selected AP Super User menu to find the name of Invoices Submenu. 1.1. Open the Menu form, Sys Admin : Application > Menu 1.2. Search AP_NAVIGATE_GUI12 menu, 1.3. Note/Copy the Submenu of Invoices which is AP_INVOICES_GUI12 so we will assign the entire invoice related Functions to our new menu. 1.4. Again query the menu AP_I NVOI CES_GUI 12. 1.5. So we will assign this menu to our responsibility and the user will have these functions to which we will assign that responsibility. 2. Responsibility Creation to Assign Menu2.1. Open the Define form, Sys Admin: Security > Responsibility > Define 2.2. Enter the required information and in Menu enter AP_I NVOI CES_GUI 12. 2.3. Save the data. 3. Responsibility Assignment to User3.1. Open the User form, Sys Admin: Security > User > Define 3.2. Search the XX_USER (you can search the user to which you want to assign) and assign XX AP Invoice Entry responsibility. 3.3. Save the data. 3.4. Switch to XX AP Invoice Entry responsibility and the following functions will be displayed.
eb:Tf0e,
Continuing from earlier Mediator example, let’s extend our use-case to include Human Workflow. MyDel handles two types of orders: Normal and Express. Normal orders are processed only after order items arrive in the Depot. Depot manager then logs into Workflow and releases the order to be sent for further processing in Order Management system. However, Express orders are directly sent for processing into Order Management system. In this example, we are going to route orders through an Order Router that will route Express and Normal orders to Order Management service and Human Workflow respectively. Depot Manager logs into Workflow system to release order for the goods received in Depot. Released orders will be written to Order Management system. Deploy the HumanWorkflowExample as specified in the Deployment section. This creates two instances of HumanWorkflowExample. One instance, with EXPRESS order entry, will directly write information to Order Management system where as the other entry creates a workflow that awaits Depot Manager’s approval. Click on the process Instance ID that is in “Running” stage. Process flow for this specific instance will be shown in a pop up window. We can see the process is waiting for Human Workflow stage. Click on the “OrderApprovalTask”. In the above screenshot, its the link on the left side of “Human Workflow Component”. From the next screen, click on “Go To Woklist Application” and login to workflow application. In my case, user name is “weblogic”. We can see an order entry pending for Approval. Click on “Actions” and then “Yes”. Come back to HumanWorfkflowExample in Enterprise Manager and check that process is now complete. Click on completed process instance, in this case 150010, to see process flow. We can see that OrderRouter invoked OrderApprovalProcess when order type is NORMAL. Once approved, OrdreManagementService is invoked through OrderABCS. We can also see BPEL process flow by clicking on OrderApprovalProcess. Explore Audit Trail and Flow tabs from the next screen. Hope this lesson helped you appreciate Human Workflow features better. I personally prefer BPEL workflow to traditional workflows because of the ease and elegance.
ec:T17036,
This part describes how to administer BPEL process service components and engines.
This part includes the following chapters:
Configuring BPEL Process Service Components and Engines
Monitoring BPEL Process Service Components and Engines
Managing BPEL Process Service Components and Engines
a) Configuring BPEL Process Service Components and Engines
This chapter describes how to configure BPEL process service components and service engines.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Configuring BPEL Process Service Engine Properties
Configuring Automatic Recovery for Oracle BPEL Process Manager
Configuring Automatic Recovery Attempts for Invoke and Callback Messages
Setting the Audit Level at the BPEL Process Service Component Level
i) Configuring BPEL Process Service Engine Properties
You can configure BPEL process service engine properties, which are used by the BPEL process service engine during processing of BPEL service components.
To configure BPEL process service engine properties:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select SOA Administration>BPEL Properties.
Right-click soa-infra.
Select SOA Administration>BPEL Properties.
The BPEL Service Engine Properties page displays properties for setting audit trail and large document thresholds, setting dispatcher thread properties, validating payload schema, and setting the audit trail level.
Description of the illustration soaadmin_bpel_props.gif
2. Make changes to the service engine properties that are appropriate to your environment.
Property
Description
Audit Level
Select one of the following options:
Off: Composite instance tracking and payload tracking information is not collected.
Inherit: Logging equals the SOA Infrastructure audit level. This setting enables the BPEL audit level to automatically change when the global setting is changed. Setting a different audit level tracking in this page overrides the tracking set at the SOA Infrastructure level.
Minimal: The BPEL service engine does not capture any audit details. Therefore, they are not available in the flow audit trails. All other events are logged.
Production: The BPEL service engine does not capture the payload. The payload details are not available in the flow audit trails. Payload details for other BPEL activities are collected, except for assign activities. This level is optimal for most standard operations and testing.
Development: Allows both composite instance tracking and payload tracking. All events are logged. However, it may have an impact on performance. This level is useful mostly for debugging purposes.
Audit Trail Threshold
Enter the maximum size in bytes of an instance audit trail before it is chunked and saved in a dehydration store table separate from the audit trail. If the threshold is exceeded, the View XML link is shown in the audit trail instead of the payload.
Large Document Threshold
Enter the maximum size of a generated document within a BPEL process component instance before it is stored in a separate table in the dehydration store.
Dispatcher System Threads
Specify the total number of threads allocated to process system dispatcher messages. System dispatcher messages are general cleanup tasks that are typically processed quickly by the server (for example, releasing stateful message beans back to the pool). Typically, only a small number of threads are required to handle the number of system dispatch messages generated during runtime.The default value is 2 threads. Any value less than 1 thread is changed to the default.
Dispatcher Invoke Threads
Specify the total number of threads allocated to process invocation dispatcher messages. Invocation dispatcher messages are generated for each payload received and are meant to instantiate a new instance. If the majority of requests processed by the service engine are instance invocations (as opposed to instance callbacks), greater performance may be achieved by increasing the number of invocation threads. Higher thread counts may cause greater CPU utilization due to higher context switching costs.The default value is 20 threads. Any value less than 1 thread is changed to the default.
Dispatcher Engine Threads
Specify the total number of threads allocated to process engine dispatcher messages. Engine dispatcher messages are generated whenever an activity must be processed asynchronously. If most of the processes deployed are durable with a large number of dehydration points (midprocess receive, onMessage, onAlarm, and wait activities), greater performance may be achieved by increasing the number of dispatcher engine threads. Note that higher thread counts can cause greater CPU utilization due to higher context-switching costs.The default value is 30 threads. Any value less than 1 thread is changed to the default.
Payload Validation
Select to enable validation of inbound and outbound messages. Nonschema-compliant payload data is intercepted and displayed as a fault.Note: This setting is independent of the SOA composite application and SOA Infrastructure payload validation level settings. If payload validation is enabled at both the service engine and SOA Infrastructure levels, data is checked twice: once when it enters the SOA Infrastructure, and again when it enters the service engine.
Disable BPEL Monitors and Sensors
Select this checkbox to disable all BPEL monitors and sensors defined for all BPEL components across all deployed SOA composite applications.
3. Click Apply.
If you want to configure advanced BPEL properties in the System MBean Browser, click More BPEL Configuration Properties. Properties that display include, but are not limited to, the following. Descriptions are provided for each property.
BpelcClasspath: The extra BPEL class path to include when compiling BPEL-generated Java sources.
DisableAsserts: Disables the execution of assertions in BPEL, including the bpelx:assert activity.
DisableSensors: Disables all calls to sensors.
ExpirationMaxRetry: The maximum number of times a failed expiration call (wait/onAlarm) is retried before failing.
ExpirationRetryDelay: The delay between expiration retries.
InstanceKeyBlockSize: The size of the block of instance IDs to allocate from the dehydration store during each fetch.
MaximumNumberOfInvokeMessagesInCache: The number of invoke messages stored in in-memory cache.
MaxRecoverAttempt: The number of automatic recovery attempts to submit in the same recoverable instance.
OneWayDeliveryPolicy: Changes whether one-way invocation messages are delivered.
StatsLastN: The size of the most recently processed request list.
SyncMaxWaitTime: The maximum time a request and response operation takes before timing out.
Make changes appropriate to your environment.
ii) Configuring Automatic Recovery for Oracle BPEL Process Manager
Oracle SOA Suite provides an automatic recovery feature in Oracle Enterprise Manager Fusion Middleware Control that enables you to configure and recover:
All activities (for example, wait activities and OnAlarm branches of pick activities) that have an associated expiration date and are scheduled with the SOA Infrastructure to be rescheduled
All activities that are not complete over a provided threshold time
All invoke and call-back messages that are unresolved
To configure automatic recovery:
In the navigator, right-click soa-infra and select SOA Administration>BPEL Properties.
Click More BPEL Configuration Properties.
In the Name column, click RecoveryConfig.
Expand RecurringScheduleConfig.
This section enables you to configure recurring recovery attempts.
5. Set the following properties to values appropriate to your environment, and click Apply.
Property
Description
maxMessageRaiseSize
The maximum number of messages to submit for each recurring recovery attempt. Use this property to limit the impact of recovery on the server. Note that this value specifies the maximum number of messages to filter from activity, invoke, and callback queries; that is, 50 messages from each of the activity, invoke, and callback tables.The default value is 50. A negative value causes all messages selected from the database to be submitted for recovery. A 0 value causes no messages to be selected from the database (effectively disabling recovery).
startWindowTime
The start time for the daily recovery window, specified in a 24-hour notation. Therefore, 2:00 pm is specified as 14:00. The leading zero does not need to be specified for single digit hour values (1:00-9:00).The default value is midnight (00:00). Any invalid parsed time value is defaulted to midnight.
stopWindowTime
The stop time for the daily recovery window, specified in a 24-hour notation. Therefore, 2:00 pm is specified as 14:00. The leading zero does not need to be specified for single digit hour values (1:00-9:00).If you do not want daily recovery, set the start and stop window times to be the same value. If the stop window time is earlier than the start window time, both the start and stop window times are changed to their respective default values.The default value is midnight (04:00), effectively setting recurring recovery to run until 04:00.Any invalid parsed time values default to 00:00.
subsequentTriggerDelay
The number of seconds between recovery attempts during daily recurring startup recovery periods. If the next recovery trigger falls outside of the current recovery period, that trigger is not scheduled until the next recurring recovery period (tomorrow).The default value is 300 (five minutes). A negative value causes the default to be selected.
threshHoldTimeInMinutes
This is the threshold time in minutes to ignore for automatic recovery processing. For automatic invoke and callback recovery, this value is used for picking messages with a received date less than the threshhold time.For automatic activities recovery, this value is used for picking activities with a modification date less than the threshold time.This property prevents the message contention scenario in which a BPEL process service engine picks up a message for recovery while another thread on the service engine is in the middle of processing the message. This property ensures that the recovery part of the service engine only attempts recovery on messages older than the value for threshHoldTimeInMinutes.The default value is 10 minutes. A negative value causes the default to be selected.
6.
7. Expand StartupScheduleConfig.
This section enables you to configure server startup recovery attempts.
8. Set the following properties to values appropriate to your environment, and click Apply.
Property
Description
maxMessageRaiseSize
The maximum number of messages to submit for each startup recovery attempt. Use this property to limit the impact of recovery on the server. Note that this value specifies the maximum number of messages to filter from activity, invoke, and callback queries; that is, 50 messages from each of the activity, invoke, and callback tables.The default value is 50. A negative value causes all messages selected from the database to be submitted for recovery. A zero value causes no messages to be selected from the database (effectively disabling recovery).
startupRecoveryDuration
Specifies the number of seconds that the startup recovery period lasts. After the server starts, it goes into a startup recovery period. During this period, pending activities and undelivered callback and invocation messages are resubmitted for processing.The default value is 600 (ten minutes). A negative or zero value disables startup recovery.
subsequentTriggerDelay
The number of seconds between recovery attempts during the server startup recovery period. If the next recovery trigger falls outside the server startup period, that trigger is not scheduled and the server moves into the recurring recovery period.The default value is 300 (five minutes). A negative value causes the default to be selected.
9.
Note:In a cluster, it is possible for different nodes to concurrently attempt an automatic recovery of the same items. The first node to lock the item attempts the recovery, while other nodes may raise an exception that can be safely ignored.
iii) Configuring Automatic Recovery Attempts for Invoke and Callback Messages
You can configure the number of automatic recovery attempts to submit in the same recoverable instance. The value you provide specifies the maximum number of times invoke and callback messages are recovered. If the value is 0 (the default value), it recovers all messages. Once the number of recovery attempts on a message exceeds the specified value, a message is marked as nonrecoverable.
To configure automatically recovery attempts for invoke and callback messages:
In the navigator, right-click soa-infra and select SOA Administration>BPEL Properties.
Click More BPEL Configuration Properties.
Go to MaxRecoverAttempt.
In the Value field, enter a value.
Click Apply.
iv) Setting the Audit Level at the BPEL Process Service Component Level
You can set the audit level for a BPEL process service component. This setting takes precedence over audit level settings at the SOA Infrastructure, service engine, and SOA composite application levels.
The service component level setting is only available for BPEL processes and is not supported for the mediator, human workflow, and business rule service components.
There are two ways to set the audit level for BPEL process service components. Supported values are Off, Minimal, Inherit, Development, and Production.
To set the audit level for BPEL process service components:
In the System MBean Browser of Oracle Enterprise Manager Fusion Middleware Control:
In the navigation tree, expand the SOA folder.
Right-click soa-infra, and select Administration>System MBean Browser.
Select Application Defined MBeans>oracle.soa.config>Server:server_name>SCAComposite>Composite_Name>SCAComposite.SCAComponent>BPEL_Service_Component>Properties.
Click the Add icon.
Expand the Element_number folder.
From the many list, select false.
In the name field, enter bpel.config.auditlevel.
In the value field, enter a value.
Click Apply.
b) Monitoring BPEL Process Service Components and Engines
This chapter describes how to monitor BPEL process service components and service engines.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Viewing the Audit Trail and Process Flow of a BPEL Process Service Component
Monitoring BPEL Process Service Component Instances and Faults
Monitoring BPEL Process Service Component Instances
Monitoring Sensor Data and Values in BPEL Process Service Components
Monitoring BPEL Process Service Engine Instances and Faults
Monitoring BPEL Process Service Engine Request and Thread Statistics
Monitoring BPEL Process Service Engine Instances
Monitoring Deployed BPEL Processes in the Service Engine
Viewing the Audit Trail and Process Flow of a BPEL Process Service Component
This section describes how to view the audit trail and process flow of a BPEL process service component in a SOA composite application instance.
Note:This section assumes a SOA composite application instance has been initiated.
To view the audit trail and process flow of a BPEL process service component:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Home.
Select the Deployed Composites tab.
In the Composite section, select a specific SOA composite application.
Under soa-infra, select a specific SOA composite application.
The Dashboard page for the selected composite application appears.
2. Use one of the following methods to select an instance of the application:
For recent instances of this application, click the instance number of an instance in the Instance ID column of the Recent Instances
For all instances of this application, click the Instances tab, then click a specific instance in the Instance ID
The Flow Trace page displays the following details:
The Faults section shows the faults occurring in the services, service components, and references that comprise the SOA composite application. Sensors enable you to monitor BPEL process activities, variables, and faults during runtime. Selecting a fault highlights the row in the Trace section in which the fault occurred. Closing the fault clears the selection in the Trace
The Sensors section displays details about composite sensors included in the service and reference binding components of the SOA composite application. The total number of sensors is shown in the section header. Composite sensors can be added to service and reference binding components during design time in Oracle JDeveloper. You cannot add composite sensors to service components. Selecting a composite sensor in this section highlights the service or reference in the Trace section in which composite sensor data was collected. Closing the sensor clears the selection in the Trace
Note: Expand the Faults or Sensors sections one at a time. The fault or sensor information is only displayed for viewing in this way.
The Trace section shows the sequence of the message flow through the services, service components, and references that comprise the SOA composite application.
The flow trace is a runtime trail of a message flow identified by an execution context ID (ECID) that is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the page. An ECID enables you to track a message flow that crosses instances of different composite applications. The flow trace lists all services, references, and components across composite applications participating in the flow.
Description of the illustration bp_compsensor3.gif
For the flow example in the Trace section, the service binding component, service components, and reference binding component involved in the flow have successfully received and processed messages.
Select a fault in the Faults
This highlights the row in the Trace section in which the fault occurred.
Close the fault to clear the selection in the Trace
Expand the Sensors section to display composite sensors.
Description of the illustration bp_compsensor1.gif
Select a sensor in the Sensors
This highlights the row in the Trace section in which the composite sensor data was collected.
If there are BPEL process messages that require recovery from the Recovery page of the BPEL process service engine, a BPEL Message Recovery Required inline warning message and recovery icon are displayed.
Description of the illustration bpel_recoveryecid2.gif
Click Show Details or the recovery icon to display a Warning dialog with the following recovery details:
The number of invoke, callback, and activity recoverable message types
The ECID value
Description of the illustration bpel_recoveryecid.gif
Use this information for creating search criteria for filtering the recoverable messages on the Recovery page of the BPEL process service engine. You can copy the ECID number from the Warning dialog, paste it into the ECID field, and select the recoverable message type from the Type list.
The display of this message recovery information on the Flow Trace page is controlled by the AuditConfig property in the System MBean Browser. By default, this property is set to All, which enables this information to be displayed. To prevent this information from displaying on the Flow Trace page, set the bpelRecoveryStatus key to Off for the AuditConfig property in the More SOA Infra Advanced Configuration Properties section of the SOA Infrastructure Common Properties page.
Note the following restrictions with ECIDs:
A separate ECID is displayed for each instance of a composite application and not for the composite level ECID that can track the complete flow of any instances for the composite application.
To get complete flow information, you must find the composite level ECID in the log files. Use that value to get all information for a particular composite and therefore all its executed instances.
ECIDs are not propagated through business events. This can limit the amount of logging information that is collected. For example, if you publish an event that is subscribed to in the same composite application, limited logging information is available.
In the Instance column of the Trace section, click a specific BPEL process service component instance. Service component instances can be accessed from this section; services and references cannot be accessed.
The Instance page appears.
Description of the illustration bpel_comp_audittrail.gif
Use these four pages to view the audit trail, flow, sensor values, and faults of a BPEL process service component instance. The following links provide additional details about the instance:
Flow Tracelink: Click the breadcrumbs in the upper left-hand corner of the page to access the flow trace for the ECID (composite instance) that contains this BPEL component instance.
Information icon: Click the information icon to the right of the name of the BPEL component (in the page title) to see biographical information about this BPEL instance. This information includes a summary of the instance, including instance ID, ECID, instance startup time or last modification time, instance state (for example, running), and number of faults.
This icon is only displayed on the Audit Trail pages of BPEL processes and Oracle Mediators, and not on the pages of human tasks and business rules.
Audit Level Settings: Click to display information details, such as the audit level used by this instance.
View Raw XML: Click to display the raw XML of the audit trail.
The Audit Trail page displays execution details about the activities in the BPEL process.
Scroll through the audit trail to check for errors and expand the payload links to view their contents at a given point in the flow.
Notes:
Canceled onMessage branches of pick or scope activities that did not execute are displayed in the audit trail. However, the flow diagram does not show these same canceled onMessage branches. This is the expected behaviour.
The following error message appears when a transaction is displayed as rolled back in the Audit Trail page:
The transaction was rolled back. The work performed for bpel
instance "instance_ number" was rolled back to the previous
Dehydration point, but the audit trail has been saved.
You can recover the instance from the recovery console by
resubmitting the callback message or activity for execution
This message does not specifically state whether recovery should happen on either the activity or the callback. This is the intended behavior. Oracle recommends that you do not recover each instance through the audit messages. Instead, set up automatic recovery to recover these instances.
Click the Flow tab
A flow diagram of the BPEL process activities appears. This flow diagram shows a fault highlighted in a BPEL process activity.
Description of the illustration bpel_comp_flow1.gif
Click an activity to view the flow of the payload through the process.
Note:
If using Microsoft Internet Explorer, you can click Copy details to clipboard to copy the activity details to the clipboard. If using Mozilla Firefox, this link does not appear. Instead, you must manually select the text, and copy and paste it to a file.
Scroll through the flow diagram to check for errors and click the highlighted activity to view error messages.
Description of the illustration bpel_comp_flow2.gif
Close the message.
Click the Faults
This page shows the error message, whether you can recover from the fault, the time at which the fault occurred, and the activity in which the fault occurred. This page displays the faults in the BPEL component instance (but not the faults that occurred in a service or reference binding component).
If a fault occurs when processing activities, the activity location of the fault is not usually shown in the Activity column.
For Oracle BPEL Process Manager, this column only shows a receive activity that has timed out. In all other cases, this column is empty.
For Oracle BPM, this column is always empty.
This is the expected behaviour.
You can recover from instance faults identified as recoverable. This page lists all instance faults, recoverable or not. The component instance faults that occurred in a service or reference are not listed here.
This page enables you to target individual faults from which to recover, and provides a degree of fault recovery granularity not available on other pages.
Description of the illustration bpel_instancedetails_faults.gif
However, you cannot perform bulk fault recoveries on this page. To perform bulk fault recovery, use one of the following pages:
Faults page of the BPEL process service engine or of a specific BPEL process service component
Faults and Rejected Messages page of a specific SOA composite application or of the SOA Infrastructure
Select a fault for recovery that has been identified as recoverable through one of the following methods. The page refreshes to display a fault recovery section at the bottom of the page.
If you click a fault in the Error Message column, a popup message displays details about the fault, including the fault ID, fault time, fault location, fault type, and complete error message text. If the fault is identified as recoverable, a Recover Now button that you can click is displayed.
You click a fault identified as recoverable in the Recovery
Select an action from the Recovery Action
Action
Description
Retry
Retries the instance with an option to provide a retry success action. An example of a scenario in which to use this recovery action is when the fault occurred because the service provider was not reachable due to a network error. The network error is now resolved.
Abort
Terminates the entire instance.
Replay
Replays the entire scope activity again in which the fault occurred.
Rethrow
Rethrows the current fault. BPEL fault handlers (catch branches) are used to handle the fault. By default, all exceptions are caught by the fault management framework unless an explicit rethrow fault policy is provided.
Continue
Ignores the fault and continues processing (marks the faulted activity as a success).
Your selection causes additional fields to appear. For example, the following fields are displayed if you select Rethrow:
Description of the illustration bpel_instancefaultrec2.gif
Use the After Successful Retry list to select defined actions to invoke after a successful retry. If you select a variable in the Variable list, you can edit the value in the Value text box.
Click the Back button of your browser to exit the flow diagram.
c) Monitoring BPEL Process Service Component Instances and Faults
You can monitor recent instances and faults for BPEL process service components. Each service component in a SOA composite application has its own instance ID. These IDs are different from the overall instance ID of the SOA composite application of which each service component is a part.
To monitor BPEL process service component instances and faults:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Home.
Select the Deployed Composites tab.
In the Composite section, select a specific SOA composite application.
Under soa-infra, select a specific SOA composite application.
2. In the Component Metrics section, select the BPEL process service component.
3. Click Dashboard.
The upper part of the Dashboard page displays the following details:
Recent instances of the BPEL process service component, including the instance ID, the state of the instance (for example, completed successfully or faulted), the start time, the last modification time, and logs describing the instance.
Recent faults in the BPEL process service component, including the error message, whether you can recover from the fault, the time at which the fault occurred, the instance ID of the BPEL service component, the BPEL activity in which the fault occurred, and logs describing the fault.
The average processing time for each activity in the BPEL process service component.
Description of the illustration bpel_comp_dash_upper.gif
In the Recent Instances section, perform the following tasks:
. In the Instance ID column, click an instance ID for a service component to view its audit trail, process flow, sensor values, and faults.
In the Logs column, click a specific log to access the Log Messages page with filtered messages specific to that instance.
Click Show All below the section to access the Instances page of the service component.
In the Recent Faults section, perform the following tasks:
. In the Error Message column, click an error message to display complete information about the fault. If the fault is identified as recoverable, click the Recover Now link to perform fault recovery.
In the Recovery column, click a fault identified as Recoverable to perform fault recovery at the component instance level.
In the Logs column, click a specific log to access the Log Messages page with filtered messages specific to that instance.
Click Show All below the section to access the Faults page of the service component.
The lower part of the Dashboard page displays the following details:
Details about the time distribution for activities, including the activity name, the total number of activities for all instances, and the average execution time
Description of the illustration bpel_activity_time_dist.gif
A graphical representation of the number of successful, faulted, and incoming (pending) instances of the BPEL process service component over a specific time range. Click Table View to display throughput details for the last five minutes, including the throughput for successful instances, the total faults throughput, and the instance throughput.
Description of the illustration bpel_comp_dash_lower.gif
Monitoring BPEL Process Service Component Instances
You can monitor BPEL process service component instances. Each service component has its own unique instance ID. This ID is in addition to the instance ID of the overall SOA composite application of which this service component is a part.
To monitor BPEL process service component instances:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Home.
Select the Deployed Composites tab.
In the Composite section, select a specific SOA composite application.
Under soa-infra, select a specific SOA composite application.
2. Select the BPEL process service component in the Component Metrics
3. Click Instances.
The Instances page displays the following details:
A utility for searching for a specific BPEL service component instance by specifying criteria and clicking Search.
BPEL process service component instances, including the instance ID, instance state (for example, completed or faulted), instance start time, last instance modification time, and log files describing the instance.
Description of the illustration bpel_com_dash_instances.gif
In the Instance ID column, click an instance ID for a service component to view its audit trail, process flow, sensor values, and faults.
In the Logs column, click a specific log to access the Log Messages page with filtered messages specific to that instance.
Monitoring Sensor Data and Values in BPEL Process Service Components
You can view the fault, activity, and variable sensor data of a BPEL process service component. You design sensors in BPEL processes and trackable fields in Oracle JDeveloper. Sensors enable you to monitor BPEL process activities, variables, and faults during runtime.
To monitor sensor data and values in BPEL process service components:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Home.
Select the Deployed Composites tab.
In the Composite section, select a specific SOA composite application.
Under soa-infra, select a specific SOA composite application.
2. Use one of the following methods to select an instance of the application:
For recent instances of this application, click the instance number of an instance in the Instance ID column of the Recent Instances
For all instances of this application, click the Instances tab, then click a specific instance in the Instance ID
The Flow Trace page appears.
Click a specific BPEL process service component in the Instance column of the Trace
Click the Sensor Values
Select a sensor to view details.
If you created JMS sensors in your BPEL process, JMS sensor values are not displayed in Oracle Enterprise Manager Fusion Middleware Control. Only sensor values in which the sensor action is to store the values in the database appear (for example, database sensor values).
Monitoring BPEL Process Service Engine Instances and Faults
You can monitor instances and faults of all BPEL process service components running in the BPEL process service engine. These BPEL process service components can be part of separate SOA composite applications.
To monitor BPEL process service engine instances and faults:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
Right-click soa-infra.
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
2. Click Dashboard.
The upper part of the Dashboard page displays recent instances of all BPEL process service components running in the BPEL process service engine, including the instance ID of the service component, the service component name, the SOA composite application of which the service component is a part, the state of the instance (for example, completed successfully or faulted), the instance start time, the last modification time, and logs describing the instance.
Description of the illustration bpel_dashboard_upper.gif
3. In the Recent Instances section, perform the following monitoring tasks:
In the Instance ID column, click an instance ID for a service component to view its audit trail, process flow, sensor values, and faults.
In the Component column, click a specific service component to access its home page.
In the Composite column, click a specific SOA composite application to access its home page.
In the Logs column, click a specific log to access the Log Messages page with filtered messages specific to that instance.
Click Show All below the section to access the Instances page of the service engine.
The lower part of the Dashboard page displays the following details:
The service components running in the service engine, the SOA composite applications of the service components, the state of the applications (for example, running), and the total, running, and faulted instances in the service engine.
The recent faults in the service engine, including the error message, whether you can recover from the fault, the time at which the fault occurred, the SOA composite application in which the fault occurred, the service component, the instance ID of the service component, the activity in which the fault occurred, and log files describing the fault.
Description of the illustration bpel_dashboard_low.gif
In the Components section, perform the following tasks:
. In the Name column, click a specific service component to access its home page.
In the Composite column, click a specific SOA composite application to access its home page.
Click Show All below the section to access the Deployed Components page of the service engine.
In the Recent Faults section, perform the following tasks:
. In the Error Message column, click an error message to display complete information about the fault. If the fault is identified as recoverable, click the Recover Now link to perform fault recovery.
In the Recovery column, click a fault identified as Recoverable to perform fault recovery at the component instance level.
In the Composite column, click a specific SOA composite application to access its home page.
In the Component column, click a specific service component to access its home page.
In the Component Instance ID column, click an instance ID for a service component to view its audit trail, process flow, sensor values, and faults.
In the Logs column, click a specific log to access the Log Messages page with filtered messages specific to that fault.
Description of the illustration bpel_comp_sen.gif
Monitoring BPEL Process Service Engine Request and Thread Statistics
You can monitor request and thread statistics for all BPEL process service components running in the service engine.
To monitor BPEL process service engine request and thread statistics:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
Right-click soa-infra.
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
2. Click Statistics.
The upper part of the Statistics page displays the following details. Click the Help icon for additional details.
Pending requests in the service engine
Active requests in the service engine
Thread statistics for the service engine
Description of the illustration bpel_stats_upper.gif
The lower part of the Statistics page displays details about the count and minimum, maximum, and average request processing times.
Monitoring BPEL Process Service Engine Instances
You can monitor all BPEL process service component instances running in the service engine. These BPEL process service components can be part of separate SOA composite applications.
To monitor BPEL process service engine instances:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
Right-click soa-infra.
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
2. Click Instances.
The Instances page displays the following details:
A utility for searching for a specific instance by specifying criteria and clicking Search.
Instances, including the instance ID of the service component, the service component name, the SOA composite application name, the state of the instance (for example, completed successfully, running, or faulted), the instance start time, the last modification time, and log files describing the instance.
Description of the illustration bpel_instances.gif
In the Instances section, perform the following monitoring tasks:
. In the Instance ID column, click an instance ID for a service component to view its audit trail, process flow, sensor values, and faults.
In the Component column, click a specific service component to access its home page.
In the Composite column, click a specific SOA composite application to access its home page.
In the Logs column, click a specific log to access the Log Messages page with filtered messages specific to that instance.
Monitoring Deployed BPEL Processes in the Service Engine
You can monitor all deployed SOA composite applications with BPEL process service components running in the service engine.
To monitor deployed BPEL processes in service engines:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
Right-click soa-infra.
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
2. Click Deployed Components.
The Deployed Components page displays the following details:
A utility for searching for a specific deployed SOA composite application by specifying criteria and clicking Search.
Details about deployed SOA composite applications with BPEL process service components running in this service engine, including the service component name, the SOA composite application, the current status, and the total, running, and faulted instances in the service engine.
Description of the illustration bpel_se_deployedcomps.gif
In the Name column, click a specific service component to access its home page.
In the Composite column, click a specific SOA composite application to access its home page.
Managing BPEL Process Service Components and Engines
This chapter describes how to manage BPEL process service components and service engines.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Recovering from BPEL Process Service Component Faults
Managing BPEL Process Service Component Policies
Recovering from BPEL Process Service Engine Faults
Performing BPEL Process Service Engine Message Recovery
Recovering from BPEL Process Service Component Faults
You can monitor and perform individual and bulk fault recoveries for BPEL process service components that are identified as recoverable. For BPEL process faults to be identified as recoverable, there must be a fault policy defined that is bound to the fault (through the fault-bindings.xml file) and which triggers the action ora-human-intervention. However, without defining any fault policies, the fault takes its standard course as either a recoverable or nonrecoverable fault.
To recover from BPEL process service component faults:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Home.
Select the Deployed Composites tab.
In the Composite section, select a specific SOA composite application.
Under soa-infra, select a specific SOA composite application.
2. Select the BPEL process service component in the Component Metrics
3. Click Faults.
The Faults page displays the following details:
A utility for searching for a specific fault by specifying criteria and clicking Search. Click the Help icon for details.
Faults that occurred in the service component, including the fault ID, error message, whether you can recover from the fault, time at which the fault occurred, service component instance ID, activity in which the fault occurred, and a link to a log file describing the fault.
Description of the illustration bpel_comp_faults.gif
BPEL process service component faults identified as recoverable can be recovered.
Select faults for recovery using one of the following methods. Note that fault recovery selection at the BPEL process service component level equals the SOA Infrastructure level, SOA composite application level, and Oracle Mediator service component level.
For...
Then...
Single fault recovery
There are three options from which to choose for single-fault recovery:
Click the row of the fault that has been identified as recoverable. With the row highlighted, select a specific action from the Recovery Action list, as described in Step 5.
In the Recovery column, click the Recover link to access the Faults page of the instance audit trail to perform fault recovery.
In the Error Message column, click the message of a fault that has been identified as recoverable. This displays complete fault details, including the fault ID, fault time, fault location, fault type, and error message text. A Recover Now option is displayed for recoverable faults. Click Recover Now to access the Faults page of the instance audit trail to perform fault recovery.
Bulk fault recovery
There are two options from which to choose for bulk-fault recovery:
Use Shift+Click or Control+Click to select specific faults in the rows.
or
From the Select menu, choose Select All Recoverable. Then use Shift+Click or Control+Click to deselect the faults to not include in the recovery operation.
Then:
Select an action from the Recovery Action list, as described in Step 5.
Note: Only the actions applicable to all selected faults are available.
Recovery of all faults
From the Select menu, choose Select All Recoverable.
Select an action from the Recovery Action list, as described in Step 5.
Note: Only the actions applicable to all selected faults are available.
Note:
In most cases, fault policy actions are automatically executed. The only exception is if you defined a fault policy that uses the action ora-human-intervention. This action creates a recoverable fault that can be recovered from Oracle Enterprise Manager Fusion Middleware Control.
Select an action from the Recovery Action list
Action
Description
Retry
Retries the instance directly. An example of a scenario in which to use this recovery action is when the fault occurred because the service provider was not reachable due to a network error. The network error is now resolved.
Abort
Terminates the entire instance.
Replay
Replays the entire scope activity again in which the fault occurred.
Rethrow
Rethrows the current fault. BPEL fault handlers (catch branches) are used to handle the fault. By default, all exceptions are caught by the fault management framework unless an explicit rethrow fault policy is provided.
Continue
Ignores the fault and continues processing (marks the faulted activity as a success).
Perform the following additional monitoring tasks from within the faults table:
. Click the Show only recoverable faults checkbox to display only faults from which you can recover.
From the Fault Type list, select to display all faults, system faults, business faults, or Oracle Web Services Manager (OWSM) faults in the faults table. Click the Help icon for a description of these fault types.
From the View list, select Columns>Fault ID to display the fault IDs for each error message. The fault ID is automatically generated and uniquely identifies a fault. The fault ID is also displayed when you click an error message.
In the Component Instance ID column, click a specific service component ID to access task details about the instance (for example, the current state of a task). Note that rejected messages do not have a component instance ID.
In the Logs column, click a link to access the Log Messages page with filtered messages specific to that instance.
Managing BPEL Process Service Component Policies
You can attach and detach policies to and from BPEL process service components in currently deployed SOA composite applications. Policies apply security to the delivery of messages. Oracle Fusion Middleware uses a policy-based model to manage web services.
To manage BPEL process service component policies:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Home.
Select the Deployed Composites tab.
In the Composite section, select a specific SOA composite application.
Under soa-infra, select a specific SOA composite application.
2. Select the BPEL process service component in the Component Metrics section.
3. Click Policies.
The Policies page enables you to attach and detach policies to and from BPEL process service components. The Policies section displays the attached policy name, the policy reference status (enabled or disabled) that you can toggle, the category (Management, Reliable Messaging, MTOM Attachment, Security, or WS-Addressing), the violations, and the authentication, authorization, confidentiality, and integrity failures since the SOA Infrastructure was last restarted.
Description of the illustration bpel_comp_policy.gif
4. Click Attach/Detach.
If multiple components are available, you are prompted to select the service or component for which to perform the attachment or detachment.
5. Select the service or component to which to attach or detach a policy.
This invokes a dialog for attaching or detaching policies.
Policies currently attached appear in the Attached Policies section. Additional policies available for attachment appear in the Available Policies section.
6. Select to attach policies appropriate to your environment.
7. Click Attach.
8. When you are finished attaching policies, click Validate.
9. If an error message appears, make the necessary corrections until you no longer have any validation errors.
10. Click OK.
The attached policy is displayed in the policies table.
Recovering from BPEL Process Service Engine Faults
You can monitor and perform individual and bulk recoveries of faults occurring in BPEL process service engines that are identified as recoverable. All BPEL process service component faults, regardless of the SOA composite application instance of which they are a part, can be viewed in the BPEL process service engine. For BPEL process faults to be identified as recoverable, there must be a fault policy defined that is bound to the fault (through the fault-bindings.xml file) and which triggers the action ora-human-intervention. However, without defining any fault policies, the fault takes its standard course as either a recoverable or nonrecoverable fault.
To recover from BPEL process service engine faults:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
Right-click soa-infra.
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
2. Click Faults.
The Faults page displays the following details:
A utility for searching for a specific fault by specifying criteria and clicking Search. Click the Help icon for details.
Faults that occurred in the service engine, including the fault ID, error message, whether you can recover from the fault, the time at which the fault occurred, the SOA composite application and service component in which the fault occurred, and the service component instance ID.
Description of the illustration bpel_se_faults.gif
BPEL process service engine faults identified as recoverable can be recovered.
Select faults for recovery using one of the following options. As with fault recovery at the SOA Infrastructure level, SOA composite application level, and Oracle Mediator service component level, you can perform single fault recovery, bulk fault recovery, and recovery of all faults.
Note:In most cases, fault policy actions are automatically executed. The only exception is if you defined a fault policy that uses the action ora-human-intervention. This action creates a recoverable fault that can be recovered from Oracle Enterprise Manager Fusion Middleware Control.
Select an action from the Recovery Action
Action
Description
Retry
Retries the instance with an option to provide a retry success action. An example of a scenario in which to use this recovery action is when the fault occurred because the service provider was not reachable due to a network error. The network error is now resolved.
Abort
Terminates the entire instance.
Replay
Replays the entire scope activity again in which the fault occurred.
Rethrow
Rethrows the current fault. BPEL fault handlers (catch branches) are used to handle the fault. By default, all exceptions are caught by the fault management framework unless an explicit rethrow fault policy is provided.
Continue
Ignores the fault and continues processing (marks the faulted activity as a success).
Perform the following additional monitoring tasks from within the faults table:
. Click the Show only recoverable faults checkbox to only display faults from which you can recover.
From the Fault Type list, select to display all faults, system faults, business faults, or OWSM faults in the faults table. Click the Help icon for a description of these fault types.
From the View list, select Columns>Fault ID to display the fault IDs for each error message. The fault ID is automatically generated and uniquely identifies a fault. The fault ID is also displayed when you click an error message.
In the Composite column, click a specific SOA composite application to access its home page.
In the Component column, click a specific service component to access its home page.
In the Component Instance ID column, click a specific service component ID to access task details about the instance (for example, the current state of a task). Note that rejected messages do not have a component instance ID.
Performing BPEL Process Service Engine Message Recovery
You can perform a manual recovery of undelivered invoke or callback messages due to a transaction rollback in the process instance. Recovery of invoke messages applies to asynchronous BPEL processes only. Synchronous BPEL processes return an error to the calling client and are not recoverable from the Recovery page. Recoverable activities are activities that failed and can be recovered. For example, if you are using the file adapter to initiate an asynchronous BPEL process and your system fails while the instance is processing, you can manually perform recovery when the server restarts to ensure that all message records are recovered.
You can also manage messages that have failed automatic recovery attempts by the BPEL process service engine. To ensure that automatic recovery of these messages is not attempted multiple times, these messages are placed in the exhausted state. You can then perform one of the following actions on these messages:
Return them to the automatic recovery queue
Never attempt a recovery on them again
Attempt to recover them immediately
For example, assume you have a BPEL process that writes to a database adapter. If the database is down, these messages are sent to a recovery queue. Automatic recovery of these messages fails while the database is down. Such messages are marked with the exhausted state so that automatic recovery is not attempted on them again. When the database begins running again, you can reset these messages (return them to the automatic recovery queue) so that an automatic recovery is attempted on them again.
To perform BPEL process service engine message recovery:
Access this page through one of the following options:
From the SOA Infrastructure Menu...
From the SOA Folder in the Navigator...
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
Right-click soa-infra.
Select Service Engines>BPEL.
2. Click Recovery.
The Recovery page displays the following details:
A Refresh Alarm Table button for resynchronizing lost, in-memory, Quartz-scheduled jobs in the database. For example, assume a timer on a wait activity or on an onAlarm branch of a pick activity was initiated, but the transaction was rolled back. You can resynchronize these jobs with the BPEL instances residing in the wait activity/onAlarm branch in the database.
A utility for searching for a specific message failure by specifying criteria and clicking Search. Click the Help icon for details.
You can enter the execution context ID (ECID) value in the ECID field. The ECID value enables you to track a message flow that crosses instances of different composite applications. If there are BPEL process messages requiring recovery and the AuditConfig property in the System MBean Browser is set to All (the default value), the following message is displayed in the Trace table of the Flow Trace page:
BPEL Message Recovery Required
Clicking Show Details or the recovery icon that appears next to this message displays a Warning dialog with information about the number of invoke, callback, and activity recoverable message types and the ECID value. You can copy the ECID value from the Warning dialog, paste it into the ECID field, and select the recoverable message type from the Type list as part of creating your search criteria on the Recovery page.
Note:
Oracle recommends that you add an index on the DLV_MESSAGE.ECID column of the DLV_MESSAGE table to improve SQL query performance when searching messages for a specific ECID value. This is because if there are too many entries in the DLV_MESSAGE table, the search query may be slow and may also overload the database. For information on adding an index, see Chapter "Creating Indexes"of the Oracle Database Administrator's Guide.
Message failures in the service engine, including the conversation ID, whether you can recover from the message failure, the service component and composite application in which the failure occurred, and the time at which the fault occurred. Depending on the state, you can recover these messages immediately, cancel these messages, or reset these messages for automatic recovery.
Description of the illustration bpel_se_recov.gif
Notes:
You can recover callback messages in resolved and undelivered states. These messages can be displayed for recovery when you execute search criteria in which you select Callback from the Type list and either Resolved or Undelivered from the Message State When a callback message first enters the BPEL process service engine, its state is undelivered. When this message
for consumption). In other situations, the callback messages can become stranded in both of these states. Messages in these states can also be recovered. However, there is no guarantee that stranded callback messages always remain in an undelivered state.
If you select Invoke from the Type list and Undelivered from the Message State list, and then click Recover, a recovery is performed. However, the Last Modified Date column remains empty for this instance on the Dashboard page of the Oracle BPEL Process Manager Service component or service engine. This is the expected behaviour. The last modified date is not displayed because the initial Oracle BPEL Process Manager instance (for example, bpel:70004) is created by the first invocation (that is, it is created, but has not yet been modified). The recovery of the undelivered invocation message always creates a new instance (for example, bpel:70005). The previously created instance (bpel:70004) is not used and remains permanently in the same status (the Last Modified Date column is empty). This information is provided for auditing purposes only.
The Message States list is applicable only to callback and invoke message type recovery, and not for activity message type recovery. is resolved to the target BPEL process instance either through matching a conversation ID or a correlation, the state is switched to resolve. In both of these states, the messages have not yet been consumed. Messages in these two states can be recovered (redelivered into the BPEL process service engine
Select a fault in the table.
Select one of the following options:
Action
Description
Recover
Retries the message in which the fault occurred.If you select messages in the exhausted state and click this button, an attempt is made to recover them immediately. Should this recovery attempt also fail, the message is returned to the exhausted state. You must then select the message and click Reset to return the message to the automatic recovery queue. If an asynchronous BPEL process encounters a transaction rollback scenario because of any underlying exception error, it rolls back to the last dehydration activity. If this is a new instance, and a receive activity was the first dehydration activity, the BPEL process service engine creates a recoverable invoke. When you click Recover to recover the invoke, the service engine creates a new instance. This instance may run to completion with no exception error. However, you continue to see the older instance identified as faulted.
Mark Cancelled
Marks the message so it is never delivered. If you select messages in the exhausted state and click this button, recovery is never attempted on them.
Reset
Select to reset exhausted messages to the undelivered state. This returns the message to the automatic recovery queue. The messages that are displayed in the exhausted state disappear from the messages table. If you select Undelivered from the Message State list and click Search, these messages are displayed. Note that callback messages in the exhausted state can also be reset to the resolved state and still remain recoverable.
Once a message is submitted for recovery, the BPEL process service engine may take time to complete the action. This typically takes less than several seconds. During this time, the message remains visible in the Recovery page. Duplicate attempts to recover the same message in that period are ignored. Refresh the page every few seconds to receive the latest recovery status.
Note:
If you define a fault policy in a BPEL process with an ora-retry action and a fault occurs, the BPEL process attempts to recover from the fault the number of times you specified with the retry Count parameter. After this period, the process continues to be in a running state. The status of an activity in the process that has not completed (such as an invoke or receive) shows as pending a manual recovery. This is the expected behaviour.
ed:T5096,
Understanding Simple Messaging
Objective-C methods look substantially different from Java methods. Although the syntax is confusing at first, it’s not difficult once you become used to it. Note that you don’t say that you ―call a method‖ when using Objective-C. Instead, you ―send a message to a receiver.‖ For instance, using Java you might type the following: objMyObject.getFooUsingID(33); When describing this line, I write that I am calling objMyObject’s getFoo method and passing the argument 33. In Objective-C, the same message appears as follows: [objMyObject getFooUsingID : 33]; When describing this line, I write that I am sending a getFooUsingID message, passing the argument 33, and objMyObject is the receiver.The difference between calling a method and sending a message isn’t Objective-C’s only difference from Java, C++, and other dot-notation languages. Objective-C uses what’s called infix notation. Infix notation mixes operands and operators. You don’t really need to fully understand infix notation, other than it means Objective-C looks substantially different from Java and C++. An Objective-C message begins with an opening square brace and ends with a closing square brace followed by a semicolon. The object’s name follows the opening brace, followed by a space, followed by the message. Arguments passed to the message follow a colon. You can, of course, have multiple-argument methods, as you will see in the next chapter. For now, though, just consider single-argument methods. Figure 3-4 summarizes an Objective-C message with a single argument.
Using self in a Message
The term self refers to an object when sending a message, and it is also the receiver. For instance, you might make a mental note to yourself to pick up milk on the way home from work (Listing 3-8). Listing 3-8 A method using the self keyword (void)goHome {[self pickupMilk]; }(Milk*) pickupMilk { } Both methods are in the same object, and so the goHome method sends the message pickupMilk to itself, or self.
Nested Arguments
Like Java, you can nest Objective-C messages. For instance, using Java, you might write the following: objMyObject.getFoo(objMyFooIdentifier.getID()); In Objective-C, you would write the same statement as follows: [objMyObject getFoo: [objMyFooIdentifier getID]]; Using Java, you might nest an object’s constructor in another method. objTester.testFubar(new Fubar(33)); In Objective-C, you can also nest object constructors in other methods. [objTester testFubar[[Fubar alloc] initWithInteger : 33]]]; In this method, a new Fubar instance is first allocated and then initialized with 33, and the resulting object reference is sent as an argument to the testFubar message.
Class and Instance Methods
As discussed earlier, you declare methods in a class’s interface and define methods in a class’s implementation. Just like C, a method declaration consists solely of the method’s signature, while the definition is the method’s actual implementation. In both files, there are two method types: instance and class methods. Instance methods begin with a minus sign, while class methods begin with a plus sign. A class method is similar to a Java static method, meaning you don’t need to create a class instance to use the method. For instance, the following is an instance method. - (void) sayHello: (NSString*) name Using the method requires creating a class instance first. Although not required, you should also initialize the class. Remember, all classes extend NSObject, which has an init method, so every Objective-C class is guaranteed to implement init. Simple *objSimple = [[Simple alloc] init]; [objSimple sayHello:@"James"]; Now consider class methods. Class methods begin with a plus sign. + (id) sayGoodBye; A class method doesn’t require creating a class instance before using the method. For instance, when first allocating space for an object instance, you call a class’s alloc method. If the class doesn’t implement the alloc method, the runtime traverses up the class’s inheritance hierarchy until it finds an alloc method or it reaches NSObject’s alloc method and calls it. Simple *mySimple = [Simple alloc]; [mySimple init]; This alloc method is a class method example. You don’t instantiate a class instance before calling alloc; rather, you call alloc directly using the class. You create and use class methods just like Java static methods. And like Java static methods, you have the same restrictions. You can’t reference that class’s instance variables from a static method, as the instance variables haven’t been initialized. You also can’t refer to other instance methods from the same class as the class method. Remember, like a Java static method, you are using an uninitialized class, not an initialized object. If your class method relies upon a class being initialized, runtime errors will result.
Adding sayGoodBye as a Class Method to Simple
Open the last example’s project in Open Simple.h and add the sayGoodBye method declaration to it). Be certain to use a + and not a – in the method’s signature.
Add the method’s definition to m.
Have m call the sayGoodBye method.
Build and run the application, and ―Goodbye...‖ is written to the debugger console.
Simple.h modified to include sayGoodBye declaration #import <Foundation/Foundation.h> @interface Simple : NSObject { } + (void) sayGoodBye; -(void) sayHello: (NSString *) name; @end Simple.m modified to include sayGoodBye definition #import "Simple.h" @implementation Simple + (void) sayGoodBye { NSLog(@"Goodbye..."); } - (void) sayHello: (NSString *) name { NSMutableString *message = [[NSMutableString alloc] initWithString:@"Hello there"]; [message appendString:name]; NSLog(message); [message release]; } @end The main.h file modified to call sayGoodBye int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { NSAutoreleasePool * pool = [[NSAutoreleasePool alloc] init]; Simple * mySimple = [[Simple alloc] init]; [mySimple sayHello:@"James"]; [mySimple release]; [Simple sayGoodBye]; int retVal = UIApplicationMain(argc, argv, nil, nil); [pool release]; return retVal; } Debugger console after running ChapThree [Session started at 2008-12-17 21:33:38 -0500.] 2008-12-17 21:33:40.498 ChapThree[851:20b] Hello there James 2008-12-17 21:33:40.501 ChapThree[851:20b] Goodbye...
The alloc and init Methods
The alloc method is how you create class instances for all Objective-C classes. This method allocates memory space for the new object instance. It is inherited from the NSObject class, so you don’t really need to implement this method yourself.The init method is how you initialize a class once allocated. Unlike the class method alloc, the init method is an instance method. The init method is also a method in NSObject. If a class has no specific initialization requirements, you don’t need to override int, nor are you required to call it when instantiating a class. However, if you have specific initialization requirements, you should override this method. Good programming practice, though, is to always call init, usually on the same line as the allocation.The init method returns an id. An id is an Objective-C type that is a pointer to the object instance’s address. The id is weakly typed, though, and the runtime treats all ids the same. Overriding an init method should always call the class parent’s init method (Listing 3-13). Listing 3-13 A simple init implementation - (id) init { if (self = [super init]){ magicNumber = 5;} return self; } In Listing 3-13, the method assigns itself to its parent’s id. If the parent’s init method fails, it returns a nil value and the if statement fails. If it succeeds, the evaluation is true and the instance variable, magicNumber, is set to five. The init method ends by returning itself. You can also initialize an object by passing arguments. By convention, initialization methods that take arguments are named init, followed by the data type of the argument. For instance, you could modify the init method in Listing 3-13 to Listing 3-14 if you wanted to initialize with an integer passed as a parameter. Listing 3-14 A simple init method - (id) initWithInt : (int) value { if (self = [super init]) magicNumber = value; return self; }
Managing Memory Using Retain and Release
Unlike Java or C#, when programming for the iPhone, you manage memory manually; there is no garbage collection on the iPhone. Although as of OS X 10.5, Cocoa includes an option to use automatic garbage collection, this option is not available on the iPhone. Table 3-1 summarizes Objective-C’s memory management methods. Table 3-1 Allocate memory for new object and assign object reference count of one. Add receiver to autorelease pool. Deallocate memory for an object with zero reference count. Decrease object’s reference count by one. Increase object’s reference count by one. Returns the object as an id. See documentation. NSObject Memory Management Related Methods Objective-C uses reference counts to determine if memory should be released or retained. When you create a class instance, the runtime allocates memory for the object and assigns that object a reference count of one. For instance, suppose you had a class named Simple. You first allocate space for it using NSObject’s alloc method. Simple *objSimple = [[Simple alloc] init]; You then use the object. [objSimple sayHello:@"James"]; When finished, you call its release method. If no release method is found, the runtime moves up the classes’ inheritance hierarchy until it finds a release implementation. As all classes extend NSObject, if no release instance is found, the runtime calls NSObject’s release method. [objSimple release]; When an object’s reference count reaches zero, the runtime calls the object’s dealloc method to deallocate the object. As with retain, if the runtime doesn’t find a dealloc method, it moves up the inheritance hierarchy until it finds one. If no dealloc method is found, the runtime calls NSObject’s dealloc method and the object is deallocated so the memory can be reclaimed. You’ve already seen how alloc, release, and dealloc work; you allocate memory for an object and assign it a reference count of one using the alloc method, and you decrement the reference count by one when calling release. When an object’s reference count reaches zero, the program calls NSObject’s dealloc method. The retain method increments an object’s reference by one and returns the object reference as an id. Unlike Java, this referencing isn’t automatic; you must explicitly call retain to increase an object’s reference count. For instance, consider the following Objective-C code (Listing 3-15). Listing 3-15 Using retain Simple *objSimple = [[Simple alloc] init]; Simple *objSimpleTwo = objSimple; NSLog(@"retaincount: %d", [objSimple retainCount]); [objSimple release]; //this causes an error because objSimpleTwo is released [objSimpleTwo sayHello:@"James"]; NOTE Typically, there is no reason to call retainCount. In this chapter, I use retainCount to illustrate Objective-C memory management.The first line allocates objSimple, and the runtime assigns the object a reference count of one. The second statement creates a new pointer to the objSimple object; both objSimple and objSimpleTwo point to the same physical object in memory. But because the code doesn’t call retain, the physical object’s reference count is not incremented. When the object is then released, the reference count is decremented by one and the reference count for the object becomes zero. The object is deallocated, so the next line fails, as objSimpleTwo is pointing to deallocated memory space.Instead, the code should have explicitly retained objSimpleTwo. [objSimpleTwo retain]; Retaining objSimpleTwo would have incremented the object’s reference count by one, bringing it to two. Then, when objSimple was released, the object’s reference count would still be one and the object would not be deallocated. The subsequent call to sayHello would work just fine, as the object that objSimpleTwo pointed to would still exist. Note, this is a somewhat unrealistic example, as you will never write code like Listing 3-15, but it illustrates retain and release.You can override the NSObject’s retain, release, dealloc, and alloc methods. But if you do, be certain to call the object’s super method version. The method call for these methods must make it up the inheritance hierarchy to NSObject for memory management to function correctly.
Using Manual Memory Management
Open the previous Try This project and implement dealloc, retain, release, and alloc in m (Listing 3-16). Note that retain returns an id, and that all these methods are declared in NSObject and don’t require you adding their signatures to Simple.h.
Modify m to write log statements of the Simple’s retaincount (Listing 3-17).
Buildand run the The debugger includes the logging added in Listing 3-16 (Listing 3-18).
} +(id) alloc { NSLog(@"allocating Simple...."); return [super alloc]; } @end Listing 3-17 The main.h file modified to include retainCount logging #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> #import "Simple.h" int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { NSAutoreleasePool * pool = [[NSAutoreleasePool alloc] init]; Simple * mySimple = [[Simple alloc] init]; NSLog(@"retaincount: %d", [mySimple retainCount]); [mySimple sayHello:@"James"]; [mySimple release]; [Simple sayGoodBye]; int retVal = UIApplicationMain(argc, argv, nil, nil); [pool release]; return retVal; } Listing 3-18 Debugger console echoing memory management logging [Session started at 2008-12-17 22:30:02 -0500.] 2008-12-17 22:30:03.894 ChapThree[1062:20b] allocating Simple.... 2008-12-17 22:30:03.895 ChapThree[1062:20b] retaincount: 1 2008-12-17 22:30:03.899 ChapThree[1062:20b] Hello there James 2008-12-17 22:30:03.903 ChapThree[1062:20b] releasing Simple..... 2008-12-17 22:30:03.904 ChapThree[1062:20b] deallocating Simple.... 2008-12-17 22:30:03.904 ChapThree[1062:20b] Goodbye... In main.m, the main method first allocates a new Simple instance and assigns the pointer (mySimple) to point to the newly allocated and initialized object. Simple *mySimple = [[Simple alloc] init]; The reference count to the object mySimple points to is one, and the debug statement in Listing 3-17 prints a retain count of one. Instance Variables and Memory In Chapter 4, you will learn about properties. You should use them and their accessor methods. If you do, you avoid this section’s complications. But you should still understand a little about instance variables and how they are handled in memory. Suppose you have an instance variable, personName, you wish to set, as in Listing 3-19. Listing 3-19 An instance variable in Simple.h #import <Foundation/Foundation.h> @interface Simple : NSObject { NSString * personName; } -(void) sayGoodBye; - (void) sayName; -(void) sayHello: (NSString *) name; @end Now suppose you modified sayHello to set personName, as in Listing 3-20. You must retain the variable; otherwise, it goes away at the method’s end. Listing 3-20 Retaining an instance variable - (void) sayHello: (NSString*) name { NSMutableString *message = [[NSMutableString alloc] initWithString: @"Hello there "]; [message appendString:name]; NSLog(message); personName = [name retain]; [message release]; } Note that by retaining name, you are increasing its reference count by one, returning it, and then setting personName to it. Thus, retaining name is retaining personName. Not retaining a variable when assigning it to another variable, as in Listing 3-20, is a good example of the type of problem you might encounter when not using properties. The name variable pointer is passed to sayHello. Assume there is only one other pointer pointing to name (a retainCount of one). Then, after assigning personName to name, the retain count remains one. The personName pointer is now at the mercy of the pointer that originally pointed to name outside the sayHello method. When the pointer external to Simple releases the object name points to, the object is deallocated. So the personName pointer now points to deallocated memory space and an error occurs. To correct this problem, you call retain on the instance variable as in Listing 3-20. Anytime you set an instance variable, you should retain it. That way, you ensure that it will not reach a zero reference count while the instance variable still points to the object. Of course, the better solution is to always use accessor methods combined with properties. You learn about accessor methods and properties in the next chapter. NOTE You could have written the code in Listing 3-20 using one of NSString’s class methods. But using stringWithString would not illustrate using retain. personName = [NSString stringWithString:name]; Managing Memory Using Autorelease Managing reference counts manually is tiresome and error- prone. NSObject’s autorelease method manages an object’s reference count for you. The autorelease method uses what’s called a release pool to manage an object’s references. Refer to Listing 3-17 and note that this method’s first step is allocating an NSAutoreleasePool. Its second-to-last step is releasing that pool. Calling autorelease adds the object to the pool, and the pool retains the object for you. Consider the sayHelloTom method in Listing 3-21. Listing 3-21 A method using autorelease - (void) sayHelloTom { Simple *objSimple = [[[Simple alloc] init] autorelease]; [objSimple sayHello:@"Tom"]; } The method allocates a Simple instance and then calls autorelease, assigning objSimple to the autorelease pool. When the method finishes executing, the autorelease pool is deallocated and the Simple instance is subsequently released. NOTE The iPhone Cocoa Touch framework creates an autorelease pool for every event loop and releases it when the loop completes.Using autorelease and accepting the default autorelease pools makes memory management easy. However, the problem is that there’s a penalty: The objects persist for the release pool’s lifetime. There is one solution, and that is to manage the NSAutoReleasePool yourself. For instance, you could modify Listing 3-22 to manage its own autorelease pool. Listing 3-22 The sayHelloTom method managing its own autorelease pool - (void) sayHelloTom { NSAutoreleasePool *pool = [[NSAutoreleasePool alloc] init]; Simple *objSimple = [[[Simple alloc] autorelease] init]; [objSimple sayHello:@"Tom"]; [pool release]; } When the pool is released and deallocated, the pool releases the object pointed to by objSimple. When the physical object pointed to by objSimple is released, the reference count is zero, so the runtime deallocates the object. You should note, though, that in this example, the results are exactly the same as if you had used the default autorelease pool. Unless creating many objects, it’s probably best to stick to the default NSAutoreleasePool rather than trying to manage it yourself. After all, how long does an event loop last? Of course, if you are doing an intensive process, involving many objects or unusually large objects, you might consider managing the autorelease pool manually.
ee:T3be0,
UIApplication and UIApplicationDelegate
Key Skills & Concepts
Understanding the UIApplication class Understanding the UIApplicationDelegate protocol Handling application startup and termination Handling application interruptions Every iPhone application has one UIApplication. UIApplication is an iPhone application’s starting point and is responsible for initializing and displaying your application’s UIWindow. It is also responsible for loading your application’s first UIView into the UIWindow. Another responsibility UIApplication has is managing your application’s life cycle. UIApplication fulfils this management responsibility using a delegate called UIApplicationDelegate.Although UIApplication receives events, it’sthe UIApplication Delegate that handles how an application responds to those events. Events the UIApplicationDelegate might handle include application life cycle events, such as startup and shutdown, and system events like incoming phone calls and calendar alerts. In this chapter, after learning how to load an application’s root view into the UIWindow, you explore handling system events using the UIApplicationDelegate protocol. Adding a UIView and UIViewController to a UIApplicationDelegate Before continuing, create this chapter’s project; this chapter uses the same project throughout. In this project, you start with the simplest iPhone template, a Window-based application and you create an application from scratch. You first create a xib and corresponding view controller. You then modify the application’s delegate so it loads the view.
Create a new Window-based Application from the New Project Name the project AddViewProject.
InGroups& Files, expand the Classes This folder contains the AddViewProject AppDelegate.h and AddViewProjectAppDelegate.m files. These two files implement the project’s custom class that adopts the UIApplicationDelegate protocol.
Highlightthe Resources folder. CTRL-Click and Select Add | New File from the popup menu. Select User Interfaces from the New File dialog, and select Empty XIB(Figure6-1).
Figure 6-1 Creating an Empty XIB Interface Builder
Namethe xib FirstViewController and click
Highlightthe Classes folder in Groups & Select File | New File from the menu.
Selectthe UIViewController subclass from the Cocoa Touch Classes and click Next (Figure 6-2).
NOTE You could have created the view controller first and then checked the ―With XIB for user interface,‖ check box and Xcode would have generated the xib for you.
Name the file FirstViewController.m and ensure the Also Create "FirstViewController.h"checkbox is selected. Click Finish.
Double-clickFirstViewController.xiband open it in Interface Builder.
Figure 6-2 Creating a UIViewController
Selecta view from the library, and drag-and-drop it onto the xib Document window.
Inthe Document window, highlight File’s Owner and select FirstViewController as the class in the First View Controller Identity Inspector (Figure 6-3).
Inthe Inspector, set the newly created view as FirstViewController’s view outlet (Figure 6-4).
Selectthe view and change its color using the inspector (Figure 6-5).
Save xib and exit Interface Builder.
Open h, import FirstViewController.h, and create a property referencing the FirstViewController class (Listing 6-1).
Figure 6-3 Select FirstViewController as the file’s owner Figure 6-4 Setting the view as the File’s Owner view Figure 6-5 Changing the view’s color
Openm, synthesize first, and modify applicationDidFinish Launching: so it obtains a reference to FirstViewController from FirstViewController.xib and then adds its view as a subview to the window. FirstViewController.m should appear identical to Listing 6-2.
Click Build And Your colored view should load into the iPhone Simulator (Figure 6-6).
} @end In steps 10 and 11, you manually connected AddViewProjectAppDelegate to its UIView. Moreover, you placed that view in its own nib. Every nib has an owner. Recall that every application has one UIWindow. UIWindow is in a project’s MainWindow.xib. That nib’s owner is UIApplication. Also notice that Xcode added the AddViewProjectAppDelegate to MainWindow.xib and connected it to the UIWindow and set the UIApplication’s delegate. Nibs you create should have a class adopting the UIViewController protocol as an owner, which is what you did in step 10. In step 9, you tied the UIView created in the nib in Interface Builder to the UIViewController created in Xcode. This is how the two objects ―know‖ about each other. You learn more about UIViewControllers and UIViews—and connecting them—in Chapter 7. NOTE Notice that you created FirstViewController’s view in its own FirstViewController.xib file. You could have opened MainWindow.xib, dragged a view onto the window, and used this nib for your user interface. But this is not the preferred way of using views in nibs. Apple recommends one nib per view. The reason for this recommendation is that an application must load all views and all controls that reside in the same nib. Using one nib per view reduces your application’s memory use because you only load views as needed. Q: What is that initWithNibName line in Listing 6-2? A: This method allows initializing a UIViewController’s view from a nib file rather than from code. You use this method when you want to write code that initializes a view controller whose view resides in a nib. You should note that this is just one of several different ways you might load a view from a nib into a class. By book’s end, you will be familiar with most of them. In the previous section, I only briefly mentioned the connections in MainWindow.xib. But these connections warrant a closer look if you want to understand what the template actually did. Notice the UIWindow in Listing 6-1 is an IBOutlet. Your first experience with IBOutlets was in Chapter 1, you learn more on it in Chapter 7. But realize the window ―lives‖ in the xib, not in the delegate. Although the window is released by the delegate in the dealloc method, it is neither allocated nor initialized by the delegate’s code in Listing 6-2. Remember, all the dealloc method in Listing 6-2 is doing is releasing the class’s reference to the window, not deallocating the window. Instead, MainWindow.xib handles allocating, initializing, and deallocating the UIWindow.UIApplication knows to load MainWindow.xib by consulting the NSMainNibFile key in Info.plist file. If you open the AddViewProject project’s Info.plist, you will see that the ―Main nib file base name‖ is set to MainWindow. While loading, the nib sets AddViewProjectAppDelegate as UIApplication’s delegate and UIWindow as AddViewProjectAppDelegate’s window. Both are outlets of their respective class in Interface Builder. Exploring MainWindow.xib
Open xib and display the document window.
Highlightthe File’s Notice it is set to UIApplication (Figure 6-7). UIApplication loads MainWindow.xib.
Notice that the template added the AddViewProjectAppDelegate
Notice AddViewProjectAppDelegate’s IBOutlet, window, is set to the UIWindow in the nib (Figure 6-8). Also notice that the UIApplication’s delegate is set as AddViewProject
Figure 6-7 UIApplication in the Document window Figure 6-8 AddViewProjectAppDelegate’s connections Ignore UIApplication—you almost never modify it. Just know that UIApplication receives system events. It is your job to write code that handles those system events. You write that code in a class adopting the UIApplicationDelegate protocol. This protocol has several life cycle methods that handle application and system events. Table 6-1 lists UIApplicationDelegate’s methods. If you begin with a template, Xcode creates the class adopting the UIApplicationDelegate for you, but Xcode does not implement the UIApplicationDelegate’s optional event-handling methods. For instance, in this chapter’s project, Xcodecreated the AddViewProject AppDelegate.h and AddViewProjectAppDelegate.m files. The Add ViewProject AppDelegate class extends NSObject and adopts the UIApplication Delegate. @interface AddViewProjectAppDelegate : NSObject <UIApplicationDelegate> The application’s UIApplication, defined in MainWindow.xib, has a reference to its UIApplicationDelegate as an outlet (Figure 6-8). As UIApplication receives one of the events related to the methods in Table 6-1, it calls the appropriate method in its delegate if implemented.
Ask the Expert
Q: What is a delegate? A: A delegate is a way to simplify the separation of processing logic from another class. It also avoids inheritance. For instance, subclassing the UIApplication object would be painful. Instead, Apple provides a UIApplicationDelegate. The UIApplication has a reference to the class implementing the UIApplicationDelegate. If implemented,the UIApplication delegates handling an event to the appropriate method in the UIApplicationDelegate. It appears as if UIApplication is handling the event; in reality, its delegate, UIApplicationDelegate, handles the event. Delegates are a common object- oriented design pattern. For more information on delegates and object-oriented programming, refer to the ―delegation pattern‖ on Wikipedia (www.wikipedia.org).
The main.m file
In the AddViewProject project, open main.m in the Other Sources folder in Groups & Files. The file’s code is listed in Listing 6-3. Listing 6-3 File main.m in project #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { NSAutoreleasePool * pool = [[NSAutoreleasePool alloc] init]; int retVal = UIApplicationMain(argc, argv, nil, nil); [pool release]; return retVal; } Main creates one UIApplication instance using the UIApplicationMain method. Every project has exactly one UIApplication object. You can obtain a reference to that object by calling UIApplication’s sharedApplication class method. This method returns a singleton reference to your application’s UIApplication object. UIApplication * myApplication = [UIApplication sharedApplication]; You usually will not do much with the UIApplication object other than obtain a reference to its UIApplicationDelegate. You obtain a reference to the UIApplicationDelegate through the following code: UIApplicationDelegate * myDelegate = [[UIApplication sharedApplication] delegate];
ef:T5f36,
Handling Application Life Cycle Events
UIApplication forwards several important events to its UIApplicationDelegate to handle. For instance, applicationSignificantTimeChange: handles a significant time change while your application is running. The method didChangeStatusBarOrientation: handles the event fired when the status bar’s orientation is changed from portrait to landscape or landscape to portrait. Table 6-1 lists UIApplicationDelegate’s application life cycle event-handling methods. With the exception of applicationDidFinishLaunching:, the methods in Table 6-1 are not required, but you should implement most of them if you wish developing a robust application. Two of the more important application life cycle events are your application’s startup and shutdown. The applicationDidFinishLaunching: method—a required method—is where you initialize your UIViewControllers, your UIWindow, add a UIView to the window, and then launch your application’s user interface. The method is also useful for restoring your application’s state, and is where you perform application initialization. The applicationWill Terminate: method is useful for saving your application’s state. You might also use this method to perform cleanup. application:didChangeStatusBarFrame: application:didChangeStatusBar Orientation: application:handleOpenURL: application:willChangeStatusBarFrame: application:willChangeStatusBar Orientation:duration: applicationDidBecomeActive: applicationDidFinishLaunching: applicationDidReceiveMemoryWarning: applicationSignificantTimeChange: applicationWillResignActive: applicationWillTerminate: -(void) application:(UIApplication *) application didChangeStatusBarFrame: (CGRect) oldStatusBarFrame -(void) application: (UIApplication *) application didChangeStatusBarOrie ntation: (UIInterfaceOrientation) oldStatusBarOrientation
(BOOL) application: (UIApplication *)
application handleOpenURL: (NSURL *) url
(void) application: (UIApplication *)
application willChangeStatusBarFrame:
(CGRect) newStatusBarFrame
-(void) application: (UIApplication *) application willChangeStatusBarOri entation:(UIInterfaceOrientation) newStatusBarOrientation duration: (NSTimeInterval) duration -(void) applicationDidBecomeActive: (UIApplication *) application - (void) applicationDidFinishLaunching: (UIApplication *) application -(void)applicationDidReceiveMemoryWarning: (UIApplication *) application -(void) applicationSignificantTimeChange: (UIApplication *) application -(void) applicationWillResignActive: (UIApplication *) application -(void) applicationWillTerminate: (UIApplication *) application Xcode offers a feature called Code Sense. As you are typing, Xcode will suggest what it thinks you are typing. If correct, press the TAB key and Xcode finishes typing for you. You can ignore the suggestion by continuing to type. If you are not certain the suggestion is correct, press the ESC key and Xcode presents a drop-down list with possible completions (Figure 6-9). If you do not see this feature, ensure Xcode is configured correctly in Xcode Preferences (Figure 6-10). Figure 6-9 Code completion in Xcode
Application Interruptions
As your application functions, it is likely to receive interruptions. An incoming phone call causes your application to become inactive. If you decide answering the call, your application terminates. Other events that might cause your application to become inactive include calendar alerts and putting your device to sleep (locking your device). The application WillResignActive: method in UIApplicationDelegate executes just prior to your application becoming inactive. The applicationDidBecomeActive: method executes just after your application becomes active again. For instance, if you are running your application and lock the screen, your application’s delegate executes the applicationWillResignActive: method. When you later unlock the screen, your application’s delegate executes the applicationDid BecomeActive: method.Another important method is applicationDidReceiveMemoryWarning: method. The iPhone has limited memory—use too much and the operating system will terminate your application. But the operating system warns your application first. When UIApplication receives this event, it forwards the event to its delegate’s applicationDidReceiveMemoryWarning: method. The delegate can then handle the application’s response to the warning. For instance, it might release a shared data structure or take other memory reclaiming actions.
Caution
Although not required, your application should handle these important events in its UIApplicationDelegate. If it does not, Apple might reject your application when submitted for inclusion in the App Store.
Handling Application Interruptions
In this task, you explore the applicationDidReceiveMemoryWarning:, applicationWillResign Active:, and applicationDidBecomeActive: methods in UIApplicationDelegate.
Add the methods application Did Receive MemoryWarning:,application DidBecomeActive:, andapplication WillResignActive: toAddViewProjectDelegate’s implementation (Add m).Add a single NSLog statement to each method. The methods should appear similar to Listing 6-4.
ClickBuildAnd Go, and execute the application in the iPhone
SelectHardware| Simulate Memory Warning from the iPhone Simulator’s
SelectHardware| Lock from the iPhone Simulator’s Unlock and then quit your application.
Reviewthe Debugger Console, which should appear similar to Listing 6-5.
Listing 6-4 AddViewProjectAppDelegate’s three additional methods -(void)applicationDidReceiveMemoryWarning:(UIApplication *) application { NSLog(@"hey got a memory warning...."); } -(void)applicationWillResignActive:(UIApplication *) application { NSLog(@"hey I'm about to resign active status...."); } -(void)applicationDidBecomeActive:(UIApplication *) application { NSLog(@"hey I'm active...."); @end Listing 6-5 Console output from running application [Session started at 2008-12-07 14:56:49 -0500.] 2008-12-07 14:56:50.737 ProjectEight[2465:20b] fired application did finishLaunching... 2008-12-07 14:56:50.740 ProjectEight[2465:20b] added first view controller and made it visible... ---snip--- 2008-12-07 14:57:03.247 AddViewProject[2465:20b] hey I'm active.... 2008-12-07 14:57:08.094 AddViewProject[2465:20b] about to terminate... The application executed the applicationDidBecomeActive: method when you started it and then after you unlocked the Simulator. It called applicationDidReceiveMemoryWarning: when you selected the Simulate Memory Warning menu item. And when the application was about to become inactive after locking, the UIApplicationDelegate executed the application WillResignActive: method.
UIView and UIViewController
Key Skills & Concepts
Understanding the UIView and UIViewController
Creating a single view application using the View-based Application Template
Creating a single view application using the Window-based Application Template
Understanding an application delegate’s root view
Setting an application’s root view in Interface Builder
Setting an application’s root view using code
Understanding UIView life cycle methods
UIViews are how the iPhone displays information on the screen. The UIView class is responsible for displaying a rectangular area on the screen. The UIViewController manages the UIView and is responsible for handling the view’s logic. The UIViewController is the glue between the view—the UIView—and your data classes—the model.There are many UIView subclasses you might work with while developing an iPhone application. In fact, every graphical component you use on an iPhone graphical user interface (GUI) is a UIView subclass. Technically speaking, everything is a view. But typically, when documentation or some other material refers to a ―view,‖ it is referring to a content view.A content view is a view that has a view controller and is responsible for presenting a screen’s worth of user interface.
The UIView Class
The UIView’s responsibilities are drawing to the screen and handling events associated with a user’s interaction with an application. A UIView has an associated UIViewController. The UIViewController manages the view. The view controller loads and unloads its associated views, manages views, and handles application life cycle events for its views. Every graphical iPhone control you use in Interface Builder is a UIView subclass. Table 7-1 lists the UIView subclasses. Notice that UIScrollView and UIControl both have further subclasses listed in the table’s second column. UIViews function as containers, controls, displays, alerts, action sheets, navigation controls, and as the application’s window. In future chapters, you consider most of these UIView types. This chapter limits itself to a simple display view and associated view controller.
The UIViewController Class
The UIViewController manages UIViews. It is responsible for creating, displaying, hiding, and destroying a view. The UIViewControl is also responsible for responding to a view’s life cycle events, handling orientation, and serving as a bridge between your application’s view and model. The view controller is your application’s controller in the model-view-controller design pattern.
View-based Application Template
The easiest route to creating a single view application is using Xcode’s View-based Application template. This template creates a single view and view controller for managing the view. While the view-based application is not as useful as Xcode’s other project templates, it is useful here, as it generates the most simple iPhone graphical application and provides a simple UIView and UIViewController example. In the next task, you generate an application using this template. But, before continuing, first review IBOutlets and IBActions.
IBOutlet and IBAction
You have already used IBOutlets and IBActions in previous chapters. Without really knowing what they are, you probably already have a good idea of what they accomplish; outlets and actions are how you connect things in a nib with things outside a nib. An outlet connects an instance variable outside a nib to an object in a nib.IBOutlet is a preprocessor directive, evaluates to void, and is ignored by the compiler,but all you really need to know is that IBOutlet is how Interface Builder knows the variable was created for its use. When adding a class, Interface Builder scans the class for IBOutlets and knows those variables are intended as outlets. You can then easily connect your graphical component to the variable, as Interface Builder adds the outlets to the inspector automatically for you to select. Note, though, Interface Builder doesn’t connect the outlets to anything; it just adds them. You are responsible for adding any connections.Actions are messages sent from objects in the nib to methods outside the nib. You define an action in your code using the IBAction keyword. Like IBOutlet, it’s a preprocessor directive and evaluates to void. You define an action in your code using the IBAction keyword. Also, like IBOutlet, when you add a class to Interface Builder, it scans the class for IBActions and adds them to the inspector for you to select. You can then connect user interface events to a specific method in your code. Note that a method designated as an action must not return a value, as the preprocessor replaces IBAction with void, and so all the compiler sees is void.An action also takes a single parameter, sender. The sender is the id of the control calling the action. So if a UIButton instance called changeLabelValue, the sender would be the pointer to the UIButton. - (IBAction) changeLabelValue: (id) sender; IBOutlet and IBAction don’t require much explanation, as you use these two directives so frequently they become second nature. Any instance variable external to Interface Builder that must communicate with a control in Interface Builder must be an IBOutlet. Any method that must be called from a control in Interface Builder must be an IBAction.
Using a View-based Application Template
Create a new View-based Application using the Name the project SimpleView.
Expandclassesand notice Interface Builder created the SimpleViewViewController class for Expand Resources and notice the template generated a separate nib, SimpleViewViewController.xib, for the SimpleViewViewController.
Open h and add a label and method for changing the label’s value. Make the label an IBOutlet and the method an IBAction (Listing 7-1).
Open m and add the IBOutlet and IBAction definitions (Listing 7-2).
Open xib in Interface Builder and change the view’s color. Add a UILabel and a UIButton to the UIView.
Notice that SimpleViewViewController is the File’s Connect SimpleViewView Controller’s theLabel outlet to the label.
ConnectSimpleViewViewController’s changeTheLabel action to the Select Touch Up Inside.
Listing 7-1 SimpleViewViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> @interface SimpleViewViewController : UIViewController { IBOutlet UILabel * theLabel; } @property (nonatomic, retain) UILabel * theLabel; - (IBAction) changeLabelValue: (id) sender; @end Listing 7-2 SimpleViewViewController.m #import "SimpleViewViewController.h" @implementation SimpleViewViewController @synthesize theLabel; - (IBAction) changeLabelValue : (id) sender { [theLabel setText:@"Hello World."]; UIButton *theBut = sender; NSLog(theBut.currentTitle); theBut.enabled = NO; [theBut setTitle:@"Pressed Already" forState: UIControlStateDisabled]; } - (void)dealloc { [theLabel release]; [super dealloc]; } @end Take a moment to examine what the View-based Application template did for you. It created the SimpleViewViewController.xib and it also created a UIViewController subclass, SimpleView ViewController, by creating the SimpleViewViewController.h and SimpleViewViewController.m files. Moreover, it added the controller to the delegate (Listing 7-3).sIn the delegate, the template created the application’s window and view controller as outlets (Listings 7-3 and 7-4). In the delegate’s applicationDidFinishLaunching: method, the template added the view controller’s view to the window and then displayed the window. Notice that nowhere does the code allocate or initialize its window or view controller. Instead, the Info.plist specifies that MainWindow.xib is the application’s main nib, so it knows to load the MainWindow.xib and the nib handles window and view controller initialization.In the MainWindow nib, the template set the nib’s file’s owner to UIApplication. The template set SimpleViewAppDelegate as the application’s delegate and set the delegate’s window to the window in MainWindow.xib.The template also added a view controller to MainWindow.xib and set it as the delegate’s root view controller. Every delegate must have a root view controller. The root view controller in MainWindow.xib comes from the SimpleViewViewController.xib, also created by the template.The template created the UIView in its own xib, SimpleViewViewController.xib. It set SimpleViewViewController.xib’s file’s owner to SimpleViewViewController. It also set the controller’s view to the view in the xib. Listing 7-3 SimpleViewAppDelegate.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> @class SimpleViewViewController; @interface SimpleViewAppDelegate : NSObject <UIApplicationDelegate> { UIWindow *window; SimpleViewViewController *viewController; } @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIWindow *window; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet SimpleViewViewController *viewController; @end Listing 7-4 SimpleViewAppDelegate.m #import "SimpleViewAppDelegate.h" #import "SimpleViewViewController.h" @implementation SimpleViewAppDelegate @synthesize window; @synthesize viewController;
The View-based Application template hides many development details. If new to iPhone programming, chances are the View-based Application template does not help clarify a UIView, UIViewController, and their relationship. To help make their relationship clearer, you should understand what the View-based Application template accomplishes automatically. Unlike a View-based Application template, a Window-based Application template requires understanding UIViews and UIViewControllers. When using the Window-based Application template, you must manually create a view and view controller and wire them together. In this project, you create a single view application starting with a Window-based Application template. Creating a Window-based Application should solidify your understanding of the steps behind its creation.
Create a new Window-based Application and name it
HighlightResources and create an empty Name the xib FirstViewController.xib.
HighlightClassesand add a UIViewController named Xcode should have created FirstViewController.h and FirstViewController.m. Be certain the checkbox to create a xib is not checked.
Open h and import the FirstViewController. Add a UIViewController property to SimpleWindowAppDelegate.h so it appears the same as
Modify m so it appears like Listing 7-6. Notice you must synthesize rootViewController and add its view to the window as a subview in the delegate’s applicationDidFinishLaunching: method.
Buildthe This step is important, if you do not build or save the changes, any added actions or outlets will not appear in Interface Builder.
Open xib in Interface Builder. Open the document window and notice that the File’s Owner isn’t set. Also notice there is no UIView.
Draga view from the library to the document window. Change the view’s
SelectFile’s Owner and change its class to FirstViewController in the Object Identity Inspector
Clickthe Connections Inspector and connect the view outlet to the view you added to the document
Save and close the FirstViewController’s document Open MainWindow.xib in Interface Builder.
Notice that there is no UIViewController or view set in the document window.
Draga view controller from the library to the document window (Figure 7-1).
Figure 7-1 Adding FirstViewController to Mainwindow.xib UIView and UIViewController Figure 7-2 Setting Mainwindow.xib’s root view controller
Inthe view controller’s inspector, change its NIB Name to FirstViewController and its type to
SelectSimpleWindow App Delegate in the document In its connections inspector, notice the rootViewController outlet. Connect this to the view controller just added (Figure 7-2).
Save and quit Interface
ClickBuildAnd Go to run the The view in FirstViewController.xib is loaded into the window and displayed.
[rootViewController release]; [super dealloc]; } @end In step 15, you connected the FirstViewController to the application’s delegate. This was an important step; it allowed the nib to set the delegate’s root view controller for you. The root view controller is the UIViewController that is first loaded by an application delegate. Remember, the application knew to load MainWindow.xib because it was in the application’s Info.plist. The application loaded MainWindow.xib, saw the FirstViewController object that was added to the document window and saw that the delegate’s root view controller was set to FirstViewController. The application also knew the controller came from FirstViewController .xib. Because of the object, variable, and nib setting, the application new to allocate and initialize a FirstViewController instance from FirstViewController.xib when loading MainWindow.xib. Because these relationships were established in Interface Builder, no manual code was necessary. This is how the View-based Application template builds a simple application, which you just duplicated manually using the Window-based application template. NOTE In this example, you manually created a xib and linked it to its associated view controller. Step 3 specifically instructed you to not check the checkbox that also created a xib; had you checked the checkbox, Xcode would have created a xib, and automatically made all the necessary connections for you.
f0:T15a3,
1 . In the BMM layer, right-click F1 Revenue and select New Object > Logical Column to open the Logical Column dialog box.
2 . On the General tab, enter Revenue Rank in the Name field.
3 . Click the Column Source tab.
4 . Select Derived from existing columns using an expression.
5 . Click the Edit Expression button to open Expression Builder.
6 . In the left pane select Functions > Display functions > Rank .
7 . Click the Insert selected item button to move the Rank function to the right pane.
Desired to gain proficiency on OBIEE 11g? Explore the blog post on OBIEE 11g training online to become a pro in OBIEE 11g
8 . Click <<numExpr>> in the expression.
9 . In the left pane select Logical Tables > F1 Revenue and then double-click Revenue to add it to the expression.
10 . Click OK to close Expression Builder. Notice that the formula is added to the Logical Column dialog box.
11 . Click OK to close the Logical Column dialog box. The Revenue Rank calculated measure is added to the business model.
12 . Drag Revenue Rank from the BMM layer to the Base Facts presentation table in the Presentation layer.
13 . Save the repository and check consistency. Fix any errors or warnings before proceeding.
14 . Close the repository. Leave the Admin Tool open.
1 . Right-click the D5 Sales Rep logical table and select Create Logical Dimension --> Dimension with Parent-Child Hierarchy.
2 . In the Logical Dimension dialog box, on the General tab, name the logical dimension H5 Sales Rep.
3 . Click Browse next to Member Key. The Browse window shows the physical table and its corresponding key.
4 . Click View to open the Logical Key dialog box. Confirm that the Sales Rep Number column is selected
5 . Click Cancel to close the Logical Key dialog box. 6 . Click OK to close the Browse window. 7 . Click Browse next to Parent Column. The Browse window shows the columns other than the member key.
8 . Deselect Show Qualified Names and select Manager Number as the parent column for the parent-child hierarchy.
9 . Click OK to close the Browse window, but do not close the Logical Dimension dialog box. Define Parent-Child Settings 1 . Click Parent-Child Settings to display the Parent-Child Relationship Table Settings dialog box. Note that at this point the Parent-Child Relationship Table is not defined.
For each parent-child hierarchy defined on a relational table, you must explicitly define the intermember relationships in a separate parent-child relationship table. In the process of creating the parent-child relationship table, you may choose one of the following options: 1. Select a previously-created parent-child relationship table. 2. Use a wizard that will generate scripts to create and populate the parent-child relationship table. In the next set of steps you select a previously created and populated parent-child relationship table. For your information only: To start the wizard you would click the Create Parent-Child Relationship Table button. The wizard creates the appropriate repository metadata objects and generates SQL scripts for creating and populating the parent-child relationship table. At the end of the wizard, Oracle BI Server stores the scripts into directories chosen during the wizard session. The scripts can then be run against the database to create and populate the parent-child relationship table. Running the wizard is not necessary in this tutorial because the parent-child relationship table is already created and populated. 2 . Click the Select Parent-Child Relationship Table button to open the Select Physical Table dialog box.
3 . In the Select Physical Table dialog box, select the D51 Sales Rep Parent Child alias you created.
4 . The D51 Sales Rep Parent Child alias is now displayed in the Parent-Child Relationship Table column.
5 . In the Parent-Child Table Relationship Column Details section, set the appropriate columns:
Member Key
MEMBER_KEY
Parent Key
ANCESTOR_KEY
Relationship Distance
DISTANCE
Leaf Node Identifier
IS_LEAF
Explanation: Member Key identifies the member. Parent Key identifies an ancestor of the member, The ancestor may be the parent of the member, or a higher-level ancestor. Relationship Distance specifies the number of parent-child hierarchical levels from the member to the ancestor. Leaf Node Identifier indicates if the member is a leaf member (1=Yes, 0=No). 6 . Click OK to close the Parent-Child Relationship Table Settings dialog box.
At TekSlate, we offer resources that help you in learning various IT courses.
We avail both written material and demo video tutorials.
To gain in-depth knowledge and be on par with practical experience, then explore OBIEE 11g Training Online.
7 . Click OK to close the Logical Dimension dialog box.
8 . Right-click H5 Sales Rep and select Expand All. Note that a parent-child logical dimension has only two levels.
9 . Delete all columns from the Detail level except for Sales Rep Name and Sales Rep Number.
10 . Double-click the Detail level to open the Logical Level dialog box. 11 . On the Keys tab, create a new key named Display Key that maps to the Sales Rep Name column.
12 . Deselect Use for Display for the Sales Rep Number column and select Use for Display for the Sales Rep Name column.
13 . Make sure that Member Key is still set to D50 Sales Rep_Key.
14 . Click OK to close the Logical Level dialog box.
15 . Expand F1 Revenue > Sources and double-click LTS1 Revenue to open the Logical Table Source dialog box.
16 . On the Content tab, set the logical level to Detail for the H5 Sales Rep logical dimension.
17 . Click OK to close the Logical Table Source dialog box.
f2:T219c,
• Import Metadata and Define Physical Layer Objects • Create Logical Table and Logical Columns • Create a Ragged/Skipped Levels Logical Dimension • Create Presentation Layer Objects • Test Your Work
Import Metadata and Define Physical Layer Objects
1 . Open the BISAMPLE repository in offline mode. 2 . In the Physical layer, expand orcl.
3 . Right-click Connection Pool and select Import Metadata to open the Import Wizard.
4 . In the Select Metadata Types screen, accept the defaults and click Next.
5 . In the Select Metadata Objects screen, in the data source view, expand BISAMPLE. 6 . In the data source view, select the SAMP_PRODUCTS_DR table for import:
7 . Click the Import Selected button to move the table to the Repository View. 8 . Expand BISAMPLE in the Repository View and confirm that the SAMP_PRODUCT_DR table is visible.
9 . Click Finish to close the Import Wizard. 10 . Confirm that the SAMP_PRODUCT_DR table is visible in the Physical layer of the repository.
11 . Create the following alias for the table: D20 Product
12 . Use the Physical Diagram to create the following physical join for the alias table: "orcl".""."BISAMPLE"."D20 Product"."PROD_KEY" = "orcl".""."BISAMPLE"."F1 Revenue"."PROD_KEY"
13 . Right-click D20 Product and select View Data.
Notice there are skipped levels in the hierarchy. For example, brand A - Brand2 has a NULL value for LOB for the product D - Product 8. 14 . Close View Data. Create Logical Table and Logical Columns 1 . Drag D20 Product from the Physical layer to the Sample Sales business model in the BMM layer to create a D20 Product logical table. The logical join to F1 Revenue is created automatically based on the join in the Physical layer.
Old Name
New Name
BRAND
Brand
LOB
LOB
PROD_DSC
Product
PROD_KEY
Product Number
Type
Product Type
3 . Rename the D20 Product logical table source to LTS1 Product (Ragged)
Desired to gain proficiency on OBIEE 11g?
Explore the blog post on OBIEE 11g training online to become a pro in OBIEE 11g
Create a Ragged/Skipped Level Logical Dimension
1 . Right-click the D20 Product logical table and select Create Logical Dimension > Dimension with Level-Based Hierarchy to automatically create a logical dimension named D20 ProductDim.
2 . Rename D20 ProductDim to H20 Product.
3 . Double-click the H20 Product logical dimension to open the Logical Dimension dialog box.
4 . On the General tab, select both Ragged and Skipped Levels.
5 . Click OK to close the Logical Dimension dialog box. 6 . Expand H20 Product.
7 . Create the following hierarchy:
Level
Column
Key
Use for Display
Product Total
<none>
<none>
<none>
Product Brand
Brand
Brand
Yes
Product LOB
LOB
LOB
Yes
Product Type
Product Type
Product Type
Yes
Product
Product
Product
Yes
Product Detail
Product Number
Product Number
Yes
f3:T20f2,
1 . In the Physical layer, expand D1 Time Quarter Grain.
2 . In the BMM layer, expand D1 Time.
D1 Time Quarter Grain
D1 Time
CAL_HALF
Cal Half
CAL_QTR
Cal Qtr
CAL_YEAR
Cal Year
DAYS_IN_QTR
Days in Qtr
JULIAN_QTR_NUM
Julian Qtr Num
PER_NAME_HALF
Per Name Half
PER_NAME_QTR
Per Name Qtr
PER_NAME_YEAR
Per Name Year
This action creates a new logical table source named D1 Time Quarter Grain for D1 Time.
4 . Rename the D1 Time Quarter Grain logical table source to LTS2 Time Quarter Grain.
5 . Double-click LTS2 Time Quarter Grain to open the Logical Table Source dialog box. 6 . On the Column Mapping tab make sure show mapped columns is selected and note the column mappings. The logical columns now map to columns in two physical tables: D1 Time and D1 Time Quarter Grain.
7 . Click OK to close the Logical Table Source dialog box. 8 . In the Physical layer expand F2 Revenue Aggregate.
9 . In the BMM layer expand F1 Revenue.
10 . Drag the following physical columns from F2 Revenue Aggregate to their corresponding logical columns in F1 Revenue: Note: Do not add them as new columns.
F2 Revenue Aggregate
F1 Revenue
UNITS
Units
REVENUE
Revenue
This action creates a new logical table source named F2 Revenue Aggregate for F1 Revenue.
11 . Rename the F2 Revenue Aggregate logical table source to LTS2 Revenue Aggregate.
These core tutorials will help you to learn the fundamentals of OBIEE 11g.
For an in-depth understanding and practical experience, explore OBIEE 11g Training.
12 . Double-click LTS2 Revenue Aggregate to open the Logical Table Source dialog box. 13 . On the Column Mappings tab make sure show mapped columns is selected and note the column mappings. The Revenue and Units logical columns now map to columns in two physical tables: F1 Revenue and F2 Revenue Aggregate.
1 . Click the Content tab. 2 . Set the following logical levels for the logical dimensions:
Logical Dimension
Logical Level
H1 Time
Quarter
H2 Product
Product Total
H20 Product
Product Total
H3 Customer
Customer Total
H5 Sales Rep
Total
Explanation: You are setting aggregation content for the fact table to the corresponding levels in the dimension hierarchies. In a subsequent step, you set similar levels for the aggregate logical table source for the Time dimension. Note that all levels are set to the total level except for the H1 Time logical dimension, which is set to Quarter. The result is, when a user queries against a particular level, Oracle BI Server will “know” to access the aggregate tables instead of the detail tables. For example, if a user queries for total sales by product by quarter, the server will access the F2 Revenue Aggregate fact table and the corresponding aggregate dimension table, D1 Time Quarter Grain. If a user queries for a level lower than the level specified here, for example Month instead of Quarter, then the server will access the detail tables (F1 Revenue and D1 Time). If a user queries for higher level (year instead of quarter) the aggregate tables will be used, because whenever a query is run against a logical level or above, the aggregate tables are used.
3 . Click OK to close the Logical Table Source dialog box. 4 . Double-click the LTS2 Time Quarter Grain logical table source to open the Logical Table Source dialog box. 5 . On the Content tab, set the logical level to Quarter.
6 . Click OK to close the Logical Table Source dialog box. 7 . Save the repository and check global consistency. Fix any errors or warnings before proceeding. 8 . Close the repository. Leave the Administration Tool open. Note that you did not need to change the Presentation layer. You made changes in the business model that impact how queries are processed and which sources are accessed. However, the user interface remains the same, so there is no need to change the Presentation layer. Oracle BI Server will automatically use the appropriate sources based on the user query.
f4:T21ba,
You can use variables in a repository to streamline administrative tasks and modify metadata content dynamically to adjust to a changing data environment. A variable has a single value at any point in time. Variables can be used instead of literals or constants in the Expression Builder in the Administration Tool or in end-user analyses. At run time, Oracle BI Server substitutes the value of the variable. In this set of steps you create a new initialization block, Current Periods, and three new dynamic repository variables—CurrentYear, CurrentMonth, and CurrentDay. You then use the variables as column filters in an Oracle BI analysis. You use the Variable Manager in the Administration Tool to define variables and initialization blocks.
To set up and use initialization blocks and variables, perform the following steps: • Create an Initialization Block • Create Variables • Test Your Work
Create an Initialization Block
1 . Open the BISAMPLE repository in offline mode. 2 . Select Manage > Variables to open the Variable Manager.
4 . Name the initialization block Current Periods.
5 . Click the Edit Data Source button to open the Repository Variable Initialization Block Data Source dialog box.
6 . Click the Browse button to open the Select Connection Pool dialog box.
7 . Double-click the Connection Pool object to select it.
The connection pool is added.
8 . Enter the following SQL to determine the value of the current day, month, and year by finding the maximum value of the period key (BILL_DAY_DT) in the fact table: SELECT CALENDAR_DATE, PER_NAME_MONTH, PER_NAME_YEAR FROM BISAMPLE.SAMP_TIME_DAY_D WHERE CALENDAR_DATE = (SELECT MAX(BILL_DAY_DT) FROM BISAMPLE.SAMP_REVENUE_F)
9 . Click Test and confirm the expected results are returned. In this example, the results are determined by the data in the sample database used for this tutorial, which holds data through December 2010.
10 . Close the Results window. 11 . Click OK to close the Repository Variable Initialization Block Data Source dialog box. Check your work:
Desired to gain proficiency on OBIEE 11g ?
Explore the blog post on OBIEE 11g training to become a pro in OBIEE 11g.
Create Variables
1 . Click Edit Data Target to open the Repository Variable Initialization Block Variable Target dialog box.
2 . Use the New button to create three new variables: CurrentDay, CurrentMonth, CurrentYear. The order is important. The value returned from the first column in the initialization block SQL, CALENDAR_DATE, is assigned to the CurrentDay variable. The value of the second column, PER_NAME_MONTH, is assigned to CurrentMonth (the second variable), and the value of the third column, PER_NAME_YEAR, is assigned to CurrentYear (the third variable). If necessary, use the Up and Down buttons to arrange the variables.
3 . Click OK to close the Repository Variable Initialization Block Variable Target dialog box. 4 . Leave the default refresh interval set to every hour. This means that the variables will be reinitialized every hour.
5 . Click the Test button and check the results:
In this example, the results are determined by the data in the sample database used for this tutorial, which holds data through December 2010. 6 . Close the Results window. 7 . Click OK to close the Repository Variable Initialization Block dialog box. 8 . Check your work in the Variable Manager:
9 . Close the Variable Manager. 10 . Save the repository and check consistency. Fix any errors or warnings before proceeding. 11 . Close the repository. Leave the Administration Tool open.
In this topic you create time series calculation measures using Oracle BI time series functions.
Time series functions include AGO, TODATE, and PERIODROLLING. These functions let you use Expression Builder to call a logical function to perform time series calculations instead of creating aliases for physical tables and modeling logically. The time series functions calculate AGO, TODATE, and PERIODROLLING functions based on the calendar tables in your data warehouse, not on standard SQL date manipulation functions.
To create time series measures, you perform the following steps: • Identify a Logical Dimension as a Time Dimension • Identify Level Keys as Chronological Keys • Create a Measure Using the AGO Function • Create a Measure Using the TODATE Function • Create a Measure Using the PERIODROLLING Function • Test Your Work
Identify a Logical Dimension as a Time Dimension
1 . Return to the Administration Tool and open the BISAMPLE repository in offline mode. 2 . In the BMM layer, double-click the H1 Time logical dimension to open the Logical Dimension dialog box.
3 . In the Structure section, select Time.
Time series functions operate on time-oriented dimensions. To use these functions on a particular dimension, you must designate the dimension as a Time dimension. 4 . Click OK to close the Logical Dimension dialog box.
Identify Level Keys as Chronological Keys 1 . Expand the H1 Time logical dimension and double-click the Time Detail level to open the Logical Level dialog box. 2 . Click the Keys tab.
3 . Select the Chronological Key check box for Calendar Date.
4 . Click OK to close the Logical Level dialog box. 5 . Repeat and set chronological keys for the following levels:
Logical Level
Chronological Key
Year
Per Name Year
Half
Per Name Half
Quarter
Per Name Qtr
Month
Per Name Month
Week
Per Name Week
It is best practice to designate a chronological key for every level of a time logical dimension.
Create a Measure Using the AGO Function
1 . Right-click the F1 Revenue logical table and select New Object > Logical Column. 2 . On the General tab, name the column Month Ago Revenue.
3 . On the Column Source tab, select "Derived from existing columns using an expression."
4 . Open the Expression Builder. 5 . Select Functions > Time Series Functions > Ago.
6 . Double-click Ago or click Insert selected item to add the Ago function to the Expression Builder.
7 . Click <<Measure>>in the expression.
These core tutorials will help you to learn the fundamentals of OBIEE 11g.
For an in-depth understanding and practical experience, explore OBIEE 11g Training.
8 . Select Logical Tables > F1 Revenue and then double-click Revenue to add it to the expression.
9 . Click <<Level>> in the expression.
10 . Select Time Dimensions > H1 Time and then double-click Month to add it to the expression.
11 . Click <<Number of Periods>> and enter 1. The Ago function will calculate the Revenue value one month before the current month.
12 . Click OK to close the Expression Builder. Check your work in the Logical Column dialog box:
13 . Click OK to close the Logical Column dialog box. The Month Ago Revenue time series measure is added to the F1 Revenue logical table.
14 . Drag the Month Ago Revenue logical column to the Base Facts presentation folder.
f6:T544c,
Tables Using UITableView and UITableViewController
Key Skills & Concepts
Understanding table views
Understanding table view delegates
Understanding table view data sources
Grouping and indexing table rows
Selecting table rows
Modifying a table’s appearance
Using a table in a navigation controller
Editing a table’s rows
TableViews display content in a list. Tables have a single column and multiple rows. They can scroll vertically and display large data sets. For example, the Notes application is a good example of an application containing a table. Note’s first screen is a list comprised of zero or more notes. In Figure 10-1, the list contains three notes. Each row presents the note’s text, transcription time, and a disclosure arrow.
Figure 10-1 The Notes application consists of a UITableView and UINavigationBar.
Figure 10-2 Creating a new note using the Notes application
The disclosure arrow indicates that details are on the next screen. Upon tapping a row, the application takes the user to the detail view for that particular row’s note (Figure 10-2). Tables can be grouped and indexed. For instance, the Music application on an iPod touch uses an index (Figure 10-3). The Settings application’s rows are grouped (Figure 10-4). Table rows might also contain a picture and other customizations, as the YouTube and App Store applications illustrate (Figure 10-5). As the applications in the first five figures illustrate, the table view is a powerful control for listing items. You can modify rows, add images, select rows, and edit them. In this chapter, you learn how to use tables. You learn how to build a table, change its style to grouped, add an index to it, and accessorize it. You also learn how to place a table in a navigation controller and how to edit a table’s rows. It is a long chapter, but the table view is a powerful control.
UITableView
The UITableView class represents a table view. This class is for displaying and editing information lists. It consists of a single column of multiple rows. Users can scroll vertically to navigate through a table’s rows. Each row contains a cell. You can customize that cell’s appearance considerably. You can index tables and create tables with zero or more sections. When you create a table, you have a choice of two styles: UITableViewStylePlain or UITableViewStyleGrouped. A plain table style presents a table like that in Figure 10-3. A grouped table presents a table like that in Figure 10-4. You see examples implementing both styles later in this chapter.
Figure 10-3 The Music application on an ipod Figure 10-4 The Settings application uses a grouped UITableView touch uses a UITableView with an index.
Figure 10-5 The YouTube and App Store applications use images and custom cells.
UITableView classes have an associated UITableViewController, a UITableViewDelegate, and a UITableViewDataSource. The UITableViewController is the controller class for a table view. You create an instance of this class to manage the UITableView. The UITableViewDelegate is a protocol you adopt in a custom class you write. This protocol allows you to manage selections, configure headers and footers, and manage cells. The UITableViewDataSource is also a protocol you adopt in a custom class. This protocol allows you to manage a table’s data source.
Adopting the UITableViewDelegate and UITableViewDataSource
In this first task, you create a UIViewController and have it manage the table view. You also implement a custom class that adopts the UITableViewDelegate and UITableViewDataSource. Creating an Empty Table
Createa new Window-based Name the application TableProjectOne.
Createa new UIViewController Name the class MyViewController.
Createa new empty xib named
Open xib.
Add a view to the document window and add a table view to the view (Figure 10-6). Be certain to resize the table view to completely fill the
Change the File’s Owner to Connect the File’s Owner view to the view in the document window.
Save and exit Interface
Add a MyViewController as an IBOutlet to TableProjectOneAppDelegate (Listings 10-1 and 10-2).
Modify applicationDidFinishLaunching so it adds the viewController property’s Build the application.
Open xib and drag a View Controller to the document window. Change its class and Nib Name to MyViewController.
Connect the TableProjectOneAppDelegate’s viewController outlet to the MyViewController added to the document
Save and exit Interface
Buildand run the The application loads an empty table into the iPhone
Figure 10-6 Adding a UITableView to an Interface Builder project NOTE In steps 1–13, you added the table view as a subview to the view in the MyViewController Nib. If you preferred, you could omit the extra view and just add the table view directly as the nib’s view. But note, you would also change MyViewController from a UIViewController, to a UITableViewController. Point is, you don’t have to put the UITableView inside a UIView in order to use it. A UITableView can be added directly to the XIB and connected to a table view controller’s view outlet, and it will work the same way. The next Try This example illustrates.
Figure 10-7 An application with an empty UITableView
Listing 10-1 TableProjectOneAppDelegate.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> #import "MyViewController.h" @interface TableProjectOneAppDelegate : NSObject <UIApplicationDelegate> { UIWindow *window; IBOutlet MyViewController * viewController; } @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet MyViewController * viewController; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIWindow *window; @end Listing 10-2 TableProjectOneAppDelegate.m #import "TableProjectOneAppDelegate.h" @implementation TableProjectOneAppDelegate @synthesize window; @synthesize viewController;(void)applicationDidFinishLaunching:(UIApplication *)application { [window addSubview:self.viewController.view]; [window makeKeyAndVisible]; }(void)dealloc { [window release]; [viewController release]; [super dealloc]; } @end In this task’s first step, you created a UITableView as a subview of a UIView. When the UIViewController loads and displays its view, the view automatically displays its subview, the table view. But all it loads is an empty table. To actually load data into the table, you must implement a delegate and a data source. Moreover, the data source must actually provide data for the table. In the next few steps, you create a delegate and data source for the table. Adding a Delegate and Data Source
Createa new NSObject named Change TableHandler so it adopts the UITableViewDelegate and UITableViewDataSource protocols (Listings 10-3 and 10-4).
Add an NSArray property and a method named fillList for filling the
Implementthe fillArray method so the application has data to load into the table’s
Implement the tableView:numberOfRowsInSection: and tableView:cellForRowAtIndexPath:
Modify MyViewController to have a TableHandler property (Listings 10-5 and 10-6). Ensure the property is an
Implement the viewDidLoad method in MyViewController so that it calls its TableHandler’s fillList
Save and
Open xib and drag an object to the document window. Change the object’s class to TableHandler (Figure 10-8).
Connectthe File’s Owner myHandler outlet to the newly added TableHandler (Figure 10-9).
Figure 10-8 Adding a TableHandler reference to Interface Builder
Connect the table view’s dataSource and delegate outlets to the newly added table handler.
Save and exit Interface
ClickBuildAnd The application displays 20 rows (Figure 10-10).
Figure 10-9 Connecting the controller to TableHandler
Figure 10-10 The project running in iPhone Simulator
The UITableViewController manages a table view. The UITableView can use objects defined in a table’s nib to define a table’s delegate and data source, or it can use itself as the delegate and data source. For instance, in the previous example, you set the table’s delegate and data source properties to the TableHandler class. You could have added a UITableViewController, set it as the table’s File’s Owner, and then set its outlets to TableHandler. If you do not provide a delegate and data source in a table’s nib, a UITableViewController sets its data source and delegate to itself. By doing this, the UITableViewController saves you the work of having to create your own classes so they adopt the delegate and data source. You still must implement any data source and delegate methods desired. However, rather than implementing these methods in separate custom classes, you implement them in a UITableViewController subclass. The UITableViewController then functions as the table’s controller, delegate, and data source.
Using a UITableViewController
In the last Try This task, you did things the hard way. However, the task’s purpose was to illustrate adding a table view as a subview, with no controller. In this Try This task, you use a UITableViewController. Moreover, rather than adding a table view as a subview, you add it directly to the xib as the primary view.
Create a new Window-based Name the application TableProjectTwo.
Createa new UITableViewController Name the class MyTableViewController (Listings 10-9 and 10-10).
Createa new empty xib named
Open xib.
Add a table view to the document window (Figure 10-11).
Change the File’s Owner to MyTableViewController if it is not already. Connect the File’s Owner view to the table view in the document window.
Figure 10-11 Adding a UITableView to an Interface Builder project
Connect the newly added table view’s dataSource and delegate outlets to the File’s
Save and exit Interface
Add a MyTableViewController as an IBOutlet to TableProjectTwoAppDelegate (Listings 10-7 and 10-8). Do not forget to import
Modify applicationDidFinishLaunching so it adds the viewController property’s Build the application.
Open xib and drag a Table View Controller to the document window. Change its class and Nib Name to MyTableViewController.
Connect the TableProjectTwoAppDelegate’s viewController outlet to the MyTableViewController added to the document
Save and exit Interface builder.
Implement the table delegate and datasource methods the same as you did in TableHandler in this chapter’s first Try This task.
Modify MyTableViewController so that it has an NSArray called tableDataList and have it populated in the viewDidLoad
Build and run the application. The application loads an empty table into the iPhone Simulator. The results should match the previous task’s results (Figure 10-10).
Tables have two main styles: grouped and plain. Figure 10-3 illustrates a table with a plain style, while Figure 10-4 illustrates a table with a grouped style. Plain tables might also be indexed. An index sorts the rows and makes navigation quicker by letting a user jump to different locations in the index.
Grouped Table Style
Grouping is accomplished by changing a UITableView’s style to grouped. You then tell a UITableView’s data source how many sections belong in the table and how many rows belong in each section. The class adopting the UITableViewDataSource protocol informs the table how many sections via the numberOfSectionsInTableView method. It informs the table how many rows are in each section via the tableView:numberOfRowsInSection: method.
Each grouping might have a title. You add titles by having your UITableViewDataSource protocol adoption implement the tableView:titleForHeaderInSection method. This method provides a table view with a title for a section’s header. You might also wish adding a footer to each grouping by implementing the tableView:titleForFooterInSection: method.
Copy TableProjectOne from the first task to a new Open the newly copied TableProjectOne in Xcode.
Modify the array in TableHandler so tableDataList consists of an array of five arrays (Listing 10-10).
Add the numberOfSectionsInTableView and titleForHeaderInSection methods to m (Listing 10-11).
Modify numberOfRowsInSection to return 2.
Modify cellForRowAtIndexPath so it uses the section and the row (Listing 10-12).
Open xib in Interface Builder.
Change the table view’s Style from Plain to Grouped (Figure 10-12).
Save and exit Interface Click Build And Go. The table’s rows are grouped (Figure 10-13).
The fillList method initializes an NSArray of five NSArrays. The numberOfSectionsInTable View method simply returns five. Although not realistic, this number matches the number of data arrays (tempArrayA through tempArrayB). The tableView:titleForHeaderInSection is hard-coded to return A, B, C, D, or E, depending upon the current section. When the table loads, five sections are created, each with a title from the titleForHeaderInSection method. Each row’s content is determined from the cellForRowAtIndexPath method. Figure 10-13 The application running in iPhone Simulator Listing 10-10 Table’s list modified to an array of arrays(void) fillList { NSArray * tempArrayA = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:@"AItem One", @"AItem Two", nil] autorelease]; NSArray * tempArrayB = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:@"BItem Three", @"BItem Four", nil] autorelease]; NSArray * tempArrayC = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:@"CItem Five", @"CItem Six", nil] autorelease]; NSArray * tempArrayD = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:@"DItem Seven", @"DItem Eight", nil] autorelease]; NSArray * tempArrayE = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:@"EItem Nine", @"EItem Ten", nil] autorelease]; NSArray * tempArray = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:tempArrayA, tempArrayB, tempArrayC, tempArrayD, tempArrayE, nil] autorelease]; self.tableDataList = tempArray; } Listing 10-11 Modifications to TableHandler.m to support grouping
Tables can be indexed. To index a table, a table’s style should be plain. As with grouping, you implement the numberOfSectionsInTableView: and tableView:numberOfRowsInSection: methods, but you also implement a third method: sectionIndexTitlesForTableView:. This method, implemented in your UITableViewDataSource adoptee, creates the titles that appear along a table’s right side. Upon clicking one of these values, a user is taken directly to the group with the corresponding title. - (NSArray *) sectionIndexTitlesForTableView:(UITableView *) tableView
Indexing
Open the TableProjectOne from the grouping Try This task.
Open xib and change the table view’s style to Plain.
Save and exit Interface Click Build And Go. Notice the application is still grouped, but the table’s appearance is changed (Figure 10-14).
Figure 10-14 A plain table with groupings
Implement the sectionIndexTitlesForTableView method, as in Listing 10-13, in m.
ClickBuildAnd The application has an index (Figure 10-15).
Figure 10-15 The indexed table running in iPhone Simulator
NOTE Don’t let this chapter’s reliance on simple NSArrays fool you into thinking you must use this collection class to hold a table’s data. You can use any collection class, or any other method you deem appropriate, provided you implement methods to obtain the data correctly.
Images in Tables
Adding an image to a table, provided you are happy with the image appearing in the row’s upper-left corner, is not difficult. Simply add an image to the cell in the tableView: cellForRowAtIndexPath: method. Remember, this method loads a UITableViewCell into a row. You can use this method to initialize a table cell with an image using the UITableViewCell’s imageView.image property. The image is then displayed in the table’s row.
Adding an Image
Open the last task’s From the book’s Resources folder, add the images power.png,icon.png, package.png, web.png, and colorize.png to the project’s Resources folder.
Modify the tableView:cellForRowAtIndexPath: method to match Listing 10-14.
ClickBuildAnd Notice the images overrun the table cell bounds (Figure 10-16).
Scale the images in Make the images 32 × 32 pixels.
Re-importthe images into the
ClickBuildAnd The images display correctly (Figure 10-17).
Figure 10-16 Images are too large to display in the application’s table rows.
Figure 10-17 Resized images displayed correctly
Selecting Rows
The UITableView allows you to select a row. Typically, a table presents rows to a user, where each row is an item in a hierarchical list. Upon selecting a row, the user is generally taken to another view presenting the item’s details. You implement the tableView: willSelectRowAtIndex: and tableView:didSelectRowAtIndexPath: methods if you wish to allow a user to select a row. (NSIndexPath *) tableView:(UITableView *) tableView willSelectRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath(void) tableView:(UITableView *) tableView didSelectRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath The tableView:willSelectRowAtIndexPath: method allows the delegate to react to a row about to be selected. The tableView:didSelectRowAtIndexPath: method allows a reactionto a row’s selection. These methods are useful because they allow you to implement custom behavior in a table’s delegate when a row is selected.
Row Selection
Open the last task’s project in Xcode.
Add the tableView:willSelectRowAtIndexPath: and the tableView: didSelectRowAtIndexPath: methods in Listing 10-15 to m.
Click Build And The application looks the same as the previous task’s results. Clicking the items should result in logging similar to Listing 10-16.
Listing 10-15 The tableView:willSelectRowAtIndexPath: and tableView: didSelectRowAtIndexPath: methods -(NSIndexPath *) tableView: (UITableView *) tableView willSelectRowAt IndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath { NSLog(@"I selected the item at the %d array and %d item, the value is: %@", indexPath.section, indexPath.row, [[self.tableDataList objectAtIndex: indexPath.section] objectAtIndex: indexPath.row]); return indexPath; } -(void)tableView:(UITableView *) tableView didSelectRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) index { NSLog(@"Yes I did...."); } Listing 10-16 Debugger Console logging [Session started at 2009-01-09 13:25:41 -0500.] 2009-01-09 13:25:45.453 TableProjectOne[2089:20b] I selected the item at the 0 array and 0 item, the value is: AItem One 2009-01-09 13:25:45.454 TableProjectOne[2089:20b] Yes I did.... 2009-01-09 13:25:48.372 TableProjectOne[2089:20b] I selected the item at the 1 array and 0 item, the value is: BItem Three 2009-01-09 13:25:48.373 TableProjectOne[2089:20b] Yes I did.... Changing Row Height A couple of sections ago, you added images that were too large to display in a table’s row. The correct way to fix this is usually to resize the images. However, sometimes you want to display a larger image, text with a large font, or a custom cell. One way you can add space in a table’s row is by increasing the row’s height. You increase a row’s height using the heightForRowAtIndexPath method. Changing Row Height
Open the previous task project in Xcode.
Add the heightForRowAtIndexPath: method in Listing 10-17 to m.
ClickBuildAnd Go, and the rows are 90 pixels tall (Figure 10-18).
Figure 10-18 The application running with 90-pixel-high rows in iPhone Simulator
Listing 10-17 The heightForRowAtIndexPath method added to TableView
-(CGFloat) tableView : (UITableView *) tableView heightForRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath { return 90; } Accessorizing Table Cells You can tell a cell to place a check mark, disclosure arrow, or detailed disclosure button in the cell by setting the cell’s accessoryView or accessoryType properties. Accessories are visual user interface clues for users. For instance, the check mark might inform a user that he or she has already selected a row. A disclosure arrow or a detailed disclosure button might hint to a user that he or she can select the row to view the row’s details in another view. The check mark and disclosure button are visual clues for a user and do not provide events that respond to a user tapping them. However, the detailed disclosure button can respond to a user tapping it.
Accessorizing a Table Cell
Open the previous project in Xcode and comment the section Index Titles For TableView method in m.
Add the tableView:accessoryButtonTappedForRowWithIndexPath: method to m(Listing10-18).Also modify the tableView:cellForRowAtIndexPath: method to add the accessories to the table cells.
ClickBuildAnd The rows contain accessories (Figure 10-19). When you tap the detailed disclosure button, the table calls the tableView:accessoryButtonTappedForRow WithIndexPath: method.
Tables can be customized. Sometimes you might wish to format data differently than provided by the default UITableViewCell. The most direct way to accomplish formatting a table cell is by adding a view to the UITableViewCell. You do this in code, by adding a subview to a cell when initializing it in the tableView:cellForRowAtIndexPath method. Another technique is to create a subclass of a UITableViewCell and then create its graphical layout using Interface Builder.
Customizing a Cell Using Interface Builder
Create a new Navigation-based Name the application CustomizedCell.
Createa new subclass of Note that Xcode provides a template for this class. Name the class MyCellView. Be certain to deselect the Use Core Data for storage checkbox if selected.
InMyCellView,createa new UILabel outlet named theTextLabel (Listings 10-19 and 10- 20).
ClickSave And
Dragthe image png from this book’s Resources folder to the Resources folder in theproject.Save.
Createa new Empty Name the file MyCellView.xib and open it in Interface Builder.
Add a Table View Cell from the library to the document window.
Change the cell’s class from UITableViewCell to
Double-clickMyCellViewin the document window to open the cell’s
Inthe Inspector, select png as the cell’s image. Change the cell’s background to yellow. Also, be certain to set the Identifier to MyCell (Figure 10-20).
Figure 10-20 Setting the identifier to MyCell
Figure 10-21 Adding UIImageView and UILabels to a view canvas
CAUTION If you do not set a cell’s identifier, the cell can never be reused. This means every call to tableView:cellForRowAtIndexPath: results in a new table cell.
Drag a UIImageView and two UILabels to the canvas (Figure 10-21). Type some text in one label; delete the other label’s Set the image view’s image to money.png.
Connectthe MyCellView’s theTextLabel outlet to the newly added
Save and exit Interface
Open xib in Interface Builder and change the table view’s background to yellow. Save and exit Interface Builder.
Modify RootViewController to implement the UITableViewController methods needed so they match Listings 10-21 and 10-22.
Modify the tableView:cellForRowAtIndexPath: method to set the cell’s accessory, background color, and
ClickBuildAnd The table cells have the customized appearance (Figure 10-22).
if(cell == nil) { cell = [[[NSBundle mainBundle] loadNibNamed:@"MyCellView" owner:self options:nil] objectAtIndex:0]; } [cell.theTextLabel setText:@"Just some static text."]; NSString *imagePath = [[NSBundle mainBundle] pathForResource:@"money" ofType:@"png"]; cell.imageView.image = [UIImage imageWithContentsOfFile:imagePath]; [cell setAccessoryType:UITableViewCellAccessoryCheckmark]; cell.contentView.backgroundColor = [UIColor yellowColor]; cell.backgroundView.backgroundColor = [UIColor yellowColor]; return cell; } - (void)dealloc { [super dealloc];}@end Notice in the previous example that you initialize the cell every time it’s called in the tableView:CellForRowAtIndexPath: method. This initialization is per Apple’s documentation, Table View Programming Guide for iPhone OS. The ―tableView:cellForRowAtIndexPath should always reset all content when reusing a cell.‖ That is why in the tableView: cellForRowAtIndexPath: you set the cell’s background color, image, and label text. In a more realistic example, you would probably vary a cell’s content depending upon the row. Implementing a UITableViewCell in its own nib does not require implementing a UITableViewCell class, as you did in the example. However, if you wish to override a UITableViewCell’s method, such as setSelected, you must implement your own custom class. You then set the UITableViewCell’s type in Interface Builder to be your custom subclass. In this example, that class is MyCellView. Implementing a custom UITableViewCell subclass is also a convenient location to place IBOutlets and IBActions for the controls on your custom UITableViewCell control. NOTE For more information on table-view cells, refer to the "A Closer Look at Table-View Cells" in Apple’s "Table View Programming Guide" for iPhone OS.
f8:T14bb,
You can also review default security settings by using the Administration Tool.
1 . Open the Administration Tool. Click Start --> All Programs --> Oracle Business Intelligence --> BI Administration.
Note: When you first start the Administration Tool, a DOS window appears. Keep this window open while you work. You can minimize the window to avoid accidentally closing it. 2 . Click File > Open > Offline.
3 . The repositories are located in <ORACLE_INSTANCE>\bifoundation\OracleBIServerComponent\coreappplication_obips1\repository (for example, c:\bi11g\instances\instance3\bifoundation\OracleBIServerComponent\coreappplication_obips1\repository). In the Open dialog box, select the SampleApp repository (for example, SampleApp_BI0010.rpd) and click Open.
Note that Oracle BI Release 11g (11.1.1.5) automatically appends a numeric, incremental suffix to each version of the .rpd file. 4 . A message box appears, indicating that this repository must be opened in read-only mode. This is because the repository has been loaded into the Oracle BI Server. Click Yes when the message box appears.
5 . In the Open Offline dialog box, enter the Repository Password (for example, Admin123) and click OK. If you are unsure of this password, you can verify it with your local administrator.
The repository opens in read-only mode.
6 . Click Manage > Identity.
The Identity Manager dialog box appears. You can review each user authorized for this repository and also each application role.
At TekSlate, we offer resources that help you in learning various IT courses.
We avail both written material and demo video tutorials.
To gain in-depth knowledge and be on par with practical experience, then exploerOBIEE Training.
7 . Double-click hmayes to view the roles that are assigned to Helen.
8 . These roles are precisely the same as those identified in Oracle WebLogic Server. Click Cancel.
You can similarly view Adam's application roles, if you so choose. 9 . Click Application Roles. Examine the roles available in the Administration Tool.
10 . Click Action > Close to close Identity Manager. 11 . Click File > Close to close the repository. Leave the Administration Tool open.
f9:T1e22,
The Web View
This chapter wraps up its discussion of controls by discussing the web view. The UIWebView is the class you use to add a web browser to your application. It’s based upon the same code foundation as Safari, and so you can use CSS and JavaScript. Using the web view can be easy, or more difficult, depending upon how much you wish your application to interact with the browser. In this chapter you keep it simple.
UIWebView
The UIWebView is responsible for the web view’s display. It is an easy means of embedding web content in your application. The loadRequest: method is how you load web content. You can check on the control’s progress loading a resource using the loading property. You might also wish moving forward or backward through the user’s browsing history; you do this using the goBack and goForward methods. And of course, you can first check to see if the control can move backwards or forwards by checking the canGoBack or canGoForward properties. If you own an iPhone, then I am certain you have noticed that you can tap telephone numbers in the Safari browser and it automatically dials the number. The UIWebView automatically implements this behavior unless you specifically inform it not to by setting the detectsPhoneNumbers property to NO. Another method that is subtle, yet powerful is the stringByEvaluatingJavaScriptFromString: method. - (NSString *)stringByEvaluatingJavaScriptFromString:(NSString *)script Why is this method so powerful? The stringByEvaluatingJavaScriptFromString: method allows evaluating any JavaScript string. You can access a page’s Document Object Model (DOM) through JavaScript, and so you can manipulate an HTML page’s content. The HTML DOM is a W3C standard for manipulating HTML documents. HTML DOM is outside this book’s scope, but for more information refer to the W3C School’s HTML DOM Tutorial, available online at www.w3schools.com. If you wish programming using the web browser you would be well served by learning the HTML DOM. The following Try This example, illustrates using the stringByEvaluatingJavaScriptFromString: method to print a page’s HTML content.You navigate to a specific page by using the UIWebView’s loadRequest method. - (void) loadRequest: (NSURLRequest *) request The loadRequest method takes a URL request as a parameter and navigates to the resource represented by the underlying URL. A NSURL class wraps the NSURLRequest’s underlying URL. Both the NSURLRequest and NSURL are part of the Foundation framework. You use both in the next Try This example application.
UIWebViewDelegate
UIWebViews can also have a delegate. You create a delegate for a UIWebView by creating a class that adopts the UIWebViewDelegate protocol and then assigning the UIWebView’s delegate property to the custom class. The UIWebViewDelegate handles key events when loading a web page. When an event occurs, the web view calls the appropriate delegate method. For instance, when a web view is about to load a page it calls the webView:should StartLoadWithRequest:navigationType: method.
request navigationType:(UIWebViewNavigationType)navigationType When a web view starts loading a page it calls the webViewDidStartLoad: method.
(void)webViewDidStartLoad:(UIWebView *)webView
When a web view finishes loading a page it calls the webViewDidFinishLoad: method, unless an error occurs, and instead it calls the webView:didFailLoadWithError: method.
1. Create a new View-based Application named MyWeb.2. Create a new class called MyWebViewDelegate and have it adopt the UIWebViewDelegate protocol (Listings 12-10 and 12-11).3. Open MyWebViewController.xib in Interface Builder.4. Add a Web View from the Library to the canvas. Also add a text field and a button
Figure 12-29 A simple web browser in Interface Builder
Change the text field’s keyboard type to URL.
Save and exit Interface
Open MyWebViewController and add IBOutlets for the text field and the web view (Listings 12-12 and 12-13). Add and IBAction called Add the MyWebViewDelegate as a property and implement the viewDidLoad method.
Save and return to Interface
Connectthe button’s Touch Up Inside action to the changeLocation Connect the text field and web view to their respective outlets.
Save and exit Interface
Buildand
Typehttp://www.apple.comin the text field and tap GO and the web page loads in the web view (Figure 12-30). The web page’s HTML is also logged to the debugger console (not provided as a listing due to its length).
Figure 12-30 A simple web browser displaying Apple’s home page
Sometimes you need to use the output from a command more than once. To accomplish this, you can redirect the output of commands using some neat command – line tricks.
There are also a few characters you can use to direct or redirect output of commands. These characters are
> ----> Directs output to a file or device (override if the file exists) < ----> Directs Input from the file or device. >> ----> Appends output or text to a file (creates if the file doesn’t exist) | ----> pipes the output of one command to another. && ----> combines commands . STDIN -- File Description (FD) -- 0 STDOUT -- File Description (FD) -- 1 STDERR -- File Description (FD) -- 2 Examples:1) $cat file > backup $cat backup ---> To verify 2) $cat > test2 < test2 ---> Input from the test1 $cat test2 ---> To verify 3) $cat test1 test2 test3 2> Error ---> File not exist $ cat Error ---> To verify 4) $cat sample test test3 > out –file 2>> error ---> File not exist $ cat out- file & $ cat Error ----> To verify
Echo : Outputs or displays a string
EX: $echo “this is some sample text”
To output some text to a file:
$echo “this is some sample text” > file_example $cat file_example To verify
CUT: Divides a string or output.
Syn: cut [option] file --- d Specifies a delimiter --- f displays a particular field --- c displays a character.
Displays the third field of the text using space as a delimiter:
$cut –d “” -f3 file_example
Displays third & fourth fields:
$cut f3,4 file_example
Displays 1st to 5th characters:
$cut - c 1-5 file_example
Past: To join two or more files horizontally by using delimiters
To join two files horizontally:
$ paste states capitals AP HYD MP BOPAL KN BANGLORE
To join two files using delimiter:
$ paste - d “ : ”States capitals AP : HYD MP : Bopal KN : Bangalore $Paste --d “ : ” states capitals > example
WC: Provides a word or line count
Syn: WC [options] file --- l lines --- w words --- c characters $WC Example Displays lines words and characters $WC - l Example only lines $WC - w Example only words.
Diff: Displays different lines between two files
$diff file1 file2
Cmp: It compares two files character by character.
$ cmp file1 file2 Note: If files are same it doesn’t return any output otherwise it displays line numbers and character position
tr: It translate character by character.
$tr “aeiou” “AEIOU” <sample $tr “a-z” “A-Z” <sample Translate lower to upper. $ tr “A-Z” “a-z” < sample Upper to lower $tr - s “ “ <sample Squeeze $tr -d “aeiou” <sample To delete aeiou $tr “,” “\t” < sample Replaced with tab space.
A spell check: To check the spelling mistakes but not grammatical mistakes.
$a spell check sample $a spell check test
Head: Displays top 10 lines of the file
$ head sample $ head -5 sample Top 5 lines
Tail: Displays last 10 lines of the file
$ tail sample $ tail -5 sample last 5 lines $tail - f sample file is open continuously
Piping(|): Combine the two or more commands in to a single line.
Here the first command output is taken as the next command input.
$ ls - l/ wc – l $cat example / cut –d “ “ - f3 file _ example $ cat example / head -20
&&: combines commands
$ echo “ this is text file” > file_example && cut –f3 example $ cat file_example To verify $ echo “ My original text: >> file _example && cat file_example
More: To see the contents of a file in the form of page wise.
$ more example
Less: To display file contents in page wise. But we can go to all directions.
$ Less example Options: f ----> forward direction B ----> Backward direction V ----> vi editor mode q ----> To quit à Tee: It is used to write the data into the files as well as on the screen. $cat sample / tee file1 file2 file3 $cat file1 To verify $cat file 2
Sort: Sorts the output of a command or file.
Syn: Sort [options} FILE --- R ----> sorts in reverse order --- B ----> Ignores leading blanks --- n ----> compares according to numerical storing value
ASCII Values 0 - 9 => 48-57 A - Z => 65-90 a- z => 97-122
$ sort example $ sort –r example Reverse order $ sort –n example Display numeric $ sort –u example unique lines $ sort --f Example Ignores case
Inclined to build a profession as Linux Developer? Then here is the blog post on Linux Training Online.
Uniq: Lists all the unique lines in a file or command output.
$ uniq example $ Uniq –u Example Displays non duplicated lines $ Uniq –d Example Displays only duplicated lines $ Uniq file_ Example > uniq_file && cat uniq – file
In above command go view uniq lines in the sample file, create a new file based on the output, and view the contents of this new file,
Sed (Stream editor): To search and replace strings or patterns in the given file
Sed is a multipurpose filter command
Syn: sed “s/old string name/new string name/g” <filename> S ---> substitution G à global occurrence in every line. $sed “s/unix/linux/g” sample $sed “s/unix/linux/gi” sample Ignore case $sed “s/unix/linux/” sample $sed “s/˄unix/linux/gi sample $sed “s/unix//gi sample Delete a word from a file $sed –e “s/unix/sas/gi” -e “s/linux/dba/gi” sample $sed –n “2p” sample To print 2nd row $sed –n “3,5p” sample To print 3rd, 4th, 5th rows $sed –n “IP >$p” sample point 1st and last rows $ sed ‘3d’ sample Delete 3rd row $sed ‘2,5d’ sample Delete 2 to 5 lines $ sed ‘2,5 w file’ sample It copies 2nd to 5th rows from sample file to file $ sed ‘=’ sample To get line numbers.
Regular Expressions (or) Regex (Grep):
Globally research a regular expression & print
To search a string or regular expression in a file(s)
Syn: grep [options] PATTERN FILE (S) $ grep root sample $ grep root sample example backup $grep root * search all files in a current directory $grep --i root sample Ignore case $grep --c root sample COUNTS NO. OF LINES $grep –n root sample print the lines along with line no’s $grep –l root sample list file names only he given pattern $grep –r root * search the pattern recursively $grep –v root sample prints non matching lines $grep –o root sample prints only the given pattern. $grep root sample -- color displays output in color $grep “it technology” sample $grep “exam*” sample Prints start with exam pattern. $grep “b[aeiou] ll” sample o/p: ball bell bill boll $grep “b..d” sample o/p: band book ba#d bad-d Note:“.” & “*” are wild card characters, it matcher any single character. $grep c[on] example $grep [0-9] example Word pattern: \< /> Þ word boundary \< Þ starting of the word \< Þ Ending of the word $grep “/<root/>” sample $grep “\,root” sample o/p: rootP Root 123O $grep “root/>” sample o/p: rootP root123P xroot123O $ grep “\<[0-9][0-9][0-9][0-9]>” sample 1025P 112O 1356P
fb:T2848,
Line pattern in Unix
Anchors: ˄ Þ start of the line. $ Þ End of the line . $grep “˄d” sample line start with d $grep “˄me” sample line start with me. $grep “me$” sample line end with me $grep “˄[˄aei] sample Not start with a,e,i $grep “[0-9]$” sample line ending with digit $grep “˄unix$” sample line should contain only unix $grep “˄$” sample displays empty lines $grep “˄…..$” sample line should contain three characters Fgrep: To search the string more faster than the grep command $fgrep “unix >sas >dba” sample Egrep (extended grep): It is a combination of grep & fgrep plus some additional regular expressions. $egrep “(unix/oracle/sas)” sample $ egrep ab{3}c sample Exact occurrence of preceding character $egrep “\<[0-9] {4,7}/>” sample $egrep ab{3} c Þ abc abbbc abbbbbc O P O Þ Find: This filter is used to search the results by depending on requirements may be on name,inode, permissions, user ………..etc. Syn: Find <search path> <criteria> <action> (a) Based on name: $find / -name passwd $find /home -name passwd $find /etc -name ‘pass*’ $find . -name linux (b) Based on size: +n Þ for greater than n. -n Þ for less than n. N Þ for exactly n. $ find / -size 4c 4 character files $ find / -size +4c More than 4 character files $find /-size -4c less than 4 characters $find.-size +50M More than 50M $find /etc/backup -size -50M less than 50m $find / -size +30M -size -50M Between 30 to 50M (c) Based on permissions: $find / -perm 644 $find / -perm 665 $find / -perm 777 (d) Based on Type: $find / -type f To find files $find / -type d to find directories (e) Based on inode: $ find / -inum 15253 $ find / root -inum 32512 $ find / home –inum 130123 (f) Based on time: M time à Modification time. C time à change time. A time à Access time. $ find / -m time +10 $ find / -m time -10 $find / -m time 10
Learn more about Linux Interview Questions in this blog post. Interested in mastering Linux ? Check out this blog post to learn more Linux Training Videos
To find the file with access time:
$find / root -a time +5 5 days ago $find / root -a time -5 $ find / root -a time 5
To find the file with change time:
$ find / -c time +5 “ “ -5 “ “ 5 $find / -amin +5 File was last accessed 5 minutes ago $find / root -cmin +5 File’s status was last change 5 minutes ago $find / home -m min+5 $find . -amin 5 (g) Based on user: $ find / -user <username> $ find / -user raju particular user files. (h) Based on group $find / group <group name> $find / group sales Particular group files. *Path: It is the way of representing files & directories in the system
There are two types of paths.
Absolute path: It is the way of representing files and directories from the top of hierarchy
EX: $ls /root/world/asia/india/ap/hyd/ $cp /home/raju/linux/root/world/asia (ii) Relative path: It is the way of representing files and directories which are related to current directory. EX: $cd /home/raju/desktop $cp linux unix/SQS $cd unix/sas $ls
fc:T3bde,
Controls-Part Two: Using Pickers and Using the Camera
Key Skills & Concepts
Using a UIDatePicker to select dates
Using a UIPickerView to select values
Using a UIPickerView with multiple components
Using a UIPickerView with UIImageView
Using the UIImagePickerController to control the camera and access the photo library
Using simple NSNotifications
what do the UIPickerView and the UIImagePicker classes have in common? Nothing, really, other than they are both ultimately UIViews. But they are both controls you might use in an iPhone application, and so they are covered together in this second chapter on iPhone controls. This chapter’s first half covers using the UIDatePicker and UIPickerView classes. These classes create visual controls that appear similar to Las Vegas slot machines. This chapter’s second half covers using the UIImagePickerController. This class allows programmatically accessing an iPhone’s camera, camera roll, and photo library.
Using Pickers-Date Pickers and Pickers
You use pickers to select one of several values. There are two types of pickers: Date Pickers and Pickers. Date pickers are used for selecting a date, time, or countdown interval. Pickers are used for selecting one of many values.
Date Pickers
Date pickers pick dates and times, placing the selected values in an NSDate class, and are implemented using the UIDatePicker class. If using Interface Builder to develop an iPhone application, you drag a date picker onto your view’s canvas from the library and modify the picker’s properties in the Inspector. You then create an IBOutlet for the picker in your view’s associated view controller and connect it to the picker on your view’s canvas. The view controller uses this outlet to obtain the UIDatePicker object’s selected date. The example later in this section illustrates this process.
UIDatePicker
A UIDatePicker has rotating wheels, allowing a user to select the date and time. If using a date picker to pick a date and time, valid modes are Date & Time, Time, and Date. If using a date picker to pick a countdown time, the valid mode is Timer. Figure 13-1 illustrates the picker’s visual appearance for the different modes.
Figure 13-1 UIDatePicker has four modes: Date & Time, Time, Date, and Timer.
There are several attributes you might change from the default when using a UIDatePicker. Figure 13- 2 illustrates the mode, locale, timeZone, date, minimumDate, maximumDate, and interval properties, as viewed in the Inspector. The locale is an NSLocale. This class encapsulates how the date should be formatted for a different date or culture. The timeZone is an NSTimeZone; its default value is the operating system’s time zone. The minuteInterval is the minute intervals displayed by the picker. For instance, Figure 13- 3 illustrates a UIDatePicker using 30-minute intervals and a UIDatePicker using 1-minute intervals.
NSDate
UIDatePickers return values as an NSDate. You access a date picker’s value through its date property. For instance, the following sets an NSDate from a UIDatePicker’s date property. NSDate * theDate = self.datePicker.date; An NSDate is a date and time. Several NSDate methods you might use include isEqualToDate:, earlierDate:, compare:, and laterDate:. For a more complete understanding of date and time programming, refer to Apple’s ―Date and Time Programming Guide for Cocoa,‖ available online.
Figure 13-2 Several UIDatePicker properties you might change in the Inspector
Figure 13-3 A UIDatePicker showing 30-minute intervals and a UIDatePicker showing 1-minute intervals
NSDateFormatter
When you wish to display a date, you use an NSDateFormatter. An NSDateFormatter allows a date to be displayed as a formatted NSString. There are many formats you might use. For instance, consider the two formatters. NSDateFormatter * dateFormatter = [[[NSDateFormatter alloc] init] autorelease]; [dateFormatter setDateFormat:@"MM/dd/yyyy"]; The ―MM/dd/yyyy‖ format outputs August 26, 2008, as ―08/26/2008." [dateFormatter setDateFormat:@"EEEE MMMM d',' yyyy"]; The ―EEEE MMMM d’,’ yyyy‖ format outputs ―Tuesday August 26, 2008,‖ as the date. These are only two of many choices you might select to format dates and times. For more formats, refer to Apple’s ―Data Formatting Programming Guide for Cocoa,‖ available online.
Using a Date Picker
Create a new View-based Name the application DatePickerProject.
Open xib in Interface Builder.
Add a date picker to the canvas and add a label (Figure 13-4).
Change the date picker’s mode to Date (Figure 13-5).
Save and exit Interface
Open DatePickerProjectViewController and add an IBOutlet for the UIDatePicker and an IBOutlet for the UILabel (Listings 13-1 and 13-2). Also add an IBAction called Don’t forget to release the two outlets in the dealloc method.
Save and Open DatePickerProjectViewController.xib in Interface Builder.
Connectthe File’s Owner datePicker outlet to the UIDatePicker on the Connect the File’s Owner theLabel to the UILabel on the canvas.
Figure 13-4 Adding a UIDatePicker and UILabel to the view
Figure 13-5 Change a UIDatePicker’s mode to Date
Figure 13-6 Connecting to the UIDatePicker’s value changed event
Connect the File’s Owner changeValue action to the UIDatePicker’s Value Changed event(Figure13-6).
Save and exit Interface builder.
ClickBuildAnd Go and run the application in iPhone Simulator (Figure 13-7). The Debugger Console should have logging similar to Listing 13-3.
Figure 13-7 The application running in iPhone Simulator
UIDatePicker classes are also useful for selecting a duration for an NSTimer. A UIDatePicker selects an NSDate, which consists of a date and a time; therefore, you can create a timer using an NSDate’s time. But a UIDatePicker does not implement a timer; it only provides a visual way to pick duration. You must then use this duration with an NSTimer. This task illustrates using a UIDatePicker to select a duration for an NSTimer and, in the process, illustrates using the NSCalendar, NSDateFormatter, and NSDateComponents classes.
Create a new View-based Application in Xcode named A Timer.
Createa new IBOutlet named timePicker for a UIDateTime and an IBAction called echoTime (Listing 13-4).
Implementthe echoTime method so it implements an NSTimer that fires a timer every second (Listing 13-5).
Add a method called echoIt for the timer to call when
Open xib in Interface Builder and place a UIDatePicker on the canvas. Set the interval to one minute. Place a button on the canvas (Figure 13-8).
Change the picker’s mode to Timer in the
Connectthe file’s owner timePicker property to the
Connectthe file’s owner echoTime action to the button’s Touch Up Inside
Figure 13-8 Adding a button to the canvas Figure 13-9 Running the application in iPhone Simulator
Save and exit Interface Builder.
ClickBuildAnd Go (Figure 13-9). The output to the Debugger Console should appear like Listing 13-6.
#chkconfig network off Routing: When you have a system that has two or more network interfaces, they are called dual-bomed (or) multi bomed systems. You need to make sure that each interface has a gateway that it can route through. Syn: route [options, Add Add a net route Del Deletes an Existing route Flush Flushes any temporary routes
Let’s look at the current routes on the system:
# route
To set default gateway:
#route add default gw 192.168.0.1 ethʘ
To verify:
# route
Learn more about Linux Interview Questions in this blog post.
Interested in mastering Linux ? Check out this blog post to learn more Linux Training Videos
Networking utilities:Ping: Tests the connectivity between two hosts #ping 192.168.0.254
When you ping something on a linux host, unlike in windows, the ping continues until you cancel it. You can limit the number of ping requests sent by prefixing –c number – count in front of the destination host.
#ping –c 3 192.168.0.254 Net stat: Shows information about connections (open, closed and listening).
Using net stat command to obtain information on routing tables, listening sockets, and established connections.
Syn: net stat [options] Options: -r Displays the routing table. -I Displays interface statistics -t shows tcp connections -U shows UDP connections -a Displays all sockets (tcp, udp, or local) -p Displays process Id’s -e Displays Extended information. --> To check that the connection is available for your clients: # netstat - tuape / grep ssh Client DNS Troubleshooting: /etc/sysconfig/network : contains the hostname of the system /etc/hosts : contains the local IP to hostname mappings /etc/resolu.cong : contains the IP address of the DNS servers Nslookup : queries (or) looks up a domain name or system Ping : Test connectivity between two hosts. Ethernet Bonding: Ethernet bonding is used to combine multiple interfaces into one, creating an increase in available bandwidth and redundancy. This is done by creating a special network interface file called as a channel bonding interface.
fe:T4408,
UIPickerView
A UIPickerView allows the selection of one or more value sets. A UIPickerView consists of rows and components. Think of the component as the column and the row as the row. So ifyou had a three-wheel UIPickerView, the third wheel is the third component. A UIPickerView must have an associated class that adopts the UIPickerViewDelegate and a class that adopts the UIPickerViewDataSource. The same class can adopt both protocols.
UIPickerViewDelegate
The UIPickerViewDelegate protocol dictates how a UIPickerView is to construct itself. This protocol contains five methods a class might implement when adopting this protocol: the pickerView:rowHeightForComponent:, pickerView:widthForComponent:, pickerView :titleForRow:forComponent:, pickerView:viewForRow:forComponent:reusingView, and pickerView:didSelectRow:inComponent: methods. Width and Height The pickerView:rowHeightForComponent: and pickerView:widthFor Component: methods set a picker’s component dimensions. Remember, a picker’s component can contain rows of strings or view controls, like a UIImageView. These methods accommodate controls by allowing you to set a component’s height and width. Each method’s signature follows.
(NSInteger) component Content The pickerView:titleForRow:forComponent: and pickerView:viewForRow:for Component: methods provide a component’s title or view. The title or the view is what is displayed as the rows in a picker. You must implement one of the two methods. If using a string, implement the pickerView:titleForRow:forComponent: method; if using a view, implement the pickerView:viewForRow:forComponent: method. Each method’s signature follows.(NSString *)pickerView:(UIPickerView *)pickerView titleForRow: (NSInteger) row forComponent: (NSInteger) component(UIView *)pickerView:(UIPickerView *)pickerView viewForRow: (NSInteger) row forComponent:(NSInteger)component reusingView: (UIView *)view Selecting The UIPickerView calls the pickerView:didSelectRow:inComponent: method when a user selects a component’s row. It takes the component’s index number and the row’s index number as parameters, so you can determine the component selected and the component’s row. The method’s signature follows.(void)pickerView:(UIPickerView *)pickerView didSelectRow:(NSInteger)row inComponent:(NSInteger)component UIPickerViewDatasource A UIPickerViewDatasource handles a UIPickerView’s data. It contains two methods you should define when adopting this protocol: the numberOfComponentsInPickerView: and pickerView:numberOfRowsInComponent: methods. The numberOfComponentsInPickerView: method returns how many components, or columns, a picker must display.(NSInteger)pickerView:(UIPickerView *)pickerView numberOfRowsInComponent: (NSInteger) component The pickerView:numberOfRowsInComponent: method returns a component’s row count.(NSInteger)pickerView:(UIPickerView *)pickerView numberOfRowsInComponent: (NSInteger) component
Using a Picker
Create a new View-based Application named A Picker.
Open xib in Interface Builder.
Draga picker view from the library to the canvas. Right-click and notice that the control doesn’t have the choices a UIDatePicker has (Figure 13-10).
Figure 13-10 A UIPickerView has less outlets and actions than a UIDatePicker
Add a button to the canvas.
Save and exit Interface Builder.
Createa new NSObject named MyPickerDelegate and change it to adopt the UIPickerViewDelegate and UIPickerViewDataSource Have MyPickerDelegate implement the needed methods (Listings 13-7 and 13-8).
Open APickerViewController and add IBOutlets for UIPickerView and MyPickerDelegate (Listing 13-9). Add an IBAction called
Implementthe changeColor action (Listing 13-10).
Save and Open APickerViewController.xib in Interface Builder.
ConnectFile’s Owner changeColor action to the button’s Touch Up Inside
ConnectFile’s Owner myPicker outlet to the
Dragan object from the library to the document Change the object’s type to MyPickerDelegate.
Connectthe File’s Owner myPickerDelegate outlet to the object just added.
Connectthe UIPickerView’s dataSource and delegate outlets to the newly added
Figure 13-11 Running the application in iPhone Simulator
Save and exit Interface Builder.
ClickBuildAnd Go to run the application in iPhone Upon pushing the button, the debugger console logs the picker’s chosen color (Figure 13-11 and Listing 13-11).
NSLog(@"picked row: %i, component: %i", row, component); NSLog(@"the value: %@", [self.myData objectAtIndex:row]); } (NSInteger) numberOfComponentsInPickerView: (UIPickerView *) pickerView { return 1; }(NSInteger) pickerView: (UIPickerView *) pickerView numberOfRowsInComponent: (NSInteger) component { return [self.myData count]; }(NSString *) pickerView: (UIPickerView *) pickerView titleForRow: (NSInteger) row forComponent: (NSInteger) component { return [self.myData objectAtIndex:row]; }(void)dealloc { [myData release]; [super dealloc]; } @end Listing 13-9 APickerViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> #import "MyPickerDelegate.h" @interface APickerViewController : UIViewController { IBOutlet UIPickerView * myPicker; IBOutlet MyPickerDelegate * myPickerDelegate; } @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIPickerView * myPicker; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet MyPickerDelegate * myPickerDelegate; - (IBAction) changeColor: (id) sender; @end Listing 13-10 APickerViewController.m #import "APickerViewController.h" @implementation APickerViewController @synthesize myPicker; @synthesize myPickerDelegate; NSLog(@"the color is: %@", (NSString *)[myPickerDelegate.myData objectAtIndex: [myPicker selectedRowInComponent:0]]); }(void)dealloc { [myPickerDelegate release]; [myPicker release]; [super dealloc]; } @end Listing 13-11 Debug console output from running APicker application [Session started at 2009-02-06 22:57:09 -0500.] 2009-02-06 22:57:13.007 APicker[429:20b] picked row: 1, component: 0 2009-02-06 22:57:13.008 APicker[429:20b] the value: Yellow 2009-02-06 22:57:14.687 APicker[429:20b] picked row: 3, component: 0 2009-02-06 22:57:14.687 APicker[429:20b] the value: Blue 2009-02-06 22:57:16.540 APicker[429:20b] picked row: 8, component: 0 2009-02-06 22:57:16.541 APicker[429:20b] the value: Tan 2009-02-06 22:57:17.499 APicker[429:20b] the color is: Tan 2009-02-06 22:57:21.215 APicker[429:20b] picked row: 10, component: 0 2009-02-06 22:57:21.215 APicker[429:20b] the value: Coral 2009-02-06 22:57:22.547 APicker[429:20b] the color is: Coral A UIPickerView must have helper classes adopting the UIPickerViewDelegate and UIPickerViewDataSource protocols. In this example, you had one class, MyPickerDelegate, adopt both protocols. The delegate uses a simple NSArray to hold NSString objects. Because the data is simple strings, the delegate implements the titleForRow method. When a user selects a row, the didSelectRow method logs the row, component, and value to the debugger console.
Open APicker application in Xcode.
Modify MyPickerDelegate’s numberOfComponentsInPickerView to return the number 2 (Listing 13-13).
ClickBuildAnd Notice the picker now shows two independent spinning wheels (Figure 13-12).
Add a second value Call the array myData2 and initialize it in the init method, as you did before with myData (Listings 13-12 and 13-13).
Createtwo constants representing the different wheels: COLOR_WHEEL for the wheel containing the myData values and SHADE_WHEEL for the wheel containing the myData2 Remember, you define constants in a class’s header file (Listing 13-12).
Modify the numberOfRowsInComponent method and titleForRow method to reflect the newly added
Open m and modify the changeColor method to reflect the second wheel (Listing 13-14).
Figure 13-12 A UIPickerView with two components
Figure 13-13 Running the application in iPhone Simulator
Click Build And The application shows two wheels. Upon clicking the button, the debugger console logs the first wheel’s color and the second wheel’s shade (Figure 13-13 and Listing 13-15). Listing 13-12 MyPickerDelegate.h modified to reflect two wheels
#import <Foundation/Foundation.h> #define COLOR_WHEEL 0 #define SHADE_WHEEL 1 @interface MyPickerDelegate : NSObject <UIPickerViewDelegate, UIPickerViewDataSource> { NSArray * myData; NSArray * myData2; } @property (nonatomic, retain) NSArray * myData; @property (nonatomic, retain) NSArray * myData2; @end Listing 13-13 MyPickerDelegate.m modified to reflect two wheels #import "MyPickerDelegate.h" @implementation MyPickerDelegate @synthesize myData; @synthesize myData2; - (id) init { if([super init] == nil) return nil; myData = [[NSArray alloc]initWithObjects: @"Red", @"Yellow", @"Green", @"Blue", @"Purple", @"Orange", @"Black", @"Gray", @"Tan", @"Pink", @"Coral", nil]; myData2 = [[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects: @"Very Dark", @"Dark", @"Normal", @"Light", @"Very Light", nil]; return self; }(NSInteger) numberOfComponentsInPickerView: (UIPickerView *) pickerView { return 2; }(void)pickerView:(UIPickerView *)pickerView didSelectRow:(NSInteger)row inComponent:(NSInteger)component { NSLog(@"picked row: %i, component: %i", row, component); if(component == COLOR_WHEEL) NSLog(@"the value: %@", [self.myData objectAtIndex:row]); else NSLog(@"the value: %@", [self.myData2 objectAtIndex:row]); } - (NSInteger) pickerView: (UIPickerView *) pickerView numberOfRowsInComponent: (NSInteger) component { if(component == COLOR_WHEEL) return [self.myData count]; else return [self.myData2 count]; } - (NSString *) pickerView: (UIPickerView *) pickerView titleForRow: (NSInteger) row forComponent: (NSInteger) component { if(component == COLOR_WHEEL) return [self.myData objectAtIndex:row]; else return [self.myData2 objectAtIndex:row]; } - (void)dealloc { [myData release]; [myData2 release]; [super dealloc]; } @end Listing 13-14 The changeColor method modified to reflect two wheels - (IBAction) changeColor: (id) sender { NSLog(@"the color is: %@ and the shade is: %@", (NSString *) [myPickerDelegate.myData objectAtIndex: [myPicker selectedRowInComponent: COLOR_WHEEL]], (NSString *)[myPickerDelegate .myData2 objectAtIndex: [myPicker selectedRowInComponent:SHADE_ WHEEL]]); } Listing 13-15 Debugger console logging from running APicker application [Session started at 2009-02-06 23:01:29 -0500.] 2009-02-06 23:01:32.630 APicker[550:20b] picked row: 7, component: 0 2009-02-06 23:01:38.632 APicker[550:20b] the value: Orange --- snip --- 2009-02-06 23:01:39.508 APicker[550:20b] the color is: Orange and the shade is: Very Light Using more components involves adding code to check which component was selected. But note, rather than using the raw integers, in this task, you created constants for both components. Each delegate’s method then checks which component the user selected. if(component == COLOR_WHEEL) return [self.myData objectAtIndex:row]; else return [self.myData2 objectAtIndex:row];
Loading UIImageViews into a UIPickerView
Open the APicker application created earlier—not the project with two components, but the earlierprojectwith only one component.
Replacethe pickerView:titleForRow:forComponent: method in MyPickerDelegate with pickerView:viewForRow:forComponent: (Listing 13-16).
Add the images png, wizard.png, and tux.png to the project. You can find these images in the book’s resources folder.
Modify the MyPickerDelegate’s init: method so it loads UIImageViews rather than strings into myData (Listing 13-16).
Modify the pickerView:didSelectRow:inComponent: so it only logs the row and component to the debugger console (Listing 13-16).
Save and build.
Open xib and remove the button.
Save and exit Interfacebuilder.
ClickBuildAnd The application loads the images into the UIPickerView (Figure 13- 14).
NOTE Notice that the pickerView:viewForRow:forComponent method takes a UIView. So, similar to custom table cells, you can also create custom picker rows using a UIView.
Figure 13-14 A UIPickerView that uses UIImageView objects as its components
Rather than working directly with an iPhone’s camera, you use the UIImagePickerController to manipulate an iPhone’s camera and photo library. Using the UIImagePickerController, you take, or select, a photo, optionally edit the photo, and then dismiss the UIImagePickerController, returning control back to your application.
UIImagePickerController
The UIImagePickerController is different from other view controllers. Rather than developers creating the controller’s view and adding components to the view’s canvas, the UIImage PickerController’s views are already created and are part of the UIKit library. Developers simply determine the controller’s source type and implement a delegate for the controller. The controller creates and manages the views while the delegate responds to the view being dismissed by a user.
Source
The iPod touch, as of this book’s publication, does not have a camera. The iPhone Simulator also lacks a camera. If you attempted to use an iPod touch’s nonexistent camera, you would obtain an exception. Attempting to use the camera on an iPhone Simulator results in a nonresponsive application after it logs a message to the debugger console (Figure 13-15). 2009-02-09 06:50:30.164 CameraProject[216:20b] photos can only be captured on HW To avoid an exception or nonresponsive application, the UIImagePickerController provides the isSourceTypeAvailable: method. + (BOOL)isSourceTypeAvailable:(UIImagePickerControllerSourceType) sourceType This method returns YES if a source type is available and NO if unavailable. Valid source types are UIImagePickerControllerSourceTypePhotoLibrary, for selecting images from the photo library; UIImagePickerControllerSourceTypeCamera, for selecting images from the camera; and UIImagePickerControllerSourceTypeSavedPhotosAlbum, for selecting images from a camera roll, or from the photo library if the device doesn’t have a camera. After ensuring a device has a source type, you set the UIImagePickerController’s sourceType property. This property determines what controls the UIImagePickerController displays. Allowable source types are the same as with the isSourceTypeAvailable: method.
Editing and Delegating
The controller also has an allowsImageEditing property and delegate property. The allowsImageEditing property determines if a user should be allowed to edit an image after taking or selecting the image. The delegate property specifies the class’s UIImagePicker ControllerDelegate.
Figure 13-15 Using a camera on the iPhone Simulator results in a nonresponsive application.
UIImagePickerControllerDelegate
The UIImagePickerControllerDelegate’s protocol has two methods your delegate should implement for the image picker. The imagePickerController:didFinishPickingMediaWithInfo :info: method is called after a user selects an image. This could be selecting an image from a camera roll or photo library, or after taking a photo using the camera. The method’s signature follows.(void)imagePickerController:(UIImagePickerController *) picker didFinishPickingMediaWithInfo: (NSDictionary *) info; If you cancel a photo selected, the imagePickerControllerDidCancel: method is called. The method’s signature follows.(void)imagePickerControllerDidCancel:(UIImagePickerController *)picker The imagePickerController:didFinishPickingMediaWithInfo: info: has three parameters. The first parameter holds a reference to the image picker, the second to the image picked, and the third parameter references an NSDictionary containing editing information. If editing is disabled, the third parameter holds nil. If editing is enabled, the parameter holds the unedited image and the cropped rectangle. For more information on the imagePickerController:didFinish PickingMediaWithInfo:info method, refer to Apple’s online UIImagePickerControllerDelegate Reference.
Using the UIImagePickerController
NOTE
Using the camera or camera roll requires having an iPhone, a developer’s membership, and a provision for this example application. You can select a photo from a photo album using the iPhone Simulator, however. To accommodate more readers, this task limits itself to the iPhone Simulator’s photo library.
Create a new View-based Name the project CameraProject.
Open xib in Interface Builder.
Draga toolbar from the library onto the view’s
Renamethe first button Take Add another button to the toolbar and call it Select Photo. Add a UIImageView to the canvas (Figure 13-16).
Figure 13-16 The application’s canvas
Save and quit Interface Builder.
Createa new NSObject called Modify the class so it adopts the UINavigationControllerDelegate and UIImagePickerControllerDelegate protocols (Listing 13-17). Add a property that contains the UIImage that the image picker will select.
Open h and import MyImagePickerDelegate. Add an IBOutlet for MyImagePickerDelegate and add an IBOutlet for the UIImageView added to the canvas (Listing 13-19).
Add two IBActions to Name one action takePicture and the other selectPicture (Listing 13-20). Implement both methods as shown in Listing 13- 20.
Implementthe viewDidLoad method in CameraProjectViewController so the method ensures the camera is supported (Listing 13-20).
NOTE If running on the iPhone Simulator, comment the code in viewDidLoad that checks if a camera is available. Be certain to only click the Select Photo button.
Save and build.
Open xib in Interface Builder.
Connectthe File’s Owner theImageView outlet to the UIImageView on the
Connectthe selectPicture action to the Select Photo button and the takePicture action to the Take Photo
Drag an object from the library to the Document Change its type to MyImagePickerDelegate.
Connectthe File’s Owner imagePickerDelegate outlet to the newly created
Save and exit Interface
Ifyou wish to use the camera, follow the necessary steps to register and provision the application so you can install it on your Otherwise, use the Select Photo button and select a photo from the SDK’s photo albums.
Run the application. Everything works as expected, except notice that the view’s image is not set to the image selected by the image picker.
@end Listing 13-20 CameraProjectViewController.m #import "CameraProjectViewController.h" @implementation CameraProjectViewController @synthesize imgPickerDelegate; @synthesize theImageView; - (void) viewDidLoad { [super viewDidLoad]; if(!([UIImagePickerController isSourceTypeAvailable: UIImagePickerControllerSourceTypeCamera])) { NSLog(@"Camera not supported....quitting application"); UIAlertView * myAlert = [[UIAlertView alloc] initWithTitle:@"Camera Error" message:@"Camera Not Supported. Application will terminate." delegate:nil cancelButtonTitle:nil otherButtonTitles:@"OK", nil]; [myAlert show]; [myAlert release]; //warning - terminate is undocumented api [[UIApplication sharedApplication] terminate]; } } - (IBAction) takePicture: (id) sender { UIImagePickerController * pickCont = [[UIImagePickerController alloc] init]; pickCont.delegate = imgPickerDelegate; pickCont.allowsImageEditing = YES; pickCont.sourceType = UIImagePickerControllerSourceTypeCamera; [self presentModalViewController:pickCont animated:YES]; NSLog(@"heynow"); } - (IBAction) selectPicture: (id) sender { UIImagePickerController * pickCont = [[UIImagePickerController alloc] init]; pickCont.delegate = imgPickerDelegate; pickCont.allowsImageEditing = YES; pickCont.sourceType = UIImagePickerControllerSourceTypePhotoLibrary; [self presentModalViewController:pickCont animated:YES]; NSLog(@"heynow"); if(self.imgPickerDelegate.selectedImage != nil) self.theImageView.image = self.imgPickerDelegate.selectedImage; } - (void)dealloc { [theImageView release]; [imgPickerDelegate release]; [super dealloc]; } @end Nothing happens after selecting or taking a photo, unless you click one of the application’s buttons a second time. The photo previously selected is then displayed (Figure 13-17). What is supposed to happen is that the theImageView in CameraProjectViewController should display the newly taken photo. You might think that placing the following lines in the selectPicture would solve the problem, but they do not. if(self.imgPickerDelegate.selectedImage != nil) self.theImageView.image = self.imgPickerDelegate.selectedImage; Notice the ―heynow‖ logging added to the delegate’s methods. Immediately after displaying the image picker, the debugger console logs ―heynow.‖ If the logging does not wait for the image picker to finish, the two lines setting the image don’t wait either, and so the image isn’t set correctly until the next time you push one of the application’s two buttons. CameraProjectController must be changed so it is notified when a picture is taken so it can update its view. There are two ways you might fix the image not displaying. First, you could add a reference to the CameraProjectViewController in MyImagePickerDelegate, but I dislike this solution. Why? Adding a CameraProjectViewController to MyImagePickerDelegate as a property introduces close coupling between the two classes. You can never again reuse MyImagePickerDelegate, unless you reuse CameraProjectViewController. Unacceptable. A better solution, in my humble opinion, is using a notification.
Notifications
If you have ever used Java listeners, you already know a notification’s basic workings. Cocoa’s notifications are similar to Java’s listeners, only easier and more flexible. Every Cocoa application has a notification center, NSNotificationCenter. Classes in your application can post notifications, NSNotification, to the notification center. Other classes can register with the notification center to listen for notifications. Through notifications, classes can communicate with each other without even knowing about one another’s existence. Although this book doesn’t present notifications with any detail, in the next few steps, you add a notification to the CameraProjectViewController. Figure 13-17 Running the application in iPhone Simulator and using the provided photo library Refer to Apples Introduction to Notification Programming Topics for more information on using notifications.
Open CameraProject in Xcode.
Modify the imagePickerController;didFinishPickingMediaWithInfo:info: method to post a
notification(Listing13-21).
Add a method called changeImage to CameraProjectViewController (Listing 13-22).
Modify viewDidLoad so it observes the notification (Listing 13-23). Also, modify dealloc so it unregisters itself as a notification
ClickBuildAnd Now the application sets the UIImageView’s image as expected.
Listing 13-21 The didFinishPickingMediaWithInfo modified to post a notification - (void)imagePickerController:(UIImagePickerController *) picker didFinishPickingMediaWithInfo:(NSDictionary *) info { self.selectedImage = (UIImage*)[info objectForKey:UIImagePickerControllerOriginalImage]; [[NSNotificationCenter defaultCenter] postNotificationName:@"Image Picked" object:nil]; [picker.parentViewController dismissModalViewControllerAnimated:YES]; [picker release]; } Listing 13-22 The changeImage method - (void) changeImage { NSLog(@"IMAGE CHANGED"); self.theImageView.image = self.imgPickerDelegate.selectedImage; } Listing 13-23 The viewDidLoad method modified to have CameraViewController observe the notification - (void) viewDidLoad { [super viewDidLoad]; if(!([UIImagePickerController isSourceTypeAvailable: UIImagePickerControllerSourceTypeCamera])) { NSLog(@"Camera not supported....quitting application"); UIAlertView * myAlert = [[UIAlertView alloc] initWithTitle:@"Camera Error" message:@"Camera Not Supported. Application will terminate." delegate:nil cancelButtonTitle:nil otherButtonTitles:@"OK", nil]; [myAlert show]; [myAlert release]; //warning - terminate is undocumented api [[UIApplication sharedApplication] terminate]; } [[NSNotificationCenter defaultCenter] addObserver:self selector: @selector(changeImage) name:@"ImagePicked" object:nil]; } - (void) dealloc { [super dealloc]; [theImageView release]; [imgPickerDelegate release]; [ [NSNotificationCenter defaultCenter] removeObserver:self]; } In this task, you created an application that uses the UIImagePickerController to control an iPhone’s camera. You created two buttons, one for taking a photo using the camera and one for selecting an image from the photo library. If you obtained provisioning for the application and installed the provisioning on your iPhone, you could install the application on your iPhone and use the camera (Figure 13-18). But instead, you selected photos from the photo library and ran the application on the iPhone Simulator.
Figure 13-18 Using the camera on an iPhone
100:T5c3f,
Data Persistence Using SQLite
Key Skills & Concepts
Creating a database and adding data to it
Including the database in Xcode
Reading from a database
Making a database writable
Inserting a record
Updating a record
Deleting a record
The SQLite database is a popular open-source database written in C. The database is small and designed for embedding in an application. Unlike a database such as Oracle, SQLite is a C library included when compiling a program. SQLite is part of the standard open-source Linux/BSD server stack, and as OS X is essentially FreeBSD, it was only natural Apple chose SQLite as the iPhone’s embedded database.
Adding a SQLite Database
Adding a SQLite database to your project involves two steps. First, you must create the database. In this chapter’s first task, you create a database using the Firefox SQLite Manager plug-in. Second, you must add the SQLite library to your Xcode project. The first task also illustrates adding the SQLite library to your Xcode project. After creating the database and loading it, you can then use the database programmatically using its C programming interface.
Creating a Simple Database Using FireFox SQLite Manager
If you don’t already have Firefox, download and install it.
Select Add-ons from the Tools menu (Figure 16-1).
SelectGet Add-ons, type SQLite in the search box, and install SQLite
Once installed and you have restarted Firefox, select Tools | SQLite
Figure 16-1 Adding SQLite Manager to Firefox
Selectthe New icon (the blank paper graphic), and create a new database named Note SQLite Manager automatically adds the .sqlite extension.
ClickCreateTableand create a new table named
Add three columns: id, name, and Make id an INTEGER and check Primary Key and Autoinc check boxes.
Makenamea VARCHAR and check only Allow
Makephoto a BLOB and check only Allow
Your screen should resemble Figure 16-2.
ClickOK and the SQLite Manager generates the database table.
Figure 16-2 Creating a database using SQLite Manager
NOTE SQLite does not enforce foreign key relationships. You must instead write triggers manually to enforce foreign key relationships. SQLite does not support right outer joins or full outer joins. SQLite views are read-only.
Click the Browse & Search tab, and then click the Add Record Button.
Inthe action sheet, leave id Name the name Icon One. Notice the small paperclip beside photo. Move your mouse over the paperclip, and the tooltip should say ―Add File as a Blob‖ (Figure 16-3). Click the paperclip and add a photo from the book’s Resources folder. If the photo column doesn’t say something like BLOB (Size: 65984), the file was not added as a blob.
ClickOK,and the record is Add another record, selecting any image from this book’s Resources folder.
Fromthe menu, select Database | Close Database and close the Exit and quit Firefox.
Figure 16-3 Adding a record using SQLite Manager
Open Xcode and create a new View-based Name the application MyDBProject.
SelectFrameworksin Groups & Right-click Frameworks and select Add | Existing Frameworks from the pop-up menu.
Navigate to your iPhone Simulator’s sdk
Navigate to usr/lib and add 0.dylib to the project.
Add the database file to the Resources in Groups & Like a photo, check the Copy Items check box.
Thistaskis Do not delete the project or database, as you use them for this chapter’s remainder.
NOTE On my computer, adding binary data using SQLite Manager is buggy. Sometimes it works, sometimes not. If getting the file’s content added is problematic, a workaround is to add the record and insert Null for the blob’s value. After inserting, update the row, and add the file’s content. Updating the blob seems more stable in SQLite Manager.
Basic SQLite Database Manipulation
If you have ever used a database from within a programming language, SQLite database manipulation using C should seem intuitive. You open the database. You create a prepared statement containing an SQL string. That statement might have one or more parameters you bind values to. After binding, you execute the statement. If the statement returns results, you loop through each record and load the record’s column values into your program’s variables. After looping through all records, you finalize the statement, and, if you are finished with the database, you close the database. The steps are similar for most languages and databases.
Opening the Database
You open a database using the sqlite3_open, sqlite_open16, or sqlite3_open_v2 commands. This chapter uses the sqlite3_open command exclusively. The sqlite3_open command takes a database filename as a UTF-8 string and opens the database. Listing 16-1, taken from the SQLite’s online documentation, lists the sqlite_open3 method signature. Listing 16-1 The sqlite3_open method signature (from SQLite online documentation) int sqlite3_open( const char *filename, /* Database filename (UTF-8) * / sqlite3 **ppDb /* OUT: SQLite db handle */ ); The method returns an integer as the method’s success or failure code. Listing 16-2, from the SQLite online documentation, lists several common result codes. Listing 16-2 SQLite return codes (taken from SQLite online documentation) #define SQLITE_OK #define SQLITE_ERROR #define SQLITE_READONLY database */ #define SQLITE_INTERRUPT #define SQLITE_IOERR occurred */ #define SQLITE_CANTOPEN #define SQLITE_MISMATCH #define SQLITE_ROW ready */ #define SQLITE_DONE executing */ 0 /* Successful result */ 1 /* SQL error or missing database */ 8/* Attempt to write a readonly 9/* Operation terminated by 10/* Some kind of disk I/O error 14 /* Unable to open the database file */ 20 /* Data type mismatch */ 100/* sqlite3_step() has another row 101/* sqlite3_step() has finished
There are two primary ways of executing SQL statements using SQLite’s C interface. One method is the sqlite3_exec method. Although a powerful method, it is more advanced C programming, and so this chapter uses the sqlite3_stmt structure and the sqlite3_prepare_v2 and sqlite3_step statements instead of the sqlite3_exec function.
The SQLite sqlite3_stmt
The sqlite3_stmt encapsulates a SQL statement. For instance, ―select * from photos‖ is a SQL statement. In your program, you encapsulate this SQL string using a statement. For instance, the following code snippet illustrates creating a SQL string, initializing a statement, and loading the statement (Listing 16-3). Listing 16-3 Using a sqlite3_stmt in a C program const char *sqlselect = "SELECT id,name,photo FROM photos"; static sqlite3_stmt *statement = nil; sqlite3_prepare_v2(database, sqlselect, -1, &statement, NULL);
The SQLite sqlite3_prepare_v2 Method
You load a SQL string into a statement using sqlite3_prepare methods. The prepare methods are sqlite3_prepare, sqlite3_prepare_v2, sqlite3_prepare_16, and sqlite3_prepare16_v2. This chapter uses only the sqlite3_prepare_v2 method. Notice the prepare statement takes a C string, not an NString, but getting the C string from an NString is not difficult—simply call the NSString’s UTF8String method. The sqlite3_prepare_v2 method’s signature is in Listing 16-4. Notice, like the open statements, the prepare statement returns an integer result code you should check when calling the method. Listing 16-4 The sqlite3_prepare_v2 method signature (taken from the SQLite online documentation) int sqlite3_prepare_v2( sqlite3 *db, const char *zSql, int nByte, sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt, /* OUT: Statement handle */ const char **pzTail /* OUT: Pointer to unused portion of zSql */ ); /* Database handle */ /* SQL statement, UTF-8 encoded */ /* Maximum length of zSql in bytes. */
The SQLite sqlite3_step Method
The sqlite3_step method executes a prepared statement. You must call this method at least once. For instance, when calling insert or update, you call sqlite3_step once. You only call it once because these statements do not result in a record set being returned from the database. When selecting data, you typically call this method multiple times until you receive no more results. The following is the method’s signature. int sqlite3_step(sqlite3_stmt*); Like the other SQLite methods, this method returns a response code you should check after calling the method.
Select
You select one or more records from a SQL database using a select statement. Because a select statement usually returns multiple rows, you must loop through the row set if you wish to obtain all records. while (sqlite3_step(statement) == SQLITE_ROW){ //process row here }
Obtaining SQLite Column Values
You obtain column values through a method in Listing 16-5. Using these methods will become more apparent after the next task. Listing 16-5 Methods for obtaining column data (from SQLite online documentation) const void *sqlite3_column_blob(sqlite3_stmt*, int iCol); int sqlite3_column_bytes(sqlite3_stmt*, int iCol); int sqlite3_column_bytes16(sqlite3_stmt*, int iCol); double sqlite3_column_double(sqlite3_stmt*, int iCol); int sqlite3_column_int(sqlite3_stmt*, int iCol); sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_column_int64(sqlite3_stmt*, int iCol); const unsigned char *sqlite3_column_text(sqlite3_stmt*, int iCol); const void *sqlite3_column_text16(sqlite3_stmt*, int iCol); int sqlite3_column_type(sqlite3_stmt*, int iCol); sqlite3_value *sqlite3_column_value(sqlite3_stmt*, int iCol); Opening and Querying a Database
Open MyDBProject in Open MyDBProjectAppDelegate.h.
InClasses,createa new group called
Add a new Objective-C class called PhotosDAO to Create another Objective-C class called PhotoDAO.
Add a name, photoID, and photo property to h and PhotoDAO.m (Listings 16-6 and 16-7).
Open h and import SQLite3 and PhotoDAO. Add a reference to the database you will use (Listing 16-8).
Add a getAllPhotos method to PhotosDAO and implement the method (Listing 16-9).
Open h and import PhotosDAO and PhotoDAO (Listing 16-10).
Add an NSMutableArray property to hold the Add an IBOutlet for a UIImageView. Add a UILabel named theLabel, add an IBAction, and name the method changeImage.
Open m and synthesize photos and theImageView (Listing 16-11).
Implementthe viewDidLoad and changeImage methods so they match Listing 16-11.
Figure 16-4 Adding a UIImageView and a UIToolBar to the view’s canvas
Open xib in Interface Builder. Add a toolbar, a label, and a UIImageView (Figure 16-4). Change the button’s title to Next. Remove the text from the label.
Connectthe File’s Owner theLabel outlet to the label added to the Connect the theImageView outlet to the UIImageView. Connect the changeImage action to the Next button. Save and exit Interface Builder.
Buildand run the application in iPhone As I am a registered developer, I deployed the application to my iPhone and ran the application (Figures 16-5 and 16-6). Aren’t they cute? Excuse my obligatory computer book author’s inclusion of his or her kids into the book.
NOTE You should never load an entire database at once when creating a real application, especially when using a large blob, like this example. Only load what you need. But for simplicity, you loaded all records in this task.
Figure 16-5 Running the application on my iphone Figure 16-6 Running the application on my iPhone
(first image) (secondimage)
The Model-View-Controller
When writing a program for any platform, you should adhere to the MVC design pattern as closely as possible. Rather than placing the database logic in a view or view controller, you created separate classes, insulating the view and controller layers from the database layer. The MyDBProjectViewController knows nothing about the underlying SQLite3 library; the view controller only knows about PhotosDAO and PhotoDAO. Notice you further separated the code by placing it in its own group, Model, under Classes. All this separation makes debugging and maintaining the program easier. It also makes reading and understanding this chapter’s example code easier.
Opening the Database
To keep the task’s length manageable and focused, rather than creating several data access methods in PhotosDAO, you only created one. - (NSMutableArray *) getAllPhotos; This method returns an array of PhotoDAO objects. The getAllPhotos method first finds the database and opens it. Because the database is in the resources folder, you can access it directly using the bundle’s resourcePath. NSFileManager *fileManager = [NSFileManager defaultManager]; NSString *theDBPath = [[[NSBundle mainBundle] resourcePath] stringByAppendingPathComponent: @"chapter18.sqlite"]; After obtaining the database’s path, you open it. if (!(sqlite3_open([theDBPath UTF8String], &database) == SQLITE_OK)) Notice that you obtain the UTF8String from the NSString before passing the sqlite3_open method the path.
Querying the Data
After opening the database, you query it for the photo records. If you have ever worked with a database using code, for instance, Java Database Connectivity (JDBC), then this code should look familiar. The getAllPhotos method first creates the SQL select string. Next, the method places the string in a statement and then queries the database. After obtaining the data, getAllPhotos loops through each record.For each new record, getAllPhotos creates a new PhotoDAO. The newly created PhotoDAO object’s values are then set to the appropriate values from the current record. After initializing the PhotoDAO object, getAllPhotos places the object into PhotosDAO’s photosArray.
Loading a Blob into NSData
This code snippet is useful. It shows you a quick, easy way to load a blob, any blob, into an NSData object. First, load the blob into a C string. const char * rawData = sqlite3_column_blob(statement, 2); Second, obtain the blob’s byte size. int rawDataLength = sqlite3_column_bytes(statement, 2); Third, create an NSData class using the C string and size variables. NSData *data = [NSData dataWithBytes:rawData length:rawDataLength]; As you already know the database blob is an image, you initialize the PhotoDAO’s photo property using the UIImage’s initWithData method. aPhoto.photo = [[UIImage alloc] initWithData:data]; This same technique works for other binary data as well (replacing UIImage with the appropriate class).
Closing the Database
When finished using a statement, you release its resources by finalizing the statement. if(sqlite3_finalize(statement) != SQLITE_OK) After you no longer need the database, you close it. if (sqlite3_close(database) != SQLITE_OK) Selecting all records only has limited value. Rarely will you use SQL statements where you do not wish to limit the results returned. For this, you typically add parameters to your SQL statements and then replace the parameters with values in your program. This is called binding your program’s values to the statements’ parameters. Programs must also usually allow more than simply selecting data; most applications allow users to add, edit, and delete records. In the next section, you learn about binding, inserting, updating, and deleting records.
101:T40d5,
SQLite Binding, Inserting, Updating, and Deleting
SQL allows limiting data to only the data needed via the where clause. For instance, the following statement only selects records whose age column is greater than 30. select * from mytable where age > 30 When placing SQL statements like this into a SQLite statement, you can parameterize the where clause’s value. For instance, to parameterize age’s value, write the following code. select * from mytable where age > ? You then bind your program’s value to the SQL statement’s parameter. Binding You bind one of your program’s values to a SQL statement’s parameter using a bind method (Listing 16-12). Different data types have different bind methods. Listing 16-12 SQLite bind methods (from the SQLite online documentation) int sqlite3_bind_blob(sqlite3_stmt*, int, const void*, int n, void(*)(void*)); int sqlite3_bind_double(sqlite3_stmt*, int, double); int sqlite3_bind_int(sqlite3_stmt*, int, int); int sqlite3_bind_int64(sqlite3_stmt*, int, sqlite3_int64); int sqlite3_bind_null(sqlite3_stmt*, int); int sqlite3_bind_text(sqlite3_stmt*, int, const char*, int n, void(*)(void*)); int sqlite3_bind_text16(sqlite3_stmt*, int, const void*, int, void(*)(void*)); int sqlite3_bind_value(sqlite3_stmt*, int, const sqlite3_value*); int sqlite3_bind_zeroblob(sqlite3_stmt*, int, int n); NOTE Bindings start with 1 rather than 0. For instance, the following code snippet shows a SQL statement and its subsequent binding. const char * select_statement = ‖Select * from photos where name = ?‖; sqlite3_bind_text(select_statement, 1, [photo.name UTF8String], -1, SQLITE_TRANSIENT); The first argument is a pointer to the prepared statement. The second argument is the SQL statement’s parameter number. The third argument is the value that should be bound to the SQL statement’s parameter. The fourth argument is the number of bytes in the value—if negative, the length is automatically determined from the C string
Insert, Update, and Delete
There is little difference between the steps for inserting, updating, or deleting records using the SQLite C library. The primary difference is you only call the sqlite3_step method once. Usually, you use insert, update, or delete with binding. For instance, insert into customers (name, age, company, location) values (?, ?, ?,?); or update customers set location = ? where company = ?; or delete customers where company = ?; In the following task, you insert, update, and delete a record.
Inserting, Updating, and Deleting Records
Making a Database Writable
Open the MYDBProject project in Xcode.
Add a class method named moveDatabase to Remember, a class method uses a plus rather than a minus.
Implementthe method in m as in Listing 16-13.
Modify the getAllPhotos method in PhotosDAO to obtain the records from the documents
Open m and add a call to the moveDatabase method to the first line of viewDidLoad (Listing 16-14).
Listing 16-13 The moveDatabase and getAllPhotos methods + (void) moveDatabase { NSFileManager *fileManager = [NSFileManager defaultManager]; NSString *theDBPath = [[[NSBundle mainBundle] resourcePath] stringByAppendingPathComponent:@"myDatabase.sqlite"]; NSError *error; BOOL success; NSArray * paths = NSSearchPathForDirectoriesInDomains (NSDocumentDirectory, NSUserDomainMask, YES); NSString * docsDir = [paths objectAtIndex:0]; NSString * newPath = [docsDir stringByAppendingPathComponent:@"chapter18.sqlite"]; [fileManager removeItemAtPath:newPath error: &error]; success = [fileManager copyItemAtPath:theDBPath toPath:newPath error: &error]; if (!success) { NSLog(@"Failed to copy database...error handling here %@.", [error localizedDescription]); } } - (NSMutableArray *) getAllPhotos { NSMutableArray * photosArray = [[NSMutableArray alloc] init]; @try { NSFileManager *fileManager = [NSFileManager defaultManager]; NSArray * paths = NSSearchPathForDirectoriesInDomains (NSDocumentDirectory, NSUserDomainMask, YES); NSString * docsDir = [paths objectAtIndex:0]; NSString * theDBPath = [docsDir stringByAppendingPathComponent: @"myDatabase.sqlite"]; BOOL success = [fileManager fileExistsAtPath:theDBPath]; if (!success) { NSLog(@"Failed to find database file '%@'."); } if (!(sqlite3_open([theDBPath UTF8String], &database) == SQLITE_OK)) { NSLog(@"An error opening database, normally handle error here."); } const char *sql = "SELECT id,name,photo FROM photos"; sqlite3_stmt *statement; if (sqlite3_prepare_v2(database, sql, -1, &statement, NULL) != SQLITE_OK) { NSLog(@"Error, failed to prepare statement, normally handle error here."); } while (sqlite3_step(statement) == SQLITE_ROW) { PhotoDAO * aPhoto = [[PhotoDAO alloc] init]; aPhoto.photoID = sqlite3_column_int(statement, 0); aPhoto.name = [NSString stringWithUTF8String:(char *) sqlite3_column_text(statement, 1)]; const char * rawData = sqlite3_column_blob(statement, 2); int rawDataLength = sqlite3_column_bytes(statement, 2); NSData *data = [NSData dataWithBytes:rawData length: rawDataLength]; aPhoto.photo = [[UIImage alloc] initWithData:data]; [photosArray addObject:aPhoto]; } if(sqlite3_finalize(statement) != SQLITE_OK) { NSLog(@"Failed to finalize data statement, normally error handling here."); } if (sqlite3_close(database) != SQLITE_OK) { NSLog(@"Failed to close database, normally error handling here."); } } @catch (NSException *e) { NSLog(@"An exception occurred: %@", [e reason]); return nil; } return photosArray; } Listing 16-14 The viewDidLoad method - (void)viewDidLoad { [PhotosDAO moveDatabase]; PhotosDAO * myPhotos = [[PhotosDAO alloc] init]; self.photos = [myPhotos getAllPhotos]; [self.theImageView setImage:((PhotoDAO *)[self.photos objectAtIndex:0]).photo]; [self.theLabel setText:((PhotoDAO *)[self.photos objectAtIndex:0]) .name]; [myPhotos release]; [super viewDidLoad]; } The first thing you do is make the database writeable. The Resources folder is read-only. Saving changes requires the database to be writable, so you copied the database to your documents directory. You also modified the getAllPhotos method so it obtained the database from the application’s document directory rather than the resources directory. Inserting Records
Add png to the project’s Resources group. You can find this photo in the book’s Resources folder.
Add a new method to PhotosDAO called Implement the method (Listing 16- 15).
Createa new IBAction in MyDBProjectViewController called addKidPhoto (Listing 16- 16).
Buildand save the
Open xib and add a new Bar Button item to the toolbar. Change the bar button’s title to Add.
Connectthe addKidPhoto action to the Add \
Save and exit Interface
ClickBuildAnd Go to run the application in the iPhone Simulator (Figure 16-7).
NSString * docsDir = [paths objectAtIndex:0]; NSString * thePath = [docsDir stringByAppendingPathComponent: @"myDatabase.sqlite"]; sqlite3_open([thePath UTF8String], &database); sqlite3_prepare_v2(database, sql, -1, &insert_statement, NULL); sqlite3_bind_text(insert_statement, 1, [photo.name UTF8String], -1, SQLITE_TRANSIENT); NSData * binData = UIImagePNGRepresentation(photo.photo); sqlite3_bind_blob(insert_statement, 2, [binData bytes], [binData length], SQLITE_TRANSIENT); sqlite3_step(insert_statement); sqlite3_finalize(insert_statement); sqlite3_close(database); } Listing 16-16 The addKidPhoto IBAction - (IBAction) addKidPhoto: (id) sender { static BOOL wasAdded; if(!wasAdded) { PhotosDAO * myPhotos = [[PhotosDAO alloc] init]; PhotoDAO * aPhoto = [[PhotoDAO alloc] init]; NSString * imgPath = [[[NSBundle mainBundle] resourcePath] stringByAppendingPathComponent:@"kids.png"]; aPhoto.name = @"Kids Both"; aPhoto.photo = [[UIImage alloc] initWithContentsOfFile:imgPath]; [myPhotos addPhoto:aPhoto]; [self.photos release]; self.photos = [myPhotos getAllPhotos]; [myPhotos release]; wasAdded = YES; } } The addPhoto method (Listing 16-15) allows new photos to be inserted. As it is a simple example, the method merely gets the photo from your resources group. The addPhoto method first creates a SQL string with parameters. The method then replaces the question marks by binding them to the appropriate value. For instance, the name column is text, so addPhoto binds it to a C string. The UIImage is binary, so it is bound to a blob. After binding, addPhoto then inserts the record by calling the sqlite3_step method. This method is called only once, as no data is returned from the insert statement. Notice, for brevity, an examination of the return code is omitted, as is other error handling from Listing 16-6 forward. Updating Records
Return to the Xcode project.
Dragpng from the book’s Resources folder to the Resources group in Xcode.
Add a new NSInteger called currentID to m. Change the changeImage method to update this new variable with the current photo’s id from the database (Listing 16-17).
Add a new method called changeAPhotoImage to PhotosDAO (Listing 6-18).
Add a new IBAction called changePhotosImage to MyDBProjectViewController (Listing 16-19). Save and build the
Open xib in Interface Builder and add another bar button to the toolbar. Change the button’s title to Change.
Connectthe changePhotosImage action to the Change
Save and exit Interface Click Build And Go to run the application in the iPhone Simulator (Figure 16-8).
(void) changeAPhotoImage: (UIImage *) image theID: (NSInteger) photoID { const char * sql = "update photos set photo = ? where id = ?"; sqlite3_stmt *update_statement = nil;
NSArray * paths = NSSearchPathForDirectoriesInDomains(NSDocumentDirectory, NSUserDomainMask, YES); NSString * docsDir = [paths objectAtIndex:0]; NSString * thePath = [docsDir stringByAppendingPathComponent:@"chapter18.sqlite"]; sqlite3_open([thePath UTF8String], &database); sqlite3_prepare_v2(database, sql, -1, &update_statement, NULL); NSData * binData = UIImagePNGRepresentation(image); sqlite3_bind_blob(update_statement, 1, [binData bytes], [binData length], SQLITE_TRANSIENT); sqlite3_bind_int(update_statement, 2, photoID); sqlite3_step(update_statement); sqlite3_finalize(update_statement); sqlite3_close(database); } Listing 16-19 The changePhotosImage method -(IBAction) changePhotosImage: (id) sender { PhotosDAO * myPhotos = [[PhotosDAO alloc] init]; NSString * imgPath = [[[NSBundle mainBundle] resourcePath] stringByAppendingPathComponent:@"woman.png"]; [myPhotos changeAPhotoImage:[[UIImage alloc] initWithContentsOfFile: imgPath] theID: currentID]; [self.photos release]; self.photos = [myPhotos getAllPhotos]; [myPhotos release]; } Updating a record is as straightforward as inserting it. The changeAPhotoImage first creates a SQL string with parameters. It then binds a file’s binary data to photo and an integer to id. After binding, it then calls the step function once, finalizes the statement, and closes the database. Notice that updating requires the record’s id, as SQLite uses the id to update the correct record. To accommodate this requirement, you added a currentID variable and changed the changeImage method to set the currentID with the currently selected photo record. Deleting Records
Quit the application and return to Xcode.
Add a new method called deletePhoto to PhotosDAO (Listing 16-20).
Createa new IBAction called deletePhoto to MyDBProjectViewController (Listing 16- 21).
Move the static NSInteger currentElement from the changeImage method in Listing 16- 11 to just below the currentID variable (Listing 16-22). Remove the static
Save and build.
Open MyDBProjectViewController.xib in Interface Builder.
Figure 16-9 The MyDBProjectViewController view’s canvas
Add another button to the toolbar and change its title to Delete.
Resizethe image and move the label to above the toolbar, as you are running out of space on the toolbar (Figure 16-9).
Connectthe button to the deletePhoto
ClickBuildAnd Go and try deleting a photo.
Listing 16-20 The deletePhoto method in PhotosDAO(void) deletePhoto: (NSInteger) photoID { const char * sql = "delete from photos where id = ?"; sqlite3_stmt *delete_statement = nil; NSArray * paths = NSSearchPathForDirectoriesInDomains(NSDocumentDirectory, NSUserDomainMask, YES); NSString * docsDir = [paths objectAtIndex:0]; NSString * thePath = [docsDir stringByAppendingPathComponent: @"chapter18.sqlite"]; sqlite3_open([thePath UTF8String], &database); sqlite3_prepare_v2(database, sql, -1, &delete_statement, NULL); sqlite3_bind_int(delete_statement, 1, photoID); sqlite3_step(delete_statement); sqlite3_finalize(delete_statement); sqlite3_close(database); } Listing 16-21 The deletePhoto IBAction in MyDBProjectViewController - (IBAction) deletePhoto : (id) sender { PhotosDAO * myPhotos = [[PhotosDAO alloc] init]; [myPhotos deletePhoto:currentID]; [self.photos release]; self.photos = [myPhotos getAllPhotos]; currentElement = 0; [myPhotos release]; } Listing 16-22 Placing currentElement at the class’s top so it shared in the class @implementation MyDBProjectViewController @synthesize photos; @synthesize theImageView; @synthesize theLabel; NSInteger currentID = 0; NSInteger currentElement = 0; The delete statement follows the same pattern as insert and update. The only real difference is the SQL string. const char * sql = "delete from photos where id = ?";
102:T94d6,
Multimedia
Key Skills & Concepts
Playing system sounds Playing songs Using the Media Player to interact with a device’s multimedia Playing video Up until the release of the iPhone OS 3.0, the iPhone was a difficult platform for developing multimedia applications. The capabilities were there, as you could always resort to using low-level C APIs to program audio and video, but the higher-level APIs were strictly undocumented and off limits. And as for the multimedia on a device that was placed there by iTunes? Forget it, off limits. Any media you wished playing in your application had to either be packaged as part of your application or streamed from a server. That restriction changed with iPhone OS 3.0; now you can access and play a user’s audio iTunes multimedia, making the iPhone and iPod touch the most programmable portable music players ever released.In this chapter, you explore the basic multimedia capabilities of the iPhone and iPod touch. You first learn how to play system sounds and longer sounds. You then move to the Media Player framework, where you use the framework to select and play a user’s iTunes audio multimedia. After learning to play iTunes media, you then learn how to play a video using the Media Player framework’s video player.
Playing Sounds
Playing short sounds on an iPhone or iPod touch is easy. Simply load the song as a system sound, obtain the sound’s id, and use the AudioServicesPlaySystemSound method to play the sound. Playing a longer sound using the AVAudioPlayer is not difficult, but a little more involved. However, there is one important limitation you must realize when using sound on your device using the AudioServicesPlaySystemSound function or AVAudioPlayer: Any media you play must be packaged as part of your application or must be streamed from a server. So, although these two classes are good for adding sound to your application or for developing an interface to a server that streams multimedia, they are not good classes for developing a music player. Instead, you should use the Media Player Framework, covered later in this chapter.
AudioServicesPlaySystemSound
The AudioServicesPlaySystemSound function plays a short system sound. Although security restrictions prevent your application from playing a device’s OS system sounds, you can load and play your own short (30 seconds or less) sounds and play them using this function. The AudioServicesPlaySystemSound function can only play a sound with the following format: .caf, if, or .wav. The sound plays at whatever audio level the device is set to, and the sound plays immediately upon its id being passed to the There is no pausing, rewinding, fast-forwarding, or other sound manipulation functionality. You load a sound, and the function plays it. void AudioServicesPlaySystemSound (SystemSoundID inSystemSoundID); The function takes a SystemSoundID as a parameter. A SystemSoundID is an unsigned integer that uniquely identifies the sound. You obtain a SystemSoundID by loading a sound into the AudioServicesCreateSystemSoundID function. OSStatus AudioServicesCreateSystemSoundID (CFURLRef inFileURL, SystemSoundID * outSystemSoundID); The AudioServicesCreateSystemSoundID function takes a reference to the file’s URL and the SystemSoundID to assign the value to. A CFURLRef is simply a lower-level pointer to a URL. You can ignore creating a CFURL (what the CFURLRef points to) and instead cast an NSURL as a CFURLRef. After obtaining a sound’s URL, you pass it to the create system sound function. It assigns the value to the system sound ID variable you defined; you pass that ID to the system sound player function; and it plays the sound.
Ask the Expert
Q: What’s a CFURLRef? What’s an NSURL?A: A CFURLRef is a reference to a CFURL object. A CFURL is part of the Core Foundation framework, meaning it is C, not Objective-C, and provides functions to create and parse URLs. An NSURL is a higher-level, Cocoa Objective-C class for working with URLs. It encapsulates a URL and provides many functions for manipulating URLs. Refer to the NSURL Class Reference for more information. You can cast an NSURL * as a CFURLRef because of Apple’s ―toll-free bridging‖ functionality. The term ―toll-free bridging‖ refers to certain Core Foundation types being interchangeable with their higher-level Cocoa counterparts. Remember, a pointer to an NSURL is equivalent to a CFURL reference. TIP You can use the AudioServicesPlaySystemSound to vibrate a user’s iPhone. Pass the kSystemSoundID_Vibrate identifier constant to the function. Currently, only the iPhone can vibrate; this code does not do anything on an iPod touch. AudioServicesPlaySystemSound(kSystemSoundID_Vibrate);
AVAudioPlayer and AVAudioPlayerDelegate
The AVAudioPlayer plays sounds. The audio player does not have the limitations of the AudioSer vicesPlaySystemSound function. It can play any length sound, loop a sound, play multiple sounds at the same time, and allows control over a sound’s volume. Methods you might use include prepareToPlay, play, pause, and stop. Each method’s functionality should be intuitive. Notice that prepareToPlay and play return a BOOL, so you can evaluate if the call was successful.
(BOOL)prepareToPlay
(BOOL)play
(void)pause
(void)stop
You can initialize an AVAudioPlayer with data or a URL. The initWithData:error: function initializes an audio player using data encapsulated in an NSData object. The initWithContentsOfURL:error: initializes an audio player using the sound file referenced by the URL. That sound file can be in your application’s bundle, or it can be a resource on a server and streamed. If streamed, note that the prepareToPlay method discussed previously takes more importance, as it buffers the content and helps lessen a user’s wait when playing an external resource.
(id)initWithData:(NSData *) data error:(NSError **) outError
Properties you might use include the currentTime, data, delegate, duration, playing, volume, and numberOfLoops. The currentTime property returns the playback in seconds as an NSTimeInterval. The duration property returns a sound’s duration in seconds as an NSTimeInterval. The volume returns the player’s playback gain as a float between 0.0 and 1.0. The playing property returns a BOOL, while the numberOfLoops property returns an unsigned int. There are also more advanced properties, such as numberOfChannels and peakPowerForChannel. For a more complete listing of AVAudioPlayer’s properties and methods, refer to the AVAudioPlayer Class Reference. An AVAudioPlayer’s delegate property refers to an audio player’s AVAudioPlayerDelegate protocol. As with all protocols, you implement a custom class that adopts the protocol. Protocol methods you might implement are listed in Table 18-1.
Playing a Sound and an MP3
Create a new View-based Application and name it Avplayer.
Fromthe Resources folder, add the mp3, charleston1925_64kb.mp3, to the application’s Resources Also add the burp_2.aif file.
Add the framework to the application’s frameworks. Also add the AVFoundation.framework. Remember, you add a framework by choosing File | Add | Existing Frameworks, and then navigating to the framework. Remember to select the framework for the iPhone OS version you are compiling for. For instance, in my project, I navigated to iPhoneSimulator3.0.sdk/System/Library/Frameworks to find the frameworks.
Open h and import the AudioToolbox and AVFoundation header files (Listing 18-1). Have the class adopt the AVAudioPlayerDelegate protocol.
Add a SystemSoundID as a variable to AvplayerViewController; name it Also add an AVAudioPlayer as a variable and name it player.
Add two IBActions to AvplayerViewController named playSound and Do not forget to add the actions to AvplayerViewController’s header and implementation (Listing 18-2). Don’t implement the actions yet, you do that in step nine. Save the application.
Open xib in Interface Builder and add two buttons. Connect one button to playSound and one button to playSong. Label both buttons appropriately.
Save and exit Interface
ImplementplaySound, playSong,and Also implement the audioPlayerDid FinishPlaying:successfully: method from the AVAudioPlayerDelegate protocol.
ClickBuildAnd Tap the button connected to playSong to begin playing the song. After the song starts playing, tap the button connected to playSound, and the iPhone Simulator belches simultaneously (Figure 18-1).
This task is straightforward; first, you loaded the sound and obtained its id. As system sounds are 30 seconds or less, loading it into memory and keeping it there should not tax your device’s memory. Notice you do not load the longer song into memory until you actually play it in the playSong method, as it takes more memory.You initialize the system sound in the viewDidLoad method. Don’t let the one line of code be intimidating; it’s actually doing something quite simple. It gets the path to the file, creates an NSURL using the path, casts it as a CFURLRef, and creates a system sound from the resource.The playSong method creates a new AVAudioPlayer instance every time the application calls it. If an error occurs, the method logs the error; otherwise, it plays the song. When the song is finished playing, it calls the audioPlayerDidFinishPlaying:successfully: method and releases the player. Figure 18-1 The finished application in the iPhone Simulator Listing 18-1 AvplayerViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> #import <AudioToolbox/AudioToolbox.h> #import <AVFoundation/AVFoundation.h> @interface AvplayerViewController : UIViewController <AVAudioPlayerDelegate> { SystemSoundID burpSoundID; AVAudioPlayer * player; }
} @end NOTE The mp3 song is entitled The Charleston, and is a digital copy of the 1925 recording. I obtained the mp3 from the Internet Archive’s 78RPMS & Cylinder Recordings Collection. The mp3 is licensed under the Creative Commons Commercial license. The burp_2.aif is also public domain. Hopefully, I am not violating any software patents by playing burp sounds on a mobile device...
Media Player Framework
Before iPhone OS 3.0, a device’s multimedia loaded by iTunes was off limits for application developers. The Media Player framework released with OS 3.0 removes that restriction by providing several classes that work with a device’s iTunes-loaded multimedia. NOTE Running the Media Player audio applications in this chapter require installing the application on an iPod touch or iPhone running iPhone OS 3.0 or later.
Media Data Classes
An MPMediaLibrary class represents a device’s multimedia library loaded from iTunes. An MPMediaItem object represents every multimedia item in the media library. The MPMediaItem class contains metadata such as title, artist, and length about a media item.When working with the MPMediaLibrary, you usually execute an MPMediaQuery that returns an MPMediaItemCollection. Although the Media Player framework offers several methods for accessing a device’s media programmatically, another way is by using an MPMediaPickerController. An MPMediaPickerController is a class that presents a view much like the current iPod application. A user can then select one or more media items, and the picker returns an MPMediaItemCollection.After selecting the media items to play, you pass them to an MPMusicController to play. The MPMusicController class is responsible for playing music, rewinding, forwarding, and other playback functionality.
MPMediaItem and MPMediaItemCollection
An MPMediaItem encapsulates a single audio multimedia element in a device’s iTunes multimedia collection. The MPMediaItem contains one method for obtaining a media item’s properties, the valueForProperty: method. - (id)valueForProperty:(NSString *)property The valueForProperty: method takes a constant representing the property for which to obtain a value. Notice that the method returns an id; this means the function’s return value is tied to the property constant passed to the method. Listing 18-3 lists the properties you might pass to the valueForProperty: method. Listing 18-3 Media Item properties NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyPersistentID; NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyAlbumTrackNumber; NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyAlbumTrackCount; NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyDiscNumber; NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyDiscCount; NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyArtwork; NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyLyrics; NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyPodcastTitle; You can also use user-defined properties. These properties have a variable value, depending upon a user’s multimedia collection use. Listing 18-4 lists the user-defined properties. Listing 18-4 User-defined properties NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyPlayCount; NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertySkipCount; NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyRating; NSString *const MPMediaItemPropertyLastPlayedDate; The MPMediaItemCollection class is a collection of media items. You obtain a collection’s media items through its items property. This property returns an NSArray of MPMediaItem objects. Other properties include count, mediaTypes, and the representativeItem properties. The count property returns a count of the collection’s multimedia items as an NSUInteger. You use the mediaTypes property and representativeItem property to obtain a collection’s media types.
Selecting Multimedia
Before playing multimedia, a user must select the media items. The easiest way to allow a user to do this is through the MPMediaPickerController. Similar to the UIImagePickerController, the view it controls is hidden from developers. Also, like the image picker, you can define a delegate for the media picker. That delegate, the MPMediaPickerControllerDelegate, responds to a user’s interaction with the media picker.
MPMediaPickerController
The MPMediaPickerController class manages the media picker view. Like the UIImagePickerController, you present this controller’s view as a modal view that overlays the currently displaying view. [self presentModalViewController:mediaController animated:YES]; You can initialize a media picker to only display certain media types using the initWithMediaTypes method. This method takes an MPMediaType; valid types are MPMediaTypeMusic, MPMediaTypePodcast, MPMediaTypeAudioBook, and MPMediaTypeAnyAudio. Notice there is no MPMediaTypeVideo; you cannot select or play an iTunes-loaded video.You can also initialize a media picker to allow a user to select multiple items by setting the allowsPickingMultimediaItems property to YES. If you don’t set this property, its default value is NO.
MPMediaPickerControllerDelegate
A media picker requires an MPMediaPickerControllerDelegate if it is to do anything interesting. An MPMediaPickerControllerDelegate has two methods you implement when adopting this protocol: the mediaPicker:didPickMediaItems: and mediaPickerDidCancel: methods.
The mediaPickerDidCancel: method responds to a user canceling the media picker, while the mediaPicker:didPickMediaItems: method responds to a user clicking the Done button after selecting media in the media picker.
Playing Multimedia - MPMusicPlayerController
A user will probably wish to play multimedia after selecting it. You play an MPMediaItemsCollection using the MPMusicPlayerController. This class is responsible for playing audio media items. There are two player types to choose from: an iPodMusicPlayer and applicationMusicPlayer. An iPodMusicPlayer replaces an iPod’s state, while an applicationMusicPlayer is independent of a user’s iPod. For instance, if you are using an iPodMusicPlayer and set it to shuffle mode, the user’s iPod application will be in shuffle mode the next time he or she uses it. When using the applicationMusicPlayer, this does not happen because it does not modify the iPod’s state.You initialize a music player’s media collection using the setQueueWithQuery:, setQueueWithItems:, or setQueueWithItemCollection: methods. The set with query method takes an MPMediaQuery, the set with items method takes an NSArray of MPMediaItems, and the set with collection method takes an MPMediaItemCollection. You can initialize a media player’s state using the repeatMode and shuffleMode properties. If you do not set these properties, your player’s state is the user’s iPod application state. Other properties you can use to obtain information about a media player are the nowPlayingItem, currentPlaybackTime, and playbackState properties. The nowPlayingItem property is an MPMediaItem that represents the currently playing media item. The currentPlaybackTime is an NSInterval containing the now-playing item’s playback location in seconds. The playbackState property returns the music player’s playback state as an MPMusicPlaybackState. Valid values for these statesincludeMPMusicPlaybackStateStopped, MPMusicPlaybackStatePlaying,MPMusicPlaybackStatePaused,MPMusicPlaybackState Interrupted,MPMusicPlaybackStateSeekingForward,andMPMusicPlaybackStateSeekingBackward.Methods you can use to control a media player are play, pause, stop, beginSeekingForward,beginSeekingBackward,endSeeking,skipToNextItem, skipToBeginning, and skipToPreviousItem. The play, pause, and stop methods should be self-explanatory. The beginSeekingForward and beginSeekingBackward methods are for fast-forwarding and rewinding, respectively, while the endSeeking method stops fast-forwarding or rewinding. The skipToNextItem, skipToPreviousItem, and skipToBeginning methods should also be self-explanatory. The MPMusicPlayerController has no delegate protocol for responding to its events. Instead it provides two notifications: the MPMusicPlayerControllerPlaybackStateDidChange and MPMusicPlayerControllerNowPlayingItemDidChange notifications. The first notification posts when an MPMusicPlayerController’s playback state changes. The second notification posts when an MPMusicPlayerController’s now-playing media item changes. By using these two notifications, your application can respond to the media player’s state, as the next example task illustrates.
Using the Media Picker and Media Player
Create a new View-based Application; name it iPod songs.
Add the Media Player framework (MediaPlayer.framework) to the project’s
Add the png, player_pause.png, player_begin1.png, player_play.png, player_ rew.png, player_fwd.png, and player-end.png images from the Resources folder to the project’s Resources folder.
Open iPodSongsViewController and add four IBOutlets: three for UILabels and one for a Name the outlets currentTitle, currentArtist, currentLengthInSeconds, and volumeView.
Add an IBAction named Don’t implement selectSongs yet. Add an IBAction named changeState (Listings 18-5 and 18-6).
Open iPodSongsViewController.xib in Interface Builder. Create a button and connect its Touch Up Inside event to the selectSongs method.
Createfivebuttons and add an image to each button (Figure 18-2). Assign each button a unique tag in the Connect the five buttons to the changeState action.
Add three labels to the Also add a UIView to the view’s canvas and connect it to the volumeView outlet.
Connectthe three labels to the currentTitle, currentArtist, and currentLengthInSeconds
ExitInterfaceBuilderand return to
Createa new Objective-C class that is a subclass of NSObject named MyMediaPickerDelegate and have it adopt the MPMediaPickerControllerDelegate protocol (Listings 18-7 and 18-8). Don’t forget to import the MediaPlayer header file.
Figure 18-2 The application’s canvas in Interface Builder
Open iPodSongsViewController and add properties for the MyMediaPickerDelegate, MPMediaLibrary, and Name the properties mediaPickerDelegate, mediaLib, and player.
Add a variable for MPVolumeView named
Be certainthat iPodSongsViewController imports MyMediaPickerDelegate and do not forget to synthesize the three
Returnto MyMediaPickerDelegate and implement the didPickMediaItems delegate
Returnto iPodSongsViewController and implement the selectSongs and changeState
Implementthe viewDidLoad method and the songsPicked method, pay particular attention to the
ClickBuildAnd The application runs, displays the control, and allows selecting multimedia. Upon tapping Done, the music player starts playing and displays the currently playing item in the labels (Figure 18-3).
Figure 18-3 The application running on an iPod touch
This is perhaps the coolest application in this entire book. The user interface isn’t pretty, but the application works well as a simple music player. In fact, I like it more than my iPod touch’s Music application, as I can quickly select all the songs I am interested in and then play them. I have used the application several times for over an hour each time while exercising, so the application works. In the viewDidLoad method, notice the code for initializing a volume control. Although the MPVolumeView class provides a sizeThatFits method, in my opinion, it is better to do it the way presented here. Simply add a UIView as a subview, size it to the desired size, and then add the volume view to the subview. Easy, and it is guaranteed to size correctly. mpVolumeView = [[MPVolumeView alloc] init]; [mpVolumeView setFrame:[self.volumeView bounds]]; [self.volumeView addSubview:mpVolumeView]; As the MPMediaPlayerController does not have a delegate, you made the iPodSongsViewController a listener for the MPMusicPlayerControllerNowPlayingItemDid ChangeNotification event. When a player’s now-playing item changes, the player fires this event. You set the songChanged method as the method called when the event fires. After being called, the songChanged method obtains the now- playing item and updates the view’s labels. The changeState method handles any one of the five control buttons being tapped. Because each button has a different tag, the method can distinguish which button fires the Touch Up Inside Event and handle the message appropriately. In a real-world application, you woulddisable the buttons as appropriate. For instance, when paused, the Pause button should be disabled and only the Play button enabled. However, here, the extra code would have detracted from the example’s intended purpose. In addition to the player’s notification, you created your own notification in MyMediaPickerDelegate. Upon selecting an MPMediaItemCollection using the media picker, this notification is fired. The songsPicked method in iPodSongsViewController responds to this notification. The method takes the NSNotification as a parameter; remember, notifications can contain an object. Here, that object is the selected MPMediaItemCollection. After initializing the media player with the collection, the songsPicked method tells the media player to begin generating playback notifications and then starts playing. Listing 18-5 iPodSongsViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> #import <MediaPlayer/MediaPlayer.h> #import "MyMediaPickerDelegate.h" @interface iPodSongsViewController : UIViewController { MyMediaPickerDelegate * mediaControllerDelegate; MPMediaLibrary * mediaLib; IBOutlet UILabel * currentTitle; IBOutlet UILabel * currentArtist; IBOutlet UILabel * currentLengthInSeconds; MPMusicPlayerController * player; IBOutlet UIView * volumeView; MPVolumeView * mpVolumeView; } @property (nonatomic, retain) MyMediaPickerDelegate * mediaControllerDelegate; @property (nonatomic, retain) MPMediaLibrary * mediaLib; @property (nonatomic, retain) UILabel * currentTitle; @property (nonatomic, retain) UILabel * currentArtist; @property (nonatomic, retain) UILabel * currentLengthInSeconds; @property (nonatomic, retain) MPMusicPlayerController * player; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIView * volumeView;
The MPMoviePlayerController plays video bundled as part of your application. It can also stream video from a server. However, despite its name, it cannot use video loaded on a user’s device by iTunes. The MPMoviePlayerController presents a modal, full-screen video when it plays. You can only minimally modify its appearance using properties. What you can change are a movie player’s background color, a movie’s scaling, and the controls presented to the user when playing a movie. You change a movie’s background color using the backgroundColor property. You change a movie’s scaling using the scalingMode property, and you change the controls presented using the movieControlMode property. The backgroundColor property changes the movie player’s background color when playing a movie. For instance, when you watch a video using the Video application on an iPod touch, the background is black. If you wish, you can change that color using this property. The scalingMode property changes a movie’s scaling. Valid values for scalingMode are MPMovieScalingModeNone, MPMovieScalingModeAspectFit, MPMovieScalingModeAspect Fill, and MPMovieScalingModeFill. The movieControlMode property determines the visible controls when a movie plays. For instance, when playing a movie using the Video application, if you tap the screen, it presents a control showing the volume, a control showing the location in the video, a scaling control, and a Done button. You can modify which control a player presents using this property. Valid values are MPMovieControlModeDefault, MPMovieControlModeVolumeOnly, and MPMovie ControlModeHidden. You initialize a movie player using the initWithContentURL: method. This method takes an NSURL to the movie’s location. This location must be within your application’s sandbox or available via an Internet server (it’s a URL). After initializing the player, you call the prepareToPlay and play methods. If you wish to be notified that the player has stopped playing, you register as a notification listener, listening for the player’s MPMoviePlayerPlay backDidFinishNotification notification.
Play a Video
Create a new View-based Application called Add the Media Player framework to the application.
Add the movie 3gp from the Resources folder to the project’s Resources folder.
Open MoviePlayerController and add an MPMoviePlayerController as a property; name it moviePlayer (Listings 18-9 and 18-10). Do not forget to import the
Add a method called playingDone and an IBAction called playMovie to MoviePlayerView Implement both methods the same as in Listing 18-10. Also implement the viewDidLoad method.
Save or Open MovieplayerViewController.xib in Interface Builder.
Add a button to the canvas and connect it to the playMovie Save and exit Interface Builder.
ClickBuildAnd Go.
Like the music player, you register to listen to the finished playing event in the viewDidLoad method. Notice that unlike the previous task, you didn’t place the event’s name in quotations. This omission was intentional. The event and the event’s NSString name are the same, and you can use either. The viewDidLoad method also initializes the movie player with the short.3gp movie’s location. In a real- world application, loading a movie when a view loads is probably not a good idea, as movies are usually quite large.When a user taps the button, the movie player begins playing the movie in landscape mode (Figure 18-4). Upon tapping the Done button, the user returns to the application’s view in portrait mode. The controller also receives the notification that the player stopped playing and releases the player. Listing 18-9 MovieplayerViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> #import <MediaPlayer/MediaPlayer.h> @interface MovieplayerViewController : UIViewController { MPMoviePlayerController * movieplayer; } @property (nonatomic, retain) MPMoviePlayerController * movieplayer; -(IBAction) playMovie: (id) sender; - (void) playingDone; @end
Figure 18-4 The application running in iPhone Simulator
Create a new package and rename it as OLEDB Command. dtsx --------->
In Data Flow drag and drop OLEDB source --------->
Double click on OLEDB Source to configure it --------->
Provide connection manager if exists and select SQL Command option from --------->
Data access mode drop down list. --------->
Provide the following SQL Command text Select * from Human Resources. Employee --------->
Where Employee ID = 1 --------->
Select columns and click ok --------->
Drag and Drop OLEDB Command and make a connection from OLEDB source to OLEDB Command --------->
Double click on OLEDB Command to configure it. --------->
In Connection Manager Tab Select the Connection manager
In components property tab, set
SQL Command - SQL Command ----- update Human Resources. Employee,
Set Martial Status =’D’ Where employee ID = 1 --------->
Click Refresh and click ok --------->
Execute package
Desired to gain proficiency on MSBI? Explore the blog post on MSBI Training to become a pro in MSBI.
FUZZY Look up Transformation :
I t is used to compare the data from source to reference dataset by usingFuzzy matching [closely matching]
Note:
IT can be spelled customers in customer’s dimensions table.
Fuzzy Look up uses To leant Index (ETI) to find matching rows in the reference table.
Each record in the reference table is broken up into tokens or words. If you take the
Name as an Example from the customer Dimension Table and if your reference dataset
Contains Rama Rao, the ETI will Contain Rama Rao. By using Token delimiters.
Steps to Configure Fuzzy Look Up
Open Business Intelligence Development Studio --------->
Create a new package and rename it as Fuzzy Look Up. dtsx --------->
In Control Flow drag and drop Data FLOW Task --------->
In Data Flow drag and drop OLEDB source --------->
Double click on OLEDB Source to configure it --------->
Provide connection manager if exists --------->
Select Production. Product category table from the drop down list --------->
Select Columns --------->
Click ok --------->
Drag and Drop Fuzzy Look Up transformation and make a connection from Source to Fuzzy Look Up --------->
Double Click on fuzzy look up to Configure it. --------->
In Reference Tab,
Connection - Provide destination connection Manager
Reference Table - Select [Production].[Product Sub category] --------->
In Columns Tab,
Make a Join or Mapping between Product Category Id from input
Column to output column --------->
Click ok --------->
Drag and Drop OLEDB destination and make a connection from Look up to OLEDB destination --------->
Provide destination Connection Manager and click new to create a new table --------->
Rename it as Fuzzy Look up --------->
Select Mapping --------->
Click ok --------->
Execute Package
Import Column Transformation:
It is used to load binary data (photos, documents and media etc) from the file System in to data flow. From the data flow it can then be loaded in to a table.
Steps to Configure Import Column Transformation
Open Business Intelligence Development Studio --------->
Create a new package and rename it as Import column. dtsx --------->
In Control flow drag and drop data flow task and it as DFT. import column. --------->
In Data Flow drag and drop OLEDB source --------->
Double click on OLEDB Source to configure it --------->
Provide connection manager if exists --------->
Select Production. Product Photo --------->
Select Columns and Click ok --------->
Drag and drop import column transformation and make a connection from Source to import column --------->
Double click on import column transformation to configure it --------->
Select input columns and check thumb nail photo file name. Input column --------->
(The input Column must be of type DT_STR or DT_WSTR) --------->
Select input and output Properties tab and expand input column --------->
Output and expand output columns --------->
Click add Column to add a new output Column and rename it as image --------->
File and note down the ID of image file output column --------->
Expand Import Column Input and Expand Input Columns --------->
Select thumbnail photo file name and set, --------->
Script Component: It is used to Execute Scripts on micro Soft Visual basics.Net to Perform certain Operations.
Steps to configure script component
Open Business Intelligence Development studio --------->
Create a new package and Rename it as script component dtsx. --------->
In control flow drag and drop Data flow task --------->
In Data Flow drag and drop script component and select “source” radio button as script component type [Here script component is a source in the data flow and provides data to the output column] --------->
Click ok --------->
In inputs and outputs page Expand output o --------->
Select output column and click add columns to add new output columns which will be carry for word it to next level --------->
Rename the column o as SNO and column 1 as SName --------->
Select script page and click design script --------->
In Microsoft visual studio for application editor providing the fall code to add new rows by adding Add row () method .
Output O Buffer. Add Row ()
Out put O Buffer . SNo = 123
Output O Buffer. SName= “Rama”
Click ok and close Vs for application Editor
Drag and drop OLEDB destination and make a connection from script component to OLEDB destination. --------->
Double click on destination to configure it and provide destination connection manager. --------->
Click new to create destination table and rename it as script component --------->
It is used to read the Data about a system using WMI Query language Steps to Configure WMI Data reader task Open Business Intelligence Development studio -----------> Create a new package and Rename it as WMI Data reader task .dtsx -----------> In control How drag and drop WMI data reader task -----------> Double click on it to configure and set WMI Connection -- New Connection -----------> Check Windows authentication check box -----------> Click text to evaluate the connection -----------> Click ok WQL Query source Type – Direct input default WQL Query source -- Select name, star Mode form Win 32 – Service Destination Type -- File connection (default) Destination -- New connection -----------> Create File -----------> Click Browse -----------> Provide file name as WIN 32 – service details .csv -----------> Click open -----------> Click Ok
Interested in mastering MSBI Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on Online MSBI Training.
Example WMI queries: Below query used to display the installed soft wares list from Microsoft Manufacturer Select * from Win 32 -- Pn P entity, where Manufacturer = Microsoft Deployed project (SSIS) to integration services server: In BIDS select “project Menu” and select properties (last option) -----------> Select deployment utility and set create deployment utility – true deployment output path -- bin / deployment -----------> In solution explorer select project and right click -----------> Select Rebuild -----------> Open windows Explorer and navigate to the project go to bin folder and go to deployment folder, select integration services deployment manifest file with name as project [Morning 8:30] -----------> Select Manifest file and right click and select deployee -----------> In welcome to the package installation wizard -----------> Click next -----------> Check file system deployment radio button and also check validate packages after installation check box ----------->
Click next -----------> Click next -----------> Click next -----------> Click finish -----------> Open SSMS Connect to integration services Expand stored packages and also expand file system you would observe that the morning 8:30 project deployed to server.
Synchronous: Single port is called synchronous, it has (input ,output) , (Receive, reply) Asynchronous: Multiple ports is called asynchronous, it has (input, input), (receive, call-back) One way: single port and no response is called one-way , it has (input),(Receive) Sample WSDL: <? XML version = “1.0” encoding = “UTF-8”?> <Schema> <element name=”add request element” > <complex Type> <Sequence> <element name=”n1” Type = “int”/> <element name=”n2” Type = “int”/> </Sequence> </complex Type> </element> <element name=”add Response element” > <complex Type> <Sequence> <element name=”result” Type = “int”/> </Sequence> </complex Type> </element> </schema> <message name =”addition request message”> <part name =”payload” element =”Add request element”> </message> <message name =”addition response message”> <part name =”payload” element =”Add response element”> </message>
Interested in mastering Oracle SOA Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on Oracle SOA Training.
Note: Synchronous and asynchronous same for here, after then Synchronous WSDL: <port type name =”Addition port type”> <operation name =”Add”> <input message =”addition request message”> <output message =”addition response message”> </operation> </port type> Asynchronous WSDL: <port type name =”Addition port type”> <operation name =”Add”> <input message =”addition request message”> </operation> </port type> <port type name =”Addition port type result”> <operation name =”result”> <input message =”addition response message”> </operation> </port type>
The dash board tab contains all the deploy BPEL process projects and latest instances. Project Retried Operation: Dash board click on project click on “manage”-> select retried apply [Note: Retired operation used to hide the project, means we will not done the over ride and execution but project saved n process]. Dash board Contains: (After double click on project)
Manage: It contains active and retired options Initiate: It contains test the project means give input values. Descriptor: It contains project details. WSDL: It contains project URL, end point URL Sensors:Source: It contains 1) created date, time 2) Author/sai teja 3) Purpose/synchronous Test Suites: Save as unit test (.XML) , save as composite test (.Zlp) Reports: Report the information
BPEL process:
It shows all projects (active and retried)
Instances:
Already tested or executed files shows in this folder(starting to till now)
When you are over ride the project without change the version then previous version is hidden.
Desired to gain proficiency on Oracle SOA? Explore the blog post on Oracle SOA Training
to become a pro in Oracle SOA.
Activities:
It shows the individual activities. Receive, invoke, assign Testing:
EM for 11g/ BPEL console 10g
End point URL copy the URL and directly paste into the browser
SOAPU
J meter
Partner link(invoke and receive, activities)
Invoke activity use for synchronous
Invoke and receive activities are use for asynchronous.
invoke activity use for
Call concrete WSDL’s
Call adopters
1st receive activity use for -> call adaptor(ex: fill poll, db poll)
Receive activity use for receive the response from asynchronous WSDL
Service requests Service Provider
Asynchronous - Asynchronous good connection
synchronous - synchronous good connection
Asynchronous - synchronous good connection
synchronous - Asynchronous Bad connection
Additional BPEL Process:Switch Activity: It’s a conditionXSD: Input n1 ,n2 – int output result int Note: Instead of A4, A5,A6 we are using only one above switch Switch: Case 1: Operation =’Add’ Case 2: Operation =‘sub’ otherwise: Operation =’mul’ Parallel flow process : “Bank services”ICICI:
Input
Output
XSD
A3
ICICIROI
Input -> Amount, Duration -> int
A4
ICICIROI
Output-> ICICIROI -> float
A5
ICICIROI
Switch:Case 1: Amount >0 and amount <20,000 or duration >0 and duration <5 Case2: Amount >20,000 and amount <21,00,000 or duration >=5 and duration <10 Bank services: XSD: Input: Amount, duration } int Output : ICICIROI, HDFC ROI,HSBC ROI } float A1
Input
Output
Amount, duration
ICICI invoke input
Amount, duration
HDFC invoke input
Amount, duration
HSBC invoke input
A2
Input
Output
ICICI invoke output
Output
HDFC invoke output
Output
HSBC invoke output
Output
POC (Proof of Concept)Question: First name 8 -20 characters last name loan Amount Address
state 8 -20 characters
city
Zip code – 10 digits
Required output: Loan Amount < 10,000 First name + Last name is approved Loan Amount > 10,000 First name + Last name is rejected Answer: Project Name/Loan Approval process http://www.wipro.com/loan approval process/1.0 change the XSD:Input : First name “String” last name “String” loan Amount “int” Address add: Address
Output: Result “String” XML NS: Add =http://www. example.org
Reply
Receive
Client
Case Case
A1
A2
<import name space =”http://www. example.org” schema location = “Address details. XSD” <Simple type name = “First name type”> <restriction base /type = “String”> <min length value =”8”/ <Max length value “20”/ </restriction> </Simple type> Create one more XSD: Right click on BPEL (It shows in project inside)(10g) new Select XML -> XML Schema click ok File name/ address details.XSD Address details .XSD: Already it contains target name space = http:// www. example.org <XSD: complex type name = “Add Type” > <XSD: Sequence> <XSD : element name =”city” Type =”city Type”/> <XSD : element name =”state” Type =”state Type”/> <XSD : element name =”Zip code” Type =”Zip code Type”/> </XSD : Sequence> </XSD: complex type> <XSD : simple Type name =”city type”> <XSD : restriction base =”XSD:string”> <XSD: min length value =”8”/> <XSD: max length value =”20”/> </XSD: restriction> </XSD: simple Type> <XSD : simple Type name =”Zip type”> <XSD : restriction base =”int”> <XSD: Total digits =”10”/> </XSD: restriction> </XSD: Simple type> For an Indepth knowledge on Oracle SOA click on:
All programs –Oracle Data base 10g expression edtion
Run SQl command line SQL > Connect sys/welcome1 xe as sysdba; SQL> alter system reset session scope =spfile sid =’*’; SQL> alter system set process = 500 scope =spfile; SQL > Shutdown immediate; Exit
All programs -> Oracle data base 10g express edition start data base exit
All programs -> oracle data base 10g express edition Run SQL command line
SQL > Connect sys /welcome Xe as sys dba; SQL> show parameter session; SQL> show parameter process; SQL> exit; RCU – Installation:
ofm –rcu –wn -> rcu Home BIN -rcu double click next
Createnext service name(Xe[DRCL]),Host name(local host),port (1521),username (sys),password(welcome1)next ignore ok create a new prefx (dev) SOA and BPM infra structure next ok next ok pass word (welcome1),conform password(welcome1)next next ok ok create close
Desired to gain proficiency on Oracle SOA? Explore the blog post on
Oracle SOA Training in Hyderabad to become a pro in Oracle SOA.
3) J – Developer:
J develop studio 11115 installDouble click next
Create a new middleware home next next next “All users” start menu next next 100% done
Install JRE:
64 bit JRE 32 bit JDK 4) $oa Installation: Ofm – soa – generic Disk 1 [set up yes] paste URL next next (skip software updates) next next [web logic server next] install 100% next finish C: programfiles/java/jre6 64 bit C: Oracle/middleware_24/jdk 160 32 bit 5) Domain creation: All programs oracle (SOA 11g – Home 1) configuration App server – click create a new web logic domain next select (4) Oracle SOA suite 11.1.1.0) Oracle_SOA1) Automatically: Oracle WSM created Oracle_JRE (5) Oracle Enterprise manager (6) Oracle Business Activity monitoring next next name (web logic), password (welcome1), confirm password (welcome1) next available JDK‘s, next BAM schema (schema password / welcome 1), SOA Infrastructure (DBMS\server / XE [ORCL]), User message (Host name / local host), OWSM MDS (port / 1521) SOA MDS next next next create 100% done 6) Mds Update: URL – (1) C: Oracle\middleware\Oracle_common\reu\integration\mds\sq1 URL – (2) C: Oracle\app\Oracle\product\10.2.0\server\bin All programs cmd C: \> cd paste URL – (1) then it shows C: \> Oracle\middleware\Oracle_common\rcu\integration\mds\sql> Beside above URL, paste URL –(2) & type sql\plus.exe Dev_mds/welcome1@XE then it shows C: \> Oracle\middleware\Oracle_common\rcu\integration\mds\sql> C:\Oracle\app\Oracle\product\10.2.0\server\bin\sqlplus.exe Dev_mds/welcome1@XE SQL > @upgmds.sql Exit 7) Start web logic & SQL server: Run cmd C: Oracle/middleware/user_projects/domain/base_domains/start web logic.cmd C: Oracle/middleware/user_projects/domain/base_domains/start managed web logic SOQ_server1 8) Update J – developer: J developer help check for updates next Install from local file [D: \SOA\SOA11g\SOQ-j dev-extension.zip (j developer zip file) Browse] next finish. Note: Unable to connect to the internet to check for updates. Cancel 9) Add source code number to J developer: J developer tools preferences click [code editor expand] [line gutter select] show line numbers ok
10) Create boot file: It’s automatically takes username and password C: \ Oracle\middleware\user_project1\domains\base_domains\server\soa_server1 Create one folder security inside SOA_server 1 Create one text file inside security folder Open text file & write username = web logic, password = welcome1 Save as [file name/boot.properties], [save as type / all file] save Delete dummy text file (ok) 11) Start managed server with the help of console: C: Oracle\middleware\ wlserver_10.3\server\bin\start nodemc naget Double click [port 5556] it means running mode. Console(7001/console) expand environment server – click soa_server 1- click Control start it will not start Oracle\middleware\w1server\common\node manager.properties file open It file last shown start script enable = false X [change property] Start script enable = true _/ 12) Server desktop shortcuts: (.bat) TITLE WEBLOGIC C: / Oracle/middleware/user_projects/domains/base_domains/start web logic cmd
Copy above path and write into the text file.
Save as “web logic.bat”, all files.
13) Table creation:
J – Developer tools data base SQL worksheet [connection/DB_RAMESH] ok
When the application is Stable We can go for Automation to perform Regression testing to all the iterative/ Incremental builds.
If we are using Agile process to develop the project then we can't wait untill the project/ application in stable. The recruitments [test cases] Which are stable can be Automated.
What kind of application can be Automated by using Selenium
Selenium Supports all kinds of web Applications
Selenium Supports Multiple languages like Java, C#, PHP, HTML e.t.c to write the scripts.
We can choose any languages to write the scripts
Interested in mastering Selenium Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on Selenium Training.
Go to sample .asp x source path of the page write the follows code in <div> tag <table align= ‘center’ border=”2”> <tr><td><%= HTML.label(“enter your name”)%></td> <td><%=HTML.textbox(“t1”)%></td> </tr> <tr><td><%=HTML.label(“enter user name”)%></td> <tr><td><%=HTML.textbox (“t2”)%></td> </tr> <tr><td><%=HTML.label (”enter password”)%></td> <td><%=HTML.textbox(“t3”)%></td> </tr> <tr><td><%=HTML.label(“text gender”)%></td> <td><%=HTML.radiobutton(“gender”, ”male”)%>male <%-HTML.radiobutton(“gender”, “female”)%>female </td> </tr> <tr><td><%=HTML.label(“select hobbies”)%></td> <td><%=HTML.checkbox(“dancing”)%>dancing <%=HTML.checkbox(“playing”)%>playing > </td> </tr> <tr><td><%=HTML.label (”select qualification”)%></td> <td><%=HTML.dropdownlist (“CB1”)%></td> </tr> <tr><td><%=HTML.label (”select skill set”)%></td> <td><%=HTML.listbox(“LB1”)%></td> </tr> <tr> <td><%=HTML.load (“describe your experience”)%></td> <td><%=HTML2.textbox(“TA!1”)%></td> </tr> </table> </div> </body> </html> Go to home controller .cs Write the following code ---> to display the data in combo box and list box Public action result sample () { List <string> L1=new list <string> (); L1.add (”SSC”); L1.add (”10+2”); L1.add (”Degree”); List <string>L2=new list <string> (); L2.add (”C#.net”); L2.add (”C”); L2.add (”ASP.net”); View data [“CB1”] =new select list (L1); View data [“LB1”] =new select list (L2); Return view (); } Redirecting the user request using HTML helper class: To redirect the user request from one page to other page use action link method from HTML helper class.
Sample view
Samples
Desired to gain proficiency on ASP.Net?
Explore the blog post on ASP.Net training to become a pro in ASP.Net.
Create new view page with the name samples Go to source part and write the following code <body> <div> <h1>welcome to satya technologies</h1> <%=HTML.actionlink (“sample view”, “sample”,”home”) %> </div> </body> //<%#HTML.actionlink ( “(“sample view”, “sample”,”home”) %> Display text action name controller name go to home controller create an action method like Public action result sample () { Return view (); } Go to globel. Asax file change action name With samples and run the application Create an action link to redirect user requires to some website
10c:T1441,
How to work with MVC models with an example
Create a new MVC2 application with the name “examples”; Go to solution explorer
↓
Select the models folder
↓
Click with RM button
↓
Click on add
↓
Click on new item
↓
Select data option from visual C# in installed template
↓
S elect entity data model
↓
Type the EDM name (employee.EOMX)
↓
Click on add
↓
Select the option generate from data base
↓
Click on next
↓
Click on new connection
↓
Type the server name (“dot net” or satya)
↓
Activate the radio button
↓
Use SQL authentication
↓
--> Type username (“Sa”);
↓
Type password (“ABC”);
↓
Select the D/B as employee
↓
Click on ok
↓
Active the radio button --> yes includes the sensitive data in the connection string
↓
Connection string name you find as employee entity
↓
Click on next This will retrieve complete D/B objects and
↓
From select emp details table
↓
Click on finish
Employee entities
Emp details
The model for data is ready
Learn the core features of ASP.NET Training and become master with our expertise tutorials.
Creation action method in control class
↓
Go to home controller.cs file
↓
Write the following code Using examples models; name space Public action result sample data () { Employee entities.obj=new employee entities (); View data [“Emp”] = obj.Emp details to list(); Return views (); } Creating view: Go to home folder;
↓
Add new view page (sample data)
↓
Write the following code <%@ import name space = “examples.models”%> <body> <h1>welcome to satya</h1> <div> <table align = “center” border = “2”> <tr> <th>Emp id </th><th>Ename</th><th>Designation</th><th>DOJ</th><th>salary</th><th>Deptno</th> </tr> <% for each (var x in (Enumerable<Emp class detail>) view data [“Emp”] { // C# code %> <tr> <td><%=HTML.Encode(x.Emp Id)%></td> <td><%=HTML.Encode(x.Ename)%></td> <td><%=HTML.Encode(x.designation)%></td> <td><%=HTML.Encode(DOJ)%></td> // MVC code ‘ ‘ </tr> <%}%> //C# code </table> </div> </body> Run the application and check
10d:Tf5e,
Integrating c# code in views
To integrity the C# code in a view we write the code complicity in source part of .asp x file by enclosing in server side decimeters’ <% C# code %> To write some C# code in index .asp x use the follows steps. Go to solution explorer
↓
Double click index.asp x from home folder of view
↓
Go to source of index .asp x
↓
Write the following code within the content place order <Content-id> <br/> <% Response.write (‘welcome to MVC class’);%> <br/> <% Response.write (Date.time.now.to string1);% > <br/> <% for (int i=0; i<=10; i++) { Respons.write (“satya”); } %> </content>
Desired to gain proficiency on ASP.Net? Explore the blog post on ASP.Net training to become a pro in ASP.Net.
Example to create a view and calling in form browser Go to solution explore
↓
Go to select home folder from views
↓
Click with RM button
↓
Click on ADD
↓
Click on view
↓
Add view dialogue box will appear
↓
Type the view name (sample)
↓
Deactivate the check box select master page
↓
Click on add
↓
This will create a view with the name sample .asp x (no .cs file will be create)
↓
Go to source
↓
Write the following code <div> <h1>satya technologies</h> </div> Any view will create is a class which is inherited from system.web.MVC.view page class. To access this view from the web browser we can create an action method with the same name as view in home controller .cs file mandatorily. Go to home controller .cs file
↓
Write the following code Public action result example () { Return view (); } Run the application by default index page will appear to see the sample view you type in the address bar home/sample at the end of the address bar http:// local host: 1974 (application name)/Home (control name)/sample (action method name)
To work with HTML forms in MVC we use begin form () and end form () in HTML helper classes Go to home folder in view
↓
Create a new page with the name sample2
↓
Learn ASP.Net by Tekslate - Fastest growing sector in the industry.
Explore Online ASP.Net Training and course is aligned with industry needs & developed by industry veterans.
Tekslate will turn you into ASP.Net Expert.
Go to source part Write the following code to create the design of the form <body> <div> <h1>welcome to satya technologies</h1> <%HTML.begin form();%> <%=HTML.label(“enter user name”)%> <%=HTML.text box(“T1”)%></br> <button id=”B1” type =”submit”>submit</button> <%HTML.end form();%> Go to home control.cs write the following code for create an action method for sample2 Public action result sample2() { Return view (); } Go to global.asax change action name to sample2 and sum the application and check
Crate a new MVC application with the name (Example 4)
↓
Go to solution explorer
↓
Select the folder model
↓
Click with RM button
↓
Click on add
↓
Click on new item
↓
Select data from visual C# in installed template
↓
Select ADO.net entity data model template
↓
Type the name (Employee.EDMX)
↓
Click on add Select generate from D/B click on next
↓
Click on new connection button
↓
Type the server name as (.:)
↓
Select radio button use SQL server authentication
↓
Type username, password (“sa”,”abc”)
↓
Activate the checkbox save my password
↓
Select the D/B employee
↓
Click on ok
↓
Activate radio button (yes include sensitive data)
↓
Click on next
↓
This will retrieve all data base table
↓
Select Emp details table]
↓
Click on finish
Step2:
Creating action method in home controller for Emp display
Go to home controller.cs
↓
Write the following code Using example. Models --> name space Public action result Emp display () { Employee entities.obj=new employee entities (); Return view (obj.empdetailes.to list ()); }
Desired to gain proficiency on ASP.Net?
Explore the blog post on ASP.Net training to become a pro in ASP.Net.
Step3:
Creating view page for employee display:
Go to solution explorer
↓
Select the home folder from views
↓
Click with RM button
↓
Click on add
↓
Click on view
↓
Type the view page name (emp display)
↓
Note: Do not activate select master page
↓
Click on add Go to source of emp display.aspx
↓
Write the following code <%@ import name space = “examples.models”%> <body> <h2>satya technologies</h2> <div> <table border =“2” align = “center” > <tr> <th>Emp id </th><th>Ename</th><th>Designation</th><th>DOJ</th><th>salary</th><th>Deptno</th> </tr> <% for each (var x in (Enumerable<Emp detail>) model) { %> <tr> <td><%=HTML.Encode(x.Emp Id)%></td> <td><%=HTML.Encode(x.Ename)%></td> <td><%=HTML.Encode(x.designation)%></td> <td><%=HTML.Encode(x.DOJ)%></td> <td><%=HTML.Encode(x.salary)%></td> <td><%=HTML.Encode(x.Deptno)%></td> </tr> <%}%> </table> </div> </body> Step4: Creating view for adding a new record i.e. addnew.aspx Go to solution explorer
↓
Select home folder from views
↓
Click on add
↓
Click on view
↓
Type the view name (add new)
↓
Activate the check box strongly typed view
↓
Select the view data class as “example.models.emp detailes” Uncheck the check box Select the master page Click on add Go to source and write the following code <h2> welcome to sathya technologies</h2> <dir> <%HTML.begin.form();%> <Field set> <table align=”center”border=”2”> <tr> <td><label for=”EmpId”>Enter EmpId</label></td> <td><%=HTML.textbox(“EmpId”)%></td> </tr> <tr> <td><Label for =”Ename”>enter Emp name</Label> </td> <td><%=HTML.textbox (“Empname”)%></td> </tr> <tr> <td><label for =(”designation”)>enter designation</label> </td> <td><%=HTML.textbox(“Designetion”)%></td> </tr> <tr> <td><label for= “DOJ”>enter DOJ</label></td> <td><%=HTML.textbox (“DOJ”)%></td> </tr> <tr> <td><label for= “salary”>enter salary</label></td> <td><%=HTML.textbox (“salary”)%></td> </tr> <tr> <td><label for= “Deptno”>enter Deptno</label></td> <td><%=HTML.textbox (“Deptno”)%></td> </tr> <tr> <td></td> <td><input type=”submit” value=”save”></td> </tr> </field set> <%HTML End form();%> <%=HTML.actionlink (“back to Emp details ”,”Emp display”)%> </div> </body>
Step5:
Writing code for adds new action method:-
Go to home controller.cs
↓
Write the following code for action methods Public action result add new () { Return value(); } [Accept verbs (http verbs.post)] Public action result add new([bind]Emp details.obj add) { Employee entities.obj=new employee entities (); Obj.add to emp details (obj add); Obj.save changes (); Return redirect to action (“Emp display”); } Run the application end check
Whenever first time request is coming to sample2 view the request will go to global.asax file check the action method name and control name then control will go to the that action method in the controller execute that action method lode them controller will be return view. After executing the view result will be delivered to client. Even when user client on button also same action method will be called If we want to call the other action method from the control we use the following procedure.
Learn more about ASP.net Interview Questions in this blog post.
Interested in mastering ASP.net? Check out this blog post to learn more ASP.net Tutorials.
Step1: create action method with same name as view name with one argument of string type as button name Function name is we find me action method like [accept verbs (http verbs.post)] Public action result view name (string button name) { Code Return view (); } àIn the above example to call the own action method from button “B1”, use the following steps Go to home controller.cs
↓
Write the following code [accept verbs (http.verbs.post)] Public action result sample2 (string B1) { View data [“a”] =”welcome sai”; Return view (); } Go to sample2.aspx Write the add the following code in the HTML form <%: view data [“a”] %> Run the application and check
Create a new view with the name sample1 Sample 1 Go to source part Writ the following code to create the design of the form <div> <%HTML.begin form();%> <%=HTML.label(“enter user name”)%> <%=HTML.text box(“T1”)%></br> <button id=”B1” type =”submit”>submit</button></br> <%HTML.end form();%> Go to home control.cs write code for two action method [Accept verbs [http verbs.post]] Public action result sample3 (string B, string T1) { View data [“a”]=”user name is:-”+T1; Return view (); } In the above home if user is entering any data in text box T1 and clicking on button B1, then user entered data in text box T1 will be passed to argument “T1” of action method sample3 action method.
Interested in mastering ASP.net?Learn more about ASP.net Tutorial in this blog post.
Example to trap the data to perform the operations:
Create a new view with the name sample2 Write the following code to create the code <body> <div> <h1>welcome to satya technologies</h1> <%HTML.begin form();%> <%=HTML.label(“enter first number”)%> <%=HTML.text box(“T1”)%></br> <%=HTML.label(“enter second number”)%> <button id=”B1” type =”submit”>add</button> <%=HTML.encode (view data [“R”])%> <%HTML.end form();%> </div> </body> Go to home control.cs write the following code for action method [Accept verbs (http verbs.post)] Public action result sample4 (string B1, string T1, string T2) { Int c= convert to int3 (T1)+c.to int (T2); View data [“R”] =”sum is:-”C; Return view (); } Run the application and check.
112:T14a7,
Implementing LINQ Queries on Collection Data
Create a new Console Application (CA Sample 2) àAdd a new class (Name) à Employee Write the following code using Auto implemented properties.
Name Space CA Sample 2
{
Class Employee
{
Public Int PEMP ID {set; get;}
Public String PE name {set; get ;}
Public String Designation {set; get ;}
Public Date time PDOJ {set; get ;}
Public Double Salary {set; get ;}
Public Int p Dept no {set; get ;}
}
}
Learn the core features of ASP.NET Training and become master with our expertise tutorials.
Create a new class in this Application with the name Examples:-
Write the following code
Namespace CA Sample 2
{
Class Example2
{
Static void Main ()
{
List <Employee> emp list = new list <Employee> ()
{
New employee (P emp id = 101, P Ename = “naveen”, Pdesigen = “pl”, p Doj = new date (2012,03,02),p salary = 1200, pdeptno =10);
New employee (P emp id = 102, P Ename = “raj”, Pdesigen = “tl”, p Doj = new date (2012,04,01),p salary = 1300, pdeptno =20);
New employee (P emp id = 103, P Ename = “sai”, Pdesigen = “ds”, p Doj = new date (2012,05,03),p salary = 1300, pdeptno =10);
};
Var R = from X in Emp list where x.pdept no = 10 Select x;
Console. Write line (“Dept no 10 employee data is :-”);
Console. Write line (“Empid/t, ename/t, designation/t, doj/t salary/t……………”);
Foreach (var I in R)
{
Console. Write line (i.pempid +’/t’ + i. pename +’/t’ +i.pdesig +’/t’+ i.p doj +’/t’+ i.p salary);
}
Console. Read ();
}
}
}
Output :-
Emp id E name designation Doj salary 101 - - - 1200 103 - - - 1400 If we want to only required fields we use query like. Var R = from x in emplist where x. p dept no = 10 select x.ename, x. designation, x.esalary;
Lambda expression are used to work on same group of data in general used with agitate function. Def :- A lambda expression is a function with out a name calculates and returns a single value.
Lambda Expression is represented by lambda operator (=>) to be read as “Goes to”
Namespace CA Sample 2
{
Class Example2
{
Static void Main ()
{
List <int> L1 = new Lint <int> {1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10};
Int c = L1.count (x =>x >4);
Int E count = L1.count (x => xy = z ==0);
C.W.L (“Count of values grater than 4 is :- ” + c);
C.W.L (“Count of values Even numbers is :- ” + E count);
Console. Read ();
}
}
}
Output :-
Count of values grater than 4 is :- 6 Count of values Even numbers are :- 5
At TekSlate, we offer resources that help you in learning various IT courses.
We avail both written material and demo video tutorials.
To gain in-depth knowledge and be on par with practical experience, then explore ASP.net Training Videos.
Example to implement lambda expression on employee class :-Example to count particular dept no and print on the column :-
Namespace CA Sample 2
{
Class Example3
{
Static void Main ()
{
List <Employee> emp list = new list <Employee> ()
{
New employee (P emp id = 101, P Ename = “N”, Pdesigen = “pl”, p Doj = new date (2012,03,02),p salary = 1200, pdeptno =10);
New employee (P emp id = 102, P Ename = “R”, Pdesigen = “tl”, p Doj = new date (2012,04,01),p salary = 1300, pdeptno =20);
New employee (P emp id = 103, P Ename = “P”, Pdesigen = “ds”, p Doj = new date (2012,05,03),p salary = 1400, pdeptno =30);
};
Var R = from x in Emplist. Select x. p dept no;
Int c1 = R.count (I => i. 10);
Int c2 = R.count (I => i. 20);
Int c3 = R.count (I => i. 30);
C.W.L (“Deptno /t : count /n………………”);
C.W.L (“10/t” + C1);
C.W.L (“20/t” + C2);
C.W.L (“30/t” + C3);
C.W.L (“total/t” + R.count ());
}
}
}
Go to Source write the following code <% @ import name space = “example modes” @%> <body> <h2> technologies </h2> <div> <% HTML . Begin Forms %> <table Border = “2” align = “center”> <tr> <th> Edit </th> <th>emp id </th><th>ename</th> <th>esal </th> <% HTML . End Form (); %> <% foreach (var x in () enumerable <Emp details> model) %> <tr> <td> <% HTML. Encode (x. emp id) %></td> <td> <% HTML. Encode (x. ename) %></td> <td> <% HTML. Encode (x.sal) %></td> </tr> <% } %> </table> </div> </body> Go to Home Controller. cs Write the following code for Action Method
Public .Action Result EMP Display ()
{
Employee Entities . obj 1 = new Employee ();
Return view (obj 1. EMP Details . To list ());
}
Go to Global .asax change action method to EMP display1.
Great a new Strongly typed view with the name edit.aspx
Go to source write the following code for design
Learn ASP.net by Tekslate - Fastest growing sector in the industry.
Explore Online ASP.net Training and course is aligned with industry needs & developed by industry veterans.
Tekslate will turn you into ASP.net Expert.
<body> <h2> technologies </h2> <div> <% html . Begin form (); %> <table align = “center ” Border = “2”> <tr> <td> <label for = “emp id”> enter emp id </label>; </td> <td><% html.text box (“EMP id”) %> </td> </tr> <tr> <td> <label for = “e name”> enter ename </label>; </td> <td><% html.text box (“E name”) %> </td> </tr> <tr> <td> <label for = “e sal”> enter e sal </label>; </td> <td><% html.text box (“E salary”) %> </td> </tr> <tr> <td> <% html.Action link (Back to list , ‘Employee;’) %> </td> <td> <input = ‘submit’. Value = ‘save’> </td> </tr> </table> <% html end form (); %> </div> </body>
Go to home controller. Cs
Write the following code to edit action method which will get the particular EMP id record . that is transferred from EMP Display , view page, will display the data in text box.
Public . Action Result Edit (int id)
{
Employee entities obj 1 = new employee entities ();
Var R = (from x in obj. EMP details where x. EMP id == ID Select x). first ();
Return view (R);
}
Write the following Action method which will update the modified data update in to data base. [Accept verbs (HTTP verbs.post)]
Public action result . edit ([bind] emp details obj edit)
{
Employee entitier. Obj 1 = new employee entitites ();
Var R = (from x in obj1 = emp details. Where x. emp id = obj edit.emp id select x ).first ();
Obj1. Apply current values (r.entity key . entity set name, obj edit);
Obj1.save changes ();
Return. Redirect to action (“Emp display”);
}
}
}
Example to call the action result from multiple button controls : Create a new mvc 2 web application (Example 5)
↓
Create a new view page (action .aspx)
↓
Go to source write the following code <h2> sathya technologies </h2> <% HTML Begin form %> <table align = “center” border = “2”> <tr> <td> enter first number </td> <td><% HTML .text box (“T1”) %></td> </tr> <td><input type = ‘submit’ name = ‘submit’ value = ‘Add’/> </td> <td> <input type = ‘submit’ name = ‘submit value = ‘submit’/’> </td> </tr> <tr> <td> <input type = ‘submit’ name = ‘submit value = ‘multiply/’> </td> </tr> <tr> <td> <input type = ‘submit’ name = ‘submit value = ‘divide’/’> </td> </tr> </table> <% HTML End form () ; %> Go to Home Controller .cs à write the following code for action method. Public Action result Arithmetic () { Return view (); } Go to global .asax àchange the action name to arithmetic àrun the application and check Go to Home controller write the Arithmetic mode Following code for 4 buttons in comman. [Accept verbs (HTTP verd.post)] Public Action result Arithmetic (string submit. String t1, string t2) { Int a, b, c =0; A = convert.to.int 32 (“T1”); B = convert.to.int 32 (“T2”); If (submit == “Add”) C = a +b; Else if (submit == “submit”) C = a-b; Else if (submit == 1 multiply) C = a*b; Else if (submit == Divide) C = a/b; View data [‘R’] = c; Return view (); } }
115:Tbcb,
Example to display the data in mvc with out using entity frame work(With out using model class)
Create a new mvc2 application Add a new view page in home folder(sample)Go to home controller.csInclude the following the namespace
↓
Using system.data; Using system.data.sqlclient;
↓
create the an action with name
↓
write the following code Public Action Result Sample () { Sql connection con = new sql connection (“”); String s= “select * from emp details “; Sql data adapter da = new sql data adapter (s, con); Data set ds = new data set (); Da. Fill (ds, ‘x’); List <data row> r = new list <data row> (); For each (data row . x in ds. Tables [0].rows) R.add (); View data [“R”] = R; Return view (); } Go to sample view Write the following code <% @ Import name space = ‘system.data’ % > <body> <h2>Satya technologies </h2> <div> <% HTML Begin Form ();%> <table border = ‘2’ align = ‘center’ > <tr> <th>EMP id </th> <th> E NAME </th><th>E sal </th> </tr> <% for each (var x in (1 enumerable <Data row> view data [‘R’]) I %)> <tr> <td><% : HTML. Encode (x [0]%)></td> <td><% : HTML. Encode (x [1]%)></td> <td><% : HTML. Encode (x [2]%)></td> </tr> <% } %> </table> <% HTML. End form (); %> </div> </body>
116:Tcdc,
Display data using entity framework model class
Performing the same example by writing code in model class Sol :- Create a new view in home folder (sample) Creating MODEL CLASS :-
Go to solution explorer
Go to model folder
Double click on account model.c
Click on + symbol of model
Create a class with name sample model
Public class Sample model ()
{
Public data set ds;
Public sample model ()
{
Sql connection con = new sql connection (“”);
String s= “select * from emp details “;
Sql data adapter da = new sql data adapter (s, con);
Data set ds = new data set ();
Da.fill (ds,’x’);
}
}
Go to home controller .cs
Aspired to become an ASP.net ?
Explore the post to discover the know-hows on ASP.net Training.
write the following code for action method sample ();
Public action result sample ()
{
Models.sample1 model obj1 = new models.sample1 model ();
List <data row> r = row list <data row> ();
Foreach (Dat row x in obj1.ds.tables [0].Rows)
R .add (x);
View data [‘R’] = R;
Return view ();
}
}
}
Go to sample 1 .aspx and write the following code: <% @ import name space = ‘system.data’ %> <h2>satya technologies </h2> <div> <% HTML. Begin form () ; %> Change the action name in global.aspx and run the application and check.
@ layout = null;
Var num 1 = 0;
Var num 2 = 0;
Var Result = 0;
If (is post)
{
Num 1 = request [‘T1’].As Int [];
Num 2 = request [‘T2’].As Int [];
Result = num 1 + num2
}
Design :-
In the first example we declare variable of int type and conversion is done by using Convert . to int 32 (); method This is completely in C # syntax. Here C# syntax with Razor syntax. In IInd Method we completely used Razor syntax that is Declaring the variable using keyword, and performing conversion using as int () method.
Interested in mastering ASP.net Training?
Enroll now for FREE demo on ASP.net Training.
Conversion Methods in Razor Syntax :-
As Int () :- convert the data to integer type . As Float () :- convert the data to Float type As Decimal () :- convert the data to Decimal type. As Date and time() :- convert the data to date time type As Bool () :- convert the data to Bool type To string () :- convert the data to String type
Data type Comparison Methods :-
Is Int () compares the given data in integer type, return true. If the data belongs to integer type other vise return false.
Is Float () compares the given data in F type, return true. If the data belongs to integer type other vise return false.
Is Decimal () compares the given data in Decimal type, return true. If the data belongs to integer type other vise return false.
Is Date time () compares the given data in Date time type, return true. If the data belongs to integer type other vise return false.
Is Bool () compares the given data in Bool type, return true. If the data belongs to integer type other vise return false.
Example to Display data of a table using Razor syntax
Create a new view page using with Razor engine
↓
Write the following code
@ using system Data;
@using system Data.Sqlclient;
@ { layout = null ;
Sql connection con = new sql connection (“”);
String s= “select * from emp details “;
Sql data adapter da = new sql data adapter (s, con);
Data set ds = new data set ();
Da.fill (ds,’x’);
}
<! Doctype html>
<html>
<head>
<title> Sample 1 </title>
</head>
<body>
<h2>Satya tech </h2>
<div>
<form action = “” Method = “Post”>
<table border = “2” align = ‘center’>
<tr>
<th>EMP id </th> <th> E name </th> <th> E sal </th>
</tr>
@ foreach (Data row R in ds. Tables [0]. Rows)
{
<tr>
<td>@ R[0]</td> <td>@ R[1]</td><td>@ R[2]</td>
</tr>
</table>
</div>
</body>
</html>
Create new view page with the name (Samples)
Learn the core features of ASP.NET Training and become master with our expertise tutorials.
Write the following code
@using system. Data;
@using system. Data. Sqlclient;
@ { layout = null;
Var r = “”;
If (is post)
{
String s = “insert in to EMP Values (”+ Request [“txt EMP id”] + “,”+Request [“txt E name”] “+”Request [txt E Sal]” +);
SQL connection = new sql connection (“”);
SQL command cmd = new dql command (s, con)
Con.open ();
Int i = cmd. Execute non query ();
Con. Close ();
R = I +”Record s inserted”
}
}
<body>
<h2>satya technologies </h2>
<div>
<form action = ‘’ method = ‘post’>
<table border = ‘2’ align = ‘center’>
<tr>
<td>Enter EMP id </td> <td> <input type = ‘text’ name = ‘txt emp id’> </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enter E name </td> <td> <input type = ‘text’ name = ‘txt e name’> </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enter EMP Salary </td> <td> <input type = ‘text’ name = ‘txt emp salary’> </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td> @ R </td> <td> <input type = “submit ” name = ‘B1 value = ‘’Insert’/> </td>
</tr>
</table>
<tr>
<td>Enter Emp salary </td> <td> <Input type= “test” name= “txt emp sal”> </td>
</tr>
<td> @</td><td><input type = “submit”name =”Bi”,value =”insert”></td>
</tr>
</table>
119:T15a4,
Software:
Digitalised automated process is called software.
Whenever graphic user interface is available then it is called digitalised, without human interaction, if the process is completed, then it is called automated process.
A software is a collection of programmes.
A program is a set of instructions which is designed for particular task.
‘N’ no of programs combined together like a single unit, it is called software tool or software component.
Software’s are classified in to two types:
System software
Application software.
1. System software: This software is designed for general purpose and doesn't having any limitations. Then it is called system software.E.g. Operating system, compiler. 2.Application Software: This software is designed for particular task and contains limitations. It is called Application software. E.g.: MS.Office, oracle, Tally.
By using MS.Office, we can maintain information in document format.
By using oracle, we can maintain information in Table format.
By using Tally, we can maintain account related information.
A computer is an Electronic device which accepts the instruction from the user, according to user send
Instructions, it produce results.
Who, using the applications is called user and who developing the application is called programmer.
The basic purpose of Language is communication.
Computer knows only one language i.e., Binary format.
As a programmer, when we required to interact with a computer, we need a communication channel, it is called programming language.
A programming Language is a special kind of instructions which is used to communicate with computer.
As a programmer, if we knows the programming language, we can’t interact directly with computer because computer cannot understand programming language code. (It knows only binary language)
In above case, we required a Mediator, called “Translator”
As a programmer, we required to give the instructions in programming language, translator will converts programming language into binary format, then according to the given instruction we will get an application / Result.Programmer p.l Translator Binary Computer App/result Complier Interpreter Assembler
11a:T937,
Translator: It is a system software which is used to convert programming language code into binary format. Translators are classified into 3 types:
Compiler
Interpreter
Assembler
A compiler is a system software which convert programming language code into binary format in a single step.
An interpreter is a system software which converts programming language code into binary format step by step. (Line by Line)
By using Assembler, we can convert, assembly language instructions into binary format.
As per performance wise, recommended to use compiler, as per the development, recommended to go for an interpreter.
Programming Language:
It is a special kind of instruction which is used to communicate with computer. Programming languages are classified in to 2 types.
High level programming language
Low level programming language
High Level programming Language:
Which programming language syntactically similar to English and easy to understand.
By using high level programming Languages, we are developing user interface applications.
C,c++,vc++,c+,Java, Cobol,Pascal,objective-c
Low level programming language:
This programming language is also called Assembly programming language.
In low level programming language, instructions will be there in symbolic format (Mnemonics).
By using low level programming languages, we are developing device driver.
A device driver is a system software component which is required to use to communicate a software with hardware components.
8051,8086 M.C. Languages.
C programming language:
It is a high level procedure oriented structured programming language.
When we are developing an application in module format then it is called procedure oriented language.
Structured programming language:
When we are developing the program in top-down format with the help of blocks, then it is called structured programming language.
11b:T1df0,
History of C Language
The C programming language was created in the early 1970s by Dennis Ritchie at Bell Labs. It was designed to be a low-level, system programming language. Over the years, it has evolved into a powerful and versatile language that is still in use today. In this blog post, we will take a look at the history of the C language and how it has evolved over time.
In 1960, the International Group of Algotists (IGA) published a report that described their new language called ALGOL. It was designed to be an easy-to-learn programming language with high readability and portability across different types of computers. In 1961, they created version 60 or ALGOL60 which became widely used in teaching computer science courses around the world because it could be implemented on any kind of computer system without much difficulty.
BPCL - 1967 - Martin Richards
In 1967, Martin Richards created a new programming language called BCPL that was meant to be an extension of ALGOL60. It added many features like macros which allowed users to define their own command words and use them in place of complex statements or functions. In 1969 Brian Kernighan implemented the first ALGOL-like compiler for BCPL on his PDP-11 computer system at Bell Laboratories where he worked with Dennis Ritchie who later used it as inspiration while designing C Programming Language (C). B is a subset of C, so you can still see traces today!
B - 1970 - Ken Thompson
In 1970, Ken Thompson designed and implemented the B programming language which was a direct descendant of BCPL. It added features like data types, structures, and arrays to make it more suitable for system programming tasks. In 1973, he ported the Unix operating system to the DEC PDP-11 computer and used B as its main development language. This led to the widespread adoption of Unix in academic circles and eventually helped popularize C as well.
C - 1972 - Dennis Ritchie
Dennis Ritchie began work on what would become the C programming language in early 1972. He based it heavily on his earlier work on BCPL and B, with additional influences from ALGOL60 and other languages of that time period. In 1973, he and Mike Lesk created the first compiler for C at Bell Laboratories in New Jersey (USA) where they worked together on Unix operating system development. By 1975, Ritchie finished porting Unix to PDP-11 using only C as its main programming language!
Portability - 1978 - Brian Kernighan & Dennis Ritchie
In 1978, Brian Kernighan and Dennis M.Ritchie published "The C Programming Language," which became known simply as K&R after their last names were put together into one word like "hammer". This book introduced many features that are still used today such as prototypes for functions without arguments or parameter types specified explicitly inline with them instead of being listed out separately at the start of the function body. It also explained the Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX) standard which helped make C more portable across different types of computer systems.
ANSI - 1983 - American National Standards Institute
In 1983, the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) published a specification for the C programming language that became known as ANSI-C. This standardized version of C added features like function prototypes, variable length arrays, and support for international character sets. It also introduced new keywords and changed some existing ones to make them more consistent with how they were actually being used in practice.
ISO - 1990 - International Organization for Standardization
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) adopted ANSI-C as its official standard for the C programming language in 1990. This led to the creation of various international variants of C such as British Standard Code for Information Interchange (BSCII), Canadian Standards Association (CSA-C), and DIN 66261 German. Various other amendments were also made to the standard over the years, including a major update in 1999 that added support for object-oriented programming features like class inheritance and virtual functions.
GNU - 1991 - Richard Stallman
In 1991, Richard Stallman announced his plans to create a new free software operating system called GNU which would be based on the UNIX design principles but use the C programming language instead of Assembly Language. The goal was to make it easier for people to write their own software programs without having to worry about licensing fees or legal restrictions imposed by companies like AT&T Bell Labs that owned Unix at the time.
C99 - 1999 - International Organization for Standardization
The C programming language was standardized again in 1999 under ISO/IEC 9899:1999, commonly known as "C99". The biggest change with this version of C was a new set of keywords added to support object-oriented programming features like class inheritance and virtual functions. Other additions included support for complex numbers via an imaginary unit (i), changes made to some existing operators so they would work better on floating point number types such as double precision real values (e.g., ++a++ → ++(a++)), and removal of the old restrict keyword which been found to be problematic and difficult to use correctly.
C11 - 2011 - International Organization for Standardization
The most recent standard for the C programming language was published in 2011 as ISO/IEC 9899:2011, commonly known as "C11". This version added a few more features such as support for atomic operations on data structures like locks and barriers, designated initializers which allow you to initialize multiple variables at once using a single list of values, and improved Unicode support. It also removed some old or obsolete features that were no longer being used, such as the restrict keyword from C99.
Conclusion
As you can see, the history of the C programming language is quite extensive with many different versions and amendments having been made over the years. What began as a simple programming language designed to be used on Unix computers has now become one of the most widely used languages in existence today.
11c:T3486,
Explain about Operators in ‘C’ Language
It is a special kind of symbol which perform a particular task. In ‘c’ programming language total no.of operators are ‘44’ and depends on no.of operators these operators are classified into 3 types. i.e.
unary
Binary
Terinary
Unary:
When we are working with unary operator which required one operand only.
Binary:
Binary operator always takes two operands
Terinary:
Terinary requires three arguments. E.g.: 2+3 When we are evaluating the expression one input data we are providing those are called operant & Argument which symbol we are using is called operator.
Assignment operator (=) :-
It is a binary data category operator
Binary category means it requires two arguments i.e, Left and right side arguments.
When we are working with Binary operator among those two argument if any one of the argument is missing then it gives an error.
When we are working with assignment operator left side argument must be a variable type only & Right side is optional.
Syntax:- L=R
a=40 Error statement missing (;)
a=50; 50 (No error)
a=’d’; d
a=’d’; d
10=20; Error
A=; Error R value requires expression
A=25; Error L value requires expression
A=10;
b=a;
Arithmetic operator:-
In ‘C’ programming language there are 5 types of arithmetic operators are available. Multiplication, division, Modus, addition, subtraction All arithmetic operators are binary operators only which require “2” Arguments. In implementation whenever an expression contains more than one operator then in order to evaluate the expression, we require to follow priority of the operator. Which operator contains highest priority, it should be evaluated first, which operator contains least priority, that one at last. When the equal priority is occur, then if it is binary then evaluate towards from left to right, if it is unary then evaluate towards from right to left.
* / % Eg:- if a=2+3=5
+_ Return value is collected at the time of compilation.
=
Ex: 1). If a=2+3*2+3; 2+6+3=8+3=11 2). If a=5+3-2; 8-2 =6 Same priority then evaluate from left to right 3). If a=5+; Error 4). If a=8-; Error. 5).If a=+5; 5 6).If a=-8,-5 When we are working with +, -, symbols then it works as a unary and binary operator also When the symbol is available, then it indicates arithmetic binary operator. If the symbol is available before the operand then it indicates the sign of the value which indicates unary operator. 5/2 2 int, int - int 5.0/2 2.5 int, float 5/2.0 2.5 float, int } float 5.0/2.0 2.5 float,float } float 2/5 0 2.0/5 0.4 -5/2 -2 5/-2 -2 -5/-2 -2 Operator behaviour is always variable independent only. i.e depends on the variable type the behaviour of the operator will not be changed Operator behaviour is always operand dependent only i.e, it depends on the input type, the behaviour of the operator changes. If both arguments are integer, then return value is integer., if any one of the argument is float or both are float then written value is float. O/P sign will depends on numerator sign and denominator sign also. Among those, two arguments any one of the argument is “-ve”, then return value is –ve , if both are ‘-ve’ then return value is ‘+ve’
Modulus operator:- (reminder)
Modulus operator returns reminder value In modulus operator, o/p sign will depends on numerator sign only. Modulus operator require two arguments UR type integers only i.e, we can’t apply for float data values,
A= 12%4; =0, a=15%2; 1
A= 21%8; 5 47%5; 2, -47%-5; -2 47%5; 2 , 5%2; 1 -47%5; 2, 2%5; 2 [ 2/5----> 0 in division operator] If the numerator is less than half the denominator value, then if it is division operator returns “Zero”. If it is “mod” %operator. Returns numerator value A= 3*15.0/5%2; = 4.5.0/5%2; = 9.0%2; Error floating operation can’t be applied for modules. In implementation, when we are working with module operator then we can’t apply for float data type. So, in this case recommended to go for Library f’ns, i.e fmode() or fmodl() f’ns, we can find remainder value of float data types which is available in math.h In implementation, when we need to extract last digit from the given i/p data, then go for %10, if we required to remove the last digit from the given num, then go for /10
Relation and Logical operators:
In c and c++, all relational and logical operators are returns “1”,”0” If the expression is true, then returns with 1, if the expression is false, then returns with “0” Every non Zero is called true, when the value become Zero, it is false. Relational operators <,>,<=,>=,==,!= Logical operators are &&,!!
()
+,-;! (signs) Uninory operator.
*,/,%
+, -
<,>,<=,>=
==,!=
&&
||
?: Condition operator or terinary.
10.= a=2>5; false =0 return value a=5<8;1 True, return value 1 a=3<2<0;0 a=3>2>0; 0<0 1>0 a=2>3<2; a=5<8>2;0 0<2; 1 return value a=5<8>2; 0 1>2
In c and c++ all relational and logical operators returns “1 or 0” If the expression is then it returns with one, if expression is false , then it returns with Zero. Every non-zero is called true, (0) the value become Zero, it is false. Relational operators are <.>,<,<=,>=,==,!= Logical operators are &&,!,..
A=5>!=0 && 2>8!=1 ;11!=0 && 0!=1 1 && 1 A=5>2==2<8&&8>5!=0; 1 A=1!=2*5 or 0!=2>5; 1 A=5<8!=0 or 8>2!=1 1!=0 or 1 !=1 1 or 0 =1
Cprogramming language is a case sensitive language i.e. upper case content and lower case content both are different In a c programming language, existing keywords and predefined f’ns all are available in lower case only. Program to print “welcome” Void main() { Printf(“welcome”) } o/p: welcome
11d:Te0a,
Variable declarations : -
Name of the memory location is called variable Generally when we required to change the data of the time of execution then we need to go for variable,
Before using any variable in the program, it must be declared first
Declaration of variable means require to specify data type, name of the variable followed by semicolon(;)
In ‘c’ programming language, variable declaration must be exist top of the program after opening the curly brace before writing first statement.
In variable declarations, name of the variable must be starts with alphabet or ‘_’(underscore) only.
Maximum length of the variable name is “32” characters, After 32 characters, compilers doesn’t consider remaining characters.
In variable declarations, existing keywords, operators separators and constant values are not allowed.
In variable declarations, at least single space should be required b/w data type & name of the variable.
When we are declaring multiple variable of same datatype, we use “’” as separator.
Operator behaviour is always variable independent i.e Acc to the variable type, the behaviour of the operator will not be changed.
Always the operator behaviour is operand dependant only
e depends on the i/p data, the behaviour of the operator will change
Always return value behaviour is variable dependant only. i.e depends on the variable type automatically return value will converted.
In implementation, when operator is returning an integer value, we require to assign the data to float variable, then automatically data will be converted into float format by adding “.0”
Whenever the operator i.e returning float value and we require to assign an integer variable then decimal point only require to assign.
By default, whenever we are declaring any variable, it bolds garbage value initially
11e:T16fc,
Control flow statements in C Language in Detail:-
Control flow statements always control the execution flow of the program.
Control flow statements are classified in to three types.
i.e
Selection statement :- eg :-if,else,elseif,switch
Interaction statements:- eg:- While,for,do-while
Jumping statements:- eg:- break,continue,goto
1. Selection statement :- Selection statements are also called as decision making statements
When we are working with selection statements, if the condition is true, then control will pass within the body, if it is false control will pass outside the body
Syntax to if: If (condition) { Statement 1; Statement 2; Statement 3; ---------------------- ----------------------- }
Constructing the body is always optional
For a single statement, doesn’t require to specify the body
If the body is not specified, then automatically,
Condition part will terminals with next semicolon(;) Else :- It is a keyword, by using this keyword, we can create alternate block for if condition.
Using else is always optional, it is recommended to use, when we are having alternate block.
When we are working with if and else, among those two blocks, only one block will be executed.
Else block will be executed whenever the if condition i.e false
If(condition)
{ Statement 1; Statement 2; } Else { Statement 3; Statement 4; } Void main() { Printf(“a”); Printf(“b”); If(5>2!=1) { Printf(“welcome”); Printf(“Hello”); } Printf(“c”); Printf(“D”); o/p: ABCD false, so it doesn’t execute the satatements which are present inside the block
Generally when we are working with constant expressions, we will get warning message from compiler i.e condition is always false or true.
Warnings can be ignored automatically at the time of execution.
Void main()
Printf(“NIT”); Printf(“welcome”); If(15!=5!=0) // if(0!=5!=0) // if(1!=0) { Printf(“A”); Printf(“B”); } Printf(“c”); } o/p:-NIT welcome ABC “Every non Zero is true”
Void main()
{ Printf(“welcome”); Printf(“NIT”); If(!5) Printf(“A”); Printf(“B”); Printf(“c”); O/P: WelcomeNITBC. When we are constructing multiple statements without using body then first statement only will consider within the “if”, because scope will be terminated with next semicolon.
{ Printf(“A”); If(8!=8>2 or 4!=1<4) { Printf(“B”); Printf(“C”); } Else Printf(“NIT”); Printf(“Y”); Printf(“Z”); } o/p: ABCYZ. When the body is not specified for else part then automatically scope will terminated with next statement only. Ie. Under the else part, first statement will place
Void main()
Printf(“Hello”); If(15!=2>5) Printf(“A”); Printf(“B”); on necessary because else should start at the else immediate ending of if statement. If is not { having the body. Printf(“X”); Printf(“Y”); } } o/p: Error misplaced error when we are using the else part, it should start immediately of if scope only i.e where the scope of the if is terminated there itself. Else part must be started.
11f:T903,
What are Scanf ,Printf, CLRSCR, Getch, & Comments in C Language
Scanf:-
It is a predefined f’n. by using this pre-defined f’n we can read the data from user.
Scanf f’n can any no.of arguments but 1st argument must be within the double quotes & remaining all arguments should separated with comma(,)
When we are working with scanf f’n with in the double only. i.e what type of data we are reading same type of format specifier is required
If scanf fun argument list should be contains & symbols.
Printf():-
It is a pre-defined f’n, by using this f’n we can print the data on console.
The scientific name of the monitor is called “console”
When we are working with the printf, it can take any no.of arguments but 1st argument must be within the double codes and every argument should be separated with ‘,’
Within the double codes whatever we pass it pins assist i.e. if any format specifiers are there then copy that type of values.
CLRSCR:-
By using this predefined f’n we can clear console data.
Using clrscr is always optional but it must be required to place after declaration part only.
Getch:-
It is a predefined f’n, by using this predefined f’n we can read a char from keyboard.
Generally we are planning the getch at end of the program. To wait the o/p screen until we are passing any char’s from keyboard.
Comments:-
When we are using comments that specific part of the prog will ignore by compiler.
Generally comments are used to provide the description about the logic
In a CPU they are 2 types of comments are possible i.e single line comments and multiple line. Comments.
Single line comments can be provide by using two forward slashes(//)
Multiple line comments can be provided by using /*………….*/
120:T2845,
Explain about Conditional operators in C Language with Examples
Conditional operators are terinary category operators.
Terinary category means it requires 3 arguments i.e left, middle and right side arguments.
In conditional operator, when expression is true, then returns with middle argument, if condition is false, then returns with right side argument and left side argument is treated as condition.
Syntax:
According to the syntax, when expression 1 is True or L value non zero , then exp2 or middle value returns. If exp1 is false or “L” value is Zero, then exp 3 or right side value will returns
When we are working with conditional operators. We require to satisfy following conditions.
i.e No of question marks and colons should be equal Every colon should match with just before the “}” mark Every colon should followed by “}”mark only Int a; A=10?20:30; M.R A=2>5!=1?10:20; Expression is true collects middle data A=1?10:20; 10 A=2<5 && 578910:20; 1&&0 9 10:20; A=0 ? 10: 20; 20 false, returns right side value A= 2>5 ? 10:20:30; no.of colons and “?” markes should be same A=5<8 ? 10:20:5!=5?30; Every colon should followed by ? mark. A=8>5!=1?10:5<2==0?20:30; upto 1st ? – left side value 0!=1?10: 90==0!20:30 after 1st question mark and Before first colon is middle value 0?10: 1?20:30 Remaining is right side value A=1!>1?10:/ 5<2==0?20:30; L M R 0=0 A=20 A=2<5? 5>2!=0 10:20:30; L 2 2 R 2<5- True returns middle so, consider 5>2!=0?10:20; 1!=0?10:20; 1? 10:20,10 1!=1 8 a=1!=2<5?10=15!=0?20:8<5!=0?30:40; L R 0?10: !5!=0?20:8<5!=0?30:40!5=false L M R 0?10:15!=0?20:8<5!=0?30:40 0!=0 8<5!=0 ? 30:40 L M R 9 a=2>5!=8<5?10=1!=5>8?!5?20:30:40; L R 1!=5>8?!5?20:30:40; L M R !=5?20:30;30 True 10 a=5<8?2>5!=1?5!=5==0?10:20:30:40; 2>5!=1!!5!=5==0?10:20:30; L !5!=5==0?10:20; L M R 11 a=2>5?18=0?10:20:8>2!=0?5<8!=1?30:!5!=5?1?40:2>5!50:60:70:80 6>2!=0?5<8!=1?30:!5!=5?!1?40=2>5?50:60:70:80 5<8!=1?30:!5!=5?!1?40:2>5?50:60:70; !5!=5?!1?40:2>5?50:60:70 !1! 40:2>5?50:60; 2>5?50=60; 60
The basic advantage of conditional operator is it increase the execution speed of the program
Generally conditional operators are used to reduce the coding part. When coding part is reducing, it occupies less memory. So, automatically performance will increase.
Nested if else:
When we are placing the if condition within the condition. Then it is called Nested if NIf can be applied upto 255 blocks. When we are working with nested if else at even any point of time only block will be executed. Syntax :- If(condition1) { Block1; } Else { If (condition 2) { Block2; } Else { If (condition 3) Block 3; Else Block4; } } Acc to the syntax if condition 1 is true then blocks will executed. If it false then control will pass through else port within the else part if condition 2 is true, then block 2 will executed if it is false then control will pass to nested else. Within the nested else if condition 3 is true then block 3 is executed else block 4 will executed. Void main() { Int x, y, z, min ; X=10;y=5;z=20; If(x<y && x<z) { Min=y; } If(z<x && Z<Y) { Min=z } Printf(“min value:%d”,min); } o/p : min value=5
In implementation when we are constructing inter related conditions independently after completion of requirement compiler will check rest of conditions even through if it is false.
Whenever we having inter related conditions, then always recommended to create optional block by using else port.
According to the syntax if condition 1 is true then block will executed ,if it is false then control will pass through else port within the else part if condition 2 is true, then block2 will executed if it is false then control will pass to nested else.
Within the nested else if condition 2 is true and then block3 is executed else block 4 will executed.
Void main() { Int x,y,z, min; X=10,y=5,z=20; If (x<y&&y<z) { Min=y; } If (z<x&&z<y) { Min=y; } If(z<x&&z<y) { Min=z; } Printf (“min value =%d”,min); } O/P : min value =5
In implementation when we are constructing inter related conditions independently after completion of requirement complier will check rest of conditions eve though if it is false.
Whenever we having inter related conditions, then always recommended to create optional block by using else part.
When we having only one alternate block then go for else part, if we having multiple alternate blocks then recommended to go for nested else.
In above prog, in place of constructing multiple conditions we can create a single statement which can provide min value i.e condition operator are required to use.
Void main()
{ Int x,y,z ,min; X=10;y=5;z=20; Min=x<y && x<Z?x:y<Z?y:Z; Printf(“min value:%d”,min); } o/p: min value=5 Void main() { Int a,b,c,d,max; Clrscr(); Printf(“Enter values”) Scanf(“%d%d%d%”,&a,&b,&c,&d); //a=100,b=50,c=20,d=30; If(a>b && a>c && a>d) { Max=a; } Else { If(b>c && b>d) { Max=b; } Else { If(c>d) } Printf(“max value=%d”,max); Getch(); } o/p : Enter 4 values : 10 20 50 30 max value = 50 By using conditional operator Void main() { Int a,b,c,d,max; Clrscr(); Printf("Enter 4 values :”); Scanf(“%d %d %d %d”,&a,&b,&c,&d); Max=a>b && a>c && a>d ? a:b>c && b>d?b:c>d?ad; Printf(“Max value=%d”,max); Getch(); } o/p : enter 4 values =50
When we are working with iteration statement, generally it takes the repetition until the condition becomes false but if it is selection statement after execution of the body control will pass outside the body automatically.
When we are working with while, first if checks the condition, if the condition is true, then control will pass within the body and after execution of the body once again control will pass back to the condition
Until the condition becomes false, body will be repeated “n” no of times.
Print the no’s from 1 to 10:- From left to right Void main() { Int I; I=1; While(i<=100) { Printf(!”%d”,i); I=i+1; } } O/P : 12345678910 Print the no’s in decrement order from top Void main() { Int i; I=15; While(i>=10) { Printf(“\n%d”,i); I=i-1; } } o/p: 15 14 13 12 11 10
“\n” is a special character which is used to print new line i.e vertical format data.
Void main()
{ Int I,n; Clrscr(); Printf(“Enter a value: ”); Scanf(“%d”, &n); I=2; While(i<=n) { Printf(“%d”,i); I=i+2; } Getch(); } o/p:- Enter a value=10 2 4 5 6 10
Program to accept the no from user
Enter a value : 12345 Sum of 1+5=6
Program
Case1: Enter two values: 10 20 10 12 14 16 18 20 Case 2: Enter two values: 9 20 10 12 14 16 18 20 Case 3: Enter two values 20 10 20 18 16 14 12 10 Case 4:- Enter two values: 21 10 20 18 16 14 12 10
Void main()
{ Int n1,n2; Clrscr(); Printf(“Ener two values:”); Scanf(“%d %d”, &n1,&n2); If (n1<=n2) { If (n1%2!=0) || if(n1%2==1) N1=n1+1; While(n1<n2) { Printf(“%d”,n1); N1=n1+2; } Else { If(n1%2==1) || if (n1%2!=0) N1=n1-1; While(n1>=n2) { Printf(“%d”,n1); N1=n1-2; } } Getcch(); } Enter a value 50 0 1 2 3 5 8 13 21 34 Void main() { Int n,I,j,k; Clrscr(); Printf(“Enter a value”); Scanf(“%d”, &n); If(n>0) { I=0; J=1; Printf(“%d %d”,I,j); K=i+j; While(k<=n) { Printf(“%d”,k); I=j; J=k; K=i+j; } } Else Printf(“\ input should be >0”); Get ch(); }
Write a program to find first n febinosis numbers i.e if input value is 20. Then print first 20 febinoces no’s
Void main() { Int n,rn,sd,nd; Clrscr(); Printf(“Ener a value”); Scanf(“ %4d”,&n); Rn=sd=nd=0;
While (n>0){Rn=rn*10+n%10; Sd=sd+n%10; Nd=nd+1; N=n/10; } Printf(“\n Reverse value is:%d ”,m); Printf(“\n sum of digits : %d”,sd); Printf(“\n no.of digits :%d”,nd); Getch(); } o/p: Enter a value 1234 Reverse no: 4321 Sum of digits : 10 No.of digits : 4
N
Rn
Sd
Nd
1234123 12 0
00+4=440+3 43 430+2 432 320+1 432
00+4=44+3 7 4+2 6 9+1 10
00+1=11+1 2 2+1 3 3+1 4
In scanf statement , when we are passing %4d scanf() specifier, then it will read. “four digit” data only from the user.
If we are providing more than “4” digits , then automatically compiler will ignore remaining digits.
In printf statement , when we are passing %2d format specifier, then it indicates that “2” digit decimal value need to be printed, if two digits are not occurred , then go for right alignment. I.e digit will be printed towards right side and space will be printed towards leftside.
In printf statements, when we are passing %2d format specifier, then it indicates that “2” digit decimal value required to print. If two digits are not occurred then fo for left alignment I.e digit will be printed left side and space will be printed towards right side
In printf, if we are passing %5.3d format specifier then it indicates that 5 digit decimal value required to print, if 5 digits are not occurred then apply the right alignment , but mandatary to print “3” digits and of three digits are not occurred, then fill with “Zeros”.
In printf, when we are passing %-5.3d format specifier then it indicates , a “5” digit decimal value required to print if “5” digits are not occurred, then go for left alignment but mandatory to print “3” digits, if three digits are not occurred then fill with “Zero”
122:T2706,
Explain about Nested Loops with Examples in C language
When we are placing a loop within the loop body, then it is called Nested loop. In implementation, when we require to repeat block of the statement, then go for loop, if complete loop body, if we required to repeat “n” no of times then go for nested loops. ?
When we are working with the nested loops, always execution process will starts from outerloop condition. Ie condition1
Whenever the outerloop condition is true, then control will pass within the outerloop.
In order to execute the outerloop, if any while statements are occur, those are called “innerloop”
Whenever the innerloop is occur, then we required to check inner loop condition i.e, condition 2
If the innerloop condition is true then control will pass within the innerloop and until the inner loop condition became false, complete body will be repeated “n” no. of times.
Whenever the inner loop condition is false, then control will pass to outer loop and until the outer loop condition is false, it will be repeated “n” no. Of times
When we are not collecting return value of the expression (or) if we are not using return value of the expression then it is called dummy statement.
Void main ()
{ Int a; A=10; A*5; ---> dummy statement. Printf (“a=%d”,a); } O/p: a=10 When we are working with dummy statements complier doesn’t gives any error, but we will get a warning msg called “code has no effect”
{ Int a; A=1; While (a<=10) Printf(“%d”,a); ++a; } O/p : 1 1 1 1 ….. infinite loop cntrl+break. If the body is not specified for while , then is repeats the statement block by using single statement only until the condition become false, if the condition is no false then we will get infinite loop.
Void main()
{int a; A=1; While(a<=10); à dummy loop. { Printf(“%d”,a); ++a; } } O/p: no o/p with infinite loop. Here dummy loop is While(a<=10); { } Printf(“%d”,a); ++a;}
When we are placing the semi colon at the end of while, it is called dummy loop.
When the dummy loop is constructed, then complier will create new body without any statement and current body became outside of the loop.
When we are working with the dummy loop, then empty body will repeats until the condition become false, if the condition is not false, then we will get infinite loop.
Break is a keyword, by using break we can terminate loop body or switch body. Using break is always optional but it must be placed within loop body or switch body only. In implementation where we know the maximum number of repeat ions but depends on the condition if we required to stop the repeat ion then use break statement. Continue is a keyword; by using continue we can skip statements from the loop body. Using continue is always optional but it must be placed within the loop body only. In implementation where we knows the maximum number of reparation but depends on the condition if we required to skip the statements from loop body then go for continue.
{ int a; A=1; While (a<=50) dummy loop { Printf(“%d”,a); If(a>=25) Break; A+2; } } O/p : Error misplaced break. While(a<=50) { } { Pf(”%d”,a); If (a>25) Break; A+=2; } When we are constructing the dummy loop then complier will create new body without any statement and current body became outside o f the loop. In above program duet to dummy loop break statement is placing outside the body so it is an error (we cannot palace outside)
Void main()
{ Int a; A=0; While(a<=100) { A+=2; If (a>=40&&a<=80) Continue; Printf(“%d”,a); } O/p: 2 4 6 . . . . . .38 82 84 86 …….98 100 102. When continue statement is executing then control will pass back to the condition without executing remaining statement with in the body.
In C programming language we are having 3 types of loops
While
for
do- while
While loop
When we are work-in with while loop then always pre checking process is ocuur i.e. before execution of the statement black condition will be executed. while loop will repeats in clock direction. syntax: Assignment; while(condition) { statement1; statement2; statement3; . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . inc/dec; }
Void main()
{ int I; i=1; while(i<=10) { printf(“%d”,i); ++I; } }
For loop:
When we are working with for loop it contains 3 part i.e.
Initialization
Condition
Iteration
Syntax:
for (initialisation ; condition ; iteration) { statement block; } Control passing for condition when we are working with for loop always execution process will starts from intialisation block. initialization block will be executed only once whom we are passing the control within the body first time. After execution of the initialization part control will pass to iteration, from iteration part once again it will pass to condition Always repetition will happen b/w condition statement block and iterations only. When we are working with for loop everything is optional but mandatory to place 2 semicolons while() error for(; ;) yes valid when the condition part is not available in for loop it repeats infinite times because condition part is replaced with non-zero value. when we are working with for loop pre checking process will be occur i.e before execution if the body condition part will executed. for loop will repeats in anti clock direction while(0) No repetition for(;0;) is it will repeat. When for loop condition part is replaced within constant ‘0’ then it repeats once because at the time of complilation number of instances became one int I; i=0; while(i) no repetition for (., I, ) no repetition
In implementation when we required repeating the statement block at least once then go for do-while. Indo-while loop post checking process will be occur i.e. after execution of the body, condition part will be executed. Do while loop also will repeats in clock direction Syntax : Assignment do { statement1; statement2; ….. … ……. includes; } while (condition ); According to the syntax of the do –while semi colon(;) must be required a end of the while.
Void main()
{ int I; i=1; do { printf(“%d”,i); ++i; } while (i<=10) O/P: 1 2 3 …………… 8 9 10
Void main()
{ int a a=2; for a( ; a<=20; ) { printf (“%d”, a); a+=2; } } O/p : 2 4 6 ……….. 18 20 Advantage : for loop is faster than while loop.
Void main()
{ int a,b; for(a=1;b=10;a<=b;a++,b--) printf(“\n %d %d ,a,d) printf (“\n a=%d d=%d ,a+10,a+10); } O/p: 1 10 2 9 3 8 4 7 5 6 a=16 b=15 for(a=1;b=10;a<=b;a++,b--_ i<=10 pf(“%d%d”, a,b); pf(“%d %d”, a+10,b+10) 6+10,5+10 In implementation when we are having more than one initialization and more than one iteration part then recommended to place (,) comma as separator
a=10 b=14 Enter a value :28 28=1+2+4+7+14=28 28 is a perfect number
Void main()
{ int I,n,sum=0; clrscr(); printf(“\n” Enter a value”); scanf(“%d”,&n); for(i=1; i<=n/2;i++) { if(n%i==0) sum+I;||sum=sum+I; } if (sum ==n && n!=0) printf(“\n %d is PERFECT NUMBER”,n); else printf(“\n %d is not PERFECT NUMBER”, n); } for(i=1;i<=n/2;i++) { if(n%i==0) sum+=1; Armstrong 153 =1 3 +53 +33 =1+125+27=153 370=33 +73= 27+343=370 371=33+73+13=27+343+1=371 407=43+73+0=64+343=407.
Void main()
{ int n, temp,I,sum=0; clrscr(); printf(“Enter a value”); scanf(“%d”,&n); for (temp=n;temp!=0; ) { i=temp%10; sum+=(i*i*i);|| sum+=pow (53);<math.h> temp!=10; } if(sum==n&&n!=0) printf(“\n%d is Armstrong numer “,n); else printf(“\n %d is not armstron number”,n); } O/p: Enter a value :153 for (temp=n;temp!=0 i= temp%10; sum= temp=temp/10;
void main()
{ int n,t,flag=0; clrscr(); printf(“\n Enter a value”); scanf(“%d”, &n); for(t=2; t<=n/2; t++) { if (n%t==0) { flag=1; //factor is not available break; } } if(flag==0 && n>1) printf(“%d is prime number”,n); else printf(“\n %d is not prime number”); getch(); o/p: Enter a value 13 it is a prime number
void main()
{ long int n1,n2,n,t,count =0; nt flag; clrscr(); printf(“\n enter two values:”); scanf(“%d ld %ld ”, &n1, &n2); for(n=n1;n<=n2; n++) { flag=0; for (t=2;t<=n/2;t++) { if(n%t==0) n1 n2 { 10 20 flag=1; break; } } if (flag==0 && n>1) printf(“\n%3\d prime=%5ld”,++count,n); } getch(); } o/p: Enter two values : 10 30
prime : 11
Prime : 13
Prime : 17
Prime : 19
Prime : 23
Prime: 29
void main()
{ int n,n1,temp,i,sum,count=0; clrscr(); printf(“Enter a value”); scanf(“%d”, &n); for (n=153;n<=n1;n++) { sum=0; for(temp=n, temp!=0; temp!=0) { i=temp%10; sum+=(i*i*i); } if(sum==n) printf(“\n%d ARMSTRONG:%d”,++count,n); if(n==32767) break; } getch(); } Rows you want to input = 5
{ int a; a=1; while(a++<=1) while(a++<=2) printf(“a=%d”,a); } o/p: 5
In implementation when two while statements are occur without body, without statement, without semicolon then first while became outerloop and 2nd while became innerloop i.e according to the nested loop it works
{ int a; a=1; while(a++<=2) printf(“a=%d”,a); } o/p: Error do statement must have while
In implementation when we require to create dummy do while place the semicolon at the end of the loop. i.e do;
void main()
{ int a; a=1; do; while(a++<=2); printf(“a=%d”,a); } o/p :a=4 do { } while(a++<=2); 1<=2 2<=2 3<=2 X
void main()
{ int a ; a=1; do while(a++<=1); while(a++<=3); printf(“a=%d”,a); }
126:T1a73,
Data types in C language
Always data types will decides that what type of data need to be hold in a variable.
in ‘c’ programming language, there are 3 type of basic data types are available i.e int,float, char.
In implementation whenever the predefined data type is not supporting . User requirement then extend size and range of predefined data types i.e primitive data types are required
In ‘c’ programming language, there are ‘9’ types of predefined or primitive data types are available , those are
Type
Type
Range
%
Ex
Char
1 byte
-128 to 127
%c
‘a’ ‘A’ ‘#’ ‘\n’
Unsigned char
1 byte
0 to 255
Int
2bytes
-32,768 to 32767
%d
-25 5 0 -5
Unsigned int
2 bytes
0 to 65,535
%u
327684
Longint
4 bytes
-2,147,483,648 to+3147,483,647
%ld+51-51
400001
Unsigned long
4 bytes
0 to 4,294,967,295
100lu51lu
Float
4 bytes
+or-3.4*10*+or-38
%lu
-3.5 7.5f
Double
8 bytes
+or- 1.1*10*+or-
%f
-3.5 7.5
Long double
10 bytes
308+or-3.4*10*+or-9932
%lf%Lf
-3.5L 7.5L
The basic advantage of classifying this many types nothing but utilizing the memory more efficiently and increasing the performance.
In implementation, when we require character operators then recommended to go for unsigned cap data type.
In implementation, when we require the numeric values from the range of -128 to 128 then go for char data type in place of constructing an integer, in this case, we require to use %d format specifier
When we require the numeric values from the range of 0 to 255 then go for unsigned char data type in place of constructing unsigned integer, in this case we require to use %u format specifier.
For normal numeric operation, go for an int type, if there is no any negative representations are available like Employee salary then recommended to go for unsigned int type.
Signed , unsigned, short and long are called “Qualifiors”
signed, unsigned indicates sign specifications
short & long indicates size specifications.
This all qualifiers we require to use for an integer data type only. i.e we can’t use for float, double and long double.
By default , any type of integral variable type sign is signed type, size is short type.
void main()
{ int i; long int l; float f; i=32767+1; l=32767+1; f=32767+1; printf(“%d%ld %f”,i,l,f); } o/p: 32768 -32768 -32768.000000
Arithmetic operations on data types:-
int , int int int, char int signed int, unsigned int signed int signed , unsigned - signed int, long int long int int,float float float, long int float float, double double double, long double long double.
if both arguments are same type then return value is same, if both arguments are different then among those two, bigger one will be the return value.
When we are working with an integral values with the combination of float, then return value is float type only.
void main()
{ int i, long int l; float f; i=32767+1; l=32767l+1; // l=(long int) 32767+1; f=32767.0f+1; // f=(float)32767+1; printf(“%d %ld %f ”,i,l,f); } o/p : -32768 32768 32768.000000
127:T4c77,
Type Cast operator and Number System with Examples in C
Type cast :
It is a concept of converting one data type values into another data type.
in ‘c’ programming language, “type castings” are classified into two types. i.e
implicit type casting
Explicit type casting
when we are converting lower data types value into higher data types. Then it is called. Implicit type casting process
Implicit type casting is under the control of compiler
As a programmer, it is not required to consider implicit type casting process.
When we are converting higher data types values into lower data type then it is called Explicit type casting.
As a programmer it is mandatary to handle explicit type casting process because data overflow will occur
{ int i; float f; i=6; f=6.0; if(f==i) printf(“welcome”); else printf(“Hello”); } o/p: Welcome When we are comparing integer value with float then both are became equal, if fractional part is not available in float i.e “.0”
On Dos based compiler the size of int is 2 bytes and the range from -32768 to + 32767 For representing any integer value, we require 16 bit combination i.e 65536 representations. Among those all combinations, 50% will represent negative data and remaining 50% will represents +ve data.
The size of unsigned int is 4 bytes and the range from 0 to 65,535 For representing any unsigned integer value, we require 16 bit combination i.e 65536 representations.
Among those all representations all gives +ve data only, because in unsigned type , signed bit is not available
When we are working with integer and unsigned integer always format specifier will decide the return value of binary representation.
The size of unsigned character is 1 byte and the range from 0 to 255 For representing any unsigned character we require 8 bit combination i.e 256 combinations and all the representation gives +ve data only. 0000 0000 0 0111 1111 1270000 1000 0000 128 1111 1111 255 255 -128 (-) 127 + 127 128 -1 When we are working with char & unsigned char, always data type will decides the return value of binary representation.
printf(“%d %U”, 65535,-1);
-1
65535
printf(“%d %U”,32768,-32768);
-32768
32768
printf(“%U %O %X ”,-1,-1,-1);
65535,
printf(“%d %U”, 32768,-32768);
-32768
32768
printf(“%u %O %X”,-1,-1,-1);
65535
0177777
For representing any octal data we require to take 3 binary bits only, for representing any hexadecimal value, we require to take 4 binary bits. printf(“%d %0 %u”, 327684,327684,327684); o/p: -32768 0100000
128:T1c4a,
About sizeof() operator in C Language
size of : -
It is a operator can keyword in ‘c’ language
it is a urinary operator which returns size of even argument.
size of operator always returns unsigned integer value only and which value is greater than “Zero”
void main()
{ int i; char ch; float f; printf("\n size of int %d”, sizeof(i)); printf(“\n size of char: %d ”, sizeof ch); printf(“\n size of float : %d”, size of F); } o/p: size of int : 2 size of char:1 size of float:4 sizeof(int) 2 bytes sizeof(signed) 2 bytes sizeof(short) 2 sizeof(long) 4 sizeof(25) 2 sizeof(40000u) 2 sizeof(655361) 4 sizeof(char) 1 sizeof(‘A’) 2 // sizeof(65) --- >2 char ch; ch=’A’; sizeof(ch) 1 size of character or character variable is 1 byte but the size of character constant is 2 bytes, because by default character constant returns integer value. i.e ‘ASCII’ value of a character. So, we will get 2 bytes sizeof(ch) 1 sizeof(float) 4 sizeof(double) 8 sizeof(long double) - 10 sizeof(short double) error sizeof(12.8) 8 //double sizeof(12.8f) 4 //float sizeof(12.8L) 10 // long double sizeof(3.0) 8 sizeof(3.5) 8
void main()
{ int i; i=0; printf(“\nsize1:%d”, size(i)); printf(“\nsize2:%d”, size(i*1 5l)); printf(“\nsize3:%d”, size(i/2.0)); printf(“\nsize4:%d”, size(i/2.0f)); printf(“\nsize5:%d”, size(i=i*15)); printf(“\ni=%d”,i); o/p : size1 : 2 //int Size2 : 4 // int,long long size3 : 8 //int,double double size4 : 4 //int, float float size 5 : 2 //int,int int i=0 in size of operator all expressions can be evaluated except assignment.
void main()
{ int a; a=10; printf(“\n size of a: %d”, sizeof(++a)); //a=a+1 ignore inclure printf(“/n a=%d”,a); } o/p : size of a:2 a=10
129:T6ae,
Priority of operators in c Language
In ‘c’ programming language, total no.of operators are 44 and according to the priority this operator are pointer to member
1
( ),[ ],
2
+,-,++,- -,!,~,*,&, sizeof,(type)
~ - 1’s compliment * _ in direction & - address of
3
*,/,%
4
*,-
5
<< (L.shift),>> (R.shift)
6
<,<=,>,>=
7
!=,==
8
&(Bitwise - ANd)
9
^(B.XOR)
10
1(B.OR)
11
&&
12
||
13
?:
14
=,+=,-=,*=,/=,%=,&=,!=,^=,<<=,>>=
15
,
12a:T6b58,
Explain Operators in C Language
Bitwise operators :-
In implementation , when we need to manipulate the data on binary representation, then go for bitwise operators when we’re working with bitwise operators, always modification will happens directly on binary format only. Bitwise operators need to be applied for an integral data type only. ie. we can’t apply for float double and long double type. Bitwise operators are ~ - its compliment << - bitwise left shift >> - bitwise right shift & - bitwise AND ^ - bitwise XOR | - bitwise OR
1’s compliment : - (~) :
This operator returns compliment value of given i/p i.e, all is will be converted into dl format, all zeros will converted into is format when we’re working with any bitwise operators we require to take complete to 16 bit representation int a; a=5; 5 0000 0000 0000 010 o/p: 6 ~5-1111 1111 1111 1010 6535 1111 1111 1111 1111 ~5 1111 1111 1111 1010 22 20 65535 65530 -32768 5 32767 +32762(n-1) 65530 32763 -6 a=~61; 61 0000 0000 0011 1101 ~611111 1111 1100 0010(-1-32-16-8-4-1 655351111 1111 1111 1111 ~62 1111 1111 1100 0010 65535 65474 -32768 61 32767 32706 ---------- --------- ------------ 65474 32707 -62 a= ~127 0000 0000 0111 1111 o/p1- >28 1111 1111 1000 0000 (-1-64-32-16-8- 4-2-1) -128 a=~0 0000 0000 0000 0000 o/p -1 1111 1111 1111 1111(-1) a=~32767 0111 1111 1111 1111 o/p:-32768 1000 0000 0000 0000 a=~-15; -1 1111 1111 1111 1111 -15 1111 1111 1111 0001 ~-15 0000 0000 0000 1110(-14) a=~-255 o/p : 254 1111 1111 1111 1111 -255 1111 1111 0000 0001(-1-128-64-32- 16-8-4-2) 0000 0000 1111 1110(-254) (128+64+32+16+8+4+2) a=~-1 o/p : 0 a=~-32768 -32768- 1000 0000 0000 0000 o.p:32767 ~327680111 1111 1111 1111 3270 unsigned int u
u=~5 5 0000 0000 0000 0101
o/p: 65530 ~5-1111 1111 1111 1010 65530
u=~32767; 32768
32767 0111 1111 1111 1111 ~32767 1000 0000 0000 0000 32768 There is no any format specifies are there which can represent binary data on console 1’s complement value is not equal to negation of given i/p Always 2’s compliment value is equal to negation of given i/p data 2’s compliment = 1’compliement +1
IN left shift operator, towards from the left side,’ n’ no. Of bits need to be dropped and towards from then right side empty places required to till with zeros. When we are dropping the bite towards from the left side then all 1’s will be shifted towards left side by ’n’ places then automatically value will increase. int a;
~4<<3; -5<<1 ; 1111 1111 1111 0110 (-1-1-8)-10 -5<<2; 1111 1111 1111 1100(-1-16-2) -20 -5<<3; 1111 1111 1101 1000(-1-1-2-4-32-40) Value =x<<n; x*2n Consider the range when using the formulae For any +ve integer left shift 16 makes the value as ‘0’ because +ve data binary representation is available in 16bits towards from left side. a=1<<16; 0 a= 32767 <<16; 0 a= 12345 << 16; 0
Right shift Operator (>>):
In right shift operator, towards from right side, ‘n’’ no. of bits need to be dropped and towards from left side empty places need to be filled with zeros for +ve data only. In right shift operator for negative no’s empty places need to be filled ones, so sign bit will not be modified, we will get negative data only. In right shift operator when we are dropping the towards from right side then all ones will be shift towards right side by ‘n’ places so value will be decreased. int a;
a= 10>>1;5 10 0000 0000 0000 1010
10>>1 0000 0000 0000 0101; 5
a=10>>2; 210>>2 0000 0000 0000 0010;2
a= 10 >>3;1 10>>3 0000 0000 0000 0001;1
a= 10>>4 0000 0000 0000 0000;0
a=1 >>1;0
a= 2>>1;1
a= 8>>1;4
a=50>>1;55
a=150>>1;75 32767 0111 1111 1111 1111
a= 32767>>15;0 32767>>15 0000 0000 0000 0000
a= 12345 >>15;0 Value=x>>n; x/2n
For any +ve no.of right shift 15 makes the values as zero because =ve data representation is available in 15 bits towards from right side.
{ int a; a=10,20,30; printf(“a=%d”,a); } O/p: 10 Assignment operator having highest priority operators dts why first value will be passed to a variable.
Void main()
{ int a; a=(10,20,30); printf(“a=%d”,a); } O/p: a=30
{ int a,b; for(a=1,b=5;a<=10,b<=8;a++,b++) printf (“\n%d”%d “,a,b); printf(“\na=%d b=%d”,a+10,b+10); } O/p : 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 15 b=19 When we are placing more than one expression as a condition in for loop, then finally evaluated expression will consider as condition.
void main()
int a,b,c; a=b=1; c=++a>1||++b>1; printf(“a=%d b=%d c=%d,a,b,c); } O/p: 2 1 1 When we are working with logical or operator if any one of the expression is true ,then return value is 1, dots why when the left side expression is true, that’s why right side part will not be evaluated.
void main()
{ int a, b, c; a=1;b=3; c=++a <1|| b<3; printf(“a=%d b=%d c=%d”,a,b,c); } O/p: 2 2 1
{ int a,b,c; a=1;b=2 c=++ a>2&&--b<<; printf(“a=%d b=%d c=%d ,a,b,c); } O/p: a=2 b=2 c=0 When we are working with logical AND operator both expressions or all expression are true then only return value is true i.e. ‘1’ that’s why when the left side expression is false ,rigt side will not be evaluated.
{ int a,b,c,d; a=1;b=2;c=3; d= ++a>1|| ++b>2 && --c<3; printf(“%d %d %d %d “, a,b,c,d); } O/p: a=2 b=2 c=3 d=1 When we are working with uniary operator with the combination of binary then highest priority will be given for unary operator.
Self containing block of one or more statements or a sub-program which is designed for a particular task is called functions. A function is a group of statements that together perform a task. Every C program has at least one function, which is main(), and all the most trivial programs can define additional functions.
A large C program is divided into basic building blocks called C function. C function contains set of instructions enclosed by “{ }” which performs specific operation in a C program. Actually, Collection of these functions creates a C program.
C functions are basic building blocks in a program. All C programs are written using functions to improve re-usability, understandability and to keep track on them.
syntax :
returntype function name (parameters)
{
statement block;
return statement;
}
- Return type, parameters and return statements are optional
- In implementation , whenever a function is returning the value then specify the return statement is optional . In this case, we will get a warning message called “ function should return a value”
- Whenever the function is returning the value, then collecting the value also optional
In ‘c’ programming language, function are classified into two types.
1. Library functions or Built in functions or predefined functions
Predefined functions in C are those that are part of the C library. These are present in any of the various headers that can be included in a program.
2. User defined functions
User defined function has to be developed by the user at the time of writing a program.
Functions have a basic structure. Their format is:
return_ data_type function name (arguments, arguments)
data _type _declarations of arguments;
{
function body
}
C FUNCTION DECLARATION, FUNCTION CALL AND FUNCTION DEFINITION:
There are 3 aspects in each C function. They are,
Function declaration or prototype – This informs compiler about the function name, function parameters and return value’s data type.
Function call – This calls the actual function
Function definition – This contains all the statements to be executed.
Example Of a Function
#include<stdio.h>
#include<conio.h>
void add(int x, int y)
{
int result;
result = x+y;
printf("Sum of %d and %d is %d ", x,y,result);
}
void main()
{
clrscr();
add(10,20);
add(30,40);
add(50,60);
getch();
}
OUTPUT:
Sum of 10 and 20 is 30
Sum of 30 and 40 is 70
Sum of 50 and 60 is 110
Types of Functions In C
There are 4 types of Functions in C
1. Functions with no arguments and no return values.
2. Functions with arguments and no return values.
3. Functions with arguments and return values.
4. Functions with no arguments and return values.
HOW TO CALL C FUNCTIONS IN A PROGRAM?
There are two ways that a C function can be called from a program. They are,
Call by value
Call by reference
Parameters in C
A Parameter is the symbolic name for "data" that goes into a function. There are two ways to pass parameters in C: Pass by Value, Pass by Reference.
Pass by Value
Pass by Value, means that a copy of the data is made and stored by way of the name of the parameter. Any changes to the parameter have NO affect on data in the calling function.
Pass by Reference
A reference parameter "refers" to the original data in the calling function. Thus any changes made to the parameter are also made to the original variable.
Advantages of Functions
- By using function, we can avoid rewriting the code in the applications
- By using functions, we can develop an application in module format
- Program development will become easy by using function
- when we are developing an application in module format, then we can easily trace and debug the applications.
- By using the functions , we can keep track the logic implementation of the program.
- The basic purpose of the function is : code reuse
- A ‘C’ program is a combination of functions
- From any function, we can invoke any other function
- Always compilation process will take place from top to bottom
- Execution process will starts with main and ends with main only.
- In implementation, when we are calling a function, which is defined later, for avoiding the compilation error we require to go for forward declaration i.e prototype is required
- Declaration of function means, require to specify return type, name of the function and parameter type information
- In function definition first line is called function declarator or function header
- Always a function is not returning any values then specify the return type as void
void means “nothing” ie. no return value.
- In implementation, whenever a function is returning the value then specify the return type as return value type. ie. what type of value we are returning same type of return statement is required.
- Default return type of the function is an int, default parameter type is void
Our course design of tutorials is practical and informative. At TekSlate, we offer resources to help you learn various IT courses. We avail both written material and demo video tutorials. For in-depth knowledge and practical experience explore Online C Tutorials.
12c:T80f,
Brief description about Storage classes in C
According to the storage classes of “c” the lifetime of the auto variable is restricted within the body that’s why how many times we are calling the abc function that many times it will created. void xyz() { int a=5; --a; printf(“\na=%d”,a); } void main() { auto int a=10; ++a; xyz(); ++a; printf(“\na=%d”,a); } o/p : a=4; a=12; void abc() { int a =10; --a; printf(“\na=%d”,a); }
According to the storage classes of ‘c’ by default any type of variable storage class specifier is auto.
The scope of the auto variable is restricted within the body that’s why abc() function related data, we can’t access in main() function
void main()
{ int a=10; clrscr(); auto int b=20; ++a; ++b; printf(“\n a=%d b=%d”,a,b); } o/p: Error declaration is not allowed here In ‘c’ programming language variable declaration must be exists top of the program before writing the first statement only.
void main()
{ auto int a=5; int a=10; ++a; printf(“a=%d”,a); } o/p : Error multiple declaration for ‘a’ In any scope we construct a single variable by using anymore of unique name, if we are constructing multiple variable with the same name then it gives an error i.e, multiple declaration
void main()
{ int a=5; ++a; printf(“\na=%d”,a); { auto int a=10; --a; printf(“\na=%d”,a); } o/p : a=6 a=9 a=7
12d:T88a,
In this tutorial, we will discuss about stacks in data structures. A stack is an ordered list in which items may be added or removed only at one end, called the “top” of the stack. The last item to be added to a stack is the first item to be removed .Accordingly, stacks are also called Last- in-first- out (LIFO) lists or First- in –out (FIFO) lists. The two basic operation associated with stack are
“Push” is the term used to insert an element into a stock.
“Pop” is the term used to delete an element into a stack.
Examples
A stack of dishes
A stack of coins
A stack of folded towels
A stack of bills
A railway system for shunting cars.
Stack may be represented in a computer in various ways, usually by means of a one –dimensional array and linked list.
“Top” is variable or a pointer, which points top most element of the stack.
Initially when the stack is empty, “Top has a value of “-1” and when the stack contains a single element.
“Top” has a value of “0” and when the stack contains two elements, “Top” has value of “1” and so on.
The following is the condition to test the stack is full or not( Top== maxsize-1)
Each time a new element is inserted in the stack, the top is incremented by “one” before the elements is placed on the stack.
Top=Top+1
The following is the condition to kept the stack is empty or not.
(Top==-1)
The “Top “is decremented by one each time a deletion is made from the stack.
Top =Top-1;
A variable “max size “, which gives the maximum number of elements that can be held by the stack.
12e:Ta68,
Bubble Sort The bubble sort is the oldest and simplest sort in use unfortunately, it is also the slowest.
compare two numbers at a time, starting with the first two numbers
If the first number, is larger than second number, than exchange the two numbers,
Go right one number and compare that number to the number that follows it. The two form a new pair.
Continue this process until no exchange has been made in an entire pass through the list.
Ex : Pass: 0
Program:
Implementation of Bubble sort
# include<stdio.h> void bubble sort(int A[20],int n); void main() { int A[30],n,i; printf(“Enter n value \n”); scanf(“%d”, &n); printf(“Enter the elements:\n”); for(i=0;i<n; i++) { scanf(“%d”,&A[i]); } bubble sort[A,n]; printf(“The following are the elements in sorting orfer:\n”); for(i=0;i<n;i++) { printf(“%5d”,a[i]); } } void bubble sort(int A[20],int n) { int pass, j,temp; for(pass=0;pass<n-1;pass++) { for(j=0;j<n-pass-1;j++) { if(a[j]>a[j+1]) { temp=A[j]; A[j]=A[j+1]; A[j+1]=temp; } } } } Enter n value: 10 Enter the elements : 5 4 1 6 7 9 2 3 8 The following are the elements in the sorting order : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time complexity:
Traditionally, the time for a sorting algorithm is measured in terms of the number of comparisons specially, There are n-1 comparisons during the first pass, which phases the largest element in the last position, these are n-2 comparisons in second step, which places the second largest element in the next-to-last position, and so on. Thus f(n)=(n-1) + (n-2) +(n-3) + -------------- +2+1 =n(n-1)/2=n2/2-n/2=0(n2)
12f:Tcd2,
A stack is useful in writing recursive calls. A stack is useful to convert in fix expression into post fix expression. It can be used in function calls for example, suppose that function “a” calls function “b” and passes two variables ,”x” and “y” to “b”. Then the function “a” can store these two variables on the stack, from where the function “b” can retrieve and use them. A stack can be used to evaluate the postfix expression. A+B=>AB+=>30. A stack can be used to implement a calculator by storing the operands and the operators on the stack and using them as and when required. The stack can be used in the algorithms which needs the back traversal. Program:
Implementation of stack data structures using array
# include <studio.h> #include <conio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #define maxsize 5 int stack [maxsize]; int Top=-1; void insertion () { Int else; if (Top== maxsize-1) { printf(“stack is over flow \n”); } else { printf(“Enter an element:”); scanf (“%d”,&ele); Top=Top+1; stack[Top]=ele; } } void deletion () { if (Top==-1) { printf(“Stack is under flow \n”); } else { printf(“ The deleted element is %d \n”, stack [Top]); Top=Top-1; } void display() { inti; if (Top==-1) { printf(“stack is under flow \n”); } else { for(i=0; i<=Top;i++) { printf(i=0; i<=Top; stack[i]); } printf( “%5d”,stack[i]); } printf(“\n”); } } int main() { int choice; printf(“1.INSERTION \n”); printf(“2.DELETION \n”); printf(“3.DISPLAY \n”); printf(“4.EXIT \n”); do { printf(“Enter your choice:”); scanf(“%d”,&choice); switch (choice) { case1: insertion (); break; case2: deletion (); break; case3: Display(); break; case4: (0); } } while (c<=4); return; }
Initial stack:
Top[-1] maxsize[5] After inserting i.e. entry 10, 20, 30, 40, 50. Top max size - 1 [5] 023 4 Inserting element stack is overflow After deleting elements 50, 40, 30, 20, 10. Inserting elements Stack is over flow After deleting elements 50,40,30,20,10
130:T9e2,
Binary search
The binary search in data structures is yet another simple method. However in the binary search, the algorithm expect the list to be sorted you can apply any one of the sorting methods before using the binary search algorithm. In binary search the given list is devided into two equal half’s. The given key is compared with the middle element of the list now three situations may occur. The middle element matches with the key the search will end peacefully here. The middle element is greater than the key then the value which we are searhing is possibly in the first half of the list. The middle element is lower than the key. Then the value which were searching is possibly in the second half of the list Now the list is searched either in the first half is in the second half of got by the result of conditions (b) and (c) given above. This search fails because the key does not exist Mid= left+right/2 Mid= 0+9/2 = 4.5 Program Binary search # include <stdio.h> # include <conio.h> void main() \{ int a[20],n,key,p,i; clrscr(); printf(“Enter the total number of elements \n”); scanf(“%d”,&n); printf(“Enter the element in ascending order \n”); for(i=0;i<n;i++) { scanf(“%d”,&a[i]); } printf(“Enter the search element \n”); scanf(“%d”,&key); p=binary search(a,n,key); /* Functional */ if(p>=0) { printf(“search is successful \n”); printf(“The element found at position %d”,p+1); } else { printf(“search is unsuccessful search \n”); } else { printf (“search is unsuccessful search \n”); } } int binary search(int a[20],int n, int key) { int left, right, mid; left=0; right=n-1; while(left<=right) { mid=(left+right)/2; if(key==a[mid]) { right=mid-1; } else { left=mid+1; } } } return(-1); } Time complexity: Each step at the algorithm divides the list divided into two parts and the search continues in one of them and the other is discarded the search requires at mast k steps where 2k > =N which results k=log2N thus the running time c both average and worst case of binary search is proportional
131:T1bb8,
How to perform I/O operation in c++
What is input ?
Information given to the program, is called input
In input data is flow inside the program
It required a source(for reading )
stadin - - > standard input used as scanf function stdout ---> standard input used as printf function taken by monitor(gives destination) What is output :
Information given by the program is called output
In output data is flow outside the program
In c++ I/O operations are alone using streams
A stream is class is provide set of functions to perform input and output operations
A stream represents input source (reading) and output destination (writing)
C++ provides 2 stream classes
ostream
istream
.IIstream The istream consists of input functions to read a streams of characters from the keyboard.
Ostream The ostream consists of output functions to write a character onto the screen.
stdout is a file pointer which is pointing to console I/O operation in C++ Example
Cout ->
It is a predefined object of class Ostream
Cout represent console output
Cout represent standard output devide(Monitor)
For cout object destination is standard output device
Ostream cout(“ con ”);
This predefined object is a variable in IOstream.h file
This object uses << (insertion) operator to perform formatted output operation
This object uses all the member function of stream class to perform output operation
<< ( insertion operator) is overloaded operation on member function
ex : printf(“%d”,IO)// This operation performs O/P operation without using formatting specifier. printf(“%f”,1.5)
This operation insert one values
Insertion means writing / printing Cout << ’10,20 ; // it will print 10
Syntax : cout<< variable/constant/expression; In order to print multiple values cout uses multiple insertion operators. Cout<value 1<value2<value 3…….
Using multiple insertion operator with cout is called cascading , it is a method of organizing
evaluation of insertion operators are are done from right to left and insertion is done from left to right
Example : # include<iostream.h> void main() { cout<< “welcome to c++”; } Eg :- #include <iostream.h> void main() { cout<<10; // cout <<10<<end l; cout<< 1.5; // cout<<1.5<<end l; cout << ‘A’; // cout<<’A’<<end l; cout<<1/5; // cout<<1.5<<end l; cout<<’A’; // cout << ‘A’ << end l; cout<< “c++” // cout << “c++” <<endl; } endl : It is a manipulator used for inserting new line
Q) What is the difference between \n and endl ?
In is a back slash is escape sequences
endl
\n
it is called manipulator
it is called escape sequence
It doesn’t occupy any space
It occupy 1 byte
It is available in iostream.h
it is available in ‘C’
eg: # include <iostream.h> void main() { cout<<10<<1.5<<’A’<<”c++”; // cascading } Cin : It is an object of istream class.
istream class provide set of functions to performs input operations
Cin uses >> (extraction) operation to read any type of value
It does not required any formatting specifiers
Formatting is an implicit functionality of extract of operation
It is an overloaded operation // reading (source) writing Cdestination which extend functionality of >> (shift operator)
syntax :
Cin >> variable –name;
One extraction operator read only one value cin>>var1>>var2>>var3----
Using multiple extraction is called as cascading
Variable (local) :
The variable declared inside function is called local variable.
Memory for this variable is allocated on execution of function and after completion of function
The scope of this variable within function
Local variable are called auto variable.
Auto is storage class and variable is never declared without class
Storage class define scope life time and storage of variable.
Eg : #include<iostream.h> void main() { int x; int Y; int Z; Cout << X << endl; cout<<Z<<endl; } o/p : The output of above program is garbage value, Because local variables are not given any default values.
C++ allows to declare local variable anywhere within function
eg : # include <iostream.h> void main() { int n1; cout<< “\n input n1 value”; cin >> n1; int n2; cout<< “\n input n2 value”; cin>> n2; int n3; n3=n1+n2; cout<< “\n sum is ” << n3 } C++ allows to declare block level variables
132:T24e3,
Static binding in C++
In function overloading or operator overloading there will be more than one function with the same name.
The functions are invoked by matching arguments.
The complier selects the appropriate function for particular call at the compilation time itself. This is called early binding or static binding.
Dynamic Binding in C++
Selecting the appropriate member function while the program is running is known as run time polymorphism.
This process is known as late binding .It is known as dynamic binding as the selection of the function is done dynamically at run time.
Dynamic binding requires use of pointer to objects
void fun1(int x) { { void fun1(float x) { } void main() { fun1(10); fun1(1.5); } The feature of runtime polymorphism is the ability to refer to objects without regard to their classes using a single pointer. We can use a pointer to a base class to refer all the derived objects. When we use the same function name in both base and derived classes a base class pointer executes the base class function only even when is assigned with derived class object address.
Virtual Function in C++
To invoke the derived class overriding member function b base class pointer when i t is assigned with derived class address the base class member function has to made virtual.
The keyword virtual has to be preceded the normal declaration.
Rules for virtual functions:
The virtual function must be members of some class.
They cannot be static members.
They accessed by using object pointers.
A virtual function can be a friend of another class.
A virtual function in a base class must be defined ,even though it may not be used.
A function declared in base class and has no definition relative to the base class.
They are redefined in derived classes.
They are called as do-nothing functions.
Abstract Base class:
A class containing pure virtual functions is called as Abstract Base class
They cannot be used to declare any objects.
It is purely for inheriting purpose only.
They are used to create a base pointer required to achieve runtime polymorphism.
Syntax: Virtual return type function – name (parameters)
Abstract class
# include<iostream.h> # include<conio.h> class shape { protected; float dim 1,dim 2; public: void read_dim( ) { cout<<”Input two dim”; cin>>dim1>>dim2; } Virtual void final_area( )=o; }; Class triangle:public shape { Public: void final_area( ) { float area=0.5*dim1*dim2; cout<<”In area of triangle is”<<area; }}; class rectangle:public shape { public: void final_area( ) float area=dim1*dim2; cout<<”In area of rectangle is”<<area; }}; Void main( ) { Triangle t1; t1.read_dim( ); Rectangle r1; r1.read_dim( ); t1.final_area( ); r1.final_area( ); }
O/P: Input two dim 2 3 Input two dim5 4 Area of triangle is 3 Area of triangle is 20
Abstract class is called as an abstract data type
A data type which allows to build a similar data type is called as abstract data type.
Hybrid Inheritance:
If there are two on more types of inheritances to design a program it is called as hybrid inheritance. Ex: class student{ }; class test:public student { };class sports:public student { }; Class result:public test,public sports; This is also called as Multi path inheristance as the class student inherited vice test and also via sports
Class alpha { }; Class beta:public alpha { }
Virtual Class
You might want to make a class if it is a base class it has been passed to more than one derived class,as might happen with multiple inheritance.
A base class cant be specified more than once in a derived class:
Eg: class B {….} Class D:B,B{….};//ILLEGAL However a base class can be indirectly passed to the derived class more than once:
Eg: Class X:public B {….} Class Y:public B {….} Class Z:public X,public Y{….} In this case, each object of class Z will have sub objects of class B. If this causes problems, you can add the key word” virtual “to a base class specifier.
For example:
# include<iostream.h>
Class A { Public: Void fun1( ) { Cout<<”In Inside function1 of A”; }};
Class B:public virtual A { public: Void fun2( ) { Cout<<”In Inside function2 of A”; }};
Class C:public virtual A { public: Void fun 3( ) { Cout<<”In Inside function3 of C”; }};
Class D:public B,public C { Public: Void fun4( ) { cout<<”In Inside function4 of D”; }};
o/p: Inside function 1 of A Inside function 2 of A Inside function 3 of C Inside function 4 of D
MULTIPLE INHERITANCE
If class is derived from more than one base class it is called as multiple inheritance. Ex: class base1 { }; class base2 { }; class derived:public base1,public base2 { };
Example:
# include<iostream.h>
Class person { Protected; Char name[10]; Public; Void read_name( ) { Cout<<”\n Input name”; Cin>>name; }};
Class employee { Protected; Int empno; public; void read_empno( ) { Cout<<”\n Input empno”; cin>>empno; }};
The mechanism of deriving a class from another derived class is known as multilevel inheritance in C++. e.g: Class base { }; class dervied1: public base { }; class deriverd2 :public derived1 { };
Multi Level Inheritance in C++ Example
# include <iostream.h> class person char name[10]; public: void read_name() { cout<<”\n Input Name”; cin>>name; } void print_name() { cout <<”\n Name “<<name; } class student:public person int rno; public: void read_rno() { cout<<”\n Input roll no”; cin>>rno; } void print_rno() { cout<<”\n Rollno”<<rno; }; clas student :: public Mca_student int sub1,sub2; public: void read_subjects() { cout <<”\n Input two subjects”; cin >>sub1>>sub2: } void print_subjects() { cout <<”\n Subject1”<<sub1; cout<<”\n Subject2<<sub2; }; void main() { Mca_student stud1; stud1.read_ stud1; stud1.read_name(); stud1.read_rno(); stud1.read_ subjects(); stud1.print_name(); stud1.print_rno(); stud1.print_subjects(); }
Constructors in derived class
Constructors of any class are invoked only if an object of that class is constructed.
If the base class constructor is having argument which assigns value to the data members of the base class then it is mandatory to invoke the base class constructor.
But the derived class object cannot invoke the base class constructor directly.
In that case derived class constructor invokes the base class constructor.
The constructor of the derived class receives the entire list of the values and passes then to the base constructors.
Constructors of derived class calls implicit default or non parameterized constructor of base class.
#include <iostream.h> class base public: base() { cout<<”\n Inside base class constructor”; }; class derived :public base public : derived () { cout<<”\n Inside derived class constructor”; }; void main() { clrscr(); derived d1; }
Parameterized constructor of base class is called explicitly with in constructor of derived class. In this calling is done as a part of constructor header.
g:
#include <iostream.h> # include<string.h> #include<conio.h> class account { int accno; char name[10]; public : account(int acno,charn[ ]) accno=acno; strcpy(name,n); void pront_accno_name() { cout<”\n Account No”<<accno; cout<<”\n Customer name”<< name; } Class saving _account: public account char cheq_fac; public: saving_account(int a, char n[ ],char c)): account(a,n) cheq_fac=c; void print_cheq_fac() { cout<<”\ n Chaqfac”<<cheq_fac; }; void main() { clrscr(); saving_account acc1(101,”abc”,’y’); acc1.print_accno_name(); acc1.print_cheq_fac(); } Non-parameter => implicitly Parameter=> Explicitly
E.g:
# include<iostream.h> # include<conio.h> class base public: base() { cout<<”\n Inside non parameterized constructor of base class”; } base (int x) { cout <<”\n Inside parameterized constructor of base class”; }; class derived :public base public: derived ():base(10) cout<<”\n Inside non parameterised constructor of derived class”; derived (int x) // default constructor of base class cout <<”\n Inside parameterised constructor of derived class”; }; void main() { derived d1; derived d2(10); } Destructor in inheritance:
Complier called implicitly the destructor of base calls inside destructor of derived class.
Calling of base destructor inside derived class destructor is last statement.
E.g: # include <iostream.h> # include <conio.h> class base { public: base() { cout<<”\n Inside constructor of base class”; } base () cout<<”\n Inside destructor of base class”; } class derived :public base{ public: derived() { cout<<”\n Inside constructor of derived class”; } derived() { cout <<\n Destructor of derived class”; }; void main() { clrscr(); derived d1; }
Member function overriding:
Redefining of base class member function inside derived class is called Member function overriding.
Writing member function inside derived class with same name, no.of parameters, types of parameter and order of parameters of member function defined base class is called member function overriding.
Member function override inorder to modify functionality of base class member function inside derived class.
If derived class wants to have different implementation of base class member function, it override base class function inside derived class.
E.g: # include <iostream.h> class base { public: void fun1() { cout<<”\n Inside base class function 1”; }}; class derived :public base { public: void fun1(){ (Inherited from base class & used in derived class) cout<<”\n Inside overriding function”; }; void main() { derived d; d.fun1(); } E.g: # include <iostream.h> # include<conio.h> class person { Char name[10]; public: void read() { cout<<”\n Input name”; cin>>name; } void print() { cout<<”\n Name”>>name; }}; class customer :public person { int id; float credit_limit; public: void read() { person:: read(); cout<<”\n Input id”; cin>>id; cout<<”\n Input credit_limit; } void print() { person::print(); cout<<”\n Id”<<id; cout<<”\n Credit Limit”<<credit_limit; }}; void main() { clrscr(); customer cust1; cust1.read(); // overriding base class in derived class cust1.print(); } O/p: input name desy input id 123 Input credit_limit Name desy Id 123 Credit_limit 1.37561 # include <iostream.h> # include<conio.h> class animal { public: void walk() { cout<<”\n animal walk”; }}; class dog:public animal { public: void walk() { cout<<”\n dog walk”; }}; class cat:public animal { public: void walk() { cout<<”\n Cat walk”; }}; void main() { dog d; cat c; d.walk(); c.walk(); }
134:T1747,
Static Members
The members of class can be declared as static in C++ Static members are of 2 types static data member static member function
Static Data Member in C++
A variable declared inside class with static keyword is called static data member. static data member is a global data member, which is global to class or more than one object Static member memory is allocated when finest object of class is create or when it accessed first time. Static data member must be initialized outside the class. Static Members in C++ Example class Alpha - - > data type { static int z; int x; int y; }; void main() { Alpha alpha1; Alpha alpha2; Alpha alpha3; }
Syntax of declaring static data member in C++
static data type variable-name;
Syntax of defining static data member in C++
definition is given outside the class datatype <class-name> :: <member-name>=[name] int –0 flat,double – 0.0 char- - - \o(null)
Static data member is accessed with class name or object name
Example : class Beta { public : int x; - - > on creation of object static int y; - - > on creation of first object (accessed fines+time with class name) }; int Beta :: y=0; void main() { cout<<Beta :: y; - - > 0 cout<<Beta :: x; - - > X Beta Beta1; cout<<Beta1.x; - - > } Example # include<iostream.h> class circle { float r; static float pi; public : void read(); void find_area(); }; float circle :: pi=3.147; void circle :: read() { cout<<”\n input r”; cin>>r; } void circle :: find_area() { float area = pi*r*r; cout<<”\n Area of circle is ”<<area; } void main() { circle circle1; circle circle2; circle1.read(); circle2.read(); circle1.find_area(); circle2.find_area(); } find output ?
Example
# include<iostream.h> class Alpha { public : int x; static int y; }; int alpha :: y; void main() { alpha alpha1; alpha1.x=10; alpha1.y=20; alpha alpha 2; alpha2.x=30; alpha2.y=40; cout<<”\n alpha1.x”<<”\t”<<alpha1.y; cout<<”\n alpha2.x”<<”\t”<< alpha2.y
Static member functions in C++
A member of class can be defined as static static member function is a global function this member function is accessed with name without creating object class Alpha { public : static int x; int y; }; int Alpha :: x=10; void main() { cout<<Alpha::x; cout<<alpha<<y; } class Alpha { static int x; }; int alpha :: x=10; void main() { cout<<alpha ::x; }
static member function access only static members of the but cann’t access non static members
class-name :: function-name # include<iostream.h> { class alpha { public: void func1() { cout<<”\n inside non static member function”; } static void fun2() { cout<<”\n inside static member funciton”; }}; void main() { alpha:: func1();// erro (Non static member can’t access class name) alpha:: fun2(); } o/p: inside static member function
Example
# include<iostream.h> # include<conio.h> class alpha { static int x; public : static void fun1() { cout<<”\n x=” <<x; o/p : x=10 cout << “\n y=” <<y; // error (static member function cannot access not static members o class); }}; int alpha :: x=10; void main () { int alpha :: x=10; void main() { alpha:: fun1() } Static member function can access non static member of class by creating object.
//Count of object or finding how many objects of class are created.
Example #include <iostream.h> class student { int rno; char name[10]; static int count; public: student() { count=count +1; } static void print –count() { cout<<”\n count is “<<count; } void read() { cout<<”\n Input roll no; cin>>rno; cout<<”\n Input name; cin>>name; void print() { cout<<”\n Rollno”<<rno; cout<<”\n Name”<<name; }}; int student:: count; void main() { student:: print_count(); student student1; student student2; student::print _count(); student1.read(); student2.read(); student1.print(); student2.print(); }
Non static Member function can access static member and non- static Members.
What is difference between constructor and destructor
Constructor
Destructor
it is executed on creation of objectits job is inita class contain multiple constructorsit can have parameters
it is executed before deleting objectits job is deinita class contain only one destructorit cannot have parameters.
Constant members in C++
Member of class can be declared as constants Constant members are of 2 types. Constant data member Constant member function
Constant data member
The value of constant data member has never changed. Constant data member must be initialized using constructor list It is used to defined read only property of object
Constant Member Function Syntax
const data type datamember-name syntax of init constant data members using construct list constructor-name(): constant-datamember(value,constant-datamember(value)---- { statements; }
//wap to find area of circle
Example # include <iostream.h> class circle { float r; const float pi; public : circle() : pi(3.147) { r=1.5; } void find_area() { float area=pi*r*r; cout<<”\n Area is”<<area; }}; void main() { circle circle1; // create a object by calling constructor circle1.find_area(); } Constant member function Example
//Finding simple interest :
#inlude<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class simple_interest { float amt; int time; const float rate; public : simple_interest(float a, int l, float r): rate(r) { amt=a; time=t; } float find_interest() { float si=(amt * rate *time)/100; cout<<”\n simple interest”<<si; } } void main() { simple_interest_cust1(5000,12,1.5); simple_interest_cust2(7000,24,2.5); cust1.find_intrest (); cust2.find_intrest (); }
Constant member function in C++
Constant member function is an accessory function which cannot modifying values of data members. It perform constant operation.
Defining more than one constructor within class by changing -->Number of parameters -->Types of parameters -->Order of parameters is called Constructor Overloading in C++ Constructor is overloaded in order to extend functionality of existing constructor
Destructor is a special member function This member function get executed before destroying object.
Destructor Properties
Destructor name is same as class name and it is prefix with ~ operator It is without any return type not even void It is not having any parameters/ arguments A class contain only one destructor.
Destructor Syntax
~destructor-name() { statements; }
DestructorExample
# include <iostream.h> class alpha { int x; public : alpha() { cout<<”\n inside construtor”; } ~alpha() { cout<<”\n inside destructor”; } }; void main() { alpha alpha1; } o/p : inside constructor(creating object) inside Destructor(Deleting object) Eg: #include <iostream.h> class array { int *a; int size; public : array(int s) { size=5; a=new int[size]; } void read_elements() { cout<<”\n input elements”; for(int i=0;i<size;i++) cin>>a[i]; } void print_elements() { cout<<”\n elements are \n”; for(int i=0;i<size;i++) cout<<endl<<a[i]; } ~array() { cout<<”\n inside destructor”; delete a; void main() { array array1(5); array1.read_elements(); array1.print_elements(); }
137:T1708,
Functions
Inline functions
Function default arguments
Function overloading
Pass by value
Classes and Objects in C++
Class Class is a data type or user defined data type. It is a collection of members, these members are 2 types. Data members Member functions In object oriented application development data is represent in the form of object
Difference between class & structure
class in c++
Structure in ‘C’
It is a collection of variables and functions
structure is a collection of variables
Contents is private, protected or public
Contents is public / global
It provide security for data
It does not provide security for data
It support polymorphism and inheritance
It does not support polymorphism and inheritance
Syntax of class in C++ class class-type-name { private : data-members; member-functions; public : data-members; member functions; }
What is data member ?
Variable declared inside class is called data member Data member define state of the object or value hold by object.
Member function in C++
Function defined inside a class is called member function Binding data members with member function inside a class called as Member function define behavior of object or operation performed on the object Private, public and protected are called as access specifier. Default members of class are private Default members of structure are global/ public
Access specifier/ access neighbours
Access specifier define visibility on accessibility of members declared within class. C++ provide 3 access specifiers
private
protected
public
Private
Default members of class are private Private member are accessible within class or members of the same class Private members are not accessible within non members on members of other classes. Data hiding in object oriented is achieved by declaring data members within class as private Protected Protected member access by members of same class and derived class Protected members cannot access by non members and members of other classes. public These members access by members of some class, derived class, non members and members of other classes.
Summary of Access Specifiers
with in class
Non members
Member of derived class
Member of Other class
Private
Yes
No
No
No
Protected
Yes
No
Yes
No
Public
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Object in C++
It is a instance of class
A variable of type class is called object
On creation of object memory is allocated for data members of class.
Syntax Class –name object –name, object-name,…. class defined structure of object
Program (Write a program to find area of triangular)
# include <iostream.h> [ writing a class within main- local class triangle classes & vice versa] { private : float base, height; // data members public : void read() { cout<<”\n input base height”; cin>>base>>height; } void find area () { float area=0.5*base*height; }; Size of the class is equal to some of data member size On creation of object memory is allocated for data members of class but not member functions Member functions operators on one or more than one object.
In this, contained object is designed behind container object.
This contained object is later sent to container object via member function.
In this approach contained object exists independent container object.
Aggregation in C++
-Aggregation composes various abstractions into a one defining a class.
-Objects can share other objects.
Example of Aggregation in C++
class alpha
{
int x;
public:
void read-x()
{
cin>>x;
}
void print.x()
{
cout<<x;
}
};
class beta
{
int y;
alpha *a;
public:
beta(alpha*p)
}
a=p;
}
void main()
{
alpha a1;
beta b1(&a1);
}
Member function with parameters of type class it receive object.
Member function can have parameters of sum class or different class.
This member function operates on more than one object.
Example
//WAP to compare marks of two students
# include<iostream.h>
class Marks
{
int rno;
int sub1,sub2;
public:
void read-marks()
{
cout<<”\n Input Two subjects”;
cin>>sub1>>sub2;
}
void compare(Marks s)
{
if (sub1 ==s,sub1&& sub2==s.sub2)
cout<<”\n Marks are not equal”;
}
};
void Main()
{
Marks stud1,stud2;
stud2.read-marks();
stud1.compare(stud2);
}
//WAP to compare two strings:
# include <iostream.h>
# include <string.h>
# include <conio.h>
class string
{
char str[10];
public:
void read-string()
{
cout<<”\n Input any string”;
cin>>str;
}
void print-string()
{
cout<<”\n String is “<<str;
}
void compare(string s)
{
if strcmp(str,s.str)==0)
cout<<”\n Strings are equal”;
else
cout<<”\n strings are not equal”;
}};
void main()
{
string str1,str2;
str1.read-string();
str2.read-string();
str1.compare(string2);
str1.print-string();
str2.print-string();
}
Member Function with return type of class in C++
if member function is having return type of class, it returns object.
int fun1[]
float fun2[]
double fun3[]
string fun4[]
Inheritance is a process of acquiring the properties and behavior of one class inside another class. Inheritance is process of using data member functions of one class inside another class. Deriving a class from existing class is called as inheritance.
Single Level Inheritance Multi level Inheritance Multiple inheritance Hierarchal inheritance Hybrid Inheritance
Example of Inheritance in C++
How to derive a class Syntax class derived –classname:<visibility Mode>base-classname, base-class-name,. . . . . . . . { data members; Member functions; };
What is visibility mode?
Visibility Mode defines the visibility or accessibility of base class members with in derived class. This visibility mode can be
Private
Public
Protected
Default visibility mode is private. When the visibility mode is private, public members of private members of derived class. The public members of the base class are accessibility by the member function of the derived class only. They are not accessible to the derived class object In both cases private members of the base class are not accessible to the derived class of member functions. They are accessible to the derived class objects. When the visibility Mode is public, public members of the base class becomes the public members of derived class.
Single level inheritance in C++
A derived class with a only one base class is called single level inheritance. Example Class base { . . . . . . . . . . . . }; class derived:public base { . . . . . . . . . . . . }; Example # include <iostream.h> class person { char name[10]; public; void read_name() { cout<<”\n Input name”; cin>> name; } void print_name() { cout<<”\n Name”<<name; } }; class employee :public person { float salary; public: void read_salary() { cout<<”\n Input salary”; cin>>salary; } void print _salary() { cout<<”\n Salary is “<<salary; }}; void main() {employee emp1; cout <<”\n << size of (emp1); emp1.read_name (); emp1.read_salary(); emp1.print_name(); emp1.print_salary(); } O/p : Input name a aa Input Salary 5000 Name aaa Salary is 5000 On creation of derived class object .Memory is allocated for data members of base class and derived class. Private Members of base class are not accessible derived class if base class provide public member functions it can access it.
Protected Member in C++
A protected member is accessible by the members functions class is immediately derived from it. It cannot be accessed by the functions outside these two classes. Example # include <iostream.h> class employee { protected : int empno; char name[10]; }; class salaried employee :public employee { float salary; public: void read() { cout<<”\n Input empno”; cin>> empno; cout<<”\n Input ename”; cin>> ename; cout<<”\n Input salary”; cin >>salary; } void print() { cout<<”\n Employee No”<<empno; cout<<”\n Employee Name”<< name; cout<<”\n Salary”<< salary; }}; void main() { salaried _employee emp1; emp1.read(); emp1.printf(); }
13a:T14bf,
Friend function
A non-member function cannot access private member of the class or object. Member function can access private members of “same type or same class or object. There could be a situation where more than one class where a function required to access private members of more than one type. If function is declared as friend of any class, it can able to access private members. Friend function is a non-member function, it is called like normal function. It is not bind with any object (OR) It is not called with object name. Friend function in C++ cannot private members of directly it is having parameters of type class. Friend return type function –name(parameters);
Example of Friend Function in C++
#include <iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class beta class alpha { int x; public: void read-x(); friend void compare (alpha,bets); }; class beta { int y; public: void read-y(); friend void compare(alpha,beta); }; void alpha::read-x() { cout<<”\n Input x”; cin>>x; } void beta::read-y() { cout<<”\n Input y@; cin>>y; } void compare (alpha a, beta b) { if( cout<<”\n Equal”; else cout <<”\n Not equal”; } void main() { alpha alpha1; beta beta1; alpha1.read-x(); beta1.read-y(); compare(alpha1,beta1); (friend function) } #include <iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class Marks; class Student { int rno; char name[10]; public: void read-student(); friend void find result(student name); class marks { int sub1,sub2; public: void read-Marks(); friend void find –result (student,Marks); }; void student:: read-student() { cout<<”\n Input rollno”; cin>>rno; cout<<”\n Input name”; cin>>name; } void marks:: read-marks() { cout<<”\n Input Marks”; cin >>sub1>>sub2; } void find –result(student s,Marks M) { cout<<”\n Roll no”<<S.rno; cout<<”\n Name”<<s.name; if (M.sub1<40 M.sub2<40) O/p: Input name RAM Input roll no 101 Input Marks
//Friend function which operates on similar type objects
A friend of class can be function or class ,having full access rights to use private members
Syntax of Friend Class
friend class-name; Example of Friend Class in C++ # include<iostream.h> class student { int rno; char name[10]; friend Marks; }; class Marks { int sub1,sub2; student stud; public: void read_marks() { cout<<”\n Input rno”; cin>>stud.rno; cout<<”\n Input Name; cin>>stud.name; cout <<”\n Input two subjects”; cin>> stud.name; cout<<”\n Input two subjects”; cin>> stud.name; cout<<”\n Input two subjects”; cin>>sub1>>sub2; } void find-result() { cout<<”\n Roll no”<<stud.rno; cout<<”\n Name”<<stud.name; if(sub1<40|| sub2<40) cout<<”\n Result Fail”; else cout<<”\n Result Pass”; }}; void Main() { Marks stud1; stud1.read_Marks(); stud1.find_result(); } Example # include <iostream,h> class address { char hno[10]; char street[10]; public: void read_address() { cout<<”\n Input hno”; cin>>hno; cout<<”\n Input street”; cin>>street; } friend person; }; class person { char name[10]; public: void read_name() { cout<<”\n Input Name”; cin>>name; } void print_details(address a) { cout<<”\n Name”<<name; cout<<”\n Hno”<<a.hno; cout<<”\n Street”<<a.street; }}; void main() { Person p1; address p1add; p1.read_name(); p1add.read_address(); p1.print_details(p1add); }
13b:T1852,
Member functions A member function perform 2 types of operation -Modification or modifier -Accessor
What is a Modifier in C++ ?
A modifier is a function which modify the statement of the object A member function which modify values of the object is called modifier function mutator function
What is Accessor in C++ ?
An accessor is member function which does not modify values of the object. Example:
WAP to find area of rectangle:
#include <iostream.h> class triangle { float l,b; public: void read() { cout<<”\n Input l,b values”; cin >>l >>b; } void find-area() { float a=l*b: cout<<”\n Area is “<<a; } }; void Main() { rectangle reactangle1; rectangle1.read(); rectangle1.find-area(); rectangle.rectangle 2; rectangle2. read(); rectangle2.find_area(); } o/p : Input l,b values Input l,b values 1.2 2.5 3.5 3.5 area is 42 Area is 8.75
Dynamic objects -
Object created inside heap area called dynamic object. An object created during run time called dynamic object This object is created using new operator New operator create object and return address this address, this address hold by pointer variable Syntax Declare pointer variable of type class (it holds address of object) class-name * variable_name; int *p; int *q; float *r; double *d; rectangle *r; Creating object pointer-variable-name=new class-name
// wap to find the area of circle
#includle<iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class circle { float r; public: void main() { cout<<”\n input r”; ci>>r; } void find_area() { float a=3.147 * r *r; cout<<”\n area is”<<a; } } void main() { circle circle1; circle1=new circle; (*circle1).read(); (*circle1).find_area(); delete circle1; circle1=NULL; } o/p : input r r=1.5 Area is Example
WAP to find result of student
#include<iostream.h> class student { protected : (not access non members) int no; public : void read_student() { cout<<”\n input r no”; cin>>rno; cout<<”\n input two subject marks”; void find_result() { cout<<”\n rollno”<<rno; if(sub<40 || sub<40) cout<<”\n result fail”; else cout<<”\n result pass”; } }; void main() { student *stud1; stud1=new student; (*stud1).read_student(); (*stud1).find_result(); delete.stud1; stud1=NULL; } Note : The class which doesn’t have any data member whose size 1 byte class is not empty data type
Defining Member Function
C++ allows to define member function inside class and outside class
inside class
outside class
Inside class
IF member function definition is given within class if becomes inline.
Inline functions are expanded during compile time.
Q-15 is pos to declare a function as inline without using keyword inline ?
Ans : Yes, writing function inside class eg: class Alpha { public : void fun1() void man() { { } ; compile -> Alpha alpha alpha; } void main() { alpha apha1; alpha1.func1(); }
Outside class
Member function definition is given outside the class in order to avoid inline. Syntax: <returntype> <class_name>::<function-name>(parameters) { statements; }
eg:
# include<iostream.h> class time { int hh,mm,ss; public : void read_time(); void print_time(); Declaration }; void time:: read_time() { cin>>hh>>mm>>ss; } void time :: print_time() { cout<<endl<<hh<<”lt”<<MM<<”lt”<<ss; } void main() { time time_in; time time_out; time_in.read_time(); time_out.read_time(); time_in.print_time(); time_out.print_time(); }
13c:T1fdc,
Function Overloading
Defining more than one function with same name by changing -->number of parameters -->types of parameters --?order of parameters is called function overloading in C++ Function is overloaded when more than one function perform similar operation with different implementation A group of functions which perform similar operation refer with one name. overloaded function having polymorphism behaviour This is called name polymorphism There should not be any two functions with same
What is name Mangling
It is a process of giving unique name to over loaded function by compiler Compiler gives unique name each every overloaded function of linker Linker recognize the function with name
void sort(float a[], int size) { for (int i=0; i<size; i++) for (int j=0; j<size-i;j++) { if(a[j]>a[j+1]) { float t=a[j]; a[j]=a[j+1]; a[j+1]=l; } } }
void main() { int a[]={5,2,4}; float b[]={1.5,2.5,1.2}; sort(a,3); sort(b,3); int i; for(i=0;i<3;i++) cout<<endl<<a[i]<<”lt”<<b[i]; } }
void sort(float a[], int size) { for (int i=0; i<size; i++) for (int j=0; j<size-i;j++) { if(a[j]>a[j+1]) { float t=a[j]; a[j]=a[j+1]; a[j+1]=l; } } }
void main() { int a[]={5,2,4}; float b[]={1.5,2.5,1.2}; sort(a,3); sort(b,3); int i; for(i=0;i<3;i++) cout<<endl<<a[i]<<”lt”<<b[i]; }
Example of Function Overloading in C++
# include <iostream.h>
float find-area(float.h) { return 3.147*r*r; }
float find-are(float b, float h) { return 0.5*b*h; } void main() { cout <<”n1.Area of circle”; cout<<”n2. Area of Triangle”; cout<<”\n input your option”; int opt; cin>> opt; switch(opt) { case 1 : float r; cout<<”\n input r”; cin >> r; cout<< “\n Area of circle is ”<< find-area®; break; case 2: float b,h; cout<<”\n input b,h”; cin>>b>>h; cout<<”\n Area of triangle is ”<< find –area(b) brak; default: cout<< “\n invalid option”; } }
// find output ?
# include <iostream.h>
void func1(int x) { cout<<”\n inside one parameter function”; }
void func1(int x, int y=0) { cout<< “\n inside two parameter function”; }
void main() { fun1(10,20); func1(30); }
Explanation
The above program displaying compile time error. Because there are two functions which match with function call sending one argument eg -1 : # include <iostream.h> fun c overloading void print(int x) { count <<”\n inside inter print function”; }
Calling on invoking function by sending address on pointer is called pass by address. In pass by address function parameters are declared of type pointer.
Advantages of pass by address in C++
Sharing data between the functions. Increase efficiency of program Note :
Invoking function by sending array is implicitly sending address.
eg : # include <iostream.h> void swap(int *p,int *q) { int l=*p; *p=*q; *q=t; }
Calling or invoking function by sending value type In pass by reference function parameters are declared reference type. This allows to share data between functions.
Example # include<iostream.h> void swap(int &x, intt &y) { x=x+y; y=x-y; x=x-y; } void main() { int a,b; cout<<”\n input a,b values”; cin>>a>>b; swap(a,b); cout<<”\n after swapping \n”; cout<<a<<”\t”<<b; }
o/p : 0 10
eg : # include<iostream.h> void func1(int x) { cout<<”\n inside pass by value”; } void func1 (int y) { cout<<” \n inside pass by alias” ; } void main() { int a =10; fun1(a); }
Explanation
The above program display compile time error because the syntax of calling function by sending value and alias is same. The function with value type parameters can’t be overloaded function with pointer type parameter
Example
# include<iostream.h>
void func1(int x)
{ cout<<”\n inside value type parameter” }
void func1(int *y)
{ int a=10; func1(&a) ; fun1(a); }
13d:T24c3,
Functions in C++
What is a function in C++?
Function is a self-contained block which contain set of instructions.
It is a small program with in program
It performs operations.
Advantages of Functions in C++
Reusability: Write code once and use may time.
Modularity: Dividing programming instructions according their operations into small programs modules.
Simple: Easy to understand or road.
Efficiency :Functions increase efficiency of the program by avoiding redundancy code.
Functions can be divided into 2 parts in C++
Function Declaration
Function Definition.
Function can be defined in 4 ways
Function with parameters with return type.
Function with parameters without return type.
Function without parameterswithout return type.
Function without parameter with return type.
C++ Functions with out parameters and without return type
This function return type is void and parameters are void. void fun1(void) //return type as void { } void func1() { } func1() // default return type of any function is integer. { } #include <iostream.h> void draw-line() { cout<<end ; for (int i=1;i<=40;i++) cout<<”*”; } void Main() { draw-line(); cout<<”\n object oriented language”; draw-line(); }
When function is called execution control switched from calling function block to called function block.
After executing called function, execution control transfer to calling function block.
Memory for function is allocated on calling and deal located after executing.
Function with parameters without return type
What is a parameter in C++?
Parameters are local variables, which receive value from calling function.
The parameters which hold by function or called format parameters.
argumentsà sender, parameters àreceiver. printf(“%d”,a) => having 2 arguments printf() à It is not valid because one argument must receive data à format argument, sender à actual argument.
If function required input from calling function to perform operation it require parameters.
C++ Supports 3 types of calling function
Pass by value.
pass by address
pass by alias /reference.
Example #include<iostream.h> void draw-line(int length) { cout<<endl; for (int i=1;i<=length;i++) cout<<”*”; } void Main() { draw –line(20); cout<<”\n C++”; draw-line(40); cout<<”\n object oriented”; draw- line (20); } O/p: *********…..20times C++ *******----40 times Object oriented *******----20 times
Pass by Value in C++
If function is called by sending value type variables or constant. In pass by value function parameter are declares of type value. Example of Pass by Value (pass by value) #include <iostream.h> void draw-line(int length,charch) { cout<<endl; for(int i=1;i<=length;i++) cout<<ch; } void main() { draw-line (20,’*’); cout<<“\n object oriented “; draw-line(20,’$’); } O/p: ************* -- - - - 20 times ############# ------- 30 times object oriented $$$$$$$$-------- 20 times
C++ Inline Functions
Every time function is called it takes a lot of extra time to executing a series of instructions like jump to the function ,pushing arguments to the stack and returning to the calling function.
When a function is small a substantial percentage of
To eliminate the cost of calls to small functions the solution is inline function
Inline Function
An inline function is declared with the key word inline
An inline function is a function that expanded inline when it is invoked
The compiler replaces the function call with corresponding function code
Syntax of Inline Functions inline function – header { function body } Macros in ‘c’ language ( converts complex express it gives logical error) # define sum(a,b)a+b void main() { int r=sum(5,2)*sum*2,5); printf(“\n %d”,r); } o/p :Disadvantages of macros in C++
Macros are not functions
If macros are used in complex expression it leads to logic errors.
There is no type checking is done during complication
inline return type function-name (parameters) { statements; * inline function is a function is } expand during compile time Prog : # include<iostream.h> { inline void func1() { cout<<endl<<”This is inline funciton”; cout<<endl<<”This is expanded”; during compile time “; cout<<endl<<”This avoid control switching between fuctions”; } void main() { fun1(); func2(); } Rules for inline expansion (situation where inline expansion doesn’t work)
If inline function contains loops (for loop, while loop, d-while) it does not expand as inline
If inline function having return type and return value.
inline void print() { for(int i=1;i<=10;i++) cout<<endl<<i; } void main() { Expl : In the above program point a function is not expand as inline becoz inline function contain loop(for) 3) if inline function are recursive, not expanded as online
The above rules various from one compiler to another
eg : # include<iostream.h> inline int pow(int num, int p) { int res=1; for(int i=1; i<=1;i++) res= res * num; return res; } void main() { int r1=pow(5,2); cout<<endl<<r1; }
Function with default arguments - - > (optional parameters)
C++ allows to write function with parameters by assigning values
Parameter having values doesn’t required to specify values in function call.
Default arguments are given from right to left
syntax : return type function – name (param, param,param=value,param=value,----) { statements; } eg : void funct1(int x, int y, intz=10) { cout<<endl<<x; cout<<endl<<y; cout<<endl<<Z; } void main() { fun1(30,40,50); func1(90,80) } void fun1(int x=10, int y) { int z=20 }
# include<iostream.h> void sample-inrest(float amt, int time, float rate=1.5) { float si=(amt * time *rate)/100; cout<<”\n simple interest is”<<si; } void main() { simple-intrest(5000,12); simple_intrest(7000,24,2.5); }
13e:T6f5,
Objects
‘C’ is a collection of functions but ‘C++’ is a collection of class and object
Object is an instance of class
Allocating memory for members of class, is called as instance
eg : int x float y instance employee emp
What do you mean by SBI of an object ?
SBI - - > state behavior identity
SBI stand for state, Behavior and identity since every object has the above the rule
State : It is a just a value to the attribute of an object at a particular time. Behavior : It describes the action and their reactions of that object Identity : An object has an identity that characterizes its own existence
Class
Object
Data type/ user defined
Instance of class
It is a logical entity
Object is a physical entity
Class does not have state
it having state.
13f:Ta75,
Object Oriented Programming
A programming language which supports
Encapsulation
Polymorphism
Inheritance
class
object
Abstraction
Name some pure object oriented languages
small talk
Java
Eiffel
Sather
C++ is a partial object oriented programming language not pure.
why it is not pure object oriented language. because C++, can write a program in c++ without using opps.
Encapsulation
It is a process of binding data with instructions which operates data into single entity.
It is a process of grouping data and instructions
Advantages
Data hiding
Binding
Object based programming languages
The programming language which allows to use existing objects but does not allow to build classes is called object based programming language. eg : vbscript, Java script
Class based programming languages
A programming language allows to build classes object but does not support inheritance and polymorphism is called class based programming languages. eg : Visual basic 4.0
Programming elements are 2 types
Data
Instructions
Advantage of OOP'S
object oriented programming
modularity
Reusability
Readability
Extensibility
Security
efficiency
Binding data with instructions or related operations is called encapsulation
What is data hiding ?
Preventing data access from unrelated operation Adv : Which allows to develop secured applications
What is Binding ?
Linking data with related operations
140:Tc9e,
Exception Handling
Exceptions are unusual conditions in a program.
They may cause the programs to fail or may lead to errors. They must be deal with.
There are 2 types of exceptions in C++
synchronous and asynchronous
“out-of- range index” and “over –flow” are synchronous type.
Errors caused by the events beyond the central of the program like keyboard interrupts are called asynchronous interrupts.
Exception is a logical error
Exception is an error which occur during runtime (Because Invalid input)
Exceptions Example in C++
# include <iostream.h> int main() { int n1,n2; cout<<”Input any 2nos”; cin >>n1>>n2; n3=n1/n2; cout<<n3; } try catch &throw (not recognized turbo c++3.0)
Purpose of C++ Exception Handling
The purpose of exceptional handling in C++ is to defect and report an “exceptional circumstance.
Then appropriate action can be taken.
The error handling code basically consists of two segments.
One to detect errors and to throw exceptions.
The other to catch the exceptions and to take appropriate action.
Structure of Try block in C++
This block contain code which has to be monitored for exception handling.
This block contain condition or business block
try { statements; throw exception-type; }
Structure of Catch block in C++
This block contain error logic.
Exception thrown by try block handled by using catch block.
catch (exception-type var) { statements; }
Example of C++ Exception Handling
# include <iostream.h> void main() { int n1,n2,n3; clrscr(); cout<<”\n Input any two numbers”; cin >> n1>>n2; try { if (n2==0) throw 0; (is type of int) else n3=n1/n2; } catch (int x) { cout<<”\n cannot divide number with zero”; } } Example of Exception Handling in C++ # include <iostream.h> # include<conio.h> # include<string.h> class login-exception { }; void Main() { char uname[10],password [10]; login –exception invalid –login; cout<<”\n Input usernamr”; cin>>uname; cin >>password; try { if (strcmp (uname,”nit”)==0&& strcmp (password ,”nit”); cout <<”\n Welcome to my app”; else throw invalid _login; } catch(login_exception e) { cout<<”\n Invalid username or password”; }}
141:T12ed,
I/O streams
C++ uses the concept of stream and stream classes to implement I/O operations with console and disk files
The input functions are defined in istream class
The output functions are defined in ostream class.
The IOstream class inherits the properties of istream and ostream classes.
Stream is a class which provides set of functions to perform input and output operations
Stream represents input source and output destination
Output Stream in C++
Output stream class provides output functions
Put()
Member function of ostream class, cout.put(ch);// displays the value of variable ch.
It can also be used to output a line of text, character by character.
Write()
Member function of ostream class, write() function displays the entire line cout. write(linesize); Line represents the name of the string to be displayed, size indicates the no.of characters to display. It doesn’t stop displaying the characters when null character is encountered. Example of Output Stream in C++ # include<iostream.h> void main() { cout.put(‘A’); // we can use only one character cout<<’A’; cout<<10; cout<<1.5; cout.write(“Hello C++”,q); cout.write(“Hello c++”,b); cout<<”Hello C++”; }
Format functions
Width() to specify the required field size for displaying an output. cout.width(w); The output will be printed in the field of w characters wide at the right end of the field.
Example of Format Functions
int a=10;(2 width) printf(“%4d”,a); //(2 for space)
precision():
By default, the floating numbers are printed with six digits after the point, We can specify the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point. cout.precision(d); sets d number of digits to the right of decimal pair.
Example
# include<iostream.h> void main() { int a=10; cout.width(5); cout<<a<<endl; float b=1.234; cout.precission(2); cout<<b<<endl; } o/p : - - - 10 1.23 Note : Numbers are right aligned.
FILL ()
The unused position of the field are filled with white spaces, by default we can fill them by the designs character by using fill() function cout.fill(ch); ch is used to fill the unused positions { int a=10; cout.width(5); cout.fill(‘*’); cout<<a<<endl; }
Setf() :
cout .setf(ios::show point) displays tralling zeros cout.setf (ios:: show pos) displays plus sign before a positive number
Example
# include <iostream.h> # include<conio.h> void main(){ flaot a=10; cout.setf(ios::showpoint); cout<<a<<endl; int b=20; cout.setf(ios:: showpos); cout<<b<<endl; } O/p: 10.000000 -20
Istream class in C++
This class provide member functions to performs input operations.
get():
Member function of istream class. Fetches a single character including a blank space,tab and new line characters, get() can be used in 2 ways; cin .get(ch);//get a character from keyboard and assigns it to ch. ch=cin.get(); also can be used
getline():
Member function of istream class. We can read the text …. oriented getline() cin.getline(line,size); Read character input into the variable line The reading is terminated as soon as either ‘\n’ is encountered of size characters are read.
Example
# include <iostream.h> # include <conio.h> void main() { char anem[10]; clrscr(); cout<<”\n Input name’: cin .get line(name,10); cout<<name; }
Example
# include <iostream.h> #include <conio.h> void main() { char ch; clrscr(); cout<<”\n Input any character including space”; ch=cin.get(); cout<<endl<<ch; }
142:T1456,
Templates/Generics
- - > Template is a key word. - - > It constructs a family of related functions on class - - > Template in C++ also called as generics - - > parameterized templates enable you to construct a family of related functions on classes. - - > Use templates when you need to write lots of nearly identical things. There are 2 types of templates in C++ 1.Function template 2.Class template Example of a Template in C++ - - > Template in is a parameterized type which receive data type as an argument. - - > One algorithm can be applied various data types Generic function/function template - - > Generic function perform operation on various data types - - > Generic function is function generator ,which generate number of functions based on data type - - > Programmer does not required to overload function, using generic function compiler generate number of functions based data types Syntax
Template<class
type-name/place holder-name> return-type function-name(parameters) { Statements; } Type-name is a place holder name which hold data type Or Type-name is a parameter –name which hold data type as argument Example of a Template in C++ #include<isotream.h> Template<class T> T max(T x,T y) { If (x>y) Return x; Else Return y; } Void main( ) { Int M1=max(10,20); Float M2=max(1.5,2.5) Cout<<’/n Max of two integers”<<M1; Cout<<’/n Max of two floats”<<M2; } E.g: # include<iostream.h> (bubble sort) template <class T> void sort (T,*a,int size) { T temp; for(int i=0;i<size;i++) for (int j=0; j<size-1;j++) { if (a[j]>a[j+i} { temp=a[j]; a[j]=a[j+1]; a[j+1]=temp; } } } void main() { int a [] ={ 20,10,40,50,30}; float b[]={1.5,1.4,1.3,1.1,1.2}; clrscr(); sort(a,5); sort(b,5); int i; for(i=0;i<5;i++) cout<<”\n”<<a[i}<<”\t”<<b[i]; }
You use a class template(also called a generic class (for class generator) to define a pattern for class definitions Generic container classes are good examples whether you have a list of intergers or any other type the basic operations are the same(insert, delete, index,etc) you can define a class structure value with generate operations once at the system generate class definitions on the fly: syntax : template<class type-name,class type-name,…..> class class-name { data members; member functions; }
Class template
Genaral form of defining an object of generic class class-name<type>obj; type is the name of the data that the class will be operating upon.
Example
#include<iostream.h> template<class T> class matrix { T int a[2] [2]; // we stop 2 types means int & float only T type Templates public: void read_matrix() { for(int i=0;i<2;i++) cin>>a[i][j]; } void print_Matrix() { for(int i=0;i<2;i++) { for(int j=0;j<2;j++) cout<<a[i][j]<<”\t”; cout<<endl; }}}; void main() { Matrx<float>M2; Matrix<int>M1; cout<<”\n size is”<<sizeof(M1); M1.read_Matrix(); M2.read_Matrix(); M1.print_Matrix(); M2.Print_Matrix(); } o/p: Size is 8 size is 16 2 4
Example
# include<iostream.h> template<class T> class stack { T a[10]; int top; public : stack() { top=-1; } void push(T e) { if(top)>9) cout<<”\n stack is full”; else a[++top]=e; } void pop() { if(top<0) cout<<”\n stack is empty”; ele cout<<endl<<a[top--]; } }; void main() { stack<int>stack1; stack<float>stack 2; stack1.push(10); stack1.push(20); stack1.push(30); stack1.pop(); stack1.pop(); stack2.push(1.5); stack2.push(2.5); stack2.pop(); } Example # include<iostream.h> template<class T1,class T2> class alpha { T1 x; T2 Y; public : void need() { cout<<”\n input x,y values”; cin>>x>>y; } void print() { cout<<”\n x=”<<x; cout<<”\n y=”<<y; } }; void main() { alpha<int,float>a1; alpha<float.double>a2; clrscr(); cout<<endl<<sizeof(a1); cout<<endl<<sizeof(a2); }
143:T2e1a,
Operator Overloading (Polymorphism)
The mechanism of giving special meanings to an operator is known as operator overloading.
This is one of the exciting features of C++
This technique has enhanced the power of extensibility of C++.
This technique permits to add two user defined variables with the same syntax that is applied to basic types.
Provides the new definitions for most of the C++ operators.
Example of Operator Overloading in C++
Int x=10; Matrix M1; Int y=20; Matrix M2; all are used under defined data type Int z; Matrix M3; Z=x+y; M3=M1+M2;// error
Exisiting operators perform operations only on predefined data types but cannot perform operation on user defined data types
Creating a new definition of an existing operations is called operator overloading.
Operator overloading not allows to create new operator.
We can overload all the C++ operators except ,
Class member acess operators(.,.*)
Scope resolution operator(::)
Size of operator(size of)
Conditional operator(?:)
Defining operator overloading in C++
Syntax Return type operator operator –symbol(operand is) { Statements; }
Overloaded operator is a specific function whose name is operator symbol.(int operator+( ) );
Rules for overloading operations
Only existing operators can be overloaded. The operator must have at least one operand of user-defined type .New operator cannot be created. We cannot change the basic meaning of the operator.
They cannot be overridden.
When binary operators overloaded through member function, the left hand operand must be an object of the relevant class.
Overload operator is a specific function whose name is operator symbol.
// overloading binary = =operator for comparing two strings
# include<iostream.h> # include<string.h> class string { char str[10]; public; void read_string( ) { cout<<”Input any string”; cin>>str; } Void print_string( ) { } Int operator==(string S2) { If(strmcmp(str,s2.str)==0) return 1; else return 0; }}; void main ( ) { string str1,str2; Str1.read_string( ); Str2.read_string( ); Str1.print_string( ); Str2.print_string( ); If(str 1==str2) cout<<”In strings are equal”; else cout<<”In strings are not equal”; }
//overload binary+operator for adding two matrices.
Example #include <iostream.h> class matrix { int a[2][2]; public: void read_matrix( ) { cout<<”In Input elements of Matrix”; for (int i=0; i<2;i++) for(int j=0; J<2;j++) cin>>a[i][j]; } void print_matrix( ) { for (int i=0;i<2;i++) for ( int j=0;j<2;i++) cout<<a[i][j]<<”lt”; cout<<endl; }} Matriox operator+(matrix M2) { Matirx M3; for ( int i=0;i<2;i++) for ( int j=0;j<2;i++) M3.a[i][j]=a[i][j]+M2.a[1][j]; return M3; } void Main() { Matrix Matrix1, Matrix2, Matrix3, Matrix1.read_matrix(); Matrix2.read_matrix(); Matrix3=Matrix1+Matrix2; Matrix1.print_Matrix( ); Matrix2.print_Matrix( ); Matrix3.print_Matrix( ); }
Overloading Binary operator
A binary operator takes two operandas member function overloading binary operator will have one explicit augument. EX:overloading binary+operator Test operator+(test obj); If test is name of the class and obj1,obj2 and obj3 are the objects of the test then the expression. Obj3=obj1+obj2; Invokes the function overloading binary+operator Obj1 invokes the function and obj2 will be passed as an argument. The function returns the sum of obj1 and obj2 and is assigned to obj3.
Overloading uniary operators
Member function overloading unary operators does no have expenditure have explicit arguments. Eg// overloading ++,-- operators --overlaoded unary ++,-- does not diff prefix and postfix both are same. Example # include <iostream.h> # include<conio.h> Class integer { Int n; Public; Integer(int x) { n=x; } Void operator ++( ){ N=n+5; } Void operator—( ) { n=n-5; } Cout<<endl<<n; }}; Void main( ) { Integer a(10); a.print( ); a++; a.print(); a--; a.print(); }
Overloading operator using friend
If overloaded operator is member, it operates on similar data types/objects
Friend operator can operate on more than one type of object/data type.
The operators cannot be overloaded using friend function.
Assignment operator = Function call operator ( ) Subscripting operator [ } Class member access operator----> Member functions can be used to overload them.
Friend function overloading Binary operator
Takes two explicit arguments Ex:friend test operator+(test obj1,test obj2) The function adds the values of the data members of the objects obj1 and obj2 when invoked and return their sum. The syntax for invoking a friend function will be same as that of member function i.e obj3=obj1+obj2; The objects are passed explicitly to the function and their sum is assingned to obj3. Class Alpha class beta { { intx; inty; Public: public; Void read_x() void read_y() { { Cin>>x; cin>>y; } } }; }; Example # include<iostream.h> class beta; class alpha { intx; public: void read_x( ) { cout<<”In Input the value of X’; cin>>x; } { Cout<<”In x=”<<x; } Friend int operator==(alpha,beta); }; Class beta { Int y; Public; Void read _y() { Cout<<”In put Y”; Cin>>y; } {void print_Y() { Cout<<’In y=<<y; } Friend int operator ==(alpha,beta); }; Int operator==(alpha a,beta b) { If (a.x==b.y) return 1; else Return 0; } void main ( ) { alpha alpha1; beta beta1; alpha1.read_x(); beta1.read_y(); If (alpha1==beta 1) cout<<”/n no.of objects are equals”; else cout<< “/n no.of objects are not equals”; }
(>>,<<) overloading extraction (..) and insertion(<<) operator for operating on userdefined data types.
Pointer is a derived data type. A variable of type of pointer is called pointer variable. A pointer variable hold address of memory location
Advantages of Pointers in C++
Dynamic memory allocation
Allows to share data between functions
Increment the effiecient of the program
Disadvantages of Pointers in C++
Not secured
Pointer Declaration
Syntax of Pointers in C++ <data type> * variable – name ; int * * - - > indirection operator Dereferencing operator Value of given address What is address ?
If is an unsigned interger value given to each byte of memory.
Address is a pointer value.
int *a
The size of pointer variable depends on compiler
16 bit compiler - - > 2 bytes 32 bit compiler - - > 4 bytes Example C++ program using Pointers # include <iostream.h> void main() { int *p; char *q; float *r; double *d; cout << sizeof(p) << endl; cout<<sizeof(q)<<endl; cout<<sizeof(r)<<endl; cout<<sizeof(d)<<endl; o/p : 4 4 BCZ turbo c++ 32 bit compiler 4 4
Write a program to swap two numbers
# include <iostream.h> void main() { int n1,n2; cout<< “\n input any two numbers”; cin>> n1 >> n2; int *p,*q; p=&n1; Q=&n2; int n3; n3=*p; // *p - - > value of 500 *p=*q; // *q - - > value of 502 *q=n3; cout<<”\n n1=”<<*p; cout<<”\n n2=”<<*q; } o/p : input - - > 10 20 After swapping value -> 20 10 Example # include <iostream.h> void main() { int n1,n2; cout<<”\n input any two numbers”; cin>>n1>>n2; int *p,*q; p=&n1; q=&n1; *p=*p+*q; // value of 500=value of 500 + value of 500 *q=*p-*q; = 10+20= 30 *p=*p-*q; cout<<”\n after swapint \n”; cout<<”\n n1=”<<n1; cout<<”\n n2=” <<n2; } o/p : input two values => 10 20 After swapping => 20 10
Dynamic memory Allocation
Allocating memory during the execution if runtime program is called as dynamic memory allocation
Advantage :
It avoiding wastage of memory
Increase efficiency of program
What is static memory allocation
Size of memory allocated by program, known at compile time on before executing program. is called static memory allocation.
What is dynamic memory allocation
Size of memory allocated by program is not known at compile time but known at runtime is called dynamic memory allocation
new
delete c++ achieves dynamic memory allocation using 2 keywords
new(in c, it is called malloc)
It allocates memory of n bytes in heap area and return address.
Heap area is dynamic memory area, which is manage by c++ program.
syntax : <pointer - variable – name >=new datatype[size];
size can be constant or variable
size is optional Texa code area Data area global variable Heap area Dynamic stack area local variable are use.
// wap to add two numbers (allocating memory dynamically)
# include <iostream.h> void main() { int *a,*b,*c; a=new int; b=new int; c=new int; cout<< “\n input any two numbers”; cin>> *a>> *b; *c=*a-*b; cout<<”\n sum is”<<*c; } o/p : input any two numbers.
Delete:
Delete unreserved memory which is reserved using new operator. delete<pointer-variabel>;
Difference betweenMalloc and new
Malloc
new
It is a function
It is a (operator) keyword
It is reserved memory in one block.
It is allocates one or more than one block of memory.
Malloc does required type casting
It doesn’t required type casting.
It does not understand constructor
It understand constructor.
Difference between Delete and Free:
Delete
Free
It is a key word
It is a function
understand destruction
It doesn’t understand destructor.
WAP to for swapping two numbers
# include <iostream.h> void main() { int *a, *b; a=new int; b=new int; cout<<” \n input any two numbers\ n”; cin>> *a>>*b; *a =*a+*b; *b=*a-*b; *a=*a-*b; cout<< “\n After swapping two numbers\n”; cout<< *a << “\t”<<*b; delete a; delete b; cout<< *a; cout<< *b; Pointer variable which holdsgf an address of memory location whose lifetime is over is called as Dangling pointer. Drawback:
It splits some logical error.
NULL
NULL is a pointer value.
If pointer variable assign NULL, it does not point to any memory location.
145:T15c7,
Files in C++
File is a named memory location in secondary storage. File is collection of data stored permanently with in disk. Of stream (output file stream calss) Output file stream class. This class opens the file in output Mode. Always output mode used for writing. Hierarchy of of stream class
File Constructor
osstem (char *fname)
This constructor create osstream class object with given file name.
ostream(char*fname,int mode)
This constructor create ostrem class object with give filename and mode.
ios::out -this create new file ios:: app-this open existing file for appending.
//program to create marks file to store student marks details
# include <iostream.h> # include <fstream.h> void Main() { char name[10]; int sub1,sub2; ofstrem fout (“ c:\\Marks”); char ch; clrscr(); cout<<”\n Input name”; cin>>name; cout<<”\n Input two subjects”; cin >>sub1>>sub2; fout<<name<<endl; fout<<sub1<<endl; fout<<sub2<<endl; cout<<”\n Add another student?”; cin >>ch; } while(ch!=’n’); }
ifstream (input file stream class in C++)
input file stream class
This class is used to read data from existing file.
it opens the file in input mode(reading the file).
Constructor
ifstream (char *fname)
This constructor create if stream class object with given filename.
It opens the given file name in input mode.
Program to read contents of file in C++
# include <iostream.h> #include <conio.h> # include <fstream.h> void main() { char name[10]; int sub1,sub2; ifstream fin clrscr(); while(1) { fin >>name; fin >>sub1>>sub2; if (fin.eof ()) break; cout<<endl<<name<<”\t<<sub1<<”\t”<<sub2; }
//Reading address from address book/reading objects from file
# include <iostream.h> # include<conio.h> #include<fstream.h> class address { char name[10]; char street[10]; char city [10]; public : void read_address() { cout<<”\n Input Name”; cin >>Name; cout<<”\n Input Street”; cin>>street; cout<<”\n Input city”; cin >>city; } void print_address() { cout <<endl<<Name<<”\t”<<street<<”\t”<<city; }}; void main() { address add; ifstream fin(“c:\\address_book”); while(1) { fin .read((char*)&add,sizeof(add)); if (fin,eof()); break; add.print_address(); } fin.close(); }
MANIPULATION OF FILE POINTERS in C++
We can move the file pointer to any desired position in the file. We can take the control of the file pointer. The functions to position the file pointer at desired position. seekg(offset,position);seekp(offset,position); offset parameter represents number of bytes and position parameter takes one of the following 3 constants; ios::beg ios :: cur ios:: end fin.seekg(4,ios::beg); fin.seekg(2, ios::beg); fin.seekg(3,ios::cur); fin.seekg(-4,ios::cur); cout<<fin.tellg(); à fin.seekg(-2,ios::end); => (7-2)=>5 offset position Reading Address randomly: fin.seekg(addno*sizeof(add),ios ::beg); void main() { address add; int addno; ifstream fin(“c:\\address_book”); cout<<”\n Input address number”; cin>>adddno; fin.seekg(addno*sizeof (add),ios::beg); fin read((char*)&add,size of (add)); if fin.eof()) cout<<”\n Invalid address number”; else add print_address(); }
146:T1976,
Constructors
Constructor is a special function in C++ Constructor is used for initialization object auto init of object is done using constructor An object is never created without constructor
Why Constructor
Data members can’t initialize within the class class A { int x=10; int Y=20; };
Data members are not initialize within the class
> object will created with garbage value.
eg : class A { int x; int y; }; void main() { A obj1;
Data members are public obj1 can be in it at the time creating object
class A { public; int x; int y; } void main() // public data members are not secured
class A ( Provide data members cannot initialize at the time of creating object )
{ int x; int y; }; void main() { A.obj={10.20}; } Statements which has to be executed on creating of object are included inside constructor.
Properties of constructor in C++(C/S of constructor) - >
Construction name must be the same as class name in C++ Constructor doesn’t have return type not even void It is called automatically at the time of creating object There can be a multiple constructor within the class It can be declared as private, public and protect Constructor are not inherited
C++ Default constructor
Constructor without any parameters is called default constructor. These are two types of constructors in C++ Compiler defined default constructor User defined default constructor.
What is difference between Member function and Constructor in C++?
Member function
Constructor
Its name should not be the same as class name
Its name must be the same as class name
It has to be called explicitly
It is called implicitly at the time of creating object.
It can be called any no.of times on object
It is called only once on object.
Its operation is modifying and accessing
Its operation is initialization
They are inherited
They are not inherited
C++ Compiler defined default constructor
If there is no constructor within class, compiler write a constructor without any parameters, This constructor is called default constructor of compiler.
User defined default constructor in C++
It user defined any constructor inside class without any parameters, it is called userdefined default constructor. Example # include<iostream.h> class triangle { float base, height; public : triangle() { base=1.5; height=2.5; } void printf() { cout<<”\n base=”<<base; cout<<”\n height=”<<height; } }; void main() { triangle triangle1; triangle triangle2; triangle1.print(); triangle2.print(); } o/p : base=1.5 height=2.5 base=1.5 height=2.5 Example # include <iostream.h> class array { int *; public : array(); void read_elements (); void print_elements(); }; array:: array() { a=new int[5]; } void array:: read_elements() { cout<<”\n input elements”; for(int i=0; i<5;i++) cin>>a[5]; } void array:: print_elements() { cout<<”\n elements are \n”; for(int i=0;i<5;i++) cout<<endl<<a[i]; } void main() { charname[10]; array subjects; cout<<”\n Enter name”; cin>>name; subjects.read(elements()); cout<<”\n”name; subjects.print_elements();
Parameterized constructor in C++
Constructor with parameters. It is user defined constructor which receive values of the time of creating object Call send initial values to object by calling the constructor. Example of a parameterized constructor # include<iostream.h> class tiangle { float base, height; public : triangle(float,float); void print() } triangle :: triangle(float b, float h) { base =b; height=h; } void triangle :: print() { cout<< “\n base=”<<base; cout<<”\n height=”<<height } void main() { triangle triangle1(1.5,2.5) triangle triangle2(2.5,3.5) triangle1.print(); triangle2.print(); }
// wap to create MXN matrix and display
# include<iostream.h> class Matrix { int xxa; int rsize; int csize; public: matrix(int,int); void read_matrix(); void print_matrix(); }; Matrix:: Matrix (int r, int c) { rsize=rc; csize=c; int x[rsize][csize]; a=new int*[rsize]; for(int i=0;i<rsize;i++) *(a+i)=new int[csize]; } void Matrix :: read_matrix() { cout<<”\n input elements of the matrix”; for(int i=0; i<rsize;i++) for(int j=0; j<rsize;j++) cin>>*(*(a+i)+j); cin>>*(*(a+i)+j); } void Matrix :: print_Matrix() { cout<< “\n elements are \n”; for(int i=0;i<rsize;i++) { for(int j=0;j<size;j++) cout<<*(*(a+i)+j)<<”\t”; cout<<endl; } } void main() { Matrix matrix1(2,2); Matrix matrix2(3,3); Matrix1.read_matrix(); Matrix1.print_matrix(); Matrix2.read_matrix(); Matrix2.print_matrix(); } o/p : input elements of the matrix 1 2 3 4 elements are
147:Tafd,
Array of objects
Creating more than one object of similar type is called Array of objects in C++ creating an array of type class. syntax class-name array-name[size]
// wap to find result 5 students
#include <iostream.h> class student { int no; int sub1,sub2; public read_student(); void find_student(); } void student read_student() { cout<<”Enter rno”; cin>>rno; cout<<”Enter marks of 2 subjects”; void student :: find _student() { cout<<”\n<<rno<<”\t”<<sub|<<”\t”<<sub2; cout<<”\t Fail”; else cout<<”\t pass”; } void main() { student stud[5]; int i; for(i=0;i<5;i++) stud[i].read_student(); for(i=0;i<5;i++) stud[i].find_result(); } O/P : input rollno 101 input 2 subject marks 604 input roll no 102 i/p 2 subject
Dynamic Array of object in C++
Allocating memory for more than one object during runtime
Syntax <pointer-to-object> = new class-name[size];
size can be constant or variable
Example :// wap to read the details n persons and display
# include <iostream.h> class person { char name[10]; char city[10]; public : void read_person(); void print_person(); }; void person :: read person() { cout<<”\n input name”; cin>>name; cout<<”\n input ciyt”; } void person :: print_person() { cout<<”\n”<<name<<”\t”<<city; } void main() { int n; person *p; cout<<”\n input details of how many person”; cin>>n; p=new person[n]; int i; for(i=0;i<n;i++) { P[i].read_person(); for(i=0;i<n;i++) p[i].print_person(); delete P; } # include<iostream.h> { class player { char name[10]; int runs; public : void read(); void print(); }; void player :: read() { cout<<”\n input name”; cin>>name; cout<<”\n input runs”; cin>>runs; } void player :: print() { cout<< “\n”<<name<<”\t”<<runs; } void main() { int n; cout<<”\n input details of house many players”; cin>>n; player *p; p=new player[n]; int i; for(i=0;i<n;i++) p[i].read(); for(i=0;i<n;i++) (*(p+i).print()); delete P; P=NULL; }
148:Tdb7,
‘::’ Unary operator
The scope operator is used to refer to member of global namespace between the global name space does have the name, the rotation ::
Member name refers to a member of the global namespace.
This can be useful for referring to members of global namespace whose names have been hidden by names declared in nested local scope. Unless we specify to the compiler in which namespace to search for a declaration, the compiler simple searches the current scope and any scopes in which the current scope is nested, to find the declaration for the name
Namespace is a collection of
variables
Functions
Classes
namespace N { Classes } int x; global variable void main (); global name space { int x=10; int y =20; void main() cout <<y; - > 20 { cout<<x; - > 20 int x=20; } cout<<x; -> 20 cout<< :: x; cout<<N :: x;
global name space - > unnamed
Unary operator in C++ with Example
# include <iostream.h> int x=10; void main() { int y=20; cout<< “\n local variable y=” <<y; 20 cout<<”\n global variable u=”<<x;10 cout<<”\n global variable x=”<< :: x; }
Example
# include <iostream.h> { int x=10; int y=10; void main() { int z=30; int x=40; { cout<< end l<< x; // 50 cout<< end l << :: x; //10 cout<<end l << z; //30 cout<< end l<<y; // 20 cout<< end l<<::y; } cout << endl<<x; // 40 cout << endl << Z; //30 cout << endl<<:: x; //20 coout<<endl<<::y; //20 }
149:T10d7,
C++ Local Variables
The variable declared inside function is called local variable in C++
Memory for this variable is allocated on execution of function and after completion of function
The scope of this variable within function
Local variable are called auto variable.
Auto is storage class and variable is never declared without class
Storage class define scope life time and storage of variable.
Example #include<iostream.h> void main() { int x; int Y; int Z; Cout << X << endl; cout<<Z<<endl; } o/p : The output of above program is garbage value, Because local variables are not given any default values.
C++ allows to declare local variable anywhere within function
Example # include <iostream.h> void main() { int n1; cout<< “\n input n1 value”; cin >> n1; int n2; cout<< “\n input n2 value”; cin>> n2; int n3; n3=n1+n2; cout<< “\n sum is ” << n3 } os void main() {
C++ allows to declare block level variables.
C++ Block level variables
The variables which are declared inside the anyone of the following block is called as Block level variables in C++
Anonymous block
Conditional block
Iterational block
Example if(<condition>) { int x; - > block level } Conditional Block while(<condition>) { int y; Block level } Iterational block Example # include <iostream.h void main() { char name[10]; int sub1,sub2; cout<<”\n input name”; cin>> name; cout<< “\n input two subjects”; cin>> sub1 >> sub2; cout<< “\n input two subjects”; cin>> sub 1>> sub 2; cout << “\n name” << name; if(sub1>=40 && sub2 >=40) { int total = sub1+sub2; flat avg=total/3; cout<<”\n Total” << total; cout<< “\n Avg” << avg; cout<< “\n Result is pass”; } else cout<< “\n result fail” }
C++ allows to declare local and block level variables with same name
This is called as hicling
Program
void main () { int x=10; int y=20; cout<<”\n local variable x=”<<x 10 cout<<”\n local variable y=”<<y; 20 { int z=30; cout<< “\n Block local variable z=” <<Z; 30 int x=40; cout<<”\n Block local variable=” <<x; cout<<”\n block variable y= <<y”; } }
we can’t access local variable within Block
C++ Global Variables
The variable declare outside the function is called global variable in C++
Variable is declared at global to share data between one or more than one function
These are called external variables.
Extern is a storage class
Syntax : int x; - > global variable void main() { int y; - > local variable if(<condition>) { int z; block level variable }
global variables memory is allocated on loading of the program.
global variables are given default value
if global variable is int, double, float then default value is zero.
c++ allows to declare local and global variable with same name.
used in c++ 1) :: (scope resolution)
pointers belongs to c++ 2) * (pointer to member access)
3 *(pointer to pointer member access operator)
Why we used scope resolution operator ?
It is a binary operator and it also work as unary operator
14a:T7b9a,
Interact With Oracle:
/* Create table and insert data */
Eg:
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = scott password = tiger path = ‘Ora’);
Execute (create table emp6(eid number, age number, position char(15), salary number)) by oracle;
Execute (insert into emp6 values(234,45,’tester’,4500))
By oracle;
Execute (insert into emp6 values (235,25,’progrmmer’, 4500))
By oracle;
Disconnect from oracle;
Quit;
/* To update the existed table */
Eg:
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = scott password = tiger path = ‘Ora’);
Execute (update emp6 set salary = salary + 2000)
By oracle;
Disconnect from oracle;
Quit;
/* To create new variable in emp6 table (oracle) & loading the data */
Eg:
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = scott password = tiger path = ‘Ora’);
Execute (after emp6 add bonus number)
By oracle;
Execute (update emp6 set bonus = salary * 0.5)
By oracle;
Disconnect from oracle;
Quit;
/* To drop required column from the oracle tables */
Eg:
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = scott password = tiger path = ‘Ora’);
Execute (after table emp6 drop column age)
By oracle;
Disconnect from oracle;
Quit;
Note:
If we run pass through facility we will get any execution message (notes) in log window. That’s why these statements are executed in other environment.
/* To delete the observations */
Eg:
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = scott password = tiger path = ‘Ora’);
Execute (delete from emp6 where position = ‘tester’)
By oracle;
Disconnect from oracle;
Quit;
Aspired to become SAS Developer? Explore the post to discover the know-hows on SAS Training In Pune.
/* To drop emp6 table */
Eg:
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = scott password = tiger path = ‘Ora’);
Execute (drop table emp6)
By oracle;
Disconnect from oracle;
Quit;
/* To create views or tables in oracle environment from the oracle files through the SAS environment */
Eg:
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = scott password = tiger path = ‘Ora’);
Select * from connection to oracle (select * from lab);
Disconnect from oracle;
Quit;
/* To report required variables */
Eg:
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = scott password = tiger path = ‘Ora’);
Select * from connection to oracle (select stno, unitsfrom lab);
Disconnect from oracle;
Quit;
/* To import the data from oracle table to SAS */
Eg:
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = scott password = tiger path = ‘Ora’);
Create view lab 1 as
Select * from connection to oracle (select * from lab);
Disconnect from oracle;
Quit;
Primary, reference, foreign key are called as surggate key in data ware housing
Access procedure:
Belongs to old technology . using access procedure, we can access the data from old technology external files (94, 95 yr). using access procedure, we can access the data from external files and stores in views only views are called access views.
Views are two types
Native view
Data set view (data set)
Sql view(sql)
Interface view – access view (access procedure)
To access the data from excel file:
Get names statement:
Default value of the get names statement is ‘NO’ in access procedure.
Note:
Based on one access descriptor we can create multiple views
Eg:
Proc access dbms = xls;
Create work. Demo. Access;
Path = ‘d:\old.xls’;
Get names = yes;
Create work. Demo2. View;
Select subid age;
Create work. Demo3. View;
Subset where gender = 1;
Select all;
Run;
NOTE:
If we create any view use with access procedure, these views are called access views
Worksheet statement:
Can be used to get the data from the required sheet
In old technology $ dollar symbol is not needed.
Note;
If you want to do any changes in views, first of all we will do changes in access descriptor changing variables names and format changes.
Eg:
Proc access dbms == xlx;
Create work. Demo4. Access;
Path = ‘d:\ old.xls’;
Worksheet = ‘sheet 2’;
Rename.varo =stno
Var2 = gender
Var3 = color’
Create work. Demo4. View;
Select all;
Run;
Proc print. Data = work. Demo 4;
Interaction with oracle environment:
Eg:
Proc access dbms = oracle;
Create work. One. Access;
User = scott;
Password = tiger;
Path = ‘ora’;
Table = ‘clinical’;
Create sas user. Demog2. View;
Select all;
Create sasuser. Demog2. View;
Select 1,3;
Create sasuser. Demog3. View;
Subset where pname
Is not null;
Select all;
Run;
Number character
Missing null
Not missing not null
To export the data into oracle tables:
Db load procedure:
Using database load procedure, we can export the data from SAS environment to require data base.
Eg;
Data load;
Input-pid test $ units cdate;
In format cdate date9;
Format cdate date9;
Cardas ;
100 HR 78 12 JAN 2007
100 DBP 90 12 JAN 2007
100 SBP 145 12 JAN 2007
;
Data lab 2;
Input pid test $ units c date;
Informat c date date9;
Format cdate date9;
Cards;
101 hr 74 13 jan 2007
101 dbp 90 13 jan 2007
101 sbp 154 13 jan2007
Load statement:
Can be used to load the data in required database table
/* To load data in oracle table */
Eg:
Proc db load dbms = oracle
Data = lab 1;
User = scott;
Password = tiger;
Path = ‘ora’;
Table = ‘lab’;
Load;
Run;
Append option:
Can be used to append the data in oracle tables from the SAS datasets
Eg:
Proc db load dbms = oracle
Data = lab 2;
User = scott;
Password = tiger;
Path = ‘ora’;
Table = ‘lab’;
Load;
Run;
Eg:
Data = lab 3;
Input pid test $ units cdate e time;
Informat c date date9;
C time time 8;
Format c date date 9
C time time 8;
Cards;
102 hr 74 14 JAN 2007 12: 23: 23
102 dbp 90 14 JAN 2007 13: 23: 12
102 sbp 154 14 JAN 2007 14: 12: 12
103 hr 74 14 JAN 2007 12: 23: 23
103 dbp 90 14 JAN 2007 13: 23: 12
103 sbp 154 14 JAN 2007 14: 12: 12
Db load procedure supporting to all options except rename option
/* To export required variable in required time */
Eg:
Proc db load dbms = oracle
Data = lab 3 ( drop etime rename = (date = c date) where = (pid = 103)) append;
User = scott;
Password = tiger;
Path = ‘ora’
Table = lab;
Load;
Run;
/* Extraction*/
Proc import
Data file = ‘d:\ suni.xls’
Out = demo dbms = excel replace;
Sheet = ‘sheet 1 $’;
Quit;
Data file = ‘d:\ suni.xls’
Out = demo dbms = excel replace;
Sheet = ‘sheet 2 $’;
Quit;
/* Create table in oracle environment */
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = sas password = sas path =’ora’);
Execute ((create table demo (pid number primary key, age number, rece char(12), color char (12)))by oracle;
Disconnect from oracle’
Quit;
Proc sql;
Connect to oracle
(user = sas password = sas path =’ora’);
Execute ((create table lab (pid number, test char(12), units number, foreign key(pid)references demo)) by oracle;
WCFwindows communication foundation WCF is a technology used to implement “service acierated architecture programming” (SOA programming) To understand SOA programming we need to look into the history of programming languages. The era of 1990’s started with structured oriented programming In structured oriented programming the code was written in the form of functions like, Int add (int x, int y) { … } Int subtract (int x, inty) { … } In structured oriented programming though reusability was their but it was not efficient and whenever a problem is redefined / enhanced it was required to write complete code again. To overcome this drawback in the era of 1990’s we got object oriented programming. Object oriented programming we got the concept classes as well as objects. Functional programming of structured oriented converted into object oriented programming i.e, parameters of the functions are transformed to data fields & properties of a class and functions are written without parameters just like, class clsArithmetic { Int x,y,z; Public .int px { set{----;} get{---;} } Public int py { set{------;} get{-----;} } public int p3 { set{----;} get{---;} } public void add() { …. } public void subtraction } … } Object oriented programming completely speaks about classes & objects and communication will take place with the help of object data using this we are able to get all the facilities of object oriented programming like abstraction, encapsulation, polymorphism, inheritance, etc. With this object oriented programming we are able to build efficient applications using different object oriented programming languages like c# .net, Java, etc.
Homogeneous Applications
The applications developed using same technologies/ programming languages are known as “homogeneous applications”
Heterogeneous Applications
Applications developed using different technologies are known as “Heterogeneous Applications”. Communication between homogeneous applications will be taken place with object data like,
Advantages of object oriented programming
Communication among heterogeneous applications is not possible on proprietary formats in object oriented programming engorges. Make communication among the heterogeneous application in the era of 2000 companies have come with a new communication format i.e., “Message format” like, A message is the data required to be transferred heterogeneous application with open standard output Service oriented architecture programming speaks specially to communicate among the heterogeneous applications. If we consider a scenario like to allow users to combine & reuse them in production of applications. Messages:- A message is the data i.e. used to be transferred between two heterogeneous applications & which is in an open standard format. A message. is a self contained unit of data that may consists of several parts including body & headers
14c:T68d,
Service
A service is a construct that exposes one/more end points with each end point exposing to one / more service operations services are logical encapsulation of self contained business functionality. Services are not classes / not components Difference between a service & component is services will enable to communicate among the heterogeneous applications where as components / packages will allow to communicate with in the homogeneous applications only.
WCF
WCF is designed to offer a manageable approach to distributed computing, interoperability with the support of service orientation. WCF simplifies development of connected applications through a new service oriented programming model. WCF includes serialization facilities that enable loose coupling & versioning and provides integration & interoperability with other services
WCF is widely used for following reasons:-
WCF can communicate using web services, interoperability with other platforms that support SOAP such as J2EE based applications. Most efficient performance as compared with other SOA programming techniques. i.e., the applications developed using WCF will work at faster rate as compared with the applications developed in removing, web’ services, MSMQ, etc. WCF will help to provide more reliability & security at compared with web services. WCF provide interoperability with applications built on other technologies. WCF will provide interoperability with all Microsoft technologies. WCF will provide interoperability with other XML protect
14d:T1db3,
Example to create WCF service with database
Create a new WCF service with the name example 3 Change the interface name to I emp details change the class name to cls emp details change the SVc file name to cls emp details SVC Write the following code in interface class i.e. I emp details.cs using system data; [service contract] Public interface I emp details { [operation contract] Data table get data(); } Go to emp details.cs file & write the following using system.data; Using system.data; Using system. Data. Sqlclient; Public class cls emp details: I Emp details { Public data table get data() { Sql connection . con = new sql connection (“----“); Sql data adapter da =new sql data adapter (“ select from emp details”, con; Data set Ds = new datsaset(); Da.fill (Ds, “emp details); Return ds. Table [0]; }}
Creating client component:-
Create a new web with the name check exmaple3 design the page add reference to cls empdetails.svc service reference name as “SR1” Using SR1; Protected void btn get data_click (--) { Emp Details client Obj1 =new emp de tails client (); Gridview. Data source = obj 1. Get data(); Grid view 1 . dta bind(); } Run the application & check.
Example to create a WCF service to perform the operations on database:-
Client design:-
Creating WCF service / server component:- Create a new WCF service with the name example 4 Change the interface name from I service.cs to I empdetails.cs change the class name from service.cs to cls emp details.cs change the service file name from service.svc to clsemp details.svc go to the file I emp details.cs & write the following code [service contract] Public interface I empdetails { [operation contract] Int insert rec (emp data obj1); [operation contract] Int insert rec (emp data obj1); [operation contract] Int delete rec (emp data obj1); } [data contract] Public class emp data { Int cls empid, cls deptno; String cls ename, cls designation; Datatime cls Doj, double clssalary ; [data member] Pblic in p emp id { set { cls em pid = value;} [data member] Public string PE name { Set { cls e name = value;} Get { return cls e name:} } [data member] Public string p designation { set { cls designation = value ;} Get { return cls designation;} } [datamember] Public datatime PDOJ { set{ cls Doj = value;} Get{ return clas Doj:} } [data member] Public double psalary { [data member] Public double psalary { set { cls salary = value :} Ge { return clssalary;} } [data member] Public int p dept no { set{ cls deptno = value;} Ge { return cls deptno;} }} Go to cls empdetails.cs class write the following to implement IEmp details interface members using system. Data; Using system.data. sqlclient; Public class cls empdetails :IE mpdetails { sql connection con=new sqlconnection (“---“); Sqlcommand cmd; Public int Insertrec (emp data obj1) { String s = “insert into emp details values (“ PEmpID + “,” + obj1. PE name + obj1/ p designation + “ ‘,’ “ + obj 1 “ ‘, “ + obj1. Psalary + “,” + obj1 +”)” ; Cmd = new sql command (s,con); Con.open(); Int ; = cmd. Execute non query (); Con. Close (); Returen I; } Public int update Rec (emp data obj1) { string s = “ update emp details set Ename = ‘ “ + Pe name + “ ‘, designation = ‘” + obj 1. Gnation + “’, DOJ = ‘” + obj 1 PDOJ + obj1.pdeptno + “ where empID = “ + objs.pempID; Cmd = new sqlcommand (s,con); Con.open(); Int I = cmd. Execute non query (); Con. Close(); Return I; } Public int delete rec (empdata obj1) { String s = “delete emp details where emp ID = “ + obj1. Pemp id; Cmd = new sqlcommand (s, con); Con.open(); Int I = cmd. Execute nonquery (); Con. Close(); Return I; }}
Example to create a client to perform the database operations
Create a new website with the name check example 4 Design the webpage add reference to cls empdetails.svc WCF service with reference name as SR1 write the following code Using SR1; Empdetails client objs = neco empdetails client(); Emp data objD = new emp data(); Protected void btn instert_click(-----){ objD.PE mp ID = convert. Toint32 (txt emp ID. Text); objd. PeName = txtEName.text; objD.p designation = txt designation.text; objed.PDOJ = convert. To Date time (txtDOJ.Text); objd.psalary = convert. To double (txtsalry. Text); ObjD.pdeptno = convert. TOInt32 (txtdeptno.text); Int I = objs. Insertrec (objD); Lbldisplay. Text = I + “Record (s) Inserted”; Crotected void btnupdate – click (---){ objD.PEm PID = convert . TOInt32 (txtempID.text); objD. PEName = texename. Text; objD.pdesignation= textdesignation.text; objD- PooJ= convert. Todatetime (txtdoj.text); ObjD.psalary = Convet. ToDouble (txtsalry. Text); Objd. Pdeptno = convert. TOIrt32 (txtdeptno. Text); Int I = objs. Updaterec (objD); Laldisplay. Text = I + “record (s) updated”; } protected void btndelete-click(----) { objd.PempID = convert. TOI nt 32 (txt emp ID. Text); Int I = objs. Deleterec (objD); Lbldisplay. Text = I + “record (s) deleted”;
14e:T1370,
Example to consume the WCF service from windows forms applications
Add reference to cls empdetails SVC from example 4 with the reference name as SR1 write the following code. //Some tirnes namespace Sr1 is not finding at that time we can write code like this Sr1 emp details client objs = new SR1 Empdetails client (); SR1. Emp data objD = Sr1. Emp data (); Protected void btninsert _ click (----) { objD.pemp ID = convert. Toirct 32 (txt emp id> text ); objD. pEname = txtEname. Text; objD. P Designation = txtdesignation. Text; objd. P doj = convert. To date time (txt Doj. Text); objd. Psalary = convert. To double (txtsalary. Text); objd. Pdeptno = convert. To int32 (txtdeptno. Text); int I = objs = insertrec (objD); Message box. Show (I + “record(s) inserted”); } Protected void btnupdate – click (---) { objD. P emp ID = convert. TOInt 32 (txtempid>text); ObjD. Pename = text e Name. text; Objd. Pdesignation = txtdesignation. Text; Objd. Pdoj = convext. To datetime (txt dotj. Text); Objd. Psalary = convert. To double (txtsalary. Text); Objd. Pdeptno = convert. toInt32 (txtdeptno. Text); Int I = objs. Updaterec (objD); Messagebox. Show (I + “ records) updated”)
Services
Create a WCF service to find the salary of the given employee Create a WCF service to find the square value, cube value, factorial value of the given number. Create a WCF service in above client in 2 ways, 1) with out using data contract class 2) by using data contract class
Basic terminology used in WCF services:-
ABC’s in WCF:- A address: B binding : C contract in ABC’s of WCF service, ‘A’ stands for “Address”, ‘B’ stands for “Binding”, ‘c’ stands for “Contract”
Address:-
Address represents the location of WCF service where messages are received. Address uniquely identifies the end point and tells to the client / consumer where service is located. Address is specified by using URI (uniform resource Identifier) By using this URI client will identify the service location and reach the address with the help of http & TCP The hierarchical part of the RUI contains a unique location who’s format is dependent on the transport mechanism. Ex:- http://localhost/example4/cls empdetails.svc
Bindings
The Binding specifies how to communicate with end points i.e., which transport protocol is to be tcp/http/some other. The binding can contain binding elements. That specify the details like security mechanisms. Used to secure messages/the message patterns used by endpoints etc. Binding is constructed by the set of components called “binding elements”
Steps of bindings
WS http binding
Basic http binding
WS dual http binding
WS federation Http binding
Net TCP binding
Net named pipe binding
Net Ms MQBinding
Net peer tcp binding
14f:T3742,
WCF Transactions Overview
A transaction is a group of query’s to be executed as a single unit. when we execute group of querys as a single unit out any problem then only all the modification will be committed to the database. If any single query is not executed due to any problem then all other modifications also will be rollback. The transactions should follow ACID properties or ACID rules ACID rules stands for, A Atomicity C consistency I Isolation D Durability
Atomicity
This word has been derived from greek, “Atom” means individual
The querys with in the transaction should into be executed separately rather, should be executable as a group only
We can’t divide the queries and we can’t execute separately.
If we execute the queries, execute as group only all the queries otherwise don’t execute any query
Consistency
The query after execution should return appropriate results and should not return wrong results.
Isolation
Isolation means if multiple transactions are doing executed, each transaction is independent of there transactions until one transaction is committed, to be data should not be reflected to other transactions
Durability
The transactions should be able to services after failures i.e. in the middle of the transaction if execution is stopped due to power failures or due to breakdowns after restoring the failure the transaction is able to complete its execution.
Implementing transactions using WCF services
In general, when we implement the transactions in WCF services it follows in 2 stages / 2 phases.
Ready phase / preparation phase
Execution and commit phase
Step1:- Client sends request to first WCF service whether it is ready to implement transaction cannot. Step2:- WCF service will acknowledge that it is to implement the service. Step3:- it is ready to implement transactions (or) not. Step4:- WCF service 2 will acknowledge implementing the transaction then execution and commit phase will start. Step5:- Client sends requests to execute the query to WCF servcvie1. Step6:- WCF service 1 will execute the query with DB Step7:- WCF service 1 will acknowledge the client Step 8 :- Client will send request to execute the query to WCF service 2. Step9:- WCF service 2 will execute the query to DB. Step 10:- WCF service 2 will acknowledge the client Step 11:- The transactions will be committed to DB.
Example to implement transactions using WCF services
Go to sql server database create database with the name sample create 3 tables with the name customer merchant & transactions like, ID customer ID Balance current balance MID Merchant ID PK Primary Key ID Transaction ID To implement the transaction we need to perform 3 modifications with in the WCF service.
Write the following attribute with in the functions of interface in which we cant to implement transactions. [transaction flow (transaction flow option. Allowed) ]
Write the following attribute in preceding to the functions of the class in which we implement the interface functions.
In Web config file in end point add a new attribute binding configuration like
<endpoint address = “ ” binding = “WShttp binding” contract = “interface name” binding configuration = “transactional binding”> <binding name = “Transactional Binding” Transaction flow = “true”/> </WS http binding> </binding> Create a new WCF service with the name “WCF customer service” change the interface name to “Icustomer.cs” Change the class file name ot “clscustomer.cs” change the servciefiel name ot “Cls customer.svc”. Write the following code (go to Icustomer.cs file) [service contract] [Transaction flow (Transaction Flowoption. Allowed)] Void update customer (string ID, double amount); } Go to the classfile clscustomer.cs à write the following code. using system.data; using system.data.sqlclient; public class cls customer: I customer [operation behavior (transaction scope required = true)] Public void update customer (string Id, double amount) { sqlconnection con = New sqlconnection (“---“); String s = “update customer set (balance “=+Amount + “where CID = ‘”+ ID + “ ‘ “; Sql command cmd = new sql command (s, con); Con.cpen(); cmd. execute nonquery(); con.close(); Go to .svc file change the service name to cls customer Go to web. Config file à write the following code in endpoint. Endpoint address = “ “ binding = “WShttp binding” contract =”Icustomer” binding configuration = “Transactional binding “ / > After completion of service tag add a new tag with the name bindings à write the following code. <System. Servicemodel> <Services> ….. </Services> <bindings> <WShttp binding> <Binding name = “Transactional binding “ transaction flow = “true”/> </WS http binding> create a 2nd service with the name WCF merchant service write the following code. [service contract] public interface Imerchant { [operation contract] [Transaction flow(Transaction flowoption.allowed)] void update Merchant (string Id, double amount); } Go to class file clsmerchant.cs write the following code using system data; using system.dat.sqlclient; public class cls merchant: Imerchant { [operation behavior (transaction scoperequired = true)] public void update merchant (string Id, double Amoutn) { sql connection con=new sqlconnection (“----“); string s = “update Merchant set c balance = “ + amont p “where MID = ‘ “ + ID + “ ‘ “ ; sqlcommand cmd = new sqlcommand (s, con); (on. Open (); cmd. Execute non Query (); con.close(); } } Go to .svc file change the service name to cls merchant Go to web. Config file write the following code in endpoint. <endpoint address = “ “ binding = “ WS httpbinding” contract = “Imerchant” binding configuration = “Transactionalbinding”/> <bindings> <WS http Bninding> <binding name = “Transactional binding” transaction flow = “True”/> </WS Http binding> </Bindings> create a new WCF service with the name WCF Transaction service à write the following code. [service contract] public interface ITransaction { [operation contract] [Transaction Flow (Transaction Flow option Allowed)] void Insert Transaction (String ID1, string Id2, string Id3, date Time D1, double amount1, double amount2, double amount3) Using system. Data: using system. Data.sqlclient; public clas cls transaction: I Transaction { [operation behavior (transaction scope required = true) ] Public void insert transaction (string Id1, string id2 string Id3, date time d1, double amount 1, double amount 2, double amount 3) { sql connection con = new sqlconnection (“----“); String S = “ Insert into transactions values (‘ “ + Id 1 + “ ‘,’ “ + Id2 + “ ‘,’ “ Id 3 + “ ‘ , ‘ “ + D1 ‘’, amount 1 + “ ‘ “ + amount 2 + “ , “ + amount 3 + “) “ ; Sql command cmd = new sqlcommand (s, con); Con.open(); cmd. Execute Nonquery(); con.close(); } }
150:T9e3,
Create a client application to consume the 3 services created by the transactions
Create a new web site with the name WCF traction client à Design the page à add references 3 WCF services created early in this program
For WCF customer service with reference name as ‘SFC’ (service reference for customer)
For WCF merchant service with reference name as “SRM”
To WCF transaction service with reference name as “SRT” add reference to “System
Transactions” Namespace write the following code using system data sqlclient; using system Transactions; using SRC; using SRM; using SRT; sqlconnection con= new sqlconnection (“---“) ; protected void btnsubmit_click(----) {
strings = “select c balance from customer where c ID=’ “ + extcid.text + “ ‘ “ ; Open (); sqlcommand cmd = new sql command (s, con); sqldata reader Dr = cmd. Execute reader (); Dr. Read (); double cbal = convert . to Double ( Dr [0]); cbal = cbal – convert. To Double (txtamt.text);
Con.close(); s= “select cbalance from merchant where MID = ‘ “cmd = new sql command (s, con); con opend(); Dr = cmd. Execute reader(); DR. Read (); double M Bal = convert. Tobouble (DR[0]); MBal = MBal + convert . to double (txt Tamt.text); con.close(); if (<bal<0) lbl display text ‘balance is not sufficient, transaction cannot be performed”; else { using (transaction scope TS = new transaction scope option. Required) { try { customer client objc = new customer clinet (); Merchant client objM = new merchant client (); Transaction client objT = new Transaction client (); objc update customer (txtcId. Text, cbal); objM. Insert transaction ((txt Tid – text, text Cid. Text, txt Mid. Text, datatime. Now .date, convert. To bouble / txt tamt. Text), cbal, mbal); T.S.complete(); lbldisplay.text = “Transaction successful”; } catch { TS dispose (); lbldisplay.text =”Transaction Rooled back”; } } }
151:T1b10,
Contracts
A contract defines certain aspects of the service such as format & structure of the message etc.
A contract is an agreement between client & service
Contract describes the data, punitions their return types, parameters, etc to be communicated with the service
Types of contracts in WCF
WCF supports 5 types of contracts
Data contracts
Operation contracts
Message contracts
Fault contracts
Service contracts
Data contract
The data type that a service should be use in metadata to enable others to interoperate with the service/ described as data contract.
In general, these data contracts are created with in the data contract class by preceding with [data contract] attribute.
The descriptions of the data types are known as the data contract.
The types used / described with in the data contract can be used in any part of the messages as parameters / return types tec.
If the service is using only simple types it is not required to create data contract separately.
Operation contract
An operation contract defines the operations, their parameters & the return types.
All operations should be preceded with operation contract attribute that are to be used outside the WCF service
In WCF services the operations can be modeled as taking a single message & returning a single message.
Message contract:-
A message contract defines / describes the format of a message.
Message contract declares whether message elements should go in headers / with in the body etc
Message contract also describes that what level of security should be applied to which elements of the message.
Fault contract
A fault contract can be associated with service operation to denote errors that can be return
An operation can have zero% more fault contracts associated with it.
These errors are soap faults that are modeled as exceptions in the programming model
Service contract
A service contract can be said as the combination of other contracts mentioned above.
The service contract bundles together multi related operations into a single functional unit.
A service contract contains internally data contracts, operation contracts, message contracts & fault contracts.
The service contract can define the settings to be followed at service level
In most of the cases, the service contract is defined by creating an interface & preceding it with service contract attribute.
The actual service contract code is resulted by implementing that interface.
The service contract outlines wheel functionality that end point exposes to the client
Endpoint
An end point is a construct, at which messages are sent/received.
An endpoint contains a location i.e., an address., a specification of the communication mechanism i.e., binding & definition for set of messages that can be sent / received i.e., contract.
So, endpoint can be set as combination of ABC’s
All communication with in the WCF services will occur through the endpoints of the service.
End points will provide the clients complete access to the functionality that WCF service offers
A WCF service is exposed to it’s clients as a collection of endpoints.
A WCF service should contain minimum one endpoint.
Structure of a service with endpoints
An endpoint is defined in a web.confing file by using the 3 attributes address, binding & contract like <endpoint address = “Value” binding = “Value” contract = “Value”> </enclpoint>
Message & Message Patterns
A message is a self contained unit of data which contains several parts like body, header, etc. Message are sent between endpoints of dient & service. WCF supports following message patterns.
Simple
Duplex
Request – reply
Simplex This is one way communication from client to service. In this mechanism / pattern client serds request / message to the service, service consumes that request but doesn’t respond back to the client. To work / implement this message pattern set “ Is one way” property to “true” along with [operation contract] attribute like, [operation contract (is one way = true)] The methods which are following simplex message pattern should not return a value i.e., should not have return type (or) should not contain reference & out parameters. Otherwise, they through an conception “System invalid operation” exception.
Duplex
This is a two way / bidirectional communicate service and service respond to the client by conserve that message. Client & service will exchange the messages cuing channel A duplex service contract is a message exchange pull in which both client & service endpoints can semi messages to each other independently. To implement this message pattern set “I someway property of [operation contract] attribute to “true” create the call back interface that defines the of operations for invoking on the client Request – Reply This is the default messaging path followed in WCF. In this type of pattern client makes a call to service tions & waits for a response from the service Client request & service response will be through event channels.
152:T149f,
Arithmetic operations using data contract in WCF services
Create a new WCF service with the name example2 Change the interface name form I service.cs to I arithematic.cs change the class name from service.cs to cls arthematic.cs change the service file name from service.svc to cls arithematic.svc double click on I arithematic.cs & write the following code. In data contract we declare all data fields & properties. To provide data facilities to the services contract we use data contract. Data contract class object reference is used in service contract [Service contract] Public interface I arithematic { [operation contract] Int add (Arithmetic data obj1); [operation contract] Int subtract (arithematic data obj1); [operation contract] Int multiply (arithematic data obj1); [operationcontact] Int divide (arithematic data obj1); } [Data contract} Public class arithematicdata { Int num1, num2, result; [data member] Public int p num1 { Set{ num 1 = value;} Get {return num1:} } [data member] Public int p num 2 { Set {num 2 = value;} Get { return num2:} [Data member] Public int presult { Set { result = value;} Get {return result;} } } Double click on cls arithmetic.cs file in solution explorers write the following code Pulbic class cls arithematic : I arithematic { Public int add (arithematic data obj1) { Obj1. Presult = obj 1.pnum1 + obj 1 .pnum2; return obj1. Presult; } Public int subtract (arithematic data obj1) { Obj1. Presult = obj1. Pnum1 – obj1. Pnum2; return obj1. Presult; } public int multiply (arithmetic data obj1) { obj1. Presutl = Obj1. Pnum1* obj1.pnum2: return obj1. Presult: } Public int divide (arithematic data obj1) { obj1. Presult=obj1. Pnum1/obj1.pnum2; return obj1. Presutl;}} Change in cls arithematic.sve file the service name to cls arithematic à to to web. Config file change the service name to cls arithematic & contract ot I arithmetic à run the application & check the path of cls Arithematic.Svc
Example to consume the WCF service / creating client component:-
Create a new web site with the name “check example2” desing the webpage. add reference to example2 WCF service class i.e., cls arithematic.svc with namespace servie reference name as “SR1” write the following code. Using SR1: Arithematic client objs = new Arithematic client (); Arithematic data objd = new arithematic data (); Protected void btn add – click (---) { objD.pnum1= convert. TOInt 32 (txtnum1.text) objD.pnum2= convert. TOInt 32 (txtnum2.text) objD.pnum = objs. Add (objD); text result. Text = objD. Presult. Tostring(); } Protected void btnsubtruct_ click (=---) { objD.pnum1= convert. TOInt 32 (txtnum1.text) objD.pnum2= convert. TOInt 32 (txtnum2.text) objD.pnum = objs. Add (objD); text result. Text = objD. Presult. Tostring(); } Protected void btndivide – click (---) { objD.pnum1 = convert. Toint32 (textnum1.Text); objD.pnum2 = convert. Toint32 (textnum2.Text); objD.preset = objs. Divide (obj D): txtresult . text = ObjD. Presutlt. Tostring(); }}
153:T30ee,
Hosting Services
To make any WCF service as active that service most be hosted with in a runtime environment which creates the service and controls the life time of the service
WCF services are designed to run on any windows process that supports managed code.
WCF services supports following types of hosting mechanisms / hosting options.
Hosting using console Applications / managed applications
Hosting within windows services
Hosting with IIS
Hosting with windows process activation service or activation domain.
Hosing with console applications / managed application
WCF services can be hosted in any managed application
This is most flexible option and required least infrastructure and resources.
In this mechanism we embed the service with console applications and use the “service host” class to host our service
The services hosted in console applications can be from windows forms applications or WPF application
Hosting a WCF service with in the console application useful during the application development process
This makes easy to debug and trace the application
Hosting with windows services
This hosting option requires register the application our WCF service within the windows service.
Once our WCF service is registered at windows serve then it will be controlled by the service control mar of the windows services
The service is implemented as both windows service and as WCF service by inheriting from both the i.e., service base of windows services as from contract interface of WCF service.
Then the code is written appropriately in on start & on stop events of windows service.
Then the service is installed with in the windows services of control panel using “install util exe”
Once the service is placed in control panel service the lipetime of the service is controlled by the
This hosting option is available in all versions windows.
Hosting with IIS
Hosting with IIS option is integrated along with .net
When WCF service is hosted with IIS it provide following facilities:
Id shutdown
Process beatth monitoring
Message based activations
IIS hosted services will support only “ Http” transport and doesn’t support other transport like Tcp etc.
Hosting with windows process activation service
This is the new mechanism available with windows vista., windows7, windows 2008 server operation system. This is not supported in windows Xp Microsoft introduced this mechanism with IIS 6.0 version (with windows Xp we have IIS 5.0 version) To work with first two hosting we should know about service host class and URI class. These 2 classes are available in system service model namespace.
Service Host class
This class is used to set the required properties for a service, to host the service.
Methods with service host class
Abort () Close () Open () Add service end point (implemented contract (address) class, binding contract); Abort():- This method is used to terminate the service Close():- This method is used to close the service Open():- This method is used to start a service. Add service Endpoint, (, , ) :- This method is used to add the required end point to the service
Example to host the service using console application
Create a new console application with the name example 6 Add a new class with the name IEMP tails.cs change the class to interface in IE details.cs Add reference to system. Service mode namespace Using system data; Using system. Service model; Namespace Example6 { [service contract] interface IEmp details { [operation contract] data table get deptdata(int D); } } create a new class file with the name cls empi .cs & write the following code. using system.data; using system.data.sqlclient; namespace example6 { public class cls emp Details : IE mp Details } Public Data Table Get Deptdata (int D) { sqlconnection con=new sql connection (----); string S = “Select * from emp Details where Deptno=”+D; sqldata Adpater da = new sqldataadapter (s.con); dataset Ds=new Dataset(); (DS, “Emp”); return ds. Tables[0]; } } } Change the program.cs file name to cls sample.cs and write the following code. using system. ServiceModel; Namespace Example6 { Class cls sample { Static voidMain() { vri obju = new uri (“net.tcp://localhost:9100/”); service host objs = new serviceHost (type of (cls emp Details), obju); Objs.open(); c.WL (“service started and running”); C WL (“press any key to terminate-----“); Console. Readline(); Objs. Close(); } } } To mention the end point for the service add app.config file into the application. Steps:-Go to selection Explorer Select the solution click with right mouse button click on add click on new item select the template application configuration fileclick on add write the following code. <xml version = “1.0” encoding = “utf – 8”?> <configuration> <system.servicemodel/> <services> <service name = “Example6.Cls Emp Details”> <endpoint address = “Example6. Cls Emp details” Binding = “net TCP Binding” Contract = “Example6. IEmp details”/> </service> </services> </system.ServiceModel> </configuration> Creating client component to consume the service costed using console application Client DesignCreate a new windows ohms application Design the form Add reference the service hosted using consol applications. Steps to add referenceGo to solution explorer select the solution click with right mouse button click on add service reference type the “net TCP://local host:9100/” click on go button we find the service class name “Cls empdetails” change the reference to me to SRI click on Add, this will create proxy impotent at client side (Note:- Before adding this reference, the service hosted in console application i.e., example 6 should be running otherwise. We can’t add the reference and can’t consume the service) à write the following code. Private void btnsubmit click(-----) { SRI.Empdetails client obj1 = new sRI.Emp Details client(); DGV sample. Datasource = bj1. Getdeptdata (convert to Int32 (txtdeptno. Text)); } àRun the application & click. This client will work a long as the service component created at console application is running. If can closeness.
154:T65b,
Remoting
Remoting is used to build distributed computing applications. Microsoft originally developed Remoting by enhancing com and dcom. Using Remoting Microsoft is able to achieve,
Reusability
Language Independency
Platform independency
Location Independency
Every component based model we will have client & server components which will be interacting with different mechanism
Remoting Architecture
1):- Client makes a request to the pro xy. 2):- proxy builds stack frame request & send to formatter. 3):- Formatter converts the request into open stand –and format (serialization is performed) & delivers to networks channel. 4):- Network channel will deliver the request to the destination machine. 5):- formatter will take the request & delivers to dispatcher. 6) :- Dispatcher will perform deserialization i.e., converts the request to server understandable form.
155:T34eb,
Difference between hosting the service on IIs and in console applications
When we host the service at IIS, IIS will start the service automatically whenever the request is coming from the host and executes the service and sends the result back to client application.
But when we host the service using console application and we want to consuming from client we need to keep service running manually.
The service hosted using IIS will support only http protocol. Where as the service running or hosted in console application will also support TCP protocol
Differences between basic HTTP binding and WS HTTP sending
originally WS http binding is the combination of basic http binding and web services as well as web services extension. This can be written as, WS http binding = Basic http Binding + WS - *
Basic http binding
WS http Binding
Data is transferred in plain text form between client and service component
Data is transferred in encrypted form between client and service component
Supports all versions of ASP.net
supports 3.0, 3.5 and 4.0 versions of ASP.Net
Supports backward compatibility i.e., service can be consumed from the client applications created in 1.0.1.1& 2.0 versions.
Doesn’t support backward compatibility i.e., service can’t be consumed form the client applications created in 1.0, 1.1&2.0 versions.
Basic http binding follows SOAP 1.1 version
WS http binding follows SOAP 1.2 version;
Security is not good.
security is good.
Hosting a WCF service using windows service
Create a new window service with the name Example 7 change service 1.cs file name to sample service.cs add reference to system. Service model name space write the following code using system. Service model; namespace example7 { [service contract] public interface IMath numbers { [operation contract] int square (int x); [operation contract] int cube (int x); [operation contract] int factorial (int x); } Public partial class sumpleservice – service base, Imc dhnumbers Servicehost objs = null; Protected override void onstart (--) { obj = new service host (type of (sample service)); if (objs ! = null) objs. Opern(); } protected override void onstop(--) { if (objs! = null) { objs.close(): objs=null; } } public int squar (int x) { return x * x; } public int cube (int x) { public int factorial (int x) { return x*x*x; } public int factorial (int x) { int R = 1, I; for (i=1; i<=x;i++) { R=R * i } return R; } } Add new app.config into the windows service write the following code <configuration> <system.service Model> <service> <Service name = “Example 7 . sample service” behavior configuration = “Metadata support”> <host> <base addresses> <add base address = “net.tcp:// localhost : 8001/Example 7”/> <add base address = “http:// localhost:8081/Example7”/> </base addresses> </hot> <end point address = “Tcpmex” binding = “meretcp binding” contract = “metadata Exchange”/> <endpoint address = “ ” binding = “ws http binding” contract = “Example7. Imath numbers”/> </service> </services> <behaviors> <services behaviors> <behavior name = “metadatasupport”> <Service metadata http get enabled = “False” http sget url = “”/> </behavior> </service behaviors> </behaviors> </system.service model></configuration> Go to sample service cs designclick with right mouse button click on add installer this will add service process Installer and service installer classes to the application select serviceprocess Installer go to properties window, set the following properties according to local system select service installer à go to properties window, set the following properties service name sample service display name sample service start type automatic build the application (this will generate an exe) Go to visual studio 2008 command prompt to install the windows service in control panel service Change the disk location TC Excample 7 exe location type the following command i-e., Install util.exe - ; example 7. Exe This will install the service with in the control panel services. Go to control panel services select the sample service click with right mouse button click on start service will be started. Now this service is ready and can be consumed from any client application
Sample of create client application to consume the WCF service hosted using windows service
Name check example 7 Design the form go to solution explorer select the solution click with right mouse button click on add service reference type the following address net.tcp//localbost : 8001/ example 7/tcpmex change the service reference 1 to sr1 click on ok (This coil) create proxy component) write the following code for calculate button protected void btn calculate _click(---) { SRI. Sample service client obj 1 = new SR1. Sample service client(); int a = convert. TOInt32 (txtnum.text): lblsquare text = obj1. Square (a). tostraing(); lblcube. Text =obj1. Cube ()a . tostring(); Lblfactorial . text = obj1. Factorial (a). tostring(); } when we are hosting the service at IIS, the service need not be continuously running rather when ever any client sends request, IIS will execute the service and sends, the result back to the client Whenever WCF service is hosted at IIS, the execution of the service will be under the control of IIS Whenever service is hosted with in console applications we should be always running as long as any client is consuming that service when we host the WCF service using console applications, the service will run under the control of CLR with the help of OS. When we host the WCF service using windows services the service starts running whenever operating system is started. Any client can consume this service until this is stopped manually (or) system is shutdown When the service is hosted using windows service it will run under the control of operating system with the help of CLR
156:Tc72,
Working With Layouts
Layouts are used to display all the controls on the window in a required form Layout will help us to keep the controls with same size though parent control size changes or screen resolution changes Also layouts will help us to scale the size of the controls a/c to parent control size or a/c to screen resolution Canvas Layout control Canvas Layout is the fixed layout and the controls placed in canvas layout will not increase or decrease their size when parent control size changes. Example With Canvas Controls Create a new window with the name canvas layout Crete canvas on window Design the canvas Create two buttons outside the canvas with the names b/n LTOR and btn RTOL respectively Write the following code Private void btn LTOR – click (object sender, Ronted Even Args e) { Canvas 1 Flow direction = flow direction. Left to right; } Private void btn RTOL_click() {canvas1. Flow Direction= flow direction. Right To left; } When you run the form observe the controls by increasing or decreasing the size of the window, the controls placed with the canvas will not increase or decrease their size but the controls outside canvas will increase or decrease their sizes a/c to size of the control
Stock Panel
Stack panel layout is used to display the elements in the form of stack we can display the elements in vertical stack form or horizontal stack form
Properties
When set to Vertical : The controls will be displayed or arranged in vertical stack from when set to Horizontal: The controls will be organized in horizontal stack form
157:T1d6e,
Working with Grid layout
This control is used to arrange the controls in the form of grid. In general when elements are pieced with on the grid the elements (control) sizes will be scaled to the window size (a/c to window size ) automatically i.e if we increase / decrease the size of the window the control sizes will increase / decrease accordingly properties with grid layout Column definition Row definitions
Column Definition:-
This property is used to store the columns of the Grid control This property is a collection property
Row definition
This is a collection property used to store all the rows within the Grid control Example With Grid Control Create a new window
↓
Create a new grid within the window
↓
Divide the grid into no.of rows & columns
↓
Select grid control
↓
Properties
↓
go to column definition properly
↓
Click on ellipse is button
↓
Click on add button for 5 tines (5 column & create ) Click on ok go to row definition property
These controls are used to work with images audio files, video files etc
Media element control:
This control is used to play video/audio files within WPf application. It is flexible to work with media elements because this control will provide a various properties and methods which will allow to customize media plays
Properties
Loaded Behavior
This property is used to set a value for the startup of video / audio file
Unloaded behavior
This property is used to set get the value when file 1 window is unloaded.
Natural Duration
This is read only property gets the complete duration of video / audio file Data type of this property in duration which is a structure
Position
Used to set 1 get the video/audio to be played from required position
Speed Ration
Used to set/get the required speed ratio out is to increase / decrease the play speed
Volume
Used to set/get the required volume to the video / audio file that is to be played
Source
used to set / get the video/audio file path that is to be played within the Media elements Data type of this property is RUI controls which is a class
158:T1163,
Close():-
Used to close the opened video/audio file that is being played within the media Element control
Pause():-
Used to stop the playing of a video/ audio at current position
Play():-
Used to play the video/audio file that is attached to media element
Stop():-
used to stop the playing of video / audio file & Reset the position to the beginning
Events with media element control:-
Media opened:-
This event will be fixed after loading the video/audio file into the media element control
Media Embed:-
This event will be fixed when playing of video/audio file completes
EG with Media Element:-
Create a new window Create a media element: select media element Go to properties window Type the file bar in source property i.e. D:\\videos\sample. Run the application & check Media element control in supported in following OS windows 7, window vistall ( service pack) Media Element Internally will take support of windows media player and to work with media element windows. Media player version should be 10,10.0 version and above ren version of windows media player will not work on media element Customizing media element Create a new window and write the following code design the window Private void binplay_click() { Media element/. Play(): { Private void btn pause_click() { Mediaelement 1. Powse(); } Private void btnstop_click() { media elemnt.Stop(); }Private void btn forward –click() { Media element1. Position = mediaelemnt1. Position+timespan.fromseconds(2); } Private void then backword – click() { Media element1. Position = Media Elemtn. Position – Timespan. Fromseconds(2): }
Hider control:-
This control is used to display some numeric data and will provide increment and decrement of values by moving the slide bar left right or top/bottom
Properties:-
Minimum:-
used to set the least value from where the slides should start (0) + [Default value]
Maximum:
Used to set the highest value upto where the slides control can be used or increased – 10 [default value]
Tick frequently :-
used to set a value by which slides value can be increased / decreased when user clicks on .1 [default]
Value:-
used to set /get current position for the slides. 0 - - > [default]
Orientation:-
used to set the required orientation when horizontal slides is displayed like Default event of slider control is value changer. This event will we fired when the value within slides changes
Previous diagram:-
Private void media element 1 – media opened() { Media element.volume = slidesi-value; } private void slides 1_vakye chanes(-) { Media element1. Value= slider 1. Value; }
Mute button:-
Private void button mute_click(--) { Media Element 1. Value =0; }
Open:-
Add reference to system . windows forms names pace and write the following. Using system. Windows. Forms; private void butn open_click(-) { Open file Dialog op = new openfile dialog(); op. filter = “wnu files|*.wmv|mpu files|*mpg| all files|*.*; OP.showdialog(); uri obj 1 = new ori(op . filemenu: media element 1. Source = Obj1; }
Portable language (writing a program irrespective of operating system as well as Hardware)
Low level language like Assembly language on Machine language called portable.
Portability
Portability allows to develop program irrespective of hardware
It allows to move the program develop for one platform to another platform
C compatible (COMP) : Programs developed in ‘C’ language can be moved without any modifications into C++
C++ is an object oriented embedded language which is having the characteristics of low level language & which is also developing the embedded software.
Which language having low level features
Disadvantages of C++
it have no security
C++ has a bootable, yes c++ is a bootable
What is the difference between C & C++?
C
C++
It is a structured programming language.
It is an object oriented programming language
It does not have inline function
It support inline function
It does not support functions with default arguments.
It support() with default arguments
It does not have exception handing
It support exception handling
It does not support generic programming
It support generic programming
It having pointers
It having pointer & and references.
15b:T900,
C++ compilers
Turbo c++
sone and c++
Micros of + c++
Dev c++
C++ on Linux
C++ on Unix
C++ on Unix os
C++ on solaries
C++ on MAC
The latest version of c++ compiler is c++ on (++12)
Structure of C++ program :
it is divided into 5 sections
Document section
Linkage section
Global declaration
Main program section
Global data section
Document section:
This section contain information about program on program heading
It is provided by using comments
c++ provide 2 types of comments
single line(//)
Multi line (/* *\)
Linkage section : C preprocessor directive section It is a programming (# include)
Any operation which has to be performed before compile program are defined this section
Global declaration :
It is used to declare global variable and function and types
Main program
void main() { } Main without arguments void main(int arg c, char *arg[]) Main with arguments { }
Global definition :
Definition functions and types which are declared inside global declaration void Main(int argc, char *arg v[], char *array) { }
Compiler works as translation program between high level languages to low level language.
Main is not recognized by compiler it is recognize by Linker 1
15c:T479,
Data types in C++
Primary Data types
derived data types
User defined data types
empty Data type
int (2B)
char(1B)
float (4B)
double(8B)
Short int(8B)
long int(4B)
signed int (2B)
Signed char(1B)
unsigned char(1B)
Long double(10B)
long long(8B)
bool(used in c++) (1B)
Long is a size modifier and signed qualifier
15d:T4fcf,
An animation is an illusion that is created by quickly cycling through a series of images, where each image is slightly different from the last.
An animation updates the value of a property over a period of time.
When we are cycling group of image the brain will perceive group of images as a single changing scene
In any file this illusion is created by using cameras that record many photographs or frames each second.
When the frames are played back by a projector the audience see a moving picture
In silver light animations can enhance your graphical creations by adding movement and interactivity
In silver light we animate objects but apply by applying animations to their individual properties
SilverLight Storyboard
Story board controls animations with timer line and provides object and property targeting information for it child animations.
In silver light to create storyboards we use story board class.
Story board is physically does not exits, rather it is a logical implementation used to apply the animations we use the following syntax to create story board in xaml.
<Story Board___> properties
One (or) more child formations>
</story board>
Methods with story board class
Begin()
Pause()
Resume()
Stop()
Begin():- This method initiates or sorts the set of animations associated with the story board
Pause():- This method is used to pause the animation clock associated with the story board.
Resume():- used to resume the animation clock that is in pause state or runtime state associated with the story board
Stop():- Used to stop the story Board. That is all animations associated with story board will be stopped
Properties With Story Board Class
Auto Reverse
True
False (default) Duration Replace Behavior
Begin time
Auto Reverse :- When set to true the animation will take back to original state after completing forward animation. That is during the timeline first forward animation will be executed. After completion of forward animation, backward animation will be implemented or applied
False:- No back word animation will be implemented
Begin time:- Used to set or get the time value at which the animation or timeline should begin. In general the begin time format will be [days] house: Minutes: seconds [.fract: onalseconds]
If we did not give any value animation will begin at time of execution of being method()
Duration:- used to set or get a value which indicates length of the time for animation.
We use the following format for the duration
[days.] -- 0to 23 hours: Minutes --0 to 59: seconds – 0 to 9 [functional seconds] optional
Repeat Behavior:- Used to set or get a value that indicates how many times animation should be repeated
If we give set Repeat behavior as 2x animation will be repeated If we give set Repeat Behavior as 2X animation will be repeated 2 times, 3X animation will be repeated for 3 times and 4x – 4 times etc
If we set repeat behavior is Forever animation will be repeated continuously through the execution time of the application. We can integrate this repeat behavior with duration. Like
Duration = “0:0:2” Repeat behaviors = “0:0:4” à animation will be repeated for 2 times.
Duration = “0:0:2” repeat behavior=”0:0:6” à repeated for 3 times.
Attached properties with storyboard class:-
Target name
Target property
These properties will be attached to animation classes when we create any animation class within the story board.
Target name:- This property is used to set the required silver light control id to which we want to apply the animations. Target property:- used to set or get the property name of the silver light control set in target name property with which we want to apply animation.
To use these properties we use the following syntax. Within the storyboard container tag
<animation alls story board. Target name = “control ID”
Story board. Target property = “property name
Duration =”value” Begin Time=”value” Auto reverse = “ value”
Repeat Behavior = “Value”/>
Types of Animation:-
These are 3 types of animations in silver light
Double animation
Color animation
Point animation
All there classes are present in system. Windows. Media. Animation]
Double Animation in SilverLight
Double animation is used to animate the value of a double property between two target values using linear Interpolation over a specified duration The class is used to implement this animation is double animation present in system. Windows. Media. Animation A double animation in which creates a transition b/w two values
Properties:-
From
To
Begin Time
Duration
Auto reverse
True
false (default)
Repeat Behaviors
From:- used to set a value from which animation clock begin
To :- used to set a value up to where animation should continue
Color Animations in SilverLight
The color animation is used to animated the value of a color property b/w values using linear interpolation over a specified duration
The color animation class creates a transition between two target values
Color animation class is present in system. Windows. Media. Animation
Properties
The properties are same as double animation
From
To
Begin Time
Duration
Auto Reverser
True
False
Repeat Behavior
Point animation:-
This animation is used to animate the value or point property between target values using lines interpolation over a specified duration the point animation class is used to create a transition between two target values
Properties:-
From
To
Begin Time
Auto Reverse
True
False (default)
Duration
Repeat behavior
Steps to work with animation
Create an object to which animation is to be applied
Add on event Trigger to the object
Create the story board
Apply the required animation using the respective animation class
Set the attached properties of animation class i.e target name and target property
Set the properties and their values of animation class.
Eg to control the animation programmatically the code is some as above for source and write it in new silver light application
<Grid X:=
<path fill = Blue>
<path.data,
<Ellipse geometry X:name= “E1” enter = “80,60”
Radius x= “40” Radius y = “20”/>
</path.data>
</path>
<canvas>
<convas. Resources>
<Story board x: Name = “SBI”>
<point animation story board. Target name = “E1”
Story board. Target property = “center” from = “80, 60” to
“200,200” duration = “0:0:5”/>
</Story board>
</canvas resources>
<canvas>
Create the buttons and write the following code protected void btn start – click – Route d event args e
{ SBI.Begin(); }
Protected void to be pause – click(..)
{
Protected void to be resume – click (--
{ SBI. Resume();
} protected void to be stop – click (--)
{
SBI. Stop ();
}
Protected void to be resume – click (--
{ SBI. Resume(); } protected void to be stop – click (--)
{ SBI. Stop (); }
Exercise
Data Binding in Silver light:-
Data binding in silver light represents attaching the data from source to target. Whenever we bind the data in silver light the data source need not be database. It might be a silver light object or XML source or database.
15e:Tfc7,
SilverLight Layouts are used to arrange controls, the silver light supports three types of layouts
Grid
Canvas
Stack panel
Grid Layout
The grid container the Microsoft designed based on HTML table, depending on the requirement we can arrange collection of controls in the multiple rows and in the multiple columns. Example:- open new silver light application Go to XAML mode In the grid tag <Grid X: Name = “layout Root” Background = “white”> <Grid. Colum Definitions> <Colum definition width = “100” > </column Definition> <column definition width = “100”> </column definition> <column definition width = “100”> </column definition> </grid.column definitions> <grid.Rowdefinitions> <Row definition Height = “100”> </Row definition> <Row definition Height = “100”> </Row definition> <Row definition height = “100”> </Row definition> </Grid. Row definitions> <Button X:Name= “b1” Height = “50” width = “50” Grid.Row = “0” Grid. Colum = “1”> </Button> <button Grid.Row = “2” Grid. Column = “1” content = “three”> </button> </Grid>
Canvas Layout
This layout is used to arrange collection of controls by specifying absolute position using left and top properties, this layout same like c# .net form container EX:- Open new silverlight application Go to xaml mode Remove the grid tag and type the following <canvas> <Text block x: Name = “t1” Text = “Welcom” Fontsize = “58” canvas.left = “100” canvas.Top = “100”> </Text block> <ellipse X:name = “e1” Height = “120” width = “300” stroke = “green” stoke thickness = “10” canvas. Left = “60” canvas.Top = “50”> </ellipse> </canvas> Output
Text Block
This control is used to display read only data, this control like a label control in the previous technologies
“X:Name” property used to decide the control name
Using “Text” property we can input the data
“Font size” property gives font size to the text block control data
Using ellipse tag we can create ellipse control
Height, weight properties setting control size
Stroke property gives border color
Fill property gives background color
Stroke thickness gives border width
Stack Panel
Using stack panel we can create workspace under grid layout and in the canvas layout, we can create workspace in the horizontal or in the vertical order using this container we can arrange collection of controls in the single row or in the single column. Example:- open new silverlight application Go to XAML mode In the grid tag <Grid X: Name = “ layout Root” Background = “white”> <stack panel orientation = “vertical”> <button Content = “click” Height = “100” width = “150”> </button> <Ellipse Height = “100” width = “150” Fill = “Red”> </ellipse> <Rectangle Height = “ 100” width = “150” Fill = “green” stock=”blue”> </Rectangle> </stack panel> </grid>
15f:T2055,
SilverLight Brushes are used to fill colors, images and videos in silver light objects.
The silver light supports five types of brushes
Solid color brush
Linear gradient brush
Image brush
Radial Gradient Brush
Video Brush
Solid Color Brush
This brush is used to fill single color in the silver light controls, while working with brushes we have to work with color related properties.
Rectangle. Fill tag gives special features to the fill property
Linear Gradient Brush
This brush is used to fill multiple colors in the silver light controls in the linear order, while working with this brush we can work with any color related property
<Gradient stop offset = “.4” color = “blue”> </gradient stop>
<gradient stop offset = “.6” color = ‘Green”> </gradient stop>
<gradient stop offset = ”.8” color = “black”> </gradient stop>
</linear Gradient brush>
</Rectangle .fill>
</rectangle>
</Grid>
àThe linear gradient brush gives multiple liners based on start point and end point properties, two properties takes x, y locations, by default two properties default parameter values are (0,0) and (1,1)
àThe start point property takes the value from upper left comes,
àEnd point property takes the value from bottom right corner using gradient stop tag we can fill one color in the silver light control, using this tag we can set color location and filling color.
Image Brush
This brush is used to fill one image in the silver light controls, while working with this brush we can work with any color related property
Example:- open new silver light application
Go to XAML mode
In the canvas tag
<canvas>
<text block x: name = “t1” Text = “welcome” Font size = “100”>
This brush is used to fill multiple colors in the silverlight controls in the circular order, while working with this brush we can work with all color related properties.
<Gradient Stop Offset = “.2” color = “Red”> </Gradient stop>
<Gradient stop offset = “.4” color = “Green”> </gradient stop>
<Gradient stop offset = “.6” color = “yellow”> </gradient stop>
<Gradient stop offset =”.8” color = “black”> </Gradient stop>
</Radial gradient Brush>
</ellipse. Fill>
</Ellipse>
</Grid>
Using Gradient Origin property we can set gradient local point, this property takes two arguments X location and Y location using Radius X, Radius Y properties we can set the X gradient size and Y Gradient size
Video Brush
This Brush is used to fill video in the silver light control, the video Brush is depending on the media element control
160:Ta18,
Media element
This control is used to access default video player from the operating system, using this control we can play different type of video formats and audio formats, while working with video brush we have to decide playing source in the media element control, we have to refer media element control reference in the video brush. Example:- open new silver light Application Go to XAML code In the grid tag <grid X:name = “Layout Root” Background = “white”> <Media element X: Name = “M1” source = “d:/advit.wmv” opacity = “0”> </Media Element> <path X:name = “p1” Height = “300” width = “300” stroke = “Red” stroke thickness = “10”> <path.data> <Rectangle Geometry Rect = “10, 10, 200, 200”> <I rectangle Geometry> </path. Data> <path.Fill> <video brush source name = “m1”> </video brush> </path. Fill> </path> </grid>
Path
The path control is used to create work space for defining collection of geometries, path.Data tag using for defining one geometry. Rectangle geometry tag used to define rectangle geometry. Rect property used to decide rectangle geometry size, this property takes four parameters
Starting x location
Starting Y location
Ending X location
Ending Y location
Implementing dynamic control with radial gradient brush
Open new silverlight application Add button control on the grid layout Go to button click event Private void button click (object sender, routed E.Vent Args e) { Rectangle r = new rectangle (); r.Hieght = 200; r.width = 200; Radial gradient brush b = new radial gradient brush (); Gradient stop g1 = new gradient stop(); G1. Offset = .2; G1.color = cdors. Red;
gradient stops. Add(g1);
gradient stop g2 = new gradient stop(); g2. Offset = .4; g2. Color = colors. Green;
Layout root. Children statement refers all controls from the grid container
‘add’ method adding new control on the container
161:T4ddf,
The transformation is used to change one coordinate space to another co ordinate space, the transformation Microsoft designed using 3x3 matrix.
Transforms are used to apply the required effects to the 2D and 3D objects. Effects are like rotating, tilling the object, stretching as well as shrinking etc. using transforms we can give different effects to the controls
The transformation we can classify in to five types
Rotate transform
Scale transform
Skew transform
Translate transform
Matrix transform
Rotate Transform
using this transformation we can rotate an object using angle property.
Scale Transform
using this transformation we can change x-co ordinate space and y-co ordinate space in the silverlight control, for changing co ordinate spaces we have to work with scale X, scaley properties.
Skew Transform
using this transformation we can skew an object co ordinate spaces using angles x, angle y properties.
Translate Transform
using this transformation we can set control X location and Y location for changing the locations the Microsoft given X and Y properties.
Example on Transformations
Open new silver light application
Go to XAML mode
In the canvas tag
<Canvas>
<Image X: name = “11” height = “100” width = “100” source = “ d:/face .jpg” canvas. Left = “100”>
<Translate transform X = “10” Y = “10”> </Translate Transform>
</image. Render transform>
</Image>
</canvas>
Image. Render Transform: This tag is used to create workspace for defining transformations.
Matrix Transform:
This transformation used to implement customized or programmer defined transformation, matrix transformation is combination of first four transformations.
This transformation the Microsoft designed using 3 x 3 matrix, depending on the requirement we can change any coordinate value
Matrix transform properties
M11: using this property we can set first row, first column values from the 3x3 matrix
M12 : using this property we can change first row, second colum values.
M21: using this property we can change second row and first column values
M22: using this property we can change second row and second column values.
Offset X: using this property we can change third row and first column values
Offset Y: using this property we can change third row and second column values
Example on Matrix Transformation
Open new silver light application
Go to XAML Mode
In the canvas tag
<canvas>
<list box x: name = “l1” Height = “250” canvas.left = “50” canvas. Top = “100”>
This tag is used to create list box control, the list box control maintains list of items, depending on the selected item we can give the information.
List box item
This tag is used to add items in the list box control, each item we can give using silverlight controls, by default we can take one item, when we are taking multiple control features in the single item we have to work with stack panel layout.
Matrix Transform. Matrix : This tag gives workspace for defining matrix transformation.
Example on double animation with transformation:
Open new silverlight application
Go to XAML Mode
In the canvas tag
<canvas>
<Ellipse X:name = “e1” Height = “100” width = “150” stroke = “red” stroke thickness = “10” canvas. Left = “50” canvas. Top = “50” mouse Enter = “e1_mouseenter”>
<double animation storyboard. Target name = “e1” storyboard. Target property = “(UIElement. Render transform). Am from = “1” To = “70” auto reverse = “True” duration = “0:0:10”>
<\bouble animation >
<double animation storyboard. Target name = “e1” storyboard. Target property = “(UIElement. Render transform). And from = “1” to = “70” auto reverse = “true” duration = “0”0”10”>
</double animation>
</story board>
</ellipse. Resource>
</ellipse >
</canvas>
El_mouse enter
{
Begin ();
}
Types of Transforms
Silver light will support following types of trans
Rotate transform
Skew transform
Scale transform
Syntax to implement Transforms
<Control class name attributes> <control class name Render Transform> <Transform class name property 1= “value” property 2=”value”/>|
</control class name.render Transform> </confrol class name>
Rotate Transform:-
This is used to rotate the object in clock wise or anti clock wise about a specified point in a two dimensional x,y coordinate system. When we use rotate transform the transformation rotates the coordinate system for a particular object about the origin point.
Every type of transform has a special class with same name of the transform.
Properties of rotate transform
Angle
Center X
Center Y
Angle
This property is used to set or get the required angle in which the object should be rotated. If we give the angle as positive the rotation will be in clock wise. If the angle is negative the rotation will be in anticlockwise
Center X & center Y
Used to mention the origin or the angle to be rotated in both X and Y directions.
Skew Transform
this is used to filt the object in required angle. Of X and Y coordinates. A skew Transform is useful for creating illusion of
Properties of skew Transform class
Angle X
Angle Y
Center X
Center Y
Angle X
Used to set/get the required angle value that is to be filter form X-axis.
Angle Y
Used to set/get a value that is to be tilted from Y axis
Scale Transform
This transform is user to stretch or shrink an object horizontally or vertically. This transformation is used to scale an object in the two dimensional x,y coordinate system
Properties of scale Transform class
Scale X
Scale Y
Center X <scale X=”1.5”
Center Y
Scale X
This property is used to set or get the value that is used to be shrink |stretch in X direction
Scale Y
used t set or get a value that indicates to shrink |stretch in Y direction
When we implement scale transform the object current state is assumed to ‘1’ the object will be stretched and if we are giving a value of less then ‘1’ the object will be shirked
Translation Transform
This transform is used to move the current object in two dimensional x,y coordinate system
Properties:-
X Y
X:-Used to set 1 get the required value that the object should be moved in x-direction
Y:-Used to set 1 get a value that the object should be moved in Y direction.
Transform Group
This transform is used to apply two 0.2 more transforms at once to the object. In general using render transform we can apply only one transform at once there are no special properties for transform group, Rather it will contain other 4 transform classes as a group with in it.
From the other four transforms, we can implements two or more transforms together using this transform group class
Example with rotate transform class
<content=”Button”>
Create a button within the silver light application page go to .xaml source and write the following code <Button content+”Button” Height=”28” width=”60” content=”Button”
Silverlight Key Frame Animations are used to implement more complex Animations, depending on the requirement we can give any number of targets. In the key frame animation for giving multiple targets we have to define frames.
The key frame Animation we can classified in to three types
Double animation using key frame
Color animation using key frame
Point animation using key frame
The three types of animations supports three frames
Linear key frame
Discrete key frame
Sp line key frame
Linear key frame
This frame is used to single target to the key frame animation this frame always takes target location and frame time
While executing this frame the user can observe previous value to target value how execute animation
Discrete key frame
Using this frame we can give single target to the key frame animation, we have to specify target value and frame time, while executing this frame we can observe animation after reaching target location
Sp line key frame
using this frame we can give single target to the key frame animation while defining this frame we have to specify target value and frame time and sp line property
The Microsoft defined sp line key frame based on sp line mathematical function.
<Ellipse geometry X:Name = “e1” radius X= “10” Radius Y = “10” center = “30, 30”>
</Ellipse geometry>
</geometry group>
</path. Data>
<path. Triggers>
<Event trigger routed event – “canvas. Loaded”>
<begin story board>
<Story board>
<point animation using key frames storyboard. Target name = “e1” storyboard. Target property = “center”>
<linear point key frame key time = “0:0:10” value = “230, 30”>
</liner point key frame>
<discrete point key frame keytimes = “0:0:20” value = “200, 230”>
</discrete point key frame>
<sp linepoint key frame key time = “0:0:30” value = “30, 230”
Key sp line = “0.0,.6, .0, .6”>
</sp line pint keyframe>
<linear point key frame key time = “0:0:35” value = “20, 30”>
</linear point key frame>
</point animation using key frames>
</story board>
</begin story board>
</event trigger>
</ path. Triggers>
</path>
</canvas>
163:T115a,
Applying 3D effects to the Controls to the Images
To apply the 3D effects in general we use projection class and plane projection class. This plane projection class con not be implemented directly with controls rather we need to implement with container like stock panel or flow layout or grid layout etc. This plane projection class will allow to rotate the given layout in 3 directions s, y, and z
Properties with plane projection class
Centre of rotation x
Centre of rotation Y
Centre of rotation z
Rotation X
Rotation Y
Rotation Z
Centre of rotation X:- This property is used to rotate the centre in x direction. Centre of rotation Y:- used to rotate the centre of the plane in Y direction. Centre of Rotation Z:- used to rotate the centre of the plane in Z direction. The values of centre of rotation X, centre of rotation y and centre of rotation Z should be form 0 to 1 Rotation X: Used to set a value that plane should be rotated in x direction Rotation Y : used to set a value that the plane should be rotated in Y direction er, y – a x is Rotation Z:- Used to set a value that the plane should be rotated in z-axis The values of rotation x, rotation Y and rotation Z should be from 0 to 30
Syntax to Apply 3d Effects to a Plane in Layout
<Layout class> <layout class. Projection> <plane projection centre of rotation X = “value” centre of rotation Y = “value” centre of rotation Z = “value” rotation x= “value” rotation Y= “value” Rotation Z = “value”/> </layout class. Projection> Code to create controls within layout </layout class>
Example with 3d Effects to a Stack Panes
Create a new silver light application
↓
Go to xaml source of the page
↓
write the following code <Grid vi name= <stack panel margin = “60” fill = “gray “> <stack panel. Projection> <plane projection Rotation x = “-20” Rotation Y = “-20” Rotations z = “35”/> </stack panel.Projection> </stack panel>
Example to Implement 3D Effects with Images
Go to design create the controls within the stock panel then Run the application and check
↓
Create a new silver light page
↓
go to xaml source.
↓
write the following code. <Stack panel margin = “60” fill= “gray”> <stack panel. Projector> <plane projection centre off rotation X = 0.9 Rotation Y = “90”/> </stack panel. Projection> </stack panel> Go to design
↓
Go to tool box
↓
double click on Image control
↓
This will create image 1
↓
Select image 1
↓
Go to properties
↓
Go to source property in common category
↓
click on ellipses button
↓
select the required image file to be displayed
↓
click on open
↓
click on ok
↓
Run the application and check
164:T45d5,
Data binding
The data binding is the concept of creating link between source and silverlight control, the data binding we can classify in to three types
One time binding
One way binding
Two way binding
One time binding: This binding is used to bind the data in the silverlight control while executing the application, after executing the application we can’t get new values from the source, we cant give modified data t the source.
One way binding: This binding is used to Bind the data in the silver light control while executing the application, after executing the application we can get modified data from the source. But we cant give modification data to the source
Two way binding:- using this binding we can bind the data while executing the application, after executing the application we can get modified data from the source, we can give modified data to the source
Example on Data Binding
Open new silverlight application
Add list box, data grid and button control
Go to mainpage XAML code behind window
Public partial class main page: user control
{
Public class emp
{
Public string ename {get; set; }
Public int eno {get; set;}
Public int esal {get; set;}
}
List <emp> obj;
Public void get data()
{
Obj = new list <emp> ();
Obj. add (new emp() {ename = “aaa”, eno =123, esal = 5000}0;
Obj.add (new emp() {ename=”666”, eno = 321, esal = 2000}0;
}
Private void button :- click (object sender, routed E vent arges e )
{
Getdata ();
/: st Box1. Items source = obj;
Datagrid1. Itemssource = Obj;
}
}
Go to SAML mode in the list box control tag
<list box height = “221”>
<listbox. Item template>
<data Template>
<list box item>
<stack painel orientation = “horizontal”>
<text block text = “{binding ename, mode=onetime}”>
</textblock>
<text block text = “{binding eno, mode = onetime}”>
</text block>
<Text Block Text = “{Binding esal, mode = onetime}”>
</textblock>
</stack panel>
</list box item>
</datatemplate>
</listbox. Item template>
</list box>
In the data grid control set auto generate columns = “True”
Silver light will support 3 types of data binding
One – way binding
Two-Way binding
One-Time
One Time Binding In one time binding we bind the data first time from source to target
If any modification made righter in source or target that will not be objet affected in source or target.
One way binding
In this method we bind the data from source to target and whenever data is modified in source that will get affected/ updated at target automatically
This is the default mode
Two way data binding
In this method we bind the data from source to target, then whenever date is updated in source or in tougher it will be updated automatically into other.
Binding the data from one silver light control to other
To bind the data from one silver light control to other we write the code with target control property
In general binding is implemented using binding element with in the delimiters like
{Binding element name = some control ID, path = property name mode = “value”}
↓
One time One way (default) Two way
Example to bind the data from one silver light control to other silver light control in one way mode.
Create a new silver light app
Change the list box name to list sample
Goto common properties in properties window
Go to Items collection property
Clicks on ellipses button
Click on add button 4 times,
Then 4 list box items will be added
Select first list box item
Go to content property
Type the content or red
Similarly change the contents of list box in list box items to green, blue, orange respectively
Create a two text boxes with name text box 1 and text box2
Go to source and write the following code to
<text box name =”text box1 ---- text = bending
Element name = “list sample path= selected item. Content, mode= one way}”/>
<Text Box name = “Text box 2” --- Back ground =” {binding element name =”list sample” path= selected item content mode = one way}”/>
Run the app in & check
When ever user selects any element text box1 data will be change and text box 2 background is changed but if user change us the data in text box1 that is in target it will not be updated to the source i.e selected item of list box list sample
To implement two way mode with text box1 and list sample
Go to text box1, XAML source and change the mode to two way like
<text box .name = “text box 1” --------
Text – “Binding element name = list sample,
Run the app in & check
Whenever user selects any element of the text party of the text box1 & back ground property of text box2 will change automatically
Similarly modify the data in text box that is type a different color name & use tab key. This will modify the selected item content with in the list sample, which indicates two way binding
Implementing data binding with silver light controls and class properties
In target control property we write our binding element like
{Binding path = data field name/properties
Mode = value, update source Trigger = value}
One time default
One way explicit
Two way (used with two way)
Methods with binding expression class
Up date source:- This method is use to update the source data when the data is updated with in the target.
To create object for expression class we use another method known as binding expression of the target control i.e. get binding expression (depending property)
WCF is used to make the communication in the intranet projects and in the internet projects, the Microsoft design ned WCF using distributed technology and using standard based technology
Distributed Technology
Server
Standard based technology
The Microsoft designed remoting with distributed technology, In the remoting always we have to implement threes different application
Private assembly
Server application
Client application
The private assembly dll file features we have to distribute to the server application and to the client application
The Microsoft designed web services using standard based technology, using web services we can make the communication in the intranet project and in the internet projects.
Web service designed in the special type of proxy machines(middle wares)
The web service implemented persons distributing web URL to the main project, based on web URL we can access web service features in the remote location.
While working with WCF integration in the silver light application, we have to open silverlight application hosting page as asp.net webpage, while opening the project the Microsoft given two different projects in the single application
Silverlight application
net application
We have to implement WCF service in the asp.net folder, while adding WCF service in the project automatically getting two files
I service 1. Cs
Service 1. SVC.Cs
I service 1.cs : The Microsoft given predefined interface in the iservice 1.cs fiel, we have to declare methods in the interface
Service 1. Svs.cs: the Microsoft given predefined class in the service 1. Svc.cs file, in the predefined class we should have to implement all interface methods.
After implementing the service class methods we have to execute service 1. Svc file, getting service reference, by adding this reference in the intranet projects and in the internet projects we can distribute WCF service features.
Client access policy. Xml: This file is used to grant cross domain features to the WCF service.
The WCF service reference we have to add in the silver light application
Import the WCF namespace
Create instance to the WCF service class
Déclassé the event
Define the event
Call the WCF service method
Example on WCF Integration with SilverLight
Open new silver light application with Asp.net webpage as hosting page.
Add text box and button control in the main page. XAML file
Add WCF service
Go to solution explorer window right click on the asp.net folder select add à click on new item à select WCF service à click on add button
Declaring methods in the iservice interface
Go to iservice 1. Cs file module
[service contract]
Public interface iservice1
{
[operation contract]
String addstr();
[operation contract]
Void dowork();
}
Implementing iservice interface methods in the service class
Go to service 1. SVC.CS file module
Public class service 1: iservice1
{
Public void do work ()
{
}
Public string addstr()
{
Return “from WCF”;
}
To give cross domain features to the WCF service we have to add XML file name with ‘ client accesspolicy. XML’
Adding XML file: Go to solution explorer window right click on the asp.net folder select add à click on new item, select XML file click on add button
Go to XML file module
<? XML version = “1.0” encoding = “utf - 8” ? >
<access – policy>
<cross – domain –access>
<policy>
<allow- from http_request _headers = “*”>
<domain uri = “*”/>
</allow _from>
<grant – to>
<resource include _ subpaths = “true” path = “/” />
</grant – to>
</policy>
</cross _ domain – access>
</access – policy>
Execute service 1. Svc file, getting service rul
As per this application service url is
http: //loathes: 1033/ servicel.svc
166:Td45,
Distributing WCF features in the SilverLight Application
Go to solution explorer right click on silverlight foler click on ‘add. Service reference Address: http: //loathes : /003 / servicel.svc Click on go button click on ok button
Note
By default the Microsoft given namespace name is ‘service reference1’ Go to main page .XAML code behind window Using silverlight application 53. Service reference1; Namespace silverlight application 53 { Public partical class mainpage: user control { Public mainpage() { Initialize component (); Service 1 client obj = new service 1 client(); Obj. add str completed + = new event handler <addstrcompleted eventargs> (obj_addstrcompleted); Obj.addstraasyncc); } Strubg s; Void obj_add strcompleted (object sender, addstr completed event args e) { S = e.result . tosting(); } Private void button_click (object sender, routed eventrags e) { Textbox1.text = s; } } }
Note:-
while declaring addstrcompleted event press two times tab key after giving “+= Using addstrcompleted event eventArgs parameter we can get WCF method data
Effects In the SilverLight
Effects are used to give rich interactive web graphical features, the silver light support two types of effects
Blur effect
Shadow effect
SilverLight Blur Effect
Open new silver light application Go to XAML mode In the canvas tag <canvas> <button X:name = “b1” height = “100” width = “250” content = “welcome” fontsize = “36” click = “b1- click”> <button. Effect> <blur effect radius = “100” > </bluer effect > </button. Effect> </button> </canvas>
Blur Effect giving at Runtime
Go to button click event Using system. Windows. Media. Effects; Private void bl-clicks (objet sender, routed event args e ) { If (bl.effect == null) { Blur effect b = new blureffet (); b.radius = 100;
Effect = b;
} Else { Bl. Effect = null; } }
SilverLight Shadow Effect
Open new silverlight application Go to SAML mode In the canvas tag <canvas> <button X: name = “bi” Height = “100” width = “250” content = “welcome” font size = “40” canvas. Left = “60” canvas . top : “100”> <button. Effect> <dropshoadow effect blurradius = “100” shadow depth = “100”> </dropshadow effect> </button. Effect> </button> </canvas>
167:T2c6e,
Data set In this job, Path the path is the file columns load (SCD) Oracle enterprise Table name = dim 2 Write method = upset (up date and insert) Upset order = update then insert Compile and Run GO to SQL plus Select * from dim2; TO insert new values
Delete SRC ;
Insert into SRC values (111,”Smitha”);
Insert in to SRC values (444, “Anu”);
Compile and RUN Job (a);
Compile and RUN Job (a); Output Skid S no S name Es – date Ee- date ACF ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 111 Shilpa Y 2 222 Reruka Y 3 333 Archana Y 4 111 Sumathi Y 7.5 version SCD 1 and 2 SCD’s are implemented in 7 using change capture and change apply. (SCD 1) Change Capture Capture the changes between before data and After data and generates change code. SCD 1SCD – II :- (7.5 version) If code =1 ,ten ESS –date = current data EE –date =”9999-12-31” Code =2 ee-dab =current date -1
Surrogate key Stage
Alternative primary key
Generates Sequence number
Surrogate key Stage differs completely in stage and version in 7.5 and 8.0.1
Q: Column Generator also generates Sequence number, So why do we use Surrogate key ?
Sol: Surrogate Key
we can pass the values with parameters Can pass the parameter in runtime Parameterization is possible
Interested in mastering DataStage Training?Enroll now for FREE demo on DataStage Training.
Column Generator
We can’t do
version :-
How to create Sequence
How to restart Sequence
Q: How can you update parameter values Sol:- APS, Routines Job :- (Source Type = flat file)Surrogate key Generated output column name = SKID Source Name = C : /Skid. TxtEmpty file Source Type = flat file output DO mapping Drag SKID to top Compile and RUN Generate Sequence no. 1 to 14th for 14 records When it is RUN for the 2nd time Sequence status from 15, 16 To identify the last highest valueJob :- (Surrogate key Generator) Source Type = Data Sequence Source name = C :/Skid.txt Empty file namelast generated value is storedrecalls the last generated, it status increment valueprocess is auto missedàlast generated value can also be stored in data base Job:- (Source type = Sequence Data base) Source type = data type Sequence Data base type = oracle Oracle server name = oracle Password = tiger Username = Scott Source name = shilpa In SQL plus, create a data base Sequence objectCreate sequence shilpa; Sequence createdOutputDo mapping
168:T289f,
Oracle Enterprise
Table name = dim 1
Write method = upset Upset order = update then insert Compile and RUN In SQL plus, Select * from dim 1; Skip
S no S name
1 111 shilpa
2 222 Renuka
3 333 Archama
To insert new valuesdelete SRC;
Insert in to SRC Values (222, ‘Anil’); Insert in to SRC Values (444, ‘Sravani’);
Commit;
Compile and Run job (a)
Compile and Run Job (b)
Select * from dim 1;
Skip S no S name
1 111 shilpa
2 222 Renuka
3 333 Archama
4 444 Sravani
SCD – type 2Table 1 Create table SRC (S no number (3), S name varchar2 (25) ); Table 2 Create Table dim 2 (skid number (2), S no number (3), S name varchar2 (25), Es – date data, EE – data date, ACF varchar2 (2)); 5 types for SCD – Type 2 S 1 :- Select output link as fact link S2 :- Map the look up key S No S3 :-Source type = Flat file =Source Name = (Empty file name) S4:- Identify the purpose of each field Skid = Surrogate key S no= business Key S name = type 2 Es –date = Effective date EE – date = Expiration date ACF = Current Indicator (“Y”)
Derivation
Skid = Surrogate key S no= S no S name = S name Es –date = Current date EE – date = “9999 – 12-31” (default DB/2 format) ACF = Current Indicator (“Y”)
Expire
EE – date = Date from Julian Day ((Julian Day from Date (Current Date ()) -1)) ACF = “N” S5 :- Map required fields to fact table
Load properties
S1 :- Set Data set properties S2 :-Set oracle properties Table Name = dim 2 Write method = upset (update and insert) Upset order = update then Insert
Oracle enterprise 0 Load dim 2 table à column à change date to Times stamp
Oracle enterprise 1 Load SRC table
S no S name 111 shilpa 222 Renuka 333 Archama
Learn DataStage by Tekslate - Fastest growing sector in the industry.
Explore Online DataStage Training and course is aligned with industry needs & developed by industry veterans.
Tekslate will turn you into DataStage Expert.
Transformer
Drag and drop the fields Times stamp to date (before. Es. date) = Es – date Times stamp to date (before. Es. date) = Ee – date In before change Es – date, Ee – date to date SCD 1) Select fact link 2) Map the look up Key SNO 3) Source type = flat file Source name = E:/shilpa/SCD 2. Txt; 4)Select all Right click clear derivation Derivation key purpose expire Double click Surrogate key () Skid Surrogate key S no business key S name type 2 Current date () Es – date effective date “9999 – 12 - 31” Ee –date Expiration date “Y” ACF Current indicator Ee – date = Date from Julian Day ((Julian Day from Date (Current Date ()) -1))
Map required fields to fact table
Compile and Run OutputSkid S no S nameEs – date Ee- date ACF 1 111 Shilpa Y 2 222 Reruka Y 3 333 Archana Y (b) Data set ---------------à oracle enterprise Copy the path of DFM Data set (a) - Columns -Save --(SCD) For indepth understanding of DataStage click on
The class HTML attribute is used to associate an element with a style sheet, and specifies the class of element, you learn more about the use of the class attribute when you will learn cascading Style sheet(CSS). The value of the attribute may also be a space-separated list of class names. For example.
class=”className1 classname2 classname3”
HTML Style Attribute
The style HTML attribute allows you to specify CSS rules within the element. For example
Here’s table of some other attributes that are readily usable with many of HTML’s tags.
Attribute
Options
Function
align
right,left,center
Horizontally aligns tags
valign
top,middle,bottom
Vertically aligns tags within an HTMl element.
bgcolor
numeric, hexadecimal,RGB values
Places a background color behind an element
background
URL
Places an background image behind an element
ID
User Defined
Names an element for use with cascading style sheets
Class
User defined
classifies an element for use with cascading style sheets
Width
Numeric value
Specifies the width of tables, images, or table cells
height
Numeric value
Specifies the height of tables, images,or table cells
Title
User Defined
“Pop-Up” title for your element.
We will see related examples as we will proceed to study other HTML tags.
World wide web Consortium(w3c) recommends lowercase in HTML 4, And demands lowercase tags in XHTML
Attributes
An attribute is used to define the characteristics of an element and is placed inside the element’s opening tag. All attributes are made up of two parts: a name and a value.
The value of the attribute should be put in double quotation marks, and is separated from the name by the equals sign
Many HTML tags have a unique set of their own attributes. Right now we want to focus on a set of generic attributes.
Core Attributes
The four core attributes that can be used on the majority of HTML elements(although not all) are:
id
title
class
style
HTML id Attribute
The id HTML attribute can be used to uniquely identify any element within a page(or style sheet). There are two primary reasons that you might want to use an id attribute on an element:
If an element carries an id attribute as a unique identifier it is possible to identify just that element and its content.
If you have two elements of the same name within a webpage(or style sheet), you can use the id attribute to distinguish between elements that have the same name.
For now, the id attribute could be used to distinguish between two paragraph elements, like so:
<p id=”html”> This para explains what is HTML</p>
<p id=”css”>This para explains what is casecading style sheet<\p>
Note that there are some special rules for the value of the id attribute, it must :
Begin with a letter (A.Z or a.z) and can then be followed by any number of letters, digits(0,9), hyphens, underscores, colons, and periods.
Remain unique within that document; no two attributes may have the same value within that HTML document.
HTML Title Attribute
The title HTML attribute gives a suggested title for the element. The behavior of this attribute will depend upon the element that carries it, although it is often displayed as a tooltip or while the element is loading.
Use Lowercase Attributes
Attribute names and attribute values are case-insensitive.
However, the World Wide Web Consortium(w3c) recommends lowercase attributes/attribute values in their HTML 4 recommendation.
Newer versions of (X) HTML will demand lowercase attributes.
16a:T46c5,
HTML Elements
The <html> element is the containing element for the whole HTML document. Each HTML document should have one <html> and each document should end with a closing </html> tag. Following two elements appear as direct children of an <html> element:
<head>
<body>
The <head> Element
The <head> element is just a container for all other header elements. It should be the first thing to appear after the opening <html> tag Each <head> element should contain a <title> element indicating the title of the document, although it may also contain any combination of the following elements, in any order : The <base> tag is used to create a “base” url for all links on the page. The <object> tag is designed to include images, javascript objects, Flash animations, MP3 files, QuickTime movies and other components of a page. The <link> tag is used to link to an external file, such as a style sheet or Javascript file The <style> tag is used to include CSS rules inside the document The <script> tag is used to include JAVA script or VBscript inside the document The <meta> tag includes information about the document such as keywords and a description, which are particularly helpful for search applications.
HTML Base Tag
<html> <head> <title>practice HTML base tag</title> <base href=”http://www.sekharit.com” target=”_blank”/> </head> <body> <p> This tag is using base path to display the image. </p> <img src=”/image/html.gif”/> <p> This link will open in new window because we have used _blank in base tag.</p> <p> Try to click this <a href=”/php/index.htm”>PHP tutorial</a> </body> </html>
Style sheets describe how documents are presented on screens, in print, or perhaps how they are pronounced. W3C has actively promoted the use of style sheets on the web since the Consortium was founded in 1994. Cascading Style Sheets(CSS) is a style sheet mechanism that has been specifically developed to meet the needs of web designers and users. With CSS, you can specify a number of style properties for given HTMl element. Each properly has a name and a value, sperated by a colon(:) Each property declaration is separated by semi-colon(;)
The <div> tag is nothing more than a container for other tags, Much like the body tag, Div elements are block elements and work behind the scenes grouping other tags together. Use only the following attributes with your div element.
id
Width
height
title
style
For the purpose of this example, we have included the style attribute in order to color our div tag in order to bring a stronger visualization for our viewer.
Above is a great visual about how a div plays the role of a container of other HTML elements, applying a background color/image is the only real way to visualize your div tags.
HTML – Links and Anchors
The web got its spidery name from the plentiful connections between web sites. These connections are made using anchor tags to create links. Text, images, and Forms may be used to create these links.
The bgcolor attributes is used to control the background of an HTML element, specifically page and table backgrounds. Bgcolor can be placed within several of the HTML tags. However, we suggest you only use it for your page’s main background(<body>) and in tables. Syntax <TAGNAME bgcolor=”value”> Quick and dirty, here is how to change the background of your web page. Just use the bgcolor attribute in the <body> tag and you are golden
HTML Code
<body bgcolor=”Silver”> <p> We set the background….</p> </body>
HTML – Background
images can be placed within elements of HTML. Tables, paragraphs, and body may all have a background image. To accomplish this, we use the background attribute as follows.
HTML Code
<table height=”100” width=”150” background=http://www.tizag.com/pics/htmlT/background.jpb> <tr><td> This table has a background image</td></tr> </table>
HTML-Background Repeat
In the first example we happen to be lucky because our image and our table had exactly the same size pixel dimensions. Everything looks great.
HTML Code
<table height=”200” width=”300” background=http://www.tizag.com/pics/htmlT/background.jpg> <tr><td>This table has a background image</td></tr></table> It is obvious this is often not the desired outcome,however,it can also be quite useful as you will see in the following example.
HTML-Patterned Backgrounds
Repeating a generic image as a background doesn’t have much practical use. We either need to find an image to fit exactly as our background or have an image an image editing program to adjust the dimensions of our image. From a different angle, we can use this default attribute to our benefit say if we wanted to have some sort of pattern as our background, In an image editing program such as Adobe Photoshop, or Paint Shop Pro, We could create a very small(perhaps 4X4 pixels) and create a couple of basic patterns, 4X4 image Now here is the same image set as the background to our same table.
HTML Code
<table height=”100” width=”150” background=”http://www.tizag.com/pics/htmlT/pattern.jpg”> <tr><td>This table has a background patterned image</td></tr> </table>
HTML-Transparent Background
Another great technique, along the same lines as the patterned images, is that of transparent, colored backgrounds. Most image editors have some sort of transparency device to create images that appear see through. We’re not going to cover how to do this with every single program. However, most of the time all you need to do is fill your canvas with the color you would like and then set the opacity to something below 100%. Then make sure you save your file as a gift not a jpeg, and all systems should be go. Now that you have had the crash course on creating transparent files, you place them onto your websites the exact same way as you would a repeating background.
To link to sections of your existing page a name must be given to the anchor, In the example below, we’ve created a mini table of contents for this page. By placing blank anchors just after each heading, and naming them, We can then create reference links to those sections on this page as shown below. Fist, the headings of this page contain blank, named anchors, They look like this
Tizag’s Own Code:
<h2> HTML Links and Anchors<a name=”top”></a></h2> <h2> HTML Text Links<a name=”text”></a></h2> <h2> HTML Email<a name=”email”></a></h2> Now create the reference links, placing the pound symbol followed by the name of the anchor in the href of the new link.
Anchor Code:
<a href=”#top”> Go to the Top</a> <a href=”#text”>Learn about Text Links</a> <a href=”#email”>Learn about Email Links</a>
HTML – Email Links
Creating an email link is simple. If you want somebody to mail you about your site a good way to do it is place an email link with a subject already in place for them.
Placing files available for download is done in exactly the same fashion as placing text links. Things become complicated if we want to place image links available for download. The best solution for images is to use a thumbnail link that we discuss in the next lesson.
HTML Code
<a href=http://www.sekharit.com/pics/htmlT/blanktext.zip> Text Document</a> Download a Text Document: Text Document
HTML – Default Links; Base
Use the <base> tag in the head element to set a default URL for all links on a page to go to. It’s always a good idea to set a base tag just incase your links become bugged somewhere down the line. Usually set your base to your home page.
Images are a staple of any web designer, so it is very important that you understand how to use them properly. Use the <img/> tag to place an image on your web page.
HTML Code
<img src=”sunset.gif” height =”50” width = “100”>
Image
HTML – Image src
Above we have defined the src attribute. Src stands for source, the source of the image or more appropriately, where the picture file is located. As with links described in a previous lesson, you may use any standard URL to properly point the src attribute to a local or external source. There are two ways to define the source of an image. First you may use a standard URL, (src=http://www.Tizag.com/pics/htmlT/sunset.gif) As your second choice, you may copy or upload the file onto your web server and access it locally using standard directory tree methods. (src=”…/sunset.gif”) The location of this picture file is in relation to your location of your .html file.
URL Types
Local Src Location Description src=”sunset.gif” picture file resides in same directory as .html file src=”…/sunset.gif” picture file resides in previous directly as .html file src=”..pics/sunset.gif” picture file resides in the pic directory in a previous directory as .html file A URL can’t contain drive letters, since a src URL is a relational source interpretation based on the location of your html file and the location of the picture file. Therefore something like src=”c:\\www\web\pics\” will not work. Pictures must be uploaded along with your .html file to your web server. Each method has its pros and cons, for instance using the URL of pictures on other sites poses a problem if the web master(s) of the other site happen to change the physical location of the picture file. Copying the file directly to your web server solves this problem. However, as you continue to upload picture files to your system, you may eventually run short on hard drive space. Use your best judgment to meet your needs.
HTML - Alternative Attribute
The alt attribute specifies alternate text to be displayed if for some reason the browser cannot find the image, or if a user has image files disabled. Text only browsers also depend on the alt attribute since they cannot display pictures. HTML Code <img src=http://example.com/brokenlink.sunset.gif alt=”Beautiful Sunset”/>
Alternative Text
HTML – Image Height and Width To define the height and width of the image, rather than letting the browser compute the size, use the height and width attributes. HTML Code <img src=”sunset.gif” height = “50” width=”100”> Height and Width Above we have defined the src, height and width attributes, By information the browser of the image dimensions it knows to set aside a place for that image. Without defining an image’s dimensions your site may load poorly; text and other images will be moved around when the browser finally figures out how big the picture is supposed to be and then makes room for the picture.
Vertically and Horizontally Align Images
Use the align and valign attributes to place images within your body, or sections.
align(Horizontal)
right
left
center
Valign(Vertical)
top
bottom
center
Below is an example of how to align an image to the right of a paragraph. HTML Code<p> This is paragraph 1, yes it is …</p> <p> <img src=”sunst.gif” align =”right”> The image will appear along the …. isn’t it ? </p> <p> This is the third paragraph that appears…. </p> Image Wrap Around: This is paragraph. yes it is. I think this paragraph serves as a nice example to show how this image alignment works The image will appear along the right hand side of the paragraph. As you can see this is very nice for adding a little eye candy that relates to the specified paragraph. If we were talking about beautiful tropical sunsets, this picture would be perfect. But we aren’t talking about that, so it’s rather a waste, isn’t it ? This is the third paragraph that appears below the paragraph with the image!
Images as Links
This will be quick review of the links – image lesson Images are very useful for links and can be created with the HTML below. HTML Code <a href=”http://www.tizag.com/”> <img src=”sunset.gif”> </a>
Image Links
Now your image will take you to our home page when you click it. Change it to your home page URL
16b:T6a3,
External Style Sheet
If you have to give same look and feel to many pages then it is a good idea to keep all the style sheet rules in a single style sheet file and include this file in all the HTML pages. You can include a style sheet file into HTML document using <link> element. Below is an example.
If you want to apply style sheet rules to a single document only then you can include those rules into that document only. Below is an example :
<head>
<style type=”text/css”>
body { background-color: pink; }
p{color:blue;20px;font-size:24px}
</style>
</head>
Inline Style Sheet
You can apply style sheet rules directly to any HTML elemet. This should be done only when you are interested to make a particular change in any HTML element only. To use inline styles you use the style attribute in the relevant tag. Below is an example:
As you begin to place more and more elements onto your web site, it will become necessary to make minor changes to the formatting of those elements. In our HTML Attributes lesson we dicussed ways to add some flavor with attributes and align elements within other elements. Several tags exits to further amplify text elements. These formatting tags can make text bold, italic,sub/superscripted, and more.
Bold, Italic and More
HTML code <p> An example of <b> Bold Text</b></p> <p> An example of <em>Emphasized Text</em></p> <p> An example of <strong> Strong Text</strong></p> <p> An example of <i>Italic Text</i></p> <p> An example of <sup> superscripeted Text</sup></p> <p> An example of <code> Computer Code Text</code></p>
HTML Formatting
An example of Bold Text An example of Emphasized Text An example of Strong Text An example of italic Text An example of superscripted Text An example of Subscripted Text An example of struckthrough Text An example of Computer code text. All of these tags add a pinch of flavor to paragraph elements. They can be used with any text type element.
Preserve Formatting – The <pre> Element
Sometimes you want your text to follow the exact format of how it is written in the HTML document. In those cases, you can use the preformatted tag <pre>. Any text between the opening <pre> tag and the closing </pre> tag will preserve the formatting of the source document. <pre> function testfunction( strText ){ alert(strText) } </pre> This will produce following result: function testFunction( strText ){ alert (startText) }
HTML Color Coding System- Color Names
There are 3 different methods to set color. The simplest being the Generic terms of colors. Examples: black, white, red, green, and blue. Generic colors are preset HTML coded colors where the values is simply the name of each color, Here is a sample of the most widely supported colors and their respective name values.
HTML Coloring System – RGB values
we do not recommend that you use RGB for safe web design because non-IE browsers do not support HTML RGB. However, if you plan on learning CSS then you should glance over this topic. RGB stands for Red, Green, Blue, Each can have a value from 0(none of that color) to 255 (fully that color). The format for RGB is – rgb(RED,GREEN,BLUE), just like the name implies. Below is an example of RGB in use, but if you are not using a browser that support it, do not worry, that is just one of the problems with HTML RGB
Red, Green, and Blue Values
bgcolor=”rgb(255,255,255)” white bgcolor=”rgb(255,0,0)” Red bgcolor=”rgb(0,255,0)” Green bgcolor=”rgb(0,0,255)” Blue
HTMl Coloring System – Hexadecimal
The hexadecimal system is complex and difficult to understand at first. Rest assured that the system becomes much, MUCH easier with practice and as a blossoming web developer, it is critical to understand hexadecimals HTML code: <p> <font size=”5”> Here is a size 5 font</font> </p>
Font Size
Here is a size 5 font.
Font Color
Set the color of your font with color.
HTML Code
<font color=”#990000”> This is text is hexacolor #990000</font> <br/> <font color=”red”> This text is red</font>
Font Color
This text is hexcolor #990000 This text is red
Font Face
Choose a different font face using any font you have installed. Be aware that if the user viewing the page doesn’t have the font installed, they will not be able to see it. Instead they will do fault to Times New Roman.And option is to choose a few that are similar in appearance.
HTML Code
<p> <font face=”Bookam old style, Book Antiqua, Garmond”> This paragraph has had its font….. </font> </p>
Font Face
This paragraph has had its font formatted by the font tag!
HTML Entities
Some characters are reserved in HTML. It is not possible to use the less than(<) or greater than(>) signs in your text, because the browser will mix them with tags. To actually display reserved characters, we must use character entities in the HTML source code to be capable of using them in your own web publications. They are far more reliable and widely compatible among web browsers and are the standard for colors on the internet. A hexadecimal is a 6 digit representation of a color, The first two digits(RR) represent a red value, the next two are a green value(GG), and the last are the blue value(BB) Here’s a hexadecimal you might see in an HTML document.
My First Hexadecimal:
bgcolor=”#RRGGBB”
HTML Color Code – Breaking the code
The following table shows how letters are incorporated into the hexadecimal essentially extending the numbers system to 16 values. Hang in there it all makes sense shortly.
Hexadecimal Color Values:
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Hexadecimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
So use letters as numbers? we will answer this question as we dive into converting hexadecimals to regular numbers, Let’s have a look at real Hexadecimal.
A Real Hexadecimal
bgcolor=”#FFFFFFF” The letter “F” is the maximum amount we can send each color and as you may deduce, this color(#FFFFFF) represents the color white. A formula exists to calculate the numeric equivalent of a hexadecimal.
HTML – Font and Basefont
The <font> tag is used to add style, size, and color to the text on your site. Use the size, color , and face attributes to customize your fonts. Use a <basefont> tag to set all of your text to the same size, face, and color. The font and basefont tags are deprecated and should not be used. Instead, use css styles to manipulate your font.
Font Size
Set the size of your font with size. The orange of accepted values is from 1(smallest) to 7(largest). The default size of a font is 3. A character entity looks like this: &entity_name; OR &#entity_number; To display a less than sign we must write: < or < Tip : The advantage of using an entity name, instead of a number, is that the name is easier to remember. However, the disadvantage is that browsers may not support all entity names(the support for entity numbers is very good)
Non-breaking Space
A common character entity used in HTML is the non-breaking space( ); Browsers will always truncate spaces in HTML pages. IF you write 10 spaces in your text, the browser will remove 9 of them, before displaying the page. To add spaces to your text, you can use the character entity.
HTML Useful Character Entities
Note : Entity names are case sensitive! Result Description Entity Name Entity Number non-breaking space   < less than < < > greater than > & & ampersand & ¢ C Cent ¢ ¢ E pound £ £ yen ¥ ¥ euro € € section § §
HTML – Text Links
Use the <a></a> tags to define the start and ending of an anchor. Decide what type of href attribute you need and place this attribute into the opening tag. The next you place between the opening and closing tags will be shown as the link on a page. Use the demonstration below as a reference.
HTML Code
<a href=”http://www.tekslate.com/” target=”_blank”>Home</a> <a href=”http://www.espn.com/” target=”_blank”> EspnHome</a> <a href=”http://www.yahoo.com/” target=”_blank” > Yahoo Home</a> Global Link :TizagHome ESPN Home Yahoo Home HTML – Link targets The target attribute defines whether to open the page in a separate window, or to open the link in the current browser window. HTML Code target=”_blank” opens new page in a browser window “_self” Loads the new page in current window _parent” Loads new page into a frame that is superior to where the link lies _top” Loads new page into the current browserwindow, cancelling all frames The example below shows how you would link to ESPN.com, a popular sports web site. The target attribute is added to allow the browser to open ESPN in a new window, so that the viewer can remain at our web site. Here’s the example HTML Code <a href=http://www.ESPN.com target=”_blank”>ESPN.COM</a> <a href=”http://www.espn.com/” target=”_blank”> EspnHome</a> <a href=”http://www.yahoo.com/” target=”_blank” > Yahoo Home</a>
Global Link
TizagHome ESPN Home Yahoo Home
HTML – Link targets
The target attribute defines whether to open the page in a separate window, or to open the link in the current browser window.
HTML Code
target=”_blank” opens new page in a browser window “_self” Loads the new page in current window _parent” Loads new page into a frame that is superior to where the link lies _top” Loads new page into the current browserwindow, cancelling all frames The example below shows how you would link to ESPN.com, a popular sports web site. The target attribute is added to allow the browser to open ESPN in a new window, so that the viewer can remain at our web site. Here’s the example
A script is a small piece of program that can add interactivity to your website. For example, a script could generate a pop-up alert box message, or provide a dropdown menu. This script could be Javascript or VBScript. You can write your Event Handlers using any of the scripting language and then you can trigger those functions using HTML attributes.
External Script
If you have to use a single script functionality among many HTML pages then it is a good idea to keep that function in a single script file and then include this file in all the HTML pages. You can incluse a style sheet file into HTML document using <script> element. Below is an example. <head> <script src=”yourfile.js” type=”text/javascript” /> </head>
Internal Script
You can write your script code directly into your HTML document. Usually we keep script code in header of the document using <script> tag. otherwise there is no restriction and you can put your source code anywhere in the document. You can specify where to make a script run automatically(as soon as the page loads), or after he user has done something(like click on a link). Below is an example this would write a Hello Javascript! message as soon as the page loads: <head> <title> internal script></title> </head> <body> <script type=”text/javascript”> alert(“Hello Javascript!”) </script> </body> This will produce following result : Hello Javascript!
16e:T3cc6,
Table
Table are very useful to arrange in HTML and they are used very frequently by almost all we developers.Tables are just like spreadsheets and they are made up of rows and columns.
You will create a table in HTML/XHTML by using<table> tag,Inside<table> element the table is written out row by row .A row is contained inside a <tr> tag,which stands for table row .And each cell is then written inside the row element using a <td> tag.which stands for table data.
Example of HTML Table
<table border=”1”>
<tr>
<td> Row 1, column 1</td>
<tr><td> Row 1, column 2</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td> Row 2, column 1</td>
<td> Row 2, column 2</td>
</tr>
</table>
This will produce following result:
Row1,Column1
Row 1, column 2
Row 2, column 1
Row 2, column 2
Note: In the above example border is an attribute of <tabel> and it will put border across all the cells. If you do not need a border then you cal use border=”0”.The border attribute and other attributes also mentioned in this session are deprecated and they have been repalced by CSS. So it recommended to use CSS instead os using any attribute directly.
Table Heading –The <th> Element
Table heading can be defined using <th> element .This tag will be put to replace <td> tag which is used to represent actual data. Normally you will put your top row as table heading as shown below, otherwise you can use<th> element at any place:
<table border=”1”>
<tr>
<th> Name</th>
<th> Salary</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td> Ramesh Raman</td>
<td>5000</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td> Shabbir Hussein</td>
<td>7000</td>
</tr>
</table>
This will produce following result. You can see its making heading as a bold one:
Name
Salary
Ramesh Raman
5000
Shabbir Hussein
7000
Note
Each cell must, however, have either a<td> or a <th> element in order for the table to display correctly even if that element is empty.
Table Cell padding and Cell spacing:
There are two attributes called cellpadding and cellspacing which you will use to adjust the white space in your table cell.Cell spacing defines the width of the border,while cellpadding represents the distance betwenn cell borders and the content with in.Following is the example:
You will use colspan attribute if you want to merge two or more columns into a single column. Similiar way you will use rowspan if you want to merge two or more rows.Following is the example:
You can set a table width and height using width and height attributes. You can specify table width or height in terms of integer value or in terms of percentage of available screen area. Following is the example:
<table border=”1” width=”400” height=”150”>
<tr>
<td> Row 1 ,Column 1</td>
<td> Row 1 ,Column 2</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td> Row 2 ,Column 1</td>
<td> Row 2 ,Column 2</td>
</tr>
</table>
This will produce following result:
<table border=”1”>
<tr>
<td>
<table border =”1”>
<tr>
<th> Name</th>
<th> Salary</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td> Ramesh Raman</td>
<td> 5000</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td> Shabbir Hussein</td>
<td> 7000</td>
</tr>
</table>
</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li> This is another cell<li>
<li>Using list inside this cell</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td> Row 2 ,Column 1 </td>
<td> Row 2 ,Column 2</td>
</tr>
</table>
This will produce following result:
16f:T64c4,
HTML forms are required when you want to collect some data from the site visitor. For example registration information: name, email address, credit card, etc.
A form will take input from the site visitor and then will post your back-end applications such as CGI,ASP Script or PHP script etc. Then your back-end application will do required processing on that data in whatever way you like.
Form elements are like text field, textarea fields,drop-down menus, radio buttons, checkboxes, etc. Which are used to take information from the user.
A simple syntax of using <form> is as follows:
<form action=”back-end script” method =”posting method” form elements like input, textarea etc>
</form>
Most frequently used form attributes are :
name : This is the name of the form.
action: Here you will specify any script URL which will receive uploaded data.
method: Here you will specify method to be used to upload data. IT can take various values but most frequently used are GET and POST.
target: it specifies the target page where the result of the script will be displayed. It takes various like _blank,_self,_parent etc.
enctype: You can use the enctype attribute to specify how the browser encodes the data before it sends it to the server. Possible values are like :
application/x-www-form-urlencoded – This is the standard method most forms use converts spaces to the plus sign and non-alphanumeric characters into the hexadecimal code front character in a ASCII text.
mulitpart/form-data- This allows the data to be sent in parts, with each consecutive part corresponding the form control. In the order they appear in the form Each part can be an optional content-type header of its own indicating the type of data for that form control.
There are different types of form controls that you can use to collect data from a visitor to your site.
Text input controls
Buttons
Checkboxes and radio buttons.
Select boxes
File select boxes
Hidden controls
Submit and rest buttons
HTML Forms – Text Input Controls
There are actually three types of text input used on forms.
Single-line text input controls :Used for items that require only one line of user input ,such as search boxes or names.They are created using the <input> element.
Passoword input controls: Single –Line text input that makes the characters a user enters.
Multiline text input control : Used when the user is requires to give detail that may be lower than a single sentence. Multi-line input controls are created with the <textarea> element.
Single –Line Text input controls
Single_Line input control are created using an <input >element whose type attribute has a value text. Here is a basic example of a single-line text input used to take first name and last name.
<form action=”/cgi-bin/hello_get.cgi” method=”get”> First name:<input type=”text” name=”first_name”/>
<br>
Last name: <input type=”text” name=”last name”/>
<input type =”submit” value=”submit”/>
</form>
This will produce following result:
Following is the list of attributes for <input> tag.
type: indicates the type of input control you want to create. This element is also used to create other form controls such as radio buttons and check boxes.
name: Used to give the name part of the name/value pair that is sent to the server, representing each form control and the value the user entered.
value: Provides an initial value for the text input control that the user will see when the forms loads.
size :Allows you to specify the width of the text-input control in terms of characters.
maxlength: Allows you to specify the maximum number of characters a user can enter into the text box.
If you want to allow a visitor to your site to enter more than one line of text, you should create a multiple-line text input control using the <textarea> element.
Here is a basic example of a multi-line text input used to take item description:
Following is the detail of above used attributes for <textarea> tag
name : The name of the control. This is used in the name/value pair that is sent to the server.
rows : Indicates the number of rows of text area box.
cols: indicates the number of columns of text area box.
<html>
<head>
<title> Practice HTML input textarea tag </title>
<./head>
<body>
<p> Try with different cols and rows</p>
<form action=”” method=”get”>
Description:<br/>
<textarea rows=”5” cols=”50” name=”description”>\
Enter decription here….
<input type=”submit” value=”submit”>
</form>
</body>
</html>
HTML Forms – Creating Button
There are various ways in HTML to create clickable buttons, you can create clickable button using <input> tag.
When you use the <input> element to create a button, the type of button you create is specified using the type attribute. The type attribute can take the following values :
Submit : This creates a button that automatically submits a form.
reset : This creates a button that automatically resets form controls to their intial values.
button: This creates a button that is used to trigger a client – side script when the user clicks that button.
<input type=”checkbox” name=”maths” value =”on”>Maths
<input type=”checkbox” name=”physics” value =”on”>Physics
<input type=”submit” value =”Select Subject”/>
</form>
The result of this code is the following form
Maths Physics
Following is the list of important check box attributes:
type: Indicates that you want to create a check box.
name: Name of the control.
value: The value that will be used if the checkbox is selected. More than one checkbox should share the same name only if you want to allow users to select several items from the same list.
checked: Indicate that when the pages loads, the check box should be selected.
<html>
<head>
<title> Practice HTML input checkbox tag</title>
</head>
<body>
<p> Try with different checkbox and different attribute</p>
Following is the list of important attributes of <select>:
name: This is the name for the control.
size: This can be used to present a scrolling list box.
multiple: If set to “multiple” then allows a user to select multiple items from the menu.
Following is the list of important attributes of <option>:
HTML
value: The value that is sent to the server if this option is selected.
Selected: Specifies that this option should be the initially selectedvalue when the page loads.
label: An alternative way of labelling options.
HTML Forms –File Select Boxes
If you want to allow a user to upload a file to your website from his computer, you will need to use a file upload box, also known as a file select box. This is also created using the <input> element.
Here is example HTML code for a form with one file select box.
If you will want to pass information between pages without the user seeing it. Hidden form controls remain part of any form, but the user cannot see them in the Web browser. They should not be used for any sensitive information you do want the user to see because the user could see this data is she looked in the source of the page.
Following hidden form is being used to keep current page number. When a user will click next page then the value of hidden form will be sent to the back-end application and it will decide which page has be displayed next.
These are special buttons which can be created using <input> When submit button is clicked then Forms data is submitted to the back-end application. When reset button is clicked then all the forms control are reset to default state.
You already have seen submit button above, we will give one reset example here:
This will produce following result. Type something and click reset button.
170:T2b83,
With HTML frames, you can display more than one HTML document in the same browser window .Each HTML document is called a frame, and each frame is independent of the others.
The disadvantages of using frames are:
HTML Frames are not excepted to be supported in future versions of HTML
HTML Frames are difficult to use.(printing the entire page is difficult>
The web developer must keep track of more HTML documents.
The HTML Frame Set Element
The HTML frame set element holds one or more frame elements .Each frame element can hold a separate document.
The frame set element states How many columns or rows there will be in the frame set and how much percentage /pixels of space will occupy each of them.
The HTML frame element
The<frame> tag defines one particular window (frame) with in a frame set.
In the example below we have a frame set with two columns.
The first column is set to 25% of the width of the browser window. The second column is set to 75% of the width of the browser window.The document “frame_a.htm” is put into the first column, and the document “frame_b.htm” is put into the second column:
<frame set cols=25%,75%>
<frame src=”frame_a.htm”/>
<frame src=”frame_b.htm”/>
</frameset>
Note: The frameset column size can also be set in pixels (cols=”200,500”), and one of the columns can be set to use the remaining space, with an asterisk(cols=”25%,*”).
Basic Notes –Useful tips
Tip: Add the <noframes> tag for browsers that do not support frames.
Important: You cannot use the <body></body> tags together with the <frameset></frameset> tags! However if you add a <noframes> tag containing some text for browsers that do not support frames,you will have to enclose the text in <body</body> tags! See how it is done in the first example below.
How to use the <no frames>tag (for browsers that do not support frames):
<html>
<frameset cols=”25%,50%,25%”>
<frame src=”frame_a.htm”/>
<frame src=”frame_b.htm”/>
<frame src=”frame_c.hmt”/>
<noframes>
<body> Your browser does not handle frames!</body>
</noframes>
</frameset>
</html>
How to create a html frame set with three documents, and how to mix them in rows and column.
<html>
<frameset rows=”50%, 50%”>
<frame src=”frame_a.htm”/>
<frameset cols=”25%, 75%>
<frame src=”frame_b.htm”/>
<frame src=”frame_c.htm”/>
</frameset>
</html>
Frameset with noresize =”noresize”
<html>
<frameset rows=”50%,50%”>
<frame noresize=”noresize” src=”frame_a.htm”/>
<frame noresize=”noresize” src=”frame_b.htm”/>
</frameset>
</html>
Navigation
<html>
<frameset cols=”120,*”>
<frame src=” tryhtml_contents.htm”/>
<frame src=”frame_a.htm” name=”showframe”/>
</frameset>
</html>
Website Layouts
Most websites have put their content in multiple columns(formatted like a magazine or newspaper).
Multiple columns are created by using <table>or <div> tags.Some CSS are normally also added to position elements or to create backgrounds or colourful look for the pages.
HTML Layouts –Using Tables
The simplest way of creating layouts is by using the HTML <table> tag.
The following example uses a table with 3 rows and 2 Columns –the first and last row spans both columns using the colspan attribute.
The Html code above will produce the following result:
Main Title of webpage
Menu Content goes here
HTML
CSS
Javascript
Copyright(c)2011 W3Schools.com
Note: Even though it is possible to create nice laytouts with HTML tables , tables were designed for presenting tabular data-NOT as a layout tool!
HTML Layouts-Using Div Elements
The div element is a block level element used for grouping HTML elements.
The following example uses five div elements to create a multiple column layout, creating the same result as in the previous example:
Example
<html>
<body>
<div id=”container” style=”width :500px”>
<div id =”header” style =”background-color:#FFA500;”>
<h1 style =”margin-bottm:0;”> Main title of the Webpage</h1></div>
<div id =”menu “ style=”background-color:#FFD700;height:200px;width:100px;float:left;”>
<b> Menu </b> </br>
HTML </br>
CSS </br>
JavaScript</br>
<div id =”content” style=”background-color:#EEEEEE;height:200px;width:400px;float:left;”> content goes here</div>
<div id =”footer” style=”background-color:#FFA500;clear:both;trext-align:center;”>
Copy right (c) 2011 W3 schools.com</div>
</div>
</body>
</html>
The HTML Code above will produce the following result:
Main Title of Web Page
Menu
HTML
CSS JavaScript
Content goes here
Copyright(c) 2011W3Schools.com
HTML Layout –Useful Tips
Tip
The biggest advantage of using CSS is that,if you can place the CSS code in an external style sheet,your site becomes MUCH EASIER to maintain .You can change the layout of al your pages by editing one file.
Tip: Because advanced layouts take time to create, a quicker option is use to a template. Search Google for free website templates (these are pre-built website layouts you can use and customize).
171:T2084,
Lists
As you can see, all this tag does is draw a line across you content, and used properly, its results can be outstanding.
You can list out your items, subjects or menu in the form of a list. HTML gives you three different types of lists.
<ul> - An unordered list. This will list items using bullets.
<ol>- A ordered list. This will use different schemes of numbers to list your items.
<dl>- A definition list. This is arrange your items in the same way as they are arranged in a dictionary.
HTML Unordered Lists
An unordered is a collection of related items that have no special order or sequence. The most common unordered list you will find on the Web is a collection of hyperlinks to other documents.
This list is created by using <ul> tag. Each item in the list is marked with a bullet. The bullet itself comes in three flavors: Squares, discs, and circles. The default bullet displayed by most web browsers is the traditional full disc.
One Movie list is given below.
<center>
<h2> Movie List</h2>
</center>
<ul>
<li> Ram Teri Ganga Meli</li>
<li> Mera Naam Jocker</li>
<li>Titanic</li>
<li> Ghost in the ship</li>
</ul>
This will produce following result:
Movie List
Ram Teri Ganga Meli
Mera Naam Jocker
Titanic
Ghost in the ship
You can use type attribute to specify the type of bullet you like. By default its is a disc. Follwing are the possible way:
<ul type=”square”>
<ul type=”disc”>
<ul type=”circle”>
<ul type=”square”>
<ul type=”disc”>
<ul type=”circle”>
Hindi
English
Maths
Physics
Hindi
English
Maths
Physics
Hindi
English
Maths
Physics
HTML Ordered Lists
The typical browser formats the contents of an ordered list just like an unordered list, except that the items are numbered instead of bulleted. The numbering starts at one and is incremented by one for each successive ordered list element tagged with<li>
This list is created by using <ol> tag. Each item in the list is marked with a number.
One Movie list is given below:
<center>
<h2>Movie List</h2>
</centre>
<ol>
<li> Ram teri Ganga Meli</li>
<li>Mera Naam Jocker</li>
<li>Titanic</li>
<li>Ghost in the ship</li>
</ol>
This will produce following result.
Movie List
Ram Teri Ganga Meli
Mera Naam Jocker
Titanic
Ghost in the ship
You can use type attribute to specify the type of numbers you like. By default its is a generic members, Following are the other possible way:
<ol type=”I”> - Upper-Case Numberals
<ol type=”a”> - Lower-Case Letters.
<ol type=”i”> - Upper-Case Letters.
<ol type=”i”>
<ol type=”i”>
<ol type=”a”>
<ol type = “A”>
Hindi
Hindi
Hindi
Hindi
English
English
English
English
Maths
Maths
Maths
Maths
Physics
Physics
Physics
Physics
You can user start attribute to specify the beginning of any index. By default it’s a first number or character. In the following example index starts from 5.
<center>
<h2>Movie List</h2>
</centre>
<ol start=”5”>
<li> Ram Teri Ganga Meli</li>
<li> Mera Naam Jocker</li>
<li> Titanic</li>
<li> Ghost in the chip</li>
</ol>
This will produce following result:
Movie List
Ram Teri Ganga Meli
Mera Naam Jocker
Titanic
Ghost in the ship
HTML Definition Lists
HTML and XHTML also support a list style entirely different from the ordered and unordered lists we have discussed so far-definition lists. Like the entries you find in a dictionary or encyclopedia, complete with text, pictures, and other multimedia elements, the Definition List is the ideal way to present a glossary, list of terms, or other name/value list.
Definition List makes use of following three tags.
<dl> - Defines the start of the list
<dt>- A term
<dd> - Term definition
</dl> - Defines the end of the list
Example
<dl>
<dt><b>HTML</b></dt>
<dd>This stands for Hyper Text Markup Language</dd>
<dt><b>HTTP</b></dt>
<dd> This stands for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol</dd>
</dl>
172:Teff,
Writing Event Handler
It is very easy to write an even handler. Following example explains how to write an event handler. Let’s write one simple function myalert in the header of the document. We will call this function when any user will bring mouse over a paragraph written in the example : <head> <title> Event Handler Example t</title> <script type=”text/javascript”> function myalert() { alert(“I am an event handler……”); return; } </script> </head> <body> <span onmouseover-“myAlert();”> Bring your mouse here to see an alert </span> </body> Now this will produce following result. Bring your mouse over this line and see the result : Bring your mouse here to see an alert
The <noscript > Element
You can also provide alternative info for users whose browsers don’t support scripts and for users who have disabled scripts. You do this using the <noscript> tag. <noscript> Please enable javascript </noscript>
Default Scripting Language
You can specify a default scripting language for all your scripting tags to use. This saves you from having to specify the language every time you use a script tag within the page. Below is the example : <meta http-equiv=”Content-Script-Type” content=”text/Javascript”>
HTML Meta Tag
HTMl lets you specify metadata-information about a document rather than document content in a variety of ways. The META element can be used to include name/value pairs describing properties of the HTML document, such as author, Expiry Date, a list of key words, author etc. Metadata provided by using meta tag is a very important part of the web. It can assist search engines in finding the best match when a user performs a search. Search engines will often look at any metadata attached to a page especially keywords- and rank it higher than another page with less relevant metadata, or with no metadata at all.
Adding Meta Tags to your Documents
You can add metadata to your web pages by placing <meta> tags between the <head> and </head>tags. The can include the following attributes
Attribute
Description
Name
Name for the property, can be anything, Examples include, keywords, description, author, revised, generation etc.
Content
Specifies the property’s values
Scheme
Specifies a scheme to use to interpret the property’s value(as declared in the content attribute)
http-equiv
Used for http response message headers. For example http-equiv can be used to refresh the page or to set a cookie. Value include content-type,expires,refresh and set-cookie
Note Core attributes for all the elements are discussed in next chapter.
Meta Tag Examples
Let’s see few important usage of Meta Tags.
Specifying Keywords
We specify keywords which will be used by the search engine to search a web page. So using following tag you can specify important keywords related to your page. <head> <meta name=”keywords” content=”HTML, meta tags, metadata”/> </head>
173:T1177,
Embedded CSS –The <style> Element
You can put your CSS rules into an HTML document using the <style> element. This tag is placed inside <head>…</head> tags.
Rules defined using this syntax will be applied to all elements available in the document.
Here is the generic syntax
Attributes
Attributes associated with <style> elements are:
Attribute
Value
Description
type
text/css
Specifies the style sheet language as a content –type (MIME type).This is required attribute.
media
screen tty tv projection handheldprint braileaural all
Specifies the device the document will be displayed on. Default value is all. This is optional attribute.
Example Following is the example of embed CSS based on above syntax:
Inline CSS-the Style Attribute
You can use style attribute of any HTML element to define style rules. These rules will be applied to that element only. Here is the generic syntax:
Example Following is the example of inline CSS based on above syntax:
External CSS- The <link> Element: The <link> element can be used to include an external style sheet file in your HTML document. An external style sheet is a separate text file with .css extension . You define all the Style rules with in this text file and then you can include this file in any HTML document using<link> element.
Here is the generic syntax of including external CSS file:
Attributes
Attributes associated with <style> elements are:
Attribute
Value
Description
Type
text/css
Specifies the style sheet language as a content-type (MIME –type).This attribute is required.
href
URL
Specifies the style sheet file having style rules .This attribute is a required.
media
screen tty tv projection handheldprint braile aural all
Specifies the device the document will be displayed on. Default value is all. This is optional attribute.
Example Consider a simple style sheet file with a name my style.css having the following rules:
Now you can include this file mystyle .css in any HTML document as follows:
174:Tbe6,
CSS Comments
Many times you may need to put additional comments in your style sheet blocks. So it is very easy to comment any part in style sheet. You simple put your comments inside /*… this is a comment in style sheet….. */ You can use /*….. */ to comment multi-line blocks in similar way you do in C and C++ programming languages. Example /* This is an external style sheet file */ h1,h2,h3 { color: #36C; font-weight : normal; letter-spacing: .4em; margin-bottom: lem; text-transform: lowercase; } /* end of style rules, */
CSS Units
Before we start actual exercise, I would like to give a brief idea about the CSS measurement units. CSS supports a number of measurements including absolute units such as inches, centimeters, points, and so on, as well as relative measures such as percentages and em units. You need these values while specifying various measurements in your style rules e.g border = “1px solid red” we have listed out all the CSS measurement units along with proper Examples
Unit
Description
Example
%
Defines a measurement as a percentage relative to another value, typically an enclosing element
p{font-size:16pt;line-height:125%}
cm
Defines a measurement in centimeters
div {margin-bottom:2cm}
Em
A relative measurement for the height of a font in em spaces. Because an em unit is equivalent to the size of a given font, if you assign a font to 12pt, each “em” unit would be 12pt; thus, 2em would be 24pt
p{letter-spacing:7em;}
Ex
This value defines a measurement relative to a font’s X-height. The x-height is determined by the height of the font’s lowercase letter X.
p{font-size:24pt;line-height:3ex;}
In
Defines a measurement in inches.
P{word-spacing: 15in;}
mm
Defines a measurement in millimeter
p{word-spacing:15mm;}
pc
Defines a measurement in picas, A pica is equivalent to 12 points; thus there are 6 picas per inch
p{font-size:20c;}
pt
Defines a measurement in points. A point is defined as 1/72nd of an inch
body{font-size:18pt;}
px
Defines a measurement in screen pixels.
p{padding:25px;}
175:T1dde,
Set The Font Style
Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the font style of an element. Possible values are normal, italic and oblique. <p style =”font-style:italic”> This text will be rendered in italic style. </p>
Set The Font Variant
following is the example which demonstrates how to set the font variant of an element. Possible values are normal and small caps. <p style=”font-variant:small-caps;”> This text will be rendered as small caps</p>
Set The Font Weight
following is the example which demonstrates how to set the font weight of an element. The font-weight property provides the functionality to specify how bold a font is. Possible values could be normal, bold, bolder, lighter, 100,200,300,400,500,600,700,800,900 <p style =”font-weight: bold;”> This font is bold </p> <p style=”font-weight:bolder;”> This font is bolder </p> <p style=”font-weight:900;”> This font is 900 weight. </p>
Set The Font Size
Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the font size of an element. The font-size property is used to control the size of fonts. Possible values could be xx-small, x-small, small, medium, large, x-large, xx-large, smaller, larger, size in pixel or in % <p style=”font-size:20px”> This font size is 20 pixels </p> <p style=”font-size:small;” > This font size is small </p> <p style=”font-size:large;”> This font size is large </p>
Shorthand Property
You can use the font property to set all the font properties at once. For example: <p style=”font: italic small-caps bold 15px Georgia;”> Applying all the properties on the text at once. </p>
Manipulate Text using CSS
You can set following text properties of an element: The color property is used to set the color of a text. The direction property is used to set the text direction The letter-spacing property is used to add or subtract space between the letters that make up a word The word-spacing property is used to add or subtract space between the words of a sentence. The text-indent property is used to indent the text of a paragraph. The text-align property is used to align the text of a paragraph. The text – decoration property is used to underline, over line, and strike through text. The text-transform property is used to capitalize text or text to uppercase or lowercase letters. The white-space property is used to control the flow and formatting of text. The text-shadow property is used to set the text shadow around a text.
Set the Text Color
Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the text color. Possible value could be any color name in any valid format. This text will be written in red. </p>
Set the Text Direction
Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the direction of a text. Possible values are ltr or rtl. <p style =”direction:rtl;”> This text will be rendered from right to left </p>
Set the Space between Characters
Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the space between characters. Possible values are normal or a number specifying space. <p style=”letter-spacing:5px;”> This text is having space between letters.
Set the Space between Words
Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the space between words. Possible values are normal or a number specifying space. <p style=”word-spacing:5px; ”> This text is having space between words. </p>
Set the Text Indent
Following is the example which demonstrates how to indent the first line of a paragraph. Possible values are % or a number specifying indent space. <p style=”text-indent:1cm;”> This text will have first line indented by 1cm and this line will remain at its actual position this is done by CSS textg-indent property. </p>
Set the Text Alignment
Following is the example which demonstrates how to align a text. Possible values are left, right,centre,justify <p style=”text-align:right;”> This will be right aligned. </p> <p style=”text-align:center;”> This will be center aligned. </p> <p style=”text-align:left;”> This will be left aligned. </p>
Decorating the Text
Following is the example which demonstrates how to decorate a text. Possible values are none, underline,overline,line-through, blink. <p style=”text_decoration:underline;”> This will be underfined </p> <p style=”text-decoration:line-through;”> This will be striked through. </p> <p style =”text-decoration:overline;”> This will have a over line. </p> <p style=”text-decoration:blink”;> This text will have blinking effect </p>
Set the Text Cases
Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the cases for a text. Possible values are none,capitalize,uppercase,lowercase… <p style=”text-tranform:capitalize;”> This will be capitalized </p> <p style=”text-transform:uppercase;”> This will be in uppercase </p> <p style=”text-transform:lowercase;”> This will be in lowercase </p>
Set the White space between Text
Following is the example which demonstrates how white space inside an element is handled. Possible values are normal,pre,nowrap. <p style=”white-space:pre;”> This text has a line break and the white-space pre setting tells the browser to honor it just like the HTML pre tag.</p>
Set the Text shadow
Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the shadow around a text. This may not be supported by all the browsers. <p style=”text-shadow:4px 4px 8px blue;”> if your browser supports the css text-shadow property, this text will have a blue shadow.</p>
Styling Links
Links can be styled with any CSS property(eg: color, font-family, background,etc) special for links are that can be styled differently depending on what state they are in. The four links states are:
a:link – a normal, unvisited link
a:visited – a link the user has visited
a:hover – a link when the user mouses over it
a:active – a link the moment it is clicked
Example a:link{color:#FF0000;} /*unvisited link */ a:visited{color:#00FF00;} /*visited link */ a:hover{color:#FF00FF;} /* mouse over link */ a:active{color:#0000FF;}/* selected link */
Example
a:link{text-deorational:none;} a:visited{text-decoration:none;} a:hover{text-decoration:underline;} a:active{text-decoration:underline;} Example a:link{background-color: #B2FF99;} a:visied{background-color: #FFFF85;} a:hover{background-color: #FF704D;} a:active{background-color: #FF704D;} When setting the style for several link states, there are some order rules:
a:hover MUST come after a:link and a:visited
a:active MUST come after a:hover
176:T234a,
CSS Colors
CSS user color values to specify a color, Typically , these are used to set a color either for the foreground of an element(i.e, its text) or else for the background of the element. They can also be used to affect the color of boarder and other decorative effects. You can specify your color values in various formats. Following table tells you all possible formats:
Format
Syntax
Example
Hex Code
#RRGGBB
P{color, #FFoooo;}
Short Hex Code
#RGB
P{color,#6A7;}
RGB%
rgb(TTT%, ggg%,bbb%)
P{color:rgb(50%,50%,50%);}
RGB Absolute
rgb(TTT,ggg,bbb)
P{color:rgb(0,0,255);}
Key word
Aqua, black.etc..
P{color:teal;}
Setting Backgrounds using CSS
You can set following background properties of an element: The back ground – color property is used to set the back ground color of an element The background – image property is used to set the back ground image of an element The background – repeat property is used to control the repetition of an image in the background. The back ground – position property is used to control the position of an image in the back ground The back ground – attachment property is used to control the scrolling of an image in the back The back ground property is used as short hand to specify a number of other back ground properties
Set the Background Color
Following is the example which demonstrate how to set the back ground color for an element <p style = “back ground – color :yellow;”> This text has a yellow background color </p>
Set the Background Image
Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the background image for an element <table style=”background – image :url(/images/paternal.gif);”> <tr><td> This table has background image set </td></tr> </table>
Repeat the Background Image
Following is the example which demonstrates how to repeat the background image if image is small. You can use non-repeat value for background-repeat property if you don’t want to repeat an image, in this case image will display only once. By default background-repeat property will have repeat value. <table sytle=”background-image:url(/images/pattern1.gif); background-repeat:repeat;”>\<tr><td> This table has background image which multiple times. </td></tr> </table> Following is the example which demonstrates how to repeat the background image vertically <table style=”background-image=url(/images/pattern1.gif); background-repeat: repeat-y;”> <tr><td> This table has background image set which will repeat vertically. </td></tr> </table> Following is the example which demonstrates how to repeat the background image horizontally. <table style=”background-image:url(/images/pattern.gif); background-repeat:repeat-x;”> <tr><td> This table has background image set which will repeat horizontally. </td></tr> </table>
Set the Background Image Position
Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the background image position 100 pixels away from the left side <table style=”background-image : url(/images/pattern1.gif); background-position:100px;”> <tr><td> Background image positioned 100 pixels away from the left. </td></tr> </table> Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the background image position 100 pixels away from the left side and 200 pixels down from the top. <table style = “background – image :url(/image/pattern1.gif); background – position:100px 200px;”> <tr><td> This table has background image positioned 100 pixels away from the left and 200 pixel from the top </td></tr> </table>
Set Background Attachment
Background attachment determines whether a background image is fixed or scrolls with the rest of the page. Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the fixed background image. <p style=”background-image:url(/images/pattern1.gif); background-attachment:fixed;”> This paragraph has fixed background image. </p> Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the scrolling background image. <p style=”background-image:url(/images/pattern1.gif); background-attachment:scroll;”> This paragraph has scrolling background image. </p>
Background Shorthand Property
AS you can see from the examples above, there are many properties to consider when dealing with backgrounds. To shorten the code, it is also possible to specify in one single property. This is called a shorthand property. The shorthand property for background is simply “background”; Example body { background:#FFFFFFF url(‘img_tree.png’) no-repeat right top; When using the shorthand property the order of the property values are :
background-color
background-image
background-repeat
background-attachment
background-position
It does not matter if one of the property values is missing, as long as the ones that are present are in this order.
Setting Fonts using CSS
You can set following font properties of an element: The font-family property is used to change the face of a font. The font-style property is used to make a font italic or oblique The font-variant property is used to create a small-caps effect. The font – weight property is used to increase or decrease how bold or light a font appears. The font-size property is used to increase or decrease the size of a font The font property is used as shorthand to specify a number of other font properties. On computer screens, sans-serif fonts are considered easier to read than serif fonts.
CSS Font Families
In CSS, there are two types of font family names: generic family – a group of font families with a similar look(like “serif”or “Monispace”) font family – a specific font family(like “Times New Roman” or “Arial”)
Generic family
font family
Description
Serif
Times New roamGeorigia
Seri fonts have small lines at the end on. some characters
Sans-serif
ArialVerdana
“Sans” means without-these fonts do not save the lines at the end of characters.
Monoscope
Courier New Lucida Console
All monoscope characters have the same width
Font Family
The font family of a text is set with the font-family property. The font-family property should hold several font names as a “fallback” system. If the browser does not support the first font, it tries the next font Start with the font you want, and end with a generic family, to let the browser pick a similar font the generic family, if no other fonts are available Note If the name of a font family is more than one word, it must be in quotation marks, like font family “Times New Roman” More than one font family is specified in a comma-separated list: Example p{font-family:”Times New Roman”,Times, serif; } Following is the example which demonstrates how to set the font family of an element. Possible value could be any font family name. <p style=”font-family: Georgia, garmond, sarif;”> This text is rendered in either Georgia, garmond, or the default serif font depending on which font you have at your system. </p>
177:T1533,
CSS Images
Images are very important part of any Web Page. Though it is not recommended to include lot of images but it is still important to use good images wherever it is required. CSS plays a good role to control image display. You can set following image properties using CSS. The border property is used to set the width of an image border. The height property is used to set the height if an image. The width property is used to set the width if an image. The –moz-opacity property is used to set the opacity of an image.
Image Border Property
The border property of an image is used to set the width of an image border. This property can have a value in length of in %. A width of zero pixels means no border. Here is the example: <img style=”border:0px;” src=/images/css.gif/> <br /> <img style=”border: 3px dashed red:” src=”/images/css.gif”/>
Image Height Property
The height property of an image is used to set the height of an image border. This property can have a value in length or in %.While giving value in %, it applies it in respect of the box in which an image is available. Here is the example <img style=”border:1px solid red;” width :100px;” src=/images/css.gif/> <br/> <img style=”border:1px solid red:” width:100%; src=”/images/css.gif”/>
Image Width Property
The width property of an image is used to set the width of an image. This property can have a value in length of in % . while giving value in %, it applies it in respect of the box in which an image is available
Here is the Example <img style =”border :1px solid red; width :100px;” Src=”/images/css.gif”/> <br/> <img style = “border :1px solid red; width :100%;” Src=”/images/css.gif”/>
moz-opacity Property
The –moz-opacity property of an image is used to set the opacity of an image. This property is used to create a transparent image in Mozilla.IE uses filter: alpha(opacity=x) to create transparent images. In Mozilla(-moz-opacity:x) x can be a value from 0.0-1.0.A lower value makes the element more transparent. In IE (filter:alpha(opacity;=x)) x can be a value from 0 -100. A lower value makes the element more transparent Here is the example: <img style =”border :1px solifd red; mox – opacity:0.4; filter:alpha (opacity=40);src=”/images/css.gif”/>
Example 1
Creating a transparent Image The CSS3 property for transparency is opacity First we will show you how to create a transparent image with CSS Img { Opacity:0.4; Filter:alpha(opacity =40);/* for IE8 and earlier*/ IE9 , Firefox , Chrome, Opera and Safari use the property opacity for transparency . the opacity property can take a value from0.0 – 1.0. A lower value makes the element more transparent. IE8 and earlier use filter:ampha(opacity=x).The x can take a value from 0-100.A lower value makes the element more transparent.
Example 2
Image transparency-Hover effect The CSS looks like this: Img { Opacity:0.4; Filter:alpha(opacity=40);/* For IE8 and earlier*/ } Img;hover { Opacity:1.0; Filter:alpha(opaciy=100); For IE8 and earlier*/ The first CSS block is similar to the code in Example1.In addition ,we have added What should happen when a user hover one of the images .In this case we want the image to NOT be transparent when the user hover over it. The CSS for this is:opacity=1. IE8 and earlier:filter:alpha(opacity=100). When the mouse pointer moves away from the image,the image will be transparent again.
Example 3
Text in Transparent Box <html> <head> <style type=”text/css”> div>background { Width :500px; Height:250px; Background:url(klematis.jpg)repeat; Border:2px solid black; } div.transbox { Width:400px; Height:180px; Margin:30px 50px; Background-clor:#ffffff; Border:1 px solid black; Opacity:0.6; Filter:alpha(opacity=60):/For IE8 and earlier*/ } div.transbox p { Margin:30px 40px; Font-weight:bold; Color:#000000; } </style> </head> <body> <div class=”background”> <div class=”transbox”> <p>This is some text that is placed in the transparent box. This is some text that is placed in the transparent box. This is some text that is placed in the transparent box. This is some text that is placed in the transparent box. This is some text that is placed in the transparent box. <p> </div> </div> </body> </html> First, we create a div element(class=”background”) with a fixed height and width ,a background image, and a border. Then we create a smaller div(class=”transbox”)inside the div element. The “transom” div have a fixed width, a black ground color, and a border-and it is transparent, Inside the transparent div, we add some text inside a p element.
CCC Display and Visibility
The display property specifies if/how an element is displayed ,and the visibility property be visible or hidden.
178:T24de,
CSS Tables
Table Borders
To specify table borders in CSS, use the border property. The example below specifies a black border for table ,th, and td elements. Example table th, td { border: 1px solid black; } Notice that the table in the example above has double borders.This is because both the table and the th/td elements have separate borders. To display a single border for the table ,use the border-collapse property.
Collapse Borders
The border-collapse property sets whether the table borders are collapsed into a single border or separated. Example table { border-collapse:collapse; } table, th, td { border: 1px solid black; }
Table Width and Height
Width and Height of a table is defined by the width and height properties. The example below sets the width of the table to 100% and the height of the th elements to 50 px: Example table { width:100% } th { height: 50px; }
Table Text Alignment
The text in a table is aligned with the text-align and vertical –align properties. The text-align property sets the horizontal alignment, like left, right, or center: Example td{ text-align:right; } The vertical –align property sets the vertical alignment, like top, bottom, or middle. Example td{ height:50px; vertical –align : bottom; }
Table Padding
To control the space between the border and content in table,use the padding property on td and th elements: Example td { padding:15px; }
Table Color
The example below specifies the color of the borders, and the text and background color of th elements: Example table ,td,th { border:1px solid green; } th { background –color:green; } Example <style type=”text/css”> tr:nth-child(odd) { background –color:red;} tr:nth-child(even) { background –color:green;} table, tr, td,th{ border:1px solid black; border-collapse:collapse; } </style> Example <style type=”text/css”> #customers{ border-collapse:collapse; font-family :”Trebuchet MS”, Arial, Helvetice,sans-serif; width :100%; } # customers td,# customers th{ border :1px solid#98BF21; font-size:1.2 em; padding:3 px 7px 2px; } # customers th{ background-color:#A7C942; color:#FFFFFF; font-size:1.4em; padding-bottom: 4px; padding-top:5px; text-align:left; } # customers tr.alt td{ background –color:#EAF2D3; color: #000000; </style>
CSS-Cursors
The cursor property of CSS allows you to specify the type of cursor that should be displayed to the user. One good usage of this property is in using images for submit buttons on forms. By default, when a cursor hovers over a link, the cursor changed from a pointer to a hand. For a submit button on a form this does not happen. Therefore ,using the cursor property to change the cursor to hand whenever someone hovers over an image that is a submit button .This provides a visual clue that they can click it. The table that follows shows possible values for the cursor property:
value
Description
Auto
Shape of the cursor depends on the context area it is over .For example an I over text ,a hand over a link ,a nd so on.
Crosshair
A cross hair or plus sign
Default
An arrow
Pointer
A pointing hand(in IE 4 this value is hand)
Move
The I bar
e-resize
The cursor indicate that an edge of a box is to be moved right(east)
ne-resize
The cursor indicate that an edge of a box is to be moved up and right(north/east)
nw –resize
The cursor indicate that an edge of a box is to be moved up and left(north/west)
n-resize
The cursor indicate that an edge of a box is to be moved up(north)
se-resize
The cursor indicate that an edge of a box is to be moved up and right(south/east)
sw-resize
The cursor indicate that an edge of a box is to be moved up andleft (south/west)
s-resize
The cursor indicate that an edge of a box is to be moved down(south)
w-resize
The cursor indicate that an edge of a box is to be moved left(west)
Text
The I bar
Wait
An hour glass
Help
A question mark or balloon, ideal for use over help buttons
<url>
The source of a cursor image file
Note
you should try to use only these values to add helpful information for users ,and in places they would except to see that cursor. For example ,using the crosshair when someone hovers over a link confuse visitors.
There may be a case when an elements content might be larger than the amount of space allocated to it .For example given width and height properties did not allow enough room to accommodate the content of the element. CSS provide a property called overflow which tells the browser what to do if the box’s content is larger than the box itself. This property can take one of the following values:
Value
Description
visible
Allows the content to overflow the border of its containing element.
hidden
The content of the nested element is simply cut off at the border of the containing element and no scroll bars is visible.
scroll
The size of the containing element does not change, but the scroll bars are added to allow the user to scroll to see the content.
auto
The purpose is the same as scroll, but the scrollbar will be shown only if the content does overflow.
Here is the example
<style type=”text/css”> .scroll { display: block; Border:1px solid red; Padding:5px; Margin-top:5px; Width:300px; Height:50px; Overflow:scroll; } Auto{ Display:block; Border:1px solid red; Padding:5px; Margin-top:5px; Width:300px; Height:50px; Overflow:auto; } </style> <p> Example of scroll value:</p> <div class=”scroll”> I am going to keep lot of content here just to show you how scrollbars works if there just to show you how scrollbars works if there is an overflow in an element box. This provides your horizontal as well as vertical scrollbars. </div> <br/> <p>Example of auto value:</p> <div class=”auto”> I am going to keep lot of content here just to show you how scrollbars works if there just to show you how scrollbars works if there is an overflow in an element box. This provides your horizontal as well as vertical scrollbars. </div>
179:T23e1,
CSS Lists
Lists are very helpful in conveying a set of either numbered or bulleted points. This tutorial teaches you how to control list type, position, style etc. using CSS There are following five CSS properties which can be used to control lists: The list-style-type Allows you to control the shape or appearance of the marker. The list-style-position specifies whether a long point that wraps to a second line should align with the first line or start underneath the start of the marker. The list-style-image specifies an image for the marker rather than a bullet point or number. The list-style serves as shorthand for the preceding properties. The marker-offset specifies the distance between a marker and the text in the list. Now we will see how to use these properties with examples.
The list-style-type Property
The list-style-type properly allows you to control the shape or style of bullet point (also known as a marker) in the case of unordered lists, and the style of numbering characters in ordered lists. Here are the values which can be used for an unordered list :
Value
Description
None
NA
Disc(default)
A filled-in circle
Circle
An empty circle
Square
A filled in square
Here are the values which can be used for an ordered list:
The list-style-position property indicates whether the marker should inside or outside of the box containing the bullet points. It can have one the two values
Value
Description
None
NA
Inside
If the text goes onto a second line, the text will wrap underneath the marker. It will also appear indented to where the text would have started if the list had a value oof outside.
Outside
If the text goes onto a second line, the text will be alighned with the start of the first line(to the right of the bullet)
The list-style-image allows you to specify an image so that can your own bullet style. The syntax is as follows, similar to the background-image property with the letters ril starting the value of the property followed by the URL in brackets. If it does not find given image then default bullets are used.
The list-style allows you to specify all the list properties into a single expansion. These properties can appear in any order. Here is the example. <ul style=”list-style:inside square;”> <li> Maths</li> <li>Social Science</li> <li>Physics</li> </ul> <ol style = “list-style: outside upper-alpha;”> <li>Maths</li> <li>Social Science</li> <li>Physics</li> </ol>
The marker-offset Property
The marker-offset property allows you to specify the distance between the markers and the text relating to that marker. Its value should be a length as shown in the following example: Unfortunately, however, this property is not supported in IE 6 or Netscape 7.
All HTML elements can be considered as boxes. In CSS, the term “box mode” is used when talking about design and layout. The CSS box model is essentially a box that wraps around HTML elements, and it consists of : margins, borders, padding,and the actual content. The box model allows us to place a boarder around elements and space elements in relation to other elements. The image below illustrates the box mode;
17a:T169b,
Positioning
The CSS positioning properties allow you to position an element. It can also place an element behind another, and specify what should happen when an elements content is toll big. Elements can be positioned using the top, bottom, left and right properties. However, these properties will not work unless the position property is set first. They also work differently depending on the positioning method. There are four different positioning methods.
Static Positioning
HTML elements are positioned static by default. A static positioned element is always positioned according to the normal flow of the page.
Fixed Positioning
An element with fixed position is positioned relative to the browser window. It will not move even if the window is scrolled: Example p.pos_fixed { Position:fixed; Top:30px; Right:5px; } <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC”-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN” http://www/w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd> <html> <head> <style type=text/css”> p.pos_fixed { Position:fixed; Top:30px; Right:5px; } </style> </head> <body> <p class=”pos _fixed “>Some more text</p> <p>b>Note:</b> IE7 and IE8 supports the fixed value only if a <!DOCTYPE is specified.</p> <p>Some text</p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ p> <p>Some text</ </body> </html>
Note
IE7 and IE 8 support the fixed value only of a !DOCTYPE is specified. Fixed positioned elements are removed from the normal flow. The document and other elements behave like the fixed positioned element does not exist. Fixed positioned elements can overlap other elements.
Relative Positioning
A relative positioned element is positioned relative to its normal position.
Example
h2.pos_left { position:relative; left:-20px; } h2.pos_right { position:relative; left:20px; } </style> </head> <body> <h2>This is a heading with no position</h2> <h2 class=”pos_left”>This heading is moved left according to its normal position</h2> <h2 class=”pos_right”>This heading is moved right according to its normal position</h2> <p> Relative positioning moves an element RELATIVE to its original position.</p> <p> The style”left:-20px”subtracts 20 pixels from the elements original left position.</p> <p> The style”left:-20px”adds 20 pixels from the elements original left position.</p> </body> </html> The content of relatively positioned elements can be moved and overlap other elements, but the reserved space for the element is still preserved in the normal flow.
Example
H2.pos_top { position:relative; top:-50px; } <html> <head> <style type=text/css”> h2.pos_top { position:relative; top:50px; } </style> </head> <body> <h2>This is a heading with no position<h2> <h2class=”pos _top”> This heading is moved upwards according to its normal position</h2> <p><b>Note:</b> Even if the content of the relatively positioned element is moved, the reserved space for the element is still preserved in the normal flow.</p> </body> </html> Relatively positioned elements are often used as container blocks for absolutely positioned elements.
Absolute Positioning
An absolute position element is positioned relative to the first parent element that has a position other than static. If no such element is found, the containing block is <html>; Example h2 { position :absolute; left:100px; top:150px; } <html> <head> <style type=text/css”> h2 { position: absolute; left:100px; top:150px; } </style> </head> <body> <h2>This is a heading with an absolute position</h2> <p>With absolute positioning , an element can be placed anywhere on a page. The heading below is placed 100px from the left of the page and 150px from the top of the page.<p> <body> <html> Absolutely positioned elements are removed from the normal flow. The document and other elements behave like the absolutely positioned element does not exist. Absolutely positioned elements can overlap other elements.
CSS-Layers
CSS gives you opportunity to create layers of various divisions. The CSS layers refer to applying the z-index property to elements that overlap each other. The z-index property is used along with position property to create an effect of layers. You can specify which element should come on top and which element should come at bottom. A z-index property can help you to create more complex webpage layouts. Following is the example which shows how to create layers in CSS. <div style=”background-color: red; width:300px; height :100px; position :relative; top:10px; left:80px; z-index:2”> </div> <div style=”background-color: yellow; width:300px; height:100px; position :relative; top:-60px; left:35px; z-index:1”> </div> <div style=”background-color: green; width:300px; height:100px; position :relative; top:-220px; left:120px; z-index:3”> </div>
17b:T259a,
What is CSS Float?
With CSS float ,an element can be pushed to the left or right ,allowing other elements to wrap around it . Float is very often used for images, but it is also useful when working with layouts.
How Elements Float
Element are floated horizontally, this means that an element can only be floated left or right, not up or down. A floated element will move as far to the left or right as it can.Usually this means all the way to the left or right of the containing element. The elements after the floating element will flow around it. The elements before the floating element will not be affected. If an image is floated to the right ,a following text flows around it to the left:
Example
img { float:right; } <html> <head> <style type=”text/css”> img { float:right; } </style> </head> <body> <p> In the paragraph below ,we have added an image with style<b> float:right </b>.The result is that the image will float to the right in the paragraph </p> <p> <img src=”logocss.gif” width =”95”height =”84”/> This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. This is some text. </p> </body> </html>
Floating Elements Next to Each Other
If you pace several floating elements after each other, they will float next to each other if there is room. Here we have made an image gallery using the float property:
Example
thumbnail { float:left; width:110px; height:90px; margin:5px; } <html> <head> <style type=”text/ccs”> Thumbnail { Float:left; Width:110px; Height:90px; Margin:5px; } </style> </head> <body> <h3>Image Gallery</h3/ <p>Try resizing the window to see what happens when the images does not have enough room</p> <img class=”thumbnail”src=”klematis_small.jpg”width=”107”height=”90”> <img class=”thumbnail”src=”klematis2_small.jpg”width=”107”height=”80”> <img class=”thumbnail”src=”klematis3_small.jpg”width=”116”height=”90”> <img class=”thumbnail”src=”klematis4_small.jpg”width=”120”height=”90”> <img class=”thumbnail”src=”klematis_small.jpg”width=”107”height=”90”> <img class=”thumbnail”src=”klematis2_small.jpg”width=”107”height=”80”> <img class=”thumbnail”src=”klematis3_small.jpg”width=”116”height=”90”> <img class=”thumbnail”src=”klematis4_small.jpg”width=”120”height=”90”> <body> <html> Turning off float-Using Clear Elements after the floating element will flow around it. To avoid this, use the clear property. The clear property specifies which sides of an element other floating elements are not allowed. Add a text line into the image gallery, using the clear property
Example
.text_line{Cler:both;} <html> <head> <style type=text/css”> .thumbnail { Flaot:left; width:110px; height:90px; <td colspan=”4”>This is the foot of the table</td> </tr> </tfoot> </tbody> <tr> <td>cell 1</td> <td>cell 2</td> <td>cell 3</td> <td>cell 4</td> </tr> <tr> …more rows here containing four cells>>>. </tr> </tbody> <tbody> <tr> <td>cell 1</td> <td>cell 2</td> <td>cell 3</td> <td>cell 4</td> </tr> <tr> …more rows here containing four cells>>>. </tr> </tbody> </table> This will produce following result
Nested Tables
You can use one table inside another table.Not only tables you can use almost all the tags inside table data tag<td>. Following is the example of using another table and other tags inside a table cell.
Using Table Caption
The caption tags will serve as a title or explanation and show up at the top of the table. This tag is deprecated in newer version of HTML/XHTML. <table border=”1”> <caption>This is the caption</caption> <tr> <td>row 1,column 1</td><td>row1, column 2</td> <tr> </table>
This is produce following result:
Using a Header, Body and Footer
Tables can be divided into three portions: aheader, abody,and a foot. The head and foot are rather similar to headers and footers in a word-processed document that remain the same for every page,while the body is the main content of the table. The three elements for separating the head,body and foot of a table are: <thead>-to create a separate table header. <tbody>-to indicate the main body of the table. <tfoot>-to create a separate table footer. A table may contain several<tbody>elements to indicate different pages of groups of data.But is notable that <thead> and <tfoot> tags should appear before <tbody> <table border=”1” width=”100%”> <thead> <tr> <td colspan=”4”>This is the head of the table</td> </tr> </thead> <tfoot> <tr> margin :5px; } .text-line { clear :both margin-bottom:2px;} </style> </head> <body> <h3> Image Gallery</h3> <p> Try resizing the window to see what happens when the images does not have enough room.</p> <img class =”thumbnail” src=”klematis_small.jpg” width=”107” height=”90”> <img class =”thumbnail” src=”klematis2_small.jpg” width=”107” height=”80”> <img class =”thumbnail” src=”klematis3_small.jpg” width=”116” height=”90”> <img class =”thumbnail” src=”klematis4_small.jpg” width=”120” height=”90”> <h3 class =”text_line”>Second row</h3> <img class =”thumbnail” src=”klematis_small.jpg” width=”107” height=”90”> <img class =”thumbnail” src=”klematis2_small.jpg” width=”107” height=”80”> <img class =”thumbnail” src=”klematis3_small.jpg” width=”116” height=”90”> <img class =”thumbnail” src=”klematis4_small.jpg” width=”120” height=”90”> </body> </html>
CSS Horizontal Aligning Block Elements
A block element is an element that takes up the full width valaible ,and has a line break before and after it . Examples of block elements: <h1> <p> <div> For aligning text, see the CSS Text chapter. In this chapter we will show you how to horizontally align block elements for layout purposes. Centre Aligning Using the margin Property Block elements can be aligned by setting the left and right margins to “auto”. Note : Using margin:auto will not work in IE 8 and earlier,unless a !DOCTYPE is declared. Setting the left and right margins to auto specifies that they should split the available margin equally .The result is cantered element: Example .center { margin –left:auto; margin-right:auto; width:70%; background –colour: #b0e0e6; }
Tip
Aligning has no effect if the width is 100%
Note
In IE5 there is a margin handling bug for block elements. To make the example above work in IE5, add some extra code.
Note
In IE 5 there is a margin handling bug for block elements.To make the example above work in IE 5,add some extra code.
Left and Right Aligning Using the position Property
One method of aligning elements is to use absolute positioning:
Example
.right { position :absolute; right:0px; width :300px; background-color:#b0e0e6; }
Note
Absolute positioned elements are removed from the normal flow, and can overlap elements.
17c:T5db,
CSS Attribute Selectors & Style HTML Elements with specific Attributes
It is possible to style HTML element that have specific attributes, not just class and id. Note IE7 and IE8 support attribute selectors only if a !DOCTYPE is specified. Attribute selection is NOT supported in IE6 and lower.
Attribute Selector
The example below styles all element with a little attribute. Example [title] { color:blue; }
Attribute and Value Selector
The example below styles all elements with title=”W3Schools”. Example [title=W3School] { border:5px solid green; }
Attribute and Value Selector-Multiple Values
The example below style all elements with a title attribute that contains a specified value. This works even if the attribute has space separated values:
Example
[title~=hello]{color:blue;} The example below styles all elements with a lang attribute that contains a specified value. This works even if the attribute has hyphen(_) separated values:
Example
[lang|=en]{color:blue;}
Styling Forms
The attribute selectors are particularly useful for styling forms without class or ID.
Hiding an Element-display: none or visibility :hidden
Hiding an element can be done by setting the display property to “none” or the visibility property to “hidden”. However, notice that these two methods produce different results: Visibilyt:hidden hides an element, but it will still take up the same space as before.The element will be hidden, but still affect the layout.
Example
h1.hidden{visibility:hidden;} <html> <head> <style type=”text/ccs”> h.hidden{visibility:hidden;} </style> </head> <body> <h1>This is a visible heading</h1> <p>Notice that the hidden heading still takes up space.</p> </body> </html>
Display
none hides an element, and it will not take up any space.The element will be hidden, and the page will be and displayed as the element is not there:
Example
H1.hidden{display:none:} <html> <head> <style type=text/ccs”> H1.hidden(display:none;) </style> </head> <body> <h1> This is a visible heading</h1> <h1 class=”hidden”>This is a hidden heading</h1> <p> Notice that the hidden heading does not take up Space.</p> </body> </html>
CSS Display-Block and Inline elements
A block element is an element that takes up the full width available, and has a line break before and after it. Examples of block elements:
<h1>
<p>
<div>
An inline element only takes up as much width as necessary,and does not force line breaks. Examples of inline elements:
<span>
<a>
An inline element only takes up much width as necessary, and does not force line breaks.
Examples of inline elements
<span>
<a>
Changing How an Element is displayed
Changing an inline element to block element, or vice versa, can be useful for making the page look a specific way, and still follow web standards. The following example displays list items as inline elements:
Example
li{display:inline;} <html> <head> <style type=text/ccs”> l1 (display:inline;) </style> </head> <body> <p> Display this link list as a horizontal menu:</p> <ul> <li><a href=”/html/default.asp”targer=”_blank”HTML</a></li> <li><a href=”/css/default.asp”targer=”_blank”CSS</a></li> <li><a href=”/js/default.asp”targer=”_blank”JavaScript</a></li> <li><a href=”/xml/default.asp”targer=”_blank”>XML</a></li> <ul> </body> </html> The following example displays span elements as block elements:
Changing the display type of an element changes only how the element is displayed. Not what kind of element it is. For example: An inline element set to display :block is not allowed to have a block element nested inside of it.
17e:T2a0a,
Cross browser Compatibility Issues
When aligning elements like this, it is always a good idea to pre-define margin and padding for the <body> element. This is avoid visual differences in different browsers. There is a problem with IE8 and earlier, when using the position property. If a container element (in our case <div class=@container”>) has a specified width and the! DOCTYPE declaration is missing, IE8 and earlier versions will add a 17px margin on the right side. This seems to be space reserved for a scrollbar. Always set the DOCTYPE declaration when using the position property:
Example
body{ margin:0; padding:o; } .container { position :relative; width :100%; } .right { position :absolute; right: width :800px; background-color:#b0e0e6; } Left and Right Aligning Using the float Property One method of aligning elements is use the float property: Example .right { float:right; width : 300px; background –color:#b0e0e6;
Cross Browser Compatibility Issues
When aligning element like this, it is always a good idea to pre-define margin and padding for the <body> element. This is to avoid visual differences in different browsers. There is a problem with IE 8 and earlier when using the float property .If the !DOC TYPE declaration is missing IE8 and earlier version will add a 17px margin on the right side. This seems to be space reserved for a scroll bar. Always set the! DOC TYPE declaration when using the float property:
CSS pseudo-classes are used to add special effects to some selectors. Syntax The syntax of pseudo-classes: selector:pseudo-class {property:value;} CSS classes can also be used with pseudo-classes: selector.class : pseudo-class {property:value} Anchor Pseudo-classes Links can be displayed in different ways in a CSS-Supporting browser: Example a:link {color:#FF0000;}/* unvisited link*/ a:visited{color:#00FF00;}/* visited link*/ a:hover{color:#FF00FF;}/* mouse over link*/ a:active {color:#0000FF;}/*selected link*/ Note: a:hover MUST come after a :link and a:visited in the CSS defintionin order to be effective!! Note: a:active MUST come after a:hover in the CSS definition in order to be effective!! Note Pseudo-class names are not case-sensitive.
Pseudo Classes and CSS Classes
Pseudo-classes can be combined with CSS classes: a:red:visited{color:#FF0000;} <a class=”red”href=”css_syntax .asp”>CSS syntax</a> If the link in the example above has been visited ,it will be displayed in red.
CSS-The : first –child Pseudo-class
The : first –child pseudo-class matches a specified element that is the first child of another element. Note For :first –child to work in IE8 and earlier ,a <!DOC TYPE> must be declared.
Match the first <p> element
In the following example, the selector matches any <p> element that is the first child of any element: Example <html> <head> <style type=”text/css”> p:first-child { color:blue; </style> </head> <body> <p>Iam a strong man</P> <p> I am a strong man</p> </body> </html>
Match the first <i> element in all <p> elements
In the following example, the selector matches the first <i> element in all <p> elements: Example <html> <head> <style type=”text/css”> <p>:first-child { font-weight:bold; } </style> </head> <body> <p>I am a <i> strong</i> man. I am a <i> strong</i> man. <p>I am a <i> strong</i> man. I am a <i> strong</i> man. </body> </html> Match all <i> elements in all first child <p> elements In the following example ,the selector matches all <i> elements in <p> elements that are the first child of another element:
Example
<html> <head> <style type=”text/csss”> p:first –childi { color:blue; } </style> </head> <body> <p>I am a <i> strong</i> man. I am a <i> strong</i> man. <p>I am a <i> strong</i> man. I am a <i> strong</i> man. </body> </html>
CSS-The :lang Pseudo –class
The: lang pseudo –class allows you to define special rules for different languages. Note: IE 8 supports the :lang pseudo –class only if a <!DOC TYPE> is specified . In the example below,the :lag class defines the quotation marks for q elements with lang=”no”: Example <html> <head> <style type=”text/css”> q:lang(no){quotes:”~” “~”;} </style> </head> <body> <p>Some text<q lang=”no”> A quote in a paragraph</q> some text</p> </body> </html>
CSS Pseudo-elemets
CSS pseudo-elements are used to add special effects to some selectors. Syntax The syntax of pseudo-elements: selector:pseudo-element{property:value;} Syntax The syntax of pseudo-elements: selector:pseudo-elements{property:value;} CSS classes can also be used with pseudo-elements: selector class:pseudo-element{property:value;}
The : first-line Pseudo – element
The “first-line” pseudo-element is used to add a special style to the first line of a text. In the following example the browser formats the first line of text in a p element according to the style in the “first-line” pseudo-element(where the browser breaks the line, depends on the size of the browser window): Example p:first-line { color:#ff0000; font-variant:small-caps; } Note : The “first-line ” pseudo-element can only be used with block-level elements. Note : The following properties apply to the “first-line” pseudo-element
font properties
color properties
background properties
word-spacing
letter-spacing
text-decoration
text-decoration
vertical-align
text-transform
line-height
clear
The : first –letter Pseudo-element The “first-letter” pseudo-element is used to add a special to the first letter of a text. Example p:first-letter { color:#ff0000; font-size:xx-large; } Note The “first-letter” pseudo-element can only be used with block level elements Note The following properties apply to the “first-letter” pseudo-element:
font properties
color properties
background properties
margin properties
padding properties
border properties
text-decoration
vertical-align(only if “float” is “none”)
text-transform
line-height
float
clear
Pseudo-elements and CSS classes
Pseudo-elements can be combined with CSS classes : p.article:first-letter{color:#ff0000;} <p class=”article”> A paragraph in an article</p> The example above will display the first letter of all paragraphs with class=”article”, in red.
Multiple Pseudo-elements
Several pseudo-elements can also be combined. In the following example, the first letter of paragraph will be red, in an xx-large. The rest of the first line will be blue, and in small-caps. The rest of the paragraph will be default size and color. Example p:first-letter { color:#ff0000; font-size:XX-large; } p:first-line { color:#000000; font-variant:small-caps;
CSS-The:before Pseudo-elements
The “:before” pseudo-element can be used to insert some content before the content of an element. The following example inserts an image before each<hl> element: Example h1:before content: url(smiley.gif);
CSS-The:after Pseudo-element
The “:after” pseudo-element can be used to insert some content after the content of an element. The following example inserts an image after each<h1> element: Example : h1:after content:url(smiley.gif);
All CSS Pseudo classes/Elements
Selector
Example
Example description
;link
a:link
Selects all unvisited links
;visited
a:visited
Selects all visited links
;active
a:active
Selects the active link
:hover
a:hover
Selects links on mouse over
:focus
input:focus
Selects the input element which has focus
:first-letter
p:first-letter
Selects the first letter of every<p> element
:first-line
p:first-line
Selects the first line of every<p> element
:first-child
p:first-child
Selects every<p> element that is the first child of its parent
:before
p:before
insert content before every <p> element
:after
p:after
Insert content after every <p> element
:lang(language)
p:lang(it)
Selects every <p> element with a lang attribute value starting with “it”
17f:T274f,
CSS Outlines
Outlines are very similar to the borders by there are few major differences in borders and outlines: An outline does not take up space. Outline do not have to be rectangular. Out line is always the same on all sides; you cannot specify different values for different side of the element.
Note
The outline properties are not supported by IE 6 or Netscape 7. You can set the following outline properties using CSS. The outline –width property is used to set the width of the outline. The outline –style property is used to set the line style for the The outline –color width property is used to set the color of the outline. The outline property is used to set all the above three properties in a single statement.
CSS Margin
The margin property defines the space around an HTML element .It is possible to use negative values to overlap content. The values of the margin property are not inherited by child elements. Remember that the adjacent vertical margins (top and bottom margins) will collapse into each other so that the distance between the blocks is not the sum of the margins, but only greater of the two margins or the same size as one margin if both are equal. There are following four properties to set an element margin. The margin A short hand property for setting the margin properties in one declaration. The margin –bottom Specifies the bottom margin of an element. The margin –top specifies the top margin of an element. The margin –left specifies the left top margin of an element. The margin –right specifies the right margin of an element. Now we will see how to use these properties with examples.
CSS Margin Property
The margin property allows you set all of the properties for the four margins in one declaration .Here is the syntax to set margin around a paragraph. <style type=”tesxt/css”> p{margin :15px} all four margins will be 15px p{ margin :10px 2%} top and bottom margin will be 10 px, left and right margin will be 2% of the total width of the document. p{ margin :10px 2% -10px} top and bottom margin will be 10 px, left and right margin will be 2% of the total width of the document, bottom margin will be -10px. p{ margin :10px 2% -10px auto} top and bottom margin will be 10 px, left and right margin will be 2% of the total width of the document, bottom margin will be -10px, left margin will be set by the browser </style> Here is the example: <p style=”margin: 15px; border:1px solid black;”> top and bottom margin will be 10 px, left and right margin will be 2% of the total width of the document. </p> <p style=”margin:10 px 2% -10px ; border:1px solid black”;> top margin will be 10px,left and right margin will be 2% of the total width of the document , bottom margin will be -10px</p> <p style=”margin:10 px 2% -10px ; auto;border:1px solid black”;> top margin will be 10px,left and right margin will be 2% of the total width of the document , bottom margin will be -10px ,left margin will be set by the browser</p> The margin –bottom Property: The margin- bottom property allows you set bottom margin of an element .It can have a value in length,% or auto. here is the example: <p style=”margin –bottom: 15px; border:1px sild black;”> This is a paragrapgh with a specified bottom margin. </p> <p style =”margin –bottom: 5%; border:1px soild black;”> This is another paragraph with a specified bottom margin in percent</p>
CSS Margin Top Property
Then margin-top property allows you set top margin of an element .It can have a value in length,%or auto Here is the example: <p style =”margin –top: 15px; border:1px solid black;”> This is a paragraph with a specified top margin </p> <p style =”margin -top: 5%; border:1px solid black;”> This is a paragraph with a specified top margin in percent </p>
CSS margin –left property
The margin - left property allows you set left margin of an element .It can have a value in length% or auto.
Here is the example
<p style =”margin –left: 15px; border:1px solid black;”> This is a paragraph with a specified left margin </p> <p style =”margin- left: 5%; border:1px solid black;”> This is a paragraph with a specified left margin in percent </p>
CSS margin –right property
The margin - right property allows you set right margin of an element .It can have a value in length% or auto. Here is the example: <p style =”margin –right: 15px; border:1px solid black;”> This is a paragraph with a specified right margin </p> <p style =”margin- right: 5%; border:1px solid black;”> This is a paragraph with a specified left margin in percent </p>
Margin – shorthand property
To shorten the code, it is possible to specify all the margin properties in one property. This is called a short hand property. The short hand property for all the margin properties is margin””
Example
margin:100px 50px; The margin property can have from one to four values
margin:25px 50 px 75 px 100px;
top margin is 25px
right margin is 50 px
bottom margin is 75 px
left margin is 100px
margin :25px 50 px 75 px;
top margin is 25px
right and left margins are 50 px
bottom margin is 75px
margin: 25px 50 px;
top and bottom margins are 25px
right and left margins are 50 px
margin : 25px;
all four margins are 25px
CSS- Padding’s
The padding property allows you to specify how much space should appear between the content of an element and its border: There are following five CSS properties which can be used to control lists: The value of this attribute should be either a length, a percentage, or the word inherits. If the value is inherit it will have the same padding as its parent element. If a percentage is used, the percentage is of the containing box. You can also set different values for the padding on each side of the box using the following properties: The padding –bottom Specifies the bottom padding of an element. The padding –top specifies the top padding of an element. The padding –left specifies the left padding of an element. The padding –right specifies the right padding of an element. The padding Serves as short hand for the preceding properties. Now we will see how to use these properties with examples.
The padding- bottom Property
The padding –bottom property sets the bottom padding (space) of an element .This can take a value in terms of length of%.
Here is the example
<p style =”padding-bottom: 15px; border: 1px solid black;”> This is a paragraph with specified bottom padding </p> <p style =”padding-bottom: 5%; border: 1px solid black;”> This is another paragraph with specified bottom padding in percent </p>
The padding –top Property
The padding –top property sets the top padding (space) of an element. This can take a value in terms of length of%. Here is the example: <p style =”padding-top: 15px; border: 1px solid black;”> This is a paragraph with specified top padding </p> <p style =”padding-top: 5%; border: 1px solid black;”> This is another paragraph with specified top padding in percent </p>
The padding –left Property
The padding –top property sets the left padding (space) of an element. This can take a value in terms of length of%. Here is the example: <p style =”padding-left: 15px; border: 1px solid black;”> This is a paragraph with specified left padding </p> <p style =”padding-left: 15%; border: 1px solid black;”> This is another paragraph with specified left padding in percent </p>
The padding –right Property:
The padding –top property sets the right padding (space) of an element. This can take a value in terms of length of%. Here is the example: <p style =”padding-right: 15px; border: 1px solid black;”> This is a paragraph with specified right padding </p> <p style =”padding-right: 5%; border: 1px solid black;”> This is another paragraph with specified right top padding in percent </p>
CSS Padding Property
The padding property sets the left, right, top and bottom padding (space) of an element. This can take a value in terms of length of%. Here is the example: <p style =”padding: 15px; border: 1px solid black;”> all four padding will be 15px </p> <p style =”padding: 10px 2%; border: 1px solid black;”> top and bottom padding will be 10px,left and right padding will be 2% of the total width of the document. </p> <p style =”padding: 10px 2% 10px; border: 1px solid black;”> top and bottom padding will be 10px,left and right padding will be 2% of the total width of the document, bottom padding will be 10px. </p> <p style =”padding: 10px 2% 10px 10px; border: 1px solid black;”> top and bottom padding will be 10px,left and right padding will be 2% of the total width of the document, bottom padding and top padding will be 10px. </p>
180:T5a5,
Calendar Extender
Calendar control is used to automatically popup the calendar when user click on a control like text box and automatically hiding after user select the date and the selected date is displayed in text box. Target control ID : Popup Position : Used to specify the position where to popup the calendar for the target control Popup Button ID : Used to specify ID of a Button control clicking on which the calendar has to popup. When this property was not set then clicking on target control itself with popup the calendar. Format : Used to specify the format for date to be displayed in the target control. While specifying the format use small d for the day, capital M for month & small y for the year. Example The following example demonstrates how to use the calendar extender. Add a page to the website and then place a Toolkit script manager & a text box on a and set ID of textbox as T1. Within html source of the page take a calendar extender and set following properties to it. <asp: CalendarExtender ID=calendarExtendar1 runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”T1” popupposition =”Right” format=”dd/mm/yyyy”/> At runtime when you click on the text box the calendar will pop up on right side of the text box, the selected date will be displayed in text box & calendar will be hidden
181:T786,
Collapsible Panel Extender
This control is used to make a panel expanded and collapsed dynamically at runtime properties. Target Control ID : Expand Control ID : Used to specify ID of the control clicking on which the target control has to be expand. Collapse Control ID : Used to specify ID of that control clicking on which the target control has to be collapsed. Expanded size : Used to specify height of the target control when it is expanded. Collapsed size : Used to specify height of the target control when it is collapsed. Expanded Text : Used to specify the text to display when the target control is expanded within the text & label Collapsed Text : Used to specify the text to display when the target control is collapsed within the text lagel. TextLabelID: Used to specify ID of a label in which you want to display expanded text and collapsed text. Example The following example demonstrates how to use the collapsible panel extender. Add a page to the website and then place a Tool kit Script manager & a label & panel on the page and for the label set the ID as L1 and provide some content within the panel. Within HTML source of the page Drag & Drop a collapsible panel Extender and set following properties to it. <asp: collapsible panel Extender ID=” collapsible panel Extender1 runat=”server” targetControlID=”panel1” Expand controlID=”L1” collapse control ID=”L1” ExpandSize=”150” collapsesize=”0” ExpandText=”[Click Here to collapse]” collapsed Text=”[click here to expand]” TextLableID=”L1”> </asp: collapsible panel Extender> At runtime By clicking on the Label L1 you can collapse and expand the panel
182:T638,
Confirm Button Extender
This control is used to display a confirmation message before executing the code of a button. PropertiesTarget Control ID : Used to specify ID of a button control for which you want to display a confirmation message. Confirm Text : Used to specify the confirm message to display when user click on the target control. ExampleThe following example demonstrates how to use the confirm Button Extender. Add a page to the website and place a Tool Kit script manger on it. Take two textboxes and a Button a page and for the textboxes set the ID T1 & T2 and for the Button set the ID Btncopy. Set the caption for Button as copy Write the following code within the copy button click event to copy the text in T1 to the text box T2.
Button Click Event
T2. Text=T1. Text
within the HTML source of the page drag & drop a confirm button extender and set following properties to it.
<asp: confirmButtonExtender ID=confirmButton Extender1 runat=”server” TargetControlID=”Btncopy” confirm Text=”Do you re Really want to copy ? ”> </asp: confirmButtonExtender> At runtime after typing some text in T1 if you click on the copy Button then it will display a confirmation message and within this when you click on cancel Button then executing the code of copy button will be cancelled and clicking on ok Button will execute the code of copy Button
183:T6da,
Modal Popup Extender
This control is used to display your own confirmation dialogbox instead of the default JavaScript dialog box. PopupcontroID : Used to specify the control to popup. OkcontrolID : Used to specific ID of the control that represent ok in the confirmation Cancel Control ID : Used to specify ID of the control that represent cancel in the confirmation. Target Control ID : Used to specify the ID of the control for which the model popup has to be display. This must be same has that target control ID of the confirm Button Extender for which the model popupExtender is set. Example The following example modifies the previous example to display the modelpopup extender for the confirmButton Extender Take a panel on the page and within the panel take a label and two buttons and for the label set the cation “ Do you really want to copy ? ” and for the Buttons set the caption “yes” and “NO” and set the ID of the Buttons as btnyes & Btn Within HTML source of the page drag & drop a Modelpopup Extender and set following properties for it. <asp: ModelpopupExtender Id=ModelpopupExtender1 runat=”server” TargetControlID=”Btncopy” okcontrolID=”Btnyes” cancelcontrolID=”BtnNo” popup controlID=”panel1”> </asp:modelpopupExtender> Modify the confirmButton Extender properties as follows <asp: confirmButtonExtender ID=”ConfirmButtonExtender” runat=”server” TargetControlID=”BtnCopy” DisplaymodalpopupId=”modalpopupExtendar1”> </asp:ConfirmButtonExtender>
184:T54d,
Drag Panel Extender
Drag panel Extender is used to allow the user to dynamically drag a panel on the page It has two important properties targetControlID & DraghandleId where DraghandleID is used to specify ID of the control by clicking on which the target control can be dragged. While using Dragpanel Extender you must enclosed in a div tag in which the height property of style set to the required value within which the target control can be dragged Example The following example Demonstrate how to use a drag panel extender. Add ‘a’ page to the website and place a Toolkit script manager and a panel on that page and within the panel take a label with the caption “click Here TO Drag” and next to the label provide any content within the panel. Within HTML source of the page drag and drop DragpanelExtender and set the following properties to it by enclosing it in a Div tag as follows. <div style = “height : 600px”> <asp:DragpanelExtender Id=”DragPanelExtender1” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID= “panel1” DragHandleID =’Label1’> </asp: DragPanelExtender> </div> At runtime by clicking on the label caption ‘click Here to Drag’ you can drag the panel to anywhere within an area of 600 px.
185:T573,
Drop Shadow Extender
DropshadowExtender is used to provide shadow effect for a control. It has the property target control ID to specify ID of the control which you want to extend with dropshadowExtender & other properties available for it are as follows. width : Used to specify width of the shadow for the target control. Opacity : Used to specify how much opacity the show is. Rounded : Indicates whether or not corners of the target control becomes rounded. Radius: Used to specify the radius to use to make the corners of the target control rounded when Rounded property was set to ‘true’ Example The following example demonstrates how to use drop shadow extender. Add a page to the website and place a toolkit script manager & an image control on that page and set an Image in a image control by using ‘Image URL’ property. Within HTML source of the page drag and drop a Dropshadowextender and set following properties to it to create shadow effect for that Image control. <asp: DropShadowExtender ID=”DropShadowExtender” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”Image1” Radius=”10” Rounded =”true” width=”15” opacity=”0.5”> </asp: DropshadowExtender>
186:Ta03,
Filtered TextBox Extender
This control is used to filter the characters allowed into the textbox. TargetControlID :FilterType : Used to specify which type of filter to apply for the target control . It has 4 possible values. customlowercase lettersnumbersUppercase lettersFiltermode : Used to specify the mode to specify to filter the characters allowed in to the target control, and it has two possible values. ValidChars : Used to specify the characters to allow into the textbox when filter mode is set to valid chars. Invalid chars : When filtermode property is set, to invalid chars then use this property to specify the list of characters that you don’t want to allow into the target control. Example The following example uses filtered text box extender to allow any character other than uppercase characters into a text box. Add a page to the website and then take a Toolkit script manager and a textbox on the page, set ID of that textbox as T1 Within HTML source of the page drag & drop a filter textbox extender and set following properties for it. <asp:filteredTextBoxExtender ID=”Filtered TextBox Extender1” runat=”server” TargetControlID=”T1” filterMode=”InvalidChars” Invalidchars=”ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ”> </asp:filteredTextBoxExtender> HTML EDITOR Extender: HTML editor extender is used to extend a textbox and aloe the user to edit the text in textbox .Similar to the editor provided to type the email message while sending email. It has the property ‘Toolbar’ to specify which buttons you want with in the Toolbar of HTML editor Extender. Example The following example makes a textbox as editor as textbox as an editor by using Html editor Extender. Add a page to the website , take a toolkit script manager on it along with a textbox and set ID of the textbox as T1. With in HTML source of the page drag and drop HTML editorExtender and set following properties to it <asp: HTMLEditor Extender ID=”HTML editor Extender runat =”sever” TargetcontrolID =”T1” Enable sanitization=”false”> <Toolbar> <asp:Bold/> <asp:Italic/> <asp:UnderLine/> <asp:cut/> <asp:copy/> <asp:paste/> </Toolbar> </asp:HTML EditorExtender>
187:Te0b,
HOVER Menu Extender
HOVER Menu Extender is used to make a control visible only when mouse point is over another control.PropertiestargercontrolID:popupcontrolID : used to specify ID of the control to popup. Offset x & Offset y: used tospecify psotion for the popup control relative to the target control. PopDelay: Used to specify the time in milli-seconds at which the popup control has to be popup. Example The following example demonstrates how to use the HOVER MenuExtender. Add a page to the website and then take a Toolkit Script manager on it and then a gridview control, for the gridview control set the ID ‘GVDept’, Autogenerate columns property to false and then create a layout of gridview control with in HTML source of the page as follows: with in GV Control <columns> <asp:TemplateField Headertext=”Deptno”> <Item Template > <asp:Linkbutton ID =”LnkEdit” runat =”server” Text=”Edit” commandName=”Edit”/> <asp: Label ID=”lblDno” runat=”Server” Text=’<%#Eval(“Deptno”)%>/> <asp:HoverMenuExtender ID=”HoverMenuExtender1” runat=”Server” TargetControlID=”LblDno” popupcontrolID=”LnkEdit” offset=”-40” popDelay=”50” > </asp: HoverMenuExtender> </ItemTemplate> <EditItemTemplate> <asp: Label ID =”lblDno” runat=”server” Text=<%#Eval(“Deptno”)%>/> </EditItemTemplate> </asp: Templatefield> <asp:TemplateField HeaderText=”Dname”> <ItemTemplate> <asp:Labek ID=”LblDame” runat=”server” Text=<%#Eval(“Dname”%>/> </ItemTemplate> <EditItem Template> <asp:TextBox Id=”TxtDname” runat=”server” Text=”<%#Bind(‘Dname’)%>/> </EditItemTemplate> </asp:TemplateFiled> <asp: TemplateField HeaderText=”Location”> <Item Template> <asp:Label ID=”LblLoc” runat=”server” Text=’<%#Eval(“Loc”)%>/> </ItemTemplate> <EditItem Template> <asp: TextBox ID=”TxtLoc” runat=”Server” Text=”<%#Bind(‘Loc’)%>/> </EditItemTemplate> </asp:TemplateField></columns> <asp:Gridview> Within the code of the page create a method with the name FillGrid() as follows and calling the method in the pagelaod event. private void FillGrid() { sqlconnection Cn= new sqlconnection( “Server=Nikhil, Database=mydb; Uid=sa; pwd=123”); SqlDataAdapter Da= new SqlDataAdapater(“Select * from dept”, Cn); Dataset Ds=new Dataset(); Da.fill(Ds,”Dept”) GVDept.DataSource=DS.Tables[“Dept”]; GVDept.DataBind(); } Call the fillGrid() method.In page load event. Write the following code with in the ‘RowEditing’ event of te GridView to convert the row into edit mode. under GVDept-RowEditing –Event { GVDept.EditIndex=e.NewEditIndex; FillGrid(); } At runtime when you place mouse pointer over the Deptno then the edit LinkButton will display to the left of the Deptno and clicking on the Edit Button will convert the row to edit mode. Until mouse pointer is over when you place mouse pointer over the Deptno.
188:T7d5,
Drop Down Extender
DropDownExtender is used to make a control DropDown when user click on another control and immediately after user select a option fromit the control dropeddown will be automatically hidden. PropertiesTarget ControlID:DropDownControlID: Used to specify the ID of the control to dropdown when user click on the target control. Example The following example demonstrates how to use dropdown Extender control. Add apage to the website and then place a Toolkit Script manager on ti and then an Image control & just below the Image control take a panel and within the panel take three linkbuttons with the captions get to Name of an Image available in your website. Within code of the page create a method with the name linkclicked and with inthat methos write the following code. protected void LinkClicked(object Sender,EventArgs e) { string path=”~/image/”+((LinkButton) sender).Text+”.jpg”; Image1.ImageUrl=path; } With in the properties of 3 LinkButtons get the click event to name of the methos we created in the code that is ‘LinkClicked’. Set ImageUrl Property for the Image control within the pageload event as follows to display the Image in Image Control Immediately page is loaded. -Page Load – Image1.ImageUrl=”~/Images/Tulips.jpg”; Within HTML source of the page drag and DropDownExtender and set following properties to it. <asp:DropDownExtender ID=”DropDownExtender1” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”Image1”DropDownControlID=”Panel1”> </asp:DropDownExtender> At runtime when you click on the image then the panel will dropDownjust below the Image control and clicking on LinkButtion will display corresponding Image with in the ImageControl and the panel will be automatically hidden. *http://www.visualstudiolaunch.com/vs2012vle/Home visualstudio-2012.
189:Tc77,
Dynamic Populate Extender
This control is used to populate a control available on the page dynamically with data. It has following properties:Target ControlID used to specify ID of the control to extend. ServiceMethod used to specify the name of the method that will return the data to populate in the targetcontrol. Example The following example populates a panel control with a gridview with data from the table based on the linkbutton on which user will click. Add a page to the website and place a ToolKit ScriptManger on it. Within HTMLsource of the page with in the headsection create a Javascript function with the name getdata as follows. <script type=”text/javascript”> function getdata(value) { var D =$find(‘Dynamic populateExtender1’); if(D) D.populate(value); } </script> With in HTML source of the page enclose each linkbutton in separate <div> tag & for that <div> tag in the ‘onlclick’ event call the javascript function getdata by setting the values 0, 1, & 2 respectively. <div onlcick=”getdata(this.value) value=”0”> <asp:LinkButton- - - - - - - - - --- -- - - - - - </div> <div onclick =”getdata(this.value)” value=”1”> <asp:LinkButton --- - - - - - - - - - </div> <div onclick=”getdata(this.value)”value=”2”> <asp: LinkButton - - - - - - - - - - - - - </div> With in HTML source of the page take a Dynamic populate Extender and set following properties for it. <asp:Dynamic populate Extender Id =”DynamicPopulateExtender1” runat=”server” TargetControlID=”panel1” ServiceMethod=”GetData”> </asp:DynamicpopulateExtender> With in the Design of the page click on the smart tag ofpanel control and choose “add dynamic populate method “ that will create a method in the code with same name as the service method set for Dynamic populate method. Public static string GetData(string contextKey) { sql connection cn=new sql connection(“server=Nikhil;database=mydb; uid=sa; pwd=123”); SqlDataAdapte Da= new SqlDataAdapater(“Select*from EMP”,cn); Switch(contentkey) { case”1”; Da=new SqlDataAdapter(“Select * from dept”,cn); break; case”1”; Da=new SqlDataAdapter(“Select * from programmer”,cn); break; } Dataset Da=new .Dataset(); Da.Fill(DS); Gridview GV=new GridView(); GV.Datasource=Ds.Tables[0]; GV.DataBind(); Stringwritter SW=new stringWriter(); HTML textwritter HTW=new HTML TextWriter(SW); GV.RenderControl(HTW); HTW.close(); return SW.Tostring(); } At runtime when you click on the linkbutton caption employees it will get the data from EMP table ,When you click on LinkButton with the caption Departments,then it will get the data from Dept table and when you click on the LinkButton with the caption programmers, is will get the data from the programmers table and this data will be filles with in a GV and the GV will populate into the panel,Dynamically.
18a:T666,
List Search Extender
ListSearchExtender is used with a ListBox control to Automatically select the item starting with the letters you type in the text box.
Properties
TargetControlID: Prompt Position: Used to specify where to display the prompt for the target control. Prompt Text : Used to specify the default promptText. Prompt CSS class : Used to specify the CSS class to use to display the prompt. Example The following example demonstrates how to use the list search extender. Add a page to the website and then place a Toolkit Script Manager and a ListBox on the page and within the Listbox Add some Items. Within HTML source of the page with in the head section create a CSS style with the name prompt as follws. <style type=”text/css”> .prompt { font-family:Arial Black; font-size:medium; color : Blue; } </style> Within HTML Source itself Drag & drop a ListSearchExtender and set following properties to it. <asp: ListsearchExtender Id=”ListSearchExtende1” runat=”server” TargetControlID=”L1” Promptposition=”Top” PromptText=”Type The text” promptcssclass=”prompt”> </asp:ListSearchExtender> At runtime while focus is in the ListBox if you the text then the first Item in the LB starting with text you typed will automatically selected.
18b:T11c7,
Masked Edit Extender
This Control is used to provide a mask to the control to restrict it to accept only specific data PropertiesTargetControlID :Mask Type : Used to specify the type of mask to apply for the target control. This can be Datetime
Date
None
Number
Time
Mask : Used to specify the mask for the target control based on the mask type. Autocomplete : Indicates whether or not the value of target control is automatically completed if user make it incomplete.
Masked Edit Validate
This control is used to validate the control that is extended with masked edit extender. Properties Control To Validate :
Used to specify the ID of the control to validate using Masked Edit Validator this must be same as TargetCotnrolID of Masked Edit Extender
ControlExtender:
Used to specify the ID of the maskedEditExtender which you are extending with masked edit Validator.
ISvalid Empty :
Indicates Whether or not the control to validate will be valid if it is empty.
Invalid Value Message :
Used to specify the error Message to display when the value in control to validate is invalid based on Mask set for Masked Edit Extender.
Empty value Message : Used to specify the error message to display when control is empty and this can be set only when is valid empty property is set to false. To specify the mask for the masked Edit Extender control you can use the following characters. 9 – Only a numeric character L - Only a letter $ - Only a letter or a space C - Only a custom character (case Sensitive) A - Only a letter or a custom character N - Only a numeric or custom character ? - Any Character / - Date separator : - Time Separator . - Decimal Separator , - Thousand Separator \ - Escape Character { - Initial decimal for repetition of masks } - Final delimiter for repetition of masks Example The following example demonstrates how to use maskedEditExtender & maskedEditValidator. Add a page to the website and then place a toolkit script manager & a textbox on it and set ID of the Textobx as T1. Within HTML Source of the page drag & drop a masked Edit Extender and set following properties to it make the Textobx T1 accept only Date. <asp: MaskedEditExtender Id=”MaskedEditExtender” runat=”server” TargetControlID=”T1” MaskType=”Date” Mask=”99/99/9999” Autocomplete=”false”> </asp: Masked Edit Extender> Within HTML Source of the page Drag & Drop a masked Edit Validator and set following properties for it to validate Textbox T1 based on the mask set for maskedEditExtender1 <asp: MaskedEditValidator ID=”MaskedEditValidator1” runat=”server” controlTOValidate = “T1” ControlExtender=”maskedEditExtender1” ISValidEmpty=”true” InvalidvalueMessage=”You must enter date in dd/mm/yyyy format”> </asp:MaskedEditValidator> At runtime when user is providing an Invalidvalue in the textbox t1 then an error message is display with masked Editvalidator.
18c:T6d3,
Mutually Exclusive Checkbox Extender
This control is used with checkboxes to provide multiple options to the user using checkboxes and allow the user to select only one or none. PropertiesTargetControlID:Key: Used to specify a group name for checkboxes so that a set of mutually exclusive checkBoxExtenders will be treated as one group and allows the user to select only one or more from the group. Example The following Example demonstrates how to use mutually
Exculsive CheckBOXExtender Control
Add a page to the website and then place a Toolkit Script manager & three checkboxes on it and set their ID’s as C1, C2, &C3 respectively. Also set a caption for all three checkboxes. Within HTML source of the page drag & drop three mutuallyExclusiveChackBoxExtender control and set following properties for it. <asp : MutuallyExtensivecheck Box Extender ID=”MutuallyExclusivecheckBoxExtender1” runat=”server” TargetControlID=”C1” key=”MyGroup”> </asp : MutuallyExculsivecheckBoxExtender> <asp:MutuallyExclusiveCheckBoxExtender2 Id=”MutuallyExclusiveCheckBoxExtender2” runat=”server” TargetControlID=”C2” Key=”mygroup”> </asp: MutuallyExclusivecheckboxExtender> <asp: MutuallyExclusiveCheckBoxExtener ID=” mutually Exclusive CheckBoxExtender3” runat=”server” TargetControlID=”c3” Key=”MyGroup”> </asp:MutuallyExclusiveCheckBoxExtender> At runtime among these three checkboxes you can select only one or none, which is not possible with radio buttons.
18d:T767,
Numericup Down Extender
NumericupDownExtender is used with a TextBox control to allow the user to select a value from a list of values by clickin g on Up & Down arrow keys.PropertiesTargetControlID :Minimum & Maximum : Used to specify minimum & maximum values user can select with NumbericupDownExtender. Step : Used to specify the value to increment or decrement when user click on up & Down arrow keys. refValues : Used to specify the list of string values separated with semi colon when you want to use numericupDownExtender to select the string values.
Example
The following example demonstrates how to use NumericupDownExtender control Add a page to the website and then take aToolkitscriptmanager & 2 text boxes on it and set their ID’s as T1 & T2. Within HTML source of the page Drag & Drop a numeric updownExtender and set following properties for it to allow the user to select values in the range of 1 to 100 within the 1 to 100 within the textbox T1 by using numericupdownextender <asp:NumericupDownExtender ID=”NumericupdownExtender1” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”T1” Minimum = “1” Maximum =”100” step=”5” width=”100”> </asp:NumericDownExtender> Within HTML source itself Drag & Drop another numeric updown Extender and set following properties for it to allow the user to select a month within the textbox T2 by using NumericupDownExtender. <asp:NumericDownExtender ID=”NumericupdownExtender1” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”T2” Refvalues=”Jan;Feb;Mar;Apr;May;June;July;Aug;Sep;Oct;Nov;Dec”> </asp:NumericDownExtender>
18e:T509,
Paging Bulleted List Extender
This control is used to apply paging for bulleted list control. This control has only one important property Target controls. Bulleted list control to extend using the paging Bulleted List Extender. Example The following example demonstrates how to use the paging Bulleted ListExtender control Add a page to the website and then take a ToolkitScriptManager and a BulletedList control and set ID of the BulletedList control as B2. Within the page load event write the following code to get employees names from the table Emp and display them in BulletedList control PageLoad : { sqlconnection cn = new sqlconnection(“server=Nikhil;database=Mydb;UserId=sa;password=123”); sqlDataAdapter Da= new sqlDataAdapter(“select Ename from EMP order by Ename”,cn); Dataset DS= new Dataset(); Da.fill(Ds,”Emp”); BL.Datasource=DS.Table[“EMP”]; BL.DataTextfiled=”Ename”; BL.DataBind(); }} Within HTML source of the page Drag & Drop a paging Bulleted listExtender and set its TargetControlID property to the ID of Bulleted list that is BL. At runtime employees name are displayed in BulletedList by dividing them into pages based on Alphabets with which the employee name starts.
18f:T699,
Popup Control Extender
PopupcontrolExtender is used to make a control popup when user click on a control display the selected value in the target control and hide the popupcontrol. PropertiesTargetcontrolID :PopupcontrolID : Used to specify ID of the control to popup when the user click on the target control offset x & offset Y : Used to specify position of the popup control relative to the target control
Example
The following example demonstrates how to use the popupcontrolExtender. Add a page to the website and place a ToolkitScriptManager followed by an update panel & within the update panel a textbox & panel and for the textbox set the ID as T1. Within the panel control in updatepanel take a radiobuttonlist control, set its ID as ‘RL’ and Add some items to it using the items property. Within HTML source of the page Drag & Drop a popup control/Extender and set following properties for it. <asp:popupcontrolExtender ID=”popupcontrolExtender1” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”T1” popupcontrolID=”panel1” offset=”30”> </asp:popupcontrolExtender> For the RadioButtonList set Autopostback property true and write the following code within selectedIndexchanged of that RadioButtonList. RL-selectedIndexchanged { popupcontrolExtender1.commit(RL.selcted value); } At runtime when you click in the Textbox the panel with RadiobuttonList will popup and whatever the Radiobutton you select, value of that radiobutton will be displayed and will be hidden
190:T74b,
Resizable Control Extender
This control is used to allow the user to resize a control dynamically at runtime. TargetcontrolID :Handlecssclass: Used to specify the css class use display the handle for the Targetcontrol by clicking on which user Resizablecssclass : Used to specify the cassclass to use to change the appearance of the TargetControl while it is resized. Minumumwidth & Minimum Height : Used to specify Maximum width & height for the Target control.
Example
The following example demonstrates how to use the resizable controlextender. Add a page to the website and then place a Toolkitscript Manager & a panel on the page and within the panel take an image control and within HTML source of the page for image control remove the complete value of ‘style’ property and then set ‘width & height ’ properties within the style to 100 % Within HTML source of the page within the head section create two css styles with the names ‘handle ’ and ‘resize’ as follows <style type=”text/css”> .handle { background-color:Black; width : 10 px; height:10px; } .resize { border-style : solid; border-width:thich; border-color:Blue; } </style> Within the HTML source of the page itself drag & drop a resizable control Extender & set following properties to it. (within panel) <asp:Resizablecontrolextender ID=”ResizablecontrolExtender” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”panel1” Handlecssclass=”handle” Resizablecssclass=”resize”> </asp:ResizablecontrolExtender> At runtime by clicking on the handle available at the bottom right corner of the panel you can resize the panel.
191:T57b,
Slider Extender
Slider Extender control is used to provide a slider on the page and allow the user to select a value within a specified rang using the slide. TargetContorlID:BoundcontrolID : Used to specify the control with in which you want to display the current value of the slide. Minimum & Maximum : Used to specify the range of values user can select with slider Extender Decimals : Used to specify number of digits you want to display after the decimal point. Example The following example demonstrates how to use the slider extender. Add a page to the website and place aToolkitscriptManager and a Textbox & label and set the ID’s of Textbox & lable as T1 & L1. Within HTML Source of the page drag & drop a sliderExtender & set following properties for it. <asp:sliderExtender ID=”sliderExtender1” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”T1” BoundcontrolID=”21” Minimum=”10” Maximum=”100” decimals=”2”> </asp:sliderExtender> At runtime in the place of TextBox you will get slider and when you select a value in the slider and when you select a value in the slider using the slider handle then the current value of the slider will be displayed in label.
192:Te30,
Slide Show Extender
This control is used to create a slideshow of images and allow the user to navigate between the slides next and previous and also play the slide at specified intervals. Properties TargetContorlID: ImagedescriptionLabelID : Used to specify the ID of the label in which you want to display description of the current image. ImageTitleLabelID : Used to specify ID of the label in which you want to display title of the current image. Next Button ID : Used to specify ID of the Button that is used to move to the next slide. previousButton Id : Used to specify ID of the button to use to move to the previous slide. playButtonID : Used to specify ID of the Button to use to play the slideshow. PlayButton Text : Used to set a caption for the play button. StopButtonText : Used to set a caption for stop button. PlayInterval : Used to specify the interval in milli seconds at which the slide as to be changed when you start playing the slide show. SlideshowserviceMethod : Used to specify a method name that will return the images to display in the slideshow as slide array. Loop : Indicates whether or not the slideshow will continuous in a loop without stopping after playing it for once.
Example
The following example demonstrates how to use the slideshow extender. Add a page to the website and then place a ToolkitscriptManager on it & then a panel & design the panel as follows. Within the HTML source of the page drag & drop a slideshow extender and set following properties for it. <asp:slideshowextender Id=”slideshowExtender” runat=”server” imageDescriptionLableID=”L2” ImageTitleLabelID=”L1” NextButtonId=”Btnnext” playButtonText=”play” playbuttonID=”Btnplay” stopButtonText=”stop” previousButtonID=”btnprev” playinterval=”3000” slideshowservicemethod=”Getimages” usecontextkey=”True” Loop=”true” > </asp:slideshowExtender> Within the design of the page click on the smart tag and choose “ Add slideshow pageMethod” option that will create a method in the code with the same name as the method name you set for the slide show service method property of the slideshowextender write the following code within that method. using system.AjaxcontrolToolkit; public static…. { return new slide[] { new slide(“Image/Desert.jpg” ,”Desert”, “This is Desert Image”); new slide(“images/Lighthouse.jpg”,”Lighthouse” . “This is lighthouse image”); new slide(“Images/penguins.jpg”,”penguins”,”This is LighthouseImage”); new slide(“Images/Tulips.jpg”,”koala”,”This is koala Image”) }; } At runtime by default first image will be displayed in image control & by clicking on next button you can move to the next slide, by clicking on previous button you can move the previous slide & by clicking on play button you can play the slideshow at the interval specified with playInteraval property.
193:T630,
TextBox WaterMark Extender
This control is used to provide watermark for the textbox Indicating what value to input in the textbox without using a label to provide a caption for the textbox properties. TargetControlID :WatermarkText : Used to specify what is the text to display in textbox as watermark. Watermarkcssclass: Used to specify the cssclass to use to display the watermark. Example The following example demonstrates how to use Textbox water mark extender. Add a page to the website and then take a Toolkitscriptmanager & two textboxes on the page and set ID’s of Textboxes as T1 & T2. Within HTML source of the page within the head section create a css class with the name watermark as follows. <style type=”text/css”> .watermark { font-family : ArialBlack; font-size: large; color: Gray; } </style> Within HTML Source itself drag & drop two textbox watermark extenders and set following properties for that <asp: TextBoxWatermarkExtender ID=”TextBoxWaterMarkExtender” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”T1” watermarkText=”userID” watermarkcssclass=”watermark”></asp:Textboxwatermarkextender> <asp:TextBoxWatermarkExtender Id=”TextBoxWaterMarkExtender 2” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”T2” watermarkText=”password” watermarkcssclass=”watermark”> </asp:TextBoxWatermarkExtender>
194:T4d6,
Toggle Button Extender
This control is used with checkbox and it is used to provide different for checkboxes when it is checked and unchecked
Properties
TargetControlID:CheckImageURL : Used to specify url of the image to display when the Targetcontrol is checked. UncheckImageURl : Used to specify url of the image to display when the target control is unchecked. Imagewidth & image height : Used to specify width & height of the image. Example The following example demonstrates how to use the ToggleButtonExtender Add a page to the website & place a ToolkitScriptmanager & a check box on it & for the checkbox set the ID as C1. With the HTML source of the page drag & drop a Toggle Button Extender and set following properties for it. <asp:ToggleButtonExtender Id=”ToggleButtonExtender1” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”c1” checkedImageurl=”~/Images/checked.ico” uncheckedimageurl=”~/images/unchecked.ico” imagewidth=”20” image height=”20”> </asp:ToggleButtonExtender>
195:T51a,
Validator Callout Extender
This control is used with validation controls to display the error message in a callout. It has only one important property TargetcontrolID.
Example
The following example demonstrates how to use valiudatorcalloutextender. Add a page to the website and then take a Toolkit scriptmanager & a Textbox & a requiredfillvalidator & a button on the page and set following properties for the required field validator. controlTovalidate : Textbox1 ErrorMessage : This TextBox must not be Blank Display : None Within HTML source of the page Drag & drop a validatorcalloutextender & set its Target controlID to the ID of required field validator that os ‘Required field validator1’
196:T7b8,
Update Panel Animation Extender
This control is used to extend the update panel and create animations for update panel while updating the update panel is in progress or updating update panel is completed . It has the property TargetControlID to specify the ID of the updatepanle to extend & animations property is used to specify the animations to play with in animations property you can use the events ‘on updated’ & ‘on updating’ It supports the all the animations that are supported by AnimationExtender.
Example
The following example demonstrates how to use update panel Animation Extender.
Add a page to the website and place a Toolkitscriptmanager and an updatepanel & within the updatepanel take one label & calendercontrol & then write the following code with in the calendar selection changed event
Rating control is used to accept rating from user and it has the following important properties. Starcss class: Used to specify the css class to use to display the star within the rating control. Empty starcssclass: Used to specify the cssclass to use to display an empty star with the Rating control. Filledstarcssclass: Used to specify the cssclass to use to display a filledstar with in the rating control. Waiting starcssclass: Used to specify the css class to use to display the star that is waiting to be selected. MaxRating: Used to specify the maximum rating user can select. CurrentRating: Used to get or set the current rating. Example The following example demonstrates how to use the rating control. Add a page to the website and place a ToolKitScriptManager, aRating Control & a Label on the page. With in the HTML Source of the page in the headsection create css class as follows. <style type=”text/css”> .star { width:30px; height:30px; background-repeat: no-repeat; padding:0px; margin:0px; } .emptystar { background-Image:Url(Images/emptystar.png); } .filledstar { background-Image:Url(Images/filledstar.png); } </style> Within HTML source it self set following properties for the Rating control. <asp:Rating ID=”Rating1” runat=”server” starcssclas=”Star” Emptystarcssclass=”emptystar” filledstarcssclass=”filledstar” waitingstarcssclass=”emptystar” MaxRating=”5” CurrentRating=”2” AutpostBack=”True”> <asp:Rating> For the label make the text property empty and write the following code with in ‘changed’ event of rating control. Rating1-changed { Label1.text=”Rating Given Is” + Rating1.currentRating.Tostring(); } } site www.asp.net/ajax
198:T913,
Password Strength
This control is used to provide password strength with in either the text or bar indicator. PropertiesTargetControlID:StrengthIndicator Type: Used to specify what is the indicator typeto use that has two options text and bar indicator. Text strength Descriptions : Used to specify list of strings to display indicating the strength separated with semicolon. Textstrength Description style: list of CSS class separated with semicolon which are used to represent the strength. Barbordercss class:
Used to specify the css class ti use for the border when the strength indicator type is set to Bar indicator.
Example The following example demonstrates how to use the password strength control. Add a page to the website and place a Toolkit Script manager followed by two textboxes on the page and set ID of the Textboxes. With in HTML source of the page in the head section create css style as follows <style type=”text/css”> .poor{background-color:Red; color:white; font-family:Arial Black; font-size:large; } .weak {background-color:Maroon; color:white; font-family:Arial Black; font-size:large; } .good { background-color:blue; color:white; font-family:Arial Black; font-size:large; } .strong { background-color:green; color:white; font-family:Arial Black; font-size:large; } .border { border-style:solid; border-width:medium; border-color:Blue; width:180px; padding:2px; } </style> Within HTML source it self take two password strength controls and set following properties for it. <asp:passwordstrength ID=”passwordstrength1” runat=”server” TargetControlID=”T1” TextstrengthDescriptions=”poor;weak;good;strong” Textstrenght DescriptionsStyles=”poor;weak;good;strong” StrengthIndicatorType=”Text”> <asp:passwordstrength> <asp:passwordstrengthId=”passwordstrength2” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”T2” BarBorderCssclass=”border” TextstrengthDescriptionStyles=”poor;weak;good;strong” StrengthIndicatorType=”BarIndicator”> </asp:Passwordstrength>
199:T75e,
Tab Container
Tabcontainer is used to create a tabbed Interface on the page.It has the tabpanel to specify the Tabpanels to create with in the Tabconstainer& every tab panel has ‘headerTemplate& ‘Contenttemplate’Where Header Template is used to provide heading for the Tabpanel and content Template is used to the content to display on the Tabpanel.Other properties Tab container has are as follows.
Tab Strip Placement
Used to specify where to display the Tabstrips with in the Tab container, Scroll bars Used to specify which scroll bars you want to display for the Tabcontainer .It has the following options. None Horizontal Vertical Both Auto
Active Tab Index
Used to get or set the Indes of the tab which is currently active in tab container. It has the event ‘Active Tabchanged’ as the default event that will be raised whenever user select a new tabpanel with in the tabeconatiner
Example
the following example creates a tabcontainer with two tabpanels within it. Add a page to the website ,take a toolkit script manager on the page and within HTML source of the page create tab panels within the tab container. <asp: Tabpanel ID=”Tp1” runat=”server”> <headerTemplate> Tab1 </headerTempalte> <content Template> <asp:calender ID=”c1” runat=”server”/> </contentTemplate> </asp:TabPanel> <asp:TabPanel ID=”Tp2” runat=”server”/> <HeaderTemplate> Tab2 </HeaderTemplate> <contentTemplate> <asp:Image ID=”Image1” runat=”server” width=”300” height=”300” ImageUrl=”~/Images/penguins.jpg”)> </contentTemplate> </asp:Tabpanel>
19a:T82b,
Animation Extender
Animation Extender is used to create animations for the controls on that page. It has the property target control ID to specify the id of the control to which you want to apply the animation using this animation Extender. IT has the property animation to specify the list of animations you want to apply for the target control. Example The following example demonstrates how to use Animation Extender to create Animations. Add a page to the website and take a Toolkit script manger & a panel on the page and within the panel provide any content you want. Within HTML source of the page drag & drop an animation Extender & create the required animations for the panel by setting the panel as target control as follows. <asp:Animation Extender ID=”Animation Extender1” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”panel1”> <Animations> <onLoad> <Fadeout Duration = “0.5” minimum opacity =”0.3”/> </onLoad> <onmouseover> <> <parallel> <Fadein Duration = “0.5”> <color property key=”background”> start value=”#FFFFFF” Endvalue=”#FFFF00” duration =”0.5” /> </parallel> <onmouseover> <parallel> <Fadeout Duration = “0.5” minimum opacity=”0.3” /> <color property key=”background” startvalue=”#FFFF00” Endvalue=”#FFFFFF” Duration = “0.5” /> </parallel> </onmouseout> </animations> </asp:Animation Extender> When you run the page then immediately after the panel is loaded it will be fade out and whenever mousepointer placed over the panel then the panel become fade in and also the background of the panel will be changed from white to yellow and whenever you move the mouse pointer out of the panel then the panel with the fade out and at the same time the background of the panel will be changed from yellow to white.
3)
19b:T831,
Auto Complete Extender
Auto complete Extender is generally used with a text box control to provide a list of values from a database or any other data source to provide a list of values just below the list box so that user can select a value from the list. It has the following important properties. target control ID Service Method : Used to specify the method name that returns the list of values to display for that target control Minimum prefix Length : Used to specify minimum number of characters to type within the target control to execute the service method and get list of values to display.Example The following example demonstrates how to use auto complete extender control. Add a page to the website and place a Toolkit script manger and a Label and text box and for the label set the caption employee name and for the Textbox set the ID T1. Within HTML source of the page take one auto complete extender and set following properties for it. <asp : Auto completeExtender ID = “AutoCompleteExtendr1” runat=”server” TargetControlID=”T1” MinumumprefixLength=”1” service Method=”GetNames” Useconnect key=”True”> </asp:AutoCompleteExtender> Within the design of that page click on the smart tag of text box control and choose “AutoCompleteMethod” to create the method “creatNames()” that is specified as service method for the autocomplete Extender and within that method write the following code. Under GetName() Sql connection Cn= new sqlconnection (“select Ename form Emp where Ename like” + prefixText+”%”,cn); cn.open(); sqlDataReader Dr=cmd.ExecuteReader(); List<string> Names = new List <string > () ; while(Dr.Read()) { Names.Add(Dr[“Ename”].Tostring()); } Dr.close(); cn.close(); return Names.ToArray(); }
19c:T80f,
Balloon Popup Extender Balloon popup Extender is used to provide a popup for the control when ever mouse pointer is over it and whenever the control got the focus. Balloonpopup Extender has the following important properties. TargetControlID: Used to specify ID of the control to extend using the BallonpopupExtender. BallonpopupControlID : Used to specify ID of that control to popup, which is generally in panel. BalloonStyle : Used to specify the style of Balloon you want to popup the Balloon popup control Position : Used to specify the position where you want to display the popup for the target control. Balloon Size : Used to specify the size of the Balloon you want. Display of Focus : Indicates whether or not popup is displayed when the focus is within the target contro. Display on Mouse over : Indicates whether or not the popup is displayed whenever mouse pointer is over the target control. Example The following example demonstrates how to use the Balloon popup extender. Add a page to the web site and take a Toolkit script manger on it. Take a text box & panel on the page, set ID of Text box T1 & within the panel provide some text that you want to provide as the popup for the textbox : Within HTML source of the page Drag & drop a Ballon popup extender and set following properties to it. <asp: Balloon Popup Extender ID=”Balloon Popup Extender1” runat=”server” TargetControlID = “T1” BalloonpopupcontrolID=”panel1” position=”TopRight” Balloon Style=”cloud” Display on focus =”false” BalloonSize = “small” DisplayonMouseover=”True”> </asp:Balloon popup Extender> At runtime when you place the Mousepointer over the Textbox T1 Textbox T1 then the panel will pop up in cloud style at the top right of the Textbox T1.
19d:Tc60,
Accordion
Accordion control is used to provide a number of panes on the page allow the user to expand a panel by clicking on its header when user select a pane then all other panes available in the accordion control will be automatically collapsed. PropertiesFadeTransitions : Used to specify whether or not the FadeTransition effect will apply to the pane whenever it is expanded or collapsed. Framespersecond : Used to specify no of frame to change within a second while applying Fade Transitions. Transition Duration : Used to specify the time in Millie-seconds for the total transition to complete Headercssclass : Used to specify the css class you want to use to display the header for accordion panes available within Accordion control when it is not selected. Headerselectedcssclass : Used to specify the css class to use to display the header of Accordion panes when they are selected. Required opened pane : Indicates whether or not atleast one pane is opened within the accordion control. Use the property panes to create panes within the accordion control & for every pane you have to specify header& content where header is used to specify heading for that & content is used to specify the context to display within that pane. Example The following example demonstrates how to use the accordion. Add a page to the website and then take a Toolkit scriptmanager on the page and within the HTML source of the page within the headsection create two css class with the names ‘header’ & ‘Selectedheader’ as follows <style type=”text/css”> .header { background-color:Black; font-family : Arial Black; font-size : large; color:white; } .selected header { background-color:Blue : font-family:Arial Black: font-size :large; color : white ; } Within HTML source of the page itself drag& drop an accordion control and design it as follows with two Accordion panes. <asp: Accordion ID=”Accordion1” runat=”server” FadeTransitions=”true” Headercssclass=”header” Framepersecond=”30” TransitionDuration=”2000” Headerselectedcssclass=”selectedheader” requireiopenedpane=”true”> <panes> <asp:Accordionpane Id=”AP1” runat=”server”> <Header> This is Accordion Panel </Header> <context> This is according panel context <br/> This is Accordion panel context <br/> ------------------ ------ </context> </asp:Accordionpane> <asp:Accordiopane Id=”AP2” runat=”server”> <Header> This is Accordion pane 2 </Header> <context> This is Accordion pane 2 context <br/> This is Accordion pane 2 context <br/> ---- ------------------- </context> </asp:Accordionpane> </panes> </asp:Accordion>
19e:T1143,
Cascading Drop Down
This control is used with dropdown list control and it is used to automatically get values to display in a dropdown list by executing a method Asynchronously.
Properties
TargetcontrolID :ParentcontrolID : Used to specify the ID of the parent dropdownlist from which it has to take the value to get the list of values for targetcontrol of the current cascading dropdown. Category : Used to specify a category name for the cascading drop down Loading Text : Used to specify the text to display in the target control while loading item into it. Prompt Text : Used to specify the text to display in for the Target control after loading items to it. ServideMethod : Used to specify the method name that is called to get the list of items to display within the target cotrol.
Example
The following example demonstrates how to use the cascading dropdown with dropdownlist controls. Add a page to the website and take a ToolkitscriptManager on it along with two Dropdownlist controls and set their ID’s as DDL1 & DDL2. Within HTML source of the page Drop & Drop two cascading drop down controls & set following for them. <asp : cascading Dropdown ID=”cascading Drop Down1” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID = “DDL1” category=”countries” LoadingText=”[Loading countries]” promptText = “select your country” Servidemethod=”Getcountries” usecontentkey = “True”> </asp: cascadingDropDown> <asp : Cascading Dropdown ID=”cascading Dropdown2” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”DDL2” parentcontrolID=”DDL1” category=”states” LoadingText = “[loading states]” propmptText = “select your state” usecontextkey=”True”> </asp:cascadingDropDown> Within the design of the page click on the smart tag of 1st dropdown list & choose “Add cascading Drop down page method” to create a Method in the code getcounties which is set as the serviceMethods for the 1 st cascading Dropdown & write the following code with in it.{ sqlconnection cn= new sqlconnection (“server=Nikhil; database=mydb;uid=sa;pwd=123”); Sqldatadpater Da=new Sql DataAdapter(“Select country from countires”, cn); Dataset Ds= new Dataset(); Da.fill(Ds,”countries”); CascadingDropDownNameValue[]Items=new cascading DropDownNamevalue[d.Tables[“countries”].Rows.count]; int i=0; foreach(DataRow Dr in Ds.Tables[“Countries”].Rows) { Items[i++]=new cascadingDropDownNameValue(Dr[0].Tostring(),Dr[0].Tostring()); } returns Items; } With in the design of the page click on the smart tag of second DropDownList & choose”Add cascading DropDownPageMethod” to create a method in the code with the name “GetStates” which is the serviceMethos set to 2 nd dropdownlist and write the following code with in that mehod. { string country=knowncategoryvalues; country=country.substring(country.Indexof(“:”)+1); country=country.substring(0,country.Length-1); Sqlconnection cn=new sqlconnection(“Server=Nikhil; database=mydb;uid=sa;pwd=123); SqldataAdapter Da=new sqlDataAdapter( “Select state from states from states where country=”’+country+’”,cn); Dataset Ds = new Dataset(); Da.fill(Ds.”States”); CascadingDropDownNameValue[]Items=new CascadingDropDownNameValue[DS.Table[“states”].Rows.count]; int i=0; foreach(DataRow Dr in Ds.Tables[“states”].Rows) { Item[i++]=new cascading DropDownNameValue( Dr[0].Tostring()); } returns Items; } At runtime immediately after the page is loaded list of countries will be add to 1 st Dropdownlist& when you select a country in DropDownlist then a list of states related to the country are added to the second dropdown list & all this done asynchronously. For this example you required the following two tables in database. create table countries(country varchar(30)) create table states (country varchar(30),state varchar(30)) For more info on Ajax Always Visible Control Extender
19f:T187e,
ETL Tool E – Extract setting the data T-transformdoing Intermediate operation L-LoadLoad to destination Tools Data stage, Informatica, AB-Initio, SSIS, OWB et Analytical tool To create multi – Dimensional object and object and provides supports for multi –Dimensional analysis ToolsCOGNOS, BO, Hyperion, SSAS, Micro strategy, OBIEE etc. Reporting tools To display the data in the understand and required format, we go for this, Tools COGNOS, BO, SSRS, Hyperion, Micro strategy B Crstal on OBIEE etc.
Inclined to build a profession as Teradata Developer? Then here is the blog post on
Online Teradata Training.
It is composed on observable and recordable facts, that are off be found in transaction(or)operation system InformationIt is an integrated collection of facts and is used as the[organized – data is called information] bases for decision making Need of dataware housing To have single version of data, in single storage To complete with other organization market To analysis tactical strategic queries etc. Definition of ODS, DWH, BI, OLTP, OLAP QLTPOn line transaction processing Here day to day operations data available (immediate operation data) Here all the DML operation can be performed. ODS(Operational data store) It is data stag structure that acts like repository for near real time operational data rather than long trand data. This ODS may for them become to enterprise operational database(or) stage area to data were house DWH(Data were house) It is data base structure, where huge data store, so that we can take appropriate decision OLAP(Online Analytical processing) It is an application that collects managing and present multi– dimensional data analysis and management purpose. BI(Business Intelligence) BI retrieve the data from data warehouse to make business decision and management(it can takes the help OLAP) Data warehouse Definition There are many authors founder define different approaches INMON SEAM KELLY etc. INMON Some people calling INMON father of data ware house A Data ware house is subject oriented Integrated. Time variant Non-volatile, Data Granularity Collection or data, in this support of Decision making SEAM KELLY A Data warehouse is subject oriented, integrated, Non- volatile, time variant, separate collection of data Subject Oriented The data in data ware house should belong to a specific subject Area, Domain (or) Business Example Entire banking, Information in single place Entire medias information in single place Integrated By loading the data we need follows standardized mechanism, we have single management data Example Naming conversion, coding measurement, data attribute etc. Non – volatile Data in the data were house data, should not updata and delete. Time variant The data should be store based on time frame so that, we cab current month sales, what is Previous month sales, what could be sales of future month
Check out the top Teradata Interview Questions now!
SeparateWhere have should be separate traditional system Accessible Where have should be high available etc.
Data Warehousing life cycle
It is combination of 3 life cycles creating a data base and modeling database. ETL requirement gathering ETL Analysis ETL Design ETL Coding ETL Testing ETL deployment and maintenance Analytical life cycle Requirement gathering analysis Designing the objects Create multi-dimensional object Testing multi- dimensional object Deployment implement Reporting life cycle Reporting Testing Reporting Design Reporting Coding Reporting Publishers And maintenance.
If the dimension contains more number of columns(>100) or more number of rows(>2million), then it is called as large or monster dimension.
Mini Dimension
If the dimension contains less number of columns(<5) and less number of rows(<1000) then it is called as mini dimension
Slowing Changing Dimension(SCD)
The dimension which changes w.r.t number of rows or number of columns over a period of time, is called as slowly changing dimension
SCD are of 3 Types
Type1 - It maintains latest data only
Type2 - It maintains complete data about all transactions
Type3 - It maintains current values along with immediate previous values
Example
PNo
PName
Cost
101
Dove
15
102
Olay
20
Type II
PNo
PName
PCost
101
Dove
10
102
Olay
20
101
Dove
15
Type III
PNo
PName
Prev Cost
Present Cost
101
Dove
10
15
102
Olay
-
20
Static Dimension
If the dimension is loaded with data only once in a project life cycle time and will never change then it is called as static dimension
Example
Country - India,Pakistan,Srilanka
Currencies - USD,INR,AUD
Aggregate Dimension
The dimension which is loaded at base level and is possible to calculate aggregate functions like sum(),avg(),min() etc is called as aggregate dimension
Multi valued Dimension
If the dimension attributes contains many to many relationship within the data then the dimension is called as multi valued dimension
Types of Fact Tables
Snapshot Fact Table
Cumulative Fact Table
Factless Fact Table
Snapshot Fact Table
It contains information at a specific point of time
Ex: Sales @ 01-01-2014
Cumulative Fact Table
It contains information about a period
Ex: Sale From 01-01-2014 to 31-01-2014
Factless Fact Table
The fact table which doesn't contain any fact information is called as fact-less fact table
Ex: To track the attendance of a student, To check the product availability in a store, To check the flight availability in the airport
1a1:T550a,
What is WCF?
Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) is an SDK for developing and deploying services on Windows. WCF provides a runtime environment for services, enabling you to expose CLR types as services, and to consume other services as CLR types.
WCF is part of .NET 3.0 and requires .NET 2.0, so it can only run on systems that support it.
What is service and client in perspective of data communication?
A service is a unit of functionality exposed to the world.
The client of a service is merely the party consuming the service.
What is address in WCF and how many types of transport schemas are there in WCF?
Address is a way of letting client know that where a service is located. In WCF, every service is associated with a unique address. This contains the location of the service and transport schemas.
WCF supports following transport schemas
HTTP TCP Peer network IPC (Inter-Process Communication over named pipes) MSMQ
The sample address for above transport schema may look like
In WCF, all services expose contracts. The contract is a platform-neutral and standard way of describing what the service does.
WCF defines four types of contracts.
Service contracts
Describe which operations the client can perform on the service. There are two types of Service Contracts. ServiceContract - This attribute is used to define the Interface. OperationContract - This attribute is used to define the method inside Interface.
Define which data types are passed to and from the service. WCF defines implicit contracts for built-in types such as int and string, but we can easily define explicit opt-in data contracts for custom types.
There are two types of Data Contracts. DataContract - attribute used to define the class DataMember - attribute used to define the properties.
[DataContract]
class Contact
{
[DataMember]
public string FirstName;
[DataMember]
public string LastName;
}
If DataMember attributes are not specified for a properties in the class, that property can't be passed to-from web service.
Fault contracts
Define which errors are raised by the service, and how the service handles and propagates errors to its clients.
Message contracts
Allow the service to interact directly with messages. Message contracts can be typed or untyped, and are useful in interoperability cases and when there is an existing message format we have to comply with.
Where we can host WCF services?
Every WCF services must be hosted somewhere. There are three ways of hosting WCF services.
They are
IIS
Self Hosting
WAS (Windows Activation Service)
For more details see http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb332338.aspx
What is binding and how many types of bindings are there in WCF?
A binding defines how an endpoint communicates to the world. A binding defines the transport (such as HTTP or TCP) and the encoding being used (such as text or binary). A binding can contain binding elements that specify details like the security mechanisms used to secure messages, or the message pattern used by an endpoint.
WCF supports nine types of bindings.
Basic binding
Offered by the BasicHttpBinding class, this is designed to expose a WCF service as a legacy ASMX web service, so that old clients can work with new services. When used by the client, this binding enables new WCF clients to work with old ASMX services.
TCP binding
Offered by the NetTcpBinding class, this uses TCP for cross-machine communication on the intranet. It supports a variety of features, including reliability, transactions, and security, and is optimized for WCF-to-WCF communication. As a result, it requires both the client and the service to use WCF.
Peer network binding
Offered by the NetPeerTcpBinding class, this uses peer networking as a transport. The peer network-enabled client and services all subscribe to the same grid and broadcast messages to it.
IPC binding
Offered by the NetNamedPipeBinding class, this uses named pipes as a transport for same-machine communication. It is the most secure binding since it cannot accept calls from outside the machine and it supports a variety of features similar to the TCP binding.
Web Service (WS) binding
Offered by the WSHttpBinding class, this uses HTTP or HTTPS for transport, and is designed to offer a variety of features such as reliability, transactions, and security over the Internet.
Federated WS binding
Offered by the WSFederationHttpBinding class, this is a specialization of the WS binding, offering support for federated security.
Duplex WS binding
Offered by the WSDualHttpBinding class, this is similar to the WS binding except it also supports bidirectional communication from the service to the client.
MSMQ binding
Offered by the NetMsmqBinding class, this uses MSMQ for transport and is designed to offer support for disconnected queued calls.
MSMQ integration binding Offered by the MsmqIntegrationBinding class, this converts WCF messages to and from MSMQ messages, and is designed to interoperate with legacy MSMQ clients.
For WCF binding comparison, see http://www.pluralsight.com/community/blogs/aaron/archive/2007/03/22/46560.aspx
What is endpoint in WCF?
Every service must have Address that defines where the service resides, Contract that defines what the service does and a Binding that defines how to communicate with the service. In WCF the relationship between Address, Contract and Binding is called Endpoint.
The Endpoint is the fusion of Address, Contract and Binding.
How to define a service as REST based service in WCF?
WCF 3.5 provides explicit support for RESTful communication using a new binding named WebHttpBinding. The below code shows how to expose a RESTful service
[ServiceContract]
interface IStock
{
[OperationContract]
[WebGet]
int GetStock(string StockId);
}
By adding the WebGet Attribute, we can define a service as REST based service that can be accessible using HTTP GET operation.
What is the address formats of the WCF transport schemas?
Address format of WCF transport schema always follow
[transport]://[machine or domain][:optional port] format.
for example:
HTTP Address Format
http://localhost:8888 the way to read the above url is
"Using HTTP, go to the machine called localhost, where on port 8888 someone is waiting" When the port number is not specified, the default port is 80.
TCP Address Format
net.tcp://localhost:8888/MyService
When a port number is not specified, the default port is 808:
net.tcp://localhost/MyService
NOTE: Two HTTP and TCP addresses from the same host can share a port, even on the same machine.
IPC Address Format
net.pipe://localhost/MyPipe
We can only open a named pipe once per machine, and therefore it is not possible for two named pipe addresses to share a pipe name on the same machine.
What is Proxy and how to generate proxy for WCF Services?
The proxy is a CLR class that exposes a single CLR interface representing the service contract. The proxy provides the same operations as service's contract, but also has additional methods for managing the proxy life cycle and the connection to the service. The proxy completely encapsulates every aspect of the service: its location, its implementation technology and runtime platform, and the communication transport.
The proxy can be generated using Visual Studio by right clicking Reference and clicking on Add Service Reference. This brings up the Add Service Reference dialog box, where you need to supply the base address of the service (or a base address and a MEX URI) and the namespace to contain the proxy.
Proxy can also be generated by using SvcUtil.exe command-line utility. We need to provide SvcUtil with the HTTP-GET address or the metadata exchange endpoint address and, optionally, with a proxy filename. The default proxy filename is output.cs but you can also use the /out switch to indicate a different name.
Transport reliability (such as the one offered by TCP) offers point-to-point guaranteed delivery at the network packet level, as well as guarantees the order of the packets. Transport reliability is not resilient to dropping network connections and a variety of other communication problems.
Message reliability deals with reliability at the message level independent of how many packets are required to deliver the message. Message reliability provides for end-to-end guaranteed delivery and order of messages, regardless of how many intermediaries are involved, and how many network hops are required to deliver the message from the client to the service.
How to configure Reliability while communicating with WCF Services?
Reliability can be configured in the client config file by adding reliableSession under binding tag.
If no timeout has been specified, the default is considered as 1 minute.
How to deal with operation overloading while exposing the WCF services?
By default overload operations (methods) are not supported in WSDL based operation. However by using Name property of OperationContract attribute, we can deal with operation overloading scenario.
Notice that both method name in the above interface is same (Add), however the Name property of the OperationContract is different. In this case client proxy will have two methods with different name AddInt and AddDouble.
What was the code name for WCF?
The code name of WCF was Indigo .
WCF is a unification of .NET framework communication technologies which unites the following technologies:-
NET remoting MSMQ Web services COM+
What are the main components of WCF?
The main components of WCF are
Service class
Hosting environment
End point
What are various ways of hosting WCF Services?
There are three major ways of hosting a WCF services
• Self-hosting the service in his own application domain. This we have already covered in the first section. The service comes in to existence when you create the object of Service Host class and the service closes when you call the Close of the Service Host class.
• Host in application domain or process provided by IIS Server.
• Host in Application domain and process provided by WAS (Windows Activation Service) Server.
What is the difference WCF and Web services?
Web services can only be invoked by HTTP (traditional webservice with .asmx). While WCF Service or a WCF component can be invoked by any protocol (like http, tcp etc.) and any transport type.
Second web services are not flexible. However, WCF Services are flexible. If you make a new version of the service then you need to just expose a new end. Therefore, services are agile and which is a very practical approach looking at the current business trends.
We develop WCF as contracts, interface, operations, and data contracts. As the developer we are more focused on the business logic services and need not worry about channel stack. WCF is a unified programming API for any kind of services so we create the service and use configuration information to set up the communication mechanism like HTTP/TCP/MSMQ etc
Address --- Specifies the location of the service which will be like http://Myserver/MyService.Clients will use this location to communicate with our service.
Binding --- Specifies how the two paries will communicate in term of transport and encoding and protocols
Contract --- Specifies the interface between client and the server.It's a simple interface with some attribute.
1a2:T3126,
What are the differences between Personal, Shared and Secured connections?
A special connection is created by one user and cannot be used by other users. The connection details are stored in PDAC.LSI folder.
A shared connection can be used by more users through a shared server. The connection details are stored in SDAC.LSI folder in the Business Objects installation folder. However one cannot set rights and securities on objects in a shared connection. Neither can a Universe to exported to repository using a shared connection.
A secured connection overcomes these limitations. Through it rights can be determined on objects and documents. Natures can be exported to the key repository only through a ensure connection. The connection parameters in this case are saved in the CMS.
What are custom hierarchies? How can they be created?
Custom Hierarchies are defined in a universe in order to facilitate custom drill down between items from same or different classes according to user requirement. They can be created from Tools --> Hierarchies in the BO Designer.
What is a text in-universe? How are they created?
In an universe, a context defines a particular join path between tables or a distinct group of joins for a precise query. Any objects created on a table column which belong to specific contexts is naturally compatible with all other objects from same contexts. When objects from two or more contexts are used, separate SQL is generated and results are then merged in a clone cube. This makes sure that no improper result is generated due to loop or anyone join path issue.
Contexts may be created using detect contexts feature or manually. They are generally created based on logical calculation and business requirements, hence the identify context method is not very effective. To manually create a context Go to Insert Context, give the context name and select the joins that should be present in the context. For a universe contexts should be created in a way that all joins(except shortcut joins) fall in at least one context
What is a chasm device? How can it be solved?
In a dimensional schema based universe, we may have one dimension table joined with two fact tables such that both of them are one-to-many joins(F >- D -<F ). In such a scenario, if we drag a measure each from both the fact tables along with dimensions from dimension table, the value of the measures in the fact tables are inflated. This condition is known as chasm trap.
A chasm trap can be solved using 2 approachs:
- Modern universe SQL parameters, the option, generate multiple inquiries for each measure demands to be selected. This will generate separate SQL statement as each measure and give the proper results. However, this method would not work, if a dimension (for example date) occurs multiple times in the result set due to chasm trap.
- A better path is to put the two joins in two different contexts. This will generate two integrated queries, thus solving the problem.
What is a fan trap? How can it be solved?
In a universe structure, we may have 3 tables joined in such a way that, the 1st table has a one to many join with the 2nd table, which in turn has a one to many join with the 3rd table(A -< B -< C). In such a scenario, if a measure is present in the 2nd table and it is dragged along with any dimension from the 3rd table, the value of the measure will be inflated. Such a condition is known as a fan trap.
A fan trap is solved by creating an alias of the 2nd table and defining contexts such that, the normal table is joined only with the first table, while the alias is joined with both the 1st and the 3rd table. We would take 2nd table’s measure only from the normal table and other dimensions of the 2nd table from the alias table
Should we encounter fan traps in a data warehouse scenario? If so, then how?
If a data warehouse is based on the Kimball model, it is a dimensional schema. In a universe built on that DW, for a fan trap to occur in such a schema, we require direct join between two fact tables, which is against the principles of dimensional modeling.
On the other hand in a data warehouse based on Inmon model, it is a normalized schema. Though in such a case, universes are generally designed on Data Marts, which are dimensional schemas (where fan traps should not occur). However, if a universe is built on the DW (for the purpose of operational reporting), then a fan trap can occur in that universe
What is aggregate awareness? What is its advantage?
Aggregate awareness function is used in scenarios where we have same reality tables in various grains. Using this function we can define only one item for the measures in the fact tables as
We also need to define dimensions for associated granularities and define their incompatibilities with the corresponding facts through the aggregate navigation. This is accesses through Tools -> Aggregate Navigation
The advantage is that in a Webi or Deski report when one drags the measure object with the dimension object of a particular granularity, the measure column from the Fact table of the corresponding granularity is selected in the BO default Query. If we did not use aggregate awareness, we would need to define separate objects for each of the fact tables which would be difficult to understand from a user’s point of view.
What are the 2 different approaches of implementing aggregate awareness? Which one is better in terms of performance?
The 2 approaches are as follows:
Aggregate tables are built in the database, which contains the dimension fields(not foreign keys) along with the aggregated measures. In the universe they are present as standalone tables, i.e they are not joined with any dimensions. Aggregate aware function is used to define both the dimensions and measures of such tables.
No aggregate tables are built in the database level. They contain the normal fact table at different granularities. In the universe, aggregate aware is used only to define the measures and aggregate incompatibility is set accordingly.
The first approach is better in terms of performance, since for the higher levels of aggregation, all the information is obtained for a single table. However, a large scale implementation of this approach in a dimensional schema is difficult. In most BI projects, the second approach is preferred
What is a derived table? What is its utility?
A derived table is a table created in the universe using an SQL Query from database level. The columns selected in the query become the columns of the derived table. A derived table can be used for complex calculations, which are difficult to achieve in report level. Such calculations are done in query level itself.
Another use of derived table can be to access tables from a different schema through a dblink.
How is a derived table different from a view? Which one is a preferred solution?
A derived table is present only in the universe level, while a view is created in data base level. Generally views are preferred since, in its case the onus of calculation remains on the database and it does not load the BO server. However, in cases where developers do not have access to database, derived table is the only solution.
What is Index Awareness? How is it implemented?
Index awareness is a property of the universe, by means of which values in the filter conditions of the queries/data providers built from the universe, are substituted by their corresponding indexes or surrogate keys. Generally the values in the filter condition come from a dimension table (like country etc) and we require a join with the fact table to get this value.
However, if index awareness is implemented, this join is eliminated and the query filter takes the equivalent index value from the fact table itself.
To implement index awareness, one needs to identify the dimension fields which are to be used in query filter. In the Edit Properties of the object, we get a Keys tab. In this tab, the source primary key of the table from which the object is derived needs to be defined as primary key, and the database columns for all foreign key relationships with the other tables also need to be defined here. Once this is done for all required dimensions, the universe will become index aware
How can we use index awareness in universe prompt?
An extended prompt syntax is available since BO 3.1. It is as follows
If the indexes for the dimension object is defined in the universe and we define the prompt condition on the object with the clause ‘primary key’ in place of free or constrained, then the filter condition will convert the prompt values entered to their corresponding indexes and eliminate the join with the dimension table
1a3:T5942,
WebMethods Interview Questions
How to find dependents of a selected element on the server?
Right click on the element for which you have to find the dependents in the navigational panel and click on the option find dependents.
What is EAI?
EAI or Enterprise Applications Integration can be defined as data that can be integrated from disparate applications regardless of the platform, allowing the sharing of business processes amongst multiple.
What is the primary function of the built-in pub.flow:savePipeline service?
Save the current pipeline to a named memory location on the Integration Server.
What Is webMethods Developer?
WebMethods Developer is a graphical development tool that you use to build, edit, and test integration logic. It provides an integrated development environment in which to develop the logic and supporting objects that carry out the work of an integration solution. It also provides tools for testing and debugging the solutions you create.
How to invoke a service from a browser?
http://servername:port/invoke/folder.subFolder.subsubFolder/serviceName (the package name is not part of the URL in any way).
What happens when the pub.flow:tracePipeline service is invoked?
The Integration Server logs the name-value pairs in the pipeline at that time.
How to remove a system lock from an element?
System locks can be removed by making the server side files of the element as readable.right Click on the element in developer which is system locked.and choose the lock properties. It will display the server side files for the element. Make the files as readable and click the refresh button in the developer.You will find that the element is no more locked.
What is the primary purpose of a Web Service Connector?
The purpose of Web Service Connector is to invoke a Web Service on a different web server Start up service will execute whenever the package is loaded or re-loaded
How to Restore a Session on a Server?
Developer gets disconnected from the server if the server goes down or if there is a problem in the network. Do not close the developer. If you close the developer you wont be able to save the changes.Once the server come up or the network problem is resolved. you will be automatically connected to the server and then you can restore your session.
How do I change the JVM used by Integration Server?
To change to the JDK used by webMethods you will need to edit the IntegrationServer\bin\server.bat or IntegrationServer/bin/server.sh file used to start up Integration Server. Edit the file and change the following line to point to the JDK path
SET JAVA_DIR=C:\opt\j2sdk1.4.2
What are Structural transformations in WebMethods?
Splitting one field into several or merging fields, reordering portions of a message or renaming fields are known as structural transformations.
What Is a Startup Service?
A startup service is one that Integration Server automatically executes when it loads a package into memory.
What are the main companies which provide EAI tools / software?
The below companies are provide EAI tools:
TIBCO
WebMethods
Vitria
iPlanet
MQSeries (IBM)
iPlanet
BizTalk (Microsoft)
WebLogic (BEA)
What Is a Flow Service?
A flow service is a service that is written in the webMethods flow language. This simple yet powerful language lets you encapsulate a sequence of services within a single service and manage the flow of data among them.
What is the default behavior, if a Flow EXIT does not specify a “from”?
$loop will be assumed, and a com.wm.lang.flow.FlowException will be thrown if the EXIT is not in a LOOP.
How to preserve existing pipeline before a restorePipeline step?
Set the “$merge” variable in restorePipeline or “merge” in restorePipelineFromFile to be true. This will ensure that everything in the pipeline before a restorePipeline step is preserved.
By default, the webMethods Integration Server has an HTTP listener assigned to which port?
5555
How to open a session on a different server?
Select “session” from the menu in toolbar and click open. key in the server IP and port on which you have to open the connection.The user name and password on that server.
How do I debug the Developer IDE itself ?
Start the developer up in debug mode, similar to the Integration server-
cd pathToWMInstall/Developer/bin developer.bat -debug 10
How do I sort using the JDBC select adapter service?
Although there is no tab to specify “order by” the same functionality is able to be specified in the “SELECT” tab. One of the columns in the is labelled “Sort Order” which will allow you to specify the column(s) you wish to sort by. To alter the order: simply alter the order of the columns selected.
What is the Branch operation?
Branch operation conditionally executes an operation based on the value of a variable at run time.
How do I throw an exception when using a try-catch block?
Set a flag in your catch block or leave a variable holding the error message in the pipeline. Outside the catch block put a branch on that variable or flag and if it is non-null then exit with failure or call the service that generates the exception.
If the webMethods Integration Server is started with from the server root directory with this command, “bin\server.bat -debug 9 -log none”, what does this tell the server to do?
Start in level 9 debug mode and write all server log information to the screen.
How do I see the java code for my flow service?
Flow is not turned into java code. It resides on disk as XML representing the flow operations which is then parsed and turned into an in-memory java tree of the operations. Although the underlying code that implements the flow operations is java, it is stored on disk as XML.
WebMethods Interview Questions For Experienced
When creating Flow services, what is the purpose of a SEQUENCE operation?
The purpose of Sequence operation is to group a subset of Flow operations so that they are treated as a unit.
What Is the Pipeline?
The pipeline is the general term used to refer to the data structure in which input and output values are maintained for a flow service. It allows services in the flow to share data.The pipeline starts with the input to the flow service and collects inputs and outputs from subsequent services in the flow. When a service in the flow executes, it has access to all data in the pipeline at that point.
What is WebMethods?
A company that provides integration tools. The key products include Integration Server, Enterprise Server, Business Integrator, Workflow and Mainframe Integration Server. WebMethods is a company, not a product.
For a REPEAT operation to execute as long as the specified repeat condition remains true, the count parameter needs to be set to:?
The count parameter needs to be set to “-1 ” .
What are the Advantages of EAI?
Advantages of EAI solutions are:
Streamlines business processes and helps raise organizational efficiency.
Real time information access among systems.
Maintains information integrity across multiple systems.
Speedier transactions at reduced costs.
If one of the applications misbehaves and requires to be shut down for maintenance, then with EAI, we can easily “decouple” it from rest of the systems. Which avoids having to bring down other systems.
When creating a BRANCH flow element, what is the purpose of the “scope” field on the properties tab?
To restrict pipeline access to only the data in this document.
What are the modules of webMethods Product Suite?
WebMethods Product Suite Modules:
Integration and B2B
Service Oriented Architecture
Business Process Management
Business Activity Monitoring
What are the tools of webMethods Integration?
WebMethod Tools:
webMethods Adapters
webMethods Developer
webMethods Integration Server
webMethods Integration Platform
webMethods Broker
webMethods Monitor
webMethods Optimize for Infrastructure
webMethods Trading Networks
webMethods EDI Module
webMethods EDIINT
webMethods eStandards Modules
webMethods PIM
How to Change the Order of Steps in a Flow Service?
We can change the Order of steps in a Flow Service of Various other services which are called in sequence within Flow service using “Shift Up and Shift Down” buttons exists at top of Editor Panel.
As well we can move any service or Map inside a SEQUENCE or BRANCH using “Shift Left and Shift Right” buttons
How should I organize connection pools?
If you have adapter notifications and adapter services then you will need to have two separate connections. Otherwise you may get strange errors about transactions and the like. You should also avoid having connection pools shared across different functional areas, even if they are pointing to the same database. The reason for this is that tuning the size of the pool becomes quite difficult if you have multiple types of usage of a pool. You are also unable to easily change the database settings for one without impacting on the other. One approach that seems to work quite well is to have separate pools for each package (generally.. not a hard and fast rule though), as your packages should generally be divided up according to functional area too.
What are the disadvantages of EAI?
The main disadvantages of using EAI systems:
Constant change: The very nature of EAI is dynamic and requires dynamic project managers to manage their implementation.
Lack of EAI experts : EAI requires knowledge of many issues and technical aspects.
EAI is a tool paradigm: EAI is not a tool, but rather a system and should be implemented as such.
Building interfaces is an art : Engineering the solution is not sufficient. Solutions need to be negotiated with user departments to reach a common consensus on the final outcome. A lack of consensus on interface designs leads to excessive effort to map between various systems data requirements.
Loss of detail : Information that seemed unimportant at an earlier stage may become crucial later.
Accountability : Since so many departments have many conflicting requirements, there should be clear accountability for the system’s final structure.
How ACLs Affect locking?
ACLS are used to give the authorization to the particular user groups. If u give ACL to administrator then the admin group users who are there in that group they can have the access to that particular service. Otherwise we can not use it. This is called ACL locking.
How to use SEQUENCE as the Target of a BRANCH?
Set evaluate label property of branch step to true. Then set the label property of sequence with the value on which it needs to be processed.
How to Find Elements in the Navigation Panel?
Just right click on the element which you want to see then u click Locate in navigation option then u can see that element in the navigation panel.
What Is an Element?
An element is an item that exists in the Navigation panel in webMethods Developer. Elements include folders, services, specifications, IS document types, triggers, and ISschemas. In the Navigation panel, servers and packages are not considered to be elements.
How can the webMethods Integration Server logging date format be changed?
By editing the watt.server.dateStampFmt parameter in the server.cnf file.
How to get the current index of the List in a loop?
There is a special variable on the pipeline called $iteration which will be incremented as the loop operator works up through the list.
When coding IS Services, how can a variable of type Document Type be represented in Java?
Variable of type Document Type be represented as "IData".
1a4:T150b9,
HR Interview Questions
Start with the present and tell why you are well qualified for the position. Remember that the key to all successful interviewing is to match your qualifications to what the interviewer is looking for. In other words you must sell what the buyer is buying. This is the single most important strategy in job hunting.
So, before you answer this or any question it's imperative that you try to uncover your interviewer's greatest need, want, problem or goal.
To do so, make you take these two steps:
Do all the homework you can before the hr interview to uncover this person's wants and needs (not the generalized needs of the industry or company)
As early as you can in the interview, ask for a more complete description of what the position entails. You might say: “I have a number of accomplishments I'd like to tell you about, but I want to make the best use of our time together and talk directly to your needs. To help me do, that, could you tell me more about the most important priorities of this position? All I know is what I (heard from the recruiter, read in the classified ad, etc
Then, ALWAYS follow-up with a second and possibly, third question, to draw out his needs even more. Surprisingly, it's usually this second or third question that unearths what the interviewer is most looking for. You might ask simply, "And in addition to that?..." or, "Is there anything else you see as essential to success in this position?:
This process will not feel easy or natural at first, because it is easier simply to answer questions, but only if you uncover the employer's wants and needs will your answers make the most sense. Practice asking these key questions before giving your answers, the process will feel more natural and you will be light years ahead of the other job candidates you're competing with. After uncovering what the employer is looking for, describe why the needs of this job bear striking parallels to tasks you've succeeded at before. Be sure to illustrate with specific examples of your responsibilities and especially your achievements, all of which are geared to present yourself as a perfect match for the needs he has just described.
What are your greatest strengths?
You know that your key strategy is to first uncover your interviewer's greatest wants and needs before you answer questions. And from Question 1, you know how to do this. Prior to any interview, you should have a list mentally prepared of your greatest strengths. You should also have, a specific example or two, which illustrates each strength, an example chosen from your most recent and most impressive achievements. You should, have this list of your greatest strengths and corresponding examples from your achievements so well committed to memory that you can recite them cold after being shaken awake at 2:30AM.
Then, once you uncover your interviewer's greatest wants and needs, you can choose those achievements from your list that best match up. As a general guideline, the 10 most desirable traits that all employers love to see in their employees are:
A proven track record as an achiever...especially if your achievements match up with the employer's greatest wants and needs.
Intelligence...management "savvy".
Honesty...integrity...a decent human being.
Good fit with corporate culture...someone to feel comfortable with...a team player who meshes well with interviewer's team.
Likeability...positive attitude...sense of humor.
Good communication skills.
Dedication...willingness to walk the extra mile to achieve excellence.
Definiteness of purpose...clear goals.
Enthusiasm...high level of motivation.
Confident...healthy...a leader.
What are your greatest weaknesses?
Disguise strength as a weakness.
Example: “I sometimes push my people too hard. I like to work with a sense of urgency and everyone is not always on the same wavelength.”
Drawback: This strategy is better than admitting a flaw, but it's so widely used, it is transparent to any experienced interviewer.
BEST ANSWER: (and another reason it's so important to get a thorough description of your interviewer's needs before you answer questions): Assure the interviewer that you can think of nothing that would stand in the way of your performing in this position with excellence. Then, quickly review you strongest qualifications.
Example: “Nobody's perfect, but based on what you've told me about this position, I believe I'd make an outstanding match. I know that when I hire people, I look for two things most of all. Do they have the qualifications to do the job well, and the motivation to do it well? Everything in my background shows I have both the qualifications and a strong desire to achieve excellence in whatever I take on. So I can say in all honesty that I see nothing that would cause you even a small concern about my ability or my strong desire to perform this job with excellence.”
Alternate strategy (if you don't yet know enough about the position to talk about such a perfect fit): Instead of confessing a weakness, describe what you like most and like least, making sure that what you like most matches up with the most important qualification for success in the position, and what you like least is not essential.
Example: Let's say you're applying for a teaching position. “If given a choice, I like to spend as much time as possible in front of my prospects selling, as opposed to shuffling paperwork back at the office. Of course, I long ago learned the importance of filing paperwork properly, and I do it conscientiously. But what I really love to do is sell (if your interviewer were a sales manager, this should be music to his ears.)
Tell me about something you did – or failed to do – that you now feel a little ashamed of ?As with faults and weaknesses, never confess a regret. But don’t seem as if you’re stonewalling either.
Best strategy: Say you harbor no regrets, then add a principle or habit you practice regularly for healthy human relations.
Example: Pause for reflection, as if the question never occurred to you. Then say to hr, “You know, I really can’t think of anything.” (Pause again, then add): “I would add that as a general management principle, I’ve found that the best way to avoid regrets is to avoid causing them in the first place. I practice one habit that helps me a great deal in this regard. At the end of each day, I mentally review the day’s events and conversations to take a second look at the people and developments I’m involved with and do a double check of what they’re likely to be feeling. Sometimes I’ll see things that do need more follow-up, whether a pat on the back, or maybe a five minute chat in someone’s office to make sure we’re clear on things…whatever.”
“I also like to make each person feel like a member of an elite team, like the Boston Celtics or LA Lakers in their prime. I’ve found that if you let each team member know you expect excellence in their performance…if you work hard to set an example yourself…and if you let people know you appreciate and respect their feelings, you wind up with a highly motivated group, a team that’s having fun at work because they’re striving for excellence rather than brooding over slights or regrets.”
Why are you leaving (or did you leave) this position?
(If you have a job presently tell the hr)
If you’re not yet 100% committed to leaving your present post, don’t be afraid to say so. Since you have a job, you are in a stronger position than someone who does not. But don’t be coy either. State honestly what you’d be hoping to find in a new spot. Of course, as stated often before, you answer will all the stronger if you have already uncovered what this position is all about and you match your desires to it.
(If you do not presently have a job tell the hr.)
Never lie about having been fired. It’s unethical – and too easily checked. But do try to deflect the reason from you personally. If your firing was the result of a takeover, merger, division wide layoff, etc., so much the better. But you should also do something totally unnatural that will demonstrate consummate professionalism. Even if it hurts, describe your own firing – candidly, succinctly and without a trace of bitterness – from the company’s point-of-view, indicating that you could understand why it happened and you might have made the same decision yourself.
Your stature will rise immensely and, most important of all, you will show you are healed from the wounds inflicted by the firing. You will enhance your image as first-class management material and stand head and shoulders above the legions of firing victims who, at the slightest provocation, zip open their shirts to expose their battle scars and decry the unfairness of it all.
For all prior positions:
Make sure you’ve prepared a brief reason for leaving. Best reasons: more money, opportunity, responsibility or growth.
The "Silent Treatment"
Like a primitive tribal mask, the Silent Treatment loses all it power to frighten you once you refuse to be intimidated. If your interviewer pulls it, keep quiet yourself for a while and then ask, with sincere politeness and not a trace of sarcasm, “Is there anything else I can fill in on that point?” That’s all there is to it.
Whatever you do, don’t let the Silent Treatment intimidate you into talking a blue streak, because you could easily talk yourself out of the position.
Why should I hire you?
By now you can see how critical it is to apply the overall strategy of uncovering the employer’s needs before you answer questions. If you know the employer’s greatest needs and desires, this question will give you a big leg up over other candidates because you will give him better reasons for hiring you than anyone else is likely to…reasons tied directly to his needs. Whether your interviewer asks you this question explicitly or not, this is the most important question of your interview because he must answer this question favourably in his own mind before you will be hired. So help him out! Walk through each of the position’s requirements as you understand them, and follow each with a reason why you meet that requirement so well.
Example: “As I understand your needs, you are first and foremost looking for someone who can manage the sales and marketing of your book publishing division. As you’ve said you need someone with a strong background in trade book sales. This is where I’ve spent almost all of my career, so I’ve chalked up 18 years of experience exactly in this area. I believe that I know the right contacts, methods, principles, and successful management techniques as well as any person can in our industry.”
“You also need someone who can expand your book distribution channels. In my prior post, my innovative promotional ideas doubled, then tripled, the number of outlets selling our books. I’m confident I can do the same for you.”
“You need someone to give a new shot in the arm to your mail order sales, someone who knows how to sell in space and direct mail media. Here, too, I believe I have exactly the experience you need. In the last five years, I’ve increased our mail order book sales from $600,000 to $2,800,000, and now we’re the country’s second leading marketer of scientific and medical books by mail.” Etc., etc., etc.,
Every one of these selling “couplets” (his need matched by your qualifications) is a touchdown that runs up your score. IT is your best opportunity to outsell your competition.
Aren’t you overqualified for this position?
As with any objection, don’t view this as a sign of imminent defeat. It’s an invitation to teach the interviewer a new way to think about this situation, seeing advantages instead of drawbacks.
Example: “I recognize the job market for what it is – a marketplace. Like any marketplace, it’s subject to the laws of supply and demand. So ‘overqualified’ can be a relative term, depending on how tight the job market is. And right now, it’s very tight. I understand and accept that.”
“I also believe that there could be very positive benefits for both of us in this match.”
“Because of my unusually strong experience in ________________ , I could start to contribute right away, perhaps much faster than someone who’d have to be brought along more slowly.”
“There’s also the value of all the training and years of experience that other companies have invested tens of thousands of dollars to give me. You’d be getting all the value of that without having to pay an extra dime for it. With someone who has yet to acquire that experience, he’d have to gain it on your nickel.”
“I could also help you in many things they don’t teach at the Harvard Business School. For example…(how to hire, train, motivate, etc.) When it comes to knowing how to work well with people and getting the most out of them, there’s just no substitute for what you learn over many years of front-line experience. You company would gain all this, too.”
“From my side, there are strong benefits, as well. Right now, I am unemployed. I want to work, very much, and the position you have here is exactly what I love to do and am best at. I’ll be happy doing this work and that’s what matters most to me, a lot more that money or title.”
“Most important, I’m looking to make a long term commitment in my career now. I’ve had enough of job-hunting and want a permanent spot at this point in my career. I also know that if I perform this job with excellence, other opportunities cannot help but open up for me right here. In time, I’ll find many other ways to help this company and in so doing, help myself. I really am looking to make a long-term commitment.”
NOTE: The main concern behind the “overqualified” question is that you will leave your new employer as soon as something better comes your way. Anything you can say to demonstrate the sincerity of your commitment to the employer and reassure him that you’re looking to stay for the long-term will help you overcome this objection.
Where do you see yourself five years from now?
Reassure your interviewer that you’re looking to make a long-term commitment…that this position entails exactly what you’re looking to do and what you do extremely well. As for your future, you believe that if you perform each job at hand with excellence, future opportunities will take care of themselves.
Example: “I am definitely interested in making a long-term commitment to my next position.
Judging by what you’ve told me about this position, it’s exactly what I’m looking for and what I am very well qualified to do. In terms of my future career path, I’m confident that if I do my work with excellence, opportunities will inevitable open up for me. It’s always been that way in my career, and I’m confident I’ll have similar opportunities here.”
Describe your ideal company, location and job.
The only right answer is to describe what this company is offering, being sure to make your answer believable with specific reasons, stated with sincerity, why each quality represented by this opportunity is attractive to you.
Remember that if you’re coming from a company that’s the leader in its field or from a glamorous or much admired company, industry, city or position, your interviewer and his company may well have an “Avis” complex. That is, they may feel a bit defensive about being “second best” to the place you’re coming from, worried that you may consider them bush league.
This anxiety could well be there even though you’ve done nothing to inspire it. You must go out of your way to assuage such anxiety, even if it’s not expressed, by putting their virtues high on the list of exactly what you’re looking for, providing credible reason for wanting these qualities.
If you do not express genuine enthusiasm for the firm, its culture, location, industry, etc., you may fail to answer this “Avis” complex objection and, as a result, leave the interviewer suspecting that a hot shot like you, coming from a Fortune 500 company in New York, just wouldn’t be happy at an unknown manufacturer based in Topeka, Kansas.
Why do you want to work at our company?
This question is your opportunity to hit the ball out of the park, thanks to the in-depth research you should do before any interview.
Best sources for researching your target company: annual reports, the corporate newsletter, contacts you know at the company or its suppliers, advertisements, articles about the company in the trade press.
What are your career options right now?
Prepare for this question by thinking of how you can position yourself as a desired commodity. If you are still working, describe the possibilities at your present firm and why, though you’re greatly appreciated there, you’re looking for something more (challenge, money, responsibility, etc.). Also mention that you’re seriously exploring opportunities with one or two other firms.
If you’re not working, you can talk about other employment possibilities you’re actually exploring. But do this with a light touch, speaking only in general terms. You don’t want to seem manipulative or coy.
Why have you been out of work so long ?
You want to emphasize factors which have prolonged your job search by your own choice.
Example: “After my job was terminated, I made a conscious decision not to jump on the first opportunities to come along. In my life, I’ve found out that you can always turn a negative into a positive IF you try hard enough. This is what I determined to do. I decided to take whatever time I needed to think through what I do best, what I most want to do, where I’d like to do it…and then identify those companies that could offer such an opportunity.”
“Also, in all honesty, you have to factor in the recession (consolidation, stabilization, etc.) in the (banking, financial services, manufacturing, advertising, etc.) industry.”
“So between my being selective and the companies in our industry downsizing, the process has taken time. But in the end, I’m convinced that when I do find the right match, all that careful evaluation from both sides of the desk will have been well worthwhile for both the company that hires me and myself.
Tell me honestly about the strong points and weak points of your boss (company, management team, etc.)
Remember the rule: Never be negative. Stress only the good points, no matter how charmingly you’re invited to be critical.
Your interviewer doesn’t care a whit about your previous boss. He wants to find out how loyal and positive you are, and whether you’ll criticize him behind his back if pressed to do so by someone in this own company. This question is your opportunity to demonstrate your loyalty to those you work with.
What good books have you read lately?
Unless you’re up for a position in academia or as book critic for The New York Times, you’re not expected to be a literary lion. But it wouldn’t hurt to have read a handful of the most recent and influential books in your profession and on management.
Consider it part of the work of your job search to read up on a few of these leading books. But make sure they are quality books that reflect favourably upon you, nothing that could even remotely be considered superficial. Finally, add a recently published bestselling work of fiction by a world-class author and you’ll pass this question with flying colors.
Tell me about a situation when your work was criticized?
Begin by emphasizing the extremely positive feedback you’ve gotten throughout your career and (if it’s true) that your performance reviews have been uniformly excellent.
Of course, no one is perfect and you always welcome suggestions on how to improve your performance. Then, give an example of a not-too-damaging learning experience from early in your career and relate the ways this lesson has since helped you. This demonstrates that you learned from the experience and the lesson is now one of the strongest breastplates in your suit of armor.
If you are pressed for a criticism from a recent position, choose something fairly trivial that in no way is essential to your successful performance. Add that you’ve learned from this, too, and over the past several years/months, it’s no longer an area of concern because you now make it a regular practice to…etc.
Another way to answer this question would be to describe your intention to broaden your master of an area of growing importance in your field. For example, this might be a computer program you’ve been meaning to sit down and learn… a new management technique you’ve read about…or perhaps attending a seminar on some cutting-edge branch of your profession. Again, the key is to focus on something not essential to your brilliant performance but which adds yet another dimension to your already impressive knowledge base.
What are your outside interests?
Try to gauge how this company’s culture would look upon your favourite outside activities and be guided accordingly.
You can also use this question to shatter any stereotypes that could limit your chances. If you’re over 50, for example, describe your activities that demonstrate physical stamina. If you’re young, mention an activity that connotes wisdom and institutional trust, such as serving on the board of a popular charity.
But above all, remember that your employer is hiring your for what you can do for him, not your family, yourself or outside organizations, no matter how admirable those activities may be.
The “Fatal Flaw” question
As every master salesperson knows, you will encounter objections (whether stated or merely thought) in every sale. They’re part and parcel of the buyer’s anxiety. The key is not to exacerbate the buyer’s anxiety but diminish it. Here’s how…
Whenever you come up against a fatal flaw question:
Be completely honest, open and straightforward about admitting the shortcoming. (Showing you have nothing to hide diminishes the buyer’s anxiety.)
Do not apologize or try to explain it away. You know that this supposed flaw is nothing to be concerned about, and this is the attitude you want your interviewer to adopt as well.
Add that as desirable as such a qualification might be, its lack has made you work all the harder throughout your career and has not prevented you from compiling an outstanding track record of achievements. You might even give examples of how, through a relentless commitment to excellence, you have consistently outperformed those who do have this qualification.
Of course, the ultimate way to handle “fatal flaw” questions is to prevent them from arising in the first place. You will do that by following the master strategy described in Question 1, i.e., uncovering the employers needs and them matching your qualifications to those needs.
Once you’ve gotten the employer to start talking about his most urgently-felt wants and goals for the position, and then help him see in step-by-step fashion how perfectly your background and achievements match up with those needs, you’re going to have one very enthusiastic interviewer on your hands, one who is no longer looking for “fatal flaws”.
How do you feel about reporting to a younger person (minority, woman, etc)?
You greatly admire a company that hires and promotes on merit alone and you couldn’t agree more with that philosophy. The age (gender, race, etc.) of the person you report to would certainly make no difference to you.
Whoever has that position has obviously earned it and knows their job well. Both the person and the position are fully deserving of respect. You believe that all people in a company, from the receptionist to the Chairman, work best when their abilities, efforts and feelings are respected and rewarded fairly, and that includes you. That’s the best type of work environment you can hope to find.
On confidential matters…
Your interviewer may press you for this information for two reasons.
First, many companies use interviews to research the competition. It’s a perfect set-up. Here in their own lair, is an insider from the enemy camp who can reveal prized information on the competition’s plans, research, financial condition, etc.
Second, the company may be testing your integrity to see if you can be cajoled or bullied into revealing confidential data.
What to do? The answer here is easy. Never reveal anything truly confidential about a present or former employer. By all means, explain your reticence diplomatically. For example, “I certainly want to be as open as I can about that. But I also wish to respect the rights of those who have trusted me with their most sensitive information, just as you would hope to be able to trust any of your key people when talking with a competitor…”
And certainly you can allude to your finest achievements in specific ways that don’t reveal the combination to the company safe.
But be guided by the golden rule. If you were the owner of your present company, would you feel it ethically wrong for the information to be given to your competitors? If so, steadfastly refuse to reveal it.
Remember that this question pits your desire to be cooperative against your integrity. Faced with any such choice, always choose integrity. It is a far more valuable commodity than whatever information the company may pry from you. Moreover, once you surrender the information, your stock goes down. They will surely lose respect for you.
One President we know always presses candidates unmercifully for confidential information. If he doesn’t get it, he grows visibly annoyed, relentlessly inquisitive, It’s all an act. He couldn’t care less about the information. This is his way of testing the candidate’s moral fiber. Only those who hold fast are hired.
What would you say to your boss if he’s crazy about an idea, but you think it stinks?
Remember the rule stated earlier: In any conflict between values, always choose integrity.
Example: I believe that when evaluating anything, it’s important to emphasize the positive.
What do I like about this idea?”
“Then, if you have reservations, I certainly want to point them out, as specifically, objectively and factually as I can.”
“After all, the most important thing I owe my boss is honesty. If he can’t count on me for that, then everything else I may do or say could be questionable in his eyes.”
“But I also want to express my thoughts in a constructive way. So my goal in this case would be to see if my boss and I could make his idea even stronger and more appealing, so that it effectively overcomes any initial reservation I or others may have about it.”
“Of course, if he overrules me and says, ‘no, let’s do it my way,’ then I owe him my full and enthusiastic support to make it work as best it can.”
How could you have improved your career progress?
You’re generally quite happy with your career progress. Maybe, if you had known something earlier in life (impossible to know at the time, such as the booming growth in a branch in your industry…or the corporate downsizing that would phase out your last job), you might have moved in a certain direction sooner.
But all things considered, you take responsibility for where you are, how you’ve gotten there, where you are going…and you harbor no regrets.
What would you do if a fellow executive on your own corporate level wasn’t pulling his/her weight…and this was hurting your department?
Try to gauge the political style of the firm and be guided accordingly. In general, fall back on universal principles of effective human relations – which in the end, embody the way you would like to be treated in a similar circumstance.
Example: “Good human relations would call for me to go directly to the person and explain the situation, to try to enlist his help in a constructive, positive solution. If I sensed resistance, I would be as persuasive as I know how to explain the benefits we can all gain from working together, and the problems we, the company and our customers will experience if we don’t.”
POSSIBLE FOLLOW-UP QUESTION
And what would you do if he still did not change his ways?
ANSWER: “One thing I wouldn’t do is let the problem slide, because it would only get worse and overlooking it would set a bad precedent. I would try again and again and again, in whatever way I could, to solve the problem, involving wider and wider circles of people, both above and below the offending executive and including my own boss if necessary, so that everyone involved can see the rewards for teamwork and the drawbacks of non-cooperation.”
“I might add that I’ve never yet come across a situation that couldn’t be resolved by harnessing others in a determined, constructive effort.”
You’ve been with your firm a long time. Won’t it be hard switching to a new company?
To overcome this objection, you must point to the many ways you have grown and adapted to changing conditions at your present firm. It has not been a static situation. Highlight the different responsibilities you’ve held, the wide array of new situations you’ve faced and conquered.
As a result, you’ve learned to adapt quickly to whatever is thrown at you, and you thrive on the stimulation of new challenges.
To further assure the interviewer, describe the similarities between the new position and your prior one. Explain that you should be quite comfortable working there, since their needs and your skills make a perfect match.
May I contact your present employer for a reference?
Express your concern that you’d like to keep your job search private, but that in time, it will be perfectly okay.
Example: “My present employer is not aware of my job search and, for obvious reasons; I’d prefer to keep it that way. I’d be most appreciative if we kept our discussion confidential right now. Of course, when we both agree the time is right, then by all means you should contact them. I’m very proud of my record there.
Give me an example of your creativity (analytical skill…managing ability, etc.)
Remember from Question 2 that you should commit to memory a list of your greatest and most recent achievements, ever ready on the tip of your tongue.
If you have such a list, it’s easy to present any of your achievements in light of the quality the interviewer is asking about. For example, the smashing success you orchestrated at last year’s trade show could be used as an example of creativity, or analytical ability, or your ability to manage.
Where could you use some improvement?
Keep this answer, like all your answers, positive. A good way to answer this question is to identify a cutting-edge branch of your profession (one that’s not essential to your employer’s needs) as an area you’re very excited about and want to explore more fully over the next six months.
What do you worry about?
Redefine the word ‘worry’ so that it does not reflect negatively on you.
Example: “I wouldn’t call it worry, but I am a strongly goal-oriented person. So I keep turning over in my mind anything that seems to be keeping me from achieving those goals, until I find a solution. That’s part of my tenacity, I suppose.”
I’m concerned that you don’t have as much experience as we’d like in...
This question is related to “The Fatal Flaw” , but here the concern is not that you are totally missing some qualifications, such as CPA certification, but rather that your experience is light in one area.
Before going into any interview, try to identify the weakest aspects of your candidacy from this company’s point of view. Then prepare the best answer you possible can to shore up your defenses.
To get past this question with flying colors, you are going to rely on your master strategy of uncovering the employer’s greatest wants and needs and then matching them with your strengths. Since you already know how to do this from Question 1, you are in a much stronger position.
More specifically, when the interviewer poses as objection like this, you should…
Agree on the importance of this qualification.
Explain that your strength may be indeed be greater than your resume indicates because…
When this strength is added to your other strengths, it’s really your combination of qualifications that’s most important. Then review the areas of your greatest strengths that match up most favorably with the company’s most urgently-felt wants and needs.
This is powerful way to handle this question for two reasons. First, you’re giving your interviewer more ammunition in the area of his concern. But more importantly, you’re shifting his focus away from this one, isolated area and putting it on the unique combination of strengths you offer, strengths which tie in perfectly with his greatest wants.
How do you feel about working nights and weekends?
First, if you’re a confirmed workaholic, this question is a softball lob. Whack it out of the park on the first swing by saying this kind of schedule is just your style. Add that your family understands it. Indeed, they’re happy for you, as they know you get your greatest satisfaction from your work.
If however, you prefer a more balanced lifestyle, answer this question with another: “What’s the norm for your best people here?”
If the hours still sound unrealistic for you, ask, “Do you have any top people who perform exceptionally for you, but who also have families and like to get home in time to see them at night?” Chances are this company does, and this associates you with this other “top-performers who- leave-not-later-than-six” group.
Depending on the answer, be honest about how you would fit into the picture. If all those extra hours make you uncomfortable, say so, but phrase your response positively.
Example: “I love my work and do it exceptionally well. I think the results speak for themselves, especially in …(mention your two or three qualifications of greater interest to the employer.
Remember, this is what he wants most, not a workaholic with weak credentials). Not only would I bring these qualities, but I’ve built my whole career on working not just hard, but smart. I think you’ll find me one of the most productive people here.
I do have a family who likes to see me after work and on weekends. They add balance and richness to my life, which in turn helps me be happy and productive at work. If I could handle some of the extra work at home in the evenings or on weekends, that would be ideal. You’d be getting a person of exceptional productivity who meets your needs with strong credentials. And I’d be able to handle some of the heavy workload at home where I can be under the same roof as my family. Everybody would win.”
Are you willing to relocate or travel?
First find out where you may have to relocate and how much travel may be involved. Then respond to the question.
If there’s no problem, say so enthusiastically.
If you do have a reservation, there are two schools of thought on how to handle it.
One advises you to keep your options open and your reservations to yourself in the early going, by saying, “no problem”. You strategy here is to get the best offer you can, then make a judgment whether it’s worth it to you to relocate or travel.
Also, by the time the offer comes through, you may have other offers and can make a more informed decision. Why kill of this opportunity before it has chance to blossom into something really special? And if you’re a little more desperate three months from now, you might wish you hadn’t slammed the door on relocating or traveling.
The second way to handle this question is to voice a reservation, but assert that you’d be open to relocating (or traveling) for the right opportunity.
The answering strategy you choose depends on how eager you are for the job. If you want to take no chances, choose the first approach.
If you want to play a little harder-to-get in hopes of generating a more enticing offer, choose the second.
Do you have the stomach to fire people? Have you had experience firing many people? Describe the rational and sensible management process you follow in both hiring and firing.
Example: “My whole management approach is to hire the best people I can find, train them thoroughly and well, get them excited and proud to be part of our team, and then work with them to achieve our goals together. If you do all of that right, especially hiring the right people,
I’ve found you don’t have to fire very often.
“So with me, firing is a last resort. But when it’s got to be done, it’s got to be done, and the faster and cleaner, the better. A poor employee can wreak terrible damage in undermining the morale of an entire team of good people. When there’s no other way, I’ve found it’s better for all concerned to act decisively in getting rid of offenders who won’t change their ways.”
Why have you had so many jobs?
First, before you even get to the interview stage, you should try to minimize your image as job hopper. If there are several entries on your resume of less than one year, consider eliminating the less important ones. Perhaps you can specify the time you spent at previous positions in rounded years not in months and years.
Example: Instead of showing three positions this way:
6/1982 – 3/1983, Position A;
4/1983 – 12/1983, Position B;
1/1984 – 8/1987, Position C;
…it would be better to show simply:
1982 – 1983, Position A;
1984 – 1987 Position C.
In other words, you would drop Position B altogether. Notice what a difference this makes in reducing your image as a job hopper.
Once in front of the interviewer and this question comes up, you must try to reassure him.
Describe each position as part of an overall pattern of growth and career destination.
Be careful not to blame other people for your frequent changes. But you can and should attribute certain changes to conditions beyond your control.
Example: Thanks to an upcoming merger, you wanted to avoid an ensuing bloodbath, so you made a good, upward career move before your department came under the axe of the new owners.
If possible, also show that your job changes were more frequent in your younger days, while you were establishing yourself, rounding out your skills and looking for the right career path. At this stage in your career, you’re certainly much more interested in the best long-term opportunity.
You might also cite the job where you stayed the longest and describe that this type of situation is what you’re looking for now.
What do you see as the proper role/mission of…
…a good (job title you’re seeking);
…a good manager;
…an executive in serving the community;
…a leading company in our industry; etc.
Think of the most essential ingredients of success for each category above – your job title, your role as manager, your firm’s role, etc.
Identify at least three but no more than six qualities you feel are most important to success in each role. Then commit your response to memory.
Here, again, the more information you’ve already drawn out about the greatest wants and needs of the interviewer, and the more homework you’ve done to identify the culture of the firm, the more on-target your answer will be.
Would you lie for the company?
Try to avoid choosing between two values, giving a positive statement which covers all bases instead.
Example: “I would never do anything to hurt the company..”
If aggressively pressed to choose between two competing values, always choose personal integrity. It is the most prized of all values.
Looking back, what would you do differently in your life ?
Indicate that you are a happy, fulfilled, optimistic person and that, in general, you wouldn’t change a thing.
Example: “It’s been a good life, rich in learning and experience, and the best it yet to come.
Every experience in life is a lesson it its own way. I wouldn’t change a thing.”
Could you have done better in your last job ?
Again never be negative.
Example: “I suppose with the benefit of hindsight you can always find things to do better, of course, but off the top of my head, I can’t think of anything of major consequence.”
(If more explanation seems necessary)
Describer a situation that didn’t suffer because of you but from external conditions beyond your control ?
For example, describe the disappointment you felt with a test campaign, new product launch, merger, etc., which looked promising at first, but led to underwhelming results. “I wish we could have known at the start what we later found out (about the economy turning, the marketplace changing, etc.), but since we couldn’t, we just had to go for it. And we did learn from it…”
Can you work under pressure?
Absolutely…(then prove it with a vivid example or two of a goal or project accomplished under severe pressure.)
What makes you angry ?
Give an answer that’s suited to both your personality and the management style of the firm.
Here, the homework you’ve done about the company and its style can help in your choice of words.
Examples: If you are a reserved person and/or the corporate culture is coolly professional:
“I’m an even-tempered and positive person by nature, and I believe this helps me a great deal in keeping my department running smoothly, harmoniously and with a genuine esprit de corps. I believe in communicating clearly what’s expected, getting people’s commitment to those goals, and then following up continuously to check progress.”
“If anyone or anything is going off track, I want to know about it early. If, after that kind of open communication and follow up, someone isn’t getting the job done, I’ll want to know why. If there’s no good reason, then I’ll get impatient and angry…and take appropriate steps from there. But if you hire good people, motivate them to strive for excellence and then follow up constantly, it almost never gets to that state.”
If you are feisty by nature and/or the position calls for a tough straw boss.
“You know what makes me angry? People who (the fill in the blanks with the most objectionable traits for this type of position)…people who don’t pull their own weight, who are negative, people who lie…etc.”
Why aren’t you earning more money at this stage of your career ?
You like to make money, but other factors are even more important.
Example: “Making money is very important to me, and one reason I’m here is because I’m looking to make more. Throughout my career, what’s been even more important to me is doing work I really like to do at the kind of company I like and respect. (Then be prepared to be specific about what your ideal position and company would be like, matching them as closely as possible to the opportunity at hand.
Who has inspired you in your life and why?
Have a few heroes in mind, from your mental “Board of Directors” – Leaders in your industry, from history or anyone else who has been your mentor.
Be prepared to give examples of how their words, actions or teachings have helped inspire your achievements. As always, prepare an answer which highlights qualities that would be highly valuable in the position you are seeking.
What was the toughest decision you ever had to make?
Be prepared with a good example, explaining why the decision was difficult…the process you followed in reaching it…the courageous or effective way you carried it out…and the beneficial results.
Tell me about the most boring job you’ve ever had.
You have never allowed yourself to grow bored with a job and you can’t understand it when others let themselves fall into that rut.
Example: “Perhaps I’ve been fortunate, but that I’ve never found myself bored with any job I have ever held. I’ve always enjoyed hard work. As with actors who feel there are no small parts,
I also believe that in every company or department there are exciting challenges and intriguing problems crying out for energetic and enthusiastic solutions. If you’re bored, it’s probably because you’re not challenging yourself to tackle those problems right under your nose.”
Have you been absent from work more than a few days in any previous position?
If you have had no problem, emphasize your excellent and consistent attendance record throughout your career.
Also describe how important you believe such consistent attendance is for a key executive…why it’s up to you to set an example of dedication…and why there’s just no substitute for being there with your people to keep the operation running smoothly, answer questions and handle problems and crises as they arise.
If you do have a past attendance problem, you want to minimize it, making it clear that it was an exceptional circumstance and that it’s cause has been corrected.
To do this, give the same answer as above but preface it with something like, “Other that being out last year (or whenever) because of (your reason, which is now in the past), I have never had a problem and have enjoyed an excellent attendance record throughout my career. Furthermore, I believe, consistent attendance is important because…” (Pick up the rest of the answer as outlined above.).
What changes would you make if you came on board?
You, of course, will want to take a good hard look at everything the company is doing before making any recommendations.
Example: “Well, I wouldn’t be a very good doctor if I gave my diagnosis before the examination.
Should you hire me, as I hope you will, I’d want to take a good hard look at everything you’re doing and understand why it’s being done that way. I’d like to have in-depth meetings with you and the other key people to get a deeper grasp of what you feel you’re doing right and what could be improved.
“From what you’ve told me so far, the areas of greatest concern to you are…” (name them. Then do two things. First, ask if these are in fact his major concerns. If so then reaffirm how your experience in meeting similar needs elsewhere might prove very helpful).
How many hours a week do you normally work?
If you are in fact a workaholic and you sense this company would like that: Say you are a confirmed workaholic, that you often work nights and weekends. Your family accepts this because it makes you fulfilled.
If you are not a workaholic: Say you have always worked hard and put in long hours. It goes with the territory. It one sense, it’s hard to keep track of the hours because your work is a labor of love, you enjoy nothing more than solving problems. So you’re almost always thinking about your work, including times when you’re home, while shaving in the morning, while commuting, etc.
What’s the most difficult part of being a (job title)?
First, redefine “difficult” to be “challenging” which is more positive. Then, identify an area everyone in your profession considers challenging and in which you excel. Describe the process you follow that enables you to get splendid results…and be specific about those results.
Example: “I think every sales manager finds it challenging to motivate the troops in a recession.
But that’s probably the strongest test of a top sales manager. I feel this is one area where I excel.”
“When I see the first sign that sales may slip or that sales force motivation is flagging because of a downturn in the economy, here’s the plan I put into action immediately…” (followed by a description of each step in the process…and most importantly, the exceptional results you’ve achieved.).
The “Hypothetical Problem”
Instead, describe the rational, methodical process you would follow in analyzing this problem, who you would consult with, generating possible solutions, choosing the best course of action, and monitoring the results.
Remember, in all such, “What would you do?” questions, always describe your process or working methods, and you’ll never go wrong.
What was the toughest challenge you’ve ever faced?
This is an easy question if you’re prepared. Have a recent example ready that demonstrates either:
A quality most important to the job at hand; or
A quality that is always in demand, such as leadership, initiative, managerial skill, persuasiveness, courage, persistence, intelligence, etc.
Have you consider starting your own business?
Again it’s best to:
Gauge this company’s corporate culture before answering and…
Be honest (which doesn’t mean you have to vividly share your fantasy of the franchise or bedand- breakfast you someday plan to open).
In general, if the corporate culture is that of a large, formal, military-style structure, minimize any indication that you’d love to have your own business. You might say, “Oh, I may have given it a thought once or twice, but my whole career has been in larger organizations. That’s where I have excelled and where I want to be.”
If the corporate culture is closer to the free-wheeling, everybody’s-a-deal-maker variety, then emphasize that in a firm like this, you can virtually get the best of all worlds, the excitement of seeing your own ideas and plans take shape…combined with the resources and stability of a well-established organization. Sounds like the perfect environment to you.
In any case, no matter what the corporate culture, be sure to indicate that any desires about running your own show are part of your past, not your present or future.
The last thing you want to project is an image of either a dreamer who failed and is now settling for the corporate cocoon…or the restless maverick who will fly out the door with key accounts, contacts and trade secrets under his arms just as soon as his bankroll has gotten rebuilt.
Always remember: Match what you want with what the position offers. The more information you’ve uncovered about the position, the more believable you can make your case.
What are your goals?
Many executives in a position to hire you are strong believers in goal-setting. (It’s one of the reason they’ve achieved so much). They like to hire in kind.
If you’re vague about your career and personal goals, it could be a big turnoff to may people you will encounter in your job search.
Be ready to discuss your goals for each major area of your life: career, personal development and learning, family, physical (health), community service and (if your interviewer is clearly a religious person) you could briefly and generally allude to your spiritual goals (showing you are a well-rounded individual with your values in the right order).
Be prepared to describe each goal in terms of specific milestones you wish to accomplish along the way, time periods you’re allotting for accomplishment, why the goal is important to you, and the specific steps you’re taking to bring it about. But do this concisely, as you never want to talk more than two minutes straight before letting your interviewer back into the conversation.
What do you for when you hire people?
Speak your own thoughts here, but for the best answer weave them around the three most important qualifications for any position.
Can the person do the work (qualifications)? Will the person do the work (motivation)?
Will the person fit in (“our kind of team player”)?
Sell me this stapler…(this pencil…this clock…or some other object on interviewer’s desk).
Of course, you already know the most important secret of all great salesmanship – “find out what people want, then show them how to get it.”
If your interviewer picks up his stapler and asks, “sell this to me,” you are going to demonstrate this proven master principle. Here’s how:
“Well, a good salesman must know both his product and his prospect before he sells anything. If I were selling this, I’d first get to know everything I could about it, all its features and benefits.”
“Then, if my goal were to sell it you, I would do some research on how you might use a fine stapler like this. The best way to do that is by asking some questions. May I ask you a few questions?”
Then ask a few questions such as, “Just out of curiosity, if you didn’t already have a stapler like this, why would you want one? And in addition to that? Any other reason? Anything else?”
“And would you want such a stapler to be reliable?...Hold a good supply of staples?” (Ask more questions that point to the features this stapler has.)
Once you’ve asked these questions, make your presentation citing all the features and benefits of this stapler and why it’s exactly what the interviewer just told you he’s looking for.
Then close with, “Just out of curiosity, what would you consider a reasonable price for a quality stapler like this…a stapler you could have right now and would (then repeat all the problems the stapler would solve for him)?Whatever he says, (unless it’s zero), say, “Okay, we’ve got a deal.”
NOTE: If your interviewer tests you by fighting every step of the way, denying that he even wants such an item, don’t fight him. Take the product away from him by saying, “Mr. Prospect,
I’m delighted you’ve told me right upfront that there’s no way you’d ever want this stapler. As you well know, the first rule of the most productive salespeople in any field is to meet the needs of people who really need and want our products, and it just wastes everyone’s time if we try to force it on those who don’t. And I certainly wouldn’t want to waste your time. But we sell many items. Is there any product on this desk you would very much like to own…just one item?” When he points something out, repeat the process above. If he knows anything about selling, he may give you a standing ovation.
“The Salary Question” – How much money do you want?
For maximum salary negotiating power, remember these five guidelines
Never bring up salary. Let the interviewer do it first. Good salespeople sell their products thoroughly before talking price. So should you. Make the interviewer want you first, and your bargaining position will be much stronger.
If your interviewer raises the salary question too early, before you’ve had a chance to create desire for your qualifications, postpone the question, saying something like, “Money is important to me, but is not my main concern. Opportunity and growth are far more important.
What I’d rather do, if you don’t mind, is explore if I’m right for the position, and then talk about money. Would that be okay?”
The #1 rule of any negotiation is: the side with more information wins. After you’ve done a thorough job of selling the interviewer and it’s time to talk salary, the secret is to get the employer talking about what he’s willing to pay before you reveal what you’re willing to accept.
So, when asked about salary, respond by asking, “I’m sure the company has already established a salary range for this position. Could you tell me what that is?” Or, “I want an income commensurate with my ability and qualifications. I trust you’ll be fair with me. What does the position pay?” Or, more simply, “What does this position pay?”
Know beforehand what you’d accept. To know what’s reasonable, research the job market and this position for any relevant salary information. Remember that most executives look for a 20- 25%$ pay boost when they switch jobs. If you’re grossly underpaid, you may want more.
Never lie about what you currently make, but feel free to include the estimated cost of all your fringes, which could well tack on 25-50% more to your present “cash-only” salary.
The Illegal Question
Illegal questions include any regarding your age…number and ages of your children or other dependents…marital status…maiden name…religion…political affiliation…ancestry…national origin…birthplace…naturalization of your parents, spouse or children…diseases…disabilities…clubs…or spouse’s occupation…unless any of the above are directly related to your performance of the job. You can’t even be asked about arrests, though you can be asked about convictions.
ANSWER: Under the ever-present threat of lawsuits, most interviewers are well aware of these taboos. Yet you may encounter, usually on a second or third interview, a senior executive who doesn’t interview much and forgets he can’t ask such questions.
You can handle an illegal question in several ways. First, you can assert your legal right not to answer. But this will frighten or embarrass your interviewer and destroy any rapport you had.
Second, you could swallow your concerns over privacy and answer the question straight forwardly if you feel the answer could help you. For example, your interviewer, a devout Baptist, recognizes you from church and mentions it. Here, you could gain by talking about your church.
Third, if you don’t want your privacy invaded, you can diplomatically answer the concern behind the question without answering the question itself.
Example: If you are over 50 and are asked, “How old are you?” you can answer with a friendly, smiling question of your own on whether there’s a concern that your age my affect your performance. Follow this up by reassuring the interviewer that there’s nothing in this job you can’t do and, in fact, your age and experience are the most important advantages you offer the employer for the following reasons…
Another example: If asked, “Do you plan to have children?” you could answer, “I am wholeheartedly dedicated to my career“, perhaps adding, “I have no plans regarding children.”
(You needn’t fear you’ve pledged eternal childlessness. You have every right to change your plans later. Get the job first and then enjoy all your options.)
Most importantly, remember that illegal questions arise from fear that you won’t perform well.
The best answer of all is to get the job and perform brilliantly. All concerns and fears will then varnish, replaced by respect and appreciation for your work.
The “Secret” Illegal Question
Much more frequent than the Illegal question is the secret illegal question. It’s secret because it’s asked only in the interviewer’s mind. Since it’s not even expressed to you, you have no way to respond to it, and it can there be most damaging.
Example: You’re physically challenged, or a single mother returning to your professional career, or over 50, or a member of an ethnic minority, or fit any of a dozen other categories that do not strictly conform to the majority in a given company.
Your interviewer wonders, “Is this person really able to handle the job?”…”Is he or she a ‘good fit’ at a place like ours?”…”Will the chemistry ever be right with someone like this?” But the interviewer never raises such questions because they’re illegal. So what can you do?
ANSWER: Remember that just because the interviewer doesn’t ask an illegal question doesn’t mean he doesn’t have it. More than likely, he is going to come up with his own answer. So you might as well help him out.
How? Well, you obviously can’t respond to an illegal question if he hasn’t even asked. This may well offend him. And there’s always the chance he wasn’t even concerned about the issue until you brought it up, and only then begins to wonder.
So you can’t address “secret” illegal questions head-on. But what you can do is make sure there’s enough counterbalancing information to more than reassure him that there’s no problem in the area he may be doubtful about.
For example, let’s say you’re a sales rep who had polio as a child and you need a cane to walk.
You know your condition has never impeded your performance, yet you’re concerned that your interviewer may secretly be wondering about your stamina or ability to travel. Well, make sure that you hit these abilities very hard, leaving no doubt about your capacity to handle them well.
So, too, if you’re in any different from what passes for “normal”. Make sure, without in any way seeming defensive about yourself that you mention strengths, accomplishments, preferences and affiliations that strongly counterbalance any unspoken concern your interviewer may have.
What was the toughest part of your last job?
State that there was nothing in your prior position that you found overly difficult, and let your answer go at that. If pressed to expand your answer, you could describe the aspects of the position you enjoyed more than others, making sure that you express maximum enjoyment for those tasks most important to the open position, and you enjoyed least those tasks that are unimportant to the position at hand.
Looking back on your last position, have you done your best work?
To cover both possible paths this question can take, your answer should state that you always try to do your best, and the best of your career is right now. Like an athlete at the top of his game, you are just hitting your career stride thanks to several factors. Then, recap those factors, highlighting your strongest qualifications.
Why should I hire you from the outside when I could promote someone from within?
Help him see the qualifications that only you can offer.
Example: “In general, I think it’s a good policy to hire from within – to look outside probably means you’re not completely comfortable choosing someone from inside.
“Naturally, you want this department to be as strong as it possibly can be, so you want the strongest candidate. I feel that I can fill that bill because…(then recap your strongest qualifications that match up with his greatest needs).”
Tell me something negative you’ve heard about our company…
Just remember the rule – never be negative – and you’ll handle this one just fine.
On a scale of one to ten, rate me as an interviewer.
Once again, never be negative. The interviewer will only resent criticism coming from you. This is the time to show your positivism.
However, don’t give a numerical rating. Simply praise whatever interview style he’s been using.
If he’s been tough, say “You have been thorough and tough-minded, the very qualities needed to conduct a good interview.”
If he’s been methodical, say, “You have been very methodical and analytical, and I’m sure that approach results in excellent hires for your firm”. In other words, pay him a sincere compliment that he can believe because it’s anchored in the behaviour you’ve just seen.
1a5:Tac1,
Vagrant is an open source tool for building a complete virtual development environment. A test environment is required for testing the latest release and new tools. It works on Linux, Mac OS X, or Windows and although by default it uses VirtualBox for managing the virtualization, it can be used with other providers such as VMware or AWS.
How to install Vagrant
First you need to download and run the installation kit.
Check that you have dpkg and Virtual box installed:
$ sudo apt-get install virtualbox
Installing Vagrant:
$ sudo apt-get install vagrant
Install the dkms package to ensure that the VirtualBox host kernel modules (vboxdrv, vboxnetflt and vboxnetadp) are properly updated if the Linux kernel version changes during the next apt-get upgrade.
$ sudo apt-get install virtualbox-dkms
Vagrant can quickly deploy the development environment. Get the vagrant images from here.
The following command will install precise32 box from the vagrant website.
-Then create a vagrant file in this folder by calling 'vagrant init', which will be the central file for the project configuration.
$ mkdir vagrant_project $ cd vagrant_project $ vagrant init
Edit the Vagrantfile in this directory and replace
config.vm.box = "precise32"
This will tell it to use this new box. Save the file and exit. Now you can deploy the guest machine with the following command:
vagrant up
This will bring up a VPS running Ubuntu 12.04 LTS. To make use of it, you can easily SSH into it:
vagrant ssh
After you are done working with the guest machine, you can exit and go back to the host with the following command:
exit
If you want to stop and remove the guest machine and all traces of it, run the following command from the host machine:
vagrant destroy
The files that were synchronized with the host machine will not be removed from the host. Additionally, you can redeploy the guest machine again for this configuration using the same vagrant up command.
1a6:T696c,
Provisions
"The vagrant provision runs any configured provisioners against the running Vagrant managed machine. This command is a great way to quickly test any provisioners, and is especially useful for incremental development of shell scripts, Chef cookbooks, or Puppet modules. We can just make simple modifications to the provisioning scripts on our machine, run a vagrant provision, and check for the desired results.
-Chef Solo
-Chef Server
-Puppet Standalone
-Puppet Server
-Shell
Chef Solo
The Vagrant Chef Solo provisioner allows you to provision the guest using Chef, specifically with Chef Solo.
chef-solo is an open source version of the chef-client that allows using cookbooks with nodes without requiring access to a Chef server. chef-solo runs locally and requires that a cookbook (and any of its dependencies) be on the same physical disk as the node.
chef-solo is a limited-functionality version of the chef-client and does not support the following:
-Node data storage
-Search indexes
-Centralized distribution of cookbooks
-A centralized API that interacts with and integrates infrastructure components
-Authentication or authorization
-Persistent attributes
list the complete set of available options for the Chef Solo provisioner.
cookbook_path(string or array) - A list of paths to where cookbooks are stored. By default this is "cookbooks", expecting a cookbooks folder relative to the Vagrantfile location.
data_bags_path(string or array) - A path where data bags are stored. By default, no data bag path is set. Chef 12 or higher is required to use the array option. Chef 11 and lower only accept a string value
environments_path (string) - A path where environment definitions are located. By default, no environments folder is set.
nodes_path(string or array) - A list of paths where node objects (in JSON format) are stored. By default, no nodes path is set.
recipe_url(string) - URL to an archive of cookbooks that Chef will download and use.
environment(string) - The environment you want the Chef run to be a part of. This requires Chef 11.6.0 or later, and thatenvironments_path is set.
roles_path(string or array) - A list of paths where roles are defined. By default this is empty. Multiple role directories are only supported by Chef 11.8.0 and later.
synced_folder_type (string) - The type of synced folders to use when sharing the data required for the provisioner to work properly. By default this will use the default synced folder type. For example, you can set this to "nfs" to use NFS synced folders.
Chef Server
Chef Server allows you to provision your virtual machine without having to keep the cookbooks within the repository itself. There are various benefits to this approach, such as being able to use your production cookbooks from chef server to provision your development environment.
The Chef Server URL
-First step to provisioning with chef server is to tell Vagrant where the chef server is located.
Chef server uses key pairs in order to verify and register nodes to the chef server (similar to SSH key-based authentication).
The validation key is used by an unregistered client to verify itself and register with the chef server.
Vagrant needs to know the path to this validation key in order to configure the client for chef server.
Vagrant::Config.rundo|config|
config.vm.provision:chef_clientdo|chef|
chef.validation_key_path="validation.pem"
end
end
The path given as the value to the configuration is expanded relative to the project directory if it’s a relative path. If it’s an absolute path, then it is taken as is.
Specifying the Run List
The run list is the list of things to run on the node, which are recipes and/or roles. Usually the run list is managed by the chef server. In this case, you don’t have to do anything, since by default Vagrant will pull the run list from the chef server.
Vagrant::Config.rundo|config|config.vm.provision:chef_clientdo|chef|# Provision with the apache2 recipechef.add_recipe("apache2")# Provision with the database rolechef.add_role("database")endend
If you need to access the run list directly, you can also use the run_list accessor:
Vagrant::Config.rundo|config|config.vm.provision:chef_clientdo|chef|# Modifying the run list directlychef.run_list=["recipe[foo]","role[bar]"]endend
Specifying the Environment
Chef 0.10 or later, you have access to environments. If you’d like to configure the environment you’re node is part of, simply use the environment configuration option:
Vagrant::Config.rundo|config|config.vm.provision:chef_clientdo|chef|# Set the environment for the chef serverchef.environment="development"endend
Configuration Options
There are other configuration options as well, but these can normally be left as their default. But if your chef server requires these to be customized, they are available to you. This documentation won’t go into detail of their function since if you’re looking for these you probably already know what they are for:
When you provision your Vagrant virtual machine with Chef server, it creates a new Chef Node entry and Chef Client entry on the Chef server, using the hostname of the machine. After you tear down your virtual machine, you must explicitly delete these entries from the Chef server before you provision a new one with Chef server.
For example, using knife:
$ knife node delete vagrant-ubuntu-oneiric
$ knife client delete vagrant-ubuntu-oneiric
If you fail to do so, you will get the following error when trying to provision a new virtual machine with the same hostname:
HTTP Request Returned 409 Conflict: Client already exists.
Puppet Standalone
Puppet in the client-server mode to configure your production environment then you might want to be able to copy & paste from the prod configuration into the Vagrant’s standalone puppet‘s configuration to test stuff. One of the key features necessary for that is enabling file serving via “source => ‘puppet:///path/to/file'”.
Enabling Puppet Standalone in Vagrant to Resolve puppet:///…
-Make the directory with the files to be served available to the Vagrant VM
-Create fileserver.conf to inform Puppet about the directory
-Tell puppet about the fileserver.conf
-Use it
Make the directory with the files to be served available to the Vagrant VM
Use a Puppet server, then Vagrant can register itself as a node on the server and use the configuration that server has to configure your virtual machine. If you’re just getting started with Puppet, you should instead be using the standalone Puppet provisioner.
Setting the Puppet Server
Vagrant needs to know the name of your Puppet server. By default, Vagrant will look for a server called puppet. You can override this in your Vagrantfile using the puppet_server option.
Vagrant::Config.rundo|config|
config.vm.provision:puppet_serverdo|puppet|
puppet.puppet_server="puppet.example.com"
end
end
Here we’ve specified the Puppet Server as puppet.example.com.
Configuring the node name
We can also control the name of the node which is passed to the Puppet Server. Remember this is important because Puppet uses this node name to identify both the configuration to be applied and to generate an SSL certificate to authenticate the node to the Puppet Server.
The node name defaults to the name of the box being provisioned.
The Vagrant Shell provisioner allows you to upload and execute a script within the guest machine.Shell provisioning is ideal for users new to Vagrant who want to get up and running quickly and provides a strong alternative for users who are not comfortable with a full configuration management system such as Chef or Puppet.
The shell provisioner takes various options. One of inline or path is required:
inline(string) - Specifies a shell command inline to execute on the remote machine. See the inline scripts section below for more information.
path (string) - Path to a shell script to upload and execute. It can be a script relative to the project Vagrantfile or a remote script (like agist).
The remainder of the available options are optional:
args(string or array) - Arguments to pass to the shell script when executing it as a single string. These arguments must be written as if they were typed directly on the command line, so be sure to escape characters, quote, etc.
env(hash) - List of key-value pairs to pass in as environment variables to the script. Vagrant will handle quoting for environment variable values, but the keys remain untouched.
binary(boolean) - Vagrant automatically replaces Windows line endings with Unix line endings. If this is false, then Vagrant will not do this. By default this is "false".
privileged(boolean) - Specifies whether to execute the shell script as a privileged user or not (sudo). By default this is "true". Windows guests use a scheduled task to run as a true administrator without the WinRM limitations.
upload_path(string) - Is the remote path where the shell script will be uploaded to. The script is uploaded as the SSH user over SCP, so this location must be writable to that user.
keep_color(boolean) - Vagrant automatically colors output in green and red depending on whether the output is from stdout or stderr.
name(string) - This value will be displayed in the output so that identification by the user is easier when many shell provisioners are present.
powershell_args(string) - Extra arguments to pass to PowerShell if you are provisioning with PowerShell on Windows.
powershell_elevated_interactive(boolean) - Run an elevated script in interactive mode on Windows. By default this is "false". Must also be privileged.
1a7:T2212,
AngularJS directives are used to extend HTML. These are special attributes starting with ng- prefix. AngularJS directives are what controls the rendering of the HTML inside an AngularJS application. Directives are a core AngularJS feature.
From the framework directives you will use every day like ng-model or ng-repeat, to your own custom directives that allow you to extend the vocabulary of the browser, if you are learning AngularJS, you need to have a solid understanding of Directives.
Directive types
AngularJS directives are extended HTML attributes with the prefix ng-.
The ng-app directive initializes an AngularJS application.
The ng-init directive initializes application data.
The ng-model directive binds the value of HTML controls (input, select, textarea) to application data.
The ng-repeat directive repeats html elements for each item in a collection
ng-app: The root element which automatically initializes or bootstraps the application when web page containing AngularJS Application is loaded. It is also used to load various AngularJS modules in AngularJS Application.
Example: In this example we have defined a default AngularJS application using ng-app attribute of a div element.
<divng-app="">
...
</div>
ng-init: Itinitializes an AngularJS Application data. It is used to put values to the variables to be used in the application.
Interested in mastering AngularJS Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on AngularJS Training.
Example: In this example we have initialize an array of countries. We're using JSON syntax to define array of countries.
Ans: Determine testing needs – Define testing environment, Analyse your application and plan actions Set up repositories – Local or Shared OR Define function libraries Generate test steps – Add steps, Add checkpoints Data drive your tests Run the tests
Q2) Does QTP run in any environment?
Ans: No, QTP works only in the Windows environment.
Q3) Explain the views in the QTP GUI.
Ans:
Keyword view:
This view is a tabular representation of all the objects and the actions that are performed on them. Every row in the table is a step performed on the AUT and can be modified. Some of the most common columns displayed are item, operation, value and documentation.
Expert view:
As the name indicates, this view is for more technical users who would want to tweak the source code as per their requirements.
Q4) What are the different kinds of test steps?
Ans: 5 types of steps : Test Object ( Performs actions on a TO) – Functions – Utility (Steps to control run session. Eg: Reporter. report) – Comment – Programming logic (Loop, conditions…etc)
Q5) What phases are involved in testing an application in QTP?
Ans: The Quick Test Professional process consists of the following main phases:
Analyzing Application: before preparing test cases need to analyze the application to find out the testing needs.
Preparing Testing Infrastructure: based on testing needs create those resources, resources like, shared repository, function library etc.
Building Test Cases: create test script containing action to be performed while testing. Add object repository with the test function libraries.
Enhancing Test: by making use of checkpoints, broadening the scope of test, add logic and condition to test for checking purpose.
Debugging, Running and Analyzing Test: debug the test so that it works without interruption. Run these test and analyze the test result generated by QTP
Report Defects: lock bug into the bug report and send it to the development team.
Q6) How many types of recording modes in the QTP?
Ans: The QTP enable us with three types of recording mode:
Normal (by Default recording): In this recording mode QTP identify the object irrespective of their location on the screen. It is done by recording object based on application window.
Analog Recording: It is used when exact mouse movement and action performed by mouse is important. Used in testing the paint application and signature made with the help of mouse.
Low Level Recording: It helps in identifying those objects which is not recognized by the QTP. It is used when the location of object is changing inside the screen.
Q7) What is an object repository?
Ans:
Object Repository:
When QTP learn any object from application it stores those object in the Object Repository with the properties of the object. It is used to identify the object. There are two types of object repository:
Shared Object Repository:
It can be shared between multiple tests but it does not allow making changes in the repository. Mostly used in Keyword Driven methodology. It is saved with .TSR extension.
Local Object Repository:
This type of object repository is linked with only one test. In this we can perform change in the repository, like changing the properties of the object, adding object in the repository. It is saved with .MTR extension.
Q8) Explain step generator in QTP?
Ans: Step Generator in QTP helps in creating those steps which is performed over the object while testing. Use of Step Generator in QTP:
Help in debugging the script by making use of Break.
To add those step which we forget to perform while recording.
To ensure that objects exist in the repository
To add up step in the function library.
Q9) Explain the use of Action Split in QTP.
Ans: Action Split: It is used to split the action into two parts. There are two type of split an action:
Splitting into two sibling actions: Both split actions are independent of each other.
Splitting into Parent-Child nested action: In this second split action is only called after the execution of the parent split action. Child split action depends upon the parent split action.
QTP generated the duplicate copy of the object repository when we perform the Split action. We can add object to anyone spilt action which is not added into another split action’s repository.
Q10) What is the purpose of loading QTP Add-Ins?
Ans: Add-Ins: these are small programs or files which can be added to a computer in order to enhance the capabilities of the system. The purposes of loading Add-Ins into QTP are following:
To increase the capabilities of the system.
To improve the graphics quality, communications interface.
To load the particular function into the memory.
To excess only those functions that is required for the execution of the script.
Interested in mastering QTP Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on QTP Training.
Q11) What is a data-driven test in QTP?
Ans:Data-Driven is an automation testing part in which test input or output values, these values are read from data files. It is performed when the values are changing by the time. The different data files may include data pools. The data is then loaded into variables in recorded or manually coded scripts. In QTP to perform the data to drive the test, we use the parameterization process. When we do data-driven test, we perform two extra steps:
Converting the test to a data-driven test.
Creating a corresponding data table.
Q12) How to use Parameterization in QTP?
Ans: It is the process of making use of different values in place of recorded values which is replaced by variable which contains different values that can be used during the execution of the scripts. QTP enable us with different type of Parameterization, passing of data:
Using Loop statement.
Dynamically test data submission
Using data table.
Fetching data from external files.
Fetching data from databases.
By taking test data front end(GUI)
Q13) Is it possible to call from one action to another action in QTP?
Ans: Yes, QTP enables us to call from one action to another action. There are two ways of calling action:
Call to Copy of action: in this, we generate the copy of action in our repository which enables us to perform changes to the copy of action.
Call to Existing action: we call to action which is made up earlier. This generates the reference to the action. We can access the action in read-only mode. In this, no copy of the existing script and data table is made.
Q14) Explain different types of action in QTP.
Ans: When generating the test script, it includes only one action. Action contains the number of steps to be performed on the application to test the application.
There are three types of action in QTP:
1. Non-Reusable action: it can be called by test only once in which it is stored.
2. Reusable action:it can be called by test multiple times in which it is stored.
3. External action: it is reusable action but stored in an external test. We can call external action but it will be available in read-only mode we cannot perform any change to the External Action.
Q15) What are the advantages of test automation?
Ans:
Time – It produces quick results
No Manual intervention
Cost-effective
Not prone to human errors
Q16) If the object hierarchy is changing from build to build, then how you will handle that condition?
Ans: In this case, descriptive programming can be used instead of having an OR. Even while descriptive programming tries to use regular expressions to identify the unique property of the objects.
Q17) What is the difference between the Run time object and the Test object?
Ans: The difference between the Run time Object and the Test objects are:
Run time objects are actual objects in the application whereas test objects are references of the actual object.
Run time objects always have the same name whereas the test object name varies in a different environment.
Test objects are used to identify the actual object in the application which is run-time objects.
The run-time object resides in the application whereas the test object resides in the object repository.
Q18) Explain Measuring Transaction.
Ans: Measuring transaction means that to measure how much time it takes to execute a set of step over the application. A transaction is a collection of steps that we are intended to know how much time it takes to execute. We can define the transaction by enclosing the set of steps with the start transaction and end transaction.
Start transaction: after the encounter of start transaction time measurement start.
End transaction: it is used to stop the time measurement.
Q19) Explain different checkpoints in QTP.
Ans: Checkpoint is a point where QTP current value or property of the object with the expected value or property of the object. When we insert the checkpoint in the test, then in the keyword view checkpoint is added in front of the current row and in the expert view a checkpoint statement is added. QTP enable us with the following types of checkpoint:
Standard Checkpoint: check properties of objects like buttons, combo boxes, lists etc.
Text Checkpoint: check text is displayed in the correct place.
Text Area Checkpoint: check text is displayed in a specific area.
Accessibility Checkpoint: used to determine a website that is not as per W3C guidelines.
Page Checkpoint: checks properties of the webpage.
Database Checkpoint:check the content of the database.
XML Checkpoint: check XML content.
Q20) Describe the Synchronization Point.
Ans: Synchronization Point: When the application response speed is not the same as the test execution speed this may cause an error. In order to remove this error we use Synchronization point. Synchronization is done by making a QTP test to wait until the application is ready for execution. When we insert the Synchronization point in the test then QTP generates the WaitProperty Statement in the ExpertView. For synchronization, we can use:
Exist statement
Wait statement.
Increase the defaulted time of QTP waits for the web page to load.
Change in default timeout setting.
Q21) What are the expert view and keyword view?
Ans:
Expert View: It contains the steps performed over the application in VBScript language.
Expert view enables us to edit the script.
In keyword view, a row exist for each object and method which is mentioned in Expert View.
Keyword View: contains the steps executed on the application in keyword-driven tabular form in the English language.
Keyword View contains four fields: ITEM, Operation, Value, and Document.
By selecting items and operations we can create and modify tests.
Q22) What is Keyword Driven Framework?
Ans: In Keyword driven framework the QTP executed script which is written in the Excel sheet with the help of Driver Script. For making Keyword Driven Framework we have two ways:
Specify Script Values Directly in Excel
Write Global Functions to perform the action on the application as function keywords in Excel.
Q23) What are the benefits of QTP?
Ans: The benefits of QTP are:
Standalone tool and integrated with Quality Center.
Testing results stored in the database automatically can be used for analyzing system performance.
Supports Keyword driven testing.
QTP Identifies objects, even if they change from build to build.
By using QTP, Test execution time and cost will reduce.
Suitable for both client-server and web-based application
Better error handling mechanism
Excellent data-driven testing features
Q24) What are the disadvantages of recording test cases in QTP?
Ans: Following are the Disadvantage of recording test cases in QTP
Occupies lot of space results in reducing QTP performance.
Updating test is difficult.
Internal to the QTP, which may cause corrupted.
Q25) What are the expert view and keyword view?
Ans:
Expert View: It contains the steps performed over the application in VBScript language.
Expert view enables us to edit the script.
In keyword view, a row exists for each object and method which is mentioned in Expert View.
Keyword View: contains the steps executed on the application in keyword-driven tabular form in the English language.
Keyword View contains four fields: ITEM, Operation, Value, and Document.
Selecting items and operations we can create and modify tests.
Q26) What is the process of synchronizing QTP and AUT?
Ans: We can synchronize QTP and AUT by applying any one of the following methods:
Q27) What is the difference between design time and runtime data table?
Ans: The differences between the Design time and Run timetable are:
Design time tables are visible in QTP main test but Run time table is visible in Test Result Window.
Design time table is created before the execution of test whereas Run time table is created after execution of test.
Design time table referred to the external data but Run time table represent actual design table in the application.
Q28) What is the difference between Shared and Local Object Repositories?
Ans: The difference between Shared and Local Object Repository are:
Shared OR can be shared between multiple tests whereas Local OR can only link with one test.
Shared OR does not allow making changes in the repository but Local OR enables the tester to perform the change in the object property present in the Object Repository or add an object in OR.
Mostly used in Keyword Driven methodology. It is saved with.TSR extension where as Local OR is saved with.MTR extension.
Q29) What are the shot cut keys for the following?
Ans:
Normal Recording:
F3 Run the test script:
F5 To stop the recording:
F4 For Analog Recording:
Ctrl+Shift+F4 Low Level Recording:
Ctrl+Shift+F3 To switch between Tree View and Expert View:
Ctrl+Tab
Q30) What is the recovery scenario in QTP?
Ans: While executing a test, some unexpected errors and events may occur.
To overcome this we take the help of Recovery Scenario.
The Recovery Scenario Consist of the Following:
Trigger Event: when unexpected events or errors invoke.
Recovery Operation: Operation needed to perform for running the remaining test script.
Post-Recovery Test Run Option: after recovering from an unexpected error where to start the remaining test execution
Q31) What are the steps involved in Recovery Scenario Wizard?
Ans: The Recovery Scenario Wizard consists of the following steps:
Defining of a trigger event.
Defining Recovery operation.
Selection of Post Recovery Run.
Specifying either to associate recovery scenario to the current test or all-new test.
Q32) Explain different types of event trigger options.
Ans: In QTP, there are the following types of triggers:
1. POP-UP window: QTP identifies the POP-UP window based on the window title and textual content.
2. Object State: object state is identified by its properties.
3. Test Run Error: when the test run result value is failed it is identified.
4. Application Crash: this state is identified by a predefined list of applications.
Q33) What are the different types of Recovery Operations?
Ans: The following type of Recovery Operation is available in QTP:
Keyboard or mouse operation.
Close Application Process.
Function call.
Restart Microsoft Windows.
Q34) Describe the Function Procedure in VBScript.
Ans:
Function procedure: it consists of steps of statements written in VBScript with some return value.
A function statement is used to declare a name, argument and code.
When no argument is given it takes empty parentheses ().
Name is used to return the value.
SYNTAX of Function Procedure:
[Public][Default][Private] Function name [(arglist)] [Statements]
Ans: You will need to select and load the Java Add-in. Then you can record and work on a Java Tree object just like you would with any other object.
Q36) How to give a call to another action from one action?
Ans: Calling one action from the other can be done by “Inserting a call” to an existing action or by creating a new action. Please refer to tutorial #21 for a detailed explanation.
Q37) How to find Operating system information using the QTP script?
Ans: You can do that with the help of the environment variable. The exact variable is, OS and OS Version is for the version information.
Q38) How you can identify the browser and its information using the QTP script?
Ans: You can identify and act on any browser that you opened again by referring to its ‘creation time’ property and use it like you would with a browser object in your OR.
Q39) How are actions and functions different in QTP?
Ans: Actions have their own Datatables and OR, but functions don’t. More importantly, Functions are a VB Scripting element, not only applicable to QTP. Please refer article 21 a detailed explanation of these.
Q40) How to remove the associated Function library?
Ans: To remove the associated Function Library we can perform any one of the following methods:
METHOD 1:
Select Resource Pane.
Right-click on the function library, and select Remove Function Library.
METHOD 2:
Select Resource Pane,
Select Function Library.
Press the DELETE key.
METHOD 3:
Go to the list of Associated Function Library in the Resource Pane.
Select the Function and click the Remove button.
Q41) What is reusable action?
Ans: An action that can be called multiple times within or outside the same test is called reusable action. By default all actions are reusable.
Q42) What are the different attributes used with Regular Expression?
Ans: The different attributes of Regular Expression are:
Backslash(\): when it is encountered the next character is treated as a literal character.
Period(.): is used to search any single character.
Square Bracket[ ]: is used to search for a single character within a list of characters.
Caret(^): is used to match any character in the list except those specified in the string.
Asterisk(*): to match zero or all occurrences of the preceding characters.
Q43) What is the difference between Global and the action sheet in QTP?
Ans:
Global Sheet: Globally accessible by all tests. Used when we have to perform many actions by using a single script.
Action Sheet: Locally accessible in a test. It is used when only one action is performed with one script.
Q44) Explain XML Checkpoints.
Ans: XML Checkpoints are used for the verification of the current and expect value or properties of the XML documents. A checkpoint fails when actual and expected values or properties are not same.
QTP enables us with three types of XML Checkpoints:
XML Web Page or Frame Checkpoints.
XML File Checkpoints.
XML Test Object Checkpoints.
Q45) How to modify the Text Checkpoint?
Ans: To modify the Checkpoint in QTP we do the following:
Go to Keyword View, Right-Click the Checkpoint.
Select Checkpoint Properties.
Checkpoint properties dialog box open, change the setting.
Q46) Give the Syntax to load Function at run time.
Q47) What is the use of an Ordinal identifier in QTP?
Ans: Ordinal Identifiers are used to initialize the value to the object which is in numeric form and it is used to find out its order with respect to other objects.
QTP enable us with the following types of Ordinal Identifiers:
Index: indicates the order of objects.
Location: determine the location of the object like inside the parent window, frame or dialog box relative to other objects.
Creation Time: determine the order in which the web browser opens.
Q48) How to delete an object from the Object Repository?
To delete an object from the repository:
Go to repository tree, and select the object.
Click the Delete button or select Edit> Delete.
Click Yes to confirm.
Q49) What is Cross-Site Scripting?
Ans: Cross Site Scripting is a thread in the dynamic website. It is also known as XSS. Cross-site scripting occurs when a web application gathers malicious data from a user. The data is collected in the hyperlink form which contains malicious content within it. It allows malicious code to be inserted into the web page. The web page can be a simple HTML code or a client-side script. When the malicious code is inserted into a page and clicked by some user, the malicious code becomes a part of the web request of the user. This request can also execute on the user’s computer and steal information.
Q50) What is contained in the Object Repository?
Ans: The object Repository stores the element identification properties extracted from the application during recording. ID will be generated for each element and this ID is used for Object identification in the application. The object Repository acts as a repository for the application elements. Object Repository contains two properties of each object for identification:
Physical properties description of the object
Logical name of the object.
Q51) The hybrid framework supports Descriptive programming. Is it true?
Ans: Yes. Frameworks are mostly based on how and where you want your test assets to be placed and how they are to be accessed for maximum efficiency. They do not restrict how you write you test itself.
Q52) What are the advantages of the Hybrid framework?
Ans: The hybrid framework is nothing but a combination of frameworks that make you arrive at a solution for your testing needs by taking what works best for your scenario. The obvious advantage is the versatility. It can be tailored to meet any testing project’s needs.
Q53) What is Procedure or Subroutine in VBScript?
Ans: Sub procedure is a series of VB Script statements (enclosed by Sub and End Sub statements) that perform actions but don’t return a value. A Sub procedure can take arguments (constants, variables, or expressions that are passed by a calling procedure). If a Subprocedure has no arguments, its Sub statement must include an empty set of parentheses ().
Q54) Is VBScript Case sensitive or Case insensitive?
Ans: It is not case-sensitive with respect to command and variable names. Everything else, like strings (text), is.
Q55) What is the difference between the keyword view and the expert view?
Ans: They are two ways QTP shows your test. Each one has its own features and caters to users of different levels of expertise.
Keyword view: This is a tabular representation of your test that has information like the Item, Operation, Data and Comments.
Expert view: This displays your test in terms of the actual lines of code. It is more like a VB Script editor and is used by advanced users.
1a9:T61b,
Cross Table Load
A cross table is a common type of table featuring a matrix of values between two or more orthogonal lists of header data, of which one is used as columnd headers. A typical example could be to have one column per month. To transform a cross table into a straight table, use a crosstable prefix. The result is that the column headers (e.g. month names) will be stored in one field - the attribute field - and the column data (month numbers) will be stored in a second field: the data field.
The syntax is: crosstable (attribute field name, data field name [ , n ] ) ( load statement | select statement ) where: Attribute field name is the field to contain the attribute values.
Data field name is the field to contain the data values. n is the number of qualifier fields preceding the table to be transformed to generic form. Default is 1
1aa:T2375,
Vagrant Boxes are prepackaged development environments that are the foundation of Vagrant. In most cases, this is usually just astripped and naked operating system such as Ubuntu, Debian, or CentOS. Boxes exist with the intention to be provisioned with additional features like Apache and PHP using tools like Chef or Puppet. This is really powerful, but it can be time consuming to setup the first configuration and difficult for beginners. Plus, not everyone has the skill-set of a system admin or work with a huge collaborative team. This post will describe to you how to create your own prepackaged Vagrant Box from and existing virtual machine. In my opinion, it’s the quickest and easiest way for beginners to get started with Vagrant. This way you’ll be able to reuse it over and over and even share it. I feel this generally goes against the main idea of Vagrant where you provision your development environments from a single config. You generally lose a lot of the debugging and configurability of your development environment, but this should be helpful for plenty of developers, teams, and projects regardless.
Choose a Box
The first thing you’ll need to do is pick a box that you want to build from. The Vagrant Cloud lets you easily find boxes that people have shared. We’ll be working off of Hashicorp’s (Vagrant’s) Precise64. This box is a good one to work off of because Chef and Puppet are already installed, plus all the settings we’re configured by the creator(s) of Vagrant.
Initialize and Start the Vagrant Box
After you’ve chosen a box, initialize the Vagrant box. Each one is slightly different, but here’s how to do it for the example we’re doing: vagrant init hashicorp/precise64 This will also create a Vagrant file for you. Now, boot the box with Vagrant by doing (it will need to download if it’s the first time using the it): vagrant up
We’ll now SSH into the box and start customizing it. If you don’t know anything about servers, you can always just use Scotch Boxsince all of this is already done for you. Here’s how to SSH into the box: vagrant ssh Now, we need to setup our server by installing whatever we want on it. This example will install a basic LAMP stack, but you can do whatever you like (Ruby, Nginx, etc.). The point of this article isn’t to teach you how to setup a server, but instead how to turn your virtual environment into a Vagrant Box. So this step might be more involved than what is actually shown: sudo apt-get update sudo apt-get upgrade sudo apt-get install vim sudo apt-get install apache2 sudo apt-get install mysql-server libapache2-mod-auth-mysql php5-mysql sudo mysql_install_db sudo /usr/bin/mysql_secure_installation sudo apt-get install php5 libapache2-mod-php5 php5-mcrypt sudo apt-get install php5-cgi php5-cli php5-curl php5-common php5-gd php5-mysql sudo service apache2 restart
Make the Box as Small as possible
We’re now going to clean up disk space on the VM so when we package it into a new Vagrant box, it’s as clean as possible. First, remove APT cache sudo apt-get clean Then, “zero out” the drive (this is for Ubuntu): sudo dd if=/dev/zero of=/EMPTY bs=1M sudo rm -f /EMPTY Lastly, let’s clear the Bash History and exit the VM: cat /dev/null > ~/.bash_history && history -c && exit
Repackage the VM into a New Vagrant Box
We’re now going to repackage the server we just created into a new Vagrant Base Box. It’s very easy with Vagrant: vagrant package--output mynew.box
Add the Box into Your Vagrant Install
The previous command will have created a “mynew.box” file. You can technically put this wherever you want on your computer. Now, let’s add this new Vagrant Box into Vagrant: vagrant box add mynewbox mynew.box This now will “download” the box into your Vagrant install allowing to initiate this from any folder, but before we do this, let’s delete and remove the Vagrant file we built this box from.
vagrant destroy
rm Vagrantfile
Initialize Your New Vagrant Box
We need to now initialize a Vagrant environment from our brand new box using the same command from earlier but referencing the new Box. vagrant init mynewbox
Customize Your New Vagrantfile
When you initialize the Vagrant environment, it creates a Vagrantfile for you (just like from before). Open the Vagrantfile and delete everything. You can use what was in there as a reference or just use Vagrant’s Official Docs, but we’re going to only use the absolute essentials that I’ve already spelled out for you. Now paste the following bare-bones code into your Vagrantfile: Now let’s create a landing page: vim index.php And add the following line to demo what we just installed with PHP: phpinfo();
Visit Your Site
Now, visit the IP address from the Vagrantfile in your browser. If everything works, you should see a PHP info dump of the index.php file you just created.
Now that you’ve just created your own Vagrant Base Box from an existing one, you should consider sharing it on the Vagrant Cloud. This way other people can download and use it!
1ab:T19d2,
Vagrant with VirtualBox support installation
Virtual Machine
The virtual machine created in VirtualBox can use any configuration you would like, but Vagrant has some hard requirements:
-The first network interface (adapter 1) must be a NAT adapter. Vagrant uses this to connect the first time.
-The MAC address of the first network interface (the NAT adapter) should be noted, since you will need to put it in a Vagrantfile later as the value for config.vm.base_mac. To get this value, use the VirtualBox GUI.
Other than the above, you are free to customize the base virtual machine as you see fit.
Additional Software
In addition to the software that should be installed based on the general guide to creating base boxes, VirtualBox base boxes require some additional software.
VirtualBox Guest Additions
VirtualBox Guest Additions must be installed so that things such as shared folders can function. Installing guest additions also usually improves performance since the guest OS can make some optimizations by knowing it is running within VirtualBox.
Before installing the guest additions, you will need the linux kernel headers and the basic developer tools. On Ubuntu, you can easily install these like so:
Next, make sure that the guest additions image is available by using the GUI and clicking on "Devices" followed by "Install Guest Additions". Then mount the CD-ROM to some location. On Ubuntu, this usually looks like this:
$ sudo mount /dev/cdrom /media/cdrom
Finally, run the shell script that matches your system to install the guest additions. For example, for Linux on x86, it is the following:
$ sudo sh /media/cdrom/VBoxLinuxAdditions.run
If the command succeeds, then the guest additions are now installed!
To install via the command line:
You can find the appropriate guest additions version to match your VirtualBox version by selecting the appropriate version here. The examples below use 4.3.8, which was the latest VirtualBox version at the time of writing.
If you did not install a Desktop environment when you installed the operating system, as recommended to reduce size, the install of the VirtualBox additions should warn you about the lack of OpenGL or Window System Drivers, but you can safely ignore this.
If the commands succeed, then the guest additions are now installed.
Packing VirtualBox
Vagrant includes a simple way to package VirtualBox base boxes. Once you've installed all the software you want to install, you can run this command:
$ vagrant package --base my-virtual-machine
Where "my-virtual-machine" is replaced by the name of the virtual machine in VirtualBox to package as a base box.
It will take a few minutes, but after it is complete, a file "package.box" should be in your working directory which is the new base box. At this point, you've successfully created a base box.
Raw Contents
This section documents the actual raw contents of the box file. This is not as useful when creating a base box but can be useful in debugging issues if necessary.
A VirtualBox base box is an archive of the resulting files of exporting a VirtualBox virtual machine. Here is an example of what is contained in such a box:
In addition to the files from exporting a VirtualBox VM, there is the "metadata.json" file used by Vagrant itself.
Also, there is a "Vagrantfile." This contains some configuration to properly set the MAC address of the NAT network device, since VirtualBox requires this to be correct in order to function properly. If you are not using vagrant package --base above, you will have to set theconfig.vm.base_mac setting in this Vagrantfile to the MAC address of the NAT device without colons.
When bringing up a VirtualBox backed machine, Vagrant imports the "box.ovf" file found in the box contents.
1ac:T3467,
Virtualization
Virtualization is a software layer between Hardware and OperatingSystem.
Virtualization allows multiple Operating System (OS)instances to run concurrently on a single computer.
A SCSI disk,FibreChannelLUN, SCSI disk, orRAIDLUN withunpartitionedspace: SATA, SCSI, SAS
Installation of ESXI-5.0 on X86 hardware
By Default Partitionare Created by hypervisor itself, for the olderversion of ESXpartition areusedtocreatemanually.
Space Occupied by all the partitions is 5GB
Here Changethe IP address from DHCP to Static Ip address.
At TekSlate, we offer resources that help you in learning various IT courses.
We avail both written material and demo video tutorials. To gain in-depth knowledge with practical experience,
then explore VMware Training.
Ans: SAP is the name of the company founded in 1972 under the German name (Systems, Applications, and Products in Data Processing) is the leading ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) software package.
Ans: SAP Testing is about testing the functionality of various SAP modules to ensure that they are performing as per the configuration. SAP system undergoes various changes like patch management and fixes, new module implementations and various other configuration changes. All these raise a need for Regression testing to be performed in SAP environments. SAP testing automation tools like SAP TAO can be used for this purpose and are recommended by SAP for testing.
Q3) What is ERP?
Ans: ERP is a package with the techniques and concepts for the integrated management of the business as a whole, for effective use of management resources, and to improve the efficiency of an enterprise. Initially, ERP was targeted for the manufacturing industry mainly for planning and managing core businesses like production and financial market. As the growth and merits of ERP package ERP software is designed for the basic process of a company from manufacturing to small shops with a target of integrating information across the company.
Q4) Different types of ERP?
Ans: SAP, BAAN, JD Edwards, Oracle Financials, Siebel, PeopleSoft. Among all the ERP’s most companies implemented or trying to implement SAP because of a number of advantages over other ERP packages.
Ans: The benefits of performing SAP Testing are manifold. They are as follows
System Validation: SAP Testing involves complete end-to-end testing and validation of all SAP modules in the SAP ERP environment.
Quality and Revenue: SAP Testing is output-based testing and not like conventional testing methods which are input based it ensures the quality of the SAP system and also focuses on the revenue and cost of the organization.
Cost and Predictability: SAP Testing involves reducing the SAP development costs and improving predictability.
Compliance Requirement: SAP Testing ensures that SAP implementation is meeting the new compliance requirements in a specific organization and all modules are working as per the expected configuration.
New Implementation and Configuration Changes: There are different types of changes implemented in the SAP system, like patches and fixes, new implementation, and configurational changes. SAP testing ensures that all the modules are performing as per requirement in this dynamic system environment.
Integration: SAP testing is performed to test various reports, data flows and workflows, GUI forms, etc. It is used to check system integration between different modules. For example, if an order posting is done that requires action in Sales and Distribution, MM and FICO so SAP testing check the integration between these systems.
Performance: It is also used to ensure that the system will be able to meet the Service Level agreements, time taken by the system to perform specific actions, the performance of the system, etc.
Q6) Explain the concept of "Business Content" in the SAP Business Information Warehouse.
Ans: Business Content is a preconfigured set of role and task-relevant information models based on consistent Metadata in the SAP Business Information Warehouse. Business Content provides selected roles within a company with the information they need to carry out their tasks. These information models essentially contain roles, workbooks, queries, InfoSources, InfoCubes, key figures, characteristics, update rules and extractors for SAP R/3, mySAP.com Business Applications and other selected applications.
Q7) Why do you usually choose to implement SAP?
Ans: There are a number of technical reasons a number of companies are planning to implement SAP. It's highly configurable, highly secure data handling, min data redundancy, max data consistency, you can capitalize on economics of sales like purchasing and tight integration-cross function.
Ans: SAP testing can be performed on the following modules:
SAP Material Management
SAP Financial Accounting and Controlling
SAP Sales and Distribution
SAP Human Resource
SAP Supply Chain Management
SAP Plant Management
Ans:Some of the automated testing tools are:
HP Quick Test Professional (QTP)
Selenium
SAP TAO
ECATT
IBM Rational Functional Tester
WinRunner
and LoadRunner
Ans: The different stages that come under Software Testing Life Cycle are
Requirements phase
Test Planning
Test Analysis
Test Design Phase
Test Implementation
Test Execution Phase
and Test Closure Phase
Q11) Can BW run without an SAP R/3 implementation?
Ans: Certainly. You can run BW without R/3 implementation. You can use predefined business content in BW using your non-SAP data. Here you simply need to map the transfer structures associated with BW data sources (InfoCubes, ODS tables) to the inbound data files or use 3rd part tool to connect your flat files and other data sources and load data in BW. Several third-party ETL products such as Acta, Informatica, DataStage and others will have been certified to load data in BW.
Q12) What is IDES?
Ans: International Demonstration and Education System. A sample application is provided for faster learning and implementation.
Q13) What is WF and its importance?
Ans: Business Work Flow: Tool for automatic control and execution of cross-application processes. This involves coordinating the persons involved, the work steps required, and the data, which needs to be processed (business objects). The main advantage is a reduction in throughput times and the costs involved in managing business processes. Transparency and quality are enhanced by its use.
Q14) What is SAP R/3?
Ans: A third-generation set of highly integrated software modules that perform common business functions based on multinational leading practice. Takes care of any enterprise however diverse in operation, spread over the world. In the R/3 system, all the three servers like the presentation, application server and database server are located in different systems.
Q15) What are presentation, application and database servers in SAP R/3?
Ans: The application layer of an R/3 System is made up of the application servers and the message server. Application programs in an R/3 System are run on application servers. The application servers communicate with the presentation components, the database, and also with each other, using the message server. All the data are stored in a centralized server. This server is called a database server.
SAP MM Testing Interview Questions
Q16) What should be the approach for writing a BDC program?
Ans: Convert the legacy system data to a flat file and convert the flat file into an internal table. Transfer the flat file into a sap system called "sap data transfer". Call transaction(Write the program explicitly) or create sessions (sessions are created and processed if successful data will transfer).
Q17) Explain open SQL vs native SQL.
Ans: ABAP Native SQL allows you to include database-specific SQL statements in an ABAP program. Most ABAP programs containing database-specific SQL statements do not run with different databases. If different databases are involved, use Open SQL. To execute ABAP Native SQL in an ABAP program, use the statement EXEC. Open SQL (Subset of standard SQL statements), allows you to access all database tables available in the R/3 System, regardless of the manufacturer. To avoid conflicts between database tables and to keep ABAP programs independent from the database system used, SAP has generated its own set of SQL statements known as Open SQL.
Q18) What are datasets?
Ans: The sequential files (processed on the application server) are called datasets. They are used for file handling in SAP.
Q19) What are internal tables check tables, value tables, and transparent tables?
Ans: Internal table: It is a standard data type object, which exists only during the runtime of the program. Check table: The check table will be at field level checking. Value table: Value table will be at domain level checking ex: scarr table is check table for carried. Transparent table: - Exists with the same structure both in the dictionary as well as in the database exactly with the same data and fields.
Q20) What are the major benefits of reporting with BW over R/3?
Ans: Would it be sufficient just to Web-enable R/3 Reports? - Performance — Heavy reporting along with regular OLTP transactions can produce a lot of loads both on the R/3 and the database (CPU, memory, disks, etc). Just take a look at the load put on your system during a month-end, quarter-end, or year-end — now imagine that occurring even more frequently. Data analysis — BW uses a Data Warehouse and OLAP concepts for storing and analyzing data, whereas R/3 was designed for transaction processing. With a lot of work you can get the same analysis out of R/3 but most likely would be easier from a BW.
Q21) How can an ERP such as SAP help a business owner learn more about how the business operates?
Ans: In order to use an ERP system, a business person must understand the business processes and how they work together from one functional area to the other. This knowledge gives the student a much deeper understanding of how a business operates. Using SAP as a tool to learn about ERP systems will require that the people understand the business processes and how they integrate.
Q22) What is the difference between OLAP and Data Mining?
Ans: OLAP - Online Analytical processing is a reporting tool configured to understand your database schema, composition facts and dimensions. By simple point-n-clicking, a user can run any number of canned or user-designed reports without having to know anything about SQL or the schema. Because of that prior configuration, the OLAP engine "builds" and executes the appropriate SQL. Mining is to build the application to specifically look at detailed analyses, often algorithmic; even more often misappropriate called "reporting.
Ans: Unit testing is used to test the functionality of various components in a SAP system. It is performed by domain and configuration experts who know the functionality of each unit in a system.
Example: To create a sales order and to save it. To perform Unit testing for this task, the tester should know that the sales order can be saved using the SAP organization elements like customer master data, partner functions, material master data, company code, credit control area, sales organization, etc.
Ans: Scenario-based testing, as the name suggests, is performed as per specific business cases.
Example: Suppose there are a few tasks that are specific to a customer segment or a given product line or a set of services. For these specific lines of targets, you have different scenarios you need to test.
This testing is also performed in the development environment, an argument can be made to say this is a test case you would cover in system testing.
Q25) What is â€Å"Extended Star Schema†and how did it emerge?
Ans: The Star Schema consists of the Dimension Tables and the Fact Table. The Master Data related tables are kept in separate tables, which have reference to the characteristics in the dimension table(s). These separate tables for master data are termed the Extended Star Schema.
Q26) Define Meta data, Master data and Transaction data
Ans: Metadata: Data that describes the structure of data or Meta Objects is called Metadata. In other words, data about data is known as Meta Data. Master Data: Master data is data that remains unchanged over a long period of time. It contains information that is always needed in the same way. Characteristics can bear master data in BW. With master data, you are dealing with attributes, texts or hierarchies. Transaction data: Data relating to the day-to-day transactions is the Transaction data.
Q27) Name some drawbacks of SAP
Ans: Interfaces are a huge problem, Determine where master data resides, Expensive, very complex, demands highly trained staff, and lengthy implementation time.
Q28) What is Bex?
Ans: Bex stands for Business Explorer. Bex enables end users to locate reports, view reports, analyze information and can execute queries. The queries in the workbook can be saved to their respective roles in the Bex browser. Bex has the following components: Bex Browser, Bex analyzer, Bex Map, and Bex Web.
Q29) What are variables?
Ans: Variables are parameters of a query that are set in the parameter query definition and are not filled with values until the queries are inserted into workbooks. There are different types of variables that are used in different applications: Characteristics variables, Hierarchies and hierarchy nodes, Texts, Formulas, Processing types, User entry/Default type, and Replacement Paths.
Q30) What is AWB?What is its purpose?
Ans: AWB stands for Administrator WorkBench. AWB is a tool for controlling, monitoring and maintaining all the processes connected with data staging and processing in the business information warehousing.
SAP FICO Testing Interview Questions
Q31) What is the significance of ODS in BIW?
Ans: An ODS Object serves to store consolidated and debugged transaction data on a document level (atomic level). It describes a consolidated dataset from one or more InfoSources. This dataset can be analyzed with a BEx Query or InfoSet Query. The data of an ODS Object can be updated with a delta update into InfoCubes and/or other ODS Objects in the same system or across systems. In contrast to multi-dimensional data storage with InfoCubes, the data in ODS Objects is stored in transparent, flat database tables.
Q32) What are the different types of source systems?
Ans: SAP R/3 Source Systems, SAP BW, Flat Files and External Systems.
Q33) What is Extractor?
Ans: Extractors are a data retrieval mechanism in the SAP source system. Which can fill the extract structure of a data source with the data from the SAP source system datasets. The extractor may be able to supply data to more fields than exist in the extract structure.
Ans: Interface testing ensures that a business process on an SAP system runs automatically. Ideally, interface testing involves larger testing activities as a project progresses. Interface testing shows that triggering works, the data selection is accurate and complete, the data transfer is successful, and the receiver is able to consume the sent data.
Ans: SAP UAT is used to ensure that end-users are able to perform assigned job functions with the new system. The important aspect of this testing is to understand the business requirement and to ensure that the expected features, functions, and capabilities are available.
Ans: Performance testing identifies bottlenecks and coding inefficiencies in a SAP system. It is carried out to check −
Whether the system response time is acceptable as per the business requirement
Whether periodic processes are running within the permissible time
Whether the expected concurrent user load can be supported
Ans: Security and Authorizations Testing is used to ensure that the users are only able to execute transactions and access appropriate data that is relevant to their project.
As with the implementation of Security standards, this is really important to test if security and authorization are placed in a system. Test IDs for job roles are created and used to both confirm what a user can do and what a user cannot do.
Ans: This testing is usually performed once in a project lifecycle. The term “cutover” means a full-scale execution of all tasks involved to extract data from legacy systems and then perform any kind of data conversion, load the results into the SAP system and fully validate the results, including a user sign-off.
Ans: SAP Regression Testing is used to find new functionalities and to test the old functionalities in a system when it is upgraded or a new system is set up. The key role of regression testing is to test the existing functionality and newly updated configuration and code base.
When you upgrade your SAP system or apply a patch, it shouldn’t affect the functionality that is expected to be performed by users and check new features that are supposed to be introduced in a new release.
Ans: SAP testing navigation ensures that you cover each module of your SAP system and at least one test to be performed for each functionality.
It also reduces the manual testing effort and covers most of the testing paths in an SAP system. OPA tests can be performed to check SAP Testing - Navigation.
Ans: Screen flow logic in SAP Testing is like an ABAP code and it is used to contain the processing blocks. It contains a procedural part of the screen and is created in screen painter and this screen painter is similar to an ABAP editor.
Logistics Modules − Material Management (MM), Plant Maintenance (PM), Sales and Distribution (SD), Quality Management (QM), etc.
Human Resource Management − Accounting Payroll, Time Management, Training and Event Management.
Ans: SAP Test-cases are required to perform a check on the installation and configuration of the SAP system, any new implementation, Multilanguage and device testing, intranet testing, real-time testing, etc.
Since an ERP system is a common centralized system and is used by multiple users simultaneously in real-time, it creates a need to write test cases with a lot of effort and dedication.
ERP systems also involve various FI transactions, so each test case should cover the scope of all the configuration and implementation parts. Test data should be passed carefully and each test should have a column with name output data.
Ans: SAP Test Acceleration and Optimization TAO 2.0 is a tool that is used to create automatic test cases during Regression testing of a system. It helps SAP customers to create different test components from the screens of a transaction and parameterizes them.
These test components are created normally for one transaction code and later can be combined to test scenarios. It can be easily integrated to the Business Process Change Analyzer in SAP Solution Manager.
Ans: Process Flow Analyzer is used to automatically find out the user interfaces used in transaction codes executed in an SAP system. It automatically creates the test components and uploads them to Quality Center. It is also used to identify the sequence of test components as per user actions and the creation of spreadsheet values.
Ans: Consolidate is known as a process to combine SAP TAO components with inbuilt components to create test scenarios as single transactional business components. It allows you to collect multiple test components into one test.
Ans: Go to SAP TAO and log in and select SAP SOLMAN in the list. This list of systems is SAP TAO is fetched from the configuration file of SAP logon. So to add a system in SAP TAO, you need to add a new system in SAP Logon and refresh the list in TAO.
Enter the login credentials and click on login.
SAP TAO will be connected to SAP Solution Manager and the TAO configuration wizard will open up.
1ae:T5f17,
What are major differences between Oracle and Greenplum?
Oracle is relational database. Greenplum is MPP nature. Greenplum is shared nothing architecture. There are many other differences in terms of functionality and behaviour. What is good and bad about the Greenplum, compared to Oracle and Greenplum? Greenplum is built on top of Postgresql . It is shared nothing, MPP architecture best for data warehousing env. Good for big data analytics purpose. Oracle is an all purpose database. How to find errors / fatal from log files? grep for ERRORS, FATAL, SIGSEGV in pg_logs directory. What is vacuum and when should I run this? VACUUM reclaims storage occupied by deleted tuples. In normal GPDB operation, tuples that are deleted or obsoleted by an update are not physically removed from their table. They remain present on disk until a VACUUM is done. Therefore, it is necessary to do VACUUM periodically, especially on frequently-updated table. What is difference between vacuum and vacuum full? Unless you need to return space to the OS so that other tables or other parts of the system can use that space, you should use VACUUM instead of VACUUM FULL. VACUUM FULL is only needed when you have a table that is mostly dead rows, that is, the vast majority of its contents have been deleted. Even then, there is no point using VACUUM FULL unless you urgently need that disk space back for other things or you expect that the table will never again grow to its past size. Do not use it for table optimization or periodic maintenance as it is counterproductive. What is Analyze and how frequence should I run this? ANALYZE collects statistics about the contents of tables in the database, and stores the results in the system table pg_statistic. Subsequently, the query planner uses these statistics to help determine the most efficient execution plans for queries. It is a good idea to run ANALYZE periodically, or just after making major changes in the contents of a table. Accurate statistics will help the query planner to choose the most appropriate query plan, and thereby improve the speed of query processing. A common strategy is to run VACUUM and ANALYZE once a day during a low-usage time of day. What is resource queues? Resource queues are used to manager Greenplum database workload management. All user / queries can be prioritized using Resource queues. Refer Admin guide for more details. What is gp_toolkit? The gp_toolkit is a database schema, which has many tables, views and functions to better manage Greenplum Database when DB is up. In 3.x earlier versions it was referred to as gp_jetpack. How to generate DDL for a table? Use pg_dump utility to generate DDL. Example: pg_dump -t njonna.accounts -s -f ddl_accounts.sql Where: -f ddl_accounts.sql is output file. -t njonna.accounts is table name with schema njonna. -s dump only schema no data What are the tools available in Greenplum to take backup and restores? For non-parallel backups: Use postgres utililities (pg_dump, pg_dumpall for backup, and pg_restore for restore). Another useful command for getting data out of database is the COPY <TABLE> to <File>. For parallel backups: gp_dump and gpcrondump for backups and gp_restore for restore process. How do I clone my production databaes to PreProd / QA environment? If Prod and QA on same GPDB cluster, use CREATE database <Clone_DBname> template <Source_DB>. If Prod and QA are on different clusters, use backup and restore utilities. What is difference between pg_dump and gp_dump? pg_dump - Non-parallel backup utility, you need big file system where backup will be created in the master node only. gp_dump - Parallel backup utility. Backup will be created in master and segments file system. What is gpcrondump? A wrapper utility for gp_dump, which can be called directly or from a crontab entry. Example: gpcrondump -x <database_name> What are the backup options available at OS level? Solaris: zfs snapshots at file system level. All OS: gpcrondump / gp_dump. My SQL query is running very slow, it was running fine yesterday what should I do? -Check that your connection to the Greenplum cluster is still good if you are using a remote client. You can do this by running the SQL locally to the GP cluster. -Check that the system tables and user tables involved are not bloated or skewed. Read jetpack or Greenplum toolkit documentation about how to do this. -Check with your DBA that the Greenplum interconnect is still performing correctly. This can be done by checking for dropped packets on the interconnect "netstat -i" and by running gpcheckperf.It is also possible that a segment is experiencing hardware problems, which can be found in the output of dmesg or in /var/log/messages* (Linux) and /var/adm/messages* (Solaris).
These core tutorials will help you to learn the Greenplum Interview Questions. For an in-depth
understanding and practical experience, explore Online Greenplum Training.
How to turn on timing, and checking how much time a query takes to execute? You can turn in timing per session before you run your SQL with the \timing command. You can run explain analyze against your SQL statement to get the timing. How to trace child processes on segment server? When session start in master and segments, all the child processes in segments will be identified with master session_id connection string (con+sess_id). For example: gpdb=# select * from pg_Stat_activity; datid | datname | procpid | sess_id |.. .. -------+---------+---------+---------+ 16986 | gpdb | 18162 | 76134 | .. .. In all segments child processes for session 76134: [gpadmin@stinger2]/export/home/gpadmin/gp40>gpssh -f host_file /usr/ucb/ps -auxww |grep con76134 [stinger2] gpadmin 18162 1.7 6.0386000124480 ? S 09:57:55 0:04 postgres: port 4000, gpadmin gpdb [local] con76134 [local] cmd3 CREATE DATABASE....................................... [stinger2] gpadmin 18625 0.3 2.726056455932 ? S 10:01:56 0:01 postgres: port 40000, gpadmin gpdb 10.5.202.12(18864) con76134 seg0 cmd4 MPPEXEC UTILITY............................... [stinger2] gpadmin 18669 0.0 0.1 3624 752 pts/2 S 10:02:36 0:00 grep con76134 [stinger3] gpadmin 22289 0.8 9.4531860196404 ? S 09:36:20 0:05 postgres: port 40000, gpadmin gpdb 10.5.202.12(18866) con76134 seg1 cmd4 MPPEXEC UTILITY............................... How to check if my session queries are running or waiting on locks? Check "waiting" column in pg_stat_activity and "granted" column in pg_locks for any object level locks. What kind of locks should we focus on MPP system when system is slow /hung? Locks that are held for a very long time and multiple other queries are waiting for that lock also. How do I monitor user activity history in Greenplum database ? Use Greenplum performance monitor (gpperfmon), which has GUI to monitor and query performance history. What is Greenplum performance monitor and how to install ? Its a monitoring tool that collects statistics on system and query performance and builds historical data. when the client connects does he connect to the Master or segment node? Master.
Can you explain the process of data migration from Oracle to Greenplum? There are many ways. Simplest steps are Unload data into csv files, create tables in greenplum database corresponding to Oracle, Create external table, start gpfdist pointing to external table location, Load data into greenplum. You can also use gpload utility. Gpload creates external table at runtime.
Which command would you use to backup a database? gp_dump, gpcrondump, pg_dump, pg_dumpall, copy
When you restore from a backup taken from gp_dump, can you import a table? NO. Yes if during the gp_dump you backed up one table only.Can you open and view a dump file? Which option would you use to export the ddl of the database or table? -s (-s | --schema-only Dump only the object definitions (schema), not data.)When a user submits a query, where does it run in Master or segment nodes? Segment nodesIf you configure your with Master and Segment nodes, where would the data reside? Segment nodes
How would go about query tuning? look at the query plan Look at the stats of the table/tables in the query look at the table distribution keys and joins in the query look at the network performance look at the resource queues look at the interconnect performance look at the join order of tables in the query look at the the query itself i.e. if it can be written in more efficient way
What would you do when a user or users are complaining that a particular query is running slow? 1) look at the query plan 2) Look at the stats of the table/tables in the query 3) look at the table distribution keys and joins in the query 4) look at the network performance 5) look at the resource queues 6) look at the interconnect performance 7) look at the join order of tables in the query 8) look at the the query itself i.e. if it can be written in more efficient wayWhat would you do to gather statistics in the database? as well as reclaim the space? A VACUUM FULL , CTAS . A VACUUM FULL will reclaim all expired row space, but is a very expensive operation and may take an unacceptably long time to finish on large, distributed Greenplum Database tables. If you do get into a situation where the free space map has overflowed, it may be more timely to recreate the table with a CREATE TABLE AS statement and drop the old table. A VACUUM FULL is not recommended in Greenplum Database.
How would you implement compression and explain possible the compression types? There are two types of in-database compression available in the Greenplum Database for append-only tables:1. Table-level compression is applied to an entire table. 2. Column-level compression is applied to a specific column. You can apply different column-level compression algorithms to different columns.How to check distribution policy of a test table sales?
The Describe table sales shows the distribution details. psql>\d sales Table"public.sales" Column | Type | Modifiers --------+---------+----------- id | integer | date | date | Distributed by: (id)
How many user schemas are there in the database? Use"\dn" at psql prompt.When is my tables last analyzed in Greenplum database? In 4.x check pg_stat_operations for all actionname performed on any object. For example,a sales table: gpdb=# select objname,actionname,statime from pg_stat_operations where objname like 'sales'; objname | actionname | statime --------+-----------+------------------------------- sales | CREATE | 2010-10-01 12:18:41.996244-07 sales | ANALYZE | 2010-10-06 14:38:21.933281-07 sales | VACUUM | 2010-10-06 14:38:33.881245-07How to check the size of a table? Table Level: psql> select pg_size_pretty(pg_relation_size('schema.tablename')); Replace schema.tablename with your search table. Table and Index: psql> select pg_size_pretty(pg_total_relation_size('schema.tablename')); Replace schema.tablename with your search table.How to check the Schema size? Schema Level: psql> select schemaname ,round(sum(pg_total_relation_size(schemaname||'.'||tablename))/1024/1024) "Size_MB" from pg_tables where schemaname='SCHEMANAME' group by 1; Replace SCHEMANAME with your schema name.How to check the database size? To see size of specific database: psql> select pg_size_pretty(pg_database_size('DATBASE_NAME')); Example: gpdb=# select pg_size_pretty(pg_database_size('gpdb')); pg_size_pretty ---------------- 24 MB (1 row) To see all database sizes: psql> select datname,pg_size_pretty(pg_database_size(datname)) from pg_database;
How to check partitioned table size including indexes and partitions? Table size with partitions: The following SQL gives you employee_dailly table size, which includes partitions. select schemaname,tablename,round(sum(pg_total_relation_size(schemaname || '.' || partitiontablename))/1024/1024) "MB" from pg_partitions where tablename='employee_daily' group by 1,2; schemaname | tablename | MB -----------+----------------+----- public | employee_daily | 254How do I get help on syntax to alter table? In psql session type \h alter table which will display the syntax: gpdb=# \h alter table How to connect in utility mode? From master host PGOPTIONS='-c gp_session_role=utility' psql -p <port> -h <hostname> Where: port is segment/ master database port. hostname is segment/master hostname.
Where/How to find db logs? Master: Master gpdb logfile is located in the $MASTER_DATA_DIRECTORY/pg_log/ directory and the file name depends on the database "log_filename" parameter.$MASTER_DATA_DIRECTORY/pg_log/gpdb-yyyy-mm-dd_000000.csv -->Log file format with default installation. ~gpadmin/gpAdminLogs/ -->gpstart,gpstop,gpstate and other utility logs. Segments: primary segments run below SQL to see logfile location: select dbid,hostname,datadir||'/pg_log' from gp_configuration where content not in (-1) and isprimary is true; Miror Segments run below SQL to see logfile location: select dbid,hostname,datadir||'/pg_log' from gp_configuration where content not in (-1) and isprimary is false; How to see the list of available functions in Greenplum DB? \df schemaname.functionname (schemaname and function name support wildcard characters) test=# \df pub*.*test* List of functions Schema | Name | Result data type | Argument data types --------+-------------+------------------+--------------------- public | bugtest | integer | public | test | boolean | integer public | test | void | (3 rows)How to check whether Greenplum server is up and running? The gpstate is the utility to check gpdb status. Use gpstate -Q to show a quick status. Refer to gpstate --help for more options. Sample output: [gpadmin@stinger2]/export/home/gpadmin>gpstate -Q gpadmin-[INFO]:-Obtaining GPDB array type, [Brief], please wait... gpadmin-[INFO]:-Obtaining GPDB array type, [Brief], please wait... gpadmin-[INFO]:-Quick Greenplum database status from Master instance only gpadmin-[INFO]:---------------------------------------------------------- gpadmin-[INFO]:-GPDB fault action value = readonly gpadmin-[INFO]:-Valid count in status view = 4 gpadmin-[INFO]:-Invalid count in status view = 0 gpadmin-[INFO]:----------------------------------------------------------How to create a Database?There are two ways to create gpdb database using psql session or the Greenplum createdb utility.Using psql session: gpdb=# \h create database Command: CREATE DATABASE Description: create a new database Syntax: CREATE DATABASE name [ [ WITH ] [ OWNER [=] dbowner ] [ TEMPLATE [=] template ] [ ENCODING [=] encoding ] [ TABLESPACE [=] tablespace ] [ CONNECTION LIMIT [=] connlimit ] ] Using createdb utility: Usage: $GPHOME/bin/createdb --help createdb [OPTION]... [DBNAME] [DESCRIPTION] Options: -D, --tablespace=TABLESPACE default tablespace for the database -e, --echo show the commands being sent to the server -E, --encoding=ENCODING encoding for the database -O, --owner=OWNER database user to own the new database -T, --template=TEMPLATE template database to copy --help show this help, then exit --version output version information, then exit
How do I get a list of databases in a greenplum cluster? gpdb=# \ l (lowercase letter "l") List of databases Name | Owner | Encoding ------{}---------- gpdb | gpadmin | UTF8 gpperfmon | gpadmin | UTF8 postgres | gpadmin | UTF8 template0 | gpadmin | UTF8 template1 | gpadmin | UTF8Check below SQL for more details on dbs. gpdb=# select * from pg_database;
How to delete/drop an existing database in Greenplum? gpdb=# \h DROP Database Command: DROP DATABASE Description: remove a database Syntax:DROP DATABASE [ IF EXISTS ] nameAlso check dropdb utility:$GPHOME/bin/dropdb --help dropdb removes a PostgreSQL database. Usage: dropdb [OPTION]... DBNAMEWhere can I get help on postgres psql commands? In psql session "\ ?" - for all psql session help "\h <SQL Command> " For any SQL syntax help.gpstart failed what should I do? Check gpstart logfile in ~gpadmin/gpAdminLogs/gpstart_yyyymmdd.log Take a look at the pg start log file for more details in $MASTER_DATA_DIRECTORY/pg_log/startup.logWhy do we need gpstop -m and gpstart -m? The gpstart -m command allows you to start the master only and none of the data segments and is used primarily by support to get system level information/configuration. An end user would not regularly or even normally use it. What is the procedure to get rid of mirror segments? There are no utilities available to remove mirrors from Greenplum. You need to make sure all primary segments are good then you can remove the mirror configuration from gp_configuration in 3.x.
How to run gpcheckcat? The gpcheckcat tool is used to check catalog inconsistencies between master and segments. It can be found in the $GPHOME/bin/lib directory: Usage: gpcheckcat <option> [dbname] -? -B parallel: number of worker threads -g dir : generate SQL to rectify catalog corruption, put it in dir -h host : DB host name -p port : DB port number -P passwd : DB password -o : check OID consistency -U uname : DB User Name -v : verbose Example: gpcheckcat gpdb >gpcheckcat_gpdb_logfile.log
What is gpdetective and how do I run it in Greenplum? The gpdetective utility collects information from a running Greenplum Database system and creates a bzip2-compressed tar output file. This output file helps with the diagnosis of Greenplum Database errors or system failures. for more details check help. gpdetective --help
How to delete a standby? To remove the currently configured standby master host from your Greenplum Database system, run the following command in the master only: # gpinitstandby -r How to re-sync a standby? Use this option if you already have a standby master configured, and just want to resynchronize the data between the primary and backup master host. The Greenplum system catalog tables will not be updated.
# gpinitstandby -n (resynchronize)
How to recover an invalid segment? Use the gprecoverseg tool, which will recognize which segments need recovery and will initialize recovery. 3.3.x: o Without "-F" option - First files will be compared, difference found and only different files will be synched (the first stage could last a long time if there are too many files in the data directory) o With "-F" option - Entire data directory will be resynched. 4.0.x: o Without "-F" option - The change tracking log will be sent and applied to the mirror. o With "-F" option - Entire data directory will be resynched.
How to add mirrors to the array? The gpadd mirrors utility configures mirror segment instances for an existing Greenplum Database system that was initially configured with primary segment instances only. For more details check help. # gpaddmirrors --help
How to see primary to mirror mapping? From database catalog following query list configuration on content ID, you can figure out primary and mirror for each content. gpdb=# select * from gp_configuration order by content. Note: starting from GPDB 4.x, gp_segment_configuration table is used instead. gpdb=# select * from gp_segment_configuration order by dbid;
How to start/stop db in admin mode? Admin mode: The gpstart with option (-R) is stands for Admin mode or restricted mode where only super users can connect to database when database opened using this option. utility mode: Utility mode allows you to connect to only individual segments when started using gpstart -m, for example< to connect to only master instance only: PGOPTIONS='-c gp_session_role=utility' psql
How to run gpcheckperf IO/netperf? Create a directory where you have free space and common in all hosts. For network I/O test for each nic card: gpcheckperf -f seg_host_file_nic-1 -r N -d /data/gpcheckperf > seg_host_file_nic_1.out gpcheckperf -f seg_host_file_nic-2 -r N -d /data/gpcheckperf > seg_host_file_nic_2.out For disk I/O: gpcheckperf -f seg_host_file_nic-1 -r ds -D -d /data/gpdb_p1 -d /data/gpdb_p2 -d /data/gpdb_m1 -d /data/gpdb_m2
How to update postgresql.conf and reload it? In GP 4.0 version check gpconfig utility to change postgres.conf parameters. In 3.X version manually change parameters in postgres.conf for more details check Greenplum Administrator's Guide.
How to manage pg_hba.conf? The pg_hba.conf file of the master instance controls client access and authentication to your Greenplum system. Check Greenplum Administrator's Guidefor instructions to add / change contents of this file. How to add new user to the database? Use createuser utility to create users. See createuser --help for more details. You can also use SQL commands in psql prompt to create users. For example: CREATE USER or ROLE <ROLE_NAME> ....
How to create a password free trusted env b/w the all the segment hosts? Use gpssh-exkeys: gpssh-exkeys -h hostname1 -h hostname2 .. -h hostnameN
How to check db version and version at init db? To check version: psql> select version(); or postgres --gp-version To check gp version at install: psql> select * from gp_version_at_initdb;
How to see the value of GUC? By connecting GPDB database using psql query catalog or do show parameter. Example: gpdb# select name,setting from pg_settings where name='GUC'; or gpdb# show <GUC_NAME>;
What is the location of pg_hba/logfile/master_data_directory? cd $MASTER_DATA_DIRECTORY - Master direcoty. pg_hba.conf and postgres.conf location and other GPDB internal directories. cd $MASTER_DATA_DIRECTORY/pg_logs -- Master database logfiles location.
1af:T3219,
J Boss 7 Installation
This is an introduction to the newest JBoss AS 7 which appeared in the download section for the first time in Nov 2010. JBoss application server can be freely downloaded from the community site: http://www.jboss.org/jbossas/downloads/JBoss AS 7 does not come with an installer; it is simply a matter of extracting the compressed archive. After you have installed JBoss, it is wise to perform a simple startup test to validate that there are no major problems with your Java VM/operating system combination. To test your installation, move to the bin directory of your JBOSS_HOME directory and issue the following command:
standalone.bat # Windows users
$ standalone.sh # Linux/Unix users
The above command starts up a JBoss standalone instance that's equivalent of starting the application server with the run.bat/run.sh script used by earlier AS releases. You will notice how amazingly fast is starting the new release of the application server; this is due to the new modular architecture, which only starts up necessary parts of the application server container needed by loaded applications. If you need to customize the startup properties of your application server, then you need to open the standalone.conf (or standalone.conf.bat for the Windows users) where the memory requirements of JBoss are declared. Here's the Linux core section of it:
if [ "x$JAVA_OPTS" = "x" ]; then
JAVA_OPTS="-Xms64m -Xmx512m -XX:MaxPermSize=256m -Dorg.jboss.resolver.
warning=true -Dsun.rmi.dgc.client.gcInterval=3600000 - Dsun.rmi.dgc.
server.gcInterval=3600000"
fi
So, by default, the application server starts with a minimum memory requirement of 64MB of heap space and a maximum of 512MB. This will be just enough to get started, however, if you need to run a core Java EE application on it, you will likely require at least 1GB of heap space or 2GB or more depending on your application type. Generally speaking, 32-bit machines cannot execute a process whose space exceeds 2GB, however on 64 bit machines, there's essentially no limit to process size. You can verify that the server is reachable from the network by simply pointing your browser to the application server's welcome page, which is reachable by default at the well-known address: http://localhost:8080 Connecting to the server with the command line interface If you have been using previous releases of the application server you might have heard about the twiddle command -line utility that queried the MBeans installed on the application server. This utility has been replaced by a more sophisticated interface named the Command Line Interface (CLI), which can be found in the JBOSS_HOME/bin folder. Just launch the jboss-cli.bat script (or jboss-admin.sh for Linux users) and you will be able to manage the application server via a shell interface. Now issue the connect [Ipaddress:port] command to connect to the management interface:
[disconnected /] connect
Connected to localhost:9999
Connecting to a remote host
Inclined to build a profession as JBOSS Developer?
Then here is the blog post on JBOSS Training Program
JBoss AS 7 introduction
After you have installed JBoss, it is wise to perform a simple startup test to validate that there are no major problems with your Java VM/operating system combination. To test your installation, move to the bin directory of your JBOSS_HOME directory and issue the following command:
standalone.bat # Windows users
$ standalone.sh # Linux/Unix users
The above command starts up a JBoss standalone instance that's equivalent of starting the application server with the run.bat/run.sh script used by earlier AS releases. You will notice how amazingly fast is starting the new release of the application server; this is due to the new modular architecture, which only starts up necessary parts of the application server container needed by loaded applications. If you need to customize the startup properties of your application server, then you need to open the standalone.conf (or standalone.conf.bat for the Windows users) where the memory requirements of JBoss are declared. Here's the Linux core section of it:
if [ "x$JAVA_OPTS" = "x" ]; then
JAVA_OPTS="-Xms64m -Xmx512m -XX:MaxPermSize=256m -Dorg.jboss.resolver.
warning=true -Dsun.rmi.dgc.client.gcInterval=3600000 - Dsun.rmi.dgc.
server.gcInterval=3600000"
fi
So, by default, the application server starts with a minimum memory requirement of 64MB of heap space and a maximum of 512MB. This will be just enough to get started, however, if you need to run a core Java EE application on it, you will likely require at least 1GB of heap space or 2GB or more depending on your application type. Generally speaking, 32-bit machines cannot execute a process whose space exceeds 2GB, however on 64 bit machines, there's essentially no limit to process size. You can verify that the server is reachable from the network by simply pointing your browser to the application server's welcome page, which is reachable by default at the well-known address: http://localhost:8080 Connecting to the server with the command line interface If you have been using previous releases of the application server you might have heard about the twiddle command -line utility that queried the MBeans installed on the application server. This utility has been replaced by a more sophisticated interface named the Command Line Interface (CLI), which can be found in the JBOSS_HOME/bin folder. Just launch the jboss-cli.bat script (or jboss-admin.sh for Linux users) and you will be able to manage the application server via a shell interface. Now issue the connect [Ipaddress:port] command to connect to the management interface:
[disconnected /] connect
Connected to localhost:9999
Connecting to a remote host
Starting from the 7.1.0 release there is security enabled by default on the AS 7.1 distribution for remote clients. Thus management interfaces are secured by default to prevent unauthorized remote access whilst still allowing access for local users for an easier out of the box experience.
If you are connecting to a remote host controller, then you need to provide your credentials:
./jboss-cli.sh --connect 192.168.1.1
Authenticating against security realm: 192.168.1.1
Username:admin
Password:*****
Connected to standalone controller at 192.168.1.1:9999
[standalone@192.168.1.1:9999 /]
Stopping JBoss Probably the easiest way to stop JBoss is by sending an interrupt signal with Ctrl+C. However, if your JBoss process was launched in the background or rather is running on another machine (see next), then you can use the CLI interface to issue an immediate shutdown command:
[disconnected /] connect
Connected to localhost:9999
[localhost:9999 /] :shutdown
There is actually one more option to shutdown the application server, which is pretty useful if you need to shut down the server from within a script. This option consists of passing the --connect option to the admin shell, thereby switching off the interactive mode:
jboss-cli.bat --connect command=:shutdown # Windows
jboss-cli.sh --connect command=:shutdown # Unix / Linux
Restarting JBoss The command-line Interface contains a lot of useful commands. One of the most interesting options is the ability to reload all or parts of the AS configuration using the reload command . When issued on the root node path of the AS server, it is able to reload the services configuration:
[disconnected /] connect
Connected to localhost:9999
[localhost:9999 /] :reload
The new server structure The first thing you'll notice when you browse through the application server folders is that its file system is basically divided into two core parts: the dichotomy reflects the distinction between standalone servers and domain servers. A JBoss domain is used to manage and coordinate a set of application server instances.JBoss AS 7 in domain mode spawns multiple JVMs which build up the domain. Besides the AS instances, two more processes are created: the Domain Controller which acts as management control point of the domain and the Host Controller which interacts with the domain Controller to control the lifecycle of the AS instances. Applications are deployed differently depending on the type of server. If you are deploying to a domain of servers then you need the Command Line Interface because the application server needs to be informed on which server group/s the deployment is targeted. Ex. Deploy an application on all server groups:
deploy MyApp.war --all-server-groups
Ex. Deploy an application on one or more server groups (separated by a comma): deploy application.ear --server-groups=main-server-group If you are deploying to a standalone server then you can either use the CLI or drop the deployment unit into the server deployments folder. As soon as the deployer HD scanner detects the application, the module is moved to the work folder of the application, leaving a placeholder Test.war.deployed file in the deployments folder. Note: With the default configuration, packaged archives (.ear, .war, .jar, .sar) are automatically deployed. Exploded archives need adding a .do-deploy empty file in the deployments folder to trigger deployment.
AngularJS is a superheroic JavaScript MVC framework for the Web. We call it superheroic because AngularJS does so much for us that we only have to focus on our core application and let AngularJS take care of everything else. It allows us to apply standard, tried-and-tested software engineering practices traditionally used on the server side in client-side programming to accelerate frontend development. It provides a consistent scalable structure that makes it a breeze to develop large, complex applications as part of a team.
MVC Model View Controller as it is popularly called, is a software design pattern for developing web applications. A Model View Controller pattern is made up of the following three parts −
-Model − It is the lowest level of the pattern responsible for maintaining data.
-View − It is responsible for displaying all or a portion of the data to the user.
-Controller − It is a software Code that controls the interactions between the Model and View.
MVC is popular because it isolates the application logic from the user interface layer and supports separation of concerns. The controller receives all requests for the application and then works with the model to prepare any data needed by the view. The view then uses the data prepared by the controller to generate a final presentable response. The MVC abstraction can be graphically represented as follows.
Desired to gain proficiency on AngularJS ? Explore the blog post on AngularJS Training to become a pro in AngularJS.
Model
The model is responsible for managing application data. It responds to the request from view and to the instructions from controller to update itself.
View
A presentation of data in a particular format, triggered by the controller's decision to present the data. They are script-based template systems such as JSP, ASP, PHP and very easy to integrate with AJAX technology.
Controller
The controller responds to user input and performs interactions on the data model objects. The controller receives input, validates it, and then performs business operations that modify the state of the data model.
For an Indepth knowledge on AngularJS, click on below
What is the computer network? A computer network is basically a group of computers which are connected together to share information and save physical resources. What is a host in computer network? Any device which is connected to a computer network is considered as a host or a node. It can be a computer or a device with its own network card such as printer or router. Which computers are known as client computer in network? The computers which are used to access the resources from network are known as client computers. Client computers usually run desktop version of operating system. What is the other name of client computers? The client computers are also known as workstation. Which computers are known as server computer in network? The computers which provide shared resources to the network are known as server computers. Server computers usually run server version of operating system. What is the NIC? NIC stands for Network Interface Card. NIC is the device which connects computer with network. Can a computer connect with network without NIC? No, a computer cannot connect with network without NIC card. What is the most basic use of Switch in computer network? A Switch is used to connect the multiple computers together for example an 8 ports switch can connect 8 computers in a single network. What term does Microsoft use for peer to peer network? Before Windows 7, it was Workgroup. Form Windows 7 it is replaced with Homegroup. How much computers we can add in a workgroup? Theoretically we can add as much computers as we want in workgroup. But practically we should never add more than ten computers in a workgroup network. What does the term driver refer in computer networking? The driver is the software program which is written specifically for a particular hardware device such as NIC card, Audio card, Video card etc. This software allows that particular device to work with other parts of computer. Without appropriate driver a device will not work as expected. What are the basic differences between Internet, Intranet and Extranet? The terms Internet, Intranet and Extranet are used to describe how a network application should be accessed. In Internet anyone can access the application from anywhere in world. In Intranet only the authorized users from the company for which the application was built can access the application. In Extranet selected external users are allowed to access the application which was built for Internet. What does the term topology defines in computer network? A topology is the physical layout which defines how computers are connected with each other’s in a computer network. Which topology uses a centralized device for connectivity? Star topology uses a centralized device (HUB or Switch) for connectivity. Which topology uses coaxial cable and terminators? Bus topology uses coaxial cable and terminators. A company has offices in Jaipur and Delhi. What type of computer network it will use to connect these offices? WAN (Wide Area Network) network is used to connect the networks which are spread over the different geographical location. Based on physical location what are the two most common network types? LAN (Local Area Network) and WAN (Wide Area Network) are the two most common network types. Does number of computers matter in LAN and WAN? No, number of computers does not matter in LAN and WAN. This categorization is purely based on geographical location of network. For example we may have 1000 computers connected together in a network. If this network is located in a building or a campus, it will be considered as a LAN network. Just like this, we may have a network of only two computers. If one computer is located in one city and other computer is located in another city then this network will be considered as a WAN network. What is the difference between physical topology and logical topology? A physical topology describes how computers are connected with each other’s physically. While a logical topology describes how data is being transmitted over the physical topology. How will you consider a topology which uses HUB as a centralized device to connect all computers? Physically it is a star topology but logically it is a bus topology. Since this topology satisfies the primary requirement of star topology, physically it can be considered as a star topology. But Hub cannot filter the data traffic, so all computers will receive data packets from all computers just like the bus topology. So physically it’s a star topology but logically it’s a bus topology. What is the backbone network? The network which connects two or more networks together is considered as a backbone network. Usually backbone network contains high speed data transferring devices such as routers and switches. Backbone network should never be used for end user connectivity. The network which provides end user connectivity should be connected through the backbone network. What is daisy chaining technique and which topology uses this technique? Star topology uses daisy chaining technique to extend the network. In this technique a hub or switch connects with another hub or switch just like a node of existing topology. Then this hub or switch can be used to connect the more devices in network. How ring topology works? In ring topology all computers connect in a circle. When a computer has some data for another computer, it puts that data packet in circle. Each computer looks at each packet to figure out whether the packet is intended for it or not. If packet is intended for it, it will pick up the packet from ring otherwise passes it to the next computer in the ring. Is ring topology is still used in LAN network? No, the ring topology is no more used in LAN network. Which topology is used in modern LAN Network? Star topology What is the mesh topology and where it is used? In mesh topology all devices are connect with all devices. For example to connect four computers in mesh topology we need 4 x 4 = 16 connections. Mesh topology is used in WAN network to build the alternative paths between networks. What is the signal bouncing issue and how it can be solved? Signal bouncing issue occurs in bus topology. Bus topology uses a coaxial cable to connect the computers. In this topology when computer sends signal, the signal travels in both directions from sending computer. When this signal reaches at the end of the cable, it bounces back and returns in the original direction. This is known as signal bouncing issue. To solve this issue we should use the terminator. Terminator absorbs the signals when they reach to it. This will prevent the signal bouncing issue. What is main advantage of Bus topology? Main advantage of Bus topology is the cost. This topology uses the lowest resources among the other available topologies. A coaxial cable, some connectors and terminators are only we need to build this topology. What are the main disadvantages of Bus topology? Main disadvantage of Bus topology are scalability, troubleshooting and length. A single break in main cable is enough to bring the entire network down. To add worse any loose terminator will also do the same job. Finding a loose terminator or break in the cable is the toughest task. Is bus topology still used in computer network? No, bus topology is no more used in computer network. What are the main advantages of star topology? Main advantages of star topology are scalability, easy to troubleshoot and centralized network component. Adding and removing a device in this topology is much easier than the other topologies. Besides this if there is any break in cable then only the device which is connected with that cable will be down. What are the main disadvantages of star topology? Main disadvantages of star topology are cost and centralized network component. In positive side a centralized device makes administrator life easier but in downside if this device fails then the entire network will be down. What is the hybrid topology? A topology which consist more than one topology is considered as a hybrid topology for example a star-bus topology, in which multiple star topologies are connected through the central bus topology. What are the main advantages of wireless network? Main advantages of wireless network are the lack of cables and mobility of devices. What are the main disadvantages of wireless network? Main disadvantages of wireless network are speed and security. Signal interference, blockage, and interception may slow down a wireless network. Form security point of view, wireless network is considered as less secure network in comparison with wired network. What is the difference between point to point and point to multipoint topology? In point to point topology once system connects with another system directly. In point to multipoint topology all systems connect through the centralized device. What is a drop cable? A drop cable is the cable which connects workstation with backbone cable in bus topology. What is the maximum length of Thicknet coaxial cable? Maximum length of Thicknet coaxial cable is 500 meter. Which cable is known as RG58 cable? The Thinnet cable is known as RG58 cable. What is the maximum length of Thinnet cable? Maximum length of the Thinnet cable is 185 meter. Which cable is known as RG8 cable? The Thicknet cable is known as RG8 cable. Which cable is used as backbone cable in bus topology? The Thicknet (RG8) cable is used as backbone cable in bus topology. Which cable is used to connect workstation with backbone cable? The Thinnet (RG58) cable is used to connect workstation with backbone cable. What is the thickness of the Thinnet cable? The thickness of the Thinnet cable is 0.25 inch. What is the thickness of the Thicknet cable? The thickness of the Thinnet cable is 0.5 inch. Which connector does Thinnet cable use to connect with NIC? The BNC (British naval connector) connector is used to connect the Thinnet cable with NIC. Which connector does Thicknet cable use to connect with NIC? The AUI (Adapter unit interface) connector is used to connect the Thicknet cable with NIC. Which pair of cable is used on computer network RG58 and RG8 or RG59 and RG6? RG58 and RG8 cable is used in computer network while RG59 and RG6 cable is used in TV cable network. Can we use RG59 and RG6 cables in computer network? No we cannot use these cables in computer network. These cables are built for TV cable network. Is coaxial cable still used in computer network? No, coaxial cable is used in bus topology which is no longer used in computer network. What is the maximum distance of UTP cable? Maximum distance of UTP cable is 100 meter. Which connector UTP cable uses to connect with NIC? The connector RJ45 Which cable uses RJ11 connector? The telephone cable uses RJ11 connector. Can we use Cateogry1 (UTP) cable for data transmission? No Category1 (UTP) cable is used only for voice transmission. What is the maximum data transmission speed of Category 2, Category 3 and Category 4 in UTP cable? The maximum transmission speed of Category 2, Category 3 and Category 4 in UTP cable is 4Mbps, 10Mbps and 16Mbps respectively. How many wires does UTP cable has? UTP cable has four pairs of wires. Each pair has two wires, twisted with each other. So there are total eight wires in UTP cable. How many wires are used for data transmission in UTP cable? Only four wires from eight wires are used in data transmission. Which wires are used for data transmission in UTP cable? The wires 1, 2, 3 and 6 are used for data transmission in UTP cable. The wires 1 and 2 are used to transmit the data while wires 3 and 6 are used to receive the data. What is the maximum data transmission speed of Category 5, Category 5e and Category 6 in UTP cable? The maximum transmission speed of Category 5, Category 5e and Category 6 in UTP cable is 100Mbps, 1000Mbps and 10Gbps respectively. How Straight-through UTP cable is built? In Straight through UTP cable all pins are matched on both sides. Pin-1 connects with Pin-1; Pin2 connects Pin2, this way each pin connects with the same number of pin on other side. Where do we use Straight-through UTP cable? The straight-through cable is used to connect the following: - Hub / Switch to System Hub / Switch to Router Hub / Switch to Server straight cable uses Why we cannot use Straight-through UTP cable to connect two systems directly? In straight-through cable the pins which send data from one computer connect with the pins which also send data on other computer. Simple a computer will not be able to pick the data from sending pins. So the transmission will be failed if we directly connect the two systems through the Straight-through UTP cable. To connect two systems directly we have to use the cross-over cable which connects sending pins with receiving pins. How Cross-over cable is built? In Cross-over cable the pins which send data from one end connect with the pins which receive data on other end. Pin1 connects with Pin3 while Pin2 connects with Pin6. Where do we use Cross-over cable? The Cross-over cable is used to connect the following: - Hub/Switch to Hub/Switch System to System Router to Router Router to System use of cross cable What is the Crosstalk? Crosstalk is the interference which generates from adjacent wires. That’s all for this set of interview questions with answers. In next set we will go through the more interview questions with answer.
1b2:T2fdf,
Cicso Nexus Interview Questions
What is NEXUS?
NEXUS is a bi-national, Canada-United States program for pre-approved, low-risk travelers entering Canada or the United States (U.S.) at designated air, land and marine ports of entry.
The program enables its members to enter either country more quickly and easily by using automated self-serve kiosks in the air mode of travel, dedicated lanes in the land mode of travel, and by calling Telephone Reporting Centres (TRCs) prior to arrival in the marine mode of travel.
How do I become a NEXUS member?
To become a member of NEXUS, applicants must:
submit an application and go through a registration process;
satisfy the eligibility criteria;
be admissible to Canada and the U.S.; and
pass risk assessments by both countries.
What are the benefits of using NEXUS?
NEXUS members avoid long line-ups and save time using automated self-serve kiosks at nine Canadian international airports (NEXUS Air).
As an added benefit, when travelling on domestic, U.S.-bound, and select international flights, NEXUS members can be expedited through Canadian Air Transport Security Authority (CATSA) airport security screening lanes located at 16 Canadian airports. Members must present their valid NEXUS card to access the Trusted Traveller CATSA Security Line.
Members also enjoy a quick and simplified entry process using dedicated lanes at 21 designated land border crossings.
When arriving by boat, members travelling to over 450 marine sites in Canada can report by phone to a TRC between 30 minutes and four hours before they arrive.
NEXUS allows Canadian and U.S. border officers to focus their efforts on unknown and potentially higher-risk travelers and their goods.
Is there a fee involved to apply for NEXUS?
Yes. There is a non-refundable processing fee of $50 in Canadian or U.S. funds.
What is iris recognition biometric technology?
Iris recognition biometric technology identifies the unique patterns of the iris (the coloured ring around the pupil of the eye). The technology reads each of the 266 unique characteristics in the human iris. It is safe, secure and non-invasive.
What is the size of a NEXUS card?
A NEXUS card is approximately the same size as a standard credit card or driver's licence.
How does NEXUS in the air mode work?
NEXUS members can use the automated kiosks located in the U.S. Preclearance area and the Canadian inspection services area at participating airports.
Members can proceed directly to the NEXUS self-serve kiosk and do not need to go through the standard queue to speak to a border services officer or CBP officer.
Members stand in front of the self-serve kiosk and look into the adjustable camera and follow the audio instructions so that their irises can be photographed using iris recognition biometric technology (see question below).
Once the CBSA or CBP has confirmed that the photo of the irises matches the one on file, the member will use the touch screen to answer standard customs and immigration questions.
NEXUS members residing in Canada can use a Traveller Declaration Card (TDC) to declare goods and pay for any duties or taxes when entering Canada. Members simply deposit a TDC in a secure TDC box conveniently located near a self-serve kiosk. Any duties or taxes owing will be collected through the credit card information provided on the TDC.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Nexus? Enroll in Instructor-Led live Nexus Training to become Job Ready!
Nexus Switch Interview Questions
Where is NEXUS in the air mode available?
NEXUS in the air mode is available at 8 locations when entering Canada.
In addition, please note that a trusted traveller kiosk is also available at Billy Bishop Toronto City Airport, for incoming flights only for use by members of NEXUS and CANPASS Air.
Where is NEXUS in the land mode available?
NEXUS in the land mode is available at 21 locations when entering Canada
Where is NEXUS in the marine mode available?
NEXUS in the marine mode is available at approximately 450 locations when entering Canada.
Why does vPC not block either of the vPC uplinks?
Nexus 7000 has a loop prevention method that drops traffic traversing the peer link (destined for a vPC peer link) when there are no failed vPC ports or links. The rule is simple: if the packet crosses the vPC peer link, it may not go out any port in a vPC even if that vPC does not have the original VLAN.
How do I verify the features enabled on Nexus 7000 Series Switch with NX-OS 4.2?
Issue the show feature command in order to verify.
switch-N7K# show feature
Feature Name
Instance
State
tacacs
1
enabled
scheduler
1
enabled
isis
2
disabled
isis
3
disabled
isis
4
disabled
ospf
1
enabled
ospf
2
disabled
ospf
3
disabled
feature vrrp switch-N7K# show run | I feature
feature tacacs+
feature schedule
feature ospf
Is there a tool available for configuration conversion on Cisco 6500 series to the Nexus platform?
Cisco has developed the IOS-NXOS Migration Tool for quick configuration conversion on Cisco 6500 series to the Nexus series OS.
What are orphan ports?
Orphan ports are single attached devices that are not connected via a vPC, but still carry vPC VLANs. In the instance of a peer-link shut or restoration, an orphan port's connectivity may be bound to the vPC failure or restoration process. Issue the show vpc orphan-ports command in order to identify the impacted VLANs.
What is the minimum NX-OS release required to support FCoE in the Nexus 7000 Series Switches?
FCoE is supported on Cisco Nexus 7000 Series systems running Cisco NX-OS Release 5.2 or later.
On a Nexus, is the metric-type keyword not available in the "default-information originate" command?
On a Nexus, use a route-map command with a set clause of metric-type type-[½] in order to have the same functionality as in IOS using the default-information originate always metric-type [½] command. For example:
Netscaler Load Balancing Persistence to specific member?
In the Netscaler load balancing persistence rules it is straightforward to sticky a client IP to the same member each time.
Can you explain what issue does the NetScaler solves?
The Netscaler technology resolves issues of low speed internet and low bandwidth that needs to stream a desktop from a centralized server. This provides slow streaming compliance on the virtualization solution to provide optimum support and feature on the client machine.
What is Citrix?
Citrix is an application arrangement framework. With Citrix, one can get to the tweaked application and can likewise conveyed to remote frameworks. It additionally permits record exchange from home PC to office PC and email getting to.
How does Citrix Netscaler licensing differ from the other Citrix product licensing?
As an appliance or hardware, Netscaler is separate from most other Citrix products that use a license server. It is licensed independently.
What are the two most common ports used on XenApp ICA sessions? What are each used for?
Ports 1494 (ICA/HDX) and 2598(Session Reliability)
What is the Role of the XenDesktop Controller?
A controller is the server-side architectural component of XenDesktop that is responsible for distributing desktops, managing user access, and optimizing connections.
Get through the interview bar with our selected interview questions for Citrix Netscaler enthusiasts
What free tool from Citrix will allow you to analyze your log files, profile your Citrix environment, scan for known issues and attach a log file to a Citrix support ticket?
Citrix Insight Services or TaaS
How You Can Remove Dead Server From The Citrix Management Console?
To expel dead server from the Citrix Management Console you need to run:
DSVERIFY SERVERS/CLEAN/FORCE for advancing the Data Store
DSVerify can be executed on any of the servers in the farm
List out the services provided by Citrix?
Service provided by Citrix includes:
- Citrix virtual memory optimization service - Encryption service - Citrix XTE service - Independent Management architecture - Citrix SMA service - COM (Common Object Model) services
How to implement Policies in Citrix?
The Citrix policy can be applied through Console Managment in 3 levels
- Farm Level - Citrix Server Level - Policy
How does Citrix Netscaler permitting vary from the other Citrix item authorizing?
As a machine or equipment, Netscaler is separate from most other Citrix items that utilization a permit server. It is authorized autonomously.
What is Citrix Reciever?
Citrix recipient is an accumulation of suite of items that empowers customer gadgets to interface with different work area virtualization administrations offered by Citrix. Citrix recipient can interface with customer gadgets to XenDesktop applications, XenDesktop and work areas by means of the HDX protocol.
What Is Lhc In Citrix?
The IMA benefit executing on every Presentation Server downloads the data it requires from the focal information store into a neighborhood MDB database known as the Local Host Cache or LHC.
What Is Citrix Xml Broker?
Citrix XML dealer acts as a go between the web interface and homestead. It gets the qualifications of the client from the web interface. It recovers the applications that have client consent to get to. It is finished by autonomous administration design and comes back to the web interface. XML merchant identifies the server in the ranch, once the client is confirmed. It restores the address of the administration rendering server to the web interface. It works between IMA administration and web interface.
1b4:T20c8,
Arrays in C++
An array is a series of elements of the same type placed in contiguous memory locations that can be individually referenced by adding an index to a unique identifier.
That means that, for example, five values of type int can be declared as an array without having to declare 5 different variables (each with its own identifier). Instead, using an array, the five int values are stored in contiguous memory locations, and all five can be accessed using the same identifier, with the proper index. For example, an array containing 5 integer values of type int called foo could be represented as: where each blank panel represents an element of the array. In this case, these are values of type int. These elements are numbered from 0 to 4, being 0 the first and 4 the last; In C++, the first element in an array is always numbered with a zero (not a one), no matter its length. Like a regular variable, an array must be declared before it is used. A typical declaration for an array in C++ is:
type name [elements];
where type is a valid type (such as int, float...), name is a valid identifier and the elements field (which is always enclosed in square brackets []), specifies the length of the array in terms of the number of elements.
Declaration of Arrays
An array declaration is very similar to a variable declaration. First a type is given for the elements of the array, then an identifier for the array and, within square brackets, the number of elements in the array. The number of elements must be an integer.
For example data on the average temperature over the year in Britain for each of the last 100 years could be stored in an array declared as follows:
float annual_temp[100];
This declaration will cause the compiler to allocate space for 100 consecutive float variables in memory. The number of elements in an array must be fixed at compile time. It is best to make the array size a constant and then, if required, the program can be changed to handle a different size of array by changing the value of the constant,
const int NE = 100;
float annual_temp[NE];
then if more records come to light it is easy to amend the program to cope with more values by changing the value of NE. This works because the compiler knows the value of the constant NE at compile time and can allocate an appropriate amount of space for the array. It would not work if an ordinary variable was used for the size in the array declaration since at compile time the compiler would not know a value for it.
Accessing Array Elements
Given the declaration above of a 100 element array the compiler reserves space for 100 consecutive floating point values and accesses these values using an index/subscript that takes values from 0 to 99. The first element in an array in C++ always has the index 0, and if the array has n elements the last element will have the index n-1.
An array element is accessed by writing the identifier of the array followed by the subscript in square brackets. Thus to set the 15th element of the array above to 1.5 the following assignment is used:
annual_temp[14] = 1.5;
Note that since the first element is at index 0, then the ith element is at index i-1. Hence in the above the 15th element has index 14.
An array element can be used anywhere an identifier may be used. Here are some examples assuming the following declarations:
const int NE = 100,
N = 50;
int i, j, count[N];
float annual_temp[NE];
float sum, av1, av2;
A value can be read into an array element directly, using cin
cin >> count[i];
The element can be increased by 5,
count[i] = count[i] + 5;
or, using the shorthand form of the assignment
count[i] += 5;
Initialisation of arrays
An array can be initialised in a similar manner as the initialisation of simple variables in their declaration . In this case the initial values are given as a list enclosed in curly brackets. For example initialising an array to hold the first few prime numbers could be written as follows:
int primes[] = {1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13};
Note that the array has not been given a size, the compiler will make it large enough to hold the number of elements in the list. In this case primes would be allocated space for seven elements. If the array is given a size then this size must be greater than or equal to the number of elements in the initialisation list. For example:
int primes[10] = {1, 2, 3, 5, 7};
would reserve space for a ten element array but would only initialise the first five elements.
A sample C++ program to store and calculate the sum of 5 numbers entered by the user using arrays.
#include <iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int numbers[5], sum = 0;
cout << "Enter 5 numbers: ";
// Storing 5 number entered by user in an array
// Finding the sum of numbers entered
for (int i = 0; i < 5; ++i)
{
cin >> numbers[i];
sum += numbers[i];
}
cout << "Sum = " << sum << endl;
return 0;
}
Output
Enter 5 numbers:
3
4
5
4
2
Sum = 18
Things to remember when working with arrays in C++
Suppose you declared an array of 10 elements. Let's say,
int testArray[10];
You can use the array members from testArray[0] to testArray[9].
If you try to access array elements outside of its bound, let's say testArray[14], the compiler may not show any error. However, this may cause unexpected output (undefined behavior).
1b5:T28bc,
KnockoutJS Interview Questions
Q1) What is Knockout JS?
Ans: Knockout JS is a JavaScript library based totally on MVVM (Model View ViewModel) pattern that lets you create a wealthy, responsive show and editor person interfaces with a clean underlying data model.
Knockout JS is a small mild weighted JavaScript library this isusually used for designing a SPA.
Q2) What are the Features of Knockout JS?
Ans:
Features of Knockout JS
Automatic UI Refresh
Dependency Tracking
Support all modern browsers
Template Binding
Declarative Binding
Compact Size less than 20 kb.
Written in Pure JavaScript
Easy to implement
Q3) What are the types of data binding supported by Knockout JS?
Ans:
Two-way binding
One-way binding
Q4) Define dependency tracking.
Ans: The KnockoutJS will automatically update the UI (DOM) when your data model is changed.
Q5) How is Knockout JS used in context properties?
Ans: Context Properties used in KnockoutJS
$parent property
$index property
Q6) Define $index property.
Ans: $index property returns the index of the current context item in the array.
Q7) Define $parent property.
Ans: $parent property allows us to examine the parent of an object.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of JavaScript? Enrol in Instructor-Led live JavaScript Training to get Job Ready!
Q8) Define observable in Knockout JS.
Ans: Observable is a property of knockout js that contains the view model. This property is bound with UI (View) in two-way binding.
Q9) What is observable Arrays in Knockout JS?
Ans: The Observable cluster is KnockoutJs properties that contain the thing gathering in the view model and this property is tied with UI (View) in two-way binding.
Q10) What are the difference between KnockoutJs and MVC?
Ans:
KnockoutJs
MVC
KnockoutJs is an MVVM pattern
MVC is a design pattern
It works like a connected mode
It works like a disconnected mode
It supported two types of binding One-way binding and two-way binding
MVC supported only one-way binding.
UI part automatically updates when your data model update
In MVC, do not update UI automatically when your data model is updated. Need an event to call the data model and update it.
The model part is not directly bind to the view page. Models directly bind with the view model and view model directly with the view page.
Model parts directly bind with the view page.
Q11) How does JQuery differ from KnockoutJs?
Ans: The KO does not depend on the jQuery library, but we can use jQuery at the same time. Using KO you can handle client and server-side applications in a simply manner.
Q12) How KO intended to compete with jQuery or work with it?
Ans: jQuery is an outstanding replacement for the clunky, inconsistent DOM API we had to put up with in the past. jQuery is an excellent low-level way to manipulate elements and event handlers in a web page. KO solves a different problem.
As soon as your UI gets nontrivial and has a few overlapping behaviours, things can get tricky and expensive to maintain if you only use jQuery.
Consider an example:
you’re displaying a list of items, stating the number of items in that list, and want to enable an ‘Add’ button only when there are fewer than 5 items.
jQuery doesn’t have a concept of an underlying data model, so to get the number of items you have to infer it from the number of TRs in a table or the number of DIVs with a certain CSS class.
Maybe the number of items is displayed in some SPAN, and you have to remember to update that SPAN’s text when the user adds an item.
You also must remember to disable the ‘Add’ button when the number of TRs is 5.
Later, you’re asked also to implement a ‘Delete’ button and you have to figure out which DOM elements to change whenever it’s clicked.
Q13) How does dependency tracking work?
Ans: It’s actually very simple and rather lovely. The tracking algorithm goes like this:
Whenever you declare a computed observable, KO immediately invokes its evaluator function to get its initial value.
While your evaluator function is running, KO keeps a log of any observables (or computed observables) that your evaluator reads the value of.
When your evaluator is finished, KO sets up subscriptions to each of the observables (or computed observables) that you’ve touched. The subscription callback is set to cause your evaluator to run again, looping the whole process back to step 1 (disposing of any old subscriptions that no longer apply).
KO notifies any subscribers about the new value of your computed observable.
So, KO doesn’t just detect your dependencies the first time your evaluator runs it redetects them every time.
for example, your dependencies can vary dynamically: dependency A could determine whether you also depend on B or C.
Then, you’ll only be re-evaluated when either A or your current choice of B or C changes.
You don’t have to declare dependencies: they’re inferred at runtime from the code’s execution.
The other neat trick is that declarative bindings are simply implemented as computed observables.
So, if a binding reads the value of an observable, that binding becomes dependent on that observable, which causes that binding to be re-evaluated if the observable changes.
1b6:T4b0a,
What is the computer network?
A computer network is basically a group of computers which are connected together to share information and save physical resources.
What is a host in computer network?
Any device which is connected to a computer network is considered as a host or a node. It can be a computer or a device with its own network card such as printer or router.
Which computers are known as client computer in network?
The computers which are used to access the resources from network are known as client computers. Client computers usually run desktop version of operating system.
What is the other name of client computers?
The client computers are also known as workstation.
Which computers are known as server computer in network?
The computers which provide shared resources to the network are known as server computers. Server computers usually run server version of operating system.
What is the NIC?
NIC stands for Network Interface Card. NIC is the device which connects computer with network.
Can a computer connect with network without NIC?
No, a computer cannot connect with network without NIC card.
What is the most basic use of Switch in computer network?
A Switch is used to connect the multiple computers together for example an 8 ports switch can connect 8 computers in a single network.
What term does Microsoft use for peer to peer network?
Before Windows 7, it was Workgroup. Form Windows 7 it is replaced with Homegroup.
How much computers we can add in a workgroup?
Theoretically we can add as much computers as we want in workgroup. But practically we should never add more than ten computers in a workgroup network.
What does the term driver refer in computer networking?
The driver is the software program which is written specifically for a particular hardware device such as NIC card, Audio card, Video card etc. This software allows that particular device to work with other parts of computer. Without appropriate driver a device will not work as expected.
What are the basic differences between Internet, Intranet and Extranet?
The terms Internet, Intranet and Extranet are used to describe how a network application should be accessed. In Internet anyone can access the application from anywhere in world. In Intranet only the authorized users from the company for which the application was built can access the application. In Extranet selected external users are allowed to access the application which was built for Internet.
What does the term topology defines in computer network?
A topology is the physical layout which defines how computers are connected with each other’s in a computer network.
Which topology uses a centralized device for connectivity?
Star topology uses a centralized device (HUB or Switch) for connectivity.
Which topology uses coaxial cable and terminators?
Bus topology uses coaxial cable and terminators.
A company has offices in Jaipur and Delhi. What type of computer network it will use to connect these offices?
WAN (Wide Area Network) network is used to connect the networks which are spread over the different geographical location.
Based on physical location what are the two most common network types?
LAN (Local Area Network) and WAN (Wide Area Network) are the two most common network types.
Does number of computers matter in LAN and WAN?
No, number of computers does not matter in LAN and WAN. This categorization is purely based on geographical location of network. For example we may have 1000 computers connected together in a network. If this network is located in a building or a campus, it will be considered as a LAN network. Just like this, we may have a network of only two computers. If one computer is located in one city and other computer is located in another city then this network will be considered as a WAN network.
What is the difference between physical topology and logical topology?
A physical topology describes how computers are connected with each other’s physically. While a logical topology describes how data is being transmitted over the physical topology.
How will you consider a topology which uses HUB as a centralized device to connect all computers?
Physically it is a star topology but logically it is a bus topology. Since this topology satisfies the primary requirement of star topology, physically it can be considered as a star topology. But Hub cannot filter the data traffic, so all computers will receive data packets from all computers just like the bus topology. So physically it’s a star topology but logically it’s a bus topology.
What is the backbone network?
The network which connects two or more networks together is considered as a backbone network. Usually backbone network contains high speed data transferring devices such as routers and switches. Backbone network should never be used for end user connectivity. The network which provides end user connectivity should be connected through the backbone network.
What is daisy chaining technique and which topology uses this technique?
Star topology uses daisy chaining technique to extend the network. In this technique a hub or switch connects with another hub or switch just like a node of existing topology. Then this hub or switch can be used to connect the more devices in network.
How ring topology works?
In ring topology all computers connect in a circle. When a computer has some data for another computer, it puts that data packet in circle. Each computer looks at each packet to figure out whether the packet is intended for it or not. If packet is intended for it, it will pick up the packet from ring otherwise passes it to the next computer in the ring.
Is ring topology is still used in LAN network?
No, the ring topology is no more used in LAN network.
Which topology is used in modern LAN Network?
Star topology
What is the mesh topology and where it is used?
In mesh topology all devices are connect with all devices. For example to connect four computers in mesh topology we need 4 x 4 = 16 connections. Mesh topology is used in WAN network to build the alternative paths between networks.
What is the signal bouncing issue and how it can be solved?
Signal bouncing issue occurs in bus topology. Bus topology uses a coaxial cable to connect the computers. In this topology when computer sends signal, the signal travels in both directions from sending computer. When this signal reaches at the end of the cable, it bounces back and returns in the original direction. This is known as signal bouncing issue. To solve this issue we should use the terminator. Terminator absorbs the signals when they reach to it. This will prevent the signal bouncing issue.
What is main advantage of Bus topology?
Main advantage of Bus topology is the cost. This topology uses the lowest resources among the other available topologies. A coaxial cable, some connectors and terminators are only we need to build this topology.
What are the main disadvantages of Bus topology?
Main disadvantage of Bus topology are scalability, troubleshooting and length. A single break in main cable is enough to bring the entire network down. To add worse any loose terminator will also do the same job. Finding a loose terminator or break in the cable is the toughest task.
Is bus topology still used in computer network?
No, bus topology is no more used in computer network.
What are the main advantages of star topology?
Main advantages of star topology are scalability, easy to troubleshoot and centralized network component. Adding and removing a device in this topology is much easier than the other topologies. Besides this if there is any break in cable then only the device which is connected with that cable will be down.
What are the main disadvantages of star topology?
Main disadvantages of star topology are cost and centralized network component. In positive side a centralized device makes administrator life easier but in downside if this device fails then the entire network will be down.
What is the hybrid topology?
A topology which consist more than one topology is considered as a hybrid topology for example a star-bus topology, in which multiple star topologies are connected through the central bus topology.
What are the main advantages of wireless network?
Main advantages of wireless network are the lack of cables and mobility of devices.
What are the main disadvantages of wireless network?
Main disadvantages of wireless network are speed and security. Signal interference, blockage, and interception may slow down a wireless network. Form security point of view, wireless network is considered as less secure network in comparison with wired network.
What is the difference between point to point and point to multipoint topology?
In point to point topology once system connects with another system directly. In point to multipoint topology all systems connect through the centralized device.
What is a drop cable?
A drop cable is the cable which connects workstation with backbone cable in bus topology.
What is the maximum length of Thicknet coaxial cable?
Maximum length of Thicknet coaxial cable is 500 meter.
Which cable is known as RG58 cable?
The Thinnet cable is known as RG58 cable.
What is the maximum length of Thinnet cable?
Maximum length of the Thinnet cable is 185 meter.
Which cable is known as RG8 cable?
The Thicknet cable is known as RG8 cable.
Which cable is used as backbone cable in bus topology?
The Thicknet (RG8) cable is used as backbone cable in bus topology.
Which cable is used to connect workstation with backbone cable?
The Thinnet (RG58) cable is used to connect workstation with backbone cable.
What is the thickness of the Thinnet cable?
The thickness of the Thinnet cable is 0.25 inch.
What is the thickness of the Thicknet cable?
The thickness of the Thinnet cable is 0.5 inch.
Which connector does Thinnet cable use to connect with NIC?
The BNC (British naval connector) connector is used to connect the Thinnet cable with NIC.
Which connector does Thicknet cable use to connect with NIC?
The AUI (Adapter unit interface) connector is used to connect the Thicknet cable with NIC.
Which pair of cable is used on computer network RG58 and RG8 or RG59 and RG6?
RG58 and RG8 cable is used in computer network while RG59 and RG6 cable is used in TV cable network.
Can we use RG59 and RG6 cables in computer network?
No we cannot use these cables in computer network. These cables are built for TV cable network.
Is coaxial cable still used in computer network?
No, coaxial cable is used in bus topology which is no longer used in computer network.
What is the maximum distance of UTP cable?
Maximum distance of UTP cable is 100 meter.
Which connector UTP cable uses to connect with NIC?
The connector RJ45
Which cable uses RJ11 connector?
The telephone cable uses RJ11 connector.
Can we use Cateogry1 (UTP) cable for data transmission?
No Category1 (UTP) cable is used only for voice transmission.
What is the maximum data transmission speed of Category 2, Category 3 and Category 4 in UTP cable?
The maximum transmission speed of Category 2, Category 3 and Category 4 in UTP cable is 4Mbps, 10Mbps and 16Mbps respectively.
How many wires does UTP cable has?
UTP cable has four pairs of wires. Each pair has two wires, twisted with each other. So there are total eight wires in UTP cable.
How many wires are used for data transmission in UTP cable?
Only four wires from eight wires are used in data transmission.
Which wires are used for data transmission in UTP cable?
The wires 1, 2, 3 and 6 are used for data transmission in UTP cable. The wires 1 and 2 are used to transmit the data while wires 3 and 6 are used to receive the data.
What is the maximum data transmission speed of Category 5, Category 5e and Category 6 in UTP cable?
The maximum transmission speed of Category 5, Category 5e and Category 6 in UTP cable is 100Mbps, 1000Mbps and 10Gbps respectively.
How Straight-through UTP cable is built?
In Straight through UTP cable all pins are matched on both sides. Pin-1 connects with Pin-1; Pin2 connects Pin2, this way each pin connects with the same number of pin on other side.
Where do we use Straight-through UTP cable?
The straight-through cable is used to connect the following: -
Hub / Switch to System Hub / Switch to Router Hub / Switch to Server straight cable uses
Why we cannot use Straight-through UTP cable to connect two systems directly?
In straight-through cable the pins which send data from one computer connect with the pins which also send data on other computer.
Simple a computer will not be able to pick the data from sending pins. So the transmission will be failed if we directly connect the two systems through the Straight-through UTP cable. To connect two systems directly we have to use the cross-over cable which connects sending pins with receiving pins.
How Cross-over cable is built?
In Cross-over cable the pins which send data from one end connect with the pins which receive data on other end. Pin1 connects with Pin3 while Pin2 connects with Pin6.
Where do we use Cross-over cable?
The Cross-over cable is used to connect the following: -
Hub/Switch to Hub/Switch System to System Router to Router Router to System use of cross cable
What is the Crosstalk?
Crosstalk is the interference which generates from adjacent wires.
1b7:T1719,
Reviews are always viewed as indicators of quality, authenticity, and trust for any business, service or product. Most reviews across platforms like Facebook, Google and Yelp, are submitted by users and cannot be controlled from your end; you could still find and showcase the positive ones in the SERPs thanks to schema markups.
Schema markups have been around in the SEO world for quite some time now. The term refers to a semantic vocabulary developed by the folks at Schema.org, sponsored by moguls like Microsoft, Google, and Pinterest, etc. These markups are code snippets which can be integrated into your website to tell search engines how they can interpret portions of information from the site, such that it can be presented in a useful manner to the end-user. Some schema types are beneficial for enhancing your content quality on the SERPs manifold. You could do it yourself or get the bulk email marketing services in Mumbai firm which handles most of your online marketing to do it for you. A fantastic resource for using schema markups is also available from Google Developers.
Markups for Reviews and Ratings
There are plenty of options in the markup vocabulary for reviews and ratings, and you can check them out on the website. Google has support for ratings for products, businesses, music, movies and a whole lot of things, so the possibilities are endless for how well you do by implementing a proper markup. There are two types of review schema markups, single review-single rating as well as aggregate ratings.
Single Review with Single Rating
Things are pretty easy if you use markups for individual reviews. You can add all sorts of stuff into your code, like product name, review body, author, rating, publishing date and publisher. You will need to keep the rating scale in mind (Google uses a 5-point system by default) and customize your markups on that basis.
Aggregate Ratings
The aggregate rating markup can be used if you have several reviews and a calculation of the average rating. The main difference between this markup and that for single reviews is the options for rating and review counts. The default is a 5-point scale, so you will have to use a bestRating and worstRating addition in your markup if you are using a different rating system.
Creating Schema Markups and Implementing Them
The Google Structured Data Markup Helper is a fantastic tool for creating markups, but there are some other great free tools which you could use to pull all required data, model, and implement schema markups.
Schema Creator for Single Reviews
Schema-Creator.org is a great online tool available for this, and it is effortless to use. Put the title of the review. The summary goes into the description, and the individual URL goes to the URL field. Next, fill in the fields corresponding to the author, item, date published, review body, rating and rating scale.
Web Code Tools for Aggregate Rating Markups
The Web Code Tools form needs you to fill in the item name, 5-star scale rating, the number of votes and a total number of reviews. You can then copy the generated code onto your website.
Testing with Google Structured Data Testing Tool
This tool is fantastic- it checks all your structured data for validity so that it gets picked up by crawlers. The first set of data is usually great, but there is scope for customization to make it robust and specific, and this is where the testing tool comes in handy, as you can check how well your optimizations work and if they are correct.
Get It onto Your Website
Your code will be in HTML, so you’ve got to put it into a compatible area like the HTML window in WordPress. You can always tweak the appearance through styling features or simple break tags (<br>) for formatting.
Conclusion
Schema markup will not improve your rankings in terms of organic visibility but will impact organic CTR and increase traffic. You should keep an eye on Google Analytics and track your website’s performance periodically. There are a whole lot of schema markups for all sorts of things which you can use to stand out on SERPS, so you should be open to experiments.
Author bio: Walter Moore is a web developer and a blogger based in Mumbai. He is also an expert in SEO and has worked for several digital marketing firms in the past. He shares a number of posts with great resources, recommendations for services like GingerDomain.com and updates related to SEM.
1b8:T2366,
The open source framework, Hadoop ecosystem, helps to store and process Big Data in a distributed environment. It contains different sub-projects (tools) such as Sqoop, Pig, and Hive.
Hive is an open-source data warehouse infrastructure tool to 1) process 2) query 3) analyze large structured datasets in Hadoop. This platform is used to develop SQL type scripts to do MapReduce operations.
Hive Data Types
Broadly Hives can be classified into Primitive and Complex data types.
Hive Primitive Data Types
1. Integral Types
Integer type data can be specified using integral data types, referred as INT. When the data range is smaller than the INT, use SMALLINT and when the data range exceeds the range of INT or is greater than INT, then use BIGINT. TINYINT is smaller than SMALLINT.
The following table depicts various INT data types:
Type
Postfix
Example
TINYINT
Y
10Y
SMALLINT
S
10S
INT
-
10
BIGINT
L
10L
2. Numeric Types
TINYINT (1-byte signed integer, from -128 to 127)
SMALLINT (2-byte signed integer, from -32,768 to 32,767)
INT (4-byte signed integer, from -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
BIGINT (8-byte signed integer, from -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to 9,223,372,036,854,775,807)
FLOAT (4-byte single precision floating point number)
DOUBLE (8-byte double precision floating point number)
DECIMAL (Hive 0.13.0 introduced user definable precision and scale)
3. String Types
String type data types are usually represented with single quotes (' ') or double quotes (" "). It contains two data types: VARCHAR and CHAR. Hive follows C-types escape characters.
Data Type
Length
VARCHAR
1 to 65355
CHAR
255
4. Date or Time Types
TIMESTAMP - It supports java.sql and also the traditional UNIX timestamp with optional nanosecond precision. Timestamp format “YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.fffffffff” and format “yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss.ffffffffff”.
DATE - DATE values are described in year/month/day format in the form {{YYYY-MM-DD}}.
5. Decimals
The DECIMAL type in Hive is as same as Bigdecimal format of Java. It is used for representing immutable arbitrary precision. Decimal type data is nothing but floating point value with higher range than DOUBLE data type. The range of decimal type is approximately 10308. to . The syntax and example is as follows:
DECIMAL(precision, scale)
decimal(10,0)
6. Union Types
Union is a collection of heterogeneous data types. You can create an instance using create union. The syntax and example is as follows:
To simplify the query a portion of the data stored, Hive organizers tables into partitions. Based on the values of partitioned columns the data tables are segregated into parts. Which means the data within a table is split across multiple partitions. Particular value(s) of partition column(s) corresponds to each partition, which is stored in sub-directory of table’s directory on HDFS.
How to Add Partition?
To add a table we need to alternate the table first. Let us assume we have a table called student with fields such as Id, Name, Class, & Section.
Syntax:
ALTER TABLE table_name ADD [IF NOT EXISTS] PARTITION partition_spec [LOCATION 'location1'] partition_spec [LOCATION 'location2'] ...;
ALTER TABLE table_name PARTITION partition_spec RENAME TO PARTITION partition_spec;
The following query is used to rename a partition:
hive > ALTER TABLE student PARTITION (Class=’6’) > RENAME TO PARTITION (Section=’b’);
How to Drop a Partition?
Syntax:
ALTER TABLE table_name DROP [IF EXISTS] PARTITION partition_spec, PARTITION partition_spec,...;
The following query is used to drop a partition:
hive > ALTER TABLE employee DROP [IF EXISTS] > PARTITION (Class=’6’);
Author Bio
Natasha is a Content Manager at SpringPeople. She has been in the edu-tech industry for 7+ years. With a aim to provide the best bona fide information on tech trends, she is associated with SpringPeople. SpringPeople is a global premier training provider for high-end and emerging technologies, methodologies and products. Partnered with parent organizations behind these technologies, SpringPeople delivers authentic and most comprehensive training on related topics.
1b9:T125a,
Groovy Interview Questions
Following are some of the most frequently asked Groovy interview questions in the interview, here are the answers for them.
What Are The Dependencies For Groovy?
As well as Java 1.4 and the Groovy jar we also depend at runtime on the ASM library.
Mention what relational operators is used for in Groovy?
Relational operators allows you to compare between objects, to check whether the two objects are different or same or if one is less than, greater than or equal to others.
Mention what relational operators is used for in Groovy?
Relational operators allows you to compare between objects, to check whether the two objects are different or same or if one is less than, greater than or equal to others.
Groovy Script Interview Questions
Explain what does the JsonSlurper class indicates?
The JsonSlurper is a class that parses JSON text or reader content into Groovy data structures (objects) such as lists, maps, and primitive types like double, Boolean, string and Integer.
Explain what is ExpandoMetaClass in Groovy?
ExpandoMetaClass is used to add methods, properties, static methods and constructors. Expandoclass does not inherited by default; you have to call ExpandoMetaClass.enableGlobally().
Explain how you can include a groovy script in another groovy?
You can include a groovy script with another groovy by using the following code. When put this code at the top of the script it will bring in the contents of a groovy file.
Explain What Is Expandometaclass In Groovy?
ExpandoMetaClass is used to add methods, properties, static methods and constructors. Expandoclass does not inherited by default; you have to call ExpandoMetaClass.enableGlobally().
What Is Grails?
Grails is an open source web application framework that uses the Groovy and Java as programming language, this framework use another frameworks like Spring, Hibernate, SiteMesh and have and embebed H2 database, Tomcat server and ORM(GORM). this framework follow some design patters as Model View Controller(MVC), Convention Over Configuration(CoC), Don't repeat yourself(DRY) and runs over the Java Virtual Machine(JVM).
Explain What Is Groovysh?
Groovysh is a command line application that enables an easy access to evaluate Groovy expressions, define classes and run experiments.
How Can I Turn On Logging For Hibernate In Order To See Sql Statements, Input Parameters And Output Results?
Edit your Config.groovy file. Find the line with:
hibernate = "off"
and replace it with:
hibernate.SQL="trace,stdout"
hibernate.type="trace,stdout"
What Is Are The Closures In Groovy?
A closure in Groovy is an open, anonymous, block of code that can take arguments, return a value and be assigned to a variable.
1ba:T30b6,
Networking Interview Questions
Following are some of the most frequently asked Networking interview questions in the interview, here are the answers for them.
What is a node?
A network can consist of two or more computers directly connected by some physical medium such as coaxial cable or optical fiber. Such a physical medium is called as Links and the computer it connects is called as Nodes.
What is a gateway or Router?
A node that is connected to two or more networks is commonly called as router or Gateway. It generally forwards message from one network to another.
Define Network?
A network is a set of devices connected by physical media links. A network is recursively is a connection of two or more nodes by a physical link or two or more networks connected by one or more nodes.
What is Protocol?
A protocol is a set of rules that govern all aspects of information communication.
What is a Link?
At the lowest level, a network can consist of two or more computers directly connected by some physical medium such as coaxial cable or optical fiber. Such a physical medium is called as Link.
What are the two types of transmission technology available?
(i) Broadcast and
(ii) point-to-point
What is Bandwidth?
Every line has an upper limit and a lower limit on the frequency of signals it can carry. This limited range is called the bandwidth.
Explain RIP (Routing Information Protocol)
It is a simple protocol used to exchange information between the routers.
What is half-duplex?
It is the mode of communication between two devices in which flow of data is bi-directional but not at the same time. ie each station can transmit and receive but not at the same time.
E.g walkie-talkies are half-duplex system.
What is full duplex?
It is the mode of communication between two devices in which flow of data is bi-directional and it occurs simultaneously. Here signals going in either direction share the capacity of the link.
E.g. telephone
What is sampling?
It is the process of obtaining amplitude of a signal at regular intervals.
What is Asynchronous mode of data transmission?
It is a serial mode of transmission. In this mode of transmission, each byte is framed with a start bit and a stop bit. There may be a variable length gap between each byte.
What are the advantages of Distributed Processing?
A list of advantages of distributed processing:
-Secure
-Support Encapsulation
-Distributed database
-Faster Problem solving
-Security through redundancy
-Collaborative Processing
What is bandwidth?
Every signal has a limit of upper range frequency and lower range frequency. The range of limit of network between its upper and lower frequency is called bandwidth.
What is the maximum length allowed for a UTP cable?
The maximum length of UTP cable is 90 to 100 meters.
What is RIP?
RIP stands for Routing information Protocol. It is accessed by the routers to send data from one network to another.
What do you understand by TCP/IP?
TCP/IP is short for Transmission Control Protocol /Internet protocol. It is a set of protocol layers that is designed for exchanging data on different types of networks.
What is netstat?
The "netstat" is a command line utility program. It gives useful information about the current TCP/IP setting of a connection.
What do you understand by ping command?
The "ping" is a utility program that allows you to check the connectivity between the network devices. You can ping devices using its IP address or name.
What is Sneakernet?
Sneakernet is the earliest form of networking where the data is physically transported using removable media.
Explain the peer-peer process.
The processes on each machine that communicate at a given layer are called peer-peer process.
What is a congested switch?
A switch receives packets faster than the shared link. It can accommodate and stores in its memory, for an extended period of time, then the switch will eventually run out of buffer space, and some packets will have to be dropped. This state is called congested state.
What is multiplexing in networking?
In Networking, multiplexing is the set of techniques that is used to allow the simultaneous transmission of multiple signals across a single data link.
What is RSA Algorithm?
RSA is short for Rivest-Shamir-Adleman algorithm. It is mostly used for public key encryption.
What are the different types of networks?
Networks can be divided on the basis of area of distribution. For example:
PAN (Personal Area Network): Its range limit is up to 10 meters. It is created for personal use. Generally personal devices are connected with this network. For example: computers, telephones, fax, printers etc.
LAN (Local Area Network): It is used for a small geographical location like office, hospital, school etc.
HAN (House Area Network): It is actually a LAN that is used within a house and used to connect homely devices like personal computers, phones, printers etc.
CAN (Campus area Network): It is a connection of devices within a campus area which links to other departments of the organization within the same campus.
MAN (Metropolitan Area Network): It is used to connect the devices which spans to large cities like metropolitan cities over a wide geographical area.
WAN (Wide Area Network): It is used over a wide geographical location that may range to connect cities and countries.
GAN (Global Area Network): It uses satellites to connect devices over global are.
What is anonymous FTP?
Anonymous FTP is used to grant users access to files in public servers. Users which are allowed access to data in these servers do not need to identify themselves, but instead log in as an anonymous guest.
What are the main elements of a protocol?
The main elements of a protocol are:
Syntax: It specifies the structure or format of the data. It also specifies the order in which they are presented.
Semantics: It specifies the meaning of each section of bits.
Timing: Timing specifies two characteristics: When data should be sent and how fast it can be sent.
Business Analyst Experience in Automation Anywhere Tool.
Easily intermingle with Client Business Unit Leader.
Understand and Automate Business Manual Process through Automation tool.
Work experience on new cutting-edge technologies and new innovative design frameworks.
Monitoring day to day resolution closures and case aging.
Establishing connection among operations team and RPA for smooth flow.
Responsible for Gap Analysis and Technical Consulting fro BI.
Core Competencies
Learning New tools
Process Improvement Initiatives
Enhance Customer Satisfaction Level
Managing team functions
Maintaining the minimum turn around time
End to end process tracking.
Education
Bachelor of Engineering in Electronics and Communication, Brenau University, Washington.
Professional Experience
Automation Anywhere Developer, Australia New Zealand Banking Group.
Key Areas:
Managing Scrum Board for Administration Projects.
Automate daily process with Automation Anywhere tool.
Integrate Automation Solutions with ERP, Desktop Application, etc.
Provide out of box solutions and reduce turn around time.
Ensuring effective performance for SLAs.
Supervising quality initiatives for process improvement.
Building and maintaining business relations and achieve delivery and quality service norms.
Accomplishments
Handled a team of 5 members.
Troubleshooting the issues and technical problems pertaining to Automation Anywhere.
Automation Anywhere Resume Secrets You Need To Know:
Highlight your accomplishments and responsibilities.
Make it clear in the ‘Objectives’ that you are qualified for the types of jobs you are applying.
Bold the most recent job titles you have held.
Invest time in highlighting the most relevant skills.
Employ proficient terminology to speak about experiences in Resume.
Showcase transparency in Employment Gaps (if any).
Your Resume must showcase the critical field competency.
Download Sample Automation Anywhere Resume (PDF) Here :
Automation Anywhere Resume
1bc:T2ca8,
Shell Scripting Interview Questions
Following are some of the most frequently asked Shell Scripting interview questions in the interview, here are the answers to them.
Q1) Write down syntax for all loops in shell scripting?
Ans:
For loop:
for i in $( ls ); do
echo item: $i
done
While loop:
#!/bin/bash
COUNTER=0
while [ $COUNTER -lt 10 ]; do
echo The counter is $COUNTER
let COUNTER=COUNTER+1
done
Until loop:
#!/bin/bash
COUNTER=20
until [ $COUNTER -lt 10 ]; do
echo COUNTER $COUNTER
let COUNTER-=1
done
Q2) What it means by #!/bin/sh or #!/bin/bash at the beginning of every script?
Ans: That line tells which shell to use. #!/bin/bash script to execute using /bin/bash. In case of python script there will be #!/usr/bin/python.
Q3) What command "export" do?
Ans: Makes variable public in subshells.
Q4) How to run the script in the background?
Ans: add "&" to the end of the script.
Q5) What "chmod 500 script" do?
Ans: Makes script executable for script owner.
Want to acquire industry skills and gain complete knowledge of Shell Scripting? Enrol in Instructor-Led live UNIX Shell Scripting Training to get Job Ready!
Q6) What ">" do?
Ans: Redirects output stream to file or another stream.
Q7) What difference between & and &&
Ans:
& - we use it when we want to put the script to the background
&& - when we want to execute a command/script if the first script was finished successfully
Q8) When do we need "if" before [ condition]?
Ans: When we need to run several commands if the condition meets.
Q9) What would be the output of the command: name=John && echo 'My name is $name'
Ans: My name is $name
Q10) Which is the symbol used for comments in bash shell scripting?
Ans: #
Q11) What would be the output of the command: echo ${new:-variable}
Ans: variable
Q12) What difference between ' and "quotes?
Ans:
' - we use it when do not want to evaluate variables to the values.
" - all variables will be evaluated and their values will be assigned instead.
Q13) How to print all arguments provided in the script?
Ans: echo $* or echo $@
Q14) What difference between [ $a == $b ] and [ $a -eq $b ]
Ans: [ $a == $b ] - should be used for string comparison [ $a -eq $b ] - should be used for number tests
Q15) What difference between = and ==
Ans:
= - we using to assign value to variable.
== - we using for string comparison.
Q16) Write the command to test if $a greater than 12?
Ans:[ $a -gt 12 ]
Q17) Write the command to test if $b is less or equal to 12?
Ans:[ $b -le 12 ]
Q18) How to redirect stdout and stderr streams to the log.txt file from the script inside?
Ans:Add "exec >log.txt 2>&1" as the first command in the script.
Q19) How to get part of the string variable with the echo command only?
Ans: echo ${variable:x:y}
x - start position
y - length
example:variable="My name is Petras, and I am developer."
echo ${variable:11:6} # will display Petras
Q20) How to get home_dir with echo command only if string variable="User:123:321:/home/dir" is given?
Ans: echo ${variable#*:*:*:}
or
echo ${variable##*:}
Q21) How to get “User” from the string above?
Ans: echo ${variable%:*:*:*}
or
echo ${variable%%:*}
Q22) How to list users which UID less than 100 (awk)?
Ans: awk -F: '$3<100' /etc/passwd.
Q23) Compare Numeric Operators
Ans:
Operator
Syntax
Description
eq
INTEGER1 -eq INTEGER2
INTEGER1 is equal to INTEGER2
ge
INTEGER1 -ge INTEGER2
INTEGER1 is greater than or equal to INTEGER2
gt
INTEGER1 -gt INTEGER2
INTEGER1 is greater than INTEGER2
le
INTEGER1 -le INTEGER2
INTEGER1 is less than or equal to INTEGER2
lt
INTEGER1 -lt INTEGER2
INTEGER1 is less than INTEGER2
ne
INTEGER1 -ne INTEGER2
INTEGER1 is not equal to INTEGER2
Q24) Syntax to define an array in bash?
Ans: array=("Hi" "my" "name" "is")
Q25) Print the first array element.
Ans: echo ${array[0]}
Q26) Print all array elements.
Ans: echo ${array[@]}
Q27) Print all array indexes syntax?
Ans: echo ${!array[@]}
Q28) Syntax to remove array element with id 123?
Ans: unset array[123]
Q29) Syntax to add a new element to the array with id 1980?
Ans: array[1980]="New_element"
1bd:Tbf4,
SVN Interview Questions
What all things should be stored in SVN repository?
Source Code
MySQL Queries
Database Updates
Project regarding important files
Product Documents
Minutes of Metting and Imp Email
How to delete file from SVN Repo?
SVN delete filename
Difference between SVN commit and SVN update?
SVN commit:: Push (upload) the local changes to Repository. SVN Update:: Get (download) the Repository changes files to local system.
List out what is the best practices for SVN?
Work from your own local work-space
Commit small autonomous changes
Use comment
Validate the files you are committing, you actually changed
Take Update before commit to the Repo.
What is "branch" , "Tag" and "Trunk" in SVN ?
Trunk is the main body of development, originating from the start of the project till end.
Branch is a copy of code derived from a certain point in the trunk that is used for applying major changes to the code while preserving the integrity of the code in the trunk.
Trunk is a point in time on the trunk or a branch that you wish to preserve. This is like base-lining the code after a major release.
Difference between Update and Commit ?
Update is used to update the local workspace with the changes committed by the team to the repository whereas Commit is the process to push changes from local to repository.
Explain what is the difference between commit and update?
Update is used to update the local workspace with the changes made by the team to the repository, while commit is the process to implement changes from local to repository, in simple words, upload a file into repository.
1be:T1296,
Ajax Interview Questions
Following are some of the most frequently asked Ajax interview questions in the interview, here are the answers for them. What are disadvantage of Ajax?
It does not crawl to search Engine.
Define JSON?
JSON is JavaScript Object Notation.
Describe how to handle concurrent AJAX requests?
JavaScipt Closures can be used for handling concurrent requests.
What is Asynchronous in Ajax?
We can set the Asynchronous value as true OR false. Async=true Ajax request execute independently, Its response can come earlier than other request which is execute later . Async=true Ajax request does not execute independently, Its response can comes when earlier request finished.
What is the difference between JavaScript and AJAX?
JavaScript makes a request to the server and waits for the response. It consumes more bandwidth as it reloads the page.
AJAX sends a request to the server and doesn't wait for the response. It doesn't reload the page so consumes less bandwidth.
What are the different ready states of a request in AJAX?
There are 5 ready states of a request in AJAX.
0 means UNOPENED 1 means OPENED 2 means HEADERS_RECEIVED 3 means LOADING 4 means DONE
What does XMLHttpRequest?
sends data in the background receives data updates data without reloading the page
What are the real web applications of AJAX currently running in the market?
Twitter Facebook Gmail Javatpoint Youtube etc.
What is JSON in AJAX?
JSON stands for JavaScript Object Notation. It is easy to understand and data exchange is fast than XML. It supports array.
What are the properties of XMLHttpRequest?
The important properties of XMLHttpRequest object are given below.
onReadyStateChange
readyState
responseText
responseXML
What are the technologies used by AJAX?
HTML/XHTML and CSS
DOM
XML
XMLHttpRequest
JavaScript
What do the different readystates in XMLHttpRequest?
Following are different stats(0-4) of ready state in XMLHttpRequest 0 Ajax Request not initialized 1 Ajax Request's server connection established 2 Ajax Request received 3 Ajax Request processing 4 request finished and response is ready.
What js library are available to use the Ajax?
Following are few JS library which are used for Ajax
JQuery
MooTools
Prototype
YUI Library
Backbone js
What are advantage of AJax?
Its faster as it load only required content.
More user friendly.
One page application possible due to Ajax.
Reduce the loading of page.
What is XMLHttpRequest?
XMLHttpRequest is an API available to web browser scripting languages (i.e. JavaScript). It is used to send HTTP/HTTPS requests to a web server and load the server's response into the script.
1bf:T3e56,
Web Service Interview Questions
Following are some of the most frequently asked Web Service interview questions in the interview, here are the answers for them.
Explain Web Services?
A Web Service can be defined as an application component for communication or say exchanging information between two applications over the network. Web services basically work on client server model where web services are easily accessible to client applications over the network.
To enable communication between various applications, web services take the help of open standards like XML (for data tagging), SOAP (for message transferring) and WSDL (to denote service availability).
What is the difference between SOA and a web service?
SOA (Service-Oriented Architecture) is an architectural pattern that makes possible for services to interact with one another independently.
Web Services is a realization of SOA concept, that leverages XML, JSON, etc. and common Internet protocols such as HTTP(S), SMTP, etc. SOA is a system-level architectural style that tries to expose business. WOA is an interface-level architectural style that focuses on the means by which these service capabilities are exposed to consumers.
What is SOAP?
SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol) is a transport protocol for sending and receiving requests and responses on XML format, which can be used on top of transport protocols such as HTTP, SMTP, UDP, etc.
What is the difference between a REST web service and a SOAP web service?
Below are the main differences between REST and SOAP web service
-REST supports different formats like text, JSON and XML; SOAP only supports XML; -REST works only over HTTP(S) on a transport layer; SOAP can be used different protocols on a transport layer; -REST works with resources, each unique URL is some representation of a resource; SOAP works with operations, which implement some business logic through different interfaces; -SOAP based reads can’t be cached, for SOAP need to provide caching; REST based reads can be cached; -SOAP supports SSL security and WS-security(Web Service-security); REST only supports SSL security; -SOAP supports ACID (Atomicity, Consistency, Isolation, Durability); REST supports transactions, but it is neither ACID compliant nor can provide two phase commit.
What is WSDL?
WSDL (Web Services Description Language) is an XML format for describing web services and how to access them.
What is MTOM?
MTOM (Message Transmission Optimization Mechanism) is a mechanism for transmitting large binary attachments with SOAP messages as raw bytes, allowing for smaller messages.
WSDL is the language that UDDI uses.
What is XOP?
XOP (XML-binary Optimized Packaging) is a mechanism defined for the serializationof XML Information Sets that contain binary data, as well as deserialization back into the XML Information Set.
Define web service protocol stack and its layers?
Web service protocol stack consists of 4 layers. This can be described as follows 1) Service transport: This is the first layer which helps in transporting XML messages between various client applications. This layer commonly uses the below-mentioned protocols:
HTTP(Hypertext Transport Protocol) SMTP(Simple Mail Transport Protocol) FTP(File Transfer Protocol) BEEP(Block Extensible Exchange Protocol)
2) XML messaging: This layer is based on the XML model where messages are encoded in common XML format which is easily understood by others. This layer includes
XML-RPC SOAP(Simple Object Access Protocol)
3) Service description: This layer contains description like location, available functions, and data types for XML messaging which describes the public interface to a specific web service. This layer includes:
WSDL(Web Service Description Language)
4) Service discovery: This layer is responsible for providing a way to publish and find web services over the web. This layer includes:
UDDI(Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration)
HTTP stands for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol.
XML-RPC is a simple protocol that uses XML messages to perform RPCs.
Following are the features of SOAP −
SOAP is a communication protocol.SOAP is for communication between applications. SOAP is a format for sending messages. SOAP is designed to communicate via Internet. SOAP is platform independent. SOAP is language independent. SOAP is simple and extensible. SOAP allows you to get around firewalls. SOAP will be developed as a W3C standard.
There are three specific security issues with web services −
Confidentiality
Authentication
Network Security
Web services manageability is defined as a set of capabilities for discovering the existence, availability, health, performance, usage, as well as the control and configuration of a web service within the web services architecture. As web services become pervasive and critical to business operations, the task of managing and implementing them is imperative to the success of business operations.
WSDL is an XML-based language for describing web services and how to access them.
Following are the features of UDDI − UDDI is a specification for a distributed registry of web services. UDDI is platform independent, open framework. UDDI can communicate via SOAP, CORBA, and Java RMI Protocol. UDDI uses WSDL to describe interfaces to web services. UDDI is seen with SOAP and WSDL as one of the three foundation standards of web services. UDDI is an open industry initiative enabling businesses to discover each other and define how they interact over the Internet.
What are the core layers in Web Service Protocol Stack?
The Web Service Protocol Stack is still evolving, but currently has four main layers −
Service Transport XML Messaging Service Description Service Discovery
This is any consumer of the web service. The requestor utilizes an existing web service by opening a network connection and sending an XML request.
Enlist few advantages of web services?
We have already discussed web services, its architecture, components. Now, let us see some its advantages
-Every application is now on the internet and it the web service which provides some sort of required functionality to the client applications. -Web services help in exposing the existing functionalities over the network to help other applications to use in their programs. -It has features like ‘Interoperability’ which determines the communication between various applications, sharing of data as well as services among themselves. -Web services use the standardized web service protocol stack for communication which consists of 4 layers namely, Service Transport, XML messaging, Service description and Service discovery. -It has the feature of the low cost of communication because of the usage of SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol) over HTTP protocol. -Easy to deploy, integrate and is reusable. -Allows simple integration between different feature as a part of loose coupling feature.
Explain BEEP?
BEEP stands for Blocks Extensible Exchange Protocol. BEEP is determined as building new protocols for the variety of applications such as instant messaging, network management, file transfer etc. It is termed as new Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) which is layered directly over TCP. It has some built-in features like
Authentication
Security
Error handling
Handshake Protocol
Explain the advantages of RESTful web services?
Enlisted below are the advantages of RESTful web services
-They are considered as language and platform independent as these can be written in any programming language and can be executed on any platform. -REST is lightweight protocol and is considered as fast because of less consumption of bandwidth and resources. -It supports multiple technologies and different data formats like plain text, XML, JSON, etc. -It has loosely coupled implementation and can be tested easily over browsers.
Explain different HTTP methods supported by RESTful web services?
Enlisted below are some common HTTP methods along with their functions that are supported by RESTful web services
GET: Read-only access to the resource.
PUT: Creation of new resource.
DELETE: Removal of a resource.
POST: Update of an existing resource.
OPTIONS: Get supported operations on the resource.
HEAD: Returns HTTP header only, nobody.
For designing a secure RESTful web service, what are the best factors that should be followed?
As HTTP URL paths are used as a part of RESTful web service, so they need to be secured. Some of the best practices include the following
Perform validation of all inputs on the server from SQL injection attacks.
Perform user’s session based authentication whenever a request is made.
Never use sensitive data like username, session token password, etc through URL. These should be passed via POST method.
Methods like GET, POST, PUT, DELETE, etc should be executed with proper restrictions.
HTTP generic error message should be invoked wherever required.
1c0:T300b,
Ember JS Interview Questions
Following are some of the most frequently asked Ember JS interview questions in the interview, here are the answers for them.
What is EmberJS?
It is javasScript framework based on Model-view-controller(MVC) and written in javascript. It allows developers to create scalable single-page web applications by incorporating common idioms. In this, Route is used as model, template as view and controller manipulates the data in the model.
Ember.js is used for creating web applications that eliminates boilerplate and at the same time provides a standard application architecture.
Ember helps to create applications, whose logic runs in browser and also it does not require server requests to functions. Ember update the DOM directly and instantly when any user interacts with things like button and text boxes on the browser page.
Explain how ember applications are structured?
The application ember.js is based on MVC (Model, View, Controller) structure
Models: It defines the data that is used in an application Controllers: It modifies query and edit the data and provide user interactions Views: It display the data and capture user actions
Explain how is ember.js is different than traditional web application?
In Ember.js, instead of majority of your application’s logic living on the server, an ember.js application downloads everything it required to run in the initial page load. So user does not have to load a new page while using the app and UI will responds quickly. The advantage of this architecture is that your web application uses the same REST API as your native App.
Explain what is the difference between Router and Route in ember.js?
Router: It is the connecting point between browser’s address bar and our application. It translates address into Route
Route: It is where a user request will land after it was translated by a Router. Route decides what data should be provided to the Template
Explain what is serializer?
For turning a raw JSON ( JavaScript Object Notation ) payload returned from your server into a record object a serializer is responsible. JSON APIs may represent attributes and relationship in many different ways.
How can you define a new ember class?
You can use call the extend () method on Ember.object to define a new ember class
Explain how you can create an Ember. handlebars template?
Call Ember.Handlebars.Compile() to create an ember.handlebars template. It will return a function which can be used by ember.view for rendering.
Explain what is Ember-data?
Ember-Data is a library that retrieve records from a server, store them, update them in the browser and save them back to the server.
Explain the role of adapter and types of adapters?
Adapter queries the back end, each adapter is made up of particular back end. For example Rest adapter deals with JSON APIs and LSAdapter deals with local storage.
What are basic models of EmberJS?
Routes: State of application is represented by URL and each URL has a corresponding route object that.
Models: Use to load data from Server.
Templates: This is html of layout.
Components: It is custom tag.
Services: Services are just singleton objects to hold long-lived data such as user sessions
What are the Features of EmberJS?
Creating reusable modules
Handlebars Templates
Automatice determines the route and controller during declaration of the route resources
Used routes
Extensive view type support.
Easy to configure
What is Enumerables in Ember.js?
enumerable is any object that contains a number of child objects, and enables you to work with those children using the Ember.
Explain Application Template?
Application Template is a default template that is used when your application starts.
Explain the role of adapter?
Adapter queries the back end, each adapter is made up of a particular back end.
Explain How You Can Create Instances In Ember.js?
You can create a new instance once you have defined the class by calling its create() method. Any properties or methods you defined on the class will be available to instances.
Explain What Is The Use Ember.sortablemixin?
For array proxies Ember.SortableMixin provides a standard interface to specify a sort order and maintain this sorting when objects are updated, removed or added without changing the order of the underlying model array.
Ember Interview Questions
List out main components of Ember.js?
Models
The Router
Controllers
Views
Components
Templates
Helpers
Why I use EmberJS?
Open source JavaScript framework
Flexible framework that embraces the concept of fast web page
It has smaller size as compare to other library
Data binding Support
What are different template components in Ember.js?
-Partial
-View
-Render
-Yield
-Outlet
When First EmberJS was released?
December 08, 2011
When latest EmberJS was released?
November 16, 2015
Who created EmberJS?
Yehuda Katz
Explain what is Enumerables in ember.js ?
In Ember.js an enumerable is any object that contains a number of child objects, and enables you to work with those children using the Ember.Enumerable API. Native JavaScript array is the most common enumerable in majority of Apps.
Explain what is ember.mixin class ?
Ember.mixin class can create objects, whose functions and properties can be shared among other instances and classes. This will help to share behaviour between objects as well as design objects.
Explain how you can create instances in ember.js?
You can create a new instance once you have defined the class by calling its create() method. Any properties or methods you defined on the class will be available to instances.
Explain how you can add data using fixture into an application?
In order to put sample data into an application before connecting the application to long-term persistence, fixtures are used.
-First update js/application.js to indicate that your application’s application adapter is an extension of the DS.FixtureAdapter. Adapters are used for communicating with a source of data for your application. Usually, this will be a web service API.
-Next, update the file at js/models/todo.js
1c1:T1173,
SAP HANA RESUME
300 Boylston, Seattle.
(415) 529 354.
johnsmith@gmail.com.
Professional Summary :
Good Knowledge in Data ware housing and Data modelling concepts.
Having Knowledge in generating analysis appliance report using BO design studio.
Holds excellent interpersonal and communication skills with demonstrated abilities in maintaining customer relationship management.
Good in Technical issues, problem solving and confident decision making.
Providing the training sessions to the team members on introduction to development on SAP HANA and currently handling the projects.
Worked on file extraction and reporting tools using HANA.
Key competencies :
Data bases : Oracle, Data base management system, SAP HANA, studio.
Tools : SAP net weaver portal, HTML.
Languages : Java script, ABAP/4.
Operating systems : Windows server 2007.
Educational Qualifications :
Bachelor of Engineering in computer science Engineering, University of Texas, Dallas.
Professional Experience :
Working as SAP HANA Developer in American Air Lines Group, Texas.
Duties and Responsibilities :
Using the SAP HANA studio created the data modelling for analytical, attribute and calculation views.
Creating the data modelling views based on business requirements.
Migration of objects from one to another (BW to HANA) based on requirements.
Involved in creating decision tables and performed calculation using function provided by HANA.
Developed and Executed queries in the back end.
Developed functional modules, standard reports, user exits and smart forms.
Accomplishments :
Handling a team of 7 members.
Troubleshooting the issues and technical problems pertaining SAP HANA.
SAP HANA Sample Resume Tips For Better Resume :
Highlight your Duties and Responsibilities.
Make it clear in the 'Objectives' that you are qualified for the types of job you are applying.
Bold the most recent jobs you have held.
Invest time in highlighting the most relevant skills.
Showcase transparency in employment gaps (if any).
1c2:T1a7c,
Octopus Deploy Interview Questionss
Following are some of the most frequently asked Octopus Deploy interview questions in the interview, here are the answers for them.
What are the delivery practices that Octopus Deploy can consider?
It is capable to easily deal with the delivery practices that are based on agile. In this practice, it is easy for the developers to make sure elimination of the run-time error without compromising with the efficiency. In addition to this, agile environment is secure and always make sure of outcomes that can be trusted in the long run.
What are consistent releases in the Octopus Deploy tool?
Well, this is basically an approach that can be considered to avoid situation when the deployment process needs to be made more secure. Many times there is a need to deploy resources for one module of the deployment and not to the other. For example, users are deployed for testing are not allowed to take part in any activity related to the production. In such a scenario, this approach ensure that all the processes related to deployment remain consistent when the users deployed for testing try to take part in production. Such situation is considered as consistent releases because the process remains consistent.
In which OS is it possible for the users to deploy the software or an application through Octopus?
With the Octopus Deploy, it is possible for the users to deploy the applications or the software into the Microsoft, Azure, Linux Servers as well as Windows Servers.
What is the significance of organizing the infrastructure in the environment?
This simply let the users define the deployment process which is very essential. This actually let the users understand the sub-tasks which are critical. This makes sure of error-free outcomes without compromising with anything. Users can also pay attention to the overall number of machines which are required to perform the task in a right manner.
Can deployments be repeated in the Octopus? What can be its impact on the project?
Yes, this is possible and can simply be achieved. Of course, it cut down the complexity and makes a project very reliable and useful.
Is it possible to use “Releases” in all the environment at the same time?
No, this is not possible. Generally they are called in the first environment. Their success in the same decides whether they can be utilized in the next or not. A lot of applications are there which support them in a reliable manner while with some there are many issues. In testing, whenever there is a new task, a release is required to be created.
What is Local vs Remote Tentacle deployments This requires that a Tentacle is installed on each of your SQL Server host servers. For example, if you have 2 SQL Server machines in each your environments (Dev,Test & Prod), you would need to install the agent on 6 servers. To reduce maintenance of your deployment server infrastructure, you may prefer to deploy from a single "central" Tentacle instead, assuming your network layout permits it. Follows these steps to perform a remote deployment from a single deployment agent:
In your project variables, add a variable called DatabaseServer and scope it appropriately for each of your target environments and/or deployment step(s)
Install the SQL Native Client 2012 (x86/x64) and SQL Command Line Utilities 2012 (x86/x64) on the Tentacle server.
Install the OctopusDeploy Tentacle on a server that can communicate with the target SQL Server instances.
Add the machine on the Octopus Environments page, and under Deployment, specify all environments. Assign a new role name to the machine, e.g. remote-sql-deployment.
On the project Process page, update the package step with the new role name.
What exactly do you known about the deployment process in the Octopus Deploy?
This process in the Octopus seems quite similar to that of a small application that is used for software deployment. Firstly there are some steps which need to be added for defining the recipe. After this, variables are added in the process. There is no strict upper limit on the steps in the Octopus. Users are free to choose them as per their experience and interest. These are available in the step library. The experienced developers can even define their own steps. Each step defines a group or a series of action which the tool executes for the related deployment process. It is necessary that process shouldn’t change too frequently.
Is there any similarity between tenants and channels in the Octopus Deploy?
Well, the fact is both seem quite similar to each other. This is because they both are responsible for eliminating one major problem and i.e. avoiding duplicacy of information. However, both are different in many aspects. The channel makes sure no copy of same information is present in the deployment process and at a user level. On the other side, the tenants make sure of same but on an enterprise level. It make sure that software can be modified in a different manner for every user but without facing the complexity issues that comes mainly due to duplicate or similar information with each dedicated copy.
What are the types of projects that you can manage with the help of Octopus Deploy?
There are many projects that can be managed in actual sense. The first thing is the deployment of the applications even when the same is on a large scale. Also, multiple software can also be managed and run with the help of this approach in a very reliable manner. The dedicated description of multiple projects can also be assured through this tool.
1c3:Tb23,
Angular JS Sample Resume
369 Main Street, Seattle, Washington. (415) 412 258. stefen@gmail.com.
Professional Summary :
Strong experience in Software Development Life Cycle (SDLC), designing and developing user experiences of web applications.
Having knowledge on working with CSS modules.
Good Experience in Search Engine Optimization in order to develop web applications.
Expertise in using various modules like waterfall, Agile scrum process.
Having extensive knowledge in web application servers like Tomcat.
Good in testing and debugging new programs using developer tools.
Technical Strengths :
Programming Languages : C, C# , java.
Browser : Opera, Firefox.
Data bases : SQL server, Teradata.
Web Technologies : XML, HTML, node.js
Tools : Bugzilla, Firebug.
Educational Qualifications :
Masters Degree in Computer Science Applications, Newyork Institute of Technology, Newyork.
Bachelor's degree in Computer Engineering, st.john college, Newyork.
Professional Experience :
Having 1 year experience in Angular Js developer, ABC corporation, Newyork.
Roles and Responsibilities :
Working closely with marketers and designers to rapidly ship new front-end experiments.
Implement front end experiences using process flow and sitemaps to bring interaction and design ideas.
Developed and designed custom jQuery components for the front end client side validations.
Developed a responsive web application integrating Bootstrap with Angular JS.
Created Responsive web design using Angular JS and did data manipulations to display data in company standard format.
Developed user interfaces for applications with the latest Front end technologies.
Expertise in developing web pages for different devices like desktop, mobile and tablet using Twitter bootstrap.
Accomplishments :
Established an IT team to support regional operations.
Implemented third -party solutions.
Angular JS Sample Resume Tips For Better Resume :
Invest time in underlining the most relevant skills.
Bold the most recent job titles you have held.
Highlight your roles and responsibilities.
Make it clear in the 'Objectives' that your are qualified for the type of job you are applying.
Showcase transparency in Employment Gaps (if any).
Feature your communication skills and quick learning ability.
1c4:Tcf3,
Application Package and Virtualization
77 Main Colony, Seattle, Washington.
(865) 954 785.
robert@gmail.com.
Profile Summary :
Designing Application Packages and deployed using SCCM globally to several workstations.
Providing on call rotation for software install and SCCM support.
Maintained review logs and executed Smoke Test.
Troubleshooting and virtualization of application installations using App-V sequencer.
Used Wise scripts and Vb scripts to add different functionalities in packaging and to schedule tasks.
Performed Quality Assurance test documentation based on the requirements of the company.
Bachelor of Engineering in Information Technology, Confidential University, Chicago.
Professional Experience :
Having 2 years experience in Application Packaging developer, ABC Corporation, Florida.
Duties and Responsibilities :
Involved in creating the App-V sequences for windows XP environment and publishing production environments and UAT.
Using WisePackageStudio, created windows installer setup packages.
Worked with windows to connect database through ODBC data sources.
Taking the backups on windows by developing the backup strategy.
Involved on working with different applications to develop MSI packages and using Transforms patches according to the package requirement.
Involved in working on migrating windows NT 4.0 packages to XP machines.ts
Accomplishments :
Handled a Team of 3 members.
Troubleshooting the issues and finding the defects.
Application Package and Virtualization Sample Resume Tips For Better Resume :
Bold the most recent job titles you have held.
Invest time in underlining the most relevant skills.
Showcase transparency in employment Gaps (if any).
Feature your communication skills and quick learning ability.
Make it clear in the 'Objectives' that you are qualified for the type of job you are applying.
Highlight your Roles and Responsibilities.
1c5:T2489,
Example No: 1 - Automate Windows Services - Check telnet service status and start telnet service if not started
Task Description
While running terminal commands, telnet service must be in started. For the purposes of this we check whether telnet service is started or not, if not then we will start the telnet service.T80.atmxNote: Save the xls in C: drive, the .atmx file in My Documents -> Automation Anywhere -> Automation Anywhere -> My Tasks
Solutions
Create a new task
Click on New->Task Editor
Insert service command to ‘Get Service Status’
Drag and drop services command.
Select ‘Get service status’ option.
Select Telnet service from the list.
Select the variable from the list.
Save the command.
Enter if condition to check whether the service is started or not.
Select $Prompt-Assignment$ in variable.
Select Equal to operation.
Select ‘Fix’ option.
Type ‘SERVICE STOPPED’
Save the command.
h3>Insert services command to START service
Drag and drop services command.
Select ‘Start service’ option.
Select Telnet service from the list.
Save the command.
Enter Else if condition to check the service is paused or not.
Select $Prompt-Assignment$ in variable.
Select Equal to operation.
Select ‘Fix’ option.
Type ‘SERVICE PAUSED’
Save the command
Insert services command to Resume Service
Drag and drop services command.
Select ‘Resume service’ option.
Select Telnet service from the list.
Save the command.
Insert all terminal commands which you want to run
Insert stop services command
After all the terminal commands put stop service command.
Drag and drop services command.
Select Stop service status option.
Select Telnet service from the list.
Save the command.
Save and Run the task
When you run this task, telnet service is started if it is not already started or paused. The service stops after executing all terminal commands./li>
How to run the task
In case you do not have Automation Anywhere installed, please download and install it from, http://www.automationanywhere.com/download/freeTrial.htm
Download T80.atmx to location, My Documents\Automation Anywhere\Automation Anywhere\My Tasks
Launch Automation Anywhere and from Task List select T80.atmx and click on RUN button to run the task.
Example No: 2 - Using OCR to integrate with command line FTP
Task Description
Web and Desktop applications are filled with images that need to be converted to a readable text for certain actions to be performed. OCR technology is used to do just that.
The task below logs into FTP server via DOS and waits to check if logged in successfully. It uses OCR technology to retrieve information from Command Prompt in to readable text to check whether login was successful.
T79.atmxNote: Save the xls in C: drive, the .atmx file in My Documents -> Automation Anywhere -> Automation Anywhere -> My Tasks
Solutions
Create a new task
Click on New->Task Editor
Insert ‘Open Program/File’ command to open command prompt
Type ‘cmd.exe’ in program/file text box.
Save the command.
Enter necessary keystrokes required to log in to the ftp server.
Insert Loop command
Insert 5 times loop command.
Insert OCR command to capture the text from command prompt.
Select window from the drop down.
Click on view capture text.
Select variable from drop down.
Click on save button.
Enter if command to check logged in successfully or not.
Enter $str$ variable.
Select ‘Includes’ operation.
Select ‘Fix’ option.
Type ‘logged in’ in fix text box.
Save the command.
Enter exit loop command in if condition.
Save and Run the task.
When you run this task, all the commands necessary to login to server are entered. It waits for some time to login to server. It uses the OCR technology to check whether login was successful or not.
logical backup [using export utility] works as an alternative backup method.
The beauty of export is we can be selective [either at export or at import]
We can export from one user and import into another within the same database
We can export from one database and import into another database [both source and target databases are ORACLE datgabases]
When migrating from one platfarm to another from WINDOWS to SUN SOLARIS then export is the only method to transfer the data [at least up on till 9i] since C/R/D files from the source can not be copied over to the target as file system are different types.
WINDOWS PLATFORM SUN SOLARIS PLATE
When upgrading ORACLE software, as a precaution, we can export of full database before the upgrade. If the upgrade utility able to successfully upgrade software as well as the database then its o.k., but Incase if software upgrading is successful where as data base up gradation has failed then we can still use the exported file which we did before the up gradation, so that we can bring back all the data.
Over a period of time [3 to 4 months] as the data based get fragmentation, being a DBA we used to go for REORG, which includes
Export full database
Drop the existing database
Recreate an empty database with all the required table spaces
Import full data
The dump file is 8 to 10 times smaller than database even though we did full export. The reasons are
No base tables are exported into target database.
No control or redo log files rare exported into the target database.
No temp table space is exported
No undo segments since they contain before image.
From user-index only definitions are exported but not the data.
Original data 10 gbTables are exported with data but they may have 50% free blocks and also 70% pot free
Really used data 2.7 gb [ 10% pot free]Use data 3 gb [ 50% of occupied] Occupied data 6 gb ddl + dml [uses undo+ lots of log switches imports takes 6 to 8 times than exports] advantages of exports
works for an alternative backup solutions.
Selective exports or imports are possible
Can copy objects
One user to another user
From one database to another database
From one OS to another OS export files are platform independent.
From one version to another version
Database reorganization [ every 3 to 4 months]
ORACLE up gradation
1c7:T340a,
Steps to provide customized validation messagesStep1 - Prepare a properties file with the custom validation msgs There prepare a properties file under classes folder or under src folder, pass all the predefined validation msgs in the present properties file from messages. Properties file and edit the validation message as per our requirement Eg: abc. Properties Should not be less than{0} Javax. faces. Validator. Long range Validator. maximum={1}value should not be greater than{0} Step - 2Configure properties file in faces-config.xml file To configure validation messages properties file, we have to use the following tags in faces- config.xml file <faces-config> <application> <message-bundle>abc</message-bundle> </application> </faces-config> Step - 3Provide label attribute in the respective i/p components The main intension of label attribute is to override the default component id-component name in validation messages with the provided value <h:input text id=”uname” value=”#{reg Bean. Uname}” required=”true” label=”user name”/> abc. properties Javar. faces. Validator. NOT-IN-RANGE=value is not in the range from{0}to{1}. Javax. faces. Validator. Double range Validator. NOT-IN-RANGE= {2}.value must be in between the range {0} and{1} Javax. faces. validator. Double range validator. TYPE={0} must be Double Javax. faces. validator. Long range validator. NOT-IN RANGE ={2} value must be in the range {0} and{1} Javax. faces. validator. Long range validator. TYPE={0} must be Double long Javax. faces. Component . UIInput. REQUIRED={0} Is required Index.html <html> <head> <meta http-equiy=”Refresh” Content=”2:URL=http://local host:1010/standaral dationsapp/registration from.dss”> <title>insert title here </title> </ head > </f:view> <body> <h1>application Loading….< /h1> </body> </html>Registration form.jsp: <%@page language=”java”conten type=”text/html;”> <%@taglib prefix=”f” <!Doctype--- <html> <head > <meta http-equiv=” Content type” Content= ”text/ html; chanset= ISO-8859-1”> <TITLE>Insert title here</title> </head > <body> <f:view> <h:from> <h:messages style=”color: blue”/> <h:panel Grid columns=”3”> <h: input text id=”u name” value=”#{reg bean. uname}” required=”true” label=”user name”/> <h: messages for= ”uname” style=”color:red”/> <h:output text value=”password”/> <h:input secret id=”upwd”value=”#{ reg bean. upwd}” required=”true” label=”password”/> <f:validate length minimum=”6”maximum=”15”/> </h:input secret> <h: messages for= ”upwd” style=”color: red”/> <h: output text value=”user age”/> <h:input text id=”uaage” value=”#{ reg bean. uage}” required=”true” label=”user age”> <f:validate long range minimum=”18”maximum=”30”/> <h:input text> <h: messages for= ”uage” style=”color: red”/> <h: output text value=”user salary”/> <h:input text id=”usal” value=”#{ reg bean. usal}” required=”true” label=”user salary”> <f:validate Double range minimum=”25000”maximum=”50000”/> <h:input text> <h: messages for= ”usal” style=”color: red”/> <h:command button value=”Registration”action=”# {reg bean. registration”} ”/> </h:panel Grid> </h:form></f:view> </body></html> Success.JSP <head > <meta……”> <title>insert title here<1title> </head> <body> <f:view> <h1>Registration success</h1> </f:view> </body></html> Registration Bean.java Package com. soft; Public class Registration Bean{ Private string uname; Private string upwd; Private int uage; Private floal usal; Set…() Get…() Public string registration(){ Return ”success”; } } Faces-config.xml <?xml version=”1.0”encoding=”UTF-8”?> <FACES-Config Xmlns=----xsd ”version=”1.2”> <managed-bean> <managed-bean-name>reg bean</managed-bean-name > <managed-bean-class>com. Durga soft. registration B ean</managed-bean- class > <managed-bean-scope>session</managed-bean- scope > </managed-bean > <navigation-rule> <from-view-id>/registration from.jsp</ > <navigation-case> <from-out come>success</ > <to-view- id>/success.jsp</ > </navigation-case> </navigation-rule> <application> <message-bundle>abc</ > </application> </faces-config>Web.xml same as prev .appl.? Custom validations: In JSF based web application , if all the standard validations are not sufficient to perform data validations, then JSF has given an environment to prepare user defined validations
To prepare custom Validator, we have to use the following steps
Prepare user defined Validator class.
Configure custom Validator in faces-config.xml file
Use custom valid tore in faces-config.xml component in user forms,
Prepare user defined Validator class. for this we have to take an user defined class & it must implement javax.faces. Validator. Validator interface
Validator interface has the following method to provide custom validation logic
In validate()method we have to provide the following implementation.
a) prepare faces message object to represent a single validation message faces message fm=new faces message();
b) Add validation message to faces message object by using either of the following methods
Public void set detail(string msg) Public void set summary(string msg) Msg. set detail(“Invalid mobile number”); Msg. set summary(“Invalid mobile number”);
c) Rise Validator Exception with the faces message throw new Validator exception(fon)
ii) Configure custom Validator in faces-config.xml files: To configure custom Validator in faces-config.xml file we have to use the following tags <faces-config> <Validator> <Validator-id>logical-name</ <Validator-class>custom Validator fully qualified name</ <Validator> </faces-config> iii) Use custom validator to the required i/p component to use custom validator with i/p component have to use the following tag <f:validator validator Id=-validator Id=….”/> This tag must be used under<h:input text>iag Custom validator app(1.x custom validator)ABC.properties Eid=Employee id ename =Employee name eaddres =Employee addres eemail =Employee mail ID eemobile =Employee mobile button=Registration email-validatore=invalid email id //copy standard Validator msg from messages. Properties file and modify them Index.html <html> <head> <meta http-equiv=”Refresh”content=”2;url=http://local host:100/custom validate app/employee form.dss”> <body> <h1>application is loading</h1> </body> </html> Employee form.jsp%@laglib perfix=”f”url=”http//sun.java.com/jsf/care%/html% <% <html> <body> <f:view> <font color=”red”> <h1> software solutions</h1> <h2>employee registration form</h2> </font> <h:form> <h:panel grid=columns=”3”> <h:output text value=”#{msg.eid}”/> <h:input text id=”eid” value=”#{regBean.eid}”required =”true ”label=”Employee Id”/> <h:message for=”eid”/> <h:output text value=”#{msg. ename}”/> <h:input text id=”ename” value=”#{regBean. ename}” Required=”true”label=”employee name”/> <h:message for=”ename”/> <h:output text value=”#{msg. eaddr}”/> <h:input text id=”eaddre” value=”#{reg Bean. eaddr}” Required=”true” label=”employee address”/> <h:message for=”eaddr”/> <h: output text value=”#{msg. eemail}”/> <h:input text id=”eemail” value=”#{reg Bean. eemail}” Required=”true” label=”employee email”/> <f:validator validator id=”email validator”/> </h:input text> <h:message for=”eemail’/> <h: output text value=”#{msg. emobile}”/> <h:input text id=”emobile” value=”#{reg Bean. eemail}” Required=”true” label=”employee mobile”/> <h:message for=”emobile”/> <h:command button value=”#{reg button}”action=”#{ Reg bean. registration}”/> </h:panel Grid></h:form></f:view> </body></html> Success.jsp <%@laglib prefir=”f”-----core”%> < “h” html”%> <html> <body> <f:view> <h1>Registration success</h1> </f:view> </body> </html> Registration Bean.java Package com. soft Public class Registration Bean{ Private string eid; Private string ename; Private string eaddr; Private string eemail; Private string emobile; //provide setter()&getter()getter() Private string registration(){ Return ”success”; }Email validator.java Package com. Durga soft; Import java. util. iterator; Import java. util. Resource bundle; Import java. faces. application. application; Import java. Faces. application. faces message; Import java. faces. content. faces context; Import java. faces. Validator. validator; Import java. faces. validator. validator exception; Public class email validator implements validator{ Public void validator(faces context fe,UI Component we, object value) throws validator exception{ String email.=(string)value; If(email. contains(“@”)){ Application application=fe.get application(); String prp-file=application. get message bundle(); Resource bundle bundle=Resource bundle. get bundle(prp-file); String err-msg=bundle.get string(“email-validator”); Faces message fm=new faces message(); Fm.set detail(err-msg); Throw new validator Exception (fm); } } } Faces-config.xml <faces-config> ------- ------ XSD <Managed. bean> < Managed. Bean-name>reg bean</ Managed. Bean-name> < Managed. Bean-class>com. durga soft. Registration bean reg </ > Managed. Bean-scope>session </ > < /Managed .bean> <navigation-rule> <from-view-id>/emkployeeform.jsp</ > <navigation-case> <from-outcome>success</ > <to-view-id>/ success.jsp</ > </navigation-rule> <validator> <validator-id>email-validator</ > </validator> <application> <resource-bundle> <base-name>abc</b > <var>msg<va/r> <message-bundle>abc< /message-bundle > </application> </faces-config>
1c8:T2535,
SYSTEM CALENDAR FUNITIONReal time usage It is really difficult to write SQL for the below data and time analytically but by using system calendar we can answer easily
Last year 3 Quarter sales to this year 3rd Quarter sales compression
Last year 25th week sales to this year 23rd sales year etc
System calendar layout This have one Row for every day from January 1st 1900 through Dec 31st 2100[73k#] Calendar- date-----Standard Date Day – of – week----(1-7 1-sunday) Day –of-month----(1-13) Day –of-year----(1-366) Week day – of- calendar -- jillion date,startingjan,1,1900 Week day – of- month --- (nth occurrence, 1-5) Week day – of- month ---(1-5 )partial week Week day – of- calendar –(1-52) Month – of –quarter ---(0-n) Month – of – year ---(1-3) Month – of – calendar—(1--n) Quarter – of – year –(1-9) Quarter – of – calendar ---(1-N) Year – of calendar ----(1900 -2100) Queries àDisplay the calendar with today date? Sel*From sys – calendar. Calendar where calendar-date=current Date;àDisplay the calendar with tomorrow date Select *From sys-calendar.calendar where calendar – date=current date+1 ->DISPLAY Quarter one sales for year2010 Create multi set sales(id integer, s date date format ‘yyyy-mm-DD’, Sale sin come integer) Date: Insert into sales(1,’2010-02-03’,1000); Insert into sales(2,’2010-03-04’,2000); Insert into sales(1,’2010-01-05’,2000); Insert into sales(1,’2010-09-04’,3000); Insert into sales(1,’2010-09-03’,2000); Sel id, sum(sales income) from sales S,Sys—calendar. calendar C where c. calendar-date= s.sdate and Quarter –of-year=1 and year-of- calendar =2010 and s.id=1 Group by s. id àDisplay the current month sales for iteam one 1st way Sel id sum(Sales income)From sales s, sys-calendar.calendar C where c.calendar-date= s. s date and month – of – year=9 and year- of – calendar = 2011 and sid = 1 group by s. id 2nd way Sel id, sum(Sales income)From sales s, sys- calendar. Calendar c(Sel *From sys- calendar. Calendar where calendar- date=current-date) Td where c. calendar-date=s. date and c. month-of- calendar=td. month-of- calendar and s.id=1 àDisplay current month sales and last year current month sales sel id, sum(Sales income)from sales s, sys- calendar. Calendar c,(Sel*From sys – calendar. Calendar where calendar-date= current - date)td Where c. calendar-date=s.date And (c.month-of- calendar=td.month-of- calendar) (or) (c.month-of- calendar=td.month-of – calendar-12) And s-id=1 Note - For Displays current months last monthcompression, last year current month prev Type s of Tables Different types of table available in tera data for different type of operation intermediate calculation
Permanent table
Set table
Multi set table
Derived Table
Volatile Table
Global Temporary
Queue table[V2R6 introduce]
Error Table[TD 12 Introduce]
Temporal table[TD13.10]on words available
a)Permanent table - This table is available across multiple session and user any where[both structure and date] d)Derived Table - This table structure data available with in the query once the query execution finish no structure data available
Its created for strong intermediate results and calculation
It life time is query level that means with in the query it created, once Query execution finish table is drop automatically
it’s stores under spool memory
In other data bases we call this type of queries are in line query(or) in line view
Select party id, party name, d. sumincome,d. avincome from party,(Select sum(prty income)as sum income, avg(party income)as avincome from party)d E) Volatile:
It is also design for intermediate operation
Its life time is with in the session that mean table data available with in the session, once the session no structure and data available
Its definition not store in the data dictionary so we cannot create indexes and we can not collect statistic and data dictionary on this table
It stores under spool memory
Note In Tera data 13 we can collect statistic on volatile table VOLATILE-NOTEPAD Allows volatile table uses along with the data for other tables Query in the same session .Log on Creating: Create volatile table <VT Name>,Log/No Log(Column definition) on commit preserver/Delete Rows; INSERTING Date - INSERT INTO<VT Name>select sum(Col name),Avg (Col name)From <T name> Using it - Select col names,<Volatile table name>.column name from<T name>,<Volatile table name> Show * from table <volatile table> .logoff .log on Show table<volatile table> àBoth structure and date will not be available .Logon 127.0.0.1/dbc, dbc; Create volatile table vt- party, No log(Sum income integer, avincome integer on commit preserve rows; Insert into vt- party select sum(Party income),Avg(Party income) From party Select p.partyid, p.party name ,vt- party .sum income , vt- party income From party p, vt- party; Show tablt vt- party; Select* From vt- party; .Logoff .Log on 127.0.0.1/dbc,dbc; Show table vt – party; Both structure and data will not be available F)Global Temporary Table
It is also design for storing intermediate result and calculation
It structure is accessible across session but it’s data accessible with in the same session
It’s stores under temporary memory
It’s structure stores order data dictionary, so we can create indexes and collect statistics under same table
Some people they are using this tables for materialized tables implementation,
Ex - log on 127.0.0.1 /dbc,dbc; Create global temporary table vt_ party, log/no log(sum income integer, avincome integer) on commit preserve rows; Insert into vt-party(10000,20000); Show table vt-party; Sel * from vt_ party; .log off; .logon 127.0.0.1/dbc,dbc; ---- ---- Show table VI- Party; Structure available; Select*From VI-Party; No data available Note Log - Log information maintains by using transient journal on commit preserve rows allows the use volatile tables again for other Queries in the session . On commit Delete Rows This is the default one means the data delete once query completed. G[Query Table] Query Table:[V2 R6 introduce] It is like permanent table, but created with Query options 1st column should be time stamp column Select statement used to read the data Select and consume To retrieve and delete the data It maintain FIFO[Fist In first out]Cache which available at parsing engine Creates set table x, Queue, fall back (Tid, time stamp not null default current time stomp, pid integer pnm varcher(30))
Insert into x(,),’vinay’);
Select*From x; only Redirect[Display]first row inserted first and last row last]
Select and consume top1*From x;
Display first row all columns and delete that row ERROR Table[TD12 introduce]
To handle the error at the time of insert to select(or) merge into statement which loading BUL Date
If these are any error to the error in error table and continuous the execution of query this tables are useful
We can redirect limited error (or) all errors
Syntax: Error table Create error table<Table name> For<Target table> Ex - Create error table et party 2 for party2; àInsert into party select* From party2 logging error; àinsert into party3 select*From party2 logging error with limit of 100; I)Temporary table[TD13.10] on words available
It has the ability to store all historical states of a particular Record or particular data base row.
Generally used for below type of Queries
Display valid Records in specified period
Display transition Records in this specified period
1c9:T1ece,
IMPORTING DATA INTO A TABLE[FIXED FAXMAT] .Run file c:\BTEQ\Conn.txt; .LOGTABLE Vinayaka.PLOG DATABASE VINAYAKA; .ROUTE MESSAGES WITH ECHO TO FILE C:\Data-log\M Load- fixid.xlog; .BEGIN IMPORT MLOAD TABLES PARTY111; .LAYOUT LAYOUT1; .FIELD I-pid 1 char(3); .FIELD I-PNM 4 char(4); .DML LABEL TAG DML: INSERT INTO PARTY111(Partyid, party name)values(:I-pid,:I-PNM); .IMPORT INFILE C:\Mload\MTEST1.TXT LAYOUT LAYOUT1 Formal Text Apply Tagdml; .END MLOAD; .LOGOFF; Importing data into multiple tables[Vartext format] .Run file c:\BTEQ\Conn.txt; .Log Table vinayaka.mno; Data base vinayaka; .Begin Import mload tables emp10,Dept10; .Layout vinay Layout; .Filler I- Fill CH*Varcher(30); .Filler I- ID*Varcher(30); .Filler I- NM*Varcher(30); .DML Label emp- insert1; Insert into emp10(eid, ename)values(:I-ID,:IANM); .DML Label dept- insert Insert into dept 10(dept id, dept name)values(:I-ID,:I-NM); .Import IN File c:\mload\vinay-vor text. Txt formal vartext ‘,’ Layout vinay layout Apply emp- insert1 where I –fill<h-‘E’ Apply Dept Insert1 where i- filkh=’D’; .ebd mload; .Log OFF; MLOAD-SCD1.Note Pad(7th Script in the project) .RUN FILE C:\BTEQ\conn.Txt; .Log table vinayaka. pLog; .Set DBS To’vinayaka’;/*Declare variable = name*/programming int :=10,che .Begin Import mload Tables &DBS..Party5 Work table &DBS.. W-Party5 Error tables &DBS..E-Party5 &DBS.. U- Party5; .Layout layout1; .Field I-Pid 1 char(1); .Field i-pnm 2 char(5); .Field I-PLOC 7 CHAR(3); .dml label party5 upsert Do INSERT FOR Missing update Rows; Updata&DBS.. PARTY5 Set party loc=:I-PLOC Where party id -:I-PID; Insert into &DBS..Party5(:I-PID,:I-PNM,:I-PLOC,); .Import infile c:\mload\data-Fixed. Txt layout layout1 format text apply party5 – UPSERT; .End mload; .LOS OFF IMPLEMENTING SCO TYPE2 Date mechanism 8th script in the project .Run File c:\BTEQ\Conn.txt; .Log Table vinayaka.mno; Database vinayaka1 .Begin Import mload tables party6’ .Layout vinaya layout; .Field I-ID*Varchar(30); .Field I-NM* Varchar(30); .Field I-LCC* Varchar(30); .Field I-SDT* Varchar(30); .DML Label party6-INSERT; Insert into party6(:I-ID,:I-NM,:I-LOC,:I-SDT,’0001-01-01’); .DML Label party6-UPD; Update party6 set end-DT=:I-SDT Where Party=:I-ID And end=DT=’0001-01-01’; .Import Infile c:\MLoad\Data-Vartext.txt Format vartext’,’ Layout vinay Layout Apply party5-=UPD Apply party6-Insert; .End mload; .Log off; Multi load Error Handling:1.While execute multi load script Tera data server is Re started? Ans: Along with Tera data Server Multi load script will also be started and it starts from last check point. While execute multiple script client system Restarted we need manually sub script so the transform last check point 2)Why multi load does not support USI, RI, JI Trigger and HI? Ans: Because multi load cannot provide communication between Amps and it’s Runs Amp Independently 3)Why multi load does not support USI And support NUSI? Ans: In NUSI Sub Table store In the same Amp And operation of the AMPS Are Independent, so it supports NUSI 4)How Do you load Multiple File Data into multiple Table using single script? .Run File c:\BTEQ\conn. TXT; .Log Table Vinayak. MNO; Data base vinayaka; .Begin IMPML Mload Tables emp, Depl; .Layout L1; .Field I-ID* Varchar(30); .Field I-NM* Varchar(30); .Lay out L2; .Field I-ID1* Varchar(30); .Field I-NM 1* Varchar(30); .Field I-INC* Varchar(30); .DML Label INS1; Insert INTO emp(eid, ename) Values (:I-ID),:I-NM); .Dml Label INS2: Insert into dept(dept id, deptname)values(:I-ID1,:I-NM1); .Import INFILE C:\MLoad\File1. Txt Formal VartexL ‘,’ Layout L1 Apply INS1; .Impart INFile c:\Mload\File2.txL Formal vartext ‘,’ Lay out L2 Apply INS2; .End Mload; .Log Off; 5)Can we concatenate multiple and load the data’, Ans: No *Multi load script fail error Table existed then how do you restart? Ans: In case of old file to RESTART 1) Do not Drop Error in work table and do not release lock and target tables 2) Simple rectifies the error on the script Run again so that Runs last check point. In case of New file to restart
Drop error table and work log table
Release the log and target table and below syntax
AQuision those Release m load<Table1>,<Table2>…< Table5> Application Release m load<Table1>,<Table2>…< Table5> in apply NoteThis command executable only in BTEP Specified new file in the script Run Freshly TPUMP[TRICIL PUMP(OR) Tera data parallel data PUMP]Features
It loads 60 or more table[max64table]
It loads error Records into error tables
It fully Automatic Restart able
It design for near real time data loading
It loads the data into
Empty or populated table
Set or multi set\
Duplicate
SI RIR, TRIGGERS, EVEN The Table is Having
It applies locks at row level
It is designed for less volume of data
Any number of scripts we can execute at a time parallity
Real time usage
For loading the data into multiple table with less volume, which is of near real time this is recommended
To load the data in to table according to the traffic also Recommendable
Navigation
Start Run Tpump
Start Program Tera data client Tera data TPUMP
Limitations
It can not perform arithmetic expansion and aggregate operations on the data
No conciliation of input files allowed
The usage of select statement is not allowed
Not more than for import task may be we in a single load task
Data before 1900 or after 1999 should be represent with ‘yyyy’ Because yy ta takes 20th century dates
1ca:T1802,
FAST Load error HandlingAbort in phase1, Data AQuision in complete:
In case of error Rectifying and Run it, so that it start from last check point
Event through here are no error simple Restarted, sot that it start from last check point
Aborted in phase2 Data AQuision completed: Simple take begin and end loading the script and Run it, so that it runs from Amp to table
1) Acquision (File- Amp)} 2)Application(Amp-Table) .Login .Begin Handle load table Error Check point End Load(Amp-Table) .Logoff What is default data conversion supported in fast load? Ans: Char Data Char Numeric Numeric Char Date Char Numeric Decimal Fixed text Varchar Integer Decimal Decimal Integer How do you load multiple file some structure to a table? [Same structure different file names](or)There is no end loading statement more data acquire then what will you do? Ans There are 2 ways
a) Taking multiple script for multiple file and Running all the script without end loading structure, so that, the data loaded to Amp and concatenated every time.
b) For the last script specify end loading and Run, so that this file data also laded to Amp and then this loaded data more from amp to table.
2nd way
a) Take a single script and replace the file one by one fill fast life without end loading
b) For the last file specify end loading in script and run, so that runs from Amp to table
1st way:FAST Load script fail and error table existed then how do you restart? Ans:1st way: In case of old file to Restart
Do not draw ET, UV, Log Table
Don of Release locks and target tables
Simply Rectify the errors and script or file and Runs it,
so that if Runs from last check point Note
While working the LAB To implement above process, 1st Rectify the error in the script/file later comment the drop and delete statement and Run the script
If script fail and you trying see the data in a table It display table is being loaded
In case of fresh restart run the below empty script so that it drop error tables, release the lock and target table and delete the content from fast lock table
.Set Record unformatted; .Run file c:\BTEQ\Conn.TXT; Database vinayaka; Begin Loading party3 Error files erparty3,UVParty3 Check point 10; End loading .Log off Take a new file in the script and run freshly Why fast load does not support SI,JI,RI And TRIGGER? Ans: The above concept Required communication between Amps, But Fast load Does not support communication between Amp’s And runs independently
1cb:T1949,
IMPORTANT STEPS TO REMEMBER WHILE EXPORTING THE DATA
Select statement to retrieve the data
File format, mode, path etc.
Step1 - Remember while importing the data
Insert OR update or up sert statement
File path, mode, structure and format
Step2 - Remember while importing the data
Insert OR update or up sert statement
File path, mode, structure and format
Modes1.Data modeThis mode also be called as Record mode Here one by one Record will be process Here Null Represent with ‘zero’[Integer], or spaces[STRINGS]
date
date
date
date
2.INDICATOR MODE It is just like data mode, null are represented with Indicate bytes[“Nulls are treated as nulls only”]
Indicator bytes
date
date
Indicator bytes
date
date
3.Report mode It is fields by field format mode 4.DIFF[Date Interchange file Format mode] It is used across various pc ways plot form such as excel, Fox pro,[Loater under Lotus – 1,2,-3 etc]
Format option
1.Format option A Two-byte integer n followed by n bytes of data. Followed by An End – of- Record market, either X ‘OA’ OR X’OD’ 2.Binary A Two-byte integer, n followed by n bytes of data. 3.TEXT An Arbitrary number of bytes followed by an end- of- Record market, either X’OA’ OR X’OD’ 4.UNFORMAT Exported as it is Received from CLIV2 with out any client modifications Note In text format end of the mandatory FREQUENTILY USE FILE MODES IN REAL TIME Un format [FJXED TEXT] 2.VARTEXT[Delimiter]
123
Vinay
KKK
8345
Modhu
58
Krish
Kumar
ID Max 10 character Name Max 30 character Column Delimiter:? Row Delimiter: CRLF[Enter key character] Note Othe Delimiters Space, Tab,; ;, etc LOGON COMMAND This command is used to log in to the system, After Logon it create as session, during session only the user can operate this queries INTERACTIVESyntax - LOGON Tdpid OR IP ADDRESS OR SERVER NAME/<user name><Enter key> password=<pass word> Ex: TD12:.LOGON 127.0.0.1/DBC<Enter key> Pass word=DBC Batch modeSyntax - Logon tdpid or IP Address or server name/<USER NAME>,<Password>[‘Acctid’] Ex: TD12 .Logon 127.0.0.1/DBC,DBC BTEQ[Basic Tera data Query] Run is Two Modes
Interactive
Batch mode
Navigation 1st way: Start Run BTEQ 2ND way: Start Programs Tera data client Tera data BTEQ[Win BTEQ] Real Time usages:
The Unix Environment we use BTEQ by Firing day to day Query[Like Query man, SQL Assissent in window]
For Testing perspective for tester use
For out day to day operations[Importing And exporting etc] we use it
1cc:Tafe,
Converting NOPI to PI table
There are 2 steps a) Create a multi set table with the same structure and take a primary index on that table. Create a multi set table New-tet(Party id integer, party name Varchar(30)primary index(Party id) b)Insert data into new- tet, drop tet table and rename new-tet to tet i)Insert into new- tet select* from tet ii) drop table tet iii) Rename table new –tet to tet Altering a primary index(it table is empty and it is not having NOPI) Alter table test modify primary index(Party name) Default primary Index If we don’t take and index on the table the system creats a primary index in the below process
The unique key(or) primary key column consider as UPI
IF No unique kdy (or) primary key it create on the first column NOPI.
Note If both primary key and unique key columns available it takes primary index(PI)on primary key column and (Unique primary index) and unique columns as USI(Secondary index)
Difference between primary index and primary key
Primary index(P.I)
Primary key (P.K)
Primary index mandatory
Primary key optional
Max 64 Columns combination
No limit on no. of columns to composite
effects data distribution
Doesn’t effect data distribution
can take duplications and null
Doesn’t allow null and duplicates.
physical mechanism
Logical mechanism
Cannot be drop
Cannot be drop
Queries stores and retrieve faster w.r.to PI etc….
1cd:T71d,
Data distribution in other RDBMS It is sequential so, storing and retrieve take time So that take lot of time storing and retrieval Data distribution in tera data
a) Automatic A sit is automatic, it loads any volume of data
b) uniform(or) even(or)randomly It loads the data uniformly or parallel so that distribution and retrieval faster.
This automatic and uniform event is possibly in tera data, because of indexes. Data Access Mechanism
a) Full table scan (FTS)
b) Primary index retrieval (P.I)
c) Secondary index retrieval(S.I)
A) FULL TABLE SCAN(FTS) i) System performance In case of FTS System performance decreased ii) Situation to Get a) If the indexed columns are not used in the query b) An index is used in non-equal to test c) Range of value specified in primary index Ex:- b)Sel*from party where party name like’V%’
C) Sel* from party where party income between 5000 and 7000
FTS Process
i) It scans every data block in table
ii) All Amp scan for the table portion
Remedy Take appropriate PI to avoid FTS To Apply PI to avoid FTS To used PI to avoid FTS.
1ce:T37a7,
AJAX controlKit webserver controls :
These controls are the independent controls and they will not extend other controls. The webserver controls available in AJAXcontrolToolkit are as follows.
Accordion :
Accordion control is used to provide a number of panes on the page allow the user to expand a panel by clicking on its header when user select a pane then all other panes available in the accordion control will be automatically collapsed.
properties :
FadeTransitions :
Used to specify whether or not the FadeTransition effect will apply to the pane whenever it is expanded or collapsed.
Framespersecond :
Used to specify no of frame to change within a second while applying Fade Transitions.
Transition Duration :
Used to specify the time in Millie-seconds for the total transition to complete
Headercssclass :
Used to specify the css class you want to use to display the header for accordion panes available within Accordion control when it is not selected.
Headerselectedcssclass :
Used to specify the css class to use to display the header of Accordion panes when they are selected.
Required opened pane :
Indicates whether or not atleast one pane is opened within the accordion control.
Use the property panes to create panes within the accordion control & for every pane you have to specify header& content where header is used to specify heading for that & content is used to specify the context to display within that pane.
Example :
The following example demonstrates how to use the accordion.
Add a page to the website and then take a Toolkit scriptmanager on the page and within the HTML source of the page within the headsection create two css class with the names ‘header’ & ‘Selectedheader’ as follows
Within HTML source of the page itself drag& drop an accordion control and design it as follows with two Accordion panes.
<asp: Accordion ID=”Accordion1” runat=”server” FadeTransitions=”true” Headercssclass=”header” Framepersecond=”30” TransitionDuration=”2000” Headerselectedcssclass=”selectedheader” requireiopenedpane=”true”> <panes> <asp:Accordionpane Id=”AP1” runat=”server”> <Header> This is Accordion Panel </Header> <context> This is according panel context <br/> This is Accordion panel context <br/> ------------------ ------ </context> </asp:Accordionpane> <asp:Accordiopane Id=”AP2” runat=”server”> <Header> This is Accordion pane 2 </Header> <context> This is Accordion pane 2 context <br/> This is Accordion pane 2 context <br/> ---- ------------------- </context> </asp:Accordionpane> </panes> </asp:Accordion>
AsyncFileupload:
Asyncfileupload control is used to Asynchronously upload the file to server properties.
Hasfile :
Used to specify whether or not a file is selected with in the file upload control
FileName :
Returns name of the file selected in fileupload control.
FileBytes :
Returns the content of the selected file in the form of Byte array.
Filecontent :
Returns an IOstream object by using which you can read data from the selected file or write data to the selected file.
uploaderstyle :
used to specify how the Asynch fileuplad will appear. IT has two options ‘traditional’ & ‘modern’
uploadingBackcolor :
Used to specify the back ground color for file upload while the file is uploadoing.
ErrorBackcolor :
Used to specify the background color for the Asyncfileupload if there is any error in uploading the file.
completebackcolor :
Used to specify the background color for ‘file upload control ’ after uploading the file is completed.
Method :
saveAS() : Used to save the file selected in the Asynfileupload to the server.
Example :
The following example demonstrates how to use the AsyncFileupload.
Add a page to the web site , take a toolkit scriptmanager on the page and then design it as follows with one Async fileuplaod, a button & an image control.
For the Asyncfile upload control set the name as AFUL and write the following code within the button upload click event.
AJAX file upload is also used to upload files to the server.Advantage of this over Asyncfileuploader & fileupload of control of ASP.net is you can select multiple files at a time with a Ajaxfileupload and displays the progress of uploading a file by clicking on the AJAX file upload you can select multiple files by holding control (ctrl) or shift key. You can also select multiple file by simple dragging & dropping the files on to the AJAX – fileupload control.
properties :
Allowed file type :
Used to specify a list of allowed file types by separationg them with (;) semicolon.
MaximumNumberoffiles:
Used to specify the Maximum Number of files user can upload using the Ajaxfileupload
style :
This property is used to specify the style for the control using CSS properties.
Method :
SaveAs () : Used to save the file selected in Ajaxfileupload to the server. within the browsers like Internet explorer chrome its that support HTML5 & CSS 3 this control can automatically display the progress of uploading a file with a progress bar when if takes time to upload.
Cascading Drop Down :
This control is used with dropdown list control and it is used to automatically get values to display in a dropdown list by executing a method Asynchronously.
Properties :
TargetcontrolID :
ParentcontrolID : Used to specify the ID of the parent dropdownlist from which it has to take the value to get the list of values for targetcontrol of the current cascading dropdown.
Category : Used to specify a category name for the cascading drop down
Loading Text : Used to specify the text to display in the target control while loading item into it.
Prompt Text : Used to specify the text to display in for the Target control after loading items to it.
ServideMethod : Used to specify the method name that is called to get the list of items to display within the target cotrol.
Example :
The following example demonstrates how to use the cascading dropdown with dropdownlist controls.
Add a page to the website and take a ToolkitscriptManager on it along with two Dropdownlist controls and set their ID’s as DDL1 & DDL2.
Within HTML source of the page Drop & Drop two cascading drop down controls & set following for them.
<asp : cascading Dropdown ID=”cascading Drop Down1” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID = “DDL1” category=”countries” LoadingText=”[Loading countries]” promptText = “select your country” Servidemethod=”Getcountries” usecontentkey = “True”> </asp: cascadingDropDown> <asp : Cascading Dropdown ID=”cascading Dropdown2” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”DDL2” parentcontrolID=”DDL1” category=”states” LoadingText = “[loading states]” propmptText = “select your state” usecontextkey=”True”> </asp:cascadingDropDown> Within the design of the page click on the smart tag of 1st dropdown list & choose “Add cascading Drop down page method” to create a Method in the code getcounties which is set as the serviceMethods for the 1 st cascading Dropdown & write the following code with in it.{ sqlconnection cn= new sqlconnection (“server=Nikhil; database=mydb;uid=sa;pwd=123”); Sqldatadpater Da=new Sql DataAdapter(“Select country from countires”, cn); Dataset Ds= new Dataset(); Da.fill(Ds,”countries”); CascadingDropDownNameValue[]Items=new cascading DropDownNamevalue[d.Tables[“countries”].Rows.count]; int i=0; foreach(DataRow Dr in Ds.Tables[“Countries”].Rows) { Items[i++]=new cascadingDropDownNameValue(Dr[0].Tostring(),Dr[0].Tostring()); } returns Items; }
With in the design of the page click on the smart tag of second DropDownList & choose”Add cascading DropDownPageMethod” to create a method in the code with the name “GetStates” which is the serviceMethos set to 2 nd dropdownlist and write the following code with in that mehod.
{ string country=knowncategoryvalues; country=country.substring(country.Indexof(“:”)+1); country=country.substring(0,country.Length-1); Sqlconnection cn=new sqlconnection(“Server=Nikhil; database=mydb;uid=sa;pwd=123); SqldataAdapter Da=new sqlDataAdapter( “Select state from states from states where country=”’+country+’”,cn); Dataset Ds = new Dataset(); Da.fill(Ds.”States”); CascadingDropDownNameValue[]Items=new CascadingDropDownNameValue[DS.Table[“states”].Rows.count]; int i=0; foreach(DataRow Dr in Ds.Tables[“states”].Rows) { Item[i++]=new cascading DropDownNameValue( Dr[0].Tostring()); } returns Items; }
at runtime immediately after the page is loaded list of countries will be add to 1 st Dropdownlist& when you select a country in DropDownlist then a list of states related to the country are added to the second dropdown list & all this done asynchronously.
For this example you required the following two tables in database.
create table countries(country varchar(30)) create table states (country varchar(30),state varchar(30))
ComboBox:
Combo Box is similar to DropDownList except that it allows you to select an Item from the List and also type the Item If it is not available in List.
Properties:
AutocompleteMode: Indicate how the Item is automatically completed while user types it .It has the possible values None,Append,Suggest&SuggestAppend.
Casesenstive: Indicate whether or not the comboBox is casesenstive to Apply the AutocompleteMode.
Datasource: Used to specify source of data for that comboBox that can be an array ,a collection or a table in database.
DataTextFiled: When datasource is in then this property is used to specify the column name in table whose data to treat as the text of the Item.
DatavalueField: When data source is a table in database then this property is used to specify the column name in table whose data to treat as value for the Items.
DropDownStyle: Used to specifyappearence & behaviour of the combobox.It has three possible values ‘simple’,Dropdown&DropDownlist’.When DropDownList is set to simple then the list portion will not hidden& It will be displayed permanently .But in Both DropDown& DropDownList style the list will be automatically hidden after selecting an Item. In the simple & dropdown styles they will allow you to select an Item available in the list .But in DropDown style you cannot type the Item& you select an Item from the list.
Items: This is the collection of Items in Combo.It can be used for adding Items to the ComboBox or delete Items from the combo box ,Bothe at design time & runtime.It has the methods & properties same as properties and methods of Itens collection of dropdownlist and listbox.
The default event for combobox is selected Indexchanged.
1cf:T25f0,
Control 1:
Script Manager:This control is responsible to manage & execute the Javascript required to implement AJAX features in a webpage. A Webpage that implements AJAX must have script manager control on it.
Control 2:
Script Manager Proxy:While working with master pages if the master page contains a script manager then all content pages created from that master page can use the script manager available on master page you can not take another script manager on the content page. If you want the reference of any external javascript file related to AJAX for that content page then you have to use script manager proxy.
Control 3:
Update Panel: update panel is used for implementing partial page update with AJAX. When post back occurs because of a control available in an update panel then only particular update panel will be post back to server and updated from server without disturbing the remaining page.
Control 4:
Update progress:This control is used to represent the progress of updating an update panel with a message or an image.
Control 5:
Timer :Timer control is used to repeatedly execute the code at specified intervals of time.
Example :
The following example demonstrates how to implement partial page update using AJAX.
Create a new Asp.net empty website, and add a page to it and place a script manager on it.
Take an update panel on the page and within the update panel take a label and button and set ID of this label as L1.
Outside the update panel and directly on that page take another label and set its id as l2.
Within page load event write the following code to display the current system time in the both labels l1 and l2.
When you run the page and click on the button available in update panel then only that update panel will be post back and only the label available in update panel is updated with tge current system time but not the label that was directly on the page outside the update panel indicating partial page update occurs.
Working with multiple Update panels:
You can use multiple update panels on a page but when post back occurs because of a control available in one update panel then every update panel available on that page will be post back to server and updated from server and not only the update panel because of which the post back is occurs. This is because update mode property of update panel is set to ‘always’ by default. When you don’t want to post back an update panel when post back occurs because of another update panel then set update mode property of that update panel to ‘conditional’
Example :
The following example demonstrates how to work with multiple update panels on a webpage.
Add a page to the website, place a script manager on it and then an update panel & within that update panel on table and button and set ID of that label is L1.
Take another update panel on that page and within that update panel a Label button & set ID of that Label as L2.
Within page –load event write the following code to display the current time in both the labels L1 & L2
Now if you run the page and click on the button available in any update panel then both the update panel will be post back to server & the labels in both the update panels will be updated with current system time because update mode property of update panel is by default set to ‘always’.
Within the properties of first update panel set update mode property to conditional and now if you run the page and click on the Button available on second update panel then the first update panel will not be post back to server and the label in first update panel will not be updated with current system time. Because the update mode property of the first update panel is set to conditional.
Control 5:
Timer Control :
Timer control is used to repeatedly execute the code at specified intervals of time. It has the property interval to specify the time interval in mille-seconds at which the code of that timer has to be repeated Timer control has the ‘tick’ event has the default event that will be raised whenever the interval set for timer elapsed. Ex: The following example uses the timer control to display the current system time on page continuously running.
Add a page to the website and place a script manager and an update panel on a page and within the update panel take one label and one timer control and for that timer control set interval property to 1000
Write the following code within the page load event and also the timer tick event to display the current system time within the label.
At run time the time displayed in the label will be updated for every one second because of timer and the time displayed within the label appears, to the user like it is continuously running
Example :
The following example displays data from a table in database in a Grid view on the page and refresh it for every 20 seconds to reflect recent changes mode to on that page.
Add a page to the website, take a script manger and update panel on a page & within the update panel take a grid view and timer & set id of grid view as GVDept & for the timer set interval property to 20,000
within the code of the page writing using statements for the namespaces system.Data.sqlclient & system.Data & then create a method with the name get data as follows
public void getdata() { sqlconnection cn=new sqlconnection(“server=Nikhil, database=Mydb;uid=sa;pwd=123”); sqlDataAdapter Da= new sqlDataAdapter(“select * from Dept”,cn); Dataset Ds=new dataset(); Ds.Fill(Ds,”Dept”); GVDept.Datasource=DS.Table[“Dept”]; GVDept.DataBind(); }
Call the method getdata() with in page-locad event & timer’s tick event
page-Load & tick event getdata(); getdata();
When you run the page than data will be retrieved from the Database and displayed on the grid view & from then onwords every 20 seconds the changes made to table Dept within the database will be reflected in grid view because of the timer
Update progress Control :
update progress control is used to indicate updating an update panel is in progress while it is updated from server. with a message or an image.
Example :
The following example demonstrates how to use update progress control to represent the progress of updating an update panel.
Add a page to the website, take a script manager on a and then an update panel and within the update panel, take a label and button and within the button click event write the following code.
Within the update panel take an update progress control and within the update progress control take a label and for the label set the caption “update in progress. please wait…”
At runtime when you click on the button available in update panel then as the current thread is suspended for 5 seconds, for 5 seconds you will get the message set to the label in update progress and after 5 seconds that label will be hidden & the label in update panel will display the message button clicked.
Within the update progress control instead of label you can also display image control to display an image indicating update is in progress.
1d0:T13a8,
Example on Data Reader:-
Design a from as follows
Place two labels, two text boxes and two buttons
using System. Data .oledb; code in GD Static oledbConnection con = new oledbConnection (“User id = Scoot; Password = tiger; Provider = ms data.1*”); Oledb command cmd = new oledbcommand (“Select * from EMP, con”); Oledb Data Reader . dr;//abstrsct Code for Button 1_click { Con. open (); Message Box. Show (“Connection is ok”); If (con. State = = connection State. closed) { Con. open (); Dr = cmd. Execute Reader (); Message Box. Show (“Con. Server version”); // column Names Label 1.Text = dr. Get Name (0); Label 1.Text = dr. Get Name (1); } Else Message Box. Show (“Connection is already opened”); Code for Button2 _click { If (dr. Read () = = true) { textBox1. Text = dr [0] . To String (); textBox1. Text = dr [1] . To String (); } Else Message Box. Show (“No more Records”); Data Reader EX 2 Developing a Dynamic From With Sql Server data base over Managed connection Project EMP à25 columns Deptà8 Bonusà4
Open windows Forms Application Project
Open a Text box and two buttons as shown
Using System. Data. Sqlclient; Code for GD Sqlconnection con = new Sqlconnection (“User id = Sa; Password =; database = northwind; Server = local host”); Sql command cmd = new sql command (); Sql Data Reader dr; Label[] L; Text Box [] T; Int x = 50; Int [] n = new int [] Code for Button 1_click con. open (); String q = “Select * from ” + text Box1 .Text; One space must be given cmd. Command Text = q; cmd. connection = con; dr = cmd. Execute Reader (); Message Box .Show (dr. Field count + “”); L = new Label [dr. Field Count]; T = new Text Box [dr. Field Count]; //add the controls in to form For (int I =0; I < dr. Field Count ; I ++) { L [i] = new Label (); L[i] .Text = dr. Get Name (i); L[i] . Location = new Point (100, x); This .Controls. Add (L [i]); T [i] = new Text Box (); T [i] . Location = new Point (200,x); This. Controls . Add ( T [i]); X= x + 30; }//for Code for Button 2_clikc DR [0] DR [1] { ENO EN SAL If (dr. Read () = = true) 101 Ravi 5000 { T [0] Text = DR [0]. To String (); For (int I = 0; I <dr. Field Count ; I++) T [i] .Text = dr [i]. To. String (); } Else Message Box. Show (“No more Records”); OBS :- When connection is closed , then all associated data readers will be closed automatically. Data Reader works only when connection model is active (open) Data Reader are connection oriented. If no. of clients are more in the network . then Data base efficiency will decreases.
1d1:T5365,
Working with user Defined controls, user defined Properties and user defined events
EMS: Employee manager system LMS: Library management system
When a predefined control is not providing users requirement, then user defined control need to be developed
To develop user defined controls, NET Introduced
“Windows forms control library project template”
User defined controls will be created in the format of DLL’S
User defined controls contains application Logic along with GUI.
User defined controls are reusable (write once ute many times)
The controls developed in c# can be used in vb also. But not in ASP.NET
IIS: Internet information service ASPX: Afire server pages extension
User defined controls are Not. Self executable; there are form dependants.
1 Steps for developing user defined controls:
Step1 open windows forms control library project, then design the control as required and write the logic Step2 Add an Jcon(optional),Build the project to get a DLL file. Step3 open windows forms application project and add the DLL file into the Tool Box. Obs:- A new control will be added into the Tool Box Step4 place a new control on the form add use it as per the requirement. User defined control is a class, which must be inherited either from user control class or form any exiting control Based on above statement, user defined controls are divided into two types
General UC Inherited UC
User Control Text box Text Text àWhen the base class name is user control, then it is called as “General User control”. When the base class name is any existing control name like text box, button etc, then it is called as “Inherited” user control”.
Developing login user control:
Open windows forms control Library project with project name login text. (Out put file is login text.Dll) Choose properties and set name = login (User defined control) (This name will be displayed in the tool box after adding the control) Lace two labels, two text boxes and a button as shown code for button1_click If (text box1.text ==”teja”&&text box2. Text==”abc”) Message box. show(“valid user”); Else Message box. show(“not a valid user”); } Adding an Icon Viewà Solution ExplorerRt click on login text Add New item Bit map and provide the name as login.bmp
Note:
user control name and BMP file names must be same. Choose properties and ht width =16 and height=16 Design the bitmap as required Choose the properties of login.bmp file and set build action= embedded resource.
Build the project(build menuà build solution)
OBS:
Login text.dll will be created under F:/0194/ Login text/ Bin/debug folder Open WFAP Open tool boxàRt Click inside of tool boxàadd tapà gire the name hy controls Open tool boxàRt Click inside of my controls tabàchoose itemsàbrowseàlogin text. Dll (or) Drag login text. Dll file into Tool box my control tab
Obs:-
A New control will be added with the name login Place a login control on to the form
Obs:-
In above user control, two text boxes and two labels and a button controls are integrated together and a new control is formed with the name login
in general user control. Individual controls properties will not be inherited.
I.e, In above example it is not possible to change the text of labels, text boxes or button
Hence user defined propertied need to be developed
Working with user defined controls and user defined properties:-
A =10 Set Property B=AGET Property
A Collection of and get functions is called as “property”.
A property with get function is called as read – only property.
Syntax to write a property
Data type variable; Public data type pName { Set { Variable = value; } Get { Return variable; } }
Example on user defined properties and user defined controls:
Q) Developing a scrollable user control with 30 Forms
Q) Developing a scrolling user control with Ltext, Lfont ,LB color and L Seep properties
Open windows forms control Library project with project name scrollable control Place a label control. Place a timer with enabled = true Place one more timer with enabled= false . Code for hmer1_tick { Label1.Top= Label1.Top-5;(It will scroll upwards) If(Label1.Top<0) { timer 1.Enabled = false; timer 2.Enabled = True; } } àCode for timer2-Tick { Label1.Top=Label1.top+5); If(Label1.top>350) { Timer1.enabled=true; Timer2.enabled=false; } } àcode in GD(Initialize component) //LtextàLabel1.textàString Public string L Text { Set{Label1.Text=value;} Get{return Label1.Text;} } //LFontàLabel1.FontàFont Public Font LFont (or) Public Font1 Font { Set{Label1.Font=value;} Get{return Label1.Font;} } //LBcoloràLabel1.Back Coloràcolor Public color LB color { Set{Label1.Back clor=value;} Get{return Label1.back color;} } //LSpeedàTimer. Intervalàint Public int LSpeed { Set { Timer1.Interval=value; Timer2.Interval=value; } Get {return timer1.interval;} } Build the project(Build menuàbuild solution)
Bs:-
Scrollable control.dll is created under D:\c194\Scrollable control\Bin\Debug Folder With a new control named “User control1”.
Open WFAP
àDrag scrollable control.DLL into tool boxàMy controls tab àThen a new control with name user control 1 will be added into the tool box place this control on the form and check Ltext, Lfont, LB color and Lspeed properties.
Working with Inherited user controls
Inherited user control is required to add extra functionality for an existing control.
In the base class name is user control, then it is called as General user control
If the base class name is any existing control, then it is called as inherited user control.
In inherited user control, all the properties will be inherited from base control
IN UC Text box-----40 properties Text_______1 properties 41 properties
Genera LU Control
User control Test Test =” ABC” Generally inherited user control’s class declaration will be as follows Public partial class test: Text box { } In inherited user controls only application logic allowed but placing some other controls are not allowed
Example on in H User control
Developing a user defined text box with a new property called as input type If input type is A or a ,then text box need to accept only Alphabets If input type is D or D, then text box need to be accept only digits. If input type is All then text box need to accept all characters. open windows forms control library project with project name UDT. Open code window by pressing f7(don’t double click on the form to open code window) Change the class declaration as follows Public partial class user defined control: Text box code in GD String S =”ALL”;//This is the default value for input type property. Public user control() Public String Input type { Set{S=Value;} Get{return S} }
Code for user control – Key press Event
Private void user control – key press(--) { If(s==”A”// S ==”a”) { If(e.kdy char>=’A’&& e. key char=’Z’) //e.key char>=’a’ && e. key char=’Z’)
UDT.DLL will be created under E:\c194\UDT\bin\debug folder Open windows forms application project àDrag UDT.DLL into tool boxàMy controls tab, then a new control will be added with the name user control Design the form As shown Execute the project and check either text boxes are accepting proper input or not.
Working with user controls and user defined events
A call back procedure is also called user defined events
When part of user controls logic and part of form’s logic need to be executed at one, shot, then user defined events are required.
User defined events are also called as call back procedures.
User defined events can be created with in 4 steps
Step1: Create a Delegate
Syntax: Public delegate void delegate name(or) Dname()
Step2:- Create an event with the help of the delegate
Syntax Public event D Nam Event name; Step3 :Raise event or call the event Syntax: Erent name() Step4: Define the event(Write the body) Prirate void control name enent name() { Logic; }
Step1,2 and 3 will need to be followed while developing the control(windows forms control library project) These steps are followed by Microsoft
Step4 need to be followed while using the control (windows forms application project)
Example on user defined event
open windows control library with project name UDE Place button Code in GD Step1: Public d delegate void D name(); Step2: Public event D name Abc; Code for Button1-click Message box. show(“from uses control”) Stpe3: Abc(); Build the project(Build menuà build solution) UDE.Dll will be crated under E:\c194\UDE\bin\debug àopen windows forms application project
Drag UDE.DLL into tool boxàMy controls
Tabà place an added control on the form (user control 1) àCode for user control ABC event Message Box. show(“from form”);
Execute the project and click on the button, then two message boxes need to be displayed.
1d2:T202b,
Working with crypto Graphy:-
1.Cryptography is a Concept of data encryptions and decryptions.
Converting actual data into some another format is called as “encryption” and rice verla is called as “Decryption”.
To encrypt or decrypt some logic is required which is called as an algorithm.
C#.NET supports ~65000*65000 types of algorithms every algorithm will be identified with unique 6 Byte value.
C# recommends to encrypt or decrypt the data in two levels.
Syntax to write a 16 Byte Array value
byte[]X=new byte[] 0x23,0x21,0x90……} There 16 Values must be in the range of 0x100 to 0x99 0 work with cryptography, .NET introduced ripple des crypto service provider class, which is the part of system. Security. Crypto graphy name space.
Example on cryptography:-
A Program to store encrypted data in a text file and reading that data by decryption Open WFAP Place two buttons as shown Using system. Security. cryptography; Using system.I0;//When ever we need to write in a text file this name space is required. Code in GD[Before button1] Code in GD[Before button1] Triple Descript to service proricler t = new triple descript to service provider (); Byte[]x= new byte[]{0x76,0x16,0x12,0x13,0x15, 0x18,…..0x20};16 different values Code for button1-click[encrypt] { Ale stream +s=new file stream(“c://test.text”, file hode.create); Crypto stream cs=mew crypto stream(fs, f. create encryptor (x,x),crypto stream hode. white); String S =”WELCOME”; Byte[] b = encoding. ASCII. Get bytes(s); Conrer byte: in stream and store into char
Close();
Fs. Close(); Message box. show(“Data in encrypted”); } Code for button2 –click File stream fs = new File stream (“c://test.txt”, File hode open); crypto stream cs = new crypto stream (fs, t. create Decryptor (X,X) crypto stream Mode. Read) Byte[]b= new Byte[100]; Int i=cs. Read (b, o, b. Length); Name start String S= Encoding. ASCII. Get String(b, o, i); Cs. close(); Cs. close(); Message box. show(s); } OBS: same Byte array must be used for encryption and decryption. WORKING WITH ROLE BASED SECURITY:-Role based security is the concept of using os level security at.NET Application level Role based security is also called as windows Authentication or principle security. Generally o/s supports 3 types of roles(privilage)
Administrator
Users
Guest
My computersRt clickmanagers or member of Rt click on users àabc Users xyzrajrani Under one line Administrator may be placed with any number of names. To work with ROLEBASED SECURITY,.NET introduced system. Security. Principle name space. Windows identify I,e predefined class, which is used to find the logged in user name Windows Principle is a predefined class, which is used to find the ROLE of logged in user.
Example on Role based Security:-
Open WFAD with name ROLES (form1) Add a new form with form name(form2) And back color =green Add one more form with name form3 and with back color = red. Place a button in form Using system. Security. Principle; Code for button1-click { Windows Identify w= Windows Identify. Get(current) Message box. show(w name); Windows. Principal = new Windows. Principal(w); If(p.IS IN ROLW (Windows Built in role. Administrator==true) { Message box. show(“Admini”); Form2 f = new form2();
shows();
}
1d3:Tca4,
Merge Sort
Merging a two lists of one element each is the same as sorting them.
Merge sort divides up an unsorted list until the above condition is met and then sorts the divided parts back together in pairs.
Specifically this can be done by recursively dividing the unsorted list in half, merge sorting .The right side then the left side and then merging the right and left back
Merge sort algorithm: Given a list L with a length K: If k==1 the list is sorted else
merger sort the left side( 0thru k/2)
merge sort the right side (k/2+1 thru K)
merge the right with the left side.
program: Implementation of merge sort
# include <stdio.h> #include <conio.h> void merge (int numbers [], int temp[], int left, int mid , int right); void merge sort (int numbers[], int temp[], int array-size); void m-sort( int numbers[],int temp[],int left, int right); void merge-sort ( int numbers [],int temp, int array-size); { m-sort(numbers,temp,0,array-size-1); } void m-sort(int numbers[],int temp[],int left, int right) { int mid; if(right>left) { mid = (right +left)/2; m-sort (numbers, temp, left,mid); m-sort(numbers temp,mid+1,right); merge(numbers,temp,left,mid+1,right); } /*merge*/ void merge(int numbers[],int temp[],int left, int mid, int right) { int i,left-end,num-elements,Emp-pos; left-end =mid-1; emp-pos-left; num-elements =right-left+1; while ((left<=left-end)&& (mid<=right)) { if(numbers[left]<=numbers[mid]) { temp[temp-pos]=numbers[left]; tmp-pos = tmp-pos+1; left=left+1; else {temp[tmp-pos]= numbers [mid]; tmp-pos=tmp-pos+1; mid=mid+1; } } while( left <= left-end) { temp (tmp-pos]= numbers[left]; left=left+1; tmp=pos=tmp=pos+1; } while(mid <=right) { temp[tmp-pos]= numbers[mid]; mid=mid+1; tmp-pos=tmp-pos+1; } for(i=0;i<=num-elements;i++) { numbers [right ]= temp[right]; right =right-1; } } void main() { int a[20],b[20],n,i; printf(“Enter the value of n:\n”); scanf(“%d”,&n); printf(“Enter n elements :\n”); for (i=0;i<=n;i++) { scanf(“%d”,&a[i]); } merger sort(a,b,n); printf (“Sorted elements are :\n”); for (i=0;i<n;i++) { printf(“%d”,a[i]); } } OUTPUT: Enter the value of n:8 Enter n elements: 18 26 32 6 43 15 9 1 sorted elements are: 1 6 9 15 18 26 32 43 Example:
1d4:T1f05,
When talking about security threats for small business, you need to be aware of almost numerous types of cyber attacks that exist nowadays. From malware, phishing, through XSS and SQL injection, to bugs, trojans, and viruses... The list can go on and on because hackers are working every day on something new. That is exactly why you need to be well aware of all the security threats and to know how to follow properly all the existing security tips for small business.
Think about all internet security tips you have heard of, and try to implement them in your company. Although, it may seem like cyber security tips are different for big and small businesses, it is literally the same. Hackers don't have a particular target, they just want to find a hole that will get them through to take what they need. So, the point is that you should be well aware how small business is not something hackers are not interested in. It is a big mistake to believe in that. Let's see what are the best solutions for small business!
1.What should you protect? Knowing where your information is being stored and used is the first step of defense. Once you know that, you will be able to act properly and to protect your data. Also, don't forget about the mobile devices. The stolen once are a huge problem. You need to have a proper password because once the device is lost, someone can break into your system and steal your sensitive data. Did you know that at least one mobile phone is lost in each of companies?
2.Passwords. I have already mentioned how unprotected devices can cause so much damage. The best cybersecurity for small business would definitely be to enforce strong passwords within the employees. Passwords need to be long enough and to have letters, symbols, and numbers. Use big and small letters for a better protection.
3.Cybersecurity recovery plan. You need to be well aware what to do in some situations when it seems that all is already lost. Be sure that you have identified all of your critical resources and know how to recover them. The next fact will help you to understand this better.
4.Encryption. Encryption technologies should be always implemented, especially for desktops, laptops and other removable media (for example a USB). In that case, only, you will be able to control and protect an unauthorized access.
5.Security solutions. When talking about security solutions for your small business, you need to be sure that you are using the reliable ones. The nowadays technology has raised so much that it does more than just preventing the viruses. The files can be scanned regularly if there is some unusual change in size or file. Programs that match malware can be also detected, just like spams.
6.Up to date. Why is so important to stay up to date? Do you get angry when your computer needs to upgrade something? You think it takes too much of your time? Well, rethink your beliefs. First of all, that is for your own good and the best security tip you can implement. Why is your computer upgrading all the time? It is trying to escape all the bugs that hackers may created already in the previous version of the system. So, staying up to date will protect you.
7.Educating the employees. When talking about cybersecurity for small business, it is highly important that not just one person knows what are the best solutions for small business when it comes to fighting against security threats. All of the employees need to be trained well to know how to recognize the threats. The threats mostly happen when someone from your business opens a spam email. Isn't that enough? It can ruin your whole security. It can make hackers to steal your sensitive data. Think about this tip and train your employees to be well aware of the danger, just as you will be after reading this article.
Interested in mastering Cyber Security Training?
Enroll now for FREE demo on Cyber Security Training.
We took a look at the most important cybersecurity tips for small business. Now, I will show you some interesting facts that people who run small business believe that are not real. Hope that you won't find yourself in these facts, but if you do, you know what should you do in the future. Or not in the future, start from now and protect your business! Let's take a look at some 'interesting' facts that people who run small business believed won't happen to them!
There is more than 50% of the small business who truly believe that they are not such an interesting target for hackers. We already explained to you that anyone can be a victim. You never know what they are looking for. Oh yes, we do know, they are looking for people and businesses that don't protect their sensitive data in a proper way. Think about that.
More than 70% of the small business companies have already been the victims of cyber attacks. Do you how much that cost those small businesses? Approximately, the annual cost was more than $190, 000! I am now sure that you will read this article over and over again until you know it by the head.
There are more than 40% of people that have already experienced some kind of a loss when it comes to confidential and proprietary information. You don't want to increase that score, right?
We talked about training and educating your employees. Are you aware that more than 70% of small businesses don't even have a security policy for their employees? That was exactly what we were talking about.
Rarely someone loses his or her mobile device or laptop, is that what you believe in? I will have to disappoint you by saying how there are more than 60% of small business employees that have already lost their mobile device or laptop, and not just once, but many times.
Are you going to risk all that? Now when you know what are the best solutions for small business, you don't have a justification anymore.
1d5:T2f84,
DataStructures Tutorial Overview
Welcome to the DataStructures Tutorial! The objective of these tutorials is to help you gain a solid understanding of data structures and their applications. By the end of these tutorials, you will be able to use data structures effectively to write efficient, scalable, and error-free code.
We will cover a wide range of topics, including stacks, sorting algorithms, queues, trees, graphs, and more. Each of these data structures has its unique properties, applications, and algorithms, and understanding them will help you write better programs.
In addition to the core concepts, we will also cover common interview questions related to data structures. Understanding these questions and how to solve them will help you ace technical interviews and build your confidence.
We will also address common issues that programmers face when working with data structures, such as memory management, performance optimization, and code maintainability.
Whether you are a beginner or an experienced programmer, this tutorial series will provide you with the knowledge and skills you need to master data structures and write better code. Let's get started!
Data Structures
In computer science, a data structure is a particular way and organizing data in a computer so that it can be used efficiently.
A data structure is an arrangement of data in a computer memory or even disk storage.
An example of several common data structures are arrays, linked lists, queues, stacks, binary trees, and hash tables.
Different kinds of data structures are suited to different kinds of applications and some are highly specialized to specific basis.
For example, 3-trees are particular well suited for the implementation of databases, while compiler implementation usually use hash tables to look up identifiers.
Data structures are used in almost every program or software system.
Specific data structures are essential ingredients of many efficient algorithms and make possible the management of huge amounts of data, such as large databases and internet indexing services.
The following are the two types of the DataStructures:
Linear DataStructures.
Non-linear DataStructures.
Linear Data Structures
Linear data structures store and organize data elements in a linear or sequential manner. These structures are often used for fast access and easy manipulation of data.
There are several types of linear data structures, including arrays, stacks, queues, and linked lists.
Non-linear DataStructures
The non-linear DataStructures holds/stores the data elements in the form hierarchy by establishing some relationship between the data elements.
Trees and graphs are nonlinear data structures.
Infix to Postfix conversions
In general, simple architecture expression can be represented in three ways: infix, prefix and postfix.
Consider the expression A+B. Here A and B are operands and + is binary
In infix notation, the operator symbol is between the two operands.
In prefix, the operator symbol is placed before is its two operands.
In postfix, the operator symbol is placed before is its two operands.
In postfix, the operator symbol is placed after its two operands(i.e the operator follows both operands)
The infix operands – precedence is as follows
parenthesis
multiplication * , Division
Addition +, Subtraction –
Algorithm: In to post (Q, P) Suppose ‘Q’ is an arithmetic expression written in infix notation. This algorithm finds the equivalent postfix expression p.
Push a left parenthesis onto the stack, and add a right parenthesis to the end of Q.
Scan Q from left to right and repeat steps 3 to 6 for each element of Q until the stack is empty.
If an operand is encountered, add it to the postfix expression P.
If a left parenthesis is encountered, push it onto the stack.
If an operator X is encountered, then:
Repeatedly pop from the stack and add to P each operator on the top of the stack, which has the same precedence as or higher precedence than X.
Push X onto the stack.
If a right parenthesis is encountered, then:
Repeatedly pop from the stack and add to P each operator on the top of the stack until a left parenthesis is encountered.
Pop the left parenthesis from the stack.
Exit
The algorithm works by using a stack to keep track of the operators encountered in the infix expression. When an operator is encountered, it is compared with the operator at the top of the stack. If the operator has higher or equal precedence than the one on the top of the stack, it is pushed onto the stack. Otherwise, the operator on top of the stack is popped and added to the postfix expression until an operator with lower precedence is encountered. The left and right parentheses are used to ensure that the order of evaluation is preserved.
Overall, the infix-to-postfix conversion algorithm is a useful technique for parsing arithmetic expressions and evaluating them in a more efficient manner.
Example :Q: A+(B*C-(D/E*F)*G)*H)
Symbol Scanned
STACK
postfix(p)
A
C
A
+
C+
A
C
C+C
A
B
C+C
AB
*
C+C*
AB
C
C+C*
ABC
-
C+C-
ABC*
(
C+C-C
ABC*D
0
C+C-C
ABC*D
/
C+C-C/
ABC*D
E
C+C-C/
ABC*DE
*
C+C-C
ABC*DE/
F
C+C-C*
ABC*DE/F
)
C+C-
ABC*DE/F*
*
C+C-
ABC*DE/F*
G
C+C-*
ABC*DE/F*G
)
C+C.
ABC*DE/F*G*-
*
C+*
ABC*DE/F*G*-
H
C+*
ABC*DE/F*G*-H
)
EMPTY
ABC*DE/F*G*-H*+
Program:
Program to convert infix to postfix expressions
#include<stdio.h>
#include<conio.h>
#include<ctype.h>
#include<stdlib.h>
char infix[20];
char postfix[20];
char stack[20];
int TOP=-1;
void GetExpr() {
int len;
printf("Enter an infix expression:\n");
gets(infix);
len = strlen(infix);
infix[len] = ')';
TOP = TOP + 1;
stack[TOP] = 'c';
}
void convert() {
int i, j;
for(i = 0, j = 0; TOP != -1; i++) {
if(isalpha(infix[i])) {
postfix[j] = infix[i];
j = j + 1;
}
else {
switch(infix[i]) {
case '(':
TOP = TOP + 1;
stack[TOP] = '(';
break;
case '+':
case '-':
while(stack[TOP] == '+' || stack[TOP] == '-' || stack[TOP] == '*' || stack[TOP] == '/') {
postfix[j] = stack[TOP];
j = j + 1;
TOP = TOP - 1;
}
TOP = TOP + 1;
stack[TOP] = infix[i];
break;
case '*':
case '/':
while(stack[TOP] == '*' || stack[TOP] == '/') {
postfix[j] = stack[TOP];
j = j + 1;
TOP = TOP - 1;
}
TOP = TOP + 1;
stack[TOP] = infix[i];
break;
case ')':
while(stack[TOP] != '(' && (stack[TOP] == '+' || stack[TOP] == '-' || stack[TOP] == '*' || stack[TOP] == '/')) {
postfix[j] = stack[TOP];
j = j + 1;
TOP = TOP - 1;
}
TOP = TOP - 1;
break;
} /* switch end */
} /* else end */
} /* for end */
postfix[j] = '\0';
printf("Expression in postfix is %s\n", postfix);
}
int main() {
clrscr();
GetExpr();
convert();
getch();
return 0;
}
Output: Enter an expression A+(B*C - CDIE*F)
1d6:T38d4,
Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) Tutorial Overview
Welcome to CSS Tutorials. The objective of these tutorials is to provide in depth understanding of Cascading Style Sheets (CSS). In these tutorials we will cover topics such as CSS Tables, CSS Images, CSS Fonts, CSS Styling, CSS Attributes, Fonts etc.
In addition to free tutorials, we will cover common interview questions, issues and how to's of CSS.
HTML was never intended to conation tags for formatting a document.
HTML was intended to define the content of a document, like:
<h1>This is a heading</h1>
<p> This is a paragraph</p>
When tags like <font>, and color attribute were added to the HTML 3.2 specification, it started a nightmare for web `developers. Development of large websites, where fonts and color information were added to every single page, became a long and expensive process.
To solve this problem, the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) created CSS.
In HTML 4.0 all formatting could be removed from the HTML document, and stored in a separate CSS file.
All browsers support CSS today.
CSS Saves a Lot of Work!
CSS defines HOW HTML elements are to be displayed.
Styles are normally saved in external.css files. External style sheets enable you to change the appearance and layout of all the pages in a Web site, just by editing one single file!
CSS Syntax
A CSS rule has two main parts: a selector, and one or more declarations:
The selector is normally the HTML element you want to style.
Each declaration consists of a property and a value.
The property is the style attribute you want to change .Ecah prpoeryty has value.
A CSS comprises of style rules that are interpreted by the browser and then applied to the corresponding elements in your document .A style rule is made of three parts:
Selector: A selector is an HTML tag at which style will be applied. This could be any tab like <hl> or <table>etc.
Property: A property is a type of attribute of HTML tag. Put simply, all the HTML attributes are converted into CSS properties .They could be color or border
Value: Values are assigned to properties .For example color property can have value either red or #F1F1F1
You can put CSS style Rule Syntax as follows:
Here table is a selector and border is a property and give value 1px solid #C00 is the value of that property.
You can define selectors in various simple ways based on your comfort. Let me put these selectors one by one.
CSS Type Selectors
This is the same selector we have seen above .Again one more example to give color to all level 1 headings:
CSS Universal Selectors
Rather than selecting elements of a specific type, the universal selector quite simply matches the name of any element type:
This rule renders the content of every element in our document in black.
CSS Descendant Selectors
Suppose you want to apply a style to a particular element only when it lies inside a particular element. As given in the following example, style rule will apply to <em> element only when it lies inside <ul> tag.
CSS Class Selectors
You can define style rules based on the class attribute of the elements. All the elements having that class will be formatted according to the defined rule.
This rule renders the content in black for every element with class attribute set to black in our document. You can make it a bit more particular .For example:
This rule renders the content in black for only <h1> elements with class attribute set to black.
You can apply more than one class selectors to given element. Consider the following example:
CSS ID Selectors
You can define style rules based on the id attribute of the elements. All the elements having that id will be formatted according to the defined rule.
This rule renders the content in black for every element with id attribute set to black in our document .You can make it a bit more particular .For example:
This rule render the content in black for only <h1> elements with id attribute set to black.
The true power of id selectors is when they are used as the foundation for descendant selectors, For example:
In this example all level 2 headings will be displayed in black color only when those headings will lie within tags having id attribute set to black.
CSS Child Selectors
You have seen descendant selectors. There is one more type of selectors which is very similar to descendants but have different functionality. Consider the following example:
This rule will render all the paragraphs in black if they are direct child of <body> element. Other paragraphs put inside other elements like <div> or <td> etc. would not have any effect of this rule.
CSS Attributes Selectors
You can also apply styles to HTML elements with particular attributes. The style rule below will match all input elements that has a type attributes with a value of text:
The advantage to this method is that the <input type=”submit”/> element is unaffected, and the color applied only to the desired text fields.
There are following rules applied to attribute selector.
p[lang]-Selects all paragraphs elements with a lang attribute.
p[lang=”fr”]- Selects all paragraphs elements whose lang attribute has a value of exactly”fr”.
p[lang~=”fr”]- Selects all paragraphs elements whose lang attribute contains the word”fr”.
p[lang|=”en”]- Selects all paragraphs elements whose lang attribute contains values that are exactly “en” or begin with “en-“.
CSS Multiple Style Rules
You may need to define multiple style rules for a single element. You can define these rules to combine multiple properties and corresponding values into a single block as defined in the following example:
Here all the property and value pairs are separated by a semi colon (;) You can keep them in a single line or multiple lines. For better readability we keep them into separate lines.
Grouping Selectors
You can apply a style to many selectors if you like. Just separate the selectors with a comma as given in the following example:
This define style rule will be applicable to h1,h2, and h3 element as well. The order of the list is irrelevant. All the elements in the selector will have the corresponding declaration applied to them.
You can combine various class selectors together as shown below:
There are four ways to associate styles with your HTML document .Most commonly used methods are inline CSS and External CSS>. We will talk about this in next tutorial
1d7:T1abb,
C++ Tutorial Overview
Welcome to C++ Tutorial. The objective of these tutorials is to provide good understanding on C++ Programming Language. In these tutorial, we will cover topics such as Data Types, Constructors, Functions, Aggregation etc. In addition to free C++ tutorial, we will cover common interview questions and issues of C++ Programming Language.
An object oriented programming language Initially named C with classes Developed by Bjourne stroustrip Renamed as c++ in 1983 The idea comes from C statement operator +* IS a superset of C
What is C++?
C++ is a programming language that was first developed in the 1980s by Bjarne Stroustrup. It is an extension of the C programming language and supports a range of programming paradigms, including procedural programming, object-oriented programming, and generic programming.
What is language ?
A language is a software computer is an electronic device cannot perform operating by own. Language provide set of instructions to perform operations by computer. Language is nothing but programming tool C++ is the name of the language ‘c’ language is derived from ‘B’ language 'B’ language is derived from BCPL ‘C’ language develops in the year 1972 C++ language is develops in the year 1980.
What is a Program?
Set of instructions or collection of instructions and data. programming elements are 1) Data ii) instruction In order to write a program to required Data and instructions. programming is nothing but process of organize data and instructions according to given problem object oriented means rules and regularity
What is a Programming Concept
Programming principle define set of rules and regulations for organization of data and instructions Process Monolithic Programming Process Oriented Programming Modular Oriented Programming Structure Oriented Programming Object Oriented Programming
Application of C++
Using C++ you can develop system software like OS, Device Drivers, Network(N/W) protocols, PC – utilities Application software you can develop application like Data base Word processing Spread sheet C++ is a general purpose programming language better than ‘c’ General purpose means it is suitable for developed any type of software. CUI means character user interface
Programming Concepts
Unstructured Programming / Monolithic Programming
Organizing the data and instructions are organized in sequential manner called Monolithic programming In this approach instructions organization in sequential order A sequence is set of instructions used to solve a given problem. ( Assembly level language, Basic) Program execution is controlled to use a go to statement
Disadvantages Code redundancy : same operation has to be more than one time, same sequence has to copied at number of places. Size of program is increment Efficiency of program is decreased
Procedural Programming
COBOL and Pascal are called as procedural oriented programming languages. In this approach instructions organized according to their operations by dividing into small programs or small pieces called sub routine. A sub routine is a small program within program This subroutine can be procedure or function
AdvantagesModularity : Dividing a program into small pieces 0 also called as divide and conqueror According to their operations into small module
Reuseability: write code once and use more than once time
Readablity : Easy to read or understand
Disadvantages : Data is global or local It emphasis on instructions but not on data.
What is a Modular programming
In modular programming, a module is a programming in this approach, an application contain one or more that one module Each program is divided into subroutine. A program which contain a main is called executable module which is compiled as .exe A program which has doesn’t have main is called reusable module which is compiled as .LIB(Library)
Structured Programming
‘C’ and pascal is called structured programming language
Characteristics of Structured Programming
Modular programming User defined data types (Pascal) scoped variables (local & Global) One subroutine communicate with another by passing values Top-down approach Disadvantages Data is global and global data does not have security Un-related operation access global data, if leads and logical errors. debugging application is complex In a large program identifying which operation perform operation on what data becomes complex.
1d8:T23bc,
WCF Tutorial Overview
Welcome to WCF Tutorial. The objective of these tutorials is to gain in depth understanding of Microsoft WCF Framework. In these tutorials, we will cover topics such as WCF Architecture, Contracts, Hosting etc.
In addition to WCF Tutorial, we will cover common interview questions and issues of WCF Framework.
WCF is a technology used to implement “service oriented architecture programming” (SOA programming)
To understand SOA programming we need to look into the history of programming languages.
The era of 1990’s started with structured oriented programming
In structured oriented programming the code was written in the form of functions like,
Int add (int x, int y)
{
…
}
Int subtract (int x, inty)
{
…
}
In structured oriented programming though reusability was their but it was not efficient and whenever a problem is redefined / enhanced it was required to write complete code again.
To overcome this drawback in the era of 1990’s we got object oriented programming.
Object oriented programming we got the concept classes as well as objects.
Functional programming of structured oriented converted into object oriented programming i.e, parameters of the functions are transformed to data fields & properties of a class and functions are written without parameters just like,
class clsArithmetic
{
Int x,y,z; Public .int px { set{----;} get{---;} }
Public int py { set{------;} get{-----;} } public int p3 { set{----;} get{---;}
} public void add() { …. } public void subtraction
} … }
Object oriented programming completely speaks about classes & objects and communication will take place with the help of object data using this we are able to get all the facilities of object oriented programming like abstraction, encapsulation, polymorphism, inheritance, etc.
With this object oriented programming we are able to build efficient applications using different object oriented programming languages like c# .net, Java, etc.
Homogeneous Applications
The applications developed using same technologies/ programming languages are known as “homogeneous applications”
Heterogeneous Applications
Applications developed using different technologies are known as “Heterogeneous Applications”.
Communication between homogeneous applications will be taken place with object data like,
Advantages of object oriented programming
Communication among heterogeneous applications is not possible on proprietary formats in object oriented programming engorges.
Make communication among the heterogeneous application in the era of 2000 companies have come with a new communication format i.e., “Massage format” like,
A message is the data required to be transferred heterogeneous application with open standard output
Service oriented architecture programming speaks specially to communicate among the heterogeneous applications. If we consider a scenario like to allow users to combine & reuse them in production of applications.
Messages:- A message is the data i.e. used to be transferred between two heterogeneous applications & which is in an open standard format.
A message. is a self contained unit of data that may consists of several parts including body & headers
1d9:T14e8,
Welcome to Octopus Deploy Tutorials. The objective of these tutorials is to provide in depth understand of Octopus Deploy.
In addition to free Octopus Deploy Tutorials, we will cover common interview questions, issues and how to’s of Octopus Deploy.
Introduction
Octopus is a deployment automation server for .NET developers. Octopus takes over where your build server finishes. The build server builds the code and runs tests, while Octopus takes care of deployment.
Everything starts with NuGet. Octopus works with your applications as NuGet packages and distributes them to the appropriate server. PowerShell is equally important as it’s the glue that makes all customization for our deployment process possible. And whatever isn’t built into Octopus can be slapped onto Octopus with PowerShell as well.
Continuous Integration, Delivery, and Deployment
If you are unfamiliar with the terms continuous integration, continuous delivery, and continuous deployment – it is worth understanding what they mean and how they relate to Octopus Deploy. Continuous integration is the process of triggering automated builds and running your tests every time code is changed. Each change is committed to the main line, or trunk, in source control. This should usually happen multiple times in a day – and every commit results in a build. To support this process, the build and tests must be fast and the results must be visible to all contributors. Continuous integration is a pre-requisite for continuous delivery.
Continuous delivery extends the concept of continuous integration by adding push-button deployments where everything but the trigger is automated. This process makes use of quality gates to make sure only good versions of the software proceed to the next environment – so if a build is found to be bad in the test environment, it is not made available to the pre-production environment. Continuous delivery results in more regular releases to production, which is often viewed as an increase in risk. This is not the case though, because the practices of continuous delivery reduce risk and each version is a less drastic change to the software, which further reduces risk.
Continuous deployment takes this idea to its logical conclusion; removing the push-button and automatically moving the software through the delivery pipeline and each of the quality gates - ultimately pushing every good version to the production environment. To reach this pinnacle of deployment automation, you must be able to validate your software automatically and deploy without disrupting your users.
Octopus deploy supports all of these practices and has features that will make continuous delivery and continuous deployment easy to manage in conjunction with your existing build server.
Uses of Octopus Deploy:
Flexible reconciliation with your current build pipeline: Octopus deploy open source does not replace your current consistent reconciliation arrangement – it supplements it. Command line tooling in addition to five-star modules for the most widely recognized CI servers implies you can trigger arrangements to dev or test conditions when a successful build finishes.
Five-star platform support: Octopus deploy security comes packaged with in-built traditions for sending different sorts of utilization, taking care of design documents, and calling scripting languages of your decision. What’s more, octopus deploys support more than 200 stages that you can reuse.
Predictable deployments, Enterprise scale: Octopus isn’t only for little projects and groups; positive associations like Accenture, NASA, ASOS and Commonwealth Bank of Australia have made Octopus their endeavor broad standard.
Automate your deployments to the cloud or on-premises: Octopus deploy web application gives an operator called Tentacle that backings organization to virtual machines – whether they’re on-premises or facilitated in Azure VM’s or AWS EC2. Octopus additionally speaks SSH and has top of the line support for different cloud seller particular sending targets.
For certifiable deployments: Octopus deploy tutorial didn’t assemble for “distribute to generation from your IDE” demos. The octopus deploys docker manufactured for this present reality. Regardless of whether you should be PCI consistent, have an air hole between your dev condition and generation, or need to include people in the deployment procedure, Octopus has you secured.
Although comparing to octopus deploy alternatives, TestOrigen’s testers prefer octopus deployment tool as it is better at meeting requirements and more usable to do automated deployments.
1da:T250d,
SilverLight Tutorials Overview
Welcome to SilverLight Tutorials. The objective of these tutorials is to gain in depth understanding of Microsoft SilverLight product. In these tutorials, we will cover topics such as SilverLight Architecture, Brushes, Layouts, Transforms, Data bindings and more.
In addition to SilverLight tutorials, we will also cover common interview questions and issues.
About SilverLight
HTML – DHTML – server side technology (ASP, ASP.net, JSP, PHP)
We know that to develop the complete websites, we use the various server side technologies like SAP, SAP.net, JSP, PHP etc……..
Almost all server side technologies will provide very good and efficient server side programming facilities to implement security or to provide state management etc.
These server side technologies also provide designing of use interface element like buttons, text boxes, list box etc.
But the designing facilities provided by these server side technologies are not efficient and do not provide very good rich user interface elements.
To overcome this drawback, always it was compulsory to depend on third party tools known as Plug ins. Like Photoshop, adobe flex, flash etc.
But when we depend on third party components efficiency and support may not be upto the mask.
To overcome such kind of problems Microsoft developed SilverLight
SilverLight is a Plug-in Software used to provide very good designing facilities as well as support for media elements.
Using silver light we can build very good rich user interface elements
Backbone of SilverLight is completely XAML [Extensible Application Markup language]
SilverLight is a powerful development plat form for crating rich media applications, business applications for the
Based on Microsoft.net framework the free silver light plug in will work across the multiple browsers, devices, operating system SilverLight will provide following facilities Extensive content Styling options Powerful communication protocols Data access facilities Light definition media Very good user interaction
SilverLight applications can be developed quickly using Microsoft editors like web platforms like visual studios visual web developer etc.
The SilverLight is new graphical tool from Microsoft, using silver light we can implement 2D,3D Graphics and animations
The Microsoft designed silver light using Java script and XML,
The SilverLight graphical features by default executes in the client Machine browser.
The SilverLight is cross browser and cross platform
The SilverLight Microsoft implemented using XAML (extensible application Markup Language), because of the Markup Language we can implement light weight graphical features in the silver light
The Microsoft created collection of controls and layouts in the SilverLight , all layouts are predefined classes, all controls are predefined objects
As per .net technologies every object having mainly Three features
PropertiesMethodsEvents
Properties
The properties are initial features to the objects, property features we can access at design time without implementing logic, we can access at runtime with implementing the logic also.
Methods
Methods are run time features to the object, methods features we can access at runtime by implementing the logic only
Events
All .net technologies are event driven programming technologies, we have to implement total source code in the events only.
Event is an action, every event performs specific action
XAML (extensible Application markup language)
The Microsoft designed silver light using XAML, this markup language is case sensitive supports only predefined tags, in XAML every open tag must be closed. Using XAML we can create controls, events and we can give all graphical features because of XAML we can implement rich internet applications while installing .net framework 3.5 (2008) automatically not getting silver light framework, manually we have to install silver light framework using silver light chainer software
Open new SilverLight application by clicking on the file menu new project
Getting new project window with two sub windows
Project types window Templates window
From the project types window we have to select visual c# From the templates window select silverlight Application click on - - >P
While opening the SilverLight application asking for execution pages or Hosting pages, the Microsoft given two execution pages to the silver light.
HTML page
net webpage
To take HTML page as hosting we have to deselect the hosting website checkbox - - > click on - - > P
In the silver light application always getting main page .XAML file, this file having 3 modes
Design Mode
XAML Mode
Code behind window
In the design mode the Microsoft given flexible graphical features all SilverLight controls we can add on the container using graphical features.
Using XAML mode we can give all graphical features at design time we can execute some graphical features at runtime also Code behind window gives graphical features at runtime, while working with code behind window we can work with classes and all object oriented features.
For creating button control go to XAML Mode in the grid tag
While executing this application getting output in the html page and generation XAP extension file
1db:T33bd,
Vagrant is a great open source software for configuring and deploying multiple development environments. It works on Linux, Mac OS X, or Windows and although by default it uses VirtualBox for managing the virtualization, it can be used with other providers such as VMware or AWS.
Vagrant Overview
Vagrant is a very good wrapper around Oracle's VirtualBox. It makes life easier for web developers and the like by providing a nice command-line interface to build, manage, provision, use virtual machines.
Although it can use other virtual machine software, the most commonly used is VirtualBox. VirtualBox allows you to create a virtual server right on your machine. This allows you to run a Linux server (or whatever else you would like) on your personal Mac or PC.
Vagrant is essentially the glue between provisioning software such as Puppet or Chef and VirtualBox.
Vagrant helps you configure your network configurations for VirtualBox as well as run the necessary scripts to provision your virtual machine.
Provisioning your Vagrant Machine:
Launching a blank virtual machine is not very useful, so Vagrant supports provisioning virtual machines through the use of provisioners. There are a handful of provisioners for the most common choices supported out of the box with Vagrant
Chef Solo
Chef Server
Puppet Standalone
Puppet Server
Shell
You can also use multiple provisioning options on the same VM. For example, you can provision your box using Chef and then finish your provisioning with a shell script afterwards.
Vagrantfile
Vagrantfile is to describe the type of machine required for a project, and how to configure and provision these machines. Vagrantfiles are called Vagrantfiles because the actual literal filename for the file is Vagrantfile
Vagrantfile is supposed to be committed to version control.
Other developers involved in the project to check out the code, run vagrant up, and be on their way.
Vagrant configuration
Configuration versions are the mechanism by which Vagrant 1.1+ is able to remain backwards compatible with Vagrant 1.0.x Vagrantfiles, while introducing dramatically new features and configuration options.
Vagrantfile will be in roughly the following format:
Vagrant.configure("2")do|config|# ...end
The "2" in the first line above represents the version of the configuration object config that will be used for configuration for that block (the section between the do and the end).
The important thing to understand as a general user of Vagrant is that within a single configuration section, only a single version can be used.
You cannot use the new config.vm.provider configurations in a version.
-configuration section. Likewise, config.vm.forward_port will not work in a version
-configuration section (it was renamed).
This is useful if you found some useful configuration snippet or something that you want to use.
This is a list of features specific to Vagrant that Atlas provides.
Vagrant Share
Vagrant Box Versioning
Vagrant Box Catalog
Vagrant Box Creation
Vagrant Share:
The vagrant share command, you can instantly share public access to your running Vagrant environment (virtual machine). The canonical use case for this is to share SSH or HTTP access to your machine.
It's important to share your work with colleagues or clients throughout the development process. Vagrant makes this easy with the share command.
There are several different types of shares.
HTTP Sharing
Vagrant Share shares HTTP access to your Vagrant environment to anyone in the world. The URL that it creates is publicly accessible and doesn't require Vagrant to be installed to access -- just a web browser.
$ vagrant share ==> default: Local HTTP port: 5000 default: Local HTTPS port: disabled ==> default: Your Vagrant Share is running! ==> default: URL: http://frosty-weasel-0857.vagrantshare.com ...
Currently, HTTP access is restricted through obscure URLs. We'll be adding more ACLs and audit logs for this in the future.
SSH Access
Vagrant Share can allow anyone to easily SSH into your Vagrant environment. You're having issues where your app isn't running properly or you just want to pair program. Now, with just one flag, anyone you want can SSH into your Vagrant environment from anywhere in the world.
To enable sharing SSH, you must add the --ssh flag to vagrant share:
$ vagrant share --ssh
==> default: SSH Port: 22
==> default: Generating new SSH key...
default: Please enter a password to encrypt the key:
default: Repeat the password to confirm:
default: Inserting generated SSH key into machine...
==> default: Checking authentication and authorization...
==> default: Creating Vagrant Share session...
default: Share will be at: awful-squirrel-9454
==> default: Your Vagrant Share is running!
...
The --ssh flag is provided, Vagrant generates a brand new SSH keypair for SSH access. The public key portion is automatically inserted into the Vagrant environment. The private key portion is uploaded to the server managing the Vagrant Share connections. The password used to encrypt the private key is not uploaded anywhere, however, meaning we couldn't access your VM if we wanted to. It is an extra layer of security.
$ vagrant connect --ssh awful-squirrel-9454
Loading share 'awful-squirrel-9454'...
Password for the private key:
Executing SSH...
Welcome to Ubuntu 12.04.1 LTS
* Documentation: https://help.ubuntu.com/
Last login: Wed Feb 26 08:38:55 2014 from 192.168.148.1
vagrant@precise64:/vagrant$
General Sharing (Vagrant Connect)
Vagrant share can share any TCP/UDP connection, and is not restricted to only a single port. When you run vagrant share, Vagrant will share the entire Vagrant environment.
When the person you are sharing with runs vagrant connect SHARE-NAME, Vagrant will give this person a static IP they can use to access the machine as if it were on the local network:
$ vagrant connect awful-squirrel-9454
==> connect: Connecting to: awful-squirrel-9454
==> connect: Starting a VM for a static connect IP.
connect: The machine is booted and ready!
==> connect: Connect is running!
==> connect: SOCKS address: 127.0.0.1:62167
==> connect: Machine IP: 172.16.0.2
==> connect:
==> connect: Press Ctrl-C to stop connection.
...
Security Concerns
The primary security mechanism for Vagrant Share is security through obscurity along with an encryption key for SSH. Additionally, there are several configuration options made available to help control access and manage security:
In addition to these options, there are other features we've built to help:
Vagrant share uses end-to-end TLS connections. So even unencrypted TCP streams are encrypted through the various proxies and only unencrypted during the final local communication between the local proxy and the Vagrant environment.
SSH keys are encrypted by default, using a password that is not transmitted to our servers or across the network at all.
SSH is not shared by default, it must explicitly be shared with the --ssh flag.
A web interface we've built shows share history and will show basic access logs in the future.
Share sessions expire after a short time (currently 8 hours), but can also be expired manually by ctrl-c from the sharing machine or via the web interface
Vagrant Box Versioning
Boxes support versioning so that members of your team using Vagrant can update the underlying box easily, and the people who create boxes can push fixes and communicate these fixes efficiently. There are multiple components of a box:
The box itself, comprised of the box name and description.
One or more box versions.
One or more providers for each box version.
Upon vagrant up or vagrant box outdated, an out-of-date box user will see the following message in Vagrant:
Bringing machine 'default' up with 'virtualbox' provider...
==> default: Checking if box 'hashicorp/example' is up to date...
==> default: A newer version of the box 'hashicorp/example' is available! You currently
==> default: have version '0.0.5'. The latest is version '0.0.6'. Run
==> default: `vagrant box update` to update.
...
Box Version Release States
Create new versions of boxes without releasing them or without Vagrant seeing the update. This lets you prepare a box for release slowly. Box versions have three states:
unreleased: Vagrant cannot see this version yet, so it needs to be released. Versions can be released by editing them and clicking the release button at the top of the page
active: Vagrant is able to add and use this box version
revoked: Vagrant cannot see this version, and it cannot be re-released. You must create the version again
The SAP Business Technology Platform (SAP BTP) is a set of advanced technology services for integrating business processes, managing data, doing analytics, and making apps. It helps businesses go digital by letting them use efficient cloud-based solutions that inspire new ideas and improve operating efficiency in a wide range of settings. Take a look at the questions below that are often asked in SAP BTP interviews. They will help you prepare.
","description":"$c","title":"SAP BTP Interview Questions","url_title":"sap-btp-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"▷ SAP BTP Interview Questions & Answers-2024","meta_desc":"▷ SAP BTP Interview Questions -✔️Freshers ✔️Experienced. ✔️Real time case study questions","views":1453,"rating":4.8,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2024-06-25T12:36:22.000Z","updated_at":"2024-06-25T12:36:22.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":1},{"id":2196,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
Are you having trouble finding helpful study materials to help you prepare for a SolarWinds interview? With more jobs opening up for SolarWinds workers, it's essential to have the right questions to prepare for interviews. Unfortunately, there aren't many complete study guides online. We've compiled a list of the most common SolarWinds interview questions to fill in this blank. There is a thorough answer to every question, which will give you the information and ideas you need to do well in your interview. Get ready for your SolarWinds interview by reading this carefully-picked post. It will make you feel better about your abilities.
","description":"$d","title":"SolarWinds Interview Questions","url_title":"solarwinds-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"▷ SolarWinds Interview Questions & Answers-2024","meta_desc":"▷ SolarWinds Interview Questions -✔️Freshers ✔️Experienced. ✔️Real time case study questions","views":1642,"rating":4.7,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"26","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2024-06-25T10:29:31.000Z","updated_at":"2024-06-25T10:29:31.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":1},{"id":2194,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
The business world changes quickly, so keeping ahead requires more than following the latest trends. It requires intentional innovation and digital change. Global firms employ integrated systems like SAP Business Technology Platform (BTP) to streamline processes, enhance productivity, and encourage long-term success. Here, we discuss what SAP BTP is and its tutorial.
","description":"$e","title":"SAP BTP Tutorial","url_title":"sap-btp-tutorial","image_url":"","meta_title":"▷ SAP BTP Tutorial: What Is It? - Tekslate","meta_desc":"SAP BTP Tutorial: What is SAP BTP, Use Cases, Extension Suite, Integration Suite, Benefits, FAQs, and More.","views":1432,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2024-06-24T17:43:58.000Z","updated_at":"2024-06-24T17:43:58.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":2},{"id":2186,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
Both MuleSoft and SnapLogic are extremely capable integration systems that provide a wealth of capabilities and advantages. SnapLogic is renowned for its user-friendly drag-and-drop interface, a large selection of pre-built connectors, and powerful data management features. The modular architecture of MuleSoft, on the other hand, allows it to support a wide range of deployment types and data formats.
","table_of_content":"$f","description":"$10","title":"SnapLogic vs MuleSoft","url_title":"snaplogic-vs-mulesoft","image_url":"","meta_title":"SnapLogic vs MuleSoft | Integration Platforms Comparison ","meta_desc":"In this article, you will learn about What is SnapLogic? What is MuleSoft? SnapLogic Advantages, MuleSoft Advantages, Features and comparison, etc. ","views":2985,"rating":4.7,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"44","author_desc":"","course_id":"787","created_at":"2023-04-29T11:51:08.000Z","updated_at":"2023-04-29T11:51:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is the difference between SnapLogic and MuleSoft?","faq_schema_a1":"SnapLogic is a cloud-based integration platform that makes it simple for users to develop and deploy integrations by providing pre-built connectors and a drag-and-drop user interface. On the other side, MuleSoft provides more sophisticated analytics and monitoring capabilities, as well as the option for on-premise or cloud deployment.","faq_schema_q2":"How do SnapLogic and MuleSoft compare in terms of pricing?","faq_schema_a2":"Because SnapLogic's pricing is determined by the quantity of users, connectors, and data quantities, it is an affordable choice for smaller businesses. Because MuleSoft's pricing is based on the amount of cores and deployment options, it is more suitable for bigger, enterprise-level deployments.","faq_schema_q3":"Can SnapLogic and MuleSoft be integrated together?","faq_schema_a3":"Using unique connections and APIs, SnapLogic and MuleSoft can be combined. Organizations may then be able to build more intricate integration workflows by utilizing the advantages of both platforms.","like_counter":0},{"id":2180,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
Are you switching your career to become a UML Designer? Then you’re on the right page. In this article, we have provided you with all the knowledge that helps you clear the UMl Developer interview. We have covered all the concepts, from basics to advanced, and curated a list of UML Interview Questions. Let's dive into the article!
","description":"$11","title":"UML Interview Questions","url_title":"uml-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 20+ UML Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Prepare for the best UML Interview Questions with Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":943,"rating":4.5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"206","created_at":"2023-04-10T07:12:26.000Z","updated_at":"2023-04-10T07:12:26.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":2179,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
It's crucial to be well-prepared for interview questions if you want to work with SAP Analytics Cloud. Organizations frequently utilise SAP Analytics Cloud, a cloud-based analytics platform, to analyse data from many sources, produce visualizations and reports, and work in real-time collaboration with others. You should be well-versed in the elements, functions, and capabilities of the platform in order to perform well in an interview.
","description":"$12","title":"SAP Analytics Cloud Interview Questions","url_title":"sap-analytics-cloud-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 30+ SAP Analytics Cloud Interview Questions (2023)","meta_desc":"Prepare for the best SAP Analytics Cloud Interview Questions with Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":741,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"19","author_desc":"","course_id":"782","created_at":"2023-03-27T08:00:46.000Z","updated_at":"2023-03-27T08:00:46.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"Explain the components of SAP Analytics Cloud?","faq_schema_a1":"Data visualisation, data modelling, planning, predictive analytics, and business intelligence are the core elements of SAP Analytics Cloud.","faq_schema_q2":"What is meant by SAP Analytics Cloud?","faq_schema_a2":"Users of the cloud-based analytics application SAP Analytics Cloud can analyse data from numerous sources, produce visualisations and reports, and work in real-time collaboration with others.","faq_schema_q3":"What is the purpose of SAP Analytics Cloud planning?","faq_schema_a3":"The what-if analysis and scenario planning capabilities, as well as the ability to design, manage, and evaluate financial plans and budgets, are all part of SAP Analytics Cloud planning.","like_counter":1},{"id":2173,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
This blog post is a comprehensive tutorial on SAP Analytics Cloud. It covers everything from the basics of SAP Analytics Cloud to its advanced features. The post includes key highlights of the prompt in the current market, including its growing popularity and how it is being used by businesses worldwide. Readers will gain a thorough understanding of the platform, its capabilities, and how it can help their business grow.
","table_of_content":"$13","description":"$14","title":"SAP Analytics Cloud Tutorial ","url_title":"sap-analytics-cloud-tutorial","image_url":"","meta_title":"SAP Analytics Cloud Tutorial | What is SAP Analytics Cloud?","meta_desc":"SAP Analytics Cloud Tutorial for Beginners ➔ In this Article, you will learn about Architecture✔️ Fundamentals✔️ Applications✔️ License and FAQs.","views":741,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"782","created_at":"2023-03-20T05:11:52.000Z","updated_at":"2023-03-20T05:11:52.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"Is SAP Analytics Cloud easy to learn?","faq_schema_a1":" Yes. If you follow all the steps properly, SAP Analytics is easy to learn. ","faq_schema_q2":"What is SAP Analytics Cloud used for?","faq_schema_a2":"Creating data reports is the main function of SAP Analytics Cloud.","faq_schema_q3":"What is the SAP Analytics Cloud tutorial?","faq_schema_a3":"SAP Analytics Cloud tutorial is a go-to tool for business users for analytical and ad-hoc reporting. Business users can create a basic, medium, and complex dashboard from transactional data in the database to meet business requirements. ","like_counter":1},{"id":2171,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$15","title":"Clinical Data Analyst Interview Questions","url_title":"clinical-data-analyst-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 60+ Clinical Data Analyst Interview Questions (2023)","meta_desc":"Clinical Data Analyst Interview Questions and Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions ✔️Curated by Experts ✔️Interview Tips and ✔️FAQ's","views":1241,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"198","created_at":"2023-03-16T07:29:43.000Z","updated_at":"2023-03-16T07:29:43.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is CT?","faq_schema_a1":"Clinical Trials or CT is a comparative examination of medication with reference to any patient’s medical condition.","faq_schema_q2":"What is Pre-clinical study?","faq_schema_a2":"The pre-clinical study is a process involving in-vitro study on animals. In this process, a range of doses is given to animals to test the toxicity and efficacy parameters.","faq_schema_q3":"What is patient file?","faq_schema_a3":"A patient’s file contains the medical and treatment history of the patient and demographic data. It can also have paper records or a combination of both computer and paper records. ","like_counter":6},{"id":2168,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$16","title":"Kotlin Interview Questions","url_title":"kotlin-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 50+ Kotlin Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Prepare for best Kotlin Interview Questions with Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions ✔️Frequently Asked ✔️Curated by Experts and ✔️FAQ's.","views":47,"rating":4.4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"4","author_desc":"","course_id":"501","created_at":"2023-03-08T12:37:29.000Z","updated_at":"2023-03-08T12:37:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is the definition of the visibility modifier?","faq_schema_a1":"The visibility modifier can be used to establish a function's extent, class or variable. The four types of visibility are private, internal, protected and public.","faq_schema_q2":"What is an enclosed class?","faq_schema_a2":"An enclosed class is a type of class which can only be extended by classes that are part of this same directory. It is usually employed in conjunction with expressions to make a limited subclass.","faq_schema_q3":"What is a \"companion object\"?","faq_schema_a3":"The term \"companion object\" refers to an object connected to a specific class and can be utilized to record static methods as well as properties.","like_counter":0},{"id":2165,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$17","title":"Grunt Interview Questions","url_title":"grunt-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 50+ Grunt Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Prepare for best Grunt Interview Questions with Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions ✔️Frequently Asked ✔️Curated by Experts and ✔️FAQ's.","views":451,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"348","created_at":"2023-03-01T12:26:16.000Z","updated_at":"2023-03-01T12:26:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is Grunt?","faq_schema_a1":"Grunt is a JavaScript task runner that helps automate repetitive actions, including minification, unit testing, compilation, etc.","faq_schema_q2":"What are the benefits of using Grunt in a project?","faq_schema_a2":"Benefits of Grunt in the project include: Increase in productivity Enhance consistency Improve code quality Ease to automation Reduce time and cost","faq_schema_q3":"How do you install Grunt?","faq_schema_a3":"To install Grunt, you must first install Node.js and Node Package Manager ( npm). Then run the command in the command prompt: 'npm install -grunt-cli.'","like_counter":0},{"id":2162,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
Knowing what you will be asked before the Interview can make you confident. We've compiled an extensive collection of Full Stack Developer interview questions from freshers to experienced professionals. This article covers the question comprehensively from all the aspects of employer majorly, including the development of front, and back-end applications servers, databases, web security, and the use of version control systems. These Full Stack Developer interview questions are designed to test your skills and knowledge in both back-end and front-end development.
","description":"$18","title":"Full Stack Developer Interview Questions","url_title":"full-stack-developer-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 50+ Full Developer Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Prepare for best Full Developer Interview Questions and Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions ✔️Frequently Asked ✔️Curated by Experts and ✔️FAQ's. ","views":457,"rating":4.4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"4","author_desc":"","course_id":"452","created_at":"2023-02-24T06:30:04.000Z","updated_at":"2023-02-24T06:30:04.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"How do I prepare for a full-stack developer interview?","faq_schema_a1":"Preparing for a full-stack developer interview may become challenging if you need to know the right way. Start with revising your basics and practicing coding. Polish your technical skill and go through the previously asked questions about full-stack development. Also, look for the tips mentioned above.","faq_schema_q2":"What are the basic skills required for a full-stack developer?","faq_schema_a2":"To become full-stack developer, basic skills required for a full-stack developer include: Proficiency in front-end technologies such as HTML, CSS, JavaScript, and a front-end framework like React or Angular. Knowledge of back-end technologies like Node.js, Java, or Python and a database like MySQL or MongoDB. Familiarity with version control systems like Git, and experience working with APIs, web services, and cloud computing is also beneficial.","faq_schema_q3":"Is 3 months enough for a full-stack developer?","faq_schema_a3":"Yes, 3 months are enough for a full-stack developer. In some cases, if you are an extreme beginner, it may take longer.","like_counter":0},{"id":2158,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$19","title":"CouchBase Interview Questions","url_title":"couchbase-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 40+ CouchBase Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for best CouchBase Interview Questions with Answers: Ace your CouchBase interview with expert-curated, FAQ's and real-time case study questions.","views":124,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"426","created_at":"2023-02-20T05:43:29.000Z","updated_at":"2023-02-20T05:43:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"Is Couchbase a SQL database?","faq_schema_a1":"No, Couchbase is a NoSQL database.","faq_schema_q2":"Does Couchbase support SQL?","faq_schema_a2":"No, Couchbase does not support SQL natively, but it offers a powerful query language called N1QL that has a SQL-like syntax.","faq_schema_q3":"What is N1QL in Couchbase?","faq_schema_a3":"N1QL is a SQL-like query language for querying JSON data in Couchbase.","like_counter":0},{"id":2157,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
Listed are the most common Vue.js interview questions with their responses and frequently asked questions. This post is for you if you're looking for an all-in-one interview escape. These questions are listed as per the difficulty level, which can be used by freshers, intermediaries, or experts. This list of interview questions will be highly beneficial to you in securing the most excellent position in the IT business.
","description":"$1a","title":"Vue.js Interview Questions","url_title":"vuejs-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 50+ Vue.js Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Prepare for best Vue.js Interview Questions and Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions ✔️Frequently Asked ✔️Curated by Experts and ✔️FAQ's.","views":156,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"502","created_at":"2023-02-16T12:48:15.000Z","updated_at":"2023-02-16T12:48:15.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"Is Vue.JS front end or back end?","faq_schema_a1":"Vue.js is a JavaScript front-end framework that assists in building user interfaces. It is used for the creation of single-page applications. Moreover, it enables the developers to establish reusable components and manage the state of applications. It functions in the browser and interacts with the users, updating the application based on their inputs. However, Vue.js could be more helpful in backend development.","faq_schema_q2":"What are Mixins in Vue?","faq_schema_a2":"Mixins refer to a versatile approach that offers a more convenient way of distributing functionalities for vue components. Mixin objects can comprise various component choices. ","faq_schema_q3":"What is VueJS mainly used for?","faq_schema_a3":"Vue.js is mainly used for creating web interfaces and single-page applications.","like_counter":0},{"id":2156,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$1b","title":"UiPath Interview Questions","url_title":"uipath-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 60+ UiPath Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for RPA UiPath interview Questions with Answers ➔ Get the best expert-curated list of top questions, UiPath FAQ's and tips.","views":450,"rating":4.7,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"9","author_desc":"","course_id":"108","created_at":"2023-02-14T11:25:37.000Z","updated_at":"2023-02-14T11:25:37.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What are the 3 key components of the UiPath platform?","faq_schema_a1":"There are majorly 3 key components of the UiPath platform, they are: UiPath Studio: UiPath Studio is a visual and graphical interface that enables users to design and build automation workflows. UiPath Robot: UiPatch Robot is a component that executes the automation workflows designed in UiPath Studio. The Robot can run either in attended mode (when a user is present at the computer) or unattended mode (when running as a background process). UiPath Orchestrator: UiPath Orchestrator is a web-based platform that enables users to manage, monitor, and scale their automation.","faq_schema_q2":"2. What is UiPath's full form?","faq_schema_a2":"UiPath does not have a full form. It is a brand name.","faq_schema_q3":"What is UiPath TCS used for?","faq_schema_a3":"TCS (Tata Consultancy Services) is a global IT services company that provides a range of Tech services. TCS uses UiPath to help its clients automate their business processes and improve operational efficiency. Here are some other uses: Uses UiPath Studio to design and build automation workflows. Uses UiPath Robots to execute automation. Uses UiPath Orchestrator to manage and monitor automation. Helps organizations reduce manual work. Improves data accuracy. Increases operational efficiency","like_counter":0},{"id":2154,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$1c","title":"Golang Interview Questions","url_title":"golang-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 50+ Golang Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Prepare for your Golang (Go) interview Questions➔ with our expert-curated list of top questions, Golang FAQ's and tips.","views":545,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"169","created_at":"2023-02-10T13:23:32.000Z","updated_at":"2023-02-10T13:23:32.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"How to prepare for a Golang interview?","faq_schema_a1":"To prepare for a Golang interview, it's recommended to familiarize yourself with Go's syntax, data structures, concurrency, and standard library. You should also have a good understanding of the following topics: pointers, interface, error handling, garbage collection, and Go's strict typing. Practicing writing code, solving problems, and discussing your solutions with others will also help.","faq_schema_q2":"Why is Go frequently referred to as a post-OOP language?","faq_schema_a2":"Go is often referred to as a post-OOP language because it takes a different approach to solving problems compared to traditional OOP languages. Go emphasizes simplicity, concurrency, and scalability, and provides built-in support for concurrent programming with Goroutines and channels. Go's use of composition instead of inheritance, and its lack of classes, make it a different approach to solving problems compared to traditional OOP languages.","faq_schema_q3":"What are the several built-in supports in Go language?","faq_schema_a3":"Go has several built-in supports, including: Concurrency primitives, such as Goroutines and channels, to handle and manage concurrent processing. A standard library that provides packages for various functions and features, such as net/http for handling HTTP requests, encoding/json for encoding and decoding JSON data, and fmt for formatting and printing output. Garbage collection for automatic memory management. Strict typing for improved code clarity and error handling. Built-in support for testing, benchmarking, and profiling.","like_counter":0},{"id":2153,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"$1d","description":"$1e","title":"Burp Suite Tutorial","url_title":"burp-suite-tutorial","image_url":"","meta_title":"Burp Suite Tutorial | What is Burp Suite?","meta_desc":"Burp Suite Tutorial for Beginners ➔ In this Article, you will learn about Features✔️ Enterprise✔️ Professional✔️ Community Editions✔️ Benefits, etc.","views":2112,"rating":4.4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"8","author_desc":"","course_id":"767","created_at":"2023-02-10T08:02:42.000Z","updated_at":"2023-02-10T08:02:42.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":2149,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$1f","title":"Facets Interview Questions","url_title":"facets-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 40+ Facets Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Best Facets Interview Questions with Answers: Ace your Facets interview with expert-curated, FAQ's and real-time case study questions.","views":453,"rating":4.5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"173","created_at":"2023-02-02T12:28:51.000Z","updated_at":"2023-02-02T12:28:51.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is a facet interview?","faq_schema_a1":"Using Facets, a management tool used to operate on medical and hospital transactions, and being skilled in answering some of the common Facets testing questions for interviews can enhance your chances for success in the interview.","faq_schema_q2":"What are facets in healthcare?","faq_schema_a2":"Facets is a central administration solution developed by TriZetto for health plans. Facets came from the requirement for a solution that made the health plans adapt to new industry drift without system restrictions. It includes different aspects of healthcare like healthcare costs, healthcare services, etc., and automates administrative tasks like billing, care management, claim processing, and network management workflow.","faq_schema_q3":"What are the 3 Facets? ","faq_schema_a3":"The three facets are problem method, problem structure, and problem solution.","like_counter":0},{"id":2147,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$20","title":"Guidewire Interview Questions","url_title":"guidewire-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 30+ Guidewire Interview Questions and Answers (2025)","meta_desc":"Best Guidewire Interview Questions with Answers: Ace your Guidewire interview with expert-curated, real-time case study questions and answers. ","views":785,"rating":4.5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"237","created_at":"2023-01-31T09:51:21.000Z","updated_at":"2023-01-31T09:51:21.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"Is guidewire a technology?","faq_schema_a1":"Guidewire is an enterprise software company serving the insurance and financial services industries. In its nearly 15-year history, the guidewire has created a leading system to help insurers (including Allstate Insurance Company, Nationwide Mutual Insurance Co., MetLife Auto & Home, and Erie Insurance) design, market, and administer their products.","faq_schema_q2":"Is Guidewire an ERP?","faq_schema_a2":"The guidewire is a CRM and ERP system.","faq_schema_q3":"What is Guidewire Claim Center?","faq_schema_a3":"Guidewire ClaimCenter is a claims management system that works with all types of insurance, including personal, commercial, and workers' compensation.","like_counter":5},{"id":2146,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$21","title":"WorkFusion Interview Questions","url_title":"workfusion-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 40+ WorkFusion Interview Questions (2023)","meta_desc":"Best WorkFusion Interview Questions with Answers ➔ In this blog, you'll learn ✔️Real-time Case Study Questions ✔️FAQs ✔️Tips✔️Curated by Experts.","views":453,"rating":4.7,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"9","author_desc":"","course_id":"149","created_at":"2023-01-30T14:02:26.000Z","updated_at":"2023-01-30T14:02:26.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is RPA Testing?","faq_schema_a1":"RPA (Robotic Process Automation) testing is the process of ensuring that an RPA solution operates as intended and meets the criteria by testing its functionality and performance. RPA testing comprises functional testing, performance testing, and regression testing. This ensures the automation's stability, accuracy, and efficiency.","faq_schema_q2":"What is a Listener in WorkFusion?","faq_schema_a2":"In WorkFusion, a Listener is a component that enables the software robot to communicate with other systems and applications. The listener receives events or triggers from external systems and executes the associated automation flow based on the setup. This enables the automation of actions triggered by outside occurrences.","faq_schema_q3":"What are different RPA jobs?","faq_schema_a3":"Different RPA jobs include: RPA Developer, RPA Business Analyst, RPA Project Manager, RPA Solution Architect, RPA Quality Assurance Analyst, RPA Infrastructure Engineer, RPA Operations Manager, RPA Consultant, and RPA Trainer.","like_counter":0},{"id":2143,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"$22","description":"$23","title":"Cypress Tutorial","url_title":"cypress-tutorial","image_url":"","meta_title":"Cypress Tutorial | Cypress Automation Tutorial","meta_desc":"Cypress Tutorial for Beginners: Learn various Cypress Automation topics like Cypress Features, Installation Steps, Architecture and workflow.","views":5456,"rating":4.8,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"7","author_desc":"","course_id":"768","created_at":"2023-01-23T10:42:07.000Z","updated_at":"2023-01-23T10:42:07.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":2141,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$24","title":"PostgreSQL Tutorial for Beginners","url_title":"postgresql-tutorial","image_url":"","meta_title":"PostgreSQL Tutorial | A Complete Guide to PostgreSQL Tutorial","meta_desc":"PostgreSQL Tutorial for Beginners ➔✔️What is PostgreSQL ✔️History ✔️Architecture ✔️Installation Guide ✔️Features and more.","views":464,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"10","author_desc":"","course_id":"500","created_at":"2023-01-20T10:30:13.000Z","updated_at":"2023-01-20T10:30:13.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":2139,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
Have you got a Saviynt interview to go to? Keep your anxiousness in check since this blog will teach you to be confident throughout the interview. This blog is a last-minute reference guide that may be used before your interview.
","description":"$25","title":"Saviynt Interview Questions","url_title":"saviynt-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 45+ Saviynt Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for Saviynt Interview Questions with Answers? ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions ✔️Frequently Asked ✔️Beginners ✔️Advanced and Saviynt FAQs.","views":1890,"rating":4.7,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"758","created_at":"2023-01-19T12:46:43.000Z","updated_at":"2023-01-19T12:46:43.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"How does Saviynt technology work?","faq_schema_a1":"Enterprises can protect apps, data, and infrastructure with Saviynt's unified platform for the cloud (Office 365, AWS, Salesforce, and Workday) (SAP, Oracle EBS). Saviynt is leading the development of IGA 2.0 by fusing sophisticated risk analytics and intelligence with fine-grained privilege control.","faq_schema_q2":"SailPoint or Saviynt—which is superior?","faq_schema_a2":"When compared, they each serve different purposes. SailPoint is the only option if you want a more extensive user base and sophisticated features. Additionally, you may choose Saviynt if you want superior features but only care a little about the community.","faq_schema_q3":"Saviynt is what sort of business?","faq_schema_a3":"Saviynt, Inc creates security software. The company provides administration, identity governance, and cloud security solutions. Enterprises can protect apps, data, and infrastructure on a single platform for cloud and enterprise thanks to Saviynt.","like_counter":3},{"id":2137,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$26","title":"PostgreSQL Interview Questions","url_title":"postgresql-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 30+ PostgreSQL Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for the best PostgreSQL interview questions with answers? Learn from the best. We are here to help you crack the interview.","views":789,"rating":4.5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"10","author_desc":"","course_id":"500","created_at":"2023-01-13T13:00:26.000Z","updated_at":"2023-01-13T13:00:26.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is PostgreSQL?","faq_schema_a1":"PostgreSQL is an open-source relational database management system (RDBMS) that is known for its powerful features and scalability. It is often used in high-demand applications such as data warehousing, business intelligence, and large-scale web applications.","faq_schema_q2":"What are some advantages of using PostgreSQL?","faq_schema_a2":"PostgreSQL offers a number of advantages, including: support for advanced data types and indexing methods robust concurrency control support for stored procedures, triggers and views high performance and scalability High availability and disaster recovery Large and active community, which makes it a great choice for various use cases.","faq_schema_q3":"Can I use PostgreSQL in a production environment?","faq_schema_a3":"Yes, PostgreSQL is a stable and reliable database management system that is suitable for use in a production environment. Many large companies and organizations use PostgreSQL in their mission-critical applications.","like_counter":0},{"id":2133,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
Preparing for a Cypress job interview requires familiarizing yourself with the tool's features and capabilities. Common questions might include explaining what Cypress is, demonstrating basic test-writing skills, and discussing best practices. Knowing how to handle asynchronous actions and debug failing tests can also be advantageous.
","description":"$27","title":"Cypress Interview Questions","url_title":"cypress-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 40+ Cypress Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for Best Cypress Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":896,"rating":4.7,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"7","author_desc":"","course_id":"768","created_at":"2022-12-29T07:04:38.000Z","updated_at":"2022-12-29T07:04:38.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":2},{"id":2130,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
Are you preparing for New Relic interview? Are you sure you have covered all the basic advanced-level questions? If not, then our guide on New Relic interview questions 2022 will help you crack the interview. In this blog, we have prepared New Relic interview questions and answers prepared by industry experts so that you can ace your interview. But before moving on to the questions, let's know a little about New Relic.
","table_of_content":"","description":"$28","title":"New Relic Interview Questions","url_title":"new-relic-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 30+ New Relic Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Done with New Relic Certification and looking for interview questions to prepare? Then you are in the right place. We are here to help you with the same. ","views":3111,"rating":4.7,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"158","created_at":"2022-11-04T10:55:14.000Z","updated_at":"2022-11-04T10:55:14.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is the infrastructure of New Relic?","faq_schema_a1":"New Relic gives the client complete details of the hosting environment and configuration of a website. If there is any change in those configurations, then there can be alerts to permit the change from the client.","faq_schema_q2":"Describe New Relic's APM?","faq_schema_a2":"The New Relic's APM allows monitoring of the performance statistics of various websites and applications. We can also sync the important and relevant data such as alerts, logs and so on to the New Relic mobile app to monitor those data from the app itself.","faq_schema_q3":"What is the use of Runbook in New Relic?","faq_schema_a3":"Runbook in New Relic allows the user to recover from any unexpected crashes or failures of the application or website.","like_counter":0},{"id":2128,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
Are you preparing for a Dynatrace interview? Are you 100% sure that you are well prepared? If not, there are Dynatrace interview questions that will come in handy; here are a few frequently asked Dynatrace Interview Questions in the world of Dynatrace. These questions will help you revise all the essential parts, making it easier for you to crack the interview.
","table_of_content":"","description":"$29","title":"Dynatrace Interview Questions","url_title":"dynatrace-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top Dynatrace Interview Questions (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for the best Dynatrace interview questions? Learn from the best. We are here to help you crack the interview.","views":451,"rating":4.4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"26","author_desc":"","course_id":"38","created_at":"2022-11-02T10:51:00.000Z","updated_at":"2022-11-02T10:51:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":3},{"id":2122,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$2a","title":"CISSP Interview Questions","url_title":"cissp-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 20 CISSP Interview Question and Answers - 2023","meta_desc":"Done with CISSP Certification and looking for interview questions to prepare? Then you are in the right place. We are here to help you with the same.","views":0,"rating":5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"459","created_at":"2022-08-04T09:02:52.000Z","updated_at":"2022-08-04T09:02:52.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":2119,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$2b","title":"Clojure Interview Questions","url_title":"clojure-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 30 Clojure Interview Question and Answers - 2023","meta_desc":"It's common for all job searchers to want to nail their interviews. But to do that, you must be completely ready. So, keep reading.","views":0,"rating":5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"424","created_at":"2022-07-25T08:12:32.000Z","updated_at":"2022-07-25T08:12:32.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":2113,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"
Have you been automating the testing process of your websites, user interfaces and applications with Cypress? If so, you are aware of its pros and cons. This post lists some of the top Cypress alternatives that you may use for effective automated testing. Let’s begin discovering.
","table_of_content":"$2c","description":"$2d","title":"Cypress Alternatives","url_title":"cypress-alternatives","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 10 Cypress Alternatives in 2023","meta_desc":"Looking for the top alternatives of the Cypress test automation tool? We have listed the 10 tools that can be used for testing apart from Cypress.","views":0,"rating":5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"155","created_at":"2022-07-09T10:45:02.000Z","updated_at":"2022-07-09T10:45:02.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":2112,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$2e","title":"TeamCity Interview Questions ","url_title":"teamcity-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 20 TeamCity Interview Question and Answers - Updated 2023","meta_desc":"Are you looking to prepare for TeamCity Interview? If yes then you need to go through these important TeamCity interview questions to ace your interview process.","views":0,"rating":5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"343","created_at":"2022-07-09T06:54:05.000Z","updated_at":"2022-07-09T06:54:05.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":2110,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$2f","title":"SPARQL Interview Questions","url_title":"sparql-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 20 SPARQL Interview Question and Answers - (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for some important SPARQL interview questions that might be asked during an interview? Then you need to go through these questions.","views":452,"rating":4.8,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"497","created_at":"2022-07-07T11:00:13.000Z","updated_at":"2022-07-07T11:00:13.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":2108,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$30","title":"Windchill Interview Questions","url_title":"windchill-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top Windchill Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for best PTC Windchill Interview Questions with Answers➔ In this blog you'll learn ✔️Real-time Case Study Questions✔️FAQs ✔️Tips","views":2101,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"35","author_desc":"","course_id":"79","created_at":"2022-07-04T12:00:32.000Z","updated_at":"2022-07-04T12:00:32.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":2107,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$31","title":"Cloud Analytics Tutorial","url_title":"cloud-analytics-tutorial","image_url":"","meta_title":"Cloud Analytics Tutorial | Introduction to Cloud Analytics","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, you will go through the introduction to cloud analytics, types of cloud analytics and why should you use it.","views":0,"rating":5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"2","author_desc":"","course_id":"180","created_at":"2022-06-30T08:18:08.000Z","updated_at":"2022-06-30T08:18:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":2104,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$32","title":"Apttus CPQ Interview Questions","url_title":"apttus-interview-questions-and-answers","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 25+ Apttus CPQ Interview Questions and Answers 2023","meta_desc":"Best Apttus CPQ Interview Questions with Answers: Ace your Apttus CPQ interview with our list of top questions and answers.","views":0,"rating":5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"119","created_at":"2022-03-30T13:09:31.000Z","updated_at":"2022-03-30T13:09:31.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":2100,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$33","title":"Hardware Design Development Interview Questions","url_title":"hardware-design-development-interview-questions-and-answers","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 30+ Hardware Design Development Interview Questions (2023)","meta_desc":"Best Hardware Design interview Questions & Answers for ✔️freshers ✔️executives ✔️Curated by Experts ✔️technical interview questions to ace your interview!","views":2141,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"161","created_at":"2022-03-29T12:04:45.000Z","updated_at":"2022-03-29T12:04:45.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":3},{"id":2098,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$34","title":"SAP MDG Tutorial","url_title":"sap-mdg-tutorial","image_url":"","meta_title":"SAP MDG Tutorial | Introduction to SAP MDG","meta_desc":"In this SAP MDG Tutorial, we will provide an introduction to the basics of sap mdg, as well as discuss some key concepts and features. ","views":5410,"rating":4.8,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"739","created_at":"2022-03-16T06:21:53.000Z","updated_at":"2022-03-16T06:21:53.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":2093,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$35","title":"Looker Interview Questions","url_title":"looker-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 30+ Looker Interview Questions (2023)","meta_desc":"Best Looker Interview Questions and Answers: Ace your Looker interview with our list of top questions and answers.","views":1421,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"19","author_desc":"","course_id":"488","created_at":"2022-02-24T11:38:35.000Z","updated_at":"2022-02-24T11:38:35.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"Describe the Data Flow.","faq_schema_a1":"It is mostly a task that is done with the assistance of an SSIS package and is responsible for data transformation. The source and destination are always clearly defined, and users may easily keep up with the amendments and modifications.","faq_schema_q2":"How Do You Define Logistic Regression?","faq_schema_a2":"It is essentially a method that is recognized for accurately verifying a dataset that contains unbiased variables. The validation level is determined by how accurately the final findings are dependent on these factors. It is not always appropriate to remove them as indicated.","faq_schema_q3":"What do you mean by Looker Business Intelligence?","faq_schema_a3":"The BI software from Looker assists in the exploration and analysis of data. We can bring together data from many sources to produce a cohesive perspective. Other than data, we can then create real-time metrics and simply distribute them. It has some impressive visuals and drill-down interfaces.","like_counter":0},{"id":2084,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$36","title":"Test -2 ","url_title":"test-tekslate","image_url":"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/mulesoft-training.png","meta_title":"test teklste","meta_desc":"test tekslate","views":5500,"rating":5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"2","created_at":"2022-01-25T11:52:08.000Z","updated_at":"2022-01-25T11:52:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"2024-08-25","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":113,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$37","title":"WebMethods Tutorial","url_title":"tutorialswebmethods","image_url":"","meta_title":"WebMethods Tutorial | A Complete Guide to WebMethods Tutorial","meta_desc":"WebMethods Tutorial for Beginners - Learn What is WebMethods, What is Integration Server in WEB METHODS, E-Standards read more.!","views":3291,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"6","author_desc":"","course_id":"131","created_at":"2016-06-28T06:16:06.000Z","updated_at":"2021-04-15T14:48:06.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":3},{"id":425,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$38","title":"SAP HCM Interview Questions","url_title":"sap-hcm-interview-questions","image_url":"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/articles/sap-hcm-interview-questions-10032023.png","meta_title":"Top 40+ SAP HCM Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for SAP HCM Interview Questions with Answers? Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":2451,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"736","created_at":"2017-09-26T09:42:11.000Z","updated_at":"2021-04-14T15:57:28.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What Is the Client In The SAP System?","faq_schema_a1":"In the SAP R/3 (R stands for Real-time) system, a client is an organization and a legal entity. A client is positioned at the highest level among all the organizational units. It contains the master data of various business processes, such as customers, products, and vendors. A three-digit number is used to represent clients in the SAP R/3 system.","faq_schema_q2":"What Is the Company Code?","faq_schema_a2":"A company code is a unique four-character alphanumeric code that represents a legally independent enterprise.","faq_schema_q3":"What Is SAP HCM Workflow?","faq_schema_a3":"The SAP HCM Workflow automates business processes and assigns tasks to appropriate persons at the right time.","like_counter":7},{"id":416,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$39","title":"Embedded Systems Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-embedded-systems","image_url":"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/articles/embedded-systems-interview-questions-10032023.png","meta_title":"TOP 50+ Embedded Systems Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for Tricky Embedded Interview Questions? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":1547,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2017-09-18T05:46:38.000Z","updated_at":"2021-04-07T12:53:55.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is an embedded system? ","faq_schema_a1":"An embedded system is part of a more extensive electrical or mechanical system dedicated to a specific task. It is a microcontroller or microprocessor-based. ","faq_schema_q2":"What are real-time embedded systems? ","faq_schema_a2":"Real-time embedded systems are computer systems that monitor, respond, or control external environments. ","faq_schema_q3":"What is a microcontroller?","faq_schema_a3":"Microcontrollers are self-contained systems inserted in devices to control the actions and features of a product. They are also called embedded controllers.","like_counter":9},{"id":1214,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$3a","title":"Advantages and Disadvantages of C Language","url_title":"advantages-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Advantages of C Language | Disadvantages of C - TekSlate","meta_desc":"These core tutorials that helps you to learn the fundamentals of C, features of C, advantages and disadvantages of C,etc","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:10:34.000Z","updated_at":"2021-04-07T10:48:35.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":1270,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$3b","title":"Advantages and Disadvantages of C++ language","url_title":"c-explain-advantages-disadvantages","image_url":"","meta_title":"Advantages and Disadvantages of C++ language - Updated 2022","meta_desc":"In this tutorial,we will learn about Advantages and Disadvantages of C++ language,what are the uses, disadvantages and advantages of c++?","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-22T22:54:22.000Z","updated_at":"2021-04-05T18:24:46.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":2},{"id":391,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$3c","title":"Oracle Procure To Pay Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-oracle-procure-to-pay","image_url":"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/articles/p2p-interview-questions-10032023.png","meta_title":"TOP 50 Oracle Procure To Pay Interview Questions (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for Oracle P2P Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":4352,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"338","created_at":"2016-11-22T05:37:44.000Z","updated_at":"2021-04-05T16:08:12.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":39},{"id":939,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"$3d","description":"$3e","title":"Salesforce Sample Triggers with different Scenarios","url_title":"15-sample-triggers-different-scenarios","image_url":"","meta_title":"Real Time Trigger Scenarios in Salesforce (2023)","meta_desc":"Salesforce trigger scenarios with examples - learn programs for the efficient implementation of complex trigger scenarios in salesforce with examples.","views":11712,"rating":4.7,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"116","created_at":"2014-11-15T05:23:18.000Z","updated_at":"2021-04-03T16:47:41.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":18},{"id":1225,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$3f","title":"Increment /Decrement operators in C","url_title":"brief-explanation-increment-decrement-operator-examples","image_url":"","meta_title":"Increment / Decrement operators in C - Updated 2023 - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Increment /Decrement operators in C - learn about increment/decrement operators in C with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":2693,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"4","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:19:43.000Z","updated_at":"2021-04-03T16:05:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":2076,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$40","title":"Snowflake Tutorial","url_title":"snowflake-tutorial","image_url":"","meta_title":"Snowflake Tutorial | Snowflake Data Warehouse Overview","meta_desc":"Snowflake Tutorial - learn about snowflake data warehouse, Benefits of using snowflake, Snowflake architecture, Snowflake features and Snowflake loading.","views":758,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2021-02-23T13:24:36.000Z","updated_at":"2021-03-25T14:27:13.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":448,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$41","title":"OpenShift Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-openshift","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 50 OpenShift Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for OpenShift Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interview in Fortune 500 companies","views":1547,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"22","author_desc":"","course_id":"61","created_at":"2017-02-02T10:01:21.000Z","updated_at":"2020-12-21T13:25:40.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is Openshift?","faq_schema_a1":"Openshift is fundamentally a PC software product that is served by Red Hat. It is a cloud improvement administration and an open-source advancement stage for possible designers. The essentials of development and deployment of the applications over the cloud are led with Openshift.","faq_schema_q2":"Explain about gear in Openshift?","faq_schema_a2":"In terms of Openshift, isolated groups are called Gears. Gears perform the working of the application. Rather than a software product piece, the application is essentially performed by gears. Another significant term is a cartridge, which is fundamentally a build made up of reusable gears.","faq_schema_q3":"Define routes and services in Openshift?","faq_schema_a3":"A pod is comprising services and containers; subsequently, service in Openshift is a get together of coherent pods. The service is considered fundamentally as a REST object in Openshift. Routes are given in Openshift to externalize and investigate the services needed to reach the hostname remotely. It is achieved by utilizing the routes created by the admin commands.","like_counter":0},{"id":1385,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$42","title":"SilverLight LINQ Integration","url_title":"silverlight-linq-integration","image_url":"","meta_title":"SilverLight LINQ Integration | Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will go over SilverLight LINQ Integration with examplse","views":820,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T23:13:03.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-22T11:44:31.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1381,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$43","title":"SilverLight Data Type Animations","url_title":"silverlight-data-type-animations","image_url":"","meta_title":"SilverLight Data Type Animations | Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will look at different types of SilverLight Data Type Animations.","views":876,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T08:24:20.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-22T11:37:18.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1367,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$44","title":"Working with WCF services","url_title":"working-wcf-services","image_url":"","meta_title":"Working with WCF services | Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, you will learn about working with WCF services and consuming the WCF service with diagrammatic representation. Learn .Net from Industry Experts!","views":1050,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:27:18.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-22T11:27:38.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1344,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$45","title":"Working With Windows Based desktop Applications in WPF","url_title":"working-windows-based-desktop-applications-wcf","image_url":"","meta_title":"Create Modern Desktop Applications | Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn how to start working with windows based desktop applications and get to know about methods with windows class.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T18:17:58.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-22T11:12:01.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1207,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$46","title":"View engine & Razor view engine","url_title":"view-engine-razor-view-engine","image_url":"","meta_title":"Difference between View engine & Razor view engine | Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will understand difference between View engine & Razor view engine. A view engine is the part of the asp.net mvc.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:03:40.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-22T11:00:37.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1195,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$47","title":"Execute an MVC Application","url_title":"execute-mvc-application","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to Execute an MVC Application | Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will talk about how to execute an application in MVC ASP.net. Learn ASP.Net Training from Tekslate!","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"230","created_at":"2014-12-08T16:59:25.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-21T18:10:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1188,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$48","title":"Types of views in MVC","url_title":"many-types-view-mvc","image_url":"","meta_title":"How many Types of view in MVC | Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss types of views in the MVC framework. View Page, Master Page, and Partial View are the 3 basic types of views we see in MVC.","views":1986,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"230","created_at":"2014-12-08T16:49:57.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-21T17:29:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1182,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$49","title":"MVC Design Patterns","url_title":"mvc-design-patterns","image_url":"","meta_title":"MVC Design Patterns - ASP.Net | Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about different types of MVC Design Patterns in ASP.Net. In general 23 design patterns are developed by GOF (gang of four)","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"230","created_at":"2014-12-05T04:56:38.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-21T17:16:01.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1569,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$4a","title":"Windows Forms Based Application in vb.net","url_title":"windows-forms-based-application-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Windows form based application in VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will explain the windows form-based application in VB.Net in detail...Tekslate.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:37:05.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-20T12:09:59.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1575,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$4b","title":"Code for Delete (button_click) (Manage Question) in vb.net","url_title":"code-delete-button_click-manage-question-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Code for delete in VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss the deletion code (button click) in VB.Net explained in detail...Tekslate.","views":768,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:37:40.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T17:39:43.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1571,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$4c","title":"Working with typed Dataset in vb.net","url_title":"working-typed-dataset-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Working with typed dataset in VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss how to work with a typed dataset in VB.Net explained in detail...Tekslate.","views":318,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:37:18.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T17:11:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1567,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$4d","title":"Working with Inheritance in vb.net","url_title":"working-inheritance-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Working Inheritance in VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss how to work with inheritance and its types in VB.Net explained in detail...Tekslate.","views":454,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:47:35.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T16:29:50.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1568,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$4e","title":"Object Oriented Program Model in vb.net","url_title":"object-oriented-program-model-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Object oriented program model in VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss the object-oriented program model in VB.Net explained in detail...Tekslate.","views":203,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:37:02.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T16:00:20.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1576,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$4f","title":"Accessing stored procedures using LINQ in vb.net","url_title":"accessing-stored-procedures-using-linq-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Accessing stored procedures using Linq VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss how to access the stored procedures using Linq in VB.Net explained in detail...Tekslate.","views":914,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:37:48.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T13:30:45.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1574,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$50","title":"Filtering the Data based on LINQ queries in vb.net","url_title":"filtering-data-based-linq-queries-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Filtering the data based on Linq Queries in VB.NET","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about filtering the database on Linq queries in VB.Net...Tekslate.","views":942,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:37:44.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T12:23:06.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1573,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$51","title":"Working with Microsoft Agent Control in vb.net","url_title":"working-microsoft-agent-control-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Working with Microsoft agent in VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn how to work with Microsoft agent control in VB.Net...Tekslate","views":290,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:37:37.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T11:52:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1566,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$52","title":"Method Overloading in vb.net","url_title":"method-overloading-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Method overloading in VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about the method of overloading, shadowing explained in detail...Tekslate.","views":657,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:47:48.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T11:41:49.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1604,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$53","title":"Ajax Extenders","url_title":"ajax-extenders","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Extenders","meta_desc":"In this blog, we will learn that the Ajax extenders, and various types of ajax extenders...Tekslate.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:30:48.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T10:54:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1638,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$54","title":"Ajax File Upload Control","url_title":"ajax-file-upload-control","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax File Upload Control | TekSlate Ajax Tutorials Online","meta_desc":"Ajax File Upload Control - In the Ajax tutorial we will learn about AJAX File Upload, Ajax File Upload Control, and its properties.","views":314,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:49:17.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T10:40:50.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1562,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$55","title":"introduction to Class & Members in vb.net","url_title":"intoduction-class-members-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Class and Members in VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about class, members, shared members, modifiers, variable, object, etc; in VB.Net by Tekslate.","views":297,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:37:30.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-19T10:27:20.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1561,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$56","title":"Types of applications developed by VB.Net","url_title":"types-applications-can-developed-using-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Types of applications that can be developed using VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss the types of applications developed by using VB.Net, Console applications explained in detail, Tekslate.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"188","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:48:54.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-17T18:22:25.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":4},{"id":1560,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$57","title":"WCF [Windows Communication Foundation] in vb.net","url_title":"wcf-windows-communication-foundation-vb-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Windows Communication Foundation in VB.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss WCF, WPF, WF, CS, LINQ, and are explained in detail...Tekslate.","views":167,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:48:59.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-17T17:55:12.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":995,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$58","title":"Debugging web parts & Debugging From A Remote Machine","url_title":"debugging-web-parts-debugging-remote-machine","image_url":"","meta_title":"Debugging web parts & Debugging From A Remote Machine","meta_desc":"Setting break points and attaching asp.net w3wp.exe process to debugging web parts and debug a remote machine ensure remote server configured correctly","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-21T10:52:05.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-17T12:12:01.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":40,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$59","title":"C# Tutorials","url_title":"c-sharp-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"C# Tutorial | C Sharp Programming Tutorial","meta_desc":"C# tutorials discusses on concepts which consists of thousands of prebuilt classes and interfaces that lets programmer to write code in very less time.","views":975,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2015-05-31T06:36:54.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-17T11:19:55.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1208,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$5a","title":"Working with Razor syntax","url_title":"working-razor-syntax","image_url":"","meta_title":"Working with Razor syntax - ASP.Net | Tekslate","meta_desc":"Working with Razor syntax - ASP.Net - in this tutorial we will learn about Razor Syntax in ASP.Net.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:04:58.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-17T09:33:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1198,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$5b","title":"Anonymous and Named types ASP.Net","url_title":"different-between-anonymous-and-named-types","image_url":"","meta_title":"Difference between Anonymous and Named types -ASP.Net","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will see the Difference between Anonymous and Named types ASP.Net in ASP.Net. In general anonymous types of declared with the var keyword.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"230","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:48:07.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-16T17:01:03.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":149,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$5c","title":"OSB Tutorials","url_title":"tutorialsosb","image_url":"","meta_title":"OSB (Oracle Service Bus) Tutorials Designed By Industry Experts","meta_desc":"This tutorial gives a brief introduction on Basics of Weblogic Application Server,Domain and Clustering, Installing Admin Server (Weblogic)....","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"196","created_at":"2016-11-25T08:53:04.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-15T15:13:11.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1393,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$5d","title":"Working with OOP synopsis concepts in C# .Net","url_title":"times-control-c-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Working with OOP synopsis concepts in C# .Net |Tekslate","meta_desc":"Working with OOP synopsis concepts in C# .Net - in this tutorial learn about oops in detail.","views":508,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2018-01-09T12:11:10.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-14T15:56:19.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1392,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$5e","title":"Enumerators in C# .Net","url_title":"working-enumerators-enum-c-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Enumerators in C# .Net | Tekslate","meta_desc":"Enumerators in C# .Net - in this tutorial learn about enumerators in .net in detail with examples. Learn .Net from Experts!","views":804,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-31T07:02:26.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-14T15:32:20.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1389,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$5f","title":"Conditional Statements in C# .Net","url_title":"conditional-statements-c-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Conditional Statements in C# .Net | Tekslate","meta_desc":"Conditional Statements in C# .Net - in this tutorial we will learn about conditional statements in c#. Net with examples in detail.","views":265,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-31T06:50:45.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-14T13:04:58.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1388,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$60","title":"Parsing in C# .Net","url_title":"parsing-in-c-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Parsing in C# .Net | .Net Study Guide |Tekslate","meta_desc":"Parsing in C# .Net - in this tutorial we will learn about parsing c# .net in detail. Learn .Net from Experts!","views":207,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-31T06:47:33.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-14T12:42:06.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1387,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$61","title":"Type Casting in C# .Net","url_title":"type-casting-in-c-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Type Casting in C# .Net | .Net Study Guide | Tekslate","meta_desc":"Type Casting in C# .Net - in this tutorial learn about .Net type casting in .Net with details. Learn .Net from Experts!","views":554,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-31T06:45:07.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-13T18:09:36.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1183,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$62","title":"design patterns in .net","url_title":"design-patterns-in-net","image_url":"","meta_title":"Deesign Patterns in ASP.Net | Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will see a list of design patterns in .net. Learn .Net from Industry Experts with real-time examples","views":475,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:29:05.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-13T16:30:34.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":64,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$63","title":"Ruby on rails Tutorials","url_title":"ruby-rails-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"Best Online Tutorials for Ruby On Rails Programming","meta_desc":"Ruby is a high-level programming language. Rails is a software library that extends the Ruby. Ruby On Rails tutorials will educate you like a trainer.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"78","created_at":"2016-06-04T10:50:17.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-07T18:28:38.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":401,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$64","title":"Qlik Sense Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-qliksense","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Qlik Sense Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Qlik Sense Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":717,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"81","created_at":"2017-05-25T10:15:26.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-06T16:16:11.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1003,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$65","title":"Configuring the Managed Metadata Service Application","url_title":"configuring-the-managed-metadata-service-application","image_url":"","meta_title":"Configuring The Managed Metadata Service Application in SharePoint","meta_desc":"Tekslate is the industry leader in sharepoint tutorial. Configuring the managed metadata service application is content management deploy to site collection","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-22T09:39:59.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-03T18:30:32.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":998,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$66","title":"Creating Business Data Connectivity Service-Visual Studio 2010","url_title":"creating-business-data-connectivity-service-using-visual-studio-2010","image_url":"","meta_title":"Creating Business Data Connectivity Service-Visual Studio","meta_desc":"The tutorial explain creating business data connectivity service-visual studio with syntax and implementing in real-time scenarios for creating database","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-21T12:36:00.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-03T18:20:01.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1013,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$67","title":"Records Center - A Place for Hierarchy, Driven By Metadata","url_title":"records-center-place-hierarchy-driven-metadata","image_url":"","meta_title":"Records Center | A Place For Hierarchy | SharePoint - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Tekslate offers Records Center tutorials which is intended to serve as a central repository in which an organization can store and manage all of its records","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-22T12:18:19.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-03T17:52:18.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1004,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$68","title":"Features & Event Receivers_Institute Introduction","url_title":"features-event-receivers_institute-introduction","image_url":"","meta_title":"Features and Event Receivers Introduction | SharePoint","meta_desc":"Introduction to feature implementation of elements and how to use feature designer and adding feature dependencies in customized course catalogue","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-22T09:47:02.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-03T16:56:36.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":970,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$69","title":"Application Pages Vs Site Content Pages Vs Custom aspx Pages Senario2","url_title":"application-pages-vs-site-content-pages-vs-custom-aspx-pages","image_url":"","meta_title":"Application Vs Site Content Pages Vs Custom aspx Pages","meta_desc":"The tutorial explains with the program Implementing Layouts page base class in the Sharepoint root directory which stored in WSS/MOSS file system.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-20T10:59:37.000Z","updated_at":"2020-10-03T12:00:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":411,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$6a","title":"Liferay Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-liferay","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 30+ Liferay Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for Liferay Interview Questions with Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":2652,"rating":4.7,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"422","created_at":"2017-09-14T09:44:03.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-26T19:00:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"Which all methods JSR-286 supports?","faq_schema_a1":"init(),render(),processAction(),processEvent(),serveResource(),destroy()","faq_schema_q2":"What class does LiferayMVCPortlet extend?","faq_schema_a2":"LiferayPortlet -> GenericPortlet","faq_schema_q3":"What are the differences between Portlet and Servlet?","faq_schema_a3":"A Portlet container is built on top Servlet container.","like_counter":3},{"id":79,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$6b","title":"J2EE Tutorials","url_title":"j2ee-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"Learn J2EE From the Experts - Online Tutorials","meta_desc":"Java J2EE Tutorials – Explore the complete workflow of developing, debug, test and troubleshoot Java EE Applications rapidly with Eclipse IDE.","views":273,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-06-11T06:40:41.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-26T13:31:40.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":308,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$6c","title":"IBM DB2 Interview Questions","url_title":"ibm-db2-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 IBM DB2 Interview Questions - Updated 2023","meta_desc":"Top IBM DB2 Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":5486,"rating":4.5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"10","author_desc":"","course_id":"227","created_at":"2016-06-07T12:04:36.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-26T13:02:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is DB2 ( IBM Database 2 )?","faq_schema_a1":"DB2 is a subsystem of the MVS operating system. It is a Database Management System ( DBMS ) for that operating system.","faq_schema_q2":"What is an access path?","faq_schema_a2":"The path that is used to get to data specified in SQL statements.","faq_schema_q3":"What is an alias?","faq_schema_a3":"It is an alternate name that can be used in SQL training Hyderabad statements to refer to a table or view in the same or remote DB2 subsystem","like_counter":1},{"id":404,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$6d","title":"MS Project Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-ms-project","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP MS Project Interview Questions and Answers - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Top MS Project Interview Questions with Answers - Here we have compiled a set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":567,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"356","created_at":"2017-05-26T06:20:11.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-25T17:42:04.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":447,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$6e","title":"OpenSpan Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-openspan","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 OpenSpan Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for OpenSpan Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":501,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"425","created_at":"2017-01-30T11:06:53.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-25T15:59:42.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":1572,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$6f","title":"Performing Data Manipulations using Disconnected Model","url_title":"performing-data-manipulations-using-disconnected-model","image_url":"","meta_title":"Performing Data Manipulations using Disconnected Model","meta_desc":"Performing Data Manipulations using Disconnected Model","views":467,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:37:24.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-24T11:02:06.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":145,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$70","title":"SAP NetWeaver Tutorial","url_title":"sap-netweaver-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"SAP NetWeaver Tutorials in Tekslate | Complete Guide-Get started","meta_desc":"SAP NetWeaver ✔️Smooth end-to-end Business, High process quality✔️efficiency are advantages✔️Gain knowledge from our tutorial.","views":4821,"rating":4.5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"754","created_at":"2016-08-03T10:57:59.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T18:38:04.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":304,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$71","title":"SAP NetWeaver Interview Questions","url_title":"sap-netweaver-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 20+ SAP NetWeaver Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Prepare for the Best SAP NetWeaver Interview Questions and Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":2854,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"736","created_at":"2016-06-07T10:10:33.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T18:28:44.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is SAP NetWeaver?","faq_schema_a1":"SAP NetWeaver is SAP's integrated technology computing platform and is the technical foundation for many SAP applications since the SAP Business Suite. SAP NetWeaver is marketed as a service-oriented application and integration platform. SAP NetWeaver provides the development and runtime environment for SAP applications and can be used for custom development and integration with other applications and systems.","faq_schema_q2":"How to trigger the idoc? ","faq_schema_a2":"We can trigger the idoc by using T Code - WE19","faq_schema_q3":"What is the difference b/w Graphical mapping and XSLT mapping?","faq_schema_a3":"XSLT MAPPING Converts from XML to text, HTML, and DHTML.and the main difference is that XSLT Mapping itself generates the target structure.there is no other tool or mapping in convert in XML to text and Html.","like_counter":0},{"id":122,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$72","title":"SAP IM Tutorial","url_title":"sap-im-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"SAP IM (Investment Management) Tutorials | Tekslate","meta_desc":"SAP IM online tutorials course teaches functions in procurement is a part in ✔️the MM module used for tracking inventory levels✔️orders,sales & deliveries.","views":1763,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"736","created_at":"2016-07-15T11:36:23.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T18:25:09.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":73,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$73","title":"SAP Lumira Tutorial","url_title":"sap-lumira-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"SAP Lumira Tutorial | Introduction to SAP Lumira","meta_desc":"SAP Lumira Tutorial - Lumira is used to visualize data and create data stories with graphical details. Learn more about Visualizing data!","views":2410,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"736","created_at":"2016-06-09T11:35:57.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T13:41:39.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1835,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$74","title":"SAP Predictive Analysis","url_title":"sap-predictive-analysis","image_url":"","meta_title":"SAP Predictive Analytics | Data Analytics | Tekslate","meta_desc":"SAP Predictive Analytics ➡️Learn all about Statistical Analytics, Data mining and all various Predictive Modules Check Out Now","views":984,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"754","created_at":"2016-05-24T07:16:51.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T13:35:20.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":376,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$75","title":"SAP PS Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-sap-ps","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 40+ SAP PS Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"SAP PS Interview Questions and Answers➡️Learn real-time interview questions on SAP PS For freshers and experienced check out now!","views":2963,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"734","created_at":"2016-11-11T10:59:26.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T13:27:55.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is Easy Cost Planning?","faq_schema_a1":"It is another function for planning costs at the WBS elements level. It uses the existing Controlling, purchasing, or MM data in the form of cost items. Also, you can have predefined costing models to simplify repeated entries.","faq_schema_q2":"What do you understand by Project?","faq_schema_a2":"A project is a system that involves 1. project, sub-project, activities & tasks. It will have good integration with the other modules like MM, Fi/co, & PM modules.","faq_schema_q3":"What is SAP-Project System?","faq_schema_a3":"Project System is a Project management tool from SAP. Which has very good integration with the other modules of SAP like FI, CO, MM, SD, PP, HR, and DMS? This module basically coordinates and controls all the phases of a project, in direct coordination with purchasing and controlling, from quotation to design and approval to resource management and cost settlement. Also besides the integration with the SAP module, this Project system also has an integration with third-party popular Project management tools like Microsoft Projects and Primavera.","like_counter":4},{"id":292,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$76","title":"SAP UI5 Interview Questions","url_title":"sapui5-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 20+ SAP UI5 Interview Questions And Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Prepare for the Best SAP UI5 Interview Questions and Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":3854,"rating":4.5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"736","created_at":"2016-06-02T08:26:26.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T13:26:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is SAPUI5?","faq_schema_a1":"Just like any other HTML5 client-side rendering library, SAPUI5 is also one. SAPUI5 strictly follows RIA (Rich Internet Application) standards. It is based on JavaScript which provides a lightweight programming model for desktop as well as mobile applications.","faq_schema_q2":"Why SAPUI5?","faq_schema_a2":"As the HTML5 world is the new age front technology across all aspects of internet applications SAP was kind of trailing in this age because SAP was using age-old Web Dynpro for building SAP Web Applications which lacks rich and user-friendly UI. SAP identified this and came up with its own custom HTML5 library i.e. SAPUI5.","faq_schema_q3":"What are the SAPUI5 Fragments?","faq_schema_a3":"Fragments are very lightweight UI controls and part of another UI. Fragments are not completely like views but they act as a view. Fragments are defined similar to views and are names like “myFragment.fragment.xml“.","like_counter":0},{"id":315,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$77","title":"SAP B1 Interview Questions","url_title":"sap-b1-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 30+ SAP B1 Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for SAP B1 Interview Questions and Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":1961,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"736","created_at":"2016-06-08T15:02:05.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T13:12:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is SAP B1?","faq_schema_a1":"B1 = Business One SAP Business One is an integrated enterprise resource planning (ERP) solution for small and medium-sized businesses, as well as divisions and subsidiaries of larger companies.","faq_schema_q2":"What is used in SDK for developing a form?","faq_schema_a2":"Screen painter is used for developing forms in SAP Business One SDK. Screen Painter is provided as an add-on by SAP and it can be used to design and develop forms. The files created by the screen painter have srf extension and these files should be renamed to XML for deploying them in SAP Business One.","faq_schema_q3":"Is it possible to alter the standard behaviour of SAP Business One using SDK?","faq_schema_a3":"The standard behaviour or the conventional flow of SAP Business One can not be altered using SDK. Some or other errors will occur. So it is advisable not to disturb the conventional flow of SAP Business One using SDK.","like_counter":1},{"id":147,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$78","title":"SAP MRS Tutorial","url_title":"sap-mrs-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"SAP MRS Tutorial | Multiresource Scheduling | Learn SAP MRS","meta_desc":"SAP MRS Tutorial ➔ Learn briefly about MRS, easily manages the planning, utilization of resources & CRM service orders, Features of MRS and etc.","views":635,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"736","created_at":"2016-08-04T09:16:54.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T12:53:14.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":327,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$79","title":"SAP Lumira Interview Questions","url_title":"sap-lumira-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 15+ SAP Lumira Interview Questions and Answers (2023) ","meta_desc":"Prepare for the Best SAP Lumira Interview Questions and Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":2281,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"754","created_at":"2016-06-21T13:33:58.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T12:28:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"Is SAP Lumira Server generally available?","faq_schema_a1":"Yes. SAP Lumira Server is generally available (GA) and customers can download it from SAP Service Marketplace.","faq_schema_q2":"Can I publish data sets on SAP Lumira Server?","faq_schema_a2":"Yes, you can combine and enrich data from multiple sources (xlsx, relational databases, SAP BusinessObjects universes) and then publish the resulting dataset to SAP Lumira Server.","faq_schema_q3":"Can SAP Lumira Server be accessed via a mobile device?","faq_schema_a3":"SAP Lumira Server can be accessed from any mobile device supporting HTML5. SAP Lumira Server is also integrated with SAP BusinessObjects Mobile, which you can download from Apple’s App Store.","like_counter":0},{"id":1834,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$7a","title":"SAP LUMIRA","url_title":"sap-lumira","image_url":"","meta_title":"SAP LUMIRA | SAP LUMIRA Data Manipulation | Tekslate","meta_desc":"SAP LUMIRA SAP➔ Lumira is data manipulation and visualization tool. You can connect to various data sources, select and clean data manipulate.","views":2619,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"736","created_at":"2016-05-24T04:35:03.000Z","updated_at":"2020-09-22T12:25:04.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":2068,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$7b","title":"Swift Interview Questions","url_title":"swift-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Top 40 Swift Interview Questions and Answers","meta_desc":"Here is the list of top 40 Swift Interview Questions for beginners and professionals with detail answers.","views":699,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"159","created_at":"2020-08-02T05:28:39.000Z","updated_at":"2020-08-02T11:20:19.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":137,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$7c","title":"Computer Networking Tutorial","url_title":"windows-networking-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"Computer Networking Tutorial | Online Study Guide For Computer Networking ","meta_desc":"Understand from fundamentals of Computer Networking with free tutorials. ","views":854,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-07-30T05:29:50.000Z","updated_at":"2020-05-26T00:00:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":275,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$7d","title":"IOS Interview Questions","url_title":"ios-development-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 IOS Interview Questions [UPDATED] !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for IOS Development Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":239,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"159","created_at":"2016-05-24T09:51:32.000Z","updated_at":"2020-05-16T00:00:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":35,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$7e","title":"HTML Tutorial","url_title":"html-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"Best HTML Online Tutorial For Beginners And Programmers","meta_desc":"HTML Tutorial explain briefly about fundamentals of html. It also covers topics on Elements, Tags & Attributes and Usage of HTML to Make Your Own Web Page.","views":7852,"rating":4.4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2015-03-27T09:37:22.000Z","updated_at":"2020-05-15T00:00:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":2},{"id":90,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$7f","title":"Crystal Report Tutorials","url_title":"crystal-report-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"Become Expert In Crystal Reports | Crystal Reports Tutorials","meta_desc":"Crystal Reports tutorial discusses on introduction to SAP Crystal Reports using business reporting scenario and will enable you to create your first report.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"220","created_at":"2016-06-14T05:16:53.000Z","updated_at":"2020-02-28T00:00:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":429,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$80","title":"Automation Anywhere Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-automation-anywhere","image_url":"","meta_title":"Automation Anywhere Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"RPA Automation Anywhere Interview Questions with Answers? Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":1586,"rating":4.5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"75","created_at":"2017-11-21T05:13:48.000Z","updated_at":"2019-03-21T00:00:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is Image Recognition in Terms of AA?","faq_schema_a1":"Image Recognition is another feature of the Visualize Technology available in Automation Anywhere Enterprise. Using the Visualize Technology, Image Recognition allows the recognition and comparison of images from files or windows.","faq_schema_q2":"What are the Typical steps Involved in Automation Anywhere process?","faq_schema_a2":"Selecting or choosing the testing tools like Automation Anywhere, and Blue Prism is the primary thing. After that, the next step is defining the automation scope followed by the phases of planning, designing as well as development. Testing execution is the next step and maintenance is the final step. It is crucial to follow steps while defining the sequence thus eliminating confusion.","faq_schema_q3":"What are the Significant factors to Consider while planning Automation Anywhere?","faq_schema_a3":"The first thing before considering anything is to pay attention and select the automation tool that is beneficial. It also requires paying attention to the framework in the case where it is present. Identifying the test deliverables is the other factor to consider. Also, other factors such as project timelines, execution, etc. must be taken care of during the planning phase.","like_counter":0},{"id":491,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$81","title":"Groovy Interview Questions And Answers","url_title":"groovy-interview-questions-and-answers","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Groovy Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Groovy Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":861,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-03-24T05:53:58.000Z","updated_at":"2019-01-10T11:32:07.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":884,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$82","title":"Creation of Item in Oracle Apps","url_title":"creation-item","image_url":"","meta_title":"Creation of an item in Oracle Apps r12","meta_desc":"In this Oracle Apps tutorial, you will learn about Creation of an item in Oracle Apps and also see all the steps involved in creation of an item.","views":1053,"rating":4.4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-11T07:16:23.000Z","updated_at":"2018-11-05T06:20:36.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":1},{"id":493,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$83","title":"Subversion SVN Interview Questions And Answers","url_title":"subversion-svn-interview-questions-and-answers","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Subversion SVN Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Subversion SVN Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":320,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"423","created_at":"2018-03-24T06:52:00.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-31T06:05:25.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1011,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$84","title":"What is InfoPath?","url_title":"what-is-infopath","image_url":"","meta_title":"What is InfoPath?","meta_desc":"Tekslate teach about what is infopath? Infopath is a MS Office tool that lets you define and use XML based forms with Microsoft SharePoint technology","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-22T11:59:53.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-29T12:48:14.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1009,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$85","title":"Feature Stapling & ActivationDependency Element (Feature)","url_title":"feature-stapling-activationdependency-element-feature","image_url":"","meta_title":"Features Stapling and Activation Dependency Element","meta_desc":"Introduction to feature stapling to create a feature and site definition to staple and learn the basics of events in sharepoint foundation with examples","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-22T10:14:42.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-29T12:32:47.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":994,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$86","title":"Getting start with a Silver light application using VS2010","url_title":"getting-start-silver-light-application-using-vs2010","image_url":"","meta_title":"Getting start with a Silver light application using VS2010","meta_desc":"Step-by-step implementation of code in mainpage.xaml to deploy silverlight in sharepoint and deploy applications with adding module and web part to project","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-21T10:47:16.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-29T11:42:42.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":990,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$87","title":"Create a Visual Web Part Project with Visual Studio server controls","url_title":"create-visual-web-part-project-visual-studio-server-controls","image_url":"","meta_title":"Create a Visual Web Part Project Visual Studio Server Control","meta_desc":"In this task, you create a Visual Web Part project in Microsoft Visual Studio 2010. Start Visual Studio 2010, click File, point to New, and then click Proje","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-21T07:15:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-29T11:30:37.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":988,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$88","title":"Creating a Class Library Web Part","url_title":"creating-class-library-web-part","image_url":"","meta_title":"Creating a Class Library Web Part","meta_desc":"The tutorial explains creating a class library web part to perform operations like user-defined text overriding create child controls methods is implemented","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-21T06:38:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-29T11:23:26.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":985,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$89","title":"Registering Content Types in a Site Definition Configuration","url_title":"registering-content-types-site-definition-configuration","image_url":"","meta_title":"Registering Content Types in a Site Definition Configuration","meta_desc":"In-depth explaination with the examples of real-time scenarios for creating the site content type and using feature activated method by using server code.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-21T05:59:55.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-29T10:49:34.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":961,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$8a","title":"Background Services","url_title":"background-services","image_url":"","meta_title":"Background Services","meta_desc":"Tekslate provides Android Background Services Tutorial. A background service is a computer process that runs behind the scenes and without user intervention","views":243,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"236","created_at":"2014-11-20T07:37:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-29T08:55:41.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":950,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$8b","title":"VISUALFORCE Pages part-2","url_title":"tags-used-create-visualforce-pages-part-ii","image_url":"","meta_title":"Visualforce Pages","meta_desc":"Here is the continuation of creating visualforce pages scenarios with real-time examples and easy to understand the syntax in implementing in pages","views":1053,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-19T07:31:41.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-27T10:09:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":949,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$8c","title":"Tags used to Create VISUALFORCE Pages","url_title":"tags-used-create-visualforce-pages","image_url":"","meta_title":"Tags used to Create VISUALFORCE Pages","meta_desc":"Determining the wide-range of tags to create visual force page with implementing scenarios opportunity view, account retain examples","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-15T13:04:30.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-27T10:06:36.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":947,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$8d","title":"Introduction to Visual Force","url_title":"introduction-visualforce","image_url":"","meta_title":"Introduction to Visual Force","meta_desc":"Salesforce is a comprehensive platform for building sophisticated applications defining structure of data model in the visual force and its limitations","views":718,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"116","created_at":"2014-11-15T10:03:11.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-27T10:04:36.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":945,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$8e","title":"Apex Scheduler","url_title":"apex-scheduler","image_url":"","meta_title":"Apex Scheduler","meta_desc":"Students learn to invoke apex scheduler classes in the step by step process to run at scheduled interface for the class and methods for scheduling jobs.","views":844,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-15T09:30:29.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-27T09:58:15.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":943,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$8f","title":"Understanding Testing in Apex","url_title":"understanding-testing-apex","image_url":"","meta_title":"Understanding Testing in Apex | Learn Salesforce Online","meta_desc":"Understanding Testing in Apex -Testing plays key role in the development phase to identify the errors in system debug and deploying APEX.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-15T05:54:02.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T13:09:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":941,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$90","title":"Governors Limits","url_title":"governors-limit-salesforece","image_url":"","meta_title":"Governors Limit in Apex","meta_desc":"The tutorial explains the governors limit applied in a APEX run-time engine which runs in multitenant environment where run-time exceptions can be handled","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-15T05:28:31.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T13:04:30.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":938,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$91","title":"Triggers Introduction","url_title":"apex-triggers-introduction","image_url":"","meta_title":"Triggers Introduction","meta_desc":"Explanation of Triggers introduction which are functional actions get fired on particular events and variables present in the system. trigger class syntax","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-14T13:03:06.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T12:56:26.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":935,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$92","title":"Sample Relationship Queries","url_title":"sample-relationship-queries","image_url":"","meta_title":"Sample Relationship Queries in Salesforce","meta_desc":"Here are the examples of sample relationship queries which are updating for standard objects and fetching for custom objects implementing in multiple record","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-14T12:36:06.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T12:48:33.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":934,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$93","title":"Standard formats of Relationship Queries","url_title":"standard-formats-relationship-queries","image_url":"","meta_title":"Standard Formats of Relationship Queries","meta_desc":"In this tutorial students learn syntax of the standard formats to be implemented using relationship queries for fetching and updating records with examples","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-14T12:27:54.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T12:45:31.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":930,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$94","title":"SOQL and SOSL Difference","url_title":"soql-sosl-difference-examples","image_url":"","meta_title":"SOQL and SOSL Difference in Salesforce With Examples","meta_desc":"TekSlate offers Salesforce CRM free tutorials covers the topics to solve the queries using SOQL bindings and SOSL, SOQL and SOSL difference between them.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-14T11:00:06.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T12:36:20.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":929,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$95","title":"Apex Data Manipulation (DML) Operations","url_title":"apex-data-manipulation-dml-operations","image_url":"","meta_title":"Apex Data Manipulation (DML) Operations","meta_desc":"The Robust framework called \"APEX Data Manipulation Language\", in this tutorial students learn to to insert, update and restore data in database using DML","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-14T10:50:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T12:33:24.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":928,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"
","description":"$96","title":"Data types","url_title":"apex-data-types","image_url":"","meta_title":"Data types in APEX | Primitive Data types | sObject Types","meta_desc":"This tutorial explains data types which are determining and classification identifying one of the various types of data, such as primitive and sObjects types.","views":3826,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"98","created_at":"2014-11-14T10:48:43.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T12:31:25.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":927,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$97","title":"Access Modifiers And OOPS Concepts","url_title":"access-modifier-and-oops-concepts","image_url":"","meta_title":"Access Modifiers And OOPS Concepts - Salesforce Apex","meta_desc":"Tekslate tutorials explain full-fledged concepts on access modifiers and OOPS Concepts defining apex class with examples in salesforce CRM virtual tutorial","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-14T10:46:15.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T12:29:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":877,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$98","title":"Terminology & WLS Architecture","url_title":"terminology-wls-architecture","image_url":"","meta_title":"Terminology & WLS Architecture","meta_desc":"Terminology & WLS Architecture","views":184,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-11T05:04:14.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T11:52:55.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":880,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$99","title":"Template Builder Pack and Unpack Command","url_title":"template-builder-pack-unpack-command","image_url":"","meta_title":"Template Builder Pack and Unpack Command","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, you will learn about template builder pack and unpack command. you will also learn about starting a managed server on a remote machine.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-11T06:13:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T11:42:03.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":882,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$9a","title":"Managing Server Startup and Shutdown","url_title":"managing-server-startup-shutdown","image_url":"","meta_title":"Managing Server Startup and Shutdown","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about managing Server Startup and Shutdown, it also discusses on starting state and standby state","views":188,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"98","created_at":"2014-11-11T06:33:53.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T11:39:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":885,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$9b","title":"System Administration Tools","url_title":"system-administration-tools","image_url":"","meta_title":"System Administration Tools","meta_desc":"This tutorial discusses on system administration tools, uses of the admin console, elements of the admin console, dynamic and non-dynamic changes.","views":373,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-11T07:15:47.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T11:33:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":890,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$9c","title":"Network Channels","url_title":"network-channels","image_url":"","meta_title":"Network Channels","meta_desc":"This tutorial gives you information about network channels and also gives you a representation of configuring network channels with an example.","views":877,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-11T09:54:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T11:14:55.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":891,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$9d","title":"JNDI Startup and Shutdown Classes","url_title":"jndi-startup-shutdown-classes","image_url":"","meta_title":"JNDI Startup and Shutdown Classes","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about starting and stopping a JNDI server. It gives an example of viewing the JNDI Tree, listing JNDI contents etc.","views":990,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-11T10:11:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T11:08:57.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":892,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$9e","title":"Deploying Applications","url_title":"deploying-applications","image_url":"","meta_title":"Deploying Applications in Weblogic","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about deploying applications in WebLogic and configuring an application for multiple deployment environments","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-11T11:34:38.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T11:06:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":902,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$9f","title":"Common Issues in Client Environments","url_title":"common-issues-client-environments","image_url":"","meta_title":"Common Issues in Weblogic","meta_desc":"This tutorial gives you a brief about Common Issues in client environment. It describes about all the issues in detail with examples.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-12T06:09:08.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T10:53:51.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":898,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$a0","title":"Getting Started with ANT Tool","url_title":"getting-started-ant-tool","image_url":"","meta_title":"Getting Started with ANT Tool","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will be introduced to ANT tool in a brief and also compiling source files and copying them to destination folder.","views":906,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-12T05:26:13.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T10:09:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":897,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$a1","title":"Virtual Host Configuration in WLS","url_title":"virtual-host-configuration-wls","image_url":"","meta_title":"Virtual Host Configuration in WLS","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will be learning about Virtual Host configuration in WLS and also discuss the requirement for creating a virtual host.","views":447,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"192","created_at":"2014-11-12T05:15:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-26T09:49:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":815,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$a2","title":"Final Code in AM, Update Page, and Patient Entry Page Controller","url_title":"final-code-update-page-patient-entry-page-controller","image_url":"","meta_title":"Final Code in AM, Update Page, and Patient Entry Page Controller","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about Final Code in AM, Update Page, and Patient Entry Page Controller","views":641,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"99","created_at":"2014-11-07T11:15:21.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T11:02:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":813,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$a3","title":"Creating Update Page","url_title":"creating-update-page","image_url":"","meta_title":"Creating Update Page","meta_desc":"Creating Update Page - In this article you will learn more about Creating Update Page and read more...","views":323,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T11:12:26.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T10:56:44.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":812,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$a4","title":"Creating Search Page","url_title":"creating-search-page","image_url":"","meta_title":"Creating Search Page","meta_desc":"Creating Search Page - In this article you will learn more about Creating Search Page and read more...","views":260,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T11:06:41.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T10:46:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":809,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$a5","title":"Manual Search","url_title":"manual-search","image_url":"","meta_title":"Manual Search","meta_desc":"Manual Search","views":151,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T10:45:14.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T09:46:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":806,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$a6","title":"Automatic Search External LOV","url_title":"automatic-search-external-lov","image_url":"","meta_title":"Automatic Search External LOV","meta_desc":"Automatic Search External LOV - In this article you will learn more about Automatic Search External LOV and read more...","views":246,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T10:26:42.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T09:30:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":805,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$a7","title":"Automatic Search Inline LOV","url_title":"automatic-search-inline-lov","image_url":"","meta_title":"Automatic Search Inline LOV","meta_desc":"Automatic Search Inline LOV - In this article you will learn more about Automatic Search Inline LOV and read more...","views":865,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T10:13:06.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T09:23:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":800,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$a8","title":"Displaying Data From Data Base","url_title":"displaying-data-data-base","image_url":"","meta_title":"Displaying Data From Data Base","meta_desc":"Displaying Data From Data Base","views":1047,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T09:07:24.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T08:53:47.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":799,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$a9","title":"Swapping The Value From One Field to Another Field","url_title":"swapping-value-one-field-another-field","image_url":"","meta_title":"Swapping The Value From One Field to Another Field","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about how to swap values from one field to another.","views":319,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"99","created_at":"2014-11-07T08:48:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T08:52:17.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":798,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$aa","title":"Displaying Exception Messages Based on Condition","url_title":"displaying-exception-messages-based-condition","image_url":"","meta_title":"Displaying Exception Messages Based on Condition","meta_desc":"Displaying Exception Messages Based on Condition","views":809,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T08:39:04.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T07:38:46.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":797,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$ab","title":"Image Item","url_title":"image-item","image_url":"","meta_title":"Image Item","meta_desc":"Image Item - In this article you will learn more about Image Item and read more...","views":218,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T07:44:18.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T07:35:07.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":796,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$ac","title":"Message Rich Text Editor","url_title":"message-rich-text-editor","image_url":"","meta_title":"Message Rich Text Editor","meta_desc":"Message Rich Text Editor","views":721,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T07:28:40.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T07:31:50.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":795,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$ad","title":"Submit Button","url_title":"submit-button","image_url":"","meta_title":"Submit Button","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about how to create submit button in OAF page.","views":106,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"99","created_at":"2014-11-07T07:23:49.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T07:28:32.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":794,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$ae","title":"Message Choice in OAF page","url_title":"message-choice","image_url":"","meta_title":"Message Choice item in OAF page","meta_desc":"Message Choice item in the OAF page - In this article you will learn more about Message Choice and read more...","views":2893,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"4","author_desc":"","course_id":"99","created_at":"2014-11-07T07:17:48.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T07:25:47.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":793,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$af","title":"Message Radio Button","url_title":"message-radio-button","image_url":"","meta_title":"Message Radio Button","meta_desc":"Message Radio Button - In this article you will learn more about Message Radio Button and read more...","views":430,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T07:04:13.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T07:18:28.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":792,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$b0","title":"Message Check Box","url_title":"message-check-box","image_url":"","meta_title":"Message Check Box","meta_desc":"Message Check Box - In this Article you will learn more about Message Check Box Read more...","views":385,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:59:16.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T07:08:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":791,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"
In this lesson we are going to see how the Query Region is going to look in OAF page and what is the use of the Query Region in OAF. Generally we use Query Region in search pages. So therefore we are going to see how to create this Query region in the next coming chapter called “Search Pages in OAF”. We have four types of searches in OAF.
","title":"Query Region","url_title":"query-region","image_url":"","meta_title":"Query Region -Tekslate","meta_desc":"Looking to learn about Query Region You've come to the right place! In this course, we will discuss about Query Region in detail.","views":136,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"69","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:56:17.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T06:51:37.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":790,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"
","title":"Message Styled Text","url_title":"message-styled-text","image_url":"","meta_title":"Message Styled Text","meta_desc":"Message Styled Text - In this article you will learn more about Message Styled Text and read more...","views":1055,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:55:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T06:43:20.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":789,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$b1","title":"Message Text Input","url_title":"message-text-input","image_url":"","meta_title":"Message Text Input","meta_desc":"Message Text Input - In this article you will learn more about Message Text Input and read more...","views":1020,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:53:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T06:31:46.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":788,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$b2","title":"Page Button Bar","url_title":"page-button-bar","image_url":"","meta_title":"Page Button Bar","meta_desc":"Page Button Bar - In this Article you will learn more about Page Button Bar Read more...","views":984,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:49:34.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T06:27:24.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":787,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$b3","title":"Default Single Column","url_title":"default-single-column","image_url":"","meta_title":"Default Single Column","meta_desc":"In this lesson we see how to create Default Single column and how the items inside the Default Single column appears in the OAF page.","views":938,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"96","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:44:21.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T06:24:46.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":786,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$b4","title":"Default Double Column","url_title":"default-double-column","image_url":"","meta_title":"Default Double Column","meta_desc":"Default Double Column - In this article you will learn more about Default Double Column Region and read more...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:41:19.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T06:11:53.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":785,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$b5","title":"Row Layout Region","url_title":"row-layout-region","image_url":"","meta_title":"Row Layout Region","meta_desc":"Row Layout Region - In this article you will learn more about Row Layout Region and read more...","views":997,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:37:41.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T06:07:40.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":784,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$b6","title":"Header Region","url_title":"header-region","image_url":"","meta_title":"Header Region","meta_desc":"Header Region - In this Article you will learn more about Header Region Read more...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:35:24.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T05:47:23.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":783,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$b7","title":"Message Component Layout Region","url_title":"message-component-layout-region","image_url":"","meta_title":"Message Component Layout Region","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn how to use Message Component Layout Region in OAF to display messages and notifications on your pages. Maximize user experience now!","views":141,"rating":4.1,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"96","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:27:43.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T05:22:15.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":782,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$b8","title":"Introduction","url_title":"introduction","image_url":"","meta_title":"Introduction","meta_desc":"Introduction","views":893,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:22:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-25T05:14:11.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":780,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$b9","title":"Creating Items and Regions In a Page","url_title":"creating-items-regions-page-2","image_url":"","meta_title":"Creating Items and Regions In a Page","meta_desc":"Creating Items and Regions In a Page","views":255,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"10","created_at":"2014-11-07T06:07:07.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T12:37:03.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":779,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$ba","title":"Creating Items and Regions In a Page","url_title":"creating-items-regions-page","image_url":"","meta_title":"Creating Items and Regions on OAF Pages","meta_desc":"In this Tutorial, You will learn how to create and manage items and regions on Oracle Application Framework (OAF) pages with this helpful guide. ","views":473,"rating":4.1,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T05:37:49.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T12:18:49.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":777,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$bb","title":"Welcome (or) Sample Page Creation","url_title":"welcome-sample-page-creation","image_url":"","meta_title":"Welcome (or) Sample Page Creation","meta_desc":"Welcome (or) Sample Page Creation - In this article you will learn more about Welcome (or) Sample Page Creation and read more...","views":157,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-07T05:08:57.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T11:57:46.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":776,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$bc","title":"JDeveloper Configuration Steps","url_title":"jdeveloper-configuration-steps","image_url":"","meta_title":"JDeveloper Configuration Steps","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about how to configure JDeveloper in our system, we are here discussing in Windows environment stepwise.","views":884,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"99","created_at":"2014-11-06T13:00:11.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T11:44:55.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":775,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$bd","title":"Installation Process of JDeveloper","url_title":"installation-process-jdeveloper","image_url":"","meta_title":"Installation Process of JDeveloper","meta_desc":"Installation Process of JDeveloper - In this Article you will learn more about Installation Process of JDeveloper Read more...","views":1059,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-06T12:44:00.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T11:40:31.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":774,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$be","title":"Identifying JDdeveloper Version","url_title":"identifying-jddeveloper-version","image_url":"","meta_title":"Identifying JDdeveloper Version","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about how to identify the JDeveloper for the Oracle Apps Instance Version.","views":776,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"90","created_at":"2014-11-06T12:38:44.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T11:35:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":773,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$bf","title":"BC4J File Structure","url_title":"bc4j-file-structure","image_url":"","meta_title":"BC4J File Structure","meta_desc":"BC4J File Structure - In this article you will learn more about BC4J File Structure and read more...","views":248,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-06T12:19:08.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T11:32:01.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":772,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$c0","title":"About Controller","url_title":"controller","image_url":"","meta_title":"About Controller","meta_desc":"About Controller","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-06T12:16:33.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T11:27:13.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":771,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$c1","title":"About View","url_title":"view","image_url":"","meta_title":"About View","meta_desc":"About View - In this Article you will learn more About View Read more...","views":1076,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-06T12:04:04.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T11:20:28.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":769,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$c2","title":"Entity Objects and Entity Association","url_title":"entity-objects-entity-association","image_url":"","meta_title":"Entity Objects and Entity Association","meta_desc":"Entity Objects and Entity Association - In this article you will learn more about Entity Objects and Entity Association and read more...","views":935,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-06T11:53:30.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T10:52:17.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":768,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$c3","title":"About Model","url_title":"model","image_url":"","meta_title":"About Model","meta_desc":"About Model","views":731,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-06T11:48:58.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T10:48:35.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":258,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$c4","title":"Microsoft Azure Interview Questions and Answers","url_title":"azure-interview-questions-answers","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Microsoft Azure Interview Questions and Answers [UPDATED-2023] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Azure Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"76","created_at":"2016-03-10T09:57:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T10:29:11.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":754,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"
Fronting with a Web Server
\n
Performance: dynamic vs. static content Scalability and High Availability: load balancing and fail over Security: web servers are simpler and easier to protect Stability: proven, more robust Features: URL rewriting, fine-grained access control, etc.
\n
Interested in mastering JBOSS Training? Enroll now for FREE demo on JBOSS Training.
\n
Although the embedded Tomcat service lets JBoss Application Server function as a stand-alone web server, there are many advantages (as outline above) to fronting JBoss AS with a real web server like Apache HTTPD. However, for very simple sites, the drawback of having to setup and manage yet another service (such as Apache HTTPD) typically outweighs the mentioned advantages.
","title":"Fronting with a Web Server","url_title":"fronting-with-a-web-server","image_url":"","meta_title":"Fronting with a Web Server","meta_desc":"TekSlate is the pioneers in JBoss tutorials deliver the complete understanding of fronting with a web server and its advantages in the real-world.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-03T21:44:02.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-24T09:11:41.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":421,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$c5","title":"Automation Testing interview questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-automation-testing","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Automation Testing Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Automation Testing Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":215,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"326","created_at":"2017-09-20T06:54:46.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-23T11:59:45.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":734,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$c6","title":"JMX Architecture","url_title":"jmx-architecture","image_url":"","meta_title":"JMX Architecture - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In-depth explanation of JMX architecture in which layers module is covered with JMX specifications and Interfaces functionality to establish connections.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"59","created_at":"2014-10-31T19:49:32.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-23T11:08:47.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":731,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$c7","title":"JMS Architecture","url_title":"jms-architecture","image_url":"","meta_title":"JMS Architecture","meta_desc":"In this tutorial student grasp complete knowledge on JMS architecture. JMS provider is a messaging system implement the interfaces and provides control.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-10-31T19:40:07.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-23T10:39:54.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":730,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$c8","title":"Introduction to JMS","url_title":"introduction-to-jms","image_url":"","meta_title":"Introduction to JMS","meta_desc":"TekSlate is the final destination for JBoss tutorials teach introduction to JMS and JMS in Java EE. JMS is used when asynchronous reliable communication is needed .","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-10-31T19:32:00.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-23T10:30:05.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":711,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$c9","title":"MQ Series Logging and Recovery","url_title":"mq-series-logging-and-recovery","image_url":"","meta_title":"logging and recovery","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about MQ series logging and recovery. It also dicusses about state of queue manager in WebSphere mq","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-10-28T19:43:06.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-23T07:23:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":709,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$ca","title":"Understanding Queues & Queue Manager in MQ Series","url_title":"queues-queue-manager-in-mq-series","image_url":"","meta_title":"Understanding WebSphere MQ queue managers","meta_desc":"This tutorial gives you knowledge on queue managers and queues. It also explains about the properties of the local queues.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"278","created_at":"2014-10-28T19:23:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-23T07:17:04.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":700,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"
How to Start and Stop Queue Manager in WebSphere MQ
\n
Start & Stop Queue ManagerStart
\n
Right click on the queue manager's name and choose start option.
\n
\n
Stop
\n
If you want to stop queue manager, then right click on queue manager and choose stop option.
\n
","title":"How to Start and Stop Queue Manager","url_title":"how-to-start-and-stop-queue-manager","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to Start and Stop Queue Manager in WebSphere MQ","meta_desc":"Queue Manager in WebSphere MQ - In this article you will learn more about How to Start and Stop Queue Manager in WebSphere MQ and read more...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-10-27T22:28:37.000Z","updated_at":"2018-10-23T06:35:58.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1063,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$cb","title":"Creation Of Tables","url_title":"creation-tables","image_url":"","meta_title":"Creation Of Tables","meta_desc":"In this article we will learn about the Creation Of Tables Using Tables with Navigation Bars and Tabs","views":606,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-27T07:58:39.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:56:46.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1069,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$cc","title":"UI Activity Indicator","url_title":"alerts","image_url":"","meta_title":"UI Activity Indicator","meta_desc":"UI Activity Indicator - In this Article you will learn more about Activity Progress and Alerting Users, Read more...","views":574,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-27T13:22:28.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:55:14.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1074,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$cd","title":"Architecture of O/S","url_title":"architecture-os","image_url":"","meta_title":"Architecture of Unix O/S","meta_desc":"Architecture of O/S - In this Article you will learn more about Architecture of Unix O/S, Difference between UNIX & WINDOWS Read more...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-27T13:45:35.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:54:46.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1076,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$ce","title":"Using Badges And Buttons","url_title":"using-badges-buttons","image_url":"","meta_title":"Using Badges And Buttons","meta_desc":"In this article we will learn about the Using Badges And Buttons, adding badges, controls and more","views":363,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"2","created_at":"2014-11-28T06:00:30.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:54:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1079,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$cf","title":"Basic Commands","url_title":"basic-commands-unix","image_url":"","meta_title":"List of Basic Commands in Unix","meta_desc":"Commands in Unix - In this Article you will learn more about List of Basic Commands in Unix Read more...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"13","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-28T06:32:30.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:53:51.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1077,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$d0","title":"UI Slider","url_title":"ui-slider","image_url":"","meta_title":"UI Slider ","meta_desc":"UI Slider - In this Article you will learn more about UISlider Using a Switch and a Slider, Read more...","views":114,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-28T06:32:49.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:53:33.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":839,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$d1","title":"Patching","url_title":"patching","image_url":"","meta_title":"Patching","meta_desc":"Patching","views":754,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-08T14:24:12.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:44:04.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":847,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$d2","title":"Cloning","url_title":"cloning","image_url":"","meta_title":"Cloning","meta_desc":"Cloning","views":776,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T05:02:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:43:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":874,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$d3","title":"FNDCPASS","url_title":"fndcpass","image_url":"","meta_title":"FNDCPASS to change the APPS password","meta_desc":"FNDCPASS ➔ Learn how to use the FNDCPASS command to change the password of an APPS user in Oracle.","views":1026,"rating":4.1,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T13:18:37.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:43:07.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":931,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$d4","title":"Collections","url_title":"apex-collections","image_url":"","meta_title":"APEX Collections","meta_desc":"In this collections tutorial students learn to implement appropriate syntax to be used to organise the groups of similar types of Apex like lists and maps","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-14T11:57:42.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:37:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":948,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$d5","title":"Controllers","url_title":"controllers-in-saleforce","image_url":"","meta_title":"Controllers","meta_desc":"Learn how controllers specifies the user interacts with UI components and functionality to develop standard list controller and uses of VF page.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"0","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-15T10:39:31.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:36:46.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1029,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$d6","title":"UITAB","url_title":"uitab","image_url":"","meta_title":"UITAB","meta_desc":"UITAB - In this Article you will learn more about UITabBar and UITabBarController, Read more...","views":719,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-26T05:05:40.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:36:03.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1040,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$d7","title":"UINavigation","url_title":"uinavigation","image_url":"","meta_title":"UINavigation","meta_desc":"UINavigation - In this article you will learn more about UINavigation and read more...","views":431,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-26T07:51:52.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:35:47.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1075,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$d8","title":"Alerts","url_title":"alerts-3","image_url":"","meta_title":"Alerts","meta_desc":"Alerts - In this article you will learn more about Alerts and read more...","views":864,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-28T05:19:20.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:34:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1197,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$d9","title":"LINQ","url_title":"linq","image_url":"","meta_title":"LINQ","meta_desc":"LINQ","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:43:57.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-24T04:27:05.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":826,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$da","title":"Key File Locations","url_title":"key-files-locations","image_url":"","meta_title":"Key File Locations In Oracle","meta_desc":"Key File Locations","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-08T04:11:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T09:08:19.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":827,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$db","title":"Installation (OS & APPS)","url_title":"installation-os-apps","image_url":"","meta_title":"Installation (OS & APPS)","meta_desc":"Installation (OS & APPS) - In this article you will learn more about Installation (OS & APPS) and read more...","views":1025,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-08T05:10:29.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T09:06:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":830,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$dc","title":"Installation (OS & APPS) part-II","url_title":"installation-os-apps-part-ii","image_url":"","meta_title":"Installation (OS & APPS) part-II","meta_desc":"Installation (OS & APPS) part-II - In this article you will learn more about Installation (OS & APPS) part-II and read more...","views":295,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-08T08:06:35.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T09:05:12.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":836,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$dd","title":"Start & Stop Services","url_title":"start-stop-services","image_url":"","meta_title":"Start & Stop Services","meta_desc":"Start & Stop Services","views":136,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-08T11:00:35.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T09:01:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":849,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$de","title":"Statistics Gathering","url_title":"statistics-gathering","image_url":"","meta_title":"Statistics Gathering","meta_desc":"Statistics Gathering","views":716,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T05:12:18.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T08:00:24.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":850,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$df","title":"Concurrent Manager","url_title":"concurrent-manager","image_url":"","meta_title":"Concurrent Manager","meta_desc":"Concurrent Manager - In this article you will learn more about Concurrent Manager and read more...","views":206,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T05:19:26.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:58:09.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":852,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$e0","title":"VNC Configuration","url_title":"vnc-configuration","image_url":"","meta_title":"VNC Configuration","meta_desc":"In this article you will learn complete about the Virtual Network Computing Configuration","views":139,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T05:39:51.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:57:35.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":855,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$e1","title":"Display Settings","url_title":"display-setings","image_url":"","meta_title":"Display Settings","meta_desc":"Display Settings - In this Article you will learn more about Display Settings Read more...","views":508,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T06:15:26.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:52:21.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":856,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"
1. Setting Auto Login on Linux You may be interested that the server should be auto login as Oracle user in case of restart. 1.1. Login as root user and open Login Screen, Linux: Applications > System Settings > Login Screen 1.2. Provide the information by clicking Automatic Login, Note: To make sure that Oracle user will be logged in always the Timed Login settings are shown in the screen. These are for DISPLAY SETTINGS as you always need the Oracle user to be logged in.
","title":"OS Auto login","url_title":"os-auto-login","image_url":"","meta_title":"OS Auto login","meta_desc":"OS Auto login","views":782,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T07:03:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:52:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":858,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$e2","title":"Reports Integration","url_title":"reports-integration","image_url":"","meta_title":"Reports Integration","meta_desc":"Reports Integration - In this article you will learn more about Reports Integration and read more...","views":1054,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T07:56:11.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:45:23.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":861,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$e3","title":"Browser Settings","url_title":"browser-settings","image_url":"","meta_title":"Browser Settings","meta_desc":"In this blog you will learn complete information about the browser settings.","views":1087,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T09:30:31.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:44:14.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":864,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$e4","title":"Forms Personalization","url_title":"forms-personalization-2","image_url":"","meta_title":"Forms Personalization","meta_desc":"Forms Personalization - In this Article you will learn more about Personalize fields properties and Read more...","views":822,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T10:36:29.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:41:50.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":866,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$e5","title":"Change Color Scheme","url_title":"change-color-scheme","image_url":"","meta_title":"Change Color Scheme","meta_desc":"Change Color Scheme - In this article you will learn more about Change Color Scheme and read more...","views":356,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T10:50:01.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:41:37.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":867,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$e6","title":"Printer Configuration","url_title":"printer-configuration","image_url":"","meta_title":"Printer Configuration","meta_desc":"Printer Configuration - In this article you will learn more about Printer Configuration and read more...","views":524,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T11:21:40.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:41:23.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":868,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$e7","title":"Testing the Web Service","url_title":"testing-web-service","image_url":"","meta_title":"Testing the Web Service","meta_desc":"In this Article you will learn more about Testing the Web Service Read more...","views":462,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"192","created_at":"2014-11-10T11:29:24.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:41:03.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":869,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$e8","title":"Printer Page Customization","url_title":"printer-page-customization","image_url":"","meta_title":"Printer Page Customization","meta_desc":"Printer Page Customization - In this Article you will learn more about Page Size Customization Read more...","views":640,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T11:48:00.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:40:49.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":872,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$e9","title":"Descriptive Flexfields(DFF)","url_title":"descriptive-flexfieldsdff","image_url":"","meta_title":"Descriptive Flexfields(DFF)","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about what is Descriptive Flexfields","views":756,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"215","created_at":"2014-11-10T13:06:00.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:38:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":870,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$ea","title":"Menu, Responsibility & User","url_title":"menu-responsibility-user","image_url":"","meta_title":"Menu, Responsibility & User","meta_desc":"Menu, Responsibility & User","views":723,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T11:57:04.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:38:35.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":871,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$eb","title":"Human Workflow","url_title":"human-workflow","image_url":"","meta_title":"Human Workflow","meta_desc":"Human Workflow - In this article you will learn more about Human Workflow and read more...","views":605,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-10T12:13:02.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:38:19.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":883,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$ec","title":"Administering BPEL Process Service Components and Engines","url_title":"administering-bpel-process-service-components-engines","image_url":"","meta_title":"Administering BPEL Process Service Components and Engines","meta_desc":"Administering BPEL Process Service Components and Engines","views":937,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-11T07:06:58.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T07:14:40.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1016,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$ed","title":"Messaging concept","url_title":"messaging-concept","image_url":"","meta_title":"Messaging concept","meta_desc":"Messaging concept - In this Article you will learn more about Nested Arguments, Class and Instance Methods, Read more...","views":151,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-25T05:46:13.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:46:22.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1025,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$ee","title":"User Interface Application","url_title":"user-interface-application","image_url":"","meta_title":"User Interface Application","meta_desc":"User Interface Application - In this article you will learn more about User Interface Application and read more...","views":834,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-25T07:25:19.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:42:24.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1028,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$ef","title":"UIView and UIViewController","url_title":"ui-view","image_url":"","meta_title":"UIView and UIViewController","meta_desc":"UIView and UIViewController - In this article you will learn more about UIView and UIViewController and read more...","views":639,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-25T07:51:41.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:37:50.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1038,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$f0","title":"Create a Calculation Measure Using a Function","url_title":"create-calculation-measure-using-function","image_url":"","meta_title":"Create a Calculation Measure Using a Function | TekSlate OBIEE 11g Tutorials","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, you will learn about creating a calculation measure using a function in obiee 11g through step-by-step process by our industrial experts.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-25T13:38:56.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:33:05.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1050,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$f1","title":"Create a Parent-Child Logical Dimension & Define Parent-Child Settings","url_title":"create-parent-child-logical-dimension-define-parent-child-settings","image_url":"","meta_title":"Create a Parent-Child Logical Dimension in OBIEE11g","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, you will learn in detail about creation of parent-child logical dimension in obiee 11g through step-by-step procedure by our experts.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"64","created_at":"2014-11-26T11:15:45.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:25:52.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1052,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$f2","title":"Creating Logical Dimensions with Ragged and Skipped- Level Hierarchies","url_title":"creating-logical-dimensions-ragged-skipped-level-hierarchies","image_url":"","meta_title":"Creating Dimensions with Ragged and Skipped-Level Hierarchies","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, you will learn about Creating Dimensions with Ragged and Skipped-Level Hierarchies through step-by-step procedure by our experts.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-26T11:52:53.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:22:15.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1055,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$f3","title":"Create New Logical Table Sources & Set Aggregate Content","url_title":"create-new-logical-table-sources-set-aggregate-content","image_url":"","meta_title":"Create New Logical Table Sources & Set Aggregate Content","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, you will learn about creating a new logical table sources and setting an aggregate content through step-by-step procedure by our experts.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-26T12:47:01.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:21:38.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1056,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$f4","title":"Using Initialization Blocks and Variables & Create Variables","url_title":"using-initialization-blocks-variables-create-variables","image_url":"","meta_title":"OBIEE11g-Using Initialization Blocks and Variables","meta_desc":"You can use variables in a repository to streamline administrative tasks and modify metadata content dynamically to adjust to a changing data environment.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-26T13:02:23.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:18:20.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1057,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$f5","title":"Creating Time Series Measures & Create a Measure Using the AGO Function","url_title":"creating-time-series-measures-create-measure-using-ago-function","image_url":"","meta_title":"Creating Time Series Measures Using the AGO Function","meta_desc":"In this topic you create time series calculation measures using Oracle BI time series functions.Time series functions include AGO, TODATE, and PERIODROLLING","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"64","created_at":"2014-11-26T13:30:21.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:18:01.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1045,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$f6","title":"UITable View","url_title":"uitable-view","image_url":"","meta_title":"UITable View - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this article we will learn about the Tables Using UITableView and UITableViewController","views":973,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-27T05:20:43.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:17:42.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1059,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$f7","title":"Grouping and Indexing","url_title":"grouping-indexing","image_url":"","meta_title":"Grouping and Indexing","meta_desc":"Grouping and Indexing","views":920,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-27T06:56:51.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:13:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1062,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$f8","title":"Reviewing User's Roles in Identity Manager Within the Administration Tool","url_title":"reviewing-users-roles-identity-manager-within-administration-tool","image_url":"","meta_title":"Reviewing User's Roles in Identity Manager Within the Administration Tool","meta_desc":"Reviewing User's Roles in Identity Manager Within the Administration Tool","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-27T07:04:51.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-22T04:12:51.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1081,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$f9","title":"Web View","url_title":"web-view","image_url":"","meta_title":"Web View","meta_desc":"Web View","views":175,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-28T06:51:21.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T13:06:21.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1084,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$fa","title":"I/O Redirection with Examples","url_title":"io-redirection-examples","image_url":"","meta_title":"I/O Redirection with Examples","meta_desc":"In this blog we will discuss about the I/O Redirection with Examples","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-28T07:23:46.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T13:05:51.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1085,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$fb","title":"Line pattern","url_title":"line-pattern","image_url":"","meta_title":"Line pattern in Unix","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about Line pattern in detail.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"54","created_at":"2014-11-28T07:26:37.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T13:05:30.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1083,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$fc","title":"Use Of Pickers And Camera","url_title":"5302","image_url":"","meta_title":"Use Of Pickers And Camera","meta_desc":"Use Of Pickers And Camera - In this article you will learn more about Use Of Pickers And Camera and read more...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-28T08:11:05.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T13:02:02.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1093,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$fd","title":"Networking","url_title":"networking","image_url":"","meta_title":"Networking","meta_desc":"Networking - In this article you will learn more about Networking and read more...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-28T11:56:21.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:53:30.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1089,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$fe","title":"Picker View Processing","url_title":"use-picker","image_url":"","meta_title":"Picker View Processing","meta_desc":"Picker View Processing","views":138,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-28T12:59:32.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:44:34.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1099,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$ff","title":"Image Controller","url_title":"image-controller","image_url":"","meta_title":"Image Controller - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this blog you will learn Image Controller Using the Camera-UIImagePickerController","views":779,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"270","created_at":"2014-11-29T06:39:02.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:39:11.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1103,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$100","title":"Data Persistence","url_title":"data-persistence","image_url":"","meta_title":"Data Persistence","meta_desc":"In this blog you will learn Data Persistence Using SQLite, Adding SQLite Database, Creating a Simple Database and more.","views":469,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-11-29T07:08:25.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:38:40.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1105,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$101","title":"Modifying SQLite","url_title":"modifying-sqlite","image_url":"","meta_title":"Modifying SQLite","meta_desc":"Modifying SQLite - In this Article you will learn more about SQLite Binding, Inserting, Updating, and Deleting Read more...","views":972,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-01T05:59:51.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:32:44.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1107,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$102","title":"Introduction To Multimedia","url_title":"introduction-multimedia","image_url":"","meta_title":"Introduction To Multimedia","meta_desc":"Introduction To Multimedia - In this article you will learn more about Multimedia and read more...","views":483,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-01T06:46:39.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:27:36.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1115,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$103","title":"OLEDB COMMAND TRASFORMATION","url_title":"oledb-command-trasformation","image_url":"","meta_title":"Steps to configure OLEDB Command transformation","meta_desc":"The objective of this tutorial is to configure OLEDB Command transformation in MSBI. Open Business Intelligence Development Studio, create a new package","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-01T10:48:27.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:23:57.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1116,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$104","title":"WMI (windows Management Instrumentation) Data reader task","url_title":"wmi-windows-management-instrumentation-data-reader-task","image_url":"","meta_title":"Steps to Configure WMI Data reader task","meta_desc":"In this tutorial we will learn how to configure WMI Data reader task. (windows Management Instrumentation) Data reader task is used to read the Data about","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"92","created_at":"2014-12-01T10:53:54.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:23:43.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1126,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$105","title":"WSDL(web service description language)","url_title":"wsdlweb-service-description-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"WSDL(web service description language)","meta_desc":"WSDL(web service description language)","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-02T06:58:31.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:11:51.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1127,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$106","title":"10g Installation steps: (10g – windows XP 32 bit)","url_title":"10g-installation-steps-10g-windows-xp-32-bit","image_url":"","meta_title":"10g Installation steps: (10g – windows XP 32 bit)","meta_desc":"10g Installation steps: (10g – windows XP 32 bit) - In this article you will learn more about 10g Installation steps and read more...","views":849,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-02T07:02:00.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:11:02.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1129,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$107","title":"Explanation of 10g – BPEL Console(Mozilla fire fox)","url_title":"10g-bpel-consolemozilla-fire-fox","image_url":"","meta_title":"Explanation of 10g – BPEL Console(Mozilla fire fox)","meta_desc":"Here you will get complete Explanation of 10g – BPEL Console Mozilla fire fox","views":858,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"1","created_at":"2014-12-02T07:34:38.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T12:09:53.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1137,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$108","title":"Oracle 11g installation step by step process","url_title":"11g-installation","image_url":"","meta_title":"Oracle 11g installation step by step process - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Looking to learn about Oracle 11g installation step by step process You've come to the right place!","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"69","created_at":"2014-12-02T09:25:23.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:58:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1160,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$109","title":"When do we use Automation in our project","url_title":"automation-project","image_url":"","meta_title":"Automation in our project","meta_desc":"Automation in our project - In this Article you will learn more about Automation in our project Read more...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-03T07:14:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:36:52.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1180,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$10a","title":"Introduction to MVC","url_title":"introduction-mvc","image_url":"","meta_title":"Introduction to MVC","meta_desc":"Introduction to MVC - In this article you will learn more about MVC and read more...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-05T04:36:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:18:13.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1190,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$10b","title":"MVC HTML helper class controllers","url_title":"mvc-html-helper-class-controllers","image_url":"","meta_title":"MVC HTML helper class controllers with Example","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will discuss about MVC HTML helper class controllers.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T16:56:51.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:14:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1186,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"
","title":"Structure of MVC","url_title":"structure-mvc","image_url":"","meta_title":"Structure of MVC","meta_desc":"Structure of MVC - In this article you will learn more about Structure of MVC and read more...","views":905,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:24:00.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:13:39.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1194,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$10c","title":"MVC Models","url_title":"mvc-models-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to work with MVC models with an example","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will lean how to create an MVC Model application","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:26:49.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:13:21.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1187,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$10d","title":"c# code in view","url_title":"c-code-in-view","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to Integrating c# code in view","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will learn integrating c# code in views. To integrity the C# code in a view we write the code complicity in source part of .asp x file","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:34:02.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:09:47.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1191,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$10e","title":"HTML forms in MVC","url_title":"work-html-forms-mvc","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to Work with HTML forms in MVC","meta_desc":"In this blog we will learn working with HTML forms in MVC with examples.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:38:47.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:09:15.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1196,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$10f","title":"Adding a record into data base using MVC","url_title":"adding-a-record-into-data-base-using-mvc","image_url":"","meta_title":"Adding a record into data base using MVC","meta_desc":"Adding a record into data base using MVC ","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:40:30.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:06:38.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1192,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$110","title":"Execute Action Method","url_title":"execute-action-method-asp","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to Execute Action Method - ASP.net","meta_desc":"Execute Action Method - In this Article you will learn more about action method execution, and Read more...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:41:53.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:06:22.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1193,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$111","title":"User entered data in text box","url_title":"user-entered-data-in-text-box","image_url":"","meta_title":"ASP.Net - User entered data in text box","meta_desc":"ASP.Net - User entered data in text box","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:43:12.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:06:04.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1201,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$112","title":"How to Implement LINQ Queries in Collection Data","url_title":"how-to-implement-linq-queries-in-collection-data","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to Implement LINQ Queries in Collection Data - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will talk about How to Implement LINQ Queries in Collection Data ASP.net. Learn ASP.Net Training from Tekslate!","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"230","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:53:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:02:34.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1202,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$113","title":"LAMBDA EXPRESION IN LINQ","url_title":"explain-lambda-expresion-linq","image_url":"","meta_title":"What is LAMBDA EXPRESION IN LINQ","meta_desc":"Lambda expression in LINQ are used to work on same group of data in general used with agitate function. A lambda expression is a function with out a name","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:55:17.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:02:20.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1203,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$114","title":"Edit records in MVC","url_title":"edit-records-in-mvc","image_url":"","meta_title":"Example to edit the records in MVC","meta_desc":"Edit records in MVC","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:56:20.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T11:02:06.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1205,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$115","title":"Entity framework & Model class","url_title":"entity-framework-model-class","image_url":"","meta_title":"Entity framework & Model class - ASP.Net","meta_desc":"In this blog you will learn example to display the data in mvc with out using entity frame work(With out using model class)","views":147,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"206","created_at":"2014-12-08T17:59:31.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:59:33.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1206,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$116","title":"Display data using entity framework model class","url_title":"display-data-using-entity-framework-model-class","image_url":"","meta_title":"Display data using entity framework model class","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will talk about Display data using entity framework model class ASP.net. Learn ASP.Net Training from Tekslate!","views":739,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"230","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:01:20.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:59:19.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1209,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$117","title":"Razor syntax","url_title":"example-razor-syntax-data-type-comparison-methods","image_url":"","meta_title":"Razor syntax","meta_desc":"Here we will discuss performing same example with Razor syntax and more","views":322,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"164","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:04:09.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:58:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1210,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$118","title":"Display data using Razor syntax","url_title":"display-data-using-razor-syntax","image_url":"","meta_title":"Display data using Razor syntax - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will talk about Display data using Razor syntax. Learn ASP.Net Training from Tekslate!","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"230","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:05:48.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:53:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1212,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$119","title":"What is a Software?","url_title":"ia-software-many-softwares","image_url":"","meta_title":"What is a Software?","meta_desc":"What is a Software- In this Article you will learn more about Software and Read more...","views":631,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:08:07.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:53:44.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1213,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$11a","title":"Translators and Programming Languages","url_title":"translatorand-programming-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Translators and Programming Languages","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will understand the concepts of Translators. Translator is a system software which is used to convert programming language code into a bin","views":320,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:09:57.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:53:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":1215,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$11b","title":"The History of the C Language: From Its Inception to Modern Use","url_title":"history-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"History of C Programing Language","meta_desc":"C is one of the oldest programming languages in use today. Here's a look at its history and how it's evolved over time.","views":947,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:10:58.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:49:09.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1217,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$11c","title":"Operators in ‘C’","url_title":"explain-operators-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Guide to Operators in ‘C’","meta_desc":"Check out this comprehensive guide to operators in the C programming language!","views":353,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:13:24.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:48:52.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1219,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$11d","title":"Declare variables in C","url_title":"declare-variables-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to declare variables in C language","meta_desc":"Learn how to declare variables in the C programming language with this helpful guide.","views":262,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:14:40.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:48:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1220,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$11e","title":"Control flow statements in C","url_title":"explain-control-flow-statements-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Control flow statements in C language","meta_desc":"If you are new to programming and want to learn control flow statements in the C language, this tutorial is for you.","views":953,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:15:43.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:43:46.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1222,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$11f","title":"Scanf ,Printf, CLRSCR, Getch, & Comments in C","url_title":"scanf-printf-clrscr-getch-comments-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Scanf ,Printf, CLRSCR, Getch, & Comments in C","meta_desc":"In this article you will learn what are Scanf, Printf, CLRSCR, Getch, and Comments in C Language","views":598,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:17:52.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:43:23.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1221,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$120","title":"Conditional operators in C","url_title":"conditional-operators-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"Conditional operators in C","meta_desc":"In this post, we'll take a look at the conditional operators available in the C programming language.","views":909,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:18:22.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:43:09.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1223,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$121","title":"Looping statements in C","url_title":"looping-statements-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"Looping statements in C - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Looping statements in C - learn about Looping statements in C with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":162,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:19:12.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:42:50.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1224,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$122","title":"Nested Loops in C","url_title":"explain-nested-loops-examples-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Nested Loops in C Language","meta_desc":"Nested Loops in C","views":898,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:20:44.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:39:40.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1226,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$123","title":"Dummies in C","url_title":"dummies-in-c-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Dummies in C - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Dummies in C - learn about Dummies in C with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":885,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:22:08.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:39:25.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":1227,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$124","title":"Break and continue Statements in C","url_title":"explain-break-continue-statements-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"About Break and continue Statements in C Language","meta_desc":"About Break and continue Statements in C Language - learn about About Break and continue Statements in C Language with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":534,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:22:58.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:39:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1228,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$125","title":"Different types of loops in C","url_title":"explain-different-types-loops-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Different types of loops in C language","meta_desc":"Explains the different types of loops that can be used in C programming. These include while, do-while, for and nested loops.","views":2905,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"4","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:26:20.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:38:49.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1230,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$126","title":"Data types in C","url_title":"explain-data-types-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Data types in C language - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Data types in C language - learn about Data types in C language with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":416,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:31:24.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:31:52.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1231,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$127","title":"Type Cast operator and Number System in C","url_title":"explain-type-cast-operator-number-systerm-give-suitable-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Type Cast operator and Number System with Examples in C","meta_desc":"Type Cast operator and Number System with Examples in C","views":437,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"2","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:34:15.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:31:38.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1232,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$128","title":"Sizeof() operator in C","url_title":"explain-sizeof-operator-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Sizeof() operator in C Language","meta_desc":"Sizeof() operator in C","views":837,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:35:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:31:23.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":2},{"id":1233,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$129","title":"Priority of operators in c Language","url_title":"explain-priority-operators-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Priority of operators in C Language - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Priority of operators in C Language - learn about Priority of operators in C Language with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":796,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:35:40.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:31:09.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1234,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$12a","title":"Operators in C","url_title":"explain-operator-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Operators in C Language - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Operators in C Language - learn about Operators in C Language with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":378,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:36:44.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:30:53.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1239,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$12b","title":"Functions in C","url_title":"explain-functions-advantages-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Functions and its Advantages in C Language","meta_desc":"Functions in C Self containing block of one or more statements or a sub-program which is designed for a particular task is called functions.","views":387,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-08T18:42:15.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:27:33.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1245,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$12c","title":"Storage classes in C","url_title":"storage-classes-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"Storage Classes in C by C Experts","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about Storage Classes in C. According to the storage classes of “c” the lifetime of the auto variable is restricted within","views":478,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-09T18:09:48.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:05:01.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1246,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$12d","title":"Stacks in Data Structures","url_title":"stacks-in-datastructures","image_url":"","meta_title":"Stacks in Data Structures by Data Structures Experts","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss about stacks in data structures. A stack is an ordered list in which items may be added or removed only at one end, called","views":278,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-09T18:26:21.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:04:45.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1253,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$12e","title":"Bubble Sort","url_title":"bubble-sort-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Study Bubble Sort with an Example From Experts","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will talk about Bubble sort and we will go over few examples. The bubble sort is a simple and well-known sorting algorithm.","views":125,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-09T18:36:45.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:04:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1247,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$12f","title":"Stack Applications in Data Structures","url_title":"stack-applications-in-data-stuctures","image_url":"","meta_title":"Stack Applications in Data Structures","meta_desc":"In this article you will learn Implementation of Stack Applications in Data Structures using array.","views":845,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-09T20:11:38.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:01:23.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1252,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$130","title":"Binary search in Data Structures","url_title":"binary-search-in-datastructures","image_url":"","meta_title":"Binary search in DataStructures","meta_desc":"What is binary search? How does it work? And why do we even need to use a method like this in data structures? Let's answer these questions!","views":805,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-09T20:48:16.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T10:01:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1276,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$131","title":"I/O operation in C++","url_title":"perform-io-operation-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to perform I/O operation in c++","meta_desc":"In this tutorial we will learn about performing I/O operation in C++. Information given to the program, is called input. Information given by the program is","views":1054,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T17:28:38.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:17:23.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1295,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$132","title":"Static, Dynamic Binding and Virtual Function in C++","url_title":"static-dynamic-binding-virtual-function-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Static, Dynamic Binding & Virtual Function in C++ Language","meta_desc":"Want to learn more about static, dynamic binding and virtual functions in C++? This article is for you!","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T17:33:08.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:14:55.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1294,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$133","title":"Multi Level Inheritance in C++","url_title":"multi-level-inheritance-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"Multi Level Inheritance in C++","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about Multi Level Inheritance in C++. The mechanism of deriving a class from another derived class is known as multilevel","views":926,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T17:37:08.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:14:42.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1289,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$134","title":"Static members in C++","url_title":"static-members-in-c-with-examples","image_url":"","meta_title":"Static members in C++ with Examples","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about Static Members in C++ with Examples. The members of class can be declared as static in C++. Static members are of","views":199,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T17:45:13.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:14:23.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1288,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$135","title":"Constant Member Function in C++","url_title":"constant-member-function-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"Constant Member Function in C++ Language","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about Constant Member Function in C++. Members of class can be declared as constants. Constant members are of two types. Co","views":795,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T17:56:57.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:14:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1287,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$136","title":"Constructor overloading in C++ Language","url_title":"constructor-overloading-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Constructor overloading in C++ Language","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss about Constructor overloading in C++ Language. Defining more than one constructor within class by changing it parameters i","views":565,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T18:02:20.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:13:53.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1283,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$137","title":"Functions in C++","url_title":"functions-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"Functions in C++ Language","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss in detail about Functions in C++ language. Class is a data type or user defined data type. It is a collection of members,","views":241,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T18:37:23.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:11:15.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1291,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$138","title":"Aggregation in C++","url_title":"aggregation-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"Aggregation in C++ Language","meta_desc":"The objective of this C++ Tutorial is to gain understanding of Aggregation in C++. Aggregation is a special type of composition. In this contained object","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T20:28:49.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:11:02.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1293,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$139","title":"Inheritance in C++ Language","url_title":"inheritance-in-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Inheritance in C++ Language","meta_desc":"In this tutorial we will discuss in details about Inheritance in C++. Inheritance is a process of acquiring the properties and behavior of one class inside","views":965,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T20:28:57.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:10:41.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1292,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$13a","title":"Friend Function and Friend Classes in C++","url_title":"friend-function-and-friend-classes-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"Friend Function and Friend Classes in C++ Language","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss in detail bout Friend function and Friend Classes in C++ with examples. A non-member function cannot access private member","views":276,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T20:33:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:10:28.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1284,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$13b","title":"Modifiers in C++ Language","url_title":"modifiers-in-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Modifiers in C++ Language","meta_desc":"Modifiers in C++ Language - learn about Modifiers in C++ Language with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":400,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T20:45:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T09:10:14.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1282,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$13c","title":"C++ Function Overloading","url_title":"c-function-overloading","image_url":"","meta_title":"C++ Function Overloading Tutorial","meta_desc":"In this C++ Tutorial, we will discuss in detail about Function Overloading with examples. Defining more than one function with same name by changing it para","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T20:51:06.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:24:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1281,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$13d","title":"Functions in C++ - Part II","url_title":"functions-in-c-with-examples","image_url":"","meta_title":"Tutorial: Functions in C++ by C++ Experts","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss in detail about Functions in C++ with examples. Function is a self-contained block which contain set of instructions. It","views":277,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T21:02:43.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:24:01.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1272,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$13e","title":"Objects and Classes in C++","url_title":"difference-object-class","image_url":"","meta_title":"Objects and Classes in C++ - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Objects and Classes in C++ - learn about Objects and Classes in C++ with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":994,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T21:31:50.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:23:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1273,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$13f","title":"OOP's concepts in C++","url_title":"explain-oops-concept-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"OOP's concepts in C++","meta_desc":"OOP's concepts in C++ - learn about OOP's concepts in C++ with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":1012,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T21:34:48.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:23:28.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1300,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$140","title":"C++ Exception Handling","url_title":"c-exception-handling","image_url":"","meta_title":"C++ Exception Handling by C++ Experts","meta_desc":"In this C++ Tutorial, we will discuss in detail about C++ Exception Handling with various examples. Exceptions are unusual conditions in a program. They ma","views":463,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T21:48:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:23:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1298,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$141","title":"IO Streams in C++","url_title":"io-streams-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"IO Streams in C++ by C++ Experts","meta_desc":"The intent of this tutorial is to provide in depth understanding of IO Streams in C++. C++ uses the concept of stream and stream classes to implement I/O o","views":3607,"rating":4.4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"4","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T22:07:05.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:20:01.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1297,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$142","title":"Templates in C++","url_title":"templates-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"Templates in C++ by C++ Experts","meta_desc":"The intent of this tutorial is to provide in depth understanding of Templates in C++ concepts with examples. Template is a key word. It constructs a family","views":754,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T22:12:26.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:19:44.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1296,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$143","title":"(Polymorphism) Operator Overloading in C++","url_title":"operator-overloading-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"(Polymorphism) Operator Overloading in C++ by C++ Experts","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss about Operator Overloading in C++ with examples. Creating a new definition of an existing operations is called operator o","views":362,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-12T22:19:46.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:19:24.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1279,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$144","title":"Pointers in C++ Language","url_title":"pointers-in-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Pointers in C++ with Examples","meta_desc":"In this C++ Tutorial, we will discuss in detail about Pointers in C++ with Examples. Pointer is a derived data type. A variable of type of pointer is called","views":349,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-12T22:51:34.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:19:09.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1299,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$145","title":"File concepts in C++","url_title":"files-concepts-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"File concepts in C++ by C++ Experts","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about working with Files in C++ with examples.","views":675,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-15T17:01:05.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:18:53.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1286,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$146","title":"Constructors in C++","url_title":"constructors-in-c-with-examples","image_url":"","meta_title":"Constructors in C++ with Examples","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss in detail about Constructors in C++ with Examples. We will cover topics such as types of constructors and difference betwe","views":643,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-15T20:38:01.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:16:12.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1285,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$147","title":"Array of Objects in C++ Language","url_title":"array-of-objects-in-c","image_url":"","meta_title":"Array of Objects in C++ Language","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss in details about Array of Objects in C++ Language. Creating more than one object of similar type is called Array of object","views":191,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-15T20:41:39.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:15:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":1278,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$148","title":"Unary Operator in C++","url_title":"unary-operator-in-c-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Unary Operator in C++ with examples - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Unary Operator in C++ with examples - learn about Unary Operator in C++ with examples with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":322,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-15T21:08:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:15:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":1277,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$149","title":"Types of variables in C++","url_title":"types-of-variables-in-c-with-examples","image_url":"","meta_title":"Different types of variables in C++","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss in detail about types of variables in C++ with examples. The variable declared inside function is called local variable in","views":717,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-15T21:16:12.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T08:15:13.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1441,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$14a","title":"SAS Interact With Oracle","url_title":"7917","image_url":"","meta_title":"SAS Interact With Oracle","meta_desc":"SAS Interact With Oracle","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T06:04:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T07:10:54.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1364,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$14b","title":"WCF Introduction","url_title":"wcf","image_url":"","meta_title":"WCF Introduction","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about introduction to WCF, homogeneous and heterogeneous applications and advantages of object oriented programming.","views":644,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:25:23.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T07:02:44.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1376,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"
WCF Architecture
\n
","title":"WCF Architecture","url_title":"wcf-architecture","image_url":"","meta_title":"WCF Architecture","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about WCF architecture with all the elements and the sub-elements represented with a diagrammatic view.","views":326,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"106","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:25:54.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T07:02:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1365,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$14c","title":"Service in WCF","url_title":"service-wcf","image_url":"","meta_title":"Service in WCF","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about service in wcf and also know the reasons on how WCF is widely used for various applications.","views":199,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:26:54.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T07:02:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1369,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$14d","title":"Create WCF service with database","url_title":"example-create-wcf-service-data-base","image_url":"","meta_title":"Create WCF service with database","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn how to create a wcf service with database and an example to create a client to perform the database operations.","views":441,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:29:18.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:59:35.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1370,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$14e","title":"WCF service from Windows Forms Applications","url_title":"example-consume-wcf-service-windows-forms-applications","image_url":"","meta_title":"WCF service from Windows Forms Applications","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn, with an example to consume the WCF service from windows forms applications and basic terminology used in WCF services.","views":1080,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:30:31.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:59:19.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1374,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$14f","title":"Transactions in WCF","url_title":"transactions-wcf","image_url":"","meta_title":"Transactions in WCF","meta_desc":"This tutorial gives you knowledge on transactions in WCF and shows an example to implement transactions using WCF services.","views":709,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:33:12.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:59:05.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1375,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$150","title":"WCF Transaction Example","url_title":"create-client-application-consume-3-services-created-transactions","image_url":"","meta_title":"WCF Transaction Example","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about creating a client application to consume the 3 services created by the transactions.","views":312,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:35:15.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:58:50.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1371,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$151","title":"Contracts in WCF","url_title":"contracts-wcf","image_url":"","meta_title":"Contracts in WCF","meta_desc":"This tutorial gives you information about contracts and types of contracts in wcf. Also explains structure of a service with endpoints.","views":1006,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:36:02.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:58:34.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1368,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$152","title":"Data Contract in WCF services","url_title":"example-perform-arithmetic-operations-using-data-contract-wcf-services","image_url":"","meta_title":"Data Contract in WCF services","meta_desc":"This tutorial teaches you about data contract in WCF services and explains with an example on consuming the WCF service / creating client component.","views":342,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:37:07.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:56:09.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1372,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$153","title":"Hosting options with WCF services","url_title":"hosting-options-wcf-services","image_url":"","meta_title":"Hosting Services","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about hosting with wcf services and also learn hosing with console applications or managed application.","views":700,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:38:49.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:55:57.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1366,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$154","title":"Remoting concept and its Architecture in WCF","url_title":"remoting-concept-architecture-wcf","image_url":"","meta_title":"Remoting concept and its Architecture in WCF","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about remoting concept and its architecture in WCF, with detailed explanation, diagrammatic view.","views":943,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:39:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:55:41.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1373,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$155","title":"Hosting service on IIS Vs Console Applications","url_title":"difference-hosting-service-iis-console-applications","image_url":"","meta_title":"Hosting service on IIS Vs Console Applications","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn hosting service on IIS Vs console applications and also know the differences between basis http binding and ws http sending","views":384,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T17:40:56.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:55:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1347,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$156","title":"Working With Layouts in WCF","url_title":"working-layouts-wcf","image_url":"","meta_title":"Layouts in WCF","meta_desc":"This tutorial discusses on how WCF Visual Studio templates provide a basic class structure for service development, data contract and configuration.","views":236,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T18:20:54.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:43:59.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1350,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$157","title":"Working with Grid layout In WCF","url_title":"working-grid-layout-wcf","image_url":"","meta_title":"grid layout in wpf","meta_desc":"This tutorial will help you learn how to allow your end-users to resize the cells of your WPF Grid and gives a brief on working with grid layouts","views":364,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-19T18:26:33.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:37:13.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1351,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$158","title":"Events with media elements control in WCF","url_title":"events-media-elements-control-wcf","image_url":"","meta_title":"configuring events over wcf","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will get to learn events with media elements control and know all the requirements of EG with media element.","views":220,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"55","created_at":"2014-12-19T18:27:01.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T06:36:54.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1497,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$159","title":"Prerequisite to Create a Planning Application","url_title":"prerequisite-create-planning-application","image_url":"","meta_title":"Prerequisite to create a planning application","meta_desc":"In this article you will learn Prerequisite to create a planning application","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-21T12:12:54.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-21T05:27:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1271,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$15a","title":"Advantages and Disadvantages of C++","url_title":"explain-history-c-advantages-disadvantages","image_url":"","meta_title":"Advantages and disadvantages of C++","meta_desc":"In this article, you'll gain knowledge on brief history about C++. It also discusses advantages and disadvantages of using it in different scenarios.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-22T22:52:11.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:40:39.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1274,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$15b","title":"C++ compilers & Structure of C++ Program","url_title":"c-compilers-structure-c-program","image_url":"","meta_title":"C++ compilers & Structure of C++ Program - Tekslate","meta_desc":"learn about C++ compilers & Structure of C++ Program with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":990,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-22T22:53:48.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:36:09.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1275,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$15c","title":"Data Types in C++ Language","url_title":"data-types-c-plus-plus","image_url":"","meta_title":"Data Types in C++","meta_desc":"Learn about the different data types available in the C++ programming language.","views":825,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2014-12-22T22:54:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:35:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1361,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$15d","title":"SilverLight Animations","url_title":"silverlight-animations","image_url":"","meta_title":"SilverLight Animations","meta_desc":"An animation is an illusion that is created by quickly cycling through a series of images, where each image is slightly different from the last. An animatio","views":100,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T08:21:57.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:32:29.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1378,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$15e","title":"SilverLight Layouts","url_title":"silverlight-layouts","image_url":"","meta_title":"SilverLight Layouts","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will discuss about types of SilverLight Layouts with examples.","views":899,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T08:27:21.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:31:57.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1379,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$15f","title":"SilverLight Brushes","url_title":"silverlight-brushes","image_url":"","meta_title":"SilverLight Brushes","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will go over through different types of SilverLight Brushes with examples","views":635,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T08:29:37.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:31:42.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1380,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$160","title":"Media Elements in SilverLight","url_title":"media-elements-silverlight","image_url":"","meta_title":"Media Elements in SilverLight","meta_desc":"Media Elements in SilverLight","views":378,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T08:33:15.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:24:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1360,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$161","title":"SilverLight Transforms","url_title":"silverlight-transforms","image_url":"","meta_title":"SilverLight Transforms","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will go over through types of SilverLight Transforms with examples. Transforms are used to apply the required effects to the 2D and","views":812,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T08:38:19.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:24:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1382,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$162","title":"Silverlight Key Frame Animation","url_title":"silverlight-key-frame-animation","image_url":"","meta_title":"Silverlight Key Frame Animations","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will go over through different types of Silverlight Key Frame Animations with examples","views":178,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T08:41:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:23:45.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1363,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$163","title":"SilverLight 3D Effects to Images","url_title":"silverlight-3d-effects-to-images","image_url":"","meta_title":"SilverLight 3D Effects to Images","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will go through on Applying 3D effects to the Controls to the Images with examplese","views":313,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T08:59:06.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:22:04.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1362,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$164","title":"Types of Data Binding in SilverLight","url_title":"types-of-data-binding-in-silverlight","image_url":"","meta_title":"Types of Data Binding in SilverLight","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will cover different Types of Data Binding in SilverLight with examples.","views":934,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T08:44:05.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:09:11.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1383,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$165","title":"WCF Integration with SilverLight","url_title":"wcf-integration-silverlight","image_url":"","meta_title":"WCF Integration with SilverLight","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will go through the WCF Integration with SilverLight with examples","views":141,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-24T23:07:38.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:03:36.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1384,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$166","title":"Adding WCF Features in the SilverLight Application","url_title":"distributing-adding-wcf-features-silver-light-application","image_url":"","meta_title":"Adding WCF Features in the SilverLight Application","meta_desc":"The objective of this tutorial is to how to Add WCF Features in the SilverLight Application with examplse","views":1060,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"41","created_at":"2014-12-24T23:10:33.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T12:03:21.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1319,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$167","title":"Data Set with Oracle Enterprise in Data Stage","url_title":"data-set-oracle-enterprise-data-stage","image_url":"","meta_title":"Data Set with Oracle Enterprise in Data Stage","meta_desc":"In this blog you will learn about Data Set with Oracle Enterprise in Data Stage","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-25T11:06:04.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:53:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1318,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$168","title":"Oracle Enterprise in Data Stage","url_title":"oracle-enterprise-data-stage","image_url":"","meta_title":"Oracle Enterprise in Data Stage - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Enhance your skills with Oracle Enterprise in Data Stage and related articles","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"156","created_at":"2014-12-25T11:07:35.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:53:35.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1578,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$169","title":"HTML Attributes","url_title":"html-attributes","image_url":"","meta_title":"HTML Attributes Tutorial by HTML Experts","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about different types of HTML Attributes with examples.","views":1075,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T08:52:26.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:13:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1579,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$16a","title":"HTML Elements and Tags","url_title":"html-elements-tags","image_url":"","meta_title":"HTML Elements and Tags","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about different types of HTML Elements and Tags with examplese","views":745,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-27T08:54:53.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:12:55.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1580,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$16b","title":"Style Sheets in HTML","url_title":"style-sheets-html","image_url":"","meta_title":"Style Sheets in HTML","meta_desc":"HTML Table Tags - In this Article you will learn more about External Style Sheet, Internal Style Sheet, and Inline Style Sheet Read more...","views":403,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-27T08:56:02.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:12:42.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1584,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$16c","title":"HTML – Formatting Elements & Tags","url_title":"html-formatting-elements-tags","image_url":"","meta_title":"HTML – Formatting Elements & Tags ","meta_desc":"HTML – Formatting Elements & Tags - In this Article you will learn more about HTML – Formatting Element W/Tags, Color Coding System, HTML Coloring System Read more...","views":724,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-27T09:08:14.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:12:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1581,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$16d","title":"HTML Script Tags","url_title":"html-script-tags","image_url":"","meta_title":"HTML Script Tags","meta_desc":"In this tutorial we will learn about HTML Script Tags, External Script, Internal Script tags and more.","views":672,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T09:09:30.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:12:09.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1586,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$16e","title":"HTML Table Tags","url_title":"html-table-tags","image_url":"","meta_title":"HTML Table Tags","meta_desc":"HTML Table Tags - In this Article you will learn more about Colspan and Rowspan Attributes, Tables Backgrounds and Table Height and Width Read more...","views":362,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-27T09:13:25.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:09:51.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":1585,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$16f","title":"HTML Forms","url_title":"html-forms","image_url":"","meta_title":"HTML Forms Tutorial by HTML Experts","meta_desc":"In this lesson, we will learn about various type of HTML Forms with examples. HTML forms are required when you want to collect some data from the site visit","views":922,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T09:19:04.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:09:35.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1587,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$170","title":"HTML Frames","url_title":"html-frames","image_url":"","meta_title":"HTML Frames Tutorial by HTML Experts","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about HTML Frames with examples","views":922,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-27T09:22:43.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:09:22.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1583,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$171","title":"HTML Lists","url_title":"html-lists","image_url":"","meta_title":"HTML Lists Tutorial by HTML Experts","meta_desc":"In this tutorial, we will learn about HTML Lists with various examples.","views":205,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-27T09:26:40.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:09:06.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1582,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$172","title":"HTML Event Handlers","url_title":"html-event-handlers","image_url":"","meta_title":"HTML Event Handlers","meta_desc":"HTML Event Handlers - In this article you will learn Event Handler, Scripting Language, HTML Meta Tag Read more...","views":1058,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-27T09:28:28.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:08:51.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1591,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$173","title":"CSS Style Element","url_title":"embedded-css-element-css","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Style Element - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will learn CSS Style Element like Attributes, Inline CSS-the Style Attribute","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T21:57:08.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:05:49.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1593,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$174","title":"CSS Comments & Units","url_title":"css-comments-units","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Comments & Units","meta_desc":"CSS Comments & Units - In this blog we will discuss about the CSS Comments, CSS Units deeply with examples.","views":848,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T21:58:07.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:05:33.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1594,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$175","title":"CSS Fonts","url_title":"css-font-style-size-weight","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Fonts - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will learn CSS Fonts like Font style, Font Variant, Font Size, Font Weight","views":113,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:04:14.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:05:12.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1592,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$176","title":"CSS Colors & Background","url_title":"css-colors-background","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Colors & Background","meta_desc":"CSS Colors & Background - In this Article you will learn more about CSS Colors, Background Shorthand Property, Setting Fonts using CSS, CSS Font Families Read more...","views":683,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:07:55.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:04:55.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1598,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$177","title":"CSS Images Properties","url_title":"css-images-properties","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Images Properties - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will learn CSS Images Properties like Image Border Property, Image Height Property","views":1051,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:11:27.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:04:40.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1597,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$178","title":"CSS Tables & Cursors","url_title":"css-tables-properties","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Tables & Cursors","meta_desc":"Here we will learn complete about CSS Tables, Borders, Alignment, Cursors and more with examples.","views":459,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:13:45.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:02:26.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1595,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$179","title":"CSS Lists Properties","url_title":"css-lists-types","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Lists Properties - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will learn CSS Lists Properties and Technology updates","views":890,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:16:38.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:02:06.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1600,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$17a","title":"CSS Positioning","url_title":"css-positioning-types","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Positioning","meta_desc":"CSS Positioning - In this Article you will learn more about Positioning, Static Positioning, Fixed Positioning and Relative Positioning and Absolute Positioning Read more...","views":786,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:18:57.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:01:36.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1601,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$17b","title":"CSS Floats","url_title":"css-floats-examples","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Floats - Tekslate Guides and Tutorials","meta_desc":"CSS Floats - Here we will learn what is CSS Float, Elements Float, Nested Tables, Alignments and more.","views":420,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:21:44.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:01:17.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1603,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$17c","title":"CSS Attribute Selectors","url_title":"css-attribute-selectors","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Attribute Selectors - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will learn CSS Attribute Selectors like Attribute Selector and Technology updates","views":798,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:23:19.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T11:00:58.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1599,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$17d","title":"CSS Element Visbility","url_title":"css-element-visbility","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Element Visbility - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will learn CSS Element Visbility like Display, Css Display","views":808,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:26:21.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:56:42.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1602,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$17e","title":"Cross Browser Compatibility Issues in CSS","url_title":"cross-browser-compatibility-issues-css","image_url":"","meta_title":"Cross Browser Compatibility Issues in CSS - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will learn Cross Browser Compatibility Issues in CSS and Technology updates","views":629,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"36","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:29:15.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:56:27.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1596,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$17f","title":"CSS Margins & Paddings","url_title":"css-margins-paddingsproperties","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Margins & Paddings","meta_desc":"CSS Margins & Paddings - In this Article you will learn more about CSS Outlines, CSS Margin, CSS Margin Property and CSS Margin Top Property Read more...","views":1042,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-27T22:33:49.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:56:13.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1605,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$180","title":"Ajax Calendar Extender","url_title":"ajax-calendar-extender","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Calendar Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"This tutorial helps you to know in detailed view of Ajax Calendar Extender, format with example.","views":597,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:31:56.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:55:38.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1606,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$181","title":"Ajax Collapsible Panel Extender","url_title":"ajax-collapsible-panel-extender","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Collapsible Panel Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial we will learn about Ajax Collapsible Panel Extender with examples","views":833,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:32:58.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:50:21.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1608,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$182","title":"Ajax Confirm Button Extender","url_title":"ajax-confirm-button-extender-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Confirm Button Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will get detailed view of Ajax Confirm Button Extender","views":847,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:35:11.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:49:54.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1609,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$183","title":"Ajax Modal Popup Extender","url_title":"ajax-modal-popup-extender-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Modal Popup Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will get detail information on Ajax Modal Popup Extender with Example.","views":287,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:36:21.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:49:39.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1610,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$184","title":"Ajax Drag Panel Extender","url_title":"ajax-drag-panel-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Drag Panel Extender - Tekslate ","meta_desc":"In this tutorial we will learn about Ajax Drag Panel Extender with Example.","views":775,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:37:13.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:49:23.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1611,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$185","title":"Ajax Drop Shadow Extender","url_title":"ajax-drop-shadow-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Drop Shadow Extender","meta_desc":"Here we will know about Ajax Drop Shadow Extender with Example","views":934,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:38:32.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:46:28.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1612,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$186","title":"Ajax Filtered TextBox Extender","url_title":"ajax-filtered-textbox-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Filtered TextBox Extender - Teksalte","meta_desc":"Here we will know about Ajax Filtered TextBox Extender with Code and Examples","views":266,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:39:48.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:46:11.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1613,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$187","title":"Ajax HOVER Menu Extender","url_title":"ajax-hover-menu-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax HOVER Menu Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this Article we will learn about Ajax HOVER Menu Extender that includes Properties targercontrolID, Offset x & Offset y with Example.","views":409,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:40:50.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:45:58.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1614,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$188","title":"Ajax Drop Down Extender","url_title":"ajax-drop-down-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Drop Down Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this Ajax Drop Down Extender tutorial you will know about Drop DownControlID with Example.","views":158,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:42:12.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:45:42.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1615,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$189","title":"Ajax Dynamic Populate Extender","url_title":"ajax-dynamic-populate-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Dynamic Populate Extender","meta_desc":"In this Tutorial we will learn about Ajax Dynamic Populate Extender","views":454,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:43:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:45:25.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1616,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$18a","title":"Ajax List Search Extender","url_title":"ajax-list-search-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax List Search Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will get information on Ajax List Search Extender with example.","views":707,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:45:23.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:44:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1617,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$18b","title":"Ajax Masked Edit Extender","url_title":"ajax-masked-edit-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Masked Edit Extender","meta_desc":"In this Tutorial detailed information on Ajax Masked Edit Extender, Masked Edit Validate with Example.","views":1084,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:47:57.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:41:21.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1618,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$18c","title":"Ajax Mutually Exclusive Checkbox Extender","url_title":"ajax-mutually-exclusive-checkbox-extender","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Mutually Exclusive Checkbox Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial we will learn Ajax Mutually Exclusive Checkbox Extender and Exculsive CheckBOXExtender Control","views":227,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:49:48.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:40:53.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1619,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$18d","title":"Numericup Down Extender","url_title":"numericup-down-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Numericup Down Extender","meta_desc":"In this tutorial we will discuss Numericup Down Extender with examples.","views":754,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:51:35.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:40:22.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1620,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$18e","title":"Ajax Paging Bulleted List Extender","url_title":"ajax-paging-bulleted-list-extender","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Paging Bulleted List Extender","meta_desc":"In this article we will learn about Ajax Paging Bulleted List Extender with example","views":1009,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:54:42.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:39:45.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1621,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$18f","title":"Ajax Popup Control Extender","url_title":"ajax-popup-control-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Popup Control Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will know about Ajax Popup Control Extender with example.","views":703,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:56:08.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:37:28.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1622,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$190","title":"Ajax Resizable Control Extender","url_title":"ajax-resizable-control-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Resizable Control Extender","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about resizable control extender and an example to demonstrate how the resizable control extender is used","views":389,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:58:04.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:37:15.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1623,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"
Rounder Corners Extender
\n
This control is used to make corners of a control as a rounded corners and it has the properties. TargetControlIDRadious The property Radius is used to specify the radius to make corners of the targetcontrol rounded. Example The following example demonstrates how to use RoundedcornerExtender. Add a page to the website, take a toolkit scriptManager and on a panel on the page & set a background color and within the panel take one Login control. Within HTML source of the page drag & drop a rounded corners Extender & set following to it. <asp:RoundedcornersExtender ID=”RoundedcornersExtender” runat=”server” TargetcontrolID=”panel1” Radius=”20”> </asp:RoundedcornersExtender>
","title":"Ajax Rounder Corners Extender","url_title":"ajax-rounder-corners-extender","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Rounder Corners Extender","meta_desc":"This tutorial explains you about how the rounder corner controls and gives a brief for its properties, it is also described with an example","views":729,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T08:59:14.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:37:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1624,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$191","title":"Ajax Slider Extender","url_title":"ajax-slider-extender","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Slider Extender","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn how slider extender control is used to provide a slider on the page and allow the user to select a value","views":396,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:00:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:36:42.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1625,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$192","title":"Ajax Slide Show Extender","url_title":"ajax-slide-show-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Slide Show Extender","meta_desc":"This tutorial explains about how control is used to create a slideshow of images and allow the user to navigate between the slides next and previous","views":683,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:02:45.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:36:26.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1626,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$193","title":"Ajax TextBox WaterMark Extender","url_title":"ajax-textbox-watermark-extender","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax TextBox WaterMark Extender","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn how to watermark for the textbox Indicating what value to input in the textbox without using a label","views":150,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:04:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:33:12.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1627,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$194","title":"Ajax Toggle Button Extender","url_title":"ajax-toggle-button-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Toggle Button Extender","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about toggle button extender and learn all the properties of it in detail with an example.","views":579,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:05:43.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:32:57.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1628,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$195","title":"Ajax Validator Callout Extender","url_title":"ajax-validator-callout-extender","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Validator Callout Extender","meta_desc":"In this tutorial the example demonstrates how to use Validator Callout Extender","views":367,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"6","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:07:29.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:32:36.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1629,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$196","title":"Ajax Update Panel Animation Extender","url_title":"ajax-update-panel-animation-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Update Panel Animation Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"This tutorial will give you a detailed information on how to Update Panel Animation Extender with examples.","views":986,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:08:38.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:32:22.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1630,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$197","title":"Ajax Rating Control","url_title":"ajax-rating-control-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Rating Control - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial we will learn about Ajax Rating Control that includes Starcss class, Empty starcssclass, Filledstarcssclass, CurrentRating and example.","views":763,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:17:53.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:32:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1631,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$198","title":"Ajax Password Strength Control","url_title":"ajax-password-strength-control-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Password Strength Control","meta_desc":"In this article we will learn about Ajax Password Strength Control with example","views":755,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:19:44.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:28:58.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1590,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$199","title":"Ajax Tab Container Tool Kit","url_title":"ajax-tabcontainer-tool-kit","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Tab Container Tool Kit - Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here we will learn about Ajax Tab Container Tool Kit that includes Tab Container, Tab Strip Placement and Active Tab Index with Example.","views":560,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:20:02.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:28:41.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1633,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$19a","title":"Ajax Animation Extender","url_title":"ajax-animation-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Animation Extender - Tekslate","meta_desc":"This tutorial will give you a detailed information on Ajax Animation Extender with example.","views":612,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:32:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:28:12.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1634,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$19b","title":"Ajax Auto Complete Extender","url_title":"ajax-auto-complete-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax - Ajax Auto Complete Extender| TekSlate Tutorials","meta_desc":"Ajax Auto Complete Extender - In this tutorials we will learn about Ajax Auto Complete Extender, Service Method, Minimum prefix Length.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:33:14.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:27:55.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1635,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$19c","title":"Ajax Balloon Popup Extender","url_title":"ajax-balloon-popup-extender-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Balloon Popup Extender","meta_desc":"In this Tutorial we will learn about Ajax Balloon Popup Extender","views":970,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:37:38.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:25:03.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1636,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$19d","title":"Ajax Accordion Control","url_title":"ajax-accordion-control-with-example","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Accordion Control","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about Ajax Accordion Control","views":433,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:45:05.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:24:45.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1639,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$19e","title":"Ajax Cascading Drop Down Control","url_title":"ajax-cascading-drop-control","image_url":"","meta_title":"Ajax Cascading Drop Down Control | TekSlate Online Trainings","meta_desc":"Ajax Cascading Drop Down Control - In this tutorial we will learn about Cascading Drop Down and Cascading drop down control in ajax.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2014-12-28T09:51:45.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T10:23:53.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1678,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$19f","title":"DataWarehousing Fundamentals","url_title":"datawarehousing-fundamentals","image_url":"","meta_title":"DataWarehousing Fundamentals","meta_desc":"DataWarehousing Fundamentals","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2014-12-30T18:13:38.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T09:33:28.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1771,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1a0","title":"Junk,Degenerate,Confirmed,Slowly changing dimension","url_title":"junk-degenerate-confirmed-slowly-changing-dimension","image_url":"","meta_title":"Junk,Degenerate,Confirmed,Slowly changing dimension in QlikView","meta_desc":"Junk,Degenerate,Confirmed,Slowly changing dimension - Here you will learn about what are the Junk,Degenerate,Confirmed,Slowly changing dimension in QlikView","views":770,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-01-20T12:40:27.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T08:31:26.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":175,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1a1","title":"WCF Interview Questions & Answers","url_title":"wcf-interview-questions-answers","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 WCF Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for WCF Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-02-19T11:44:49.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T07:19:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":237,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1a2","title":"Business Objects Interview Questions and Answers","url_title":"business-objects-interview-questions-answers","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Business Objects Interview Questions [UPDATED] !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Business Objects Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":725,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-03-07T07:06:56.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T05:42:20.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":241,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1a3","title":"WebMethods Interview Questions and Answers","url_title":"webmethods-interview-questions-answers","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 WebMethods Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS&Cognizant!!","meta_desc":"Looking for WebMethods Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":2693,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"6","author_desc":"","course_id":"131","created_at":"2016-03-08T06:20:08.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T05:41:18.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":2},{"id":266,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1a4","title":"IT HR Interview Questions","url_title":"it-hr-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 IT HR Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for IT HR Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":449,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-05-11T07:01:19.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-20T04:44:34.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1812,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1a5","title":"Vagrant Installation","url_title":"vagrant-installation","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to install Vagrant by Vagrant Experts | TekSlate Vagrant Tutorials","meta_desc":"How to install Vagrant by Vagrant Experts - In this tutorial,we will cover step by step procedure to install Vagrant with examples.","views":872,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-05-18T07:20:28.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-19T12:43:31.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1813,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1a6","title":"Vagrant Provision","url_title":"vagrant-provision","image_url":"","meta_title":"Vagrant Provision | TekSlate Vagrant Tutorials Onlline","meta_desc":"Vagrant Provision - In Vagrant tutorial we will learn about Vagrant Provision, Validation Key Path, Specifying the Run List.","views":609,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-05-18T09:13:26.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-19T12:43:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1817,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1a7","title":"Angular Directive","url_title":"angular-directive","image_url":"","meta_title":"Angular Directive | TekSlate AngularJS Tutorials","meta_desc":"Angular Directive - In AngularJS Tutorial we will learn about Angular Directive, Directive types, AngularJS Routing, MVC Architecture.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"1","created_at":"2016-05-19T05:34:39.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-19T12:39:26.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":274,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1a8","title":"QTP Interview Questions","url_title":"qtp-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50+ QTP Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for QTP Interview Questions with Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":2740,"rating":4.6,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"235","created_at":"2016-05-24T06:42:20.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-19T12:22:16.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":1853,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1a9","title":"Cross Table Load","url_title":"cross-table-load","image_url":"","meta_title":"Explain Cross Table Load - TekSlate QlikView Tutorials","meta_desc":"Cross Table Load - Here you will learn about hoe to create Cross Table Load,","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"211","created_at":"2016-05-25T09:46:19.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-19T12:03:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1867,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1aa","title":"Vagrant boxes","url_title":"vagrant-boxes","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to Install Vagrant Boxes | Installation of Vagrant Boxes","meta_desc":"Vagrant Boxes are prepackaged development environments that are the foundation of Vagrant. In most cases, this is usually just astripped and naked...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-05-26T11:28:58.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-19T11:50:48.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1873,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1ab","title":"Vagrant VirtualBox","url_title":"vagrant-virtualbox","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to Install Vagrant VirtualBoX | TekSlate Vagrant Tutorials","meta_desc":"The virtual machine created in VirtualBox can use any configuration you would like, but Vagrant has some hard requirements.","views":749,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-05-27T11:44:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-19T11:42:44.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1875,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1ac","title":"Installation of ESXI","url_title":"installation-of-esxi","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to Install ESXI? | Learn VMware Online With Free Tutorials","meta_desc":"Virtualization is a software layer between Hardware and Operating System.Virtualization allows multiple Operating System (OS)instances to run concurrently..","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-05-28T04:58:01.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-19T11:40:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1883,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1ad","title":"SAP Testing Interview Questions","url_title":"sap-testing","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 SAP Testing Interview Questions [UPDATED] !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for SAP Testing Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":3784,"rating":4.5,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"754","created_at":"2016-05-30T06:22:15.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-19T11:30:03.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":316,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1ae","title":"Greenplum Interview Questions","url_title":"greenplum-interview-questions","image_url":"","meta_title":"Greenplum Interview Questions [Updated]- Tekslate","meta_desc":"Here you will get, Greenplum Interview Questions, Difference between Oracle and Greenplum and Various questions related to Greenplum","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"289","created_at":"2016-06-08T16:07:37.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T13:09:41.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1917,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1af","title":"J Boss 7 Installation","url_title":"j-boss-7-installation","image_url":"","meta_title":"Installation of JBoss 7","meta_desc":"This is an introduction to the newest JBoss AS 7 which appeared in the download section for the first time in Nov 2010.JBoss application server can be...","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"59","created_at":"2016-06-14T07:20:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T12:50:35.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1933,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1b0","title":"MVC Architecture","url_title":"mvc-architecture","image_url":"","meta_title":"MVC Architecture","meta_desc":"Here you will learn complete overview on Model, View, Controller","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-07-05T09:46:05.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T12:33:11.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":334,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1b1","title":"Windows Networking Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-in-windows-networking","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Windows Networking Interview Questions [UPDATED] !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Windows Networking Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":288,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-08-02T11:00:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T12:19:11.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1947,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1b2","title":"Nexus Interview Question And Answers","url_title":"nexus-interview-question-and-answers","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Nexus Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Nexus Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"141","created_at":"2016-10-17T11:04:39.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T12:02:25.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":383,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1b3","title":"Citrix Netscaler Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-citrix-netscaler","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Citrix Netscaler Interview Questions [UPDATED] !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Citrix Netscaler Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"217","created_at":"2016-11-17T04:24:45.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T10:59:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1280,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1b4","title":"Arrays Concept in C++ Language","url_title":"wap-swapping-two-numbers-c-language","image_url":"","meta_title":"Understand C++ Arrays With Examples | C++ Language","meta_desc":"An array is a series of elements of the same type placed in contiguous memory locations that can be individually referenced by adding an index to a unique..","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2016-12-16T08:31:30.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T10:14:09.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":462,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1b5","title":"KnockoutJS Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-knockoutjs","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 10+ KnockoutJS Interview Questions and Answers (2023)","meta_desc":"Looking for KnockoutJS Interview Questions with Answers ➔ Real-time Case Study Questions✔️ Curated by Experts✔️ FAQs✔️ Interview Tips.","views":3765,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2017-03-05T04:25:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T09:35:28.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"What is Knockout JS?","faq_schema_a1":"Knockout JS is a JavaScript library based totally on MVVM (Model View ViewModel) pattern that lets you create a wealthy, responsive show and editor person interfaces with a clean underlying data model. Knockout JS is a small mild weighted JavaScript library this is usually used for designing a SPA.","faq_schema_q2":"Define dependency tracking.","faq_schema_a2":"The KnockoutJS will automatically update the UI (DOM) when your data model is changed.","faq_schema_q3":" What is observable Arrays in Knockout JS?","faq_schema_a3":"The Observable cluster is KnockoutJs properties that contain the thing gathering in the view model and this property is tied with UI (View) in two-way binding.","like_counter":1},{"id":472,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1b6","title":"Windows Networking Interview Questions With Answers","url_title":"interview-questions-on-windows-networking","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Windows Networking Interview Questions [UPDATED] !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Windows Networking Interview Questions Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":558,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"276","created_at":"2017-03-07T06:08:06.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T09:28:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":1977,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1b7","title":"Boost Your Site’s Star Rankings by Adding Reviews","url_title":"boost-sites-star-rankings-adding-reviews","image_url":"","meta_title":"Boost Your Site’s Star Rankings by Adding Reviews - TekSlate","meta_desc":"This tutorials briefs you how you can boost your website ranking by adding the user reviews, Roles of Schema markup and how it will impact organic CTR.","views":303,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2017-03-08T08:00:30.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T09:23:34.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1983,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1b8","title":"Hive Data Types And Partitioning","url_title":"hive-data-types-and-partitioning","image_url":"","meta_title":"Hive Data Types | Hive Partitioning | Add, Rename and Drop","meta_desc":"Hive data types that include both primitive and complex types, along with hive partitioning operations like add, rename and drop with examples.","views":624,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"2","created_at":"2017-08-10T09:36:14.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T08:38:40.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":413,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1b9","title":"Groovy Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-groovy","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Groovy Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Groovy Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":657,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2017-09-15T11:52:02.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T07:24:56.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":414,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1ba","title":"Networking Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-networking","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Networking Testing Interview Questions [UPDATED] !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Networking Testing Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":649,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2017-09-15T12:29:20.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T07:24:39.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1989,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1bb","title":"Automation Anywhere Resume","url_title":"automation-anywhere-resume","image_url":"","meta_title":"Sample Automation Anywhere Resume","meta_desc":"We here share an Automation Anywhere Fresher and Experienced Sample Resume for Job Interview and also discuss few Resume Writing Tips.","views":590,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2017-09-16T11:27:46.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T07:23:45.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":415,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1bc","title":"Shell Scripting Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-shell-scripting","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Shell Scripring Interview Questions [UPDATED] !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Shell Scripring Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":1758,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"19","created_at":"2017-09-18T04:11:23.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T07:18:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":418,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1bd","title":"Subversion SVN Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-subversion","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Subversion Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Subversion Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":563,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"423","created_at":"2017-09-19T06:48:03.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T07:12:57.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":419,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1be","title":"Ajax Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-ajax","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Ajax Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Ajax Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":780,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2017-09-19T08:46:41.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T07:12:26.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":420,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1bf","title":"Web Services Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-web-services","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Web Services Interview Questions [UPDATED] !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Web Services Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":135,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2017-09-20T06:16:16.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T07:11:57.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":422,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1c0","title":"Ember JS Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-ember-js","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Ember JS Interview Questions [UPDATED] - TCS & Cognizant !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Ember JS Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":568,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2017-09-20T08:25:29.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T07:05:34.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1997,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1c1","title":"SAP HANA Resume","url_title":"sap-hana-resume","image_url":"","meta_title":"SAP HANA Sample Resume","meta_desc":"We here share a SAP HANA Fresher and Experienced Sample Resume for Job Interview and also discuss few Resume Writing Tips.","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"736","created_at":"2017-09-21T05:58:21.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T07:00:49.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":1},{"id":436,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":2,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1c2","title":"Octopus Deploy Interview Questions","url_title":"interview-questions-on-octopus-deploy","image_url":"","meta_title":"TOP 50 Octopus Deploy Interview Questions [UPDATED] !!!","meta_desc":"Looking for Octopus Deploy Interview Questions with Answers? Here we have compiled set of questions from the students who have attended interviews in Fortune 500 companies","views":920,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"427","created_at":"2017-09-23T12:25:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T06:47:33.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":2015,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1c3","title":"Angular JS Resume","url_title":"angular-js-resume","image_url":"","meta_title":"Angular JS Sample Resume","meta_desc":"We here share an Anjular JS Fresher and Experienced Sample Resume for Job Interview and also discuss on few Resume Writing Tips.","views":419,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"1","created_at":"2017-09-25T11:51:20.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T06:44:12.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":2031,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1c4","title":"Application Package and Virtualization","url_title":"application-package-and-virtualization","image_url":"","meta_title":"Application Package and Virtualization Sample Resume","meta_desc":"We here share an Application Package and Virtualization Fresher and Experienced Sample Resume for Job Interview and also discuss on few Resume Writing Tips.","views":745,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2017-09-28T10:43:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T06:20:08.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":2055,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1c5","title":"Automation Anywhere Examples","url_title":"automation-anywhere-examples","image_url":"","meta_title":"Automation Anywhere Examples - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this lesson you can learn Automation Anywhere Examples from Tekslate!","views":0,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"75","created_at":"2017-11-17T04:30:51.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T05:55:05.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1767,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"
Settings for determining the credit control area of a document. The settings of items 1 - 4 are taken into account according to their priority. The credit control area found is stored in field VBAK-KKBER.
","title":"How to configure Credit Management Function","url_title":"configure-credit-management-function","image_url":"","meta_title":"How to configure Credit Management Function","meta_desc":"How to configure Credit Management Function","views":1066,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T09:07:18.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T05:42:38.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1762,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1c6","title":"Logical backup’s reg & incr exports","url_title":"logical-backups-reg-incr-exports","image_url":"","meta_title":"Logical backup’s reg & incr exports","meta_desc":"In this article you will learn complete about Logical backup’s reg & incr exports.","views":619,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T09:12:20.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T05:42:05.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1738,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1c7","title":"Steps to provide customized validation messages","url_title":"steps-provide-customized-validation-messages","image_url":"","meta_title":"Steps to provide customized validation messages","meta_desc":"Steps to provide customized validation messages","views":246,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T09:17:19.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T05:11:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1716,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1c8","title":"SYSTEM CALENDAR FUNCTIONS","url_title":"system-calendar-functions","image_url":"","meta_title":"System Calendar Functions","meta_desc":"In this blog you will learn about the System Calendar Functions, Layout, Table and more","views":209,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T09:26:43.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T04:53:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1713,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1c9","title":"IMPORTING DATA INTO A TABLE[FIXED FAXMAT]","url_title":"importing-data-tablefixed-faxmat","image_url":"","meta_title":"IMPORTING DATA INTO A TABLE[FIXED FAXMAT]","meta_desc":"IMPORTING DATA INTO A TABLE[FIXED FAXMAT]","views":510,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T09:26:47.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T04:52:44.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1709,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1ca","title":"FAST Load error Handling in Tera","url_title":"fast-load-error-handling-tera","image_url":"","meta_title":"FAST Load error Handling in Tera","meta_desc":"FAST Load error Handling in Tera","views":393,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T09:28:50.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T04:48:25.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1703,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1cb","title":"IMPORTANT STEPS TO REMEMBER WHILE EXPORTING THE DATA","url_title":"important-steps-remember-exporting-data","image_url":"","meta_title":"Important Steps To Remember While Exporting The Data","meta_desc":"In this blog we will discuss Important Steps To Remember While Exporting The Data","views":656,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T09:39:32.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-17T04:47:49.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1691,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1cc","title":"Converting NOPI to PI table","url_title":"converting-nopi-pi-table","image_url":"","meta_title":"Converting NOPI to PI table","meta_desc":"In this blog you will learn about Converting NOPI to PI table, differences between primary index and primary key and more","views":747,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T09:39:55.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-12T07:04:11.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1687,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1cd","title":"Data distribution in other RDBMS","url_title":"data-distribution-rdbms","image_url":"","meta_title":"Data distribution in other RDBMS","meta_desc":"Data distribution in other RDBMS","views":312,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T09:39:59.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-12T07:03:54.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1589,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1ce","title":"AJAX controlKit webserver controls","url_title":"ajax-controlkit-webserver-controls","image_url":"","meta_title":"AJAX controlKit webserver controls - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this tutorial you will learn about AJAX controlKit webserver controls that includes Accordion, AsyncFileupload with thieir Properties","views":406,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:26:06.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-12T06:57:44.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1588,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1cf","title":"Working with multiple Update panels in AJAX","url_title":"working-multiple-update-panels-ajax","image_url":"","meta_title":"Working with multiple Update panels in AJAX","meta_desc":"In this article you will learn about Working with multiple Update panels in AJAX","views":456,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"245","created_at":"2018-01-09T10:38:02.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-12T06:48:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1413,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1d0","title":"Example on Data Reader in C# .ne","url_title":"example-data-reader-c-ne","image_url":"","meta_title":"Example on Data Reader in C#","meta_desc":"Want to learn how to use the data reader in c#? This example will teach you everything you need to know!","views":267,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2018-01-09T11:22:58.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-12T06:20:10.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1503,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1d1","title":"Working with user Defined controls, Properties, events","url_title":"working-user-defined-controls-properties-events","image_url":"","meta_title":"Working with user Defined controls, Properties, events","meta_desc":"Working with user Defined controls, Properties, events","views":1053,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-01-09T11:24:10.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-12T06:15:00.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1505,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1d2","title":"Working with crypto Graphy","url_title":"working-crypto-graphy","image_url":"","meta_title":"Working with crypto Graphy - Tekslate","meta_desc":"In this Blog, you can learn - Working with crypto Graphy and More! ","views":578,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"111","created_at":"2018-01-09T11:24:20.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-12T06:14:25.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":1269,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1d3","title":"Explain about Merge Sort in DataStructures","url_title":"explain-merge-sort-datastructures","image_url":"","meta_title":"Explain about Merge Sort in DataStructures","meta_desc":"Merge Sort in DataStructures - learn about Merge Sort in DataStructures with examples briefly. Read More...!","views":155,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2018-01-09T12:50:18.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-12T06:05:38.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":2056,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":3,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1d4","title":"Small Business Internet Security Tips","url_title":"small-business-internet-security-tips","image_url":"","meta_title":"Small Business Internet Security Tips - TekSlate Cyber Security Tutorials","meta_desc":"Small Business Internet Security Tips - Cybersecurity tips for small businesses that need to follow for security purpose and stay secure from hackers. Steps to be followed for data protection - Password securing, Recovery plan, Encryption, Up to date on security threats.....","views":399,"rating":4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2018-02-22T09:49:52.000Z","updated_at":"2018-09-12T06:05:05.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":null,"video_schema_upload_date":null,"video_schema_description":null,"faq_schema_q1":null,"faq_schema_a1":null,"faq_schema_q2":null,"faq_schema_a2":null,"faq_schema_q3":null,"faq_schema_a3":null,"like_counter":0},{"id":33,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1d5","title":"Data Structures Tutorial","url_title":"datastructures-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"Data Structures tutorial | A Complete Beginners Guide","meta_desc":"Data Structures tutorial explains the topics from basics to expert level. It discusses on concepts such as stack, queue, searching and sorting techniques with examples.","views":2604,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2015-05-24T23:36:05.000Z","updated_at":"2018-02-14T09:04:03.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":36,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1d6","title":"CSS Tutorial","url_title":"css-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"CSS Tutorial | CSS Basics | Learn CSS | CSS Beginners Tutorial","meta_desc":"Have you always wanted to learn to build your own website but are afraid? CSS Tutorials help you to teach all the basics that are needed for development.","views":1848,"rating":4.1,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"192","created_at":"2015-06-27T22:41:28.000Z","updated_at":"2018-02-14T05:43:25.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":1},{"id":29,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1d7","title":"C++ Tutorial","url_title":"c-plus-plus-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"C++ Tutorial | What is C++? (2023)","meta_desc":"C++ Tutorial for Beginners ➔ In this Article, you will learn about History✔️ Applications✔️ History✔️ Programming Concepts✔️ Advantages, and FAQs.","views":212,"rating":4.1,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"231","created_at":"2015-08-22T22:50:15.000Z","updated_at":"2018-02-13T11:56:06.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":31,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1d8","title":"WCF Tutorial","url_title":"wcf-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) Tutorial | WCF Service Tutorial","meta_desc":"WCF is a technology used to implement SOA Programming.Learn WCF Introduction,Architecture,Hosting,Contracts and more topics from our free tutorials.","views":1284,"rating":4.4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"276","created_at":"2015-07-24T23:22:38.000Z","updated_at":"2018-02-13T06:17:22.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":153,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1d9","title":"Octopus Deploy Tutorial","url_title":"tutorials-octopus-deploy-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"Introduction To Octopus Deploy | Octopus DeployTutorials Online","meta_desc":"Octopus Deploy Tutorials gives a brief introduction and works with your applications as NuGet packages and distributes them to the appropriate server.","views":1335,"rating":4.3,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"427","created_at":"2016-07-23T09:47:11.000Z","updated_at":"2018-01-23T10:53:44.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":30,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":"","table_of_content":"","description":"$1da","title":"SilverLight Tutorial","url_title":"silverlight-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"SilverLight Online Tutorials and Learning Resources","meta_desc":"SilverLight tutorials is no less than classroom training giving insight details of topics like Architecture,Brushes,Layouts,Data bindings etc.","views":1319,"rating":4.2,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"72","created_at":"2015-12-24T08:53:26.000Z","updated_at":"2017-12-20T12:16:07.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0},{"id":53,"blog_category":300,"blog_type":1,"wp_id":1,"excerpt":null,"table_of_content":null,"description":"$1db","title":"Vagrant Tutorial","url_title":"vagrant-tutorials","image_url":"","meta_title":"Vagrant Tutorial | What is Vagrant Tutorial","meta_desc":"This Vagrant tutorial will guide you through the basics of using Vagrant to create and manage virtual development environments, allowing you to easily reproduce your production environment locally.","views":764,"rating":4.4,"author":"1","top_level_cat_id":"50","author_desc":"","course_id":"0","created_at":"2016-05-18T07:40:16.000Z","updated_at":"2016-09-07T08:26:12.000Z","status":1,"video_schema_name":"","video_schema_upload_date":"","video_schema_description":"","faq_schema_q1":"","faq_schema_a1":"","faq_schema_q2":"","faq_schema_a2":"","faq_schema_q3":"","faq_schema_a3":"","like_counter":0}],"type":"blog-cat","categories":[]},"urlName":"general"}]
a:[["$","meta","0",{"name":"viewport","content":"width=device-width, initial-scale=1"}],["$","meta","1",{"charSet":"utf-8"}],["$","title","2",{"children":"general"}],["$","meta","3",{"name":"description","content":"TekSlate provides all the essential resources to help you become a skilled salesforce professional. Here is the list of informative resources that include tutorials, interview questions, and other technical blogs to make it easy for you to master general."}],["$","meta","4",{"name":"application-name","content":"tekslatetutor"}],["$","meta","5",{"name":"generator","content":"tekslatetutor"}],["$","link","6",{"rel":"canonical","href":"https://tekslate.com/general"}],["$","meta","7",{"property":"og:title","content":"general"}],["$","meta","8",{"property":"og:description","content":"TekSlate provides all the essential resources to help you become a skilled salesforce professional. Here is the list of informative resources that include tutorials, interview questions, and other technical blogs to make it easy for you to master general."}],["$","meta","9",{"property":"og:url","content":"https://tekslate.com/general"}],["$","meta","10",{"property":"og:site_name","content":"tekslatetutor"}],["$","meta","11",{"property":"og:locale","content":"en_US"}],["$","meta","12",{"property":"og:image","content":"https://tekslateassets.s3.amazonaws.com/images/TekSlate_New+Colour.svg"}],["$","meta","13",{"property":"og:image:width","content":"1200"}],["$","meta","14",{"property":"og:image:height","content":"628"}],["$","meta","15",{"property":"og:type","content":"website"}],["$","meta","16",{"name":"twitter:card","content":"summary"}],["$","meta","17",{"name":"twitter:creator","content":"@tekslatetutor"}],["$","meta","18",{"name":"twitter:title","content":"general"}],["$","meta","19",{"name":"twitter:description","content":"TekSlate provides all the essential resources to help you become a skilled salesforce professional. Here is the list of informative resources that include tutorials, interview questions, and other technical blogs to make it easy for you to master general."}],["$","meta","20",{"name":"twitter:image","content":"https://tekslateassets.s3.amazonaws.com/images/TekSlate_New+Colour.svg"}],["$","link","21",{"rel":"icon","href":"https://tekslateassets.s3.amazonaws.com/images/favicon.svg"}]]
1:null
click on File 
A view engine is the part of the asp.net MVC 
new Project 
which provides the scope of risibility 
-
A very simple way to extend the functionality of SharePoint is to create your own application page to enhance the administration of a web application, site collection, or site. In this example, we will create a simple page that writes out some information about the current web being administered. The first thing we will write is the page class; this will be used to provide the "code-behind" for the ASPX page that will be created later. 1. Open Visual Studio and create a new Class Library project, name this project AppPageExample 2. Rename the default Class1.cs file to AppPageCode.cs and allow it to rename the class (if this does not occur then change the actual class name manually) 3. Add references to Microsoft.SharePoint.dll and System.Web.dll to project 4. The SharePoint API exposes an inheritable class Microsoft.SharePoint.WebControls.LayoutsPageBase, this class includes common properties and methods that all standard application pages utilize. Change the AppPageExample class so that it inherits from the.
You can access components from the Designer view of the 
. 
Connecting to Data Sources Connect to an SAP HANA analytic view Open Predictive Analysis 
Connect to a universe data source
Connect to a Freehand SQL data source Open New document & Select any DataBase 
Provide Data Base Details 
Write SQL Query & Execute it 
Manipulating Data Add columns using functions and formulas Execute predictive Analysis 
Go to Manipulation Tools(Tab) & go to Create new Function & Select as “Round” 
View data with Geo Code 
Sharing Results Share data visualizations Prepare a report 
Publish dataset to SAP Explorer Execute Query 
Select Excel sheet 
Connect to SAP BO Server 
Create an Analysis Open A predictive View 
Go to Data Preparation(tab) & Select Sample 
Set Options
Go to Algorithms(Tab) & select R-K Means 
Select Measures 
Run the Query 
As per the above figure, step 3 & 4 is your stapling feature trying to modify elements from the site definition (i.e. out of the box lists / list view web parts and Step 6 is when the actual lists from the site definition are getting created. Feature Stapling is the great way if the site definition is already in use (and sites have been created). Feature Stapling has two features. A "Stapler" feature which staples another feature to the site definition and the"Staplee" feature which will be stapled. For Example suppose you want to apply a custom Theme to all of the "Publishing site" site definitions. This can be solved by creating a feature which will apply the Custom theme to the site and it can be associated with the publishing site's site definition. Or Suppose if you want to activate a custom list to all the Team sites , this can also be solved creating a feature which on activating when you create a team site the custom list gets created. How to Create Feature stapler.
Notice the following details:
Uncheck the checkbox [ ] “Host the Silverlight application in a new Web site”. We don’t need to host Silverlight in a separate web app since SharePoint will be the host. 
Step 2: You can add the following code at MainPage.xaml for testing if you are new with Silverlight 
Build the Application and your Silverlight Application is ready at this stage Step 3: So, Develop your Silverlight application as per as your requirement. For Example: I developed a application like below. Let’s imagine this application is ready to deploy 
Click Add and in the Silverlight Web Part dialog enter the value from the Url field in the Elements.xml file. 
Configure Web Part to adjust size.The problem is the default size for the Silverlight Web Part is 400x300 but the application is bigger than 300. 
Now Your Silverlight application Deployment Done! 
Add the Web Part to the Web Parts Page In this task, you add the Web Part to the Web Parts page and test the solution.
Now click on the Opportunity tab and click on “New” button 
Visualforce Page Scenario 2: 
Once we click on “Tabbed Button”, we will get the following screen.
Explanation: In the 1st step starts with pagetag, here it includes standardController=”ACCOUNT”, and the header will be enabled, and tab style will be of account.
Explination:
Add the PageReference link to the Account Layout 
Update the field values then click on “Save the Page” button in the above window,we will get the Standard Account detail page Visualforce Senarion 5:
Go to Opportunity detail page and click on the WithoutPageRef link 
Update the field values in the following window and click on “Save The Opportunity” button, then values will be updated but redirects to the same page but not to the opportunity detail page 
Visualforce Senarion 6: Before we have written trigger saying that when the Contact is created by checking Contact Relationship checkbox, then Contact Relationship will be created for that contact automatically. Create the visualforce page with the following code. Create the button called "Create Multiple Contact Relationship "on Account object and once we click on this button on account detail page, then Contacts will be populated which don't have Contact Relationships. Visualforce Code:
The following window will come when we click on "Create Multiple Contact Relationship" on the above window 
Shared Database Metadata → The data which is .xml format. If we create anything like fields objects then these data will be stored as metadata (.xml format) into the database.
Client Application:
In computer networks, a proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application program) that acts as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource, available from a different server. The proxy server evaluates the request according to its filtering rules. For example, it may filter traffic by IP address or protocol. If the request is validated by the filter, the proxy provides the resource by connecting to the relevant server and requesting the service on behalf of the client. A proxy server may optionally alter the client's request or the server's response, and sometimes it may serve the request without contacting the specified server. In this case, it 'caches' responses from the remote server, and returns subsequent requests for the same content directly. A proxy server that passes requests and replies unmodified is usually called a gateway or sometimes tunneling proxy. A proxy server can be placed in the user's local computer or at various points between the user and the destination servers on the Internet. A reverse proxy is (usually) an Internet-facing proxy used as a front-end to control and protect access to a server on a private network, commonly also performing tasks such as load-balancing, authentication, decryption or caching. A proxy server has a large variety of potential purposes, including:
A firewall is a part of a computer system or network that is designed to block unauthorized access while permitting authorized communications. It is a device or set of devices that is configured to permit or deny network transmissions based upon a set of rules and other criteria. Firewalls can be implemented in either hardware or software, or a combination of both. Firewalls are frequently used to prevent unauthorized Internet users from accessing private networks connected to the Internet, especially intranets. All messages entering or leaving the intranet pass through the firewall, which inspects each message and blocks those that do not meet the specified security criteria. There are several types of firewall techniques:
An Application Server Configuration 
Definition: Domain
A domain is the basic administration unit for WebLogic Server instances. A domain consists of one or more WebLogic Server instances (and their associated resources) that you manage with a single Administration Server. You can define multiple domains based on different system administrators' responsibilities, application boundaries, or geographical locations of servers. Conversely, you can use a single domain to centralize all WebLogic Server administration activities. Why Use Domains?
Definition: Administration Server
The Administration Server operates as the central control entity for the configuration of the entire domain. It maintains the domain’s configuration documents and distributes changes in the configuration documents to Managed Servers. You can also use the Administration Server as a central location from which to monitor all resources in a domain. Definition: Managed Server
Definition: Machine A machine is a computer that hosts WebLogic Server(s). A machine: – Runs a supported operating system platform – Can host multiple WebLogic Server Instances 
Definition: Cluster
A WebLogic Server cluster consists of multiple WebLogic Server instances running simultaneously and working together to provide increased scalability and reliability. A cluster appears to clients to be a single WebLogic Server instance. The server instances that constitute a cluster can run on the same machine, or be located on different machines. You can increase a cluster’s capacity by adding additional server instances to the cluster on an existing machine, or you can add machines to the cluster to host the incremental server instances. Summary:
Create a New Template: The Create a New Template window is displayed when you start the Domain Template Builder as described in Starting the Domain Template Builder. Select Create a Domain Template and click Next. Then Select a Template Domain Source window is displayed. 
Select a Template Domain Source The Select a Template Domain Source window prompts you to choose the domain or domain template from which you want to create a domain template. Click Next. The Describe the Template window is displayed. 
Describe the Template: The Describe the Template window prompts you to provide a description for the template. 
Add or Omit Applications The Add or Omit Applications window is displayed only if applications are included in the template or domain selected in Select a Template Domain Source. 
Add SQL Scripts You can add your own SQL scripts to the new template, so that the scripts are available when you create a domain based on the template. 
Configure the Administration Server: In every domain, one server must be designated as the administration server: the central point from which the whole domain is managed. You can access the administrator server by using the URL protocol://listen-address: listen-port. The protocol can be any of the following: t3, t3s, http, https. Configure Administrator Username and Password: When you create a domain template, the administrator username and password from the original domain or template are included in your new template. You can modify this username and password if required. 
Configure Users, Groups, and Global Roles The Configure Users, Groups and Global Roles window is displayed in the Domain Template Builder in the following circumstances:
Assign Users to Groups: 
Assign Groups to Groups: 
Specify Start Menu Entries: 
Prepare Scripts and Files with Replacement Variables Click Next. The Review the Domain Template window is displayed. 
Review the Domain Template The Review WebLogic Domain Template window allows you to review the settings for the new template before it is created. 
Create a Template The Create a Template window prompts you to specify the name and directory for the domain template, and launch the process that creates it. After verifying the information displayed in the window, click Create. Click done in the Creating Template window. Using the pack and unpack Commands The pack and unpack commands provide a simple, one-step method for creating domains and templates from the command line. You cannot, however, use these commands to customize the contents of your domain or template in the same way as the other tools. The pack and unpack commands are available in the \common\bin subdirectory of the product installation directory. Note: In addition to the pack and unpack commands, you can use the Configuration Wizard, Domain Template Builder, or WebLogic Scripting Tool to create domains and templates. You can create the following types of templates by using the pack command, and then use them to create templates by using the unpack command: Domain template: This type of template defines the full set of resources within a domain, including infrastructure components, applications, services, security options, and general environment and operating system options. You can use a domain template as the basis for new domains. Managed server template: This type of template defines the subset of resources within a domain that are required to create a managed server domain directory on a remote machine. You can create a managed server template by using the pack command, with the -managed=true option. Subsequently, when you use the managed server template with the unpack command; the managed server domain directory that is created contains sufficient bootstrap information to start the managed server on the remote machine. Pack Command: The pack command provides an alternative method for creating a template from the command line in one simple step. Although the pack command does not allow you to customize the contents of your template in the same way as the Domain Template Builder, it helps you do the following tasks quickly: The pack command creates a template archive (.jar) file that contains a snapshot of either an entire domain or a subset of a domain. You can use a template that contains a subset of a domain to create a managed server domain directory hierarchy on a remote machine. Syntax: pack -domain=domain -template=template -template_name=“template_name” [-template_author=“author”][-template_desc=“description”] [-managed={true|false}][-log=log_file] [-log_priority=log_priority] Example: To create a template based on an existing domain named mydomain that is located in the C:\bea\user_projects\domains directory, run the following command: pack -domain=C:\bea\user_projects\domains\mydomain -template=C:\bea\user_templates\mydomain.jar -template_name="My WebLogic Domain" A template file named mydomain.jar is created in the C:\bea\user_templates directory. The name of the template is My WebLogic Domain. Unpack Command: The unpack command provides a one-step method for creating a domain quickly from an existing template by using the default settings defined in the template. When creating a domain, unpack does not provide the same customization options as the Configuration Wizard or WLST. If, however, you use the unpack command with a domain template, you can do the following: Change the password for the default administrative user defined in the template. By using unpack, you can also create a managed server domain directory based on a managed server template created with the pack command. The managed server uses the settings defined for the administration server; so you cannot change the JDK or the start mode, add administrative users, or change the administrator password. Note: You cannot use unpack to extend an existing domain. When you use the unpack command with a domain template, it creates a domain containing all of the application and resource files defined in the template. It also creates necessary start scripts, and certain security and configuration files.When you use the unpack command with a managed server template, it creates a managed server domain directory that includes the following:
https://hostname:secureport/console
hostname := name or IP address of the administration server port := port number the administration server is listening on secureport := SSL port number the administration server is listening on Example URLs: http://localhost:7001/console http://adminDNSName:7001/console https://127.0.0.1:7002/console When the login page appears, enter the user name and the password you used to start the Administration Server. 
Elements of the Administration Console The Administration Console user interface includes the following panels. 1) Change Center This is the starting point for using the Administration Console to make changes in WebLogic Server. 
2) Domain Structure This panel contains a tree structure you can use to navigate to pages in the Administration Console. Select any of the nodes in the Domain Structure tree to view that page. Click a + (plus) icon in the Domain Structure to expand a node and a - (minus) icon to collapse the node. 
3) How do I... This panel includes links to online help tasks that are relevant to the current Console page. 
4) Tool Bar The tool bar at the top of the Console includes the following elements: 
Welcome message: Indicates user name which you have logged into the Console. Connected to: The IP address and port you used to connect to the Console. Home: A link to the top page of the Console. Log Out: Click to log out of the Console. Preferences: A link to a page where you can change some Console behavior. Help: A link to the Administration Console Online Help. AskBea: A Link to Support Team. 5) Breadcrumb Navigation A series of links that show the path you have taken through the Administration Console’s pages. You can click on any of the links to return to a previously-visited page. Ex: Home > Summary of Servers > examplesServer 6) System Status The System Status panel reports on the number of information, error, and warning messages that have been logged. You can view these messages in the server log files, which you can access from the Administration Console at Diagnostics > Log Files. 7) Advanced Options in Console
Some WLST Commands 
Summary: In this Chapter we discussed:
Network Channels
In the Network Channel table, specify the following properties: Name: Protocol 
In the Create a new Network Channel page, specify the following properties: Listen Address Listen Port External Listen Address External Listen Port 
Using Channels Example 1: Multiple NICs per server 
Using Channels Example 2: Separate Internal and External traffic:
Summary:
Naming Service A naming service provides a method for mapping identifiers to entities or objects: Naming Service vocabulary: Binding: Association of an atomic name and an object Example: www.bea.com is bound to 209.10.217.38 Namespace: A set of unique names in a naming system Example: www.bea.com/products 
A JNDI Tree 
Contexts and Subcontexts A naming service associates names with objects. An association between a name and an object is called a binding, and a set of such bindings is called a context. A name in a context can be bound to another context that uses the same naming conventions; the bound context is called a subcontext. For example, in a filesystem, a directory (such as /temp) is a context that contains bindings between filenames and objects that the system can use to manipulate the files (often called file handles). If a directory contains a binding for another directory (e.g., /temp/javax), the subdirectory is a subcontext.
Listing JNDI Contents
Startup and Shutdown Classes You can use startup and shutdown classes to configure a WebLogic Server to perform tasks when you start or gracefully shut down the server. A startup class is a Java program that is automatically loaded and executed when a WebLogic Server is started or restarted. A shutdown class is a Java program that is automatically loaded and executed when the WebLogic Server is shut down either from the Administration Console or the weblogic.admin shutdown command. To use startup or shutdown classes, you must configure and assign them to servers or clusters. You can use a startup class to:
When Are Startup Classes Loaded?
Summary: In this chapter we discussed:
BUILD.XML Lets see what it really means:
First line tells us that it is a XML file. Then comes the root element, project. Rest of the code for this project will come in between project tags. It has 3 attributes:
These 2 lines declare user-defined variables which are used later in the file. src holds the location of the current directory as given by '.' build holds the location "basedir/build" where basedir was defined in project name above.Remember all the paths mentioned are relative to basedir So, property tag is used to give name-value pairs, but same effect could have been achieved by mentioning these name-value pairs in an external file (named build.properties) and using them in build.xml as they are used now. 
Target tag is like a function which you can call again to perform a reusable task. These lines are pretty simple to understand. The echo tag will echo/display whats written to the output console, and the delete command will delete the build directory ${build} is way to evaluate the build variable that we have defined above using property tag.
Here, we just create a directory using mkdir command. The thing to note here is the depends attribute of target tag. This attribute is used throughout build.xml to create a chain of targets, to give a sequential flow i.e. it helps in specifying the dependencies of one module over another and tells us how the targets will be called. 
This function compiles the source files present in src directory and stores the resulting .class files in build directory. I have deliberately not added more steps like creating a war file and deploying it on server, because that would make this entry long and complicated un-neccessarily. Time to run what we have done so far. Running this script To run this script, create a folder and name it Test and copy this build.xml file in it. And to test whether your script works or not, create any correct java file in this Test folder, which we will compile. Your directory structure should look like this. Test | |------ build.xml | |-------HelloWorld.java To run your build script, go to Test Folder, and type ant C:\Users\Agraj\Desktop\Test>ant If everything goes correct, it will give output Buildfile: build.xml clean: [echo] Deleting build [delete] Deleting directory C:\Users\Agraj\Desktop\Test\build init: [echo] Creating new directory: build [mkdir] Created dir: C:\Users\Agraj\Desktop\Test\build compile: [echo] Compiling source files present in . to build [javac] Compiling 1 source file to C:\Users\Agraj\Desktop\Test\build BUILD SUCCESSFUL Total time: 2 seconds Having said that, the problem that occurs most commonly is that Ant tool is unable to parse the build.xml file correctly. This is so because even a space or tab inserted in xml file can cause Ant to fail. You can get to know about the extra spaces/tabs using vi editor on linux/unix machines, but it can be pretty frustating on windows to look out for such an error. Although, most of us will never change the build.xml while development but still it helps a lot when you know what happens when you build your project and you don't feel alien to the environment :-) Random Notes:
- Restart the server to confirm that the server is using the default channel and port-81 channel. 2) Once the network channel is created, go to Environment -> Virtual hosts - Click on new, give a name to the host vh.localhost.org. - Now click on the virtual host vh.localhost.org, give the below values: Virtual Host Names: vh.localhost.org Network Access Point Name: port-81 
Click on targets tab, check the admin server. Save the changes and restart the server. 3) Now we need to modify the windows host file in C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc directory and add the host name vh.localhost.org which we have specified for the virtual host. Add the below in the file: 127.0.0.1 vh.localhost.org 4) Now deploy one test application following the below steps: - Click on deployments - Click on install -> Choose the application from the path - Click next, check Install this deployment as an application -> target it to the virtual host (not the server) 
Click finish and Deployment state should be active. Now access the application using the url: http://vh.localhost.org:81/web-app You should see the welcome page of the application. Check out our Related Courses 
Run the page to see the output and for the new created page also we need to attach corporate branding image. The update page contains the details which are already entered so we just need to edit only few values or we need to change only one or two changes like name is spelled wrong, amount entered is not correct or might be refunded to the patient, etc., So therefore whenever on search page if we click on Update Image then it must take us to this update page along with the details and after making changes we need to update the same row. First let us write the code to validate the Update button and other button in the page. Create the Controller in Update Page region, initialize the AM in the process Request of the controller: StirlingAMImpl am = (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean);am.xxinsertpatient(); Write the following code in processFormRequest, if you observe the code is similar code for update too like the way we wrote for patient entry. StirlingAMImpl am= (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean);if (pageContext.getParameter("update")!=null){ am.getOADBTransaction().commit(); throw new OAException("Patient Data Updated Successfully",OAException.CONFIRMATION);}if(pageContext.getParameter("item4")!=null){ pageContext.setForwardURL("OA.jsp?page=/xxstirling/oracle/apps/po/stirlingprj/webui/StrilingPG", null, OAWebBeanConstants.KEEP_MENU_CONTEXT, null, null, true, OAWebBeanConstants.ADD_BREAD_CRUMB_YES, OAWebBeanConstants.IGNORE_MESSAGES);} The below image shows the output of Update page. 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
The below figure shows the page structure output of the Search Page: 
Still now we just created the page structure but the page is not yet validated properly. After creating page structure we need to create the Method in AM for search operation, it means if we are entering patient Id then in the where condition SQL Query must filter the Rows according to the entered Patient Id related similarly for Patient Name and Patient Phone Number too. So therefore we need to write a SQL data retrieval Query, create one VO and write the Query in the VO Qeury area: VO Name: SearchVO Package Name: xxstirling.oracle.apps.po.stirlingprj.server Write the Following Query in the query region of VO: SELECT * FROM XXSTIRLING_PATIENT_ENTRY_TABLE WHERE PATIENT_ID LIKE NVL(:1, PATIENT_ID) AND PATIENT_NAME LIKE NVL(:2, PATIENT_NAME) AND PHONE_NUMBER LIKE NVL(:3, PHONE_NUMBER) After Creating VO attach VO to the AM. After attaching create method in AM, the following code shows the java code of creating Method in AM. public void xxSearchPatient (OAPageContext pc, OAWebBean wb) { String pid = null; String name = null; String phno = null; SearchVOImpl vo1= getSearchVO1(); if (pc.getParameter("item1")!=null) { pid = pc.getParameter("item1").toString(); vo1.setWhereClauseParam(0,pid); } else { vo1.setWhereClauseParam(0,null); } if(pc.getParameter("item2")!=null) { name = pc.getParameter("item2").toString(); vo1.setWhereClauseParam(1,name); } else { vo1.setWhereClauseParam(1,null); } if(pc.getParameter("item3")!=null) { phno = pc.getParameter("item3").toString(); vo1.setWhereClauseParam(2,phno); } else { vo1.setWhereClauseParam(2,null); } vo1.executeQuery(); } Create One controller in Search page and initialize the AM in the SearchPage Controller, note that we already initialized AM in Patient Entry page Controller. Now we are initializing AM in SearchPage Controller, initialize the AM in ProcessRequest as follows: StirlingAMImpl am= (StirlingAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); According to the page output we need to validate three buttons:
If we observe in the output we created two image items one is for Update and Other is for Details of the patients. We not yet validated the Edit and Update images. The next lesson shows how to create Update page and the page structure of the Update page and output of Update, but for Update the values must be carried so hence we know that to carry values we will create SPEL in OAF. Check out our Popular Trainings 
Now if we observe the above image we need to create three Message Text Input items for search and two button items. After entering data in Message Text Input items and once we click on Go button then according to the search item provided the resultant values must be displayed in the below table region. steps to construct the page like above picture: step 1: Create one message component layout region step 2: Under message component layout region create three message text input items. step 3: Create one Row Layout Region under main region, under Row Layout Region create two Submit buttons and if we want a space between two buttons then create one Spacer item between two submit button items. step 4: Create one region using wizard and select region style as Table, select proper package name in which we created VO (ManualsearchVO). After creating all the page structure may look like : 
Step 4:- Open the java file of AM and create one method in AM and write the logic. public void xxSearchParams (OAPageContext pc,OAWebBean wb) { String dno = null; String dname = null; String loc = null; //ManualsearchVOImpl vo= getManualsearchVO1(); OAViewObject vo= getManualsearchVO1(); if(pc.getParameter("item1")!=null) { dno = pc.getParameter("item1").toString(); vo.setWhereClauseParam(0,dno); } else { vo.setWhereClauseParam(0,null); } if(pc.getParameter("item2")!=null) { dname =pc.getParameter("item2").toString(); vo.setWhereClauseParam(1,dname); } else { vo.setWhereClauseParam(1,null); } if(pc.getParameter("item3")!=null) { loc = pc.getParameter("item3").toString(); vo.setWhereClauseParam(2,loc); } else { vo.setWhereClauseParam(2,null); } vo.executeQuery(); } Step 5:- Create the controller and write the logic for buttons in Process Form Request of controller and here is the logic. public void processFormRequest(OAPageContext pageContext, OAWebBean webBean) { super.processFormRequest(pageContext, webBean); ManualsearchAMImpl am=(ManualsearchAMImpl)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); if(pageContext.getParameter("item4")!=null) { am.xxSearchParams(pageContext,webBean); } if(pageContext.getParameter("item6")!=null) { OAMessageTextInputBean msb = (OAMessageTextInputBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("item1"); msb.setValue(pageContext,null); OAMessageTextInputBean msb2 = (OAMessageTextInputBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("item2"); msb2.setValue(pageContext,null); OAMessageTextInputBean msb3 = (OAMessageTextInputBean)webBean.findChildRecursive("item3"); msb3.setValue(pageContext,null); } } Step 6:- After writing logic in AM and Controller rebuild the code and run the page to see the output. The resultant page may look like the following figure: 
Give some text in any Text input field and click on go button. 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
Click on the icon 
so that the following window will get opens 
Click on the search image 
so that it displays list of values as shown below. 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
click on the search symbol 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
After selecting Region Using Wizard then a welcome window will get open as shown below: 
Click on Next button to see the first step: 
After selecting proper AM we can see the VO attached to that AM in the Available View Usages, which is shown below: 
Click on Next button, in Step2 window select Region Style as “table“, the same scenario is shown in the below figure: 
In the next window we will find all the available attributes and in that select the attributes whichever required to display 
Click on Next button then we will find a window in that we can change the prompt names if required and also the style of the item we can change here we are taking all the items as Message Text input types.
Click on Next button and then click on the finish button. 
After creating Region Using Wizard now create one more item and the Item Style is “Submit Button”. So that the page structure looks like the following:
Now create one controller on the main region. Right click on the region1(Main region id) and then select Set New Controller… Now after creating the controller write the following code in the process Form Request. public void processFormRequest(OAPageContext pageContext, OAWebBean webBean) { super.processFormRequest(pageContext, webBean); if(pageContext.getParameter("item1")!=null) { /* The below code line is used to initialize the application module */ OAApplicationModule am=(OAApplicationModule)pageContext.getApplicationModule(webBean); /* The below code line is used to initialize VO*/ OAViewObject vo=(OAViewObject)am.findViewObject("ItemsVO1"); /* ItemsVO1 is the instance name in AM which is the original name of the VO */ vo.executeQuery(); } } Rebuild the code, run the page and see the output: 
Click on the “Go” button so that it will display the records as shown below 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
Oracle SOA Suite 11g is the product set for Business Layer. Individual constituents of Oracle SOA Suite and their description given below: Oracle BPEL Process Manager: BPEL stands for Business Process Execution Language. It is a XML based declarative language that can be used implement end to end business processes. Basic building block of these processes is a service, which could be a web service. BPEL utilizes various adapters to service enable legacy and custom applications before consuming them in processes. BPEL also provides human workflow that has variety of uses. Oracle Service Bus: OSB is an enterprise level service bus that was originally part of Weblogic before acquisition. OSB offers very useful features for service virtualization, canonical models and very efficient payload transformations. OSB is normally used to complement Oracle BPEL Process Manager. Oracle Business Activity Monitoring: BAM is a real-time service monitoring tool that can be used to track an end to end process created by BPEL/OSB. BAM offers real-time dashboards that can be help diagnose potential bottlenecks in the processes before they occur. BAM can be easily plugged into BPEL PM using simple integration. Oracle Business Rules: As the name suggests, its a product to create and use business rules. This can act as central repository for various rule artefacts and thus facilitate greater re-usability. It can be easily integrated with rest of Fusion Middleware products. Oracle B2B Integration: Used to connect with trading partners using industry standard protocols such as RosettaNet, EDIFACT etc., it can interface with E-Business Suite using XML Gateway and rest of Fusion Middleware using IP Queues. Together, above products can be used to define and implement Service Oriented Architecture. Check out our Popular Trainings 
)option.
Check out our Popular Trainings 
Sometimes you may not find an option called About this Page, for that you need to set one Profile Option in Oracle Apps. The name of the profile option is “Personalize Self-Service Defn”. Switch to the responsibility, System Administrator. The navigation to select the profile option is: System Administrator -> Profile -> System The same navigation is shown in the below figure:
After that select the Display level as Site and down in the Profile give name like “Persolalize%Self%”, the same scenario is shown in the below figure: 
After entering, click on Find button then you can see full profile option name. At site level select YES option to activate About this Page link in the Oracle apps Framework page. The same scenario is shown in the below figure:
Step 2: After selecting About This page we can see another window, in that select a tab called “Technology Components” and after selecting that tab we can see the option called OA Framework which shows the version name of OA Framework. The same scenario is shown in the below figure which is showing the version number as 12.1.3. 
Step 3: Now you need to download the JDeveloper patch of the version which we identified in Technology Components. All the patches we can download from Oracle Meta link, and the file size is 500+ MB. The below table lists some patches related to the versions:
Extract the ZIP file and open the patch folder you will find three folders, as shown in the below figure contains jdevbin, jdevdoc, jdevhome: 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
Check out our Popular Trainings 
Instrumentation Layer
Listing 10-27 TableViewDetailsViewController.h #import <Foundation/Foundation.h> @interface TableViewDetailsViewController : UIViewController { } @end Listing 10-28 TableViewDetailsViewController.m #import "TableViewDetailsViewController.h" @implementation TableViewDetailsViewController @end Listing 10-29 The tableView:didSelectRowAtIndexPath: method added to MyTableViewController - (void)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView didSelectRowAtIndexPath: (NSIndexPath *) indexPath { NSLog(@"pushing..."); TableViewDetailsViewController * temp = [[ [TableViewDetailsViewController alloc] initWithNibName: @"TableViewDetailsViewController" bundle:nil] autorelease]; [self.navCont pushViewController:temp animated:YES]; } 
Figure 10-27 A table where the first and last rows have no editing style,no accessory is displayed. If this method returns UITableViewCellEditingStyleDelete, the delete accessory is displayed. And if the method returns UITableViewCellEditingStyleInsert, the insert accessory is displayed. The following example code in Listing 10-30 and Figure 10-27 illustrates. Listing 10-30 The tableView:editingStyleForRowAtIndexPath method - (UITableViewCellEditingStyle)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView editingStyleForRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)indexPath { if(indexPath.row == 0 || indexPath.row == [self.workoutArray count]- 1) { return UITableViewCellEditingStyleNone; } return UITableViewCellEditingStyleDelete; } A table knows a table row is movable by the tableView:canMoveRowAtIndexPath: method. Like the tableView:canEditRowAtIndexPath: method, simply have the method return YES if all rows are moveable; otherwise, write your own custom code. If you omit this method, no rows are movable.The tableView:canMoveRowAtIndexPath: method only prevents particular rows from being directly moved by a user. A user can still move another row to the position held by the unmovable row, thus moving the unmovable row indirectly. To prevent this behavior,you can implement the tableView:targetIndexPathForMoveFromRowAtIndexPath: toProposedIndexPath: method in your table view’s delegate. If a proposed move is acceptable, return the proposedDestinationIndexPath; otherwise, return the sourceIndexPath. The method’s signature follows. - (NSIndexPath *)tableView:(UITableView *)tableView targetIndexPathForMoveFromRowAtIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)sourceIndexPath toProposedIndexPath:(NSIndexPath *)proposedDestinationIndexPath The tableView:commitEditingStyle:forRowAtIndexPath: commits a row insertion or deletion. Notice the editingStyle parameter. If a row is deleted, the table view sends a UITable ViewCellEditingStyleDelete style as the editingStyle parameter. If a row is inserted, the table view sends a UITableViewCellEditingStyleInsert style. It uses the editingStyle parameter to tell it which action resulted in the method being called. This method is for implementing code that handles a row insertion or deletion. For instance, in this chapter, data comes from an NSArray or NSMutableArray. When using an NSMutableArray as a data source for a table, deleting a row means you must delete the corresponding item from the array. If inserting, you must add an item at the index where the row was inserted and remove the item from its old location in the array.
Figure 11-5 Connecting the myActivityView outlet to the activity indicator
Figure 11-9 ActivityAndProgressViewController’s canvas
Figure 11-10 The application running in iPhone Simulator. Figure 11-11 The application displaying the UIProgressView you added to the project. Listing 11-4 PleaseWaitViewController.m #import "PleaseWaitViewController.h" @implementation PleaseWaitViewController @synthesize myProgress; - (void)dealloc { [myProgress release]; [super dealloc]; } @end Listing 11-5 ActivityAndProgressViewController.h modified for this task #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> #import "PleaseWaitViewController.h" #import "ActivityAndProgressAppDelegate.h" @interface ActivityAndProgressViewController : UIViewController { IBOutlet PleaseWaitViewController * myActivityView; } @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet PleaseWaitViewController * myActivityView;
Shell: It is a command line interpreter. The shell access request from user and the checks command existence if the command exist then it converts into kernel understandable language and it send the given request to kernel. The shell access interface between user and kernel. Types of shells: 
Figure 12-6 The buttons’ background image changes Figure 12-7 The buttons are grayed-out when disabled TIP Another way to create a custom button is by setting a button’s type to custom. That technique is not shown here. It is not hard though. First, add an image to a button. Second, change the button’s type to custom and only the image is visible. Note that you can use different images for different button states, exactly as you did in the previous example application.
4.4. Follow all steps mentioned in readme.html of the patch you are going to apply. 4.5. In this patch there is no extra step and we have to apply the driver file u4712852.drv. Oracle has changed the patch files and now only one file is included that is has prefix u + patch number + .drv early patch had three files to apply with prefixes (c, d, g). • The c copy driver (cXXXXXXX.drv) should be applied to Concurrent Processing/Admin/Forms/Web servers. • The d database driver (dXXXXXXX.drv) should be applied to the Admin server. • The g generate driver (g3016463.drv) should be applied to Concurrent Processing/Forms servers. 4.6. Change folder to, $ cd /oracle/ visappl/ad/11.5.0/bin (11i) $ cd /d01/oracle/VIS/apps/apps_st/appl/ad/12.0.0/bin (R12) 4.7. Execute $./ adpatch < ENTER> and follow the instructions and provide required information.
Figure 8-1 The Clock application has a tab for each subtask. Figure 8-2 The iPod application has a tab for each data view. 
Figure 8-3 The iPod application uses a More tab to display tabs. NOTE Do not use a tab bar for sequential navigation or data drill-down. The navigation control and tables are more appropriate choices for navigating sequential lists and data drill-down.You create a tab bar using the UITabBar class. A UITabBar displays two or more tabs along a window’s bottom edge. Individual tabs are UITabBarItem class instances. You tie these classes together using the UITabBarController and UITabBarControllerDelegate. Each UITabBarItem contains its own view controller. Click a tab, and the UITabBarItem loads its view controller. The view controller displays its view. NOTE A tab’s view controller might be an advanced view, like a table or a navigation controller. Chapter 9 illustrates placing a navigation controller in a tab. Chapter 10 illustrates placing a navigation controller in a tab and then a table in the navigation controller.A UITabBar has an associated UITabBarController and UITabBarDelegate. The UITabBarController manages the UIViewController objects in each tab. For instance, if a user wishes to add, remove, or rearrange tab bar items, the UITabBarController is responsible for implementing the behavior. You will see how to accomplish a rearrangeable tab bar later in this chapter. But first, consider the easiest tab bar implementation: the Tab Bar Application template. 
Figure 8-4 The second tab bar item’s view controller is from another nib. Listing 8-1 The TabBarExOneAppDelegate adopts the UITabBarControllerDelegate protocol. #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> @interface TabBarExOneAppDelegate : NSObject <UIApplicationDelegate, UITabBarControllerDelegate> { UIWindow *window; UITabBarController *tabBarController; } @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIWindow *window; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UITabBarController *tabBarController; @end
Figure 8-5 Changing a tab bar item’s image to Search Figure 8-6 Running the three-tab application in iPhone Simulator Creating a Tab Bar Application from Scratch Using a template is well and good, but doesn’t teach you how to actually build a tabbed application (unless you are using the template). So in this task, you duplicate the Tab Bar Application template’s steps, but start with a Window-based Application template and manually add the tab bar items to your project. It is no more difficult than using the template— just slightly more tedious.
Figure 8-7 The first and second tab identifiers Listing 8-2 TabBarExTwoAppDelegate.h modified to use a UITabBarController #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> @interface TabBarExTwoAppDelegate : NSObject <UIApplicationDelegate, UITabBarControllerDelegate> { UIWindow *window; UITabBarController *tabBarController; } @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UIWindow *window; @property (nonatomic, retain) IBOutlet UITabBarController *tabBarController; @end Listing 8-3 TabBarExTwoAppDelegate.m modified to use a UITabBarController #import "TabBarExTwoAppDelegate.h" @implementation TabBarExTwoAppDelegate @synthesize window; @synthesize tabBarController;
5.Change each view controller’s class to Also change each view controller’s NIB name to FourthViewController. NOTE You would never use the same view controller for three different tabs in a real project.
Figure 8-10 Application displaying four Figure 8-11 Clicking the More tab tabs and a More button. displays the remaining two tabs in a list. 
Figure 8-12 Clicking the Edit button displays Figure 8-13 Replacing a couple tabs with a view for configuring the tab bar’s tabs. Two and Three. 
Figure 8-14 Only First and Second are editable. Listing 8-4 Setting the customizableViewControllers - (void)applicationDidFinishLaunching:(UIApplication *)application { NSMutableArray * conts = [[[NSMutableArray alloc] init] autorelease]; [conts addObject:[tabBarController.viewControllers objectAtIndex:0]]; [conts addObject:[tabBarController.viewControllers objectAtIndex:1]]; tabBarController.customizableViewControllers = conts; [window addSubview:tabBarController.view]; } A tab bar’s default behavior is to allow users to rearrange, delete, and add tabs when a tab bar contains more than four tabs. To disable editing all tabs, set the tab bar controller’s customizableViewControllers to nil. To disable only some tags, add the tabs that should be editable to the customizableViewControllers. Tabs not added to customizableViewControllers are automatically made non-editable.
Figure 9-1 Using the App Store application 
Figure 9-2 The Notes App uses a navigation bar. 
Figure 9-3 Adding a navigation controller to MainWindow.xib 
Figure 9-4 Changing the view controller to FirstViewController
Figure 9-5 Connecting the navigation controller 
Figure 9-6 The application running in iPhone Simulato The first step to using a navigation bar is to add a navigation controller to a document window. Upon adding the navigation controller, Interface Builder also adds a root view controller and you changed this view controller to your view controller. Making this connection in Interface Builder allows the nib to manage the property’s life cycle. When you build and run the application, the application knows MainWindow.xib is the application’s main nib and loads it. Upon loading, the nib initializes the objects it manages, which includes the navigation controller property, navController. The navigation controller loads its root view controller. Because the root view controller has an associated navigation item, the navigation controller adds a navigation bar above the view with the navigation item’s title. Because MainWindow.xib handles all the application’s initialization, all you do in the applicationDidFinishLaunching method is add the view to the window. After adding the navigation controller, you must provide navigation controls so a user can move from view to view. You can either add a button to the navigation bar itself or add a control to a view’s canvas. The next few steps do both.
Figure 9-8 Adding a button to FirstViewController’s navigation bar Listing 9-3 FirstViewController.h #import<UIKit/UIKit.h> #import "SecondViewController.h" @interface FirstViewController : UIViewController { SecondViewController * second; } @property (nonatomic, retain) SecondViewController * second; - (IBAction) moveToNextView: (id) sender; @end
Figure 9-10 The application running in iPhone Simulator In step 13, you changed the default title to your view’s title. Actually, to be specific, you changed the default title to your view controller’s navigation item’s title. In step 14, you added a bar button item to the navigation bar and set it as the navigation bar item’s rightBarButtonItem. Establishing this connection ensures the application displays the button on the bar’s right. You then created an action that, when clicked, pushes the second view controller onto the navigation controller’s stack. The navigation controller displays this view and a navigation bar containing the new view’s navigation bar element. Notice you must push view controllers onto the stack manually through code, as in Listing 9-4. [self.navigationController pushViewController:self.second animated: YES]; If a view controller is in a navigation controller’s stack, then the navigationController property automatically refers to the navigation controller managing the stack. So, the navigation controller in ThreeViewNavContAppDelegate pushes FirstViewController’s SecondViewController onto the stack. Note that setting the animated parameter to YES causes the view to slide in from the left.As the task illustrates, creating an application using a navigation controller and associated navigation bar is not difficult. The Back button, and popping a view controller from the navigation controller, is implemented for you. You provide the control and action to push view controllers onto the navigation controller’s stack. 
Figure 9-12 The application displaying the second view controller’s navigation item’s title 
Figure 9-14 The second view with a Next button Figure 9-15 Connecting button to moveToNextView method 
Figure 9-19 Adding a navigation controller. Figure 9-20 Canvas indicates view is from a different nib. 
Figure 9-21 Bar button added to document window 
Figure 9-23 The finished application in iPhone Simulator
LINQ will bridge this gap between OOP and relational data bases 
1.2. Press ENTER key from the keyboard. 
1.3. I f you are not sure about your media then better to select OK and the media verification will be started which will ask you to enter all CD’s one by one. I f media is tested then TAB to Skip and press ENTER. 
1.4. No action required on this screen. 
1.5. Click on Next (button). 
1.6. Click on Next (button). 
1.7. Click on Next (button). 
1.8. Select Manually partition with Disk Druid and click on Next (button). 
1.9. As I have used VMWARE to get these installation screens so there is an NTFS hard disk which in your case will not appear. Select Free and click on Next (button). 
1.10. Select /boot as Mount Point and enter 500 MB as size, ext3 as File System Type while keeping Fixed size and click on OK (button). 
1.11. Select swap in the File System Type and 2000 MB in Size and Fixed size then click on OK (button). 
1.12. Select / in Mount Point, ext3 as File System Type and click on Fill to maximum allowable size and click on OK (button). 
1.13. Verify the sized and after verification click on Next (button). 
1.14. Click on Next (button). 
1.15. Click on Edit (button). 
1.16. Uncheck Configure using DHCP. 1.17. Keep check Activate on boot and enter IP Address and Netmask. I f your machine is not on network then enter as above otherwise ask your network administrator to provided you IP address so you can enter here. 1.18. Click on OK (button). 
1.19. Click manually under Hostname and enter the host and domain name. 1.20. I f your machine is on network then ask your Network Administrator to provide you Gateway and Primary DNS information. 1.21. Click on Next (button). 
1.22. Select No firewall and click on Next (button). 
1.23. Click on Proceed (button). 
1.24. Click on Next (button). 
1.25. Select your time zone and click on Next (button). 
1.26. Enter root password but don’t forget, better to note it and click on Next (button). 
1.27. Select Customize software packages to be installed and click on Proceed (button). Note: I t is recommended to install All packages so we have selected Customize software packages to be installed in the above step. I f there is any space limitation then you may go with Install default software packages but later you will have to install required packages manually. Select the following packages to install manually as by default these would not be installed. If you will select complete installation then these packages would be installed automatically. -----> Legacy Software Development package ---->X Software Development package 
1.28. Scroll down to the bottom. 
1.29. Select Everything for full installation. 
1.30. Click on Next (button). 
1.31. Click on Continue (button) and the installation will be started. 
1.32. Insert CD’s as prompted and click on OK (button). 
1.33. Installation is complete so remove any CD from the drive and click on Reboot (button). <<<<------------------------------------****------------------------------------------->>>> 2. Pre Installation Tasks If you installed with default packages instead of everything then you will have to install few required packages manually. 2.1. Select these packages from the Package Group Selection screen. I f the operating system is already installed, use System Settings > Add/Remove Applications to install these two packages. The following required components must be installed manually: --->openmotif21-2.1.30-11.RHEL4.4 --->libaio-0.3.102-1 --->libaio-devel-0.3.102-1 The libaio components are available on Disk 3 of the RHEL4.0 media. For information on downloading the openmotif component, see the instructions at the following URL: 2.2. Apply one of these OS library patches: 4198954 (for Red Hat 4.0), you can download it from metalink. 2.3. After installing these patches, run ldconfig -v. 2.4. Release 11i Hardware Requirements (minimum) -->Server machine P4 --> DVD -->RAM Minimum 1GB -->Hard Disk Space Note: To get the spaces command $ du –h /Stage11i is used. -->A Note book and a writing pen -->UPS (to avoid a power failure during installation). Software Requirements -->Oracle Application 11.5.10.2 -->Linux Redhat AS 4 32bit. -->Metalink Access -->Oracle Metalink Reference document # 287453.1 2.4.1. Verify minimum Kernel Requirements with uname and rpm command, [ root@vision ~ ]# uname -r 2.6.9-5.ELsmp [ root@vision ~ ]# rpm -q glibc glibc-2.3.4-2 Note: The above displayed information is as per recommendations. 2.4.2. Domain Name System (DNS) Resolver Parameters 2.4.3. Edit the following file /etc/ resolv.conf and set the following parameters as below, -->options attempts:5 -->options timeout:15 2.4.4. The format of hosts /etc/hosts file must be formatted as follows : 127.0.0.1 localhost.localdomain < ip_address> < node_name> .< domain_name> 2.4.5. Verify that the /etc/ sysconfig/network file is formatted as follows : HOSTNAME= < node_name> .< domain_name> 2.4.6. I f the /etc/ sysconfig/networking/profiles/default/network file exists, remove it. Note: I f you changed any files in the previous steps, reboot the system. 2.4.7. Modify number of open descriptors: in file /etc/ security/ limits.conf add the following lines: ---->* hard nofile 65535 ---->* soft nofile 4096 Note: The following warning will appear in the alert log file if these above settings will not be effective. Make sure that each line must have “* ” . WARNING:Oracle instance running on a system with low open file descriptor limit. Tune your system to increase this limit to avoid severe performance degradation. 2.4.8. Change port range value : /etc/ sysctl.config add the following line, net.ipv4.ip_local_port_range = 1024 65000 2.4.9. Set LD_ASSUME_KERNEL in file /etc/profile LD_ASSUME_KERNEL= 2.4.19 export LD_ASSUME_KERNEL 2.4.10. Java 2 Standard Edition (J2SE), Rapid Install installs the Java 2 Standard Edition 1.4.2 automatically. 2.5. Release 12 2.5.1. Verify minimum Kernel Requirements with uname and it should be 2.6.9-42.ELsmp. 
2.5.2. Edit the /etc/ sysctl.conf file using vi command. 2.5.3. The file before change will look like the following, 
2.5.4. Open the file using following command, ------$ vi /etc/ sysctl.conf 2.5.5. Insert the following values,
2.5.6. Save and exit with wq. 2.5.7. Edit the following file /etc/ resolv.conf and set the following parameters as below, ---->options attempts:5 ---->options timeout:15 2.5.8. The format of hosts /etc/hosts file must be formatted as follows : 127.0.0.1 localhost.localdomain < ip_address> < node_name> .< domain_name> -----> 192.168.0.1 vision.erpstuff.com 2.5.9. Verify that the /etc/ sysconfig/network file is formatted as follows : ---->HOSTNAME= < node_name> .< domain_name> ---->HOSTNAME= vision.erpstuff.com 2.5.10. I f the /etc/ sysconfig/networking/profiles/default/network file exists, remove it. Note: I f you changed any files in the previous steps, reboot the system. 2.5.11. Modify number of open descriptors: in file /etc/ security/ limits.conf add the following lines: --->* hard nofile 65535 --->* soft nofile 4096 --->* hard nproc 16384 --->* soft nproc 2047 Note: The following warning will appear in the alert log file if these above settings will not be effective. Make sure that each line must have “* ” . WARNING:Oracle instance running on a system with low open file descriptor limit. Tune your system to increase this limit to avoid severe performance degradation. <<<<------------------------------------****------------------------------------------->>>> 3. OS User and Group Creation 3.1. Create a user named oracle and two groups named dba and oinstall.
The DVD’s are labeled as below, --->Start Here - Disk 1 --->APPL_TOP - Disk n --->RDBMS - Disk n --->Tools - Disk n --->Databases - Disk n 4.1.2. Now we will use adautostg.pl to create stage and please resolve any issue if the script prompts for any. 4.1.3. Login as OS user “oracle” with privileges to mount, unmount and eject the DVD. The must also have write privileges to the stage area. 4.1.4. Insert the first DVD named Start Here in DVD-ROM drive and mount the DVD if not auto mounted. 4.1.5. To verify perl version and to confirm if it is in the PATH, perl –v The version should be 5.0053 or higher else download from perl.com and install it. 
4.1.6. Run adautostg.pl script from the mounted DVD, 4.1.7. $ perl /media/ cdrom/Disk1/ rapidwiz/adautostg.pl 
4.1.8. Provide the top-level directory on the prompt like /d01 and the script will create a directory Stage11i in the directory automatically and will create all other folders in this directory as the structure shown in the above figure. So the directory will look like /d01/Stage11i. 
4.1.9. Enter folder and press enter key. 
4.1.10. The next prompt is for AutoMount so press y or enter key to accept default. 4.1.11. Enter DVD mount point which in my case is /media/ cdrom. 4.1.12. Enter 1 or press enter key to take the default which is also 1 to stage Oracle Applications. 4.1.13. Insert the DVD one by one as the script will prompt. Note: Good thing is that script will maintain a log so if copying is aborted due to any reason so next time you can resume from the same stage. 4.2. Release 12 The staging steps are similar to the 11i. 
4.2.1. Insert the first DVD labeled Start Here – Disk 1 DVD. 4.2.2. Now run adautostg.pl using perl. $ /media/ cdrom/Disk1/ rapidwiz/perl adautostg.pl 4.2.3. Provide the target directory name like /d01. 4.2.4. Press enter key to accept default y to AutoMount. 4.2.5. Enter the mount point like in my case it is, /media/ cdrom 4.2.6. Select 1 to stage Oracle Applications. 4.2.7. Insert DVD as prompted. 
5.6. I f you already have a configuration created with rapidwiz then you can provide it on the Load Configuration screen by select Yes, load configuration file and click open to find the configuration file. By providing the file the next steps will be skipped and the system status check step will be performed on the basis of parameters provided in the configuration file. To know how this file is created and saved just see next screen Save Instance – specific Configuration, which displayed after we provide all the information. The default name is config.txt. I have selected No as I don’t have configuration. 
5.7. Press the next button on the above screen. 5.8. As I already mentioned above that I will demonstrate single node installation so here on the Install Type screen I will select, Single – node (All services on a single node). 
5.9. Press Next and the next screen will be to define database type. 5.10. I will install Vision Demo Database instead of Fresh Database as the Fresh would be blank while Vision is preconfigured Database. So on the Define Database Type screen I have selected Vision Demo Database and also entered my database name VIS. 
5.11. After providing these two information press Next on the above screen. 5.12. By default the Oracle OS User is the user with which I logged in and started the installation so I can’t change it here. The second is to enter the group so provide the name of group which was created in few steps above. The third entry on the Database Install Information – Vision screen is to provide the Base Install Directory where the application will be installed. 
5.13. I f you need to change any other path on the above screen the click on Advanced Edit else proceed by clicking Next. 5.14. In the previous step we provided information for Database while on this Configuration Information for Node – Vision screen we will provide information for Application side. The information is just like same as on the database screen. You can set different paths of database and applications installation if any space limitation on one disk. 
5.15. Enter your domain name in the Domain Name field on Global System Settings screen. Like for demonstration I have entered erpstuff.com. 
5.16. Save the configuration file on the following Save Instance – specific Configuration screen for future use. Name the file which is convenient for you as kept the default one that is config.txt. 
5.17. Press Next to proceed. 5.18. All the input tasks of DBA are completed now the checks will be performed on the basis of information provided in the previous steps. 5.19. The next screen which will appear is the System Check Status screen. 5.20. The next immediate screen will show the results of checks performed in the last step. 5.21. View if any cross found and resolve the error mentioned. I am sure if all steps above were performed carefully there should be no issue at this place. I f any error displayed on the Validate System Configuration screen then press Back else press Next. 
5.22. The next screen is Component Installation Review which displays the components to be installed. 
5.23. Pressing Next will bring the Load Balancing screen. 
5.24. I have used default values for Concurrent Manager, Forms Server on the Load Balancing Node Specification screen. 
5.25. As we are installing single node so Node name is same for all Services while Linux is selected as Operating System on Node Information screen. 
5.26. After pressing the Next on the above screen will bring the following Installing Oracle Applications screen which shows two progress bars. 
5.27. During this the DBA can perform the following tasks, o In case of multi node installation start OS installation on the other node. o I f it is lunch time then have a nice lunch as the installation will take time to complete depending on the hardware. o I f you have music system then listening good music would also be a good time passing. o Mean while keep watching the progress bars as any error may be prompted due to certain reason like if any step(s) was/were missed. <<<<<<----------------------------*******------------------------------------------>>>>> 6. Oracle Applications R12 Installation (Linux) Oracle Applications Documentation Resources, Release 12 Detailed information is available in Metalink note 394692.1 The following components are optional, and not delivered by Rapid I nstall: • Oracle Discoverer 10g (10.1.2.0.2) • Oracle Portal 10g (10.1.4) • Oracle Single Sign-On 10g (10.1.2.0.2) • Oracle Internet Directory 10g (10.1.2.0.2) Note: In Release 12, Java Development Kit (JDK) 5.0 is automatically installed by Rapid Install. For more details about JDK visit, http: / / java.sun.com/ j2se/1.5.0/ install-linux# requirements Disk Space Requirements --->Operating System 4.7 GB --->Stage 33 GB --->Applications node file system 28 GB (Includes AS 10.1.2 ORACLE_HOME, AS 10.1.3 ORACLE_HOME, COMMON_TOP, APPL_TOP, and INST_TOP) --->Database node file system (Fresh) 45 GB --->Database node file system (Vision) 133 GB Note: We will install single node vision instance so we will require total space (4.7 + 33 + 28 + 133 = 198.7). The Applications node technology stack includes, among other components: • Oracle Developer 10i, which includes: • Oracle Forms • Oracle Reports • Oracle 10g Application Server 10.1.2 • Oracle 10g Application Server 10.1.3 (includes Oracle HTTP Server) The database node includes: • Oracle Database 10g Release 2 The following components are optional, and not delivered by Rapid I nstall: • Oracle Discoverer 10g (10.1.2.0.2) • Oracle Portal 10g (10.1.4) • Oracle Single Sign-On 10g (10.1.2.0.2) • Oracle Internet Directory 10g (10.1.2.0.2) Note: In Release 12, Java Development Kit (JDK) 5.0 is automatically installed by Rapid Install. 6.1. Create a user named oracle and two groups named dba and oinstall. The steps are demonstrated in the following slide.
6.5. Click on Next (B). 
6.6. Click on Next (B). 
6.7. Click Accept Oracle Connection Tools Agreement and click on Next (B). 
6.8. Enter your Metalink Support Identifier, Metalink Account and select Country. 6.9. Click on Next (B). 
6.10. Click on Next (B). 
6.11. Click on Next (B). 
6.12. Change if required and click on Next (B).
6.13. Change if required and click on Next (B). 
6.14. Click on Next (B). 
6.15. Resolve if any test is fail and click on Next (B). 
6.16. Click on Next (B). 
6.17. Click on Yes (B). 6.18. The installation will start so wait till not completed. 
6.19. All post-install checks should be successful if there is any issue then resolve it and click on Next (B). 
6.20. Click on Finish (B). 6.21. The next is to check the directory structure as Oracle has changed the structure in R12. 
6.22. Open internet explorer and enter the URL here in my case it is, Note: In EBS Release 12 it is mandatory to first time login with sysadmin in order to complete installation. 
6.23. Enter sysadmin in User Name and sysadmin as Password. 6.24. Click on Login (B). 6.25. The J2SE setup will be automatically started. 
6.26. Click Typical setup and click on Accept (B). 
6.27. Click on Finish (B). 
6.28. The following is the navigation window of R12. 
<<<<<<----------------------------*******------------------------------------------>>>>> 7. Oracle Applications Installation (Windows) Now we will try to capture the steps for the Installation of Oracle eBusiness suite on Microsoft Windows. 7.1. Windows OS Setup 7.1.1. Fist of all download the latest version of JDK from http: / / java.sun.com and install it while keeping in mind that there should be no space in the folder(s) name. 7.1.2. During Windows installation please make sure that the machine should be at least 8 characters and if during installation it is less than 8 then change it. 7.1.3. First of all you need to create a new user on Windows server with name “oracle” and add the user in administrators group to give administrative privileges. 7.1.4. Logoff and login into as “oracle” and install the following tools before installation of 11i. 7.1.5. The sequence of installation of these softwares should be as the sequence in the following steps. 7.1.6. Install the printer on the server before proceeding with the installation. Note: There should be no space in the folder names of the following softwares. Do not install in the “Program Files” folder because there is a space character in the folder name. 7.2. JDK 7.2.1. Fist of all download the latest version of JDK from http://java.sun.com and install it while keeping in mind that there should be no space in the folder(s) name. 7.3. MS Outlook 7.3.1. For few versions of eBusiness suite you need to install Microsoft Outlook so install the Microsoft Outlook. 7.4. Microsoft Visual C+ + 7.4.1. The next is to install Microsoft Visual C+ + . 7.4.2. Start the setup. 7.4.3. Select “Product” on the following screen. 
7.4.4. Click on Next (B). 
7.4.5. Select Visual C+ + 6.0 Enterprise Edition and click on Next (B). 
7.4.6. Select Register Environment Variables and click on OK (B). 
7.4.7. Enter a folder name and path which should not have any space(s). 7.4.8. Click on Next (B). 7.4.9. After the installation reboot the system. 7.4.10. Next is to install Service Pack 4 for Microsoft Visual Studio 7.4.11. After Service pack installation reboot the system. 7.5. MKS Toolkit 7.5.1. Download the MKS Toolkit from http: / /www.mks.com as a demo version for 30 days is available for free download. 7.5.2. Start the setup. 
7.5.3. Click on Next (B). 
7.5.4. Click on Next (B). 7.5.5. On the following screen, give non-space name of the folder where you want to install the toolkit. Click the “Browse” button to change the folder name. You may install the toolkit to C: \mksnt folder as described in the Oracle Installation Guide. 7.5.6. Click on Next (B). 
7.5.7. Click on Next (B). 7.5.8. Wait for the installation to complete. 7.5.9. Once the installation is complete, go to the “MS DOS Prompt” and run any Unix command. You must be able to run all Unix commands on Windows successfully. Like for example enter ls command which is same a dir command of windows. 7.6. GNUMake Utility 7.6.1. Download the GNU from http: / /www.gnu.org/ and following the instruction as provided by GNU. 7.6.2. Now copy the gnumake.exe from c: \gnu to c: \mksnt\mksnt. 7.7. Set the Required Paths 7.7.1. Right Click the “My Computer” icon on the desktop and choose “Properties” from the popup menu. Click the “Advanced” tab and then “Environment Variables” . Double Click the “Path” variable and add the following before %system% and %system32%; --->c: \mksnt\mksnt;c: \gnu. 7.8. Startup Installation 7.8.1. Open the MS DOS Prompt and goto the Rapidwiz directory 7.8.2. Run the following cmd file to start the installation wizward, E: \Stage11i\ redCD\Disk1\ rapidwiz> rapidwiz.cmd 7.8.3. This will initiate the installation wizard. 7.8.4. Once the installation completes reboot the system. Note: As the installation steps/ screens are already covered in the above demonstration of installation on Linux so will not be covered. The only difference is the paths so on the installation screen provide the windows paths. 
Note: For further details of parameters click the Help (B) or for more details read about GATHER_SCHEMA_STATS. 1.3. Click OK (button). 1.4. Now schedule as per your requirements. I have scheduled it to run this request every Sunday mid night for one year. 
1.5. On clicking OK (button) as we have selected Save this schedule the following window will appear, 
1.6. Enter Name and Description of the schedule and press OK (button). 1.7. Now on the main window Submit the request by clicking Request (button). 1.8. Also have a look on the following requests you may submit as per your requirements 
1.9. I had submitted a request to show the log file and next day I viewed the log file which is show below, Note: Please note the time taken on vision machine so it will vary on the size of data. For this reason I scheduled it at mid night. 
1.3. Submit the request and then view the request status, 
1.4. Our all old requests are no more in the requests window. I t will also free space on hard disk by deleting log files. 
1.9. Save the file. Note: I f you want to use KDE, add the following line instead of gnome-session &, startkde & 1.10. After setting the desktop, the existing VNC-based X session must be killed through this command.
Note: I f you are going to download Zip Archive then you need WinZip software to extract the executable file. http: / /www.winzip.com/ 2.3. Extract or place the file in a folder on your local drive. C: \ vncviewer 2.4. On running the exe file on your windows client and the following screen will appear. 
2.5. Enter IP address of your VNC server we configured above in the following format, IP address :1 Note: For security reasons the IP address is not shown here but hope there should be no issue in providing your server IP in this field. Don’t forget to click on Options button to have few setting of vnc viewer. 2.6. Enter the password same we set above while configuring server side, 
2.7. The following options screen will appear, 
2.8. By default, VNC starts up only a simple window manager and a terminal window. To avoid the above options screen we will perform the following steps and will uncomment the unset and exec lines and will add shost + in the xstartup file as shown below, 
2.9. Save the file after modification. 1.12. After setting the desktop, the existing VNC-based X session must be killed through this command.
1.1. Login as Oracle user on Linux server locally. 1.2. Update the DisallowTCP and set to false in the gdm.conf file on application server machine. /etc/X11/gdm 1.3. Open the file in any editor $ vi/etc/X11/gdm/gdm.conf 1.4. Open the terminal window and execute the following statements. $ set DISPLAY= localhost:0.0 $ xhost + $ export DISPLAY= localhost:0.0 $ xhost + localhost localhost being added to access control list 1.5. To verify display settings use xclock or xterm. $ xclock 
$ xterm 
Note: I f these windows are displayed then it means that display settings are ok. 1.6. Alternatively make the following change in the adrepctl.sh file. This will eliminate the above manual steps on each restart of server. $ vi /oracle/prodcomn/admin/ scripts/ VIS_vision/adrepctl.sh 1.7. Insert xhost + and save the file. Now each time when you will start the apps services display setting will be set. 1.8. Open the .bash_profile of Oracle user, $ cd ~ “go to home folder of oracle user” $ vi .bash_profile 1.9. Insert the following line, export DISPLAY= "vision:0.0" 
Note: These settings will only work if the user Oracle will remain logged in. 
Note: Note the parameters (TOKENS) like here it is :P_SET_OF_BOOKS_ID. 
1.2. Save the report as CGLTESTREP where I have used C for customized reports. While saving be careful that extension rdf must be in small characters as by default reports builder saves in capital letters. 1.3. Copy the file on server in / u01/ oracle/ visappl/ gl/ 11.5.0/ reports/ US folder. 1.4. Verify file extension as it should be is small letters. $> ls CGLTESTREP.* CGLTESTREP.rdf <<<<<<<<<<<<<<---------------*************-------------->>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> 2. Integration in Applications 1.1. Login to Oracle Applications with System Administrator Responsibility. 1.2. Open the Executable screen to register the report. Sys Admin : Concurrent > Program > Executable 1.3. Provide the information as shown below and save the record. 
1.4. The next step is to define the report and its parameters by using the Define screen. Sys Admin : Concurrent > Program > Define 
1.5. Select your desired Output Format from the list (HTML, PCL, PDF, PostScript, Text and XML), here I have selected PDF. 1.6. After providing all the required information on Definition main screen click Parameters (button) to provide parameters of the report. 
Note: Define all the parameters of report as here we have only one so we will just save the record and will close the form. 1.7. Now the next question is who can access this report? To do so we have to assign a Request Group. 1.8. To find the Request Group open the responsibility screen and search “General Ledger Super user” responsibility. Sys Admin : Security > Responsibility > Define 
1.9. Copy or note the Request Group Name which is “GL Concurrent Program Group” 1.10. Now to add the report to this Request Group we will open the Request screen, Sys Admin : Security > Responsibility > Request 1.11. Query to find the Request Group “GL Concurrent Program Group” . 1.12. Add a record and enter report name in the name field as shown below. 
1.13. Save the information. 1.14. Now to check the integrated report switch to General Ledger responsibility and submit a request. 
Note: I f the report failed and following error of Oracle Toolkit appears then you will have to set the Display Settings. For this search Display Settings in this document. 
<<<<<<<<<<<<<<---------------*************-------------->>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> 3. Reports output in Excel We can get the text reports output in excel instead of browser. The steps are as below, 1.1. Login as System Administrator and open the Viewer Options screen, Sys Admin : Install > Viewer Options 1.2. Create a new Viewer option with the following input data, table border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="1" style="width: 500px;">
1.3. Save the data. 1.4. Open System Profile screen and search Viewer: Application for Text, 
1.5. Select the defined viewer option. Like here we had defined Microsoft Excel 11i for user XX_USER. 
1.6. Logout and login again to submit a report. 1.7. Submit a text report like Active Users and the view its output. 
1.8. After completion click View Output (button) and a MS Internet Explorer dialog will appear. Click Open (button) on the dialog and the report will be displayed in MS Excel. 
Note: I f this dialog is not appearing then follow the following steps to enable download settings of MS Internet Explorer. 1.9. To enable download settings, IE Menu: Tools > Security > Internet > Custom Level > Downloads 
1.10. Ensure that Download settings are enabled. Note: These download settings are important to set if you are trying to export data from a form of any module using Menu > File > Export. 
1.2. Uncheck the check box “Require server verification (https: () for all sites in this zone” . 1.3. Add the applications hostname and domain. 1.4. Click add (button) to add the link in the Trusted Websites. 2. JInitiator JInitiator 1.3.1.x versions will download and install on any security setting except High, therefore the security setting should not need any adjustments at download and install time. 3. Page Refresh When using Oracle Self-Service products to view the most current data the following settings need to be set in MSIE. 3.1. To set 'Page Refresh', MSIE: Menu > Tools > Internet Options > General tab > Settings 
3.2. The option 'Every visit to the page' should be checked. 4. Shared Desktop Security I f a PC is shared by multiple users then encrypted pages should not be saved on the pc locally. 4.1. Open the Advanced tab of Internet Options, MSIE: Menu > Tools > Internet Options > Advanced tab > Security 
4.2. Check the box of 'Do not save encrypted pages to Disk'. Click OK to confirm changes. 5. Auto complete in Internet Explorer MSIE automatically displays the last entered values so for security reason it is better to disable this option. 5.1. Open Content tab, MSIE: Menu > Tools > Internet Options > Content 
5.2. Click Settings (button) of AutoComplete region and uncheck 'Forms' and 'User names and passwords on forms'. Click OK to confirm the changes. 6. HTTP 1.1/Keep Alive Settings For Oracle Applications version 11.5.9 or later “HTTP 1.1/Keep Alive” should be enabled. 6.1. Open the Advanced tab, MSIE: Menu > Tools > Internet Options > Advanced 
6.2.Under HTTP 1.1 Settings both options “Use HTTP 1.1” and “Use HTTP 1.1 through proxy connections” should bi checked. 
1.6. Open the personalize form, Menu > Help > Diagnostics > Custom Code > Personalize 1.7. Provide apps password on the displayed dialog. 1.8. Enter the required data and select WHEN-NEW-FORM-INSTANCE as trigger event. 
1.9. Click the Actions (tab) and click in the first row, 
1.10. Now click in the next row to set properties of E-Mail field. 
1.11. Click in the next row to set properties of Fax field. 
1.12. Save the information. 1.13. Close both Personalization and Users form. 1.14. Open the user definition form as this time our trigger will execute. 
1.15. View the changes. 
1.3. Click on Find (button). 
1.4. Under the User name open LOV and select a color like I have selected blue. 1.5. Click the OK (button). 1.6. Save the data and logout from the Oracle Applications. 1.7. Now login as XX_USER and view the color change. 
Note: The above change will only work for XX_USER as we changed color scheme only for this user. For a Site level change do not provide user. 
1.2. Click New (button). 
1.4. Enter Queue name in the name field and a short description. 1.5. Click Forward (button). 
1.4. Enter Queue name in the name field and a short description. 1.5. Click Forward (button). 
1.6. Select a queue type by clicking on LOV. 
1.7. Select Networked Windows (SMB). 
Note: For security reasons the Share names are removed from the above window. 1.8. Click Specify (button). 
1.9. Here the Server is the windows XP machine (name / IP address) where printer is installed. In the Share field enter windows XP machine (name / IP address) and the printer share name. The next field is User name here provide domain name ,user name and provided windows domain password in the Password field. 1.10. Click OK (button). 
1.11. Select the Queue and click Forward (button). 
Select the manufacturer. 
1.13. Select HP as the manufacturer. 
1.14. Select or type LaserJet 1200. Note: The text box will appear when you will start typing. 1.15. Click Forward (button). 
1.16. Confirm the Type, Share and Printer and Click Finish (button). 
1.17. Click Yes if you want to print a test print. 
Note: I f you will not take a test print then on next screen you will have to click Apply (button) to save the settings. 
1.18. I f test print is printed then click Apply (button). ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2. Defining Printer in Oracle Applications We will use default definitions of Printer Drivers, Print Styles and Printer Types as most of the drivers of common printer are already provided by Oracle in Oracle Applications. In case you have a printer of which drivers are not defined then you will have to provide information on these screens. 2.1. Login as XX_USER and switch to SYSADMIN responsibility, Sysadmin : Install > Printer > Driver 
2.2. To define Printer Drivers the SRW Driver will be used while defining Print Styles so keep in mind while entering information in this field. The Arguments, Initialization and Reset settings will be available in the printer manual or ask your hardware vendor. 2.3. To define Printer Style open the Style screen, Sysadmin : Install > Printer > Style 2.4. Provide Style Name, SRW Driver and other required information. 
2.5. The next step is to define Printer Type. Sysadmin : Install > Printer > Types 2.6. Provide Style defined earlier. 
2.7. Now we will define the printer by providing Printer name which we configured on Linux machine. Sysadmin : Install > Printer > Register 2.8. Enter HPLaser in the Printer field and select HPLJ4 in the Type field. 
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3. Reports Printing using above Defined Printer 3.1. Submit a new request of Active Users Report, 
3.2. Click Options (button). 
3.3. Select HPLaser in the Printer field and enter 1 in the Copies field. 3.4. Click OK (button). 3.5. Report should be printed otherwise verify the above steps. 3.6. We can also assign Printer to Concurrent Programs. Open the Concurrent Programs screen, Sysadmin : Concurrent > Program > Define 3.7. Search Active Users program. 
3.8. Select HPLaser in the Output Printer. 3.9. Save the information. 3.10. Submit a new request of Active Users and check that HPLaser is the default printer in the Print to field. 
Note: Default is 0 in the Copies field and you can change it by changing system profile Concurrent:Report Copies. Here you can provide by clicking the Options (button). 
Select “HelloWorld [1.0]” process and click on “Test” service. 
Under “Input Arguments” section, we can see “input” as one of the fields of payload. Enter “World” in input field and click on “Test Web Service”. 
Input payload can also be seen in XML format by selecting “XML View”. 
Response will have “Hello” prefixed to our input string “World”. 
This completes our Hello World process. 
1.2. Install the drivers of your printer if not already installed. Here we have EPSON LQ- 300+ ESC/ P 2 installed. 1.3. Click (single) on the installed printer and from menu File > Server Properties 
1.4. Select any Form and enable the check box Create a new form. 1.5. Provide Form name and provide your desired Paper size (Width & Height) in inches.
1.6. Click OK (button) to save the settings. 1.7. Now open the properties page of your printer by right clicking the printer icon. 
1.8. Click Printing Preferences (button) and select Paper Size erpstuff paper size 8.50x4.00. 
1.9. Click OK (button) on all screens to save the changes. 1.10. Send a print from Oracle Report Builder. 
Note: The layout of the reports developed in Oracle Report Builder 6i based on scott schema. 1.11. Make sure the proper Printer Name is selected. 
1.12. Make sure the proper Printer Name is selected and also verify the Properties. 1.13. Take the printout from the printer and match with your requirements. 
1.3. Click on Distributions (button). 
1.4. Open the Examine from Menu: Help > Diagnostic > Examine. 1.5. Provide the APPS password if prompted. 
1.6. Note the value of Block D_SUM_FOLDER field and click the LOV button of Block field. 
1.7. Select $DESCRI PTI VE_FLEXFI ELD$ and click OK (button). 
1.8. Locate D_SUM_FOLDER here it is D_SUM_FOLDER.DI ST_DF and click OK (button). 
1.9. Note the value displayed I nvoice Distribution (Payables) . Here the Invoice Distribution is DFF name and Payables is the name of application. 2. Defining Descriptive Flexfield (DFF) 2.1. Open the Segments form, Payables: Setup > Flexfield > Descriptive > Segments Or Sys Admin: Application > Flexfield > Descriptive > Segments 2.2. Search for Application Payables and Title Invoice Distribution. 
2.3. Elements defined as Global Data Elements will be for each transaction so we can also call that these will be used as header. Soon you will know. 2.4. Enter the information in the required fields. 
2.5. I have assigned Value Set 16 Characters so the length will be of 16 characters. I f you will not assign Value Set then a warning message will appear that it will truncate the field. I have created only one element so you can create more. 2.6. Save the data. 
2.7. In the second line enter Freight as code and then click Segments (button). 2.8. Enter the following information.
2.9. Save the data. 2.10. Now we will define for Imports. 
2.11. Click Segments (button). 2.12. Enter the following information.
2.13. Save and close this form. 2.14. Create another line for Insurance. 
2.15. Click Segments (button). 2.16. Enter the following information.
2.17. Save and close this form. 2.18. On the main form create a line for Rent and enter the following information.
2.19. Save and close this form. 2.20. On the main form create a line for Utilities and enter the following information.
2.21. Save and close this form. 2.22. On the main form create a line for Vehicle Running and enter the following information.
2.23. Save and close this form. 
2.24. Enable Check box Freeze Flexfield Definition and save. The DFF definition will be compiled. 
2.25. Click OK (button). 3. Entry in Defining Descriptive Flexfield (DFF) 3.1. Open the Invoices form, Payables: Invoices > Entry > Invoices 3.2. Create a new invoice. 
3.3. Click Distribution (button). 3.4. Enter the required information. 
3.5. Click the field labeled [ ] . 3.6. Here Customer Invoice No is our Global and this will be entered for all type of expenses. 
3.7. Click the Select the Expense Type field. 
3.8. Select Insurance (or any which you want to enter information for) and enter the information in the fields displayed for that Expense type. 
Note: As we have not assigned any Value Set so here we can see that our fields length is truncated and we need to scroll. 3.9. Here I have selected Utilities and the fields are displayed which were defined for Utilities. 
1.3. Note/Copy the Submenu of Invoices which is AP_INVOICES_GUI12 so we will assign the entire invoice related Functions to our new menu. 1.4. Again query the menu AP_I NVOI CES_GUI 12. 
1.5. So we will assign this menu to our responsibility and the user will have these functions to which we will assign that responsibility. 2. Responsibility Creation to Assign Menu 2.1. Open the Define form, Sys Admin: Security > Responsibility > Define 2.2. Enter the required information and in Menu enter AP_I NVOI CES_GUI 12. 
2.3. Save the data. 3. Responsibility Assignment to User 3.1. Open the User form, Sys Admin: Security > User > Define 3.2. Search the XX_USER (you can search the user to which you want to assign) and assign XX AP Invoice Entry responsibility. 
3.3. Save the data. 3.4. Switch to XX AP Invoice Entry responsibility and the following functions will be displayed. 
Deploy the HumanWorkflowExample as specified in the Deployment section. This creates two instances of HumanWorkflowExample. One instance, with EXPRESS order entry, will directly write information to Order Management system where as the other entry creates a workflow that awaits Depot Manager’s approval. 
Click on the process Instance ID that is in “Running” stage. Process flow for this specific instance will be shown in a pop up window. We can see the process is waiting for Human Workflow stage. 
Click on the “OrderApprovalTask”. In the above screenshot, its the link on the left side of “Human Workflow Component”. From the next screen, click on “Go To Woklist Application” and login to workflow application. In my case, user name is “weblogic”. We can see an order entry pending for Approval. Click on “Actions” and then “Yes”. 
Come back to HumanWorfkflowExample in Enterprise Manager and check that process is now complete. 
Click on completed process instance, in this case 150010, to see process flow. We can see that OrderRouter invoked OrderApprovalProcess when order type is NORMAL. Once approved, OrdreManagementService is invoked through OrderABCS. 
We can also see BPEL process flow by clicking on OrderApprovalProcess. Explore Audit Trail and Flow tabs from the next screen. 
Hope this lesson helped you appreciate Human Workflow features better. I personally prefer BPEL workflow to traditional workflows because of the ease and elegance. 
Description of the illustration bpel_se_recov.gif
Figure 6-1 Creating an Empty XIB Interface Builder 
Figure 6-2 Creating a UIViewController 
Figure 6-3 Select FirstViewController as the file’s owner 
Figure 6-4 Setting the view as the File’s Owner view 
Figure 6-5 Changing the view’s color 
Figure 6-6 The application in iPhone Simulator Listing 6-2 AddViewProjectAppDelegate.m implementation #import "AddViewProjectAppDelegate.h" @implementation AddViewProjectAppDelegate @synthesize window; @synthesize first;
Figure 6-7 UIApplication in the Document window 
Figure 6-8 AddViewProjectAppDelegate’s connections Ignore UIApplication—you almost never modify it. Just know that UIApplication receives system events. It is your job to write code that handles those system events. You write that code in a class adopting the UIApplicationDelegate protocol. This protocol has several life cycle methods that handle application and system events. Table 6-1 lists UIApplicationDelegate’s methods. If you begin with a template, Xcode creates the class adopting the UIApplicationDelegate for you, but Xcode does not implement the UIApplicationDelegate’s optional event-handling methods. For instance, in this chapter’s project, Xcodecreated the AddViewProject AppDelegate.h and AddViewProjectAppDelegate.m files. The Add ViewProject AppDelegate class extends NSObject and adopts the UIApplication Delegate. @interface AddViewProjectAppDelegate : NSObject <UIApplicationDelegate> The application’s UIApplication, defined in MainWindow.xib, has a reference to its UIApplicationDelegate as an outlet (Figure 6-8). As UIApplication receives one of the events related to the methods in Table 6-1, it calls the appropriate method in its delegate if implemented.
Figure 6-9 Code completion in Xcode 
Figure 7-1 Adding FirstViewController to Mainwindow.xib UIView and UIViewController 
Figure 7-2 Setting Mainwindow.xib’s root view controller 
Figure 10-6 Adding a UITableView to an Interface Builder project NOTE In steps 1–13, you added the table view as a subview to the view in the MyViewController Nib. If you preferred, you could omit the extra view and just add the table view directly as the nib’s view. But note, you would also change MyViewController from a UIViewController, to a UITableViewController. Point is, you don’t have to put the UITableView inside a UIView in order to use it. A UITableView can be added directly to the XIB and connected to a table view controller’s view outlet, and it will work the same way. The next Try This example illustrates. 
Figure 10-8 Adding a TableHandler reference to Interface Builder 
Figure 10-9 Connecting the controller to TableHandler 
Figure 10-11 Adding a UITableView to an Interface Builder project 
Figure 10-13 The application running in iPhone Simulator Listing 10-10 Table’s list modified to an array of arrays(void) fillList { NSArray * tempArrayA = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:@"AItem One", @"AItem Two", nil] autorelease]; NSArray * tempArrayB = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:@"BItem Three", @"BItem Four", nil] autorelease]; NSArray * tempArrayC = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:@"CItem Five", @"CItem Six", nil] autorelease]; NSArray * tempArrayD = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:@"DItem Seven", @"DItem Eight", nil] autorelease]; NSArray * tempArrayE = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:@"EItem Nine", @"EItem Ten", nil] autorelease]; NSArray * tempArray = [[[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:tempArrayA, tempArrayB, tempArrayC, tempArrayD, tempArrayE, nil] autorelease]; self.tableDataList = tempArray; } Listing 10-11 Modifications to TableHandler.m to support grouping
Listing 10-22 RootViewController.m #import "RootViewController.h" #import "CustomizedCellAppDelegate.h" @implementation RootViewController
Figure 13-8 Adding a button to the canvas Figure 13-9 Running the application in iPhone Simulator 
Figure 13-10 A UIPickerView has less outlets and actions than a UIDatePicker 
Figure 13-11 Running the application in iPhone Simulator
Figure 13-13 Running the application in iPhone Simulator 
Listing 13-16 MyPickerDelegate.m modified to load images into the UIPickerView #import "MyPickerDelegate.h" @implementation MyPickerDelegate @synthesize myData; - (id) init { if([super init] == nil) return nil; UIImageView * one = [[UIImageView alloc] initWithImage:[[UIImage alloc] initWithContentsOfFile: [[[NSBundle mainBundle] resourcePath] stringByAppendingPathComponent:@"wizard.png"]]]; UIImageView * two =[[UIImageView alloc] initWithImage:[[UIImage alloc] initWithContentsOfFile: [[[NSBundle mainBundle] resourcePath] stringByAppendingPathComponent: @"tux.png"]]]; UIImageView * three =[[UIImageView alloc] initWithImage:[[UIImage alloc] initWithContentsOfFile: [[[NSBundle mainBundle] resourcePath] stringByAppendingPathComponent:@"money.png"]]]; myData = [[NSArray alloc] initWithObjects:one,two,three,nil]; return self; }(void)pickerView:(UIPickerView *)pickerView didSelectRow:(NSInteger)row inComponent: (NSInteger)component { NSLog(@"picked row: %i, component: %i", row, component); }(NSInteger) numberOfComponentsInPickerView: (UIPickerView *) pickerView { return 1; }(NSInteger) pickerView: (UIPickerView *) pickerView numberOfRowsInComponent: (NSInteger) component { return [self.myData count]; }(UIView *)pickerView:(UIPickerView *)pickerView viewForRow:(NSInteger) row forComponent:(NSInteger)component reusingView:(UIView *)view { return [self.myData objectAtIndex:row]; } @end
Figure 13-17 Running the application in iPhone Simulator and using the provided photo library Refer to Apples Introduction to Notification Programming Topics for more information on using notifications. 
Figure 16-9 The MyDBProjectViewController view’s canvas 
Figure 18-1 The finished application in the iPhone Simulator Listing 18-1 AvplayerViewController.h #import <UIKit/UIKit.h> #import <AudioToolbox/AudioToolbox.h> #import <AVFoundation/AVFoundation.h> @interface AvplayerViewController : UIViewController <AVAudioPlayerDelegate> { SystemSoundID burpSoundID; AVAudioPlayer * player; }
Asynchronous partner link: 
Switch Activity: It’s a condition 
XSD: Input 
ICICI:
<Simple type name = “First name type”> <restriction base /type = “String”> <min length value =”8”/ <Max length value “20”/ </restriction> </Simple type> Create one more XSD: Right click on BPEL (It shows in project inside)(10g) 
13) Table creation:
Go to source part Writ the following code to create the design of the form <div> <%HTML.begin form();%> <%=HTML.label(“enter user name”)%> <%=HTML.text box(“T1”)%></br> <button id=”B1” type =”submit”>submit</button></br> <%HTML.end form();%> Go to home control.cs write code for two action method [Accept verbs [http verbs.post]] Public action result sample3 (string B, string T1) { View data [“a”]=”user name is:-”+T1; Return view (); } In the above home if user is entering any data in text box T1 and clicking on button B1, then user entered data in text box T1 will be passed to argument “T1” of action method sample3 action method.
Write the following code to create the code <body> <div> <h1>welcome to satya technologies</h1> <%HTML.begin form();%> <%=HTML.label(“enter first number”)%> <%=HTML.text box(“T1”)%></br> <%=HTML.label(“enter second number”)%> <button id=”B1” type =”submit”>add</button> <%=HTML.encode (view data [“R”])%> <%HTML.end form();%> </div> </body> Go to home control.cs write the following code for action method [Accept verbs (http verbs.post)] Public action result sample4 (string B1, string T1, string T2) { Int c= convert to int3 (T1)+c.to int (T2); View data [“R”] =”sum is:-”C; Return view (); } Run the application and check.
Create a new mvc 2 web application (Example 5)
Write the following code
According to the syntax, when expression 1 is True or L value non zero , then exp2 or middle value returns. If exp1 is false or “L” value is Zero, then exp 3 or right side value will returns
Control passing for condition when we are working with for loop always execution process will starts from intialisation block. initialization block will be executed only once whom we are passing the control within the body first time. After execution of the initialization part control will pass to iteration, from iteration part once again it will pass to condition Always repetition will happen b/w condition statement block and iterations only. When we are working with for loop everything is optional but mandatory to place 2 semicolons while() error for(; ;) yes valid when the condition part is not available in for loop it repeats infinite times because condition part is replaced with non-zero value. when we are working with for loop pre checking process will be occur i.e before execution if the body condition part will executed. for loop will repeats in anti clock direction while(0)
10 012 0X4 81X1X80X2 = 8X2 83 0 1 2 3 0X53 83X0+82X1+81X2+80X3 64+16+3 Error 
0181 error 
Error 0981 range(0-7) 161 0241 0XA1 291 0443 0X123 
int i; i=32767+1; 32467 
For representing any octal data we require to take 3 binary bits only, for representing any hexadecimal value, we require to take 4 binary bits. printf(“%d %0 %u”, 327684,327684,327684); o/p: -32768 0100000 
void xyz() { int a=5; --a; printf(“\na=%d”,a); } void main() { auto int a=10; ++a; xyz(); ++a; printf(“\na=%d”,a); } o/p : a=4; a=12; void abc() { int a =10; --a; printf(“\na=%d”,a); } 
The two basic operation associated with stack are
Top[-1] maxsize[5] After inserting i.e. entry 10, 20, 30, 40, 50. Top max size - 1 [5] 
Inserting elements Stack is over flow After deleting elements 50,40,30,20,10 
Mid= left+right/2 Mid= 0+9/2 = 4.5 Program Binary search # include <stdio.h> # include <conio.h> void main() \{ int a[20],n,key,p,i; clrscr(); printf(“Enter the total number of elements \n”); scanf(“%d”,&n); printf(“Enter the element in ascending order \n”); for(i=0;i<n;i++) { scanf(“%d”,&a[i]); } printf(“Enter the search element \n”); scanf(“%d”,&key); p=binary search(a,n,key); /* Functional */ if(p>=0) { printf(“search is successful \n”); printf(“The element found at position %d”,p+1); } else { printf(“search is unsuccessful search \n”); } else { printf (“search is unsuccessful search \n”); } } int binary search(int a[20],int n, int key) { int left, right, mid; left=0; right=n-1; while(left<=right) { mid=(left+right)/2; if(key==a[mid]) { right=mid-1; } else { left=mid+1; } } } return(-1); } Time complexity: Each step at the algorithm divides the list divided into two parts and the search continues in one of them and the other is discarded the search requires at mast k steps where 2k > =N which results k=log2N thus the running time c both average and worst case of binary search is proportional 
Data hiding in object oriented is achieved by declaring data members within class as private Protected Protected member access by members of same class and derived class Protected members cannot access by non members and members of other classes. 
public These members access by members of some class, derived class, non members and members of other classes. 
Size of the class is equal to some of data member size On creation of object memory is allocated for data members of class but not member functions Member functions operators on one or more than one object. 
How to derive a class Syntax class derived –classname:<visibility Mode>base-classname, base-class-name,. . . . . . . . { data members; Member functions; };
When the visibility Mode is public, public members of the base class becomes the public members of derived class. 
Example # include <iostream.h> class employee { protected : int empno; char name[10]; }; class salaried employee :public employee { float salary; public: void read() { cout<<”\n Input empno”; cin>> empno; cout<<”\n Input ename”; cin>> ename; cout<<”\n Input salary”; cin >>salary; } void print() { cout<<”\n Employee No”<<empno; cout<<”\n Employee Name”<< name; cout<<”\n Salary”<< salary; }}; void main() { salaried _employee emp1; emp1.read(); emp1.printf(); } 
#include <iostream.h> #include<conio.h> class Marks; class Student { int rno; char name[10]; public: void read-student(); friend void find result(student name); class marks { int sub1,sub2; public: void read-Marks(); friend void find –result (student,Marks); }; void student:: read-student() { cout<<”\n Input rollno”; cin>>rno; cout<<”\n Input name”; cin>>name; } void marks:: read-marks() { cout<<”\n Input Marks”; cin >>sub1>>sub2; } void find –result(student s,Marks M) { cout<<”\n Roll no”<<S.rno; cout<<”\n Name”<<s.name; if (M.sub1<40 M.sub2<40) 
O/p: Input name RAM Input roll no 101 Input Marks 
Disadvantages of macros in C++
Complex operator+(complex c2) { complex C3; C3.real=real+C2.real; C3.img=img+C2.img; return C3; } Void main( ) { Complex comp1,comp2,comp3; Comp1.read( ): Comp2.read( ): Comp3= comp1+comp2; Comp1.print( ); Comp2.print( ); Comp3.print( ); } 
After swapping value -> 20 10 Example # include <iostream.h> void main() { int n1,n2; cout<<”\n input any two numbers”; cin>>n1>>n2; int *p,*q; p=&n1; q=&n1; *p=*p+*q; // value of 500=value of 500 + value of 500 *q=*p-*q; = 10+20= 30 *p=*p-*q; cout<<”\n after swapint \n”; cout<<”\n n1=”<<n1; cout<<”\n n2=” <<n2; } o/p : input two values => 10 20 After swapping => 20 10 
# include <iostrem.h> # include<fstream.h> class address { char name[10]; char street[10]; char city[10]; public: void read_address() { cout<<”\n Input name “; cin>>name; cout<<”\n Input street”; cin>> street; cout<<”\n Input city”; cin>> city; } void print_address() { cout<<endl<<name<<”\t”<<street<<”\t”<<city; }}; void main() { address add; char ch; ofstream fout (“c://address_book”); do{ add.read_address() fout.write((char*)&add,size of (add)); cout<<”\n Add another book?”; cin>>ch; } while (ch!=’n’) fout.close(); } 
fin.seekg(4,ios::beg); fin.seekg(2, ios::beg); fin.seekg(3,ios::cur); fin.seekg(-4,ios::cur); cout<<fin.tellg(); à fin.seekg(-2,ios::end); => (7-2)=>5 offset position Reading Address randomly: fin.seekg(addno*sizeof(add),ios ::beg); void main() { address add; int addno; ifstream fin(“c:\\address_book”); cout<<”\n Input address number”; cin>>adddno; fin.seekg(addno*sizeof (add),ios::beg); fin read((char*)&add,size of (add)); if fin.eof()) cout<<”\n Invalid address number”; else add print_address(); } 
void main() { A obj1; 
A message is the data required to be transferred heterogeneous application with open standard output Service oriented architecture programming speaks specially to communicate among the heterogeneous applications. If we consider a scenario like to allow users to combine & reuse them in production of applications. Messages:- A message is the data i.e. used to be transferred between two heterogeneous applications & which is in an open standard format. 
Creating WCF service / server component:- Create a new WCF service with the name example 4 Change the interface name from I service.cs to I empdetails.cs 
Create a WCF service to find the square value, cube value, factorial value of the given number. 
Create a WCF service in above client in 2 ways, 1) with out using data contract class 2) by using data contract class 
ID 
<binding name = “Transactional Binding” Transaction flow = “true”/> </WS http binding> </binding> 
An endpoint is defined in a web.confing file by using the 3 attributes address, binding & contract like <endpoint address = “Value” binding = “Value” contract = “Value”> </enclpoint> 
Request – Reply This is the default messaging path followed in WCF. In this type of pattern client makes a call to service tions & waits for a response from the service Client request & service response will be through event channels. 
Create a new web site with the name “check example2” 
1):- Client makes a request to the pro xy. 2):- proxy builds stack frame request & send to formatter. 3):- Formatter converts the request into open stand –and format (serialization is performed) & delivers to networks channel. 4):- Network channel will deliver the request to the destination machine. 5):- formatter will take the request & delivers to dispatcher. 6) :- Dispatcher will perform deserialization i.e., converts the request to server understandable form.
Example With Canvas Controls 
Create a new window with the name canvas layout Crete canvas on window Design the canvas Create two buttons outside the canvas with the names b/n LTOR and btn RTOL respectively Write the following code Private void btn LTOR – click (object sender, Ronted Even Args e) { Canvas 1 Flow direction = flow direction. Left to right; } Private void btn RTOL_click() {canvas1. Flow Direction= flow direction. Right To left; } When you run the form observe the controls by increasing or decreasing the size of the window, the controls placed with the canvas will not increase or decrease their size but the controls outside canvas will increase or decrease their sizes a/c to size of the control 
Create a new window
Create a new window Create a media element: select media element Go to properties window Type the file bar in source property i.e. D:\\videos\sample. Run the application & check Media element control in supported in following OS windows 7, window vistall ( service pack) Media Element Internally will take support of windows media player and to work with media element windows. Media player version should be 10,10.0 version and above ren version of windows media player will not work on media element Customizing media element Create a new window and write the following code design the window Private void binplay_click() { Media element/. Play(): { Private void btn pause_click() 
{ Mediaelement 1. Powse(); } Private void btnstop_click() { media elemnt.Stop(); }Private void btn forward –click() { Media element1. Position = mediaelemnt1. Position+timespan.fromseconds(2); } Private void then backword – click() { Media element1. Position = Media Elemtn. Position – Timespan. Fromseconds(2): } 
Default event of slider control is value changer. This event will we fired when the value within slides changes 
<Grid vi name= <stack panel margin = “60” fill = “gray “> <stack panel. Projection> <plane projection Rotation x = “-20” Rotation Y = “-20” Rotations z = “35”/> </stack panel.Projection> </stack panel> 
right click on silverlight foler 
If code =1 ,ten ESS –date = current data EE –date =”9999-12-31” Code =2 ee-dab =current date -1
Surrogate key Generated output column name = SKID Source Name = C : /Skid. Txt
Job :- (Surrogate key Generator) Source Type = Data Sequence 
Source type = data type Sequence Data base type = oracle Oracle server name = oracle Password = tiger Username = Scott Source name = shilpa In SQL plus, create a data base Sequence object
Above we have defined the src, height and width attributes, By information the browser of the image dimensions it knows to set aside a place for that image. Without defining an image’s dimensions your site may load poorly; text and other images will be moved around when the browser finally figures out how big the picture is supposed to be and then makes room for the picture.
Now your image will take you to our home page when you click it. Change it to your home page URL
On computer screens, sans-serif fonts are considered easier to read than serif fonts. 
Within the HTML source of the page drag & drop a slideshow extender and set following properties for it. <asp:slideshowextender Id=”slideshowExtender” runat=”server” imageDescriptionLableID=”L2” ImageTitleLabelID=”L1” NextButtonId=”Btnnext” playButtonText=”play” playbuttonID=”Btnplay” stopButtonText=”stop” previousButtonID=”btnprev” playinterval=”3000” slideshowservicemethod=”Getimages” usecontextkey=”True” Loop=”true” > </asp:slideshowExtender> Within the design of the page click on the smart tag and choose “ Add slideshow pageMethod” option that will create a method in the code with the same name as the method name you set for the slide show service method property of the slideshowextender write the following code within that method. using system.AjaxcontrolToolkit; public static…. { return new slide[] { new slide(“Image/Desert.jpg” ,”Desert”, “This is Desert Image”); new slide(“images/Lighthouse.jpg”,”Lighthouse” . “This is lighthouse image”); new slide(“Images/penguins.jpg”,”penguins”,”This is LighthouseImage”); new slide(“Images/Tulips.jpg”,”koala”,”This is koala Image”) }; } At runtime by default first image will be displayed in image control & by clicking on next button you can move to the next slide, by clicking on previous button you can move the previous slide & by clicking on play button you can play the slideshow at the interval specified with playInteraval property.
ETL Tool E – Extract 
setting the data T-transform
Applications are deployed differently depending on the type of server. If you are deploying to a domain of servers then you need the Command Line Interface because the application server needs to be informed on which server group/s the deployment is targeted. Ex. Deploy an application on all server groups: 
Note: With the default configuration, packaged archives (.ear, .war, .jar, .sar) are automatically deployed. Exploded archives need adding a .do-deploy empty file in the deployments folder to trigger deployment.
where each blank panel represents an element of the array. In this case, these are values of type int. These elements are numbered from 0 to 4, being 0 the first and 4 the last; In C++, the first element in an array is always numbered with a zero (not a one), no matter its length. Like a regular variable, an array must be declared before it is used. A typical declaration for an array in C++ is:
ddl + dml [uses undo+ lots of log switches imports takes 6 to 8 times than exports] advantages of exports
abc. properties Javar. faces. Validator. NOT-IN-RANGE=value is not in the range from{0}to{1}. Javax. faces. Validator. Double range Validator. NOT-IN-RANGE= {2}.value must be in between the range {0} and{1} Javax. faces. validator. Double range validator. TYPE={0} must be Double Javax. faces. validator. Long range validator. NOT-IN RANGE ={2} value must be in the range {0} and{1} Javax. faces. validator. Long range validator. TYPE={0} must be Double long Javax. faces. Component . UIInput. REQUIRED={0} Is required Index.html <html> <head> <meta http-equiy=”Refresh” Content=”2:URL=http://local host:1010/standaral dationsapp/registration from.dss”> <title>insert title here </title> </ head > </f:view> <body> <h1>application Loading….< /h1> </body> </html> Registration form.jsp: <%@page language=”java”conten type=”text/html;”> <%@taglib prefix=”f” <!Doctype--- <html> <head > <meta http-equiv=” Content type” Content= ”text/ html; chanset= ISO-8859-1”> <TITLE>Insert title here</title> </head > <body> <f:view> <h:from> <h:messages style=”color: blue”/> <h:panel Grid columns=”3”> <h: input text id=”u name” value=”#{reg bean. uname}” required=”true” label=”user name”/> <h: messages for= ”uname” style=”color:red”/> <h:output text value=”password”/> <h:input secret id=”upwd”value=”#{ reg bean. upwd}” required=”true” label=”password”/> <f:validate length minimum=”6”maximum=”15”/> </h:input secret> <h: messages for= ”upwd” style=”color: red”/> <h: output text value=”user age”/> <h:input text id=”uaage” value=”#{ reg bean. uage}” required=”true” label=”user age”> <f:validate long range minimum=”18”maximum=”30”/> <h:input text> <h: messages for= ”uage” style=”color: red”/> <h: output text value=”user salary”/> <h:input text id=”usal” value=”#{ reg bean. usal}” required=”true” label=”user salary”> <f:validate Double range minimum=”25000”maximum=”50000”/> <h:input text> <h: messages for= ”usal” style=”color: red”/> <h:command button value=”Registration”action=”# {reg bean. registration”} ”/> </h:panel Grid> </h:form></f:view> </body></html> Success.JSP <head > <meta……”> <title>insert title here<1title> </head> <body> <f:view> <h1>Registration success</h1> </f:view> </body></html> Registration Bean.java Package com. soft; Public class Registration Bean{ Private string uname; Private string upwd; Private int uage; Private floal usal; Set…() Get…() Public string registration(){ Return ”success”; } } Faces-config.xml <?xml version=”1.0”encoding=”UTF-8”?> <FACES-Config Xmlns=----xsd ”version=”1.2”> <managed-bean> <managed-bean-name>reg bean</managed-bean-name > <managed-bean-class>com. Durga soft. registration B ean</managed-bean- class > <managed-bean-scope>session</managed-bean- scope > </managed-bean > <navigation-rule> <from-view-id>/registration from.jsp</ > <navigation-case> <from-out come>success</ > <to-view- id>/success.jsp</ > </navigation-case> </navigation-rule> <application> <message-bundle>abc</ > </application> </faces-config> Web.xml same as prev .appl.? Custom validations: In JSF based web application , if all the standard validations are not sufficient to perform data validations, then JSF has given an environment to prepare user defined validations
Integer 
FREQUENTILY USE FILE MODES IN REAL TIME Un format [FJXED TEXT] 
2.VARTEXT[Delimiter]
i) System performance In case of FTS System performance decreased ii) Situation to Get a) If the indexed columns are not used in the query b) An index is used in non-equal to test c) Range of value specified in primary index Ex:- b)Sel*from party where party name like’V%’
using System. Data .oledb; code in GD Static oledbConnection con = new oledbConnection (“User id = Scoot; Password = tiger; Provider = ms data.1*”); Oledb command cmd = new oledbcommand (“Select * from EMP, con”); Oledb Data Reader . dr;//abstrsct Code for Button 1_click { Con. open (); Message Box. Show (“Connection is ok”); If (con. State = = connection State. closed) { Con. open (); Dr = cmd. Execute Reader (); Message Box. Show (“Con. Server version”); // column Names Label 1.Text = dr. Get Name (0); Label 1.Text = dr. Get Name (1); } Else Message Box. Show (“Connection is already opened”); Code for Button2 _click { If (dr. Read () = = true) { textBox1. Text = dr [0] . To String (); textBox1. Text = dr [1] . To String (); } Else Message Box. Show (“No more Records”); Data Reader EX 2 Developing a Dynamic From With Sql Server data base over Managed connection Project EMP à25 columns Deptà8 Bonusà4 
OBS :- When connection is closed , then all associated data readers will be closed automatically. Data Reader works only when connection model is active (open) Data Reader are connection oriented. If no. of clients are more in the network . then Data base efficiency will decreases. 
LMS: Library management system 
IIS: Internet information service ASPX: Afire server pages extension 
User defined control is a class, which must be inherited either from user control class or form any exiting control 
Test =” ABC” Generally inherited user control’s class declaration will be as follows Public partial class test: Text box { } In inherited user controls only application logic allowed but placing some other controls are not allowed 
Execute the project and check either text boxes are accepting proper input or not. 
1.Cryptography is a Concept of data encryptions and decryptions.
![\"21\"](\"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/11/211-460x193.png\")
![\"22\"](\"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/11/221-460x386.png\")
Check out our Popular Trainings ![\"MQ_Start\"](\"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/10/MQ_Start.png\")
![\"MQ_Stop\"](\"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/10/MQ_Stop.jpg\")
![\"16\"](\"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/11/164.png\")
1.2. Provide the information by clicking Automatic Login, ![\"17\"](\"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/11/174-460x353.png\")
Note: To make sure that Oracle user will be logged in always the Timed Login settings are shown in the screen. These are for DISPLAY SETTINGS as you always need the Oracle user to be logged in. ![\"4\"](\"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/12/411.png\")
![\"Untitled\"](\"https://newtekslateassets.s3.us-west-2.amazonaws.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/12/Untitled-460x640.png\")
